Factory Workshop Manual
Make
Ford
Model
Escape 2wd
Engine and year
L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)
Please navigate through the PDF using the options
provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar.
This manual was submitted by
Anonymous
Date
1st January 2018
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0100 - P0104,
( P0101 P0102 P0103 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0102
P0100 - P0104: Testing and Inspection P0102
For diagnosis of code P0102 refer to chart
Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0100 - P0104,
( P0101 P0102 P0103 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0102 > Page 9
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0100 - P0104,
( P0101 P0102 P0103 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0102 > Page 10
P0100 - P0104: Testing and Inspection P0103
For diagnosis of code P0103 refer to chart
Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0100 - P0104,
( P0101 P0102 P0103 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0102 > Page 11
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106
P0105 - P0109: Testing and Inspection P0106
For diagnosis of code P0106 refer to chart
Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 16
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 17
P0105 - P0109: Testing and Inspection P0107
For diagnosis of code P0107 refer to chart
Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 18
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 19
P0105 - P0109: Testing and Inspection P0108
For diagnosis of code P0108 refer to chart
Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 20
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 21
P0105 - P0109: Testing and Inspection P0109
For diagnosis of code P0109 refer to chart
Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 22
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114,
( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112
P0110 - P0114: Testing and Inspection P0112
For diagnosis of code P0112 refer to chart
Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114,
( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112 > Page 27
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114,
( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112 > Page 28
P0110 - P0114: Testing and Inspection P0113
For diagnosis of code P0113 refer to chart
Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114,
( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112 > Page 29
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119,
( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116
P0115 - P0119: Testing and Inspection P0116
For diagnosis of code P0116 refer to chart
Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119,
( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 34
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119,
( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 35
P0115 - P0119: Testing and Inspection P0117
For diagnosis of code P0117 refer to chart
Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119,
( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 36
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119,
( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 37
P0115 - P0119: Testing and Inspection P0118
For diagnosis of code P0118 refer to chart
Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119,
( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 38
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124,
( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121
P0120 - P0124: Testing and Inspection P0121
For diagnosis of code P0121 refer to chart
Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124,
( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121 > Page 43
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124,
( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121 > Page 44
P0120 - P0124: Testing and Inspection P0122
For diagnosis of code P0122 refer to chart
Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124,
( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121 > Page 45
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124,
( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121 > Page 46
P0120 - P0124: Testing and Inspection P0123
For diagnosis of code P0123 refer to chart
Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124,
( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121 > Page 47
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0125 - P0129,
( P0126 P0127 P0128 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0125
P0125 - P0129: Testing and Inspection P0125
For diagnosis of code P0125 refer to chart
Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0125 - P0129,
( P0126 P0127 P0128 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0125 > Page 52
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0125 - P0129,
( P0126 P0127 P0128 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0125 > Page 53
P0125 - P0129: Testing and Inspection P0127
For diagnosis of code P0127 refer to chart
Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0125 - P0129,
( P0126 P0127 P0128 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0125 > Page 54
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134,
( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131
P0130 - P0134: Testing and Inspection P0131
For diagnosis of code P0131 refer to chart
Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134,
( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 59
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134,
( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 60
P0130 - P0134: Testing and Inspection P0133
For diagnosis of code P0133 refer to chart
Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134,
( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 61
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0135 - P0139,
( P0136 P0137 P0138 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0135
P0135 - P0139: Testing and Inspection P0135
For diagnosis of code P0135 refer to chart
Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0135 - P0139,
( P0136 P0137 P0138 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0135 > Page 66
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0135 - P0139,
( P0136 P0137 P0138 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0135 > Page 67
P0135 - P0139: Testing and Inspection P0136
For diagnosis of code P0136 refer to chart
Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0135 - P0139,
( P0136 P0137 P0138 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0135 > Page 68
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0140 - P0144,
( P0141 P0142 P0143 0140 0141 0142 0143 0144 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0140 - P0144: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0141 refer to chart
Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0140 - P0144,
( P0141 P0142 P0143 0140 0141 0142 0143 0144 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 72
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0145 - P0149,
( P0146 P0127 P0148 0145 0146 0147 0148 0149 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0145 - P0149: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0148 refer to chart
Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0145 - P0149,
( P0146 P0127 P0148 0145 0146 0147 0148 0149 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 76
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154,
( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151
P0150 - P0154: Testing and Inspection P0151
For diagnosis of code P0151 refer to chart
Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154,
( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 81
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154,
( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 82
P0150 - P0154: Testing and Inspection P0153
For diagnosis of code P0153 refer to chart
Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154,
( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 83
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0155 - P0159,
( P0156 P0157 P0158 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0155
P0155 - P0159: Testing and Inspection P0155
For diagnosis of code P0155 refer to chart
Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0155 - P0159,
( P0156 P0157 P0158 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0155 > Page 88
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0155 - P0159,
( P0156 P0157 P0158 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0155 > Page 89
P0155 - P0159: Testing and Inspection P0156
For diagnosis of code P0156 refer to chart
Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0155 - P0159,
( P0156 P0157 P0158 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0155 > Page 90
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0160 - P0164,
( P0161 P0162 P0163 0160 0161 0162 0163 0164 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0160 - P0164: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0161 refer to chart
Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0160 - P0164,
( P0161 P0162 P0163 0160 0161 0162 0163 0164 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 94
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174,
( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171
P0170 - P0174: Testing and Inspection P0171
For diagnosis of code P0171 refer to chart
Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174,
( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 99
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174,
( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 100
P0170 - P0174: Testing and Inspection P0172
For diagnosis of code P0172 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174,
( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 101
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174,
( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 102
P0170 - P0174: Testing and Inspection P0174
For diagnosis of code P0174 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174,
( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 103
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0175 - P0179,
( P0176 P0177 P0178 0175 0176 0177 0178 0179 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0175
P0175 - P0179: Testing and Inspection P0175
For diagnosis of code P0175 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0175 - P0179,
( P0176 P0177 P0178 0175 0176 0177 0178 0179 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0175 > Page 108
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0175 - P0179,
( P0176 P0177 P0178 0175 0176 0177 0178 0179 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0175 > Page 109
P0175 - P0179: Testing and Inspection P0176
For diagnosis of code P0176 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0175 - P0179,
( P0176 P0177 P0178 0175 0176 0177 0178 0179 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0175 > Page 110
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180
P0180 - P0184: Testing and Inspection P0180
For diagnosis of code P0180 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 115
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 116
P0180 - P0184: Testing and Inspection P0181
For diagnosis of code P0181 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 117
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 118
P0180 - P0184: Testing and Inspection P0182
For diagnosis of code P0182 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 119
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 120
P0180 - P0184: Testing and Inspection P0183
For diagnosis of code P0183 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 121
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190
P0190 - P0194: Testing and Inspection P0190
For diagnosis of code P0190 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 126
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 127
P0190 - P0194: Testing and Inspection P0191
For diagnosis of code P0191 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 128
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 129
P0190 - P0194: Testing and Inspection P0192
For diagnosis of code P0192 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 130
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 131
P0190 - P0194: Testing and Inspection P0193
For diagnosis of code P0193 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 132
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204,
( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201
P0200 - P0204: Testing and Inspection P0201
For diagnosis of code P0201 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204,
( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 138
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204,
( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 139
P0200 - P0204: Testing and Inspection P0202
For diagnosis of code P0202 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204,
( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 140
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204,
( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 141
P0200 - P0204: Testing and Inspection P0203
For diagnosis of code P0203 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204,
( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 142
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204,
( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 143
P0200 - P0204: Testing and Inspection P0204
For diagnosis of code P0204 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204,
( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 144
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205
P0205 - P0209: Testing and Inspection P0205
For diagnosis of code P0205 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 149
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 150
P0205 - P0209: Testing and Inspection P0206
For diagnosis of code P0206 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 151
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 152
P0205 - P0209: Testing and Inspection P0207
For diagnosis of code P0207 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 153
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 154
P0205 - P0209: Testing and Inspection P0208
For diagnosis of code P0208 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 155
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 156
P0205 - P0209: Testing and Inspection P0209
For diagnosis of code P0209 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 157
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214,
( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0210
P0210 - P0214: Testing and Inspection P0210
For diagnosis of code P0210 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214,
( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0210 > Page 162
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214,
( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0210 > Page 163
P0210 - P0214: Testing and Inspection P0211
For diagnosis of code P0211 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214,
( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0210 > Page 164
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214,
( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0210 > Page 165
P0210 - P0214: Testing and Inspection P0212
For diagnosis of code P0212 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214,
( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0210 > Page 166
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0215 - P0219,
( P0216 P0217 P0218 0215 0216 0217 0218 0219 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0215 - P0219: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0217 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0215 - P0219,
( P0216 P0217 P0218 0215 0216 0217 0218 0219 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 170
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234,
( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230
P0230 - P0234: Testing and Inspection P0230
For diagnosis of code P0230 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234,
( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 175
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234,
( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 176
P0230 - P0234: Testing and Inspection P0231
For diagnosis of code P0231 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234,
( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 177
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234,
( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 178
P0230 - P0234: Testing and Inspection P0232
For diagnosis of code P0232 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234,
( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 179
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234,
( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 180
P0230 - P0234: Testing and Inspection P0234
For diagnosis of code P0234 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234,
( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 181
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0240 - P0244,
( P0241 P0242 P0243 0240 0241 0242 0243 0244 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0240 - P0244: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0243 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0240 - P0244,
( P0241 P0242 P0243 0240 0241 0242 0243 0244 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 185
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0295 - P0299,
( P0296 P0297 P0298 0295 0296 0297 0298 0299 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0295 - P0299: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0298 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0295 - P0299,
( P0296 P0297 P0298 0295 0296 0297 0298 0299 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 189
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304,
( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0300
P0300 - P0304: Testing and Inspection P0300
For diagnosis of code P0300 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304,
( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0300 > Page 195
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304,
( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0300 > Page 196
P0300 - P0304: Testing and Inspection P0301
For diagnosis of code P0301 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304,
( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0300 > Page 197
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304,
( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0300 > Page 198
P0300 - P0304: Testing and Inspection P0302
For diagnosis of code P0302 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304,
( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0300 > Page 199
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304,
( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0300 > Page 200
P0300 - P0304: Testing and Inspection P0303
For diagnosis of code P0303 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304,
( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0300 > Page 201
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304,
( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0300 > Page 202
P0300 - P0304: Testing and Inspection P0304
For diagnosis of code P0304 refer to chart
P0172 - P0304
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304,
( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0300 > Page 203
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0305 - P0309,
( P0306 P0307 P0308 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0305
P0305 - P0309: Testing and Inspection P0305
For diagnosis of code P0305 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0305 - P0309,
( P0306 P0307 P0308 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0305 > Page 208
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0305 - P0309,
( P0306 P0307 P0308 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0305 > Page 209
P0305 - P0309: Testing and Inspection P0306
For diagnosis of code P0306 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0305 - P0309,
( P0306 P0307 P0308 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0305 > Page 210
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0305 - P0309,
( P0306 P0307 P0308 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0305 > Page 211
P0305 - P0309: Testing and Inspection P0307
For diagnosis of code P0307 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0305 - P0309,
( P0306 P0307 P0308 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0305 > Page 212
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0305 - P0309,
( P0306 P0307 P0308 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0305 > Page 213
P0305 - P0309: Testing and Inspection P0308
For diagnosis of code P0308 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0305 - P0309,
( P0306 P0307 P0308 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0305 > Page 214
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0305 - P0309,
( P0306 P0307 P0308 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0305 > Page 215
P0305 - P0309: Testing and Inspection P0309
For diagnosis of code P0309 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0305 - P0309,
( P0306 P0307 P0308 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0305 > Page 216
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0310 - P0314,
( P0311 P0312 P0313 0310 0311 0312 0313 0314 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0310 - P0314: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0310 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0310 - P0314,
( P0311 P0312 P0313 0310 0311 0312 0313 0314 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 220
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0320 - P0324,
( P0321 P0322 P0323 0320 0321 0322 0323 0324 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0320 - P0324: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0320 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0320 - P0324,
( P0321 P0322 P0323 0320 0321 0322 0323 0324 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 224
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0325 - P0329,
( P0326 P0327 P0328 0325 0326 0327 0328 0329 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0325
P0325 - P0329: Testing and Inspection P0325
For diagnosis of code P0325 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0325 - P0329,
( P0326 P0327 P0328 0325 0326 0327 0328 0329 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0325 > Page 229
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0325 - P0329,
( P0326 P0327 P0328 0325 0326 0327 0328 0329 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0325 > Page 230
P0325 - P0329: Testing and Inspection P0326
For diagnosis of code P0326 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0325 - P0329,
( P0326 P0327 P0328 0325 0326 0327 0328 0329 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0325 > Page 231
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0330 - P0334,
( P0331 P0332 P0333 0330 0331 0332 0333 0334 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0330
P0330 - P0334: Testing and Inspection P0330
For diagnosis of code P0330 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0330 - P0334,
( P0331 P0332 P0333 0330 0331 0332 0333 0334 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0330 > Page 236
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0330 - P0334,
( P0331 P0332 P0333 0330 0331 0332 0333 0334 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0330 > Page 237
P0330 - P0334: Testing and Inspection P0331
For diagnosis of code P0331 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0330 - P0334,
( P0331 P0332 P0333 0330 0331 0332 0333 0334 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0330 > Page 238
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0340 - P0344,
( P0341 P0342 P0343 0340 0341 0342 0343 0344 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0340 - P0344: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0340 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0340 - P0344,
( P0341 P0342 P0343 0340 0341 0342 0343 0344 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 242
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350
P0350 - P0354: Testing and Inspection P0350
For diagnosis of code P0350 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 247
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 248
P0350 - P0354: Testing and Inspection P0351
For diagnosis of code P0351 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 249
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 250
P0350 - P0354: Testing and Inspection P0352
For diagnosis of code P0352 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 251
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 252
P0350 - P0354: Testing and Inspection P0353
For diagnosis of code P0353 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 253
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 254
P0350 - P0354: Testing and Inspection P0354
For diagnosis of code P0354 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 255
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355
P0355 - P0359: Testing and Inspection P0355
For diagnosis of code P0355 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 260
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 261
P0355 - P0359: Testing and Inspection P0356
For diagnosis of code P0356 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 262
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 263
P0355 - P0359: Testing and Inspection P0357
For diagnosis of code P0357 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 264
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 265
P0355 - P0359: Testing and Inspection P0358
For diagnosis of code P0358 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 266
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 267
P0355 - P0359: Testing and Inspection P0359
For diagnosis of code P0359 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 268
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0360 - P0364,
( P0361 P0362 P0363 0360 0361 0362 0363 0364 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0360 - P0364: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0360 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0360 - P0364,
( P0361 P0362 P0363 0360 0361 0362 0363 0364 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 272
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404,
( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400
P0400 - P0404: Testing and Inspection P0400
For diagnosis of code P0400 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404,
( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 278
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404,
( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 279
P0400 - P0404: Testing and Inspection P0401
For diagnosis of code P0401 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404,
( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 280
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404,
( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 281
P0400 - P0404: Testing and Inspection P0402
For diagnosis of code P0402 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404,
( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 282
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404,
( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 283
P0400 - P0404: Testing and Inspection P0403
For diagnosis of code P0403 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404,
( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 284
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0410 - P0414,
( P0411 P0412 P0413 0410 0411 0412 0413 0414 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0411
P0410 - P0414: Testing and Inspection P0411
For diagnosis of code P0411 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0410 - P0414,
( P0411 P0412 P0413 0410 0411 0412 0413 0414 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0411 > Page 289
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0410 - P0414,
( P0411 P0412 P0413 0410 0411 0412 0413 0414 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0411 > Page 290
P0410 - P0414: Testing and Inspection P0412
For diagnosis of code P0412 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0410 - P0414,
( P0411 P0412 P0413 0410 0411 0412 0413 0414 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0411 > Page 291
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0420 - P0424,
( P0421 P0422 P0423 0420 0421 0422 0423 0424 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0420 - P0424: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0420 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0420 - P0424,
( P0421 P0422 P0423 0420 0421 0422 0423 0424 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 295
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0430 - P0434,
( P0431 P0432 P0433 0430 0431 0432 0433 0434 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0430 - P0434: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0430 refer to chart
P0305 - P0442
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0430 - P0434,
( P0431 P0432 P0433 0430 0431 0432 0433 0434 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 299
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0440 - P0444,
( P0441 P0442 P0443 0440 0441 0442 0443 0444 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0442
P0440 - P0444: Testing and Inspection P0442
For diagnosis of code P0442 refer to chart
DTC Index P0442 - P1443
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Evaporative Emissions diagnostic information , See: Powertrain
Management/Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0440 - P0444,
( P0441 P0442 P0443 0440 0441 0442 0443 0444 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0442 > Page 304
P0440 - P0444: Testing and Inspection P0443
For diagnosis of code P0443 refer to chart
P0443 - P071x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0440 - P0444,
( P0441 P0442 P0443 0440 0441 0442 0443 0444 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0442 > Page 305
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454,
( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451
P0450 - P0454: Testing and Inspection P0451
For diagnosis of code P0451 refer to chart
P0443 - P071x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454,
( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 310
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454,
( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 311
P0450 - P0454: Testing and Inspection P0452
For diagnosis of code P0452 refer to chart
P0443 - P071x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454,
( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 312
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454,
( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 313
P0450 - P0454: Testing and Inspection P0453
For diagnosis of code P0453 refer to chart
P0443 - P071x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454,
( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 314
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0455 - P0459,
( P0456 P0457 P0458 0455 0456 0457 0458 0459 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0455
P0455 - P0459: Testing and Inspection P0455
For diagnosis of code P0455 refer to chart
DTC Index P0442 - P1443
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Evaporative Emissions diagnostic information , See: Powertrain
Management/Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0455 - P0459,
( P0456 P0457 P0458 0455 0456 0457 0458 0459 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0455 > Page 319
P0455 - P0459: Testing and Inspection P0457
For diagnosis of P0457 refer to the system experiencing the problem.
Computers and Control Systems
P0443 - P071x
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0455 - P0459,
( P0456 P0457 P0458 0455 0456 0457 0458 0459 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0455 > Page 320
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Instrument Panel
DTC Index P0457
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Instrument Panel diagnostic information, See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and
Warning Indicators/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464,
( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460
P0460 - P0464: Testing and Inspection P0460
For diagnosis of code P0460 refer to chart
P0443 - P071x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464,
( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 > Page 325
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464,
( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 > Page 326
P0460 - P0464: Testing and Inspection P0461
For diagnosis of code P0461 refer to chart
P0443 - P071x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464,
( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 > Page 327
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504,
( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500
P0500 - P0504: Testing and Inspection P0500
For diagnosis of code P0500 refer to chart
P0443 - P071x
NOTE 12: Vehicle Speed information is provided by the Antilock Brake System (ABS). Perform
complete diagnosis, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504,
( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500 > Page 333
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504,
( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500 > Page 334
P0500 - P0504: Testing and Inspection P0501
For diagnosis of code P0501 refer to chart
P0443 - P071x
NOTE 12: Vehicle Speed information is provided by the Antilock Brake System (ABS). Perform
complete diagnosis, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504,
( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500 > Page 335
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504,
( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500 > Page 336
P0500 - P0504: Testing and Inspection P0503
For diagnosis of code P0503 refer to chart
P0443 - P071x
NOTE 12: Vehicle Speed information is provided by the Antilock Brake System (ABS). Perform
complete diagnosis, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504,
( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500 > Page 337
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0505 - P0509,
( P0506 P0507 P0508 0505 0506 0507 0508 0509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0505 - P0509: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0505 refer to chart
P0443 - P071x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0505 - P0509,
( P0506 P0507 P0508 0505 0506 0507 0508 0509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 341
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0550 - P0554,
( P0551 P0552 P0553 0550 0551 0552 0553 0554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0552
P0550 - P0554: Testing and Inspection P0552
For diagnosis of code P0552 refer to chart
P0443 - P071x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0550 - P0554,
( P0551 P0552 P0553 0550 0551 0552 0553 0554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0552 > Page 346
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0550 - P0554,
( P0551 P0552 P0553 0550 0551 0552 0553 0554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0552 > Page 347
P0550 - P0554: Testing and Inspection P0553
For diagnosis of code P0553 refer to chart
P0443 - P071x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0550 - P0554,
( P0551 P0552 P0553 0550 0551 0552 0553 0554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0552 > Page 348
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0600 - P0604,
( P0601 P0602 P0603 0600 0601 0602 0603 0604 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0602
P0600 - P0604: Testing and Inspection P0602
For diagnosis of code P0602 refer to chart
P0443 - P071x
NOTE 11: The vehicle ID block (VID) needs to be reprogrammed. Refer to VID Block Procedure.
See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0600 - P0604,
( P0601 P0602 P0603 0600 0601 0602 0603 0604 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0602 > Page 354
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0600 - P0604,
( P0601 P0602 P0603 0600 0601 0602 0603 0604 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0602 > Page 355
P0600 - P0604: Testing and Inspection P0603
For diagnosis of code P0603 refer to chart
P0443 - P071x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0600 - P0604,
( P0601 P0602 P0603 0600 0601 0602 0603 0604 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0602 > Page 356
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0605 - P0609,
( P0606 P0607 P0608 0605 0606 0607 0608 0609 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0605 - P0609: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0605 refer to chart
P0443 - P071x
NOTE 14: Be sure to check for aftermarket performance products before replacing PCM. If
replacement is necessary refer to Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
(EEPROM), See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0605 - P0609,
( P0606 P0607 P0608 0605 0606 0607 0608 0609 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 360
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0700 - P0704,
( P0701 P0702 P0703 0700 0701 0702 0703 0704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0703
P0700 - P0704: Testing and Inspection P0703
For diagnosis of code P0703 refer to chart
P0443 - P071x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0700 - P0704,
( P0701 P0702 P0703 0700 0701 0702 0703 0704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0703 > Page 366
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0700 - P0704,
( P0701 P0702 P0703 0700 0701 0702 0703 0704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0703 > Page 367
P0700 - P0704: Testing and Inspection P0704
For diagnosis of code P0704 refer to chart
P0443 - P071x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0700 - P0704,
( P0701 P0702 P0703 0700 0701 0702 0703 0704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0703 > Page 368
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709,
( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0707
P0705 - P0709: Testing and Inspection P0707
For diagnosis of code P0707 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709,
( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0707 > Page 373
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709,
( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0707 > Page 374
P0705 - P0709: Testing and Inspection P0708
For diagnosis of code P0708 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709,
( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0707 > Page 375
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714,
( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0712
P0710 - P0714: Testing and Inspection P0712
For diagnosis of code P0712 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714,
( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0712 > Page 380
P0710 - P0714: Testing and Inspection P0713
For diagnosis of code P0713 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719,
( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715
P0715 - P0719: Testing and Inspection P0715
For diagnosis of code P0715 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719,
( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 > Page 385
P0715 - P0719: Testing and Inspection P0717
For diagnosis of code P0717 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719,
( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 > Page 386
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719,
( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 > Page 387
P0715 - P0719: Testing and Inspection P0718
For diagnosis of code P0718 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719,
( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 > Page 388
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724,
( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission
P0720 - P0724: Testing and Inspection Manual Transmission
For diagnosis of code P072x refer to chart
P072x - P1138
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724,
( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission >
Page 393
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Note: "x" = any number 0 thru 9
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724,
( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission >
Page 394
P0720 - P0724: Testing and Inspection Automatic Transmission
P0720
For diagnosis of code P0720 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724,
( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission >
Page 395
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
P0721
For diagnosis of code P0721 refer to chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724,
( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission >
Page 396
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724,
( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission >
Page 397
Inspection
P0722 ( P 0722 )
For diagnosis of code P0722 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724,
( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission >
Page 398
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0725 - P0729,
( P0726 P0727 P0728 0725 0726 0727 0728 0729 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0725 - P0729: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P072x refer to chart
P072x - P1138
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0725 - P0729,
( P0726 P0727 P0728 0725 0726 0727 0728 0729 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 402
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Note: "x" = any number 0 thru 9
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734,
( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0731
P0730 - P0734: Testing and Inspection P0731
For diagnosis of code P0731 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734,
( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0731 > Page 407
P0730 - P0734: Testing and Inspection P0732
For diagnosis of code P0732 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734,
( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0731 > Page 408
P0730 - P0734: Testing and Inspection P0733
For diagnosis of code P0733 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734,
( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0731 > Page 409
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734,
( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0731 > Page 410
P0730 - P0734: Testing and Inspection P0734
For diagnosis of code P0734 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734,
( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0731 > Page 411
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744,
( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0740 - P0744: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0743 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744,
( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 415
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754,
( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750
P0750 - P0754: Testing and Inspection P0750
For diagnosis of code P0750 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754,
( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 > Page 420
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754,
( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 > Page 421
P0750 - P0754: Testing and Inspection P0751
For diagnosis of code P0751 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754,
( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 > Page 422
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759,
( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755
P0755 - P0759: Testing and Inspection P0755
For diagnosis of code P0755 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759,
( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 > Page 427
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759,
( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 > Page 428
P0755 - P0759: Testing and Inspection P0756
For diagnosis of code P0756 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759,
( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 > Page 429
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0800-P08ZZ > P0810 - P0814,
( P0811 P0812 P0813 0810 0811 0812 0813 0814 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0810 - P0814: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0812 refer to chart
P072x - P1138
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0800-P08ZZ > P0810 - P0814,
( P0811 P0812 P0813 0810 0811 0812 0813 0814 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 434
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1000-P10ZZ > P1000 - P1004,
( P1001 P1002 P1003 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1000
P1000 - P1004: Testing and Inspection P1000
For diagnosis of code P1000 refer to chart
P072x - P1138
NOTE 1: DTC P1000 is ignored in KOEO and KOER Self-Test. Disregard the DTC P1000 and
continue as directed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1000-P10ZZ > P1000 - P1004,
( P1001 P1002 P1003 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1000 > Page 440
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1000-P10ZZ > P1000 - P1004,
( P1001 P1002 P1003 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1000 > Page 441
P1000 - P1004: Testing and Inspection P1001
For diagnosis of code P1001 refer to chart
P072x - P1138
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1000-P10ZZ > P1000 - P1004,
( P1001 P1002 P1003 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1000 > Page 442
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1100 - P1104,
( P1101 P1102 P1103 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1100
P1100 - P1104: Testing and Inspection P1100
For diagnosis of code P1100 refer to chart
P072x - P1138
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1100 - P1104,
( P1101 P1102 P1103 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1100 > Page 448
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1100 - P1104,
( P1101 P1102 P1103 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1100 > Page 449
P1100 - P1104: Testing and Inspection P1101
For diagnosis of code P1101 refer to chart
P072x - P1138
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1100 - P1104,
( P1101 P1102 P1103 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1100 > Page 450
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1110 - P1114,
( P1111 P1112 P1113 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1112
P1110 - P1114: Testing and Inspection P1112
For diagnosis of code P1112 refer to chart
P072x - P1138
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1110 - P1114,
( P1111 P1112 P1113 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1112 > Page 455
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1110 - P1114,
( P1111 P1112 P1113 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1112 > Page 456
P1110 - P1114: Testing and Inspection P1114
For diagnosis of code P1114 refer to chart
P072x - P1138
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1110 - P1114,
( P1111 P1112 P1113 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1112 > Page 457
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119,
( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1115
P1115 - P1119: Testing and Inspection P1115
For diagnosis of code P1115 refer to chart
P072x - P1138
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119,
( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1115 > Page 462
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119,
( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1115 > Page 463
P1115 - P1119: Testing and Inspection P1116
For diagnosis of code P1116 refer to chart
P072x - P1138
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119,
( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1115 > Page 464
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119,
( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1115 > Page 465
P1115 - P1119: Testing and Inspection P1117
For diagnosis of code P1117 refer to chart
P072x - P1138
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119,
( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1115 > Page 466
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124,
( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120
P1120 - P1124: Testing and Inspection P1120
For diagnosis of code P1120 refer to chart
P072x - P1138
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124,
( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120 > Page 471
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124,
( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120 > Page 472
P1120 - P1124: Testing and Inspection P1121
For diagnosis of code P1121 refer to chart
P072x - P1138
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124,
( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120 > Page 473
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124,
( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120 > Page 474
P1120 - P1124: Testing and Inspection P1124
For diagnosis of code P1124 refer to chart
P072x - P1138
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124,
( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120 > Page 475
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129,
( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125
P1125 - P1129: Testing and Inspection P1125
For diagnosis of code P1125 refer to chart
P072x - P1138
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129,
( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 480
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129,
( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 481
P1125 - P1129: Testing and Inspection P1127
For diagnosis of code P1127 refer to chart
P072x - P1138
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129,
( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 482
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129,
( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 483
P1125 - P1129: Testing and Inspection P1128
For diagnosis of code P1128 refer to chart
P072x - P1138
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129,
( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 484
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129,
( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 485
P1125 - P1129: Testing and Inspection P1129
For diagnosis of code P1129 refer to chart
P072x - P1138
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129,
( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 486
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134,
( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130
P1130 - P1134: Testing and Inspection P1130
For diagnosis of code P1130 refer to chart
P072x - P1138
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134,
( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130 > Page 491
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134,
( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130 > Page 492
P1130 - P1134: Testing and Inspection P1131
For diagnosis of code P1131 refer to chart
P072x - P1138
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134,
( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130 > Page 493
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134,
( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130 > Page 494
P1130 - P1134: Testing and Inspection P1132
For diagnosis of code P1132 refer to chart
P072x - P1138
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134,
( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130 > Page 495
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1135 - P1139,
( P1136 P1137 P1138 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1137
P1135 - P1139: Testing and Inspection P1137
For diagnosis of code P1137 refer to chart
P072x - P1138
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1135 - P1139,
( P1136 P1137 P1138 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1137 > Page 500
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1135 - P1139,
( P1136 P1137 P1138 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1137 > Page 501
P1135 - P1139: Testing and Inspection P1138
For diagnosis of code P1138 refer to chart
P072x - P1138
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1135 - P1139,
( P1136 P1137 P1138 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1137 > Page 502
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154,
( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150
P1150 - P1154: Testing and Inspection P1150
For diagnosis of code P1150 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154,
( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150 > Page 507
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154,
( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150 > Page 508
P1150 - P1154: Testing and Inspection P1151
For diagnosis of code P1151 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154,
( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150 > Page 509
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154,
( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150 > Page 510
P1150 - P1154: Testing and Inspection P1152
For diagnosis of code P1152 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154,
( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150 > Page 511
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1155 - P1159,
( P1156 P1157 P1158 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1157
P1155 - P1159: Testing and Inspection P1157
For diagnosis of code P1157 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1155 - P1159,
( P1156 P1157 P1158 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1157 > Page 516
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1155 - P1159,
( P1156 P1157 P1158 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1157 > Page 517
P1155 - P1159: Testing and Inspection P1158
For diagnosis of code P1158 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1155 - P1159,
( P1156 P1157 P1158 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1157 > Page 518
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1165 - P1169,
( P1166 P1167 P1168 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1168
P1165 - P1169: Testing and Inspection P1168
For diagnosis of code P1168 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1165 - P1169,
( P1166 P1167 P1168 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1168 > Page 523
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1165 - P1169,
( P1166 P1167 P1168 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1168 > Page 524
P1165 - P1169: Testing and Inspection P1169
For diagnosis of code P1169 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1165 - P1169,
( P1166 P1167 P1168 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1168 > Page 525
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184,
( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180
P1180 - P1184: Testing and Inspection P1180
For diagnosis of code P1180 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184,
( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 > Page 530
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184,
( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 > Page 531
P1180 - P1184: Testing and Inspection P1181
For diagnosis of code P1181 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184,
( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 > Page 532
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184,
( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 > Page 533
P1180 - P1184: Testing and Inspection P1183
For diagnosis of code P1183 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184,
( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 > Page 534
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184,
( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 > Page 535
P1180 - P1184: Testing and Inspection P1184
For diagnosis of code P1184 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184,
( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 > Page 536
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1225 - P1229,
( P1226 P1227 P1228 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1225 - P1229: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1229 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1225 - P1229,
( P1226 P1227 P1228 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 541
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1230 - P1234,
( P1231 P1232 P1233 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1232
P1230 - P1234: Testing and Inspection P1232
For diagnosis of code P1232 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1230 - P1234,
( P1231 P1232 P1233 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1232 > Page 546
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1230 - P1234,
( P1231 P1232 P1233 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1232 > Page 547
P1230 - P1234: Testing and Inspection P1233
For diagnosis of code P1233 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
NOTE 10: Perform Rear Electronics Module (REM) self-test/diagnostics.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1230 - P1234,
( P1231 P1232 P1233 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1232 > Page 548
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1230 - P1234,
( P1231 P1232 P1233 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1232 > Page 549
P1230 - P1234: Testing and Inspection P1234
For diagnosis of code P1234 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
NOTE 10: Perform Rear Electronics Module (REM) self-test/diagnostics.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1230 - P1234,
( P1231 P1232 P1233 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1232 > Page 550
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239,
( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235
P1235 - P1239: Testing and Inspection P1235
For diagnosis of code P1235 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239,
( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 > Page 555
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239,
( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 > Page 556
P1235 - P1239: Testing and Inspection P1236
For diagnosis of code P1236 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239,
( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 > Page 557
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239,
( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 > Page 558
P1235 - P1239: Testing and Inspection P1237
For diagnosis of code P1237 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239,
( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 > Page 559
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239,
( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 > Page 560
P1235 - P1239: Testing and Inspection P1238
For diagnosis of code P1238 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239,
( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 > Page 561
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1240 - P1244,
( P1241 P1242 P1243 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1240 - P1244: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1244 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1240 - P1244,
( P1241 P1242 P1243 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 565
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1245 - P1249,
( P1246 P1247 P1248 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1245
P1245 - P1249: Testing and Inspection P1245
For diagnosis of code P1245 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1245 - P1249,
( P1246 P1247 P1248 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1245 > Page 570
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1245 - P1249,
( P1246 P1247 P1248 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1245 > Page 571
P1245 - P1249: Testing and Inspection P1246
For diagnosis of P1246 refer to the system experiencing the problem.
Computers and Control Systems
Refer to Pinpoint Test HY1. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Pinpoint Tests/Tests HY: Generator/Regulator System
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Charging System
DTC Index P1246
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Charging System diagnostic information, See: Starting and Charging/Charging
System/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264,
( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1260 - P1264: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1260 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264,
( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 575
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274,
( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1270 - P1274: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1270 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274,
( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 579
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289,
( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285
P1285 - P1289: Testing and Inspection P1285
For diagnosis of code P1285 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289,
( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285 > Page 584
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289,
( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285 > Page 585
P1285 - P1289: Testing and Inspection P1288
For diagnosis of code P1288 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289,
( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285 > Page 586
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289,
( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285 > Page 587
P1285 - P1289: Testing and Inspection P1289
For diagnosis of code P1289 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289,
( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285 > Page 588
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1290 - P1294,
( P1291 P1292 P1293 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1290 - P1294: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1290 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1290 - P1294,
( P1291 P1292 P1293 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 592
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1295 - P1299,
( P1296 P1297 P1298 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1295 - P1299: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1299 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1295 - P1299,
( P1296 P1297 P1298 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 596
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1305 - P1309,
( P1306 P1307 P1308 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1305 - P1309: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1309 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1305 - P1309,
( P1306 P1307 P1308 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 601
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384,
( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380
P1380 - P1384: Testing and Inspection P1380
For diagnosis of code P1380 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384,
( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380 > Page 606
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384,
( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380 > Page 607
P1380 - P1384: Testing and Inspection P1381
For diagnosis of code P1381 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384,
( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380 > Page 608
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384,
( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380 > Page 609
P1380 - P1384: Testing and Inspection P1383
For diagnosis of code P1383 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384,
( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380 > Page 610
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1400 - P1404,
( P1401 P1402 P1403 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1400
P1400 - P1404: Testing and Inspection P1400
For diagnosis of code P1400 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1400 - P1404,
( P1401 P1402 P1403 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1400 > Page 616
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1400 - P1404,
( P1401 P1402 P1403 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1400 > Page 617
P1400 - P1404: Testing and Inspection P1401
For diagnosis of code P1401 refer to chart
P1150 - P1401
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1400 - P1404,
( P1401 P1402 P1403 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1400 > Page 618
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409,
( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405
P1405 - P1409: Testing and Inspection P1405
For diagnosis of code P1405 refer to chart
P1405 - P1517
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409,
( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 623
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409,
( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 624
P1405 - P1409: Testing and Inspection P1406
For diagnosis of code P1406 refer to chart
P1405 - P1517
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409,
( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 625
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409,
( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 626
P1405 - P1409: Testing and Inspection P1408
For diagnosis of code P1408 refer to chart
P1405 - P1517
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409,
( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 627
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409,
( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 628
P1405 - P1409: Testing and Inspection P1409
For diagnosis of code P1409 refer to chart
P1405 - P1517
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409,
( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 629
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1410 - P1414,
( P1411 P1412 P1413 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1413
P1410 - P1414: Testing and Inspection P1413
For diagnosis of code P1413 refer to chart
P1405 - P1517
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1410 - P1414,
( P1411 P1412 P1413 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1413 > Page 634
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1410 - P1414,
( P1411 P1412 P1413 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1413 > Page 635
P1410 - P1414: Testing and Inspection P1414
For diagnosis of code P1414 refer to chart
P1405 - P1517
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1410 - P1414,
( P1411 P1412 P1413 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1413 > Page 636
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1430 - P1434,
( P1431 P1432 P1433 1430 1431 1432 1433 1434 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1430 - P1434: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1432 refer to chart
P1405 - P1517
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1430 - P1434,
( P1431 P1432 P1433 1430 1431 1432 1433 1434 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 640
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1440 - P1444,
( P1441 P1442 P1443 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1440 - P1444: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1443 refer to chart
DTC Index P0442 - P1443
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Evaporative Emissions diagnostic information , See: Powertrain
Management/Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1450 - P1454,
( P1451 P1452 P1453 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1450
P1450 - P1454: Testing and Inspection P1450
For diagnosis of code P1450 refer to the system experiencing the problem.
Computers and Control Systems
P1405 - P1517
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1450 - P1454,
( P1451 P1452 P1453 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1450 > Page 648
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Evaporative Emissions System
DTC Index P1450
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Evaporative Emissions diagnostic information, See: Powertrain
Management/Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1450 - P1454,
( P1451 P1452 P1453 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1450 > Page 649
P1450 - P1454: Testing and Inspection P1451
For diagnosis of code P1451 refer to chart
P1405 - P1517
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1450 - P1454,
( P1451 P1452 P1453 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1450 > Page 650
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460
P1460 - P1464: Testing and Inspection P1460
For diagnosis of code P1460 refer to chart
P1405 - P1517
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 655
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 656
P1460 - P1464: Testing and Inspection P1461
For diagnosis of code P1461 refer to chart
P1405 - P1517
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 657
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 658
P1460 - P1464: Testing and Inspection P1462
For diagnosis of code P1462 refer to chart
P1405 - P1517
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 659
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 660
P1460 - P1464: Testing and Inspection P1463
For diagnosis of code P1463 refer to chart
P1405 - P1517
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 661
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 662
P1460 - P1464: Testing and Inspection P1464
For diagnosis of P1464 refer to the system experiencing the problem.
Computers and Control Systems
P1405 - P1517
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 663
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Heating and Air Conditioning
DTC Index P1460 - P1479
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Heating and Air Conditioning diagnostic information, See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1465 - P1469,
( P1466 P1467 P1468 1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1465 - P1469: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1469 refer to chart
P1405 - P1517
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1465 - P1469,
( P1466 P1467 P1468 1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 667
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1470 - P1474,
( P1471 P1472 P1473 1470 1471 1472 1473 1474 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1470 - P1474: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1474 refer to chart
P1405 - P1517
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1470 - P1474,
( P1471 P1472 P1473 1470 1471 1472 1473 1474 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 671
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1475 - P1479,
( P1476 P1477 P1478 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1477
P1475 - P1479: Testing and Inspection P1477
For diagnosis of code P1477 refer to chart
P1405 - P1517
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1475 - P1479,
( P1476 P1477 P1478 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1477 > Page 676
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1475 - P1479,
( P1476 P1477 P1478 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1477 > Page 677
P1475 - P1479: Testing and Inspection P1479
For diagnosis of code P1479 refer to chart
P1405 - P1517
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1475 - P1479,
( P1476 P1477 P1478 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1477 > Page 678
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504,
( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500
P1500 - P1504: Testing and Inspection P1500
For diagnosis of code P1500 refer to chart
P1405 - P1517
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504,
( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 684
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504,
( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 685
P1500 - P1504: Testing and Inspection P1501
For diagnosis of code P1501 refer to chart
P1405 - P1517
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504,
( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 686
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504,
( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 687
P1500 - P1504: Testing and Inspection P1502
For diagnosis of code P1502 refer to chart
P1405 - P1517
NOTE 12: Vehicle Speed information is provided by the Antilock Brake System (ABS). Perform
complete diagnosis, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504,
( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 688
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504,
( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 689
P1500 - P1504: Testing and Inspection P1504
For diagnosis of code P1504 refer to chart
P1405 - P1517
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504,
( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 690
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1505 - P1509,
( P1506 P1507 P1508 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1506
P1505 - P1509: Testing and Inspection P1506
For diagnosis of code P1506 refer to chart
P1405 - P1517
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1505 - P1509,
( P1506 P1507 P1508 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1506 > Page 695
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1505 - P1509,
( P1506 P1507 P1508 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1506 > Page 696
P1505 - P1509: Testing and Inspection P1507
For diagnosis of code P1507 refer to chart
P1405 - P1517
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1505 - P1509,
( P1506 P1507 P1508 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1506 > Page 697
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519,
( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516
P1515 - P1519: Testing and Inspection P1516
For diagnosis of code P1516 refer to chart
P1405 - P1517
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519,
( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 702
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519,
( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 703
P1515 - P1519: Testing and Inspection P1517
For diagnosis of code P1517 refer to chart
P1405 - P1517
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519,
( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 704
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519,
( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 705
P1515 - P1519: Testing and Inspection P1518
For diagnosis of code P1518 refer to chart
P1518 - P1781
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519,
( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 706
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519,
( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 707
P1515 - P1519: Testing and Inspection P1519
For diagnosis of code P1519 refer to chart
P1518 - P1781
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519,
( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 708
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1520 - P1524,
( P1521 P1522 P1523 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1520 - P1524: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1520 refer to chart
P1518 - P1781
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1520 - P1524,
( P1521 P1522 P1523 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 712
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1545 - P1549,
( P1546 P1547 P1548 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1545 - P1549: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1549 refer to chart
P1518 - P1781
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1545 - P1549,
( P1546 P1547 P1548 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 716
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1550 - P1554,
( P1551 P1552 P1553 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1550 - P1554: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1550 refer to chart
P1518 - P1781
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1550 - P1554,
( P1551 P1552 P1553 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 720
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1570 - P1574,
( P1571 P1572 P1573 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1570 - P1574: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1572 refer to chart
P1518 - P1781
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1570 - P1574,
( P1571 P1572 P1573 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 724
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1605 - P1609,
( P1606 P1607 P1608 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1605 - P1609: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1605 refer to chart
P1518 - P1781
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1605 - P1609,
( P1606 P1607 P1608 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 729
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1630 - P1634,
( P1631 P1632 P1633 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1630 - P1634: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1633 refer to chart
P1518 - P1781
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1630 - P1634,
( P1631 P1632 P1633 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 733
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1635 - P1639,
( P1636 P1637 P1638 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1635
P1635 - P1639: Testing and Inspection P1635
For diagnosis of code P1635 refer to chart
P1518 - P1781
NOTE 11: The vehicle ID block (VID) needs to be reprogrammed. Refer to Flash VID Block
procedure, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1635 - P1639,
( P1636 P1637 P1638 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1635 > Page 738
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1635 - P1639,
( P1636 P1637 P1638 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1635 > Page 739
P1635 - P1639: Testing and Inspection P1636
For diagnosis of code P1636 refer to chart
P1518 - P1781
NOTE 18: DTC P1636 indicates the PCM has lost communication with the Inductive Signature
Chip. Replace PCM. If replacement is necessary refer to Flash Electically Erasable Programmable
Read Only Memory (EEPROM), See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1635 - P1639,
( P1636 P1637 P1638 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1635 > Page 740
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1635 - P1639,
( P1636 P1637 P1638 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1635 > Page 741
P1635 - P1639: Testing and Inspection P1639
For diagnosis of code P1639 refer to chart
P1518 - P1781
NOTE 11: The vehicle ID block (VID) needs to be reprogrammed. Refer to Flash VID Block
procedure, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1635 - P1639,
( P1636 P1637 P1638 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1635 > Page 742
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1640 - P1644,
( P1641 P1642 P1643 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1640 - P1644: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1641 refer to chart
P1518 - P1781
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1640 - P1644,
( P1641 P1642 P1643 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 746
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1650 - P1654,
( P1651 P1652 P1653 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1650
P1650 - P1654: Testing and Inspection P1650
For diagnosis of code P1650 refer to chart
P1518 - P1781
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1650 - P1654,
( P1651 P1652 P1653 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1650 > Page 751
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1650 - P1654,
( P1651 P1652 P1653 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1650 > Page 752
P1650 - P1654: Testing and Inspection P1651
For diagnosis of code P1651 refer to chart
P1518 - P1781
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1650 - P1654,
( P1651 P1652 P1653 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1650 > Page 753
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704,
( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1702
P1700 - P1704: Testing and Inspection P1702
For diagnosis of code P1702 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704,
( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1702 > Page 759
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704,
( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1702 > Page 760
P1700 - P1704: Testing and Inspection P1703
For diagnosis of code P1703 refer to charts
P1518 - P1781
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704,
( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1702 > Page 761
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1705 - P1709,
( P1706 P1707 P1708 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1705
P1705 - P1709: Testing and Inspection P1705
Manual Transmission
For diagnosis of code P1705 refer to chart
P1518 - P1781
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1705 - P1709,
( P1706 P1707 P1708 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1705 > Page 766
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Automatic Transmission
For diagnosis of code P1705 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1705 - P1709,
( P1706 P1707 P1708 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1705 > Page 767
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1705 - P1709,
( P1706 P1707 P1708 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1705 > Page 768
P1705 - P1709: Testing and Inspection P1709
For diagnosis of code P1709 refer to chart
P1518 - P1781
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1705 - P1709,
( P1706 P1707 P1708 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1705 > Page 769
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714,
( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1711
P1710 - P1714: Testing and Inspection P1711
For diagnosis of code P1711 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714,
( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1711 > Page 774
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714,
( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1711 > Page 775
P1710 - P1714: Testing and Inspection P1713
For diagnosis of code P1713 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714,
( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1711 > Page 776
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714,
( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1711 > Page 777
P1710 - P1714: Testing and Inspection P1714
For diagnosis of code P1714 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714,
( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1711 > Page 778
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1715 - P1719,
( P1716 P1717 P1718 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1715
P1715 - P1719: Testing and Inspection P1715
For diagnosis of code P1715 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1715 - P1719,
( P1716 P1717 P1718 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1715 > Page 783
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1715 - P1719,
( P1716 P1717 P1718 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1715 > Page 784
P1715 - P1719: Testing and Inspection P1718
For diagnosis of code P1718 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1715 - P1719,
( P1716 P1717 P1718 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1715 > Page 785
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1725 - P1729,
( P1726 P1727 P1728 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1725 - P1729: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1729 refer to chart
P1518 - P1781
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1725 - P1729,
( P1726 P1727 P1728 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 789
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1740 - P1744,
( P1741 P1742 P1743 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1742
P1740 - P1744: Testing and Inspection P1742
For diagnosis of code P1742 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1740 - P1744,
( P1741 P1742 P1743 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1742 > Page 794
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1740 - P1744,
( P1741 P1742 P1743 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1742 > Page 795
P1740 - P1744: Testing and Inspection P1744
For diagnosis of code P1744 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1740 - P1744,
( P1741 P1742 P1743 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1742 > Page 796
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1745 - P1749,
( P1746 P1747 P1748 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1746
P1745 - P1749: Testing and Inspection P1746
For diagnosis of code P1746 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1745 - P1749,
( P1746 P1747 P1748 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1746 > Page 801
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1745 - P1749,
( P1746 P1747 P1748 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1746 > Page 802
P1745 - P1749: Testing and Inspection P1747
For diagnosis of code P1747 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1745 - P1749,
( P1746 P1747 P1748 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1746 > Page 803
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1750 - P1754,
( P1751 P1752 P1753 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1750 - P1754: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1751 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1750 - P1754,
( P1751 P1752 P1753 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 807
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1755 - P1759,
( P1756 P1757 P1758 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1755 - P1759: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1756 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1755 - P1759,
( P1756 P1757 P1758 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 811
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1760 - P1764,
( P1761 P1762 P1763 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1760 - P1764: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1760 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1760 - P1764,
( P1761 P1762 P1763 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 815
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784,
( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780
P1780 - P1784: Testing and Inspection P1780
For diagnosis of code P1780 refer to chart
P1518 - P1781
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784,
( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 820
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784,
( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 821
P1780 - P1784: Testing and Inspection P1781
For diagnosis of code P1781 refer to chart
P1518 - P1781
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784,
( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 822
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784,
( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 823
P1780 - P1784: Testing and Inspection P1783
For diagnosis of code P1783 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784,
( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 824
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1785 - P1789,
( P1786 P1787 P1788 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1788
P1785 - P1789: Testing and Inspection P1788
For diagnosis of code P1788 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1785 - P1789,
( P1786 P1787 P1788 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1788 > Page 829
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1785 - P1789,
( P1786 P1787 P1788 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1788 > Page 830
P1785 - P1789: Testing and Inspection P1789
For diagnosis of code P1789 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1785 - P1789,
( P1786 P1787 P1788 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1788 > Page 831
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1900-P19ZZ > P1900 - P1904,
( P1901 P1902 P1903 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1900 - P1904: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1900 refer to charts
P1783 - P1900
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1900-P19ZZ > P1900 - P1904,
( P1901 P1902 P1903 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 836
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory
Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations
Accessory Delay Relay: Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory
Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 843
Diagram 700-01-00-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory
Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory
Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Relay > Page 846
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory
Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay
Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory
Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 849
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory
Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 850
Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory
Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 851
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure
voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the
relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is
12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm
Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Application and ID
Alarm Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control
Modules (General Module).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm
Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 855
Alarm Module: Testing and Inspection
Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Locations > Component
Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Locations > Component
Locations > Page 861
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Connector Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 864
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 865
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 866
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 867
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 868
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 869
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 870
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 871
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 872
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 873
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 874
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 875
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 876
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 877
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 878
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 879
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 880
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 881
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 882
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 883
Diagram 419-10-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Description and Operation >
System Description
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Description and Operation System Description
The multifunction module consists of the Generic Electronic Module (GEM).
The GEM controls the following features:
^ interval rear window wiper
^ battery saver
^ illuminated entry
^ headlamp control
^ interior lamp control
^ power door locks
^ Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
^ accessory delay
^ perimeter anti-theft system
^ door ajar output control
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Description and Operation >
System Description > Page 886
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Description and Operation Principles of Operation (How
Does It Work?)
The Generic Electronic Module (GEM) constantly monitors its subsystems for concerns. If a
concern is found in one of the subsystems, the GEM will record the concern in the form of a
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).
The ignition switch position is very important to the GEM function. Erratic or unexpected GEM
function can often be traced to problems with these GEM inputs.
The GEM controls a variety of systems:
^ interval rear window wiper
^ battery saver
^ illuminated entry
^ headlamp control
^ interior lamp control
^ power door locks
^ Remote Key Less Entry (RKE)
^ accessory delay
^ perimeter anti-theft system
^ door ajar output control
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system in question. 2. Visually inspect for obvious
signs of mechanical and electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Electrical ^
Fuse
^ Wiring harness
^ Connector(s)
^ Circuitry
^ Generic Electronic Module (GEM)
3. If the concern remains after the inspection, connect the diagnostic tool to the Data Link
Connector (DLC) located beneath the instrument panel
and select the vehicle to be tested from the diagnostic tool menu. If the diagnostic tool does not
communicate with the vehicle: ^
check that the program card is correctly installed.
^ check the connections to the vehicle.
^ check the ignition switch position.
4. If the diagnostic tool still does not communicate with the vehicle, refer to the diagnostic tool
manual. 5. Carry out the DATA LINK DIAGNOSTICS test. See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Module Communication
Network/Testing and Inspection/Module Communications Network/Pinpoint Tests/Pinpoint Test PC
(Precheck) If the diagnostic tool responds with: ^
CKT914, CKT915 or CKT70 = ALL ECUS NO RESP/NOT EQUIP, refer to Module
Communications Network (Information Bus).
^ NO RESP/NOT EQUIP for generic electronic module (GEM), go to Pinpoint Test A.
^ SYSTEM PASSED, retrieve and record the continuous Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), erase
the continuous DTCs and carry out self-test diagnostics for the GEM.
6. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the GEM Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Index to continue diagnostics. See: Diagnostic
Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures
7. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, refer to the appropriate Vehicle System to
continue diagnostics.
Additional Testing
For additional information on warning chime concerns, refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and
Warning Indicators.
For additional information on courtesy lamps/illuminated entry and battery saver concerns, refer to
Lighting and Horns.
For additional information on Rear interval timer concerns, refer to Wiper and Washer Systems.
For additional information on keyless entry concerns, refer to Keyless Entry.
For additional information on Power Door Lock concerns, refer to Power Locks.
For additional information on anti-theft concerns, refer to Antitheft and Alarm Systems.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 889
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures
DTC Index B1217 - B1325
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 890
DTC Index B1327 - C1962
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 891
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 892
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Pinpoint Tests
A1 - A2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 893
A2 - A4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 894
A4 - A5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page
895
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
NOTE: Prior to removal of the GEM, it is necessary to upload module configuration information to a
diagnostic tool. This information needs to be downloaded into the new module once installed.
2. Remove the floor console. Refer to Console.
3. Disconnect the GEM electrical connectors.
4. Remove the GEM
1 Pull back the insulation and remove the nuts.
2 Remove the GEM.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Configure the GEM. Refer to Module Communications Network (Information Bus).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page
896
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless
Entry Module > Component Information > Application and ID
Keyless Entry Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control
Modules (General Module).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless
Entry Module > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 900
Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection
Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module >
Component Information > Application and ID
Keyless Entry Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control
Modules (General Module).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module >
Component Information > Application and ID > Page 905
Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection
Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Control
Module > Component Information > Application and ID
Power Door Lock Control Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control
Modules (General Module).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Control
Module > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 909
Power Door Lock Control Module: Testing and Inspection
Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 913
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair
Technical Service Bulletin # 07S51S2 Date: 091009
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 923
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED?
Yes. OASIS was activated April 10, 2007.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED?
Yes. Available through the website. Owner names and addresses were made available April 30,
2007.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 924
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles have been directed to dealers for repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter and schedule a
service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
RELATED DAMAGE
If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the
Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company
reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not
had this recall performed on a timely basis.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service
Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval
after completion of the repair will not be granted.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair
was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this
bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC).
The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option,
directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251 Dearborn, MI 48121-6251.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund
claims that include other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be
accepted for reimbursement.
^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair.
Claiming a refund will not close the recall on the vehicle.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 07S51 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
RENTAL VEHICLES
If an ABS module needs to be ordered, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except
for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP)
guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle
was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Handling Allowance: An allowance of $1.00 per repair is being provided to cover the costs of
locally obtained materials and XG-12 Electrical Grease. To claim the allowance, enter $1.00 as
"HANDLG" in the "MISC EXPENSE" area of the claim form.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 925
^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line
on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires approval from Special Service Support
Center.
^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked.
"MT" labor requires approval from Special Service Support Center.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 926
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program Order your parts requirements through normal
order processing channels.
The DOR/COR number for this safety recall is 50376.
Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Support Center or E-mailed.
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to DOES II.
PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN
Affected ABS Modules (Part number YL8Z-2C065-AA and YL8Z-2B373-BA) and the removed ABS
connector are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center
(WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition
and return instructions.
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures".
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
This program includes making sure the wiring harness connector is properly sealed against
moisture/contamination, and inspecting the ABS module for evidence of corrosion resulting from an
inadequately sealed connector.
During the inspection, we expect that most of the affected vehicles will not have any evidence of
corrosion in the ABS module. However, the ABS wiring harness connector still needs to be
inspected for missing or improperly seated seals and/or incorrect connector number.
If the ABS module is corroded, the ABS module and connector must be replaced.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 927
A flow chart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1.
Inspect Connector Seals
INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
2. NOTE: When disconnecting the ABS module connector, be sure the blue connector lock stays
engaged with the harness connector and does not
remain in the module. Remove it from the module if necessary and make sure the white 0-ring seal
is properly installed.
Disconnect the ABS module 25-pin connector by sliding the lock mechanism out (towards the
passenger side of the vehicle) and pulling the connector off the module.
3. Disconnect the speed sensor harness, then remove the 2 harness retainers from the studs and
position the harness above the air cleaner assembly to
provide access for inspection.
4. Inspect the top of the ABS module connector cover for 2 yellow "X" marks.
^ If 2 yellow "X" marks are present, perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
^ If no yellow "X" marks are present, proceed to Step 5.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 928
5. Inspect the ABS module connector pins for corrosion. See Figure 2.
^ If corrosion is present, perform Labor Operation E - Install Pigtail, New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
^ If corrosion is not present, proceed to Step 6.
6. CAUTION: Do not cut any of the harness wires or the wire insulation when cutting off the tie
strap.
Remove the tie strap from the connector dress cover, then slide the cover off the connector. See
Figure 3.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 929
7. Verify the wire seals are present on the 4 heavier gauge wires. See Figure 4.
8. Verify the numbers 054" are stamped on the slide-lock end of the mat cover (wipe the mat cover
clean if necessary to view). See Figure 5.
NOTE:
Mat covers with any other number will be missing plugs in the unused pin locations.
9. Perform Labor Operation C - Install Pigtail and Apply Electrical Grease if:
^ any seals are missing or,
^ if the number on the mat cover is not "054".
10. Perform Labor Operation D - Seat Connector and Apply Electrical Grease if:
^ Any of the 4 wire seals are not fully seated in the connector cavities.
^ Each seal should sit approximately 1-2 mm (1/16 in) below the top of the round cavity. See Figure
4.
11. Perform Labor Operation A - Apply Electrical Grease if:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 930
^ The module is not corroded. and
^ All seals are present. and
^ All seals are fully seated. and
^ The number on the mat cover is "054".
LABOR OPERATION A - APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
1. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 6.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 6. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess
amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a "hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
2. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
3. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
LABOR OPERATION C - INSTALL PIGTAIL AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION
When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless
heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 931
USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 7.
1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module
connector. See Figure 8.
2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module
connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness
(all wires) to the same length. See Figure 8.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 932
3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/2 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See
Figure 9.
CAUTION:
The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT
cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire
on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag.
Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to
have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different
except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing
circuits when splicing wires.
NOTE:
The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these
wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation.
NOTE:
The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original
vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 933
4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness.
Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice
connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903.
See Figure 10.
5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice
connector.
6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the
flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit,
shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all
wires are insulated. See Figure 11.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 934
7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply
tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure
to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on
the other. See Figure 12.
8. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 13.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 935
connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 13. DO NOT
spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector
cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or
locked in place.
9. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
10. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
11. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by
illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3
seconds).
^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle.
^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special
Support Service Center.
LABOR OPERATION D - SEAT CONNECTOR SEALS AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
1. If the seals are not fully seated, reseat any seals not fully seated with a blunt tool. DO NOT use
anything sharp such as a screwdriver, awl or punch that could penetrate the seal and allow
moisture to enter the terminal. See Figure 14.
2. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 936
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 15.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 15. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an
excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
3. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
4. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
LABOR OPERATION E - INSTALL PIGTAIL, NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL
GREASE
IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION
When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless
heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 937
USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 16.
PROCEDURE TO REPLACE VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module
connector. See Figure 17.
2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module
connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness
(all wires) to the same length. See Figure 17.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 938
3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See
Figure 18.
CAUTION:
The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT
cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire
on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag.
Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to
have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different
except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing
circuits when splicing wires.
NOTE:
The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these
wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation.
NOTE:
The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original
vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 939
4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness.
Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice
connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903.
See Figure 19.
5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice
connector.
6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the
flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit,
shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all
wires are insulated. See Figure 20.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 940
7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply
tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure
to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on
the other. See Figure 21.
8. Install a new ABS module. Perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
9. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
10. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by
illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the
instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds).
^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle.
^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special
Support Service Center.
LABOR OPERATION F - INSTALL NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
NOTE:
Module configuration or reprogramming is not required when installing a new ABS module.
1. Disconnect the 2-wire electrical connector at the ABS module.
2. Raise the vehicle on a hoist.
3. Remove the screws and the ABS module.
4. Position the new module and install the screws. Tighten the screws no more than 2 Nm (18
lb-in).
5. Lower the hoist.
6. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect
the harness as follows:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 941
^ Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 22.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 22. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an
excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
7. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
8. Reconnect the 2-wire connector to the ABS module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 942
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 943
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 944
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 945
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 946
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 947
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
NHTSA07V156000 > Mar > 07 > Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect
Electronic Brake Control Module: Recalls Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2004 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor
Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V156000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: March 30, 2007
COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Antilock: Control Unit/Module
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 446460
SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with Antilock Brakes (ABS), the ABS module
connector may have missing or dislodged wire seals. This condition could allow contamination to
enter the module connector, creating a potential for an electrical short.
CONSEQUENCE: An electrical short might cause an ABS malfunction that would illuminate the
ABS warning light, and in some cases, the module may overheat resulting in burning odor, smoke,
and/or fire. This condition could occur either when the vehicle ignition switch is in the off position or
while the vehicle is being operated.
Remedy: Dealers will inspect the wire harness connector to the ABS module for missing or
dislodged wire seals, and repair or replace the harness connector as appropriate. The dealer will
also inspect the connector on the ABS module and replace it if it is found to be corroded or
damaged. The recall began on April 23, 2007. Owners may contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673.
NOTES: Ford recall No. 07S51. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to
http://www.safercar.gov.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair
Technical Service Bulletin # 07S51S2 Date: 091009
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 957
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED?
Yes. OASIS was activated April 10, 2007.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED?
Yes. Available through the website. Owner names and addresses were made available April 30,
2007.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 958
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles have been directed to dealers for repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter and schedule a
service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
RELATED DAMAGE
If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the
Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company
reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not
had this recall performed on a timely basis.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service
Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval
after completion of the repair will not be granted.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair
was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this
bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC).
The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option,
directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251 Dearborn, MI 48121-6251.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund
claims that include other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be
accepted for reimbursement.
^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair.
Claiming a refund will not close the recall on the vehicle.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 07S51 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
RENTAL VEHICLES
If an ABS module needs to be ordered, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except
for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP)
guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle
was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Handling Allowance: An allowance of $1.00 per repair is being provided to cover the costs of
locally obtained materials and XG-12 Electrical Grease. To claim the allowance, enter $1.00 as
"HANDLG" in the "MISC EXPENSE" area of the claim form.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 959
^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line
on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires approval from Special Service Support
Center.
^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked.
"MT" labor requires approval from Special Service Support Center.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 960
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program Order your parts requirements through normal
order processing channels.
The DOR/COR number for this safety recall is 50376.
Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Support Center or E-mailed.
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to DOES II.
PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN
Affected ABS Modules (Part number YL8Z-2C065-AA and YL8Z-2B373-BA) and the removed ABS
connector are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center
(WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition
and return instructions.
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures".
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
This program includes making sure the wiring harness connector is properly sealed against
moisture/contamination, and inspecting the ABS module for evidence of corrosion resulting from an
inadequately sealed connector.
During the inspection, we expect that most of the affected vehicles will not have any evidence of
corrosion in the ABS module. However, the ABS wiring harness connector still needs to be
inspected for missing or improperly seated seals and/or incorrect connector number.
If the ABS module is corroded, the ABS module and connector must be replaced.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 961
A flow chart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1.
Inspect Connector Seals
INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
2. NOTE: When disconnecting the ABS module connector, be sure the blue connector lock stays
engaged with the harness connector and does not
remain in the module. Remove it from the module if necessary and make sure the white 0-ring seal
is properly installed.
Disconnect the ABS module 25-pin connector by sliding the lock mechanism out (towards the
passenger side of the vehicle) and pulling the connector off the module.
3. Disconnect the speed sensor harness, then remove the 2 harness retainers from the studs and
position the harness above the air cleaner assembly to
provide access for inspection.
4. Inspect the top of the ABS module connector cover for 2 yellow "X" marks.
^ If 2 yellow "X" marks are present, perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
^ If no yellow "X" marks are present, proceed to Step 5.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 962
5. Inspect the ABS module connector pins for corrosion. See Figure 2.
^ If corrosion is present, perform Labor Operation E - Install Pigtail, New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
^ If corrosion is not present, proceed to Step 6.
6. CAUTION: Do not cut any of the harness wires or the wire insulation when cutting off the tie
strap.
Remove the tie strap from the connector dress cover, then slide the cover off the connector. See
Figure 3.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 963
7. Verify the wire seals are present on the 4 heavier gauge wires. See Figure 4.
8. Verify the numbers 054" are stamped on the slide-lock end of the mat cover (wipe the mat cover
clean if necessary to view). See Figure 5.
NOTE:
Mat covers with any other number will be missing plugs in the unused pin locations.
9. Perform Labor Operation C - Install Pigtail and Apply Electrical Grease if:
^ any seals are missing or,
^ if the number on the mat cover is not "054".
10. Perform Labor Operation D - Seat Connector and Apply Electrical Grease if:
^ Any of the 4 wire seals are not fully seated in the connector cavities.
^ Each seal should sit approximately 1-2 mm (1/16 in) below the top of the round cavity. See Figure
4.
11. Perform Labor Operation A - Apply Electrical Grease if:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 964
^ The module is not corroded. and
^ All seals are present. and
^ All seals are fully seated. and
^ The number on the mat cover is "054".
LABOR OPERATION A - APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
1. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 6.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 6. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess
amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a "hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
2. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
3. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
LABOR OPERATION C - INSTALL PIGTAIL AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION
When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless
heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 965
USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 7.
1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module
connector. See Figure 8.
2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module
connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness
(all wires) to the same length. See Figure 8.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 966
3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/2 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See
Figure 9.
CAUTION:
The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT
cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire
on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag.
Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to
have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different
except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing
circuits when splicing wires.
NOTE:
The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these
wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation.
NOTE:
The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original
vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 967
4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness.
Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice
connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903.
See Figure 10.
5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice
connector.
6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the
flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit,
shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all
wires are insulated. See Figure 11.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 968
7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply
tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure
to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on
the other. See Figure 12.
8. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 13.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 969
connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 13. DO NOT
spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector
cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or
locked in place.
9. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
10. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
11. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by
illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3
seconds).
^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle.
^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special
Support Service Center.
LABOR OPERATION D - SEAT CONNECTOR SEALS AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
1. If the seals are not fully seated, reseat any seals not fully seated with a blunt tool. DO NOT use
anything sharp such as a screwdriver, awl or punch that could penetrate the seal and allow
moisture to enter the terminal. See Figure 14.
2. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 970
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 15.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 15. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an
excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
3. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
4. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
LABOR OPERATION E - INSTALL PIGTAIL, NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL
GREASE
IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION
When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless
heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 971
USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 16.
PROCEDURE TO REPLACE VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module
connector. See Figure 17.
2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module
connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness
(all wires) to the same length. See Figure 17.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 972
3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See
Figure 18.
CAUTION:
The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT
cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire
on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag.
Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to
have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different
except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing
circuits when splicing wires.
NOTE:
The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these
wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation.
NOTE:
The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original
vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 973
4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness.
Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice
connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903.
See Figure 19.
5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice
connector.
6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the
flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit,
shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all
wires are insulated. See Figure 20.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 974
7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply
tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure
to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on
the other. See Figure 21.
8. Install a new ABS module. Perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
9. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
10. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by
illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the
instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds).
^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle.
^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special
Support Service Center.
LABOR OPERATION F - INSTALL NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
NOTE:
Module configuration or reprogramming is not required when installing a new ABS module.
1. Disconnect the 2-wire electrical connector at the ABS module.
2. Raise the vehicle on a hoist.
3. Remove the screws and the ABS module.
4. Position the new module and install the screws. Tighten the screws no more than 2 Nm (18
lb-in).
5. Lower the hoist.
6. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect
the harness as follows:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 975
^ Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 22.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 22. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an
excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
7. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
8. Reconnect the 2-wire connector to the ABS module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 976
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 977
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 978
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 979
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 980
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 981
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > NHTSA07V156000 > Mar > 07 > Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect
Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 07V156000: ABS Module
Connector Defect
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2004 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor
Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V156000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: March 30, 2007
COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Antilock: Control Unit/Module
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 446460
SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with Antilock Brakes (ABS), the ABS module
connector may have missing or dislodged wire seals. This condition could allow contamination to
enter the module connector, creating a potential for an electrical short.
CONSEQUENCE: An electrical short might cause an ABS malfunction that would illuminate the
ABS warning light, and in some cases, the module may overheat resulting in burning odor, smoke,
and/or fire. This condition could occur either when the vehicle ignition switch is in the off position or
while the vehicle is being operated.
Remedy: Dealers will inspect the wire harness connector to the ABS module for missing or
dislodged wire seals, and repair or replace the harness connector as appropriate. The dealer will
also inspect the connector on the ABS module and replace it if it is found to be corroded or
damaged. The recall began on April 23, 2007. Owners may contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673.
NOTES: Ford recall No. 07S51. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to
http://www.safercar.gov.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 986
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 987
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 988
Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation
Anti-Lock Brake Control Module
NOTE: The 4x2 service replacement module cannot be interchanged with the 4x4 module. The
service replacement 4x4 module is interchangeable with the 4x2 module.
The anti-lock brake control module is mounted to the HCU. It is an on-board diagnostic,
non-repairable unit consisting of two microprocessors and the necessary circuitry for their
operation. The anti-lock brake control module monitors system operation during normal driving as
well as during anti-lock braking. Anti-lock brake module operation is as follows: ^
Under normal driving conditions, the microprocessor produces short test pulses to the solenoid
valves that check the electrical system without any mechanical reaction.
^ Impending wheel lock conditions trigger signals from the anti-lock brake control module that open
and close the appropriate solenoid valves. This results in moderate pulsations in the brake pedal.
^ The anti-lock brake module used in 4x4 application includes a G-sensor. It detects vehicle
movement during a brake lockup event that is transferred to other wheels through the powertrain.
During normal braking, the brake pedal feel is identical to a standard brake system. Most faults that
occur in the anti-lock brake system will be stored as a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) in the
keep-alive memory of the anti-lock brake control module. The DTCs can be retrieved by following
the or-board diagnostic procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 989
Electronic Brake Control Module: Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is part of,
please refer to Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems; Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 990
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair
Module-Anti-Lock Brake Control
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the air cleaner and the air cleaner outlet pipe.
3. Disconnect the electrical connectors.
4. Remove the bolts.
5. Remove the bolt. 6. Raise and support the vehicle.
7. Remove the screws and the control module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 991
8. NOTE: The 4x2 module cannot be interchanged with the 4x4 module. The 4x4 module is
interchangeable with the 4x2 module.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan Low Relay
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan Low Relay > Page 997
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan Low Relay > Page 998
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan Low Relay > Page 999
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1002
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1003
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1004
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagrams Medium Speed Fan Control Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1005
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1006
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Blower Motor Relay: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1011
Electrical Components
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1012
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1013
Blower Motor Relay: Description and Operation
The blower motor relay supplies voltage to the blower motor and is activated when the key is ON
and the function selector switch is in any position besides OFF. The blower motor relay is located
under the instrument panel next to the steering column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1014
Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1015
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1019
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Compressor Clutch Relay
Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Compressor Clutch Relay
The A/C compressor clutch relay supplies voltage to the A/C compressor clutch and is located in
the Battery Junction Box (BJB). The Power Control Module (PCM) can interrupt the A/C
compressor operation through the A/C compressor clutch relay under the following conditions:
^ during engine start-up
^ Wide Open Throttle (WOT)
^ low engine idle conditions
^ excessively high engine temperatures
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Compressor Clutch Relay > Page 1022
Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Compressor Cut-Off Relay
WIDE OPEN THROTTLE A/C CUT-OFF
The Wide Open Throttle A/C Cut-Off Relay (may be referred to as the A/C clutch relay) is normally
open. There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch or EATC Module and the A/C
clutch. The PCM will receive a signal indicating that A/C is requested (for some applications, this
message is sent through the BUS + and BUS - circuits). When A/C is requested, the PCM will
check other A/C related inputs that are available (such as ACP (SW), A/C Cycling Switch (ACCS)).
If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK (such as coolant
temperature, engine rpm, throttle position), the PCM will ground the Wide Open Throttle A/C
(WAC) output, closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/C clutch.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 1023
Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 1024
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure
voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the
relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is
12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Battery Discharge Protection
Relay, Lighting > Component Information > Application and ID
Battery Discharge Protection Relay: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control
Modules (General Module).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Control Unit > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 1032
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 1033
Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the nut and the DRL module.
^ Disconnect the electrical connectors.
^ Transfer parts as necessary.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1037
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1038
Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1039
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Exterior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Application and ID
Exterior Lighting Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control
Modules (General Module).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Exterior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Application and ID > Page 1043
Exterior Lighting Module: Testing and Inspection
Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1047
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1048
Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1049
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure
voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the
relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is
12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1053
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1054
Headlamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1055
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure
voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the
relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is
12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1059
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1060
Horn Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1061
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure
voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the
relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is
12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Application and ID
Interior Lighting Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control
Modules (General Module).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Application and ID > Page 1065
Interior Lighting Module: Testing and Inspection
Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Lamp Control Module >
Component Information > Application and ID
Lamp Control Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control
Modules (General Module).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1072
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1073
Parking Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1074
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure
voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the
relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is
12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1079
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure
voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the
relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is
12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1083
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 1088
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 1089
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 1090
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 1091
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 1092
Relay Box: Locations Central Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 1093
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 1094
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 1095
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 1096
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box
Relay Box: Diagrams Central Junction Box
Diagram 700-01-00-3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 1099
Diagram 700-01-00-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 1100
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 1103
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 1104
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 1105
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 1106
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 1107
Relay Box: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 1108
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 1109
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 1110
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 1111
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-5-5 > Mar > 01 > PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures
Powertrain Control Module: Customer Interest PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures
Article No. 01-5-5
March 19, 2001
ELECTRICAL - CHARGING SYSTEM WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED - DURING
COLD AMBIENT TEMPERATURES BELOW - 6 DEGREES CELSIUS (20 DEGREES F.) VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH 2.0L ZETEC ENGINE BUILT 7/8/2000 THROUGH 2/12/2001 ONLY
FORD: 2001 ESCAPE
ISSUE
Some vehicles may exhibit a red charge lamp illumination in cold ambient temperatures below-6°C
(20°F). This may be caused by the calibration of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
ACTION
Verify red charge lamp illumination. If normal diagnostics cannot resolve condition, reprogram the
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with latest calibration. Refer to the PCM Calibration Information
Chart shown for details.
Obtain an Authorized Modifications Decal (FPS 8262 - obtainable through DOES II, 25/pkg) and list
the date, dealer number, and summary of modifications performed. Select a prominent place
adjacent to the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal suitable for installing the Authorized
Modifications Decal. Clean the area, install the decal, and cover it with a clear plastic decal shield.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 203000, 203100, 204000, 204200, 206000, 290000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine
Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures
Powertrain Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM
Programming Procedures
TSB 04-24-14
12/13/04
FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria,
Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five
Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer,
F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS
1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis,
Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB
applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement.
ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle
concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed.
ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs.
Verify repair after reprogramming.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM
Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle.
2. Use WDS if available.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine
Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 1127
a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply.
b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level.
3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool,
such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS.
NOTE
IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS,
GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF.
PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD
1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able
to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
2. Install the new PCM.
NOTE
IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING
INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER.
3. Attempt to start the vehicle.
4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM.
5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639.
a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure
must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1.
b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly
set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc.
6. Check for DTC B2900.
a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this
procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during
this procedure.
b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7.
7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures.
REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM
Replacement
1. Verify all cables are properly connected.
2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level.
3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level.
4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again.
5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open
previous session, and attempt reprogramming again.
6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM,
proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not
communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure.
1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits.
2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity.
NOTE
IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT
TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine
Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 1128
INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC.
3. Connect WDS to vehicle.
4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK.
9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN
from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK.
10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above".
11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK.
12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens.
14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be
reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 01-5-5 > Mar > 01 > PCM Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures
Powertrain Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold
Temperatures
Article No. 01-5-5
March 19, 2001
ELECTRICAL - CHARGING SYSTEM WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED - DURING
COLD AMBIENT TEMPERATURES BELOW - 6 DEGREES CELSIUS (20 DEGREES F.) VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH 2.0L ZETEC ENGINE BUILT 7/8/2000 THROUGH 2/12/2001 ONLY
FORD: 2001 ESCAPE
ISSUE
Some vehicles may exhibit a red charge lamp illumination in cold ambient temperatures below-6°C
(20°F). This may be caused by the calibration of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
ACTION
Verify red charge lamp illumination. If normal diagnostics cannot resolve condition, reprogram the
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with latest calibration. Refer to the PCM Calibration Information
Chart shown for details.
Obtain an Authorized Modifications Decal (FPS 8262 - obtainable through DOES II, 25/pkg) and list
the date, dealer number, and summary of modifications performed. Select a prominent place
adjacent to the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal suitable for installing the Authorized
Modifications Decal. Clean the area, install the decal, and cover it with a clear plastic decal shield.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 203000, 203100, 204000, 204200, 206000, 290000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine
Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures
Powertrain Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM
Programming Procedures
TSB 04-24-14
12/13/04
FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria,
Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five
Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer,
F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS
1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis,
Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB
applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement.
ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle
concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed.
ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs.
Verify repair after reprogramming.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM
Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle.
2. Use WDS if available.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine
Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 1138
a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply.
b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level.
3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool,
such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS.
NOTE
IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS,
GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF.
PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD
1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able
to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
2. Install the new PCM.
NOTE
IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING
INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER.
3. Attempt to start the vehicle.
4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM.
5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639.
a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure
must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1.
b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly
set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc.
6. Check for DTC B2900.
a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this
procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during
this procedure.
b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7.
7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures.
REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM
Replacement
1. Verify all cables are properly connected.
2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level.
3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level.
4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again.
5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open
previous session, and attempt reprogramming again.
6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM,
proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not
communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure.
1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits.
2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity.
NOTE
IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT
TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine
Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 1139
INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC.
3. Connect WDS to vehicle.
4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK.
9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN
from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK.
10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above".
11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK.
12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens.
14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be
reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1140
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1141
Powertrain Control Module: Diagrams
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1142
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1143
Part 3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1144
Powertrain Control Module: Description and Operation
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE - VEHICLE SPEED OUTPUT (VSO)
The PCM-VSO (Powertrain Control Module - Vehicle Speed Output) speed signal subsystem
generates vehicle speed information for distribution to the vehicle's electrical/electronic modules
and subsystems that require vehicle speed data. This subsystem senses the transmission output
shaft speed with a sensor. The data is processed by the PCM, and distributed as a hard-wired
signal or as a multiplexed data message.
The key features of the PCM-VSO system are to:
^ Infer vehicle movement from the output shaft sensor signal
^ Convert transmission output shaft rotational information to vehicle speed information
^ Compensate for tire size and axle ratio with a programmed calibration variable
^ Utilize a transfer case sensor for four wheel drive applications
^ Distribute vehicle speed information as a multiplexed message and/or an analog signal
The signal from a non-contact shaft sensor (Output Shaft Sensor--OSS or Transfer Case Shaft
Sensor--TCSS) mounted on the transmission (automatics, manuals, or 4X4 transfer cases) is
sensed directly by the PCM. The PCM converts the OSS or TCSS information to 8000 pulses per
mile, based on a tire and axle ratio conversion factor. This conversion factor is programmed into
the PCM at the time the vehicle is assembled and can be reprogrammed in the field for servicing
changes in the tire size and axle ratio. The PCM transmits the computed vehicle speed and
distance traveled information to all the vehicle speed signal users on the vehicle. VSO information
can be transmitted by a hard-wired interface between the vehicle speed signal user and the PCM,
or by Speed and Odometer SCP multiplexed data messages.
The VSO hard-wired signal wave form is a DC square wave with a voltage level of 0 to VBAT.
Typical output operating range is 2.22Hz per MPH (1.3808 Hz pr 1 Km/h). Multiplexed data for
speed and distance data are transmitted as separate SCP messages over the SCP multiplex link.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory
Powertrain Control Module: Service and Repair Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read
Only Memory
Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory - Flash EEPROM
Description
Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) is contained in an
Integrated Circuit (IC) internal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the
vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle and is capable of being
reprogrammed or reflashed repeatedly.
As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the Vehicle Identification (VID) block. The
VID block must be programmed when replacing the PCM as under Programming the VID Block for
a Replacement PCM. Failure to perform this procedure may generate fault code: P1639, VID Block
not programmed or is corrupt. The VID block in an existing Powertrain Control Module (PCM). can
also be tailored to accommodate various hardware changes made to the vehicle since production.
Failure to perform this procedure properly may generate fault code: P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of
Acceptable Range. This is described under Making Changes to the VID Block and also under
Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy
for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the VIN number, octane adjust, fuel octane,
fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the presence of speed control and four wheel
drive electronic shift on the fly versus manual shift on the fly. Only items applicable to vehicle
hardware and supported by the VID block will be displayed on the scan tool.
When changing items in the VID block, the strategy will place range limits on certain items such as
tire and axle ratio. The VID block is also limited to the number of times to be reconfigured. When
this limit is reached, the scan tool will display a message indicating the need to flash the PCM
again to reset the VID block.
Each of the procedures described below use the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS).
Reprogramming can be performed by a local Ford dealer for any non Ford facility. There are other
Enhanced Scan Tools that may have reprogramming capabilities available. Refer to the diagnostic
tool manufacturers users manual for details.
Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM
A new PCM will contain the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However,
the VID block will be blank and will need programming. There are two procedures available. The
first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM and the second is manual data
entry into the new PCM.
Automatic data transfer will be performed if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done
by the use of a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The
stored data can now be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been replaced.
Manual data entry must be performed if the old module is damaged and is incapable of
communicating. Remove and replace the old PCM. You may be instructed to contact the "AS
BUILT" data center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool.
Contact the center ONLY if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford L-M
technician's, contact your National Hotline for "AS Built" data. Non Ford technicians, use the Fed
World website at "fedworld.gov". Select Auto Service Information and search for "Calibrations" or
"Vehicle Calibrations" then specify vehicle manufacturer, model name and model year as required.
Making Changes to the VID Block
A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to
accommodate vehicle hardware. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool.
Making Changes to the PCM Calibration
At certain times, the entire EEPROM will need to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to
changes made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block
because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory > Page 1147
Powertrain Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) cover.
1 Loosen the bolt and disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the nuts and the cover.
3. Remove the PCM.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module Power Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] >
Component Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module Power Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1151
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Emission Control Systems > Air Injection Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation
Air Injection Pump Relay: Description and Operation
SOLID STATE RELAY
Solid State Relay
The solid state relay (Figure 124) switches the high current required for operation of the electric
AIR pump. Input control to the solid state relay comes from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1160
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1161
Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1162
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Powertrain Control Module Power Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] >
Component Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Powertrain Control Module Power Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1166
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1171
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1172
Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1173
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Specifications
Air Bag Control Module: Specifications
Restraint Control Module Bolts 12 Nm
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1178
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1179
Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1180
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Air Bag Control Module: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE
CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET
FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE
AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM
MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING
BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 1183
Air Bag Control Module: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 1184
Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) carries out the following functions:
^ signals the inflators to deploy the air bags in the event of a deployable crash
^ monitors the air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) for faults
^ illuminates the air bag indicator if a fault is detected
^ flashes the air bag indicator to indicate the Lamp Fault Code (LFC) detected
^ communicates through the Data Link Connector (DLC) the current or historical Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs)
^ signals the instrument cluster to activate a chime if the air bag indicator is not available and
another SRS fault exists
NOTE: The safing Sensor is internal to the RCM and is not serviced separately.
The RCM monitors the SRS for possible faults. If a fault is detected while the ignition switch is in
the RUN position, the RCM will flash the air bag indicator located in the instrument cluster.
When the ignition is cycled (turned off and then on), the air bag indicator will prove out by lighting
for six seconds and then off for two seconds. After the prove out, the air bag indicator will then flash
the two-digit LFC for any current SRS fault. If an SRS fault exists, the air bag indicator will flash the
LFC five times, and then remain illuminated for the rest of the key cycle. The RCM will also
communicate the current and historical DTCs through the DLC, to the scan tool. If the air bag
indicator does not function, and the system detects a fault condition, the RCM will signal the
instrument cluster to activate an audible chime. The chime is a series of five sets of five tone
bursts. If the chime is heard, the SRS and the air bag indicator require repair.
LFCs are prioritized. If two or more faults occur at the same time, the fault having the highest
priority will be displayed. After that fault has been corrected, the next highest priority fault will be
displayed.
The RCM includes a backup power supply. This feature provides sufficient backup power to deploy
the air bags in the event that the ignition circuit is damaged in a collision before the safing and air
bag sensors determine that a deployment is required. The backup power supply will deplete its
stored energy approximately one minute after the battery ground cable is disconnected.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 1185
Air Bag Control Module: Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Air Bag Systems; Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Vehicles With Side Air Bags
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE
CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET
FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE
AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM
MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition,
install the original part and perform the diagnostic
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1188
procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
2. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1189
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
5. Open the glove box past its stops.
6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the instrument panel, disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
8. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1190
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
12. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1191
13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
14. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system diagnostic tools
installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 19. Position the carpet back
at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel.
20. Remove the right-hand side restraint control module (RCM) retaining bolts. 21. Position the
carpet back at the left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1192
22. Remove the RCM.
1 Slide and disengage the two RCM electrical connector locking clips.
2 Push down to pivot the RCM electrical connector tabs and pull out to disconnect.
3 Remove the retaining bolt.
4 Remove the RCM.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE
CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET
FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE
AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM
MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition,
install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Position the RCM to the center tunnel area and install the three bolts hand-tight.
WARNING: ^
THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING
BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1193
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
2. Tighten the right-hand side RCM bolts.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
3. Reposition the carpet back at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument
panel.
4. Connect the RCM.
1 Tighten the bolt.
2 Connect the RCM electrical connectors.
3 Slide and engage the RCM electrical connector locking clips.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
5. Reposition the carpet back at the left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument
panel. 6. Connect the battery ground cable. 7. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still
installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
8. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1194
9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
10. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
the bracket under the seat.
11. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
12. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag
module electrical connector onto the bracket under the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1195
seat.
13. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
14. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
onto the bracket under the seat.
15. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1196
16. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air
bag module electrical connector onto the bracket
under the seat.
17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
18. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 19. Close the glove box.
20. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1197
VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
21. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
22. Install the steering wheel access cover. 23. Connect the battery ground cable. 24. With all the
restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard /
Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Vehicles Without Side Air Bags
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1198
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE
CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET
FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE
AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM
MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition,
install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1199
2. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
5. Open the glove box past its stops.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1200
6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the instrument panel, disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
8. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1201
10. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector. 12. Connect the battery ground cable. 13. With the restraint system diagnostic
tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and
Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
14. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 15. Position the carpet back
at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel.
16. Remove the right-hand side restraint control module (RCM) retaining bolts. 17. Position the
carpet back at the left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel.
18. Remove the RCM.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1202
1 Slide and disengage the two RCM electrical connector locking clips.
2 Push down to pivot the RCM electrical connector tabs and pull out to disconnect.
3 Remove the retaining bolt.
4 Remove the RCM.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE
CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET
FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE
AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM
MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition,
install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Position the RCM to the center tunnel area and install the three bolts hand-tight.
WARNING: ^
THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING
BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1203
2. Tighten the right-hand side RCM bolts.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
3. Reposition the carpet back at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument
panel.
4. Connect the RCM.
1 Tighten the bolt.
2 Connect the RCM electrical connectors.
3 Slide and engage the RCM electrical connector locking clips.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
5. Reposition the carpet back at the left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument
panel. 6. Connect the battery ground cable. 7. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still
installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
8. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1204
10. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
the bracket under the seat.
11. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
12. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
onto the bracket under the seat.
13. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1205
VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND
POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
14. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 15. Close the glove box.
16. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
17. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
18. Install the steering wheel access cover. 19. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1206
20. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Body
and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard /
Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1207
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Weld Nut Repair
"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE:
^ There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedures and Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control
Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
^ If two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts in this procedure. Weld nuts must
be installed in Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side
Impact Sensor.
^ The following procedure applies to vehicles that have a rectangular hole in the sheet metal that is
in close proximity to the missing weld nut.
1. Obtain a "J" nut (part number N623332-S301) or any of the following optional "J" nuts (part
numbers: N623342-S101, N800854-S100,
N800925-S100).
2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190) or equivalent. 3. Install
the "J" nut through the rectangular hole in the sheet metal. 4. Install the crash sensor.
NOTE: Be sure the threaded portion of the "J" nut is aligned with the clearance hole in the sheet
metal.
5. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE:
^ There are two procedures to repairs a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedure and Weld Nut Repair-"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM)
and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
^ Use only this procedure if two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts in Weld
Nut Repair-"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Crash Sensor.
^ Radiator support repair shown, others are similar.
1. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) weld nut (part number N806285-S190). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in)
grounding screw (part number N806327-S190).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1208
3. Route a sufficient length of copper welding wire through the weld nut clearance hole and back
out an adjacent access hole.
4. Feed the copper welding wire through the weld nut, then through a standard flat washer. 5.
Secure the flat washer so that it cannot be pulled off the end of the copper welding wire. 6. Pull the
copper welding wire back through the clearance hole, allowing the weld nut and flat washer to
follow the copper welding wire through. 7. Position the weld nut to the weld nut clearance hole,
firmly pulling on the copper welding wire allowing the secured flat washer to hold the weld
nut in position.
8. Holding the weld nut securely in place and using a MIG welder, weld in four places around the
edge of the weld nut. 9. Metal finish as required.
10. Verify the nut is securely in place. 11. Install the crash sensor. 12. Tighten the attaching screws
to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Stripped Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
1. Obtain an 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw (part number N802455-S190). 2. Drill out the internal
threads of the stripped-out weld nut to 7.37 mm (0.29 in) using a letter "L" size drill bit. 3. Position
the crash sensor to the vehicle. 4. Install the 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw into the drilled-out
weld nut. 5. Install the remaining attaching screws. 6. Tighten the attaching screws to specification.
Refer to Torque Specifications.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1209
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1214
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1220
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1221
Shift Interlock Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1222
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Relay > Component Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1227
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1228
Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1229
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 >
Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 00S49 Date: 001101
Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
00S49
SAFETY RECALL
Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Windshield Wiper Module Inspection and Possible
Replacement
November 2000
Advance Announcement
Dealer Letter
Attachment I ^
Administrative Information
Attachment II ^
Labor Allowances
^ Parts Ordering Information
Attachment III ^
Technical Information
Owner Letter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 >
Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1239
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 >
Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1240
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 >
Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1241
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS
You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this recall.
PLEASE NOTE
Correct all vehicles in stock before delivery.
PROMPTLY CORRECT
Promptly correct all affected vehicles on your dealer VIN list which you will receive in the Ford
Dealer Consolidated Communicator (FDCC). Also, correct other eligible vehicles which are brought
to your dealership.
DEALER-OWNER CONTACT
If you have recently sold a vehicle, please contact that owner immediately and provide them a copy
of the owner letter and schedule a service date.
REGIONAL CONTACT
Advise regional office if an owner:
^ cannot be contacted.
^ does not make a service date.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using DWE.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
OWNER REFUNDS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 >
Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1242
Ford Motor Company will refund owner-paid wiper module repairs made before the date of the
Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the
servicing dealer). Refer to ACESII manual for refund information.
RENTAL CARS
For vehicles which fail the inspection, and if parts are not available, Ford Motor Company will pay
for a rental vehicle, except for fuel which will be at the owner's expense. Enter the word "RENTAL"
plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall
claim. Follow ESP cost guidelines.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
CRITICAL PARTS SUPPLY NOTE - PLEASE READ CAREFULLY
Parts will be in limited supply for several weeks. Therefore, parts will be prioritized for vehicles
which Ford records show as sold as of November 16, 2000.
Dealers are to report the results of inspections on all affected units that fail the inspection (for the
first 30 days) by calling the Recall Hotline at 1-800-325-5621 with the following required
information:
-- VIN number
-- Results of (4) ball stud inspections
-- Results of (4) plastic ball socket inspections
-- Dealer P&A; Code
Based on the inspection results reported. dealers will be advised if the vehicle can be released or if
it must be held for repair. Please note that FCS-700 tags will be issued and all replaced parts must
be returned to the Warranty Parts Return Center where they will be inspected to assure that only
suspect parts are being replaced. The cost of parts not properly inspected or not returned will be
charged back to the dealer.
A fair and equitable distribution of parts will be made based on the number of vehicles which fail
the inspection and are properly reported to the Recall Hotline. Each Dealer who calls in will receive
a shipment of parts for reported units before any dealer receives a second shipment.
No seed stock distribution is planned at this time. No parts will be sent until inspected units are
reported to the Recall Hotline.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 >
Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1243
Please note that vehicles sold after November 16, 2000 will not receive priority handling for parts.
We urge you to carefully conduct inspections and manage your allocation of parts for this program.
NOTE:
All orders must be placed through the Recall Hotline (1-800 325-5621) for the first 30 days, until
December 21, 2000. After that date, use the normal order process.
ORDER INFORMATION DOR/COR
DOR/COR number 50197 identifies parts ordered for this campaign through the Recall Hotline
(1-800-325-5621).
FCS-700 TAGS
FCS-700 Tags will be issued for each claim involving a wiper module (less motor) replacement.
These returned assemblies will be inspected and dealers will be "charged-back" for units that pass
inspection criteria. Less than 6% of the wiper module assemblies will require replacement.
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to:
^ DOES II
^ Updated Price Book
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
The affected vehicles in this program may require the replacement of the windshield wiper
mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly (wiper module assembly less motor). A two-part inspection
must be performed to determine if replacement is required. The inspection includes the following:
^ An inspection of the wiper link ball studs.
^ An inspection of the wiper link plastic ball sockets.
If the vehicle fails the inspection process, a new windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft
assembly must be installed. This procedure gives details of the inspection process and refers you
to the service procedures in the Workshop Manual if replacement is required.
INSPECTION
CAUTION
Whenever the wiper arms are removed and reinstalled, proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is
critical.
1. Verify that the wipers are in the "PARK" position and the key is in the "OFF" position before
proceeding with inspection.
2. Remove the windshield wiper arm nuts, then remove the wiper arms.
3. Remove the left side cowl top vent panel.
4. Disconnect the wiper motor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 >
Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1244
5. Remove the three (3) bolts, then remove the wiper module. See Figure 1.
IMPORTANT:
USING A PERMANENT MARKER, PLACE A MARK ON THE WIPER LINKS NEXT TO ALL BALL
STUDS/SOCKETS THAT FAIL INSPECTION. DEFECTIVE WINDSHIELD WIPER MOUNTING
ARM AND PIVOT SHAFT ASSEMBLIES MUST BE RETURNED TO THE WARRANTY PARTS
RETURN CENTER. SEE THE ATTACHMENT II FOR MORE INFORMATION.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 >
Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1245
6. Inspect the four (4) ball studs (positions A-D). The backside of each ball stud should be riveted
(mushroomed) over as shown in the illustration. Please note, the ball stud at position B is the most
suspect. See Figure 2 for ball stud location and Figure 3 for detail of ball studs.
^ If ANY of the ball studs are not mushroomed over, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm
and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate
Workshop Manual.
^ If all of the ball studs are mushroomed over, continue the inspection procedure.
7. Visually inspect the tabs on the four (4) plastic ball sockets located at the ends of the wiper links.
Each tab should be undamaged and fully engaged in the corresponding hole located in the wiper
arm link. See Figure 2 for location of ball sockets and Figure 4 for detail of tabs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 >
Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1246
a. If the tab is missing, damaged, or detached from the rim on ANY of the sockets, replace the
windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in
section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 5.
b. If the tab is aligned but not fully engaged into the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of
the sockets but is not otherwise damaged or detached from the rim, press the tab with your thumb
(no tools) to fully engage it in the hole. If force greater than thumb pressure is required to engage
the tab into the hole, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to
the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 6.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 >
Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1247
c. If the tab is not aligned with the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of the sockets,
replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service
procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 7.
d. Beginning at the tab, carefully lift the lip of the rubber seal using a flat screwdriver or similar tool.
Verify that there is a continuous rim of plastic material around the base of EACH socket. If there
are any sections of material broken away or any visible damage (cracks) on ANY one of the
sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service
procedures in section 501-16
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 >
Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1248
of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 8.
e. Inspect the dome section of the sockets for cracks. If grease is present on the dome of the
socket, this may be evidence of a crack. If ANY one of the sockets is cracked, replace the
windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in
section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 9.
If the wiper module passes all the inspections described in A-E, no replacement is required.
8. Install the wiper module. Tighten the bolts to 12 Nm (107 lb-in).
WARNING:
THE IGNITION KEY MUST BE IN THE "OFF" POSITION BEFORE CONNECTING THE WIPER
MOTOR. IF NOT, SUDDEN MOVEMENT OF THE WIPER LINKS MAY OCCUR WHEN THE
MOTOR IS CONNECTED.
9. Connect the wiper motor electrical connector.
10. Install the left side cowl vent panel.
CAUTION
The wiper motor must be in the "PARK" position before installing the wiper arms or damage to the
vehicle will result.
11. Cycle and park the wiper motor.
CAUTION
Proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is critical.
12. Install the windshield wiper arms. Tighten the nuts to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 >
Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1249
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 >
Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1250
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module:
> 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 00S49 Date: 001101
Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
00S49
SAFETY RECALL
Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Windshield Wiper Module Inspection and Possible
Replacement
November 2000
Advance Announcement
Dealer Letter
Attachment I ^
Administrative Information
Attachment II ^
Labor Allowances
^ Parts Ordering Information
Attachment III ^
Technical Information
Owner Letter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module:
> 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1256
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module:
> 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1257
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module:
> 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1258
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS
You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this recall.
PLEASE NOTE
Correct all vehicles in stock before delivery.
PROMPTLY CORRECT
Promptly correct all affected vehicles on your dealer VIN list which you will receive in the Ford
Dealer Consolidated Communicator (FDCC). Also, correct other eligible vehicles which are brought
to your dealership.
DEALER-OWNER CONTACT
If you have recently sold a vehicle, please contact that owner immediately and provide them a copy
of the owner letter and schedule a service date.
REGIONAL CONTACT
Advise regional office if an owner:
^ cannot be contacted.
^ does not make a service date.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using DWE.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
OWNER REFUNDS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module:
> 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1259
Ford Motor Company will refund owner-paid wiper module repairs made before the date of the
Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the
servicing dealer). Refer to ACESII manual for refund information.
RENTAL CARS
For vehicles which fail the inspection, and if parts are not available, Ford Motor Company will pay
for a rental vehicle, except for fuel which will be at the owner's expense. Enter the word "RENTAL"
plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall
claim. Follow ESP cost guidelines.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
CRITICAL PARTS SUPPLY NOTE - PLEASE READ CAREFULLY
Parts will be in limited supply for several weeks. Therefore, parts will be prioritized for vehicles
which Ford records show as sold as of November 16, 2000.
Dealers are to report the results of inspections on all affected units that fail the inspection (for the
first 30 days) by calling the Recall Hotline at 1-800-325-5621 with the following required
information:
-- VIN number
-- Results of (4) ball stud inspections
-- Results of (4) plastic ball socket inspections
-- Dealer P&A; Code
Based on the inspection results reported. dealers will be advised if the vehicle can be released or if
it must be held for repair. Please note that FCS-700 tags will be issued and all replaced parts must
be returned to the Warranty Parts Return Center where they will be inspected to assure that only
suspect parts are being replaced. The cost of parts not properly inspected or not returned will be
charged back to the dealer.
A fair and equitable distribution of parts will be made based on the number of vehicles which fail
the inspection and are properly reported to the Recall Hotline. Each Dealer who calls in will receive
a shipment of parts for reported units before any dealer receives a second shipment.
No seed stock distribution is planned at this time. No parts will be sent until inspected units are
reported to the Recall Hotline.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module:
> 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1260
Please note that vehicles sold after November 16, 2000 will not receive priority handling for parts.
We urge you to carefully conduct inspections and manage your allocation of parts for this program.
NOTE:
All orders must be placed through the Recall Hotline (1-800 325-5621) for the first 30 days, until
December 21, 2000. After that date, use the normal order process.
ORDER INFORMATION DOR/COR
DOR/COR number 50197 identifies parts ordered for this campaign through the Recall Hotline
(1-800-325-5621).
FCS-700 TAGS
FCS-700 Tags will be issued for each claim involving a wiper module (less motor) replacement.
These returned assemblies will be inspected and dealers will be "charged-back" for units that pass
inspection criteria. Less than 6% of the wiper module assemblies will require replacement.
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to:
^ DOES II
^ Updated Price Book
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
The affected vehicles in this program may require the replacement of the windshield wiper
mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly (wiper module assembly less motor). A two-part inspection
must be performed to determine if replacement is required. The inspection includes the following:
^ An inspection of the wiper link ball studs.
^ An inspection of the wiper link plastic ball sockets.
If the vehicle fails the inspection process, a new windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft
assembly must be installed. This procedure gives details of the inspection process and refers you
to the service procedures in the Workshop Manual if replacement is required.
INSPECTION
CAUTION
Whenever the wiper arms are removed and reinstalled, proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is
critical.
1. Verify that the wipers are in the "PARK" position and the key is in the "OFF" position before
proceeding with inspection.
2. Remove the windshield wiper arm nuts, then remove the wiper arms.
3. Remove the left side cowl top vent panel.
4. Disconnect the wiper motor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module:
> 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1261
5. Remove the three (3) bolts, then remove the wiper module. See Figure 1.
IMPORTANT:
USING A PERMANENT MARKER, PLACE A MARK ON THE WIPER LINKS NEXT TO ALL BALL
STUDS/SOCKETS THAT FAIL INSPECTION. DEFECTIVE WINDSHIELD WIPER MOUNTING
ARM AND PIVOT SHAFT ASSEMBLIES MUST BE RETURNED TO THE WARRANTY PARTS
RETURN CENTER. SEE THE ATTACHMENT II FOR MORE INFORMATION.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module:
> 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1262
6. Inspect the four (4) ball studs (positions A-D). The backside of each ball stud should be riveted
(mushroomed) over as shown in the illustration. Please note, the ball stud at position B is the most
suspect. See Figure 2 for ball stud location and Figure 3 for detail of ball studs.
^ If ANY of the ball studs are not mushroomed over, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm
and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate
Workshop Manual.
^ If all of the ball studs are mushroomed over, continue the inspection procedure.
7. Visually inspect the tabs on the four (4) plastic ball sockets located at the ends of the wiper links.
Each tab should be undamaged and fully engaged in the corresponding hole located in the wiper
arm link. See Figure 2 for location of ball sockets and Figure 4 for detail of tabs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module:
> 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1263
a. If the tab is missing, damaged, or detached from the rim on ANY of the sockets, replace the
windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in
section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 5.
b. If the tab is aligned but not fully engaged into the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of
the sockets but is not otherwise damaged or detached from the rim, press the tab with your thumb
(no tools) to fully engage it in the hole. If force greater than thumb pressure is required to engage
the tab into the hole, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to
the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 6.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module:
> 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1264
c. If the tab is not aligned with the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of the sockets,
replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service
procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 7.
d. Beginning at the tab, carefully lift the lip of the rubber seal using a flat screwdriver or similar tool.
Verify that there is a continuous rim of plastic material around the base of EACH socket. If there
are any sections of material broken away or any visible damage (cracks) on ANY one of the
sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service
procedures in section 501-16
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module:
> 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1265
of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 8.
e. Inspect the dome section of the sockets for cracks. If grease is present on the dome of the
socket, this may be evidence of a crack. If ANY one of the sockets is cracked, replace the
windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in
section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 9.
If the wiper module passes all the inspections described in A-E, no replacement is required.
8. Install the wiper module. Tighten the bolts to 12 Nm (107 lb-in).
WARNING:
THE IGNITION KEY MUST BE IN THE "OFF" POSITION BEFORE CONNECTING THE WIPER
MOTOR. IF NOT, SUDDEN MOVEMENT OF THE WIPER LINKS MAY OCCUR WHEN THE
MOTOR IS CONNECTED.
9. Connect the wiper motor electrical connector.
10. Install the left side cowl vent panel.
CAUTION
The wiper motor must be in the "PARK" position before installing the wiper arms or damage to the
vehicle will result.
11. Cycle and park the wiper motor.
CAUTION
Proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is critical.
12. Install the windshield wiper arms. Tighten the nuts to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module:
> 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1266
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module:
> 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1267
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1268
Wiper Control Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding the Rear Interval Wiper please refer to Multifunction Electronic
Control Modules (General Module).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1269
Wiper Control Module: Testing and Inspection
Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood
Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor >
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 1284
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Driver Side
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Driver Side
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Driver Side > Page 1287
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Driver Side > Page 1288
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Passenger Side
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Driver Side > Page 1289
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1293
Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1294
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1298
Power Seat Switch: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARD.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF
THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1299
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1300
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1301
Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARD.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF
THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system
must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
^ Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
the side air bag to floor connector.
^ A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
^ If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the seat control switch knob.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1302
3. Remove the front seat cushion side shield,
1 Remove the seat backrest handle.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Remove the shield. ^
Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the seat control switch.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1306
Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1307
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch
> Component Information > Diagrams > Roof Opening Panel Position Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch
> Component Information > Diagrams > Roof Opening Panel Position Switch > Page 1312
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 1317
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid
Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid
Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1322
Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
Brake Fluid Level, Warning Switch
The brake fluid level warning switch is an integral part of the brake master cylinder reservoir. It
consists of a float containing a magnet and a reed switch mounted in the bottom of the brake
master cylinder reservoir. When the brake fluid in the brake master cylinder reservoir gets to a
predetermined level, the float and magnet actuates the reed switch that causes the red brake
warning indicator to illuminate. Loss of brake fluid from either the primary (front) or secondary (rear)
system will cause this system to activate. If the brake fluid level warning switch is inoperative, a
new brake master cylinder reservoir must be installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake
Release Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
Parking Brake Release Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake control.
2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch.
^ Remove the screws.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake
Warning Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips
Wheel Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips
TSB 04-23-2
11/29/04
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL TIP
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE When servicing the wheel speed sensors on a 2001-2005 Escape or 2005 Mariner and
Escape Hybrid, care must be taken during removal to prevent damage. The wheel speed sensor
wire has a body plug attached to it. This plug can be damaged if not removed correctly, such as
removal for pinpoint testing. If the body plug is damaged, sensor replacement may be necessary
even though the sensor is functional in all other respects.
ACTION
When removing the body plug, rotate the plug into a position which allows the use of a small
screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body plug. These two tabs are at right
angles (directly above and below) to the sensor wire. See Figures 1 and 2 for reference.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips > Page
1333
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1334
Wheel Speed Sensor: Specifications
Anti-lock brake sensor bolt Rear 20 ft.lb
Anti-lock brake sensor bolt (4X2) Front 9-10 ft.lb
Anti-lock brake sensor bolt (4X4) 62-80 in.lb
Anti-lock brake sensor wire retaining bolt (4X4) 62-80 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 1337
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 1338
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 1339
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 1342
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 1343
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 1344
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1345
Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
Anti-Lock Brake Sensor
NOTE: Any time an anti-lock brake sensor is removed, thoroughly clean the mounting surfaces. On
front anti-lock brake sensors, apply High-Temperature 4x4 Front Axle and Wheel Bearing Grease.
The anti-lock brake system uses four "active" sensors and four sensor indicators to detect the
speed of each wheel. The teeth on the sensor indicator rotate past the stationary sensor at wheel
speed. As the teeth pass the sensor, a digital input signal is generated. The control module uses
the input to compute the speed of each wheel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor, Front
Sensor-Front
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Detach the grommet from the body and pull the connector through the hole.
3. Disconnect the sensor wiring.
4. Detach the retainer.
5. Remove the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 1348
6. NOTE: Clean off any dirt that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the bolt and the sensor.
7. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 1349
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor, Rear
Sensor-Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Detach the grommet from the body and pull the connector through the hole.
3. Disconnect the sensor wiring.
4. Detach the bolt.
5. Remove the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 1350
6. NOTE: Clean off any dirt that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the bolt and the sensor.
7. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Level Sensor: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 >
Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON
Coolant Level Sensor: Customer Interest Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON
Article No. 03-25-2
12/22/03
ENGINE - COOLING SYSTEM - LOW COOLANT WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED COOLANT DEGAS BOTTLE INSPECTION - SERVICE TIP
FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE
This article supersedes TSB 03-08-5 to update the vehicle model years and service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2003 Escape 3.0L vehicles may exhibit a low coolant warning indicator lamp
illuminated. This may be caused by a low coolant level, even if it appears there is significant
coolant in the degas bottle. Analysis of coolant degas bottles indicate that bottle replacement may
not be necessary. Adjusting the coolant to the proper level may be all that is required to correct the
condition.
ACTION The following Service Procedure provides tips to help in veritying proper coolant levels.
Additional diagnostic and service information can be found in the appropriate Workshop Manual
Section 303-03.
SERVICE PROCEDURE PROPER INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF COOLANT LEVEL IN
THE DEGAS BOTTLE
There are four (4) different cells within the Escape degas bottle. The front cells of the degas bottle
are not a good visual indicator of proper coolant level, as these cells will always give the
appearance of being full (Figure 1). The actual COLD FILL RANGE is the larger cell with the fill
cap, just below the seam. It can be difficult to see if not properly examined.
If the vehicle is HOT when inspecting, the coolant level should be at the bottle seam (minimum) or
above the seam by 1/2 inch, well above the LOW mark. When hot, if the coolant level is not at least
to the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), there is a possibility of illuminating the low coolant
lamp when the vehicle cools down and the coolant is drawn back into the engine cooling system.
DIAGNOSIS Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Not Illuminated (OFF):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap and return vehicle to customer.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Level Sensor: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 >
Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON > Page 1360
Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Illuminated (ON):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap, verify that the warning lamp turns off after key cycle and return to customer.
2. If the coolant level is verified to be at the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), disconnect the
coolant level sensor and verify that the warning lamp turns off. If the lamp does turn off then
replace the degas bottle. If the lamp remains on with the sensor disconnected then perform
diagnostics on the circuit beyond degas bottle/low coolant sensor.
NOTE
IT TAKES APPROXIMATELY 25 SECONDS FOR THE LOW COOLANT LAMP TO TURN OFF
AFTER THE SENSOR CIRCUIT IS OPENED. (EXAMPLE: WHEN ADDING COOLANT TO A LOW
BOTTLE WITH LAMP ON.)
NOTE
DO NOT REPLACE THE DEGAS BOTTLE UNLESS DIRECTED BY DIAGNOSTICS IN STEP 2.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
SUPERSEDES: 03-08-5
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Level Sensor: > 03-25-2
> Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON
Coolant Level Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light
ON
Article No. 03-25-2
12/22/03
ENGINE - COOLING SYSTEM - LOW COOLANT WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED COOLANT DEGAS BOTTLE INSPECTION - SERVICE TIP
FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE
This article supersedes TSB 03-08-5 to update the vehicle model years and service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2003 Escape 3.0L vehicles may exhibit a low coolant warning indicator lamp
illuminated. This may be caused by a low coolant level, even if it appears there is significant
coolant in the degas bottle. Analysis of coolant degas bottles indicate that bottle replacement may
not be necessary. Adjusting the coolant to the proper level may be all that is required to correct the
condition.
ACTION The following Service Procedure provides tips to help in veritying proper coolant levels.
Additional diagnostic and service information can be found in the appropriate Workshop Manual
Section 303-03.
SERVICE PROCEDURE PROPER INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF COOLANT LEVEL IN
THE DEGAS BOTTLE
There are four (4) different cells within the Escape degas bottle. The front cells of the degas bottle
are not a good visual indicator of proper coolant level, as these cells will always give the
appearance of being full (Figure 1). The actual COLD FILL RANGE is the larger cell with the fill
cap, just below the seam. It can be difficult to see if not properly examined.
If the vehicle is HOT when inspecting, the coolant level should be at the bottle seam (minimum) or
above the seam by 1/2 inch, well above the LOW mark. When hot, if the coolant level is not at least
to the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), there is a possibility of illuminating the low coolant
lamp when the vehicle cools down and the coolant is drawn back into the engine cooling system.
DIAGNOSIS Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Not Illuminated (OFF):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap and return vehicle to customer.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Level Sensor: > 03-25-2
> Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON > Page 1366
Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Illuminated (ON):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap, verify that the warning lamp turns off after key cycle and return to customer.
2. If the coolant level is verified to be at the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), disconnect the
coolant level sensor and verify that the warning lamp turns off. If the lamp does turn off then
replace the degas bottle. If the lamp remains on with the sensor disconnected then perform
diagnostics on the circuit beyond degas bottle/low coolant sensor.
NOTE
IT TAKES APPROXIMATELY 25 SECONDS FOR THE LOW COOLANT LAMP TO TURN OFF
AFTER THE SENSOR CIRCUIT IS OPENED. (EXAMPLE: WHEN ADDING COOLANT TO A LOW
BOTTLE WITH LAMP ON.)
NOTE
DO NOT REPLACE THE DEGAS BOTTLE UNLESS DIRECTED BY DIAGNOSTICS IN STEP 2.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
SUPERSEDES: 03-08-5
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1367
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations >
Page 1372
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor (Figure 26) is a thermistor device in which
resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as
temperature increases, and increases as temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects
the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and
measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature
information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an
overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on
information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss
could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could
occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by
allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to
Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy details.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor > Page 1378
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT)
Sensor
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor (Figure 27) is a thermistor device in which
resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the
temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine
coolant passage. The ECT sensor is similar in construction to the IAT sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page
1379
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the generator.
2. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the CHT sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch > Page 1385
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1386
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service Precautions
CAUTION: Initial installation of a deactivator switch allows for one adjustment. If additional
adjustments are required, install a new switch.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1387
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the deactivator switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Rotate counterclockwise 45 degrees and remove the deactivator switch.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Initial installation of a deactivator switch allows for one adjustment. If additional
adjustments are required, install a new switch.
1. Release the plunger lock.
^ Turn the lock knob counterclockwise until the first click is felt.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Install the deactivator switch.
1 Position the deactivator switch in the bracket and rotate clockwise 45 degrees.
2 Connect the electrical connector.
4. Slowly release the brake pedal and tug moderately once the pedal reaches the rest position.
NOTE: There should be an extra click heard when tugging on the brake pedal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch >
Component Information > Service Precautions
Cruise Control Switch: Service Precautions
WARNING: WHEN CARRYING A LIVE AIR BAG, MAKE SURE THE BAG AND TRIM COVER
ARE POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL
DEPLOYMENT, THE BAG WILL THEN DEPLOY WITH MINIMAL CHANCE OF INJURY. FAILURE
TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 1391
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the steering wheel.
2. Remove the steering wheel cover.
WARNING: WHEN CARRYING A LIVE AIR BAG, MAKE SURE THE BAG AND TRIM COVER
ARE POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL
DEPLOYMENT, THE BAG WILL THEN DEPLOY WITH MINIMAL CHANCE OF INJURY. FAILURE
TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
3. Remove the steering wheel frame.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Disconnect the ground wire.
3 Remove the steering wheel frame.
4. Disconnect the speed control switches electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 1392
5. Remove the speed control switches.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the speed control switches.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Specifications
Oil Pressure Sender: Specifications
Oil Pressure Sender Tightening Torque 20 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1397
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1398
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: The halfshaft is removed for clarity.
Disconnect the oil pressure sender electrical connector.
2. Remove the oil pressure sender. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Air Conditioning Switch > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Air Conditioning Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Remove the function selector switch knob.
3. Remove the function selector switch.
^ Push in the locking tab on one side of the function selector switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Align the function selector switch locking tabs with the holes in the housing and press the
function selector into the housing. Verify that both locking tabs are secured.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Remove the blower motor switch knob.
3. Remove the blower motor switch.
^ Depress the locking tab.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Locations
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations
Electrical Components
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 1409
Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 1410
Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Compressor Cut-Off/Cycling Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Compressor Cut-Off/Cycling Switch > Page 1413
Dual Pressure Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation A/C Cycling Switch
A/C Cycling Switch
The A/C cycling switch is mounted on a Schrader valve-type fitting on the top of the suction
accumulator.
^ A valve depressor, located inside the threaded end of the A/C cycling switch, presses in on the
Schrader valve stem.
^ This allows the suction pressure inside the suction accumulator to control the operation of the
A/C cycling switch.
^ The electrical switch contacts open when the suction pressure drops to 152-193 kPa (22-28 psi).
^ The contacts close when the suction pressure rises to 276-324 kPa (40-47 psi).
^ When the A/C cycling switch contacts close, the signal to energize the A/C clutch is sent to the
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) which energizes the A/C relay and supplies B+ voltage to the
A/C clutch field coil.
^ When the A/C cycling switch contacts open, the A/C clutch field coil is deenergized and
compressor operation stops.
^ The A/C cycling switch will control the A/C evaporator core pressure at a point where the plate/fin
surface temperature will be maintained slightly above freezing.
^ This prevents icing of the A/C evaporator core and blockage of airflow.
^ It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to remove the A/C cycling switch.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch > Page 1416
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Cycling Switch
PCM Inputs
AIR CONDITIONING CYCLING SWITCH
The Air Conditioning (A/C) cycling switch may be wired to either the A/C Cycling Switch (ACCS) or
ACPSW Powertrain Control Module (PCM) input. When the A/C cycling switch opens, the PCM will
turn off the Air Conditioning (A/C) clutch For information on the specific function of the A/C cycling
switch, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning.
The A/C Cycling Switch (ACCS) circuit to the PCM provides a voltage signal which indicates when
the A/C is requested. When the A/C demand switch is turned on, and both the A/C cycling switch
and the high pressure contacts of the A/C high pressure switch (if equipped and in circuit) are
closed, voltage is supplied to the ACCS circuit at the PCM. Refer to Vehicle/Diagrams for vehicle
specific wiring.
If the ACCS signal is not received by the PCM, the PCM circuit will not allow the A/C to operate.
For additional information, refer to PCM outputs, wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff. See:
Powertrain Management/Description and Operation/PCM Outputs
NOTE: Some applications do not have a dedicated (separate) input to the PCM indicating that A/C
is requested. This information is received by the PCM through the BUS + and BUS - Standard
Corporate Protocol (SCP) communication.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch > Page 1417
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning High Pressure
Switch
The A/C pressure cut-off switch is used to interrupt A/C compressor operation in the event of high
system discharge pressures.
^ The A/C pressure cut-off switch is mounted on a Schrader valve-type fitting on the high pressure
side of the condenser to evaporator line.
^ A valve depressor, located inside the threaded end of the A/C pressure cut-off switch, is used to
monitor the compressor discharge pressure.
^ It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch.
^ The A/C pressure cut-off switch has two sets of contacts. One electrical contact is normally
closed.
^ When the compressor discharge pressure rises to approximately 3,103 kPa (450 psi), the switch
contacts open, disengaging the A/C compressor.
^ When the pressure drops to approximately 1,724 kPa (250 psi), the contacts close to allow
operation of the A/C compressor.
The switch contains a second set of electrical contacts used for high-speed fan control.
^ When the compressor discharge pressure reaches approximately 2,241 kPa (325 psi), these
contacts close and engage the high-speed fan control.
^ When the pressure drops to approximately 1,896 kPa (275 psi), the contacts again open and the
high speed fan control is disengaged.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Cut-Off/Cycling Switch
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Compressor Cut-Off/Cycling Switch
REMOVAL
1. Remove the A/C cycling switch.
1 Disconnect the A/C cycling switch electrical connector.
2 Remove the A/C cycling switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Cut-Off/Cycling Switch > Page 1420
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Pressure Cutoff Switch
REMOVAL
1. Remove the pressure cut-off switch.
1 Disconnect the A/C pressure cut-off switch electrical connector.
2 Remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1425
Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1426
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pin 3 using a fused (10 A) jumper to 12V DC power and pin 5 to
ground. Measure the voltage between pin 3 and pin 5 while rotating the thumbwell from full
illumination to no illumination. If the voltage smoothly decreases from near 12 volts to near 0 volts,
the illumination dimmer is okay. If not, replace the main light switch.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Pedal Position
Switch <--> [Brake Light Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Pedal Position
Switch <--> [Brake Light Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1437
Brake Pedal Position Switch: Description and Operation
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch
The Brake Pedal Position (BPP) switch (Figure 21) is used by the PCM to disengage the
transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control
for idle quality. On most applications the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and supplies battery
positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. On other applications the BPP switch
signal is broadcast over the SCP link via another module to be received by the PCM.
On applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all
stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor
in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stop amp bulbs has
failed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Pedal Position
Switch <--> [Brake Light Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1438
Brake Pedal Position Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Brake Pedal Position (BPP) switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Rotate clockwise and remove the BPP switch.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: Initial installation of brake pedal position (BPP) switch allows for one adjustment. If
additional adjustments are necessary, install a new switch.
1. To unlock, rotate the lock knob counterclockwise to the stop. 2. With the engine running, fully
depress and hold the brake pedal.
3. Install the brake pedal position (BPP) switch.
1 Position the BPP switch in the bracket and rotate counterclockwise.
2 Connect the electrical connector.
4. Slowly release the brake pedal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch
> Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch
> Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1442
Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service Precautions
CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to remove fog lamp switch or damage to the finish panel may
occur. Adding tape to the end of a thin tool will reduce marring to the finish panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch
> Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1443
Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to remove fog lamp switch or damage to the finish panel may
occur. Adding tape to the end of a thin tool will reduce marring to the finish panel.
2. Use a thin tool to remove the fog lamp switch.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1447
Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Position the instrument panel center finish panel rearward from the instrument panel.
3. Remove the Hazard flasher switch.
1. Disconnect Electrical connector. 2. Remove the hazard flasher switch.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1451
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Turn Signal Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1455
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Absolute Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
THERMAL MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) Sensor
The Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor (TMAP) (Figure 41) consists of a Manifold
Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor and an integrated thermistor. The thermistor part of the sensor is
currently not being used. The MAP part of the sensor measures intake manifold air absolute
pressure. The PCM uses information from the MAP sensor, Throttle Position (TP) sensor, Mass Air
Flow (MAF) sensor, Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) or Cylinder Head Temperature (CKP)
sensor and Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor to determine how much exhaust gas is introduced
into the intake manifold.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information
> Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information
> Locations > Page 1464
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information
> Locations > Page 1465
Mass Air Flow Sensor: Description and Operation
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air
entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at
200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 36). If the
hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced.
Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow.
The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air
mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio (Figure 37). This input is also used in determining transmission Electronic Pressure
Control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Some MAF sensors have Integrated Bypass Technology (IBT) with an integrated Intake Air
Temperature (IAT) sensor. The present applications with IBT are: Focus, Escort (4V), 2.0L Cougar,
Escape, Taurus/Sable, Windstar, Explorer/Mountaineer and E-Series.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information
> Locations > Page 1466
Mass Air Flow Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
1470
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
1471
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
The Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor
identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the Powertrain
Control Module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the firing of sequential fuel injectors. The Coil
On Plug (COP) Ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to
fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit.
Typical Hall-Effect Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor
There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 22)
and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor (Figure 23).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
1472
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP)/Park-Neutral Position (PNP) Switches
The Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) switch (Figure 24) is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch
pedal position and, in some manual transmission applications, both the clutch pedal engagement
position and the gear shift position. The PCM provides a 5-volt reference Vehicle Reference
Voltage (VREF) signal to the CPP switch and/or a Park/Neutral Position (PNP) switch (on the CPP
signal line). If the CPP switch (either or both CPP and PNP switches are closed) is closed,
indicating the clutch pedal is engaged and the shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position, the output
voltage (5 volts) from the PCM is grounded through the signal return line to the PCM, and there is 1
volt or less. One volt or less indicates there is a reduced load on the engine. If the CPP switch (or
PNP switch on vehicle or both CPP and PNP switches open on the vehicle) is open, meaning the
clutch pedal is disengaged (all systems) and the shift lever is not in NEUTRAL position (PNP
switch systems), the input on the CPP signal to the PCM will be approximately 5 volts. Then, the
5-volt signal input at the PCM will indicate a load on the engine. The PCM uses the load
information in mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Page 1476
Clutch Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) electrical connector.
2. Remove the CPP locknut and the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1480
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
1484
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
1485
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS)
Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors
The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block
adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse
wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for
a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9
degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates
crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is
also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of
tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to fixed reference (Figure 25).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
1486
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the exhaust manifold.
2. Remove the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor (Figure 26) is a thermistor device in which
resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as
temperature increases, and increases as temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects
the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and
measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature
information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an
overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on
information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss
could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could
occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by
allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to
Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy details.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor > Page 1492
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT)
Sensor
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor (Figure 27) is a thermistor device in which
resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the
temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine
coolant passage. The ECT sensor is similar in construction to the IAT sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 1493
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the generator.
2. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the CHT sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE
PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL
VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE
DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM
THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING,
POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT
IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions
> Page 1497
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
In-Line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) sensor (Figure 97) or inline Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) sensor
(Figure 98) is used to measure the fuel tank pressure during the EVAP monitor test on vehicles
equipped with the Running Loss-type system. Also, it is used to control excessive fuel tank
pressure by forcing the system to purge.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions
> Page 1498
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY
TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN
POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT
IN PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Disconnect the battery.
WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND
CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL
PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND
CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK
OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID
IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Remove the rear seat assembly.
3. Remove the fuel tank sending unit access cover.
4. Disconnect the fuel tank pressure sensor electrical connector.
5. Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor.
^ Disconnect the vapor tubes.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions
> Page 1499
^ Carry out a leak test. See: Powertrain Management/Emission Control Systems/Evaporative
Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission System Leak
Test
^ Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Powertrain
Management/Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle
NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford
specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Intake Air Temperature (IAT)
Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire Terminals
The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensors (Figure 34) and integrated Mass Air Flow (MAF) type
(Figure 37), are thermistor devices in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical
resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and increases as the
temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor
terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 1503
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The IAT provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature
information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel spark and MAF.
The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT
sensor.
Supercharged 5.4L Lightning vehicles use (2) AT sensors. Both sensors operate as above.
However, one is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard OBD II/cold
weather input, while a second sensor Second Intake Air Temperature (IAT2) is located after the
supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air
temperature information to the PCM to control border-line spark and to help determine intercooler
efficiency.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1507
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
Knock Sensor
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
The Knock Sensor (KS) (Figure 35) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine
vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine
knock and to retard spark timing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1508
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the KS electrical connector and remove the connector from the mounting bracket.
NOTE: The Knock Sensor (KS) is located on the RH side of the cylinder block.
3. Remove the nut and the KS.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis
Technical Service Bulletin # 01-9-7 Date: 010514
Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis
Article No. 01-9-7
05/14/01
DRIVEABILITY - H025 (HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR), CATALYST, AND FUEL SYSTEM
MONITORS - SERVICE TIPS - OBD II VEHICLES ONLY
FORD: 1994-1997 THUNDERBIRD 1994-2001 MUSTANG 1995-2001 CROWN VICTORIA
1996-1997 PROBE 1996-2000 CONTOUR 1996-2001 ESCORT, TAURUS 2000-2001 FOCUS
1994-1997 F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350 1995-2001 ECONOLINE, RANGER, WINDSTAR
1996 BRONCO 1996-1997 AEROSTAR 1996-2001 EXPLORER 1997-2001 EXPEDITION, F-150,
F-250 LD 1999-2001 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2001 EXCURSION 2001 ESCAPE
LINCOLN: 1995-2001 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 1996-1998 MARK VIII 2000-2001 LS
1998-2001 NAVIGATOR
MERCURY: 1994-1997 COUGAR 1995-2001 GRAND MARQUIS 1996-1999 TRACER 1996-2000
MYSTIQUE 1996-2001 SABLE 1999-2001 COUGAR 1997-2001 MOUNTAINEER
ISSUE This article is intended to be an aide in diagnosing conditions related to Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S), Catalyst, and Fuel System Monitor related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
Additional information is included to assist in diagnosing certain vehicle symptoms. This article is
NOT intended to be a shortcut to the Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) Workshop
Manual pinpoint tests. The pinpoint tests in the PC/ED Manual should ALWAYS be followed when
diagnosing vehicle conditions.
ACTION Use the following information and Service Tips to assist in the diagnosis of H025,
Catalyst, and Fuel System Monitor related DTCs.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 98-23-10 WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 623000, 690000, 698298
Information
^ A. Description of Terms and Acronyms
^ B. HO2S Location Diagrams
^ C. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 1513
^ C1. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Information
^ C2. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
^ D. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor
^ D1. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Information
^ D2. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
^ E. Fuel System Monitor
^ E1. Fuel System Monitor - Information
^ E2. Fuel System Monitor Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
^ F. Diagnostic Service Tips
^ F1. Tips - General
^ F2. Tips Related to Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor
^ F3. Tips Related to Catalyst Monitor
^ F4. Tips Related to Fuel System Monitor
A. Description of Terms and Acronyms
^ CHT - Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor or PID
^ CKP - Crankshaft Position Sensor or PID
^ DTC - Diagnostic Trouble Code
^ ECT - Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor or PID
^ EGR - Exhaust Gas Recirculation
^ EEC - Electronic Engine Control
^ EVR - EGR Vacuum Regulator
^ FMEM - Failure Mode Effects Management
^ GND - Ground
^ HC - Hydrocarbons
^ HO2S - Heated Oxygen Sensor or PID
^ IAT - Inlet Air Temperature Sensor or PID
^ KAM - Keep Alive Memory
^ KOEO - Key On Engine Off
^ KOER - Key On Engine Running
^ LONGFT - Long Term Fuel Trim
^ MAF - Mass Air Flow Sensor or PID
^ MIL - Malfunction Indicator Lamp ("Check Engine")
^ NGS - New Generation Star Tester (Scan Tool)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 1514
^ OBD II - On-Board Diagnostics II
^ OSM - Output State Monitor
^ PC/ED - Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis
^ PCM - Powertrain Control Module
^ PCV - Positive Crankcase Ventilation
^ PID - Parameter Identification Display
^ RAM - Random Access Memory
^ RPM - Revolutions Per Minute
^ SHRTFT - Short Term Fuel Trim
^ Stoichiometric - 14.7:1 Air/Fuel Ratio (Gasoline Engines)
^ TP - Throttle Position Sensor or PID
^ VMV - Vapor Management Valve
^ VPWR - Vehicle Power (Battery Voltage)
^ VREF - Vehicle Reference Voltage (5 volts)
B. HO2S Location Diagrams
Refer to Figure 1 to better understand the H025 sensor names and locations. Regardless of how
the engine is mounted in the vehicle, conventional or transverse, the HO2S naming convention
stays the same in relationship to engine banks 1 and 2. Bank 1 will always be the bank containing
the # 1 cylinder.
C. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor
C1.) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 1515
The H025 Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the HO2S sensors for a malfunction
or deterioration that can affect emissions. Under specific conditions, the fuel control or upstream
HO2S sensors (Figures 1 and 3) are checked for proper output voltage and response rate (the time
it takes to switch from lean to rich or rich to lean). Downstream HO2S sensors (Figures 1 and 3)
used for Catalyst Monitor are also monitored for proper output voltage. Input is required from the
ECT or CHT, IAT, MAF, TP and CKP sensors to activate the H025 Monitor. The Fuel System
Monitor and Misfire Detection Monitor must also have completed successfully before the HO2S
Monitor is enabled.
The HO2S sensor senses the oxygen content in the exhaust flow and outputs a voltage between
zero and 1.0 volt. Lean of stoichiometric (air/fuel ratio of approximately 14.7:1 for gasoline
engines), the HO2S will generate a voltage between zero and 0.45 volt. Rich of stoichiometric, the
HO2S will generate a voltage between 0.45 and 1.0 volt.
^ The HO2S Monitor evaluates both the upstream (Fuel Control) and downstream (Catalyst
Monitor) HO2S for proper function.
^ Once the HO2S Monitor is enabled, the upstream H025 signal voltage amplitude and response
frequency are checked. Excessive voltage is determined by comparing the HO2S signal voltage to
a maximum calibratable threshold voltage.
^ A fixed frequency closed loop fuel control routine is executed and the upstream HO2S voltage
amplitude and output response frequency are observed. A sample of the upstream HO2S signal is
evaluated to determine if the sensor is capable of switching or has a slow response rate.
^ An HO2S heater circuit fault is determined by turning the heater on and off and looking for a
corresponding change in the OSM and by measuring the current going through the heater circuit.
^ The MIL is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive OBD II drive cycles.
The HO2S Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows:
^ HO2S signal circuit malfunction - P0131, P0136, P0151, P0156
^ HO2S slow response rate - P0133, P0153
^ HO2S heater circuit malfunction - P0135, P0141, P0155, P0161
^ Downstream HO2S not running in on-demand self test - P1127
^ Swapped H025 connectors - P1128 and P1129
^ H025 lack of switching - P1130, P1131, P1132, P1150, P1151, P1152
^ HO2S lack of switching (sensor indicates lean) - P1137
^ H025 lack of switching (sensor indicates rich) - P1138
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 1516
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 1517
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 1518
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 1519
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 1520
C2.) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes
D. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor
D1.) Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Information
The Federal Test Procedure Catalyst Monitor monitors for deterioration in the catalyst system and
illuminates the MIL when tailpipe emissions exceed the appropriate HC emission thresholds. The
Catalyst Monitor is enabled after the upstream and downstream HO2S sensors have been tested
and verified to be functional. This monitor relies on the front and rear heated oxygen sensors
(HO2S) to infer catalyst efficiency based upon oxygen storage capacity. Under normal closed loop
fuel conditions, high efficiency catalysts have oxygen storage which makes the switching frequency
of the rear HO2S quite slow compared with the frequency of the front HO2S. As catalyst efficiency
deteriorates, its ability to store oxygen declines, and the rear HO2S begins to switch more rapidly,
approaching the frequency of the front sensor. In general, as catalyst efficiency decreases, the
switch ratio increases from a switch ratio of 0 for a low mileage catalyst to a switch ratio of 0.8 or
0.9 for a low efficiency catalyst.
Some vehicles will monitor substantially less than the entire catalyst volume in order to meet the
stringent catalyst monitoring malfunction thresholds. In many cases, only the front, light-off catalyst
is monitored.
Front and rear HO2S switches are counted under specified closed loop fuel conditions. After the
required number of front switches are obtained, a rear-to-front HO2S switch ratio is calculated. The
switch ratio is compared against a threshold value. If the switch ratio is greater than the calibrated
maximum limit, the catalyst has failed. The test entry conditions for the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor
are as follows: ECT or CHT (warmed engine), IAT (not at extreme ambient temperatures), MAF
(greater than minimum engine load), VSS (within vehicle speed window) and TP (at part throttle)
are required.
^ Because an exponentially weighted moving average is used for malfunction determination, up to
six OBD II drive cycles may be required to illuminate the MIL.
NOTE
THE CATALYST MONITOR ON SOME EARLY OBD II VEHICLES (SOME 1994-1996 VEHICLES)
WAS REFERRED TO AS THE "STEADY-STATE CATALYST MONITOR" AS OPPOSED TO THE
"FTP CATALYST MONITOR" (DESCRIBED ABOVE) THAT IS MOST COMMON FOR VEHICLES
BUILT AFTER 1996. BELOW IS A BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE STEADY-STATE CATALYST
MONITOR:
The Steady-State Catalyst Monitor performs a 20 second test during steady state rpm and load
conditions. The Monitor transfers closed loop fuel control from the front to the rear 02 sensors. The
Monitor then observes the switching frequency and compares it to a threshold frequency stored in
an rpm/load table. A frequency higher than the maximum calibrated threshold indicates a
malfunction.
The Catalyst Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 1521
^ Catalyst system efficiency below threshold (Bank 1) - P0420
^ Catalyst system efficiency below threshold (Bank 2) - P0430
D2.) Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes
E. Fuel System Monitor
E1.) Fuel System Monitor - Information
The Fuel System Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the fuel trim system. The fuel
control system uses fuel trim tables stored in the PCM's KAM to compensate for variability in fuel
system components due to normal wear and aging. Fuel trim tables are based on vehicle speed
and engine load. During closed loop vehicle operation, the fuel trim strategy learns the corrections
needed to correct a "biased" rich or lean fuel system. The correction is stored in the fuel trim tables.
The fuel trim has two means of adapting; a LONGFT and a SHRTFT. LONGFT relies on the fuel
trim tables and SHRTFT refers to the desired air/fuel ratio parameter "LAMBSE". LAMBSE is
calculated by the PCM from HO2S inputs and helps maintain a 14.7:1 air/fuel ratio during closed
loop operation. SHRTFT and LONGFT work together. If the HO2S indicates the engine is running
rich, the PCM will correct the rich condition by moving SHRTFT in the negative range (less fuel to
correct for a rich combustion). If after a certain amount of time SHRTFT is still compensating for a
rich condition, the PCM "learns" this and moves LONGFT into the negative range to compensate
and allows SHRTFT to return to a value near 0%. Input from the ECT or CHT, IAT, and MAF
sensors is required to activate the fuel trim system, which in turn activates the Fuel System
Monitor. Once activated, the Fuel System Monitor looks for the fuel trim tables to reach the
adaptive clip (adaptive limit) and LAMBSE to exceed a calibrated limit. The Fuel System Monitor
will store the appropriate DTC when a fault is detected as described below.
^ The H025 detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and provides the PCM with feedback
indicating a rich or lean condition.
^ A correction factor is added to the fuel injector pulsewidth calculation according to the Long and
Short Term Fuel Trims as needed to compensate for variations in the fuel system.
^ When deviation in the parameter LAMBSE increases, air/fuel control suffers and emissions
increase. When LAMBSE exceeds a calibrated limit and the fuel trim table has clipped (reached
adaptive limit), the Fuel System Monitor sets a DTC.
^ The MIL is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive OBD II drive cycles.
The Fuel System Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows:
^ Fuel Delivery Error - P0148
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 1522
^ Lean shift in fuel system operation - P0171 (Bank 1) and P0174 (Bank 2)
^ Rich shift in fuel system operation - P0172 (Bank 1) and P0175 (Bank 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 1523
E2.) Fuel System Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes
F. Diagnostic Service Tips
1. Always reset KAM after performing a repair:
After performing a repair on a vehicle with the MIL on, and/or DTCs present, always clear KAM.
When a malfunction is present, the PCM adapts (attempts to correct) for this condition. Once the
vehicle has been repaired, if the KAM is not reset, the PCM will once again have to adapt back to
the normal operating conditions. Clearing the KAM will erase what the PCM has learned, so the
PCM will be able to start with "base tables".
2. Always view and record Freeze Frame Data:
Freeze Frame Data can be a valuable asset in duplicating and diagnosing concerns. This data (a
snapshot of certain PID values, recorded at the time the MIL was activated) indicates the manner in
which the vehicle was being driven at the time the fault occurred. This can be especially useful on
intermittent concerns. Freeze Frame Data, in some cases, can also help to isolate possible areas
of concern, as well as ruling out others. Always record (write down) the Freeze Frame Data.
3. Multiple DTCs (with the same meaning):
When multiple (paired) DTCs with the same meaning are set for multiple sensors, it is unlikely that
replacing both HO2S sensors will resolve the concern. In most cases, there will be another issue
that is causing the codes. Examples of multiple (paired) DTCs:
(P0135/P0155), (P0141/P0161), (P1131/P1151), (P1132/P1152).
To further clarify this, see the more detailed scenario as follows:
A vehicle comes in with a MIL On concern. KOEO self test reveals DTCs P0135 and P0155
(HTR-11 and HTR-21 circuit malfunction), with no other DTCs present. The most likely cause of
these DTCs would be something in the heater power circuit that both of these HO2S sensors have
in common (Example: open or shorted heater circuit wiring or splice). It is highly unlikely that
multiple sensors would fail at the same time. When multiple DTCs of this nature are encountered,
reviewing the appropriate wiring diagram(s) can help to isolate possible areas of concern. When
reviewing the wiring diagram, look for things that the affected sensors have in common.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 1524
In this example, the most likely cause of DTCs P0135 and P0155 (with no other DTCs present)
would be a concern with Splice "B" (refer to Figure 2).
NOTE
THIS ILLUSTRATION IS ONLY AN EXAMPLE. SPLICE NAMES "A", "B", AND "C" ARE USED IN
THIS EXAMPLE FOR CONVENIENCE ONLY. ON AN ACTUAL VEHICLE, SPLICE NAMES WILL
DEPEND ON THE CIRCUIT NUMBER FOR THE VEHICLE UNDER REPAIR. NOTE ALSO THAT
THIS FIGURE IS NOT INTENDED TO SHOW ALL SPLICES/CONNECTIONS ON ALL
VEHICLES. OTHER EEC CIRCUITS, NOT SHOWN, MAY ALSO BE SPLICED IN WITH THE
CIRCUITS SHOWN.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 1525
4. View H025 PID data carefully: NGS PIDs for HO2S sensors that do not exist (with certain
exhaust configurations) will show a value of "0" volts (refer to Figures 3 and 4).
In this example, the vehicle (equipped with a 4-cylinder engine) has one upstream and one
downstream HO2S. Notice that the NGS (scan tool) display shows two upstream and two
downstream HO2S PIDs, and that the "unused" HO2S sensor PIDs display "0" volts.
5. H025 sensors measure oxygen in the exhaust, not fuel: The exhaust gas condition reported by
the HO2S sensor is based on the presence of oxygen in the exhaust, not the presence of unburned
fuel.
Example: In the event of an ignition-related misfire, you might expect a rich HO2S reading, due to
the amount of unburned fuel in the exhaust system. However, there is also a large amount of
unburned oxygen, since no combustion took place in the misfiring cylinder. Since the H025 senses
oxygen only, it would report a lean condition in this particular situation.
F2.) Tips Related to Heated Oxygen Sensor (H025) Monitor
1. OBD II Response Rate Monitor: The OBD II
Response Rate Monitor (P0133/P0153) is only run at vehicle speeds between approximately 50-95
km/h (30-60 mph), during steady-state conditions. The test lasts approximately 6 seconds.
Therefore, P0133/P0153 cannot be diagnosed at idle in the repair bay.
2. Do not compare H025 switch rate - Bank-to-Bank or vehicle-to-vehicle: Different H025 switch
rates, from Bank-to-Bank, are considered normal. The H025 switch rate, from one Bank to the
other, should not be compared as a gauge of the H025's ability to switch/react. The PCM is
continuously adjusting spark and fuel in reaction to engine operating conditions (rpm, load, air flow,
throttle angle, etc.). The PCM is also continuously adapting to certain conditions (customer driving
habits, engine and component wear, etc.).
F3.) Tips Related to Catalyst Efficiency Monitor
1. Determining catalyst efficiency/switch ratio:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 1526
The upstream H025 sensors will have a high switch frequency, due to normal closed loop fuel
control. With an efficient catalyst, the downstream H025 will have a low switch frequency. The
switch ratio is determined by dividing the number of downstream switches by the number of
upstream switches over a given period of time. As the catalyst ages (or if the catalyst is damaged
or contaminated), the downstream switches will increase. When the downstream switch rate
crosses a threshold value (approximately 0.75 switch ratio), a code is stored (P0420 and/or P0430)
and the MIL illuminates (refer to Figures 5 and 6).
NOTE
IF A CATALYST IS DETERMINED TO HAVE LOW EFFICIENCY AND REQUIRES
REPLACEMENT, REPLACEMENT OF THE DOWNSTREAM H025 SENSORS WILL NOT BE
NECESSARY.
2. Use care in handling H025 sensors: In the event of catalyst replacement, use care in the
handling of H025 sensors to prevent damage or contamination. Do not use power tools in the
removal or installation of sensors. Use a 22mm wrench or crow foot to remove and install H025
sensors; do not use slotted sockets, as these sockets may damage wires. H025 sensors should be
torqued to 41 +/- 5 N.m (30 +/- 4 lb-ft).
3. Do not replace downstream HO2S sensors (H02S12/H02S22) for DTCs P0420 and/or P0430:
When diagnosing a vehicle with a customer concern of MIL On and DTCs P0420/P0430 in
continuous memory, do not replace the downstream HO2S sensors (H02S12/H02S22). Damaged
or malfunctioning downstream HO2S sensors will not cause these DTCs to be set. Always verify
the vehicle concern, then perform the pinpoint diagnostics in the appropriate PC/ED Service
Manual.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 1527
F4.) Tips Related to the Fuel System Monitor
1. HO2S sensors are not likely to be the cause of adaptive DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175:
Most warranty-returned HO2S sensors (replaced for these DTCs) are found to function normally.
Additional related DTCs will normally be present if there is a concern with the HO2S sensors. Do
not replace an HO2S sensor unless verified through pinpoint diagnostic tests found in the PC/ED
Service Manual.
2. DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, and P0175 are not related to downstream H028 sensors: When
diagnosing a vehicle with a MIL On and DTC(s) P0171, P0172, P0174, and/or P0175 in continuous
memory, do not replace the downstream HO2S sensors. These DTCs have no connection to the
downstream HO2S sensor function nor its diagnosis for faults. Always verify the vehicle concern,
then perform the pinpoint diagnostics from the appropriate PC/ED Service Manual.
3. Diagnosing lean conditions and lean DTCs P0171, P0174: Freeze Frame Data can often help to
identify the type of lean condition, even if the fault is intermittent, by indicating how the vehicle was
being driven when the fault occurred. Diagnosis of lean conditions and lean adaptive DTCs can be
difficult, especially if the concern is intermittent. Verifying the concern is extremely important. There
are different types of lean conditions. The ability to identify the type of lean condition causing the
concern can be crucial to a correct diagnosis. When DTCs P0171 and P0174 are both present,
there is a strong likelihood of another concern being present:
a. Vacuum leaks/unmetered air: In this type of condition, the engine may actually run lean of
stoichiometry (14.7:1 air/fuel ratio) if the PCM is not able to compensate enough to correct for the
condition. This condition is typically caused by air entering the engine through an abnormal source
(opening), or due to a MAF malfunction. In this situation, the volume of air entering the engine is
actually greater than what the MAF is indicating to the PCM. Vacuum leaks will normally be most
apparent when high manifold vacuum is present, during idle or light throttle. If Freeze Frame Data
indicates that the fault occurred at idle, a check for vacuum leaks/unmetered air when the engine is
cold might be the best starting point.
Examples: Loose, leaking or disconnected vacuum lines, intake manifold gaskets or 0-rings,
throttle body gaskets, brake booster, air inlet tube, stuck/frozen/aftermarket PCV valve, unseated
engine oil dipstick, MAF reading lower than normal, etc.
b. Insufficient fueling: In this type of condition, the engine may actually run lean of stoichiometry
(14.7:1 air/fuel ratio) if the PCM is not able to compensate enough to correct for the condition. This
condition is typically caused by a fuel delivery system concern that restricts or limits the amount of
fuel being delivered to the engine. This condition will normally be most apparent when the engine is
under a heavy load, when a higher volume of fuel is required. If Freeze Frame Data indicates that
the fault occurred under a heavy load, a check of the fuel delivery system (checking fuel pressure
with engine under a load) might be the best starting point.
Examples: Low fuel pressure (fuel pump, fuel filter, fuel leaks, restricted fuel supply lines), fuel
injector concerns, etc.
c. Exhaust system leaks: In this type of condition, the engine may actually be running near
stoichiometry (14.7:1 air/fuel ratio), but the exhaust gas mixture will be lean. This condition is
caused by oxygen-rich air entering the exhaust system through an external source. This condition
will cause the exhaust gas mixture to be lean, even though the actual combustion in the engine
may not be.
Examples: Exhaust system leaks upstream or near HO2S, malfunctioning Secondary Air Injection
system
d. MAF concerns: If a MAF concern is suspected, see TSB 98-23-10.
4. Checking fuel pressure: Check fuel pressure with engine under a load when diagnosing a lean
concern. A partially plugged fuel filter can be difficult to detect and can be easily overlooked if fuel
pressure is only checked at idle. The same is true for other types of fuel supply concerns (e.g., bent
or kinked lines, degraded fuel pump).
At idle, an engine requires only a small volume of fuel. Due to the fact that there is a small volume
of fuel needed at idle, a restriction in the fuel supply line in many cases will not cause the fuel
pressure to be low. When the vehicle is under a load, the engine requires much more fuel than at
idle. Under a load, a restriction in the fuel supply line will prevent the high rate of fuel flow that is
needed to maintain the correct fuel pressure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1528
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1531
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1532
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1533
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1534
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1535
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1536
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1537
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1538
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1539
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1540
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1541
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1542
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1543
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1544
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1545
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1546
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1547
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1548
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1549
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1550
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 1551
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor
Heated Oxygen Sensor Monitor
The Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the HO2S
sensors for a malfunction or deterioration which can affect emissions. The fuel control or upstream
HO2S is checked for proper output voltage and response rate (the time it takes to switch from lean
to rich or rich to lean). Downstream HO2S used for Catalyst Monitor are also monitored for proper
output voltage. The following illustration shows that input is required from the Engine Coolant
Temperature (ECT) or Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT), Intake Air Temperature (IAT), Mass Air
Flow (MAF) and Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensors to activate the HO2S Monitor. The Fuel
System Monitor and Misfire Detection Monitor must also have completed successfully before the
HO2S Monitor is enabled.
1. The HO2S sensor senses the oxygen content in the exhaust flow and outputs a voltage between
zero and 1.0 volt. Lean of stoichiometric (air/fuel
ratio of approximately 14.7:1), the HO2S will generate a voltage between zero and 0.45 volt. Rich
of stoichiometric, the HO2S will generate a voltage between 0.45 and 1.0 volt. The HO2S Monitor
evaluates both the upstream (fuel control) and downstream (Catalyst Monitor) HO2S for proper
function.
2. Once the HO2S Monitor is enabled, the upstream HO2S signal voltage amplitude and response
frequency are checked. Excessive voltage is
determined by comparing the HO2S signal voltage to a maximum calibratable threshold voltage. A
fixed frequency closed loop fuel control routine is executed and the upstream HO2S voltage
amplitude and output response frequency are observed. A sample of the upstream HO2S signal is
evaluated to determine if the sensor is capable of switching or has a slow response rate. A HO2S
heater circuit fault is determined by turning the heater on and off and looking for a corresponding
change in the Output State Monitor (OSM) and by measuring the current going through the heater
circuit. The HO2S Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows:
The Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTCs) associated with HO2S lack of switching are DTCs P1130,
P1131, P1132, P1150, P1151 and P1152.
The DTCs associated with HO2S slow response rate are DTCs P0133 and P0153.
The DTCs associated with HO2S signal circuit malfunction are DTCs P0131, P0136, P0148, P0151
and P0156.
The DTCs associated with a HO2S heater circuit malfunction are DTCs P0135, P0141, P0155 and
P0161. The Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) associated with the downstream HO2S not running in
on-demand is DTC P1127.
The DTCs associated with swapped HO2S connectors are DTCs P1128 and P1129.
3. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive
drive cycles.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor > Page 1554
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation PCM Inputs
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) (Figure 33) detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and
produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of
oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a low voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low
concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a high voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The
HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near
stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a
voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts.
Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to
temperatures of 800°C (1400°F). At approximately 300°C (600°F) the engine can enter closed loop
operation. The Vehicle Power (VPWR) circuit supplies voltage to the heater and the PCM will
complete the ground when the proper conditions occur. For model year 1998 a new HO2S heater
and heater control system are installed on some vehicles. The high power heater reaches closed
loop fuel control temperatures. The use of this heater requires that the HO2S heater control be duty
cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. The 6 ohm design is not interchangeable with new style
3.3 ohm heater.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
EGO Sensor Wrench
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the
vehicle.
3. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S.
NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or
equivalent to aid in removal.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in
installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 1557
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor
EGO Sensor Wrench
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
EGO Sensor Wrench
1. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor.
NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor
to aid in installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 1558
EGO Sensor Wrench
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1563
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1564
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1565
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1566
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1567
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1568
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1569
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1570
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1571
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1572
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1573
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1574
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1575
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1576
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1577
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1578
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1579
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1580
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1581
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1582
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch (Figure 38) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the
power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic
pressure increases. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for
additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking
maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust transmission Electronic Pressure
Control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Page 1585
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Sensor
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The Power Steering Pressure (PSP) sensor (Figure 39) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the
power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic
pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for
additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking
maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust transmission Electronic Pressure
Control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect
Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831
Attachment I - Administrative Information
Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6
Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure
Sensor Warranty Coverage
OASIS
You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program.
Note:
Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected
vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended
warranty time/mileage period.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is
claimed on.
CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03
Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a
warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for
vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for
this repair under the 02M01 program.
Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage
Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01.
Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles)
Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines.
Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP)
Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside
the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair.
OWNER REFUNDS
Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the
month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair
was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not
have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for
the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460).
All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual.
Refer to ACESII manual for refund information.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect >
Page 1594
LABOR ALLOWANCES
[NEW] NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Special Notes:
^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03.
^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program.
^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor
time has been adjusted accordingly.
^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not
cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs.
^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order
processing.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION
NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect >
Page 1595
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book.
PARTS RETENTION
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures."
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is
encountered, call the Special Service Support Center.
1. Retrieve continuous DTCs.
NOTE:
Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are
present:
^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED
^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED
Any other DTC present is not covered by this program.
2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as
follows:
a) Key off.
b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube.
c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector.
Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is
required.
3. Clear continuous DTCs.
4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect >
Page 1596
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect >
Page 1597
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect >
Page 1598
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug >
04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect
Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831
Attachment I - Administrative Information
Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6
Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure
Sensor Warranty Coverage
OASIS
You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program.
Note:
Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected
vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended
warranty time/mileage period.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is
claimed on.
CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03
Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a
warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for
vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for
this repair under the 02M01 program.
Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage
Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01.
Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles)
Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines.
Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP)
Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside
the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair.
OWNER REFUNDS
Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the
month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair
was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not
have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for
the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460).
All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual.
Refer to ACESII manual for refund information.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug >
04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1604
LABOR ALLOWANCES
[NEW] NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Special Notes:
^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03.
^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program.
^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor
time has been adjusted accordingly.
^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not
cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs.
^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order
processing.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION
NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug >
04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1605
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book.
PARTS RETENTION
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures."
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is
encountered, call the Special Service Support Center.
1. Retrieve continuous DTCs.
NOTE:
Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are
present:
^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED
^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED
Any other DTC present is not covered by this program.
2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as
follows:
a) Key off.
b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube.
c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector.
Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is
required.
3. Clear continuous DTCs.
4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug >
04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1606
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug >
04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1607
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug >
04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1608
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 >
Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL
ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set
Article No. 04-11-1
06/08/2004
DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON
AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS
ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY
FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001
EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC,
EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER
LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR
MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003
MOUNTAINEER
This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications.
ISSUE
Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following
symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently
functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1).
ACTION
For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic
procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED
Manual for the issue described above.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 >
Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 1613
NOTE
ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA
NOTE
THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT
THE FOLLOWING:
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002
^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002
^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s).
2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor.
3. Clear continuous DTC(s).
4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 >
Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 1614
Labor Operations
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
And Emissions Warranty Coverage.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9J460 42
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 >
Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 1615
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 >
Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL
ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set
Article No. 04-11-1
06/08/2004
DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON
AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS
ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY
FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001
EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC,
EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER
LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR
MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003
MOUNTAINEER
This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications.
ISSUE
Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following
symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently
functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1).
ACTION
For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic
procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED
Manual for the issue described above.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 >
Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 1621
NOTE
ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA
NOTE
THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT
THE FOLLOWING:
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002
^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002
^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s).
2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor.
3. Clear continuous DTC(s).
4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 >
Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 1622
Labor Operations
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
And Emissions Warranty Coverage.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9J460 42
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 >
Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 1623
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1624
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1625
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 86) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure
transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice
tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses
referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI
SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the aluminum differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter
hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the
pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1626
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 87) is identical in operation
as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose
connections are marked on the underside of the sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1627
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR
tube.
NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1631
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > PCM Inputs
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation PCM Inputs
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Typical Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
The Throttle Position (TP) sensor (Figure 42) is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a
signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing
has a three-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases
corrosion resistance on terminals and increases connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on
the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are
determined by the PCM from the TP. Those conditions are closed throttle (includes idle or
deceleration), part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration), wide open throttle (includes
maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank), and throttle angle rate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > PCM Inputs > Page 1634
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Systems
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system for component integrity, system
functionality, and faults that can cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government
regulations. For additional information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System
Hardware-PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications
Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Specifications
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 18 ft.lb
Transmission range (TR) sensor bolts 9 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1638
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1639
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1640
Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL. 2. Disconnect the battery cables. 3. Remove the battery and
tray.
4. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAP) sensor.
5. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1641
6. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
7. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the thermostat housing to gain access to the transmission
range (TR) sensor.
Remove the thermostat housing.
8. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor.
1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1642
2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Connect the electrical connector.
3. Install the thermostat housing.
4. Install the air cleaner assembly.
5. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
6. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor.
7. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
Install the battery and tray.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1643
8. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive
symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its
adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the
strategy.
Connect the battery cables.
9. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in
PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should be
active only in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Specifications
Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) bolt 62 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page
1647
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page
1648
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page
1649
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
The Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (Figure 45) is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that
generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the
vehicle is moving at a relatively low velocity, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As
the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM
uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as
fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling and torque converter clutch
scheduling.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page
1650
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the VSS. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect
Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831
Attachment I - Administrative Information
Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6
Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure
Sensor Warranty Coverage
OASIS
You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program.
Note:
Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected
vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended
warranty time/mileage period.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is
claimed on.
CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03
Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a
warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for
vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for
this repair under the 02M01 program.
Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage
Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01.
Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles)
Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines.
Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP)
Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside
the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair.
OWNER REFUNDS
Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the
month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair
was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not
have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for
the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460).
All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual.
Refer to ACESII manual for refund information.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1660
LABOR ALLOWANCES
[NEW] NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Special Notes:
^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03.
^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program.
^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor
time has been adjusted accordingly.
^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not
cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs.
^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order
processing.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION
NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1661
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book.
PARTS RETENTION
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures."
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is
encountered, call the Special Service Support Center.
1. Retrieve continuous DTCs.
NOTE:
Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are
present:
^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED
^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED
Any other DTC present is not covered by this program.
2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as
follows:
a) Key off.
b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube.
c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector.
Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is
required.
3. Clear continuous DTCs.
4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1662
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1663
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1664
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall
- Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect
Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831
Attachment I - Administrative Information
Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6
Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure
Sensor Warranty Coverage
OASIS
You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program.
Note:
Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected
vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended
warranty time/mileage period.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is
claimed on.
CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03
Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a
warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for
vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for
this repair under the 02M01 program.
Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage
Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01.
Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles)
Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines.
Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP)
Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside
the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair.
OWNER REFUNDS
Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the
month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair
was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not
have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for
the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460).
All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual.
Refer to ACESII manual for refund information.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall
- Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1670
LABOR ALLOWANCES
[NEW] NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Special Notes:
^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03.
^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program.
^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor
time has been adjusted accordingly.
^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not
cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs.
^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order
processing.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION
NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall
- Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1671
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book.
PARTS RETENTION
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures."
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is
encountered, call the Special Service Support Center.
1. Retrieve continuous DTCs.
NOTE:
Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are
present:
^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED
^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED
Any other DTC present is not covered by this program.
2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as
follows:
a) Key off.
b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube.
c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector.
Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is
required.
3. Clear continuous DTCs.
4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall
- Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1672
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall
- Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1673
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall
- Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1674
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 >
Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL
ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set
Article No. 04-11-1
06/08/2004
DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON
AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS
ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY
FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001
EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC,
EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER
LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR
MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003
MOUNTAINEER
This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications.
ISSUE
Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following
symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently
functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1).
ACTION
For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic
procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED
Manual for the issue described above.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 >
Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 1679
NOTE
ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA
NOTE
THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT
THE FOLLOWING:
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002
^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002
^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s).
2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor.
3. Clear continuous DTC(s).
4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 >
Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 1680
Labor Operations
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
And Emissions Warranty Coverage.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9J460 42
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 >
Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 1681
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL
ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set
Article No. 04-11-1
06/08/2004
DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON
AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS
ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY
FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001
EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC,
EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER
LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR
MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003
MOUNTAINEER
This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications.
ISSUE
Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following
symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently
functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1).
ACTION
For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic
procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED
Manual for the issue described above.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 1687
NOTE
ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA
NOTE
THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT
THE FOLLOWING:
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002
^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002
^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s).
2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor.
3. Clear continuous DTC(s).
4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 1688
Labor Operations
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
And Emissions Warranty Coverage.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9J460 42
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 1689
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 1690
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 1691
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 86) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure
transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice
tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses
referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI
SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the aluminum differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter
hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the
pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 1692
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 87) is identical in operation
as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose
connections are marked on the underside of the sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 1693
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR
tube.
NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information >
Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information >
Locations > Page 1698
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information >
Locations > Page 1699
Mass Air Flow Sensor: Description and Operation
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air
entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at
200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 36). If the
hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced.
Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow.
The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air
mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio (Figure 37). This input is also used in determining transmission Electronic Pressure
Control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Some MAF sensors have Integrated Bypass Technology (IBT) with an integrated Intake Air
Temperature (IAT) sensor. The present applications with IBT are: Focus, Escort (4V), 2.0L Cougar,
Escape, Taurus/Sable, Windstar, Explorer/Mountaineer and E-Series.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information >
Locations > Page 1700
Mass Air Flow Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
1704
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
1705
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR
Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
The Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 31) is a diaphragm strain gauge device in which
resistance changes with pressure. The electrical resistance of a strain gauge increases as
pressure increases, and decreases as pressure decreases. The varying resistance affects the
voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding
to pressure.
Strain gauge type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The FRP sensor measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by
the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulse width and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder.
Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
The Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 32) senses the pressure difference between the fuel
rail and the intake manifold. The return fuel line to the fuel tank has been deleted in this type of fuel
system. The differential fuel/intake manifold pressure together with measured fuel temperature
provides an indication of the fuel vapors in the fuel rail. Both differential pressure and temperature
feedback signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump
sustains fuel rail pressure which preserve fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel
injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to
decrease.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1709
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1710
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
The Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 72) is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump.
The purpose of the IFS switch is to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel
ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the
magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the
switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset
before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner Guide for the location of the IFS.
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1711
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the cowl side trim panel.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the nut.
3 Remove the cowl side trim panel.
2. Remove the Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch.
1 Disconnect the connector.
2 Remove the screws and the IFS switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1715
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> PCM Inputs
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation PCM Inputs
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Typical Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
The Throttle Position (TP) sensor (Figure 42) is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a
signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing
has a three-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases
corrosion resistance on terminals and increases connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on
the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are
determined by the PCM from the TP. Those conditions are closed throttle (includes idle or
deceleration), part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration), wide open throttle (includes
maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank), and throttle angle rate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> PCM Inputs > Page 1718
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Systems
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system for component integrity, system
functionality, and faults that can cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government
regulations. For additional information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System
Hardware-PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1723
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1724
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
The Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor
identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the Powertrain
Control Module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the firing of sequential fuel injectors. The Coil
On Plug (COP) Ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to
fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit.
Typical Hall-Effect Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor
There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 22)
and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor (Figure 23).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1725
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1729
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1730
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS)
Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors
The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block
adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse
wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for
a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9
degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates
crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is
also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of
tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to fixed reference (Figure 25).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1731
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the exhaust manifold.
2. Remove the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the upper steering column shroud.
3. Remove the screws and the lower steering column shroud. 4. Turn the ignition key to the ON
position.
5. Using a small tool, depress the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock
cylinder out. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1739
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
Knock Sensor
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
The Knock Sensor (KS) (Figure 35) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine
vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine
knock and to retard spark timing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1740
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the KS electrical connector and remove the connector from the mounting bracket.
NOTE: The Knock Sensor (KS) is located on the RH side of the cylinder block.
3. Remove the nut and the KS.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Specifications
Impact Sensor: Specifications
Side Impact Sensor Bolts 12 Nm
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left > Page 1747
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left > Page 1750
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information
Impact Sensor: Customer Safety Information
WARNING: THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR
CORRECT SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN
WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND
BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE
RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 1753
Impact Sensor: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE AIR BAG SIDE CRASH SENSOR RETAINING BOLTS IS
CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 1754
Impact Sensor: Description and Operation
WARNING: THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR
CORRECT SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN
WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND
BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE
RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
For this vehicle, the SRS employs three crash sensors. One of the sensors is integral to the RCM
and is not serviceable separately. In addition, there are two side crash sensors located in the LH
and RH B-pillars. The RCM is mounted on the center tunnel under the instrument panel. Mounting
orientation is critical for correct operation of all crash sensors.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor
Driver Side
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1757
vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint
system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if
equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: ^
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
2. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1758
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
5. Open the glove box past its stops.
6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the Instrument Panel (I/P), disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1759
8. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
10. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1760
12. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
14. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system diagnostic
tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and
Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1761
19. Remove the B-pillar trim panel.
20. Remove the side crash sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the side crash sensor.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1762
1. Install the side crash sensor.
1 Position the side crash sensor to the B-pillar.
2 Install the bolts.
3 Connect the side crash sensor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE AIR BAG SIDE CRASH SENSOR RETAINING
BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
2. Connect the battery ground cable. 3. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still in place at all
deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
4. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 5. Install the B-pillar trim
panel.
6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
the bracket under the seat.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1763
8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
9. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag module
electrical connector onto the bracket under the
seat.
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
11. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1764
onto the bracket under the seat.
12. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
13. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air
bag module electrical connector onto the bracket
under the seat.
14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1765
15. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 16. Close the glove box.
17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
18. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
19. Install the steering wheel access cover. 20. Connect the battery ground cable. 21. With all the
restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard /
Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1766
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
22. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
Passenger Side
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1767
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat Systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: ^
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
2. Open the glove box past its stops.
3. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the Instrument Panel (I/P), disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1768
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
5. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
6. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1769
8. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
10. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1770
12. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking dip.
2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
14. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system
diagnostic tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and
Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1771
19. Remove the B-pillar trim panel.
20. Remove the side crash sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the side crash sensor.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat Systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1772
1. Install the side crash sensor.
1 Position the side crash sensor to the B-pillar.
2 Install the bolts.
3 Connect the side crash sensor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE AIR BAG SIDE CRASH SENSOR RETAINING
BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
2. Connect the battery ground cable. 3. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still in place at all
deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
4. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 5. Install the B-pillar trim
panel.
6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
onto the bracket under the seat.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1773
8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
9. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air
bag module electrical connector onto the bracket
under the seat.
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
11. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1774
the bracket under the seat.
12. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
13. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag
module electrical connector onto the bracket under the
seat.
14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1775
15. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
16. Install the steering wheel access cover.
17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
18. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 19. Close the glove box. 20.
Connect the battery ground cable. 21. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove
out the air bag system. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard /
Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1776
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
22. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1777
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Weld Nut Repair
"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE:
^ There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedures and Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control
Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
^ If two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts in this procedure. Weld nuts must
be installed in Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side
Impact Sensor.
^ The following procedure applies to vehicles that have a rectangular hole in the sheet metal that is
in close proximity to the missing weld nut.
1. Obtain a "J" nut (part number N623332-S301) or any of the following optional "J" nuts (part
numbers: N623342-S101, N800854-S100,
N800925-S100).
2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190) or equivalent. 3. Install
the "J" nut through the rectangular hole in the sheet metal. 4. Install the crash sensor.
NOTE: Be sure the threaded portion of the "J" nut is aligned with the clearance hole in the sheet
metal.
5. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE:
^ There are two procedures to repairs a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedure and Weld Nut Repair-"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM)
and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
^ Use only this procedure if two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts in Weld
Nut Repair-"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Crash Sensor.
^ Radiator support repair shown, others are similar.
1. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) weld nut (part number N806285-S190). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in)
grounding screw (part number N806327-S190).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1778
3. Route a sufficient length of copper welding wire through the weld nut clearance hole and back
out an adjacent access hole.
4. Feed the copper welding wire through the weld nut, then through a standard flat washer. 5.
Secure the flat washer so that it cannot be pulled off the end of the copper welding wire. 6. Pull the
copper welding wire back through the clearance hole, allowing the weld nut and flat washer to
follow the copper welding wire through. 7. Position the weld nut to the weld nut clearance hole,
firmly pulling on the copper welding wire allowing the secured flat washer to hold the weld
nut in position.
8. Holding the weld nut securely in place and using a MIG welder, weld in four places around the
edge of the weld nut. 9. Metal finish as required.
10. Verify the nut is securely in place. 11. Install the crash sensor. 12. Tighten the attaching screws
to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Stripped Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
1. Obtain an 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw (part number N802455-S190). 2. Drill out the internal
threads of the stripped-out weld nut to 7.37 mm (0.29 in) using a letter "L" size drill bit. 3. Position
the crash sensor to the vehicle. 4. Install the 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw into the drilled-out
weld nut. 5. Install the remaining attaching screws. 6. Tighten the attaching screws to specification.
Refer to Torque Specifications.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1779
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Safing Sensor, Air Bag >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Safing Sensor: Description and Operation
Safing Sensor
The Safing Sensor is part of the Restraints Control Module (RCM) and is not serviced separately.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt Buckle Switch: > 05-17-11 > Sep >
05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Customer Interest SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set
TSB 05-17-11
09/05/05
RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the
electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the
buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully
functional.
ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety
belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved
connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt
buckle pretensioner.
One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for
complete repair procedure.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs.
A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner
Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With
14056D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7861202 OR 7861203 X2
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle Switch: >
05-17-11 > Sep > 05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's
B1877/B1881 Set
TSB 05-17-11
09/05/05
RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the
electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the
buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully
functional.
ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety
belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved
connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt
buckle pretensioner.
One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for
complete repair procedure.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs.
A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner
Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With
14056D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7861202 OR 7861203 X2
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1796
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Clutch Switch: Locations
The Clutch Switch is located near the left hand rocker panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch > Page 1803
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the upper steering column shroud.
3. Remove the screws and the lower steering column shroud. 4. Turn the ignition key to the ON
position.
5. Using a small tool, depress the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock
cylinder out. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1814
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1815
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1816
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1817
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1818
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1819
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1820
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1821
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1822
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1823
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1824
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1825
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1826
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1827
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1828
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1829
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1830
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1831
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1832
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1833
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power
Steering Pressure Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch (Figure 38) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the
power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic
pressure increases. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for
additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking
maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust transmission Electronic Pressure
Control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power
Steering Pressure Switch > Page 1836
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Sensor
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The Power Steering Pressure (PSP) sensor (Figure 39) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the
power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic
pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for
additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking
maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust transmission Electronic Pressure
Control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Figures 43 and 44) signals the PCM with key power
whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the Transmission Control Indicator
Lamp (TCIL) lights when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. The operator of the vehicle
controls the position of the TCS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component
Information > Specifications
Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Specifications
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 18 ft.lb
Transmission range (TR) sensor bolts 9 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1845
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1846
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1847
Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL. 2. Disconnect the battery cables. 3. Remove the battery and
tray.
4. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAP) sensor.
5. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1848
6. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
7. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the thermostat housing to gain access to the transmission
range (TR) sensor.
Remove the thermostat housing.
8. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor.
1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1849
2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Connect the electrical connector.
3. Install the thermostat housing.
4. Install the air cleaner assembly.
5. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
6. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor.
7. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
Install the battery and tray.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1850
8. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive
symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its
adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the
strategy.
Connect the battery cables.
9. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in
PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should be
active only in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored
Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's
Stored
Article No. 02-2-4
02/04/02
TRANSAXLE - CD4E - HARSH AND DELAYED 1-2/2-3 UPSHIFTS - AFTER TRANSAXLE OR
TURBINE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR (TSS) REPLACEMENT - POSSIBLE DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, AND
P1744
FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2001-2002 ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR
ISSUE
Some vehicles equipped with the CD4E transaxle may exhibit harsh and delayed 1-2/2-3 upshifts
along with DTCs for gear ratio errors after the Transaxle or Turbine Shaft Speed sensor (TSS)
have been replaced. DTCs may include OBD1 codes 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, or OBD II
codes P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, and P1744
ACTION
If the condition occurred after servicing the Transaxle or TSS, refer to the following TSS Selection
Chart and select the correct TSS for the vehicle application. Note that each TSS has the Ford
engineering part number on it. Also note that there is a TSS kit that includes an instruction sheet,
TSS sensor and correct bolt.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored >
Page 1859
If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and
determine the correct sensor for the vehicle.
1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body.
2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the
Selection Chart.
3. Clear all codes and verify repair.
4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year
Workshop Manual.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's
Stored
Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed
Upshifts/DTC's Stored
Article No. 02-2-4
02/04/02
TRANSAXLE - CD4E - HARSH AND DELAYED 1-2/2-3 UPSHIFTS - AFTER TRANSAXLE OR
TURBINE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR (TSS) REPLACEMENT - POSSIBLE DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, AND
P1744
FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2001-2002 ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR
ISSUE
Some vehicles equipped with the CD4E transaxle may exhibit harsh and delayed 1-2/2-3 upshifts
along with DTCs for gear ratio errors after the Transaxle or Turbine Shaft Speed sensor (TSS)
have been replaced. DTCs may include OBD1 codes 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, or OBD II
codes P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, and P1744
ACTION
If the condition occurred after servicing the Transaxle or TSS, refer to the following TSS Selection
Chart and select the correct TSS for the vehicle application. Note that each TSS has the Ford
engineering part number on it. Also note that there is a TSS kit that includes an instruction sheet,
TSS sensor and correct bolt.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's
Stored > Page 1865
If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and
determine the correct sensor for the vehicle.
1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body.
2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the
Selection Chart.
3. Clear all codes and verify repair.
4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year
Workshop Manual.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1866
Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications
Turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb
Output shaft speed (OSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor >
Page 1869
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor > Page 1872
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1873
Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR
The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with
information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control
and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of
vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending
upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which
powertrain control feature uses the information generated.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield.
4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor.
^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the OSS bore.
5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) Sensor > Page 1876
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation.
Install the OSS sensor. ^
Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) Sensor > Page 1877
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor.
5. Remove the TSS sensor.
^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore.
6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) Sensor > Page 1878
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation.
Install the TSS sensor. ^
Connect the TSS electrical connector.
2. Remove the drain pan.
3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
7. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all near positions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Specifications
Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications
Turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb
Output shaft speed (OSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor >
Page 1885
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor > Page 1888
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1889
Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR
The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with
information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control
and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of
vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending
upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which
powertrain control feature uses the information generated.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield.
4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor.
^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the OSS bore.
5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) Sensor > Page 1892
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation.
Install the OSS sensor. ^
Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) Sensor > Page 1893
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor.
5. Remove the TSS sensor.
^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore.
6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) Sensor > Page 1894
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation.
Install the TSS sensor. ^
Connect the TSS electrical connector.
2. Remove the drain pan.
3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
7. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all near positions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1899
Heated Glass Element Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the audio unit.
2. Push outward on the rear window defrost switch to remove it from the instrument panel center
finish panel.
^ Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 1904
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Adjust Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 1905
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Left Rear
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 1908
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 1909
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 1910
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 1911
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Passenger Side
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 1912
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 1913
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Right Rear
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 1914
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1915
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
NOTE: The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar.
Front door
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
All doors
2. Release the locking clip and remove the window control switch.
^ Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1920
Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1921
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1922
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the steering column shroud.
NOTE: The windshield wiper/washer switch is part of the multifunction switch assembly.
2. Remove the screws.
3. Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1926
Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1927
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1928
Wiper Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the steering column shroud.
NOTE: The windshield wiper/washer switch is part of the multifunction switch assembly.
2. Remove the screws.
3. Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
TSB 04-21-4
11/01/04
STEERING DRIFT/PULL - IMPROVED DIAGNOSTIC AND REPAIR PROCEDURE - SERVICE
TIP
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull to either the right or left. This condition may occur
even if the alignment settings are within specifications.
ACTION The following procedure is designed to supplement the Workshop Manual. It contains a
more detailed description of the camber/caster adjustment, updated diagnostics to help determine
cause and an updated camber adjustment procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 1938
1. Refer to the Drift/Pull diagnostic flow chart (Figure 1).
2. Use procedures in TSB when adjusting alignment if directed by the diagnostic flow chart.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 1939
3. Complete worksheet as needed (Figure 5).
GENERAL FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER STRUT MOUNT ADJUSTMENT INFORMATION:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 1940
Adjustment of camber and caster can be made by rotating the upper strut mount into one (1) of four
(4) positions. The orientation of the strut rod relative to the center of the hole for the mount
determines the alignment change. The strut rod is offset 180 degrees from the paint mark on the
strut bushing. Moving the strut rod inboard or outboard changes camber and moving the strut rod
forward or rearward changes caster. Regardless of the start setting, a 90 degree rotation will only
change one of the settings (caster or camber), and a 180 degree rotation will change both settings
(caster and camber).
ADDITIONAL FRONT CAMBER ADJUSTMENT:
The clearance between the bolts and the holes in the knuckle to strut joint allows front camber
adjustment beyond what the strut mount orientation provides. This additional adjustment can be
used on either of the front wheels to increase or decrease a camber split.
Rotating the upper strut mount is the primary and preferred method to adjust front camber. If
rotating the upper strut mount does not provide enough camber adjustment, perform the following
steps to achieve an approximate camber change of up to +/- 0.24 degrees per side:
1. Lift the vehicle up off its tires.
2. Replace the old strut to knuckle fasteners (bolts and nuts) with new fasteners, but do not torque
the new fasteners.
3. Move the top of the tire inboard or outboard to adjust camber (Figure 4).
a. If more negative camber is desired, push the top of the tire inboard.
b. If less negative camber is desired, pull the top of the tire outboard.
4. With the tire at the desired position, torque the new fasteners to 85 lb-ft (115 N.m).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 1941
5. Lower the vehicle back down.
6. Place vehicle on alignment rack and measure the alignment to confirm the desired camber
change was achieved.
NOTE
DO NOT ADJUST THE ALIGNMENT SETTINGS (INDIVIDUAL CAMBER) BEYOND THE
RELEASED SPECIFICATIONS.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
FRONT W6
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for
Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
Alignment: By Symptom Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
TSB 04-21-4
11/01/04
STEERING DRIFT/PULL - IMPROVED DIAGNOSTIC AND REPAIR PROCEDURE - SERVICE
TIP
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull to either the right or left. This condition may occur
even if the alignment settings are within specifications.
ACTION The following procedure is designed to supplement the Workshop Manual. It contains a
more detailed description of the camber/caster adjustment, updated diagnostics to help determine
cause and an updated camber adjustment procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for
Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 1947
1. Refer to the Drift/Pull diagnostic flow chart (Figure 1).
2. Use procedures in TSB when adjusting alignment if directed by the diagnostic flow chart.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for
Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 1948
3. Complete worksheet as needed (Figure 5).
GENERAL FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER STRUT MOUNT ADJUSTMENT INFORMATION:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for
Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 1949
Adjustment of camber and caster can be made by rotating the upper strut mount into one (1) of four
(4) positions. The orientation of the strut rod relative to the center of the hole for the mount
determines the alignment change. The strut rod is offset 180 degrees from the paint mark on the
strut bushing. Moving the strut rod inboard or outboard changes camber and moving the strut rod
forward or rearward changes caster. Regardless of the start setting, a 90 degree rotation will only
change one of the settings (caster or camber), and a 180 degree rotation will change both settings
(caster and camber).
ADDITIONAL FRONT CAMBER ADJUSTMENT:
The clearance between the bolts and the holes in the knuckle to strut joint allows front camber
adjustment beyond what the strut mount orientation provides. This additional adjustment can be
used on either of the front wheels to increase or decrease a camber split.
Rotating the upper strut mount is the primary and preferred method to adjust front camber. If
rotating the upper strut mount does not provide enough camber adjustment, perform the following
steps to achieve an approximate camber change of up to +/- 0.24 degrees per side:
1. Lift the vehicle up off its tires.
2. Replace the old strut to knuckle fasteners (bolts and nuts) with new fasteners, but do not torque
the new fasteners.
3. Move the top of the tire inboard or outboard to adjust camber (Figure 4).
a. If more negative camber is desired, push the top of the tire inboard.
b. If less negative camber is desired, pull the top of the tire outboard.
4. With the tire at the desired position, torque the new fasteners to 85 lb-ft (115 N.m).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for
Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 1950
5. Lower the vehicle back down.
6. Place vehicle on alignment rack and measure the alignment to confirm the desired camber
change was achieved.
NOTE
DO NOT ADJUST THE ALIGNMENT SETTINGS (INDIVIDUAL CAMBER) BEYOND THE
RELEASED SPECIFICATIONS.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
FRONT W6
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1951
Alignment: Specifications
Front Alignment Specifications Camber -0.84 deg
Caster 1.93 deg
Toe 3 +/- 3 mm
Steering Axis Inclination 11.4 deg
Steering Axis Offset 4.16 mm
(tire size P215/70R16) -1.6 mm (-0.06 inch) (tire size
P225/70R15)1.41 mm (0.05 inch) (tire size P235/70R16)
Ride height 476.6 +/- 20 mm
Rear Alignment Specifications Camber 0.04 deg
Toe 2.4 +/- 2.8 mm
Ride height 491 +/- 20 mm
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1952
Alignment: Description and Operation
Camber
Camber is the inward or outward tilting of the wheels at the top. When the wheel tilts out at the top,
then the camber is positive (+). When the wheel tilts in at the top, then the camber is negative (-).
Caster Caster is the tilting of the steering axis either forward or backward from vertical.
A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a
separate procedure on this vehicle. Front caster should fall within specification when the front
camber is adjusted.
Toe Toe is a measurement of how much the front of the wheels are turned in or out from the
straight-ahead position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1953
When the wheels are turned in toward the front of the vehicle, toe is positive (+) (toe in). When the
wheels are turned out toward the front of the vehicle, toe is negative (-) (toe out). Toe is measured
in degrees, from side to side, and totaled.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment
Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster Adjustment
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the front shock absorber upper mounting bracket nuts.
3. Push the front shock absorber upper mounting bracket downward and turn it to the desired
position to set camber and caster. Both camber and
caster for front suspension are adjustable within a maximum of 30 degree angle.
4. Tighten the front shock absorber upper mounting bracket nuts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 1956
Alignment: Service and Repair Lean Correction
NOTE: When installing a new coil spring, install a new one with the same part number and the
same spring code. Refer to the Vehicle Certification (VC) Label on the driver side door.
1. Measure the distance from the wheelhouse opening to the center of the wheel and tire at the
same point on both sides of the vehicle. 2. If the difference exceeds 10 mm (0.4 inch), a lean
correction is necessary.
Compare the original with a new coil spring. Note the difference.
3. Remove the higher side coil spring.
1 If the original coil spring exceeds the height of the new one by 10 mm (0.4 inch), install the new
coil spring in the vehicle.
2 If the original coil spring is shorter than the new one by 10 mm (0.4 inch), remove the low side
coil spring from the vehicle.
4. Compare all three coil springs and select the two most evenly matched for installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 1957
Alignment: Service and Repair Toe Adjustment
Front
1. Start the engine and center the steering wheel. 2. Turn the engine off, and lock the steering
wheel in position. 3. Check the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions.
4. NOTE: Do not allow the steering gear bellows to twist when the front wheel spindle tie rod is
rotated.
Remove the clamps.
5. Loosen the nuts.
^ Clean and lubricate the nut(s) and front wheel spindle tie rod threads.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 1958
6. Rotate the front wheel spindle tie rods.
7. Tighten the nuts.
8. Install the clamp(s). 9. Recheck the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's
instructions.
Rear
1. NOTE: Jounce the vehicle to make sure that the suspension is in its normal resting position.
Check the toe setting using suitable wheel alignment equipment.
2. Loosen the LH and RH rear suspension trailing arm and bushing bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 1959
3. Turn the LH and RH adjusting cams simultaneously until the toe is within specification.
4. Tighten the LH and RH rear suspension trailing arm and bushing bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test
Port > Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation
PRESSURE TEST POINT
There is a pressure test point with a schrader fitting in the fuel rail that relieves fuel pressure and
measures the fuel injector supply pressure for service and diagnostic procedures. Before servicing
or testing the fuel system, read any CAUTION, WARNING, and HANDLING information. ON
VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH A SCHRADER VALVE, USE ROTUNDA FUEL PRESSURE
TEST KIT #134-ROO87 OR EQUIVALENT.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information >
Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 800 - 900 RPM
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner
Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Remove the battery tray.
3. Remove the bolt and the intake pipe.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Make sure the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel correctly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated
Fuel Pressure Release: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve
Eliminated
Article No. 02-21-2
10/28/02
FUEL - FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE DISCONTINUED - 2.0L ENGINE
FORD: 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002 ESCORT ZX2, ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1999-2002 COUGAR
ISSUE
Vehicles equipped with the 2.0L 4V Zetec and the 2.0L SPI no longer have the Fuel Pressure
Relief Valve (Schrader Valve).
ACTION
To relieve or manually check fuel pressures, refer to the following Service Procedures for details.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Service Procedure For Relieving Fuel Pressure
1. Remove the fuel pump relay in the engine compartment fuse box.
2. Start the engine and allow idling until the engine stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately five seconds to ensure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. When fuel system service is complete, Install Fuel Pump Relay.
5. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting
engine.
NOTE
IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM.
6. Start vehicle and check for leaks.
NOTE
IT IS POSSIBLE THAT A DTC MAY BE SET DUE TO THE PUMP RELAY BEING PULLED AND
THE ENGINE STARTED AND RUN OUT OF FUEL. IF DTC'S ARE SET, CLEAR ALL DTC'S
BEFORE RETURNING VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER.
Service Procedure For Manually Checking Fuel Pressure With A Gauge.
1. Remove the fuel pump relay in the engine compartment fuse box.
2. Start the engine and allow idling until the engine stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately five seconds to make sure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. Disconnect fuel line at the fuel rail to chassis line pierce point.
a. If the vehicle is equipped with Quick Release Coupling Push Connector at the fuel rail to fuel line
pierce point, separate the coupling by depressing the tabs and pulling on the fuel line.
b. If the vehicle is equipped with a Spring Lock Coupling Connector using special tool 310-D00S or
equivalent
5. Install the Schrader Valve service tool adaptor listed in the chart in this article.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated > Page 1977
6. Install fuel pressure gauge special service tool 310-012 or equivalent.
7. Install fuel pump relay.
8. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for oaks before starting
engine.
NOTE
IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM.
9. Start and run engine to surge air from fuel system (air trapped in the fuel system may effect test
results).
10. Perform normal diagnosti35 ann service repairs as needed.
11. After fuel system service is complete, relieve fuel system pressure using fuel pressure gauge
relief valve.
12. Remove special service tools
13. Re-connect fuel system lines
14. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting
engine.
NOTE
IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM.
15. Start vehicle and check for leaks.
NOTE
IT IS POSSIBLE THAT A DTC MAY BE SET DUE TO THE PUMP RELAY BEING PULLED AND
THE ENGINE STARTED AND RUN OUT OF FUEL. IF DTC'S ARE SET, CLEAR ALL DTC'S
BEFORE RETURNING VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER.
Service Tools Required Chart
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 404000, 490000, 497000, 499000, 603300, 607000, 698298
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1978
Fuel Pressure Release: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE
WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER
ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE
FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1979
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
1. Remove the LH engine compartment relay panel cover.
WARNING: ^
DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER
ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE
FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system.
2. Remove the fuel pump relay. 3. Start the engine. 4. After the engine stalls, crank the engine over
two more times to be sure all the pressure has been released. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the
OFF position. Install the fuel pump relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1980
Fuel Pressure Gauge
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component
Information > Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
4-Cyl Firing Order: 1 3 4 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1984
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Number One
Cylinder > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component
Information > Service Precautions
Ignition Cable: Service Precautions
CAUTION:
^ Do not pull on the ignition wire directly, as the wire may separate from the connector inside the
spark plug boot.
^ Correct installation of the ignition wires is critical to engine operation. If one spark plug wire is not
correctly installed at either the spark plug or the ignition coil, both spark plugs connected to the
ignition coil may not fire under load.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Page 1992
Ignition Cable: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Grasp the spark plug boot firmly and with a twisting-pulling motion, disconnect the ignition wires
from the spark plugs.
CAUTION: Do not pull on the ignition wire directly, as the wire may separate from the connector
inside the spark plug boot.
2. Disconnect the ignition wires from the ignition coil and remove the wires.
INSTALLATION
1. Connect the ignition wires to the correct ignition coil terminals.
CAUTION: Correct installation of the ignition wires is critical to engine operation. If one spark plug
wire is not correctly installed at either the spark plug or the ignition coil, both spark plugs connected
to the ignition coil may not fire under load.
NOTE: ^
Whenever an ignition wire is reinstalled or a new one is installed, apply Silicone Brake Caliper
Grease and Dielectric compound to the interior surface of the ignition wire boot.
^ Before installing the ignition wires, inspect the ignition wires for any visible damage; install new
ignition wires if necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Page 1993
2. Connect the ignition wires to the correct spark plugs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Spark Plug Gap
Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Gap
Spark Plug Gap ...................................................................................................................................
.................................................. 1.3 mm (0.051 inch)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Spark Plug Gap > Page 1998
Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Torque
Spark Plug Torque ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................... 15 Nm (11 ft lbs)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1999
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark Plug Type Cylinders 1 And 3 .....................................................................................................
................................................................ AZFS-32F Spark Plug Type Cylinders 2 And 4 ..................
................................................................................................................................................
AZFS-32FE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2000
Spark Plug: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the spark plug wires from the spark plugs.
2. Remove the spark plugs.
NOTE: ^
If an original spark plug is reused, install it in the same cylinder from which it was removed. New
spark plugs can be used in any cylinder.
^ Use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the spark plug well before removing the
spark plugs.
3. Inspect the spark plugs. 4. Clean the spark plugs with a wire brush or a professional spark plug
cleaner (follow the manufacturer's instructions).
INSTALLATION
1. Adjust the plug gap as necessary.
2. Install the spark plugs.
NOTE: Apply Anti-Seize Lubricant to the lower three threads of the spark plugs. Do not allow
lubricant to contaminate the spark plug electrodes or insulator tips.
3. Connect the spark plug wires to the spark plugs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System
Information > Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
The indicated compression pressure are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is within 75% of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System
Information > Specifications > Page 2004
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
General Remarks
NOTE: Removing fuses and disconnecting electrical components causes the powertrain control
module (PCM) to log an error message. After the measurements have been carried out this error
message should be cleared from memory by connecting to PCM.
NOTE: Only check the compression pressure with the valves set to the prescribed clearance (if this
can be adjusted).
The compression pressure should be checked with the engine at operating temperature.
Check The Compression Pressure
WARNING: On manual transmissions shift the transmission into neutral. On automatic
transmission vehicles, select "P". Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. Remove the fuel pump relay. 2. Start the engine - the engine will start, run for a few seconds
then stall. 3. Remove the spark plugs. 4. Install the compression tester. 5. Install an auxiliary starter
switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch OFF, using the auxiliary starter switch, crank
the engine a
minimum of five compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the approximate
number of compression strokes required to obtain the highest reading.
6. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of
compression strokes. 7. Install the components in reverse order, observing the specified tightening
torques. 8. Reset the PCM fault memory.
Interpretation of the Results
The indicated compression pressure are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is within 75% of the highest reading.
CAUTION: If engine oil is sprayed into the combustion chamber, after carrying out the
measurement run the engine at 2000 rpm for about 15 minutes, in order to burn the oil and prevent
damage to the catalytic converter.
If the measurement on one or more cylinders is much lower than the specified value, spray some
engine oil into the combustion chamber and repeat the compression measurement. If the reading
greatly improves, the piston rings are damaged. If the reading stays the same, the cause is either
damaged valve seats or valve stem seals. If the measurements for two cylinders next to each other
are both too low then it is very likely that the cylinder head gasket between them is burnt through.
This can also be recognized by traces of engine oil in the coolant and/or coolant in the engine oil.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System
Information > Specifications
Valve Clearance: Specifications
Valve Clearance Intake 0.006 in
Exhaust 0.012 in
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System
Information > Specifications > Page 2008
Valve Clearance: Adjustments
Removal
1. Remove the timing belt.
2. NOTE: Measure each valve's clearance at base circle with the lobe pointed away from the
tappet, before removing the camshafts. Failure to
measure all clearances prior to removing the camshafts will necessitate repeated removal and
installation and wasted labor time.
Use a feeler gauge to measure each valve's clearance and record its location.
3. Remove the camshafts.
4. CAUTION: If the camshaft and valve tappets are to be reused, mark the location of the valve
tappets to make sure that they are assembled in
their original positions.
Remove the valve tappets from the cylinder head.
5. NOTE: A mid-range clearance is the most desirable:
^ intake: 0.15 mm (0.006 inch)
^ exhaust: 0.3 mm (0.012 inch)
NOTE: Select tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance plus the base
tappet thickness minus most desirable thickness.
Select tappets and mark installation location.
Installation
1. NOTE: Lubricate the valve tappets with Super Premium SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil or equivalent
meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C153-H.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System
Information > Specifications > Page 2009
Install the valve tappets.
2. Install the camshafts.
3. Confirm each valve's clearance at base circle with the lobe pointed away from the tappet. 4.
Install the timing belt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications
Timing Belt: Specifications
Timing Belt Replacement Interval 120,000 mi
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2013
Timing Belt: Diagrams
Confirm The Crankshaft Position Is At TDC (No. 1 Cylinder)
Adjust the timing belt tensioner.
1 Using a 6mm Allen wrench, rotate the adjuster counterclockwise and align the marks as shown.
2 Tighten the tensioner pulley bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2014
Timing Belt: Service and Repair
Timing Belt
NOTE:Ford does not provide camshaft gear timing marks, or information to perform timing belt
service without the special tools shown
in this procedure.
Special Tools
Removal
1. Remove the valve cover. 2. Remove the spark plugs. 3. Remove the catalytic converter.
4. Remove the bolt, nut, and position the coolant tube aside.
5. Rotate the crankshaft to just before Top Dead Center (TDC) (No. 1 cylinder).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2015
6. Remove the stud.
7. Install the special tool.
8. NOTE: Make sure the correct (second) notch in the pulley is indexed to the lower cylinder block.
Rotate the crankshaft clockwise against the peg to bring it to TDC (No. 1 cylinder).
9. Loosen the water pulley bolts.
10. Remove the timing belt covers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2016
11. Remove the water pump pulley.
12. Remove the accessory drive belt idler pulley.
13. NOTE: Installation of the alignment tool into the exhaust camshaft may require the camshafts to
be rotated clockwise slightly.
Install the special tool and align the camshafts.
14. Raise and support the vehicle.
15. Remove the bolts and the engine mount lower bracket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2017
16. Loosen the timing belt tensioner pulley and allow to slide down to the bottom of its travel.
17. CAUTION: If the camshaft timing belt is to be reused, mark the direction of the camshaft timing
belt to rotation of camshaft prior to removal or
premature wear or failure may occur.
Slide the timing belt off of the camshaft and crankshaft sprockets.
18. Inspect the timing belt for wear. Install a new belt if necessary.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the correct (second) notch in the pulley is indexed to the lower cylinder block.
Slide the crankshaft pulley onto the crankshaft and confirm the crankshaft position is at TDC (No. 1
cylinder) by rotating it clockwise against the alignment peg. ^
Remove the crankshaft pulley.
2. Lower the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2018
3. Confirm that the timing belt tensioner is installed correctly with the tab positioned in the slot in
the inner timing cover.
4. Install the timing belt onto the timing belt sprockets.
5. Adjust the timing belt tensioner.
1 Using a 6mm Allen wrench, rotate the adjuster counterclockwise and align the marks as shown.
2 Tighten the tensioner pulley bolt.
6. Raise the vehicle.
7. Install the front engine mount lower bracket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2019
8. Install the accessory drive belt idler pulley.
9. Install the water pump pulley.
^ Hand tighten the bolts.
10. Install the timing belt covers.
11. Tighten the water pump pulley bolts.
12. Remove the special tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2020
13. Install the stud.
14. Install the coolant tube. 15. Install the catalytic converter.
16. Remove the special tool. 17. Install the valve cover. 18. Install the spark plugs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Locations
Drive Belt: Locations
2.0L Zetec without A/C
2.0L Zetec with A/C
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Locations > Page 2024
Drive Belt: Diagrams
2.0L Zetec without A/C
2.0L Zetec with A/C
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview
Drive Belt: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer's concern by operating the engine to duplicate the condition. 2. Inspect to
determine if any of the following mechanical concerns apply:
3. NOTE: Minor cracks in the V-grooved portion of the drive belt are considered normal and
acceptable. If the drive belt has chunks missing from
the ribs, a new drive belt should be installed.
Install a new drive belt if any of the following conditions exist: rib chunk-out, severe glazing, frayed
cords or other concerns. Inspect for drive belt cracking/chunking/wear.
V-Ribbed Belt With Cracks (Acceptable)
V-Ribbed Serpentine Drive Belt With Cracks Across Ribs
V-Ribbed Belt With Chunks Of Rib Missing (Not Acceptable)
V-Ribbed Serpentine Drive Belt With Chunks of Rib Missing
4. If the concerns remain after inspection, determine the symptoms and go to the Symptom Chart.
See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2027
Drive Belt: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
SYMPTOM CHART
Part 1 of 2
Part 2 of 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2028
Drive Belt: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Belt Tensioner-Dynamic
Belt Tensioner-Dynamic
The belt tensioner can be checked dynamically as follows: 1. With the engine running, observe the
belt tensioner movement. The belt tensioner should move (respond) when the A/C clutch cycles (if
equipped), or when the engine is accelerated rapidly. If the belt tensioner movement is constant
without A/C clutch cycling or acceleration, a pulley or shaft is probably bent or a pulley is out of
round. In rare cases, excessive drive belt rideout (uneven depth of grooves in drive belt ) can
cause excessive drive belt tensioner movement. This condition can be checked by installing a new
drive belt, and repeating the observation.
2. With the engine off, check routing of the drive belt. 3. Inspect the belt tensioner wear indicator to
confirm the drive belt is within operating range. Install a new drive belt if necessary.
Belt Tensioner-Mechanical
Belt Tensioner-Mechanical
The only mechanical check that needs to be made is a check for tensioner stick, grab or bind. 1.
Remove the belt in the area of the tensioner. 2. Rotate the tensioner from its relaxed position
through its full stroke and back to the relaxed position to make sure there is no stick, grab or bind
and to make sure that there is tension on the belt tensioner spring.
3. If the tensioner meets the above criteria, proceed to test the tensioner dynamically. If the
tensioner does not meet the above criteria, install a new
tensioner.
Engine Accessory Drive
Engine Accessory Drive Test
To carry out this test, proceed as follows:
^ Remove the accessory drive belts.
WARNING: BLOCK THE FRONT AND REAR WHEELS, AND APPLY THE PARKING BRAKE
AND THE SERVICE BRAKE, OR INJURY TO PERSONNEL CAN RESULT.
CAUTION: Limit engine running time to one minute or less with belts removed or serious engine
damage will result.
NOTE: A serpentine drive belt decreases the usefulness of this test. In these cases, use a vibration
analyzer, such as the EVA, to pinpoint accessory vibrations. An electronic listening device, such as
an EngineEAR, will also help to identify noises from specific accessories.
^ Increase the engine rpm to where the concern occurs.
^ If the vibration/noise is duplicated when carrying out this test, the belts and accessories are not
sources.
^ If the vibration/noise was not duplicated when carrying out this test, install each accessory belt,
one at a time, to locate the source.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2029
Drive Belt: Service and Repair
Accessory Drive Belt - 2.0L Zetec Removal and Installation
1. Remove the right front wheel and tire.
2. Remove the bolts and the right front lower splash shield.
3. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the accessory drive belt. 4. To
install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Remove the battery tray.
3. Remove the bolt and the intake pipe.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Make sure the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel correctly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair
NOTE: The air distribution system of this vehicle cannot be equipped with a cabin air filter.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service
Precautions
Evaporative Canister Filter: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE
PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL
VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE
DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM
THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING,
POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT
IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 2041
Evaporative Canister Filter: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY
TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN
POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT
IN PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Disconnect the battery.
WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND
CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL
PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND
CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK
OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID
IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Disconnect the EVAP canister outlet tube.
4. Disconnect the canister vent solenoid electrical connector and the remote canister vent hose.
5. Remove the EVAP canister bracket assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 2042
6. Remove the remote canister vent hose.
7. Remove the dust separator.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Carry out a leak test. See: Powertrain Management/Emission Control Systems/Evaporative
Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission System Leak
Test
^ Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Powertrain
Management/Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle
NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford
specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Specifications
Fluid Filter - A/T: Specifications
Transmission filler tube bolt 71 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2046
Fluid Filter - A/T: Locations
Part 1 Of 7
Transmission Fluid Filter Location
Filter is located at exploded view position number 8 internal. See Transmission
Disassembly/Assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2047
Special Tool
Seal Removal
Transmission Filter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated
Fuel Pressure Release: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve
Eliminated
Article No. 02-21-2
10/28/02
FUEL - FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE DISCONTINUED - 2.0L ENGINE
FORD: 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002 ESCORT ZX2, ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1999-2002 COUGAR
ISSUE
Vehicles equipped with the 2.0L 4V Zetec and the 2.0L SPI no longer have the Fuel Pressure
Relief Valve (Schrader Valve).
ACTION
To relieve or manually check fuel pressures, refer to the following Service Procedures for details.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Service Procedure For Relieving Fuel Pressure
1. Remove the fuel pump relay in the engine compartment fuse box.
2. Start the engine and allow idling until the engine stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately five seconds to ensure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. When fuel system service is complete, Install Fuel Pump Relay.
5. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting
engine.
NOTE
IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM.
6. Start vehicle and check for leaks.
NOTE
IT IS POSSIBLE THAT A DTC MAY BE SET DUE TO THE PUMP RELAY BEING PULLED AND
THE ENGINE STARTED AND RUN OUT OF FUEL. IF DTC'S ARE SET, CLEAR ALL DTC'S
BEFORE RETURNING VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER.
Service Procedure For Manually Checking Fuel Pressure With A Gauge.
1. Remove the fuel pump relay in the engine compartment fuse box.
2. Start the engine and allow idling until the engine stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately five seconds to make sure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. Disconnect fuel line at the fuel rail to chassis line pierce point.
a. If the vehicle is equipped with Quick Release Coupling Push Connector at the fuel rail to fuel line
pierce point, separate the coupling by depressing the tabs and pulling on the fuel line.
b. If the vehicle is equipped with a Spring Lock Coupling Connector using special tool 310-D00S or
equivalent
5. Install the Schrader Valve service tool adaptor listed in the chart in this article.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated > Page 2053
6. Install fuel pressure gauge special service tool 310-012 or equivalent.
7. Install fuel pump relay.
8. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for oaks before starting
engine.
NOTE
IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM.
9. Start and run engine to surge air from fuel system (air trapped in the fuel system may effect test
results).
10. Perform normal diagnosti35 ann service repairs as needed.
11. After fuel system service is complete, relieve fuel system pressure using fuel pressure gauge
relief valve.
12. Remove special service tools
13. Re-connect fuel system lines
14. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting
engine.
NOTE
IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM.
15. Start vehicle and check for leaks.
NOTE
IT IS POSSIBLE THAT A DTC MAY BE SET DUE TO THE PUMP RELAY BEING PULLED AND
THE ENGINE STARTED AND RUN OUT OF FUEL. IF DTC'S ARE SET, CLEAR ALL DTC'S
BEFORE RETURNING VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER.
Service Tools Required Chart
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 404000, 490000, 497000, 499000, 603300, 607000, 698298
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 2054
Fuel Pressure Release: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE
WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER
ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE
FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 2055
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
1. Remove the LH engine compartment relay panel cover.
WARNING: ^
DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER
ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE
FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system.
2. Remove the fuel pump relay. 3. Start the engine. 4. After the engine stalls, crank the engine over
two more times to be sure all the pressure has been released. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the
OFF position. Install the fuel pump relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 2056
Fuel Pressure Gauge
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Specifications
Oil Filter: Specifications
Oil Filter 12 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Hose: Customer Interest A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2069
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2070
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page
2076
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page
2077
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Page 2078
Heater Hose: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Drain the engine coolant.
2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core.
3. Disconnect the heater hose from the hose connection. 4. Remove the RH front wheel.
5. Disconnect the heater hose from the hose connection.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Lubricate the hoses with Rubber Suspension Insulator Lube E25Y-19553-A or equivalent meeting
Ford specification ESF-M99B112-A.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions
Hose/Line HVAC: Service Precautions
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Page 2082
Hose/Line HVAC: Description and Operation
NOTE: Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air
conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed
A/C compressor or damage to the suction accumulator.
The condenser to evaporator line contains high-pressure liquid refrigerant upstream of the A/C
evaporator core orifice. The A/C manifold and tube assembly is attached to the A/C compressor
with O-ring seals.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Page 2083
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch. 2. Remove the evaporator core orifice.
3. Disconnect the condenser to evaporator line from the A/C evaporator core.
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
4. Remove the front bumper cover.
5. Remove the nut and disconnect the condenser to evaporator line from the A/C condenser core
and remove the condenser to evaporator line.
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Page 2084
Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool Set
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 02-5-2 > Mar > 02 > Power Steering - Leaks in
Extreme Cold
Power Steering Line/Hose: Customer Interest Power Steering - Leaks in Extreme Cold
Article No. 02-5-2
03/01/02
STEERING - POWER STEERING FLUID LEAK DURING EXTREME COLD AMBIENT
TEMPERATURES -20 TO -28C (-5 TO -20F) - VEHICLES PRODUCED 2/12/2002 ONLY
FORD: 2001-2002 ESCAPE
ISSUE
Some vehicles built before 2/12/2002 may exhibit a power steering fluid leak at the Return Hose
and/or Cooler Hose at the Intermediate Tube Assembly during extreme cold ambient temperatures
-20 to -28°C (-5 to -20 °F). This may be caused by hose blow out due to an increase in fluid
viscosity during extreme cold temperatures.
ACTION
Replace the Intermediate Tube with a steel intermediate tube and replace spring type clamps on
Return Hose and Cooler Hose with worm type clamps to increase hose retention.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Perform procedure in Workshop Manual Section 211-02 to remove Return Hose and Cooler
Hose from Intermediate Tube.
2. Replace Intermediate Tube with new part 2L8Z-3A713-AA.
3. Reinstall Cooler and Return Hoses using worm clamps 376240-S100.
4. Bleed all of the air from steering system using bleed procedure in Section 211-00 of the
appropriate year Workshop Manual.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
020502A Replace Metal Section Of 1.0 Hr.
Power Steering Return Hose (Includes Time To Bleed Air From System)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A713 42
OASIS CODES: 303000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 02-5-2 > Mar > 02 > Power Steering Leaks in Extreme Cold
Power Steering Line/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Power Steering - Leaks in Extreme Cold
Article No. 02-5-2
03/01/02
STEERING - POWER STEERING FLUID LEAK DURING EXTREME COLD AMBIENT
TEMPERATURES -20 TO -28C (-5 TO -20F) - VEHICLES PRODUCED 2/12/2002 ONLY
FORD: 2001-2002 ESCAPE
ISSUE
Some vehicles built before 2/12/2002 may exhibit a power steering fluid leak at the Return Hose
and/or Cooler Hose at the Intermediate Tube Assembly during extreme cold ambient temperatures
-20 to -28°C (-5 to -20 °F). This may be caused by hose blow out due to an increase in fluid
viscosity during extreme cold temperatures.
ACTION
Replace the Intermediate Tube with a steel intermediate tube and replace spring type clamps on
Return Hose and Cooler Hose with worm type clamps to increase hose retention.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Perform procedure in Workshop Manual Section 211-02 to remove Return Hose and Cooler
Hose from Intermediate Tube.
2. Replace Intermediate Tube with new part 2L8Z-3A713-AA.
3. Reinstall Cooler and Return Hoses using worm clamps 376240-S100.
4. Bleed all of the air from steering system using bleed procedure in Section 211-00 of the
appropriate year Workshop Manual.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
020502A Replace Metal Section Of 1.0 Hr.
Power Steering Return Hose (Includes Time To Bleed Air From System)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A713 42
OASIS CODES: 303000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 2098
Power Steering Line/Hose: Specifications
Power Steering Pressure Line-To-Pump Fitting 48 ft.lb
Power Steering Pressure Line Bracket-To-Engine Bolt 18 ft.lb
Power Steering Pressure And Return Line Retainer Plate-To-Gear Bolt 18 ft.lb
Power Steering Pressure Line Bracket-To-Gear Bolt 89 in.lb
Power Steering Return Line Bracket-To-Gear Bolt 89 in.lb
Power Steering Pressure Line Bracket-To-Lifting Eye Bolt 89 in.lb
Power Steering Pressure Hose To Steering Gear Fitting 21 - 25 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Hose
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Hose
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: Drain the excess power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan.
NOTE: Make sure not to drop the O-ring seals.
Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines.
1 Remove the bolt.
2 Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines.
2. Remove the power steering return line bracket-to-gear bolt.
3. Release the clamp and remove the power steering return line.
4. NOTE: Make sure the O-ring seals are on the power steering pressure and return lines.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^
Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Hose > Page 2101
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump to Gear Pressure Line
Special Tools
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. NOTE: Drain the excess power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan.
Disconnect the power steering pressure line from the power steering pump.
3. Lower the vehicle.
4. NOTE: Do not drop the O-ring seals.
Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines.
1 Remove the bolt.
2 Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Hose > Page 2102
5. Remove the power steering pressure line bracket bolt to the steering gear.
6. Remove the power steering pressure line bracket bolt to the engine lifting hook.
7. Remove the power steering pressure line bracket to engine bolt and the power steering pressure
line.
Installation
1. Using the special tool, install a new seal on the power steering pressure line fitting.
^ Remove and discard the original seal.
^ Stretch the seal over the special tool and slide it onto the tube nut.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Hose > Page 2103
2. Install the power steering pressure line bucket to engine bolt.
3. Install the power steering pressure line bracket bolt to the engine lifting hook.
4. Install the power steering pressure line bracket bolt to the steering gear.
5. NOTE: Make sure the O-ring seals are on the power steering pressure and return lines.
Connect the power steering pressure and return lines to the steering gear and install the bolt.
6. Raise the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Hose > Page 2104
7. Connect the power steering pressure line to the power steering pump. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9.
Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications
Brake Fluid: Specifications
High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid, C6AZ-19542-AB ESA-M6C25-A, DOT3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2109
Brake Fluid: Description and Operation
Brake Fluid
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
^ Do not reuse brake fluid drained or bled from the brake system.
^ Do not use brake fluid that has been stored in an open container.
^ Do not mix different types of brake fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications
Clutch Fluid: Specifications
Ford High Performance DOT3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB ESA-M6C25-A, DOT3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Engine Coolant - Propylene Glycol Recommendations
Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Coolant - Propylene Glycol Recommendations
Article No. 01-23-6
11/26/01
^ ENGINE COOLANT - PROPYLENE GLYCOL - FORD MOTOR COMPANY POSITION ON
ENGINE COOLANTS MADE FROM PROPYLENE GLYCOL
^ ENGINE COOLANT - PROPYLENE GLYCOL-BASED - FORD MOTOR COMPANY POSITION
ON PROPYLENE GLYCOL-BASED ENGINE COOLANTS
FORD: 1989-1993 FESTIVA 1989-1994 TEMPO 1989-1997 PROBE, THUNDERBIRD 1989-2002
CROWN VICTORIA, ESCORT, MUSTANG, TAURUS 1994-1997 ASPIRE 1995-2000 CONTOUR
2000-2002 FOCUS 2002 THUNDERBIRD 1989-1990 BRONCO II 1989-1996 BRONCO
1989-1997 AEROSTAR, F SUPER DUTY 1989-2002 ECONOLINE, F-150, RANGER 1991-2002
EXPLORER 1995-2002 WINDSTAR 1997-2002 EXPEDITION 1999-2002 SUPER DUTY F
SERIES 2000-2002 EXCURSION 2001-2002 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER
SPORT 2000-2002 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1989-1992 MARK VII 1989-2002 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 1993-1998 MARK VIII
2000-2002 LS 1998-2002 NAVIGATOR 2002 BLACKWOOD
MERCURY: 1989-1994 TOPAZ 1989-1997 COUGAR 1989-2002 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE
1991-1994 CAPRI 1991-1999 TRACER 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR 1993-2002
VILLAGER 1997-2002 MOUNTAINEER
MERKUR: 1989 SCORPIO, XR4TI
This article is being republished in its entirety to update the model year coverage.
ISSUE This TSB article describes Ford Motor Company's position on the use of propylene
glycol-based engine coolants.
ACTION
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Engine Coolant - Propylene Glycol Recommendations > Page 2117
Ford Motor Company does not recommend nor endorse the use of engine coolants made with
propylene glycol in Ford vehicles. Ford Motor Company currently recommends the use of ethylene
glycol-based engine coolants.
Published information suggests that engine coolants made with propylene glycol may provide
engine cooling performance equivalent to engine coolants made with ethylene glycol. However,
different brands of engine coolant provide varying corrosion protection for the cooling system. Ford
does not have performance data for the multitude of engine coolants available in the aftermarket
and therefore cannot recommend the use of any coolant except those sold by Ford Customer
Service Division. Consult the vehicle's Owner's Guide to determine the appropriate Ford Customer
Service Division coolant for the vehicle.
Furthermore, claims of toxicological and environmental advantages of propylene glycol over
ethylene glycol may be misleading. When significant new information is developed, Ford will review
this policy.
Ford Motor Company specifications recommend that vehicles be maintained using certain ethylene
glycol-based engine coolants. Those specifications do not refer to engine coolants made with
propylene glycol. Although the Ford New Vehicle Limited Warranty is not automatically voided upon
the use of a coolant made with propylene glycol, if such use results in damage to the vehicle or its
components, the cost of repairing the damage would not be covered by the Ford New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 96-16-4 WARRANTY STATUS:
INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 402000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
Coolant Capacity (Manual Trans) 7.0 qt (US)
To convert to imperial measure, multiply U.S. quarts shown
by 0.83.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 2120
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
Antifreeze Type Ford Premium Engine Coolant (Green in color)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications
Differential Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Fluid (2.0L) 2.95 pt (US)
Use SAE 80W-90 High Perfomance Rear Axle Lubricant
F1TZ-19580-B or equivalent meeting Ford specification
WSP-M2C197-A. Fill the rear axle 3-5 mm (1/8-3/16 inch)
from the bottom of filler hole.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications > Page 2125
Differential Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Ford Part Name - MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
Ford Part Number - XT-5-QM
Ford Specification - MERCON(R) V
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications
Differential Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications
Please refer to Manual Transmission Fluid; Specifications for capacities of the manual transaxle
assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications > Page 2130
Differential Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Fluid Type SAE 75W-90
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T
- Mercon V ATF Usage
Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage
TSB 06-14-4
07/24/06
MERCON ATF IS BEING REPLACED BY MERCON V ATF AS A SERVICE FLUID.
FORD: 1980-1997 Crown Victoria 1981-1997 Mustang, Thunderbird 1981-2003 Escort 1986-1993
Festiva 1986-1997 Taurus 1989-1997 Probe 1994-1997 Aspire 1995-2000 Contour 1980-1996
Bronco 1981-2003 F-150 1981-2004 E-Series, F-Super Duty 1983-1996 Ranger 1986-1996
Aerostar 1991-1997 Explorer 1993-2004 F-53 Motorhome Chassis 1995-1998 Windstar 1997-2004
Expedition 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2007 Escape 1987-2000 F-B-Series 2000-2007 F-650,
F-750
LINCOLN: 1980-1997 Town Car 1981-1997 Continental 1993-1997 Mark VIII 1998-2004 Navigator
2002-2003 Blackwood
MERCURY: 1980-1997 Grand Marquis 1981-1997 Cougar 1986-1997 Sable 1987-1999 Tracer
1995-2000 Mystique 1999-2002 Cougar 1993-2002 Villager 1997 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
MERKUR: 1985-1989 XR4TI
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-7 to update the vehicle application chart.
ISSUE MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid is being replaced by MERCON(R) V as a
service fluid.
ACTION Beginning immediately all automatic transmission / transaxle applications requiring
MERCON(R) can now be serviced using MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission
Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. After July 1, 2007, MERCON(R)
Automatic Transmission Fluid will no longer be manufactured, therefore, availability of this fluid will
only continue for however long it takes to deplete what remains in inventory.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T
- Mercon V ATF Usage > Page 2135
Service automatic transmissions requiring MERCON(R) with MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R)
Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V
For proper fluid application on current and past model vehicles equipped with automatic
transmissions I transaxles refer to the fluid usage chart. (Figure 1)
CAUTION
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS / TRANSAXLES THAT REQUIRE MERCON® V SHOULD STILL
ONLY USE MERCON(R) V OR DUAL USAGE FLUID LABELED MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T
- Mercon V ATF Usage > Page 2136
CAUTION
MERCON(R) SP, MOTORCRAFT PREMIUM AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID AND
MOTORCRAFT M5 ATFS ARE UNIQUE FLUIDS AND MUST BE USED IN APPLICATIONS
RECOMMENDING THAT PARTICULAR FLUID.
USE OF ANY OTHER FLUID MAY CAUSE REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY OR TRANSMISSION
DAMAGE.
CAUTION
THE FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS OF FLUIDS FOR CVT TRANSMISSIONS ARE VERY
DIFFERENT THAN THOSE OF OTHER AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUIDS (ATFS).
USE OF A FLUID OTHER THAN MOTORCRAFT CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE CHAIN TYPE
TRANSMISSION FLUID OR ONE LABELED AS MEETING MERCON(R) C WILL CAUSE
FUNCTIONALITY CONCERNS AND INTERNAL TRANSMISSION DAMAGE.
CAUTION
DO NOT USE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID SUPPLEMENTS, ADDITIVES,
TREATMENTS OR CLEANING AGENTS.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Transmission Fluid ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................. 10 Qt 9.5L Note: Approximately Dry Fill Capacity
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 2139
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Ford Part Name - MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
Ford Part Number - XT-5-QM
Ford Specification - MERCON(R) V
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2140
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Place a suitable container under the transaxle drain plug.
3. NOTE: If an integral problem is suspected, drain the fluid through a paper filter. A small amount
of metal or friction particles may be found from
normal wear. However, if excessive metal and friction particles are present, internal service will be
required.
Remove the transaxle drain plug and drain transmission fluid.
Installation
1. Install the transaxle drain plug.
^ After the fluid has been drained, clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of Pipe
Sealant with Teflon 09 D8AZ- 19554-A or XW7Z-19554-AA or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSK-M2G350-A2.
2. Lower the vehicle 3. Add 3.7 liters (3.9 quarts) of MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 4. Start the engine and run through
all gears for a total of five minutes at idle. Turn off the engine. 5. Repeat the previous steps to help
flush fluid from the torque converter.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications
Manual Transmission
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
................................................................... 2.8 Quarts Note: Approximate refill. Service refill
capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a
level surface.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 2145
Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Manual Transmission Fluid Type
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
.................. Motorcraft SAE 75W-90 Gear Oil GL-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Engine Oil - Oil Recommendations/Applications
Technical Service Bulletin # 02-1-9 Date: 020121
Engine Oil - Oil Recommendations/Applications
Article No. 02-1-9
01/21/02
ENGINE - ENGINE OIL - RECOMMENDED APPLICATIONS FOR SAE 5W-20 AND SAE 5W-30
MOTOR OILS - GASOLINE AND FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLES ONLY
FORD: 1992-2002 CROWN VICTORIA 1993-1994 TEMPO 1993-1997 THUNDERBIRD 1993-2002
ESCORT, MUSTANG, TAURUS 1995-2000 CONTOUR 1998-2002 ESCORT ZX2 2000-2002
FOCUS 1993-1996 BRONCO 1993-1997 AEROSTAR 1993-2002 E SERIES, F-150, RANGER
1995-2002 WINDSTAR 1997-1999 F-250 LD 1997-2001 EXPLORER 1997-2002 EXPEDITION
1999-2002 SUPER DUTY F SERIES, SUPER DUTY F-53 STRIPPED CHAS. 2000-2002
EXCURSION 2001-2002 ESCAPE
LINCOLN: 1991-2002 TOWN CAR 1993-1998 MARK VIII 1993-2002 CONTINENTAL 2000-2002
LS 1998-2002 NAVIGATOR
MERCURY: 1992-2002 GRAND MARQUIS 1993-1994 TOPAZ 1993-1997 COUGAR 1993-1999
TRACER 1993-2002 SABLE 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2001
MOUNTAINEER
This article is being republished in its entirety to update the vehicle models, engines and years
affected.
NOTE
PLEASE REFER TO THE VEHICLE APPLICATION LIST LATER IN THIS TSB FOR A
COMPLETE LIST OF VEHICLES AFFECTED BY THIS TSB.
ISSUE Ford Motor Company now recommends SAE 5W-20 viscosity grade for servicing most
gasoline and flexible fueled vehicles.
ACTION All 2001 and 2002 vehicles where SAE 5W-20 is specified should be serviced at the
recommended oil change intervals using SAE 5W-20. This oil is an improved formulation to
improve fuel economy.
Testing has validated this viscosity grade can be used in many previous model year vehicles. It is
recommended ALL vehicles on the following Vehicle Application Listing be service with SAE
5W-20.
All 2001-2002 vehicles other than those listed in the "Exception 2001 Vehicles" or "Exception 2002
Vehicles" chart are being filled with SAE 5W-20
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Engine Oil - Oil Recommendations/Applications > Page 2150
motor oil at the factory and should also be serviced with SAE 5W-20 oil.
Exception 2001 Vehicles
Exception 2002 Vehicles
NOTE
IF VEHICLE IS NOT LISTED IN THIS APPLICATION, SAE 5W-30 OIL IS RECOMMENDED.
REFER TO TSB 99-8-16.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 99-8-16 SUPERSEDES: 01-4-7 WARRANTY STATUS:
INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 401000, 490000, 497000, 499000
Veh. App. Listing Approved For SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil
^ 1993-1996 1.9L Escort/Tracer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Engine Oil - Oil Recommendations/Applications > Page 2151
^ 1995-2000 2.0L Zetec Contour/Mystique
^ 1999-2002 2.0L Cougar
^ 1997-2002 2.0L Escort/Tracer
^ 1998-2002 2.0L Escort ZX2
^ 2000-2002 2.0L Focus
^ 2001-2002 2.0L Escape
^ 1993-1997 2.3L Ranger
^ 1993-1994 2.3L Mustang
^ 1993-1994 2.3L Tempo/Topaz
^ 1998-2001 2.5L Ranger
^ 1995-2000 2.5L Contour/Mystique
^ 1999-2002 2.5L Cougar
^ 2001-2002 3.0L 4V Escape
^ 1996-2001 3.0L 4V Taurus/Sable
^ 1993-2002 3.0L (Vulcan) Aerostar/Ranger,
^ Taurus/Sable (Flexible Fuel and Gas)
^ 1995-2000 3.0L (Vulcan) Windstar
^ 1993-1994 3.0L (Vulcan) Tempo/Topaz
^ 2000-2002 3.0L 4V Lincoln LS
^ 1995-2002 3.8L Windstar
^ 1993-1997 3.8L Taurus/Sable,
^ Thunderbird/Cougar, Continental
^ 1994-2002 3.8L Mustang
^ 2002-2002 3.9L 4V Lincoln LS
^ 1997-2002 4.2L (SPI) F-150 (under 8500 GVW only), E-Series
^ 1996-2002 4.6L 2V Mustang
^ 1992-2002 4.6L Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis
^ 1991-2002 4.6L Town Car
^ 1994-1997 4.6L 2V Thunderbird/Cougar
^ 1996-2002 4.6L 4V Mustang Cobra
^ 1995-2002 4.6L 4V Continental
^ 1993-1998 4.6L 4V Mark VIII
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Engine Oil - Oil Recommendations/Applications > Page 2152
^ 1997-2002 4.6L 2V Triton F-150/250 (under 8500 GVW only), E-Series, Expedition
^ 1993-1999 4.9L E-Series, F-Series
^ 1993-1995 5.0L Mustang/Mustang Cobra
^ 1993-1993 5.0L Thunderbird/Cougar
^ 1997-2001 5.0L Explorer/Mountaineer
^ 1993-1996 5.0L E-Series, F-Series, Bronco
^ 2000-2002 5.4L Excursion
^ 1998-2002 5.4L 2V/4V Navigator
^ 1997-2002 5.4L 2V F-1501250 (under 8500 GVW only), Expedition, E-Series, E-350
Chassis/RV/Cutaway
^ 1993-1997 5.8L F-Series, Bronco
^ 1993-1996 5.8L E-Series
^ 2000-2002 6.8L Excursion
^ 1997-2002 6.8L E-Series, E-350 Chassis/RV/Cutaway
^ 1999-2002 6.8L Super Duty F-Series 250 HD/350/450/550 Motorhome
^ 1993-1998 7.5L All Vehicles
NOTE
FOR 1993 THROUGH 1998 MODEL YEAR FFV USE XO-10W30-FFV.
NOTE
THE "EXCEPTION 2001-2002 VEHICLES" SHOULD BE SERVICED WITH SAE 5W-30 MOTOR
OIL
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil
With Filter ............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... 4.25L (4.5 Qt)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 2155
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Engine Oil Type ...................................................................................................................... Super
Premium SAE 5W-20, XO-5W-20-QSP or equivalent
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage
Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage
TSB 07-1-7
01/22/07
MERCON(R) ATF REPLACED BY MERCON(R) V AS A SERVICE FLUID FOR SOME POWER
STEERING SYSTEMS
FORD: 1996-1997 Thunderbird 1996-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 1998-2003 Escort
2000-2007 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006 Ford GT 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle
2006-2007 Fusion 1996-1997 Aerostar 1996-2007 E-Series, Explorer, Ranger 1997-2004 F-53
Motorhome Chassis 1997-2007 Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty 1998-2003 Windstar 2000-2005
Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2007 Escape 2004-2007
Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1996-1997 Cargo 1996-1998 L-Series 1996-1999 F- B-Series
2000-2007 F-650, F-750 2006-2007 Low Cab Forward
LINCOLN: 1996-1998 Mark VIII 1996-1999 Continental 1996-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln
LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX
MERCURY: 1996-1997 Cougar 1996-2005 Sable 1996-2007 Grand Marquis 1999-2002 Cougar
2003-2004 Marauder 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2007 Mountaineer 1998-2002
Villager 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2007 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid is being replaced by MERCON(R) V as a
service fluid for power steering systems originally requiring MERCON(R).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage > Page 2160
ACTION Beginning immediately all power steering applications requiring MERCON(R) can now be
serviced using MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids
labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. After July 1, 2007, MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission
Fluid will no longer be manufactured, therefore, availability of this fluid will continue until remaining
inventory has been depleted.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Service power steering Systems requiring MERCON(R) with MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R)
Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V.
CAUTION
APPLICATIONS RECOMMENDING TYPE F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AND POWER
STEERING FLUID MUST CONTINUE TO USE THAT PARTICULAR FLUID. USE OF ANY
OTHER FLUID MAY CAUSE REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY OR DAMAGE
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications
Power Steering Fluid: Capacity Specifications
Power Steering Fluid Capacity 2.0 qt (US)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications > Page 2163
Power Steering Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications /
/
Power Steering Fluid Type MERCON(R) ATF
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
.................................................. 850 kg (1 lb, 14 oz)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 2168
Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications
A/C Refrigerant ....................................................................................................................................
....................................... R-134a Refrigerant YN-19
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2169
Refrigerant: Diagrams
Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2170
Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Environmental Impact Information
Refrigerant: Environmental Impact Information
The Ozone Layer A thin layer of ozone molecules, located 10 to 30 miles above the earth, form a
protective cover by absorbing a portion of the ultraviolet (UV) radiation emitted from the Sun.
Ozone Depletion Scientific research performed over the past 15 years links the release of
chlorofluorocarbons (CFC)s, also know by the trade name Freon) into the atmosphere to ozone
depletion. When CFCs are released into the atmosphere, they eventually reach the ozone layer
located in the stratosphere where they react with and destroy ozone molecules.
Harmful Effects Ozone depletion and the corresponding increase in UV radiation has been shown
to lead to higher incidents of cancer as well as global warming. When viewed from a global
perspective, ozone depletion holds an enormous potential for damage.
Upper Level Vs. Ground Level Ozone Confusion often arises when we hear about the necessity of
the ozone layer and ground level ozone. The ozone layer existing high above the earth is beneficial
but the same compound, when located at ground level, is harmful to humans, animals, crops and
vegetation.
Ground level ozone is a component of smog and forms when hydrocarbons (HC) react with
nitrogen oxides (NOx) in the presence of sunlight and heat.
Montreal Protocol In response to the growing body of evidence demonstrating the detrimental
effects of (CFC)s, 24 countries and the European community met in Montreal, Canada, in 1987 to
establish standards for the control of (CFC)s. Since that time, a total of 132 countries have become
signatories to this agreement leading to an end of production of R12 in December, 1995, in all
developed countries.
As established by the Montreal Protocol, R12 production in developed countries has ceased.
Clean Air Act The United States Congress, acting in response to the Montreal Protocol, banned
production of (CFC)s by the year 2000. Congress also amended the Clean Air Act in an effort to
control both the production and use of (CFC)s for refrigerant applications including mobile vehicle
air conditioning systems.
Additional Information Sources
For more complete and detailed explanations of the above policies, please refer to:
http://www.epa.gov/ozone/
Technician Certification Organizations providing technician refrigerant recovery and recycling
certification include:
National Institute for Automotive Service Excellence (ASE) 13505 Dulles Technology Drive, Suite 2
Herndon, VA 22071-3421 Phone: (703) 713-3800 Fax: (703) 713-0727 http://www.asecert.org/
International Mobile Air Conditioning Association (IMACA) P.O. Box 9000 Fort Worth, TX
76147-2000 Phone: (817) 732-4600 Fax: (817) 732-9610 http://www.imaca.org/
Mobile Air Conditioning Society (MACS) Worldwide P.O. Box 100 East Greenville, PA 18041
Phone: 215-679-2220
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Environmental Impact Information > Page 2173
Fax: 215-541-4635 http://www.macsw.org/
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Environmental Impact Information > Page 2174
Refrigerant: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE INJURY, THE AIR BAG SYSTEM
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING ANY CLIMATE
CONTROL COMPONENTS. TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY, DISCONNECT THE
BATTERY POSITIVE CABLE AND WAIT ONE MINUTE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ CARBON MONOXIDE IS COLORLESS, ODORLESS AND DANGEROUS. IF IT IS NECESSARY
TO OPERATE THE ENGINE WITH VEHICLE IN A CLOSED AREA SUCH AS A GARAGE,
ALWAYS USE AN EXHAUST COLLECTOR TO VENT THE EXHAUST GASES OUTSIDE THE
CLOSED AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
^ R-134A IS CLASSIFIED AS A SAFE REFRIGERANT, BUT MISUSE CAN MAKE IT
DANGEROUS. THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS MUST BE OBSERVED. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GOGGLES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM.
^ AVOID CONTACT WITH LIQUID REFRIGERANT R-134A. R-134A VAPORIZES AT
APPROXIMATELY -25°C (-13°F) UNDER ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE AND IT WILL FREEZE
SKIN TISSUE.
^ NEVER ALLOW REFRIGERANT R-134A GAS TO ESCAPE IN QUANTITY IN AN OCCUPIED
SPACE. R-134A IS NON-TOXIC, BUT IT WILL DISPLACE THE OXYGEN NEEDED TO
SUPPORT LIFE.
^ DO NOT ALLOW ANY PORTION OF THE CHARGED AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM TO
BECOME TOO HOT. THE PRESSURE IN AN AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM RISES AS THE
TEMPERATURE RISES AND TEMPERATURES OF APPROXIMATELY 85°C (185°F) CAN BE
DANGEROUS.
^ ALLOW THE ENGINE TO COOL SUFFICIENTLY PRIOR TO CARRYING OUT MAINTENANCE
OR SERIOUS BURNS AND INJURY CAN OCCUR.
^ USE EXTREME CARE AND OBSERVE ALL SAFETY AND SERVICE PRECAUTIONS
RELATED TO THE USE OF REFRIGERANTS. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS
MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ DUE TO REFRIGERANT HAZARDS, ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GOGGLES AND
NON-PENETRABLE GLOVES WHEN WORKING ON OR FLUSHING A/C SYSTEMS. FAILURE
TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Environmental Impact Information > Page 2175
Refrigerant: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION:
- To avoid damaging the vehicle or A/C components, the following precautions must be observed: ^
The A/C refrigerant of all vehicles must be identified and analyzed prior to refrigerant charging.
Failure to do so can contaminate the shop bulk refrigerant and other vehicles.
^ Do not add R-12 refrigerant to an A/C system that requires the use of R-134a refrigerant. These
two types of refrigerant must never be mixed. Doing so can damage the A/C system.
^ Charge the A/C system with the engine running only at the low-pressure side to prevent
refrigerant slugging from damaging the A/C compressor.
^ Use only R-134a refrigerant. Due to environmental concerns, when the air conditioning system is
drained, the refrigerant must be collected using refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. R-134a
must never be removed without the appropriate equipment or released into the atmosphere. Use of
a recovery machine dedicated to R-134a is necessary to reduce the possibility of oil and refrigerant
incompatibility concerns. Refer to the instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer when
removing refrigerant from or charging the air conditioning system.
^ Refrigerant R-134a must not be mixed with air for leak testing or used with air for any other
purpose above atmospheric pressure. R-134a is combustible when mixed with high concentrations
of air and at higher pressures.
^ A number of manufacturers are producing refrigerant products that are described as direct
substitutes for refrigerant R-134a. The use of any unauthorized substitute refrigerant can severely
damage the A/C components. If repair is necessary, use only new or recycled refrigerant R-134a.
- To avoid contamination of the A/C system: ^
Keep service tools and the work area clean.
^ Never open or loosen a connection before discharging the system.
^ When loosening a connection, if any residual pressure is evident, allow it to leak out before
opening the fitting.
^ Evacuate a system that has been opened to install a new component or a system that has
discharged through leakage before charging.
^ Seal open fittings with a cap or plug immediately after disconnecting a component from the
system.
^ Clean the outside of the fittings thoroughly before disconnecting a component from the system.
^ Do not remove the sealing caps from a new component until ready to install.
^ Refrigerant oil will absorb moisture from the atmosphere if left uncapped. Do not open an oil
container until ready to use, and install the cap immediately after using. Store the oil in a clean,
moisture-free container.
^ Install a new O-ring seal before connecting an open fitting. Coat the fitting and O-ring seal with
refrigerant oil before connecting.
^ When installing a refrigerant line, avoid sharp bends. Position the line away from the exhaust or
any sharp edges that can chafe the line.
^ Tighten threaded fittings only to specifications. The steel and aluminum fittings used in the
refrigerant system will not tolerate overtightening.
^ When disconnecting a fitting, use a wrench on both halves of the fitting to prevent twisting of the
refrigerant lines or tubes.
^ Do not open a refrigerant system or uncap a new component unless it is as close as possible to
room temperature. This will prevent condensation from forming inside a component that is cooler
than the surrounding air.
- Good ventilation is necessary in the area where electronic A/C leak testing is to be carried out. If
the surrounding air is contaminated with refrigerant gas, the leak detector will indicate this gas all
the time. Odors from other chemicals such as antifreeze, diesel fuel, disc brake cleaner, or other
cleaning solvents can cause the same problem. A fan, even in a well-ventilated area, is very helpful
in removing small traces of contamination from the air that might affect the leak detector.
- A/C Refrigerant Analyzer must be used before the recovery of any vehicle's A/C refrigerant.
Failure to do so puts the shop's bulk refrigerant at risk of contamination. If the vehicle's A/C
refrigerant is contaminated, refer the customer to the service facility that carried out the last A/C
service. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use the A/C recovery equipment that is
designated for recovering contaminated A/C refrigerant. All contaminated A/C refrigerant must be
disposed of as hazardous waste. For all equipment, follow the equipment manufacturer's
procedures and instructions.
- Suction accumulator/drier, muffler, hoses, thermal expansion valve, and fixed orifice tube should
be removed when flushing the A/C system. Internal plumbing of these devices makes it impossible
to correctly remove any residual-flushing agent. Except for the hoses, these components are
typically discarded after A/C system contamination. Hoses can normally be reused unless they are
clogged with foreign material. The 3.785 liters (1 gallon) of A/C Systems Flushing Solvent
F4AZ-19579-A and FL1-A filter used in A/C Flusher 219-00001 are intended for use on one vehicle
only. They may be used to flush both the A/C condenser core and the A/C evaporator core on an
individual vehicle, but under no circumstances should they be used on more than one vehicle.
- During normal A/C operation, oil is circulated through the system with the refrigerant, and a small
amount is retained in each component. If certain components of the system are removed for new
installation, some of the refrigerant oil will go with the component. To maintain the original total oil
charge, it is necessary to compensate for the oil lost by adding oil to the system with the new part.
- If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into your
recovery/recycling equipment.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system, you must verify the purity of the
refrigerant. 2. Connect the R-134a A/C Refrigerant Center to the low and high pressure service
gauge port valves.
NOTE: Some R-134a service centers require the use of an A/C manifold gauge set.
3. Recover the refrigerant from the system following the operating instructions provided by the
equipment manufacturer. 4. Once the service center has recovered the vehicle A/C system
refrigerant, close the service center inlet valve (if so equipped). Then switch off the
power supply.
5. Allow the vehicle A/C system to remain closed for about two minutes. Observe the system
vacuum level as shown on the gauge. If the pressure
does not rise, disconnect the recovery station hose(s).
6. If the system pressure rises, repeat Steps 2 through 5 until the vacuum level remains stable for
two minutes. 7. Carry out the required repairs, then evacuate and recharge the A/C system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 2178
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Identifying Refrigerants
Delux A/C Refrigerant Analyzer
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Follow the instructions included with the refrigerant analyzer to obtain the sample for testing.
NOTE: Prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system, you must use an A/C refrigerant
analyzer to identify gas samples taken directly from the refrigeration system or storage containers.
2. The analyzer will display one of the following:
^ A green "PASS" Light Emitting Diode (LED) will light if the purity of the R-134, R-12 or the R-22 is
better than 98% by weight.
^ A red "FAIL" LED will light if the purity of the gases does not meet the 98% purity standard.
^ A red "FAIL" LED and "HYDROCARBON" light will illuminate and a horn will sound if a
hydrocarbon is detected above 5%. This will alert the user of potential hazards.
3. If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into your
recovery/recycling equipment.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 2179
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Handling of Contaminated Refrigerants
1. Recover the contaminated refrigerant using suitable recovery-only equipment designed for
capturing and storing contaminated refrigerant.
^ This equipment must only be used to recover contaminated refrigerant to prevent the spread to
other vehicles.
^ If this equipment is not available, contact an A/C service facility in your area with the correct
equipment to carry out this service.
CAUTION: If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into your
recovery/recycling equipment.
2. Determine and correct the cause of the customer's initial concern. 3. Remove the suction
accumulator/drier.
NOTE: ^
Residual refrigerant oil in the suction accumulator/drier must be drained and measured for correct
oil system matching.
^ The suction accumulator/drier cannot be cleaned and a new suction accumulator/drier must be
installed.
4. Clean the A/C evaporator core and the A/C condenser core by flushing. 5. Install the new suction
accumulator/drier. 6. Correctly oil match the system. 7. Evacuate and charge the system. 8.
Dispose of contaminated refrigerant according to all federal, state and local regulations.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 2180
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Evacuation and Charging
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Prior to charging the refrigerant system, you must verify the purity of the refrigerant. See:
Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and
Repair/Identifying Refrigerants
2. Connect the R-134a A/C Refrigerant Center to the low and high pressure service gauge port
valves.
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a charging station to carry out evacuation and
charging of the refrigerant system. If a charging station is not available, system charging may be
accomplished using a separate vacuum pump, charging cylinder, and manifold gauge set.
3. Evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) (vacuum)
and as close to 101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible.
Continue to operate the vacuum pump for a minimum of 45 minutes.
4. Turn off the evacuation pump. Observe the low-pressure gauge for five minutes to make sure
that the system vacuum is held. If vacuum is not
held for five minutes, leak test the system, service the leaks, and evacuate the system again.
5. Correctly oil match the system to verify that the correct amount of refrigerant oil is present in the
system. 6. Charge the system with the specified weight of refrigerant and refrigerant oil. 7. When
no more refrigerant is being drawn into the system, start the engine and select MAX A/C operation.
Adjust the blower motor speed to
maximum and allow the remaining refrigerant to be drawn into the system. Continue to add
refrigerant into the system until the specified weight of R-134a has been added. Close the charging
cylinder valve and allow the system to pull any remaining refrigerant from the hose. When the
suction pressure drops to approximately 207 kPa (30 psi), close the charging hose valve.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 2181
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Leak Detection
Electronic Leak Detection
Refrigerent Leak Detector
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
CAUTION: Good ventilation is necessary in the area where electronic A/C leak testing is to be
carried out. If the surrounding air is contaminated with refrigerant gas, the leak detector will indicate
this gas all the time. Odors from other chemicals such as antifreeze, diesel fuel, disc brake cleaner,
or other cleaning solvents can cause the same problem. A fan, even in a well-ventilated area, is
very helpful in removing small traces of contamination from the air that might affect the leak
detector.
1. Leak test the refrigerant system using the Refrigerant Leak Detector. Follow instructions
included with leak detector for handling and operation
techniques.
NOTE: System pressure should be between 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C (75°F) with the
engine off.
2. If a leak is found, recover the refrigerant and repair the system.
Tracer Dye Leak Detection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 2182
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
NOTE: Ford Motor Company vehicles are produced with R-134a Leak Tracer Dye incorporated into
the A/C system. The location of leaks can be pinpointed by the bright yellow-green glow of the
tracer dye. Since more than one leak can exist, always inspect each component.
1. Check for leaks using a 120-watt UV spot lamp. 2. Scan all components, fittings and lines of the
A/C system. 3. After the leak is repaired, remove any traces of leak dye with a general purpose oil
solvent.
4. Verify the repair by operating the system for a short time and inspecting with the UV spot lamp.
Tracer Dye Injection
NOTE: System pressure should be between 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C (75°F) with the
engine off.
1. Install the Manifold Gauge Set or a recovery station.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 2183
2. Turn the valve on the fluorescent tracer dye injector all the way to the left to close the valve.
3. Fill the reservoir with 7 ml (0.25 ounce) of R-134a Fluorescent Tracer Dye 164-R3712.
4. Install the injector between the low-side quick disconnect and the vehicle low-pressure service
gauge port valve. 5. Open all quick disconnect valves and charge the refrigerant system. 6. When
system charging is complete, recover the refrigerant from the dye injector. 7. Remove the dye
injector from the low-side quick disconnect valve.
NOTE: Only connect the dye-injector to the Manifold Gauge Set or the charging/recovery station
when dye is to be injected. The dye injector has a one-way check valve that will prevent system
refrigerant recovery and evacuation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
General Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 2188
Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
R-134a Systems ...................................................................................................................
F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) WSH-M1C231-B
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2189
Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair
Refrigerant Oil Addition
CAUTION: During normal A/C operation, oil is circulated through the system with the refrigerant,
and a small amount is retained in each component. If certain components of the system are
removed for new installation, some of the refrigerant oil will go with the component. To maintain the
original total oil charge, it is necessary to compensate for the oil lost by adding oil to the system
with the new part.
1. Rotate the A/C compressor shaft six to eight revolutions while collecting oil in a clean measuring
device.
^ If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is between 85-142 ml (3-5 ounces), pour
the same amount plus 30 ml (1 ounce) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent
meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B into the new A/C compressor.
^ If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is greater than 142 ml (5
ounces), pour the same amount drained of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent
meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B into the new A/C compressor.
^ If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is less than 85 ml (3 ounces),
pour 85 ml (3 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B into the new A/C compressor.
NOTE: Service A/C compressors are shipped without compressor oil.
2. For the suction accumulator/drier, drill two 1/2 inch holes in the suction accumulator/drier
cylinder and drain the oil into a calibrated container.
^ Add a quantity of new oil to match that drained from the old suction accumulator/drier plus 60 ml
(2 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification
WSH-M1C231-B.
3. For the A/C evaporator core, add 89 ml (3 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or
equivalent meeting Ford specification
WSH-M1C231-B to the suction accumulator/drier inlet tube.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2190
4. For the A/C condenser core, add 30 ml (1 ounce) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or
equivalent meeting Ford specification
WSH-M1C231-B to the A/C condenser core or the suction accumulator/drier inlet tube.
5. Add 60 ml (2 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B to the suction
accumulator/drier inlet tube when carrying out each of the following repairs: ^
installation of a new A/C evaporator core orifice
^ installation of a new A/C compressor pressure relief valve
^ installation of a new refrigerant line
^ repair of an O-ring seal leak
^ repair of a charge port leak
6. Installation of new components that do not require discharge of refrigerant and resulting oil loss,
such as the A/C cycling switch and the A/C
pressure transducer, do not require additional oil.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Specifications
Brake Bleeding: Specifications
Disc Brake Caliper Bleeder Screws 12 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master
Cylinder - Bench Bleed
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed
Brake Master Cylinder-Bench Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. Support the brake master cylinder body in a soft jaw vise, and fill the brake master cylinder
reservoir with specified brake fluid.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
2. Install plugs in the front and rear brake outlet ports.
3. Loosen the plug in the front outlet port and slowly depress the primary piston.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master
Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 2196
4. Tighten the plug in the front outlet port and release the primary piston. 5. Repeat this procedure
until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 6. Repeat Steps 3, 4, and 5 for the rear outlet port with the
front outlet port plugged. 7. Tighten the plugs and attempt to depress the primary piston. The piston
will not depress if all the air is bled out of the system. 8. Install the reservoir cap and install the
brake master cylinder in the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master
Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 2197
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake Master Cylinder - In-Vehicle Bleed
Brake Master Cylinder-In-Vehicle Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and Polyglycol. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. Disconnect the brake outlet lines from the brake master cylinder and cap the lines. 2. Install
short brake hoses to the master cylinder outlet ports with the ends submerged in the brake master
cylinder reservoir.
3. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid
C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows from both brake
hoses.
5. Remove the short brake hoses and install the brake outlet lines.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master
Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 2198
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Gravity Bleeding
Gravity Bleed
Brake system
1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB
or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to
the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front
wheel.
Rear drum brakes
3. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Loosen the rear wheel cylinder bleeder screw and leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid
flows.
4. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw.
Front disc brakes
5. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Open the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Leave open until clear bubble-free brake fluid
flows.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master
Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 2199
6. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw.
7. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with fluid and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master
Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 2200
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Manual Bleeding
Manual Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
Brake system
1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB
or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to
the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front
wheel.
Rear drum brakes
3. Attach a rubber drain hose to the rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a
container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times
and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Loosen the bleeder screw until fluid flow stops.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the bleeder screw. 6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until
clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows.
7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system.
Front disc brakes
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master
Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 2201
9. Attach a rubber drain hose to the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free
end of the hose in a container partially filled with
clean brake fluid.
10. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake
pedal. 11. Loosen the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw until fluid flow stops. Maintain pressure
on the brake pedal and tighten the front disc brake
caliper bleeder screw.
12. Repeat Steps 10 and 11 until clear, bubble-free fluid flows.
13. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw.
14. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master
Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 2202
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair
Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed
Brake Master Cylinder-Bench Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. Support the brake master cylinder body in a soft jaw vise, and fill the brake master cylinder
reservoir with specified brake fluid.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
2. Install plugs in the front and rear brake outlet ports.
3. Loosen the plug in the front outlet port and slowly depress the primary piston.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master
Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 2203
4. Tighten the plug in the front outlet port and release the primary piston. 5. Repeat this procedure
until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 6. Repeat Steps 3, 4, and 5 for the rear outlet port with the
front outlet port plugged. 7. Tighten the plugs and attempt to depress the primary piston. The piston
will not depress if all the air is bled out of the system. 8. Install the reservoir cap and install the
brake master cylinder in the vehicle.
Brake Master Cylinder - In-Vehicle Bleed
Brake Master Cylinder-In-Vehicle Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and Polyglycol. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. Disconnect the brake outlet lines from the brake master cylinder and cap the lines. 2. Install
short brake hoses to the master cylinder outlet ports with the ends submerged in the brake master
cylinder reservoir.
3. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid
C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows from both brake
hoses.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master
Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 2204
5. Remove the short brake hoses and install the brake outlet lines.
Brake System Gravity Bleeding
Gravity Bleed
Brake system
1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB
or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to
the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front
wheel.
Rear drum brakes
3. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Loosen the rear wheel cylinder bleeder screw and leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid
flows.
4. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw.
Front disc brakes
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master
Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 2205
5. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Open the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Leave open until clear bubble-free brake fluid
flows.
6. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw.
7. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with fluid and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Brake System Manual Bleeding
Manual Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
Brake system
1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master
Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 2206
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB
or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to
the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front
wheel.
Rear drum brakes
3. Attach a rubber drain hose to the rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a
container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times
and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Loosen the bleeder screw until fluid flow stops.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the bleeder screw. 6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until
clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows.
7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system.
Front disc brakes
9. Attach a rubber drain hose to the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free
end of the hose in a container partially filled with
clean brake fluid.
10. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake
pedal. 11. Loosen the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw until fluid flow stops. Maintain pressure
on the brake pedal and tighten the front disc brake
caliper bleeder screw.
12. Repeat Steps 10 and 11 until clear, bubble-free fluid flows.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master
Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 2207
13. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw.
14. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Brake System Pressure Bleeding
Brake System Pressure Bleeding
Special Tool(s)
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air
may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the
hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. Clean the outside of the brake master cylinder reservoir.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master
Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 2208
2. Remove the reservoir cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with brake fluid.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
3. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers
of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the
instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter.
Install Brake Bleeder to the brake master cylinder reservoir, and attach the Brake Bleeder tank
hose to the fitting on the adapter.
4. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RH rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose
in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 5. Open the valve on the Brake Bleeder tank.
6. Loosen the bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then close the
bleeder screw and remove the rubber hose.
7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in
order from the LH rear wheel to the RH front wheel, ending with the LH front wheel. 9. Close the
Brake Bleeder tank valve and remove the tank hose from the adapter, and remove the adapter.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master
Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 2209
10. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Four Wheel Antilock Brake System Bleeding
Brake System Bleeding
Special Tool(s)
Anti-Lock Brakes Bleed
1. NOTE: Carrying out the System Bleed function drives trapped air from the hydraulic control unit
(HCU). Subsequent bleeding removes the air
from the brake hydraulic system to the bleeder screws.
NOTE: The engine must be running to provide adequate voltage to the HCU module during the
anti-lock control portion of the system bleed.
Connect the diagnostic tool.
2. Start the engine and depress the brake pedal to half of the full travel position. 3. Access
FUNCTION TEST mode and press the trigger to run the SYSTEM BLEED FUNCTION. 4. Manually
bleed the brake hydraulic system. 5. Repeat the procedure carrying out a total of two diagnostic
tool cycles and two manual bleed cycles.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions >
Customer Safety Information
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Customer Safety Information
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE
AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID
NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions >
Customer Safety Information > Page 2214
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE
AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID
NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Seats Removed
There are two deactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
side air bag concerns, and also when repairing any in-seat component in vehicles equipped with
side air bags.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal. This procedure will be used when
diagnosing a concern not related to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: ^
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag system is being serviced, the airbag system
must be deactivated using the appropriate deactivation procedure.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag floor
connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system with the seats in the
vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system, the seats must be removed
from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag floor
connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle
over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag system (lumbar,
climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the
restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air
bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the front seats. 9. Attach
a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag floor electrical connector.
10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical
connector. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical
connector. 12. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Seats Not Removed
There are two deactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
side air bag concerns, and also when repairing any in-seat component in vehicles equipped with
side air bags.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal. This procedure will be used when
diagnosing a concern not related to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position. 2. Disconnect the battery
ground cable.
WARNING: ^
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 2217
SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR
STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS
DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD
LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag system is being serviced, the airbag system
must be deactivated using the appropriate deactivation procedure.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag floor
connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system with the seats in the
vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system, the seats must be removed
from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag floor
connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle
over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag system (lumbar,
climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the
restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect
the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped
with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat.
10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical
connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to
the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect
the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Depowering and Repowering Procedure
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event
of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if
equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered.
NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition
switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system
(SRS) fault.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the
cover and the restraints control module (RCM)
fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB.
4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no
flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit
continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 2218
proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing or
replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side
impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair
have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected.
2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover.
4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front
of any air bag module when the
battery ground cable is connected.
Connect the battery ground cable.
5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator
and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool.
Seats Removed
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED
AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO
AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
4. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 2219
5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Install the front seats. 8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring
connector.
^ Reconnect the electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
10. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 11. Reconnect the battery
ground cable. 12. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Seats Not Removed
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED
AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO
AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring
connector.
^ Reconnect the electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
4. If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 6.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 2220
8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 2221
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist
Air Bag Reconnect Checklist
The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system
concern: 1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3.
Restraints Control Module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors
connected? 5. All sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected?
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 2222
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure
Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator
with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
^ fail to light.
^ remain lit continuously.
^ flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control
Module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an
SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag
indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box
Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box > Page 2228
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box > Page 2229
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box > Page 2230
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box > Page 2231
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box > Page 2232
Fuse: Locations Central Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box > Page 2233
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box > Page 2234
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box > Page 2235
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box > Page 2236
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuse: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2239
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2240
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2241
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2242
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2243
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2244
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2245
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2246
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2247
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2248
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2249
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2250
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2251
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2252
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2253
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2254
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2255
Fuse: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2256
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2257
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Battery Junction Box
Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2260
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2261
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2262
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2263
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2264
Fuse: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2265
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2266
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2267
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2268
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box
Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box > Page 2273
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box > Page 2274
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box > Page 2275
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box > Page 2276
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box > Page 2277
Fuse Block: Locations Central Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box > Page 2278
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box > Page 2279
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box > Page 2280
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box > Page 2281
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2284
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2285
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2286
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2287
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2288
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2289
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2290
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2291
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2292
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2293
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2294
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2295
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2296
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2297
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2298
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2299
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2300
Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2301
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2302
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2303
Fuse Block: Connector Views
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2304
Diagram 700-01-00-3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2305
Diagram 700-01-00-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box
Fuse Block: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2308
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2309
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2310
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2311
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2312
Fuse Block: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2313
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2314
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2315
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2316
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box > Page 2321
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box > Page 2322
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box > Page 2323
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box > Page 2324
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box > Page 2325
Relay Box: Locations Central Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box > Page 2326
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box > Page 2327
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box > Page 2328
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box > Page 2329
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Central Junction Box
Relay Box: Diagrams Central Junction Box
Diagram 700-01-00-3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Central Junction Box > Page 2332
Diagram 700-01-00-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Central Junction Box > Page 2333
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2336
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2337
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2338
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2339
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2340
Relay Box: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2341
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2342
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2343
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2344
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation
SERVICE ENGINE SOON
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine's emission control system. This
is commonly known as the On Board Diagnostic System (OBD II). This OBD II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards. The
OBD II system also assists the service technician in properly servicing your vehicle.
The SERVICE ENGINE SOON indicator light illuminates when the ignition is first turned to the ON
position to check the bulb. If it comes on after the engine is started, on of the engine's emission
control systems may be malfunctioning. The light may illuminate without a driveability concern
being noted. The vehicle will ususally be drivable and will not require towing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2349
Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair
Solid SERVICE ENGINE SOON light
This means that the On Board Diagnostic System (OBD II) has detected a malfunction. Temporary
malfunctions may cause your SERVICE ENGINE SOON light to illuminate. Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel. (The engine may misfire or run poorly.) 2. Poor fuel quality or
water in the fuel. 3. The fuel cap may not have been properly installed and securely tightened.
The temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel and/or
properly installing and securely tightening the gas cap. After three driving cycles with out these or
any other temporary malfunctions present, the SERVICE ENGINE SOON light should turn off. (A
driving cycle consists of a cold engine start-up followed by mixed city/highway driving.) No
additional vehicle service is required.
Blinking SERVICE ENGINE SOON light
Engine misfire is occurring which could cause damage to your catalytic converter. You should drive
in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
at the first available opportunity.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL)
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
Check Engine, Service Engine Soon Or ISO Standard Engine Symbol
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) (Figure 15) alerts the driver that the Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) has detected an OBD II emission-related component or system fault. When this
occurs, an OBD II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set.
^ The MIL is located on the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE
SOON or ISO standard engine symbol (Figure 16).
^ Power is supplied to the MIL whenever the ignition switch is in the RUN or START position.
^ The MIL will remain on in the RUN/START mode as a bulb check during the instrument cluster
proveout for approximately 4 seconds.
^ If the MIL remains on after the bulb check: The PCM illuminates the MIL for an emission related concern and a DTC will be present.
- The instrument cluster will illuminate the MIL if the PCM does not send a control message to the
instrument cluster.
- The PCM is operating in the Hardware Limited Operation Strategy (HLOS).
- The MIL circuit is shorted to ground.
^ If the MIL remains off (during the bulb check): Bulb is damaged.
- MIL circuit is open.
^ To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the Scan Tool must be sent, or three
consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a fault.
^ For any MIL concern, GO to Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection.
^ If the MIL blinks at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition could possibly exist.
^ If the MIL blinks erratically, an intermittent open B+ to the bulb or an intermittent short to ground
in the MIL circuit exist. Also, the PCM can reset while cranking if battery voltage is low.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair
The manufacturer does NOT show that this vehicle is equipped with an oil change reminder lamp.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation
JACKING
WARNING: ^
DO NOT RUN THE ENGINE WHEN JACKING THE VEHICLE. THE WHEELS CONTACTING THE
GROUND COULD CAUSE THE VEHICLE TO MOVE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ MAKE SURE THE JACK AND JACK STANDS ARE CORRECTLY LOCATED TO PREVENT
THE VEHICLE FROM FALLING. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT
IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ WHEEL CHOCKS SHOULD BE USED TO PREVENT THE VEHICLE FROM ROLLING AND
FALLING OFF THE JACK. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
CAUTION: The service jack provided with the vehicle is only intended to be used in an emergency
for changing a deflated tire. Never use the service jack to hoist the vehicle for any other service.
Refer to the Owner Guide when using the jack supplied with the vehicle.
Jacking Points - Front
1. The front jacking point is at the bolt head of the lower control arm.
Jacking Points - Rear
1. The rear jacking points are located on the rear trailing arms.
LIFTING
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 2360
Lifting Points
1. The lifting points are part of the uni-body structure.
CAUTION: Damage to the suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if care
is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment
Technical Service Bulletin # 02-1-6 Date: 020121
Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment
Article No. 02-1-6
01/21/02
^ WHEELS - ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT HUNTER G5P9700 - SERVICE TIPS
^ VIBRATION - ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT HUNTER G5P9700 - SERVICE
TIPS
FORD: 1997 THUNDERBIRD 1997-2000 CONTOUR 1997-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, ESCORT,
MUSTANG, TAURUS 2000-2002 FOCUS 2002 THUNDERBIRD 1997-2002 E SERIES,
EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 1999-2002 SUPER DUTY F SERIES
2000-2002 EXCURSION 2001-2002 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT
LINCOLN:
1997-1998 MARK VIII 1997-2002 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 2000-2002 LS 1998-2002
NAVIGATOR 2002 BLACKWOOD
MERCURY: 1997 COUGAR 1997-2000 MYSTIQUE 1997-2002 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE
1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2002 MOUNTAINEER, VILLAGER
ISSUE The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance when using tire/wheel assembly road
force measurement equipment such as the Hunter GSP97OO. This bulletin is authored and
endorsed by Hunter, Michelin, Goodyear, Continental/General, Hankook, Bridgestone/Firestone
and Pirelli. Items addressed are software upgrades, road test (exercise tires), assembly center
verification and warranty restrictions.
This type of equipment can be a valuable tool to improve customer satisfaction when used as a
vibration repair tool. This type of equipment can also provide a high level of customer satisfaction
when used as an assembly too! when the customer has purchased new wheels/tires in the
"Around-the-Wheel" program.
ACTION The Hunter GSP9700/9712 road force measurement tool is NOT to be used for
determining if a tire or wheel meets a specification. It can be used as a service diagnostic tool to
minimize road force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. The tool such as the Hunter GSP97OO
can approximate the low point of the "'1heel and the high point of the tire. This allows the tire to be
matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly road force variation. This will
minimize the contribution to vibration from the tire/wheel assembly.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 306000, 703000
Service Information
NOTE
TRADITIONAL WHEEL BALANCER "MATCH-MOUNTING" OR "WEIGHT OPTIMIZATION"
ACHIEVES WEIGHT MINIMIZATION AND WILL NOT ACHIEVE THE SAME RESULTS.
NOTE
WARRANTY CLAIMS CANNOT BE SUBMITTED FOR TIRE/WHEEL REPLACEMENT BASED ON
HUNTER G5P9700 RESULTS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2365
NOTE
UPGRADING SOFTWARE TO VERSION 2.1 OR GREATER WILL ENHANCE THE
TECHNICIANS CAPABILITY TO MINIMIZE THE ROAD FORCE VARIATION OF THE
TIRE/WHEEL ASSEMBLY. THE VERSION OF SOFTWARE CAN BE IDENTIFIED FROM THE
START-UP SCREEN BY PRESSING THE CENTER SHIFT KEY ONCE (I.E. HAS TWO GREEN
ARROWS) AND SELECTING THE K1 KEY ("IDENTIFY SOFTWARE"). IF THE SYSTEM IS IN
THE BALANCE MODE, THE START-UP SCREEN CAN BE ACCESSED BY PRESSING THE "R"
KEY TWICE (THIS IS JUST TO THE LEFT OF THE START KEY). CONTACT YOUR LOCAL
HUNTER ENGINEERING REPRESENTATIVE TO ORDER SOFTWARE UPGRADES.
1. Check the inflation pressure of all four tires and adjust to the vehicle manufacturers
recommended pressure. The vehicle manufacturers recommended tire pressure for the original
equipment tires can be found on the drivers side door placard.
2. Road test the vehicle on a smooth road for a minimum of 10 miles. Performance of the road test
at highway speeds is preferred.
NOTE
THIS MUST BE PERFORMED TO "EXERCISE" THE TIRES AND ELIMINATE "COLD" FLAT
SPOTTING THAT OCCURS DUE TO SHORT-PERIOD VEHICLE STORAGE OR PARKING. IF
THE VEHICLE'S TIRES ARE NOT EXERCISED FIRST, ACCURACY OF THE ROAD FORCE
MEASUREMENTS CAN VARY SIGNIFICANTLY, EVEN IF THE VEHICLE IS PARKED/STORED
IN ONE LOCATION FOR ONLY A SHORT PERIOD OF TIME (E.G. 20 MINUTES).
3. Perform the road force measurement IMMEDIATELY after exercising the tires. If the road force
measurement cannot be performed immediately, lift all four tires off the ground with a hoist or jack
stands to prevent measurement errors due to further flat spotting.
4. Assembly centering verification MUST be performed and PASSED prior to any road force
measurement.
For those with a software version other than 2.1 the centering verification must be performed
manually.
a. Spin assembly to measure. Record the assembly R1H.
b. Loosen wing-nut.
c. Rotate and reposition assembly and cone/adapter to a different mounting location (180 degrees).
d. Tighten wing-nut.
e. Re-spin to measure. Record the assembly R1H.
f. Compare results obtained in STEP a with those obtained in STEP e.
g. If the difference in assembly R1H measurements is less than 5 lbs., the assembly centering
verification PASSES and technician can proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the
centering verification FAILS proceed to STEP h.
h. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE.
^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application
^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged
5. For those with software version 2.1 the following procedure will lead the technician through a
Centering Check.
a. From the balance mode screen press the center SHIFT KEY ONCE (i.e. has two green arrows).
b. Push the "K1" button to select Perform Centering Check.
c. Follow the instructions.
d. If Centering Check PASSES proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the Centering Check
fails proceed to step e.
e. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE.
^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application
^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged
6. Prior to installing assembly on the vehicle balance assembly utilizing the two-plane dynamic
balancing mode.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2366
Technical Service Bulletin # 00L12 Date: 010101
Information
00L12
SPECIAL FIELD ACTION
All 2001 Model Year Passenger Cars and Light Trucks up to and Including F550 Super Duty
Vehicles Sold in the U.S., U.S. Territories, Mexico, and Canada - Warranty Guide Supplement
Original - January 2001
Dealer Letter
Attachment I ^
Administrative Information
Attachment II ^
Labor Allowances
Attachment III ^
Technical Information
Customer Notification Letter
Supplement # 1, February 5, 2001 - Updated Information
All 2001 Model Year Passenger Cars and Light Trucks up to and Including F550 Super Duty
Vehicles Sold in the U.S., U.S. Territories, Mexico, and Canada - Warranty Guide Supplement
Supplement # 2, February 19, 2001 - Updated Information
All 2001 Model Year Passenger Cars and light Trucks up to and Including F550 Super Duty
Vehicles Sold in the U.S., U.S. Territories, Mexico, and Canada - Warranty Guide Supplement
Special Field Action 00L12, Supplement # 1 dated 2/05/01 - Updated Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2367
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2368
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS
Will not be active for this program.
PLEASE NOTE
Correct all units in dealer inventory prior to delivery to the customer.
DEALER - OWNER CONTACT
An owner list will not be provided for this program.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using DWE.
^ Refer to ACES II manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2369
LABOR ALLOWANCES
Attachment III - Technical Information
SPECIAL FIELD ACTION 00L12 WARRANTY GUIDE SUPPLEMENT
VEHICLES COVERED BY THE NEW TIRE WARRANTY All 2001 model year passenger cars and
light trucks up to and including F550 Super Duty vehicles sold in the U.S., U.S. Territories, Mexico,
and Canada, built through December 31, 2000.
NOTE:
Information regarding tire warranty will be included in the Warranty Guide for vehicles produced
after December 31, 2000.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Obtain a copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement.
NOTE:
Beginning January 2001, dealers will begin to receive vehicle notification letters, which includes the
Warranty Guide Supplement, for in-stock units. In the interim, until notification letters begin to arrive
at the dealership, please make copies of the Warranty Guide Supplement (attached to this
document).
2. Locate the vehicle Warranty Guide (located in the glove compartment).
3. Place a copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement in the Warranty Guide of the vehicle.
PLEASE NOTE:
This procedure is for dealer stock units only. Owners of vehicles previously delivered will receive a
copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement with their notification letter.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2370
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2371
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2372
Supplement # 1 - Information
Supplement # 1, February 5, 2001 - Updated Information
Cover Letter
Dealer Letter
Attachment I ^
Administrative Information
Attachment II ^
Labor Allowances
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2373
Attachment III ^
Technical Information
Customer Notification Letter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2374
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2375
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2376
Supplement # 1 - Attachment I
OASIS
Will not be active for this program.
PLEASE NOTE
Correct all units in dealer inventory prior to delivery to the customer.
DEALER - OWNER CONTACT
An owner list will not be provided for this program.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using DWE.
^ Refer to ACES II manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Supplement # 1 - Attachment II
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2377
LABOR ALLOWANCES
Supplement # 1 - Attachment III
WARRANTY GUIDE SUPPLEMENT
NOTE:
Information regarding tire warranty will be included in the Warranty Guide for vehicles produced
after the end date listed above.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2378
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Obtain a copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement.
NOTE:
Beginning January 2001, dealers will begin to receive vehicle notification letters, which includes the
Warranty Guide Supplement, for in-stock units. In the interim, until notification letters begin to arrive
at the dealership, please make copies of the Warranty Guide Supplement (included in this
document).
2. Locate the vehicle Warranty Guide (located in the glove compartment).
3. Place a copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement in the Warranty Guide of the vehicle.
PLEASE NOTE:
This procedure is for dealer stock units only. Owners of vehicles previously delivered will receive a
copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement with their notification letter.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2379
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2380
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2381
Supplement # 2 - Information
Supplement # 2, February 19, 2001 - Updated Information
Cover Letter
Dealer Letter
Attachment I ^
Administrative Information
Attachment II ^Labor Allowances
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2382
Attachment III ^
Technical Information
Apology Letter
Customer Notification Letter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2383
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2384
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2385
Supplement # 2 - Attachment I
OASIS
Will not be active for this program.
PLEASE NOTE
Correct all units in dealer inventory prior to delivery to the customer.
DEALER - OWNER CONTACT
An owner list will not be provided for this program.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using DWE.
^ Refer to ACES II manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Supplement # 2 - Attachment II
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2386
LABOR ALLOWANCES
Supplement # 2 - Attachment III
WARRANTY GUIDE SUPPLEMENT
NOTE:
Information regarding tire warranty will be included in the Warranty Guide for vehicles produced
after the end date listed above.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2387
1. Obtain a copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement. Note: Beginning January 2001, dealers will
begin to receive vehicle notification letters, which includes the Warranty Guide Supplement, for
in-stock units. In the interim, until notification letters begin to arrive at the dealership, please make
copies of the Warranty Guide Supplement (attached to this document).
2. Locate the vehicle Warranty Guide (located in the glove compartment).
3. Place a copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement in the Warranty Guide of the vehicle.
PLEASE NOTE:
This procedure is for dealer stock units only. Owners of vehicles previously delivered will receive a
copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement with their notification letter.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2388
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2389
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2390
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 2391
Tires: Specifications
Aluminum Max. Radial Runout 0.06 in
Max. Lateral Runout 0.08 in
Steel Max. Radial Runout 0.06 in
Max. Lateral Runout 0.08 in
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Recalls: > NHTSA00V260001 > Sep > 00 > Recall 00V260001: Wheel Separation From Vehicle
Wheels: Recalls Recall 00V260001: Wheel Separation From Vehicle
Some 4x2 sport utility vehicles not equipped with an antilock braking system may have
inadvertently been built with 4x4 rear hubs instead of 4x2 hubs. If the incorrect hubs are installed
on a 4x2 vehicle, the rear wheels can loosen, or in some cases, separate from the vehicle.
This condition could cause loss of control of the vehicle, increasing the risk of a crash.
Dealers will inspect the rear hubs and, if necessary, replace them. Owner notification began
September 25, 2000. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon
service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Ford at
1-800-392-3673. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety
Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-11-2 > Jun > 02 > Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels
Wheels: Customer Interest Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels
Article No. 02-11-2
06/10/02
BRAKES - EXCESSIVE BRAKE DUST - INFORMATION AND CLEANING TIPS
FORD: 1999-2002 ESCORT 1999-2003 CROWN VICTORIA 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002
ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1999-2003 GRAND MARQUIS
ISSUE
Under normal operating conditions, customers may notice accumulation of brake dust on their
wheels. Some brake dust is inevitable as brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise. The
use of modern friction materials with emphasis on improved performance and environmental
considerations can lead to more dust than in the past.
ACTION
Brake dust can be cleaned by weekly washing with Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A) and a soft
sponge. Heavier deposits can be removed with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A).
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 108000, 301000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 02-11-2 > Jun > 02 > Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels
Article No. 02-11-2
06/10/02
BRAKES - EXCESSIVE BRAKE DUST - INFORMATION AND CLEANING TIPS
FORD: 1999-2002 ESCORT 1999-2003 CROWN VICTORIA 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002
ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1999-2003 GRAND MARQUIS
ISSUE
Under normal operating conditions, customers may notice accumulation of brake dust on their
wheels. Some brake dust is inevitable as brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise. The
use of modern friction materials with emphasis on improved performance and environmental
considerations can lead to more dust than in the past.
ACTION
Brake dust can be cleaned by weekly washing with Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A) and a soft
sponge. Heavier deposits can be removed with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A).
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 108000, 301000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 02-1-6 > Jan > 02 > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement
Equipment
Technical Service Bulletin # 02-1-6 Date: 020121
Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment
Article No. 02-1-6
01/21/02
^ WHEELS - ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT HUNTER G5P9700 - SERVICE TIPS
^ VIBRATION - ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT HUNTER G5P9700 - SERVICE
TIPS
FORD: 1997 THUNDERBIRD 1997-2000 CONTOUR 1997-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, ESCORT,
MUSTANG, TAURUS 2000-2002 FOCUS 2002 THUNDERBIRD 1997-2002 E SERIES,
EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 1999-2002 SUPER DUTY F SERIES
2000-2002 EXCURSION 2001-2002 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT
LINCOLN:
1997-1998 MARK VIII 1997-2002 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 2000-2002 LS 1998-2002
NAVIGATOR 2002 BLACKWOOD
MERCURY: 1997 COUGAR 1997-2000 MYSTIQUE 1997-2002 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE
1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2002 MOUNTAINEER, VILLAGER
ISSUE The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance when using tire/wheel assembly road
force measurement equipment such as the Hunter GSP97OO. This bulletin is authored and
endorsed by Hunter, Michelin, Goodyear, Continental/General, Hankook, Bridgestone/Firestone
and Pirelli. Items addressed are software upgrades, road test (exercise tires), assembly center
verification and warranty restrictions.
This type of equipment can be a valuable tool to improve customer satisfaction when used as a
vibration repair tool. This type of equipment can also provide a high level of customer satisfaction
when used as an assembly too! when the customer has purchased new wheels/tires in the
"Around-the-Wheel" program.
ACTION The Hunter GSP9700/9712 road force measurement tool is NOT to be used for
determining if a tire or wheel meets a specification. It can be used as a service diagnostic tool to
minimize road force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. The tool such as the Hunter GSP97OO
can approximate the low point of the "'1heel and the high point of the tire. This allows the tire to be
matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly road force variation. This will
minimize the contribution to vibration from the tire/wheel assembly.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 306000, 703000
Service Information
NOTE
TRADITIONAL WHEEL BALANCER "MATCH-MOUNTING" OR "WEIGHT OPTIMIZATION"
ACHIEVES WEIGHT MINIMIZATION AND WILL NOT ACHIEVE THE SAME RESULTS.
NOTE
WARRANTY CLAIMS CANNOT BE SUBMITTED FOR TIRE/WHEEL REPLACEMENT BASED ON
HUNTER G5P9700 RESULTS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 02-1-6 > Jan > 02 > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement
Equipment > Page 2414
NOTE
UPGRADING SOFTWARE TO VERSION 2.1 OR GREATER WILL ENHANCE THE
TECHNICIANS CAPABILITY TO MINIMIZE THE ROAD FORCE VARIATION OF THE
TIRE/WHEEL ASSEMBLY. THE VERSION OF SOFTWARE CAN BE IDENTIFIED FROM THE
START-UP SCREEN BY PRESSING THE CENTER SHIFT KEY ONCE (I.E. HAS TWO GREEN
ARROWS) AND SELECTING THE K1 KEY ("IDENTIFY SOFTWARE"). IF THE SYSTEM IS IN
THE BALANCE MODE, THE START-UP SCREEN CAN BE ACCESSED BY PRESSING THE "R"
KEY TWICE (THIS IS JUST TO THE LEFT OF THE START KEY). CONTACT YOUR LOCAL
HUNTER ENGINEERING REPRESENTATIVE TO ORDER SOFTWARE UPGRADES.
1. Check the inflation pressure of all four tires and adjust to the vehicle manufacturers
recommended pressure. The vehicle manufacturers recommended tire pressure for the original
equipment tires can be found on the drivers side door placard.
2. Road test the vehicle on a smooth road for a minimum of 10 miles. Performance of the road test
at highway speeds is preferred.
NOTE
THIS MUST BE PERFORMED TO "EXERCISE" THE TIRES AND ELIMINATE "COLD" FLAT
SPOTTING THAT OCCURS DUE TO SHORT-PERIOD VEHICLE STORAGE OR PARKING. IF
THE VEHICLE'S TIRES ARE NOT EXERCISED FIRST, ACCURACY OF THE ROAD FORCE
MEASUREMENTS CAN VARY SIGNIFICANTLY, EVEN IF THE VEHICLE IS PARKED/STORED
IN ONE LOCATION FOR ONLY A SHORT PERIOD OF TIME (E.G. 20 MINUTES).
3. Perform the road force measurement IMMEDIATELY after exercising the tires. If the road force
measurement cannot be performed immediately, lift all four tires off the ground with a hoist or jack
stands to prevent measurement errors due to further flat spotting.
4. Assembly centering verification MUST be performed and PASSED prior to any road force
measurement.
For those with a software version other than 2.1 the centering verification must be performed
manually.
a. Spin assembly to measure. Record the assembly R1H.
b. Loosen wing-nut.
c. Rotate and reposition assembly and cone/adapter to a different mounting location (180 degrees).
d. Tighten wing-nut.
e. Re-spin to measure. Record the assembly R1H.
f. Compare results obtained in STEP a with those obtained in STEP e.
g. If the difference in assembly R1H measurements is less than 5 lbs., the assembly centering
verification PASSES and technician can proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the
centering verification FAILS proceed to STEP h.
h. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE.
^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application
^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged
5. For those with software version 2.1 the following procedure will lead the technician through a
Centering Check.
a. From the balance mode screen press the center SHIFT KEY ONCE (i.e. has two green arrows).
b. Push the "K1" button to select Perform Centering Check.
c. Follow the instructions.
d. If Centering Check PASSES proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the Centering Check
fails proceed to step e.
e. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE.
^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application
^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged
6. Prior to installing assembly on the vehicle balance assembly utilizing the two-plane dynamic
balancing mode.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > NHTSA00V260001 > Sep > 00 > Recall 00V260001: Wheel
Separation From Vehicle
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 00V260001: Wheel Separation From Vehicle
Some 4x2 sport utility vehicles not equipped with an antilock braking system may have
inadvertently been built with 4x4 rear hubs instead of 4x2 hubs. If the incorrect hubs are installed
on a 4x2 vehicle, the rear wheels can loosen, or in some cases, separate from the vehicle.
This condition could cause loss of control of the vehicle, increasing the risk of a crash.
Dealers will inspect the rear hubs and, if necessary, replace them. Owner notification began
September 25, 2000. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon
service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Ford at
1-800-392-3673. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety
Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 02-11-2 > Jun > 02 > Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels
Article No. 02-11-2
06/10/02
BRAKES - EXCESSIVE BRAKE DUST - INFORMATION AND CLEANING TIPS
FORD: 1999-2002 ESCORT 1999-2003 CROWN VICTORIA 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002
ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1999-2003 GRAND MARQUIS
ISSUE
Under normal operating conditions, customers may notice accumulation of brake dust on their
wheels. Some brake dust is inevitable as brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise. The
use of modern friction materials with emphasis on improved performance and environmental
considerations can lead to more dust than in the past.
ACTION
Brake dust can be cleaned by weekly washing with Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A) and a soft
sponge. Heavier deposits can be removed with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A).
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 108000, 301000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 02-1-6 > Jan > 02 > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement
Equipment
Technical Service Bulletin # 02-1-6 Date: 020121
Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment
Article No. 02-1-6
01/21/02
^ WHEELS - ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT HUNTER G5P9700 - SERVICE TIPS
^ VIBRATION - ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT HUNTER G5P9700 - SERVICE
TIPS
FORD: 1997 THUNDERBIRD 1997-2000 CONTOUR 1997-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, ESCORT,
MUSTANG, TAURUS 2000-2002 FOCUS 2002 THUNDERBIRD 1997-2002 E SERIES,
EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 1999-2002 SUPER DUTY F SERIES
2000-2002 EXCURSION 2001-2002 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT
LINCOLN:
1997-1998 MARK VIII 1997-2002 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 2000-2002 LS 1998-2002
NAVIGATOR 2002 BLACKWOOD
MERCURY: 1997 COUGAR 1997-2000 MYSTIQUE 1997-2002 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE
1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2002 MOUNTAINEER, VILLAGER
ISSUE The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance when using tire/wheel assembly road
force measurement equipment such as the Hunter GSP97OO. This bulletin is authored and
endorsed by Hunter, Michelin, Goodyear, Continental/General, Hankook, Bridgestone/Firestone
and Pirelli. Items addressed are software upgrades, road test (exercise tires), assembly center
verification and warranty restrictions.
This type of equipment can be a valuable tool to improve customer satisfaction when used as a
vibration repair tool. This type of equipment can also provide a high level of customer satisfaction
when used as an assembly too! when the customer has purchased new wheels/tires in the
"Around-the-Wheel" program.
ACTION The Hunter GSP9700/9712 road force measurement tool is NOT to be used for
determining if a tire or wheel meets a specification. It can be used as a service diagnostic tool to
minimize road force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. The tool such as the Hunter GSP97OO
can approximate the low point of the "'1heel and the high point of the tire. This allows the tire to be
matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly road force variation. This will
minimize the contribution to vibration from the tire/wheel assembly.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 306000, 703000
Service Information
NOTE
TRADITIONAL WHEEL BALANCER "MATCH-MOUNTING" OR "WEIGHT OPTIMIZATION"
ACHIEVES WEIGHT MINIMIZATION AND WILL NOT ACHIEVE THE SAME RESULTS.
NOTE
WARRANTY CLAIMS CANNOT BE SUBMITTED FOR TIRE/WHEEL REPLACEMENT BASED ON
HUNTER G5P9700 RESULTS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 02-1-6 > Jan > 02 > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement
Equipment > Page 2428
NOTE
UPGRADING SOFTWARE TO VERSION 2.1 OR GREATER WILL ENHANCE THE
TECHNICIANS CAPABILITY TO MINIMIZE THE ROAD FORCE VARIATION OF THE
TIRE/WHEEL ASSEMBLY. THE VERSION OF SOFTWARE CAN BE IDENTIFIED FROM THE
START-UP SCREEN BY PRESSING THE CENTER SHIFT KEY ONCE (I.E. HAS TWO GREEN
ARROWS) AND SELECTING THE K1 KEY ("IDENTIFY SOFTWARE"). IF THE SYSTEM IS IN
THE BALANCE MODE, THE START-UP SCREEN CAN BE ACCESSED BY PRESSING THE "R"
KEY TWICE (THIS IS JUST TO THE LEFT OF THE START KEY). CONTACT YOUR LOCAL
HUNTER ENGINEERING REPRESENTATIVE TO ORDER SOFTWARE UPGRADES.
1. Check the inflation pressure of all four tires and adjust to the vehicle manufacturers
recommended pressure. The vehicle manufacturers recommended tire pressure for the original
equipment tires can be found on the drivers side door placard.
2. Road test the vehicle on a smooth road for a minimum of 10 miles. Performance of the road test
at highway speeds is preferred.
NOTE
THIS MUST BE PERFORMED TO "EXERCISE" THE TIRES AND ELIMINATE "COLD" FLAT
SPOTTING THAT OCCURS DUE TO SHORT-PERIOD VEHICLE STORAGE OR PARKING. IF
THE VEHICLE'S TIRES ARE NOT EXERCISED FIRST, ACCURACY OF THE ROAD FORCE
MEASUREMENTS CAN VARY SIGNIFICANTLY, EVEN IF THE VEHICLE IS PARKED/STORED
IN ONE LOCATION FOR ONLY A SHORT PERIOD OF TIME (E.G. 20 MINUTES).
3. Perform the road force measurement IMMEDIATELY after exercising the tires. If the road force
measurement cannot be performed immediately, lift all four tires off the ground with a hoist or jack
stands to prevent measurement errors due to further flat spotting.
4. Assembly centering verification MUST be performed and PASSED prior to any road force
measurement.
For those with a software version other than 2.1 the centering verification must be performed
manually.
a. Spin assembly to measure. Record the assembly R1H.
b. Loosen wing-nut.
c. Rotate and reposition assembly and cone/adapter to a different mounting location (180 degrees).
d. Tighten wing-nut.
e. Re-spin to measure. Record the assembly R1H.
f. Compare results obtained in STEP a with those obtained in STEP e.
g. If the difference in assembly R1H measurements is less than 5 lbs., the assembly centering
verification PASSES and technician can proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the
centering verification FAILS proceed to STEP h.
h. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE.
^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application
^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged
5. For those with software version 2.1 the following procedure will lead the technician through a
Centering Check.
a. From the balance mode screen press the center SHIFT KEY ONCE (i.e. has two green arrows).
b. Push the "K1" button to select Perform Centering Check.
c. Follow the instructions.
d. If Centering Check PASSES proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the Centering Check
fails proceed to step e.
e. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE.
^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application
^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged
6. Prior to installing assembly on the vehicle balance assembly utilizing the two-plane dynamic
balancing mode.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 02-1-6 > Jan > 02 > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement
Equipment > Page 2434
NOTE
UPGRADING SOFTWARE TO VERSION 2.1 OR GREATER WILL ENHANCE THE
TECHNICIANS CAPABILITY TO MINIMIZE THE ROAD FORCE VARIATION OF THE
TIRE/WHEEL ASSEMBLY. THE VERSION OF SOFTWARE CAN BE IDENTIFIED FROM THE
START-UP SCREEN BY PRESSING THE CENTER SHIFT KEY ONCE (I.E. HAS TWO GREEN
ARROWS) AND SELECTING THE K1 KEY ("IDENTIFY SOFTWARE"). IF THE SYSTEM IS IN
THE BALANCE MODE, THE START-UP SCREEN CAN BE ACCESSED BY PRESSING THE "R"
KEY TWICE (THIS IS JUST TO THE LEFT OF THE START KEY). CONTACT YOUR LOCAL
HUNTER ENGINEERING REPRESENTATIVE TO ORDER SOFTWARE UPGRADES.
1. Check the inflation pressure of all four tires and adjust to the vehicle manufacturers
recommended pressure. The vehicle manufacturers recommended tire pressure for the original
equipment tires can be found on the drivers side door placard.
2. Road test the vehicle on a smooth road for a minimum of 10 miles. Performance of the road test
at highway speeds is preferred.
NOTE
THIS MUST BE PERFORMED TO "EXERCISE" THE TIRES AND ELIMINATE "COLD" FLAT
SPOTTING THAT OCCURS DUE TO SHORT-PERIOD VEHICLE STORAGE OR PARKING. IF
THE VEHICLE'S TIRES ARE NOT EXERCISED FIRST, ACCURACY OF THE ROAD FORCE
MEASUREMENTS CAN VARY SIGNIFICANTLY, EVEN IF THE VEHICLE IS PARKED/STORED
IN ONE LOCATION FOR ONLY A SHORT PERIOD OF TIME (E.G. 20 MINUTES).
3. Perform the road force measurement IMMEDIATELY after exercising the tires. If the road force
measurement cannot be performed immediately, lift all four tires off the ground with a hoist or jack
stands to prevent measurement errors due to further flat spotting.
4. Assembly centering verification MUST be performed and PASSED prior to any road force
measurement.
For those with a software version other than 2.1 the centering verification must be performed
manually.
a. Spin assembly to measure. Record the assembly R1H.
b. Loosen wing-nut.
c. Rotate and reposition assembly and cone/adapter to a different mounting location (180 degrees).
d. Tighten wing-nut.
e. Re-spin to measure. Record the assembly R1H.
f. Compare results obtained in STEP a with those obtained in STEP e.
g. If the difference in assembly R1H measurements is less than 5 lbs., the assembly centering
verification PASSES and technician can proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the
centering verification FAILS proceed to STEP h.
h. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE.
^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application
^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged
5. For those with software version 2.1 the following procedure will lead the technician through a
Centering Check.
a. From the balance mode screen press the center SHIFT KEY ONCE (i.e. has two green arrows).
b. Push the "K1" button to select Perform Centering Check.
c. Follow the instructions.
d. If Centering Check PASSES proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the Centering Check
fails proceed to step e.
e. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE.
^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application
^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged
6. Prior to installing assembly on the vehicle balance assembly utilizing the two-plane dynamic
balancing mode.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > NHTSA00V260001 > Sep > 00 > Recall 00V260001: Wheel Separation
From Vehicle
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 00V260001: Wheel Separation From Vehicle
Some 4x2 sport utility vehicles not equipped with an antilock braking system may have
inadvertently been built with 4x4 rear hubs instead of 4x2 hubs. If the incorrect hubs are installed
on a 4x2 vehicle, the rear wheels can loosen, or in some cases, separate from the vehicle.
This condition could cause loss of control of the vehicle, increasing the risk of a crash.
Dealers will inspect the rear hubs and, if necessary, replace them. Owner notification began
September 25, 2000. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon
service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Ford at
1-800-392-3673. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety
Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2439
Wheels: Specifications
Aluminum Max. Radial Runout 0.06 in
Max. Lateral Runout 0.08 in
Steel Max. Radial Runout 0.06 in
Max. Lateral Runout 0.08 in
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Straightening Wheels, Rims or Components
Wheels: Service and Repair Straightening Wheels, Rims or Components
1. NOTE: Do not heat wheels in an attempt to soften them for straightening to repair damage. The
special alloy used in these wheels is heat-treated.
Uncontrolled heating from welding affects the properties of the material.
Do not weld the wheels for any reason.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Straightening Wheels, Rims or Components > Page 2442
Wheels: Service and Repair Wheel Leaks
1. Pinhole leaks in cast aluminum wheels compromise the wheel integrity. Install a new wheel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection
Wheel Bearing Check
1. Raise the vehicle until the front tires are off the floor.
^ Make sure the wheels are in a straight forward position.
2. Spin the tire by hand to check the wheel bearings for roughness.
NOTE: Make sure the wheel rotates freely and that the brake pads are retraced sufficiently to allow
free movement of the tire and wheel assembly.
3. Grip each front tire at the top and bottom and move the wheel inward and outward while lifting
the weight of the tire off the front wheel bearing.
4. If the tire and wheel (hub) is loose on the spindle, does not rotate freely, or has a rough feeling
when spun, carry out one of the following:
1 On vehicles with inner and outer bearings, inspect the bearings and cups for wear or damage.
Adjust or install new bearing and cups as
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Page 2446
necessary.
2 On vehicles with one sealed bearing install a new wheel hub.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front
Special Tools
Special Tools
Special Tools
Removal
NOTE: Install a new wheel bearing when the wheel hub is removed.
All vehicles 1. Remove the brake disc.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2449
2. Remove the wheel hub nut.
3. Remove the tie rod end nut.
1 Remove the cotter pin.
2 Remove the nut.
4. Using the special tool, separate the tie rod end from the knuckle.
Vehicles with ABS
5. Remove the bolt and position the anti-lock brake sensor aside.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2450
6. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
1 Remove the pinch bolt.
2 Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
7. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the wheel knuckle.
^ Position the halfshaft aside and support.
8. Remove the wheel knuckle.
1 Remove the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts.
2 Remove the wheel knuckle.
9. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing and knuckle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2451
10. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle, after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
11. Remove the snap ring.
12. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
NOTE: The brake disc shield is pressed on.
13. If necessary, remove the brake disc shield.
Installation
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2452
1. If necessary, install a disc brake shield.
2. Using the special tool, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
3. Install the snap ring.
4. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2453
5. Install the wheel knuckle.
1 Position the wheel knuckle.
2 Install the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts.
6. Using the special tool, insert the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
7. Install the pinch bolt into the wheel knuckle.
^ Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle.
Vehicles with ABS
8. Install the anti-lock brake sensor and tighten the bolt.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2454
9. Install the tie rod end into the wheel knuckle.
1 Install the tie rod end nut.
2 Install a new cotter pin.
10. Install the wheel hub nut. 11. Install the brake disc.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2455
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear
Special Tools
Removal
1. Remove the brake drum.
2. Remove the wheel hub nut.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2456
3. Using the special tool, remove the wheel hub.
4. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle, after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
5. Remove the snap ring.
6. Using the special tools, remove the wheel bearing outer race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2457
1. Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
2. Install the snap ring.
3. Using the special tool, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
4. Install the wheel hub nut. 5. Install the brake drum.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information >
Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Front Wheel Hub Nut 290 Nm (214 lb-ft)
Rear Wheel Hub Nut (2WD) 290 Nm (214 lb-ft)
Rear Wheel Hub Nut (4WD) 290 Nm (214 lb-ft)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications
Wheel Fastener: Specifications
Wheel Nuts (all wheels) 133 Nm (98 lb-ft)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front wheel bearing.
2. Press out the wheel studs. 3. To install. reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2467
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel bearing.
2. Press out the wheel studs. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation
Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation
JACKING
WARNING: ^
DO NOT RUN THE ENGINE WHEN JACKING THE VEHICLE. THE WHEELS CONTACTING THE
GROUND COULD CAUSE THE VEHICLE TO MOVE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ MAKE SURE THE JACK AND JACK STANDS ARE CORRECTLY LOCATED TO PREVENT
THE VEHICLE FROM FALLING. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT
IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ WHEEL CHOCKS SHOULD BE USED TO PREVENT THE VEHICLE FROM ROLLING AND
FALLING OFF THE JACK. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
CAUTION: The service jack provided with the vehicle is only intended to be used in an emergency
for changing a deflated tire. Never use the service jack to hoist the vehicle for any other service.
Refer to the Owner Guide when using the jack supplied with the vehicle.
Jacking Points - Front
1. The front jacking point is at the bolt head of the lower control arm.
Jacking Points - Rear
1. The rear jacking points are located on the rear trailing arms.
LIFTING
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page
2471
Lifting Points
1. The lifting points are part of the uni-body structure.
CAUTION: Damage to the suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if care
is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation Variable Cam Timing System
Variable Cam Timing System
Overview
The Variable Cam Timing System allows the exhaust cam to advance and retard at varying engine
speeds. The purpose of this is to reduce exhaust emissions and increase fuel economy. As the
exhaust cam retards in relation to the crankshaft position, residual exhaust gases are left in the
combustion chamber. The residual gases cool the combustion chamber and are inert when mixed
with the incoming fresh charge of fuel and air. This results in better fuel economy and lower
Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) and Hydrocarbons (HG) the engine produces. The Exhaust Gas
Recalculation System (EGR) is unnecessary on the 2.0L (4V) engine due to this feature.
Variable Cam Timing
The Variable Cam Timing (VCT) system consists of the control solenoid, five-tooth pulse ring (4+1)
on exhaust camshaft, Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor, Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT)
sensor, Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor, Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor, Crankshaft Position (CKP)
sensor, Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (Figure 129).
1. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) receives input signals from the Intake Air Temperature
(IAT) sensor, Engine Coolant
Temperature (ECT) sensor, Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor, Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor and
Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor for determining the operating conditions of the engine.
2. The Variable Cam Timing (VCT) system is enabled by the PCM when the proper conditions are
met. The PCM disables the VCT system if
a fault is detected.
3. The PCM calculates relative cam position using the CMP sensor and data from the (4+1) pulse
ring mounted on the exhaust camshaft.
Relative cam position is calculated by measuring the time between the rising edge of Profile
Ignition Pickup (PIP) and the falling edge of Variable Cam Timing (VCT) pulse.
4. The PCM continually calculates a cam position error value based on the difference between the
desired and actual position and a duty
cycle is commanded for the VCT solenoid valve. Engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT unit.
5. Oil flows to either side of the piston chamber changing a linear motion from the piston to a
rotation motion from the helical mechanism in
the VCT unit. During closed loop the PCM outputs a revised duty cycle to the VCT solenoid valve
to correct for cam position error.
Variable Cam Timing System
HARDWARE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System > Page 2479
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve
The VCT solenoid valve (Figure 130) is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve
controls the flow of engine oil to the variable cam timing unit assembly. As the PCM duty cycles the
solenoid valve, oil is allowed to flow to the VCT unit assembly and advance or retard the cam
timing.
Variable Cam Timing Unit Assembly
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Unit Assembly
The variable cam timing unit assembly (Figure 131) is coupled to the camshaft through a helical
spline in the VCT unit chamber. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the
other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the piston to move linearly along the axis of the
camshaft. This linear motion is translated into rotational camshaft motion through the helical spline
coupling. A spring installed
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System > Page 2480
in the chamber is designed to hold the camshaft in the minimum overlap position (5 degrees) when
oil pressure is too low to maintain adequate position control. The camshaft is allowed to rotate up
to 30 degrees.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System > Page 2481
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Unit
Assembly
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Unit Assembly
Variable Cam Timing Unit Assembly
The variable cam timing unit assembly (Figure 131) is coupled to the camshaft through a helical
spline in the VCT unit chamber. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the
other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the piston to move linearly along the axis of the
camshaft. This linear motion is translated into rotational camshaft motion through the helical spline
coupling. A spring installed in the chamber is designed to hold the camshaft in the minimum
overlap position (5 degrees) when oil pressure is too low to maintain adequate position control. The
camshaft is allowed to rotate up to 30 degrees.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Description and Operation
VARIABLE CAM TIMING (VCT) SOLENOID VALVE
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve
The Variable Cam Timing (VCT) solenoid valve (Figure 130) is an integral part of the VCT system.
The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil to the variable cam timing unit assembly. As the
PCM duty cycles the solenoid valve, oil is allowed to flow to the VCT unit assembly and advance or
retard the cam timing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information >
Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
The indicated compression pressure are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is within 75% of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information >
Specifications > Page 2488
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
General Remarks
NOTE: Removing fuses and disconnecting electrical components causes the powertrain control
module (PCM) to log an error message. After the measurements have been carried out this error
message should be cleared from memory by connecting to PCM.
NOTE: Only check the compression pressure with the valves set to the prescribed clearance (if this
can be adjusted).
The compression pressure should be checked with the engine at operating temperature.
Check The Compression Pressure
WARNING: On manual transmissions shift the transmission into neutral. On automatic
transmission vehicles, select "P". Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. Remove the fuel pump relay. 2. Start the engine - the engine will start, run for a few seconds
then stall. 3. Remove the spark plugs. 4. Install the compression tester. 5. Install an auxiliary starter
switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch OFF, using the auxiliary starter switch, crank
the engine a
minimum of five compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the approximate
number of compression strokes required to obtain the highest reading.
6. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of
compression strokes. 7. Install the components in reverse order, observing the specified tightening
torques. 8. Reset the PCM fault memory.
Interpretation of the Results
The indicated compression pressure are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is within 75% of the highest reading.
CAUTION: If engine oil is sprayed into the combustion chamber, after carrying out the
measurement run the engine at 2000 rpm for about 15 minutes, in order to burn the oil and prevent
damage to the catalytic converter.
If the measurement on one or more cylinders is much lower than the specified value, spray some
engine oil into the combustion chamber and repeat the compression measurement. If the reading
greatly improves, the piston rings are damaged. If the reading stays the same, the cause is either
damaged valve seats or valve stem seals. If the measurements for two cylinders next to each other
are both too low then it is very likely that the cylinder head gasket between them is burnt through.
This can also be recognized by traces of engine oil in the coolant and/or coolant in the engine oil.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing
> Component Information > Specifications
Camshaft Bearing: Specifications
Camshaft Cap Bolts: 19 Nm (14 ft. lb.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft
Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Camshaft Sprocket Bolts 50 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft
Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Page 2497
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Crankshaft Pulley Bolt 85 ft.lb
Camshaft Sprocket Bolts 50 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft
Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2498
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Service and Repair
NOTE:Ford does not provide camshaft gear timing marks, or information to perform timing belt
service without the special tools shown
in this procedure.
Timing Drive Components-Timing Sprockets
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Remove the timing belt. 2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. CAUTION: The camshaft alignment tool is not recommended to hold the camshafts in place
when removing or tightening the bolts. Damage to
camshaft may result.
NOTE: Use an open-end wrench to keep each camshaft from rotating.
Remove the bolts and the camshaft timing sprockets.
Installation
1. Install the camshaft sprockets onto the camshafts and loosely install the bolts. 2. Raise and
support the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft
Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2499
3. NOTE: Make sure the correct (second) notch in the pulley is indexed to the lower cylinder block.
Slide the crankshaft pulley onto the crankshaft and confirm the crankshaft position is at TDC (No.
1cylinder) by rotating it clockwise against the alignment peg. ^
Remove the crankshaft pulley.
4. Lower the vehicle.
5. Confirm that the timing belt tensioner is installed correctly with the tab positioned in the slot in
the inner timing cover.
6. Install the timing belt onto the timing belt sprockets.
7. Adjust the timing belt tensioner.
1 Using a 6mm Allen wrench, rotate the adjuster counterclockwise and align the marks as shown.
2 Tighten the tensioner pulley bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft
Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2500
8. CAUTION: The camshaft alignment tool is not recommended to hold the camshafts in place
when removing or tightening the bolts. Damage to
camshaft may result.
NOTE: Use an open-end wrench to keep each camshaft from rotating.
Tighten the camshaft timing sprocket bolts to specifications.
9. Raise and support the vehicle.
10. Install the front mount lower bracket.
11. Install the lower timing belt cover.
12. Install the accessory drive belt idler pulley.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft
Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2501
13. Install the water pump pulley.
^ Hand tighten the bolts.
14. Install the crankshaft pulley.
15. Tighten the water pump pulley bolts.
16. Remove the special tool.
17. Install the stud.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft
Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2502
18. Install the coolant tube. 19. Install the catalytic converter. 20. Lower the vehicle.
21. Remove the special tool.
22. Remove the special tool. 23. Install the valve cover. 24. Install the spark plugs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Specifications
Camshaft: Specifications
Camshaft Lobe Lift Intake 0.0137 in
Exhaust 0.0134 in
Theoretical Valve Maximum Lift Intake 0.3643 in
Exhaust 0.33858 in
End Play Service Limit 0.00315 - 0.00866 in
Bearing Journal Diameter 1.0221 - 1.0227 in
Camshaft Bearing Radial Clearance 0.000787 - 0.002756 in
Camshaft Cap Bolts Tightening Torque 14 ft.lb
Sequence Refer to Procedure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Specifications > Page 2506
Camshaft: Service and Repair
NOTE:Ford does not provide camshaft gear timing marks, or information to perform timing belt
service without the special tools shown
in this procedure.
Removal
1. Remove the camshaft timing sprockets. 2. Verify the valve clearance.
3. CAUTION: Cylinder head camshaft journal caps are numbered on the outside flats to make sure
that they are assembled in their original
positions. Failure to do so may result in engine damage.
Remove the camshafts.
^ Loosen the camshaft journal cap bolts in several two-turn passes in the sequence shown.
^ Remove the bolts.
^ Remove the caps.
4. Inspect the camshafts for wear.
^ Discard the oil seals.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Specifications > Page 2507
1. NOTE: The front camshaft journal cap must be installed and the bolts tightened to specification
within four minutes of sealer application or oil
leaks may occur.
Coat the sealing surface of the front camshaft journal cap with Gasket Maker F8AZ-19B508-AB or
equivalent meeting Ford specification WSK-M2G348-AS.
2. NOTE: Lubricate camshaft bearing surfaces with Super Premium SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil or
equivalent meeting Ford specification
WSS-M2C153-H.
Install the camshafts. ^
Position the camshafts and camshaft journal caps.
^ Install the bolts and tighten the bolts in several two-turn passes using the sequence shown.
3. Verify the valve clearance.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Specifications > Page 2508
4. NOTE: The exhaust camshaft oil seal is shown, the intake seal is similar.
Using the special tool, install new camshaft front oil seals.
5. Install the camshaft timing sprockets.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash
Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair
Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service and Repair
Removal
1. Remove the camshafts.
2. CAUTION: If the camshaft and valve tappets are to be reused, mark the location of the valve
tappets to make sure that they are assembled in
their original positions.
Remove the valve tappets from the cylinder head.
3. Inspect the valve tappets.
4. NOTE: Make sure the valve tappets are installed in their original locations.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^
Lubricate the valve tappet with Super Premium SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSS-M2C153-H.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation Variable Cam Timing System
Variable Cam Timing System
Overview
The Variable Cam Timing System allows the exhaust cam to advance and retard at varying engine
speeds. The purpose of this is to reduce exhaust emissions and increase fuel economy. As the
exhaust cam retards in relation to the crankshaft position, residual exhaust gases are left in the
combustion chamber. The residual gases cool the combustion chamber and are inert when mixed
with the incoming fresh charge of fuel and air. This results in better fuel economy and lower
Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) and Hydrocarbons (HG) the engine produces. The Exhaust Gas
Recalculation System (EGR) is unnecessary on the 2.0L (4V) engine due to this feature.
Variable Cam Timing
The Variable Cam Timing (VCT) system consists of the control solenoid, five-tooth pulse ring (4+1)
on exhaust camshaft, Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor, Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT)
sensor, Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor, Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor, Crankshaft Position (CKP)
sensor, Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (Figure 129).
1. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) receives input signals from the Intake Air Temperature
(IAT) sensor, Engine Coolant
Temperature (ECT) sensor, Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor, Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor and
Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor for determining the operating conditions of the engine.
2. The Variable Cam Timing (VCT) system is enabled by the PCM when the proper conditions are
met. The PCM disables the VCT system if
a fault is detected.
3. The PCM calculates relative cam position using the CMP sensor and data from the (4+1) pulse
ring mounted on the exhaust camshaft.
Relative cam position is calculated by measuring the time between the rising edge of Profile
Ignition Pickup (PIP) and the falling edge of Variable Cam Timing (VCT) pulse.
4. The PCM continually calculates a cam position error value based on the difference between the
desired and actual position and a duty
cycle is commanded for the VCT solenoid valve. Engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT unit.
5. Oil flows to either side of the piston chamber changing a linear motion from the piston to a
rotation motion from the helical mechanism in
the VCT unit. During closed loop the PCM outputs a revised duty cycle to the VCT solenoid valve
to correct for cam position error.
Variable Cam Timing System
HARDWARE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System > Page 2516
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve
The VCT solenoid valve (Figure 130) is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve
controls the flow of engine oil to the variable cam timing unit assembly. As the PCM duty cycles the
solenoid valve, oil is allowed to flow to the VCT unit assembly and advance or retard the cam
timing.
Variable Cam Timing Unit Assembly
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Unit Assembly
The variable cam timing unit assembly (Figure 131) is coupled to the camshaft through a helical
spline in the VCT unit chamber. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the
other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the piston to move linearly along the axis of the
camshaft. This linear motion is translated into rotational camshaft motion through the helical spline
coupling. A spring installed
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System > Page 2517
in the chamber is designed to hold the camshaft in the minimum overlap position (5 degrees) when
oil pressure is too low to maintain adequate position control. The camshaft is allowed to rotate up
to 30 degrees.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System > Page 2518
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Unit
Assembly
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Unit Assembly
Variable Cam Timing Unit Assembly
The variable cam timing unit assembly (Figure 131) is coupled to the camshaft through a helical
spline in the VCT unit chamber. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the
other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the piston to move linearly along the axis of the
camshaft. This linear motion is translated into rotational camshaft motion through the helical spline
coupling. A spring installed in the chamber is designed to hold the camshaft in the minimum
overlap position (5 degrees) when oil pressure is too low to maintain adequate position control. The
camshaft is allowed to rotate up to 30 degrees.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing >
Component Information > Specifications
Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications
Connecting Rod Bearing Clearance to Crankshaft 0.016-0.070 mm (0.0006299-0.0027559 in)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications > Connecting Rod Bolt
Connecting Rod: Specifications Connecting Rod Bolt
CAUTION: Connecting rods and connecting rod caps must be correctly oriented, the interlocking
tangs on the same side of the connecting rod or possible engine damage may occur.
NOTE: Lubricate the connecting rod bearings and the crankshaft journals prior to installation with
Super Premium SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C153-H.
NOTE: Rotate the crankshaft after installing each connecting rod cap and inspect for excess drag
or binding.
Install the connecting rod caps.
^ Install new bolts and tighten in two stages:
^ Stage 1: Tighten to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.).
^ Stage 2: Tighten an additional 90 degrees.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications > Connecting Rod Bolt > Page 2527
Connecting Rod: Specifications
Connecting Rod Bearing Bore Diameter 46.89-46.91 mm
Bearing Clearance to Crankshaft 0.016-0.070 mm
Piston Pin Bore Diameter 20.589-20.609 mm
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing >
Component Information > Specifications
Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications
Main Bearing Bores Inside Diameter Bearing Caps Installed 2.28389 - 2.284956 in
Main Bearing Bores Inside Diameter Bearing Caps Installed 2.2837749 - 2.284680 in
Bearing Caps Graded By Size
Main Bearing Radial Clearances 0.000433 - 0.002833 in
Main Bearing Radial Clearances Bearing Caps Graded By Size 0.0007716 - 0.0017322 in
Main Bearing Cap Bolts Stage 1 18 ft.lb
Stage 2 Additional 60 degrees
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Crankshaft: Specifications
Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Diameter 2.2826726-2.28346 in
Main Bearing Journal End Play 0.0035433-0.010236 in
Connecting Rod Bearing Journal Diameter 1.846059-1.850036 in
Crankshaft Bearing Bore Diameter 0.810589-1.846847 in
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Raise the vehicle.
3. Disconnect the block heater power cable from the block heater.
4. CAUTION: Do not loosen the block heater retaining screw more than necessary for removal.
Remove the block heater.
5. CAUTION: Make sure the power cable is routed and secured away from rotating or hot
components or damage to the cable may occur.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications
Pulley, Crankshaft Bolt 85 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2540
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the bolts and the RH lower splash shield.
3. Loosen the bolt retaining the crankshaft pulley.
4. Remove the accessory drive belt.
5. Remove the bolt and the crankshaft pulley. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Piston: Specifications
Piston to Bore Clearance 0.0003937 - 0.0011811 in
Piston Diameter Class-1 3.337828 - 3.338537 in
Class-2 3.357316 - 3.3358025 in
Piston Bore Diameter 0.7870063 - 0.7877937 in
Ring Groove Width Upper Compression Ring 0.058425 in
Lower Compression Ring 0.0682675 in
Oil Control Ring 1.1143698 in
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Pin, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Piston Pin: Specifications
Wrist Pin Piston Pin Length 2.48031 - 2.51181 in
Pin Diameter White 0.8134629 - 0.8120062 in
Red 0.8120062 - 0.8121243 in
Blue 0.8121243 - 0.8122424 in
Piston-to Piston Pin Interference Fit 0.0003937 - 0.0005905 in
Piston Pin Clearance In Connecting Rod Bore 0.0006299 - 0.0019291 in
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Piston Ring: Specifications
Piston Ring Ring Width Upper Compression Ring 0.011811 - 0.019685 in
Lower Compression Ring 0.011811 - 0.019685 in
Oil Control Ring 0.015748 - 0.055118 in
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System
Information > Specifications
Valve Clearance: Specifications
Valve Clearance Intake 0.006 in
Exhaust 0.012 in
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System
Information > Specifications > Page 2554
Valve Clearance: Adjustments
Removal
1. Remove the timing belt.
2. NOTE: Measure each valve's clearance at base circle with the lobe pointed away from the
tappet, before removing the camshafts. Failure to
measure all clearances prior to removing the camshafts will necessitate repeated removal and
installation and wasted labor time.
Use a feeler gauge to measure each valve's clearance and record its location.
3. Remove the camshafts.
4. CAUTION: If the camshaft and valve tappets are to be reused, mark the location of the valve
tappets to make sure that they are assembled in
their original positions.
Remove the valve tappets from the cylinder head.
5. NOTE: A mid-range clearance is the most desirable:
^ intake: 0.15 mm (0.006 inch)
^ exhaust: 0.3 mm (0.012 inch)
NOTE: Select tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance plus the base
tappet thickness minus most desirable thickness.
Select tappets and mark installation location.
Installation
1. NOTE: Lubricate the valve tappets with Super Premium SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil or equivalent
meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C153-H.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System
Information > Specifications > Page 2555
Install the valve tappets.
2. Install the camshafts.
3. Confirm each valve's clearance at base circle with the lobe pointed away from the tappet. 4.
Install the timing belt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated
Fuel Pressure Release: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve
Eliminated
Article No. 02-21-2
10/28/02
FUEL - FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE DISCONTINUED - 2.0L ENGINE
FORD: 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002 ESCORT ZX2, ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1999-2002 COUGAR
ISSUE
Vehicles equipped with the 2.0L 4V Zetec and the 2.0L SPI no longer have the Fuel Pressure
Relief Valve (Schrader Valve).
ACTION
To relieve or manually check fuel pressures, refer to the following Service Procedures for details.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Service Procedure For Relieving Fuel Pressure
1. Remove the fuel pump relay in the engine compartment fuse box.
2. Start the engine and allow idling until the engine stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately five seconds to ensure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. When fuel system service is complete, Install Fuel Pump Relay.
5. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting
engine.
NOTE
IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM.
6. Start vehicle and check for leaks.
NOTE
IT IS POSSIBLE THAT A DTC MAY BE SET DUE TO THE PUMP RELAY BEING PULLED AND
THE ENGINE STARTED AND RUN OUT OF FUEL. IF DTC'S ARE SET, CLEAR ALL DTC'S
BEFORE RETURNING VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER.
Service Procedure For Manually Checking Fuel Pressure With A Gauge.
1. Remove the fuel pump relay in the engine compartment fuse box.
2. Start the engine and allow idling until the engine stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately five seconds to make sure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. Disconnect fuel line at the fuel rail to chassis line pierce point.
a. If the vehicle is equipped with Quick Release Coupling Push Connector at the fuel rail to fuel line
pierce point, separate the coupling by depressing the tabs and pulling on the fuel line.
b. If the vehicle is equipped with a Spring Lock Coupling Connector using special tool 310-D00S or
equivalent
5. Install the Schrader Valve service tool adaptor listed in the chart in this article.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated > Page 2560
6. Install fuel pressure gauge special service tool 310-012 or equivalent.
7. Install fuel pump relay.
8. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for oaks before starting
engine.
NOTE
IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM.
9. Start and run engine to surge air from fuel system (air trapped in the fuel system may effect test
results).
10. Perform normal diagnosti35 ann service repairs as needed.
11. After fuel system service is complete, relieve fuel system pressure using fuel pressure gauge
relief valve.
12. Remove special service tools
13. Re-connect fuel system lines
14. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting
engine.
NOTE
IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM.
15. Start vehicle and check for leaks.
NOTE
IT IS POSSIBLE THAT A DTC MAY BE SET DUE TO THE PUMP RELAY BEING PULLED AND
THE ENGINE STARTED AND RUN OUT OF FUEL. IF DTC'S ARE SET, CLEAR ALL DTC'S
BEFORE RETURNING VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER.
Service Tools Required Chart
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 404000, 490000, 497000, 499000, 603300, 607000, 698298
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2561
Fuel Pressure Release: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE
WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER
ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE
FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2562
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
1. Remove the LH engine compartment relay panel cover.
WARNING: ^
DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER
ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE
FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system.
2. Remove the fuel pump relay. 3. Start the engine. 4. After the engine stalls, crank the engine over
two more times to be sure all the pressure has been released. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the
OFF position. Install the fuel pump relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2563
Fuel Pressure Gauge
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Specifications
Valve Cover: Specifications
Valve Cover Bolts 80 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2567
Valve Cover: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe.
2. Remove the ignition wires from the spark plugs.
3. Disconnect the throttle cables.
^ Disconnect the speed control actuator cable (if equipped).
^ Disconnect the accelerator cable.
4. Remove the valve cover.
1 Remove the stud bolts
2 Remove the bolts.
5. CAUTION: The valve cover sealing surfaces are soft materials. Do not use abrasive grinding
discs to remove gasket material; only use manual
scrapers. Do not scratch or gouge sealing surfaces or oil leaks may occur.
Clean and inspect the sealing surfaces of the valve cover and the cylinder head. Both surfaces
must be clean and flat.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Install a new valve cover gasket if damaged.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component
Information > Specifications
Valve Guide: Specifications
Valve Guide Bore Diameter Intake 0.23858 in
Insert Counterbore Diameter
Exhaust 0.23858 in
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component
Information > Specifications
Valve Spring: Specifications
Valve Spring Compression Pressure Intake 82.1 lbf at 0.988 in
Exhaust 94.94 lbf at 1.0275 in
Free Length 1.701 in
Installed Height 1.346 in
Assembled Height Service Limit 1.346 in
Pressure Lost @ Specific Height +/- 0.0256 inch
Intake 32.596 lbf
Exhaust 40.464 lbf
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2574
Valve Spring: Service and Repair
Valve-Valve Spring, Valve Spring Retainer and Valve Stem Seal
Removal
1. Remove the spark plugs. 2. Remove the valve tappets.
3. NOTE: If the air pressure fails to hold the valves closed while carrying out the following steps,
valve or valve seat damage is indicated and the
cylinder head must be removed.
NOTE: Make sure the applicable piston is at the top of its stroke.
Install the air line with an adapter in the spark plug hole and turn on the air supply.
4. Install the special tools, compress the valve spring, and remove the valve spring retainer and
valve spring. 5. Inspect the valve spring, valve spring retainer and valve spring retainer key. Install
new parts as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2575
6. NOTE: If air pressure has forced the piston to the bottom of the cylinder, any loss of air pressure
will allow the valve(s) to fall into the cylinder.
A rubber band, tape or string wrapped around the end of the valve stem will prevent this from
happening.
Use the special tools to remove the valve stem seal.
Installation
1. CAUTION: If the valve has been damaged, removal will be necessary for repair.
Remove the air pressure from the spark plug adapter and inspect the valve for damage. Rotate the
valve and check the valve for eccentric movement during rotation.
2. If the condition of the valve is satisfactory, apply Super Premium SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil or
equivalent meeting Ford specification
WSS-M2C153-H to the valve stem and hold the valve closed. Apply the air pressure within the
cylinder.
3. Lubricate valve and guides with Super Premium SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil or equivalent meeting
Ford specification WSS-M2C153-H and using the
special tool install the valve stem seals onto the cylinder head valve guides.
4. Place the valve spring in position over the valve and install the valve spring retainer.
5. Using the special tools compress the valve spring and install the valve spring retainer keys.
^ Remove the special tools.
6. Remove the air pressure. 7. Remove the air line adapter. 8. Install the valve tappets. 9. Install
the spark plugs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust >
Component Information > Specifications
Valve: Specifications
Valve Valve To Guide Clearance 0.000662 - 0.0025196 in
Angle Degrees Runout 90 deg
Total Indicated Runout
Valve Head Diameter Intake 1.2598 in
Exhaust 1.10236 in
Valve Face Runout Limit 0.0013779 in
Intake and Exhaust
Valve Face Angle 45 deg
Valve Stem Diameter Intake 0.23740 in
Exhaust 0.23740 in
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Locations
Drive Belt: Locations
2.0L Zetec without A/C
2.0L Zetec with A/C
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Locations > Page 2583
Drive Belt: Diagrams
2.0L Zetec without A/C
2.0L Zetec with A/C
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Drive Belt: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer's concern by operating the engine to duplicate the condition. 2. Inspect to
determine if any of the following mechanical concerns apply:
3. NOTE: Minor cracks in the V-grooved portion of the drive belt are considered normal and
acceptable. If the drive belt has chunks missing from
the ribs, a new drive belt should be installed.
Install a new drive belt if any of the following conditions exist: rib chunk-out, severe glazing, frayed
cords or other concerns. Inspect for drive belt cracking/chunking/wear.
V-Ribbed Belt With Cracks (Acceptable)
V-Ribbed Serpentine Drive Belt With Cracks Across Ribs
V-Ribbed Belt With Chunks Of Rib Missing (Not Acceptable)
V-Ribbed Serpentine Drive Belt With Chunks of Rib Missing
4. If the concerns remain after inspection, determine the symptoms and go to the Symptom Chart.
See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2586
Drive Belt: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
SYMPTOM CHART
Part 1 of 2
Part 2 of 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2587
Drive Belt: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Belt Tensioner-Dynamic
Belt Tensioner-Dynamic
The belt tensioner can be checked dynamically as follows: 1. With the engine running, observe the
belt tensioner movement. The belt tensioner should move (respond) when the A/C clutch cycles (if
equipped), or when the engine is accelerated rapidly. If the belt tensioner movement is constant
without A/C clutch cycling or acceleration, a pulley or shaft is probably bent or a pulley is out of
round. In rare cases, excessive drive belt rideout (uneven depth of grooves in drive belt ) can
cause excessive drive belt tensioner movement. This condition can be checked by installing a new
drive belt, and repeating the observation.
2. With the engine off, check routing of the drive belt. 3. Inspect the belt tensioner wear indicator to
confirm the drive belt is within operating range. Install a new drive belt if necessary.
Belt Tensioner-Mechanical
Belt Tensioner-Mechanical
The only mechanical check that needs to be made is a check for tensioner stick, grab or bind. 1.
Remove the belt in the area of the tensioner. 2. Rotate the tensioner from its relaxed position
through its full stroke and back to the relaxed position to make sure there is no stick, grab or bind
and to make sure that there is tension on the belt tensioner spring.
3. If the tensioner meets the above criteria, proceed to test the tensioner dynamically. If the
tensioner does not meet the above criteria, install a new
tensioner.
Engine Accessory Drive
Engine Accessory Drive Test
To carry out this test, proceed as follows:
^ Remove the accessory drive belts.
WARNING: BLOCK THE FRONT AND REAR WHEELS, AND APPLY THE PARKING BRAKE
AND THE SERVICE BRAKE, OR INJURY TO PERSONNEL CAN RESULT.
CAUTION: Limit engine running time to one minute or less with belts removed or serious engine
damage will result.
NOTE: A serpentine drive belt decreases the usefulness of this test. In these cases, use a vibration
analyzer, such as the EVA, to pinpoint accessory vibrations. An electronic listening device, such as
an EngineEAR, will also help to identify noises from specific accessories.
^ Increase the engine rpm to where the concern occurs.
^ If the vibration/noise is duplicated when carrying out this test, the belts and accessories are not
sources.
^ If the vibration/noise was not duplicated when carrying out this test, install each accessory belt,
one at a time, to locate the source.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2588
Drive Belt: Service and Repair
Accessory Drive Belt - 2.0L Zetec Removal and Installation
1. Remove the right front wheel and tire.
2. Remove the bolts and the right front lower splash shield.
3. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the accessory drive belt. 4. To
install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair
Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair
Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner -2.0L Zetec Removal and Installation
1. Remove the accessory drive belt.
2. Remove the bolts and the accessory drive belt tensioner. 3. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Engine Mount > Component Information > Specifications
Engine Mount: Specifications
Engine Mount Ground Wire Nut (Engine) 80 in.lb
Ground Wire Nut (Body) 89 in.lb
Bolt/Nuts 41 ft.lb
Lower Bracket Bolts 37 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount
Engine Mount: Service and Repair Engine Mount
Engine Mount
Removal and Installation
1. Install the special tool.
2. Disconnect the ground strap.
3. Remove the engine mount upper bracket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount > Page 2597
4. Disconnect the ground wire.
5. Disconnect the power steering line bracket.
6. Disconnect the power steering line bracket and position the line aside.
7. Remove the engine mount. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount > Page 2598
Engine Mount: Service and Repair Powertrain/Drivetrain Mount Neutralizing
Powertrain/Drivetrain Mount Neutralizing
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Loosen, but do not remove, the powertrain/drivetrain mount
fasteners. 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Move the vehicle in forward and reverse 0.6-1.2 meters (2-4 ft).
CAUTION: Do not twist or strain the powertrain/drivetrain mounts.
5. Raise and support the vehicle. 6. Tighten the powertrain/drivetrain mount fasteners. 7. Lower the
vehicle. 8. Test the system for normal operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler
Pulley > Component Information > Specifications
Idler Pulley: Specifications
Idler Pulley Bolt 35 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler
Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2602
Idler Pulley: Service and Repair
Accessory Drive Belt Idler Pulley -2.0L Zetec Removal and Installation
1. Remove the accessory drive belt.
2. Remove the bolt and the accessory drive belt idler pulley. 3. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure >
Component Information > Specifications
Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications
Oil Pressure (Hot) 54-80 psi at 4000 rpm
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick
Tube > Component Information > Specifications
Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Specifications
Dip Stick Tube 89 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick
Tube > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2610
Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the bolt and the oil level indicator and tube. 2. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
^ Install a new O-ring seal if damaged.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Drain Plug >
Component Information > Specifications
Engine Oil Drain Plug: Specifications
Drain Plug 18 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Oil - Oil Recommendations/Applications
Technical Service Bulletin # 02-1-9 Date: 020121
Engine Oil - Oil Recommendations/Applications
Article No. 02-1-9
01/21/02
ENGINE - ENGINE OIL - RECOMMENDED APPLICATIONS FOR SAE 5W-20 AND SAE 5W-30
MOTOR OILS - GASOLINE AND FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLES ONLY
FORD: 1992-2002 CROWN VICTORIA 1993-1994 TEMPO 1993-1997 THUNDERBIRD 1993-2002
ESCORT, MUSTANG, TAURUS 1995-2000 CONTOUR 1998-2002 ESCORT ZX2 2000-2002
FOCUS 1993-1996 BRONCO 1993-1997 AEROSTAR 1993-2002 E SERIES, F-150, RANGER
1995-2002 WINDSTAR 1997-1999 F-250 LD 1997-2001 EXPLORER 1997-2002 EXPEDITION
1999-2002 SUPER DUTY F SERIES, SUPER DUTY F-53 STRIPPED CHAS. 2000-2002
EXCURSION 2001-2002 ESCAPE
LINCOLN: 1991-2002 TOWN CAR 1993-1998 MARK VIII 1993-2002 CONTINENTAL 2000-2002
LS 1998-2002 NAVIGATOR
MERCURY: 1992-2002 GRAND MARQUIS 1993-1994 TOPAZ 1993-1997 COUGAR 1993-1999
TRACER 1993-2002 SABLE 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2001
MOUNTAINEER
This article is being republished in its entirety to update the vehicle models, engines and years
affected.
NOTE
PLEASE REFER TO THE VEHICLE APPLICATION LIST LATER IN THIS TSB FOR A
COMPLETE LIST OF VEHICLES AFFECTED BY THIS TSB.
ISSUE Ford Motor Company now recommends SAE 5W-20 viscosity grade for servicing most
gasoline and flexible fueled vehicles.
ACTION All 2001 and 2002 vehicles where SAE 5W-20 is specified should be serviced at the
recommended oil change intervals using SAE 5W-20. This oil is an improved formulation to
improve fuel economy.
Testing has validated this viscosity grade can be used in many previous model year vehicles. It is
recommended ALL vehicles on the following Vehicle Application Listing be service with SAE
5W-20.
All 2001-2002 vehicles other than those listed in the "Exception 2001 Vehicles" or "Exception 2002
Vehicles" chart are being filled with SAE 5W-20
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Oil - Oil Recommendations/Applications > Page 2618
motor oil at the factory and should also be serviced with SAE 5W-20 oil.
Exception 2001 Vehicles
Exception 2002 Vehicles
NOTE
IF VEHICLE IS NOT LISTED IN THIS APPLICATION, SAE 5W-30 OIL IS RECOMMENDED.
REFER TO TSB 99-8-16.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 99-8-16 SUPERSEDES: 01-4-7 WARRANTY STATUS:
INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 401000, 490000, 497000, 499000
Veh. App. Listing Approved For SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil
^ 1993-1996 1.9L Escort/Tracer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Oil - Oil Recommendations/Applications > Page 2619
^ 1995-2000 2.0L Zetec Contour/Mystique
^ 1999-2002 2.0L Cougar
^ 1997-2002 2.0L Escort/Tracer
^ 1998-2002 2.0L Escort ZX2
^ 2000-2002 2.0L Focus
^ 2001-2002 2.0L Escape
^ 1993-1997 2.3L Ranger
^ 1993-1994 2.3L Mustang
^ 1993-1994 2.3L Tempo/Topaz
^ 1998-2001 2.5L Ranger
^ 1995-2000 2.5L Contour/Mystique
^ 1999-2002 2.5L Cougar
^ 2001-2002 3.0L 4V Escape
^ 1996-2001 3.0L 4V Taurus/Sable
^ 1993-2002 3.0L (Vulcan) Aerostar/Ranger,
^ Taurus/Sable (Flexible Fuel and Gas)
^ 1995-2000 3.0L (Vulcan) Windstar
^ 1993-1994 3.0L (Vulcan) Tempo/Topaz
^ 2000-2002 3.0L 4V Lincoln LS
^ 1995-2002 3.8L Windstar
^ 1993-1997 3.8L Taurus/Sable,
^ Thunderbird/Cougar, Continental
^ 1994-2002 3.8L Mustang
^ 2002-2002 3.9L 4V Lincoln LS
^ 1997-2002 4.2L (SPI) F-150 (under 8500 GVW only), E-Series
^ 1996-2002 4.6L 2V Mustang
^ 1992-2002 4.6L Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis
^ 1991-2002 4.6L Town Car
^ 1994-1997 4.6L 2V Thunderbird/Cougar
^ 1996-2002 4.6L 4V Mustang Cobra
^ 1995-2002 4.6L 4V Continental
^ 1993-1998 4.6L 4V Mark VIII
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Oil - Oil Recommendations/Applications > Page 2620
^ 1997-2002 4.6L 2V Triton F-150/250 (under 8500 GVW only), E-Series, Expedition
^ 1993-1999 4.9L E-Series, F-Series
^ 1993-1995 5.0L Mustang/Mustang Cobra
^ 1993-1993 5.0L Thunderbird/Cougar
^ 1997-2001 5.0L Explorer/Mountaineer
^ 1993-1996 5.0L E-Series, F-Series, Bronco
^ 2000-2002 5.4L Excursion
^ 1998-2002 5.4L 2V/4V Navigator
^ 1997-2002 5.4L 2V F-1501250 (under 8500 GVW only), Expedition, E-Series, E-350
Chassis/RV/Cutaway
^ 1993-1997 5.8L F-Series, Bronco
^ 1993-1996 5.8L E-Series
^ 2000-2002 6.8L Excursion
^ 1997-2002 6.8L E-Series, E-350 Chassis/RV/Cutaway
^ 1999-2002 6.8L Super Duty F-Series 250 HD/350/450/550 Motorhome
^ 1993-1998 7.5L All Vehicles
NOTE
FOR 1993 THROUGH 1998 MODEL YEAR FFV USE XO-10W30-FFV.
NOTE
THE "EXCEPTION 2001-2002 VEHICLES" SHOULD BE SERVICED WITH SAE 5W-30 MOTOR
OIL
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil
With Filter ............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... 4.25L (4.5 Qt)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2623
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Engine Oil Type ...................................................................................................................... Super
Premium SAE 5W-20, XO-5W-20-QSP or equivalent
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component
Information > Specifications
Oil Cooler: Specifications
Oil Cooler Bolt 43 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2627
Oil Cooler: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Drain the engine coolant.
2. Remove the oil filter.
3. Remove the oil cooler.
^ Disconnect the coolant hoses.
^ Remove the cooler mounting bolt.
4. CAUTION: The oil cooler sealing surfaces are soft metals. Do not use abrasive grinding discs to
remove gasket material; only use manual
scrapers. Do not scratch or gouge sealing surfaces or oil leaks may occur.
Carefully clean the sealing surfaces. ^
Install a new oil filter.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component
Information > Specifications
Oil Filter: Specifications
Oil Filter 12 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Specifications
Oil Pan: Specifications
-- The oil pan must be installed and the bolts tightened to
specification within seven minutes of sealer application or
oil leaks may occur.
Oil Pan Bolts Stage 1 6 Nm
Stage 2 12 Nm
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2634
Oil Pan: Service and Repair
Removal
1. Remove the catalytic converter.
2. Drain the engine oil.
^ Install the drain plug.
3. Remove the 17 bolts and the oil pan.
Installation
1. CAUTION: The oil pan sealing surfaces are soft metals. Do not use abrasive grinding discs to
remove gasket material; use only manual scrapers.
Do not scratch or gouge the aluminum sealing surfaces.
Clean and inspect the mounting faces of both the oil pan and the cylinder block with Metal Surface
Cleaner F4AZ-19A536-RA or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSE-M5B392-A. Both
surfaces must be flat, clean and dry.
2. NOTE: The oil pan must be installed and the bolts tightened to specification within seven
minutes of sealer application or oil leaks may occur.
NOTE: Apply a 3 mm (0.1 inch) continuous bead of Silicone Gasket and Sealant F7AZ-19554-EA
or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSE-M4G323-A4 to the oil pan.
Install the oil pan. Tighten the bolts using the sequence shown in two stages: ^
Stage 1: Tighten to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.).
^ Stage 2: Tighten 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs.).
3. Install the catalytic converter. 4. Fill the crankcase with Super Premium SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil or
equivalent meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C153-H.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Specifications
Oil Pressure Sender: Specifications
Oil Pressure Sender Tightening Torque 20 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2638
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2639
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: The halfshaft is removed for clarity.
Disconnect the oil pressure sender electrical connector.
2. Remove the oil pressure sender. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component
Information > Specifications
Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Specifications
Oil Pump Pick Up Tightening Torque 89 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2643
Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the oil pan.
2. Remove the oil pump screen cover and tube.
^ Remove and discard the gasket.
3. CAUTION: The oil pump screen cover and tube sealing surfaces are soft metals. Do not use
abrasive grinding discs to remove gasket material;
only use manual scrapers. Do not scratch or gouge sealing surfaces.
Carefully clean both sealing surfaces.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Install a new gasket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil
Pressure > Component Information > Specifications
Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications
Oil Pressure (Hot) 54-80 psi at 4000 rpm
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications
Intake Manifold: Specifications
Throttle Body 62 in.lb
Intake Manifold Bolts/Nuts 13 ft.lb
Sequence ---
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 2651
Intake Manifold: Service and Repair
Removal
1. WARNING: Fuel supply lines will remain pressurized for long periods of time after engine shut
down. This pressure must be relieved
before disconnecting any fuel lines or fuel system components to prevent possible injury. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Remove the fuel injection supply manifold.
2. Disconnect the Throttle Position (TP) sensor electrical connector.
3. Disconnect the Idle Air Control (IAC) electrical connector and unclip the harness from the
bracket.
4. Disconnect the main engine control sensor wiring and remove the connector from the mounting
bracket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 2652
5. Disconnect the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) wire harness from the bracket.
6. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum supply hose.
7. Disconnect the four vacuum lines.
8. Disconnect the Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) vacuum line.
9. Disconnect the Knock Sensor (KS) electrical connector.
10. Lower the vehicle. 11. Remove the generator.
12. NOTE: Illustration shown with throttle body removed for clarity.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 2653
Remove the intake manifold. ^
Remove the two nuts and five bolts in the sequence shown.
13. Remove and inspect the intake manifold gaskets.
^ Discard if damaged.
Installation
1. NOTE: Illustration shown with the throttle body removed for clarity.
NOTE: Install new intake manifold gaskets if damaged.
Install the intake manifold and tighten using the sequence shown.
2. Install the generator. 3. Raise the vehicle.
4. Connect the KS electrical connector 5. Lower the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 2654
6. Connect the PCV vacuum line.
7. Connect the four vacuum lines.
8. Connect the brake booster vacuum supply hose to the intake manifold.
9. Connect the PCM wire harness to the bracket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 2655
10. Connect the main engine control sensor wiring.
11. Connect the IAC electrical connector and reattach the harness to the bracket.
12. Connect the TP sensor electrical connector. 13. Install the fuel injection supply manifold.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Camshaft Oil Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Camshaft Oil Seal: Service and Repair
Camshaft Oil Seal
Removal
1. Remove the camshaft timing sprockets.
2. NOTE: The exhaust camshaft oil seal is shown, the intake camshaft oil seal is similar.
Using the special tool, remove the camshaft oil seals.
Installation
1. NOTE: The exhaust camshaft oil seal is shown, the intake seal is similar.
Using the special tool, install new camshaft front oil seals.
2. Install the camshaft timing sprockets.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing
Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair
Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal
Removal
1. Remove the flywheel.
2. CAUTION: Use care to avoid damaging the crankshaft sealing surface.
Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft rear oil seal.
3. Inspect the crankshaft rear oil seal area.
Installation
1. NOTE: Coat the rear oil seal area and the crankshaft rear oil seal lip with Super Premium SAE
5W-20 Motor Oil or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSS-M2C153-H.
NOTE: Make sure the crankshaft rear oil seal is on correctly and that the edges are not rolled over.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing
Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2663
Using the special tools, install the crankshaft rear oil seal.
2. Install the flywheel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Cylinder Head Gasket >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket Identification
Cylinder Head Gasket: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket
Identification
TSB 06-18-16
09/18/06
IDENTIFYING THE CORRECT REPLACEMENT HEAD GASKET FOR CERTAIN
REMANUFACTURED ENGINES - SERVICE TIP
FORD: 1999-2006 Mustang, Mustang, Mustang, Mustang, Mustang, Mustang 2000-2005
Thunderbird 2001-2005 Taurus 2001-2006 Crown Victoria, Crown Victoria 2005 Five Hundred,
Freestyle 1997-2005 Expedition 1997-2006 E-Series, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty 1999-2003
Windstar 1999-2004 F-53 Motorhome Chassis 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2005 Escape, Escape, Explorer Sport Trac, Ranger 2004-2005 Freestar, Freestar 2006 F-53
Motorhome Chassis
LINCOLN: 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2001-2002 Continental 2001-200 Town Car 1998-2004
Navigator, Navigator 2003-2004 Aviator 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2001 Cougar 2001-2005 Sable 2001-2006 Grand Marquis 2003-2006 Marauder 2005
Montego 1997-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner
ISSUE On various vehicles when servicing the head gasket on certain Ford remanufactured
engines, it is critical to determine the type of remanufactured engine that is being serviced, in order
to identify the correct replacement gasket.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to help identify if the vehicle is equipped with a SID (for
originally equipment level thickness head gasket) or OVR (for oversized service level thicker head
gasket) remanufactured engine when replacing a head gasket.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Use this TSB to help identify if the vehicle is equipped with a STD or OVR remanufactured engine
when replacing a head gasket. This will ensure that you obtain the proper head gasket (thicker for
OVR-oversized) for the engine you are repairing, as the engine may have milled engine block deck,
milled cylinder head deck, or an over sized bore in the cylinders. This information will be needed
when ordering parts. The parts catalogs already reflect the correct service numbers, as long as this
additional information is available.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Cylinder Head Gasket >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket Identification > Page 2668
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Cylinder Head Gasket >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket Identification > Page 2669
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Cylinder Head Gasket >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket Identification > Page 2670
For certain remanufactured engines, the long block assembly will be uniquely identified with a build
date, reman code, service part number, and serial number. This metal tag will be marked with STD,
or with OVR (Figures 1-6).
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Cylinder Head Gasket >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket Identification > Page 2671
Technical Service Bulletin # 02-1-4 Date: 020121
Engine Head Gasket - Approved Replacement Procedures
Article No. 02-1-4
01/21/02
ENGINE - APPROVED HEAD GASKET REPLACEMENT SERVICE PROCEDURES
FORD: 1992-1997 THUNDERBIRD 1992-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, ESCORT, MUSTANG,
TAURUS 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2000-2002 FOCUS 1995-2002 WINDSTAR 1997-2002 E
SERIES, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150 1999-2002 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2002
EXCURSION 2001-2002 ESCAPE
LINCOLN: 1992-2002 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 2000-2002 LS 1998-2002 NAVIGATOR 2002
BLACKWOOD
MERCURY: 1992-1997 COUGAR 1992-1999 TRACER 1992-2002 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE
1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR 1993-2002 VILLAGER 1997-2002 MOUNTAINEER
ISSUE Some engine assemblies with aluminum cylinder heads repaired in-vehicle have been
found to leak coolant and/or oil from the cylinder head gasket area due to particle contamination or
scratches and dents at the head to block mating surfaces.
ACTION Refer to the following Service Information for recommended gasket sealing surface
preparation procedures. If the engine diagnosis points to a faulty head gasket (leaks oil, leaks
coolant, oil or coolant contamination, or air in coolant), thorough cleaning procedures are
necessary for a successful head gasket repair. Diagnosis and post-repair confirmation can be done
successfully utilizing leak detection methods such as a black light dye process.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
To sum up, a successful leak repair depends on:
^ Accurate diagnosis of the leak using Ford-recommended test equipment and procedures
^ Surface preparation and gasket installation using the approved tools, cleaners, and methods
^ Exercising CARE and CLEANLINESS during disassembly/assembly of components
^ Use of genuine Ford OEM replacement parts
^ Use of a Ford Remanufacturer
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY
OASIS CODES: 401000, 402000, 403000, 499000
Aluminum Cylinder Head - Removal From Engine
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Cylinder Head Gasket >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket Identification > Page 2672
WARNING
ALUMINUM CYLINDER HEADS ARE HIGHLY POLISHED AND MUST BE HANDLED WITH
EXTREME CARE. AFTER REMOVING THE HEAD BOLTS, WITHDRAW THE HEAD FROM THE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT. USE EXTREME CARE NOTING THAT THE GASKET SURFACE OF
THE HEAD COULD BE DAMAGED ON THE WAY OUT OF THE VEHICLE IF ALLOWED TO HIT
AGAINST OTHER ENGINE COMPONENTS. ONCE REMOVED, PLACE THE HEAD ON A
BENCH, GASKET SIDE UP, USING A PIECE OF CLEAN CARDBOARD ON THE BENCH
SURFACE UNDERNEATH. DO NOT SLIDE THE HEAD GASKET SURFACE ALONG THE
BENCHTOP OR DAMAGE WILL OCCUR.
NOTE
SOME ENGINES REQUIRE A "DE-TORQUING" PROCEDURE OF THE CYLINDER HEAD
BOLTS. CONSULT WITH THE APPROPRIATE MODEL YEAR WORKSHOP MANUAL FIRST, AS
THIS PROCEDURE IS USUALLY DONE ON FOUR-VALVE ENGINES. HOWEVER, ALL
ALUMINUM HEADS ARE PRONE TO WARPAGE DURING REMOVAL IF TAKEN OFF WHEN
HOT OR WARM. THE ENGINE SHOULD BE COOLED SUFFICIENTLY BY THE TIME THE
HEADS ARE ACCESSIBLE DURING TEARDOWN. ALLOW AN ADEQUATE COOL DOWN
PERIOD.
NOTE
IN SOME ENGINE APPLICATIONS, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO "RUBBER BAND" A FEW OF
THE HEAD BOLTS TOGETHER DUE TO TIGHT CLEARANCES OF THE HEAD NEAR
HEATER/AC PLENUMS AND THE BODY COWL. THIS WILL ALLOW THE BOLTS TO CLEAR
THE BLOCK DECK AS THE HEAD IS WITHDRAWN FROM THE VEHICLE.
Place CLEAN shop towels over the cylinder block bores to prevent further contamination from
reaching internal parts and surfaces. If a towel is to be removed, do it SLOWLY . Debris collected
on the towel can fall on the engine if care is not exercised as it is removed.
Gasket surfaces are machined to near-mirror surface quality. Scratches, dents, gouges, and other
impressions may allow oil, coolant, and compression gases to leak into other sealed cavities and/or
the atmosphere. Surface imperfections deteriorate the head gasket's ability to seal effectively.
Contamination on these surfaces will cause leaks from "shimming" the head even under full head
bolt torque. Contamination will also cause marks on the polished gasket surface, creating a leak
path.
Inspection For Damage and Cleaning Procedure
The overall straightness of the cylinder head and block face is held within very tight specification.
Defects known as "waviness" or "depressions" cannot be surface machined out with ordinary
equipment. Machining must meet manufacturer's specification on surface finish quality and be less
than 0.001" inch (0.025 mm) level as measured under a known quality straightedge using a feeler
gauge. If the engine has been overheated the cylinder head may have been damaged or warped.
Re-surfacing will not correct this damage.
The head must not contain any impressions on its sealing surface deeper than 0.001" (0.025 mm).
There must not be any scratches or gouges present, especially those which track to another
sealing cavity or to the atmosphere.
Ensure that the mating cylinder block surface is completely free of solid contamination, corrosion,
and fluids. Use Motorcraft Metal Surface Cleaner, F4AZ-19A536-RA or equivalent, to rid the
surface of any material, which could later interfere with the gasket's sealing ability.
WARNING
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES ARE ANY ALUMINUM GASKET SURFACES TO BE CLEANED
USING RAZOR BLADES, ROTARY ABRASIVE DEVICES INCLUDING ROLOC AND 3M
BRANDED SCOTCHBRITE PRODUCTS, ROTARY WIRE BRUSHES, SINGLE HANDLED WIRE
BRUSHES, HAND ABRASIVE SUCH AS SANDPAPER OR EMERY CLOTH, OR ANY CARBON
STEEL BLADE. THESE TOOLS ARE PROVEN TO CUT AND DAMAGE ALUMINUM AND WILL
DISRUPT THE POLISHED FINISH. ABRASIVE PARTICLES ARE ALSO SUSCEPTIBLE TO
ENTERING THE ENGINE CAVITIES AND MAY CAUSE INTERNAL ENGINE DAMAGE. THE
ONLY TOOLS ACCEPTABLE ARE PLASTIC AND WOOD SCRAPERS COMBINED WITH USE
OF MOTORCRAFT METAL SURFACE CLEANER, F4AZ-19A536-RA, OR EQUIVALENT
SOLVENT.
The original head bolts are to be discarded. Only new head bolts are acceptable for use in a head
gasket repair. Use of old bolts can cause clamp load failure because they were stretched from the
last torquing procedure either from the plant or a previous field repair. The new head bolt shanks
and threads should be thoroughly cleaned, dried, and lightly lubricated. Oil the bolts and let oil drip
for a minimum of 5 minutes. Use of too much oil may cause hydraulic lockup in the bolt hole.
The corresponding bolt holes in the cylinder block must be free of contamination consisting of dirt
particles, coolant, and oil. Bolts can mechanically or hydraulically lock on top of these materials and
cause for poor clamping of the cylinder head gasket. Use very lightly compressed air to blow out
the bolt holes. Use care to prevent debris from scattering over the internal engine surfaces.
To clean the cylinder block gasket surface, a plastic or wood scraper in combination with Motorcraft
Metal Surface Cleaner, F4AZ-19A536-RA, or equivalent solvent can be used with a portable shop
vacuum. Move the scraper toward the vacuum nozzle to direct loosened material quickly away from
the block surface.
It is not necessary to expect aluminum head surfaces to be shiny and bright after the vehicle has
been in service. Sanding, scraping, or polishing will create surface depressions that cause leaks.
The surface is expected to be flat within 0.001" (0.025 mm) and free of dirt, metal chips, and liquid
contaminants. Any staining of the metal surface is considered normal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Cylinder Head Gasket >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket Identification > Page 2673
Machining of aluminum heads and blocks is an unacceptable field practice for quality control
purposes of flatness and surface finish standards. Removing material will also raise the risk of
internal reciprocating components striking each other, as well as changing the emissions
calibration of the engine. Machining practices of aluminum blocks and heads are not reimbursable.
Ford Remanufacturers are authorized to perform this procedure and have the necessary
equipment to put the specified surface finish on the head within original factory limits.
Installation Onto the Cylinder Block Surface
WARNING
ANY GASKET SEALING AIDS WHICH ARE NOT LIMITED TO, AND INCLUDE AVIATION
CEMENT, COPPER SPRAYS, OR GLUES ARE NOT TO BE USED. THE GASKET MUST BE
FITTED DRY WITHOUT SUPPLEMENTAL SEALING AIDS. ATTEMPTS TO SEAL WITH THESE
COMPOUNDS WILL CAUSE HEAD SHIMMING AND/OR NEW LEAK PATHS. THESE
COMPOUNDS HAVE ALSO BEEN KNOWN TO CAUSE EMISSIONS SENSORS TO FAIL
THEREBY TRIPPING FAULT CODES IN THE PCM.
Ensure that all surfaces of the cylinder block, cylinder head, and gasket are fully free of any solid or
liquid contamination and have been prepared for assembly using Motorcraft Metal Surface Cleaner,
F4AZ-19A536-RA, or equivalent solvent. Also ensure that any residual dirt on the engine was
removed successfully from the surrounding areas of the block to head face of the head and the
block.
Using Workshop Manual procedures, assemble the head to the block carefully. Do not allow the
gasket surfaces to scrape or bang against other engine parts. The head may pick up material along
the way, if this is allowed. Once in place, with dowels properly aligned to the head and ensuring
that the head is fully square, seated, and resting on the block deck in a level condition, install new
"torque-to-yield" cylinder head bolts to a finger tight condition. Refer to the appropriate model year
Workshop Manual for the procedure to torque the head bolts in the correct sequence and at the
intervals specified. Failure to follow these instructions may result in a warped head, and damaged
head bolt threads.
Do not use "cheater pipes" on torque wrenches. Use a known quality, calibrated torque wrench.
Pull evenly and steady on each bolt. Do not exert side pressures on the bolt hex, which can disrupt
the integrity of the bolt head and give a false reading on the final torque value of the fastener.
Once the engine is fully reassembled, be sure that fluid levels have been topped off as required for
the operation. When the engine is ready for starting, ensure that the engine 6i1 pump is (was)
primed properly and is in a "ready to start" condition with all engine oil galleys having been charged
with oil.
WARNING
DO NOT RACE THE ENGINE UPON INITIAL STARTUP. MAINTAIN ENGINE IDLE TO BUILD OIL
PRESSURE. USE OF A MECHANICAL PRESSURE GAUGE WILL ENSURE THAT OIL FLOW
HAS DEVELOPED ON THE PUMP'S PRESSURE SIDE. A DEFECTIVE GAUGE OR LIGHT IN
THE INSTRUMENT PANEL WILL NOT VERIFY PRESSURE HAS BEEN OBTAINED. SEVERE
INTERNAL ENGINE DAMAGE WILL RESULT IF PRESSURE IS NOT OBSERVED AND
STEADILY MAINTAINED.
Allow a warm up period, which brings the engine to normal operating temperature. Check for leaks
around the gasket joints of the head, front cover, and associated component parts. The vehicle
should be road tested within normal guidelines to raise the engine to operating temperature and
verify the repair is sound.
Shut down the engine, allow for a cool-down and drain-back period to enable fluids to return to
levels. Check fluid levels using owner guide recommendations (dipstick, sight gages, etc.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair
Removal
1. Remove the timing belt.
2. Remove the crankshaft sprocket and timing belt guide.
3. CAUTION: Use care to avoid damaging the crankshaft surface.
Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft front seal from the oil pump.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2677
1. Using the special tool, install a new crankshaft front seal.
2. Install the timing belt guide and crankshaft sprocket. 3. Install the timing belt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
> Component Information > Specifications
Oil Pressure Sender: Specifications
Oil Pressure Sender Tightening Torque 20 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
> Component Information > Specifications > Page 2682
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
> Component Information > Specifications > Page 2683
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: The halfshaft is removed for clarity.
Disconnect the oil pressure sender electrical connector.
2. Remove the oil pressure sender. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket >
Component Information > Specifications > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Camshaft Sprocket Bolts 50 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket >
Component Information > Specifications > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Page 2689
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Crankshaft Pulley Bolt 85 ft.lb
Camshaft Sprocket Bolts 50 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2690
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Service and Repair
NOTE:Ford does not provide camshaft gear timing marks, or information to perform timing belt
service without the special tools shown
in this procedure.
Timing Drive Components-Timing Sprockets
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Remove the timing belt. 2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. CAUTION: The camshaft alignment tool is not recommended to hold the camshafts in place
when removing or tightening the bolts. Damage to
camshaft may result.
NOTE: Use an open-end wrench to keep each camshaft from rotating.
Remove the bolts and the camshaft timing sprockets.
Installation
1. Install the camshaft sprockets onto the camshafts and loosely install the bolts. 2. Raise and
support the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2691
3. NOTE: Make sure the correct (second) notch in the pulley is indexed to the lower cylinder block.
Slide the crankshaft pulley onto the crankshaft and confirm the crankshaft position is at TDC (No.
1cylinder) by rotating it clockwise against the alignment peg. ^
Remove the crankshaft pulley.
4. Lower the vehicle.
5. Confirm that the timing belt tensioner is installed correctly with the tab positioned in the slot in
the inner timing cover.
6. Install the timing belt onto the timing belt sprockets.
7. Adjust the timing belt tensioner.
1 Using a 6mm Allen wrench, rotate the adjuster counterclockwise and align the marks as shown.
2 Tighten the tensioner pulley bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2692
8. CAUTION: The camshaft alignment tool is not recommended to hold the camshafts in place
when removing or tightening the bolts. Damage to
camshaft may result.
NOTE: Use an open-end wrench to keep each camshaft from rotating.
Tighten the camshaft timing sprocket bolts to specifications.
9. Raise and support the vehicle.
10. Install the front mount lower bracket.
11. Install the lower timing belt cover.
12. Install the accessory drive belt idler pulley.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2693
13. Install the water pump pulley.
^ Hand tighten the bolts.
14. Install the crankshaft pulley.
15. Tighten the water pump pulley bolts.
16. Remove the special tool.
17. Install the stud.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2694
18. Install the coolant tube. 19. Install the catalytic converter. 20. Lower the vehicle.
21. Remove the special tool.
22. Remove the special tool. 23. Install the valve cover. 24. Install the spark plugs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component
Information > Specifications
Timing Belt: Specifications
Timing Belt Replacement Interval 120,000 mi
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2698
Timing Belt: Diagrams
Confirm The Crankshaft Position Is At TDC (No. 1 Cylinder)
Adjust the timing belt tensioner.
1 Using a 6mm Allen wrench, rotate the adjuster counterclockwise and align the marks as shown.
2 Tighten the tensioner pulley bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2699
Timing Belt: Service and Repair
Timing Belt
NOTE:Ford does not provide camshaft gear timing marks, or information to perform timing belt
service without the special tools shown
in this procedure.
Special Tools
Removal
1. Remove the valve cover. 2. Remove the spark plugs. 3. Remove the catalytic converter.
4. Remove the bolt, nut, and position the coolant tube aside.
5. Rotate the crankshaft to just before Top Dead Center (TDC) (No. 1 cylinder).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2700
6. Remove the stud.
7. Install the special tool.
8. NOTE: Make sure the correct (second) notch in the pulley is indexed to the lower cylinder block.
Rotate the crankshaft clockwise against the peg to bring it to TDC (No. 1 cylinder).
9. Loosen the water pulley bolts.
10. Remove the timing belt covers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2701
11. Remove the water pump pulley.
12. Remove the accessory drive belt idler pulley.
13. NOTE: Installation of the alignment tool into the exhaust camshaft may require the camshafts to
be rotated clockwise slightly.
Install the special tool and align the camshafts.
14. Raise and support the vehicle.
15. Remove the bolts and the engine mount lower bracket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2702
16. Loosen the timing belt tensioner pulley and allow to slide down to the bottom of its travel.
17. CAUTION: If the camshaft timing belt is to be reused, mark the direction of the camshaft timing
belt to rotation of camshaft prior to removal or
premature wear or failure may occur.
Slide the timing belt off of the camshaft and crankshaft sprockets.
18. Inspect the timing belt for wear. Install a new belt if necessary.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the correct (second) notch in the pulley is indexed to the lower cylinder block.
Slide the crankshaft pulley onto the crankshaft and confirm the crankshaft position is at TDC (No. 1
cylinder) by rotating it clockwise against the alignment peg. ^
Remove the crankshaft pulley.
2. Lower the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2703
3. Confirm that the timing belt tensioner is installed correctly with the tab positioned in the slot in
the inner timing cover.
4. Install the timing belt onto the timing belt sprockets.
5. Adjust the timing belt tensioner.
1 Using a 6mm Allen wrench, rotate the adjuster counterclockwise and align the marks as shown.
2 Tighten the tensioner pulley bolt.
6. Raise the vehicle.
7. Install the front engine mount lower bracket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2704
8. Install the accessory drive belt idler pulley.
9. Install the water pump pulley.
^ Hand tighten the bolts.
10. Install the timing belt covers.
11. Tighten the water pump pulley bolts.
12. Remove the special tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2705
13. Install the stud.
14. Install the coolant tube. 15. Install the catalytic converter.
16. Remove the special tool. 17. Install the valve cover. 18. Install the spark plugs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt Idler Pulley >
Component Information > Service Precautions
Timing Belt Idler Pulley: Service Precautions
Ford does not provide camshaft gear timing marks, or information to perform timing belt service
without the special tools shown in the service and repair procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt Tensioner >
Component Information > Specifications
Timing Belt Tensioner: Specifications
Timing Belt Tensioner Bolt 25 Nm (18 lb-ft)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt Tensioner >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2712
Timing Belt Tensioner: Service Precautions
Ford does not provide camshaft gear timing marks, or information to perform timing belt service
without the special tools shown in the service and repair procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications
Timing Cover: Specifications
Timing Cover Upper Cover 71 in.lb
Lower Cover 62 in.lb
Inner Cover 89 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2716
Timing Cover: Service and Repair
NOTE:Ford does not provide camshaft gear timing marks, or information to perform timing belt
service without the special tools shown
in this procedure.
Timing Belt Cover-Upper and Lower
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the crankshaft pulley.
3. Remove the bolts and the lower timing belt cover. 4. Lower the vehicle.
5. Install the special tool.
6. Remove the ground strap.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2717
7. Remove the engine mount upper bracket.
8. Remove the studs.
9. Remove the bolts and the upper timing belt cover.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation Variable Cam Timing System
Variable Cam Timing System
Overview
The Variable Cam Timing System allows the exhaust cam to advance and retard at varying engine
speeds. The purpose of this is to reduce exhaust emissions and increase fuel economy. As the
exhaust cam retards in relation to the crankshaft position, residual exhaust gases are left in the
combustion chamber. The residual gases cool the combustion chamber and are inert when mixed
with the incoming fresh charge of fuel and air. This results in better fuel economy and lower
Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) and Hydrocarbons (HG) the engine produces. The Exhaust Gas
Recalculation System (EGR) is unnecessary on the 2.0L (4V) engine due to this feature.
Variable Cam Timing
The Variable Cam Timing (VCT) system consists of the control solenoid, five-tooth pulse ring (4+1)
on exhaust camshaft, Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor, Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT)
sensor, Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor, Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor, Crankshaft Position (CKP)
sensor, Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (Figure 129).
1. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) receives input signals from the Intake Air Temperature
(IAT) sensor, Engine Coolant
Temperature (ECT) sensor, Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor, Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor and
Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor for determining the operating conditions of the engine.
2. The Variable Cam Timing (VCT) system is enabled by the PCM when the proper conditions are
met. The PCM disables the VCT system if
a fault is detected.
3. The PCM calculates relative cam position using the CMP sensor and data from the (4+1) pulse
ring mounted on the exhaust camshaft.
Relative cam position is calculated by measuring the time between the rising edge of Profile
Ignition Pickup (PIP) and the falling edge of Variable Cam Timing (VCT) pulse.
4. The PCM continually calculates a cam position error value based on the difference between the
desired and actual position and a duty
cycle is commanded for the VCT solenoid valve. Engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT unit.
5. Oil flows to either side of the piston chamber changing a linear motion from the piston to a
rotation motion from the helical mechanism in
the VCT unit. During closed loop the PCM outputs a revised duty cycle to the VCT solenoid valve
to correct for cam position error.
Variable Cam Timing System
HARDWARE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System >
Page 2723
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve
The VCT solenoid valve (Figure 130) is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve
controls the flow of engine oil to the variable cam timing unit assembly. As the PCM duty cycles the
solenoid valve, oil is allowed to flow to the VCT unit assembly and advance or retard the cam
timing.
Variable Cam Timing Unit Assembly
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Unit Assembly
The variable cam timing unit assembly (Figure 131) is coupled to the camshaft through a helical
spline in the VCT unit chamber. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the
other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the piston to move linearly along the axis of the
camshaft. This linear motion is translated into rotational camshaft motion through the helical spline
coupling. A spring installed
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System >
Page 2724
in the chamber is designed to hold the camshaft in the minimum overlap position (5 degrees) when
oil pressure is too low to maintain adequate position control. The camshaft is allowed to rotate up
to 30 degrees.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System >
Page 2725
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Unit
Assembly
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Unit Assembly
Variable Cam Timing Unit Assembly
The variable cam timing unit assembly (Figure 131) is coupled to the camshaft through a helical
spline in the VCT unit chamber. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the
other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the piston to move linearly along the axis of the
camshaft. This linear motion is translated into rotational camshaft motion through the helical spline
coupling. A spring installed in the chamber is designed to hold the camshaft in the minimum
overlap position (5 degrees) when oil pressure is too low to maintain adequate position control. The
camshaft is allowed to rotate up to 30 degrees.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Description and Operation
VARIABLE CAM TIMING (VCT) SOLENOID VALVE
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve
The Variable Cam Timing (VCT) solenoid valve (Figure 130) is an integral part of the VCT system.
The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil to the variable cam timing unit assembly. As the
PCM duty cycles the solenoid valve, oil is allowed to flow to the VCT unit assembly and advance or
retard the cam timing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel
Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation
PRESSURE TEST POINT
There is a pressure test point with a schrader fitting in the fuel rail that relieves fuel pressure and
measures the fuel injector supply pressure for service and diagnostic procedures. Before servicing
or testing the fuel system, read any CAUTION, WARNING, and HANDLING information. ON
VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH A SCHRADER VALVE, USE ROTUNDA FUEL PRESSURE
TEST KIT #134-ROO87 OR EQUIVALENT.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle
Speed > System Information > Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 800 - 900 RPM
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air
Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Remove the battery tray.
3. Remove the bolt and the intake pipe.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Make sure the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel correctly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter
> Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve
Eliminated
Fuel Pressure Release: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve
Eliminated
Article No. 02-21-2
10/28/02
FUEL - FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE DISCONTINUED - 2.0L ENGINE
FORD: 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002 ESCORT ZX2, ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1999-2002 COUGAR
ISSUE
Vehicles equipped with the 2.0L 4V Zetec and the 2.0L SPI no longer have the Fuel Pressure
Relief Valve (Schrader Valve).
ACTION
To relieve or manually check fuel pressures, refer to the following Service Procedures for details.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Service Procedure For Relieving Fuel Pressure
1. Remove the fuel pump relay in the engine compartment fuse box.
2. Start the engine and allow idling until the engine stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately five seconds to ensure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. When fuel system service is complete, Install Fuel Pump Relay.
5. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting
engine.
NOTE
IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM.
6. Start vehicle and check for leaks.
NOTE
IT IS POSSIBLE THAT A DTC MAY BE SET DUE TO THE PUMP RELAY BEING PULLED AND
THE ENGINE STARTED AND RUN OUT OF FUEL. IF DTC'S ARE SET, CLEAR ALL DTC'S
BEFORE RETURNING VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER.
Service Procedure For Manually Checking Fuel Pressure With A Gauge.
1. Remove the fuel pump relay in the engine compartment fuse box.
2. Start the engine and allow idling until the engine stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately five seconds to make sure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. Disconnect fuel line at the fuel rail to chassis line pierce point.
a. If the vehicle is equipped with Quick Release Coupling Push Connector at the fuel rail to fuel line
pierce point, separate the coupling by depressing the tabs and pulling on the fuel line.
b. If the vehicle is equipped with a Spring Lock Coupling Connector using special tool 310-D00S or
equivalent
5. Install the Schrader Valve service tool adaptor listed in the chart in this article.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter
> Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve
Eliminated > Page 2746
6. Install fuel pressure gauge special service tool 310-012 or equivalent.
7. Install fuel pump relay.
8. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for oaks before starting
engine.
NOTE
IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM.
9. Start and run engine to surge air from fuel system (air trapped in the fuel system may effect test
results).
10. Perform normal diagnosti35 ann service repairs as needed.
11. After fuel system service is complete, relieve fuel system pressure using fuel pressure gauge
relief valve.
12. Remove special service tools
13. Re-connect fuel system lines
14. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting
engine.
NOTE
IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM.
15. Start vehicle and check for leaks.
NOTE
IT IS POSSIBLE THAT A DTC MAY BE SET DUE TO THE PUMP RELAY BEING PULLED AND
THE ENGINE STARTED AND RUN OUT OF FUEL. IF DTC'S ARE SET, CLEAR ALL DTC'S
BEFORE RETURNING VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER.
Service Tools Required Chart
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 404000, 490000, 497000, 499000, 603300, 607000, 698298
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter
> Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2747
Fuel Pressure Release: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE
WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER
ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE
FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter
> Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2748
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
1. Remove the LH engine compartment relay panel cover.
WARNING: ^
DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER
ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE
FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system.
2. Remove the fuel pump relay. 3. Start the engine. 4. After the engine stalls, crank the engine over
two more times to be sure all the pressure has been released. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the
OFF position. Install the fuel pump relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter
> Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2749
Fuel Pressure Gauge
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing
Order > Component Information > Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
4-Cyl Firing Order: 1 3 4 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing
Order > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2753
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition
Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition
Cable > Component Information > Service Precautions
Ignition Cable: Service Precautions
CAUTION:
^ Do not pull on the ignition wire directly, as the wire may separate from the connector inside the
spark plug boot.
^ Correct installation of the ignition wires is critical to engine operation. If one spark plug wire is not
correctly installed at either the spark plug or the ignition coil, both spark plugs connected to the
ignition coil may not fire under load.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition
Cable > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 2761
Ignition Cable: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Grasp the spark plug boot firmly and with a twisting-pulling motion, disconnect the ignition wires
from the spark plugs.
CAUTION: Do not pull on the ignition wire directly, as the wire may separate from the connector
inside the spark plug boot.
2. Disconnect the ignition wires from the ignition coil and remove the wires.
INSTALLATION
1. Connect the ignition wires to the correct ignition coil terminals.
CAUTION: Correct installation of the ignition wires is critical to engine operation. If one spark plug
wire is not correctly installed at either the spark plug or the ignition coil, both spark plugs connected
to the ignition coil may not fire under load.
NOTE: ^
Whenever an ignition wire is reinstalled or a new one is installed, apply Silicone Brake Caliper
Grease and Dielectric compound to the interior surface of the ignition wire boot.
^ Before installing the ignition wires, inspect the ignition wires for any visible damage; install new
ignition wires if necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition
Cable > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 2762
2. Connect the ignition wires to the correct spark plugs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Spark Plug Gap
Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Gap
Spark Plug Gap ...................................................................................................................................
.................................................. 1.3 mm (0.051 inch)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Spark Plug Gap > Page 2767
Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Torque
Spark Plug Torque ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................... 15 Nm (11 ft lbs)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2768
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark Plug Type Cylinders 1 And 3 .....................................................................................................
................................................................ AZFS-32F Spark Plug Type Cylinders 2 And 4 ..................
................................................................................................................................................
AZFS-32FE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2769
Spark Plug: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the spark plug wires from the spark plugs.
2. Remove the spark plugs.
NOTE: ^
If an original spark plug is reused, install it in the same cylinder from which it was removed. New
spark plugs can be used in any cylinder.
^ Use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the spark plug well before removing the
spark plugs.
3. Inspect the spark plugs. 4. Clean the spark plugs with a wire brush or a professional spark plug
cleaner (follow the manufacturer's instructions).
INSTALLATION
1. Adjust the plug gap as necessary.
2. Install the spark plugs.
NOTE: Apply Anti-Seize Lubricant to the lower three threads of the spark plugs. Do not allow
lubricant to contaminate the spark plug electrodes or insulator tips.
3. Connect the spark plug wires to the spark plugs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Compression Check > System Information > Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
The indicated compression pressure are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is within 75% of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2773
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
General Remarks
NOTE: Removing fuses and disconnecting electrical components causes the powertrain control
module (PCM) to log an error message. After the measurements have been carried out this error
message should be cleared from memory by connecting to PCM.
NOTE: Only check the compression pressure with the valves set to the prescribed clearance (if this
can be adjusted).
The compression pressure should be checked with the engine at operating temperature.
Check The Compression Pressure
WARNING: On manual transmissions shift the transmission into neutral. On automatic
transmission vehicles, select "P". Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. Remove the fuel pump relay. 2. Start the engine - the engine will start, run for a few seconds
then stall. 3. Remove the spark plugs. 4. Install the compression tester. 5. Install an auxiliary starter
switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch OFF, using the auxiliary starter switch, crank
the engine a
minimum of five compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the approximate
number of compression strokes required to obtain the highest reading.
6. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of
compression strokes. 7. Install the components in reverse order, observing the specified tightening
torques. 8. Reset the PCM fault memory.
Interpretation of the Results
The indicated compression pressure are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is within 75% of the highest reading.
CAUTION: If engine oil is sprayed into the combustion chamber, after carrying out the
measurement run the engine at 2000 rpm for about 15 minutes, in order to burn the oil and prevent
damage to the catalytic converter.
If the measurement on one or more cylinders is much lower than the specified value, spray some
engine oil into the combustion chamber and repeat the compression measurement. If the reading
greatly improves, the piston rings are damaged. If the reading stays the same, the cause is either
damaged valve seats or valve stem seals. If the measurements for two cylinders next to each other
are both too low then it is very likely that the cylinder head gasket between them is burnt through.
This can also be recognized by traces of engine oil in the coolant and/or coolant in the engine oil.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve
Clearance > System Information > Specifications
Valve Clearance: Specifications
Valve Clearance Intake 0.006 in
Exhaust 0.012 in
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve
Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2777
Valve Clearance: Adjustments
Removal
1. Remove the timing belt.
2. NOTE: Measure each valve's clearance at base circle with the lobe pointed away from the
tappet, before removing the camshafts. Failure to
measure all clearances prior to removing the camshafts will necessitate repeated removal and
installation and wasted labor time.
Use a feeler gauge to measure each valve's clearance and record its location.
3. Remove the camshafts.
4. CAUTION: If the camshaft and valve tappets are to be reused, mark the location of the valve
tappets to make sure that they are assembled in
their original positions.
Remove the valve tappets from the cylinder head.
5. NOTE: A mid-range clearance is the most desirable:
^ intake: 0.15 mm (0.006 inch)
^ exhaust: 0.3 mm (0.012 inch)
NOTE: Select tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance plus the base
tappet thickness minus most desirable thickness.
Select tappets and mark installation location.
Installation
1. NOTE: Lubricate the valve tappets with Super Premium SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil or equivalent
meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C153-H.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve
Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2778
Install the valve tappets.
2. Install the camshafts.
3. Confirm each valve's clearance at base circle with the lobe pointed away from the tappet. 4.
Install the timing belt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications
> Water Pump
Water Pump: Specifications
Water Pump Bolts 89 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications
> Water Pump > Page 2783
Water Pump: Specifications
Water Pump Pulley 89 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications
> Page 2784
Water Pump: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Drain the engine cooling system. 2. Remove the right front tire assembly.
3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the accessory drive belt.
5. Remove the water pump pulley.
6. Remove the four bolts and the water pump.
7. NOTE: Clean and inspect the sealing surfaces.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Actuators and Solenoids - Cooling System >
Hydraulic Cooling Fan Solenoid Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation
Hydraulic Cooling Fan Solenoid Valve: Description and Operation
HYDRAULIC COOLING FAN DRIVE
Hydraulic Cooling Fan Pump With Integral Solenoid
The system consists of an engine-driven pump with an integral solenoid (Figure 50) on the pump
that is triggered by the powertrain control module (PCM). Fan speed is controlled by adjusting
current to the solenoid, which then changes the fluid flow to the hydraulic motor. More current
means the solenoid opens up, allowing higher pressure to increase the fan speed. The fan always
turns due to solenoid current leakage, even in cold engine cases. The motor is driven by the pump.
It contains a shaft on which the fan mounts. The motor also contains quick connect fittings for the
high pressure lines. The cooler is similar to the power steering cooler (same purpose and function,
to keep the fluid cool).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Engine Coolant - Propylene Glycol Recommendations
Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Coolant - Propylene Glycol Recommendations
Article No. 01-23-6
11/26/01
^ ENGINE COOLANT - PROPYLENE GLYCOL - FORD MOTOR COMPANY POSITION ON
ENGINE COOLANTS MADE FROM PROPYLENE GLYCOL
^ ENGINE COOLANT - PROPYLENE GLYCOL-BASED - FORD MOTOR COMPANY POSITION
ON PROPYLENE GLYCOL-BASED ENGINE COOLANTS
FORD: 1989-1993 FESTIVA 1989-1994 TEMPO 1989-1997 PROBE, THUNDERBIRD 1989-2002
CROWN VICTORIA, ESCORT, MUSTANG, TAURUS 1994-1997 ASPIRE 1995-2000 CONTOUR
2000-2002 FOCUS 2002 THUNDERBIRD 1989-1990 BRONCO II 1989-1996 BRONCO
1989-1997 AEROSTAR, F SUPER DUTY 1989-2002 ECONOLINE, F-150, RANGER 1991-2002
EXPLORER 1995-2002 WINDSTAR 1997-2002 EXPEDITION 1999-2002 SUPER DUTY F
SERIES 2000-2002 EXCURSION 2001-2002 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER
SPORT 2000-2002 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1989-1992 MARK VII 1989-2002 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 1993-1998 MARK VIII
2000-2002 LS 1998-2002 NAVIGATOR 2002 BLACKWOOD
MERCURY: 1989-1994 TOPAZ 1989-1997 COUGAR 1989-2002 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE
1991-1994 CAPRI 1991-1999 TRACER 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR 1993-2002
VILLAGER 1997-2002 MOUNTAINEER
MERKUR: 1989 SCORPIO, XR4TI
This article is being republished in its entirety to update the model year coverage.
ISSUE This TSB article describes Ford Motor Company's position on the use of propylene
glycol-based engine coolants.
ACTION
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Engine Coolant - Propylene Glycol Recommendations > Page 2794
Ford Motor Company does not recommend nor endorse the use of engine coolants made with
propylene glycol in Ford vehicles. Ford Motor Company currently recommends the use of ethylene
glycol-based engine coolants.
Published information suggests that engine coolants made with propylene glycol may provide
engine cooling performance equivalent to engine coolants made with ethylene glycol. However,
different brands of engine coolant provide varying corrosion protection for the cooling system. Ford
does not have performance data for the multitude of engine coolants available in the aftermarket
and therefore cannot recommend the use of any coolant except those sold by Ford Customer
Service Division. Consult the vehicle's Owner's Guide to determine the appropriate Ford Customer
Service Division coolant for the vehicle.
Furthermore, claims of toxicological and environmental advantages of propylene glycol over
ethylene glycol may be misleading. When significant new information is developed, Ford will review
this policy.
Ford Motor Company specifications recommend that vehicles be maintained using certain ethylene
glycol-based engine coolants. Those specifications do not refer to engine coolants made with
propylene glycol. Although the Ford New Vehicle Limited Warranty is not automatically voided upon
the use of a coolant made with propylene glycol, if such use results in damage to the vehicle or its
components, the cost of repairing the damage would not be covered by the Ford New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 96-16-4 WARRANTY STATUS:
INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 402000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information >
Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
Coolant Capacity (Manual Trans) 7.0 qt (US)
To convert to imperial measure, multiply U.S. quarts shown
by 0.83.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information >
Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2797
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
Antifreeze Type Ford Premium Engine Coolant (Green in color)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Level Sensor: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling
System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON
Coolant Level Sensor: Customer Interest Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON
Article No. 03-25-2
12/22/03
ENGINE - COOLING SYSTEM - LOW COOLANT WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED COOLANT DEGAS BOTTLE INSPECTION - SERVICE TIP
FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE
This article supersedes TSB 03-08-5 to update the vehicle model years and service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2003 Escape 3.0L vehicles may exhibit a low coolant warning indicator lamp
illuminated. This may be caused by a low coolant level, even if it appears there is significant
coolant in the degas bottle. Analysis of coolant degas bottles indicate that bottle replacement may
not be necessary. Adjusting the coolant to the proper level may be all that is required to correct the
condition.
ACTION The following Service Procedure provides tips to help in veritying proper coolant levels.
Additional diagnostic and service information can be found in the appropriate Workshop Manual
Section 303-03.
SERVICE PROCEDURE PROPER INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF COOLANT LEVEL IN
THE DEGAS BOTTLE
There are four (4) different cells within the Escape degas bottle. The front cells of the degas bottle
are not a good visual indicator of proper coolant level, as these cells will always give the
appearance of being full (Figure 1). The actual COLD FILL RANGE is the larger cell with the fill
cap, just below the seam. It can be difficult to see if not properly examined.
If the vehicle is HOT when inspecting, the coolant level should be at the bottle seam (minimum) or
above the seam by 1/2 inch, well above the LOW mark. When hot, if the coolant level is not at least
to the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), there is a possibility of illuminating the low coolant
lamp when the vehicle cools down and the coolant is drawn back into the engine cooling system.
DIAGNOSIS Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Not Illuminated (OFF):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap and return vehicle to customer.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Level Sensor: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling
System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON > Page 2806
Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Illuminated (ON):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap, verify that the warning lamp turns off after key cycle and return to customer.
2. If the coolant level is verified to be at the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), disconnect the
coolant level sensor and verify that the warning lamp turns off. If the lamp does turn off then
replace the degas bottle. If the lamp remains on with the sensor disconnected then perform
diagnostics on the circuit beyond degas bottle/low coolant sensor.
NOTE
IT TAKES APPROXIMATELY 25 SECONDS FOR THE LOW COOLANT LAMP TO TURN OFF
AFTER THE SENSOR CIRCUIT IS OPENED. (EXAMPLE: WHEN ADDING COOLANT TO A LOW
BOTTLE WITH LAMP ON.)
NOTE
DO NOT REPLACE THE DEGAS BOTTLE UNLESS DIRECTED BY DIAGNOSTICS IN STEP 2.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
SUPERSEDES: 03-08-5
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Level Sensor: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 >
Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON
Coolant Level Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light
ON
Article No. 03-25-2
12/22/03
ENGINE - COOLING SYSTEM - LOW COOLANT WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED COOLANT DEGAS BOTTLE INSPECTION - SERVICE TIP
FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE
This article supersedes TSB 03-08-5 to update the vehicle model years and service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2003 Escape 3.0L vehicles may exhibit a low coolant warning indicator lamp
illuminated. This may be caused by a low coolant level, even if it appears there is significant
coolant in the degas bottle. Analysis of coolant degas bottles indicate that bottle replacement may
not be necessary. Adjusting the coolant to the proper level may be all that is required to correct the
condition.
ACTION The following Service Procedure provides tips to help in veritying proper coolant levels.
Additional diagnostic and service information can be found in the appropriate Workshop Manual
Section 303-03.
SERVICE PROCEDURE PROPER INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF COOLANT LEVEL IN
THE DEGAS BOTTLE
There are four (4) different cells within the Escape degas bottle. The front cells of the degas bottle
are not a good visual indicator of proper coolant level, as these cells will always give the
appearance of being full (Figure 1). The actual COLD FILL RANGE is the larger cell with the fill
cap, just below the seam. It can be difficult to see if not properly examined.
If the vehicle is HOT when inspecting, the coolant level should be at the bottle seam (minimum) or
above the seam by 1/2 inch, well above the LOW mark. When hot, if the coolant level is not at least
to the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), there is a possibility of illuminating the low coolant
lamp when the vehicle cools down and the coolant is drawn back into the engine cooling system.
DIAGNOSIS Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Not Illuminated (OFF):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap and return vehicle to customer.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Level Sensor: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 >
Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON > Page 2812
Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Illuminated (ON):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap, verify that the warning lamp turns off after key cycle and return to customer.
2. If the coolant level is verified to be at the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), disconnect the
coolant level sensor and verify that the warning lamp turns off. If the lamp does turn off then
replace the degas bottle. If the lamp remains on with the sensor disconnected then perform
diagnostics on the circuit beyond degas bottle/low coolant sensor.
NOTE
IT TAKES APPROXIMATELY 25 SECONDS FOR THE LOW COOLANT LAMP TO TURN OFF
AFTER THE SENSOR CIRCUIT IS OPENED. (EXAMPLE: WHEN ADDING COOLANT TO A LOW
BOTTLE WITH LAMP ON.)
NOTE
DO NOT REPLACE THE DEGAS BOTTLE UNLESS DIRECTED BY DIAGNOSTICS IN STEP 2.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
SUPERSEDES: 03-08-5
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2813
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Reservoir: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low
Coolant Warning Light ON
Coolant Reservoir: Customer Interest Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON
Article No. 03-25-2
12/22/03
ENGINE - COOLING SYSTEM - LOW COOLANT WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED COOLANT DEGAS BOTTLE INSPECTION - SERVICE TIP
FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE
This article supersedes TSB 03-08-5 to update the vehicle model years and service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2003 Escape 3.0L vehicles may exhibit a low coolant warning indicator lamp
illuminated. This may be caused by a low coolant level, even if it appears there is significant
coolant in the degas bottle. Analysis of coolant degas bottles indicate that bottle replacement may
not be necessary. Adjusting the coolant to the proper level may be all that is required to correct the
condition.
ACTION The following Service Procedure provides tips to help in veritying proper coolant levels.
Additional diagnostic and service information can be found in the appropriate Workshop Manual
Section 303-03.
SERVICE PROCEDURE PROPER INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF COOLANT LEVEL IN
THE DEGAS BOTTLE
There are four (4) different cells within the Escape degas bottle. The front cells of the degas bottle
are not a good visual indicator of proper coolant level, as these cells will always give the
appearance of being full (Figure 1). The actual COLD FILL RANGE is the larger cell with the fill
cap, just below the seam. It can be difficult to see if not properly examined.
If the vehicle is HOT when inspecting, the coolant level should be at the bottle seam (minimum) or
above the seam by 1/2 inch, well above the LOW mark. When hot, if the coolant level is not at least
to the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), there is a possibility of illuminating the low coolant
lamp when the vehicle cools down and the coolant is drawn back into the engine cooling system.
DIAGNOSIS Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Not Illuminated (OFF):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap and return vehicle to customer.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Reservoir: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low
Coolant Warning Light ON > Page 2822
Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Illuminated (ON):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap, verify that the warning lamp turns off after key cycle and return to customer.
2. If the coolant level is verified to be at the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), disconnect the
coolant level sensor and verify that the warning lamp turns off. If the lamp does turn off then
replace the degas bottle. If the lamp remains on with the sensor disconnected then perform
diagnostics on the circuit beyond degas bottle/low coolant sensor.
NOTE
IT TAKES APPROXIMATELY 25 SECONDS FOR THE LOW COOLANT LAMP TO TURN OFF
AFTER THE SENSOR CIRCUIT IS OPENED. (EXAMPLE: WHEN ADDING COOLANT TO A LOW
BOTTLE WITH LAMP ON.)
NOTE
DO NOT REPLACE THE DEGAS BOTTLE UNLESS DIRECTED BY DIAGNOSTICS IN STEP 2.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
SUPERSEDES: 03-08-5
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Reservoir: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System
- Low Coolant Warning Light ON
Coolant Reservoir: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON
Article No. 03-25-2
12/22/03
ENGINE - COOLING SYSTEM - LOW COOLANT WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED COOLANT DEGAS BOTTLE INSPECTION - SERVICE TIP
FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE
This article supersedes TSB 03-08-5 to update the vehicle model years and service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2003 Escape 3.0L vehicles may exhibit a low coolant warning indicator lamp
illuminated. This may be caused by a low coolant level, even if it appears there is significant
coolant in the degas bottle. Analysis of coolant degas bottles indicate that bottle replacement may
not be necessary. Adjusting the coolant to the proper level may be all that is required to correct the
condition.
ACTION The following Service Procedure provides tips to help in veritying proper coolant levels.
Additional diagnostic and service information can be found in the appropriate Workshop Manual
Section 303-03.
SERVICE PROCEDURE PROPER INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF COOLANT LEVEL IN
THE DEGAS BOTTLE
There are four (4) different cells within the Escape degas bottle. The front cells of the degas bottle
are not a good visual indicator of proper coolant level, as these cells will always give the
appearance of being full (Figure 1). The actual COLD FILL RANGE is the larger cell with the fill
cap, just below the seam. It can be difficult to see if not properly examined.
If the vehicle is HOT when inspecting, the coolant level should be at the bottle seam (minimum) or
above the seam by 1/2 inch, well above the LOW mark. When hot, if the coolant level is not at least
to the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), there is a possibility of illuminating the low coolant
lamp when the vehicle cools down and the coolant is drawn back into the engine cooling system.
DIAGNOSIS Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Not Illuminated (OFF):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap and return vehicle to customer.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Reservoir: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System
- Low Coolant Warning Light ON > Page 2828
Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Illuminated (ON):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap, verify that the warning lamp turns off after key cycle and return to customer.
2. If the coolant level is verified to be at the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), disconnect the
coolant level sensor and verify that the warning lamp turns off. If the lamp does turn off then
replace the degas bottle. If the lamp remains on with the sensor disconnected then perform
diagnostics on the circuit beyond degas bottle/low coolant sensor.
NOTE
IT TAKES APPROXIMATELY 25 SECONDS FOR THE LOW COOLANT LAMP TO TURN OFF
AFTER THE SENSOR CIRCUIT IS OPENED. (EXAMPLE: WHEN ADDING COOLANT TO A LOW
BOTTLE WITH LAMP ON.)
NOTE
DO NOT REPLACE THE DEGAS BOTTLE UNLESS DIRECTED BY DIAGNOSTICS IN STEP 2.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
SUPERSEDES: 03-08-5
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2829
Coolant Reservoir: Specifications
Degas Bottle Nuts ................................................................................................................................
................................................... 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2830
Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair
Degas Bottle Removal and Installation
1. Drain the engine cooling system.
2. Remove the degas bottle. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor 1 > Page 2836
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan Low Relay
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan Low Relay > Page 2841
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan Low Relay > Page 2842
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan Low Relay > Page 2843
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 2846
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 2847
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 2848
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagrams Medium Speed Fan Control Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2849
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2850
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Resistor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Fan Clutch >
Component Information > Tools and Equipment
Fan Clutch: Tools and Equipment
Fan Clutch Holding Tool AST tool# 8005
Allows the technician to hold the water pump pulleuy in place while loosening the radiator fan.
2009 Suggested user price: $41.20
Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1 800 525 2943
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Hydraulic Cooling Fan
Solenoid Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation
Hydraulic Cooling Fan Solenoid Valve: Description and Operation
HYDRAULIC COOLING FAN DRIVE
Hydraulic Cooling Fan Pump With Integral Solenoid
The system consists of an engine-driven pump with an integral solenoid (Figure 50) on the pump
that is triggered by the powertrain control module (PCM). Fan speed is controlled by adjusting
current to the solenoid, which then changes the fluid flow to the hydraulic motor. More current
means the solenoid opens up, allowing higher pressure to increase the fan speed. The fan always
turns due to solenoid current leakage, even in cold engine cases. The motor is driven by the pump.
It contains a shaft on which the fan mounts. The motor also contains quick connect fittings for the
high pressure lines. The cooler is similar to the power steering cooler (same purpose and function,
to keep the fluid cool).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2864
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor (Figure 26) is a thermistor device in which
resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as
temperature increases, and increases as temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects
the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and
measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature
information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an
overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on
information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss
could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could
occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by
allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to
Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy details.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor
> Page 2870
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT)
Sensor
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor (Figure 27) is a thermistor device in which
resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the
temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine
coolant passage. The ECT sensor is similar in construction to the IAT sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2871
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the generator.
2. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the CHT sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Core: Customer Interest A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2880
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2881
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Core: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2887
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2888
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Heater Core: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ CARBON MONOXIDE IS COLORLESS, ODORLESS AND DANGEROUS. IF IT IS NECESSARY
TO OPERATE THE ENGINE WITH THE VEHICLE IN A CLOSED AREA SUCH AS A GARAGE,
ALWAYS USE AN EXHAUST COLLECTOR TO VENT THE EXHAUST GASES OUTSIDE THE
CLOSED AREA.
^ THE HEATER CORE INLET HOSE WILL BECOME TOO HOT TO HANDLE IF THE SYSTEM IS
WORKING CORRECTLY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 2891
Heater Core: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening
of non-specification clamps can cause leakage at the heater water hose connection and damage
the heater core.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Page 2892
Heater Core: Description and Operation
Heater Core
The heater core consists of fins and tubes arranged to extract heat from the engine coolant and
transfer the heat to air passing through the heater core housing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Page 2893
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection
WARNING: CARBON MONOXIDE GAS IS COLORLESS, ODORLESS AND DANGEROUS. IF IT
IS NECESSARY TO OPERATE THE ENGINE WITH THE VEHICLE IN A CLOSED AREA SUCH
AS A GARAGE, ALWAYS USE AN EXHAUST COLLECTOR TO VENT THE EXHAUST GASES
OUTSIDE THE CLOSED AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT
IN PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Inspect for evidence of coolant leakage at the heater water hose to heater core attachments. A
coolant leak in the heater water hose could follow
the heater core tube to the heater core and appear as a leak in the heater core.
CAUTION: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening
of non-specification clamps can cause leakage at the heater water hose connection and damage
the heater core.
NOTE: Testing of returned heater cores reveals that a large percentage of heater cores are good
and did not require installation of a new heater core. If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater
core must be tested by following the Plugged Heater Core Component Test before the Heater Core
Pressure Test. Carry out a system inspection by checking the heater system thoroughly.
2. Check the integrity of the heater water hose clamps.
Heater Core - Plugged
WARNING: THE HEATER CORE INLET HOSE WILL BECOME TOO HOT TO HANDLE IF THE
SYSTEM IS WORKING CORRECTLY.
1. Check to see that the engine coolant is at the correct level. 2. Start the engine and turn on the
heater 3. When the engine coolant reaches operating temperature, feel the heater core outlet hose
to see if it is hot.
If it is not hot: ^
the heater core may have an air pocket.
^ the heater core may be plugged, or
^ the thermostat is not working correctly.
Heater Core - Pressure Test Use the radiator/heater core pressure tester to carry out the pressure
test.
1. Drain the coolant from the cooling system.
NOTE: Due to space limitations, a bench test may be necessary for pressure testing.
2. Disconnect the heater water hoses from the heater core. 3. Install a short piece of heater water
hose, approximately 101 mm (4 inches) long on each heater core tube. 4. Fill the heater core and
heater water hoses with water and install plug BT-7422-B and adapter BT-7422-A from the
radiator/heater core
pressure tester in the heater water hose ends. Secure the heater water hoses, plug and adapter
with hose clamps.
5. Attach the pump and gauge assembly from the radiator/heater core pressure tester to the
adapter. 6. Close the bleed valve at the base of the gauge. Pump 241 kPa (35 psi) of air pressure
into the heater core. 7. Observe the pressure gauge for a minimum of three minutes. 8. If the
pressure drops, check the heater water hose connections to the core tubes for leaks. If the heater
water hoses do not leak, remove the
heater core from the vehicle and carry out the bench test.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Page 2894
Heater Core - Bench Test 1. Remove the heater core from the vehicle. 2. Drain all of the coolant
from the heater core. 3. Connect the 101 mm (4 inch) test heater water hoses with plug and
adapter to the core tubes. Then connect the radiator/heater core pressure
tester to the adapter.
4. Apply 241 kPa (35 psi) of air pressure to the heater core. Submerge the heater core in water. 5.
If a leak is observed, install a new heater core.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Page 2895
Heater Core: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Drain the engine coolant.
NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater
core is removed.
2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 3. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to:
Body and Frame, Interior Trim, Dashboard/Instrument Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and
Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service
and Repair/Removal and Installation
4. Remove the heater blending door levers.
1 Remove the screw for heater blending door.
2 Remove the levers for the blending door.
5. Remove the heater core.
1 Remove the three screws.
2 Remove the cover for the heater core and pull the heater core out of the housing.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Before installing the temperature control cable, make sure the blend door, cable and
temperature switch are correctly positioned.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information >
Specifications
Radiator: Specifications
Radiator Pressure Test 20 psi
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 2899
Radiator: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
All vehicles 1. Drain the engine cooling system.
2. Remove the lower splash shields.
Vehicles with 2.0L Zetec engines
3. Disconnect the lower radiator hose and the degas return hose.
Vehicles with 3.0L (4V) engines
4. Disconnect the lower radiator hose and the high pressure transmission line.
All vehicles 5. Lower the vehicle.
Vehicles with 2.0L Zetec engines
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 2900
6. Disconnect the remaining coolant hose connections.
Vehicles with 3.0L (4V) engines
7. Disconnect the transmission return line.
8. Disconnect the upper radiator hose and degas supply hose.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 2901
9. Position the hood latch assemble out of the way.
10. Remove the two bolts and the center support.
11. Remove the two top bolts retaining the cooling fan to the radiator.
12. Remove the upper radiator support brackets, and remove the radiator from the vehicle. 13. To
install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information >
Specifications
Radiator Cap: Specifications
Radiator Cap Pressure 16 psi
+2 psi
-3 psi
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan Low Relay
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan Low Relay > Page 2910
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan Low Relay > Page 2911
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan Low Relay > Page 2912
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 2915
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 2916
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 2917
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagrams Medium Speed Fan Control Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2918
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2919
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Level Sensor:
> 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON
Coolant Level Sensor: Customer Interest Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON
Article No. 03-25-2
12/22/03
ENGINE - COOLING SYSTEM - LOW COOLANT WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED COOLANT DEGAS BOTTLE INSPECTION - SERVICE TIP
FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE
This article supersedes TSB 03-08-5 to update the vehicle model years and service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2003 Escape 3.0L vehicles may exhibit a low coolant warning indicator lamp
illuminated. This may be caused by a low coolant level, even if it appears there is significant
coolant in the degas bottle. Analysis of coolant degas bottles indicate that bottle replacement may
not be necessary. Adjusting the coolant to the proper level may be all that is required to correct the
condition.
ACTION The following Service Procedure provides tips to help in veritying proper coolant levels.
Additional diagnostic and service information can be found in the appropriate Workshop Manual
Section 303-03.
SERVICE PROCEDURE PROPER INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF COOLANT LEVEL IN
THE DEGAS BOTTLE
There are four (4) different cells within the Escape degas bottle. The front cells of the degas bottle
are not a good visual indicator of proper coolant level, as these cells will always give the
appearance of being full (Figure 1). The actual COLD FILL RANGE is the larger cell with the fill
cap, just below the seam. It can be difficult to see if not properly examined.
If the vehicle is HOT when inspecting, the coolant level should be at the bottle seam (minimum) or
above the seam by 1/2 inch, well above the LOW mark. When hot, if the coolant level is not at least
to the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), there is a possibility of illuminating the low coolant
lamp when the vehicle cools down and the coolant is drawn back into the engine cooling system.
DIAGNOSIS Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Not Illuminated (OFF):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap and return vehicle to customer.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Level Sensor:
> 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON > Page 2929
Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Illuminated (ON):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap, verify that the warning lamp turns off after key cycle and return to customer.
2. If the coolant level is verified to be at the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), disconnect the
coolant level sensor and verify that the warning lamp turns off. If the lamp does turn off then
replace the degas bottle. If the lamp remains on with the sensor disconnected then perform
diagnostics on the circuit beyond degas bottle/low coolant sensor.
NOTE
IT TAKES APPROXIMATELY 25 SECONDS FOR THE LOW COOLANT LAMP TO TURN OFF
AFTER THE SENSOR CIRCUIT IS OPENED. (EXAMPLE: WHEN ADDING COOLANT TO A LOW
BOTTLE WITH LAMP ON.)
NOTE
DO NOT REPLACE THE DEGAS BOTTLE UNLESS DIRECTED BY DIAGNOSTICS IN STEP 2.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
SUPERSEDES: 03-08-5
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant
Level Sensor: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON
Coolant Level Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light
ON
Article No. 03-25-2
12/22/03
ENGINE - COOLING SYSTEM - LOW COOLANT WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED COOLANT DEGAS BOTTLE INSPECTION - SERVICE TIP
FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE
This article supersedes TSB 03-08-5 to update the vehicle model years and service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2003 Escape 3.0L vehicles may exhibit a low coolant warning indicator lamp
illuminated. This may be caused by a low coolant level, even if it appears there is significant
coolant in the degas bottle. Analysis of coolant degas bottles indicate that bottle replacement may
not be necessary. Adjusting the coolant to the proper level may be all that is required to correct the
condition.
ACTION The following Service Procedure provides tips to help in veritying proper coolant levels.
Additional diagnostic and service information can be found in the appropriate Workshop Manual
Section 303-03.
SERVICE PROCEDURE PROPER INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF COOLANT LEVEL IN
THE DEGAS BOTTLE
There are four (4) different cells within the Escape degas bottle. The front cells of the degas bottle
are not a good visual indicator of proper coolant level, as these cells will always give the
appearance of being full (Figure 1). The actual COLD FILL RANGE is the larger cell with the fill
cap, just below the seam. It can be difficult to see if not properly examined.
If the vehicle is HOT when inspecting, the coolant level should be at the bottle seam (minimum) or
above the seam by 1/2 inch, well above the LOW mark. When hot, if the coolant level is not at least
to the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), there is a possibility of illuminating the low coolant
lamp when the vehicle cools down and the coolant is drawn back into the engine cooling system.
DIAGNOSIS Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Not Illuminated (OFF):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap and return vehicle to customer.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant
Level Sensor: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON > Page 2935
Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Illuminated (ON):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap, verify that the warning lamp turns off after key cycle and return to customer.
2. If the coolant level is verified to be at the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), disconnect the
coolant level sensor and verify that the warning lamp turns off. If the lamp does turn off then
replace the degas bottle. If the lamp remains on with the sensor disconnected then perform
diagnostics on the circuit beyond degas bottle/low coolant sensor.
NOTE
IT TAKES APPROXIMATELY 25 SECONDS FOR THE LOW COOLANT LAMP TO TURN OFF
AFTER THE SENSOR CIRCUIT IS OPENED. (EXAMPLE: WHEN ADDING COOLANT TO A LOW
BOTTLE WITH LAMP ON.)
NOTE
DO NOT REPLACE THE DEGAS BOTTLE UNLESS DIRECTED BY DIAGNOSTICS IN STEP 2.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
SUPERSEDES: 03-08-5
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2936
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Locations > Page 2941
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor (Figure 26) is a thermistor device in which
resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as
temperature increases, and increases as temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects
the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and
measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature
information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an
overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on
information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss
could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could
occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by
allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to
Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy details.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor > Page 2947
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT)
Sensor
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor (Figure 27) is a thermistor device in which
resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the
temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine
coolant passage. The ECT sensor is similar in construction to the IAT sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 2948
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the generator.
2. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the CHT sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component
Information > Specifications
Thermostat: Specifications
Thermostat Starts To Open 194 - 201 F
Fully Open 223 F
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2952
Thermostat: Description and Operation
THERMOSTAT HEATER CONTROL
Thermostat Assembly With Heater Control
The primary objective for the thermostat heater control is for improvement in fuel economy and
thermal efficiency. The system consists of a high temperature (98°C/208°F in lieu of a 90°C/194°F)
thermostat (Figure 51)that has a resistive heater within the wax element. The heater is controlled
by the PCM dependent on engine speed, throttle position, engine load, vehicle speed, air charge
temperature, transmission oil temperature and engine coolant temperature.
During low speed, low load and low air charge temperature conditions, the thermostat heater is
OFF and the engine is allowed to operate at an elevated coolant temperature. This should result in
lower internal friction and higher thermal efficiency, both leading to improved fuel economy.
During high speed, high load, high temperature conditions (air charge, transmission oil or engine
coolant), the PCM output is energized with a duty cycle to the thermostat heater. This heats the
wax and forces the thermostat to rapidly open wider allowing extra coolant to flow from the radiator.
This will reduce the coolant temperature and improve with performance demand.
It should be noted that the heater is only capable of supplying a SMALL amount of additional heat
to the wax element; it is NOT capable of opening the thermostat alone. The thermostat is 100%
duty cycle for short calibrated time and than the duty cycle is reduce to a maximum of 70% on and
30% off.
Approximately, unheated, the thermostat will begin to open at a coolant temperature of 98°C
(208°F) and will be fully open at 115°C (239°F). Energizing the heater will reduce the opening
temperature to about 80°C (176°F) and the fully open temperature to 110°C (230°F).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2953
Thermostat: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Drain the engine coolant.
2. Remove the three bolts and separate the water outlet adapter from the thermostat housing.
3. NOTE: The thermostat is indexed and must be installed correctly.
Remove the thermostat and the 0-ring seal.
4. NOTE: Clean and inspect the sealing surfaces.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Housing, Engine Cooling >
Component Information > Specifications
Thermostat Housing: Specifications
Thermostat Housing Bolts and Studs 89 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Housing, Engine Cooling >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2957
Thermostat Housing: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the thermostat.
2. Remove the thermostat housing.
3. NOTE: Clean and inspect the sealing surfaces.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information >
Specifications > Water Pump
Water Pump: Specifications
Water Pump Bolts 89 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information >
Specifications > Water Pump > Page 2962
Water Pump: Specifications
Water Pump Pulley 89 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 2963
Water Pump: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Drain the engine cooling system. 2. Remove the right front tire assembly.
3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the accessory drive belt.
5. Remove the water pump pulley.
6. Remove the four bolts and the water pump.
7. NOTE: Clean and inspect the sealing surfaces.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis
Technical Service Bulletin # 01-9-7 Date: 010514
Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis
Article No. 01-9-7
05/14/01
DRIVEABILITY - H025 (HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR), CATALYST, AND FUEL SYSTEM
MONITORS - SERVICE TIPS - OBD II VEHICLES ONLY
FORD: 1994-1997 THUNDERBIRD 1994-2001 MUSTANG 1995-2001 CROWN VICTORIA
1996-1997 PROBE 1996-2000 CONTOUR 1996-2001 ESCORT, TAURUS 2000-2001 FOCUS
1994-1997 F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350 1995-2001 ECONOLINE, RANGER, WINDSTAR
1996 BRONCO 1996-1997 AEROSTAR 1996-2001 EXPLORER 1997-2001 EXPEDITION, F-150,
F-250 LD 1999-2001 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2001 EXCURSION 2001 ESCAPE
LINCOLN: 1995-2001 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 1996-1998 MARK VIII 2000-2001 LS
1998-2001 NAVIGATOR
MERCURY: 1994-1997 COUGAR 1995-2001 GRAND MARQUIS 1996-1999 TRACER 1996-2000
MYSTIQUE 1996-2001 SABLE 1999-2001 COUGAR 1997-2001 MOUNTAINEER
ISSUE This article is intended to be an aide in diagnosing conditions related to Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S), Catalyst, and Fuel System Monitor related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
Additional information is included to assist in diagnosing certain vehicle symptoms. This article is
NOT intended to be a shortcut to the Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) Workshop
Manual pinpoint tests. The pinpoint tests in the PC/ED Manual should ALWAYS be followed when
diagnosing vehicle conditions.
ACTION Use the following information and Service Tips to assist in the diagnosis of H025,
Catalyst, and Fuel System Monitor related DTCs.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 98-23-10 WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 623000, 690000, 698298
Information
^ A. Description of Terms and Acronyms
^ B. HO2S Location Diagrams
^ C. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 2969
^ C1. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Information
^ C2. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
^ D. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor
^ D1. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Information
^ D2. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
^ E. Fuel System Monitor
^ E1. Fuel System Monitor - Information
^ E2. Fuel System Monitor Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
^ F. Diagnostic Service Tips
^ F1. Tips - General
^ F2. Tips Related to Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor
^ F3. Tips Related to Catalyst Monitor
^ F4. Tips Related to Fuel System Monitor
A. Description of Terms and Acronyms
^ CHT - Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor or PID
^ CKP - Crankshaft Position Sensor or PID
^ DTC - Diagnostic Trouble Code
^ ECT - Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor or PID
^ EGR - Exhaust Gas Recirculation
^ EEC - Electronic Engine Control
^ EVR - EGR Vacuum Regulator
^ FMEM - Failure Mode Effects Management
^ GND - Ground
^ HC - Hydrocarbons
^ HO2S - Heated Oxygen Sensor or PID
^ IAT - Inlet Air Temperature Sensor or PID
^ KAM - Keep Alive Memory
^ KOEO - Key On Engine Off
^ KOER - Key On Engine Running
^ LONGFT - Long Term Fuel Trim
^ MAF - Mass Air Flow Sensor or PID
^ MIL - Malfunction Indicator Lamp ("Check Engine")
^ NGS - New Generation Star Tester (Scan Tool)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 2970
^ OBD II - On-Board Diagnostics II
^ OSM - Output State Monitor
^ PC/ED - Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis
^ PCM - Powertrain Control Module
^ PCV - Positive Crankcase Ventilation
^ PID - Parameter Identification Display
^ RAM - Random Access Memory
^ RPM - Revolutions Per Minute
^ SHRTFT - Short Term Fuel Trim
^ Stoichiometric - 14.7:1 Air/Fuel Ratio (Gasoline Engines)
^ TP - Throttle Position Sensor or PID
^ VMV - Vapor Management Valve
^ VPWR - Vehicle Power (Battery Voltage)
^ VREF - Vehicle Reference Voltage (5 volts)
B. HO2S Location Diagrams
Refer to Figure 1 to better understand the H025 sensor names and locations. Regardless of how
the engine is mounted in the vehicle, conventional or transverse, the HO2S naming convention
stays the same in relationship to engine banks 1 and 2. Bank 1 will always be the bank containing
the # 1 cylinder.
C. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor
C1.) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 2971
The H025 Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the HO2S sensors for a malfunction
or deterioration that can affect emissions. Under specific conditions, the fuel control or upstream
HO2S sensors (Figures 1 and 3) are checked for proper output voltage and response rate (the time
it takes to switch from lean to rich or rich to lean). Downstream HO2S sensors (Figures 1 and 3)
used for Catalyst Monitor are also monitored for proper output voltage. Input is required from the
ECT or CHT, IAT, MAF, TP and CKP sensors to activate the H025 Monitor. The Fuel System
Monitor and Misfire Detection Monitor must also have completed successfully before the HO2S
Monitor is enabled.
The HO2S sensor senses the oxygen content in the exhaust flow and outputs a voltage between
zero and 1.0 volt. Lean of stoichiometric (air/fuel ratio of approximately 14.7:1 for gasoline
engines), the HO2S will generate a voltage between zero and 0.45 volt. Rich of stoichiometric, the
HO2S will generate a voltage between 0.45 and 1.0 volt.
^ The HO2S Monitor evaluates both the upstream (Fuel Control) and downstream (Catalyst
Monitor) HO2S for proper function.
^ Once the HO2S Monitor is enabled, the upstream H025 signal voltage amplitude and response
frequency are checked. Excessive voltage is determined by comparing the HO2S signal voltage to
a maximum calibratable threshold voltage.
^ A fixed frequency closed loop fuel control routine is executed and the upstream HO2S voltage
amplitude and output response frequency are observed. A sample of the upstream HO2S signal is
evaluated to determine if the sensor is capable of switching or has a slow response rate.
^ An HO2S heater circuit fault is determined by turning the heater on and off and looking for a
corresponding change in the OSM and by measuring the current going through the heater circuit.
^ The MIL is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive OBD II drive cycles.
The HO2S Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows:
^ HO2S signal circuit malfunction - P0131, P0136, P0151, P0156
^ HO2S slow response rate - P0133, P0153
^ HO2S heater circuit malfunction - P0135, P0141, P0155, P0161
^ Downstream HO2S not running in on-demand self test - P1127
^ Swapped H025 connectors - P1128 and P1129
^ H025 lack of switching - P1130, P1131, P1132, P1150, P1151, P1152
^ HO2S lack of switching (sensor indicates lean) - P1137
^ H025 lack of switching (sensor indicates rich) - P1138
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 2972
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 2973
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 2974
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 2975
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 2976
C2.) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes
D. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor
D1.) Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Information
The Federal Test Procedure Catalyst Monitor monitors for deterioration in the catalyst system and
illuminates the MIL when tailpipe emissions exceed the appropriate HC emission thresholds. The
Catalyst Monitor is enabled after the upstream and downstream HO2S sensors have been tested
and verified to be functional. This monitor relies on the front and rear heated oxygen sensors
(HO2S) to infer catalyst efficiency based upon oxygen storage capacity. Under normal closed loop
fuel conditions, high efficiency catalysts have oxygen storage which makes the switching frequency
of the rear HO2S quite slow compared with the frequency of the front HO2S. As catalyst efficiency
deteriorates, its ability to store oxygen declines, and the rear HO2S begins to switch more rapidly,
approaching the frequency of the front sensor. In general, as catalyst efficiency decreases, the
switch ratio increases from a switch ratio of 0 for a low mileage catalyst to a switch ratio of 0.8 or
0.9 for a low efficiency catalyst.
Some vehicles will monitor substantially less than the entire catalyst volume in order to meet the
stringent catalyst monitoring malfunction thresholds. In many cases, only the front, light-off catalyst
is monitored.
Front and rear HO2S switches are counted under specified closed loop fuel conditions. After the
required number of front switches are obtained, a rear-to-front HO2S switch ratio is calculated. The
switch ratio is compared against a threshold value. If the switch ratio is greater than the calibrated
maximum limit, the catalyst has failed. The test entry conditions for the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor
are as follows: ECT or CHT (warmed engine), IAT (not at extreme ambient temperatures), MAF
(greater than minimum engine load), VSS (within vehicle speed window) and TP (at part throttle)
are required.
^ Because an exponentially weighted moving average is used for malfunction determination, up to
six OBD II drive cycles may be required to illuminate the MIL.
NOTE
THE CATALYST MONITOR ON SOME EARLY OBD II VEHICLES (SOME 1994-1996 VEHICLES)
WAS REFERRED TO AS THE "STEADY-STATE CATALYST MONITOR" AS OPPOSED TO THE
"FTP CATALYST MONITOR" (DESCRIBED ABOVE) THAT IS MOST COMMON FOR VEHICLES
BUILT AFTER 1996. BELOW IS A BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE STEADY-STATE CATALYST
MONITOR:
The Steady-State Catalyst Monitor performs a 20 second test during steady state rpm and load
conditions. The Monitor transfers closed loop fuel control from the front to the rear 02 sensors. The
Monitor then observes the switching frequency and compares it to a threshold frequency stored in
an rpm/load table. A frequency higher than the maximum calibrated threshold indicates a
malfunction.
The Catalyst Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 2977
^ Catalyst system efficiency below threshold (Bank 1) - P0420
^ Catalyst system efficiency below threshold (Bank 2) - P0430
D2.) Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes
E. Fuel System Monitor
E1.) Fuel System Monitor - Information
The Fuel System Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the fuel trim system. The fuel
control system uses fuel trim tables stored in the PCM's KAM to compensate for variability in fuel
system components due to normal wear and aging. Fuel trim tables are based on vehicle speed
and engine load. During closed loop vehicle operation, the fuel trim strategy learns the corrections
needed to correct a "biased" rich or lean fuel system. The correction is stored in the fuel trim tables.
The fuel trim has two means of adapting; a LONGFT and a SHRTFT. LONGFT relies on the fuel
trim tables and SHRTFT refers to the desired air/fuel ratio parameter "LAMBSE". LAMBSE is
calculated by the PCM from HO2S inputs and helps maintain a 14.7:1 air/fuel ratio during closed
loop operation. SHRTFT and LONGFT work together. If the HO2S indicates the engine is running
rich, the PCM will correct the rich condition by moving SHRTFT in the negative range (less fuel to
correct for a rich combustion). If after a certain amount of time SHRTFT is still compensating for a
rich condition, the PCM "learns" this and moves LONGFT into the negative range to compensate
and allows SHRTFT to return to a value near 0%. Input from the ECT or CHT, IAT, and MAF
sensors is required to activate the fuel trim system, which in turn activates the Fuel System
Monitor. Once activated, the Fuel System Monitor looks for the fuel trim tables to reach the
adaptive clip (adaptive limit) and LAMBSE to exceed a calibrated limit. The Fuel System Monitor
will store the appropriate DTC when a fault is detected as described below.
^ The H025 detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and provides the PCM with feedback
indicating a rich or lean condition.
^ A correction factor is added to the fuel injector pulsewidth calculation according to the Long and
Short Term Fuel Trims as needed to compensate for variations in the fuel system.
^ When deviation in the parameter LAMBSE increases, air/fuel control suffers and emissions
increase. When LAMBSE exceeds a calibrated limit and the fuel trim table has clipped (reached
adaptive limit), the Fuel System Monitor sets a DTC.
^ The MIL is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive OBD II drive cycles.
The Fuel System Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows:
^ Fuel Delivery Error - P0148
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 2978
^ Lean shift in fuel system operation - P0171 (Bank 1) and P0174 (Bank 2)
^ Rich shift in fuel system operation - P0172 (Bank 1) and P0175 (Bank 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 2979
E2.) Fuel System Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes
F. Diagnostic Service Tips
1. Always reset KAM after performing a repair:
After performing a repair on a vehicle with the MIL on, and/or DTCs present, always clear KAM.
When a malfunction is present, the PCM adapts (attempts to correct) for this condition. Once the
vehicle has been repaired, if the KAM is not reset, the PCM will once again have to adapt back to
the normal operating conditions. Clearing the KAM will erase what the PCM has learned, so the
PCM will be able to start with "base tables".
2. Always view and record Freeze Frame Data:
Freeze Frame Data can be a valuable asset in duplicating and diagnosing concerns. This data (a
snapshot of certain PID values, recorded at the time the MIL was activated) indicates the manner in
which the vehicle was being driven at the time the fault occurred. This can be especially useful on
intermittent concerns. Freeze Frame Data, in some cases, can also help to isolate possible areas
of concern, as well as ruling out others. Always record (write down) the Freeze Frame Data.
3. Multiple DTCs (with the same meaning):
When multiple (paired) DTCs with the same meaning are set for multiple sensors, it is unlikely that
replacing both HO2S sensors will resolve the concern. In most cases, there will be another issue
that is causing the codes. Examples of multiple (paired) DTCs:
(P0135/P0155), (P0141/P0161), (P1131/P1151), (P1132/P1152).
To further clarify this, see the more detailed scenario as follows:
A vehicle comes in with a MIL On concern. KOEO self test reveals DTCs P0135 and P0155
(HTR-11 and HTR-21 circuit malfunction), with no other DTCs present. The most likely cause of
these DTCs would be something in the heater power circuit that both of these HO2S sensors have
in common (Example: open or shorted heater circuit wiring or splice). It is highly unlikely that
multiple sensors would fail at the same time. When multiple DTCs of this nature are encountered,
reviewing the appropriate wiring diagram(s) can help to isolate possible areas of concern. When
reviewing the wiring diagram, look for things that the affected sensors have in common.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 2980
In this example, the most likely cause of DTCs P0135 and P0155 (with no other DTCs present)
would be a concern with Splice "B" (refer to Figure 2).
NOTE
THIS ILLUSTRATION IS ONLY AN EXAMPLE. SPLICE NAMES "A", "B", AND "C" ARE USED IN
THIS EXAMPLE FOR CONVENIENCE ONLY. ON AN ACTUAL VEHICLE, SPLICE NAMES WILL
DEPEND ON THE CIRCUIT NUMBER FOR THE VEHICLE UNDER REPAIR. NOTE ALSO THAT
THIS FIGURE IS NOT INTENDED TO SHOW ALL SPLICES/CONNECTIONS ON ALL
VEHICLES. OTHER EEC CIRCUITS, NOT SHOWN, MAY ALSO BE SPLICED IN WITH THE
CIRCUITS SHOWN.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 2981
4. View H025 PID data carefully: NGS PIDs for HO2S sensors that do not exist (with certain
exhaust configurations) will show a value of "0" volts (refer to Figures 3 and 4).
In this example, the vehicle (equipped with a 4-cylinder engine) has one upstream and one
downstream HO2S. Notice that the NGS (scan tool) display shows two upstream and two
downstream HO2S PIDs, and that the "unused" HO2S sensor PIDs display "0" volts.
5. H025 sensors measure oxygen in the exhaust, not fuel: The exhaust gas condition reported by
the HO2S sensor is based on the presence of oxygen in the exhaust, not the presence of unburned
fuel.
Example: In the event of an ignition-related misfire, you might expect a rich HO2S reading, due to
the amount of unburned fuel in the exhaust system. However, there is also a large amount of
unburned oxygen, since no combustion took place in the misfiring cylinder. Since the H025 senses
oxygen only, it would report a lean condition in this particular situation.
F2.) Tips Related to Heated Oxygen Sensor (H025) Monitor
1. OBD II Response Rate Monitor: The OBD II
Response Rate Monitor (P0133/P0153) is only run at vehicle speeds between approximately 50-95
km/h (30-60 mph), during steady-state conditions. The test lasts approximately 6 seconds.
Therefore, P0133/P0153 cannot be diagnosed at idle in the repair bay.
2. Do not compare H025 switch rate - Bank-to-Bank or vehicle-to-vehicle: Different H025 switch
rates, from Bank-to-Bank, are considered normal. The H025 switch rate, from one Bank to the
other, should not be compared as a gauge of the H025's ability to switch/react. The PCM is
continuously adjusting spark and fuel in reaction to engine operating conditions (rpm, load, air flow,
throttle angle, etc.). The PCM is also continuously adapting to certain conditions (customer driving
habits, engine and component wear, etc.).
F3.) Tips Related to Catalyst Efficiency Monitor
1. Determining catalyst efficiency/switch ratio:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 2982
The upstream H025 sensors will have a high switch frequency, due to normal closed loop fuel
control. With an efficient catalyst, the downstream H025 will have a low switch frequency. The
switch ratio is determined by dividing the number of downstream switches by the number of
upstream switches over a given period of time. As the catalyst ages (or if the catalyst is damaged
or contaminated), the downstream switches will increase. When the downstream switch rate
crosses a threshold value (approximately 0.75 switch ratio), a code is stored (P0420 and/or P0430)
and the MIL illuminates (refer to Figures 5 and 6).
NOTE
IF A CATALYST IS DETERMINED TO HAVE LOW EFFICIENCY AND REQUIRES
REPLACEMENT, REPLACEMENT OF THE DOWNSTREAM H025 SENSORS WILL NOT BE
NECESSARY.
2. Use care in handling H025 sensors: In the event of catalyst replacement, use care in the
handling of H025 sensors to prevent damage or contamination. Do not use power tools in the
removal or installation of sensors. Use a 22mm wrench or crow foot to remove and install H025
sensors; do not use slotted sockets, as these sockets may damage wires. H025 sensors should be
torqued to 41 +/- 5 N.m (30 +/- 4 lb-ft).
3. Do not replace downstream HO2S sensors (H02S12/H02S22) for DTCs P0420 and/or P0430:
When diagnosing a vehicle with a customer concern of MIL On and DTCs P0420/P0430 in
continuous memory, do not replace the downstream HO2S sensors (H02S12/H02S22). Damaged
or malfunctioning downstream HO2S sensors will not cause these DTCs to be set. Always verify
the vehicle concern, then perform the pinpoint diagnostics in the appropriate PC/ED Service
Manual.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 2983
F4.) Tips Related to the Fuel System Monitor
1. HO2S sensors are not likely to be the cause of adaptive DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175:
Most warranty-returned HO2S sensors (replaced for these DTCs) are found to function normally.
Additional related DTCs will normally be present if there is a concern with the HO2S sensors. Do
not replace an HO2S sensor unless verified through pinpoint diagnostic tests found in the PC/ED
Service Manual.
2. DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, and P0175 are not related to downstream H028 sensors: When
diagnosing a vehicle with a MIL On and DTC(s) P0171, P0172, P0174, and/or P0175 in continuous
memory, do not replace the downstream HO2S sensors. These DTCs have no connection to the
downstream HO2S sensor function nor its diagnosis for faults. Always verify the vehicle concern,
then perform the pinpoint diagnostics from the appropriate PC/ED Service Manual.
3. Diagnosing lean conditions and lean DTCs P0171, P0174: Freeze Frame Data can often help to
identify the type of lean condition, even if the fault is intermittent, by indicating how the vehicle was
being driven when the fault occurred. Diagnosis of lean conditions and lean adaptive DTCs can be
difficult, especially if the concern is intermittent. Verifying the concern is extremely important. There
are different types of lean conditions. The ability to identify the type of lean condition causing the
concern can be crucial to a correct diagnosis. When DTCs P0171 and P0174 are both present,
there is a strong likelihood of another concern being present:
a. Vacuum leaks/unmetered air: In this type of condition, the engine may actually run lean of
stoichiometry (14.7:1 air/fuel ratio) if the PCM is not able to compensate enough to correct for the
condition. This condition is typically caused by air entering the engine through an abnormal source
(opening), or due to a MAF malfunction. In this situation, the volume of air entering the engine is
actually greater than what the MAF is indicating to the PCM. Vacuum leaks will normally be most
apparent when high manifold vacuum is present, during idle or light throttle. If Freeze Frame Data
indicates that the fault occurred at idle, a check for vacuum leaks/unmetered air when the engine is
cold might be the best starting point.
Examples: Loose, leaking or disconnected vacuum lines, intake manifold gaskets or 0-rings,
throttle body gaskets, brake booster, air inlet tube, stuck/frozen/aftermarket PCV valve, unseated
engine oil dipstick, MAF reading lower than normal, etc.
b. Insufficient fueling: In this type of condition, the engine may actually run lean of stoichiometry
(14.7:1 air/fuel ratio) if the PCM is not able to compensate enough to correct for the condition. This
condition is typically caused by a fuel delivery system concern that restricts or limits the amount of
fuel being delivered to the engine. This condition will normally be most apparent when the engine is
under a heavy load, when a higher volume of fuel is required. If Freeze Frame Data indicates that
the fault occurred under a heavy load, a check of the fuel delivery system (checking fuel pressure
with engine under a load) might be the best starting point.
Examples: Low fuel pressure (fuel pump, fuel filter, fuel leaks, restricted fuel supply lines), fuel
injector concerns, etc.
c. Exhaust system leaks: In this type of condition, the engine may actually be running near
stoichiometry (14.7:1 air/fuel ratio), but the exhaust gas mixture will be lean. This condition is
caused by oxygen-rich air entering the exhaust system through an external source. This condition
will cause the exhaust gas mixture to be lean, even though the actual combustion in the engine
may not be.
Examples: Exhaust system leaks upstream or near HO2S, malfunctioning Secondary Air Injection
system
d. MAF concerns: If a MAF concern is suspected, see TSB 98-23-10.
4. Checking fuel pressure: Check fuel pressure with engine under a load when diagnosing a lean
concern. A partially plugged fuel filter can be difficult to detect and can be easily overlooked if fuel
pressure is only checked at idle. The same is true for other types of fuel supply concerns (e.g., bent
or kinked lines, degraded fuel pump).
At idle, an engine requires only a small volume of fuel. Due to the fact that there is a small volume
of fuel needed at idle, a restriction in the fuel supply line in many cases will not cause the fuel
pressure to be low. When the vehicle is under a load, the engine requires much more fuel than at
idle. Under a load, a restriction in the fuel supply line will prevent the high rate of fuel flow that is
needed to maintain the correct fuel pressure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2984
Catalytic Converter: Specifications
Catalytic Converter TWC to Exhaust Manifold Nuts 35 ft.lb
TWC Bracket Bolts 18 ft.lb
TWC To Resonator Bolts 30 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions
Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Acronyms and Definitions
2V - L
ACRONYMS AND DEFINITIONS
NOTE: This Acronyms and Definitions listing contains technical terms applicable to Ford Motor
Company products. It is not intended to be an all-inclusive dictionary of components and their
functions. If a detailed description of a particular system or component is desired, refer to the
applicable Vehicle System for the specific vehicle being serviced.
2V: Two Valve engine configuration.
4V: Four Valve engine configuration.
ABS: Anti-lock Brake System.
A/C: Air Conditioning. A vehicle accessory system that modifies the passenger compartment air by
cooling and dehydrating the air.
ACC: Air Conditioning Clutch. Indicates status of the A/C clutch.
ACCS: Air Conditioning Cycling Switch. Indicates status of the A/C cycling switch.
ACD: Air Conditioning Demand. A signal input to the PCM from the Air Conditioning control panel.
ACP: Air Conditioning Head Pressure or A/C cycling switch input state.
ACPSW: Air Conditioning Pressure Switch.
ACPV: Air Conditioning Head Pressure Volts. A voltage input to the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) from the ACP switch or sensor.
ACR: Air Conditioning Relay. Commanded output controlled by the PCM and acts as an A/C cutout
control during heavy acceleration.
A/D: Analog-to-Digital. Analog-to-Digital signal conversion.
ADC: See ATDC.
AFCM: Alternative Fuel Control Module.
AIR: Secondary Air Injection.
AIRB: Secondary Air Injection Bypass.
Air Diverter: Air Diverter Valve. Part of the EAIR system. Diverts fresh air to the exhaust system
when the electric air pump is commanded on.
AIR EVAL: Air System Evaluated. Displays a YES or NO status indicating whether the Air System
has been evaluated for OBD (On-Board Diagnostic) II purposes.
Air/Fuel Ratio: Air to fuel mixture ratio. An air/fuel mixture that is 14.7:1 is also called stoichiometry.
AIRM: Secondary AIR pump monitor.
Ambient Air Temperature: Temperature of the air surrounding an object.
Analog (Electrical/Electronic): An electrical signal that can obtain any value within the voltage limits
of the signal.
ARB: Air Resource Board.
ARPMIDES: Ancillary RPM Desired. RPM required to maintain the vehicle speed commanded by
Speed Control Command Switch (SCCS) inputs.
ASCII: American Standard Code for Information Interchange.
ATDC: After Top Dead Center. The location of the piston after it has reached the top of its stroke.
Measured in degrees of crankshaft rotation.
AVOM: Analog Volt-Ohm Multimeter. Readings are indicated by a sweep hand on a printed scale,
rather than a digital display.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 2987
AWD: All-Wheel Drive.
BARO: Barometric Pressure.
Base Idle: Idle rpm determined by the throttle lever hardset on the throttle body with the IAC
solenoid disconnected.
Base Timing: Spark advance in degrees before top dead center of the base engine without any
control from the PCM or ICM.
Battery Positive Voltage (B+): The positive (+) voltage from the battery or any circuit connected
directly to the battery. Compare "Vehicle Power (VPWR)."
BAT TEMP: Battery Temperature.
BJB: Battery Junction Box.
BOB: Breakout Box. A test device which connects in series to the PCM and PCM harness.
BPA: Brake Pedal Applied switch. Typically located on the braking system master cylinder. Can be
hydraulic or electric.
BPP: Brake Pedal Position. Indicates the position of the brake pedal, based on input from the
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) switch.
BRAKE LMP or BRKL: Brake Warning Lamp Status. Activates the Brake Warning Lamp by
applying voltage to the control line.
BTDC: Before Top Dead Center. The location of the piston before it has reached the top of its
stroke. Measured in degrees of crankshaft rotation.
Bus + or Bus -: Multiplex circuits that carry Standard Corporate Protocol (SCP) data from module to
module and to the DLC.
CAC: Charge Air Cooler. Formerly known as Intercooler. A device which lowers the temperature of
pressurized intake air.
CAFE: Corporate Average Fuel Economy. A set of federal requirements and regulations which
govern fuel economy standards.
CANVNT: Canister Vent Solenoid.
Catalyst: Catalytic converter. An in-line exhaust system device used to reduce the level of engine
exhaust emissions.
CAT EVAL: Catalyst System Evaluated. This item indicates YES when the Catalyst Efficiency
Monitor has successfully completed.
CCM: Comprehensive Component Monitor.
CCRM: Constant Control Relay Module. A relay module that provides ON-OFF control of various
EEC components.
CD A through J: Coil Driver 1 through 10.
Centralized Testing Facility: State government operation. Provides Inspection/Maintenance (IM)
and safety inspections.
CGND or CSE GND: Case Ground. Provides a ground source for the PCM or ECU case.
CHT: Cylinder Head Temperature. Units are displayed in either degrees Fahrenheit or Centigrade.
CHTIL: Cylinder Head Temperature Indicator Lamp.
CHTV: Cylinder Head Temperature Voltage. The actual voltage drop across the CHT sensor
thermistor.
CID: Cylinder Identification. PCM input signal from Camshaft Position Sensor.
CKP: Crankshaft Position. Senses the position of the crankshaft.
CKP+, CKP-: CKP+ is the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor signal wire. CKP - is the signal return.
CL: Closed Loop. An operating condition or mode which enables operation based on sensor
feedback.
CMP: Camshaft Position. Indicates camshaft position.
CMPFM: Camshaft Position Failure Mode. Indicates when the PCM identifies a CID/CMP fault.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 2988
CMS: Catalyst Monitor Sensor. Downstream H025.
CMVSS: Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
CNG: Compressed Natural Gas.
CO: Carbon Monoxide. A colorless, odorless and toxic gas that is a component of auto exhaust
emissions.
CO(2): Carbon Dioxide. A colorless, odorless gas that is a normal by-product of the combustion of
fuel.
Coil: A device consisting of windings around an iron core. In a spark ignition system, designed to
increase voltage.
Cold Soak: Time given to a vehicle to sit at a low temperature (typically below 68°F / 20°C) until the
temperature of external and internal components stabilize.
CONT: Continuous Memory. The portion of KAM (Keep Alive Memory) used to store DTCs
generated during Continuous Memory Self-Test.
Continuous Memory Self- Test: A continuous test of the EEC system conducted by the PCM
whenever the vehicle is operating.
CPP: Clutch Pedal Position. Indicates clutch pedal position.
CPP Switch: Clutch Pedal Position Switch. Located on the clutch pedal and detects when the
clutch pedal is depressed.
CQIS: Common Quality Indicator System.
CSE GND: Case Ground.
CT: Closed Throttle Mode. A mode when the PCM varies the pulse width of the fuel injectors to
obtain the air/fuel mixture appropriate for closed throttle operation.
CTO: Clean Tach Output. Signal used to drive the instrument panel tachometer.
Data Communications Link: A communication path between various in-vehicle electronic modules.
Accessed by scan tools through the Data Link Connector (DLC).
DC: 1. Direct Current. Electric current flowing in one direction. 2. Duty Cycle. The voltage
measurement of ON time versus the full cycle period, expressed in percent.
DCL: Data Communication Link.
DI: Distributor Ignition. A system in which the ignition coil secondary circuit is sequenced by a
distributor.
Digital: Controls process information by switching the current or voltage ON and OFF.
DLC: Data Link Connector. J1962 connector providing access to vehicle diagnostic information.
DOHC: Dual Overhead Cam. An engine configuration that uses two camshafts positioned above
the valves.
DOL: Data Output Line. A circuit that sends certain information from the PCM to the instrument
cluster.
DPFEGR: Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation. System that uses a pressure
transducer to control the operation of the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Vacuum Regulator
Valve.
DRI: Deposit Resistant Injector. A fuel injector designed to prevent build-up of carbon and other
unwanted deposits.
DRL: Daytime Running Lamps. A system that keeps the vehicle running lamps on at all times while
the vehicle is operating.
DTM: Diagnostic Test Mode. A level of capability in an On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) system.
DTC: Diagnostic Trouble Code. An alpha/numeric identifier for a fault condition identified by the
On-Board Diagnostic System.
DVOM: Digital Volt-Ohm Meter.
E-85: Fuel containing 85% ethanol alcohol.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 2989
EAIR: Electric Secondary Air Injection. A pump-driven system for providing secondary air using an
electric air pump.
EAIRM: Electric Secondary Air Pump circuit Monitor.
ECT: Engine Coolant Temperature. Displayed in either Fahrenheit or Centigrade.
ECTV: Engine Coolant Temperature Voltage. The actual voltage drop across the ECT sensor
thermistor.
ECU: Electronic Control Unit. A module that handles the control strategy and monitors system
inputs or outputs.
EEC: Electronic Engine Control system.
EEC-V: Fifth generation EEC system.
EFT: Engine Fuel Temperature.
EFTA: Bank 1 input. EFTA is displayed in either Fahrenheit or Centigrade.
EFTAV: Voltage drop across the EFTA (Bank 1) sensor thermistor.
EFTB: Bank 2 input. EFTB is displayed in either Fahrenheit or Centigrade.
EFTBV: Voltage drop across the EFTB (Bank 2) sensor thermistor.
EGR: Exhaust Gas Recirculation. A process in which a small amount of exhaust gas is routed into
the combustion chamber.
EGR EVAL: Exhaust Gas Recirculation System Evaluated. EGR EVAL will display YES when the
monitor is complete.
EGRMDSD: Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation Motor Desired position. The PID name used to
operate the Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) valve with scan tool's output state control.
EGRS: EGR Shutoff. A normally closed solenoid that applies vacuum to the EGR valve when
energized by the PCM.
EGRT: Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve Temperature Sensor. A temperature sensor that is
threaded into the bottom of the intake plenum.
EGR Vacuum Regulator: Controls vacuum to the EGR valve by a duty cycle signal from the PCM.
EGRVR: Exhaust Gas Recirculation Vacuum Regulator. Solenoid which varies the vacuum to the
EGR valve by varying the duty cycle to the regulator.
EGRVRA: Exhaust Gas Recirculation Vacuum Regulator Actual (volt). The actual state of the
commanded output.
EGRVRF: Exhaust Gas Recirculation Vacuum Regulator Fault. Represents whether a fault exists
in the EGRV circuit.
EI: Integrated Electronic Ignition. An Electronic Ignition system that has the Ignition Control Module
(ICM) integrated into the PCM.
EI-HDR: Electronic Ignition, High Data Rate. Formerly known as Electronic Distributorless Ignition
System.
EI-LDR: Electronic Ignition, Low Data Rate. Formerly known as Distributorless Ignition System.
EMI: Electromagnetic Interference. Usually caused by ignition voltage spikes, solenoids, relay
operation or noisy generator contacts.
EOL: End Of Line. A system designed specifically for use at assembly plants to make sure all new
vehicles perform to design specifications.
EPA: Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. Government).
EPROM: Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory. An electronic component in the PCM that
requires the electronic storage of information.
ESOF: Electronic Shift-on-the-Fly.
EVAP: Evaporative Emissions. A system to prevent fuel vapor from escaping into the atmosphere.
EVAPCP: Evaporative Canister Purge Solenoid. Controls a solenoid which allows venting of the
evaporative purge canister.
EVAPCPF: Evaporative Canister Purge Solenoid Fault. Identifies whether an electrical fault exists
for the current commanded state.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 2990
EVAPCV: Evaporative Canister Vent Solenoid. Controls a solenoid which seals the EVAP system
canister from atmospheric pressure during the EVAP OBD II Monitor test.
Evaporative Emissions Canister: An evaporative emission canister, containing activated charcoal
which absorbs and holds fuel vapors.
EVAPPDC: Evaporative Canister Purge Duty Cycle. The duty cycle commanded to the Evap
Canister Purge Solenoid by the PCM.
EVO: Electronic Variable Orifice.
EWP: Electric Water Pump.
Exciter Ring: A toothed or notched iron or steel disk, which is the moveable part of a wheel speed
sensor.
FAN: Fan Speed. Used in conjunction with vehicles having multiple fan speed control. Displays
OFF, LOW, or HIGH status.
FC: Fan Control.
FCS: Fuel Control Solenoid.
FCIL: Fuel Cap Off Indicator Lamp. Indicates that the fuel filler cap was not properly installed.
FEAD: Front End Accessory Drive.
FEPS: Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) Programming
Signal. 18 volt DC signal sent by the scan tool to initiate PCM reprogramming.
FF: 1. Flexible Fuel. A system capable of using a variety of fuels for vehicle operation. 2. A PID that
displays the % alcohol content in fuel.
FFLRN: Flex Fuel Learned. Displays when the PCM's Flex Fuel strategy has completed calculating
the inferred alcohol content of fuel.
FFFM: Flexible Fuel Failure Mode. Indicates whether the current Flex Fuel Sensor reading (FF) is
reliable or not. Displays a YES or NO.
FFTEMP: Flexible Fuel Sensor - Temperature. Alcohol concentration derived from the signal pulse
width.
FFV: Flexible Fuel Vehicle.
FIFO: First In First Out.
FILO: First In Last Out.
FIM: Fuel Indicator Module.
FLI: Fuel Level Input. Used by the Evap monitor to calculate fuel tank vapor volume. Displayed as
a percentage.
FLIV: Fuel Level Input Voltage.
FMEM: Failure Mode Effects Management. Operating strategy that maintains limited vehicle
function in the event of a PCM or EEC component failure.
FP:1. Fuel Pump. Indicates whether the pump has been commanded ON or OFF by the PCM. 2.
Fuel Pump (Modulated). Fuel pump duty cycle percentage.
FPDM: Fuel Pump Driver Module. A module that controls the electric fuel pump.
FPF: Fuel Pump Fault. Identifies whether a fault exists in the FP circuit.
FPM: Fuel Pump Monitor. Monitors the Fuel Pump I circuits for faults.
Freeze Frame: A block of memory containing the vehicle operating conditions at a specific time.
FRP: Fuel Rail Pressure. Based on FRP V.
FRP V: Fuel Rail Pressure Voltage. A voltage input to the PCM from the Fuel Rail Pressure
Sensor.
FSC: Fail-Safe Cooling.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 2991
FSV: Fuel Shut-off Valve. A component of Natural Gas Vehicles. This valve either allows or
prevents Natural Gas flow to the fuel rail.
FSVF: Fuel Shut-Off Valve Fault. Indicates if there is a fault in the FSV circuit. Displayed as YES or
NO.
FSVM: Fuel Shut-off Valve Monitor. Monitors operation of the Fuel Shut-Off Valve / circuit.
FTP: Fuel Tank Pressure. Displayed as inches of water, kPa, or volts.
FTP V: Fuel Tank Pressure Voltage. From the FTP transducer.
FUEL PR: Fuel Pressure. Measurement of the force of the fuel delivered via the fuel pump.
FUELPW: Fuel Pulse Width. Displays the commanded pulse width at time of last data update.
FUELPW1: Fuel Injector Pulse Width #1. Corresponds to injectors normally affected by O2S1
(HEGO1).
FUELPW2: Fuel Injector Pulse Width #2. Corresponds to injectors normally affected by O2S2
(HEGO2).
FUELSYS: Fuel System Status (OPEN/CLOSED Loop). Formerly known as LOOP.
Fuel Tank Vapor Valve: A valve mounted in the top of the fuel tank that vents excess vapor and
pressure from the fuel tank into the Evaporative Emission Control System.
FWD: Front Wheel Drive.
GEM: Generic Electronic Module.
GEN: Generator.
GENF: Generator Output Fault.
GENFDC: Generator Field Control Output.
GFS: Generator field signal monitor.
GND: Ground.
GPM: Grams Per Mile. Also known as Gallons Per Minute.
GPS: Global Positioning Satellite.
Green State Vehicle: Formally known as California Emissions. A vehicle that is equipped with
California on-board diagnostics.
GSS: Gear Select Solenoid.
GVW: Gross Vehicle Weight.
Hall Effect: A process where current is passed through a small slice of semi-conductor material and
a magnetic field to produce a small voltage in the semi-conductor.
Hard Fault: A fault currently present in the system.
HC: 1. Hydrocarbon. A by-product of combustion and a component of auto exhaust emissions. 2.
High Compression.
HCF: Hydraulic Cooling Fan.
HCFD: Hydraulic Cooling Fan Drive.
HFC: Hydraulic Cooling Fan.
HFCF: High Fan Control Fault. Identifies if there is a fault in the HFC circuit.
HFP: High Fuel Pump.
HLOS: Hardware Limited Operating Strategy. A mode of operation where the PCM replaces output
commands with fixed values in response to internal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 2992
PCM malfunctions.
HO: High Output.
HO2S: Heated Oxygen Sensor. Formerly known as Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen (HEGO) Sensor.
Provides information on rich or lean exhaust conditions to the PCM.
Hot Soak: Period of time after an engine operates where localized combustion heat dissipates
throughout the engine.
HTR, HTR11, HTR12, HTR21 H1R22, HTRX1, HTRX2: HO2S Heater. Heater element for the
HO2S sensor.
Hydrogen: Chemical symbol H. Highly flammable gas.
Hz: Hertz. Cycles per second.
IAC: Idle Air Control. Electrical control of throttle bypass air.
IAT: Intake Air Temperature.
IATV: Intake Air Temperature Voltage. Actual voltage drop across the IAT sensor.
IAT2: Intake Air Temperature 2. Displayed in either Fahrenheit or Centigrade. Used on
supercharged vehicles.
IAT2V: Intake Air Temperature 2 Voltage. Actual voltage drop across the IATV2 sensor.
IC: Integrated Circuit. A small Semi-Conductor device capable of doing many separate circuit
functions.
ICM: Ignition Control Module. The module that controls the ignition system.
IFDM: Integrated Fuel Delivery Module.
IFS: Inertia Fuel Shutoff.
IGN GND: Ignition Ground.
Ignition: System used to provide high voltage spark for internal combustion engines.
IGNKEY(IGKY): Ignition Key status.
IGNSW (IGSW): Ignition Switch Position.
IMRC: Intake Manifold Runner Control. Controls airflow through the high-speed runners in the
intake manifold.
IMRCM: Intake Manifold Runner Control Monitor. Monitors the IMRC / circuits for faults.
IMTV: Intake Manifold Tuning Valve. Controls airflow through runners in a split intake manifold.
INJ1, INJ2, INJ3, INJ4, INJ5, INJ6, INJ7, INJ8, INJ9, INJ1O: lnjector number or its signal output
from the PCM.
Injector: A device for delivering metered pressurized fuel to the intake system or the cylinders.
Intake Air: Air drawn through a filter and distributed to each cylinder for use in combustion.
Intercooler: See CAC.
IPATS: Integrated Passive Anti-Theft System.
ISO: international Standards Organization.
KAM: Keep Alive Memory. A portion of the memory within the PCM that must have power even
when the vehicle is not operating.
KAPWR: Keep Alive Power. Dedicated, unswitched power circuit that maintains KAM.
Key On Engine Off Self- Test: A test of the EEC system conducted by the PCM with power applied
and the engine at rest.
Key On Engine Running Self- Test: A test of the EEC system conducted by the PCM with the
engine running and the vehicle at rest.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 2993
KEYPWR: Key Power. Battery voltage supplied when the ignition key is in the ON position.
Knock: The sharp metallic sound produced when two combustion pressure fronts collide in the
combustion chamber of an engine.
KOEC: Key On Engine Continuous.
KOEO: Key On Engine off.
KOER: Key On Engine Running.
KPA: Kilopascal. Unit of pressure. 3.386 kPa = 1 inch of mercury (Hg.).
KPH: Kilometers Per Hour.
KS: Knock Sensor. Detects engine knock.
L: Liters. The unit of volume in the metric measuring system. One liter equals 1.06 quarts.
LEV: Low Emissions Vehicle.
LFC: Low Fan Control.
LFP: Low Fuel Pump. Reduced operating speed for multi-speed fuel pumps.
LIFO: Last In First Out.
LILO: Last In Last Out.
LONGFT1, LONGFT2: Long-Term Fuel Trim. Fuel flow adjustment determined by the PCM.
LOOP: indicates OPEN or CLOSED loop status.
LPG: Liquefied Petroleum Gas.
LPLR: Low Pressure Low Resistance fuel injector.
M-V
ACRONYMS AND DEFINITIONS
NOTE: This Acronyms and Definitions listing contains technical terms applicable to Ford Motor
Company products. It is not intended to be an all-inclusive dictionary of components and their
functions. If a detailed description of a particular system or component is desired, refer to the
applicable Vehicle System for the specific vehicle being serviced.
M-85: Fuel containing 85% methanol alcohol.
MAF: Mass Air Flow. Used to measure the mass (weight) of the air entering the engine.
MAF RTN: Mass Air Flow Return. A return circuit for the MAF sensor.
MAP: Manifold Absolute Pressure. The internal pressure of the intake manifold.
MFC: Medium Fan Control.
MFI: Multiport Fuel Injection. A fuel-delivery system in which each cylinder is individually fueled.
MFP: Modulated Fuel Pump.
Microprocessor: A digital processor on a chip which perform arithmetic and control logic.
MIL: Malfunction Indicator Lamp. An indicator lamp alerting the driver of an emission related
malfunction. May also read "CHECK ENGINE" or "SERVICE ENGINE SOON."
MISF: Misfire. Any event in the cylinder that causes a sudden change in acceleration of the
crankshaft.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 2994
MON: Motor Octane Number.
Monolithic Substrate: The ceramic honeycomb structure used in the catalytic converter.
MSOF: Manual Shift-on-the-Fly.
MY: Model Year.
NA: Naturally Aspirated. Engine that is not supercharged or turbocharged.
NAAO: North American Automotive Operations.
NC: Normally Closed.
NG: Natural Gas. A system capable of using natural gas for vehicle operation.
NGS: New Generation STAR (Self-Test Automatic Readout) tester.
NGVM: Natural Gas Vehicle Module.
NO: Norm ally Open.
NO(x): Oxides of Nitrogen. Formed at high combustion temperatures.
NVH: Noise, Vibration, Harshness. A classification of vehicle concerns.
OASIS: On-Line Automotive Service Information System.
OBD, OBD-II: On-Board Diagnostics, On-Board Diagnostics Second Generation. A system that
monitors PCM input and output control signals.
On Demand Test: Technician initiated "KOEO" and "KOER" tests performed by the PCM.
OC: Oxidation Catalytic converter. A catalytic converter system that reduces levels of HC and CO.
OCT ADJ: Octane Adjust. Compensating strategy that adjusts for changes in fuel octane.
OEM: Original Equipment Manufacturer.
OHC: OverHead Cam. An engine configuration that uses a single camshaft positioned above the
valves.
OWL: Overheat Warning Lamp or its signal output from the PCM. Turns the TEMP warning lamp
ON when engine oil temperature exceeds safe limits.
Open Circuit: A circuit which does not provide a complete path for flow of current.
OL: Open Loop. An operating condition based on instructions not modified by PCM feedback.
O(2)S 11/12/21/22: Oxygen Sensor and its relative position in the exhaust system. Detects oxygen
content in exhaust gasses.
OSC: Output State Control.
OSS: Output Shaft Speed.
Ozone: A blue gaseous form of oxygen (O(3)) formed naturally by electric discharge or exposure to
ultraviolet radiation.
Particulate: Small solid matter found in exhaust gases, especially prevalent in diesel engines.
PATS: Passive Anti-Theft System.
PATSIL: Passive Anti-Theft System Indicator Light.
PATSIN: Passive Anti-Theft System Receive Signal.
PATSOUT: Passive Anti-Theft System Transmit Signal.
PATSTRT: Passive Anti-Theft System Starter Relay Control
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 2995
PCM: Powertrain Control Module. Formerly known as the EEC (Electronic Engine Control)
Processor.
PCV: Positive Crankcase Ventilation. A system which allows the controlled flow of crankcase
vapors into the combustion chamber.
PF: Purge Flow. Amount of fuel vapor burned in the engine.
Photochemical: Term describing the action of light on air pollutants which results in creating smog.
PID: Parameter Identifier. Identifies an address in PCM memory which contains operating
information.
Powertrain: Engine and transmission/transaxle components.
Pressure - Absolute: A pressure referenced to a perfect vacuum.
Pressure - Atmospheric: The pressure of the surrounding air at any given temperature and altitude.
Sometimes called Barometric Pressure.
Pressure - Barometric: Pertaining to atmospheric pressure or the results obtained by a barometer.
Pressure - Differential: The pressure difference between two regions, such as between the intake
manifold and atmospheric pressure.
Pressure - Gage: The amount by which absolute pressure exceeds the ambient atmospheric
pressure.
PIP: Profile Ignition Pickup. Provides crankshaft position information for ignition synchronization.
Potentiometer: An adjustable resistance component commonly used as a sensor (Example: TP
Sensor).
PPM: Parts Per Million. A measure used in emission analysis.
PROM: Programmable Read-Only Memory. Similar to ROM except without program instructions.
Protocol: A set of rules for the exchange of information on a network.
PSOM: Programmable Speedometer/Odometer Module. A module that processes vehicle speed
information.
PSP: Power Steering Pressure. Indicates the pressure in the power steering system.
PSP V: Power Steering Pressure Input Voltage.
PTEC: Powertrain Electronic Controller.
PTO: Power Take-Off.
PW: Pulse Width. The length of time an actuator, such as a fuel injector, remains energized.
PWM: Pulse Width Modulation. Controls the intensity of an output by varying the signal duty cycle.
PWR GND: Power Ground. The main ground circuit in the EEC system.
Quick Test: A series of diagnostic tests of the EEC system consisting of KOEO, KOER and
Continuous Memory Self-Tests. Results are displayed as a series of DTCs.
RABS: Rear Antilock Brake System.
RAM: Random Access Memory. Memory into which information can be written as well as read.
REDOX: Reduction Oxidation Catalytic converter. A catalytic converter system designed to operate
at high temperatures.
Regulator: Controls the alternator/generator field current to maintain proper battery charge.
Contained within the PCM in smart charging applications.
Relay: An electromechanical device in which connections in one circuit are opened or closed by
changes in another circuit.
REM: Rear Electronic Module.
Repetitive Spark: Multiple firings of individual spark plugs at engine speeds below 1000 RPM to
improve idle quality and improve emissions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 2996
RF: Radio Frequency.
RFI: Radio Frequency Interference.
RFS: Returnless Fuel System.
RM: Relay Module. A module containing two or more relays.
ROM: Read-Only Memory. Computer memory that can be accessed and utilized, but not altered.
RON: Research Octane Number.
Routine: A group of related tasks, such as a series of diagnostic tests.
RPM: Revolutions Per Minute.
RS: Reverse Switch.
RTN: Return. A dedicated sensor ground circuit.
RWD: Rear Wheel Drive.
SAE: Society of Automotive Engineers.
SBS: Supercharger Bypass Solenoid or its signal output from the PCM.
SC: Supercharged or Supercharger.
SCB: Supercharger Bypass Control. A system that allows manifold vacuum to be bled away from
the supercharger wastegate actuator to allow for maximum boost.
SCBF: Supercharger Bypass Control Fault. Identifies whether a fault exists in the Supercharger
Bypass circuit.
SCICP: Supercharger Intercooler Pump Control.
SCICPF: Supercharger Intercooler Pump Control Fault.
SCIPC: The PID to monitor the operation of the Supercharger and Charge Air Cooler pump.
SCP: Standard Corporate Protocol.
Self- Test: See Quick Test.
Sensor: A device that detects the value or change in a physical quantity, such as temperature,
pressure or flow rate, and converts the data into an electrical signal.
SFI: Sequential Multi port Fuel Injection. A multiport fuel delivery system where each injector is
individually energized and timed relative to its cylinder intake event.
Shield: A conducting sleeve that surrounds wires to be electronically isolated from Electromagnetic
Interference (EMI).
Short Circuit: An undesirable condition in a circuit where it is terminated at a point other than that
intended.
SHRT FT: Short-Term Fuel Trim. Fuel flow adjustment in response to the HO2S sensor(s) input
during closed-loop operation.
SIG RTN: Signal Return. A dedicated sensor ground circuit that is common to two or more sensors.
SIL: Shift Indicator Lamp.
Smart Driver: A PCM or ECU output driver that can detect faults (open or shorts) on its output
circuit.
SME: Society of Manufacturing Engineers.
SOF: Shift-On-the-Fly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 2997
SOHC: Single Overhead Cam.
Solenoid: A device consisting of an electrical coil which produces a magnetic field in a plunger and
pulled to a central position.
ST: Scan Tool. A device that interfaces with and communicates information on a data link.
Stoichiometry: An air/fuel mixture that is neither too rich nor too lean. Stoichiometric ratio is 14.7
parts of air for every 1 part of fuel.
Switch: A device for making, breaking, or changing the connections in an electrical circuit.
TA: Traction Assist.
TACH: Tachometer.
TB: Throttle Body. A device that controls airflow through the engine via a butterfly valve, and has
an air bypass channel around the throttle plate.
TC: 1. Traction Control. Combines anti-lock braking and axle torque reduction to control wheel
slippage. 2. Turbocharger.
TDC: Top Dead Center.
Tear Tag: The two-piece adhesive label attached to the PCM to identify its calibration.
Thermistor: A temperature dependent resistor, like that used in CHT and ECT sensors.
Timing: Relationship between spark plug firing and piston position expressed in crankshaft degrees
before (BTDC) or after (ATDC) top dead center of the compression stroke.
TMAP: Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor. A MAP Sensor that includes a thermistor to
measure intake air temperature.
TP: Throttle Position (sensor). A three-wire potentiometer that provides throttle angle and rate
information for the PCM.
TP V: Throttle Position Sensor Voltage.
Transducer: A device that receives energy from one medium and transfers it to another. For
example, thermal energy is converted to an electrical signal through a temperature probe.
Transmissions/Transaxles:
NOTE: All related items are grouped under the general heading "TRANSMISSIONS" located at the
end.
TSB: Technical Service Bulletin. Notifies service personnel of any known vehicle concerns,
procedures, or general service information.
Underspeed Mode: A control mode that prevents the engine from stalling in the event it stumbles
while running. Also used during engine crank.
Vacuum: Manifold pressure that is reduced below the ambient atmospheric pressure.
Variable Reluctance: A process of passing a varying magnetic field through wire windings and
inducing a voltage.
VCT: Variable Camshaft Timing.
VECI: Vehicle Emission Control Information label.
VIN: Vehicle Identification Number. A unique identification number given to every vehicle produced.
Includes information about the year, model, engine, and plant origin of the vehicle.
VMV: Vapor Management Valve. Controls the flow of fuel vapors out of the carbon canister.
VOM: Volt-Ohm Meter. Readings are indicated by sweep hand on a printed scale rather than a
digital (DVOM) display.
VPWR: Vehicle Power. A switched circuit that provides power to the EEC system. Compare
"Battery Voltage
VREF: Reference Voltage. A dedicated circuit that provides approximately a 5.0 volt signal used as
a reference by certain sensors.
WAC: Wide Open Throttle A/C Cut-off. Turns A/C system off during wide open throttle or certain
other operating conditions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 2998
Wastegate Control: A device that opens the wastegate in case of overboost from a turbocharger.
WOT: Wide Open Throttle. A condition of maximum airflow through the throttle body.
Zip Tube: Another name for "fresh air duct" or "air inlet duct".
TRANSMISSIONS:
NOTE: The transmission naming convention is as follows:
^ The first character, a number, is the number of forward gears.
^ The second character, either the letter "F" or "R," represents front (transaxle) or rear
(transmission) wheel drive.
^ The next set of characters, a grouping of numbers, represents the design torque capacity of the
transmission/transaxle (for example, "27" represents 270ft./lbs. in the 4F27E transaxle).
^ The last character, if used, is one of the following:
^ "E" for electronic shift
^ "N" for non-synchronous shift
^
"S" for synchronous shift
^ "W" for wide ratio
^ 4F27E: Also known as the FN Focus automatic transmission.
^ 4F44E: Formerly known as the CD4E.
^ 4F46S: Formerly known as the Ax45 and regular-duty AXOD-E.
^ 4F50N: Formerly known as the Ax4N and heavy-duty AXOD-E.
^ 4R44E: Formerly known as A4LD for 3.0L applications.
^ 4R55E: Formerly known as A4LD for 4.0L applications.
^ 4R70W: Formerly known as AOD-E.
^ 4R100: Formerly known as E4OD.
^ 5R44E: Formerly known as A5LD for 3.0L applications.
^ 5R55E: Formerly known as A5LD for 4.0L applications.
^ 5R55N: Lincoln LS automatic transmission.
^ 5R55W: Wide-ratio truck transmission.
^ 4x4L: 4x4 Low.
^ A/T: Automatic Transmission.
^ CCS: Coast Clutch Solenoid.
^ CCSF: Coast Clutch Solenoid Fault. Displays a YES if fault exists.
^ EPC: Electronic Pressure Control.
^ EPCV: Electronic Pressure Control Volts.
^ ESS: Electronic Shift Scheduling.
^ HCDSS: High Clutch Drum Speed Sensor. PCM input from the 4R44E and 4R55E.
^ M5OD: Manual 5-Speed transmission with overdrive (RWD).
^ M/T: Manual Transmission/Transaxle.
^ NPS: Neutral Pressure Switch or its signal input to the PCM.
^ OCS: Overdrive Cancel Switch.
^ OSS: Output Shaft Speed. Indicates rotational speed of the transmission output shaft.
^ PNP: Park/Neutral Position switch. Also known as Neutral Drive Switch (NDS), Neutral Gear
Switch (NGS), and Transmission Switch Neutral (TSN).
^ REVERSE or REV: Transmission Reverse Switch Input.
^ SIL: Shift Indicator Lamp. A lamp that indicates the preferred shift points on select manual
transmission/transaxle vehicles.
^ S91/SS2/SS3: Shift solenoids. Devices that control the shifting in an automatic transmission.
^ TCC: Torque Converter Clutch. When energized, causes a mechanical engagement and
disengagement of the Torque Converter Clutch.
^ TCIL: Transmission Control Indicator Lamp. Indicates that the Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
has been activated.
^ TCS: Transmission Control Switch. Modifies the operation of electronically controlled
transmissions.
^ Torque converter: A device which by its design multiplies the torque in a fluid coupling between
an engine and transmission/transaxle.
^ TFT: Transmission Fluid Temperature. Indicates temperature of transmission fluid.
^ Transaxle: A device consisting of a transmission and axle drive gears assembled in the same
case. Front-wheel drive applications.
^ Transmission: A device which selectively increases or decreases the ratio of relative rotation
between its input and output shafts. Rear-wheel drive applications.
^ TR: Transmission Range. The range in which the transmission is operating.
^ TR Sensor: Formerly known as Manual Lever Position Sensor (MLPS). Provides information to
the PCM on the transmission range selector position.
^ TR V: Transmission Range Voltage.
^ TSS: Turbine Shaft Speed. Indicates rotational speed of the transmission turbine shaft.
^ VSS: Vehicle Speed Sensor. A magnetic pickup device that generates an AC signal that is
proportional to vehicle speed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 2999
Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Federal Test
Procedure
Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Federal Test Procedure
The Catalyst Efficiency Monitor uses an oxygen sensor before and after the catalyst to infer the
hydrocarbon efficiency based on oxygen storage capacity of the catalyst. Under normal, close-loop
fuel conditions, high efficiency catalysts have significant oxygen storage. This makes the switching
frequency of the rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) very slow and reduces the amplitude of those
switches as compared to the switching frequency and amplitude of the front HO2S. As the catalyst
efficiency deteriorates, its ability to store oxygen declines. The post-catalyst or downstream HO2S
signal begins to switch more rapidly with increasing amplitude, approaching the switching
frequency and amplitude of the pre-catalyst or upstream HO2S.
All applications utilize an FTP-based (Federal Test Procedure) catalyst monitor. This simply means
that the catalyst monitor must run during a standard FTP emission test as opposed to the
20-second steady state catalyst monitor used in 1994 through some 1996 vehicles. Two slightly
different versions of the catalyst monitor are used in the 2001 model year.
Switch Ratio Method (1996 - 2001)
1. In order to assess catalyst oxygen storage, the monitor counts front and rear HO2S switches
during part-throttle, close-loop fuel condition after
the engine is warmed-up and inferred catalyst temperature is within limits. Front switches are
accumulated in up to nine different air mass regions or cells although three air mass regions is
typical. Rear switches are counted in a single cell for all air mass regions. When the required
number of front switches has accumulated in each cell, the total number of rear switches is divided
by the total number of front switches to compute a switch ratio. A switch ratio near 0.0 indicates
high oxygen storage capacity, hence high HC efficiency. A switch ratio near 1.0 indicates low
oxygen storage capacity, hence low HC efficiency. If the actual switch ratio exceeds a calibrated
threshold switch ratio, the catalyst is considered failed.
Inputs from Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) or Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) (warm
engine), IAT (not extreme ambient temperatures), Mass Air Flow (MAF) (greater than minimum
engine load), Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (within vehicle speed widow) and Throttle Position (TP)
(at part-throttle) are required to enable the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor.
2. The DTCs associated with this test are Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0420 (Bank 1) and
P0430 (Bank 2). Because an Exponentially
Weight Moving Average algorithm is use for malfunction determination, up to six driving cycles may
be required to illuminate the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) during normal customer driving. If
Keep Alive Memory (KAM) is reset, a malfunction will illuminate the MIL in 2 drive cycles.
Index Ratio Method (some 2001 and beyond)
1. In order to assess catalyst oxygen storage, the catalyst monitor counts front HO2S switches
during part-throttle, closed-loop fuel conditions
after the engine is warmed-up and inferred catalyst temperature is within limits. Front switches are
accumulated in up to three different air mass regions or cells. While catalyst monitoring entry
conditions are being met, the front and rear HO2S signal lengths are continually being calculated.
When the required number of front switches has accumulated in each cell, the total signal length of
the rear HO2S is divided by the total signal length of the front HO2S to compute a catalyst index
ratio. An index ratio near 0.0 indicates high oxygen storage capacity, hence high efficiency. A
switch ratio near 1.0 indicates low oxygen storage capacity, hence low HC efficiency. If the actual
index ratio exceeds the threshold index ratio, the catalyst is considered failed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 3000
Inputs from ECT or CHT (warm engine), IAT (not extreme ambient temperatures), MAF (greater
than minimum engine load), VSS (within vehicle speed widow) and TP (at part-throttle) are required
to enable the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor.
2. The DTCs associated with this test are DTC P0420 (Bank 1) and P0430 (Bank 2). Because an
Exponentially Weighted Moving Average
algorithm is use for malfunction determination, up to six driving cycles may be required to illuminate
the MIL during normal customer driving. If KAM is reset, a malfunction will illuminate the MIL in 2
drive cycles.
If the catalyst monitor does not complete during a particular driving cycle, the already accumulated
switch/signal data is retained in Keep Alive Memory and is used during the next driving cycle to
allow the catalyst monitor a better opportunity to complete.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 3001
Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Catalyst and Exhaust Systems
Catalyst and Exhaust System
Overview
The Catalytic Converter and Exhaust Systems (Figure 135) work together to control the release of
harmful engine exhaust emissions into the atmosphere. The engine exhaust gas consists mainly of
Nitrogen (N), Carbon Dioxide (CO2) and Water Vapor (H2O). However, it also contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO), Oxides Of Nitrogen (NOx), Hydrogen (H), and various unburned Hydrocarbons
(HCs). CO, NO(x), and HCs are major air pollutants, and their emission into the atmosphere must
be controlled.
The exhaust system generally consists of an exhaust manifold, front exhaust pipe, upstream
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S), rear exhaust pipe, downstream HO2S, a muffler and an exhaust
tailpipe. The catalytic converter is installed between the front and rear exhaust pipes. Catalytic
converter efficiency is monitored by the On Board Diagnostic (OBD II) system.
Generic Catalyst and Exhaust System
Catalytic Converter
A catalyst is a material that remains unchanged when it initiates and increases the speed of a
chemical reaction. A catalyst will also enable a chemical reaction to occur at a lower temperature.
The concentration of exhaust gas products released to the atmosphere must be controlled. The
catalytic converter assists in this task. It contains a catalyst in the form of a specially treated
honeycomb structure saturated with catalytically active precious metals. As the exhaust gases
come in contact with the catalyst, they are changed into mostly harmless products. The catalyst
initiates and speeds up heat producing chemical reactions of the exhaust gas components so they
are used up as much as possible.
Exhaust System
The purpose of the exhaust system is to convey engine emissions from the exhaust manifold to the
atmosphere. Engine exhaust emissions are directed from the engine exhaust manifold to the
catalytic converter through the front exhaust pipe. An HO2S is mounted on the front exhaust pipe
before the catalyst. The catalytic converter reduces the concentration of Carbon Monoxide (CO),
unburned Hydrocarbons (HCs) and Oxides of Nitrogen (NO) in the exhaust emissions to an
acceptable level. The reduced exhaust emissions are directed from the catalytic converter to a
muffler through the rear exhaust pipe. Another HO2S is mounted on the rear exhaust pipe. Lastly,
the exhaust emissions are directed to the atmosphere through an exhaust tailpipe.
HARDWARE
The downstream HO2S may be located after the light off catalyst or underbody catalyst. The
underbody catalyst may be in-line with the light off catalyst, or the underbody catalyst may be
common to two light off catalysts, forming a "Y" pipe configuration. For an exact configuration of the
catalyst and exhaust system, refer to Exhaust System.
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The Three Way Catalytic (TWC) converter contains either platinum (Pt) and Rhodium (Rh) or
Palladium (Pd) and Rhodium (Rh). The TWC converter catalyzes the oxidation reactions of
unburned HCs and CO and the reduction reaction of NO. The three-way conversion can be best
accomplished by always operating the engine air fuel/ratio at or close to stoichiometry.
Exhaust Manifold/Runners
The exhaust manifold runners collect exhaust gases from engine cylinders. The number of exhaust
manifolds and exhaust manifold runners depends on the engine configuration and number of
cylinders.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 3002
Exhaust Pipes
Exhaust pipes are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to
increase the life of the product. The pipes serve as guides for the flow of exhaust gases from the
engine exhaust manifold through the catalytic converter and the muffler.
Upstream Heated and Downstream Heated Oxygen Sensors
The HO2S provide the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with voltage and frequency information
related to the oxygen content of the exhaust gas.
In addition to providing the PCM with indications of how rich/lean the engine is operating, the
upstream HO2S signal serves as an input to the HO2S monitor. The downstream HO2S signal is
an input to the Catalyst Efficiency monitor.
Muffler
Mufflers are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase
the life of the product. The muffler reduces the level of noise produced by the engine, and it also
reduces the noise produced by exhaust gases as they travel from the catalytic converter to the
atmosphere.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Page 3003
Catalytic Converter: Testing and Inspection
For information regarding diagnosis of this system refer to Computers and Control Systems
Diagnosis.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Page 3004
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair
Catalytic Converter-2.0L Zetec
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the bolts and the heat shield.
2. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (H02S) and the catalyst monitor sensor electrical
connectors.
3. Using the special tool, remove the H02S.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Page 3005
4. Disconnect the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) tube.
5. Remove and discard the nuts. 6. Raise and support the vehicle.
7. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor.
8. Remove the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Page 3006
9. Remove the spring bolts and the flag nuts.
^ Discard the nuts.
10. Remove the catalytic converter.
^ Discard the ring seal.
^ Discard the gasket.
11. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Install new flag nuts.
^ Install a new ring seal.
^ Install a new gasket.
^ Install new nuts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications
Exhaust Manifold: Specifications
Exhaust Manifold Bolts/Nuts 12 ft.lb
Exhaust Manifold Heat Shield Bolts 89 in.lb
EGR To Exhaust Manifold Tube Nut 30 ft.lb
TWC To Exhaust Manifold Nuts 35 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 3010
Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair
Removal
1. Remove the catalytic converter. 2. Lower the vehicle.
3. Remove the oil level indicator and tube bracket bolt.
4. CAUTION: Do not work on the aluminum engine components until the engine is cold or damage
may occur.
Remove the six bolts and three nuts and remove the exhaust manifold. ^
Discard the gasket.
Installation
1. CAUTION: The exhaust manifold sealing surfaces are soft metals. Do not use abrasive grinding
discs to remove gasket material; use only plastic
manual scrapers. Do not scratch or gouge the aluminum sealing surfaces.
Carefully clean both sealing surfaces.
^ Position a new gasket.
2. Install the exhaust manifold and tighten using the sequence shown.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 3011
3. Install the oil level indicator and tube. 4. Install the catalytic converter.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Heat Shield, Exhaust > Component
Information > Specifications
Heat Shield: Specifications
Heat Shield Exhaust Manifold Heat Shield Bolts 89 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information >
Specifications
Muffler: Specifications
Muffler Muffler/Tailpipe To Resonator Nuts 37 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 3018
Muffler: Service and Repair
Muffler and Tailpipe
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove and discard the nuts.
^ Discard the gasket.
3. Disconnect the muffler from the hanger and remove the muffler. 4. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
^ Install a new gasket.
^ Install new nuts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Resonator > Component Information
> Specifications
Exhaust Resonator: Specifications
Resonator TWC To Resonator Bolts 30 ft.lb
Muffler/Tailpipe To Resonator Nuts 37 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-5-5 > Mar > 01 > PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures
Powertrain Control Module: Customer Interest PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures
Article No. 01-5-5
March 19, 2001
ELECTRICAL - CHARGING SYSTEM WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED - DURING
COLD AMBIENT TEMPERATURES BELOW - 6 DEGREES CELSIUS (20 DEGREES F.) VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH 2.0L ZETEC ENGINE BUILT 7/8/2000 THROUGH 2/12/2001 ONLY
FORD: 2001 ESCAPE
ISSUE
Some vehicles may exhibit a red charge lamp illumination in cold ambient temperatures below-6°C
(20°F). This may be caused by the calibration of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
ACTION
Verify red charge lamp illumination. If normal diagnostics cannot resolve condition, reprogram the
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with latest calibration. Refer to the PCM Calibration Information
Chart shown for details.
Obtain an Authorized Modifications Decal (FPS 8262 - obtainable through DOES II, 25/pkg) and list
the date, dealer number, and summary of modifications performed. Select a prominent place
adjacent to the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal suitable for installing the Authorized
Modifications Decal. Clean the area, install the decal, and cover it with a clear plastic decal shield.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 203000, 203100, 204000, 204200, 206000, 290000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine
Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures
Powertrain Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM
Programming Procedures
TSB 04-24-14
12/13/04
FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria,
Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five
Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer,
F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS
1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis,
Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB
applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement.
ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle
concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed.
ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs.
Verify repair after reprogramming.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM
Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle.
2. Use WDS if available.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine
Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3038
a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply.
b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level.
3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool,
such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS.
NOTE
IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS,
GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF.
PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD
1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able
to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
2. Install the new PCM.
NOTE
IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING
INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER.
3. Attempt to start the vehicle.
4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM.
5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639.
a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure
must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1.
b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly
set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc.
6. Check for DTC B2900.
a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this
procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during
this procedure.
b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7.
7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures.
REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM
Replacement
1. Verify all cables are properly connected.
2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level.
3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level.
4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again.
5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open
previous session, and attempt reprogramming again.
6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM,
proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not
communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure.
1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits.
2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity.
NOTE
IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT
TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine
Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3039
INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC.
3. Connect WDS to vehicle.
4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK.
9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN
from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK.
10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above".
11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK.
12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens.
14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be
reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 01-5-5 > Mar > 01 > PCM Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures
Powertrain Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold
Temperatures
Article No. 01-5-5
March 19, 2001
ELECTRICAL - CHARGING SYSTEM WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED - DURING
COLD AMBIENT TEMPERATURES BELOW - 6 DEGREES CELSIUS (20 DEGREES F.) VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH 2.0L ZETEC ENGINE BUILT 7/8/2000 THROUGH 2/12/2001 ONLY
FORD: 2001 ESCAPE
ISSUE
Some vehicles may exhibit a red charge lamp illumination in cold ambient temperatures below-6°C
(20°F). This may be caused by the calibration of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
ACTION
Verify red charge lamp illumination. If normal diagnostics cannot resolve condition, reprogram the
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with latest calibration. Refer to the PCM Calibration Information
Chart shown for details.
Obtain an Authorized Modifications Decal (FPS 8262 - obtainable through DOES II, 25/pkg) and list
the date, dealer number, and summary of modifications performed. Select a prominent place
adjacent to the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal suitable for installing the Authorized
Modifications Decal. Clean the area, install the decal, and cover it with a clear plastic decal shield.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 203000, 203100, 204000, 204200, 206000, 290000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine
Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures
Powertrain Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM
Programming Procedures
TSB 04-24-14
12/13/04
FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria,
Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five
Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer,
F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS
1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis,
Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB
applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement.
ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle
concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed.
ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs.
Verify repair after reprogramming.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM
Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle.
2. Use WDS if available.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine
Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3049
a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply.
b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level.
3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool,
such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS.
NOTE
IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS,
GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF.
PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD
1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able
to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
2. Install the new PCM.
NOTE
IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING
INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER.
3. Attempt to start the vehicle.
4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM.
5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639.
a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure
must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1.
b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly
set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc.
6. Check for DTC B2900.
a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this
procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during
this procedure.
b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7.
7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures.
REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM
Replacement
1. Verify all cables are properly connected.
2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level.
3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level.
4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again.
5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open
previous session, and attempt reprogramming again.
6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM,
proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not
communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure.
1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits.
2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity.
NOTE
IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT
TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine
Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3050
INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC.
3. Connect WDS to vehicle.
4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK.
9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN
from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK.
10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above".
11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK.
12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens.
14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be
reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3051
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3052
Powertrain Control Module: Diagrams
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3053
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3054
Part 3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3055
Powertrain Control Module: Description and Operation
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE - VEHICLE SPEED OUTPUT (VSO)
The PCM-VSO (Powertrain Control Module - Vehicle Speed Output) speed signal subsystem
generates vehicle speed information for distribution to the vehicle's electrical/electronic modules
and subsystems that require vehicle speed data. This subsystem senses the transmission output
shaft speed with a sensor. The data is processed by the PCM, and distributed as a hard-wired
signal or as a multiplexed data message.
The key features of the PCM-VSO system are to:
^ Infer vehicle movement from the output shaft sensor signal
^ Convert transmission output shaft rotational information to vehicle speed information
^ Compensate for tire size and axle ratio with a programmed calibration variable
^ Utilize a transfer case sensor for four wheel drive applications
^ Distribute vehicle speed information as a multiplexed message and/or an analog signal
The signal from a non-contact shaft sensor (Output Shaft Sensor--OSS or Transfer Case Shaft
Sensor--TCSS) mounted on the transmission (automatics, manuals, or 4X4 transfer cases) is
sensed directly by the PCM. The PCM converts the OSS or TCSS information to 8000 pulses per
mile, based on a tire and axle ratio conversion factor. This conversion factor is programmed into
the PCM at the time the vehicle is assembled and can be reprogrammed in the field for servicing
changes in the tire size and axle ratio. The PCM transmits the computed vehicle speed and
distance traveled information to all the vehicle speed signal users on the vehicle. VSO information
can be transmitted by a hard-wired interface between the vehicle speed signal user and the PCM,
or by Speed and Odometer SCP multiplexed data messages.
The VSO hard-wired signal wave form is a DC square wave with a voltage level of 0 to VBAT.
Typical output operating range is 2.22Hz per MPH (1.3808 Hz pr 1 Km/h). Multiplexed data for
speed and distance data are transmitted as separate SCP messages over the SCP multiplex link.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory
Powertrain Control Module: Service and Repair Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read
Only Memory
Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory - Flash EEPROM
Description
Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) is contained in an
Integrated Circuit (IC) internal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the
vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle and is capable of being
reprogrammed or reflashed repeatedly.
As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the Vehicle Identification (VID) block. The
VID block must be programmed when replacing the PCM as under Programming the VID Block for
a Replacement PCM. Failure to perform this procedure may generate fault code: P1639, VID Block
not programmed or is corrupt. The VID block in an existing Powertrain Control Module (PCM). can
also be tailored to accommodate various hardware changes made to the vehicle since production.
Failure to perform this procedure properly may generate fault code: P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of
Acceptable Range. This is described under Making Changes to the VID Block and also under
Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy
for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the VIN number, octane adjust, fuel octane,
fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the presence of speed control and four wheel
drive electronic shift on the fly versus manual shift on the fly. Only items applicable to vehicle
hardware and supported by the VID block will be displayed on the scan tool.
When changing items in the VID block, the strategy will place range limits on certain items such as
tire and axle ratio. The VID block is also limited to the number of times to be reconfigured. When
this limit is reached, the scan tool will display a message indicating the need to flash the PCM
again to reset the VID block.
Each of the procedures described below use the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS).
Reprogramming can be performed by a local Ford dealer for any non Ford facility. There are other
Enhanced Scan Tools that may have reprogramming capabilities available. Refer to the diagnostic
tool manufacturers users manual for details.
Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM
A new PCM will contain the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However,
the VID block will be blank and will need programming. There are two procedures available. The
first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM and the second is manual data
entry into the new PCM.
Automatic data transfer will be performed if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done
by the use of a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The
stored data can now be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been replaced.
Manual data entry must be performed if the old module is damaged and is incapable of
communicating. Remove and replace the old PCM. You may be instructed to contact the "AS
BUILT" data center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool.
Contact the center ONLY if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford L-M
technician's, contact your National Hotline for "AS Built" data. Non Ford technicians, use the Fed
World website at "fedworld.gov". Select Auto Service Information and search for "Calibrations" or
"Vehicle Calibrations" then specify vehicle manufacturer, model name and model year as required.
Making Changes to the VID Block
A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to
accommodate vehicle hardware. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool.
Making Changes to the PCM Calibration
At certain times, the entire EEPROM will need to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to
changes made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block
because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory > Page 3058
Powertrain Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) cover.
1 Loosen the bolt and disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the nuts and the cover.
3. Remove the PCM.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module Power Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] >
Component Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module Power Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3062
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Emission Control Systems > Air Injection Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation
Air Injection Pump Relay: Description and Operation
SOLID STATE RELAY
Solid State Relay
The solid state relay (Figure 124) switches the high current required for operation of the electric
AIR pump. Input control to the solid state relay comes from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3071
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3072
Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3073
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Powertrain Control Module Power Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] >
Component Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Powertrain Control Module Power Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3077
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3082
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3083
Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3084
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Absolute Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
THERMAL MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) Sensor
The Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor (TMAP) (Figure 41) consists of a Manifold
Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor and an integrated thermistor. The thermistor part of the sensor is
currently not being used. The MAP part of the sensor measures intake manifold air absolute
pressure. The PCM uses information from the MAP sensor, Throttle Position (TP) sensor, Mass Air
Flow (MAF) sensor, Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) or Cylinder Head Temperature (CKP)
sensor and Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor to determine how much exhaust gas is introduced
into the intake manifold.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information
> Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information
> Locations > Page 3093
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information
> Locations > Page 3094
Mass Air Flow Sensor: Description and Operation
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air
entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at
200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 36). If the
hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced.
Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow.
The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air
mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio (Figure 37). This input is also used in determining transmission Electronic Pressure
Control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Some MAF sensors have Integrated Bypass Technology (IBT) with an integrated Intake Air
Temperature (IAT) sensor. The present applications with IBT are: Focus, Escort (4V), 2.0L Cougar,
Escape, Taurus/Sable, Windstar, Explorer/Mountaineer and E-Series.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information
> Locations > Page 3095
Mass Air Flow Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
3099
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
3100
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
The Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor
identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the Powertrain
Control Module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the firing of sequential fuel injectors. The Coil
On Plug (COP) Ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to
fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit.
Typical Hall-Effect Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor
There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 22)
and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor (Figure 23).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
3101
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP)/Park-Neutral Position (PNP) Switches
The Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) switch (Figure 24) is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch
pedal position and, in some manual transmission applications, both the clutch pedal engagement
position and the gear shift position. The PCM provides a 5-volt reference Vehicle Reference
Voltage (VREF) signal to the CPP switch and/or a Park/Neutral Position (PNP) switch (on the CPP
signal line). If the CPP switch (either or both CPP and PNP switches are closed) is closed,
indicating the clutch pedal is engaged and the shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position, the output
voltage (5 volts) from the PCM is grounded through the signal return line to the PCM, and there is 1
volt or less. One volt or less indicates there is a reduced load on the engine. If the CPP switch (or
PNP switch on vehicle or both CPP and PNP switches open on the vehicle) is open, meaning the
clutch pedal is disengaged (all systems) and the shift lever is not in NEUTRAL position (PNP
switch systems), the input on the CPP signal to the PCM will be approximately 5 volts. Then, the
5-volt signal input at the PCM will indicate a load on the engine. The PCM uses the load
information in mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Page 3105
Clutch Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) electrical connector.
2. Remove the CPP locknut and the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3109
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
3113
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
3114
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS)
Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors
The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block
adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse
wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for
a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9
degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates
crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is
also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of
tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to fixed reference (Figure 25).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
3115
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the exhaust manifold.
2. Remove the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor (Figure 26) is a thermistor device in which
resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as
temperature increases, and increases as temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects
the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and
measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature
information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an
overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on
information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss
could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could
occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by
allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to
Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy details.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor > Page 3121
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT)
Sensor
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor (Figure 27) is a thermistor device in which
resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the
temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine
coolant passage. The ECT sensor is similar in construction to the IAT sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 3122
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the generator.
2. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the CHT sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE
PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL
VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE
DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM
THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING,
POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT
IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions
> Page 3126
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
In-Line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) sensor (Figure 97) or inline Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) sensor
(Figure 98) is used to measure the fuel tank pressure during the EVAP monitor test on vehicles
equipped with the Running Loss-type system. Also, it is used to control excessive fuel tank
pressure by forcing the system to purge.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions
> Page 3127
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY
TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN
POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT
IN PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Disconnect the battery.
WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND
CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL
PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND
CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK
OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID
IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Remove the rear seat assembly.
3. Remove the fuel tank sending unit access cover.
4. Disconnect the fuel tank pressure sensor electrical connector.
5. Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor.
^ Disconnect the vapor tubes.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions
> Page 3128
^ Carry out a leak test. See: Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test
^ Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Emission Control
Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative
Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle
NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford
specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Intake Air Temperature (IAT)
Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire Terminals
The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensors (Figure 34) and integrated Mass Air Flow (MAF) type
(Figure 37), are thermistor devices in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical
resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and increases as the
temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor
terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 3132
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The IAT provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature
information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel spark and MAF.
The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT
sensor.
Supercharged 5.4L Lightning vehicles use (2) AT sensors. Both sensors operate as above.
However, one is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard OBD II/cold
weather input, while a second sensor Second Intake Air Temperature (IAT2) is located after the
supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air
temperature information to the PCM to control border-line spark and to help determine intercooler
efficiency.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3136
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
Knock Sensor
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
The Knock Sensor (KS) (Figure 35) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine
vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine
knock and to retard spark timing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3137
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the KS electrical connector and remove the connector from the mounting bracket.
NOTE: The Knock Sensor (KS) is located on the RH side of the cylinder block.
3. Remove the nut and the KS.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis
Technical Service Bulletin # 01-9-7 Date: 010514
Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis
Article No. 01-9-7
05/14/01
DRIVEABILITY - H025 (HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR), CATALYST, AND FUEL SYSTEM
MONITORS - SERVICE TIPS - OBD II VEHICLES ONLY
FORD: 1994-1997 THUNDERBIRD 1994-2001 MUSTANG 1995-2001 CROWN VICTORIA
1996-1997 PROBE 1996-2000 CONTOUR 1996-2001 ESCORT, TAURUS 2000-2001 FOCUS
1994-1997 F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350 1995-2001 ECONOLINE, RANGER, WINDSTAR
1996 BRONCO 1996-1997 AEROSTAR 1996-2001 EXPLORER 1997-2001 EXPEDITION, F-150,
F-250 LD 1999-2001 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2001 EXCURSION 2001 ESCAPE
LINCOLN: 1995-2001 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 1996-1998 MARK VIII 2000-2001 LS
1998-2001 NAVIGATOR
MERCURY: 1994-1997 COUGAR 1995-2001 GRAND MARQUIS 1996-1999 TRACER 1996-2000
MYSTIQUE 1996-2001 SABLE 1999-2001 COUGAR 1997-2001 MOUNTAINEER
ISSUE This article is intended to be an aide in diagnosing conditions related to Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S), Catalyst, and Fuel System Monitor related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
Additional information is included to assist in diagnosing certain vehicle symptoms. This article is
NOT intended to be a shortcut to the Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) Workshop
Manual pinpoint tests. The pinpoint tests in the PC/ED Manual should ALWAYS be followed when
diagnosing vehicle conditions.
ACTION Use the following information and Service Tips to assist in the diagnosis of H025,
Catalyst, and Fuel System Monitor related DTCs.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 98-23-10 WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 623000, 690000, 698298
Information
^ A. Description of Terms and Acronyms
^ B. HO2S Location Diagrams
^ C. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3142
^ C1. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Information
^ C2. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
^ D. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor
^ D1. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Information
^ D2. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
^ E. Fuel System Monitor
^ E1. Fuel System Monitor - Information
^ E2. Fuel System Monitor Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
^ F. Diagnostic Service Tips
^ F1. Tips - General
^ F2. Tips Related to Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor
^ F3. Tips Related to Catalyst Monitor
^ F4. Tips Related to Fuel System Monitor
A. Description of Terms and Acronyms
^ CHT - Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor or PID
^ CKP - Crankshaft Position Sensor or PID
^ DTC - Diagnostic Trouble Code
^ ECT - Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor or PID
^ EGR - Exhaust Gas Recirculation
^ EEC - Electronic Engine Control
^ EVR - EGR Vacuum Regulator
^ FMEM - Failure Mode Effects Management
^ GND - Ground
^ HC - Hydrocarbons
^ HO2S - Heated Oxygen Sensor or PID
^ IAT - Inlet Air Temperature Sensor or PID
^ KAM - Keep Alive Memory
^ KOEO - Key On Engine Off
^ KOER - Key On Engine Running
^ LONGFT - Long Term Fuel Trim
^ MAF - Mass Air Flow Sensor or PID
^ MIL - Malfunction Indicator Lamp ("Check Engine")
^ NGS - New Generation Star Tester (Scan Tool)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3143
^ OBD II - On-Board Diagnostics II
^ OSM - Output State Monitor
^ PC/ED - Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis
^ PCM - Powertrain Control Module
^ PCV - Positive Crankcase Ventilation
^ PID - Parameter Identification Display
^ RAM - Random Access Memory
^ RPM - Revolutions Per Minute
^ SHRTFT - Short Term Fuel Trim
^ Stoichiometric - 14.7:1 Air/Fuel Ratio (Gasoline Engines)
^ TP - Throttle Position Sensor or PID
^ VMV - Vapor Management Valve
^ VPWR - Vehicle Power (Battery Voltage)
^ VREF - Vehicle Reference Voltage (5 volts)
B. HO2S Location Diagrams
Refer to Figure 1 to better understand the H025 sensor names and locations. Regardless of how
the engine is mounted in the vehicle, conventional or transverse, the HO2S naming convention
stays the same in relationship to engine banks 1 and 2. Bank 1 will always be the bank containing
the # 1 cylinder.
C. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor
C1.) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3144
The H025 Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the HO2S sensors for a malfunction
or deterioration that can affect emissions. Under specific conditions, the fuel control or upstream
HO2S sensors (Figures 1 and 3) are checked for proper output voltage and response rate (the time
it takes to switch from lean to rich or rich to lean). Downstream HO2S sensors (Figures 1 and 3)
used for Catalyst Monitor are also monitored for proper output voltage. Input is required from the
ECT or CHT, IAT, MAF, TP and CKP sensors to activate the H025 Monitor. The Fuel System
Monitor and Misfire Detection Monitor must also have completed successfully before the HO2S
Monitor is enabled.
The HO2S sensor senses the oxygen content in the exhaust flow and outputs a voltage between
zero and 1.0 volt. Lean of stoichiometric (air/fuel ratio of approximately 14.7:1 for gasoline
engines), the HO2S will generate a voltage between zero and 0.45 volt. Rich of stoichiometric, the
HO2S will generate a voltage between 0.45 and 1.0 volt.
^ The HO2S Monitor evaluates both the upstream (Fuel Control) and downstream (Catalyst
Monitor) HO2S for proper function.
^ Once the HO2S Monitor is enabled, the upstream H025 signal voltage amplitude and response
frequency are checked. Excessive voltage is determined by comparing the HO2S signal voltage to
a maximum calibratable threshold voltage.
^ A fixed frequency closed loop fuel control routine is executed and the upstream HO2S voltage
amplitude and output response frequency are observed. A sample of the upstream HO2S signal is
evaluated to determine if the sensor is capable of switching or has a slow response rate.
^ An HO2S heater circuit fault is determined by turning the heater on and off and looking for a
corresponding change in the OSM and by measuring the current going through the heater circuit.
^ The MIL is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive OBD II drive cycles.
The HO2S Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows:
^ HO2S signal circuit malfunction - P0131, P0136, P0151, P0156
^ HO2S slow response rate - P0133, P0153
^ HO2S heater circuit malfunction - P0135, P0141, P0155, P0161
^ Downstream HO2S not running in on-demand self test - P1127
^ Swapped H025 connectors - P1128 and P1129
^ H025 lack of switching - P1130, P1131, P1132, P1150, P1151, P1152
^ HO2S lack of switching (sensor indicates lean) - P1137
^ H025 lack of switching (sensor indicates rich) - P1138
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3145
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3146
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3147
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3148
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3149
C2.) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes
D. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor
D1.) Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Information
The Federal Test Procedure Catalyst Monitor monitors for deterioration in the catalyst system and
illuminates the MIL when tailpipe emissions exceed the appropriate HC emission thresholds. The
Catalyst Monitor is enabled after the upstream and downstream HO2S sensors have been tested
and verified to be functional. This monitor relies on the front and rear heated oxygen sensors
(HO2S) to infer catalyst efficiency based upon oxygen storage capacity. Under normal closed loop
fuel conditions, high efficiency catalysts have oxygen storage which makes the switching frequency
of the rear HO2S quite slow compared with the frequency of the front HO2S. As catalyst efficiency
deteriorates, its ability to store oxygen declines, and the rear HO2S begins to switch more rapidly,
approaching the frequency of the front sensor. In general, as catalyst efficiency decreases, the
switch ratio increases from a switch ratio of 0 for a low mileage catalyst to a switch ratio of 0.8 or
0.9 for a low efficiency catalyst.
Some vehicles will monitor substantially less than the entire catalyst volume in order to meet the
stringent catalyst monitoring malfunction thresholds. In many cases, only the front, light-off catalyst
is monitored.
Front and rear HO2S switches are counted under specified closed loop fuel conditions. After the
required number of front switches are obtained, a rear-to-front HO2S switch ratio is calculated. The
switch ratio is compared against a threshold value. If the switch ratio is greater than the calibrated
maximum limit, the catalyst has failed. The test entry conditions for the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor
are as follows: ECT or CHT (warmed engine), IAT (not at extreme ambient temperatures), MAF
(greater than minimum engine load), VSS (within vehicle speed window) and TP (at part throttle)
are required.
^ Because an exponentially weighted moving average is used for malfunction determination, up to
six OBD II drive cycles may be required to illuminate the MIL.
NOTE
THE CATALYST MONITOR ON SOME EARLY OBD II VEHICLES (SOME 1994-1996 VEHICLES)
WAS REFERRED TO AS THE "STEADY-STATE CATALYST MONITOR" AS OPPOSED TO THE
"FTP CATALYST MONITOR" (DESCRIBED ABOVE) THAT IS MOST COMMON FOR VEHICLES
BUILT AFTER 1996. BELOW IS A BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE STEADY-STATE CATALYST
MONITOR:
The Steady-State Catalyst Monitor performs a 20 second test during steady state rpm and load
conditions. The Monitor transfers closed loop fuel control from the front to the rear 02 sensors. The
Monitor then observes the switching frequency and compares it to a threshold frequency stored in
an rpm/load table. A frequency higher than the maximum calibrated threshold indicates a
malfunction.
The Catalyst Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3150
^ Catalyst system efficiency below threshold (Bank 1) - P0420
^ Catalyst system efficiency below threshold (Bank 2) - P0430
D2.) Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes
E. Fuel System Monitor
E1.) Fuel System Monitor - Information
The Fuel System Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the fuel trim system. The fuel
control system uses fuel trim tables stored in the PCM's KAM to compensate for variability in fuel
system components due to normal wear and aging. Fuel trim tables are based on vehicle speed
and engine load. During closed loop vehicle operation, the fuel trim strategy learns the corrections
needed to correct a "biased" rich or lean fuel system. The correction is stored in the fuel trim tables.
The fuel trim has two means of adapting; a LONGFT and a SHRTFT. LONGFT relies on the fuel
trim tables and SHRTFT refers to the desired air/fuel ratio parameter "LAMBSE". LAMBSE is
calculated by the PCM from HO2S inputs and helps maintain a 14.7:1 air/fuel ratio during closed
loop operation. SHRTFT and LONGFT work together. If the HO2S indicates the engine is running
rich, the PCM will correct the rich condition by moving SHRTFT in the negative range (less fuel to
correct for a rich combustion). If after a certain amount of time SHRTFT is still compensating for a
rich condition, the PCM "learns" this and moves LONGFT into the negative range to compensate
and allows SHRTFT to return to a value near 0%. Input from the ECT or CHT, IAT, and MAF
sensors is required to activate the fuel trim system, which in turn activates the Fuel System
Monitor. Once activated, the Fuel System Monitor looks for the fuel trim tables to reach the
adaptive clip (adaptive limit) and LAMBSE to exceed a calibrated limit. The Fuel System Monitor
will store the appropriate DTC when a fault is detected as described below.
^ The H025 detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and provides the PCM with feedback
indicating a rich or lean condition.
^ A correction factor is added to the fuel injector pulsewidth calculation according to the Long and
Short Term Fuel Trims as needed to compensate for variations in the fuel system.
^ When deviation in the parameter LAMBSE increases, air/fuel control suffers and emissions
increase. When LAMBSE exceeds a calibrated limit and the fuel trim table has clipped (reached
adaptive limit), the Fuel System Monitor sets a DTC.
^ The MIL is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive OBD II drive cycles.
The Fuel System Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows:
^ Fuel Delivery Error - P0148
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3151
^ Lean shift in fuel system operation - P0171 (Bank 1) and P0174 (Bank 2)
^ Rich shift in fuel system operation - P0172 (Bank 1) and P0175 (Bank 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3152
E2.) Fuel System Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes
F. Diagnostic Service Tips
1. Always reset KAM after performing a repair:
After performing a repair on a vehicle with the MIL on, and/or DTCs present, always clear KAM.
When a malfunction is present, the PCM adapts (attempts to correct) for this condition. Once the
vehicle has been repaired, if the KAM is not reset, the PCM will once again have to adapt back to
the normal operating conditions. Clearing the KAM will erase what the PCM has learned, so the
PCM will be able to start with "base tables".
2. Always view and record Freeze Frame Data:
Freeze Frame Data can be a valuable asset in duplicating and diagnosing concerns. This data (a
snapshot of certain PID values, recorded at the time the MIL was activated) indicates the manner in
which the vehicle was being driven at the time the fault occurred. This can be especially useful on
intermittent concerns. Freeze Frame Data, in some cases, can also help to isolate possible areas
of concern, as well as ruling out others. Always record (write down) the Freeze Frame Data.
3. Multiple DTCs (with the same meaning):
When multiple (paired) DTCs with the same meaning are set for multiple sensors, it is unlikely that
replacing both HO2S sensors will resolve the concern. In most cases, there will be another issue
that is causing the codes. Examples of multiple (paired) DTCs:
(P0135/P0155), (P0141/P0161), (P1131/P1151), (P1132/P1152).
To further clarify this, see the more detailed scenario as follows:
A vehicle comes in with a MIL On concern. KOEO self test reveals DTCs P0135 and P0155
(HTR-11 and HTR-21 circuit malfunction), with no other DTCs present. The most likely cause of
these DTCs would be something in the heater power circuit that both of these HO2S sensors have
in common (Example: open or shorted heater circuit wiring or splice). It is highly unlikely that
multiple sensors would fail at the same time. When multiple DTCs of this nature are encountered,
reviewing the appropriate wiring diagram(s) can help to isolate possible areas of concern. When
reviewing the wiring diagram, look for things that the affected sensors have in common.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3153
In this example, the most likely cause of DTCs P0135 and P0155 (with no other DTCs present)
would be a concern with Splice "B" (refer to Figure 2).
NOTE
THIS ILLUSTRATION IS ONLY AN EXAMPLE. SPLICE NAMES "A", "B", AND "C" ARE USED IN
THIS EXAMPLE FOR CONVENIENCE ONLY. ON AN ACTUAL VEHICLE, SPLICE NAMES WILL
DEPEND ON THE CIRCUIT NUMBER FOR THE VEHICLE UNDER REPAIR. NOTE ALSO THAT
THIS FIGURE IS NOT INTENDED TO SHOW ALL SPLICES/CONNECTIONS ON ALL
VEHICLES. OTHER EEC CIRCUITS, NOT SHOWN, MAY ALSO BE SPLICED IN WITH THE
CIRCUITS SHOWN.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3154
4. View H025 PID data carefully: NGS PIDs for HO2S sensors that do not exist (with certain
exhaust configurations) will show a value of "0" volts (refer to Figures 3 and 4).
In this example, the vehicle (equipped with a 4-cylinder engine) has one upstream and one
downstream HO2S. Notice that the NGS (scan tool) display shows two upstream and two
downstream HO2S PIDs, and that the "unused" HO2S sensor PIDs display "0" volts.
5. H025 sensors measure oxygen in the exhaust, not fuel: The exhaust gas condition reported by
the HO2S sensor is based on the presence of oxygen in the exhaust, not the presence of unburned
fuel.
Example: In the event of an ignition-related misfire, you might expect a rich HO2S reading, due to
the amount of unburned fuel in the exhaust system. However, there is also a large amount of
unburned oxygen, since no combustion took place in the misfiring cylinder. Since the H025 senses
oxygen only, it would report a lean condition in this particular situation.
F2.) Tips Related to Heated Oxygen Sensor (H025) Monitor
1. OBD II Response Rate Monitor: The OBD II
Response Rate Monitor (P0133/P0153) is only run at vehicle speeds between approximately 50-95
km/h (30-60 mph), during steady-state conditions. The test lasts approximately 6 seconds.
Therefore, P0133/P0153 cannot be diagnosed at idle in the repair bay.
2. Do not compare H025 switch rate - Bank-to-Bank or vehicle-to-vehicle: Different H025 switch
rates, from Bank-to-Bank, are considered normal. The H025 switch rate, from one Bank to the
other, should not be compared as a gauge of the H025's ability to switch/react. The PCM is
continuously adjusting spark and fuel in reaction to engine operating conditions (rpm, load, air flow,
throttle angle, etc.). The PCM is also continuously adapting to certain conditions (customer driving
habits, engine and component wear, etc.).
F3.) Tips Related to Catalyst Efficiency Monitor
1. Determining catalyst efficiency/switch ratio:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3155
The upstream H025 sensors will have a high switch frequency, due to normal closed loop fuel
control. With an efficient catalyst, the downstream H025 will have a low switch frequency. The
switch ratio is determined by dividing the number of downstream switches by the number of
upstream switches over a given period of time. As the catalyst ages (or if the catalyst is damaged
or contaminated), the downstream switches will increase. When the downstream switch rate
crosses a threshold value (approximately 0.75 switch ratio), a code is stored (P0420 and/or P0430)
and the MIL illuminates (refer to Figures 5 and 6).
NOTE
IF A CATALYST IS DETERMINED TO HAVE LOW EFFICIENCY AND REQUIRES
REPLACEMENT, REPLACEMENT OF THE DOWNSTREAM H025 SENSORS WILL NOT BE
NECESSARY.
2. Use care in handling H025 sensors: In the event of catalyst replacement, use care in the
handling of H025 sensors to prevent damage or contamination. Do not use power tools in the
removal or installation of sensors. Use a 22mm wrench or crow foot to remove and install H025
sensors; do not use slotted sockets, as these sockets may damage wires. H025 sensors should be
torqued to 41 +/- 5 N.m (30 +/- 4 lb-ft).
3. Do not replace downstream HO2S sensors (H02S12/H02S22) for DTCs P0420 and/or P0430:
When diagnosing a vehicle with a customer concern of MIL On and DTCs P0420/P0430 in
continuous memory, do not replace the downstream HO2S sensors (H02S12/H02S22). Damaged
or malfunctioning downstream HO2S sensors will not cause these DTCs to be set. Always verify
the vehicle concern, then perform the pinpoint diagnostics in the appropriate PC/ED Service
Manual.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3156
F4.) Tips Related to the Fuel System Monitor
1. HO2S sensors are not likely to be the cause of adaptive DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175:
Most warranty-returned HO2S sensors (replaced for these DTCs) are found to function normally.
Additional related DTCs will normally be present if there is a concern with the HO2S sensors. Do
not replace an HO2S sensor unless verified through pinpoint diagnostic tests found in the PC/ED
Service Manual.
2. DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, and P0175 are not related to downstream H028 sensors: When
diagnosing a vehicle with a MIL On and DTC(s) P0171, P0172, P0174, and/or P0175 in continuous
memory, do not replace the downstream HO2S sensors. These DTCs have no connection to the
downstream HO2S sensor function nor its diagnosis for faults. Always verify the vehicle concern,
then perform the pinpoint diagnostics from the appropriate PC/ED Service Manual.
3. Diagnosing lean conditions and lean DTCs P0171, P0174: Freeze Frame Data can often help to
identify the type of lean condition, even if the fault is intermittent, by indicating how the vehicle was
being driven when the fault occurred. Diagnosis of lean conditions and lean adaptive DTCs can be
difficult, especially if the concern is intermittent. Verifying the concern is extremely important. There
are different types of lean conditions. The ability to identify the type of lean condition causing the
concern can be crucial to a correct diagnosis. When DTCs P0171 and P0174 are both present,
there is a strong likelihood of another concern being present:
a. Vacuum leaks/unmetered air: In this type of condition, the engine may actually run lean of
stoichiometry (14.7:1 air/fuel ratio) if the PCM is not able to compensate enough to correct for the
condition. This condition is typically caused by air entering the engine through an abnormal source
(opening), or due to a MAF malfunction. In this situation, the volume of air entering the engine is
actually greater than what the MAF is indicating to the PCM. Vacuum leaks will normally be most
apparent when high manifold vacuum is present, during idle or light throttle. If Freeze Frame Data
indicates that the fault occurred at idle, a check for vacuum leaks/unmetered air when the engine is
cold might be the best starting point.
Examples: Loose, leaking or disconnected vacuum lines, intake manifold gaskets or 0-rings,
throttle body gaskets, brake booster, air inlet tube, stuck/frozen/aftermarket PCV valve, unseated
engine oil dipstick, MAF reading lower than normal, etc.
b. Insufficient fueling: In this type of condition, the engine may actually run lean of stoichiometry
(14.7:1 air/fuel ratio) if the PCM is not able to compensate enough to correct for the condition. This
condition is typically caused by a fuel delivery system concern that restricts or limits the amount of
fuel being delivered to the engine. This condition will normally be most apparent when the engine is
under a heavy load, when a higher volume of fuel is required. If Freeze Frame Data indicates that
the fault occurred under a heavy load, a check of the fuel delivery system (checking fuel pressure
with engine under a load) might be the best starting point.
Examples: Low fuel pressure (fuel pump, fuel filter, fuel leaks, restricted fuel supply lines), fuel
injector concerns, etc.
c. Exhaust system leaks: In this type of condition, the engine may actually be running near
stoichiometry (14.7:1 air/fuel ratio), but the exhaust gas mixture will be lean. This condition is
caused by oxygen-rich air entering the exhaust system through an external source. This condition
will cause the exhaust gas mixture to be lean, even though the actual combustion in the engine
may not be.
Examples: Exhaust system leaks upstream or near HO2S, malfunctioning Secondary Air Injection
system
d. MAF concerns: If a MAF concern is suspected, see TSB 98-23-10.
4. Checking fuel pressure: Check fuel pressure with engine under a load when diagnosing a lean
concern. A partially plugged fuel filter can be difficult to detect and can be easily overlooked if fuel
pressure is only checked at idle. The same is true for other types of fuel supply concerns (e.g., bent
or kinked lines, degraded fuel pump).
At idle, an engine requires only a small volume of fuel. Due to the fact that there is a small volume
of fuel needed at idle, a restriction in the fuel supply line in many cases will not cause the fuel
pressure to be low. When the vehicle is under a load, the engine requires much more fuel than at
idle. Under a load, a restriction in the fuel supply line will prevent the high rate of fuel flow that is
needed to maintain the correct fuel pressure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3157
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3160
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3161
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3162
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3163
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3164
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3165
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3166
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3167
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3168
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3169
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3170
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3171
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3172
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3173
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3174
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3175
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3176
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3177
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3178
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3179
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 3180
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor
Heated Oxygen Sensor Monitor
The Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the HO2S
sensors for a malfunction or deterioration which can affect emissions. The fuel control or upstream
HO2S is checked for proper output voltage and response rate (the time it takes to switch from lean
to rich or rich to lean). Downstream HO2S used for Catalyst Monitor are also monitored for proper
output voltage. The following illustration shows that input is required from the Engine Coolant
Temperature (ECT) or Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT), Intake Air Temperature (IAT), Mass Air
Flow (MAF) and Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensors to activate the HO2S Monitor. The Fuel
System Monitor and Misfire Detection Monitor must also have completed successfully before the
HO2S Monitor is enabled.
1. The HO2S sensor senses the oxygen content in the exhaust flow and outputs a voltage between
zero and 1.0 volt. Lean of stoichiometric (air/fuel
ratio of approximately 14.7:1), the HO2S will generate a voltage between zero and 0.45 volt. Rich
of stoichiometric, the HO2S will generate a voltage between 0.45 and 1.0 volt. The HO2S Monitor
evaluates both the upstream (fuel control) and downstream (Catalyst Monitor) HO2S for proper
function.
2. Once the HO2S Monitor is enabled, the upstream HO2S signal voltage amplitude and response
frequency are checked. Excessive voltage is
determined by comparing the HO2S signal voltage to a maximum calibratable threshold voltage. A
fixed frequency closed loop fuel control routine is executed and the upstream HO2S voltage
amplitude and output response frequency are observed. A sample of the upstream HO2S signal is
evaluated to determine if the sensor is capable of switching or has a slow response rate. A HO2S
heater circuit fault is determined by turning the heater on and off and looking for a corresponding
change in the Output State Monitor (OSM) and by measuring the current going through the heater
circuit. The HO2S Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows:
The Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTCs) associated with HO2S lack of switching are DTCs P1130,
P1131, P1132, P1150, P1151 and P1152.
The DTCs associated with HO2S slow response rate are DTCs P0133 and P0153.
The DTCs associated with HO2S signal circuit malfunction are DTCs P0131, P0136, P0148, P0151
and P0156.
The DTCs associated with a HO2S heater circuit malfunction are DTCs P0135, P0141, P0155 and
P0161. The Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) associated with the downstream HO2S not running in
on-demand is DTC P1127.
The DTCs associated with swapped HO2S connectors are DTCs P1128 and P1129.
3. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive
drive cycles.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor > Page 3183
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation PCM Inputs
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) (Figure 33) detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and
produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of
oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a low voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low
concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a high voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The
HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near
stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a
voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts.
Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to
temperatures of 800°C (1400°F). At approximately 300°C (600°F) the engine can enter closed loop
operation. The Vehicle Power (VPWR) circuit supplies voltage to the heater and the PCM will
complete the ground when the proper conditions occur. For model year 1998 a new HO2S heater
and heater control system are installed on some vehicles. The high power heater reaches closed
loop fuel control temperatures. The use of this heater requires that the HO2S heater control be duty
cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. The 6 ohm design is not interchangeable with new style
3.3 ohm heater.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
EGO Sensor Wrench
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the
vehicle.
3. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S.
NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or
equivalent to aid in removal.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in
installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 3186
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor
EGO Sensor Wrench
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
EGO Sensor Wrench
1. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor.
NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor
to aid in installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 3187
EGO Sensor Wrench
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3192
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3193
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3194
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3195
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3196
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3197
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3198
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3199
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3200
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3201
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3202
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3203
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3204
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3205
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3206
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3207
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3208
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3209
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3210
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3211
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch (Figure 38) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the
power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic
pressure increases. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for
additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking
maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust transmission Electronic Pressure
Control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Page 3214
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Sensor
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The Power Steering Pressure (PSP) sensor (Figure 39) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the
power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic
pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for
additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking
maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust transmission Electronic Pressure
Control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect
Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831
Attachment I - Administrative Information
Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6
Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure
Sensor Warranty Coverage
OASIS
You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program.
Note:
Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected
vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended
warranty time/mileage period.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is
claimed on.
CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03
Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a
warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for
vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for
this repair under the 02M01 program.
Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage
Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01.
Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles)
Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines.
Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP)
Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside
the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair.
OWNER REFUNDS
Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the
month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair
was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not
have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for
the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460).
All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual.
Refer to ACESII manual for refund information.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect >
Page 3223
LABOR ALLOWANCES
[NEW] NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Special Notes:
^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03.
^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program.
^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor
time has been adjusted accordingly.
^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not
cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs.
^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order
processing.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION
NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect >
Page 3224
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book.
PARTS RETENTION
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures."
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is
encountered, call the Special Service Support Center.
1. Retrieve continuous DTCs.
NOTE:
Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are
present:
^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED
^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED
Any other DTC present is not covered by this program.
2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as
follows:
a) Key off.
b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube.
c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector.
Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is
required.
3. Clear continuous DTCs.
4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect >
Page 3225
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect >
Page 3226
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect >
Page 3227
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug >
04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect
Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831
Attachment I - Administrative Information
Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6
Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure
Sensor Warranty Coverage
OASIS
You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program.
Note:
Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected
vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended
warranty time/mileage period.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is
claimed on.
CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03
Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a
warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for
vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for
this repair under the 02M01 program.
Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage
Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01.
Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles)
Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines.
Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP)
Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside
the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair.
OWNER REFUNDS
Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the
month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair
was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not
have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for
the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460).
All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual.
Refer to ACESII manual for refund information.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug >
04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3233
LABOR ALLOWANCES
[NEW] NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Special Notes:
^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03.
^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program.
^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor
time has been adjusted accordingly.
^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not
cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs.
^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order
processing.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION
NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug >
04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3234
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book.
PARTS RETENTION
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures."
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is
encountered, call the Special Service Support Center.
1. Retrieve continuous DTCs.
NOTE:
Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are
present:
^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED
^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED
Any other DTC present is not covered by this program.
2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as
follows:
a) Key off.
b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube.
c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector.
Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is
required.
3. Clear continuous DTCs.
4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug >
04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3235
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug >
04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3236
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug >
04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3237
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 >
Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL
ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set
Article No. 04-11-1
06/08/2004
DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON
AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS
ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY
FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001
EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC,
EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER
LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR
MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003
MOUNTAINEER
This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications.
ISSUE
Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following
symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently
functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1).
ACTION
For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic
procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED
Manual for the issue described above.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 >
Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3242
NOTE
ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA
NOTE
THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT
THE FOLLOWING:
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002
^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002
^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s).
2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor.
3. Clear continuous DTC(s).
4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 >
Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3243
Labor Operations
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
And Emissions Warranty Coverage.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9J460 42
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 >
Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3244
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 >
Restraints - Seat Belts Slow to Retract
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL
ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set
Article No. 04-11-1
06/08/2004
DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON
AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS
ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY
FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001
EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC,
EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER
LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR
MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003
MOUNTAINEER
This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications.
ISSUE
Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following
symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently
functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1).
ACTION
For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic
procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED
Manual for the issue described above.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 >
Restraints - Seat Belts Slow to Retract > Page 3250
NOTE
ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA
NOTE
THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT
THE FOLLOWING:
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002
^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002
^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s).
2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor.
3. Clear continuous DTC(s).
4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 >
Restraints - Seat Belts Slow to Retract > Page 3251
Labor Operations
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
And Emissions Warranty Coverage.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9J460 42
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 >
Restraints - Seat Belts Slow to Retract > Page 3252
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3253
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3254
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 86) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure
transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice
tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses
referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI
SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the aluminum differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter
hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the
pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3255
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 87) is identical in operation
as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose
connections are marked on the underside of the sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3256
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR
tube.
NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3260
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > PCM Inputs
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation PCM Inputs
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Typical Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
The Throttle Position (TP) sensor (Figure 42) is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a
signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing
has a three-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases
corrosion resistance on terminals and increases connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on
the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are
determined by the PCM from the TP. Those conditions are closed throttle (includes idle or
deceleration), part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration), wide open throttle (includes
maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank), and throttle angle rate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > PCM Inputs > Page 3263
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Systems
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system for component integrity, system
functionality, and faults that can cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government
regulations. For additional information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System
Hardware-PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications
Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Specifications
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 18 ft.lb
Transmission range (TR) sensor bolts 9 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3267
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3268
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3269
Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL. 2. Disconnect the battery cables. 3. Remove the battery and
tray.
4. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAP) sensor.
5. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3270
6. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
7. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the thermostat housing to gain access to the transmission
range (TR) sensor.
Remove the thermostat housing.
8. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor.
1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3271
2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Connect the electrical connector.
3. Install the thermostat housing.
4. Install the air cleaner assembly.
5. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
6. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor.
7. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
Install the battery and tray.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3272
8. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive
symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its
adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the
strategy.
Connect the battery cables.
9. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in
PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should be
active only in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Specifications
Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) bolt 62 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page
3276
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page
3277
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page
3278
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
The Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (Figure 45) is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that
generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the
vehicle is moving at a relatively low velocity, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As
the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM
uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as
fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling and torque converter clutch
scheduling.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page
3279
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the VSS. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect
Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831
Attachment I - Administrative Information
Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6
Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure
Sensor Warranty Coverage
OASIS
You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program.
Note:
Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected
vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended
warranty time/mileage period.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is
claimed on.
CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03
Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a
warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for
vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for
this repair under the 02M01 program.
Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage
Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01.
Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles)
Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines.
Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP)
Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside
the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair.
OWNER REFUNDS
Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the
month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair
was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not
have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for
the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460).
All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual.
Refer to ACESII manual for refund information.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3289
LABOR ALLOWANCES
[NEW] NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Special Notes:
^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03.
^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program.
^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor
time has been adjusted accordingly.
^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not
cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs.
^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order
processing.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION
NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3290
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book.
PARTS RETENTION
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures."
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is
encountered, call the Special Service Support Center.
1. Retrieve continuous DTCs.
NOTE:
Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are
present:
^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED
^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED
Any other DTC present is not covered by this program.
2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as
follows:
a) Key off.
b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube.
c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector.
Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is
required.
3. Clear continuous DTCs.
4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3291
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3292
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3293
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall
- Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect
Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831
Attachment I - Administrative Information
Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6
Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure
Sensor Warranty Coverage
OASIS
You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program.
Note:
Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected
vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended
warranty time/mileage period.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is
claimed on.
CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03
Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a
warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for
vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for
this repair under the 02M01 program.
Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage
Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01.
Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles)
Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines.
Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP)
Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside
the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair.
OWNER REFUNDS
Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the
month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair
was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not
have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for
the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460).
All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual.
Refer to ACESII manual for refund information.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall
- Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3299
LABOR ALLOWANCES
[NEW] NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Special Notes:
^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03.
^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program.
^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor
time has been adjusted accordingly.
^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not
cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs.
^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order
processing.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION
NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall
- Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3300
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book.
PARTS RETENTION
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures."
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is
encountered, call the Special Service Support Center.
1. Retrieve continuous DTCs.
NOTE:
Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are
present:
^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED
^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED
Any other DTC present is not covered by this program.
2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as
follows:
a) Key off.
b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube.
c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector.
Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is
required.
3. Clear continuous DTCs.
4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall
- Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3301
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall
- Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3302
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall
- Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3303
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 >
Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL
ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set
Article No. 04-11-1
06/08/2004
DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON
AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS
ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY
FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001
EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC,
EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER
LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR
MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003
MOUNTAINEER
This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications.
ISSUE
Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following
symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently
functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1).
ACTION
For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic
procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED
Manual for the issue described above.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 >
Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3308
NOTE
ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA
NOTE
THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT
THE FOLLOWING:
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002
^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002
^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s).
2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor.
3. Clear continuous DTC(s).
4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 >
Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3309
Labor Operations
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
And Emissions Warranty Coverage.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9J460 42
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 >
Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3310
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL
ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set
Article No. 04-11-1
06/08/2004
DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON
AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS
ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY
FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001
EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC,
EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER
LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR
MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003
MOUNTAINEER
This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications.
ISSUE
Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following
symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently
functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1).
ACTION
For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic
procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED
Manual for the issue described above.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3316
NOTE
ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA
NOTE
THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT
THE FOLLOWING:
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002
^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002
^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s).
2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor.
3. Clear continuous DTC(s).
4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3317
Labor Operations
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
And Emissions Warranty Coverage.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9J460 42
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3318
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 3319
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 3320
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 86) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure
transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice
tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses
referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI
SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the aluminum differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter
hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the
pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 3321
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 87) is identical in operation
as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose
connections are marked on the underside of the sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 3322
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR
tube.
NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information >
Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information >
Locations > Page 3327
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information >
Locations > Page 3328
Mass Air Flow Sensor: Description and Operation
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air
entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at
200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 36). If the
hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced.
Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow.
The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air
mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio (Figure 37). This input is also used in determining transmission Electronic Pressure
Control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Some MAF sensors have Integrated Bypass Technology (IBT) with an integrated Intake Air
Temperature (IAT) sensor. The present applications with IBT are: Focus, Escort (4V), 2.0L Cougar,
Escape, Taurus/Sable, Windstar, Explorer/Mountaineer and E-Series.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information >
Locations > Page 3329
Mass Air Flow Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
3333
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
3334
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR
Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
The Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 31) is a diaphragm strain gauge device in which
resistance changes with pressure. The electrical resistance of a strain gauge increases as
pressure increases, and decreases as pressure decreases. The varying resistance affects the
voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding
to pressure.
Strain gauge type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The FRP sensor measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by
the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulse width and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder.
Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
The Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 32) senses the pressure difference between the fuel
rail and the intake manifold. The return fuel line to the fuel tank has been deleted in this type of fuel
system. The differential fuel/intake manifold pressure together with measured fuel temperature
provides an indication of the fuel vapors in the fuel rail. Both differential pressure and temperature
feedback signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump
sustains fuel rail pressure which preserve fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel
injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to
decrease.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3338
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3339
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
The Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 72) is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump.
The purpose of the IFS switch is to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel
ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the
magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the
switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset
before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner Guide for the location of the IFS.
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3340
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the cowl side trim panel.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the nut.
3 Remove the cowl side trim panel.
2. Remove the Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch.
1 Disconnect the connector.
2 Remove the screws and the IFS switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3344
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> PCM Inputs
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation PCM Inputs
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Typical Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
The Throttle Position (TP) sensor (Figure 42) is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a
signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing
has a three-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases
corrosion resistance on terminals and increases connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on
the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are
determined by the PCM from the TP. Those conditions are closed throttle (includes idle or
deceleration), part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration), wide open throttle (includes
maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank), and throttle angle rate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> PCM Inputs > Page 3347
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Systems
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system for component integrity, system
functionality, and faults that can cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government
regulations. For additional information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System
Hardware-PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3352
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3353
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
The Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor
identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the Powertrain
Control Module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the firing of sequential fuel injectors. The Coil
On Plug (COP) Ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to
fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit.
Typical Hall-Effect Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor
There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 22)
and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor (Figure 23).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3354
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3358
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3359
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS)
Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors
The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block
adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse
wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for
a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9
degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates
crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is
also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of
tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to fixed reference (Figure 25).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3360
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the exhaust manifold.
2. Remove the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the upper steering column shroud.
3. Remove the screws and the lower steering column shroud. 4. Turn the ignition key to the ON
position.
5. Using a small tool, depress the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock
cylinder out. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3368
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
Knock Sensor
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
The Knock Sensor (KS) (Figure 35) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine
vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine
knock and to retard spark timing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3369
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the KS electrical connector and remove the connector from the mounting bracket.
NOTE: The Knock Sensor (KS) is located on the RH side of the cylinder block.
3. Remove the nut and the KS.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel
Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation
PRESSURE TEST POINT
There is a pressure test point with a schrader fitting in the fuel rail that relieves fuel pressure and
measures the fuel injector supply pressure for service and diagnostic procedures. Before servicing
or testing the fuel system, read any CAUTION, WARNING, and HANDLING information. ON
VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH A SCHRADER VALVE, USE ROTUNDA FUEL PRESSURE
TEST KIT #134-ROO87 OR EQUIVALENT.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System
Information > Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 800 - 900 RPM
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing >
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Remove the battery tray.
3. Remove the bolt and the intake pipe.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Make sure the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel correctly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel
Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve
Eliminated
Fuel Pressure Release: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve
Eliminated
Article No. 02-21-2
10/28/02
FUEL - FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE DISCONTINUED - 2.0L ENGINE
FORD: 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002 ESCORT ZX2, ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1999-2002 COUGAR
ISSUE
Vehicles equipped with the 2.0L 4V Zetec and the 2.0L SPI no longer have the Fuel Pressure
Relief Valve (Schrader Valve).
ACTION
To relieve or manually check fuel pressures, refer to the following Service Procedures for details.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Service Procedure For Relieving Fuel Pressure
1. Remove the fuel pump relay in the engine compartment fuse box.
2. Start the engine and allow idling until the engine stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately five seconds to ensure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. When fuel system service is complete, Install Fuel Pump Relay.
5. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting
engine.
NOTE
IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM.
6. Start vehicle and check for leaks.
NOTE
IT IS POSSIBLE THAT A DTC MAY BE SET DUE TO THE PUMP RELAY BEING PULLED AND
THE ENGINE STARTED AND RUN OUT OF FUEL. IF DTC'S ARE SET, CLEAR ALL DTC'S
BEFORE RETURNING VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER.
Service Procedure For Manually Checking Fuel Pressure With A Gauge.
1. Remove the fuel pump relay in the engine compartment fuse box.
2. Start the engine and allow idling until the engine stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately five seconds to make sure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. Disconnect fuel line at the fuel rail to chassis line pierce point.
a. If the vehicle is equipped with Quick Release Coupling Push Connector at the fuel rail to fuel line
pierce point, separate the coupling by depressing the tabs and pulling on the fuel line.
b. If the vehicle is equipped with a Spring Lock Coupling Connector using special tool 310-D00S or
equivalent
5. Install the Schrader Valve service tool adaptor listed in the chart in this article.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel
Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve
Eliminated > Page 3387
6. Install fuel pressure gauge special service tool 310-012 or equivalent.
7. Install fuel pump relay.
8. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for oaks before starting
engine.
NOTE
IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM.
9. Start and run engine to surge air from fuel system (air trapped in the fuel system may effect test
results).
10. Perform normal diagnosti35 ann service repairs as needed.
11. After fuel system service is complete, relieve fuel system pressure using fuel pressure gauge
relief valve.
12. Remove special service tools
13. Re-connect fuel system lines
14. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting
engine.
NOTE
IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM.
15. Start vehicle and check for leaks.
NOTE
IT IS POSSIBLE THAT A DTC MAY BE SET DUE TO THE PUMP RELAY BEING PULLED AND
THE ENGINE STARTED AND RUN OUT OF FUEL. IF DTC'S ARE SET, CLEAR ALL DTC'S
BEFORE RETURNING VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER.
Service Tools Required Chart
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 404000, 490000, 497000, 499000, 603300, 607000, 698298
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel
Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3388
Fuel Pressure Release: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE
WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER
ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE
FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel
Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3389
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
1. Remove the LH engine compartment relay panel cover.
WARNING: ^
DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER
ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE
FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system.
2. Remove the fuel pump relay. 3. Start the engine. 4. After the engine stalls, crank the engine over
two more times to be sure all the pressure has been released. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the
OFF position. Install the fuel pump relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel
Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3390
Fuel Pressure Gauge
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order >
Component Information > Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
4-Cyl Firing Order: 1 3 4 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 3394
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing >
Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable >
Component Information > Service Precautions
Ignition Cable: Service Precautions
CAUTION:
^ Do not pull on the ignition wire directly, as the wire may separate from the connector inside the
spark plug boot.
^ Correct installation of the ignition wires is critical to engine operation. If one spark plug wire is not
correctly installed at either the spark plug or the ignition coil, both spark plugs connected to the
ignition coil may not fire under load.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3402
Ignition Cable: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Grasp the spark plug boot firmly and with a twisting-pulling motion, disconnect the ignition wires
from the spark plugs.
CAUTION: Do not pull on the ignition wire directly, as the wire may separate from the connector
inside the spark plug boot.
2. Disconnect the ignition wires from the ignition coil and remove the wires.
INSTALLATION
1. Connect the ignition wires to the correct ignition coil terminals.
CAUTION: Correct installation of the ignition wires is critical to engine operation. If one spark plug
wire is not correctly installed at either the spark plug or the ignition coil, both spark plugs connected
to the ignition coil may not fire under load.
NOTE: ^
Whenever an ignition wire is reinstalled or a new one is installed, apply Silicone Brake Caliper
Grease and Dielectric compound to the interior surface of the ignition wire boot.
^ Before installing the ignition wires, inspect the ignition wires for any visible damage; install new
ignition wires if necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3403
2. Connect the ignition wires to the correct spark plugs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Spark Plug Gap
Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Gap
Spark Plug Gap ...................................................................................................................................
.................................................. 1.3 mm (0.051 inch)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Spark Plug Gap > Page 3408
Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Torque
Spark Plug Torque ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................... 15 Nm (11 ft lbs)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 3409
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark Plug Type Cylinders 1 And 3 .....................................................................................................
................................................................ AZFS-32F Spark Plug Type Cylinders 2 And 4 ..................
................................................................................................................................................
AZFS-32FE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 3410
Spark Plug: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the spark plug wires from the spark plugs.
2. Remove the spark plugs.
NOTE: ^
If an original spark plug is reused, install it in the same cylinder from which it was removed. New
spark plugs can be used in any cylinder.
^ Use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the spark plug well before removing the
spark plugs.
3. Inspect the spark plugs. 4. Clean the spark plugs with a wire brush or a professional spark plug
cleaner (follow the manufacturer's instructions).
INSTALLATION
1. Adjust the plug gap as necessary.
2. Install the spark plugs.
NOTE: Apply Anti-Seize Lubricant to the lower three threads of the spark plugs. Do not allow
lubricant to contaminate the spark plug electrodes or insulator tips.
3. Connect the spark plug wires to the spark plugs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check >
System Information > Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
The indicated compression pressure are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is within 75% of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check >
System Information > Specifications > Page 3414
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
General Remarks
NOTE: Removing fuses and disconnecting electrical components causes the powertrain control
module (PCM) to log an error message. After the measurements have been carried out this error
message should be cleared from memory by connecting to PCM.
NOTE: Only check the compression pressure with the valves set to the prescribed clearance (if this
can be adjusted).
The compression pressure should be checked with the engine at operating temperature.
Check The Compression Pressure
WARNING: On manual transmissions shift the transmission into neutral. On automatic
transmission vehicles, select "P". Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. Remove the fuel pump relay. 2. Start the engine - the engine will start, run for a few seconds
then stall. 3. Remove the spark plugs. 4. Install the compression tester. 5. Install an auxiliary starter
switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch OFF, using the auxiliary starter switch, crank
the engine a
minimum of five compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the approximate
number of compression strokes required to obtain the highest reading.
6. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of
compression strokes. 7. Install the components in reverse order, observing the specified tightening
torques. 8. Reset the PCM fault memory.
Interpretation of the Results
The indicated compression pressure are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is within 75% of the highest reading.
CAUTION: If engine oil is sprayed into the combustion chamber, after carrying out the
measurement run the engine at 2000 rpm for about 15 minutes, in order to burn the oil and prevent
damage to the catalytic converter.
If the measurement on one or more cylinders is much lower than the specified value, spray some
engine oil into the combustion chamber and repeat the compression measurement. If the reading
greatly improves, the piston rings are damaged. If the reading stays the same, the cause is either
damaged valve seats or valve stem seals. If the measurements for two cylinders next to each other
are both too low then it is very likely that the cylinder head gasket between them is burnt through.
This can also be recognized by traces of engine oil in the coolant and/or coolant in the engine oil.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance >
System Information > Specifications
Valve Clearance: Specifications
Valve Clearance Intake 0.006 in
Exhaust 0.012 in
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance >
System Information > Specifications > Page 3418
Valve Clearance: Adjustments
Removal
1. Remove the timing belt.
2. NOTE: Measure each valve's clearance at base circle with the lobe pointed away from the
tappet, before removing the camshafts. Failure to
measure all clearances prior to removing the camshafts will necessitate repeated removal and
installation and wasted labor time.
Use a feeler gauge to measure each valve's clearance and record its location.
3. Remove the camshafts.
4. CAUTION: If the camshaft and valve tappets are to be reused, mark the location of the valve
tappets to make sure that they are assembled in
their original positions.
Remove the valve tappets from the cylinder head.
5. NOTE: A mid-range clearance is the most desirable:
^ intake: 0.15 mm (0.006 inch)
^ exhaust: 0.3 mm (0.012 inch)
NOTE: Select tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance plus the base
tappet thickness minus most desirable thickness.
Select tappets and mark installation location.
Installation
1. NOTE: Lubricate the valve tappets with Super Premium SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil or equivalent
meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C153-H.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance >
System Information > Specifications > Page 3419
Install the valve tappets.
2. Install the camshafts.
3. Confirm each valve's clearance at base circle with the lobe pointed away from the tappet. 4.
Install the timing belt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Absolute Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
THERMAL MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) Sensor
The Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor (TMAP) (Figure 41) consists of a Manifold
Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor and an integrated thermistor. The thermistor part of the sensor is
currently not being used. The MAP part of the sensor measures intake manifold air absolute
pressure. The PCM uses information from the MAP sensor, Throttle Position (TP) sensor, Mass Air
Flow (MAF) sensor, Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) or Cylinder Head Temperature (CKP)
sensor and Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor to determine how much exhaust gas is introduced
into the intake manifold.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air
Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air
Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3427
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air
Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3428
Mass Air Flow Sensor: Description and Operation
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air
entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at
200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 36). If the
hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced.
Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow.
The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air
mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio (Figure 37). This input is also used in determining transmission Electronic Pressure
Control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Some MAF sensors have Integrated Bypass Technology (IBT) with an integrated Intake Air
Temperature (IAT) sensor. The present applications with IBT are: Focus, Escort (4V), 2.0L Cougar,
Escape, Taurus/Sable, Windstar, Explorer/Mountaineer and E-Series.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air
Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3429
Mass Air Flow Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Intake Air Temperature (IAT)
Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire Terminals
The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensors (Figure 34) and integrated Mass Air Flow (MAF) type
(Figure 37), are thermistor devices in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical
resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and increases as the
temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor
terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3433
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The IAT provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature
information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel spark and MAF.
The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT
sensor.
Supercharged 5.4L Lightning vehicles use (2) AT sensors. Both sensors operate as above.
However, one is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard OBD II/cold
weather input, while a second sensor Second Intake Air Temperature (IAT2) is located after the
supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air
temperature information to the PCM to control border-line spark and to help determine intercooler
efficiency.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component
Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3440
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3441
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
The Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor
identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the Powertrain
Control Module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the firing of sequential fuel injectors. The Coil
On Plug (COP) Ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to
fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit.
Typical Hall-Effect Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor
There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 22)
and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor (Figure 23).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3442
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP)/Park-Neutral Position (PNP) Switches
The Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) switch (Figure 24) is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch
pedal position and, in some manual transmission applications, both the clutch pedal engagement
position and the gear shift position. The PCM provides a 5-volt reference Vehicle Reference
Voltage (VREF) signal to the CPP switch and/or a Park/Neutral Position (PNP) switch (on the CPP
signal line). If the CPP switch (either or both CPP and PNP switches are closed) is closed,
indicating the clutch pedal is engaged and the shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position, the output
voltage (5 volts) from the PCM is grounded through the signal return line to the PCM, and there is 1
volt or less. One volt or less indicates there is a reduced load on the engine. If the CPP switch (or
PNP switch on vehicle or both CPP and PNP switches open on the vehicle) is open, meaning the
clutch pedal is disengaged (all systems) and the shift lever is not in NEUTRAL position (PNP
switch systems), the input on the CPP signal to the PCM will be approximately 5 volts. Then, the
5-volt signal input at the PCM will indicate a load on the engine. The PCM uses the load
information in mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 3446
Clutch Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) electrical connector.
2. Remove the CPP locknut and the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature
Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature
Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3450
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3454
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3455
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS)
Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors
The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block
adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse
wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for
a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9
degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates
crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is
also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of
tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to fixed reference (Figure 25).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3456
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the exhaust manifold.
2. Remove the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Data Link Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3462
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3463
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3464
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3465
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3466
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3467
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3468
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3469
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3470
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3471
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3472
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3473
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3474
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3475
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3476
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3477
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3478
Data Link Connector: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3479
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3480
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3481
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <-->
[Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-5-5 > Mar > 01 >
PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures
Powertrain Control Module: Customer Interest PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures
Article No. 01-5-5
March 19, 2001
ELECTRICAL - CHARGING SYSTEM WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED - DURING
COLD AMBIENT TEMPERATURES BELOW - 6 DEGREES CELSIUS (20 DEGREES F.) VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH 2.0L ZETEC ENGINE BUILT 7/8/2000 THROUGH 2/12/2001 ONLY
FORD: 2001 ESCAPE
ISSUE
Some vehicles may exhibit a red charge lamp illumination in cold ambient temperatures below-6°C
(20°F). This may be caused by the calibration of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
ACTION
Verify red charge lamp illumination. If normal diagnostics cannot resolve condition, reprogram the
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with latest calibration. Refer to the PCM Calibration Information
Chart shown for details.
Obtain an Authorized Modifications Decal (FPS 8262 - obtainable through DOES II, 25/pkg) and list
the date, dealer number, and summary of modifications performed. Select a prominent place
adjacent to the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal suitable for installing the Authorized
Modifications Decal. Clean the area, install the decal, and cover it with a clear plastic decal shield.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 203000, 203100, 204000, 204200, 206000, 290000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <-->
[Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures
Powertrain Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM
Programming Procedures
TSB 04-24-14
12/13/04
FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria,
Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five
Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer,
F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS
1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis,
Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB
applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement.
ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle
concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed.
ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs.
Verify repair after reprogramming.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM
Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle.
2. Use WDS if available.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <-->
[Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page
3495
a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply.
b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level.
3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool,
such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS.
NOTE
IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS,
GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF.
PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD
1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able
to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
2. Install the new PCM.
NOTE
IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING
INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER.
3. Attempt to start the vehicle.
4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM.
5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639.
a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure
must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1.
b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly
set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc.
6. Check for DTC B2900.
a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this
procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during
this procedure.
b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7.
7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures.
REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM
Replacement
1. Verify all cables are properly connected.
2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level.
3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level.
4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again.
5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open
previous session, and attempt reprogramming again.
6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM,
proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not
communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure.
1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits.
2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity.
NOTE
IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT
TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <-->
[Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page
3496
INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC.
3. Connect WDS to vehicle.
4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK.
9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN
from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK.
10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above".
11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK.
12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens.
14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be
reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <-->
[Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Powertrain Control Module: > 01-5-5 > Mar > 01 > PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures
Powertrain Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold
Temperatures
Article No. 01-5-5
March 19, 2001
ELECTRICAL - CHARGING SYSTEM WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED - DURING
COLD AMBIENT TEMPERATURES BELOW - 6 DEGREES CELSIUS (20 DEGREES F.) VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH 2.0L ZETEC ENGINE BUILT 7/8/2000 THROUGH 2/12/2001 ONLY
FORD: 2001 ESCAPE
ISSUE
Some vehicles may exhibit a red charge lamp illumination in cold ambient temperatures below-6°C
(20°F). This may be caused by the calibration of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
ACTION
Verify red charge lamp illumination. If normal diagnostics cannot resolve condition, reprogram the
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with latest calibration. Refer to the PCM Calibration Information
Chart shown for details.
Obtain an Authorized Modifications Decal (FPS 8262 - obtainable through DOES II, 25/pkg) and list
the date, dealer number, and summary of modifications performed. Select a prominent place
adjacent to the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal suitable for installing the Authorized
Modifications Decal. Clean the area, install the decal, and cover it with a clear plastic decal shield.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 203000, 203100, 204000, 204200, 206000, 290000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <-->
[Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Powertrain
Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures
Powertrain Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM
Programming Procedures
TSB 04-24-14
12/13/04
FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria,
Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five
Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer,
F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS
1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis,
Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB
applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement.
ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle
concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed.
ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs.
Verify repair after reprogramming.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM
Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle.
2. Use WDS if available.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <-->
[Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Powertrain
Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3506
a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply.
b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level.
3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool,
such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS.
NOTE
IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS,
GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF.
PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD
1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able
to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
2. Install the new PCM.
NOTE
IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING
INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER.
3. Attempt to start the vehicle.
4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM.
5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639.
a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure
must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1.
b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly
set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc.
6. Check for DTC B2900.
a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this
procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during
this procedure.
b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7.
7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures.
REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM
Replacement
1. Verify all cables are properly connected.
2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level.
3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level.
4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again.
5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open
previous session, and attempt reprogramming again.
6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM,
proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not
communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure.
1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits.
2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity.
NOTE
IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT
TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <-->
[Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Powertrain
Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3507
INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC.
3. Connect WDS to vehicle.
4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK.
9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN
from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK.
10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above".
11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK.
12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens.
14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be
reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <-->
[Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3508
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <-->
[Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3509
Powertrain Control Module: Diagrams
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <-->
[Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3510
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <-->
[Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3511
Part 3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <-->
[Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3512
Powertrain Control Module: Description and Operation
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE - VEHICLE SPEED OUTPUT (VSO)
The PCM-VSO (Powertrain Control Module - Vehicle Speed Output) speed signal subsystem
generates vehicle speed information for distribution to the vehicle's electrical/electronic modules
and subsystems that require vehicle speed data. This subsystem senses the transmission output
shaft speed with a sensor. The data is processed by the PCM, and distributed as a hard-wired
signal or as a multiplexed data message.
The key features of the PCM-VSO system are to:
^ Infer vehicle movement from the output shaft sensor signal
^ Convert transmission output shaft rotational information to vehicle speed information
^ Compensate for tire size and axle ratio with a programmed calibration variable
^ Utilize a transfer case sensor for four wheel drive applications
^ Distribute vehicle speed information as a multiplexed message and/or an analog signal
The signal from a non-contact shaft sensor (Output Shaft Sensor--OSS or Transfer Case Shaft
Sensor--TCSS) mounted on the transmission (automatics, manuals, or 4X4 transfer cases) is
sensed directly by the PCM. The PCM converts the OSS or TCSS information to 8000 pulses per
mile, based on a tire and axle ratio conversion factor. This conversion factor is programmed into
the PCM at the time the vehicle is assembled and can be reprogrammed in the field for servicing
changes in the tire size and axle ratio. The PCM transmits the computed vehicle speed and
distance traveled information to all the vehicle speed signal users on the vehicle. VSO information
can be transmitted by a hard-wired interface between the vehicle speed signal user and the PCM,
or by Speed and Odometer SCP multiplexed data messages.
The VSO hard-wired signal wave form is a DC square wave with a voltage level of 0 to VBAT.
Typical output operating range is 2.22Hz per MPH (1.3808 Hz pr 1 Km/h). Multiplexed data for
speed and distance data are transmitted as separate SCP messages over the SCP multiplex link.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <-->
[Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read
Only Memory
Powertrain Control Module: Service and Repair Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read
Only Memory
Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory - Flash EEPROM
Description
Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) is contained in an
Integrated Circuit (IC) internal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the
vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle and is capable of being
reprogrammed or reflashed repeatedly.
As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the Vehicle Identification (VID) block. The
VID block must be programmed when replacing the PCM as under Programming the VID Block for
a Replacement PCM. Failure to perform this procedure may generate fault code: P1639, VID Block
not programmed or is corrupt. The VID block in an existing Powertrain Control Module (PCM). can
also be tailored to accommodate various hardware changes made to the vehicle since production.
Failure to perform this procedure properly may generate fault code: P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of
Acceptable Range. This is described under Making Changes to the VID Block and also under
Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy
for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the VIN number, octane adjust, fuel octane,
fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the presence of speed control and four wheel
drive electronic shift on the fly versus manual shift on the fly. Only items applicable to vehicle
hardware and supported by the VID block will be displayed on the scan tool.
When changing items in the VID block, the strategy will place range limits on certain items such as
tire and axle ratio. The VID block is also limited to the number of times to be reconfigured. When
this limit is reached, the scan tool will display a message indicating the need to flash the PCM
again to reset the VID block.
Each of the procedures described below use the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS).
Reprogramming can be performed by a local Ford dealer for any non Ford facility. There are other
Enhanced Scan Tools that may have reprogramming capabilities available. Refer to the diagnostic
tool manufacturers users manual for details.
Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM
A new PCM will contain the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However,
the VID block will be blank and will need programming. There are two procedures available. The
first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM and the second is manual data
entry into the new PCM.
Automatic data transfer will be performed if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done
by the use of a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The
stored data can now be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been replaced.
Manual data entry must be performed if the old module is damaged and is incapable of
communicating. Remove and replace the old PCM. You may be instructed to contact the "AS
BUILT" data center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool.
Contact the center ONLY if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford L-M
technician's, contact your National Hotline for "AS Built" data. Non Ford technicians, use the Fed
World website at "fedworld.gov". Select Auto Service Information and search for "Calibrations" or
"Vehicle Calibrations" then specify vehicle manufacturer, model name and model year as required.
Making Changes to the VID Block
A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to
accommodate vehicle hardware. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool.
Making Changes to the PCM Calibration
At certain times, the entire EEPROM will need to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to
changes made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block
because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <-->
[Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read
Only Memory > Page 3515
Powertrain Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) cover.
1 Loosen the bolt and disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the nuts and the cover.
3. Remove the PCM.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor (Figure 26) is a thermistor device in which
resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as
temperature increases, and increases as temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects
the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and
measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature
information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an
overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on
information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss
could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could
occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by
allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to
Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy details.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor > Page 3521
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT)
Sensor
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor (Figure 27) is a thermistor device in which
resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the
temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine
coolant passage. The ECT sensor is similar in construction to the IAT sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3522
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the generator.
2. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the CHT sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Pump Signal > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Pump Signal: Description and Operation
FUEL PUMP MONITOR
Applications Using a Fuel Pump Relay for Fuel Pump On/Off Control
The Fuel Pump Monitor (FPM) circuit is spliced into the Fuel Pump Power (FP PWR) circuit and is
used by the PCM for diagnostic purposes. The PCM sources a low current voltage down the FPM
circuit. With the fuel pump off, this voltage is pulled low by the path to ground through the fuel
pump. With the fuel pump off and the FPM circuit low, the PCM can verify that the FPM circuit and
the FP PWR circuit are complete from the FPM splice through the fuel pump to ground. This also
confirms that the FP PWR or FPM circuits are not shorted to power. With the fuel pump on, voltage
is now being supplied from the fuel pump relay to the FP PWR and FPM circuits. With the fuel
pump on and the FPM circuit high, the PCM can verify that the FP PWR circuit from the fuel pump
relay to the FPM splice is complete. It can also verify that the fuel pump relay contacts are closed
and there is a B+ supply to the fuel pump relay.
Fuel Pump Driver Module Applications
Fuel Pump Driver Module Duty Cycle Signals, Part 1
Fuel Pump Driver Module Duty Cycle Signals, Part 2
The Fuel Pump Driver Module (FPDM) communicates diagnostic information to the Powertrain
Control Module (PCM) through the Fuel Pump Monitor (FPM) circuit. This information is sent by the
FPDM as a duty cycle signal. The three duty cycle signals that may be sent are listed in the table.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Service Precautions
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE
PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL
VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE
DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM
THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING,
POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT
IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3529
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
In-Line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) sensor (Figure 97) or inline Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) sensor
(Figure 98) is used to measure the fuel tank pressure during the EVAP monitor test on vehicles
equipped with the Running Loss-type system. Also, it is used to control excessive fuel tank
pressure by forcing the system to purge.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3530
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY
TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN
POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT
IN PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Disconnect the battery.
WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND
CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL
PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND
CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK
OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID
IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Remove the rear seat assembly.
3. Remove the fuel tank sending unit access cover.
4. Disconnect the fuel tank pressure sensor electrical connector.
5. Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor.
^ Disconnect the vapor tubes.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3531
^ Carry out a leak test. See: Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test
^ Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Emission Control
Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative
Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle
NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford
specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle
Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle
Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3535
Idle Air Control Valve: Description and Operation
IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE
Nippondenso Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Assembly
Hitachi Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Assembly With Vent/Filter
The Idle Air Control (IAC) valve assembly (Figure 117) and (Figure 118) controls engine idle speed
and provides a dashpot function. The IAC valve assembly meters intake air around the throttle
plate through a bypass within the IAC valve assembly and throttle body. The PCM determines the
desired idle speed or bypass air and signals the IAC valve assembly through a specified duty cycle.
The IAC valve responds by positioning the IAC valve to control the amount of bypassed air. The
PCM monitors engine rpm and increases or decreases the IAC duty cycle in order to achieve the
desired rpm.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle
Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3536
Hitachi Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Assembly With Air-Assist Injectors
On applications with air-assisted injectors, the IAC valve (Figure 119) also supplies a small amount
of air into the path of the fuel injectors. The jet of air causes an increase in fuel atomization at low
speed and light load conditions.
NOTE: The IAC Valve Assembly is NOT ADJUSTABLE and CANNOT BE CLEANED.
The IAC valve (part of throttle body assembly) has an internal diode on some applications. If the
internal diode is measured in crossed terminal position with a digital multimeter, there will be an
incorrect or negative reading. It is important that the mating component and harness connectors
correctly oriented. Diagnostic procedures emphasize this importance.
The PCM uses the IAC valve assembly to control:
^ No touch start
^ Cold engine fast idle for rapid warm-up
^ Idle (corrects for engine load)
^ Stumble or stalling on deceleration (provides a dashpot function)
^ Over-temperature idle boost.
^ Air Assist to Injectors.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle
Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3537
Idle Air Control Valve: Testing and Inspection
Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Noise
1. Open the hood. 2. Verify the condition by operating the vehicle for a short time.
NOTE: ^
Key symptom is elevated idle speed while noise is occurring.
^ "Snapping" the throttle can induce the noise.
3. Inspect the IAC. If physical evidence of contamination exists, install a new IAC. 4. While the
noise is occurring, either place an EngineEAR probe near the IAC valve and the inlet tube, or
create a 6.35 mm (0.25 in)-12.7 mm
(0.50 in) air gap between the inlet tube and the clean air tube. If the IAC valve is making the noise,
install a new IAC valve.
5. Test the vehicle for normal operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle
Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3538
Idle Air Control Valve: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Disconnect the Idle Air Control (IAC) valve electrical connector.
3. Remove the two bolts and the IAC valve.
^ Discard the gasket.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Install a new gasket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Specifications
General Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Module Communication Network: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3544
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3545
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3546
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3547
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3548
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3549
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3550
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3551
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3552
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3553
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3554
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3555
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3556
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3557
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3558
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3559
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3560
Module Communication Network: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3561
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3562
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3563
Module Communication Network: Electrical Diagrams
Diagram 418-00-00-1
Diagram 418-00-00-2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3564
Diagram 418-00-00-3
Diagram 418-00-00-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description and Operation
Module Communication Network: Description and Operation
The module communications network consists of the following items:
^ Standard Corporate Protocol (SCP) communications network
^ International Standards Organization (ISO) communications network
^ Generic Electronic Module (GEM)
^ Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
^ Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) module
^ Restraint Control Module (RCM)
^ Instrument Cluster (IC)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description and Operation > Page 3567
Module Communication Network: Description and Operation Principles and Operation
The vehicle has two module communications networks. The Standard Corporate Protocol (SCP)
network, which is an unshielded twisted pair cable (data bus plus, circuit 914 [TN/OG] and data bus
minus, circuit 915 [PK/LB]); and the International Standards Organization (ISO) 9141 network
which is a single wire (circuit 70 [LB/WH]). The diagnostic tool can connect to both networks
through the Data Link Connector (DLC). This makes diagnosis and testing of these systems easier
by allowing one smart tester to be able to diagnose and control any module on the two networks
from one connector. The DLC can be found under the instrument panel between the steering
column and the radio.
The SCP communication network will remain operational even with the severing of one of the bus
wires. Communications will also continue if one of the bus wires is shorted to ground or voltage, or
if some, but not all, termination resistors are lost.
The ISO 9141 communication network does not permit inter-module communication. When the
diagnostic tool communicates to modules on the ISO 9141 communication network, the diagnostic
tool must ask for all information; the modules cannot initiate communications.
Unlike the SCP, the ISO 9141 communication network will not function if the wire is shorted to
ground or battery voltage. Also, if one of the modules on the ISO 9141 communication network
loses power or shorts internally, communications to that module will fail.
There are two modules linked to the SCP communication network and three modules linked to the
ISO 9141 communication network.
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) is on the SCP communication network. The PCM controls
the engine for better fuel economy, emissions control and failure mode detection and storage.
The Passive Anti-theft System (PATS) is integrated into the PCM module. The PCM/PATS system
is connected to the vehicle electrical system, the transceiver module, the vehicle SCP
communications network and the vehicle anti-theft indicator located in the Instrument Cluster (IC).
The PCM module uses a microprocessor to control the system functions as well as illumination of
the anti-theft indicator. The illumination command is sent from the PCM through the SCP
communications network to the IC, which in turn sends power to the anti-theft indicator. The PCM
module microprocessor stores the ignition key codes in non-volatile memory. The PCM and IC
modules can be diagnosed through the data link connector.
The Restraint Control Module (RCM) is on the ISO 9141 communication network. The RCM
controls the deployment of the air bags based on sensor input.
The Generic Electronic Module (GEM) is on the ISO 9141 communication network. The GEM
controls a variety of systems:
^ rear wiper
^ cargo lamps
^ interior lamps
^ exterior lamps
^ accessory delay
^ perimeter anti-theft (if equipped)
The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) control module is on the ISO 9141 communication network. The
ABS module controls the brake pressure to the four wheels to keep the vehicle under control while
braking.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description and Operation > Page 3568
Module Communication Network: Description and Operation Principles of Operation
Some modules support the ability to change specified factory configuration settings and preset
preference items. The process used to change the settings and customer preference items is
module configuration. There are two different methods of module configuration:
^ Programmable Module Installation (PMI)
^ customer preference items
There are three storage locations for module configuration information. One primary storage
location and two secondary (or backup) storage locations.
^ Primary location is the memory of the specific module.
^ First backup location is the VID block memory of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
^ Second backup is the As-Built Data Center.
During PMI, the diagnostic tool will attempt to extract the module configuration information from the
module to be changed. If this is unsuccessful, the diagnostic tool will use the first backup and
attempt to extract the module configuration information from the VID block in the PCM. If this also
fails, the diagnostic tool will display instructions to contact the As-Built Data Center. This is the only
time the As-Built Data Center should be contacted.
Programmable Module Installation (PMI)
NOTE: If the powertrain control module (PCM) needs to have a powertrain calibration flash
programmed, refer to Computers and Control Systems. Make sure to use the flash cable when
programming calibrations or running a PMI routine on the PCM.
The PMI configuration method is used when a new programmable module is to be installed. During
the PMI routine the diagnostic tool attempts to gather two pieces of information: ^
option content information from the old module (module configuration and customer preference
settings)
^ the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) from the PCM
During PMI the diagnostic tool first looks to the PCM for the VIN of the vehicle. Once the VIN is
retrieved the diagnostic tool will carry out a self-test of the suspect module to determine if the
module has been configured. ^
If DTC B2477 is present the module does not contain complete configuration information. The PMI
routine will then halt and give instructions on how to proceed.
^ If DTC B2477 is not present the module will allow the diagnostic tool to retrieve its option content
information. The diagnostic tool will then store the option content information and the VIN.
The diagnostic tool can store the combined option content information and VIN for only one module
at a time. Once information is stored, the diagnostic tool cannot be used to retrieve any other
option content information without erasing the previous option content information. Make sure the
new module is on hand for installation before retrieving option content information data from the old
module.
After the new module is installed, use the diagnostic tool to restore the option content information
into the new module.
Vehicle Identification (VID) Block
NOTE: ^
If the PCM needs to have a powertrain calibration flash programmed, refer to Computers and
Control Systems. Make sure to use the flash cable when programming calibrations or running a
PMI routine on the PCM.
^ When carrying out a PMI routine on any non-PCM module, use the OBDII cable.
^ Flash programming powertrain calibrations onto the PCM is different than PMI. It has no effect on
the backup data in the VID block memory area of the PCM.
The PCM contains a memory area called a vehicle identification (VID) block. A portion of the VID
block is used to store the backup data for each programmable module on the vehicle.
The VID block is the first backup of information when using the PMI configuration method. If the
diagnostic tool cannot retrieve option content information from the suspect module, the diagnostic
tool will attempt to extract backup information from the VID block of the PCM.
The VID block is not related to or affected by the powertrain calibration information stored in the
PCM. If a new powertrain calibration has been flashed onto the PCM, the VID block will not be
affected.
If using the PMI routine to install a new PCM, the diagnostic tool will reprogram only VID
information. The engine calibration information may still need to be flashed.
As-Built Data Center
The As-Built Data Center keeps a record of the vehicle configuration in a database that is
retrievable using the VIN. The As-Built Data Center records the applicable module configurations
stored in each module before the vehicle leaves the factory. The As-Built Data Center will always
reflect the original build of the vehicle as it left the factory. Only contact the As-Built Data Center
when directed to do so by the diagnostic tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description and Operation > Page 3569
Customer Preference Items
This method is used to enable or disable module-controlled items or systems to suit the preference
of the customer. Not all features controlled by the module are listed in this configuration method.
Refer to the Module Configuration Index for a list of features for each module. See: Testing and
Inspection/Module Configuration/Scan Tool Testing/Module Configuration Index
If a feature is changed using the customer preference items configuration method, the changed
information will not be stored in the PCM VID block. The VID block will retain the original settings
as they were recorded when the vehicle left the factory.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network
Module Communication Network: Testing and Inspection Module Communications Network
Initial Inspection
1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Electrical ^
Central Junction Box (CJB) Fuse ROOM (10 A)
^ Wiring harness
^ Connectors
^ Instrument Cluster (IC)
^ Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) control module
^ Restraint Control Module (RCM)
^ Generic Electronic Module (GEM)
^ Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
3. If the concern remains after the inspection, connect the diagnostic tool to the Data Link
Connector (DLC) located beneath the instrument panel
and select the vehicle to be tested from the diagnostic tool menu. If the diagnostic tool does not
communicate with the vehicle: ^
check that the program card is correctly installed.
^ check the connections to the vehicle.
^ check the ignition switch position is in RUN.
If the diagnostic tool still does not communicate with the vehicle, go to Pinpoint Test H. See:
Pinpoint Tests/Pinpoint Tests/Test H: No Module/Network Communication
4. Go to Pinpoint Test PC. See: Pinpoint Tests/Pinpoint Test PC (Precheck)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3572
PC1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3573
A1 - A3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3574
A3
B1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3575
B2 - B3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3576
C1 - C3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3577
C3
Test D: IC Module Does Not Respond to the Diagnostic Tool
D1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3578
D2 - D3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3579
D3
Test E: PCM Does Not Respond to the Diagnostic Tool
E1 - E2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3580
E2 - E3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3581
E3
Test F: No Module/Network Communication - ISO 9141 Network
F1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3582
F2 - F3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3583
F4 - F5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3584
F6 - F7
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3585
F8 - F10
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3586
F10 - F12
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3587
F12
Test G: No Module/Network Communication-SCP Network
G1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3588
G2 - G3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3589
G4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3590
G5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3591
G6 - G7
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3592
G7 - G8
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3593
H1 - H3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3594
H4
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3595
Module Communication Network: Testing and Inspection Module Configuration
Initial Inspection
1. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage. Refer to the following chart:
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Electrical ^
Damaged wiring harness
^ Loose or corroded connectors
^ Instrument Cluster (IC)
^ Generic Electronic Module (GEM)
^ Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
2. If the concern remains after inspection, connect the diagnostic tool to the Data Link Connector
(DLC) located beneath the instrument panel and
select the vehicle to be tested from the diagnostic tool menu. If the diagnostic tool does not
communicate with the vehicle: ^
check that the program card is correctly installed.
^ check the connections to the vehicle.
^ check that the ignition switch is in the RUN position.
3. If the diagnostic tool still does not communicate with the vehicle, refer to Module
Communications Network (Information Bus). 4. Refer to the Symptom Chart. See: Diagnosis By
Symptom
Module Configuration Index
Module Configuration Index
NOTE: Do not contact the As-Built Data Center unless the diagnostic tool instructs you to do so.
The diagnostic tool will not allow you to use as-built data information unless the diagnostic tool first
prompts you for the As-Built Data Center information.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3596
Diagnostic Tool Message Index, Part 1
Diagnostic Tool Message Index, Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3597
A1 - A2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3598
A3 - A4
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Communications Network Wiring Repair
Module Communication Network: Service and Repair Communications Network Wiring Repair
COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT WIRING REPAIR
Heat Gun
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Strip the wires.
3. Solder the wires.
1 Install the heat shrink tube.
2 Twist the wires together.
3 Solder the wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly Activated (RMA) solder, not acid core solder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Communications Network Wiring Repair > Page
3601
4. Bend the wires back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for the solder to cool before moving the wires.
5. Position the (A) heat shrink tube over the (B) wire repair.
^ Overlap the heat shrink tube on both wires.
6. Use the heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out both ends of the beat shrink
tube. 7. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Communications Network Wiring Repair > Page
3602
Module Communication Network: Service and Repair Module Configuration
Programmable Module Installation
NOTE:
^ If using the WDS, select Module Configuration and Programming, then follow the screen prompts.
^ Do not remove the original module from the vehicle until the diagnostic tool has retrieved the
module's configuration information.
^ Make sure the module is listed as being supported by programmable module installation in the
Module Configuration Index.
^ Make sure to use the flash cable when programming calibrations or running a PMI routine on the
PCM.
^ It is important to keep a record of any error message given by the tester during the programmable
module installation routine. Additionally, observe the point during the routine that the error message
is given and refer to the Diagnostic Tool Message Index. This will help determine what is causing
the error message.
1. Select Programmable Module Installation on the diagnostic tool. 2. Select Retrieve Module
Configuration - Old ECU, and follow the text screens until successful. 3. Install the new module. 4.
Select Restore Module Configuration - New ECU, and follow the text screens until successful.
Programmable Module Installation - Using Backup Data
NOTE:
^ If using the WDS, select Module Configuration and Programming, then follow the screen prompts.
^ Make sure to use the flash cable when programming calibrations or running a PMI routine on the
PCM.
1. Select Programmable Module Installation on the diagnostic tool. 2. Select Retrieve Module
Configuration - Old ECU. The diagnostic tool will give you a message to reinstall the old module or
to continue for
backup data. If the module to be replaced will not communicate or has incorrect data, continue and
allow the diagnostic tool to find backup data. If the diagnostic tool successfully retrieves the backup
data, GO to Step 7 in this procedure. If the diagnostic tool prompts you to contact the As-Built Data
Center for backup information, contact the As-Built Data Center and obtain the backup data for the
vehicle and continue on.
3. After the As-Built Data Center backup data is obtained continue with the routine by entering the
VIN number of the vehicle when the diagnostic
tool prompts you to do so.
4. The diagnostic tool will prompt you to enter the vehicle data. The vehicle data is listed on the
As-Built Data Center sheet in the upper left-hand
portion, directly underneath the VIN for the vehicle.
5. The diagnostic tool will prompt you to enter information for the module that needs to be
reprogrammed. Enter all of the data that the diagnostic
tool requests. If the diagnostic tool requests information that is not listed on the As-Built Data
Center sheet, press NO.
6. Follow the text screens until all pertinent data is entered and the module data is stored. 7. Select
Restore Module Configuration New ECU, and follow the text screens until successful. 8. Manually
validate each customer preference item for correct setting. If necessary, ask the customer what
setting would be their preference. Refer to
the Module Configuration Index for the list of customer preference items. See: Testing and
Inspection/Module Configuration/Scan Tool Testing/Module Configuration Index
Customer Preference Items
NOTE:
^ If using the WDS, select Module Configuration and Programming, then follow the screen prompts.
^ Make sure module is listed as supporting customer preference items and supports the specific
item to be configured in the Module Configuration Index.
1. Select Service Bay Functions on the diagnostic tool. 2. Select the module that contains the
customer preference item to be programmed. Refer to the Module Configuration Index. See:
Testing and
Inspection/Module Configuration/Scan Tool Testing/Module Configuration Index
3. Select Customer Preference Items on the diagnostic tool. 4. Select Module Option Content. 5.
Select the item to be enabled or disabled. 6. Enable or disable the item as necessary to reflect the
customer preference.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Tools and Equipment > Tools and Equipment
Module Communication Network: Tools and Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Heat Gun
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network
<--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Tools and Equipment > Tools and Equipment > Page 3605
Module Communication Network: Tools and Equipment Diagnostic Special Service Tool(S)
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 3609
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
Knock Sensor
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
The Knock Sensor (KS) (Figure 35) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine
vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine
knock and to retard spark timing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 3610
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the KS electrical connector and remove the connector from the mounting bracket.
NOTE: The Knock Sensor (KS) is located on the RH side of the cylinder block.
3. Remove the nut and the KS.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module Power
Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module Power
Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3614
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL)
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
Check Engine, Service Engine Soon Or ISO Standard Engine Symbol
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) (Figure 15) alerts the driver that the Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) has detected an OBD II emission-related component or system fault. When this
occurs, an OBD II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set.
^ The MIL is located on the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE
SOON or ISO standard engine symbol (Figure 16).
^ Power is supplied to the MIL whenever the ignition switch is in the RUN or START position.
^ The MIL will remain on in the RUN/START mode as a bulb check during the instrument cluster
proveout for approximately 4 seconds.
^ If the MIL remains on after the bulb check: The PCM illuminates the MIL for an emission related concern and a DTC will be present.
- The instrument cluster will illuminate the MIL if the PCM does not send a control message to the
instrument cluster.
- The PCM is operating in the Hardware Limited Operation Strategy (HLOS).
- The MIL circuit is shorted to ground.
^ If the MIL remains off (during the bulb check): Bulb is damaged.
- MIL circuit is open.
^ To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the Scan Tool must be sent, or three
consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a fault.
^ For any MIL concern, GO to Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection.
^ If the MIL blinks at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition could possibly exist.
^ If the MIL blinks erratically, an intermittent open B+ to the bulb or an intermittent short to ground
in the MIL circuit exist. Also, the PCM can reset while cranking if battery voltage is low.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability
Diagnosis
Technical Service Bulletin # 01-9-7 Date: 010514
Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis
Article No. 01-9-7
05/14/01
DRIVEABILITY - H025 (HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR), CATALYST, AND FUEL SYSTEM
MONITORS - SERVICE TIPS - OBD II VEHICLES ONLY
FORD: 1994-1997 THUNDERBIRD 1994-2001 MUSTANG 1995-2001 CROWN VICTORIA
1996-1997 PROBE 1996-2000 CONTOUR 1996-2001 ESCORT, TAURUS 2000-2001 FOCUS
1994-1997 F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350 1995-2001 ECONOLINE, RANGER, WINDSTAR
1996 BRONCO 1996-1997 AEROSTAR 1996-2001 EXPLORER 1997-2001 EXPEDITION, F-150,
F-250 LD 1999-2001 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2001 EXCURSION 2001 ESCAPE
LINCOLN: 1995-2001 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 1996-1998 MARK VIII 2000-2001 LS
1998-2001 NAVIGATOR
MERCURY: 1994-1997 COUGAR 1995-2001 GRAND MARQUIS 1996-1999 TRACER 1996-2000
MYSTIQUE 1996-2001 SABLE 1999-2001 COUGAR 1997-2001 MOUNTAINEER
ISSUE This article is intended to be an aide in diagnosing conditions related to Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S), Catalyst, and Fuel System Monitor related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
Additional information is included to assist in diagnosing certain vehicle symptoms. This article is
NOT intended to be a shortcut to the Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) Workshop
Manual pinpoint tests. The pinpoint tests in the PC/ED Manual should ALWAYS be followed when
diagnosing vehicle conditions.
ACTION Use the following information and Service Tips to assist in the diagnosis of H025,
Catalyst, and Fuel System Monitor related DTCs.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 98-23-10 WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 623000, 690000, 698298
Information
^ A. Description of Terms and Acronyms
^ B. HO2S Location Diagrams
^ C. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability
Diagnosis > Page 3622
^ C1. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Information
^ C2. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
^ D. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor
^ D1. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Information
^ D2. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
^ E. Fuel System Monitor
^ E1. Fuel System Monitor - Information
^ E2. Fuel System Monitor Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
^ F. Diagnostic Service Tips
^ F1. Tips - General
^ F2. Tips Related to Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor
^ F3. Tips Related to Catalyst Monitor
^ F4. Tips Related to Fuel System Monitor
A. Description of Terms and Acronyms
^ CHT - Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor or PID
^ CKP - Crankshaft Position Sensor or PID
^ DTC - Diagnostic Trouble Code
^ ECT - Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor or PID
^ EGR - Exhaust Gas Recirculation
^ EEC - Electronic Engine Control
^ EVR - EGR Vacuum Regulator
^ FMEM - Failure Mode Effects Management
^ GND - Ground
^ HC - Hydrocarbons
^ HO2S - Heated Oxygen Sensor or PID
^ IAT - Inlet Air Temperature Sensor or PID
^ KAM - Keep Alive Memory
^ KOEO - Key On Engine Off
^ KOER - Key On Engine Running
^ LONGFT - Long Term Fuel Trim
^ MAF - Mass Air Flow Sensor or PID
^ MIL - Malfunction Indicator Lamp ("Check Engine")
^ NGS - New Generation Star Tester (Scan Tool)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability
Diagnosis > Page 3623
^ OBD II - On-Board Diagnostics II
^ OSM - Output State Monitor
^ PC/ED - Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis
^ PCM - Powertrain Control Module
^ PCV - Positive Crankcase Ventilation
^ PID - Parameter Identification Display
^ RAM - Random Access Memory
^ RPM - Revolutions Per Minute
^ SHRTFT - Short Term Fuel Trim
^ Stoichiometric - 14.7:1 Air/Fuel Ratio (Gasoline Engines)
^ TP - Throttle Position Sensor or PID
^ VMV - Vapor Management Valve
^ VPWR - Vehicle Power (Battery Voltage)
^ VREF - Vehicle Reference Voltage (5 volts)
B. HO2S Location Diagrams
Refer to Figure 1 to better understand the H025 sensor names and locations. Regardless of how
the engine is mounted in the vehicle, conventional or transverse, the HO2S naming convention
stays the same in relationship to engine banks 1 and 2. Bank 1 will always be the bank containing
the # 1 cylinder.
C. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor
C1.) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability
Diagnosis > Page 3624
The H025 Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the HO2S sensors for a malfunction
or deterioration that can affect emissions. Under specific conditions, the fuel control or upstream
HO2S sensors (Figures 1 and 3) are checked for proper output voltage and response rate (the time
it takes to switch from lean to rich or rich to lean). Downstream HO2S sensors (Figures 1 and 3)
used for Catalyst Monitor are also monitored for proper output voltage. Input is required from the
ECT or CHT, IAT, MAF, TP and CKP sensors to activate the H025 Monitor. The Fuel System
Monitor and Misfire Detection Monitor must also have completed successfully before the HO2S
Monitor is enabled.
The HO2S sensor senses the oxygen content in the exhaust flow and outputs a voltage between
zero and 1.0 volt. Lean of stoichiometric (air/fuel ratio of approximately 14.7:1 for gasoline
engines), the HO2S will generate a voltage between zero and 0.45 volt. Rich of stoichiometric, the
HO2S will generate a voltage between 0.45 and 1.0 volt.
^ The HO2S Monitor evaluates both the upstream (Fuel Control) and downstream (Catalyst
Monitor) HO2S for proper function.
^ Once the HO2S Monitor is enabled, the upstream H025 signal voltage amplitude and response
frequency are checked. Excessive voltage is determined by comparing the HO2S signal voltage to
a maximum calibratable threshold voltage.
^ A fixed frequency closed loop fuel control routine is executed and the upstream HO2S voltage
amplitude and output response frequency are observed. A sample of the upstream HO2S signal is
evaluated to determine if the sensor is capable of switching or has a slow response rate.
^ An HO2S heater circuit fault is determined by turning the heater on and off and looking for a
corresponding change in the OSM and by measuring the current going through the heater circuit.
^ The MIL is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive OBD II drive cycles.
The HO2S Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows:
^ HO2S signal circuit malfunction - P0131, P0136, P0151, P0156
^ HO2S slow response rate - P0133, P0153
^ HO2S heater circuit malfunction - P0135, P0141, P0155, P0161
^ Downstream HO2S not running in on-demand self test - P1127
^ Swapped H025 connectors - P1128 and P1129
^ H025 lack of switching - P1130, P1131, P1132, P1150, P1151, P1152
^ HO2S lack of switching (sensor indicates lean) - P1137
^ H025 lack of switching (sensor indicates rich) - P1138
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability
Diagnosis > Page 3625
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability
Diagnosis > Page 3626
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability
Diagnosis > Page 3627
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability
Diagnosis > Page 3628
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability
Diagnosis > Page 3629
C2.) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes
D. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor
D1.) Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Information
The Federal Test Procedure Catalyst Monitor monitors for deterioration in the catalyst system and
illuminates the MIL when tailpipe emissions exceed the appropriate HC emission thresholds. The
Catalyst Monitor is enabled after the upstream and downstream HO2S sensors have been tested
and verified to be functional. This monitor relies on the front and rear heated oxygen sensors
(HO2S) to infer catalyst efficiency based upon oxygen storage capacity. Under normal closed loop
fuel conditions, high efficiency catalysts have oxygen storage which makes the switching frequency
of the rear HO2S quite slow compared with the frequency of the front HO2S. As catalyst efficiency
deteriorates, its ability to store oxygen declines, and the rear HO2S begins to switch more rapidly,
approaching the frequency of the front sensor. In general, as catalyst efficiency decreases, the
switch ratio increases from a switch ratio of 0 for a low mileage catalyst to a switch ratio of 0.8 or
0.9 for a low efficiency catalyst.
Some vehicles will monitor substantially less than the entire catalyst volume in order to meet the
stringent catalyst monitoring malfunction thresholds. In many cases, only the front, light-off catalyst
is monitored.
Front and rear HO2S switches are counted under specified closed loop fuel conditions. After the
required number of front switches are obtained, a rear-to-front HO2S switch ratio is calculated. The
switch ratio is compared against a threshold value. If the switch ratio is greater than the calibrated
maximum limit, the catalyst has failed. The test entry conditions for the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor
are as follows: ECT or CHT (warmed engine), IAT (not at extreme ambient temperatures), MAF
(greater than minimum engine load), VSS (within vehicle speed window) and TP (at part throttle)
are required.
^ Because an exponentially weighted moving average is used for malfunction determination, up to
six OBD II drive cycles may be required to illuminate the MIL.
NOTE
THE CATALYST MONITOR ON SOME EARLY OBD II VEHICLES (SOME 1994-1996 VEHICLES)
WAS REFERRED TO AS THE "STEADY-STATE CATALYST MONITOR" AS OPPOSED TO THE
"FTP CATALYST MONITOR" (DESCRIBED ABOVE) THAT IS MOST COMMON FOR VEHICLES
BUILT AFTER 1996. BELOW IS A BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE STEADY-STATE CATALYST
MONITOR:
The Steady-State Catalyst Monitor performs a 20 second test during steady state rpm and load
conditions. The Monitor transfers closed loop fuel control from the front to the rear 02 sensors. The
Monitor then observes the switching frequency and compares it to a threshold frequency stored in
an rpm/load table. A frequency higher than the maximum calibrated threshold indicates a
malfunction.
The Catalyst Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability
Diagnosis > Page 3630
^ Catalyst system efficiency below threshold (Bank 1) - P0420
^ Catalyst system efficiency below threshold (Bank 2) - P0430
D2.) Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes
E. Fuel System Monitor
E1.) Fuel System Monitor - Information
The Fuel System Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the fuel trim system. The fuel
control system uses fuel trim tables stored in the PCM's KAM to compensate for variability in fuel
system components due to normal wear and aging. Fuel trim tables are based on vehicle speed
and engine load. During closed loop vehicle operation, the fuel trim strategy learns the corrections
needed to correct a "biased" rich or lean fuel system. The correction is stored in the fuel trim tables.
The fuel trim has two means of adapting; a LONGFT and a SHRTFT. LONGFT relies on the fuel
trim tables and SHRTFT refers to the desired air/fuel ratio parameter "LAMBSE". LAMBSE is
calculated by the PCM from HO2S inputs and helps maintain a 14.7:1 air/fuel ratio during closed
loop operation. SHRTFT and LONGFT work together. If the HO2S indicates the engine is running
rich, the PCM will correct the rich condition by moving SHRTFT in the negative range (less fuel to
correct for a rich combustion). If after a certain amount of time SHRTFT is still compensating for a
rich condition, the PCM "learns" this and moves LONGFT into the negative range to compensate
and allows SHRTFT to return to a value near 0%. Input from the ECT or CHT, IAT, and MAF
sensors is required to activate the fuel trim system, which in turn activates the Fuel System
Monitor. Once activated, the Fuel System Monitor looks for the fuel trim tables to reach the
adaptive clip (adaptive limit) and LAMBSE to exceed a calibrated limit. The Fuel System Monitor
will store the appropriate DTC when a fault is detected as described below.
^ The H025 detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and provides the PCM with feedback
indicating a rich or lean condition.
^ A correction factor is added to the fuel injector pulsewidth calculation according to the Long and
Short Term Fuel Trims as needed to compensate for variations in the fuel system.
^ When deviation in the parameter LAMBSE increases, air/fuel control suffers and emissions
increase. When LAMBSE exceeds a calibrated limit and the fuel trim table has clipped (reached
adaptive limit), the Fuel System Monitor sets a DTC.
^ The MIL is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive OBD II drive cycles.
The Fuel System Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows:
^ Fuel Delivery Error - P0148
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability
Diagnosis > Page 3631
^ Lean shift in fuel system operation - P0171 (Bank 1) and P0174 (Bank 2)
^ Rich shift in fuel system operation - P0172 (Bank 1) and P0175 (Bank 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability
Diagnosis > Page 3632
E2.) Fuel System Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes
F. Diagnostic Service Tips
1. Always reset KAM after performing a repair:
After performing a repair on a vehicle with the MIL on, and/or DTCs present, always clear KAM.
When a malfunction is present, the PCM adapts (attempts to correct) for this condition. Once the
vehicle has been repaired, if the KAM is not reset, the PCM will once again have to adapt back to
the normal operating conditions. Clearing the KAM will erase what the PCM has learned, so the
PCM will be able to start with "base tables".
2. Always view and record Freeze Frame Data:
Freeze Frame Data can be a valuable asset in duplicating and diagnosing concerns. This data (a
snapshot of certain PID values, recorded at the time the MIL was activated) indicates the manner in
which the vehicle was being driven at the time the fault occurred. This can be especially useful on
intermittent concerns. Freeze Frame Data, in some cases, can also help to isolate possible areas
of concern, as well as ruling out others. Always record (write down) the Freeze Frame Data.
3. Multiple DTCs (with the same meaning):
When multiple (paired) DTCs with the same meaning are set for multiple sensors, it is unlikely that
replacing both HO2S sensors will resolve the concern. In most cases, there will be another issue
that is causing the codes. Examples of multiple (paired) DTCs:
(P0135/P0155), (P0141/P0161), (P1131/P1151), (P1132/P1152).
To further clarify this, see the more detailed scenario as follows:
A vehicle comes in with a MIL On concern. KOEO self test reveals DTCs P0135 and P0155
(HTR-11 and HTR-21 circuit malfunction), with no other DTCs present. The most likely cause of
these DTCs would be something in the heater power circuit that both of these HO2S sensors have
in common (Example: open or shorted heater circuit wiring or splice). It is highly unlikely that
multiple sensors would fail at the same time. When multiple DTCs of this nature are encountered,
reviewing the appropriate wiring diagram(s) can help to isolate possible areas of concern. When
reviewing the wiring diagram, look for things that the affected sensors have in common.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability
Diagnosis > Page 3633
In this example, the most likely cause of DTCs P0135 and P0155 (with no other DTCs present)
would be a concern with Splice "B" (refer to Figure 2).
NOTE
THIS ILLUSTRATION IS ONLY AN EXAMPLE. SPLICE NAMES "A", "B", AND "C" ARE USED IN
THIS EXAMPLE FOR CONVENIENCE ONLY. ON AN ACTUAL VEHICLE, SPLICE NAMES WILL
DEPEND ON THE CIRCUIT NUMBER FOR THE VEHICLE UNDER REPAIR. NOTE ALSO THAT
THIS FIGURE IS NOT INTENDED TO SHOW ALL SPLICES/CONNECTIONS ON ALL
VEHICLES. OTHER EEC CIRCUITS, NOT SHOWN, MAY ALSO BE SPLICED IN WITH THE
CIRCUITS SHOWN.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability
Diagnosis > Page 3634
4. View H025 PID data carefully: NGS PIDs for HO2S sensors that do not exist (with certain
exhaust configurations) will show a value of "0" volts (refer to Figures 3 and 4).
In this example, the vehicle (equipped with a 4-cylinder engine) has one upstream and one
downstream HO2S. Notice that the NGS (scan tool) display shows two upstream and two
downstream HO2S PIDs, and that the "unused" HO2S sensor PIDs display "0" volts.
5. H025 sensors measure oxygen in the exhaust, not fuel: The exhaust gas condition reported by
the HO2S sensor is based on the presence of oxygen in the exhaust, not the presence of unburned
fuel.
Example: In the event of an ignition-related misfire, you might expect a rich HO2S reading, due to
the amount of unburned fuel in the exhaust system. However, there is also a large amount of
unburned oxygen, since no combustion took place in the misfiring cylinder. Since the H025 senses
oxygen only, it would report a lean condition in this particular situation.
F2.) Tips Related to Heated Oxygen Sensor (H025) Monitor
1. OBD II Response Rate Monitor: The OBD II
Response Rate Monitor (P0133/P0153) is only run at vehicle speeds between approximately 50-95
km/h (30-60 mph), during steady-state conditions. The test lasts approximately 6 seconds.
Therefore, P0133/P0153 cannot be diagnosed at idle in the repair bay.
2. Do not compare H025 switch rate - Bank-to-Bank or vehicle-to-vehicle: Different H025 switch
rates, from Bank-to-Bank, are considered normal. The H025 switch rate, from one Bank to the
other, should not be compared as a gauge of the H025's ability to switch/react. The PCM is
continuously adjusting spark and fuel in reaction to engine operating conditions (rpm, load, air flow,
throttle angle, etc.). The PCM is also continuously adapting to certain conditions (customer driving
habits, engine and component wear, etc.).
F3.) Tips Related to Catalyst Efficiency Monitor
1. Determining catalyst efficiency/switch ratio:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability
Diagnosis > Page 3635
The upstream H025 sensors will have a high switch frequency, due to normal closed loop fuel
control. With an efficient catalyst, the downstream H025 will have a low switch frequency. The
switch ratio is determined by dividing the number of downstream switches by the number of
upstream switches over a given period of time. As the catalyst ages (or if the catalyst is damaged
or contaminated), the downstream switches will increase. When the downstream switch rate
crosses a threshold value (approximately 0.75 switch ratio), a code is stored (P0420 and/or P0430)
and the MIL illuminates (refer to Figures 5 and 6).
NOTE
IF A CATALYST IS DETERMINED TO HAVE LOW EFFICIENCY AND REQUIRES
REPLACEMENT, REPLACEMENT OF THE DOWNSTREAM H025 SENSORS WILL NOT BE
NECESSARY.
2. Use care in handling H025 sensors: In the event of catalyst replacement, use care in the
handling of H025 sensors to prevent damage or contamination. Do not use power tools in the
removal or installation of sensors. Use a 22mm wrench or crow foot to remove and install H025
sensors; do not use slotted sockets, as these sockets may damage wires. H025 sensors should be
torqued to 41 +/- 5 N.m (30 +/- 4 lb-ft).
3. Do not replace downstream HO2S sensors (H02S12/H02S22) for DTCs P0420 and/or P0430:
When diagnosing a vehicle with a customer concern of MIL On and DTCs P0420/P0430 in
continuous memory, do not replace the downstream HO2S sensors (H02S12/H02S22). Damaged
or malfunctioning downstream HO2S sensors will not cause these DTCs to be set. Always verify
the vehicle concern, then perform the pinpoint diagnostics in the appropriate PC/ED Service
Manual.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability
Diagnosis > Page 3636
F4.) Tips Related to the Fuel System Monitor
1. HO2S sensors are not likely to be the cause of adaptive DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175:
Most warranty-returned HO2S sensors (replaced for these DTCs) are found to function normally.
Additional related DTCs will normally be present if there is a concern with the HO2S sensors. Do
not replace an HO2S sensor unless verified through pinpoint diagnostic tests found in the PC/ED
Service Manual.
2. DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, and P0175 are not related to downstream H028 sensors: When
diagnosing a vehicle with a MIL On and DTC(s) P0171, P0172, P0174, and/or P0175 in continuous
memory, do not replace the downstream HO2S sensors. These DTCs have no connection to the
downstream HO2S sensor function nor its diagnosis for faults. Always verify the vehicle concern,
then perform the pinpoint diagnostics from the appropriate PC/ED Service Manual.
3. Diagnosing lean conditions and lean DTCs P0171, P0174: Freeze Frame Data can often help to
identify the type of lean condition, even if the fault is intermittent, by indicating how the vehicle was
being driven when the fault occurred. Diagnosis of lean conditions and lean adaptive DTCs can be
difficult, especially if the concern is intermittent. Verifying the concern is extremely important. There
are different types of lean conditions. The ability to identify the type of lean condition causing the
concern can be crucial to a correct diagnosis. When DTCs P0171 and P0174 are both present,
there is a strong likelihood of another concern being present:
a. Vacuum leaks/unmetered air: In this type of condition, the engine may actually run lean of
stoichiometry (14.7:1 air/fuel ratio) if the PCM is not able to compensate enough to correct for the
condition. This condition is typically caused by air entering the engine through an abnormal source
(opening), or due to a MAF malfunction. In this situation, the volume of air entering the engine is
actually greater than what the MAF is indicating to the PCM. Vacuum leaks will normally be most
apparent when high manifold vacuum is present, during idle or light throttle. If Freeze Frame Data
indicates that the fault occurred at idle, a check for vacuum leaks/unmetered air when the engine is
cold might be the best starting point.
Examples: Loose, leaking or disconnected vacuum lines, intake manifold gaskets or 0-rings,
throttle body gaskets, brake booster, air inlet tube, stuck/frozen/aftermarket PCV valve, unseated
engine oil dipstick, MAF reading lower than normal, etc.
b. Insufficient fueling: In this type of condition, the engine may actually run lean of stoichiometry
(14.7:1 air/fuel ratio) if the PCM is not able to compensate enough to correct for the condition. This
condition is typically caused by a fuel delivery system concern that restricts or limits the amount of
fuel being delivered to the engine. This condition will normally be most apparent when the engine is
under a heavy load, when a higher volume of fuel is required. If Freeze Frame Data indicates that
the fault occurred under a heavy load, a check of the fuel delivery system (checking fuel pressure
with engine under a load) might be the best starting point.
Examples: Low fuel pressure (fuel pump, fuel filter, fuel leaks, restricted fuel supply lines), fuel
injector concerns, etc.
c. Exhaust system leaks: In this type of condition, the engine may actually be running near
stoichiometry (14.7:1 air/fuel ratio), but the exhaust gas mixture will be lean. This condition is
caused by oxygen-rich air entering the exhaust system through an external source. This condition
will cause the exhaust gas mixture to be lean, even though the actual combustion in the engine
may not be.
Examples: Exhaust system leaks upstream or near HO2S, malfunctioning Secondary Air Injection
system
d. MAF concerns: If a MAF concern is suspected, see TSB 98-23-10.
4. Checking fuel pressure: Check fuel pressure with engine under a load when diagnosing a lean
concern. A partially plugged fuel filter can be difficult to detect and can be easily overlooked if fuel
pressure is only checked at idle. The same is true for other types of fuel supply concerns (e.g., bent
or kinked lines, degraded fuel pump).
At idle, an engine requires only a small volume of fuel. Due to the fact that there is a small volume
of fuel needed at idle, a restriction in the fuel supply line in many cases will not cause the fuel
pressure to be low. When the vehicle is under a load, the engine requires much more fuel than at
idle. Under a load, a restriction in the fuel supply line will prevent the high rate of fuel flow that is
needed to maintain the correct fuel pressure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3637
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3640
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3641
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3642
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3643
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3644
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3645
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3646
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3647
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3648
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3649
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3650
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3651
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3652
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3653
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3654
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3655
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3656
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3657
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3658
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3659
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3660
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor
Heated Oxygen Sensor Monitor
The Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the HO2S
sensors for a malfunction or deterioration which can affect emissions. The fuel control or upstream
HO2S is checked for proper output voltage and response rate (the time it takes to switch from lean
to rich or rich to lean). Downstream HO2S used for Catalyst Monitor are also monitored for proper
output voltage. The following illustration shows that input is required from the Engine Coolant
Temperature (ECT) or Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT), Intake Air Temperature (IAT), Mass Air
Flow (MAF) and Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensors to activate the HO2S Monitor. The Fuel
System Monitor and Misfire Detection Monitor must also have completed successfully before the
HO2S Monitor is enabled.
1. The HO2S sensor senses the oxygen content in the exhaust flow and outputs a voltage between
zero and 1.0 volt. Lean of stoichiometric (air/fuel
ratio of approximately 14.7:1), the HO2S will generate a voltage between zero and 0.45 volt. Rich
of stoichiometric, the HO2S will generate a voltage between 0.45 and 1.0 volt. The HO2S Monitor
evaluates both the upstream (fuel control) and downstream (Catalyst Monitor) HO2S for proper
function.
2. Once the HO2S Monitor is enabled, the upstream HO2S signal voltage amplitude and response
frequency are checked. Excessive voltage is
determined by comparing the HO2S signal voltage to a maximum calibratable threshold voltage. A
fixed frequency closed loop fuel control routine is executed and the upstream HO2S voltage
amplitude and output response frequency are observed. A sample of the upstream HO2S signal is
evaluated to determine if the sensor is capable of switching or has a slow response rate. A HO2S
heater circuit fault is determined by turning the heater on and off and looking for a corresponding
change in the Output State Monitor (OSM) and by measuring the current going through the heater
circuit. The HO2S Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows:
The Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTCs) associated with HO2S lack of switching are DTCs P1130,
P1131, P1132, P1150, P1151 and P1152.
The DTCs associated with HO2S slow response rate are DTCs P0133 and P0153.
The DTCs associated with HO2S signal circuit malfunction are DTCs P0131, P0136, P0148, P0151
and P0156.
The DTCs associated with a HO2S heater circuit malfunction are DTCs P0135, P0141, P0155 and
P0161. The Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) associated with the downstream HO2S not running in
on-demand is DTC P1127.
The DTCs associated with swapped HO2S connectors are DTCs P1128 and P1129.
3. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive
drive cycles.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor > Page
3663
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation PCM Inputs
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) (Figure 33) detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and
produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of
oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a low voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low
concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a high voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The
HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near
stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a
voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts.
Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to
temperatures of 800°C (1400°F). At approximately 300°C (600°F) the engine can enter closed loop
operation. The Vehicle Power (VPWR) circuit supplies voltage to the heater and the PCM will
complete the ground when the proper conditions occur. For model year 1998 a new HO2S heater
and heater control system are installed on some vehicles. The high power heater reaches closed
loop fuel control temperatures. The use of this heater requires that the HO2S heater control be duty
cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. The 6 ohm design is not interchangeable with new style
3.3 ohm heater.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
EGO Sensor Wrench
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the
vehicle.
3. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S.
NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or
equivalent to aid in removal.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in
installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 3666
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor
EGO Sensor Wrench
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
EGO Sensor Wrench
1. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor.
NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor
to aid in installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3667
EGO Sensor Wrench
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3672
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3673
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3674
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3675
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3676
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3677
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3678
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3679
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3680
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3681
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3682
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3683
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3684
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3685
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3686
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3687
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3688
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3689
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3690
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3691
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch (Figure 38) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the
power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic
pressure increases. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for
additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking
maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust transmission Electronic Pressure
Control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Page 3694
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Sensor
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The Power Steering Pressure (PSP) sensor (Figure 39) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the
power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic
pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for
additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking
maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust transmission Electronic Pressure
Control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube
Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect
Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831
Attachment I - Administrative Information
Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6
Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure
Sensor Warranty Coverage
OASIS
You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program.
Note:
Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected
vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended
warranty time/mileage period.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is
claimed on.
CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03
Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a
warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for
vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for
this repair under the 02M01 program.
Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage
Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01.
Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles)
Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines.
Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP)
Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside
the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair.
OWNER REFUNDS
Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the
month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair
was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not
have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for
the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460).
All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual.
Refer to ACESII manual for refund information.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube
Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3703
LABOR ALLOWANCES
[NEW] NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Special Notes:
^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03.
^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program.
^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor
time has been adjusted accordingly.
^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not
cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs.
^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order
processing.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION
NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube
Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3704
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book.
PARTS RETENTION
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures."
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is
encountered, call the Special Service Support Center.
1. Retrieve continuous DTCs.
NOTE:
Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are
present:
^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED
^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED
Any other DTC present is not covered by this program.
2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as
follows:
a) Key off.
b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube.
c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector.
Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is
required.
3. Clear continuous DTCs.
4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube
Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3705
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube
Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3706
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube
Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3707
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect
Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831
Attachment I - Administrative Information
Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6
Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure
Sensor Warranty Coverage
OASIS
You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program.
Note:
Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected
vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended
warranty time/mileage period.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is
claimed on.
CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03
Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a
warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for
vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for
this repair under the 02M01 program.
Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage
Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01.
Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles)
Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines.
Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP)
Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside
the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair.
OWNER REFUNDS
Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the
month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair
was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not
have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for
the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460).
All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual.
Refer to ACESII manual for refund information.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3713
LABOR ALLOWANCES
[NEW] NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Special Notes:
^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03.
^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program.
^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor
time has been adjusted accordingly.
^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not
cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs.
^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order
processing.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION
NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3714
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book.
PARTS RETENTION
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures."
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is
encountered, call the Special Service Support Center.
1. Retrieve continuous DTCs.
NOTE:
Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are
present:
^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED
^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED
Any other DTC present is not covered by this program.
2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as
follows:
a) Key off.
b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube.
c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector.
Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is
required.
3. Clear continuous DTCs.
4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3715
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3716
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3717
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL
ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set
Article No. 04-11-1
06/08/2004
DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON
AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS
ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY
FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001
EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC,
EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER
LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR
MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003
MOUNTAINEER
This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications.
ISSUE
Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following
symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently
functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1).
ACTION
For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic
procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED
Manual for the issue described above.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3722
NOTE
ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA
NOTE
THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT
THE FOLLOWING:
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002
^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002
^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s).
2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor.
3. Clear continuous DTC(s).
4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3723
Labor Operations
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
And Emissions Warranty Coverage.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9J460 42
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3724
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback
Exhaust Sensor: > 02-11-2 > Jun > 02 > Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL
ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set
Article No. 04-11-1
06/08/2004
DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON
AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS
ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY
FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001
EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC,
EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER
LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR
MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003
MOUNTAINEER
This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications.
ISSUE
Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following
symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently
functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1).
ACTION
For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic
procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED
Manual for the issue described above.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback
Exhaust Sensor: > 02-11-2 > Jun > 02 > Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels > Page 3730
NOTE
ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA
NOTE
THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT
THE FOLLOWING:
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002
^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002
^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s).
2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor.
3. Clear continuous DTC(s).
4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback
Exhaust Sensor: > 02-11-2 > Jun > 02 > Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels > Page 3731
Labor Operations
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
And Emissions Warranty Coverage.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9J460 42
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback
Exhaust Sensor: > 02-11-2 > Jun > 02 > Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels > Page 3732
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3733
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3734
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 86) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure
transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice
tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses
referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI
SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the aluminum differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter
hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the
pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3735
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 87) is identical in operation
as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose
connections are marked on the underside of the sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3736
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR
tube.
NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-5-5 > Mar > 01 > PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures
Powertrain Control Module: Customer Interest PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures
Article No. 01-5-5
March 19, 2001
ELECTRICAL - CHARGING SYSTEM WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED - DURING
COLD AMBIENT TEMPERATURES BELOW - 6 DEGREES CELSIUS (20 DEGREES F.) VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH 2.0L ZETEC ENGINE BUILT 7/8/2000 THROUGH 2/12/2001 ONLY
FORD: 2001 ESCAPE
ISSUE
Some vehicles may exhibit a red charge lamp illumination in cold ambient temperatures below-6°C
(20°F). This may be caused by the calibration of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
ACTION
Verify red charge lamp illumination. If normal diagnostics cannot resolve condition, reprogram the
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with latest calibration. Refer to the PCM Calibration Information
Chart shown for details.
Obtain an Authorized Modifications Decal (FPS 8262 - obtainable through DOES II, 25/pkg) and list
the date, dealer number, and summary of modifications performed. Select a prominent place
adjacent to the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal suitable for installing the Authorized
Modifications Decal. Clean the area, install the decal, and cover it with a clear plastic decal shield.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 203000, 203100, 204000, 204200, 206000, 290000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls General PCM Programming Procedures
Powertrain Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM
Programming Procedures
TSB 04-24-14
12/13/04
FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria,
Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five
Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer,
F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS
1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis,
Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB
applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement.
ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle
concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed.
ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs.
Verify repair after reprogramming.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM
Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle.
2. Use WDS if available.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3751
a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply.
b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level.
3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool,
such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS.
NOTE
IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS,
GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF.
PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD
1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able
to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
2. Install the new PCM.
NOTE
IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING
INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER.
3. Attempt to start the vehicle.
4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM.
5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639.
a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure
must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1.
b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly
set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc.
6. Check for DTC B2900.
a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this
procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during
this procedure.
b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7.
7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures.
REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM
Replacement
1. Verify all cables are properly connected.
2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level.
3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level.
4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again.
5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open
previous session, and attempt reprogramming again.
6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM,
proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not
communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure.
1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits.
2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity.
NOTE
IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT
TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3752
INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC.
3. Connect WDS to vehicle.
4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK.
9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN
from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK.
10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above".
11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK.
12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens.
14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be
reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 01-5-5 > Mar > 01 > PCM - Charge Lamp
ON in Cold Temperatures
Powertrain Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold
Temperatures
Article No. 01-5-5
March 19, 2001
ELECTRICAL - CHARGING SYSTEM WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED - DURING
COLD AMBIENT TEMPERATURES BELOW - 6 DEGREES CELSIUS (20 DEGREES F.) VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH 2.0L ZETEC ENGINE BUILT 7/8/2000 THROUGH 2/12/2001 ONLY
FORD: 2001 ESCAPE
ISSUE
Some vehicles may exhibit a red charge lamp illumination in cold ambient temperatures below-6°C
(20°F). This may be caused by the calibration of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
ACTION
Verify red charge lamp illumination. If normal diagnostics cannot resolve condition, reprogram the
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with latest calibration. Refer to the PCM Calibration Information
Chart shown for details.
Obtain an Authorized Modifications Decal (FPS 8262 - obtainable through DOES II, 25/pkg) and list
the date, dealer number, and summary of modifications performed. Select a prominent place
adjacent to the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal suitable for installing the Authorized
Modifications Decal. Clean the area, install the decal, and cover it with a clear plastic decal shield.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 203000, 203100, 204000, 204200, 206000, 290000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls General PCM Programming Procedures
Powertrain Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM
Programming Procedures
TSB 04-24-14
12/13/04
FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria,
Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five
Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer,
F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS
1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis,
Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB
applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement.
ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle
concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed.
ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs.
Verify repair after reprogramming.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM
Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle.
2. Use WDS if available.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3762
a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply.
b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level.
3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool,
such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS.
NOTE
IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS,
GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF.
PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD
1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able
to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
2. Install the new PCM.
NOTE
IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING
INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER.
3. Attempt to start the vehicle.
4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM.
5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639.
a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure
must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1.
b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly
set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc.
6. Check for DTC B2900.
a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this
procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during
this procedure.
b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7.
7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures.
REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM
Replacement
1. Verify all cables are properly connected.
2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level.
3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level.
4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again.
5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open
previous session, and attempt reprogramming again.
6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM,
proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not
communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure.
1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits.
2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity.
NOTE
IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT
TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3763
INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC.
3. Connect WDS to vehicle.
4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK.
9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN
from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK.
10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above".
11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK.
12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens.
14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be
reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 3764
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 3765
Powertrain Control Module: Diagrams
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 3766
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 3767
Part 3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 3768
Powertrain Control Module: Description and Operation
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE - VEHICLE SPEED OUTPUT (VSO)
The PCM-VSO (Powertrain Control Module - Vehicle Speed Output) speed signal subsystem
generates vehicle speed information for distribution to the vehicle's electrical/electronic modules
and subsystems that require vehicle speed data. This subsystem senses the transmission output
shaft speed with a sensor. The data is processed by the PCM, and distributed as a hard-wired
signal or as a multiplexed data message.
The key features of the PCM-VSO system are to:
^ Infer vehicle movement from the output shaft sensor signal
^ Convert transmission output shaft rotational information to vehicle speed information
^ Compensate for tire size and axle ratio with a programmed calibration variable
^ Utilize a transfer case sensor for four wheel drive applications
^ Distribute vehicle speed information as a multiplexed message and/or an analog signal
The signal from a non-contact shaft sensor (Output Shaft Sensor--OSS or Transfer Case Shaft
Sensor--TCSS) mounted on the transmission (automatics, manuals, or 4X4 transfer cases) is
sensed directly by the PCM. The PCM converts the OSS or TCSS information to 8000 pulses per
mile, based on a tire and axle ratio conversion factor. This conversion factor is programmed into
the PCM at the time the vehicle is assembled and can be reprogrammed in the field for servicing
changes in the tire size and axle ratio. The PCM transmits the computed vehicle speed and
distance traveled information to all the vehicle speed signal users on the vehicle. VSO information
can be transmitted by a hard-wired interface between the vehicle speed signal user and the PCM,
or by Speed and Odometer SCP multiplexed data messages.
The VSO hard-wired signal wave form is a DC square wave with a voltage level of 0 to VBAT.
Typical output operating range is 2.22Hz per MPH (1.3808 Hz pr 1 Km/h). Multiplexed data for
speed and distance data are transmitted as separate SCP messages over the SCP multiplex link.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory
Powertrain Control Module: Service and Repair Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read
Only Memory
Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory - Flash EEPROM
Description
Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) is contained in an
Integrated Circuit (IC) internal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the
vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle and is capable of being
reprogrammed or reflashed repeatedly.
As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the Vehicle Identification (VID) block. The
VID block must be programmed when replacing the PCM as under Programming the VID Block for
a Replacement PCM. Failure to perform this procedure may generate fault code: P1639, VID Block
not programmed or is corrupt. The VID block in an existing Powertrain Control Module (PCM). can
also be tailored to accommodate various hardware changes made to the vehicle since production.
Failure to perform this procedure properly may generate fault code: P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of
Acceptable Range. This is described under Making Changes to the VID Block and also under
Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy
for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the VIN number, octane adjust, fuel octane,
fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the presence of speed control and four wheel
drive electronic shift on the fly versus manual shift on the fly. Only items applicable to vehicle
hardware and supported by the VID block will be displayed on the scan tool.
When changing items in the VID block, the strategy will place range limits on certain items such as
tire and axle ratio. The VID block is also limited to the number of times to be reconfigured. When
this limit is reached, the scan tool will display a message indicating the need to flash the PCM
again to reset the VID block.
Each of the procedures described below use the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS).
Reprogramming can be performed by a local Ford dealer for any non Ford facility. There are other
Enhanced Scan Tools that may have reprogramming capabilities available. Refer to the diagnostic
tool manufacturers users manual for details.
Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM
A new PCM will contain the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However,
the VID block will be blank and will need programming. There are two procedures available. The
first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM and the second is manual data
entry into the new PCM.
Automatic data transfer will be performed if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done
by the use of a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The
stored data can now be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been replaced.
Manual data entry must be performed if the old module is damaged and is incapable of
communicating. Remove and replace the old PCM. You may be instructed to contact the "AS
BUILT" data center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool.
Contact the center ONLY if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford L-M
technician's, contact your National Hotline for "AS Built" data. Non Ford technicians, use the Fed
World website at "fedworld.gov". Select Auto Service Information and search for "Calibrations" or
"Vehicle Calibrations" then specify vehicle manufacturer, model name and model year as required.
Making Changes to the VID Block
A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to
accommodate vehicle hardware. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool.
Making Changes to the PCM Calibration
At certain times, the entire EEPROM will need to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to
changes made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block
because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory > Page 3771
Powertrain Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) cover.
1 Loosen the bolt and disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the nuts and the cover.
3. Remove the PCM.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module Power Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component
Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module Power Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3775
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Absolute Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
THERMAL MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) Sensor
The Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor (TMAP) (Figure 41) consists of a Manifold
Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor and an integrated thermistor. The thermistor part of the sensor is
currently not being used. The MAP part of the sensor measures intake manifold air absolute
pressure. The PCM uses information from the MAP sensor, Throttle Position (TP) sensor, Mass Air
Flow (MAF) sensor, Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) or Cylinder Head Temperature (CKP)
sensor and Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor to determine how much exhaust gas is introduced
into the intake manifold.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information >
Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information >
Locations > Page 3783
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information >
Locations > Page 3784
Mass Air Flow Sensor: Description and Operation
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air
entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at
200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 36). If the
hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced.
Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow.
The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air
mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio (Figure 37). This input is also used in determining transmission Electronic Pressure
Control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Some MAF sensors have Integrated Bypass Technology (IBT) with an integrated Intake Air
Temperature (IAT) sensor. The present applications with IBT are: Focus, Escort (4V), 2.0L Cougar,
Escape, Taurus/Sable, Windstar, Explorer/Mountaineer and E-Series.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information >
Locations > Page 3785
Mass Air Flow Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3789
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3790
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
The Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor
identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the Powertrain
Control Module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the firing of sequential fuel injectors. The Coil
On Plug (COP) Ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to
fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit.
Typical Hall-Effect Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor
There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 22)
and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor (Figure 23).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3791
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP)/Park-Neutral Position (PNP) Switches
The Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) switch (Figure 24) is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch
pedal position and, in some manual transmission applications, both the clutch pedal engagement
position and the gear shift position. The PCM provides a 5-volt reference Vehicle Reference
Voltage (VREF) signal to the CPP switch and/or a Park/Neutral Position (PNP) switch (on the CPP
signal line). If the CPP switch (either or both CPP and PNP switches are closed) is closed,
indicating the clutch pedal is engaged and the shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position, the output
voltage (5 volts) from the PCM is grounded through the signal return line to the PCM, and there is 1
volt or less. One volt or less indicates there is a reduced load on the engine. If the CPP switch (or
PNP switch on vehicle or both CPP and PNP switches open on the vehicle) is open, meaning the
clutch pedal is disengaged (all systems) and the shift lever is not in NEUTRAL position (PNP
switch systems), the input on the CPP signal to the PCM will be approximately 5 volts. Then, the
5-volt signal input at the PCM will indicate a load on the engine. The PCM uses the load
information in mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3795
Clutch Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) electrical connector.
2. Remove the CPP locknut and the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information >
Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information >
Locations > Page 3799
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3803
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3804
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS)
Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors
The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block
adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse
wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for
a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9
degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates
crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is
also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of
tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to fixed reference (Figure 25).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3805
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the exhaust manifold.
2. Remove the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor (Figure 26) is a thermistor device in which
resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as
temperature increases, and increases as temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects
the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and
measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature
information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an
overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on
information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss
could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could
occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by
allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to
Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy details.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor > Page 3811
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT)
Sensor
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor (Figure 27) is a thermistor device in which
resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the
temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine
coolant passage. The ECT sensor is similar in construction to the IAT sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Page 3812
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the generator.
2. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the CHT sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE
PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL
VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE
DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM
THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING,
POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT
IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page
3816
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
In-Line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) sensor (Figure 97) or inline Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) sensor
(Figure 98) is used to measure the fuel tank pressure during the EVAP monitor test on vehicles
equipped with the Running Loss-type system. Also, it is used to control excessive fuel tank
pressure by forcing the system to purge.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page
3817
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY
TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN
POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT
IN PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Disconnect the battery.
WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND
CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL
PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND
CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK
OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID
IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Remove the rear seat assembly.
3. Remove the fuel tank sending unit access cover.
4. Disconnect the fuel tank pressure sensor electrical connector.
5. Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor.
^ Disconnect the vapor tubes.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page
3818
^ Carry out a leak test. See: Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test
^ Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Emission Control
Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative
Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle
NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford
specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Intake Air Temperature (IAT)
Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire Terminals
The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensors (Figure 34) and integrated Mass Air Flow (MAF) type
(Figure 37), are thermistor devices in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical
resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and increases as the
temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor
terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Page 3822
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The IAT provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature
information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel spark and MAF.
The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT
sensor.
Supercharged 5.4L Lightning vehicles use (2) AT sensors. Both sensors operate as above.
However, one is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard OBD II/cold
weather input, while a second sensor Second Intake Air Temperature (IAT2) is located after the
supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air
temperature information to the PCM to control border-line spark and to help determine intercooler
efficiency.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3826
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
Knock Sensor
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
The Knock Sensor (KS) (Figure 35) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine
vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine
knock and to retard spark timing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3827
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the KS electrical connector and remove the connector from the mounting bracket.
NOTE: The Knock Sensor (KS) is located on the RH side of the cylinder block.
3. Remove the nut and the KS.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis
Technical Service Bulletin # 01-9-7 Date: 010514
Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis
Article No. 01-9-7
05/14/01
DRIVEABILITY - H025 (HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR), CATALYST, AND FUEL SYSTEM
MONITORS - SERVICE TIPS - OBD II VEHICLES ONLY
FORD: 1994-1997 THUNDERBIRD 1994-2001 MUSTANG 1995-2001 CROWN VICTORIA
1996-1997 PROBE 1996-2000 CONTOUR 1996-2001 ESCORT, TAURUS 2000-2001 FOCUS
1994-1997 F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350 1995-2001 ECONOLINE, RANGER, WINDSTAR
1996 BRONCO 1996-1997 AEROSTAR 1996-2001 EXPLORER 1997-2001 EXPEDITION, F-150,
F-250 LD 1999-2001 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2001 EXCURSION 2001 ESCAPE
LINCOLN: 1995-2001 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 1996-1998 MARK VIII 2000-2001 LS
1998-2001 NAVIGATOR
MERCURY: 1994-1997 COUGAR 1995-2001 GRAND MARQUIS 1996-1999 TRACER 1996-2000
MYSTIQUE 1996-2001 SABLE 1999-2001 COUGAR 1997-2001 MOUNTAINEER
ISSUE This article is intended to be an aide in diagnosing conditions related to Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S), Catalyst, and Fuel System Monitor related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
Additional information is included to assist in diagnosing certain vehicle symptoms. This article is
NOT intended to be a shortcut to the Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) Workshop
Manual pinpoint tests. The pinpoint tests in the PC/ED Manual should ALWAYS be followed when
diagnosing vehicle conditions.
ACTION Use the following information and Service Tips to assist in the diagnosis of H025,
Catalyst, and Fuel System Monitor related DTCs.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 98-23-10 WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 623000, 690000, 698298
Information
^ A. Description of Terms and Acronyms
^ B. HO2S Location Diagrams
^ C. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3832
^ C1. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Information
^ C2. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
^ D. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor
^ D1. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Information
^ D2. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
^ E. Fuel System Monitor
^ E1. Fuel System Monitor - Information
^ E2. Fuel System Monitor Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
^ F. Diagnostic Service Tips
^ F1. Tips - General
^ F2. Tips Related to Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor
^ F3. Tips Related to Catalyst Monitor
^ F4. Tips Related to Fuel System Monitor
A. Description of Terms and Acronyms
^ CHT - Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor or PID
^ CKP - Crankshaft Position Sensor or PID
^ DTC - Diagnostic Trouble Code
^ ECT - Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor or PID
^ EGR - Exhaust Gas Recirculation
^ EEC - Electronic Engine Control
^ EVR - EGR Vacuum Regulator
^ FMEM - Failure Mode Effects Management
^ GND - Ground
^ HC - Hydrocarbons
^ HO2S - Heated Oxygen Sensor or PID
^ IAT - Inlet Air Temperature Sensor or PID
^ KAM - Keep Alive Memory
^ KOEO - Key On Engine Off
^ KOER - Key On Engine Running
^ LONGFT - Long Term Fuel Trim
^ MAF - Mass Air Flow Sensor or PID
^ MIL - Malfunction Indicator Lamp ("Check Engine")
^ NGS - New Generation Star Tester (Scan Tool)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3833
^ OBD II - On-Board Diagnostics II
^ OSM - Output State Monitor
^ PC/ED - Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis
^ PCM - Powertrain Control Module
^ PCV - Positive Crankcase Ventilation
^ PID - Parameter Identification Display
^ RAM - Random Access Memory
^ RPM - Revolutions Per Minute
^ SHRTFT - Short Term Fuel Trim
^ Stoichiometric - 14.7:1 Air/Fuel Ratio (Gasoline Engines)
^ TP - Throttle Position Sensor or PID
^ VMV - Vapor Management Valve
^ VPWR - Vehicle Power (Battery Voltage)
^ VREF - Vehicle Reference Voltage (5 volts)
B. HO2S Location Diagrams
Refer to Figure 1 to better understand the H025 sensor names and locations. Regardless of how
the engine is mounted in the vehicle, conventional or transverse, the HO2S naming convention
stays the same in relationship to engine banks 1 and 2. Bank 1 will always be the bank containing
the # 1 cylinder.
C. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor
C1.) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3834
The H025 Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the HO2S sensors for a malfunction
or deterioration that can affect emissions. Under specific conditions, the fuel control or upstream
HO2S sensors (Figures 1 and 3) are checked for proper output voltage and response rate (the time
it takes to switch from lean to rich or rich to lean). Downstream HO2S sensors (Figures 1 and 3)
used for Catalyst Monitor are also monitored for proper output voltage. Input is required from the
ECT or CHT, IAT, MAF, TP and CKP sensors to activate the H025 Monitor. The Fuel System
Monitor and Misfire Detection Monitor must also have completed successfully before the HO2S
Monitor is enabled.
The HO2S sensor senses the oxygen content in the exhaust flow and outputs a voltage between
zero and 1.0 volt. Lean of stoichiometric (air/fuel ratio of approximately 14.7:1 for gasoline
engines), the HO2S will generate a voltage between zero and 0.45 volt. Rich of stoichiometric, the
HO2S will generate a voltage between 0.45 and 1.0 volt.
^ The HO2S Monitor evaluates both the upstream (Fuel Control) and downstream (Catalyst
Monitor) HO2S for proper function.
^ Once the HO2S Monitor is enabled, the upstream H025 signal voltage amplitude and response
frequency are checked. Excessive voltage is determined by comparing the HO2S signal voltage to
a maximum calibratable threshold voltage.
^ A fixed frequency closed loop fuel control routine is executed and the upstream HO2S voltage
amplitude and output response frequency are observed. A sample of the upstream HO2S signal is
evaluated to determine if the sensor is capable of switching or has a slow response rate.
^ An HO2S heater circuit fault is determined by turning the heater on and off and looking for a
corresponding change in the OSM and by measuring the current going through the heater circuit.
^ The MIL is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive OBD II drive cycles.
The HO2S Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows:
^ HO2S signal circuit malfunction - P0131, P0136, P0151, P0156
^ HO2S slow response rate - P0133, P0153
^ HO2S heater circuit malfunction - P0135, P0141, P0155, P0161
^ Downstream HO2S not running in on-demand self test - P1127
^ Swapped H025 connectors - P1128 and P1129
^ H025 lack of switching - P1130, P1131, P1132, P1150, P1151, P1152
^ HO2S lack of switching (sensor indicates lean) - P1137
^ H025 lack of switching (sensor indicates rich) - P1138
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3835
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3836
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3837
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3838
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3839
C2.) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes
D. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor
D1.) Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Information
The Federal Test Procedure Catalyst Monitor monitors for deterioration in the catalyst system and
illuminates the MIL when tailpipe emissions exceed the appropriate HC emission thresholds. The
Catalyst Monitor is enabled after the upstream and downstream HO2S sensors have been tested
and verified to be functional. This monitor relies on the front and rear heated oxygen sensors
(HO2S) to infer catalyst efficiency based upon oxygen storage capacity. Under normal closed loop
fuel conditions, high efficiency catalysts have oxygen storage which makes the switching frequency
of the rear HO2S quite slow compared with the frequency of the front HO2S. As catalyst efficiency
deteriorates, its ability to store oxygen declines, and the rear HO2S begins to switch more rapidly,
approaching the frequency of the front sensor. In general, as catalyst efficiency decreases, the
switch ratio increases from a switch ratio of 0 for a low mileage catalyst to a switch ratio of 0.8 or
0.9 for a low efficiency catalyst.
Some vehicles will monitor substantially less than the entire catalyst volume in order to meet the
stringent catalyst monitoring malfunction thresholds. In many cases, only the front, light-off catalyst
is monitored.
Front and rear HO2S switches are counted under specified closed loop fuel conditions. After the
required number of front switches are obtained, a rear-to-front HO2S switch ratio is calculated. The
switch ratio is compared against a threshold value. If the switch ratio is greater than the calibrated
maximum limit, the catalyst has failed. The test entry conditions for the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor
are as follows: ECT or CHT (warmed engine), IAT (not at extreme ambient temperatures), MAF
(greater than minimum engine load), VSS (within vehicle speed window) and TP (at part throttle)
are required.
^ Because an exponentially weighted moving average is used for malfunction determination, up to
six OBD II drive cycles may be required to illuminate the MIL.
NOTE
THE CATALYST MONITOR ON SOME EARLY OBD II VEHICLES (SOME 1994-1996 VEHICLES)
WAS REFERRED TO AS THE "STEADY-STATE CATALYST MONITOR" AS OPPOSED TO THE
"FTP CATALYST MONITOR" (DESCRIBED ABOVE) THAT IS MOST COMMON FOR VEHICLES
BUILT AFTER 1996. BELOW IS A BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE STEADY-STATE CATALYST
MONITOR:
The Steady-State Catalyst Monitor performs a 20 second test during steady state rpm and load
conditions. The Monitor transfers closed loop fuel control from the front to the rear 02 sensors. The
Monitor then observes the switching frequency and compares it to a threshold frequency stored in
an rpm/load table. A frequency higher than the maximum calibrated threshold indicates a
malfunction.
The Catalyst Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3840
^ Catalyst system efficiency below threshold (Bank 1) - P0420
^ Catalyst system efficiency below threshold (Bank 2) - P0430
D2.) Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes
E. Fuel System Monitor
E1.) Fuel System Monitor - Information
The Fuel System Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the fuel trim system. The fuel
control system uses fuel trim tables stored in the PCM's KAM to compensate for variability in fuel
system components due to normal wear and aging. Fuel trim tables are based on vehicle speed
and engine load. During closed loop vehicle operation, the fuel trim strategy learns the corrections
needed to correct a "biased" rich or lean fuel system. The correction is stored in the fuel trim tables.
The fuel trim has two means of adapting; a LONGFT and a SHRTFT. LONGFT relies on the fuel
trim tables and SHRTFT refers to the desired air/fuel ratio parameter "LAMBSE". LAMBSE is
calculated by the PCM from HO2S inputs and helps maintain a 14.7:1 air/fuel ratio during closed
loop operation. SHRTFT and LONGFT work together. If the HO2S indicates the engine is running
rich, the PCM will correct the rich condition by moving SHRTFT in the negative range (less fuel to
correct for a rich combustion). If after a certain amount of time SHRTFT is still compensating for a
rich condition, the PCM "learns" this and moves LONGFT into the negative range to compensate
and allows SHRTFT to return to a value near 0%. Input from the ECT or CHT, IAT, and MAF
sensors is required to activate the fuel trim system, which in turn activates the Fuel System
Monitor. Once activated, the Fuel System Monitor looks for the fuel trim tables to reach the
adaptive clip (adaptive limit) and LAMBSE to exceed a calibrated limit. The Fuel System Monitor
will store the appropriate DTC when a fault is detected as described below.
^ The H025 detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and provides the PCM with feedback
indicating a rich or lean condition.
^ A correction factor is added to the fuel injector pulsewidth calculation according to the Long and
Short Term Fuel Trims as needed to compensate for variations in the fuel system.
^ When deviation in the parameter LAMBSE increases, air/fuel control suffers and emissions
increase. When LAMBSE exceeds a calibrated limit and the fuel trim table has clipped (reached
adaptive limit), the Fuel System Monitor sets a DTC.
^ The MIL is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive OBD II drive cycles.
The Fuel System Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows:
^ Fuel Delivery Error - P0148
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3841
^ Lean shift in fuel system operation - P0171 (Bank 1) and P0174 (Bank 2)
^ Rich shift in fuel system operation - P0172 (Bank 1) and P0175 (Bank 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3842
E2.) Fuel System Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes
F. Diagnostic Service Tips
1. Always reset KAM after performing a repair:
After performing a repair on a vehicle with the MIL on, and/or DTCs present, always clear KAM.
When a malfunction is present, the PCM adapts (attempts to correct) for this condition. Once the
vehicle has been repaired, if the KAM is not reset, the PCM will once again have to adapt back to
the normal operating conditions. Clearing the KAM will erase what the PCM has learned, so the
PCM will be able to start with "base tables".
2. Always view and record Freeze Frame Data:
Freeze Frame Data can be a valuable asset in duplicating and diagnosing concerns. This data (a
snapshot of certain PID values, recorded at the time the MIL was activated) indicates the manner in
which the vehicle was being driven at the time the fault occurred. This can be especially useful on
intermittent concerns. Freeze Frame Data, in some cases, can also help to isolate possible areas
of concern, as well as ruling out others. Always record (write down) the Freeze Frame Data.
3. Multiple DTCs (with the same meaning):
When multiple (paired) DTCs with the same meaning are set for multiple sensors, it is unlikely that
replacing both HO2S sensors will resolve the concern. In most cases, there will be another issue
that is causing the codes. Examples of multiple (paired) DTCs:
(P0135/P0155), (P0141/P0161), (P1131/P1151), (P1132/P1152).
To further clarify this, see the more detailed scenario as follows:
A vehicle comes in with a MIL On concern. KOEO self test reveals DTCs P0135 and P0155
(HTR-11 and HTR-21 circuit malfunction), with no other DTCs present. The most likely cause of
these DTCs would be something in the heater power circuit that both of these HO2S sensors have
in common (Example: open or shorted heater circuit wiring or splice). It is highly unlikely that
multiple sensors would fail at the same time. When multiple DTCs of this nature are encountered,
reviewing the appropriate wiring diagram(s) can help to isolate possible areas of concern. When
reviewing the wiring diagram, look for things that the affected sensors have in common.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3843
In this example, the most likely cause of DTCs P0135 and P0155 (with no other DTCs present)
would be a concern with Splice "B" (refer to Figure 2).
NOTE
THIS ILLUSTRATION IS ONLY AN EXAMPLE. SPLICE NAMES "A", "B", AND "C" ARE USED IN
THIS EXAMPLE FOR CONVENIENCE ONLY. ON AN ACTUAL VEHICLE, SPLICE NAMES WILL
DEPEND ON THE CIRCUIT NUMBER FOR THE VEHICLE UNDER REPAIR. NOTE ALSO THAT
THIS FIGURE IS NOT INTENDED TO SHOW ALL SPLICES/CONNECTIONS ON ALL
VEHICLES. OTHER EEC CIRCUITS, NOT SHOWN, MAY ALSO BE SPLICED IN WITH THE
CIRCUITS SHOWN.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3844
4. View H025 PID data carefully: NGS PIDs for HO2S sensors that do not exist (with certain
exhaust configurations) will show a value of "0" volts (refer to Figures 3 and 4).
In this example, the vehicle (equipped with a 4-cylinder engine) has one upstream and one
downstream HO2S. Notice that the NGS (scan tool) display shows two upstream and two
downstream HO2S PIDs, and that the "unused" HO2S sensor PIDs display "0" volts.
5. H025 sensors measure oxygen in the exhaust, not fuel: The exhaust gas condition reported by
the HO2S sensor is based on the presence of oxygen in the exhaust, not the presence of unburned
fuel.
Example: In the event of an ignition-related misfire, you might expect a rich HO2S reading, due to
the amount of unburned fuel in the exhaust system. However, there is also a large amount of
unburned oxygen, since no combustion took place in the misfiring cylinder. Since the H025 senses
oxygen only, it would report a lean condition in this particular situation.
F2.) Tips Related to Heated Oxygen Sensor (H025) Monitor
1. OBD II Response Rate Monitor: The OBD II
Response Rate Monitor (P0133/P0153) is only run at vehicle speeds between approximately 50-95
km/h (30-60 mph), during steady-state conditions. The test lasts approximately 6 seconds.
Therefore, P0133/P0153 cannot be diagnosed at idle in the repair bay.
2. Do not compare H025 switch rate - Bank-to-Bank or vehicle-to-vehicle: Different H025 switch
rates, from Bank-to-Bank, are considered normal. The H025 switch rate, from one Bank to the
other, should not be compared as a gauge of the H025's ability to switch/react. The PCM is
continuously adjusting spark and fuel in reaction to engine operating conditions (rpm, load, air flow,
throttle angle, etc.). The PCM is also continuously adapting to certain conditions (customer driving
habits, engine and component wear, etc.).
F3.) Tips Related to Catalyst Efficiency Monitor
1. Determining catalyst efficiency/switch ratio:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3845
The upstream H025 sensors will have a high switch frequency, due to normal closed loop fuel
control. With an efficient catalyst, the downstream H025 will have a low switch frequency. The
switch ratio is determined by dividing the number of downstream switches by the number of
upstream switches over a given period of time. As the catalyst ages (or if the catalyst is damaged
or contaminated), the downstream switches will increase. When the downstream switch rate
crosses a threshold value (approximately 0.75 switch ratio), a code is stored (P0420 and/or P0430)
and the MIL illuminates (refer to Figures 5 and 6).
NOTE
IF A CATALYST IS DETERMINED TO HAVE LOW EFFICIENCY AND REQUIRES
REPLACEMENT, REPLACEMENT OF THE DOWNSTREAM H025 SENSORS WILL NOT BE
NECESSARY.
2. Use care in handling H025 sensors: In the event of catalyst replacement, use care in the
handling of H025 sensors to prevent damage or contamination. Do not use power tools in the
removal or installation of sensors. Use a 22mm wrench or crow foot to remove and install H025
sensors; do not use slotted sockets, as these sockets may damage wires. H025 sensors should be
torqued to 41 +/- 5 N.m (30 +/- 4 lb-ft).
3. Do not replace downstream HO2S sensors (H02S12/H02S22) for DTCs P0420 and/or P0430:
When diagnosing a vehicle with a customer concern of MIL On and DTCs P0420/P0430 in
continuous memory, do not replace the downstream HO2S sensors (H02S12/H02S22). Damaged
or malfunctioning downstream HO2S sensors will not cause these DTCs to be set. Always verify
the vehicle concern, then perform the pinpoint diagnostics in the appropriate PC/ED Service
Manual.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3846
F4.) Tips Related to the Fuel System Monitor
1. HO2S sensors are not likely to be the cause of adaptive DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175:
Most warranty-returned HO2S sensors (replaced for these DTCs) are found to function normally.
Additional related DTCs will normally be present if there is a concern with the HO2S sensors. Do
not replace an HO2S sensor unless verified through pinpoint diagnostic tests found in the PC/ED
Service Manual.
2. DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, and P0175 are not related to downstream H028 sensors: When
diagnosing a vehicle with a MIL On and DTC(s) P0171, P0172, P0174, and/or P0175 in continuous
memory, do not replace the downstream HO2S sensors. These DTCs have no connection to the
downstream HO2S sensor function nor its diagnosis for faults. Always verify the vehicle concern,
then perform the pinpoint diagnostics from the appropriate PC/ED Service Manual.
3. Diagnosing lean conditions and lean DTCs P0171, P0174: Freeze Frame Data can often help to
identify the type of lean condition, even if the fault is intermittent, by indicating how the vehicle was
being driven when the fault occurred. Diagnosis of lean conditions and lean adaptive DTCs can be
difficult, especially if the concern is intermittent. Verifying the concern is extremely important. There
are different types of lean conditions. The ability to identify the type of lean condition causing the
concern can be crucial to a correct diagnosis. When DTCs P0171 and P0174 are both present,
there is a strong likelihood of another concern being present:
a. Vacuum leaks/unmetered air: In this type of condition, the engine may actually run lean of
stoichiometry (14.7:1 air/fuel ratio) if the PCM is not able to compensate enough to correct for the
condition. This condition is typically caused by air entering the engine through an abnormal source
(opening), or due to a MAF malfunction. In this situation, the volume of air entering the engine is
actually greater than what the MAF is indicating to the PCM. Vacuum leaks will normally be most
apparent when high manifold vacuum is present, during idle or light throttle. If Freeze Frame Data
indicates that the fault occurred at idle, a check for vacuum leaks/unmetered air when the engine is
cold might be the best starting point.
Examples: Loose, leaking or disconnected vacuum lines, intake manifold gaskets or 0-rings,
throttle body gaskets, brake booster, air inlet tube, stuck/frozen/aftermarket PCV valve, unseated
engine oil dipstick, MAF reading lower than normal, etc.
b. Insufficient fueling: In this type of condition, the engine may actually run lean of stoichiometry
(14.7:1 air/fuel ratio) if the PCM is not able to compensate enough to correct for the condition. This
condition is typically caused by a fuel delivery system concern that restricts or limits the amount of
fuel being delivered to the engine. This condition will normally be most apparent when the engine is
under a heavy load, when a higher volume of fuel is required. If Freeze Frame Data indicates that
the fault occurred under a heavy load, a check of the fuel delivery system (checking fuel pressure
with engine under a load) might be the best starting point.
Examples: Low fuel pressure (fuel pump, fuel filter, fuel leaks, restricted fuel supply lines), fuel
injector concerns, etc.
c. Exhaust system leaks: In this type of condition, the engine may actually be running near
stoichiometry (14.7:1 air/fuel ratio), but the exhaust gas mixture will be lean. This condition is
caused by oxygen-rich air entering the exhaust system through an external source. This condition
will cause the exhaust gas mixture to be lean, even though the actual combustion in the engine
may not be.
Examples: Exhaust system leaks upstream or near HO2S, malfunctioning Secondary Air Injection
system
d. MAF concerns: If a MAF concern is suspected, see TSB 98-23-10.
4. Checking fuel pressure: Check fuel pressure with engine under a load when diagnosing a lean
concern. A partially plugged fuel filter can be difficult to detect and can be easily overlooked if fuel
pressure is only checked at idle. The same is true for other types of fuel supply concerns (e.g., bent
or kinked lines, degraded fuel pump).
At idle, an engine requires only a small volume of fuel. Due to the fact that there is a small volume
of fuel needed at idle, a restriction in the fuel supply line in many cases will not cause the fuel
pressure to be low. When the vehicle is under a load, the engine requires much more fuel than at
idle. Under a load, a restriction in the fuel supply line will prevent the high rate of fuel flow that is
needed to maintain the correct fuel pressure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 3847
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3850
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3851
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3852
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3853
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3854
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3855
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3856
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3857
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3858
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3859
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3860
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3861
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3862
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3863
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3864
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3865
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3866
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3867
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3868
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3869
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 3870
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor
Heated Oxygen Sensor Monitor
The Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the HO2S
sensors for a malfunction or deterioration which can affect emissions. The fuel control or upstream
HO2S is checked for proper output voltage and response rate (the time it takes to switch from lean
to rich or rich to lean). Downstream HO2S used for Catalyst Monitor are also monitored for proper
output voltage. The following illustration shows that input is required from the Engine Coolant
Temperature (ECT) or Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT), Intake Air Temperature (IAT), Mass Air
Flow (MAF) and Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensors to activate the HO2S Monitor. The Fuel
System Monitor and Misfire Detection Monitor must also have completed successfully before the
HO2S Monitor is enabled.
1. The HO2S sensor senses the oxygen content in the exhaust flow and outputs a voltage between
zero and 1.0 volt. Lean of stoichiometric (air/fuel
ratio of approximately 14.7:1), the HO2S will generate a voltage between zero and 0.45 volt. Rich
of stoichiometric, the HO2S will generate a voltage between 0.45 and 1.0 volt. The HO2S Monitor
evaluates both the upstream (fuel control) and downstream (Catalyst Monitor) HO2S for proper
function.
2. Once the HO2S Monitor is enabled, the upstream HO2S signal voltage amplitude and response
frequency are checked. Excessive voltage is
determined by comparing the HO2S signal voltage to a maximum calibratable threshold voltage. A
fixed frequency closed loop fuel control routine is executed and the upstream HO2S voltage
amplitude and output response frequency are observed. A sample of the upstream HO2S signal is
evaluated to determine if the sensor is capable of switching or has a slow response rate. A HO2S
heater circuit fault is determined by turning the heater on and off and looking for a corresponding
change in the Output State Monitor (OSM) and by measuring the current going through the heater
circuit. The HO2S Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows:
The Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTCs) associated with HO2S lack of switching are DTCs P1130,
P1131, P1132, P1150, P1151 and P1152.
The DTCs associated with HO2S slow response rate are DTCs P0133 and P0153.
The DTCs associated with HO2S signal circuit malfunction are DTCs P0131, P0136, P0148, P0151
and P0156.
The DTCs associated with a HO2S heater circuit malfunction are DTCs P0135, P0141, P0155 and
P0161. The Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) associated with the downstream HO2S not running in
on-demand is DTC P1127.
The DTCs associated with swapped HO2S connectors are DTCs P1128 and P1129.
3. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive
drive cycles.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor > Page 3873
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation PCM Inputs
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) (Figure 33) detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and
produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of
oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a low voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low
concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a high voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The
HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near
stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a
voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts.
Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to
temperatures of 800°C (1400°F). At approximately 300°C (600°F) the engine can enter closed loop
operation. The Vehicle Power (VPWR) circuit supplies voltage to the heater and the PCM will
complete the ground when the proper conditions occur. For model year 1998 a new HO2S heater
and heater control system are installed on some vehicles. The high power heater reaches closed
loop fuel control temperatures. The use of this heater requires that the HO2S heater control be duty
cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. The 6 ohm design is not interchangeable with new style
3.3 ohm heater.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
EGO Sensor Wrench
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the
vehicle.
3. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S.
NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or
equivalent to aid in removal.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in
installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 3876
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor
EGO Sensor Wrench
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
EGO Sensor Wrench
1. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor.
NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor
to aid in installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 3877
EGO Sensor Wrench
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3882
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3883
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3884
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3885
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3886
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3887
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3888
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3889
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3890
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3891
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3892
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3893
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3894
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3895
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3896
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3897
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3898
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3899
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3900
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3901
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Power Steering Pressure Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch (Figure 38) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the
power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic
pressure increases. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for
additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking
maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust transmission Electronic Pressure
Control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Power Steering Pressure Switch > Page 3904
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Sensor
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The Power Steering Pressure (PSP) sensor (Figure 39) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the
power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic
pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for
additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking
maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust transmission Electronic Pressure
Control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect
Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831
Attachment I - Administrative Information
Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6
Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure
Sensor Warranty Coverage
OASIS
You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program.
Note:
Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected
vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended
warranty time/mileage period.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is
claimed on.
CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03
Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a
warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for
vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for
this repair under the 02M01 program.
Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage
Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01.
Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles)
Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines.
Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP)
Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside
the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair.
OWNER REFUNDS
Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the
month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair
was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not
have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for
the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460).
All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual.
Refer to ACESII manual for refund information.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3913
LABOR ALLOWANCES
[NEW] NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Special Notes:
^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03.
^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program.
^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor
time has been adjusted accordingly.
^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not
cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs.
^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order
processing.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION
NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3914
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book.
PARTS RETENTION
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures."
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is
encountered, call the Special Service Support Center.
1. Retrieve continuous DTCs.
NOTE:
Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are
present:
^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED
^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED
Any other DTC present is not covered by this program.
2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as
follows:
a) Key off.
b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube.
c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector.
Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is
required.
3. Clear continuous DTCs.
4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3915
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3916
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3917
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall
- Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect
Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831
Attachment I - Administrative Information
Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6
Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure
Sensor Warranty Coverage
OASIS
You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program.
Note:
Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected
vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended
warranty time/mileage period.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is
claimed on.
CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03
Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a
warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for
vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for
this repair under the 02M01 program.
Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage
Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01.
Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles)
Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines.
Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP)
Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside
the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair.
OWNER REFUNDS
Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the
month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair
was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not
have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for
the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460).
All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual.
Refer to ACESII manual for refund information.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall
- Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3923
LABOR ALLOWANCES
[NEW] NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Special Notes:
^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03.
^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program.
^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor
time has been adjusted accordingly.
^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not
cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs.
^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order
processing.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION
NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall
- Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3924
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book.
PARTS RETENTION
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures."
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is
encountered, call the Special Service Support Center.
1. Retrieve continuous DTCs.
NOTE:
Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are
present:
^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED
^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED
Any other DTC present is not covered by this program.
2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as
follows:
a) Key off.
b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube.
c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector.
Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is
required.
3. Clear continuous DTCs.
4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall
- Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3925
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall
- Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3926
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall
- Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3927
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 >
Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL
ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set
Article No. 04-11-1
06/08/2004
DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON
AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS
ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY
FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001
EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC,
EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER
LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR
MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003
MOUNTAINEER
This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications.
ISSUE
Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following
symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently
functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1).
ACTION
For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic
procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED
Manual for the issue described above.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 >
Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3932
NOTE
ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA
NOTE
THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT
THE FOLLOWING:
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002
^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002
^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s).
2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor.
3. Clear continuous DTC(s).
4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 >
Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3933
Labor Operations
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
And Emissions Warranty Coverage.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9J460 42
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 >
Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3934
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL
ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set
Article No. 04-11-1
06/08/2004
DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON
AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS
ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY
FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001
EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC,
EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER
LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR
MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003
MOUNTAINEER
This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications.
ISSUE
Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following
symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently
functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1).
ACTION
For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic
procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED
Manual for the issue described above.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3940
NOTE
ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA
NOTE
THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT
THE FOLLOWING:
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002
^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002
^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s).
2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor.
3. Clear continuous DTC(s).
4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3941
Labor Operations
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
And Emissions Warranty Coverage.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9J460 42
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3942
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 3943
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 3944
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 86) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure
transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice
tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses
referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI
SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the aluminum differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter
hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the
pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 3945
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 87) is identical in operation
as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose
connections are marked on the underside of the sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 3946
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR
tube.
NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3950
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > PCM
Inputs
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation PCM Inputs
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Typical Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
The Throttle Position (TP) sensor (Figure 42) is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a
signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing
has a three-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases
corrosion resistance on terminals and increases connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on
the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are
determined by the PCM from the TP. Those conditions are closed throttle (includes idle or
deceleration), part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration), wide open throttle (includes
maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank), and throttle angle rate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > PCM
Inputs > Page 3953
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Systems
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system for component integrity, system
functionality, and faults that can cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government
regulations. For additional information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System
Hardware-PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] >
Component Information > Specifications
Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Specifications
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 18 ft.lb
Transmission range (TR) sensor bolts 9 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 3957
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 3958
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 3959
Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL. 2. Disconnect the battery cables. 3. Remove the battery and
tray.
4. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAP) sensor.
5. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 3960
6. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
7. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the thermostat housing to gain access to the transmission
range (TR) sensor.
Remove the thermostat housing.
8. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor.
1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 3961
2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Connect the electrical connector.
3. Install the thermostat housing.
4. Install the air cleaner assembly.
5. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
6. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor.
7. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
Install the battery and tray.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 3962
8. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive
symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its
adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the
strategy.
Connect the battery cables.
9. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in
PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should be
active only in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Specifications
Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) bolt 62 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3966
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3967
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3968
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
The Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (Figure 45) is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that
generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the
vehicle is moving at a relatively low velocity, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As
the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM
uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as
fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling and torque converter clutch
scheduling.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3969
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the VSS. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3973
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > PCM Inputs
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation PCM Inputs
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Typical Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
The Throttle Position (TP) sensor (Figure 42) is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a
signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing
has a three-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases
corrosion resistance on terminals and increases connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on
the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are
determined by the PCM from the TP. Those conditions are closed throttle (includes idle or
deceleration), part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration), wide open throttle (includes
maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank), and throttle angle rate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > PCM Inputs > Page 3976
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Systems
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system for component integrity, system
functionality, and faults that can cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government
regulations. For additional information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System
Hardware-PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range
Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications
Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Specifications
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 18 ft.lb
Transmission range (TR) sensor bolts 9 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range
Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3980
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range
Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3981
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range
Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3982
Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL. 2. Disconnect the battery cables. 3. Remove the battery and
tray.
4. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAP) sensor.
5. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range
Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3983
6. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
7. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the thermostat housing to gain access to the transmission
range (TR) sensor.
Remove the thermostat housing.
8. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor.
1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range
Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3984
2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Connect the electrical connector.
3. Install the thermostat housing.
4. Install the air cleaner assembly.
5. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
6. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor.
7. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
Install the battery and tray.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range
Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3985
8. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive
symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its
adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the
strategy.
Connect the battery cables.
9. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in
PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should be
active only in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation Variable Cam Timing System
Variable Cam Timing System
Overview
The Variable Cam Timing System allows the exhaust cam to advance and retard at varying engine
speeds. The purpose of this is to reduce exhaust emissions and increase fuel economy. As the
exhaust cam retards in relation to the crankshaft position, residual exhaust gases are left in the
combustion chamber. The residual gases cool the combustion chamber and are inert when mixed
with the incoming fresh charge of fuel and air. This results in better fuel economy and lower
Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) and Hydrocarbons (HG) the engine produces. The Exhaust Gas
Recalculation System (EGR) is unnecessary on the 2.0L (4V) engine due to this feature.
Variable Cam Timing
The Variable Cam Timing (VCT) system consists of the control solenoid, five-tooth pulse ring (4+1)
on exhaust camshaft, Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor, Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT)
sensor, Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor, Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor, Crankshaft Position (CKP)
sensor, Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (Figure 129).
1. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) receives input signals from the Intake Air Temperature
(IAT) sensor, Engine Coolant
Temperature (ECT) sensor, Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor, Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor and
Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor for determining the operating conditions of the engine.
2. The Variable Cam Timing (VCT) system is enabled by the PCM when the proper conditions are
met. The PCM disables the VCT system if
a fault is detected.
3. The PCM calculates relative cam position using the CMP sensor and data from the (4+1) pulse
ring mounted on the exhaust camshaft.
Relative cam position is calculated by measuring the time between the rising edge of Profile
Ignition Pickup (PIP) and the falling edge of Variable Cam Timing (VCT) pulse.
4. The PCM continually calculates a cam position error value based on the difference between the
desired and actual position and a duty
cycle is commanded for the VCT solenoid valve. Engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT unit.
5. Oil flows to either side of the piston chamber changing a linear motion from the piston to a
rotation motion from the helical mechanism in
the VCT unit. During closed loop the PCM outputs a revised duty cycle to the VCT solenoid valve
to correct for cam position error.
Variable Cam Timing System
HARDWARE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System > Page 3990
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve
The VCT solenoid valve (Figure 130) is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve
controls the flow of engine oil to the variable cam timing unit assembly. As the PCM duty cycles the
solenoid valve, oil is allowed to flow to the VCT unit assembly and advance or retard the cam
timing.
Variable Cam Timing Unit Assembly
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Unit Assembly
The variable cam timing unit assembly (Figure 131) is coupled to the camshaft through a helical
spline in the VCT unit chamber. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the
other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the piston to move linearly along the axis of the
camshaft. This linear motion is translated into rotational camshaft motion through the helical spline
coupling. A spring installed
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System > Page 3991
in the chamber is designed to hold the camshaft in the minimum overlap position (5 degrees) when
oil pressure is too low to maintain adequate position control. The camshaft is allowed to rotate up
to 30 degrees.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System > Page 3992
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Unit
Assembly
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Unit Assembly
Variable Cam Timing Unit Assembly
The variable cam timing unit assembly (Figure 131) is coupled to the camshaft through a helical
spline in the VCT unit chamber. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the
other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the piston to move linearly along the axis of the
camshaft. This linear motion is translated into rotational camshaft motion through the helical spline
coupling. A spring installed in the chamber is designed to hold the camshaft in the minimum
overlap position (5 degrees) when oil pressure is too low to maintain adequate position control. The
camshaft is allowed to rotate up to 30 degrees.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Description and Operation
VARIABLE CAM TIMING (VCT) SOLENOID VALVE
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve
The Variable Cam Timing (VCT) solenoid valve (Figure 130) is an integral part of the VCT system.
The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil to the variable cam timing unit assembly. As the
PCM duty cycles the solenoid valve, oil is allowed to flow to the VCT unit assembly and advance or
retard the cam timing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor >
Component Information > Specifications
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Specifications
Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) bolt 62 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 3999
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 4000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 4001
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
The Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (Figure 45) is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that
generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the
vehicle is moving at a relatively low velocity, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As
the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM
uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as
fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling and torque converter clutch
scheduling.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 4002
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the VSS. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Diverter Solenoid >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Air Diverter Solenoid: Description and Operation
AIR BYPASS SOLENOID
Secondary Air Injection Bypass Solenoid
The secondary air injection bypass (AIR bypass) solenoid (Figure 122) is used by the PCM to
control vacuum to the secondary air injection diverter (AIR diverter) valve. The AIR bypass solenoid
is a normally closed solenoid. The AIR bypass solenoid also has a filtered vent feature to permit
vacuum release.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Diverter Valve >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Air Diverter Valve: Description and Operation
AIR DIVERTER VALVE
Air Injection Diverter (AIR Diverter) Valve
The secondary air injection diverter (AIR diverter) valve (Figure 123) is used with the electric AIR
pump to provide on/off control of air to the exhaust manifold and catalytic converter. When the
electric AIR pump is on and vacuum is supplied to the AIR diverter valve, air passes the integral
check valve disk. When the electric AIR pump is off, and vacuum is removed from the AIR diverter
valve, the integral check valve disk is held on the seat and stops air from being drawn into the
exhaust system and prevents the back flow of the exhaust into the Secondary Air Injection System.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Injection Pump >
Component Information > Locations
Air Injection Pump: Locations
Electric Air Pump lower left side of engine compartment.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Injection Pump >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4014
Air Injection Pump: Description and Operation
ELECTRIC AIR PUMP
Electric Air Pump
The electric AIR pump (Figure 121) provides pressurized air to the Secondary Air Injection system.
The electric AIR pump functions independently of rpm and is controlled by the PCM. The electric
AIR pump is only used for short periods of time. Delivery of air is dependent on the amount of
system backpressure and system voltage. The inlet system of the AIR pump incorporates a
non-serviceable filter and splash cap which helps to guard against dirt and water.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Injection Pump Relay
> Component Information > Description and Operation
Air Injection Pump Relay: Description and Operation
SOLID STATE RELAY
Solid State Relay
The solid state relay (Figure 124) switches the high current required for operation of the electric
AIR pump. Input control to the solid state relay comes from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Vacuum Check Valve,
AIR > Component Information > Description and Operation
Vacuum Check Valve: Description and Operation
VACUUM CHECK VALVES
Vacuum Check Valve
A vacuum check valve (Figure 125) blocks air flow in one direction. It allows free air flow in the
other direction. The check side of this valve will hold the highest vacuum registered on the vacuum
side.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis
Technical Service Bulletin # 01-9-7 Date: 010514
Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis
Article No. 01-9-7
05/14/01
DRIVEABILITY - H025 (HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR), CATALYST, AND FUEL SYSTEM
MONITORS - SERVICE TIPS - OBD II VEHICLES ONLY
FORD: 1994-1997 THUNDERBIRD 1994-2001 MUSTANG 1995-2001 CROWN VICTORIA
1996-1997 PROBE 1996-2000 CONTOUR 1996-2001 ESCORT, TAURUS 2000-2001 FOCUS
1994-1997 F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350 1995-2001 ECONOLINE, RANGER, WINDSTAR
1996 BRONCO 1996-1997 AEROSTAR 1996-2001 EXPLORER 1997-2001 EXPEDITION, F-150,
F-250 LD 1999-2001 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2001 EXCURSION 2001 ESCAPE
LINCOLN: 1995-2001 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 1996-1998 MARK VIII 2000-2001 LS
1998-2001 NAVIGATOR
MERCURY: 1994-1997 COUGAR 1995-2001 GRAND MARQUIS 1996-1999 TRACER 1996-2000
MYSTIQUE 1996-2001 SABLE 1999-2001 COUGAR 1997-2001 MOUNTAINEER
ISSUE This article is intended to be an aide in diagnosing conditions related to Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S), Catalyst, and Fuel System Monitor related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
Additional information is included to assist in diagnosing certain vehicle symptoms. This article is
NOT intended to be a shortcut to the Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) Workshop
Manual pinpoint tests. The pinpoint tests in the PC/ED Manual should ALWAYS be followed when
diagnosing vehicle conditions.
ACTION Use the following information and Service Tips to assist in the diagnosis of H025,
Catalyst, and Fuel System Monitor related DTCs.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 98-23-10 WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 623000, 690000, 698298
Information
^ A. Description of Terms and Acronyms
^ B. HO2S Location Diagrams
^ C. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 4025
^ C1. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Information
^ C2. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
^ D. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor
^ D1. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Information
^ D2. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
^ E. Fuel System Monitor
^ E1. Fuel System Monitor - Information
^ E2. Fuel System Monitor Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
^ F. Diagnostic Service Tips
^ F1. Tips - General
^ F2. Tips Related to Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor
^ F3. Tips Related to Catalyst Monitor
^ F4. Tips Related to Fuel System Monitor
A. Description of Terms and Acronyms
^ CHT - Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor or PID
^ CKP - Crankshaft Position Sensor or PID
^ DTC - Diagnostic Trouble Code
^ ECT - Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor or PID
^ EGR - Exhaust Gas Recirculation
^ EEC - Electronic Engine Control
^ EVR - EGR Vacuum Regulator
^ FMEM - Failure Mode Effects Management
^ GND - Ground
^ HC - Hydrocarbons
^ HO2S - Heated Oxygen Sensor or PID
^ IAT - Inlet Air Temperature Sensor or PID
^ KAM - Keep Alive Memory
^ KOEO - Key On Engine Off
^ KOER - Key On Engine Running
^ LONGFT - Long Term Fuel Trim
^ MAF - Mass Air Flow Sensor or PID
^ MIL - Malfunction Indicator Lamp ("Check Engine")
^ NGS - New Generation Star Tester (Scan Tool)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 4026
^ OBD II - On-Board Diagnostics II
^ OSM - Output State Monitor
^ PC/ED - Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis
^ PCM - Powertrain Control Module
^ PCV - Positive Crankcase Ventilation
^ PID - Parameter Identification Display
^ RAM - Random Access Memory
^ RPM - Revolutions Per Minute
^ SHRTFT - Short Term Fuel Trim
^ Stoichiometric - 14.7:1 Air/Fuel Ratio (Gasoline Engines)
^ TP - Throttle Position Sensor or PID
^ VMV - Vapor Management Valve
^ VPWR - Vehicle Power (Battery Voltage)
^ VREF - Vehicle Reference Voltage (5 volts)
B. HO2S Location Diagrams
Refer to Figure 1 to better understand the H025 sensor names and locations. Regardless of how
the engine is mounted in the vehicle, conventional or transverse, the HO2S naming convention
stays the same in relationship to engine banks 1 and 2. Bank 1 will always be the bank containing
the # 1 cylinder.
C. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor
C1.) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 4027
The H025 Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the HO2S sensors for a malfunction
or deterioration that can affect emissions. Under specific conditions, the fuel control or upstream
HO2S sensors (Figures 1 and 3) are checked for proper output voltage and response rate (the time
it takes to switch from lean to rich or rich to lean). Downstream HO2S sensors (Figures 1 and 3)
used for Catalyst Monitor are also monitored for proper output voltage. Input is required from the
ECT or CHT, IAT, MAF, TP and CKP sensors to activate the H025 Monitor. The Fuel System
Monitor and Misfire Detection Monitor must also have completed successfully before the HO2S
Monitor is enabled.
The HO2S sensor senses the oxygen content in the exhaust flow and outputs a voltage between
zero and 1.0 volt. Lean of stoichiometric (air/fuel ratio of approximately 14.7:1 for gasoline
engines), the HO2S will generate a voltage between zero and 0.45 volt. Rich of stoichiometric, the
HO2S will generate a voltage between 0.45 and 1.0 volt.
^ The HO2S Monitor evaluates both the upstream (Fuel Control) and downstream (Catalyst
Monitor) HO2S for proper function.
^ Once the HO2S Monitor is enabled, the upstream H025 signal voltage amplitude and response
frequency are checked. Excessive voltage is determined by comparing the HO2S signal voltage to
a maximum calibratable threshold voltage.
^ A fixed frequency closed loop fuel control routine is executed and the upstream HO2S voltage
amplitude and output response frequency are observed. A sample of the upstream HO2S signal is
evaluated to determine if the sensor is capable of switching or has a slow response rate.
^ An HO2S heater circuit fault is determined by turning the heater on and off and looking for a
corresponding change in the OSM and by measuring the current going through the heater circuit.
^ The MIL is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive OBD II drive cycles.
The HO2S Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows:
^ HO2S signal circuit malfunction - P0131, P0136, P0151, P0156
^ HO2S slow response rate - P0133, P0153
^ HO2S heater circuit malfunction - P0135, P0141, P0155, P0161
^ Downstream HO2S not running in on-demand self test - P1127
^ Swapped H025 connectors - P1128 and P1129
^ H025 lack of switching - P1130, P1131, P1132, P1150, P1151, P1152
^ HO2S lack of switching (sensor indicates lean) - P1137
^ H025 lack of switching (sensor indicates rich) - P1138
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 4028
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 4029
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 4030
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 4031
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 4032
C2.) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes
D. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor
D1.) Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Information
The Federal Test Procedure Catalyst Monitor monitors for deterioration in the catalyst system and
illuminates the MIL when tailpipe emissions exceed the appropriate HC emission thresholds. The
Catalyst Monitor is enabled after the upstream and downstream HO2S sensors have been tested
and verified to be functional. This monitor relies on the front and rear heated oxygen sensors
(HO2S) to infer catalyst efficiency based upon oxygen storage capacity. Under normal closed loop
fuel conditions, high efficiency catalysts have oxygen storage which makes the switching frequency
of the rear HO2S quite slow compared with the frequency of the front HO2S. As catalyst efficiency
deteriorates, its ability to store oxygen declines, and the rear HO2S begins to switch more rapidly,
approaching the frequency of the front sensor. In general, as catalyst efficiency decreases, the
switch ratio increases from a switch ratio of 0 for a low mileage catalyst to a switch ratio of 0.8 or
0.9 for a low efficiency catalyst.
Some vehicles will monitor substantially less than the entire catalyst volume in order to meet the
stringent catalyst monitoring malfunction thresholds. In many cases, only the front, light-off catalyst
is monitored.
Front and rear HO2S switches are counted under specified closed loop fuel conditions. After the
required number of front switches are obtained, a rear-to-front HO2S switch ratio is calculated. The
switch ratio is compared against a threshold value. If the switch ratio is greater than the calibrated
maximum limit, the catalyst has failed. The test entry conditions for the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor
are as follows: ECT or CHT (warmed engine), IAT (not at extreme ambient temperatures), MAF
(greater than minimum engine load), VSS (within vehicle speed window) and TP (at part throttle)
are required.
^ Because an exponentially weighted moving average is used for malfunction determination, up to
six OBD II drive cycles may be required to illuminate the MIL.
NOTE
THE CATALYST MONITOR ON SOME EARLY OBD II VEHICLES (SOME 1994-1996 VEHICLES)
WAS REFERRED TO AS THE "STEADY-STATE CATALYST MONITOR" AS OPPOSED TO THE
"FTP CATALYST MONITOR" (DESCRIBED ABOVE) THAT IS MOST COMMON FOR VEHICLES
BUILT AFTER 1996. BELOW IS A BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE STEADY-STATE CATALYST
MONITOR:
The Steady-State Catalyst Monitor performs a 20 second test during steady state rpm and load
conditions. The Monitor transfers closed loop fuel control from the front to the rear 02 sensors. The
Monitor then observes the switching frequency and compares it to a threshold frequency stored in
an rpm/load table. A frequency higher than the maximum calibrated threshold indicates a
malfunction.
The Catalyst Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 4033
^ Catalyst system efficiency below threshold (Bank 1) - P0420
^ Catalyst system efficiency below threshold (Bank 2) - P0430
D2.) Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes
E. Fuel System Monitor
E1.) Fuel System Monitor - Information
The Fuel System Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the fuel trim system. The fuel
control system uses fuel trim tables stored in the PCM's KAM to compensate for variability in fuel
system components due to normal wear and aging. Fuel trim tables are based on vehicle speed
and engine load. During closed loop vehicle operation, the fuel trim strategy learns the corrections
needed to correct a "biased" rich or lean fuel system. The correction is stored in the fuel trim tables.
The fuel trim has two means of adapting; a LONGFT and a SHRTFT. LONGFT relies on the fuel
trim tables and SHRTFT refers to the desired air/fuel ratio parameter "LAMBSE". LAMBSE is
calculated by the PCM from HO2S inputs and helps maintain a 14.7:1 air/fuel ratio during closed
loop operation. SHRTFT and LONGFT work together. If the HO2S indicates the engine is running
rich, the PCM will correct the rich condition by moving SHRTFT in the negative range (less fuel to
correct for a rich combustion). If after a certain amount of time SHRTFT is still compensating for a
rich condition, the PCM "learns" this and moves LONGFT into the negative range to compensate
and allows SHRTFT to return to a value near 0%. Input from the ECT or CHT, IAT, and MAF
sensors is required to activate the fuel trim system, which in turn activates the Fuel System
Monitor. Once activated, the Fuel System Monitor looks for the fuel trim tables to reach the
adaptive clip (adaptive limit) and LAMBSE to exceed a calibrated limit. The Fuel System Monitor
will store the appropriate DTC when a fault is detected as described below.
^ The H025 detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and provides the PCM with feedback
indicating a rich or lean condition.
^ A correction factor is added to the fuel injector pulsewidth calculation according to the Long and
Short Term Fuel Trims as needed to compensate for variations in the fuel system.
^ When deviation in the parameter LAMBSE increases, air/fuel control suffers and emissions
increase. When LAMBSE exceeds a calibrated limit and the fuel trim table has clipped (reached
adaptive limit), the Fuel System Monitor sets a DTC.
^ The MIL is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive OBD II drive cycles.
The Fuel System Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows:
^ Fuel Delivery Error - P0148
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 4034
^ Lean shift in fuel system operation - P0171 (Bank 1) and P0174 (Bank 2)
^ Rich shift in fuel system operation - P0172 (Bank 1) and P0175 (Bank 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 4035
E2.) Fuel System Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes
F. Diagnostic Service Tips
1. Always reset KAM after performing a repair:
After performing a repair on a vehicle with the MIL on, and/or DTCs present, always clear KAM.
When a malfunction is present, the PCM adapts (attempts to correct) for this condition. Once the
vehicle has been repaired, if the KAM is not reset, the PCM will once again have to adapt back to
the normal operating conditions. Clearing the KAM will erase what the PCM has learned, so the
PCM will be able to start with "base tables".
2. Always view and record Freeze Frame Data:
Freeze Frame Data can be a valuable asset in duplicating and diagnosing concerns. This data (a
snapshot of certain PID values, recorded at the time the MIL was activated) indicates the manner in
which the vehicle was being driven at the time the fault occurred. This can be especially useful on
intermittent concerns. Freeze Frame Data, in some cases, can also help to isolate possible areas
of concern, as well as ruling out others. Always record (write down) the Freeze Frame Data.
3. Multiple DTCs (with the same meaning):
When multiple (paired) DTCs with the same meaning are set for multiple sensors, it is unlikely that
replacing both HO2S sensors will resolve the concern. In most cases, there will be another issue
that is causing the codes. Examples of multiple (paired) DTCs:
(P0135/P0155), (P0141/P0161), (P1131/P1151), (P1132/P1152).
To further clarify this, see the more detailed scenario as follows:
A vehicle comes in with a MIL On concern. KOEO self test reveals DTCs P0135 and P0155
(HTR-11 and HTR-21 circuit malfunction), with no other DTCs present. The most likely cause of
these DTCs would be something in the heater power circuit that both of these HO2S sensors have
in common (Example: open or shorted heater circuit wiring or splice). It is highly unlikely that
multiple sensors would fail at the same time. When multiple DTCs of this nature are encountered,
reviewing the appropriate wiring diagram(s) can help to isolate possible areas of concern. When
reviewing the wiring diagram, look for things that the affected sensors have in common.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 4036
In this example, the most likely cause of DTCs P0135 and P0155 (with no other DTCs present)
would be a concern with Splice "B" (refer to Figure 2).
NOTE
THIS ILLUSTRATION IS ONLY AN EXAMPLE. SPLICE NAMES "A", "B", AND "C" ARE USED IN
THIS EXAMPLE FOR CONVENIENCE ONLY. ON AN ACTUAL VEHICLE, SPLICE NAMES WILL
DEPEND ON THE CIRCUIT NUMBER FOR THE VEHICLE UNDER REPAIR. NOTE ALSO THAT
THIS FIGURE IS NOT INTENDED TO SHOW ALL SPLICES/CONNECTIONS ON ALL
VEHICLES. OTHER EEC CIRCUITS, NOT SHOWN, MAY ALSO BE SPLICED IN WITH THE
CIRCUITS SHOWN.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 4037
4. View H025 PID data carefully: NGS PIDs for HO2S sensors that do not exist (with certain
exhaust configurations) will show a value of "0" volts (refer to Figures 3 and 4).
In this example, the vehicle (equipped with a 4-cylinder engine) has one upstream and one
downstream HO2S. Notice that the NGS (scan tool) display shows two upstream and two
downstream HO2S PIDs, and that the "unused" HO2S sensor PIDs display "0" volts.
5. H025 sensors measure oxygen in the exhaust, not fuel: The exhaust gas condition reported by
the HO2S sensor is based on the presence of oxygen in the exhaust, not the presence of unburned
fuel.
Example: In the event of an ignition-related misfire, you might expect a rich HO2S reading, due to
the amount of unburned fuel in the exhaust system. However, there is also a large amount of
unburned oxygen, since no combustion took place in the misfiring cylinder. Since the H025 senses
oxygen only, it would report a lean condition in this particular situation.
F2.) Tips Related to Heated Oxygen Sensor (H025) Monitor
1. OBD II Response Rate Monitor: The OBD II
Response Rate Monitor (P0133/P0153) is only run at vehicle speeds between approximately 50-95
km/h (30-60 mph), during steady-state conditions. The test lasts approximately 6 seconds.
Therefore, P0133/P0153 cannot be diagnosed at idle in the repair bay.
2. Do not compare H025 switch rate - Bank-to-Bank or vehicle-to-vehicle: Different H025 switch
rates, from Bank-to-Bank, are considered normal. The H025 switch rate, from one Bank to the
other, should not be compared as a gauge of the H025's ability to switch/react. The PCM is
continuously adjusting spark and fuel in reaction to engine operating conditions (rpm, load, air flow,
throttle angle, etc.). The PCM is also continuously adapting to certain conditions (customer driving
habits, engine and component wear, etc.).
F3.) Tips Related to Catalyst Efficiency Monitor
1. Determining catalyst efficiency/switch ratio:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 4038
The upstream H025 sensors will have a high switch frequency, due to normal closed loop fuel
control. With an efficient catalyst, the downstream H025 will have a low switch frequency. The
switch ratio is determined by dividing the number of downstream switches by the number of
upstream switches over a given period of time. As the catalyst ages (or if the catalyst is damaged
or contaminated), the downstream switches will increase. When the downstream switch rate
crosses a threshold value (approximately 0.75 switch ratio), a code is stored (P0420 and/or P0430)
and the MIL illuminates (refer to Figures 5 and 6).
NOTE
IF A CATALYST IS DETERMINED TO HAVE LOW EFFICIENCY AND REQUIRES
REPLACEMENT, REPLACEMENT OF THE DOWNSTREAM H025 SENSORS WILL NOT BE
NECESSARY.
2. Use care in handling H025 sensors: In the event of catalyst replacement, use care in the
handling of H025 sensors to prevent damage or contamination. Do not use power tools in the
removal or installation of sensors. Use a 22mm wrench or crow foot to remove and install H025
sensors; do not use slotted sockets, as these sockets may damage wires. H025 sensors should be
torqued to 41 +/- 5 N.m (30 +/- 4 lb-ft).
3. Do not replace downstream HO2S sensors (H02S12/H02S22) for DTCs P0420 and/or P0430:
When diagnosing a vehicle with a customer concern of MIL On and DTCs P0420/P0430 in
continuous memory, do not replace the downstream HO2S sensors (H02S12/H02S22). Damaged
or malfunctioning downstream HO2S sensors will not cause these DTCs to be set. Always verify
the vehicle concern, then perform the pinpoint diagnostics in the appropriate PC/ED Service
Manual.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 4039
F4.) Tips Related to the Fuel System Monitor
1. HO2S sensors are not likely to be the cause of adaptive DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175:
Most warranty-returned HO2S sensors (replaced for these DTCs) are found to function normally.
Additional related DTCs will normally be present if there is a concern with the HO2S sensors. Do
not replace an HO2S sensor unless verified through pinpoint diagnostic tests found in the PC/ED
Service Manual.
2. DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, and P0175 are not related to downstream H028 sensors: When
diagnosing a vehicle with a MIL On and DTC(s) P0171, P0172, P0174, and/or P0175 in continuous
memory, do not replace the downstream HO2S sensors. These DTCs have no connection to the
downstream HO2S sensor function nor its diagnosis for faults. Always verify the vehicle concern,
then perform the pinpoint diagnostics from the appropriate PC/ED Service Manual.
3. Diagnosing lean conditions and lean DTCs P0171, P0174: Freeze Frame Data can often help to
identify the type of lean condition, even if the fault is intermittent, by indicating how the vehicle was
being driven when the fault occurred. Diagnosis of lean conditions and lean adaptive DTCs can be
difficult, especially if the concern is intermittent. Verifying the concern is extremely important. There
are different types of lean conditions. The ability to identify the type of lean condition causing the
concern can be crucial to a correct diagnosis. When DTCs P0171 and P0174 are both present,
there is a strong likelihood of another concern being present:
a. Vacuum leaks/unmetered air: In this type of condition, the engine may actually run lean of
stoichiometry (14.7:1 air/fuel ratio) if the PCM is not able to compensate enough to correct for the
condition. This condition is typically caused by air entering the engine through an abnormal source
(opening), or due to a MAF malfunction. In this situation, the volume of air entering the engine is
actually greater than what the MAF is indicating to the PCM. Vacuum leaks will normally be most
apparent when high manifold vacuum is present, during idle or light throttle. If Freeze Frame Data
indicates that the fault occurred at idle, a check for vacuum leaks/unmetered air when the engine is
cold might be the best starting point.
Examples: Loose, leaking or disconnected vacuum lines, intake manifold gaskets or 0-rings,
throttle body gaskets, brake booster, air inlet tube, stuck/frozen/aftermarket PCV valve, unseated
engine oil dipstick, MAF reading lower than normal, etc.
b. Insufficient fueling: In this type of condition, the engine may actually run lean of stoichiometry
(14.7:1 air/fuel ratio) if the PCM is not able to compensate enough to correct for the condition. This
condition is typically caused by a fuel delivery system concern that restricts or limits the amount of
fuel being delivered to the engine. This condition will normally be most apparent when the engine is
under a heavy load, when a higher volume of fuel is required. If Freeze Frame Data indicates that
the fault occurred under a heavy load, a check of the fuel delivery system (checking fuel pressure
with engine under a load) might be the best starting point.
Examples: Low fuel pressure (fuel pump, fuel filter, fuel leaks, restricted fuel supply lines), fuel
injector concerns, etc.
c. Exhaust system leaks: In this type of condition, the engine may actually be running near
stoichiometry (14.7:1 air/fuel ratio), but the exhaust gas mixture will be lean. This condition is
caused by oxygen-rich air entering the exhaust system through an external source. This condition
will cause the exhaust gas mixture to be lean, even though the actual combustion in the engine
may not be.
Examples: Exhaust system leaks upstream or near HO2S, malfunctioning Secondary Air Injection
system
d. MAF concerns: If a MAF concern is suspected, see TSB 98-23-10.
4. Checking fuel pressure: Check fuel pressure with engine under a load when diagnosing a lean
concern. A partially plugged fuel filter can be difficult to detect and can be easily overlooked if fuel
pressure is only checked at idle. The same is true for other types of fuel supply concerns (e.g., bent
or kinked lines, degraded fuel pump).
At idle, an engine requires only a small volume of fuel. Due to the fact that there is a small volume
of fuel needed at idle, a restriction in the fuel supply line in many cases will not cause the fuel
pressure to be low. When the vehicle is under a load, the engine requires much more fuel than at
idle. Under a load, a restriction in the fuel supply line will prevent the high rate of fuel flow that is
needed to maintain the correct fuel pressure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4040
Catalytic Converter: Specifications
Catalytic Converter TWC to Exhaust Manifold Nuts 35 ft.lb
TWC Bracket Bolts 18 ft.lb
TWC To Resonator Bolts 30 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions
Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Acronyms and Definitions
2V - L
ACRONYMS AND DEFINITIONS
NOTE: This Acronyms and Definitions listing contains technical terms applicable to Ford Motor
Company products. It is not intended to be an all-inclusive dictionary of components and their
functions. If a detailed description of a particular system or component is desired, refer to the
applicable Vehicle System for the specific vehicle being serviced.
2V: Two Valve engine configuration.
4V: Four Valve engine configuration.
ABS: Anti-lock Brake System.
A/C: Air Conditioning. A vehicle accessory system that modifies the passenger compartment air by
cooling and dehydrating the air.
ACC: Air Conditioning Clutch. Indicates status of the A/C clutch.
ACCS: Air Conditioning Cycling Switch. Indicates status of the A/C cycling switch.
ACD: Air Conditioning Demand. A signal input to the PCM from the Air Conditioning control panel.
ACP: Air Conditioning Head Pressure or A/C cycling switch input state.
ACPSW: Air Conditioning Pressure Switch.
ACPV: Air Conditioning Head Pressure Volts. A voltage input to the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) from the ACP switch or sensor.
ACR: Air Conditioning Relay. Commanded output controlled by the PCM and acts as an A/C cutout
control during heavy acceleration.
A/D: Analog-to-Digital. Analog-to-Digital signal conversion.
ADC: See ATDC.
AFCM: Alternative Fuel Control Module.
AIR: Secondary Air Injection.
AIRB: Secondary Air Injection Bypass.
Air Diverter: Air Diverter Valve. Part of the EAIR system. Diverts fresh air to the exhaust system
when the electric air pump is commanded on.
AIR EVAL: Air System Evaluated. Displays a YES or NO status indicating whether the Air System
has been evaluated for OBD (On-Board Diagnostic) II purposes.
Air/Fuel Ratio: Air to fuel mixture ratio. An air/fuel mixture that is 14.7:1 is also called stoichiometry.
AIRM: Secondary AIR pump monitor.
Ambient Air Temperature: Temperature of the air surrounding an object.
Analog (Electrical/Electronic): An electrical signal that can obtain any value within the voltage limits
of the signal.
ARB: Air Resource Board.
ARPMIDES: Ancillary RPM Desired. RPM required to maintain the vehicle speed commanded by
Speed Control Command Switch (SCCS) inputs.
ASCII: American Standard Code for Information Interchange.
ATDC: After Top Dead Center. The location of the piston after it has reached the top of its stroke.
Measured in degrees of crankshaft rotation.
AVOM: Analog Volt-Ohm Multimeter. Readings are indicated by a sweep hand on a printed scale,
rather than a digital display.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4043
AWD: All-Wheel Drive.
BARO: Barometric Pressure.
Base Idle: Idle rpm determined by the throttle lever hardset on the throttle body with the IAC
solenoid disconnected.
Base Timing: Spark advance in degrees before top dead center of the base engine without any
control from the PCM or ICM.
Battery Positive Voltage (B+): The positive (+) voltage from the battery or any circuit connected
directly to the battery. Compare "Vehicle Power (VPWR)."
BAT TEMP: Battery Temperature.
BJB: Battery Junction Box.
BOB: Breakout Box. A test device which connects in series to the PCM and PCM harness.
BPA: Brake Pedal Applied switch. Typically located on the braking system master cylinder. Can be
hydraulic or electric.
BPP: Brake Pedal Position. Indicates the position of the brake pedal, based on input from the
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) switch.
BRAKE LMP or BRKL: Brake Warning Lamp Status. Activates the Brake Warning Lamp by
applying voltage to the control line.
BTDC: Before Top Dead Center. The location of the piston before it has reached the top of its
stroke. Measured in degrees of crankshaft rotation.
Bus + or Bus -: Multiplex circuits that carry Standard Corporate Protocol (SCP) data from module to
module and to the DLC.
CAC: Charge Air Cooler. Formerly known as Intercooler. A device which lowers the temperature of
pressurized intake air.
CAFE: Corporate Average Fuel Economy. A set of federal requirements and regulations which
govern fuel economy standards.
CANVNT: Canister Vent Solenoid.
Catalyst: Catalytic converter. An in-line exhaust system device used to reduce the level of engine
exhaust emissions.
CAT EVAL: Catalyst System Evaluated. This item indicates YES when the Catalyst Efficiency
Monitor has successfully completed.
CCM: Comprehensive Component Monitor.
CCRM: Constant Control Relay Module. A relay module that provides ON-OFF control of various
EEC components.
CD A through J: Coil Driver 1 through 10.
Centralized Testing Facility: State government operation. Provides Inspection/Maintenance (IM)
and safety inspections.
CGND or CSE GND: Case Ground. Provides a ground source for the PCM or ECU case.
CHT: Cylinder Head Temperature. Units are displayed in either degrees Fahrenheit or Centigrade.
CHTIL: Cylinder Head Temperature Indicator Lamp.
CHTV: Cylinder Head Temperature Voltage. The actual voltage drop across the CHT sensor
thermistor.
CID: Cylinder Identification. PCM input signal from Camshaft Position Sensor.
CKP: Crankshaft Position. Senses the position of the crankshaft.
CKP+, CKP-: CKP+ is the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor signal wire. CKP - is the signal return.
CL: Closed Loop. An operating condition or mode which enables operation based on sensor
feedback.
CMP: Camshaft Position. Indicates camshaft position.
CMPFM: Camshaft Position Failure Mode. Indicates when the PCM identifies a CID/CMP fault.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4044
CMS: Catalyst Monitor Sensor. Downstream H025.
CMVSS: Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
CNG: Compressed Natural Gas.
CO: Carbon Monoxide. A colorless, odorless and toxic gas that is a component of auto exhaust
emissions.
CO(2): Carbon Dioxide. A colorless, odorless gas that is a normal by-product of the combustion of
fuel.
Coil: A device consisting of windings around an iron core. In a spark ignition system, designed to
increase voltage.
Cold Soak: Time given to a vehicle to sit at a low temperature (typically below 68°F / 20°C) until the
temperature of external and internal components stabilize.
CONT: Continuous Memory. The portion of KAM (Keep Alive Memory) used to store DTCs
generated during Continuous Memory Self-Test.
Continuous Memory Self- Test: A continuous test of the EEC system conducted by the PCM
whenever the vehicle is operating.
CPP: Clutch Pedal Position. Indicates clutch pedal position.
CPP Switch: Clutch Pedal Position Switch. Located on the clutch pedal and detects when the
clutch pedal is depressed.
CQIS: Common Quality Indicator System.
CSE GND: Case Ground.
CT: Closed Throttle Mode. A mode when the PCM varies the pulse width of the fuel injectors to
obtain the air/fuel mixture appropriate for closed throttle operation.
CTO: Clean Tach Output. Signal used to drive the instrument panel tachometer.
Data Communications Link: A communication path between various in-vehicle electronic modules.
Accessed by scan tools through the Data Link Connector (DLC).
DC: 1. Direct Current. Electric current flowing in one direction. 2. Duty Cycle. The voltage
measurement of ON time versus the full cycle period, expressed in percent.
DCL: Data Communication Link.
DI: Distributor Ignition. A system in which the ignition coil secondary circuit is sequenced by a
distributor.
Digital: Controls process information by switching the current or voltage ON and OFF.
DLC: Data Link Connector. J1962 connector providing access to vehicle diagnostic information.
DOHC: Dual Overhead Cam. An engine configuration that uses two camshafts positioned above
the valves.
DOL: Data Output Line. A circuit that sends certain information from the PCM to the instrument
cluster.
DPFEGR: Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation. System that uses a pressure
transducer to control the operation of the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Vacuum Regulator
Valve.
DRI: Deposit Resistant Injector. A fuel injector designed to prevent build-up of carbon and other
unwanted deposits.
DRL: Daytime Running Lamps. A system that keeps the vehicle running lamps on at all times while
the vehicle is operating.
DTM: Diagnostic Test Mode. A level of capability in an On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) system.
DTC: Diagnostic Trouble Code. An alpha/numeric identifier for a fault condition identified by the
On-Board Diagnostic System.
DVOM: Digital Volt-Ohm Meter.
E-85: Fuel containing 85% ethanol alcohol.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4045
EAIR: Electric Secondary Air Injection. A pump-driven system for providing secondary air using an
electric air pump.
EAIRM: Electric Secondary Air Pump circuit Monitor.
ECT: Engine Coolant Temperature. Displayed in either Fahrenheit or Centigrade.
ECTV: Engine Coolant Temperature Voltage. The actual voltage drop across the ECT sensor
thermistor.
ECU: Electronic Control Unit. A module that handles the control strategy and monitors system
inputs or outputs.
EEC: Electronic Engine Control system.
EEC-V: Fifth generation EEC system.
EFT: Engine Fuel Temperature.
EFTA: Bank 1 input. EFTA is displayed in either Fahrenheit or Centigrade.
EFTAV: Voltage drop across the EFTA (Bank 1) sensor thermistor.
EFTB: Bank 2 input. EFTB is displayed in either Fahrenheit or Centigrade.
EFTBV: Voltage drop across the EFTB (Bank 2) sensor thermistor.
EGR: Exhaust Gas Recirculation. A process in which a small amount of exhaust gas is routed into
the combustion chamber.
EGR EVAL: Exhaust Gas Recirculation System Evaluated. EGR EVAL will display YES when the
monitor is complete.
EGRMDSD: Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation Motor Desired position. The PID name used to
operate the Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) valve with scan tool's output state control.
EGRS: EGR Shutoff. A normally closed solenoid that applies vacuum to the EGR valve when
energized by the PCM.
EGRT: Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve Temperature Sensor. A temperature sensor that is
threaded into the bottom of the intake plenum.
EGR Vacuum Regulator: Controls vacuum to the EGR valve by a duty cycle signal from the PCM.
EGRVR: Exhaust Gas Recirculation Vacuum Regulator. Solenoid which varies the vacuum to the
EGR valve by varying the duty cycle to the regulator.
EGRVRA: Exhaust Gas Recirculation Vacuum Regulator Actual (volt). The actual state of the
commanded output.
EGRVRF: Exhaust Gas Recirculation Vacuum Regulator Fault. Represents whether a fault exists
in the EGRV circuit.
EI: Integrated Electronic Ignition. An Electronic Ignition system that has the Ignition Control Module
(ICM) integrated into the PCM.
EI-HDR: Electronic Ignition, High Data Rate. Formerly known as Electronic Distributorless Ignition
System.
EI-LDR: Electronic Ignition, Low Data Rate. Formerly known as Distributorless Ignition System.
EMI: Electromagnetic Interference. Usually caused by ignition voltage spikes, solenoids, relay
operation or noisy generator contacts.
EOL: End Of Line. A system designed specifically for use at assembly plants to make sure all new
vehicles perform to design specifications.
EPA: Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. Government).
EPROM: Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory. An electronic component in the PCM that
requires the electronic storage of information.
ESOF: Electronic Shift-on-the-Fly.
EVAP: Evaporative Emissions. A system to prevent fuel vapor from escaping into the atmosphere.
EVAPCP: Evaporative Canister Purge Solenoid. Controls a solenoid which allows venting of the
evaporative purge canister.
EVAPCPF: Evaporative Canister Purge Solenoid Fault. Identifies whether an electrical fault exists
for the current commanded state.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4046
EVAPCV: Evaporative Canister Vent Solenoid. Controls a solenoid which seals the EVAP system
canister from atmospheric pressure during the EVAP OBD II Monitor test.
Evaporative Emissions Canister: An evaporative emission canister, containing activated charcoal
which absorbs and holds fuel vapors.
EVAPPDC: Evaporative Canister Purge Duty Cycle. The duty cycle commanded to the Evap
Canister Purge Solenoid by the PCM.
EVO: Electronic Variable Orifice.
EWP: Electric Water Pump.
Exciter Ring: A toothed or notched iron or steel disk, which is the moveable part of a wheel speed
sensor.
FAN: Fan Speed. Used in conjunction with vehicles having multiple fan speed control. Displays
OFF, LOW, or HIGH status.
FC: Fan Control.
FCS: Fuel Control Solenoid.
FCIL: Fuel Cap Off Indicator Lamp. Indicates that the fuel filler cap was not properly installed.
FEAD: Front End Accessory Drive.
FEPS: Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) Programming
Signal. 18 volt DC signal sent by the scan tool to initiate PCM reprogramming.
FF: 1. Flexible Fuel. A system capable of using a variety of fuels for vehicle operation. 2. A PID that
displays the % alcohol content in fuel.
FFLRN: Flex Fuel Learned. Displays when the PCM's Flex Fuel strategy has completed calculating
the inferred alcohol content of fuel.
FFFM: Flexible Fuel Failure Mode. Indicates whether the current Flex Fuel Sensor reading (FF) is
reliable or not. Displays a YES or NO.
FFTEMP: Flexible Fuel Sensor - Temperature. Alcohol concentration derived from the signal pulse
width.
FFV: Flexible Fuel Vehicle.
FIFO: First In First Out.
FILO: First In Last Out.
FIM: Fuel Indicator Module.
FLI: Fuel Level Input. Used by the Evap monitor to calculate fuel tank vapor volume. Displayed as
a percentage.
FLIV: Fuel Level Input Voltage.
FMEM: Failure Mode Effects Management. Operating strategy that maintains limited vehicle
function in the event of a PCM or EEC component failure.
FP:1. Fuel Pump. Indicates whether the pump has been commanded ON or OFF by the PCM. 2.
Fuel Pump (Modulated). Fuel pump duty cycle percentage.
FPDM: Fuel Pump Driver Module. A module that controls the electric fuel pump.
FPF: Fuel Pump Fault. Identifies whether a fault exists in the FP circuit.
FPM: Fuel Pump Monitor. Monitors the Fuel Pump I circuits for faults.
Freeze Frame: A block of memory containing the vehicle operating conditions at a specific time.
FRP: Fuel Rail Pressure. Based on FRP V.
FRP V: Fuel Rail Pressure Voltage. A voltage input to the PCM from the Fuel Rail Pressure
Sensor.
FSC: Fail-Safe Cooling.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4047
FSV: Fuel Shut-off Valve. A component of Natural Gas Vehicles. This valve either allows or
prevents Natural Gas flow to the fuel rail.
FSVF: Fuel Shut-Off Valve Fault. Indicates if there is a fault in the FSV circuit. Displayed as YES or
NO.
FSVM: Fuel Shut-off Valve Monitor. Monitors operation of the Fuel Shut-Off Valve / circuit.
FTP: Fuel Tank Pressure. Displayed as inches of water, kPa, or volts.
FTP V: Fuel Tank Pressure Voltage. From the FTP transducer.
FUEL PR: Fuel Pressure. Measurement of the force of the fuel delivered via the fuel pump.
FUELPW: Fuel Pulse Width. Displays the commanded pulse width at time of last data update.
FUELPW1: Fuel Injector Pulse Width #1. Corresponds to injectors normally affected by O2S1
(HEGO1).
FUELPW2: Fuel Injector Pulse Width #2. Corresponds to injectors normally affected by O2S2
(HEGO2).
FUELSYS: Fuel System Status (OPEN/CLOSED Loop). Formerly known as LOOP.
Fuel Tank Vapor Valve: A valve mounted in the top of the fuel tank that vents excess vapor and
pressure from the fuel tank into the Evaporative Emission Control System.
FWD: Front Wheel Drive.
GEM: Generic Electronic Module.
GEN: Generator.
GENF: Generator Output Fault.
GENFDC: Generator Field Control Output.
GFS: Generator field signal monitor.
GND: Ground.
GPM: Grams Per Mile. Also known as Gallons Per Minute.
GPS: Global Positioning Satellite.
Green State Vehicle: Formally known as California Emissions. A vehicle that is equipped with
California on-board diagnostics.
GSS: Gear Select Solenoid.
GVW: Gross Vehicle Weight.
Hall Effect: A process where current is passed through a small slice of semi-conductor material and
a magnetic field to produce a small voltage in the semi-conductor.
Hard Fault: A fault currently present in the system.
HC: 1. Hydrocarbon. A by-product of combustion and a component of auto exhaust emissions. 2.
High Compression.
HCF: Hydraulic Cooling Fan.
HCFD: Hydraulic Cooling Fan Drive.
HFC: Hydraulic Cooling Fan.
HFCF: High Fan Control Fault. Identifies if there is a fault in the HFC circuit.
HFP: High Fuel Pump.
HLOS: Hardware Limited Operating Strategy. A mode of operation where the PCM replaces output
commands with fixed values in response to internal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4048
PCM malfunctions.
HO: High Output.
HO2S: Heated Oxygen Sensor. Formerly known as Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen (HEGO) Sensor.
Provides information on rich or lean exhaust conditions to the PCM.
Hot Soak: Period of time after an engine operates where localized combustion heat dissipates
throughout the engine.
HTR, HTR11, HTR12, HTR21 H1R22, HTRX1, HTRX2: HO2S Heater. Heater element for the
HO2S sensor.
Hydrogen: Chemical symbol H. Highly flammable gas.
Hz: Hertz. Cycles per second.
IAC: Idle Air Control. Electrical control of throttle bypass air.
IAT: Intake Air Temperature.
IATV: Intake Air Temperature Voltage. Actual voltage drop across the IAT sensor.
IAT2: Intake Air Temperature 2. Displayed in either Fahrenheit or Centigrade. Used on
supercharged vehicles.
IAT2V: Intake Air Temperature 2 Voltage. Actual voltage drop across the IATV2 sensor.
IC: Integrated Circuit. A small Semi-Conductor device capable of doing many separate circuit
functions.
ICM: Ignition Control Module. The module that controls the ignition system.
IFDM: Integrated Fuel Delivery Module.
IFS: Inertia Fuel Shutoff.
IGN GND: Ignition Ground.
Ignition: System used to provide high voltage spark for internal combustion engines.
IGNKEY(IGKY): Ignition Key status.
IGNSW (IGSW): Ignition Switch Position.
IMRC: Intake Manifold Runner Control. Controls airflow through the high-speed runners in the
intake manifold.
IMRCM: Intake Manifold Runner Control Monitor. Monitors the IMRC / circuits for faults.
IMTV: Intake Manifold Tuning Valve. Controls airflow through runners in a split intake manifold.
INJ1, INJ2, INJ3, INJ4, INJ5, INJ6, INJ7, INJ8, INJ9, INJ1O: lnjector number or its signal output
from the PCM.
Injector: A device for delivering metered pressurized fuel to the intake system or the cylinders.
Intake Air: Air drawn through a filter and distributed to each cylinder for use in combustion.
Intercooler: See CAC.
IPATS: Integrated Passive Anti-Theft System.
ISO: international Standards Organization.
KAM: Keep Alive Memory. A portion of the memory within the PCM that must have power even
when the vehicle is not operating.
KAPWR: Keep Alive Power. Dedicated, unswitched power circuit that maintains KAM.
Key On Engine Off Self- Test: A test of the EEC system conducted by the PCM with power applied
and the engine at rest.
Key On Engine Running Self- Test: A test of the EEC system conducted by the PCM with the
engine running and the vehicle at rest.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4049
KEYPWR: Key Power. Battery voltage supplied when the ignition key is in the ON position.
Knock: The sharp metallic sound produced when two combustion pressure fronts collide in the
combustion chamber of an engine.
KOEC: Key On Engine Continuous.
KOEO: Key On Engine off.
KOER: Key On Engine Running.
KPA: Kilopascal. Unit of pressure. 3.386 kPa = 1 inch of mercury (Hg.).
KPH: Kilometers Per Hour.
KS: Knock Sensor. Detects engine knock.
L: Liters. The unit of volume in the metric measuring system. One liter equals 1.06 quarts.
LEV: Low Emissions Vehicle.
LFC: Low Fan Control.
LFP: Low Fuel Pump. Reduced operating speed for multi-speed fuel pumps.
LIFO: Last In First Out.
LILO: Last In Last Out.
LONGFT1, LONGFT2: Long-Term Fuel Trim. Fuel flow adjustment determined by the PCM.
LOOP: indicates OPEN or CLOSED loop status.
LPG: Liquefied Petroleum Gas.
LPLR: Low Pressure Low Resistance fuel injector.
M-V
ACRONYMS AND DEFINITIONS
NOTE: This Acronyms and Definitions listing contains technical terms applicable to Ford Motor
Company products. It is not intended to be an all-inclusive dictionary of components and their
functions. If a detailed description of a particular system or component is desired, refer to the
applicable Vehicle System for the specific vehicle being serviced.
M-85: Fuel containing 85% methanol alcohol.
MAF: Mass Air Flow. Used to measure the mass (weight) of the air entering the engine.
MAF RTN: Mass Air Flow Return. A return circuit for the MAF sensor.
MAP: Manifold Absolute Pressure. The internal pressure of the intake manifold.
MFC: Medium Fan Control.
MFI: Multiport Fuel Injection. A fuel-delivery system in which each cylinder is individually fueled.
MFP: Modulated Fuel Pump.
Microprocessor: A digital processor on a chip which perform arithmetic and control logic.
MIL: Malfunction Indicator Lamp. An indicator lamp alerting the driver of an emission related
malfunction. May also read "CHECK ENGINE" or "SERVICE ENGINE SOON."
MISF: Misfire. Any event in the cylinder that causes a sudden change in acceleration of the
crankshaft.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4050
MON: Motor Octane Number.
Monolithic Substrate: The ceramic honeycomb structure used in the catalytic converter.
MSOF: Manual Shift-on-the-Fly.
MY: Model Year.
NA: Naturally Aspirated. Engine that is not supercharged or turbocharged.
NAAO: North American Automotive Operations.
NC: Normally Closed.
NG: Natural Gas. A system capable of using natural gas for vehicle operation.
NGS: New Generation STAR (Self-Test Automatic Readout) tester.
NGVM: Natural Gas Vehicle Module.
NO: Norm ally Open.
NO(x): Oxides of Nitrogen. Formed at high combustion temperatures.
NVH: Noise, Vibration, Harshness. A classification of vehicle concerns.
OASIS: On-Line Automotive Service Information System.
OBD, OBD-II: On-Board Diagnostics, On-Board Diagnostics Second Generation. A system that
monitors PCM input and output control signals.
On Demand Test: Technician initiated "KOEO" and "KOER" tests performed by the PCM.
OC: Oxidation Catalytic converter. A catalytic converter system that reduces levels of HC and CO.
OCT ADJ: Octane Adjust. Compensating strategy that adjusts for changes in fuel octane.
OEM: Original Equipment Manufacturer.
OHC: OverHead Cam. An engine configuration that uses a single camshaft positioned above the
valves.
OWL: Overheat Warning Lamp or its signal output from the PCM. Turns the TEMP warning lamp
ON when engine oil temperature exceeds safe limits.
Open Circuit: A circuit which does not provide a complete path for flow of current.
OL: Open Loop. An operating condition based on instructions not modified by PCM feedback.
O(2)S 11/12/21/22: Oxygen Sensor and its relative position in the exhaust system. Detects oxygen
content in exhaust gasses.
OSC: Output State Control.
OSS: Output Shaft Speed.
Ozone: A blue gaseous form of oxygen (O(3)) formed naturally by electric discharge or exposure to
ultraviolet radiation.
Particulate: Small solid matter found in exhaust gases, especially prevalent in diesel engines.
PATS: Passive Anti-Theft System.
PATSIL: Passive Anti-Theft System Indicator Light.
PATSIN: Passive Anti-Theft System Receive Signal.
PATSOUT: Passive Anti-Theft System Transmit Signal.
PATSTRT: Passive Anti-Theft System Starter Relay Control
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4051
PCM: Powertrain Control Module. Formerly known as the EEC (Electronic Engine Control)
Processor.
PCV: Positive Crankcase Ventilation. A system which allows the controlled flow of crankcase
vapors into the combustion chamber.
PF: Purge Flow. Amount of fuel vapor burned in the engine.
Photochemical: Term describing the action of light on air pollutants which results in creating smog.
PID: Parameter Identifier. Identifies an address in PCM memory which contains operating
information.
Powertrain: Engine and transmission/transaxle components.
Pressure - Absolute: A pressure referenced to a perfect vacuum.
Pressure - Atmospheric: The pressure of the surrounding air at any given temperature and altitude.
Sometimes called Barometric Pressure.
Pressure - Barometric: Pertaining to atmospheric pressure or the results obtained by a barometer.
Pressure - Differential: The pressure difference between two regions, such as between the intake
manifold and atmospheric pressure.
Pressure - Gage: The amount by which absolute pressure exceeds the ambient atmospheric
pressure.
PIP: Profile Ignition Pickup. Provides crankshaft position information for ignition synchronization.
Potentiometer: An adjustable resistance component commonly used as a sensor (Example: TP
Sensor).
PPM: Parts Per Million. A measure used in emission analysis.
PROM: Programmable Read-Only Memory. Similar to ROM except without program instructions.
Protocol: A set of rules for the exchange of information on a network.
PSOM: Programmable Speedometer/Odometer Module. A module that processes vehicle speed
information.
PSP: Power Steering Pressure. Indicates the pressure in the power steering system.
PSP V: Power Steering Pressure Input Voltage.
PTEC: Powertrain Electronic Controller.
PTO: Power Take-Off.
PW: Pulse Width. The length of time an actuator, such as a fuel injector, remains energized.
PWM: Pulse Width Modulation. Controls the intensity of an output by varying the signal duty cycle.
PWR GND: Power Ground. The main ground circuit in the EEC system.
Quick Test: A series of diagnostic tests of the EEC system consisting of KOEO, KOER and
Continuous Memory Self-Tests. Results are displayed as a series of DTCs.
RABS: Rear Antilock Brake System.
RAM: Random Access Memory. Memory into which information can be written as well as read.
REDOX: Reduction Oxidation Catalytic converter. A catalytic converter system designed to operate
at high temperatures.
Regulator: Controls the alternator/generator field current to maintain proper battery charge.
Contained within the PCM in smart charging applications.
Relay: An electromechanical device in which connections in one circuit are opened or closed by
changes in another circuit.
REM: Rear Electronic Module.
Repetitive Spark: Multiple firings of individual spark plugs at engine speeds below 1000 RPM to
improve idle quality and improve emissions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4052
RF: Radio Frequency.
RFI: Radio Frequency Interference.
RFS: Returnless Fuel System.
RM: Relay Module. A module containing two or more relays.
ROM: Read-Only Memory. Computer memory that can be accessed and utilized, but not altered.
RON: Research Octane Number.
Routine: A group of related tasks, such as a series of diagnostic tests.
RPM: Revolutions Per Minute.
RS: Reverse Switch.
RTN: Return. A dedicated sensor ground circuit.
RWD: Rear Wheel Drive.
SAE: Society of Automotive Engineers.
SBS: Supercharger Bypass Solenoid or its signal output from the PCM.
SC: Supercharged or Supercharger.
SCB: Supercharger Bypass Control. A system that allows manifold vacuum to be bled away from
the supercharger wastegate actuator to allow for maximum boost.
SCBF: Supercharger Bypass Control Fault. Identifies whether a fault exists in the Supercharger
Bypass circuit.
SCICP: Supercharger Intercooler Pump Control.
SCICPF: Supercharger Intercooler Pump Control Fault.
SCIPC: The PID to monitor the operation of the Supercharger and Charge Air Cooler pump.
SCP: Standard Corporate Protocol.
Self- Test: See Quick Test.
Sensor: A device that detects the value or change in a physical quantity, such as temperature,
pressure or flow rate, and converts the data into an electrical signal.
SFI: Sequential Multi port Fuel Injection. A multiport fuel delivery system where each injector is
individually energized and timed relative to its cylinder intake event.
Shield: A conducting sleeve that surrounds wires to be electronically isolated from Electromagnetic
Interference (EMI).
Short Circuit: An undesirable condition in a circuit where it is terminated at a point other than that
intended.
SHRT FT: Short-Term Fuel Trim. Fuel flow adjustment in response to the HO2S sensor(s) input
during closed-loop operation.
SIG RTN: Signal Return. A dedicated sensor ground circuit that is common to two or more sensors.
SIL: Shift Indicator Lamp.
Smart Driver: A PCM or ECU output driver that can detect faults (open or shorts) on its output
circuit.
SME: Society of Manufacturing Engineers.
SOF: Shift-On-the-Fly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4053
SOHC: Single Overhead Cam.
Solenoid: A device consisting of an electrical coil which produces a magnetic field in a plunger and
pulled to a central position.
ST: Scan Tool. A device that interfaces with and communicates information on a data link.
Stoichiometry: An air/fuel mixture that is neither too rich nor too lean. Stoichiometric ratio is 14.7
parts of air for every 1 part of fuel.
Switch: A device for making, breaking, or changing the connections in an electrical circuit.
TA: Traction Assist.
TACH: Tachometer.
TB: Throttle Body. A device that controls airflow through the engine via a butterfly valve, and has
an air bypass channel around the throttle plate.
TC: 1. Traction Control. Combines anti-lock braking and axle torque reduction to control wheel
slippage. 2. Turbocharger.
TDC: Top Dead Center.
Tear Tag: The two-piece adhesive label attached to the PCM to identify its calibration.
Thermistor: A temperature dependent resistor, like that used in CHT and ECT sensors.
Timing: Relationship between spark plug firing and piston position expressed in crankshaft degrees
before (BTDC) or after (ATDC) top dead center of the compression stroke.
TMAP: Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor. A MAP Sensor that includes a thermistor to
measure intake air temperature.
TP: Throttle Position (sensor). A three-wire potentiometer that provides throttle angle and rate
information for the PCM.
TP V: Throttle Position Sensor Voltage.
Transducer: A device that receives energy from one medium and transfers it to another. For
example, thermal energy is converted to an electrical signal through a temperature probe.
Transmissions/Transaxles:
NOTE: All related items are grouped under the general heading "TRANSMISSIONS" located at the
end.
TSB: Technical Service Bulletin. Notifies service personnel of any known vehicle concerns,
procedures, or general service information.
Underspeed Mode: A control mode that prevents the engine from stalling in the event it stumbles
while running. Also used during engine crank.
Vacuum: Manifold pressure that is reduced below the ambient atmospheric pressure.
Variable Reluctance: A process of passing a varying magnetic field through wire windings and
inducing a voltage.
VCT: Variable Camshaft Timing.
VECI: Vehicle Emission Control Information label.
VIN: Vehicle Identification Number. A unique identification number given to every vehicle produced.
Includes information about the year, model, engine, and plant origin of the vehicle.
VMV: Vapor Management Valve. Controls the flow of fuel vapors out of the carbon canister.
VOM: Volt-Ohm Meter. Readings are indicated by sweep hand on a printed scale rather than a
digital (DVOM) display.
VPWR: Vehicle Power. A switched circuit that provides power to the EEC system. Compare
"Battery Voltage
VREF: Reference Voltage. A dedicated circuit that provides approximately a 5.0 volt signal used as
a reference by certain sensors.
WAC: Wide Open Throttle A/C Cut-off. Turns A/C system off during wide open throttle or certain
other operating conditions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4054
Wastegate Control: A device that opens the wastegate in case of overboost from a turbocharger.
WOT: Wide Open Throttle. A condition of maximum airflow through the throttle body.
Zip Tube: Another name for "fresh air duct" or "air inlet duct".
TRANSMISSIONS:
NOTE: The transmission naming convention is as follows:
^ The first character, a number, is the number of forward gears.
^ The second character, either the letter "F" or "R," represents front (transaxle) or rear
(transmission) wheel drive.
^ The next set of characters, a grouping of numbers, represents the design torque capacity of the
transmission/transaxle (for example, "27" represents 270ft./lbs. in the 4F27E transaxle).
^ The last character, if used, is one of the following:
^ "E" for electronic shift
^ "N" for non-synchronous shift
^
"S" for synchronous shift
^ "W" for wide ratio
^ 4F27E: Also known as the FN Focus automatic transmission.
^ 4F44E: Formerly known as the CD4E.
^ 4F46S: Formerly known as the Ax45 and regular-duty AXOD-E.
^ 4F50N: Formerly known as the Ax4N and heavy-duty AXOD-E.
^ 4R44E: Formerly known as A4LD for 3.0L applications.
^ 4R55E: Formerly known as A4LD for 4.0L applications.
^ 4R70W: Formerly known as AOD-E.
^ 4R100: Formerly known as E4OD.
^ 5R44E: Formerly known as A5LD for 3.0L applications.
^ 5R55E: Formerly known as A5LD for 4.0L applications.
^ 5R55N: Lincoln LS automatic transmission.
^ 5R55W: Wide-ratio truck transmission.
^ 4x4L: 4x4 Low.
^ A/T: Automatic Transmission.
^ CCS: Coast Clutch Solenoid.
^ CCSF: Coast Clutch Solenoid Fault. Displays a YES if fault exists.
^ EPC: Electronic Pressure Control.
^ EPCV: Electronic Pressure Control Volts.
^ ESS: Electronic Shift Scheduling.
^ HCDSS: High Clutch Drum Speed Sensor. PCM input from the 4R44E and 4R55E.
^ M5OD: Manual 5-Speed transmission with overdrive (RWD).
^ M/T: Manual Transmission/Transaxle.
^ NPS: Neutral Pressure Switch or its signal input to the PCM.
^ OCS: Overdrive Cancel Switch.
^ OSS: Output Shaft Speed. Indicates rotational speed of the transmission output shaft.
^ PNP: Park/Neutral Position switch. Also known as Neutral Drive Switch (NDS), Neutral Gear
Switch (NGS), and Transmission Switch Neutral (TSN).
^ REVERSE or REV: Transmission Reverse Switch Input.
^ SIL: Shift Indicator Lamp. A lamp that indicates the preferred shift points on select manual
transmission/transaxle vehicles.
^ S91/SS2/SS3: Shift solenoids. Devices that control the shifting in an automatic transmission.
^ TCC: Torque Converter Clutch. When energized, causes a mechanical engagement and
disengagement of the Torque Converter Clutch.
^ TCIL: Transmission Control Indicator Lamp. Indicates that the Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
has been activated.
^ TCS: Transmission Control Switch. Modifies the operation of electronically controlled
transmissions.
^ Torque converter: A device which by its design multiplies the torque in a fluid coupling between
an engine and transmission/transaxle.
^ TFT: Transmission Fluid Temperature. Indicates temperature of transmission fluid.
^ Transaxle: A device consisting of a transmission and axle drive gears assembled in the same
case. Front-wheel drive applications.
^ Transmission: A device which selectively increases or decreases the ratio of relative rotation
between its input and output shafts. Rear-wheel drive applications.
^ TR: Transmission Range. The range in which the transmission is operating.
^ TR Sensor: Formerly known as Manual Lever Position Sensor (MLPS). Provides information to
the PCM on the transmission range selector position.
^ TR V: Transmission Range Voltage.
^ TSS: Turbine Shaft Speed. Indicates rotational speed of the transmission turbine shaft.
^ VSS: Vehicle Speed Sensor. A magnetic pickup device that generates an AC signal that is
proportional to vehicle speed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4055
Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Federal Test
Procedure
Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Federal Test Procedure
The Catalyst Efficiency Monitor uses an oxygen sensor before and after the catalyst to infer the
hydrocarbon efficiency based on oxygen storage capacity of the catalyst. Under normal, close-loop
fuel conditions, high efficiency catalysts have significant oxygen storage. This makes the switching
frequency of the rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) very slow and reduces the amplitude of those
switches as compared to the switching frequency and amplitude of the front HO2S. As the catalyst
efficiency deteriorates, its ability to store oxygen declines. The post-catalyst or downstream HO2S
signal begins to switch more rapidly with increasing amplitude, approaching the switching
frequency and amplitude of the pre-catalyst or upstream HO2S.
All applications utilize an FTP-based (Federal Test Procedure) catalyst monitor. This simply means
that the catalyst monitor must run during a standard FTP emission test as opposed to the
20-second steady state catalyst monitor used in 1994 through some 1996 vehicles. Two slightly
different versions of the catalyst monitor are used in the 2001 model year.
Switch Ratio Method (1996 - 2001)
1. In order to assess catalyst oxygen storage, the monitor counts front and rear HO2S switches
during part-throttle, close-loop fuel condition after
the engine is warmed-up and inferred catalyst temperature is within limits. Front switches are
accumulated in up to nine different air mass regions or cells although three air mass regions is
typical. Rear switches are counted in a single cell for all air mass regions. When the required
number of front switches has accumulated in each cell, the total number of rear switches is divided
by the total number of front switches to compute a switch ratio. A switch ratio near 0.0 indicates
high oxygen storage capacity, hence high HC efficiency. A switch ratio near 1.0 indicates low
oxygen storage capacity, hence low HC efficiency. If the actual switch ratio exceeds a calibrated
threshold switch ratio, the catalyst is considered failed.
Inputs from Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) or Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) (warm
engine), IAT (not extreme ambient temperatures), Mass Air Flow (MAF) (greater than minimum
engine load), Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (within vehicle speed widow) and Throttle Position (TP)
(at part-throttle) are required to enable the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor.
2. The DTCs associated with this test are Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0420 (Bank 1) and
P0430 (Bank 2). Because an Exponentially
Weight Moving Average algorithm is use for malfunction determination, up to six driving cycles may
be required to illuminate the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) during normal customer driving. If
Keep Alive Memory (KAM) is reset, a malfunction will illuminate the MIL in 2 drive cycles.
Index Ratio Method (some 2001 and beyond)
1. In order to assess catalyst oxygen storage, the catalyst monitor counts front HO2S switches
during part-throttle, closed-loop fuel conditions
after the engine is warmed-up and inferred catalyst temperature is within limits. Front switches are
accumulated in up to three different air mass regions or cells. While catalyst monitoring entry
conditions are being met, the front and rear HO2S signal lengths are continually being calculated.
When the required number of front switches has accumulated in each cell, the total signal length of
the rear HO2S is divided by the total signal length of the front HO2S to compute a catalyst index
ratio. An index ratio near 0.0 indicates high oxygen storage capacity, hence high efficiency. A
switch ratio near 1.0 indicates low oxygen storage capacity, hence low HC efficiency. If the actual
index ratio exceeds the threshold index ratio, the catalyst is considered failed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4056
Inputs from ECT or CHT (warm engine), IAT (not extreme ambient temperatures), MAF (greater
than minimum engine load), VSS (within vehicle speed widow) and TP (at part-throttle) are required
to enable the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor.
2. The DTCs associated with this test are DTC P0420 (Bank 1) and P0430 (Bank 2). Because an
Exponentially Weighted Moving Average
algorithm is use for malfunction determination, up to six driving cycles may be required to illuminate
the MIL during normal customer driving. If KAM is reset, a malfunction will illuminate the MIL in 2
drive cycles.
If the catalyst monitor does not complete during a particular driving cycle, the already accumulated
switch/signal data is retained in Keep Alive Memory and is used during the next driving cycle to
allow the catalyst monitor a better opportunity to complete.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4057
Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Catalyst and Exhaust Systems
Catalyst and Exhaust System
Overview
The Catalytic Converter and Exhaust Systems (Figure 135) work together to control the release of
harmful engine exhaust emissions into the atmosphere. The engine exhaust gas consists mainly of
Nitrogen (N), Carbon Dioxide (CO2) and Water Vapor (H2O). However, it also contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO), Oxides Of Nitrogen (NOx), Hydrogen (H), and various unburned Hydrocarbons
(HCs). CO, NO(x), and HCs are major air pollutants, and their emission into the atmosphere must
be controlled.
The exhaust system generally consists of an exhaust manifold, front exhaust pipe, upstream
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S), rear exhaust pipe, downstream HO2S, a muffler and an exhaust
tailpipe. The catalytic converter is installed between the front and rear exhaust pipes. Catalytic
converter efficiency is monitored by the On Board Diagnostic (OBD II) system.
Generic Catalyst and Exhaust System
Catalytic Converter
A catalyst is a material that remains unchanged when it initiates and increases the speed of a
chemical reaction. A catalyst will also enable a chemical reaction to occur at a lower temperature.
The concentration of exhaust gas products released to the atmosphere must be controlled. The
catalytic converter assists in this task. It contains a catalyst in the form of a specially treated
honeycomb structure saturated with catalytically active precious metals. As the exhaust gases
come in contact with the catalyst, they are changed into mostly harmless products. The catalyst
initiates and speeds up heat producing chemical reactions of the exhaust gas components so they
are used up as much as possible.
Exhaust System
The purpose of the exhaust system is to convey engine emissions from the exhaust manifold to the
atmosphere. Engine exhaust emissions are directed from the engine exhaust manifold to the
catalytic converter through the front exhaust pipe. An HO2S is mounted on the front exhaust pipe
before the catalyst. The catalytic converter reduces the concentration of Carbon Monoxide (CO),
unburned Hydrocarbons (HCs) and Oxides of Nitrogen (NO) in the exhaust emissions to an
acceptable level. The reduced exhaust emissions are directed from the catalytic converter to a
muffler through the rear exhaust pipe. Another HO2S is mounted on the rear exhaust pipe. Lastly,
the exhaust emissions are directed to the atmosphere through an exhaust tailpipe.
HARDWARE
The downstream HO2S may be located after the light off catalyst or underbody catalyst. The
underbody catalyst may be in-line with the light off catalyst, or the underbody catalyst may be
common to two light off catalysts, forming a "Y" pipe configuration. For an exact configuration of the
catalyst and exhaust system, refer to Exhaust System.
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The Three Way Catalytic (TWC) converter contains either platinum (Pt) and Rhodium (Rh) or
Palladium (Pd) and Rhodium (Rh). The TWC converter catalyzes the oxidation reactions of
unburned HCs and CO and the reduction reaction of NO. The three-way conversion can be best
accomplished by always operating the engine air fuel/ratio at or close to stoichiometry.
Exhaust Manifold/Runners
The exhaust manifold runners collect exhaust gases from engine cylinders. The number of exhaust
manifolds and exhaust manifold runners depends on the engine configuration and number of
cylinders.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4058
Exhaust Pipes
Exhaust pipes are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to
increase the life of the product. The pipes serve as guides for the flow of exhaust gases from the
engine exhaust manifold through the catalytic converter and the muffler.
Upstream Heated and Downstream Heated Oxygen Sensors
The HO2S provide the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with voltage and frequency information
related to the oxygen content of the exhaust gas.
In addition to providing the PCM with indications of how rich/lean the engine is operating, the
upstream HO2S signal serves as an input to the HO2S monitor. The downstream HO2S signal is
an input to the Catalyst Efficiency monitor.
Muffler
Mufflers are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase
the life of the product. The muffler reduces the level of noise produced by the engine, and it also
reduces the noise produced by exhaust gases as they travel from the catalytic converter to the
atmosphere.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 4059
Catalytic Converter: Testing and Inspection
For information regarding diagnosis of this system refer to Computers and Control Systems
Diagnosis.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 4060
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair
Catalytic Converter-2.0L Zetec
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the bolts and the heat shield.
2. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (H02S) and the catalyst monitor sensor electrical
connectors.
3. Using the special tool, remove the H02S.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 4061
4. Disconnect the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) tube.
5. Remove and discard the nuts. 6. Raise and support the vehicle.
7. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor.
8. Remove the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 4062
9. Remove the spring bolts and the flag nuts.
^ Discard the nuts.
10. Remove the catalytic converter.
^ Discard the ring seal.
^ Discard the gasket.
11. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Install new flag nuts.
^ Install a new ring seal.
^ Install a new gasket.
^ Install new nuts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4067
Canister Purge Control Valve: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE
PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL
VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE
DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM
THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING,
POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT
IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4068
Canister Purge Control Valve: Description and Operation
EVAP Canister Purge Valve
EVAP Canister Purge Valve
EVAP Canister Purge Valve
The EVAP canister purge valve (Figure 95) and (Figure 96) is the part of the Enhanced EVAP
system that is controlled by the PCM. This valve controls the flow of vapors (purging) from the
EVAP canister to the intake manifold during various engine operating modes. The EVAP canister
purge valve is normally closed valve.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4069
Canister Purge Control Valve: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY
TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN
POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT
IN PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Disconnect the battery.
WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND
CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL
PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND
CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK
OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID
IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve.
^ Disconnect the electrical connector.
^ Disconnect the vacuum tube.
^ Disconnect the EVAP canister outlet tube.
^ Disconnect the EVAP return tube.
3. Remove the EVAP canister purge valve.
^ Remove the two nuts.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Carry out a leak test. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission
System Leak Test
^ Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle
NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford
specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service Precautions
Evaporative Canister Filter: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE
PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL
VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE
DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM
THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING,
POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT
IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4073
Evaporative Canister Filter: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY
TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN
POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT
IN PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Disconnect the battery.
WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND
CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL
PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND
CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK
OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID
IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Disconnect the EVAP canister outlet tube.
4. Disconnect the canister vent solenoid electrical connector and the remote canister vent hose.
5. Remove the EVAP canister bracket assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4074
6. Remove the remote canister vent hose.
7. Remove the dust separator.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Carry out a leak test. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission
System Leak Test
^ Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle
NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford
specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Service Precautions
Evaporative Check Valve: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE
PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL
VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE
DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM
THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING,
POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT
IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4078
Evaporative Check Valve: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY
TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN
POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT
IN PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Disconnect the battery.
WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND
CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL
PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND
CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK
OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID
IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Disconnect the EVAP canister outlet tube.
4. Disconnect the canister vent solenoid electrical connector and the remote canister vent hose.
5. Remove the EVAP canister bracket assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4079
6. Remove the evaporative emission check valve.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Carry out a leak test. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission
System Leak Test
^ Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle
NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford
specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Service Precautions
Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE
PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL
VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE
DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM
THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING,
POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT
IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4083
Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY
TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN
POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT
IN PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Disconnect the battery.
WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND
CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL
PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND
CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK
OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID
IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Disconnect the EVAP canister outlet tube.
4. Disconnect the canister vent solenoid electrical connector and the remote canister vent hose.
5. Remove the EVAP canister bracket assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4084
6. Remove the remote canister vent hose, dust separator and canister vent solenoid.
7. Remove the EVAP canister outlet tube.
8. Remove the EVAP canister.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Carry out a leak test. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission
System Leak Test
^ Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle
NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford
specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service Precautions
Evaporative Emissions Hose: Service Precautions
WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND
CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL
PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND
CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK
OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR LIQUID FUEL
IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4088
Evaporative Emissions Hose: Service and Repair
DISCONNECT
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND
CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL
PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND
CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK
OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR LIQUID FUEL
IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Disconnect the vapor tube from the fitting.
1 Squeeze the fitting.
2 Disconnect the vapor tube from the fitting.
CONNECT
1. Clean and inspect the fitting and the tube for damage. 2. Remove any dirt or obstructions.
3. Push the tube into the fitting until it snaps in place.
4. Pull on the connection to make sure the fitting is secure. 5. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Solenoid, Evaporative System > Component Information > Description and Operation
Leak Detection Solenoid: Description and Operation
Canister Vent Solenoid
Typical Canister Vent (CV) Solenoid
During the Enhanced EVAP System test monitor, the Canister Vent (CV) solenoid (Figure 99) seals
the EVAP canister from atmospheric pressure. This allows the EVAP canister purge valve to obtain
the target vacuum in the fuel tank during the monitor run.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4095
Leak Detection Valve: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE
PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL
VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE
DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM
THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING,
POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT
IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4096
Leak Detection Valve: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY
TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN
POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT
IN PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Disconnect the battery.
WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND
CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL
PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND
CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK
OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID
IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Disconnect the EVAP canister outlet tube.
4. Disconnect the canister vent solenoid electrical connector and the remote canister vent hose.
5. Remove the EVAP canister bracket assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4097
6. Remove the remote canister vent hose and the dust separator.
7. Remove the canister vent solenoid.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Carry out a leak test. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission
System Leak Test
^ Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle
NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford
specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR
Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation
EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid: Description and Operation
EGR VACUUM REGULATOR SOLENOID
EGR Vacuum Regulator Solenoid
Test Graph
EGR Vacuum Regulator Solenoid Data Chart
The EGR vacuum regulator solenoid (Figure 88) is an electromagnetic device which is used to
regulate the vacuum supply to the EGR valve. The solenoid contains a coil which magnetically
controls the position of a disc to regulate the vacuum. As the duty cycle to the coil increases, the
vacuum signal passed through the solenoid to the EGR valve also increases. Vacuum not directed
to the EGR valve is vented through the solenoid vent to atmosphere. Note that at 0% duty cycle (no
electrical signal applied), the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid allows some vacuum to pass, but not
enough to open the EGR valve.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR
Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4102
EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Disconnect the EGR vacuum regulator valve.
^ Disconnect the electrical connector.
^ Disconnect the vacuum hoses.
3. Remove the nuts and remove the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube
> Component Information > Service Precautions
EGR Tube: Service Precautions
CAUTION:
^ When the EGR tube is disconnected from the EGR valve a new EGR tube must be installed. The
aluminum threads on the EGR valve must be inspected, and a new EGR valve installed if the
threads are damaged.
^ The EGR tube must be discarded after removal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube
> Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4106
EGR Tube: Description and Operation
ORIFICE TUBE ASSEMBLY
Orifice Tube Assembly
The orifice tube assembly (Figure 90) is a section of tubing connecting the exhaust system to the
intake manifold. The assembly provides the flow path for the EGR to the intake manifold and also
contains the metering orifice and two pressure pick-up tubes. The internal metering orifice creates
a measurable pressure drop across it as the EGR valve opens and closes. This pressure
differential across the orifice is picked up by the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor which
provides feedback to the PCM.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube
> Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4107
EGR Tube: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the splash shield.
3. Disconnect the EGR tube fitting. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe.
6. Disconnect the EGR tube from the EGR valve.
CAUTION: When the EGR tube is disconnected from the EGR valve a new EGR tube must be
installed. The aluminum threads on the EGR valve must be inspected, and a new EGR valve
installed if the threads are damaged.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube
> Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4108
7. Remove the EGR tube bracket bolts.
8. Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor from the EGR tube. 9. Remove
and discard the EGR tube.
CAUTION: The EGR tube must be discarded after removal.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Service Precautions
EGR Valve: Service Precautions
CAUTION: When the EGR tube is disconnected from the EGR valve a new EGR tube must be
installed. The aluminum threads on the EGR valve must be inspected and a new EGR valve
installed if the threads are damaged.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR
EGR Valve: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback EGR
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION VALVE
EGR Valve
Test Graph
The EGR valve (Figure 89) in the Differential Pressure Feedback EGR system is a conventional,
vacuum-actuated EGR valve. The valve increases or decreases the flow of exhaust gas
recirculation. As vacuum applied to the EGR valve diaphragm overcomes the spring force, the
valve begins to open. As the vacuum signal weakens, at 5.4 kPa (1.6 in-Hg) or less, the spring
force closes the valve. The EGR valve is fully open at about 15 kPa (4.5 in-Hg).
Since EGR flow requirement varies greatly, providing service specifications on flow rate is
impractical. The on-board diagnostic system monitors the EGR valve function and triggers a
Diagnostic Trouble Code if the test criteria is not met. The EGR valve flow rate is not measured
directly as part of the field diagnostic procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR > Page 4114
EGR Valve: Description and Operation Electric Motor EGR System (EEGR)
ELECTRIC EGR VALVE
Electric EGR Motor/Valve Assembly
Electric EGR
The electric EGR valve (Figure 92) and (Figure 93) is a water cooled motor/valve assembly. The
motor is commanded to move in 52 discrete steps as it acts directly on the the EGR valve. The
position of the valve determines the rate of EGR. The built in spring works to close the valve
(against the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR > Page 4115
motor opening force).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4116
EGR Valve: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove and discard the exhaust manifold to EGR valve tube. 2. Remove the air cleaner outlet
pipe.
3. Remove the EGR valve.
1 Disconnect the vacuum line.
2 Remove the bolts.
CAUTION: When the EGR tube is disconnected from the EGR valve a new EGR tube must be
installed. The aluminum threads on the EGR valve must be inspected and a new EGR valve
installed if the threads are damaged.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Carefully clean all sealing surfaces and install a new EGR valve gasket.
NOTE: The EGR valve sealing surfaces are soft metals.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Exhaust
Pressure Regulator Vacuum Valve, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04
> Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect
Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831
Attachment I - Administrative Information
Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6
Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure
Sensor Warranty Coverage
OASIS
You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program.
Note:
Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected
vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended
warranty time/mileage period.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is
claimed on.
CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03
Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a
warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for
vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for
this repair under the 02M01 program.
Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage
Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01.
Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles)
Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines.
Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP)
Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside
the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair.
OWNER REFUNDS
Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the
month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair
was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not
have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for
the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460).
All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual.
Refer to ACESII manual for refund information.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04
> Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4128
LABOR ALLOWANCES
[NEW] NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Special Notes:
^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03.
^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program.
^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor
time has been adjusted accordingly.
^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not
cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs.
^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order
processing.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION
NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04
> Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4129
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book.
PARTS RETENTION
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures."
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is
encountered, call the Special Service Support Center.
1. Retrieve continuous DTCs.
NOTE:
Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are
present:
^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED
^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED
Any other DTC present is not covered by this program.
2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as
follows:
a) Key off.
b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube.
c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector.
Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is
required.
3. Clear continuous DTCs.
4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04
> Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4130
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04
> Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4131
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04
> Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4132
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect
Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831
Attachment I - Administrative Information
Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6
Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure
Sensor Warranty Coverage
OASIS
You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program.
Note:
Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected
vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended
warranty time/mileage period.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is
claimed on.
CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03
Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a
warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for
vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for
this repair under the 02M01 program.
Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage
Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01.
Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles)
Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines.
Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP)
Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside
the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair.
OWNER REFUNDS
Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the
month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair
was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not
have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for
the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460).
All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual.
Refer to ACESII manual for refund information.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect >
Page 4138
LABOR ALLOWANCES
[NEW] NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Special Notes:
^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03.
^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program.
^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor
time has been adjusted accordingly.
^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not
cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs.
^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order
processing.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION
NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect >
Page 4139
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book.
PARTS RETENTION
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures."
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is
encountered, call the Special Service Support Center.
1. Retrieve continuous DTCs.
NOTE:
Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are
present:
^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED
^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED
Any other DTC present is not covered by this program.
2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as
follows:
a) Key off.
b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube.
c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector.
Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is
required.
3. Clear continuous DTCs.
4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect >
Page 4140
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect >
Page 4141
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect >
Page 4142
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL
ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set
Article No. 04-11-1
06/08/2004
DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON
AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS
ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY
FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001
EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC,
EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER
LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR
MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003
MOUNTAINEER
This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications.
ISSUE
Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following
symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently
functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1).
ACTION
For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic
procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED
Manual for the issue described above.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page
4147
NOTE
ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA
NOTE
THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT
THE FOLLOWING:
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002
^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002
^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s).
2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor.
3. Clear continuous DTC(s).
4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page
4148
Labor Operations
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
And Emissions Warranty Coverage.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9J460 42
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page
4149
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL
ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set
Article No. 04-11-1
06/08/2004
DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON
AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS
ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY
FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001
EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC,
EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER
LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR
MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003
MOUNTAINEER
This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications.
ISSUE
Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following
symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently
functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1).
ACTION
For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic
procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED
Manual for the issue described above.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page
4155
NOTE
ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA
NOTE
THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT
THE FOLLOWING:
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002
^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002
^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s).
2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor.
3. Clear continuous DTC(s).
4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page
4156
Labor Operations
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
And Emissions Warranty Coverage.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9J460 42
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page
4157
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4158
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4159
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 86) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure
transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice
tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses
referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI
SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the aluminum differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter
hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the
pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4160
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 87) is identical in operation
as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose
connections are marked on the underside of the sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4161
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR
tube.
NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Oil
Separator > Component Information > Service and Repair
Oil Separator: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the three way catalytic convertor.
2. Remove the crankcase vent oil separator.
1 Disconnect the Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve.
2 Remove the bolts and remove the separator.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Carefully clean all sealing surfaces and install a new crankcase vent oil separator gasket.
NOTE: The oil separator sealing surfaces are soft metal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > PCV
Valve Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
PCV Valve Hose: Service and Repair
CRANKCASE VENTILATION HOSE AND TUBE
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the crankcase ventilation tube from the Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve.
2. Disconnect the hose from the tube.
3. Unclip the crankshaft position sensor wiring harness.
4. Remove the bolt from the tube bracket and remove the tube.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation >
Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair
Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve.
^ Remove the crankcase ventilation hose from the PCV valve.
^ Remove the PCV valve from the grommet.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Emission Control
Systems > Air Injection Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation
Air Injection Pump Relay: Description and Operation
SOLID STATE RELAY
Solid State Relay
The solid state relay (Figure 124) switches the high current required for operation of the electric
AIR pump. Input control to the solid state relay comes from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect
Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831
Attachment I - Administrative Information
Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6
Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure
Sensor Warranty Coverage
OASIS
You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program.
Note:
Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected
vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended
warranty time/mileage period.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is
claimed on.
CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03
Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a
warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for
vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for
this repair under the 02M01 program.
Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage
Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01.
Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles)
Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines.
Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP)
Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside
the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair.
OWNER REFUNDS
Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the
month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair
was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not
have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for
the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460).
All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual.
Refer to ACESII manual for refund information.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4185
LABOR ALLOWANCES
[NEW] NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Special Notes:
^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03.
^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program.
^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor
time has been adjusted accordingly.
^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not
cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs.
^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order
processing.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION
NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4186
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book.
PARTS RETENTION
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures."
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is
encountered, call the Special Service Support Center.
1. Retrieve continuous DTCs.
NOTE:
Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are
present:
^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED
^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED
Any other DTC present is not covered by this program.
2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as
follows:
a) Key off.
b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube.
c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector.
Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is
required.
3. Clear continuous DTCs.
4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4187
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4188
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4189
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR
Pressure Sensor Defect
Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831
Attachment I - Administrative Information
Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6
Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure
Sensor Warranty Coverage
OASIS
You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program.
Note:
Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected
vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended
warranty time/mileage period.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is
claimed on.
CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03
Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a
warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for
vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for
this repair under the 02M01 program.
Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage
Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01.
Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles)
Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines.
Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP)
Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside
the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair.
OWNER REFUNDS
Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the
month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair
was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not
have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for
the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460).
All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual.
Refer to ACESII manual for refund information.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR
Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4195
LABOR ALLOWANCES
[NEW] NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Special Notes:
^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03.
^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program.
^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor
time has been adjusted accordingly.
^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not
cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs.
^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order
processing.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION
NOTE:
If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty
coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service
Support Center.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR
Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4196
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book.
PARTS RETENTION
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures."
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is
encountered, call the Special Service Support Center.
1. Retrieve continuous DTCs.
NOTE:
Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are
present:
^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED
^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED
^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED
Any other DTC present is not covered by this program.
2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as
follows:
a) Key off.
b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube.
c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector.
Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is
required.
3. Clear continuous DTCs.
4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR
Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4197
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR
Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4198
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR
Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4199
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability
Issues/DTC's Set
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL
ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set
Article No. 04-11-1
06/08/2004
DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON
AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS
ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY
FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001
EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC,
EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER
LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR
MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003
MOUNTAINEER
This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications.
ISSUE
Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following
symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently
functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1).
ACTION
For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic
procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED
Manual for the issue described above.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability
Issues/DTC's Set > Page 4204
NOTE
ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA
NOTE
THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT
THE FOLLOWING:
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002
^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002
^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s).
2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor.
3. Clear continuous DTC(s).
4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability
Issues/DTC's Set > Page 4205
Labor Operations
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
And Emissions Warranty Coverage.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9J460 42
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability
Issues/DTC's Set > Page 4206
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed
Upshifts/DTC's Stored
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL
ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set
Article No. 04-11-1
06/08/2004
DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON
AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS
ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY
FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001
EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC,
EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER
LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR
MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003
MOUNTAINEER
This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications.
ISSUE
Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following
symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently
functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1).
ACTION
For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic
procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED
Manual for the issue described above.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed
Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 4212
NOTE
ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA
NOTE
THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT
THE FOLLOWING:
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002
^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002
^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002
^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s).
2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor.
3. Clear continuous DTC(s).
4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed
Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 4213
Labor Operations
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
And Emissions Warranty Coverage.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9J460 42
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed
Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 4214
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Page 4215
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Page 4216
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 86) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure
transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice
tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses
referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI
SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the aluminum differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter
hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the
pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Page 4217
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 87) is identical in operation
as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose
connections are marked on the underside of the sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Page 4218
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR
tube.
NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test
Port > Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation
PRESSURE TEST POINT
There is a pressure test point with a schrader fitting in the fuel rail that relieves fuel pressure and
measures the fuel injector supply pressure for service and diagnostic procedures. Before servicing
or testing the fuel system, read any CAUTION, WARNING, and HANDLING information. ON
VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH A SCHRADER VALVE, USE ROTUNDA FUEL PRESSURE
TEST KIT #134-ROO87 OR EQUIVALENT.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated
Fuel Pressure Release: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve
Eliminated
Article No. 02-21-2
10/28/02
FUEL - FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE DISCONTINUED - 2.0L ENGINE
FORD: 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002 ESCORT ZX2, ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1999-2002 COUGAR
ISSUE
Vehicles equipped with the 2.0L 4V Zetec and the 2.0L SPI no longer have the Fuel Pressure
Relief Valve (Schrader Valve).
ACTION
To relieve or manually check fuel pressures, refer to the following Service Procedures for details.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Service Procedure For Relieving Fuel Pressure
1. Remove the fuel pump relay in the engine compartment fuse box.
2. Start the engine and allow idling until the engine stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately five seconds to ensure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. When fuel system service is complete, Install Fuel Pump Relay.
5. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting
engine.
NOTE
IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM.
6. Start vehicle and check for leaks.
NOTE
IT IS POSSIBLE THAT A DTC MAY BE SET DUE TO THE PUMP RELAY BEING PULLED AND
THE ENGINE STARTED AND RUN OUT OF FUEL. IF DTC'S ARE SET, CLEAR ALL DTC'S
BEFORE RETURNING VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER.
Service Procedure For Manually Checking Fuel Pressure With A Gauge.
1. Remove the fuel pump relay in the engine compartment fuse box.
2. Start the engine and allow idling until the engine stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately five seconds to make sure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. Disconnect fuel line at the fuel rail to chassis line pierce point.
a. If the vehicle is equipped with Quick Release Coupling Push Connector at the fuel rail to fuel line
pierce point, separate the coupling by depressing the tabs and pulling on the fuel line.
b. If the vehicle is equipped with a Spring Lock Coupling Connector using special tool 310-D00S or
equivalent
5. Install the Schrader Valve service tool adaptor listed in the chart in this article.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated > Page 4228
6. Install fuel pressure gauge special service tool 310-012 or equivalent.
7. Install fuel pump relay.
8. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for oaks before starting
engine.
NOTE
IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM.
9. Start and run engine to surge air from fuel system (air trapped in the fuel system may effect test
results).
10. Perform normal diagnosti35 ann service repairs as needed.
11. After fuel system service is complete, relieve fuel system pressure using fuel pressure gauge
relief valve.
12. Remove special service tools
13. Re-connect fuel system lines
14. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting
engine.
NOTE
IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM.
15. Start vehicle and check for leaks.
NOTE
IT IS POSSIBLE THAT A DTC MAY BE SET DUE TO THE PUMP RELAY BEING PULLED AND
THE ENGINE STARTED AND RUN OUT OF FUEL. IF DTC'S ARE SET, CLEAR ALL DTC'S
BEFORE RETURNING VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER.
Service Tools Required Chart
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 404000, 490000, 497000, 499000, 603300, 607000, 698298
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4229
Fuel Pressure Release: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE
WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER
ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE
FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4230
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
1. Remove the LH engine compartment relay panel cover.
WARNING: ^
DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER
ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE
FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system.
2. Remove the fuel pump relay. 3. Start the engine. 4. After the engine stalls, crank the engine over
two more times to be sure all the pressure has been released. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the
OFF position. Install the fuel pump relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4231
Fuel Pressure Gauge
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information >
Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 800 - 900 RPM
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4238
Accelerator Pedal: Service Precautions
WARNING: MAKE SURE SURROUNDING COMPONENTS SUCH AS WIRING, HOSES, SOUND
INSULATION AND FLOOR CARPETING ARE NOT CONTACTING THE SLIDING INNER CABLE
OF THE ACCELERATOR CABLE OR THE ACCELERATOR PEDAL AND SHAFT. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
CAUTION: Do not pull the accelerator cable out by the cable housing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4239
Accelerator Pedal: Description and Operation
The acceleration control consists of the pedal and shaft assembly, accelerator cable and
accelerator cable bracket.
WARNING: MAKE SURE SURROUNDING COMPONENTS SUCH AS WIRING, HOSES, SOUND
INSULATION AND FLOOR CARPETING ARE NOT CONTACTING THE SLIDING INNER CABLE
OF THE ACCELERATOR CABLE OR THE ACCELERATOR PEDAL AND SHAFT. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
The throttle is controlled by an accelerator cable attached to the accelerator pedal and shaft. The
accelerator pedal and shaft should travel smoothly from the idle to the wide-open throttle positions.
Hesitation on return or prevention of return to the idle position must not occur.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Accelerator Pedal: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Verify the condition by operating the accelerator pedal and shaft from idle to wide open-throttle and
back again. Check for any resistance in forward travel of the accelerator pedal and shaft or
hesitation on return.
If a concern exists, visually inspect all components of the accelerator pedal and shaft. Look for
damage or binding of the accelerator cable. Look for obstructions at the throttle body and
accelerator pedal and shaft.
For vehicles equipped with speed control, examine the speed control cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4242
Accelerator Pedal: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Symptom Chart, Part 1
Symptom Chart, Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4243
Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the accelerator cable from the throttle lever and bracket.
2. Remove the accelerator pedal and shaft assembly.
1 Disconnect the accelerator cable.
2 Remove the bolts.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: To ease installation, remove the grommet from the throttle lever and install it onto the
accelerator cable end.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner
Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Remove the battery tray.
3. Remove the bolt and the intake pipe.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Make sure the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel correctly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow
Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow
Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations > Page 4251
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow
Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations > Page 4252
Mass Air Flow Sensor: Description and Operation
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air
entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at
200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 36). If the
hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced.
Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow.
The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air
mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio (Figure 37). This input is also used in determining transmission Electronic Pressure
Control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Some MAF sensors have Integrated Bypass Technology (IBT) with an integrated Intake Air
Temperature (IAT) sensor. The present applications with IBT are: Focus, Escort (4V), 2.0L Cougar,
Escape, Taurus/Sable, Windstar, Explorer/Mountaineer and E-Series.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow
Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations > Page 4253
Mass Air Flow Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Cap: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL
ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON
Fuel Filler Cap: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON
Article No. 03-20-3
10/13/03
DRIVEABILITY - MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
(MIL) ILLUMINATED WITH DTC'S P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457, P1442 OR CHECK FUEL CAP
LAMP ILLUMINATED WITH DTC P0457
FORD: 1997-2000 CONTOUR 1997-2002 ESCORT 1997-2003 CROWN VICTORIA, MUSTANG,
TAURUS 1998-2003 ESCORT ZX2 2000-2003 FOCUS 2002-2003 THUNDERBIRD 1997 F-250
HD 1997-1999 F-250 LD 1997-2003 E SERIES, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER,
WINDSTAR 1999-2003 F SUPER DUTY 2000-2003 EXCURSION 2001-2003 ESCAPE,
EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 MARK VIII 1997-2002 CONTINENTAL 1997-2003 TOWN CAR 2000-2003
LS 1998-2003 NAVIGATOR 2002-2003 BLACKWOOD
MERCURY: 1997-1999 TRACER 1997-2000 MYSTIQUE 1997-2003 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE
1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2003 MOUNTAINEER
This article supersedes TSB 03-9-8 to update the vehicle lines and Service Procedures.
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illuminated with Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs) P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457 or P1442 or a "Check Fuel Cap" Lamp
illuminated with DTC P0457 for the Evaporative Emission System. This may be caused by loose or
leaking hoses, loose or broken fuel cap, a leak at the top of the fuel filler pipe neck, etc.
ACTION Use the Rotunda Leak Detector Smoke Machine (Part 218-00001) or equivalent, to locate
and repair leaks in the Evaporative Emission System. Refer to the following Service Procedure for
details.
Definitions of Acronyms
^ CVS Canister Vent Solenoid
^ DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code
^ EVAP Evaporative Emissions System
^ EVMV Electronic Vapor Management Valve
^ FTP Fuel Tank Pressure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Cap: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL
ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4262
^ MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp
^ NGS New Generation STAR Tester
^ PID Parameter Identifier WDS Worldwide Diagnostic System
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE SUPERSEDES ALL OTHER PROCEDURES PUBLISHED IN SERVICE
MANUALS AND TSB ARTICLES.
NOTE
MANY EVAP LEAKS ARE CAUSED BY A LOOSE OR FAULTY CAP. IF THE FUEL CAP IS
SUSPECT DURING VISUAL INSPECTION, DO NOT DISTURB THE FUEL CAP UNTIL THE
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE IS COMPLETE. IF THE LEAK VERIFICATION FAILS, THE CAP
CAN BE REPOSITIONED OR REPLACED AND THE TEST REPEATED. THIS ACTION WILL
ISOLATE THE CAP FROM THE REST OF THE EVAP SYSTEM AS A POTENTIAL CONCERN. IF
DEBRIS ON THE SEALING SURFACE OF THE CAP APPEARS TO BE THE SOURCE OF THE
LEAK, CLEAN THE CAP AND REINSTALL.
OVERVIEW OF TEST PROCEDURES
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Cap: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL
ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4263
NOTE
SEE (FIGURE 1) AT END OF ARTICLE FOR TEST PROCEDURE FLOWCHART.
This TSB provides the following procedures:
^ Check the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (9C915) for a no flow condition
^ Locate a leak so that a repair can be performed
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Cap: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL
ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4264
^ Verify repair by utilizing a metered air pressure test
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE NO FLOW TEST
1. Using WDS Datalogger select the following PID's: EVAPVM # (or EVMV#), EVAPCV # and FTP.
2. Start the vehicle.
3. Close both the Canister Vent Solenoid (CVS) (EVAPCV # On or 100% duty cycle) and the EVAP
Canister Purge Valve (EVAPVM# Off or zero % duty cycle).
4. While monitoring the FTP PID, command open the EVAP Canister Purge Valve with the
EVAPVM# PID to 100% duty
5. If the FTP decreases and/or the RPM changes and/or the engine stalls, the test passed. Turn off
engine and proceed to test procedures below. Otherwise replace the EVAP Canister Purge Valve,
verify the repair by repeating the No Flow Test and return vehicle.
SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE)
1. Disconnect the larger of two manifold vacuum lines at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve and cap it
at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (see Figure 2).
2. Connect the Smoke Machine power cables to vehicle battery The "Power Indicator Lamp" should
be on indicating a good battery contact.
3. Position the selector valve on Rotunda's Smoke Machine Control Panel to "SMOKE".
4. Locate the vehicle's Evaporative Emission Service Test Port and remove the green cap. The
EVAP Service Test Port is located close to or on the EVAP Canister Purge Valve.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Cap: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL
ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4265
WARNING
DO NOT REMOVE THE SCHRADER VALVE. REMOVING THE SCHRADER VALVE FROM THE
TEST PORT ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH THE ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT
VALVE (9G641) AND/OR ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT VALVE & BRACKET
ASSEMBLY (9G683) (SEE FIGURE 3), OR EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE (9C915) AND/OR
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE & BRACKET ASSEMBLY (9F933) (SEE FIGURE 2) WILL
PERMANENTLY DAMAGE THE VALVE.
5. Install the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter that is provided with the Rotunda's Smoke Machine
to EVAP Canister Purge Valve test port.
NOTE
SPECIAL PROCEDURES HAVE BEEN DESIGNATED FOR WINDSTAR, LS, THUNDERBIRD &
PZEV FOCUS BECAUSE THEY HAVE A CHECK VALVE THAT WILL PREVENT SMOKE FROM
ENTERING THE FILLER NECK.
6. Connect black smoke hose nozzle tip to the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter. For all except
Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus Use NGS or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN
AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS OPERATION).
7. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - Remove the fuel cap from the vehicle.
Depress remote starter button: Smoke will be introduced into the EVAP Emission System. Secure
the fuel cap once smoke is seen exiting from the fuel tank's neck area. For Windstar, LS,
Thunderbird & PZEV Focus, do not remove fuel cap. Depress starter button and introduce smoke to
system until it can be seen exiting the CVS (located by filler neck). Once smoke is seen, use NGS
or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS
OPERATION).
8. Press and release the remote starter button in intervals of approximately 15 seconds on and 15
seconds off. Use the halogen light provided with the Smoke Machine to look for smoke in the
engine compartment, EVAP hoses to EVAP Canister Purge Valve, CVS, carbon canister and area
around the fuel cap. Wiggle fuel vapor lines to check for leaks. Check for leaks in areas that are
difficult to access, such as connections on top of the tank where connections may be or inside
frame rails. Use the black light to ensure that there are no leaks. If a leak is detected, repair as
necessary. If the leak is not detected from the top, check under the bottom of vehicle. Inspect the
EVAP hoses running to the carbon canister, fuel filler neck, CVS, and EVAP Canister Purge Valve.
Go to LEAK VERIFICATION to verify any repair or if no leak is found.
LEAK VERIFICATION (METERED AIR SYSTEM)
1. Position the selector valve located on the Smoke Machine control panel to "METER".
2. Verify calibration of the flow meter by using the .020" calibrated leak orifice. To do this, insert air
supply hose (transparent hose) nozzle tip into appropriate EVAP System calibrated leak orifice
located on the front of the Smoke Machine panel.
3. TURN ON: Depress the remote starter button. Observe the position of the flow meter indicator
ball. Position the flow meter red pointer flag so it aligns with the measurement of the indicator ball.
Release the button and remove the air supply hose nozzle tip from the EVAP System calibrated
leak orifice.
NOTE
THIS FLOW METER CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT INDICATES THE VEHICLE PASS OR FAIL
CRITERIA BASED ON THE .020" EVAP SYSTEM LEAK STANDARD.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Cap: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL
ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4266
4. Connect the transparent air supply hose nozzle tip into the EVAP Service Test Port adapter.
5. Use NGS or WDS Diagnostic tool to CLOSE the CVS.
6. Depress the remote starter button on the Rotunda's Smoke Leak Detector. The indicator ball in
the flowmeter will go all the way to the top indicating the system is being pressurized. Continue to
depress the remote starter button until the ball stops descending. Once the indicator ball has
stopped descending, observe if it is above or below the red indicator flag. If performing this
verification following a repair, go to Step 7. If performing this verification after performing the
SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE), go to Step 8.
7. Leak Verification After Repair
a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed. The test procedure is
complete. Remove the Smoke Machine Test equipment from the vehicle and reconnect the large
EVAP Canister Purge Valve manifold vacuum hose and the test port's green cap.
b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST
PROCEDURE).
8. Leak Verification After Passing SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE)
a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed, go to Step 9.
b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST
PROCEDURE).
9. Using WDS Datalogger or NGS select the FTPV PID.
10. Remove Fuel Cap and turn the vehicle's ignition switch to the run position and check the FTPV
PID.
11. The nominal value for the FTPV PID is 2.6V. If the value is greater than 2.8V or less than 2.4V,
the FTP sensor is out of range and should be replaced. Verify the repair by checking to see if the
new sensor is in range. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - if the sensor is
within range, the concern is no longer present. (Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus go to
Step 12.)
12. For Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus only verify that filler neck clamps are in good
working order and tightened. Repair as necessary. If no problem is found with clamps, replace the
fuel cap.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-9-8 WARRANTY STATUS:
INFORMATION ONLY
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Cap: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 >
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON
Fuel Filler Cap: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap
Lamp ON
Article No. 03-20-3
10/13/03
DRIVEABILITY - MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
(MIL) ILLUMINATED WITH DTC'S P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457, P1442 OR CHECK FUEL CAP
LAMP ILLUMINATED WITH DTC P0457
FORD: 1997-2000 CONTOUR 1997-2002 ESCORT 1997-2003 CROWN VICTORIA, MUSTANG,
TAURUS 1998-2003 ESCORT ZX2 2000-2003 FOCUS 2002-2003 THUNDERBIRD 1997 F-250
HD 1997-1999 F-250 LD 1997-2003 E SERIES, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER,
WINDSTAR 1999-2003 F SUPER DUTY 2000-2003 EXCURSION 2001-2003 ESCAPE,
EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 MARK VIII 1997-2002 CONTINENTAL 1997-2003 TOWN CAR 2000-2003
LS 1998-2003 NAVIGATOR 2002-2003 BLACKWOOD
MERCURY: 1997-1999 TRACER 1997-2000 MYSTIQUE 1997-2003 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE
1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2003 MOUNTAINEER
This article supersedes TSB 03-9-8 to update the vehicle lines and Service Procedures.
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illuminated with Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs) P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457 or P1442 or a "Check Fuel Cap" Lamp
illuminated with DTC P0457 for the Evaporative Emission System. This may be caused by loose or
leaking hoses, loose or broken fuel cap, a leak at the top of the fuel filler pipe neck, etc.
ACTION Use the Rotunda Leak Detector Smoke Machine (Part 218-00001) or equivalent, to locate
and repair leaks in the Evaporative Emission System. Refer to the following Service Procedure for
details.
Definitions of Acronyms
^ CVS Canister Vent Solenoid
^ DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code
^ EVAP Evaporative Emissions System
^ EVMV Electronic Vapor Management Valve
^ FTP Fuel Tank Pressure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Cap: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 >
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4272
^ MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp
^ NGS New Generation STAR Tester
^ PID Parameter Identifier WDS Worldwide Diagnostic System
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE SUPERSEDES ALL OTHER PROCEDURES PUBLISHED IN SERVICE
MANUALS AND TSB ARTICLES.
NOTE
MANY EVAP LEAKS ARE CAUSED BY A LOOSE OR FAULTY CAP. IF THE FUEL CAP IS
SUSPECT DURING VISUAL INSPECTION, DO NOT DISTURB THE FUEL CAP UNTIL THE
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE IS COMPLETE. IF THE LEAK VERIFICATION FAILS, THE CAP
CAN BE REPOSITIONED OR REPLACED AND THE TEST REPEATED. THIS ACTION WILL
ISOLATE THE CAP FROM THE REST OF THE EVAP SYSTEM AS A POTENTIAL CONCERN. IF
DEBRIS ON THE SEALING SURFACE OF THE CAP APPEARS TO BE THE SOURCE OF THE
LEAK, CLEAN THE CAP AND REINSTALL.
OVERVIEW OF TEST PROCEDURES
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Cap: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 >
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4273
NOTE
SEE (FIGURE 1) AT END OF ARTICLE FOR TEST PROCEDURE FLOWCHART.
This TSB provides the following procedures:
^ Check the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (9C915) for a no flow condition
^ Locate a leak so that a repair can be performed
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Cap: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 >
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4274
^ Verify repair by utilizing a metered air pressure test
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE NO FLOW TEST
1. Using WDS Datalogger select the following PID's: EVAPVM # (or EVMV#), EVAPCV # and FTP.
2. Start the vehicle.
3. Close both the Canister Vent Solenoid (CVS) (EVAPCV # On or 100% duty cycle) and the EVAP
Canister Purge Valve (EVAPVM# Off or zero % duty cycle).
4. While monitoring the FTP PID, command open the EVAP Canister Purge Valve with the
EVAPVM# PID to 100% duty
5. If the FTP decreases and/or the RPM changes and/or the engine stalls, the test passed. Turn off
engine and proceed to test procedures below. Otherwise replace the EVAP Canister Purge Valve,
verify the repair by repeating the No Flow Test and return vehicle.
SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE)
1. Disconnect the larger of two manifold vacuum lines at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve and cap it
at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (see Figure 2).
2. Connect the Smoke Machine power cables to vehicle battery The "Power Indicator Lamp" should
be on indicating a good battery contact.
3. Position the selector valve on Rotunda's Smoke Machine Control Panel to "SMOKE".
4. Locate the vehicle's Evaporative Emission Service Test Port and remove the green cap. The
EVAP Service Test Port is located close to or on the EVAP Canister Purge Valve.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Cap: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 >
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4275
WARNING
DO NOT REMOVE THE SCHRADER VALVE. REMOVING THE SCHRADER VALVE FROM THE
TEST PORT ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH THE ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT
VALVE (9G641) AND/OR ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT VALVE & BRACKET
ASSEMBLY (9G683) (SEE FIGURE 3), OR EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE (9C915) AND/OR
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE & BRACKET ASSEMBLY (9F933) (SEE FIGURE 2) WILL
PERMANENTLY DAMAGE THE VALVE.
5. Install the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter that is provided with the Rotunda's Smoke Machine
to EVAP Canister Purge Valve test port.
NOTE
SPECIAL PROCEDURES HAVE BEEN DESIGNATED FOR WINDSTAR, LS, THUNDERBIRD &
PZEV FOCUS BECAUSE THEY HAVE A CHECK VALVE THAT WILL PREVENT SMOKE FROM
ENTERING THE FILLER NECK.
6. Connect black smoke hose nozzle tip to the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter. For all except
Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus Use NGS or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN
AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS OPERATION).
7. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - Remove the fuel cap from the vehicle.
Depress remote starter button: Smoke will be introduced into the EVAP Emission System. Secure
the fuel cap once smoke is seen exiting from the fuel tank's neck area. For Windstar, LS,
Thunderbird & PZEV Focus, do not remove fuel cap. Depress starter button and introduce smoke to
system until it can be seen exiting the CVS (located by filler neck). Once smoke is seen, use NGS
or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS
OPERATION).
8. Press and release the remote starter button in intervals of approximately 15 seconds on and 15
seconds off. Use the halogen light provided with the Smoke Machine to look for smoke in the
engine compartment, EVAP hoses to EVAP Canister Purge Valve, CVS, carbon canister and area
around the fuel cap. Wiggle fuel vapor lines to check for leaks. Check for leaks in areas that are
difficult to access, such as connections on top of the tank where connections may be or inside
frame rails. Use the black light to ensure that there are no leaks. If a leak is detected, repair as
necessary. If the leak is not detected from the top, check under the bottom of vehicle. Inspect the
EVAP hoses running to the carbon canister, fuel filler neck, CVS, and EVAP Canister Purge Valve.
Go to LEAK VERIFICATION to verify any repair or if no leak is found.
LEAK VERIFICATION (METERED AIR SYSTEM)
1. Position the selector valve located on the Smoke Machine control panel to "METER".
2. Verify calibration of the flow meter by using the .020" calibrated leak orifice. To do this, insert air
supply hose (transparent hose) nozzle tip into appropriate EVAP System calibrated leak orifice
located on the front of the Smoke Machine panel.
3. TURN ON: Depress the remote starter button. Observe the position of the flow meter indicator
ball. Position the flow meter red pointer flag so it aligns with the measurement of the indicator ball.
Release the button and remove the air supply hose nozzle tip from the EVAP System calibrated
leak orifice.
NOTE
THIS FLOW METER CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT INDICATES THE VEHICLE PASS OR FAIL
CRITERIA BASED ON THE .020" EVAP SYSTEM LEAK STANDARD.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Cap: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 >
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4276
4. Connect the transparent air supply hose nozzle tip into the EVAP Service Test Port adapter.
5. Use NGS or WDS Diagnostic tool to CLOSE the CVS.
6. Depress the remote starter button on the Rotunda's Smoke Leak Detector. The indicator ball in
the flowmeter will go all the way to the top indicating the system is being pressurized. Continue to
depress the remote starter button until the ball stops descending. Once the indicator ball has
stopped descending, observe if it is above or below the red indicator flag. If performing this
verification following a repair, go to Step 7. If performing this verification after performing the
SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE), go to Step 8.
7. Leak Verification After Repair
a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed. The test procedure is
complete. Remove the Smoke Machine Test equipment from the vehicle and reconnect the large
EVAP Canister Purge Valve manifold vacuum hose and the test port's green cap.
b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST
PROCEDURE).
8. Leak Verification After Passing SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE)
a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed, go to Step 9.
b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST
PROCEDURE).
9. Using WDS Datalogger or NGS select the FTPV PID.
10. Remove Fuel Cap and turn the vehicle's ignition switch to the run position and check the FTPV
PID.
11. The nominal value for the FTPV PID is 2.6V. If the value is greater than 2.8V or less than 2.4V,
the FTP sensor is out of range and should be replaced. Verify the repair by checking to see if the
new sensor is in range. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - if the sensor is
within range, the concern is no longer present. (Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus go to
Step 12.)
12. For Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus only verify that filler neck clamps are in good
working order and tightened. Repair as necessary. If no problem is found with clamps, replace the
fuel cap.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-9-8 WARRANTY STATUS:
INFORMATION ONLY
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4277
Fuel Filler Cap: Description and Operation
FUEL FILLER CAP
Fuel Filler Cap
The fuel filler cap (Figure 100) is used to prevent fuel spill and close the evaporative emission/fuel
system to atmosphere. Some vehicles may have a Fuel Cap Off Indicator Lamp (FCIL) in the
instrument cluster which will illuminate when there is a failure in the vapor management system
that may be due to the fuel filler cap not being sealed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated
Fuel Pressure Release: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve
Eliminated
Article No. 02-21-2
10/28/02
FUEL - FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE DISCONTINUED - 2.0L ENGINE
FORD: 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002 ESCORT ZX2, ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1999-2002 COUGAR
ISSUE
Vehicles equipped with the 2.0L 4V Zetec and the 2.0L SPI no longer have the Fuel Pressure
Relief Valve (Schrader Valve).
ACTION
To relieve or manually check fuel pressures, refer to the following Service Procedures for details.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Service Procedure For Relieving Fuel Pressure
1. Remove the fuel pump relay in the engine compartment fuse box.
2. Start the engine and allow idling until the engine stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately five seconds to ensure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. When fuel system service is complete, Install Fuel Pump Relay.
5. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting
engine.
NOTE
IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM.
6. Start vehicle and check for leaks.
NOTE
IT IS POSSIBLE THAT A DTC MAY BE SET DUE TO THE PUMP RELAY BEING PULLED AND
THE ENGINE STARTED AND RUN OUT OF FUEL. IF DTC'S ARE SET, CLEAR ALL DTC'S
BEFORE RETURNING VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER.
Service Procedure For Manually Checking Fuel Pressure With A Gauge.
1. Remove the fuel pump relay in the engine compartment fuse box.
2. Start the engine and allow idling until the engine stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately five seconds to make sure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. Disconnect fuel line at the fuel rail to chassis line pierce point.
a. If the vehicle is equipped with Quick Release Coupling Push Connector at the fuel rail to fuel line
pierce point, separate the coupling by depressing the tabs and pulling on the fuel line.
b. If the vehicle is equipped with a Spring Lock Coupling Connector using special tool 310-D00S or
equivalent
5. Install the Schrader Valve service tool adaptor listed in the chart in this article.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated > Page 4283
6. Install fuel pressure gauge special service tool 310-012 or equivalent.
7. Install fuel pump relay.
8. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for oaks before starting
engine.
NOTE
IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM.
9. Start and run engine to surge air from fuel system (air trapped in the fuel system may effect test
results).
10. Perform normal diagnosti35 ann service repairs as needed.
11. After fuel system service is complete, relieve fuel system pressure using fuel pressure gauge
relief valve.
12. Remove special service tools
13. Re-connect fuel system lines
14. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting
engine.
NOTE
IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM.
15. Start vehicle and check for leaks.
NOTE
IT IS POSSIBLE THAT A DTC MAY BE SET DUE TO THE PUMP RELAY BEING PULLED AND
THE ENGINE STARTED AND RUN OUT OF FUEL. IF DTC'S ARE SET, CLEAR ALL DTC'S
BEFORE RETURNING VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER.
Service Tools Required Chart
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 404000, 490000, 497000, 499000, 603300, 607000, 698298
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4284
Fuel Pressure Release: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE
WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER
ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE
FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4285
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
1. Remove the LH engine compartment relay panel cover.
WARNING: ^
DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER
ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE
FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system.
2. Remove the fuel pump relay. 3. Start the engine. 4. After the engine stalls, crank the engine over
two more times to be sure all the pressure has been released. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the
OFF position. Install the fuel pump relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4286
Fuel Pressure Gauge
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Fuel Injector Wiring
Harness > Component Information > Service Precautions
Fuel Injector Wiring Harness: Service Precautions
WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY
TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Fuel Injector Wiring
Harness > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4291
Fuel Injector Wiring Harness: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY
TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe.
2. Disconnect the following electrical connectors:
1 cylinder temperature sensor
2 throttle position sensor
3 wiring harness to vehicle
4 idle air control valve
5 camshaft position sensor
6 crankshaft position sensor
7 ignition coil
8 radio ignition noise suppressor
9 fuel injectors
3. Disconnect the wiring harness to vehicle connectors from bracket and remove harness.
NOTE: Remove and reinstall new tie straps if necessary.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Line Coupler: > NHTSA00V277001 > Sep > 00 > Recall
00V277001: Fuel Line Connector Seal Leakage
Fuel Line Coupler: Recalls Recall 00V277001: Fuel Line Connector Seal Leakage
The O-ring seals in the fuel line connector at the outlet end of the fuel filter were damaged when
the line was connected to the filter during vehicle assembly. In some cases, this damage could
result in a fuel odor, or possibly in fuel dripping from the connection.
Fuel leakage, in the presence of an ignition source, could result in a fire.
Dealers will inspect and, if necessary, replace the fuel line. Owner notification began September
27, 2000. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date
and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Ford at
1-800-392-3673. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety
Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line
Connector O-Ring Defect
Technical Service Bulletin # 00S27 Date: 000901
Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect
00S27
SAFETY RECALL
Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Fuel Line Inspection
Dealer Letter
Attachment I ^
Administrative Information
Attachment II ^
Labor Allowances
^ Parts Ordering Information
Attachment III ^
Technical Information
Attachment IV ^
Escape Special Handling Letter
Customer Notification Letter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line
Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4304
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line
Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4305
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this recall.
PROMPTLY CORRECT Promptly correct all affected vehicles on your dealer VIN list which you will
receive in the Ford Dealer Consolidated Communicator (FDCC). Also, correct other eligible
vehicles that are brought to your dealership.
DEALER-OWNER CONTACT Immediately contact any affected owner whose name is not on the
list. Give the owner a copy of the Owner Letter and schedule a service date.
REGIONAL CONTACT Advise regional office if an owner:
^ cannot be contacted.
^ does not make a service date.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using DWE.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
OWNER REFUNDS Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid fuel line repairs made before
the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was
made away from the servicing dealer). Refer to ACESII manual for refund information.
RENTAL CARS Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except for fuel, which will be at
the customer's expense. Enter the word "LOANER" plus the number of days the vehicle was used
in the Miscellaneous Expense area. See "Escape Special Handling Procedure", Attachment IV.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
Parts Ordering Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line
Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4306
Of the total population of approximately 12,000 vehicles subject to inspection, potentially 120 units
(1%) are expected to require fuel line replacement. Dealers must call the Recall Hotline at
1-800-325-5621 when repairs are required.
DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to:
^ DOES II
^ Updated Price Book
EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford
Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
ESCAPE FUEL LINE INSPECTION
INSPECTION
1. Turn the ignition key to the ON position without starting the engine.
2. Raise and support the vehicle on a hoist.
3. Locate the fuel line at the filter outlet near the fuel tank.
4. Grasp the fuel line near the filter outlet tube and wiggle it gently. Check the filter outlet connector
for leakage within 30 seconds. See Figure 1.
5. If no leak is present, no further action is required. Lower and release the vehicle.
6. If a leak appears within 30 seconds, the fuel line assembly must be replaced. Proceed to the
Replacement procedure in this Attachment III.
REPLACEMENT
NOTE:
A single fuel line has been released for this program. The entire fuel line bundle is not to be
replaced during this service.
1. A single fuel line has been released for this program. The entire fuel line bundle is not to be
replaced during this service.
2. Install a memory saver. Open the hood, disconnect the battery negative cable, then relieve fuel
system pressure.
3. Access the fuel pump module as follows:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line
Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4307
a. Open the left rear door.
b. Position the seat bench forward.
c. Pull back the carpet to expose the fuel pump module access cover.
d. Remove the screws and lift the access cover up, then disconnect the two electrical connectors.
4. Disconnect the outboard fuel line (the one closest to the door). See Figure 2.
5. Raise and support the vehicle.
6. Position a drain pan. Remove the bundle retainer, then disconnect the fuel line at the filter and at
the supply line. See Figure 3.
7. Remove the line from the vehicle noting the path of the fuel line around other components.
8. Position the new fuel line in the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line
Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4308
9. Connect the fuel line to the filter outlet tube and the supply line leading forward toward the
engine.
10. Install the bundle retainer.
11. Remove the supports and lower the vehicle.
12. Connect the fuel line to the fuel pump module.
13. Connect the two electrical connectors at the fuel pump module.
14. Connect the battery negative cable and remove the memory saver. Turn the key on without
starting the engine to pressurize the fuel system and check for leaks around the new fuel line
connections. Turn the key off.
15. Reinstall the fuel pump access cover. Position back the carpet and seat, then close the door.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line
Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4309
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line
Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4310
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line
Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4311
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line
Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4312
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Line Coupler: > NHTSA00V277001 >
Sep > 00 > Recall 00V277001: Fuel Line Connector Seal Leakage
Fuel Line Coupler: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 00V277001: Fuel Line Connector Seal
Leakage
The O-ring seals in the fuel line connector at the outlet end of the fuel filter were damaged when
the line was connected to the filter during vehicle assembly. In some cases, this damage could
result in a fuel odor, or possibly in fuel dripping from the connection.
Fuel leakage, in the presence of an ignition source, could result in a fire.
Dealers will inspect and, if necessary, replace the fuel line. Owner notification began September
27, 2000. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date
and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Ford at
1-800-392-3673. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety
Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 >
Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect
Technical Service Bulletin # 00S27 Date: 000901
Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect
00S27
SAFETY RECALL
Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Fuel Line Inspection
Dealer Letter
Attachment I ^
Administrative Information
Attachment II ^
Labor Allowances
^ Parts Ordering Information
Attachment III ^
Technical Information
Attachment IV ^
Escape Special Handling Letter
Customer Notification Letter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 >
Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4322
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 >
Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4323
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this recall.
PROMPTLY CORRECT Promptly correct all affected vehicles on your dealer VIN list which you will
receive in the Ford Dealer Consolidated Communicator (FDCC). Also, correct other eligible
vehicles that are brought to your dealership.
DEALER-OWNER CONTACT Immediately contact any affected owner whose name is not on the
list. Give the owner a copy of the Owner Letter and schedule a service date.
REGIONAL CONTACT Advise regional office if an owner:
^ cannot be contacted.
^ does not make a service date.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using DWE.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
OWNER REFUNDS Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid fuel line repairs made before
the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was
made away from the servicing dealer). Refer to ACESII manual for refund information.
RENTAL CARS Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except for fuel, which will be at
the customer's expense. Enter the word "LOANER" plus the number of days the vehicle was used
in the Miscellaneous Expense area. See "Escape Special Handling Procedure", Attachment IV.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
Parts Ordering Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 >
Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4324
Of the total population of approximately 12,000 vehicles subject to inspection, potentially 120 units
(1%) are expected to require fuel line replacement. Dealers must call the Recall Hotline at
1-800-325-5621 when repairs are required.
DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to:
^ DOES II
^ Updated Price Book
EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford
Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
ESCAPE FUEL LINE INSPECTION
INSPECTION
1. Turn the ignition key to the ON position without starting the engine.
2. Raise and support the vehicle on a hoist.
3. Locate the fuel line at the filter outlet near the fuel tank.
4. Grasp the fuel line near the filter outlet tube and wiggle it gently. Check the filter outlet connector
for leakage within 30 seconds. See Figure 1.
5. If no leak is present, no further action is required. Lower and release the vehicle.
6. If a leak appears within 30 seconds, the fuel line assembly must be replaced. Proceed to the
Replacement procedure in this Attachment III.
REPLACEMENT
NOTE:
A single fuel line has been released for this program. The entire fuel line bundle is not to be
replaced during this service.
1. A single fuel line has been released for this program. The entire fuel line bundle is not to be
replaced during this service.
2. Install a memory saver. Open the hood, disconnect the battery negative cable, then relieve fuel
system pressure.
3. Access the fuel pump module as follows:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 >
Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4325
a. Open the left rear door.
b. Position the seat bench forward.
c. Pull back the carpet to expose the fuel pump module access cover.
d. Remove the screws and lift the access cover up, then disconnect the two electrical connectors.
4. Disconnect the outboard fuel line (the one closest to the door). See Figure 2.
5. Raise and support the vehicle.
6. Position a drain pan. Remove the bundle retainer, then disconnect the fuel line at the filter and at
the supply line. See Figure 3.
7. Remove the line from the vehicle noting the path of the fuel line around other components.
8. Position the new fuel line in the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 >
Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4326
9. Connect the fuel line to the filter outlet tube and the supply line leading forward toward the
engine.
10. Install the bundle retainer.
11. Remove the supports and lower the vehicle.
12. Connect the fuel line to the fuel pump module.
13. Connect the two electrical connectors at the fuel pump module.
14. Connect the battery negative cable and remove the memory saver. Turn the key on without
starting the engine to pressurize the fuel system and check for leaks around the new fuel line
connections. Turn the key off.
15. Reinstall the fuel pump access cover. Position back the carpet and seat, then close the door.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 >
Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4327
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 >
Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4328
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 >
Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4329
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 >
Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4330
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Fuel Line Coupler: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE
ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE REPAIRING OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL
LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED TO
PREVENT ACCIDENTAL SPRAYING OF FUEL, CAUSING PERSONAL INJURY OR A FIRE
HAZARD. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 4333
Fuel Line Coupler: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip components
which may cause fuel leaks.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Push Connect Fittings
Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Push Connect Fittings
DISCONNECT
1. Relieve the fuel pressure.
WARNING: ^
DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE
ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE REPAIRING OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL
LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED TO
PREVENT ACCIDENTAL SPRAYING OF FUEL, CAUSING PERSONAL INJURY OR A FIRE
HAZARD. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Separate the coupling.
1 Depress the tabs
2 Separate the coupling.
CONNECT
1. Clean and inspect the coupling and the tube for damage.
2. Align the tube to the coupling and push until you hear a click.
3. Pull on the coupling to make sure it is fully engaged. 4. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Push Connect Fittings > Page 4336
Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair R-Clip Fittings
DISCONNECT
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE
ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE REPAIRING OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL
LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED TO
PREVENT ACCIDENTAL SPRAYING OF FUEL, CAUSING PERSONAL INJURY OR A FIRE
HAZARD. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
CAUTION: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip components
which may cause fuel leaks.
1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Remove the shipping tab by bending downward.
4. Spread the R-clip legs and push the clip into the fitting.
5. Separate the fitting from the tube.
CONNECT
1. Clean and inspect the fitting and the tube for damage. Remove any foreign material or
obstructions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Push Connect Fittings > Page 4337
2. Insert the R-clip into the fitting.
3. Align the tube and the fitting.
4. Insert the tube in the fitting and push together until a click is heard.
5. Pull on the connection to make sure it is fully engaged. 6. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Push Connect Fittings > Page 4338
Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Spring Lock Couplings
Fuel Pipe 1/2 Inch Remover
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
DISCONNECT
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE
WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE
ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE REPAIRING OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL
LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE MUST BE
RELIEVED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Remove the fuel line clip.
4. Install the special tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Push Connect Fittings > Page 4339
5. Close and push the special tool into the open side of the cage.
6. Separate the coupling.
7. Remove the special tool.
CONNECT
1. Clean and inspect both coupling ends. Install new O-ring seals and garter springs if necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Push Connect Fittings > Page 4340
2. Fit the male coupling into the female end and push until the garter spring snaps over the flared
end of the female coupling.
3. Verify coupling engagement by pulling on the lines.
4. Install the fuel line clip. 5. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 4341
Fuel Pipe 1/2 Inch Remover
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Pressure Regulator: Description and Operation
FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
Fuel Pressure Regulator
The fuel pressure regulator (Figure 70) is attached to the fuel rail downstream of the fuel injectors.
It regulates fuel pressure supplied to the fuel injectors. The regulator is a diaphragm-operated relief
valve. One side of the diaphragm senses fuel pressure and the other side is connected to the
intake manifold vacuum. Fuel pressure is established by a spring preload applied to the diaphragm.
Balancing one side of the diaphragm with manifold vacuum maintains a constant fuel pressure drop
across the fuel injectors. Fuel pressure is high when engine vacuum is low. Excess fuel is
bypassed through the fuel pressure regulator and returned through the fuel return line to the fuel
tank.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4348
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4349
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR
Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
The Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 31) is a diaphragm strain gauge device in which
resistance changes with pressure. The electrical resistance of a strain gauge increases as
pressure increases, and decreases as pressure decreases. The varying resistance affects the
voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding
to pressure.
Strain gauge type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The FRP sensor measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by
the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulse width and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder.
Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
The Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 32) senses the pressure difference between the fuel
rail and the intake manifold. The return fuel line to the fuel tank has been deleted in this type of fuel
system. The differential fuel/intake manifold pressure together with measured fuel temperature
provides an indication of the fuel vapors in the fuel rail. Both differential pressure and temperature
feedback signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump
sustains fuel rail pressure which preserve fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel
injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to
decrease.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Test Port >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation
PRESSURE TEST POINT
There is a pressure test point with a schrader fitting in the fuel rail that relieves fuel pressure and
measures the fuel injector supply pressure for service and diagnostic procedures. Before servicing
or testing the fuel system, read any CAUTION, WARNING, and HANDLING information. ON
VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH A SCHRADER VALVE, USE ROTUNDA FUEL PRESSURE
TEST KIT #134-ROO87 OR EQUIVALENT.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE
ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE WORKING ON OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL
LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE MUST BE
RELIEVED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 4357
Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION:
^ Use an O-ring seal made of fuel-resistant material. Use of incorrect O-ring seals may result in fuel
leakage.
^ Never use silicone grease. Silicone grease may clog the fuel injectors.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4358
Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper: Description and Operation
FUEL RAIL PULSE DAMPER
Pulse Damper
The fuel rail pulse damper (Figure 71) located on the fuel rail reduces fuel system noise caused by
the pulsing of the fuel injectors. The vacuum port located on the damper is connected to manifold
vacuum to avoid fuel spillage in the event the pulse damper diaphragm were to rupture. (The pulse
damper should not be confused with a fuel pressure regulator, it does not regulate fuel rail
pressure.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4359
Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE
ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE WORKING ON OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL
LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE MUST BE
RELIEVED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
1. Relieve the fuel system pressure.
2. Remove the fuel pulse damper.
1 Disconnect the vacuum line.
2 Remove the bolts and the damper.
3. Inspect the O-ring seal and install a new seal if damaged.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
CAUTION: ^
Use an O-ring seal made of fuel-resistant material. Use of incorrect O-ring seals may result in fuel
leakage.
^ Never use silicone grease. Silicone grease may clog the fuel injectors.
NOTE: Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean Super Premium SAE 5W-30 Motor Oil XO-5W30-QSP
or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C153-G to aid installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > Fuel
Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation
PRESSURE TEST POINT
There is a pressure test point with a schrader fitting in the fuel rail that relieves fuel pressure and
measures the fuel injector supply pressure for service and diagnostic procedures. Before servicing
or testing the fuel system, read any CAUTION, WARNING, and HANDLING information. ON
VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH A SCHRADER VALVE, USE ROTUNDA FUEL PRESSURE
TEST KIT #134-ROO87 OR EQUIVALENT.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4368
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4369
Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4370
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information
> Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Fuel Rail: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE
ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE WORKING ON OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL
LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE MUST BE
RELIEVED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information
> Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 4375
Fuel Rail: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION:
^ Use O-ring seals made of fuel-resistant material. Use of incorrect O-ring seals may result in fuel
leakage.
^ Never use silicone grease. Silicone grease may clog fuel injectors.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information
> Service Precautions > Page 4376
Fuel Rail: Service and Repair
Fuel Pipe 1/2 Inch Remover
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE
ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE WORKING ON OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL
LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE MUST BE
RELIEVED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Remove the air
cleaner outlet pipe.
4. Using the special tool, disconnect the fuel line.
5. Disconnect the accelerator cable and, if equipped, the speed control actuator cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information
> Service Precautions > Page 4377
6. Disconnect the fuel pulse damper vacuum hose.
7. Disconnect the fuel injector electrical connectors.
8. Remove the bolts and remove the fuel supply manifold.
9. Inspect the O-ring seals. Discard if damaged
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
CAUTION: ^
Use O-ring seals made of fuel-resistant material. Use of incorrect O-ring seals may result in fuel
leakage.
^ Never use silicone grease. Silicone grease may clog fuel injectors.
NOTE: Lubricate the O-ring seals with clean Super Premium SAE 5W-30 Motor Oil XO-5W30-QSP
or equivalent meeting Ford specification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information
> Service Precautions > Page 4378
WSS-M2C153-G to aid installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information
> Service Precautions > Page 4379
Fuel Pipe 1/2 Inch Remover
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line
Connector O-Ring Defect
Technical Service Bulletin # 00S27 Date: 000901
Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect
00S27
SAFETY RECALL
Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Fuel Line Inspection
Dealer Letter
Attachment I ^
Administrative Information
Attachment II ^
Labor Allowances
^ Parts Ordering Information
Attachment III ^
Technical Information
Attachment IV ^
Escape Special Handling Letter
Customer Notification Letter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line
Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4388
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line
Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4389
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this recall.
PROMPTLY CORRECT Promptly correct all affected vehicles on your dealer VIN list which you will
receive in the Ford Dealer Consolidated Communicator (FDCC). Also, correct other eligible
vehicles that are brought to your dealership.
DEALER-OWNER CONTACT Immediately contact any affected owner whose name is not on the
list. Give the owner a copy of the Owner Letter and schedule a service date.
REGIONAL CONTACT Advise regional office if an owner:
^ cannot be contacted.
^ does not make a service date.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using DWE.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
OWNER REFUNDS Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid fuel line repairs made before
the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was
made away from the servicing dealer). Refer to ACESII manual for refund information.
RENTAL CARS Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except for fuel, which will be at
the customer's expense. Enter the word "LOANER" plus the number of days the vehicle was used
in the Miscellaneous Expense area. See "Escape Special Handling Procedure", Attachment IV.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
Parts Ordering Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line
Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4390
Of the total population of approximately 12,000 vehicles subject to inspection, potentially 120 units
(1%) are expected to require fuel line replacement. Dealers must call the Recall Hotline at
1-800-325-5621 when repairs are required.
DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to:
^ DOES II
^ Updated Price Book
EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford
Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
ESCAPE FUEL LINE INSPECTION
INSPECTION
1. Turn the ignition key to the ON position without starting the engine.
2. Raise and support the vehicle on a hoist.
3. Locate the fuel line at the filter outlet near the fuel tank.
4. Grasp the fuel line near the filter outlet tube and wiggle it gently. Check the filter outlet connector
for leakage within 30 seconds. See Figure 1.
5. If no leak is present, no further action is required. Lower and release the vehicle.
6. If a leak appears within 30 seconds, the fuel line assembly must be replaced. Proceed to the
Replacement procedure in this Attachment III.
REPLACEMENT
NOTE:
A single fuel line has been released for this program. The entire fuel line bundle is not to be
replaced during this service.
1. A single fuel line has been released for this program. The entire fuel line bundle is not to be
replaced during this service.
2. Install a memory saver. Open the hood, disconnect the battery negative cable, then relieve fuel
system pressure.
3. Access the fuel pump module as follows:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line
Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4391
a. Open the left rear door.
b. Position the seat bench forward.
c. Pull back the carpet to expose the fuel pump module access cover.
d. Remove the screws and lift the access cover up, then disconnect the two electrical connectors.
4. Disconnect the outboard fuel line (the one closest to the door). See Figure 2.
5. Raise and support the vehicle.
6. Position a drain pan. Remove the bundle retainer, then disconnect the fuel line at the filter and at
the supply line. See Figure 3.
7. Remove the line from the vehicle noting the path of the fuel line around other components.
8. Position the new fuel line in the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line
Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4392
9. Connect the fuel line to the filter outlet tube and the supply line leading forward toward the
engine.
10. Install the bundle retainer.
11. Remove the supports and lower the vehicle.
12. Connect the fuel line to the fuel pump module.
13. Connect the two electrical connectors at the fuel pump module.
14. Connect the battery negative cable and remove the memory saver. Turn the key on without
starting the engine to pressurize the fuel system and check for leaks around the new fuel line
connections. Turn the key off.
15. Reinstall the fuel pump access cover. Position back the carpet and seat, then close the door.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line
Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4393
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line
Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4394
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line
Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4395
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line
Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4396
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 >
Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect
Technical Service Bulletin # 00S27 Date: 000901
Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect
00S27
SAFETY RECALL
Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Fuel Line Inspection
Dealer Letter
Attachment I ^
Administrative Information
Attachment II ^
Labor Allowances
^ Parts Ordering Information
Attachment III ^
Technical Information
Attachment IV ^
Escape Special Handling Letter
Customer Notification Letter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 >
Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4402
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 >
Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4403
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this recall.
PROMPTLY CORRECT Promptly correct all affected vehicles on your dealer VIN list which you will
receive in the Ford Dealer Consolidated Communicator (FDCC). Also, correct other eligible
vehicles that are brought to your dealership.
DEALER-OWNER CONTACT Immediately contact any affected owner whose name is not on the
list. Give the owner a copy of the Owner Letter and schedule a service date.
REGIONAL CONTACT Advise regional office if an owner:
^ cannot be contacted.
^ does not make a service date.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using DWE.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
OWNER REFUNDS Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid fuel line repairs made before
the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was
made away from the servicing dealer). Refer to ACESII manual for refund information.
RENTAL CARS Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except for fuel, which will be at
the customer's expense. Enter the word "LOANER" plus the number of days the vehicle was used
in the Miscellaneous Expense area. See "Escape Special Handling Procedure", Attachment IV.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
Parts Ordering Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 >
Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4404
Of the total population of approximately 12,000 vehicles subject to inspection, potentially 120 units
(1%) are expected to require fuel line replacement. Dealers must call the Recall Hotline at
1-800-325-5621 when repairs are required.
DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to:
^ DOES II
^ Updated Price Book
EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford
Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
ESCAPE FUEL LINE INSPECTION
INSPECTION
1. Turn the ignition key to the ON position without starting the engine.
2. Raise and support the vehicle on a hoist.
3. Locate the fuel line at the filter outlet near the fuel tank.
4. Grasp the fuel line near the filter outlet tube and wiggle it gently. Check the filter outlet connector
for leakage within 30 seconds. See Figure 1.
5. If no leak is present, no further action is required. Lower and release the vehicle.
6. If a leak appears within 30 seconds, the fuel line assembly must be replaced. Proceed to the
Replacement procedure in this Attachment III.
REPLACEMENT
NOTE:
A single fuel line has been released for this program. The entire fuel line bundle is not to be
replaced during this service.
1. A single fuel line has been released for this program. The entire fuel line bundle is not to be
replaced during this service.
2. Install a memory saver. Open the hood, disconnect the battery negative cable, then relieve fuel
system pressure.
3. Access the fuel pump module as follows:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 >
Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4405
a. Open the left rear door.
b. Position the seat bench forward.
c. Pull back the carpet to expose the fuel pump module access cover.
d. Remove the screws and lift the access cover up, then disconnect the two electrical connectors.
4. Disconnect the outboard fuel line (the one closest to the door). See Figure 2.
5. Raise and support the vehicle.
6. Position a drain pan. Remove the bundle retainer, then disconnect the fuel line at the filter and at
the supply line. See Figure 3.
7. Remove the line from the vehicle noting the path of the fuel line around other components.
8. Position the new fuel line in the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 >
Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4406
9. Connect the fuel line to the filter outlet tube and the supply line leading forward toward the
engine.
10. Install the bundle retainer.
11. Remove the supports and lower the vehicle.
12. Connect the fuel line to the fuel pump module.
13. Connect the two electrical connectors at the fuel pump module.
14. Connect the battery negative cable and remove the memory saver. Turn the key on without
starting the engine to pressurize the fuel system and check for leaks around the new fuel line
connections. Turn the key off.
15. Reinstall the fuel pump access cover. Position back the carpet and seat, then close the door.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 >
Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4407
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 >
Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4408
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 >
Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4409
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 >
Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4410
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 >
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON
Fuel Filler Hose: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON
Article No. 03-20-3
10/13/03
DRIVEABILITY - MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
(MIL) ILLUMINATED WITH DTC'S P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457, P1442 OR CHECK FUEL CAP
LAMP ILLUMINATED WITH DTC P0457
FORD: 1997-2000 CONTOUR 1997-2002 ESCORT 1997-2003 CROWN VICTORIA, MUSTANG,
TAURUS 1998-2003 ESCORT ZX2 2000-2003 FOCUS 2002-2003 THUNDERBIRD 1997 F-250
HD 1997-1999 F-250 LD 1997-2003 E SERIES, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER,
WINDSTAR 1999-2003 F SUPER DUTY 2000-2003 EXCURSION 2001-2003 ESCAPE,
EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 MARK VIII 1997-2002 CONTINENTAL 1997-2003 TOWN CAR 2000-2003
LS 1998-2003 NAVIGATOR 2002-2003 BLACKWOOD
MERCURY: 1997-1999 TRACER 1997-2000 MYSTIQUE 1997-2003 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE
1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2003 MOUNTAINEER
This article supersedes TSB 03-9-8 to update the vehicle lines and Service Procedures.
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illuminated with Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs) P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457 or P1442 or a "Check Fuel Cap" Lamp
illuminated with DTC P0457 for the Evaporative Emission System. This may be caused by loose or
leaking hoses, loose or broken fuel cap, a leak at the top of the fuel filler pipe neck, etc.
ACTION Use the Rotunda Leak Detector Smoke Machine (Part 218-00001) or equivalent, to locate
and repair leaks in the Evaporative Emission System. Refer to the following Service Procedure for
details.
Definitions of Acronyms
^ CVS Canister Vent Solenoid
^ DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code
^ EVAP Evaporative Emissions System
^ EVMV Electronic Vapor Management Valve
^ FTP Fuel Tank Pressure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 >
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4420
^ MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp
^ NGS New Generation STAR Tester
^ PID Parameter Identifier WDS Worldwide Diagnostic System
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE SUPERSEDES ALL OTHER PROCEDURES PUBLISHED IN SERVICE
MANUALS AND TSB ARTICLES.
NOTE
MANY EVAP LEAKS ARE CAUSED BY A LOOSE OR FAULTY CAP. IF THE FUEL CAP IS
SUSPECT DURING VISUAL INSPECTION, DO NOT DISTURB THE FUEL CAP UNTIL THE
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE IS COMPLETE. IF THE LEAK VERIFICATION FAILS, THE CAP
CAN BE REPOSITIONED OR REPLACED AND THE TEST REPEATED. THIS ACTION WILL
ISOLATE THE CAP FROM THE REST OF THE EVAP SYSTEM AS A POTENTIAL CONCERN. IF
DEBRIS ON THE SEALING SURFACE OF THE CAP APPEARS TO BE THE SOURCE OF THE
LEAK, CLEAN THE CAP AND REINSTALL.
OVERVIEW OF TEST PROCEDURES
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 >
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4421
NOTE
SEE (FIGURE 1) AT END OF ARTICLE FOR TEST PROCEDURE FLOWCHART.
This TSB provides the following procedures:
^ Check the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (9C915) for a no flow condition
^ Locate a leak so that a repair can be performed
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 >
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4422
^ Verify repair by utilizing a metered air pressure test
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE NO FLOW TEST
1. Using WDS Datalogger select the following PID's: EVAPVM # (or EVMV#), EVAPCV # and FTP.
2. Start the vehicle.
3. Close both the Canister Vent Solenoid (CVS) (EVAPCV # On or 100% duty cycle) and the EVAP
Canister Purge Valve (EVAPVM# Off or zero % duty cycle).
4. While monitoring the FTP PID, command open the EVAP Canister Purge Valve with the
EVAPVM# PID to 100% duty
5. If the FTP decreases and/or the RPM changes and/or the engine stalls, the test passed. Turn off
engine and proceed to test procedures below. Otherwise replace the EVAP Canister Purge Valve,
verify the repair by repeating the No Flow Test and return vehicle.
SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE)
1. Disconnect the larger of two manifold vacuum lines at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve and cap it
at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (see Figure 2).
2. Connect the Smoke Machine power cables to vehicle battery The "Power Indicator Lamp" should
be on indicating a good battery contact.
3. Position the selector valve on Rotunda's Smoke Machine Control Panel to "SMOKE".
4. Locate the vehicle's Evaporative Emission Service Test Port and remove the green cap. The
EVAP Service Test Port is located close to or on the EVAP Canister Purge Valve.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 >
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4423
WARNING
DO NOT REMOVE THE SCHRADER VALVE. REMOVING THE SCHRADER VALVE FROM THE
TEST PORT ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH THE ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT
VALVE (9G641) AND/OR ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT VALVE & BRACKET
ASSEMBLY (9G683) (SEE FIGURE 3), OR EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE (9C915) AND/OR
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE & BRACKET ASSEMBLY (9F933) (SEE FIGURE 2) WILL
PERMANENTLY DAMAGE THE VALVE.
5. Install the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter that is provided with the Rotunda's Smoke Machine
to EVAP Canister Purge Valve test port.
NOTE
SPECIAL PROCEDURES HAVE BEEN DESIGNATED FOR WINDSTAR, LS, THUNDERBIRD &
PZEV FOCUS BECAUSE THEY HAVE A CHECK VALVE THAT WILL PREVENT SMOKE FROM
ENTERING THE FILLER NECK.
6. Connect black smoke hose nozzle tip to the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter. For all except
Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus Use NGS or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN
AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS OPERATION).
7. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - Remove the fuel cap from the vehicle.
Depress remote starter button: Smoke will be introduced into the EVAP Emission System. Secure
the fuel cap once smoke is seen exiting from the fuel tank's neck area. For Windstar, LS,
Thunderbird & PZEV Focus, do not remove fuel cap. Depress starter button and introduce smoke to
system until it can be seen exiting the CVS (located by filler neck). Once smoke is seen, use NGS
or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS
OPERATION).
8. Press and release the remote starter button in intervals of approximately 15 seconds on and 15
seconds off. Use the halogen light provided with the Smoke Machine to look for smoke in the
engine compartment, EVAP hoses to EVAP Canister Purge Valve, CVS, carbon canister and area
around the fuel cap. Wiggle fuel vapor lines to check for leaks. Check for leaks in areas that are
difficult to access, such as connections on top of the tank where connections may be or inside
frame rails. Use the black light to ensure that there are no leaks. If a leak is detected, repair as
necessary. If the leak is not detected from the top, check under the bottom of vehicle. Inspect the
EVAP hoses running to the carbon canister, fuel filler neck, CVS, and EVAP Canister Purge Valve.
Go to LEAK VERIFICATION to verify any repair or if no leak is found.
LEAK VERIFICATION (METERED AIR SYSTEM)
1. Position the selector valve located on the Smoke Machine control panel to "METER".
2. Verify calibration of the flow meter by using the .020" calibrated leak orifice. To do this, insert air
supply hose (transparent hose) nozzle tip into appropriate EVAP System calibrated leak orifice
located on the front of the Smoke Machine panel.
3. TURN ON: Depress the remote starter button. Observe the position of the flow meter indicator
ball. Position the flow meter red pointer flag so it aligns with the measurement of the indicator ball.
Release the button and remove the air supply hose nozzle tip from the EVAP System calibrated
leak orifice.
NOTE
THIS FLOW METER CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT INDICATES THE VEHICLE PASS OR FAIL
CRITERIA BASED ON THE .020" EVAP SYSTEM LEAK STANDARD.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 >
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4424
4. Connect the transparent air supply hose nozzle tip into the EVAP Service Test Port adapter.
5. Use NGS or WDS Diagnostic tool to CLOSE the CVS.
6. Depress the remote starter button on the Rotunda's Smoke Leak Detector. The indicator ball in
the flowmeter will go all the way to the top indicating the system is being pressurized. Continue to
depress the remote starter button until the ball stops descending. Once the indicator ball has
stopped descending, observe if it is above or below the red indicator flag. If performing this
verification following a repair, go to Step 7. If performing this verification after performing the
SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE), go to Step 8.
7. Leak Verification After Repair
a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed. The test procedure is
complete. Remove the Smoke Machine Test equipment from the vehicle and reconnect the large
EVAP Canister Purge Valve manifold vacuum hose and the test port's green cap.
b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST
PROCEDURE).
8. Leak Verification After Passing SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE)
a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed, go to Step 9.
b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST
PROCEDURE).
9. Using WDS Datalogger or NGS select the FTPV PID.
10. Remove Fuel Cap and turn the vehicle's ignition switch to the run position and check the FTPV
PID.
11. The nominal value for the FTPV PID is 2.6V. If the value is greater than 2.8V or less than 2.4V,
the FTP sensor is out of range and should be replaced. Verify the repair by checking to see if the
new sensor is in range. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - if the sensor is
within range, the concern is no longer present. (Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus go to
Step 12.)
12. For Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus only verify that filler neck clamps are in good
working order and tightened. Repair as necessary. If no problem is found with clamps, replace the
fuel cap.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-9-8 WARRANTY STATUS:
INFORMATION ONLY
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct
> 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON
Fuel Filler Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap
Lamp ON
Article No. 03-20-3
10/13/03
DRIVEABILITY - MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
(MIL) ILLUMINATED WITH DTC'S P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457, P1442 OR CHECK FUEL CAP
LAMP ILLUMINATED WITH DTC P0457
FORD: 1997-2000 CONTOUR 1997-2002 ESCORT 1997-2003 CROWN VICTORIA, MUSTANG,
TAURUS 1998-2003 ESCORT ZX2 2000-2003 FOCUS 2002-2003 THUNDERBIRD 1997 F-250
HD 1997-1999 F-250 LD 1997-2003 E SERIES, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER,
WINDSTAR 1999-2003 F SUPER DUTY 2000-2003 EXCURSION 2001-2003 ESCAPE,
EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 MARK VIII 1997-2002 CONTINENTAL 1997-2003 TOWN CAR 2000-2003
LS 1998-2003 NAVIGATOR 2002-2003 BLACKWOOD
MERCURY: 1997-1999 TRACER 1997-2000 MYSTIQUE 1997-2003 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE
1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2003 MOUNTAINEER
This article supersedes TSB 03-9-8 to update the vehicle lines and Service Procedures.
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illuminated with Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs) P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457 or P1442 or a "Check Fuel Cap" Lamp
illuminated with DTC P0457 for the Evaporative Emission System. This may be caused by loose or
leaking hoses, loose or broken fuel cap, a leak at the top of the fuel filler pipe neck, etc.
ACTION Use the Rotunda Leak Detector Smoke Machine (Part 218-00001) or equivalent, to locate
and repair leaks in the Evaporative Emission System. Refer to the following Service Procedure for
details.
Definitions of Acronyms
^ CVS Canister Vent Solenoid
^ DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code
^ EVAP Evaporative Emissions System
^ EVMV Electronic Vapor Management Valve
^ FTP Fuel Tank Pressure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct
> 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4430
^ MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp
^ NGS New Generation STAR Tester
^ PID Parameter Identifier WDS Worldwide Diagnostic System
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE SUPERSEDES ALL OTHER PROCEDURES PUBLISHED IN SERVICE
MANUALS AND TSB ARTICLES.
NOTE
MANY EVAP LEAKS ARE CAUSED BY A LOOSE OR FAULTY CAP. IF THE FUEL CAP IS
SUSPECT DURING VISUAL INSPECTION, DO NOT DISTURB THE FUEL CAP UNTIL THE
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE IS COMPLETE. IF THE LEAK VERIFICATION FAILS, THE CAP
CAN BE REPOSITIONED OR REPLACED AND THE TEST REPEATED. THIS ACTION WILL
ISOLATE THE CAP FROM THE REST OF THE EVAP SYSTEM AS A POTENTIAL CONCERN. IF
DEBRIS ON THE SEALING SURFACE OF THE CAP APPEARS TO BE THE SOURCE OF THE
LEAK, CLEAN THE CAP AND REINSTALL.
OVERVIEW OF TEST PROCEDURES
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct
> 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4431
NOTE
SEE (FIGURE 1) AT END OF ARTICLE FOR TEST PROCEDURE FLOWCHART.
This TSB provides the following procedures:
^ Check the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (9C915) for a no flow condition
^ Locate a leak so that a repair can be performed
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct
> 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4432
^ Verify repair by utilizing a metered air pressure test
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE NO FLOW TEST
1. Using WDS Datalogger select the following PID's: EVAPVM # (or EVMV#), EVAPCV # and FTP.
2. Start the vehicle.
3. Close both the Canister Vent Solenoid (CVS) (EVAPCV # On or 100% duty cycle) and the EVAP
Canister Purge Valve (EVAPVM# Off or zero % duty cycle).
4. While monitoring the FTP PID, command open the EVAP Canister Purge Valve with the
EVAPVM# PID to 100% duty
5. If the FTP decreases and/or the RPM changes and/or the engine stalls, the test passed. Turn off
engine and proceed to test procedures below. Otherwise replace the EVAP Canister Purge Valve,
verify the repair by repeating the No Flow Test and return vehicle.
SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE)
1. Disconnect the larger of two manifold vacuum lines at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve and cap it
at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (see Figure 2).
2. Connect the Smoke Machine power cables to vehicle battery The "Power Indicator Lamp" should
be on indicating a good battery contact.
3. Position the selector valve on Rotunda's Smoke Machine Control Panel to "SMOKE".
4. Locate the vehicle's Evaporative Emission Service Test Port and remove the green cap. The
EVAP Service Test Port is located close to or on the EVAP Canister Purge Valve.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct
> 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4433
WARNING
DO NOT REMOVE THE SCHRADER VALVE. REMOVING THE SCHRADER VALVE FROM THE
TEST PORT ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH THE ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT
VALVE (9G641) AND/OR ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT VALVE & BRACKET
ASSEMBLY (9G683) (SEE FIGURE 3), OR EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE (9C915) AND/OR
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE & BRACKET ASSEMBLY (9F933) (SEE FIGURE 2) WILL
PERMANENTLY DAMAGE THE VALVE.
5. Install the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter that is provided with the Rotunda's Smoke Machine
to EVAP Canister Purge Valve test port.
NOTE
SPECIAL PROCEDURES HAVE BEEN DESIGNATED FOR WINDSTAR, LS, THUNDERBIRD &
PZEV FOCUS BECAUSE THEY HAVE A CHECK VALVE THAT WILL PREVENT SMOKE FROM
ENTERING THE FILLER NECK.
6. Connect black smoke hose nozzle tip to the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter. For all except
Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus Use NGS or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN
AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS OPERATION).
7. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - Remove the fuel cap from the vehicle.
Depress remote starter button: Smoke will be introduced into the EVAP Emission System. Secure
the fuel cap once smoke is seen exiting from the fuel tank's neck area. For Windstar, LS,
Thunderbird & PZEV Focus, do not remove fuel cap. Depress starter button and introduce smoke to
system until it can be seen exiting the CVS (located by filler neck). Once smoke is seen, use NGS
or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS
OPERATION).
8. Press and release the remote starter button in intervals of approximately 15 seconds on and 15
seconds off. Use the halogen light provided with the Smoke Machine to look for smoke in the
engine compartment, EVAP hoses to EVAP Canister Purge Valve, CVS, carbon canister and area
around the fuel cap. Wiggle fuel vapor lines to check for leaks. Check for leaks in areas that are
difficult to access, such as connections on top of the tank where connections may be or inside
frame rails. Use the black light to ensure that there are no leaks. If a leak is detected, repair as
necessary. If the leak is not detected from the top, check under the bottom of vehicle. Inspect the
EVAP hoses running to the carbon canister, fuel filler neck, CVS, and EVAP Canister Purge Valve.
Go to LEAK VERIFICATION to verify any repair or if no leak is found.
LEAK VERIFICATION (METERED AIR SYSTEM)
1. Position the selector valve located on the Smoke Machine control panel to "METER".
2. Verify calibration of the flow meter by using the .020" calibrated leak orifice. To do this, insert air
supply hose (transparent hose) nozzle tip into appropriate EVAP System calibrated leak orifice
located on the front of the Smoke Machine panel.
3. TURN ON: Depress the remote starter button. Observe the position of the flow meter indicator
ball. Position the flow meter red pointer flag so it aligns with the measurement of the indicator ball.
Release the button and remove the air supply hose nozzle tip from the EVAP System calibrated
leak orifice.
NOTE
THIS FLOW METER CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT INDICATES THE VEHICLE PASS OR FAIL
CRITERIA BASED ON THE .020" EVAP SYSTEM LEAK STANDARD.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct
> 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4434
4. Connect the transparent air supply hose nozzle tip into the EVAP Service Test Port adapter.
5. Use NGS or WDS Diagnostic tool to CLOSE the CVS.
6. Depress the remote starter button on the Rotunda's Smoke Leak Detector. The indicator ball in
the flowmeter will go all the way to the top indicating the system is being pressurized. Continue to
depress the remote starter button until the ball stops descending. Once the indicator ball has
stopped descending, observe if it is above or below the red indicator flag. If performing this
verification following a repair, go to Step 7. If performing this verification after performing the
SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE), go to Step 8.
7. Leak Verification After Repair
a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed. The test procedure is
complete. Remove the Smoke Machine Test equipment from the vehicle and reconnect the large
EVAP Canister Purge Valve manifold vacuum hose and the test port's green cap.
b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST
PROCEDURE).
8. Leak Verification After Passing SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE)
a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed, go to Step 9.
b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST
PROCEDURE).
9. Using WDS Datalogger or NGS select the FTPV PID.
10. Remove Fuel Cap and turn the vehicle's ignition switch to the run position and check the FTPV
PID.
11. The nominal value for the FTPV PID is 2.6V. If the value is greater than 2.8V or less than 2.4V,
the FTP sensor is out of range and should be replaced. Verify the repair by checking to see if the
new sensor is in range. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - if the sensor is
within range, the concern is no longer present. (Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus go to
Step 12.)
12. For Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus only verify that filler neck clamps are in good
working order and tightened. Repair as necessary. If no problem is found with clamps, replace the
fuel cap.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-9-8 WARRANTY STATUS:
INFORMATION ONLY
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4435
Fuel Filler Hose: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE
PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE FUEL TANK MAY BE PRESSURIZED. REMOVE THE FUEL TANK FILLER CAP SLOWLY.
IF A HISSING SOUND IS HEARD, WAIT UNTIL THE CONDITION STOPS BEFORE REMOVING
THE FUEL TANK FILLER CAP. IF THESE PRECAUTIONS ARE NOT FOLLOWED, FUEL MAY
SPRAY AND CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4436
Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair
FUEL FILLER TUBE
Heavy-Duty Riveter
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the left rear wheel.
WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY
TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN
POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Remove the gas cap.
WARNING: THE FUEL TANK MAY BE PRESSURIZED. REMOVE THE FUEL TANK FILLER CAP
SLOWLY. IF A HISSING SOUND IS HEARD, WAIT UNTIL THE CONDITION STOPS BEFORE
REMOVING THE FUEL TANK FILLER CAP. IF THESE PRECAUTIONS ARE NOT FOLLOWED,
FUEL MAY SPRAY AND CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY.
3. Remove the filler neck retaining screws.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4437
4. Remove the rivets and the fuel tank filler tube shield.
5. Remove the fuel filler tube.
1 Disconnect the hoses.
2 Remove the bolt and the fuel filler tube.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Use the Heavy-Duty Riveter to install the rivets.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4438
Heavy-Duty Riveter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL
ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON
Fuel Filler Neck: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON
Article No. 03-20-3
10/13/03
DRIVEABILITY - MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
(MIL) ILLUMINATED WITH DTC'S P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457, P1442 OR CHECK FUEL CAP
LAMP ILLUMINATED WITH DTC P0457
FORD: 1997-2000 CONTOUR 1997-2002 ESCORT 1997-2003 CROWN VICTORIA, MUSTANG,
TAURUS 1998-2003 ESCORT ZX2 2000-2003 FOCUS 2002-2003 THUNDERBIRD 1997 F-250
HD 1997-1999 F-250 LD 1997-2003 E SERIES, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER,
WINDSTAR 1999-2003 F SUPER DUTY 2000-2003 EXCURSION 2001-2003 ESCAPE,
EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 MARK VIII 1997-2002 CONTINENTAL 1997-2003 TOWN CAR 2000-2003
LS 1998-2003 NAVIGATOR 2002-2003 BLACKWOOD
MERCURY: 1997-1999 TRACER 1997-2000 MYSTIQUE 1997-2003 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE
1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2003 MOUNTAINEER
This article supersedes TSB 03-9-8 to update the vehicle lines and Service Procedures.
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illuminated with Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs) P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457 or P1442 or a "Check Fuel Cap" Lamp
illuminated with DTC P0457 for the Evaporative Emission System. This may be caused by loose or
leaking hoses, loose or broken fuel cap, a leak at the top of the fuel filler pipe neck, etc.
ACTION Use the Rotunda Leak Detector Smoke Machine (Part 218-00001) or equivalent, to locate
and repair leaks in the Evaporative Emission System. Refer to the following Service Procedure for
details.
Definitions of Acronyms
^ CVS Canister Vent Solenoid
^ DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code
^ EVAP Evaporative Emissions System
^ EVMV Electronic Vapor Management Valve
^ FTP Fuel Tank Pressure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL
ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4447
^ MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp
^ NGS New Generation STAR Tester
^ PID Parameter Identifier WDS Worldwide Diagnostic System
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE SUPERSEDES ALL OTHER PROCEDURES PUBLISHED IN SERVICE
MANUALS AND TSB ARTICLES.
NOTE
MANY EVAP LEAKS ARE CAUSED BY A LOOSE OR FAULTY CAP. IF THE FUEL CAP IS
SUSPECT DURING VISUAL INSPECTION, DO NOT DISTURB THE FUEL CAP UNTIL THE
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE IS COMPLETE. IF THE LEAK VERIFICATION FAILS, THE CAP
CAN BE REPOSITIONED OR REPLACED AND THE TEST REPEATED. THIS ACTION WILL
ISOLATE THE CAP FROM THE REST OF THE EVAP SYSTEM AS A POTENTIAL CONCERN. IF
DEBRIS ON THE SEALING SURFACE OF THE CAP APPEARS TO BE THE SOURCE OF THE
LEAK, CLEAN THE CAP AND REINSTALL.
OVERVIEW OF TEST PROCEDURES
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL
ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4448
NOTE
SEE (FIGURE 1) AT END OF ARTICLE FOR TEST PROCEDURE FLOWCHART.
This TSB provides the following procedures:
^ Check the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (9C915) for a no flow condition
^ Locate a leak so that a repair can be performed
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL
ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4449
^ Verify repair by utilizing a metered air pressure test
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE NO FLOW TEST
1. Using WDS Datalogger select the following PID's: EVAPVM # (or EVMV#), EVAPCV # and FTP.
2. Start the vehicle.
3. Close both the Canister Vent Solenoid (CVS) (EVAPCV # On or 100% duty cycle) and the EVAP
Canister Purge Valve (EVAPVM# Off or zero % duty cycle).
4. While monitoring the FTP PID, command open the EVAP Canister Purge Valve with the
EVAPVM# PID to 100% duty
5. If the FTP decreases and/or the RPM changes and/or the engine stalls, the test passed. Turn off
engine and proceed to test procedures below. Otherwise replace the EVAP Canister Purge Valve,
verify the repair by repeating the No Flow Test and return vehicle.
SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE)
1. Disconnect the larger of two manifold vacuum lines at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve and cap it
at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (see Figure 2).
2. Connect the Smoke Machine power cables to vehicle battery The "Power Indicator Lamp" should
be on indicating a good battery contact.
3. Position the selector valve on Rotunda's Smoke Machine Control Panel to "SMOKE".
4. Locate the vehicle's Evaporative Emission Service Test Port and remove the green cap. The
EVAP Service Test Port is located close to or on the EVAP Canister Purge Valve.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL
ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4450
WARNING
DO NOT REMOVE THE SCHRADER VALVE. REMOVING THE SCHRADER VALVE FROM THE
TEST PORT ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH THE ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT
VALVE (9G641) AND/OR ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT VALVE & BRACKET
ASSEMBLY (9G683) (SEE FIGURE 3), OR EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE (9C915) AND/OR
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE & BRACKET ASSEMBLY (9F933) (SEE FIGURE 2) WILL
PERMANENTLY DAMAGE THE VALVE.
5. Install the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter that is provided with the Rotunda's Smoke Machine
to EVAP Canister Purge Valve test port.
NOTE
SPECIAL PROCEDURES HAVE BEEN DESIGNATED FOR WINDSTAR, LS, THUNDERBIRD &
PZEV FOCUS BECAUSE THEY HAVE A CHECK VALVE THAT WILL PREVENT SMOKE FROM
ENTERING THE FILLER NECK.
6. Connect black smoke hose nozzle tip to the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter. For all except
Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus Use NGS or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN
AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS OPERATION).
7. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - Remove the fuel cap from the vehicle.
Depress remote starter button: Smoke will be introduced into the EVAP Emission System. Secure
the fuel cap once smoke is seen exiting from the fuel tank's neck area. For Windstar, LS,
Thunderbird & PZEV Focus, do not remove fuel cap. Depress starter button and introduce smoke to
system until it can be seen exiting the CVS (located by filler neck). Once smoke is seen, use NGS
or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS
OPERATION).
8. Press and release the remote starter button in intervals of approximately 15 seconds on and 15
seconds off. Use the halogen light provided with the Smoke Machine to look for smoke in the
engine compartment, EVAP hoses to EVAP Canister Purge Valve, CVS, carbon canister and area
around the fuel cap. Wiggle fuel vapor lines to check for leaks. Check for leaks in areas that are
difficult to access, such as connections on top of the tank where connections may be or inside
frame rails. Use the black light to ensure that there are no leaks. If a leak is detected, repair as
necessary. If the leak is not detected from the top, check under the bottom of vehicle. Inspect the
EVAP hoses running to the carbon canister, fuel filler neck, CVS, and EVAP Canister Purge Valve.
Go to LEAK VERIFICATION to verify any repair or if no leak is found.
LEAK VERIFICATION (METERED AIR SYSTEM)
1. Position the selector valve located on the Smoke Machine control panel to "METER".
2. Verify calibration of the flow meter by using the .020" calibrated leak orifice. To do this, insert air
supply hose (transparent hose) nozzle tip into appropriate EVAP System calibrated leak orifice
located on the front of the Smoke Machine panel.
3. TURN ON: Depress the remote starter button. Observe the position of the flow meter indicator
ball. Position the flow meter red pointer flag so it aligns with the measurement of the indicator ball.
Release the button and remove the air supply hose nozzle tip from the EVAP System calibrated
leak orifice.
NOTE
THIS FLOW METER CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT INDICATES THE VEHICLE PASS OR FAIL
CRITERIA BASED ON THE .020" EVAP SYSTEM LEAK STANDARD.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL
ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4451
4. Connect the transparent air supply hose nozzle tip into the EVAP Service Test Port adapter.
5. Use NGS or WDS Diagnostic tool to CLOSE the CVS.
6. Depress the remote starter button on the Rotunda's Smoke Leak Detector. The indicator ball in
the flowmeter will go all the way to the top indicating the system is being pressurized. Continue to
depress the remote starter button until the ball stops descending. Once the indicator ball has
stopped descending, observe if it is above or below the red indicator flag. If performing this
verification following a repair, go to Step 7. If performing this verification after performing the
SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE), go to Step 8.
7. Leak Verification After Repair
a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed. The test procedure is
complete. Remove the Smoke Machine Test equipment from the vehicle and reconnect the large
EVAP Canister Purge Valve manifold vacuum hose and the test port's green cap.
b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST
PROCEDURE).
8. Leak Verification After Passing SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE)
a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed, go to Step 9.
b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST
PROCEDURE).
9. Using WDS Datalogger or NGS select the FTPV PID.
10. Remove Fuel Cap and turn the vehicle's ignition switch to the run position and check the FTPV
PID.
11. The nominal value for the FTPV PID is 2.6V. If the value is greater than 2.8V or less than 2.4V,
the FTP sensor is out of range and should be replaced. Verify the repair by checking to see if the
new sensor is in range. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - if the sensor is
within range, the concern is no longer present. (Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus go to
Step 12.)
12. For Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus only verify that filler neck clamps are in good
working order and tightened. Repair as necessary. If no problem is found with clamps, replace the
fuel cap.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-9-8 WARRANTY STATUS:
INFORMATION ONLY
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON
Fuel Filler Neck: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap
Lamp ON
Article No. 03-20-3
10/13/03
DRIVEABILITY - MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
(MIL) ILLUMINATED WITH DTC'S P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457, P1442 OR CHECK FUEL CAP
LAMP ILLUMINATED WITH DTC P0457
FORD: 1997-2000 CONTOUR 1997-2002 ESCORT 1997-2003 CROWN VICTORIA, MUSTANG,
TAURUS 1998-2003 ESCORT ZX2 2000-2003 FOCUS 2002-2003 THUNDERBIRD 1997 F-250
HD 1997-1999 F-250 LD 1997-2003 E SERIES, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER,
WINDSTAR 1999-2003 F SUPER DUTY 2000-2003 EXCURSION 2001-2003 ESCAPE,
EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 MARK VIII 1997-2002 CONTINENTAL 1997-2003 TOWN CAR 2000-2003
LS 1998-2003 NAVIGATOR 2002-2003 BLACKWOOD
MERCURY: 1997-1999 TRACER 1997-2000 MYSTIQUE 1997-2003 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE
1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2003 MOUNTAINEER
This article supersedes TSB 03-9-8 to update the vehicle lines and Service Procedures.
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illuminated with Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs) P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457 or P1442 or a "Check Fuel Cap" Lamp
illuminated with DTC P0457 for the Evaporative Emission System. This may be caused by loose or
leaking hoses, loose or broken fuel cap, a leak at the top of the fuel filler pipe neck, etc.
ACTION Use the Rotunda Leak Detector Smoke Machine (Part 218-00001) or equivalent, to locate
and repair leaks in the Evaporative Emission System. Refer to the following Service Procedure for
details.
Definitions of Acronyms
^ CVS Canister Vent Solenoid
^ DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code
^ EVAP Evaporative Emissions System
^ EVMV Electronic Vapor Management Valve
^ FTP Fuel Tank Pressure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4457
^ MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp
^ NGS New Generation STAR Tester
^ PID Parameter Identifier WDS Worldwide Diagnostic System
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE SUPERSEDES ALL OTHER PROCEDURES PUBLISHED IN SERVICE
MANUALS AND TSB ARTICLES.
NOTE
MANY EVAP LEAKS ARE CAUSED BY A LOOSE OR FAULTY CAP. IF THE FUEL CAP IS
SUSPECT DURING VISUAL INSPECTION, DO NOT DISTURB THE FUEL CAP UNTIL THE
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE IS COMPLETE. IF THE LEAK VERIFICATION FAILS, THE CAP
CAN BE REPOSITIONED OR REPLACED AND THE TEST REPEATED. THIS ACTION WILL
ISOLATE THE CAP FROM THE REST OF THE EVAP SYSTEM AS A POTENTIAL CONCERN. IF
DEBRIS ON THE SEALING SURFACE OF THE CAP APPEARS TO BE THE SOURCE OF THE
LEAK, CLEAN THE CAP AND REINSTALL.
OVERVIEW OF TEST PROCEDURES
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4458
NOTE
SEE (FIGURE 1) AT END OF ARTICLE FOR TEST PROCEDURE FLOWCHART.
This TSB provides the following procedures:
^ Check the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (9C915) for a no flow condition
^ Locate a leak so that a repair can be performed
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4459
^ Verify repair by utilizing a metered air pressure test
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE NO FLOW TEST
1. Using WDS Datalogger select the following PID's: EVAPVM # (or EVMV#), EVAPCV # and FTP.
2. Start the vehicle.
3. Close both the Canister Vent Solenoid (CVS) (EVAPCV # On or 100% duty cycle) and the EVAP
Canister Purge Valve (EVAPVM# Off or zero % duty cycle).
4. While monitoring the FTP PID, command open the EVAP Canister Purge Valve with the
EVAPVM# PID to 100% duty
5. If the FTP decreases and/or the RPM changes and/or the engine stalls, the test passed. Turn off
engine and proceed to test procedures below. Otherwise replace the EVAP Canister Purge Valve,
verify the repair by repeating the No Flow Test and return vehicle.
SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE)
1. Disconnect the larger of two manifold vacuum lines at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve and cap it
at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (see Figure 2).
2. Connect the Smoke Machine power cables to vehicle battery The "Power Indicator Lamp" should
be on indicating a good battery contact.
3. Position the selector valve on Rotunda's Smoke Machine Control Panel to "SMOKE".
4. Locate the vehicle's Evaporative Emission Service Test Port and remove the green cap. The
EVAP Service Test Port is located close to or on the EVAP Canister Purge Valve.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4460
WARNING
DO NOT REMOVE THE SCHRADER VALVE. REMOVING THE SCHRADER VALVE FROM THE
TEST PORT ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH THE ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT
VALVE (9G641) AND/OR ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT VALVE & BRACKET
ASSEMBLY (9G683) (SEE FIGURE 3), OR EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE (9C915) AND/OR
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE & BRACKET ASSEMBLY (9F933) (SEE FIGURE 2) WILL
PERMANENTLY DAMAGE THE VALVE.
5. Install the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter that is provided with the Rotunda's Smoke Machine
to EVAP Canister Purge Valve test port.
NOTE
SPECIAL PROCEDURES HAVE BEEN DESIGNATED FOR WINDSTAR, LS, THUNDERBIRD &
PZEV FOCUS BECAUSE THEY HAVE A CHECK VALVE THAT WILL PREVENT SMOKE FROM
ENTERING THE FILLER NECK.
6. Connect black smoke hose nozzle tip to the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter. For all except
Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus Use NGS or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN
AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS OPERATION).
7. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - Remove the fuel cap from the vehicle.
Depress remote starter button: Smoke will be introduced into the EVAP Emission System. Secure
the fuel cap once smoke is seen exiting from the fuel tank's neck area. For Windstar, LS,
Thunderbird & PZEV Focus, do not remove fuel cap. Depress starter button and introduce smoke to
system until it can be seen exiting the CVS (located by filler neck). Once smoke is seen, use NGS
or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS
OPERATION).
8. Press and release the remote starter button in intervals of approximately 15 seconds on and 15
seconds off. Use the halogen light provided with the Smoke Machine to look for smoke in the
engine compartment, EVAP hoses to EVAP Canister Purge Valve, CVS, carbon canister and area
around the fuel cap. Wiggle fuel vapor lines to check for leaks. Check for leaks in areas that are
difficult to access, such as connections on top of the tank where connections may be or inside
frame rails. Use the black light to ensure that there are no leaks. If a leak is detected, repair as
necessary. If the leak is not detected from the top, check under the bottom of vehicle. Inspect the
EVAP hoses running to the carbon canister, fuel filler neck, CVS, and EVAP Canister Purge Valve.
Go to LEAK VERIFICATION to verify any repair or if no leak is found.
LEAK VERIFICATION (METERED AIR SYSTEM)
1. Position the selector valve located on the Smoke Machine control panel to "METER".
2. Verify calibration of the flow meter by using the .020" calibrated leak orifice. To do this, insert air
supply hose (transparent hose) nozzle tip into appropriate EVAP System calibrated leak orifice
located on the front of the Smoke Machine panel.
3. TURN ON: Depress the remote starter button. Observe the position of the flow meter indicator
ball. Position the flow meter red pointer flag so it aligns with the measurement of the indicator ball.
Release the button and remove the air supply hose nozzle tip from the EVAP System calibrated
leak orifice.
NOTE
THIS FLOW METER CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT INDICATES THE VEHICLE PASS OR FAIL
CRITERIA BASED ON THE .020" EVAP SYSTEM LEAK STANDARD.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4461
4. Connect the transparent air supply hose nozzle tip into the EVAP Service Test Port adapter.
5. Use NGS or WDS Diagnostic tool to CLOSE the CVS.
6. Depress the remote starter button on the Rotunda's Smoke Leak Detector. The indicator ball in
the flowmeter will go all the way to the top indicating the system is being pressurized. Continue to
depress the remote starter button until the ball stops descending. Once the indicator ball has
stopped descending, observe if it is above or below the red indicator flag. If performing this
verification following a repair, go to Step 7. If performing this verification after performing the
SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE), go to Step 8.
7. Leak Verification After Repair
a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed. The test procedure is
complete. Remove the Smoke Machine Test equipment from the vehicle and reconnect the large
EVAP Canister Purge Valve manifold vacuum hose and the test port's green cap.
b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST
PROCEDURE).
8. Leak Verification After Passing SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE)
a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed, go to Step 9.
b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST
PROCEDURE).
9. Using WDS Datalogger or NGS select the FTPV PID.
10. Remove Fuel Cap and turn the vehicle's ignition switch to the run position and check the FTPV
PID.
11. The nominal value for the FTPV PID is 2.6V. If the value is greater than 2.8V or less than 2.4V,
the FTP sensor is out of range and should be replaced. Verify the repair by checking to see if the
new sensor is in range. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - if the sensor is
within range, the concern is no longer present. (Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus go to
Step 12.)
12. For Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus only verify that filler neck clamps are in good
working order and tightened. Repair as necessary. If no problem is found with clamps, replace the
fuel cap.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-9-8 WARRANTY STATUS:
INFORMATION ONLY
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Neck: > NHTSA00V210001
> Aug > 00 > Recall 00V210001: Speed Control Cable Corrosion/Binding
Cruise Control Servo Cable: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 00V210001: Speed Control
Cable Corrosion/Binding
The speed control cable can have a cracked or missing speed control cable servo cap locating tab.
The locating tab could enter the servo clutch cavity and interfere with the speed control servo
clutch. Also, water could enter those units that contain a cracked or missing servo cap locating tab,
eventually causing corrosion that could interfere with the function of the speed control.
If either of these conditions occurs and the speed control is used, the speed control could prevent
the throttle from returning to idle, resulting in a stuck throttle. A stuck throttle could result in a crash.
Dealers will inspect the speed control cables. Vehicles with speed control cables from cavities 3
and 4 will have the cable the speed control servo replaced. Owner notification began August 6,
2000. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and
do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673.
Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at
1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Mounting
Straps > Component Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Tank Mounting Straps: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Use a suitable jack to support the fuel tank.
3. Disconnect the pin-type retainer from the fuel tank strap and position the parking brake cable
aside.
4. Remove the bolts and the fuel tank straps.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component
Information > Service Precautions
Fuel Tank Unit: Service Precautions
WARNING: Adhere to the following procedures any time the fuel system is being worked on in
order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury:
- Keep a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher near the work area.
- Place a "CAUTION FLAMMABLE" sign in the work area.
- Work in a well-ventilated area. Do not smoke, and keep sparks and open flames away.
- Wear eye protection.
- Use caution when working near the catalytic converter to prevent the possibility of burns or fire.
(The temperatures within the converter can exceed 537 °C (1000 °F).
- Relieve the fuel system pressure prior to disconnecting fuel system components.
- Disconnect the negative battery cable except for tests where battery voltage is required.
- Use a suitable container to store or catch fuel.
- Do not replace fuel pipe with fuel hose.
- Plug all disconnected fuel line fittings and hoses.
- After making any fuel system repairs ALWAYS inspect for fuel leaks.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle
Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle
Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4481
Idle Air Control Valve: Description and Operation
IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE
Nippondenso Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Assembly
Hitachi Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Assembly With Vent/Filter
The Idle Air Control (IAC) valve assembly (Figure 117) and (Figure 118) controls engine idle speed
and provides a dashpot function. The IAC valve assembly meters intake air around the throttle
plate through a bypass within the IAC valve assembly and throttle body. The PCM determines the
desired idle speed or bypass air and signals the IAC valve assembly through a specified duty cycle.
The IAC valve responds by positioning the IAC valve to control the amount of bypassed air. The
PCM monitors engine rpm and increases or decreases the IAC duty cycle in order to achieve the
desired rpm.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle
Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4482
Hitachi Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Assembly With Air-Assist Injectors
On applications with air-assisted injectors, the IAC valve (Figure 119) also supplies a small amount
of air into the path of the fuel injectors. The jet of air causes an increase in fuel atomization at low
speed and light load conditions.
NOTE: The IAC Valve Assembly is NOT ADJUSTABLE and CANNOT BE CLEANED.
The IAC valve (part of throttle body assembly) has an internal diode on some applications. If the
internal diode is measured in crossed terminal position with a digital multimeter, there will be an
incorrect or negative reading. It is important that the mating component and harness connectors
correctly oriented. Diagnostic procedures emphasize this importance.
The PCM uses the IAC valve assembly to control:
^ No touch start
^ Cold engine fast idle for rapid warm-up
^ Idle (corrects for engine load)
^ Stumble or stalling on deceleration (provides a dashpot function)
^ Over-temperature idle boost.
^ Air Assist to Injectors.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle
Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4483
Idle Air Control Valve: Testing and Inspection
Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Noise
1. Open the hood. 2. Verify the condition by operating the vehicle for a short time.
NOTE: ^
Key symptom is elevated idle speed while noise is occurring.
^ "Snapping" the throttle can induce the noise.
3. Inspect the IAC. If physical evidence of contamination exists, install a new IAC. 4. While the
noise is occurring, either place an EngineEAR probe near the IAC valve and the inlet tube, or
create a 6.35 mm (0.25 in)-12.7 mm
(0.50 in) air gap between the inlet tube and the clean air tube. If the IAC valve is making the noise,
install a new IAC valve.
5. Test the vehicle for normal operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle
Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4484
Idle Air Control Valve: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Disconnect the Idle Air Control (IAC) valve electrical connector.
3. Remove the two bolts and the IAC valve.
^ Discard the gasket.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Install a new gasket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4488
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4489
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
The Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 72) is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump.
The purpose of the IFS switch is to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel
ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the
magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the
switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset
before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner Guide for the location of the IFS.
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4490
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the cowl side trim panel.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the nut.
3 Remove the cowl side trim panel.
2. Remove the Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch.
1 Disconnect the connector.
2 Remove the screws and the IFS switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Intake Air Duct > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Intake Air Duct: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the air cleaner outlet pipe at the mass air flow sensor.
^ Unclip the throttle cable from the outlet pipe.
^ Loosen the screw clamp and disconnect the pipe.
2. Remove the outlet pipe.
1 Disconnect the outlet pipe from the throttle body.
2 Unclip the hose from the outlet pipe.
3 Disconnect the crankcase vent tube and remove the air cleaner outlet pipe.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: The air cleaner outlet pipe should be securely sealed to prevent unmetered air from
entering the engine.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Powertrain Control Module Power
Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Powertrain Control Module Power
Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 4497
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4502
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4503
Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4504
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Powertrain Control Module Power Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component
Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Powertrain Control Module Power Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4508
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Resonator, Intake Air > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Resonator: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the left front wheel.
2. Remove the seven pin-type retainers and four screws and position aside the left inner fender
splash shield.
3. Remove the bolt and remove the intake air resonator.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Make sure the front rubber grommet is seated in the bracket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations >
Page 4516
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations >
Page 4517
Mass Air Flow Sensor: Description and Operation
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air
entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at
200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 36). If the
hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced.
Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow.
The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air
mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio (Figure 37). This input is also used in determining transmission Electronic Pressure
Control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Some MAF sensors have Integrated Bypass Technology (IBT) with an integrated Intake Air
Temperature (IAT) sensor. The present applications with IBT are: Focus, Escort (4V), 2.0L Cougar,
Escape, Taurus/Sable, Windstar, Explorer/Mountaineer and E-Series.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations >
Page 4518
Mass Air Flow Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4522
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4523
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR
Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
The Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 31) is a diaphragm strain gauge device in which
resistance changes with pressure. The electrical resistance of a strain gauge increases as
pressure increases, and decreases as pressure decreases. The varying resistance affects the
voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding
to pressure.
Strain gauge type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The FRP sensor measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by
the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulse width and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder.
Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
The Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 32) senses the pressure difference between the fuel
rail and the intake manifold. The return fuel line to the fuel tank has been deleted in this type of fuel
system. The differential fuel/intake manifold pressure together with measured fuel temperature
provides an indication of the fuel vapors in the fuel rail. Both differential pressure and temperature
feedback signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump
sustains fuel rail pressure which preserve fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel
injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to
decrease.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4527
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4528
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
The Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 72) is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump.
The purpose of the IFS switch is to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel
ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the
magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the
switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset
before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner Guide for the location of the IFS.
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4529
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the cowl side trim panel.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the nut.
3 Remove the cowl side trim panel.
2. Remove the Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch.
1 Disconnect the connector.
2 Remove the screws and the IFS switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4533
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > PCM Inputs
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation PCM Inputs
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Typical Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
The Throttle Position (TP) sensor (Figure 42) is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a
signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing
has a three-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases
corrosion resistance on terminals and increases connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on
the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are
determined by the PCM from the TP. Those conditions are closed throttle (includes idle or
deceleration), part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration), wide open throttle (includes
maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank), and throttle angle rate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > PCM Inputs >
Page 4536
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Systems
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system for component integrity, system
functionality, and faults that can cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government
regulations. For additional information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System
Hardware-PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Throttle Body: Technician Safety Information
WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY
TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 4541
Throttle Body: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION:
^ Throttle body bore and plate area have a special coating and should not be cleaned.
^ The throttle body sealing surfaces are soft materials. Use care if cleaning is necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Throttle Body Housing
Throttle Body: Description and Operation Throttle Body Housing
THROTTLE BODY HOUSING
The throttle body housing assembly is a single piece of aluminum casting with an air passage and
a butterfly throttle plate with linkage mechanisms. When the throttle plate is in the idle (or closed)
position, the throttle lever arm should be in contact with the Throttle Return Stop. The throttle return
stop prevents the throttle plate from contacting the bore and sticking closed. The setting also
establishes the amount of air flow between the throttle plate and bore. To minimize the closed plate
air flow, a special coating is applied to the throttle plate and bore to help seal this area. This
sealant/coating also makes the throttle body resistant to engine intake sludge accumulation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Throttle Body Housing > Page 4544
Throttle Body: Description and Operation Throttle Body System Overview
THROTTLE BODY SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The throttle body system meters air to the engine during idle, part throttle, and Wide Open Throttle
(WOT) conditions. The throttle body system consists of an Idle Air Control (IAC) valve assembly,
idle air orifice, single or dual bores with butterfly valve throttle plates and a Throttle Position (TP)
sensor. One other source of idle air flow is the Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) system. The
combined idle air flow (from idle air orifice IAC flow and PCV flow) is measured by the MAF sensor
on all applications.
During idle, the throttle body assembly provides a set amount of air flow to the engine through the
idle air passage and PCV valve. The IAC valve assembly provides additional air when commanded
by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) to maintain the proper engine idle speed under varying
conditions. The IAC valve assembly mounts directly to the throttle body assembly in most
applications, but is remote-mounted to the intake manifold in some applications. Idle speed is
controlled by the PCM and cannot be adjusted.
NOTE: The traditional idle air adjust procedure as well as throttle return screw are no longer used
on OBD II applications.
Throttle rotation is controlled by a cam/cable linkage to slow the initial opening rate of the throttle
plate. The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. Some
throttle body applications provide an air supply channel upstream of the throttle plate to provide
fresh air to the Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) or IAC systems. Other throttle body
applications provide individual vacuum taps downstream of the throttle plate for PCV return,
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR), Evaporative Emission (EVAP), and miscellaneous control
signals.
Throttle Body System Hardware
The major components of the throttle body assembly include the TP sensor, IAC valve assembly,
and throttle body housing assembly.
Throttle Position Sensor
The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system for component integrity, system
functionality, and faults that can cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government
regulations. For additional information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System
Hardware-PCM Inputs.
Idle Air Control Valve
Nippondenso Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Assembly
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Throttle Body Housing > Page 4545
Hitachi Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Assembly With Vent/Filter
The Idle Air Control (IAC) valve assembly (Figure 117) and (Figure 118) controls engine idle speed
and provides a dashpot function. The IAC valve assembly meters intake air around the throttle
plate through a bypass within the IAC valve assembly and throttle body. The PCM determines the
desired idle speed or bypass air and signals the IAC valve assembly through a specified duty cycle.
The IAC valve responds by positioning the IAC valve to control the amount of bypassed air. The
PCM monitors engine rpm and increases or decreases the IAC duty cycle in order to achieve the
desired rpm.
Hitachi Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Assembly With Air-Assist Injectors
On applications with air-assisted injectors, the IAC valve (Figure 119) also supplies a small amount
of air into the path of the fuel injectors. The jet of air causes an increase in fuel atomization at low
speed and light load conditions.
NOTE: The IAC Valve Assembly is NOT ADJUSTABLE and CANNOT BE CLEANED.
The IAC valve (part of throttle body assembly) has an internal diode on some applications. If the
internal diode is measured in crossed terminal position with a digital multimeter, there will be an
incorrect or negative reading. It is important that the mating component and harness connectors
correctly oriented. Diagnostic procedures emphasize this importance.
The PCM uses the IAC valve assembly to control:
^ No touch start
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Throttle Body Housing > Page 4546
^ Cold engine fast idle for rapid warm-up
^ Idle (corrects for engine load)
^ Stumble or stalling on deceleration (provides a dashpot function)
^ Over-temperature idle boost.
^ Air Assist to Injectors.
Throttle Body Housing
The throttle body housing assembly is a single piece of aluminum casting with an air passage and
a butterfly throttle plate with linkage mechanisms. When the throttle plate is in the idle (or closed)
position, the throttle lever arm should be in contact with the Throttle Return Stop. The throttle return
stop prevents the throttle plate from contacting the bore and sticking closed. The setting also
establishes the amount of air flow between the throttle plate and bore. To minimize the closed plate
air flow, a special coating is applied to the throttle plate and bore to help seal this area. This
sealant/coating also makes the throttle body resistant to engine intake sludge accumulation.
Typical Attention Decal Locations
Features of the Throttle Body Assembly include:
1. Idle Air Control (IAC) valve assembly mounted directly to the throttle body assembly (some
vehicles). 2. A pre-set stop to locate the WOT position. 3. An air supply channel upstream of the
throttle plate to provide fresh air to the PCV system (some vehicles only). 4. Individual vacuum taps
for PCV, EGR, Evaporative Emission (EVAP) and miscellaneous control signals (some vehicles
only). 5. PCV air return (it applicable). 6. A throttle body-mounted Throttle Position (TP) sensor. 7.
A sealant/coating on the throttle bore and throttle plate makes the throttle body air flow tolerant to
engine intake sludge accumulation. These
throttle body assemblies MUST NOT BE CLEANED and have a white/black attention decal (Figure
116) advising not to clean.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 4547
Throttle Body: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY
TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
CAUTION: Throttle body bore and plate area have a special coating and should not be cleaned.
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe.
2. Remove the throttle body.
1 Disconnect the accelerator cable and, if equipped, the speed control actuator cable.
2 Disconnect the throttle position sensor electrical connector.
3 Remove the screws and throttle body.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
CAUTION: The throttle body sealing surfaces are soft materials. Use care if cleaning is necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 4551
Throttle Cable/Linkage: Service Precautions
WARNING: MAKE SURE SURROUNDING COMPONENTS SUCH AS WIRING, HOSES, SOUND
INSULATION AND FLOOR CARPETING ARE NOT CONTACTING THE SLIDING INNER CABLE
OF THE ACCELERATOR CABLE OR THE ACCELERATOR PEDAL AND SHAFT. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
CAUTION: Do not pull the accelerator cable out by the cable housing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 4552
Throttle Cable/Linkage: Description and Operation
The acceleration control consists of the pedal and shaft assembly, accelerator cable and
accelerator cable bracket.
WARNING: MAKE SURE SURROUNDING COMPONENTS SUCH AS WIRING, HOSES, SOUND
INSULATION AND FLOOR CARPETING ARE NOT CONTACTING THE SLIDING INNER CABLE
OF THE ACCELERATOR CABLE OR THE ACCELERATOR PEDAL AND SHAFT. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
The throttle is controlled by an accelerator cable attached to the accelerator pedal and shaft. The
accelerator pedal and shaft should travel smoothly from the idle to the wide-open throttle positions.
Hesitation on return or prevention of return to the idle position must not occur.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 4553
Throttle Cable/Linkage: Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is part of,
please refer to Accelerator Pedal; Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Cable
Throttle Cable/Linkage: Service and Repair Cable
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the accelerator cable from the throttle lever and bracket.
1 Disconnect the accelerator cable from the throttle lever.
2 Disconnect the accelerator cable from the bracket.
2. Disconnect the accelerator cable from the pedal.
3. Remove the accelerator cable.
1 Remove the bracket bolt.
2 Disconnect the accelerator cable from the air cleaner outlet tube.
3 Remove the accelerator cable from the dash panel.
CAUTION: Do not pull the accelerator cable out by the cable housing.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: To ease installation, remove the grommet from the throttle lever and install it onto the
accelerator cable end.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Cable > Page 4556
Throttle Cable/Linkage: Service and Repair Cable Bracket
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the crankcase ventilation hose.
2. Remove the bolt, nuts and the engine appearance cover.
3. Disconnect the throttle control linkage from the throttle lever.
1 If equipped, disconnect the speed control cable from the throttle lever.
2 Rotate the throttle lever.
3 Slide the accelerator cable end out of the throttle lever.
4. Disconnect the throttle control linkage from the accelerator cable bracket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Cable > Page 4557
1 Disconnect the accelerator cable from the bracket.
2 If equipped, squeeze the tabs and disconnect the speed control cable from the accelerator cable
bracket.
5. Remove the bolts and the accelerator cable bracket.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4561
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > PCM Inputs
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation PCM Inputs
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Typical Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
The Throttle Position (TP) sensor (Figure 42) is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a
signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing
has a three-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases
corrosion resistance on terminals and increases connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on
the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are
determined by the PCM from the TP. Those conditions are closed throttle (includes idle or
deceleration), part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration), wide open throttle (includes
maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank), and throttle angle rate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > PCM Inputs > Page 4564
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Systems
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system for component integrity, system
functionality, and faults that can cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government
regulations. For additional information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System
Hardware-PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Variable Induction System >
Variable Induction Control Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation
Variable Induction Control Valve: Description and Operation
INTAKE MANIFOLD TUNING VALVE (IMTV)
Intake Manifold Tuning Valve (IMTV)
3.0L LS6 Intake Air System
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Variable Induction System >
Variable Induction Control Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4569
4.6L E/F-Series Intake Air System
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Variable Induction System >
Variable Induction Control Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4570
5.4L (4) Intake Air System
The Intake Manifold Tuning Valve (IMTV) (Figure 107) is a motorized actuated unit mounted
directly to the intake manifold. The IMTV actuator controls a shutter device attached to the actuator
shaft. There is no monitor input to the PCM with this system to indicate shutter position.
The motorized IMTV unit will not be energized below approximately 2600 rpm or higher on some
vehicles. The shutter will be in the closed position not allowing airflow blend to occur in the intake
manifold. Above approximately 2600 rpm or higher, the motorized unit will be energized. The
motorized unit will be commanded on by the PCM initially at a 100 percent duty cycle to move the
shutter to the open position and then falling to approximately 50 percent to continue to hold the
shutter open.
1. The PCM uses the TP sensor and CKP signals to determine activation of the IMTV system.
There must be a positive change in voltage from
the TP sensor along with the increase in rpm to open the shutter.
2. The PCM uses the information from the input signals to control the IMTV. 3. When commanded
on by the PCM, the motorized actuator shutter opens up the end of the vertical separating wall at
high engine speeds to
allow both sides of the manifold to blend together.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information >
Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
4-Cyl Firing Order: 1 3 4 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4575
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4583
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4584
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
The Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor
identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the Powertrain
Control Module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the firing of sequential fuel injectors. The Coil
On Plug (COP) Ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to
fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit.
Typical Hall-Effect Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor
There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 22)
and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor (Figure 23).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4585
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4589
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4590
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS)
Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors
The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block
adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse
wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for
a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9
degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates
crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is
also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of
tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to fixed reference (Figure 25).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4591
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the exhaust manifold.
2. Remove the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Service
Precautions
Ignition Cable: Service Precautions
CAUTION:
^ Do not pull on the ignition wire directly, as the wire may separate from the connector inside the
spark plug boot.
^ Correct installation of the ignition wires is critical to engine operation. If one spark plug wire is not
correctly installed at either the spark plug or the ignition coil, both spark plugs connected to the
ignition coil may not fire under load.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 4595
Ignition Cable: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Grasp the spark plug boot firmly and with a twisting-pulling motion, disconnect the ignition wires
from the spark plugs.
CAUTION: Do not pull on the ignition wire directly, as the wire may separate from the connector
inside the spark plug boot.
2. Disconnect the ignition wires from the ignition coil and remove the wires.
INSTALLATION
1. Connect the ignition wires to the correct ignition coil terminals.
CAUTION: Correct installation of the ignition wires is critical to engine operation. If one spark plug
wire is not correctly installed at either the spark plug or the ignition coil, both spark plugs connected
to the ignition coil may not fire under load.
NOTE: ^
Whenever an ignition wire is reinstalled or a new one is installed, apply Silicone Brake Caliper
Grease and Dielectric compound to the interior surface of the ignition wire boot.
^ Before installing the ignition wires, inspect the ignition wires for any visible damage; install new
ignition wires if necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 4596
2. Connect the ignition wires to the correct spark plugs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips
Ignition Coil: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips
TSB 05-22-8
11/14/05
WDS COP KIT DIAGNOSTIC TIPS - COIL ON PLUG
(COP) IGNITION SYSTEMS - ENGINE MISFIRE OR ROUGH RUNNING
FORD: 1996-1999 Taurus SHO 1998-2006 Crown Victoria, Mustang 2000 Taurus 2002-2005
Thunderbird 2003-2006 Focus 2004-2006 Taurus 2005-2006 Five Hundred, Freestyle 1997-2006
E-Series, Expedition, F-150 1999-2006 F-Super Duty 2000-2005 Excursion, F-53 2001-2006
Escape 2002-2005 Explorer 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1998-2002 Continental 1998-2006 Town Car 2000-2006 LS
1998-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1998-2006 Grand Marquis 2000 Sable 2004-2005 Sable 2005-2006 Montego
2002-2005 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 04-16-01 to update the vehicle applications and model years.
NOTE
FOLLOW THIS TSB PROCEDURE ONLY IF THERE ARE NO SPECIFIC MISFIRE TSBs/SSMs
RELEASED FOR THE VEHICLE SYMPTOM BEING EXPERIENCED.
ISSUE Approximately 50% of coil on plug (COP) coils returned for warranty do not have a problem.
ACTION The misfiring cylinder must be identified through Self-Test misfire codes or through WDS
Power Balance. Rule out base engine problems, rule out fuel problems, and then look at ignition
problems (be sure to rule out coil primary circuit issues). Once the above steps have been
completed, and the issue is in the secondary part of the ignition system, the oscilloscope procedure
outlined in this TSB can isolate the difference between a coil or spark plug problem.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
The optional WDS COP Kit available through Rotunda will provide more accurate diagnosis and
help reduce replacement of non-defective parts. The Kit (418-F5528) can be purchased through
1-800-ROTUNDA.
The following material will detail the diagnostic steps on WDS to take the guesswork out of misfire
diagnosis using the COP Kit. The following
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 4601
procedure is for cylinder specific misfires and not random misfires. Random misfires have a
different root cause and are not covered by this TSB.
Misfire Definition: A misfiring cylinder is lacking power relative to the other cylinders. The causes
for a cylinder specific misfire could be fuel, spark, or mechanical problems.
Perform a thorough visual inspection. If no visible concerns are found use the following WDS tools
for misfire diagnosis:
^ Self-test (Check for codes first)
Power Balance (Identify the cylinder of concern)
^ Relative Compression (Rule out a possible mechanical issue)
^ Fuel (Make sure fuel injectors are not restricted)
^ Ignition (Make sure spark plugs and coils are working properly)
^ Oscilloscope (Detailed signal analysis)
NOTE
USE THE ENCYCLOPEDIA BUTTON IN THE LOWER LEFT CORNER OF THE SCREEN FOR
DETAILED INFORMATION ON THE WDS TOOL BEING DISPLAYED.
If there is a self-test code identifying a particular cylinder then you just need to determine if it is a
fuel, ignition, or possibly a mechanical problem. Proceed to Step 2 after running Relative
Compression to rule out any mechanical issues. If there is no self-test code and the customer
concern is a miss, proceed to Step 1.
Step 1: (Select Toolbox Icon, then Powertrain, then Power Balance)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 4602
The cylinder specific miss has to be identified as shown in the example in Figure 2 in order to
proceed with the remaining steps. If the miss does not occur at idle (in the bay), try to brake torque
the engine. This extra loading should reproduce the miss in the bay. If the miss cannot be
reproduced during brake torque, select Relative Compression under Powertrain on WDS before
going on a road test to rule out mechanical problems. If Relative Compression shows a problem
then the base engine issue must be serviced. If Relative Compression results are good (Figure 3),
road test under as many different driving conditions as possible until the miss occurs on Power
Balance. Some misses may be very intermiffent so be patient and concentrate on steady load
conditions. Once a cylinder dropout is identified proceed to Step 2.
Step 2: (Select Toolbox Icon, then Powertrain, then Fuel System Test)
Run Fuel System Test on WDS to determine if there may be a fuel problem. After completing fuel
Pressure/Leakdown test, select Injector flow to isolate
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 4603
a restricted injector as shown in Figure 4. If all the injectors are within specification, proceed to
Step 3.
Step 3: (Select Toolbox Icon, then Powertrain, then Ignition System Test)
Run Ignition System Test on WDS to determine if there is an ignition problem. Look at both
duration (DUR) and kilovolts (KV) and look for values that standout from the rest as shown in
Figure 5 and Figure 6.
NOTE
LIVE DISPLAY HAS TO AVERAGE IGNITION VALUES BECAUSE THERE IS TOO MUCH DATA
TO DISPLAY. MAKE A CAPTURE TO VIEW EACH ENGINE EVENT WITHOUT AVERAGING.
THIS CAN BE HELPFUL WHEN THE PROBLEM IS INTERMITTENT. IF THE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 4604
MISS IS EXTREMELY INTERMITTENT AND DOES NOT SHOW UP IN IGNITION, PROCEED TO
STEP 4.
If either spark duration or peak KV on the Red Probe (Suspect Cylinder) are offset from the values
displayed on the Black Probe (Known Good Cylinder) then the problem is in the ignition system.
Rule out coil primary circuit issues before proceeding to coil secondary issues such as the spark
plug , coil boot, or possibly the coil. Use the WDS Oscilloscope with the COP kit to determine if the
issue is the coil or the spark plug.
Step 4: (Select Toolbox, then Oscilloscope)
WARNING
SECONDARY IGNITION VOLTAGES ARE VERY HIGH. KEEP HANDS AND TOOLS AWAY
FROM THE END OF THE COIL THAT SUPPLIES THE SPARK.
SET-UP: With the engine off, pull the suspect coil from the cylinder well and turn it upside down so
the coil cannot spark to any other surface as shown in Figure 1. Wrap a clean shop cloth around
the hard shell of the coil to help keep the coil propped up and stable.
CAUTION
THE COIL BOOT CAN BE DAMAGED IF THE COIL SPARKS TO ANOTHER SURFACE DURING
THIS PROCEDURE.
Keep the coil connected to the harness and leave the WDS COP clip attached to the coil. Route
the coil clip wire and cable away from the coil being tested as well as other coils to avoid noise
interference. Disconnect the injector of the cylinder being tested so raw fuel is not washing the
cylinder. This is a stress test for the coil. The type of waveform displayed on the oscilloscope will
show whether a coil or the plug is the problem if all previous steps have been followed. Keep hands
and tools away from the end of the coil that supplies the spark.
COP Stress Test Procedure:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 4605
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 4606
Go to the Oscilloscope Tool and select Channel 3, then select Auto, then select
COP_STRESS_TEST_RED. This pre-configured setting will zoom-in on the peak firing of the coil
being tested. Start the engine and be sure the coil is not sparking to any surface. If the coil is
sparking to other surfaces, turn the engine off immediately and readjust the coil so it cannot spark
to any other surface. Restart the engine and touch the Red Man icon to start the oscilloscope. All
settings are pre-configured and no adjustments are necessary. Compare the waveform you get
with the examples provided in Figures 7, 8, and 9). Figure 7 is a good waveform. If your waveform
is similar to Figure 7 the coil is working correctly. Suspect the spark plug.
Figure 8 and Figure 9 are examples of problem coils. Replace the coil if the waveform is similar to
Figures 8 or 9. The coil is causing the misfire when the peak firing appears like those shown in
Figures 8 and 9. Notice the difference in the peak-firing signal when compared to the good peak
signal in Figure 7.
Figure 9 shows a more dramatic fault in the peak failure.
Most root causes of misfire issues can be identified quickly using the steps outlined above. Some
misfire issues can be difficult making the oscilloscope an important part of your diagnostic toolbox.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 05-13-4
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil on Plug (CoP) #1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4609
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4610
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4611
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4612
Ignition Coil: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4613
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Page 4614
Ignition Coil: Service Precautions
CAUTION: Correct installation of the ignition wires is critical to engine operation. If one spark plug
wire is not correctly installed at either the spark plugs or the ignition coil, both spark plugs
connected to the ignition coil may not fire under load.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Page 4615
Ignition Coil: Description and Operation
Coil Pack
Horizontal Connector Six Tower Coil Pack
Series 5 Six Tower Coil Pack
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Page 4616
Four - Tower Coil Packs
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Page 4617
Series 5 Four Tower Coil Pack
Coil packs come in four tower, Series 5 four tower, six-tower horizontal connector and Series 5 Six
tower models. Two adjacent coil towers share a common coil and are called a matched pair. For
six-tower coil pack (six cylinder) applications the matched pairs are 1 and 5, 2 and 6, and 3 and 4
(Figure 56)and (Figure 57). For four-tower coil pack (four cylinder) applications the matched pairs
are 1 and 4, and 2 and 3 (Figure 58) and (Figure 59).
When the coil is fired by the PCM, spark is delivered through the matched pair towers to their
respective spark plugs. The spark plugs are fired simultaneously and are paired so that as one fires
on the compression stroke, the other spark plug fires on the exhaust stroke. The next time the coil
is fired the situation is reversed. The next pair of spark plugs fire according to the engine firing
order.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Coil Bracket
Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Coil Bracket
REMOVAL
1. Remove the ignition coil.
2. Remove the bracket.
1 Remove the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) tube bracket bolt.
2 Remove the three bolts and remove the ignition coil bracket.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Coil Bracket > Page 4620
Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Coil Pack
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Disconnect the ignition wires.
3. Disconnect the ignition coil electrical connectors.
4. Remove the bolts and remove the ignition coil.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
CAUTION: Correct installation of the ignition wires is critical to engine operation. If one spark plug
wire is not correctly installed at either the spark plugs or the ignition coil, both spark plugs
connected to the ignition coil may not fire under load.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information >
Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4624
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4625
Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4626
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 4630
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
Knock Sensor
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
The Knock Sensor (KS) (Figure 35) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine
vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine
knock and to retard spark timing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 4631
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the KS electrical connector and remove the connector from the mounting bracket.
NOTE: The Knock Sensor (KS) is located on the RH side of the cylinder block.
3. Remove the nut and the KS.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition
Relay > Component Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4636
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4637
Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4638
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4643
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4644
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
The Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor
identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the Powertrain
Control Module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the firing of sequential fuel injectors. The Coil
On Plug (COP) Ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to
fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit.
Typical Hall-Effect Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor
There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 22)
and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor (Figure 23).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4645
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4649
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4650
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS)
Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors
The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block
adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse
wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for
a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9
degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates
crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is
also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of
tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to fixed reference (Figure 25).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4651
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the exhaust manifold.
2. Remove the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition
Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the upper steering column shroud.
3. Remove the screws and the lower steering column shroud. 4. Turn the ignition key to the ON
position.
5. Using a small tool, depress the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock
cylinder out. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4659
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
Knock Sensor
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
The Knock Sensor (KS) (Figure 35) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine
vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine
knock and to retard spark timing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4660
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the KS electrical connector and remove the connector from the mounting bracket.
NOTE: The Knock Sensor (KS) is located on the RH side of the cylinder block.
3. Remove the nut and the KS.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Spark Plug Gap
Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Gap
Spark Plug Gap ...................................................................................................................................
.................................................. 1.3 mm (0.051 inch)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Spark Plug Gap > Page 4665
Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Torque
Spark Plug Torque ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................... 15 Nm (11 ft lbs)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4666
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark Plug Type Cylinders 1 And 3 .....................................................................................................
................................................................ AZFS-32F Spark Plug Type Cylinders 2 And 4 ..................
................................................................................................................................................
AZFS-32FE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4667
Spark Plug: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the spark plug wires from the spark plugs.
2. Remove the spark plugs.
NOTE: ^
If an original spark plug is reused, install it in the same cylinder from which it was removed. New
spark plugs can be used in any cylinder.
^ Use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the spark plug well before removing the
spark plugs.
3. Inspect the spark plugs. 4. Clean the spark plugs with a wire brush or a professional spark plug
cleaner (follow the manufacturer's instructions).
INSTALLATION
1. Adjust the plug gap as necessary.
2. Install the spark plugs.
NOTE: Apply Anti-Seize Lubricant to the lower three threads of the spark plugs. Do not allow
lubricant to contaminate the spark plug electrodes or insulator tips.
3. Connect the spark plug wires to the spark plugs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information >
Specifications
Shift Solenoid: Specifications
Solenoid valve body bolts 89 in.lb
Solenoid body-to-case bolts 89 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information
> Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation
TRANSMISSION CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP
The Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL) is an output signal from the PCM that controls the
lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Refer to
Transmission Control Switch, PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4688
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4689
Shift Interlock Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4690
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Figures 43 and 44) signals the PCM with key power
whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the Transmission Control Indicator
Lamp (TCIL) lights when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. The operator of the vehicle
controls the position of the TCS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission
Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications
Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Specifications
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 18 ft.lb
Transmission range (TR) sensor bolts 9 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission
Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4699
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission
Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4700
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission
Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4701
Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL. 2. Disconnect the battery cables. 3. Remove the battery and
tray.
4. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAP) sensor.
5. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission
Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4702
6. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
7. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the thermostat housing to gain access to the transmission
range (TR) sensor.
Remove the thermostat housing.
8. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor.
1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission
Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4703
2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Connect the electrical connector.
3. Install the thermostat housing.
4. Install the air cleaner assembly.
5. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
6. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor.
7. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
Install the battery and tray.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission
Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4704
8. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive
symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its
adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the
strategy.
Connect the battery cables.
9. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in
PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should be
active only in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh
and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored
Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's
Stored
Article No. 02-2-4
02/04/02
TRANSAXLE - CD4E - HARSH AND DELAYED 1-2/2-3 UPSHIFTS - AFTER TRANSAXLE OR
TURBINE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR (TSS) REPLACEMENT - POSSIBLE DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, AND
P1744
FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2001-2002 ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR
ISSUE
Some vehicles equipped with the CD4E transaxle may exhibit harsh and delayed 1-2/2-3 upshifts
along with DTCs for gear ratio errors after the Transaxle or Turbine Shaft Speed sensor (TSS)
have been replaced. DTCs may include OBD1 codes 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, or OBD II
codes P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, and P1744
ACTION
If the condition occurred after servicing the Transaxle or TSS, refer to the following TSS Selection
Chart and select the correct TSS for the vehicle application. Note that each TSS has the Ford
engineering part number on it. Also note that there is a TSS kit that includes an instruction sheet,
TSS sensor and correct bolt.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh
and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 4713
If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and
determine the correct sensor for the vehicle.
1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body.
2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the
Selection Chart.
3. Clear all codes and verify repair.
4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year
Workshop Manual.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored
Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed
Upshifts/DTC's Stored
Article No. 02-2-4
02/04/02
TRANSAXLE - CD4E - HARSH AND DELAYED 1-2/2-3 UPSHIFTS - AFTER TRANSAXLE OR
TURBINE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR (TSS) REPLACEMENT - POSSIBLE DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, AND
P1744
FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2001-2002 ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR
ISSUE
Some vehicles equipped with the CD4E transaxle may exhibit harsh and delayed 1-2/2-3 upshifts
along with DTCs for gear ratio errors after the Transaxle or Turbine Shaft Speed sensor (TSS)
have been replaced. DTCs may include OBD1 codes 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, or OBD II
codes P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, and P1744
ACTION
If the condition occurred after servicing the Transaxle or TSS, refer to the following TSS Selection
Chart and select the correct TSS for the vehicle application. Note that each TSS has the Ford
engineering part number on it. Also note that there is a TSS kit that includes an instruction sheet,
TSS sensor and correct bolt.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 4719
If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and
determine the correct sensor for the vehicle.
1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body.
2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the
Selection Chart.
3. Clear all codes and verify repair.
4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year
Workshop Manual.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4720
Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications
Turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb
Output shaft speed (OSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 4723
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4726
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 4727
Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR
The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with
information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control
and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of
vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending
upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which
powertrain control feature uses the information generated.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield.
4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor.
^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the OSS bore.
5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4730
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation.
Install the OSS sensor. ^
Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4731
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor.
5. Remove the TSS sensor.
^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore.
6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4732
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation.
Install the TSS sensor. ^
Connect the TSS electrical connector.
2. Remove the drain pan.
3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
7. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all near positions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Specifications
Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications
Turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb
Output shaft speed (OSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 4739
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4742
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 4743
Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR
The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with
information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control
and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of
vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending
upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which
powertrain control feature uses the information generated.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield.
4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor.
^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the OSS bore.
5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4746
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation.
Install the OSS sensor. ^
Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4747
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor.
5. Remove the TSS sensor.
^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore.
6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4748
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation.
Install the TSS sensor. ^
Connect the TSS electrical connector.
2. Remove the drain pan.
3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
7. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all near positions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General
PCM Programming Procedures
TSB 04-24-14
12/13/04
FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria,
Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five
Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer,
F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS
1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis,
Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB
applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement.
ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle
concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed.
ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs.
Verify repair after reprogramming.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM
Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle.
2. Use WDS if available.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 4753
a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply.
b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level.
3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool,
such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS.
NOTE
IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS,
GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF.
PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD
1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able
to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
2. Install the new PCM.
NOTE
IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING
INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER.
3. Attempt to start the vehicle.
4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM.
5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639.
a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure
must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1.
b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly
set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc.
6. Check for DTC B2900.
a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this
procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during
this procedure.
b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7.
7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures.
REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM
Replacement
1. Verify all cables are properly connected.
2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level.
3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level.
4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again.
5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open
previous session, and attempt reprogramming again.
6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM,
proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not
communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure.
1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits.
2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity.
NOTE
IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT
TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 4754
INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC.
3. Connect WDS to vehicle.
4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK.
9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN
from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK.
10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above".
11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK.
12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens.
14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be
reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications
Shift Solenoid: Specifications
Solenoid valve body bolts 89 in.lb
Solenoid body-to-case bolts 89 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications
Shift Solenoid: Specifications
Solenoid valve body bolts 89 in.lb
Solenoid body-to-case bolts 89 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Band Apply Servo: Service and Repair
Overdrive Servo
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. NOTE: Servicing the intermediate/overdrive servo in the vehicle is only recommended in the
event of a leak. If servicing is required due to a
servo condition, it is necessary to remove and disassemble the transaxle to inspect the
intermediate/overdrive band assembly and direct clutch for damage.
Raise the vehicle on a hoist.
2. WARNING: The servo is under pressure. Servo and servo cover are under high spring force.
Use caution when removing servo cover.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Assemble the special tool.
3. CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to remove the retaining ring or damage to the case may
occur. Use only snap ring pliers to remove the
retaining ring.
Using the special tool, remove the servo assembly. 1. Install the special tool. 2. Compress the
servo assembly by tightening the bolt. 3. Remove the retaining ring.
4. Remove the servo cover assembly. 5. Remove the intermediate and overdrive servo piston and
return spring. 6. Wipe the servo piston and the servo cover cap with a lint-free cloth.
7. CAUTION: Do not clean the rubber sealing surfaces of the servo piston and the servo cover cap
with cleaning solvent or damage to the sealing
surface may result.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4773
Inspect the servo piston for cracks on its pressure surfaces and in the sealing area. Look for
damage near the point where the servo piston is attached to the servo rod.
8. Squeeze the servo piston lip for flexibility. If the lip feels brittle, install a new piston. 9. Inspect the
servo retainer spring for cracks, breaks or deformation.
Installation
1. WARNING: Servo return spring force is very high. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in personal injury.
Assemble the special tool.
2. Install the special tool.
3. CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to install the retaining ring or damage to the case may
occur. Use only snap ring pliers to install the
retaining ring.
NOTE: If the servo cover will not seat deep enough in the bore to install the servo cover retaining
ring, use a blunt punch or small hammer and gently tap the cover around the outer edge until the
servo cover retaining ring can be installed.
Tighten the special tool bolt. ^
Install the servo cover retaining ring.
4. If the case is stamped "WG", install a wide-groove snap ring, or the servo will be damaged.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4774
5. Loosen the special tool bolt.
^ When the spring tension is released, remove the special tool.
6. Lower the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Bell Housing, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications
Bell Housing: Specifications
fide bell housing bolts 30 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Case, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications
Case: Specifications
Transaxle case-to-engine bolts 35 ft.lb
Case pressure taps 71 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch: > 00-18-2 > Sep > 00 > A/T - No Forward Gear
Engagement
Clutch: Customer Interest A/T - No Forward Gear Engagement
Article No. 00-18-2
09/04/00
TRANSAXLE - CD4E - NO FORWARD ENGAGEMENT - FORWARD CLUTCH CYLINDER SNAP
RING POSITION - SERVICE TIP
FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1994-2000 CONTOUR 2001 ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1994-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2001 COUGAR
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit no forward gear ranges due to the misalignment of the
forward/coast clutch cylinder snap ring with respect to the legs of the forward clutch piston.
ACTION During assembly of the forward/coast clutch cylinder, the gap in the select fit retaining ring
should be located midway (i.e., 45 degrees) between adjacent legs of the forward clutch piston.
Refer to the following Service Procedure for details.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Prior to installing the forward and coast clutch plates into the cylinder, note the location of the
four (4) forward piston legs (Figure 1).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch: > 00-18-2 > Sep > 00 > A/T - No Forward Gear
Engagement > Page 4789
2. Mark the top of the cylinder with a felt tip marker midway between any two adjacent legs (i.e., 45
degrees or 4 external spline teeth from the center of any leg) (Figure 2).
NOTE:
THE FORWARD PISTON LEGS WILL NO LONGER BE VISIBLE WHEN CLUTCH PACK AND
RETAINER IS INSTALLED.
3. Following the Service or Workshop Manual procedure, install the clutch plates.
4. Position the ends of the snap ring such that the gap is aligned with the mark on the top of the
cylinder (the 45 degree mark) (Figure 3).
5. Perform end clearance check as required.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch: > 00-18-2 > Sep > 00 > A/T - No Forward Gear
Engagement > Page 4790
WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000,
506000, 597997
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch: > 00-18-2 > Sep > 00 > A/T - No
Forward Gear Engagement
Clutch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - No Forward Gear Engagement
Article No. 00-18-2
09/04/00
TRANSAXLE - CD4E - NO FORWARD ENGAGEMENT - FORWARD CLUTCH CYLINDER SNAP
RING POSITION - SERVICE TIP
FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1994-2000 CONTOUR 2001 ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1994-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2001 COUGAR
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit no forward gear ranges due to the misalignment of the
forward/coast clutch cylinder snap ring with respect to the legs of the forward clutch piston.
ACTION During assembly of the forward/coast clutch cylinder, the gap in the select fit retaining ring
should be located midway (i.e., 45 degrees) between adjacent legs of the forward clutch piston.
Refer to the following Service Procedure for details.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Prior to installing the forward and coast clutch plates into the cylinder, note the location of the
four (4) forward piston legs (Figure 1).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch: > 00-18-2 > Sep > 00 > A/T - No
Forward Gear Engagement > Page 4796
2. Mark the top of the cylinder with a felt tip marker midway between any two adjacent legs (i.e., 45
degrees or 4 external spline teeth from the center of any leg) (Figure 2).
NOTE:
THE FORWARD PISTON LEGS WILL NO LONGER BE VISIBLE WHEN CLUTCH PACK AND
RETAINER IS INSTALLED.
3. Following the Service or Workshop Manual procedure, install the clutch plates.
4. Position the ends of the snap ring such that the gap is aligned with the mark on the top of the
cylinder (the 45 degree mark) (Figure 3).
5. Perform end clearance check as required.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch: > 00-18-2 > Sep > 00 > A/T - No
Forward Gear Engagement > Page 4797
WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000,
506000, 597997
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic
Transaxle > Differential Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Differential Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Fluid (2.0L) 2.95 pt (US)
Use SAE 80W-90 High Perfomance Rear Axle Lubricant
F1TZ-19580-B or equivalent meeting Ford specification
WSP-M2C197-A. Fill the rear axle 3-5 mm (1/8-3/16 inch)
from the bottom of filler hole.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic
Transaxle > Differential Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4803
Differential Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Ford Part Name - MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
Ford Part Number - XT-5-QM
Ford Specification - MERCON(R) V
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission
Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Specifications
Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube: Specifications
Filler tube bolt 10 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drain Plug, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications
Drain Plug: Specifications
Drain plug 20 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage
Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage
TSB 06-14-4
07/24/06
MERCON ATF IS BEING REPLACED BY MERCON V ATF AS A SERVICE FLUID.
FORD: 1980-1997 Crown Victoria 1981-1997 Mustang, Thunderbird 1981-2003 Escort 1986-1993
Festiva 1986-1997 Taurus 1989-1997 Probe 1994-1997 Aspire 1995-2000 Contour 1980-1996
Bronco 1981-2003 F-150 1981-2004 E-Series, F-Super Duty 1983-1996 Ranger 1986-1996
Aerostar 1991-1997 Explorer 1993-2004 F-53 Motorhome Chassis 1995-1998 Windstar 1997-2004
Expedition 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2007 Escape 1987-2000 F-B-Series 2000-2007 F-650,
F-750
LINCOLN: 1980-1997 Town Car 1981-1997 Continental 1993-1997 Mark VIII 1998-2004 Navigator
2002-2003 Blackwood
MERCURY: 1980-1997 Grand Marquis 1981-1997 Cougar 1986-1997 Sable 1987-1999 Tracer
1995-2000 Mystique 1999-2002 Cougar 1993-2002 Villager 1997 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
MERKUR: 1985-1989 XR4TI
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-7 to update the vehicle application chart.
ISSUE MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid is being replaced by MERCON(R) V as a
service fluid.
ACTION Beginning immediately all automatic transmission / transaxle applications requiring
MERCON(R) can now be serviced using MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission
Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. After July 1, 2007, MERCON(R)
Automatic Transmission Fluid will no longer be manufactured, therefore, availability of this fluid will
only continue for however long it takes to deplete what remains in inventory.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage > Page 4814
Service automatic transmissions requiring MERCON(R) with MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R)
Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V
For proper fluid application on current and past model vehicles equipped with automatic
transmissions I transaxles refer to the fluid usage chart. (Figure 1)
CAUTION
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS / TRANSAXLES THAT REQUIRE MERCON® V SHOULD STILL
ONLY USE MERCON(R) V OR DUAL USAGE FLUID LABELED MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage > Page 4815
CAUTION
MERCON(R) SP, MOTORCRAFT PREMIUM AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID AND
MOTORCRAFT M5 ATFS ARE UNIQUE FLUIDS AND MUST BE USED IN APPLICATIONS
RECOMMENDING THAT PARTICULAR FLUID.
USE OF ANY OTHER FLUID MAY CAUSE REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY OR TRANSMISSION
DAMAGE.
CAUTION
THE FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS OF FLUIDS FOR CVT TRANSMISSIONS ARE VERY
DIFFERENT THAN THOSE OF OTHER AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUIDS (ATFS).
USE OF A FLUID OTHER THAN MOTORCRAFT CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE CHAIN TYPE
TRANSMISSION FLUID OR ONE LABELED AS MEETING MERCON(R) C WILL CAUSE
FUNCTIONALITY CONCERNS AND INTERNAL TRANSMISSION DAMAGE.
CAUTION
DO NOT USE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID SUPPLEMENTS, ADDITIVES,
TREATMENTS OR CLEANING AGENTS.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Transmission Fluid ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................. 10 Qt 9.5L Note: Approximately Dry Fill Capacity
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4818
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Ford Part Name - MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
Ford Part Number - XT-5-QM
Ford Specification - MERCON(R) V
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4819
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Place a suitable container under the transaxle drain plug.
3. NOTE: If an integral problem is suspected, drain the fluid through a paper filter. A small amount
of metal or friction particles may be found from
normal wear. However, if excessive metal and friction particles are present, internal service will be
required.
Remove the transaxle drain plug and drain transmission fluid.
Installation
1. Install the transaxle drain plug.
^ After the fluid has been drained, clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of Pipe
Sealant with Teflon 09 D8AZ- 19554-A or XW7Z-19554-AA or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSK-M2G350-A2.
2. Lower the vehicle 3. Add 3.7 liters (3.9 quarts) of MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 4. Start the engine and run through
all gears for a total of five minutes at idle. Turn off the engine. 5. Repeat the previous steps to help
flush fluid from the torque converter.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T >
Component Information > Specifications
Fluid Filter - A/T: Specifications
Transmission filler tube bolt 71 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 4823
Fluid Filter - A/T: Locations
Part 1 Of 7
Transmission Fluid Filter Location
Filter is located at exploded view position number 8 internal. See Transmission
Disassembly/Assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 4824
Special Tool
Seal Removal
Transmission Filter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications
Fluid Line/Hose: Specifications
Auxiliary cooler bolts 89 in.lb
Cooler tube bracket bolt 18 ft.lb
Cooler tube fittings 18 ft.lb
Transaxle cooler lines 17 ft.lb
Cooler line fitting 30 ft.lb
Cooler inlet line 17 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 4828
Fluid Line/Hose: Service and Repair
Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front bumper cover.
2. Disconnect the cooler tubes.
3. Disconnect the front cooler tube.
4. Disconnect and remove the front cooler tube.
5. Disconnect the rear cooler tube.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 4829
6. Remove the rear transmission cooler tube bracket bolt and the cooler tube. 7. Lower the vehicle.
8. Disconnect and remove the integral to auxiliary cooler tube. 9. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
^ Fill the transaxle to the specified level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications
Fluid Pan: Specifications
Main Control Cover Bolts 20 Nm (15 lb-ft)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications
Fluid Pump: Specifications
Pump assembly bolts 10 ft.lb
Pump support bolts 10 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators - A/T
> Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation
TRANSMISSION CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP
The Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL) is an output signal from the PCM that controls the
lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Refer to
Transmission Control Switch, PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T >
Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T >
Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4844
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T >
Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4845
Shift Interlock Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T >
Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4846
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Figures 43 and 44) signals the PCM with key power
whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the Transmission Control Indicator
Lamp (TCIL) lights when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. The operator of the vehicle
controls the position of the TCS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information >
Specifications
Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Specifications
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 18 ft.lb
Transmission range (TR) sensor bolts 9 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4854
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4855
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4856
Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL. 2. Disconnect the battery cables. 3. Remove the battery and
tray.
4. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAP) sensor.
5. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4857
6. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
7. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the thermostat housing to gain access to the transmission
range (TR) sensor.
Remove the thermostat housing.
8. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor.
1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4858
2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Connect the electrical connector.
3. Install the thermostat housing.
4. Install the air cleaner assembly.
5. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
6. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor.
7. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
Install the battery and tray.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4859
8. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive
symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its
adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the
strategy.
Connect the battery cables.
9. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in
PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should be
active only in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored
Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's
Stored
Article No. 02-2-4
02/04/02
TRANSAXLE - CD4E - HARSH AND DELAYED 1-2/2-3 UPSHIFTS - AFTER TRANSAXLE OR
TURBINE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR (TSS) REPLACEMENT - POSSIBLE DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, AND
P1744
FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2001-2002 ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR
ISSUE
Some vehicles equipped with the CD4E transaxle may exhibit harsh and delayed 1-2/2-3 upshifts
along with DTCs for gear ratio errors after the Transaxle or Turbine Shaft Speed sensor (TSS)
have been replaced. DTCs may include OBD1 codes 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, or OBD II
codes P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, and P1744
ACTION
If the condition occurred after servicing the Transaxle or TSS, refer to the following TSS Selection
Chart and select the correct TSS for the vehicle application. Note that each TSS has the Ford
engineering part number on it. Also note that there is a TSS kit that includes an instruction sheet,
TSS sensor and correct bolt.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 4868
If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and
determine the correct sensor for the vehicle.
1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body.
2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the
Selection Chart.
3. Clear all codes and verify repair.
4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year
Workshop Manual.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored
Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed
Upshifts/DTC's Stored
Article No. 02-2-4
02/04/02
TRANSAXLE - CD4E - HARSH AND DELAYED 1-2/2-3 UPSHIFTS - AFTER TRANSAXLE OR
TURBINE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR (TSS) REPLACEMENT - POSSIBLE DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, AND
P1744
FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2001-2002 ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR
ISSUE
Some vehicles equipped with the CD4E transaxle may exhibit harsh and delayed 1-2/2-3 upshifts
along with DTCs for gear ratio errors after the Transaxle or Turbine Shaft Speed sensor (TSS)
have been replaced. DTCs may include OBD1 codes 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, or OBD II
codes P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, and P1744
ACTION
If the condition occurred after servicing the Transaxle or TSS, refer to the following TSS Selection
Chart and select the correct TSS for the vehicle application. Note that each TSS has the Ford
engineering part number on it. Also note that there is a TSS kit that includes an instruction sheet,
TSS sensor and correct bolt.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 4874
If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and
determine the correct sensor for the vehicle.
1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body.
2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the
Selection Chart.
3. Clear all codes and verify repair.
4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year
Workshop Manual.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4875
Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications
Turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb
Output shaft speed (OSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 4878
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page
4881
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4882
Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR
The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with
information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control
and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of
vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending
upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which
powertrain control feature uses the information generated.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield.
4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor.
^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the OSS bore.
5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor >
Page 4885
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation.
Install the OSS sensor. ^
Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor >
Page 4886
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor.
5. Remove the TSS sensor.
^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore.
6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor >
Page 4887
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation.
Install the TSS sensor. ^
Connect the TSS electrical connector.
2. Remove the drain pan.
3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
7. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all near positions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift
Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift
Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4892
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift
Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4893
Shift Interlock Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift
Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4894
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications
Shift Solenoid: Specifications
Solenoid valve body bolts 89 in.lb
Solenoid body-to-case bolts 89 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Specifications
Shifter A/T: Specifications
Gearshift assembly bolt 89 in.lb
Nuts selector lever 80 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4901
Shifter A/T: Service and Repair
Selector Lever Removal and Installation
NOTE: LH drive is shown, RH drive is similar.
1. Remove the multifunction switch.
2. Disconnect the gearshift cable.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the three bolts and the gearshift lever assembly. 5. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Specifications
Shift Cable: Specifications
Gearshift cable bracket bolts 17 ft.lb
Gearshift cable nuts 89 in.lb
Shift cable bracket bolts 17 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4906
Shift Cable: Adjustments
Selector Lever Cable Adjustment
Special Tool(s)
1. Remove the upper steering column shroud.
2. Remove the lower steering column shroud.
1. Remove the screws. 2. Remove the lower steering column shroud.
3. Position a feeler gauge between the gearshift lever selector and the gearshift lever detent. 4.
Place the gearshift lever in the DRIVE position and hang a 1.4 kg (3 lb.) weight from the gearshift
lever.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4907
5. Loosen the gearshift cable adjuster to adjust the cable then tighten.
6. Install the lower steering column shroud.
1. Position the lower steering column shroud. 2. Install the screws.
7. Install the upper steering column shroud.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4908
Shift Cable: Service and Repair
Selector Lever Cable
Special Tool(s)
Removal
NOTE: LH drive is shown, RH drive is similar.
1. Remove the upper steering column shroud.
2. Remove the lower steering column shroud.
1. Remove the screws. 2. Remove the lower steering column shroud.
3. Disconnect the gearshift cable from the steering column bracket.
1. Disconnect the gearshift cable from the gearshift lever. 2. Disconnect the gearshift cable from
the steering column bracket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4909
4. Remove the gearshift cable nuts.
5. Detach the gearshift cable from the transaxle shifter lever.
6. Remove the bolts.
7. Remove the gearshift cable.
Installation
NOTE: LH drive is shown RH drive is similar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4910
1. Install the gearshift cable.
2. Position the gearshift cable bracket and install the bolts.
3. Connect the gearshift cable to the transaxle shifter lever.
4. Install the gearshift cable nuts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4911
5. Connect the gearshift cable to the gearshift lever.
1. Attach the gearshift cable to the steering column bracket. 2. Connect the gearshift cable to the
gearshift lever.
6. Position a feeler gauge between the gearshift lever selector and the gearshift lever detent. 7.
Place the gearshift lever in the DRIVE position and hang a 1.4 kg (3 lb.) weight from the gearshift
lever.
8. Loosen the gearshift cable adjuster to adjust the cable then tighten.
9. Install the lower steering column shroud.
1. Position the lower steering column shroud. 2. Install the screws.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4912
10. Install the upper steering column shroud.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Specifications
Torque Converter: Specifications
Torque converter nuts 27 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T CD4E - Cold Weather Transmission Failure
Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T CD4E - Cold Weather Transmission Failure
TSB 09-25-4
12/28/09
CD4E TRANSMISSION FAILURE - REPLACE OR INSTALL TRANSMISSION FLUID COOLER
COLD WEATHER BYPASS KIT
FORD: 2001-2008 Escape
MERCURY: 2001-2008 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 4-14-1 to update the model year coverage, Part List and Service
Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a CD4E transmission may
experience a transmission failure due to inadequate lube flow during warm up in cold weather.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Follow the Workshop Manual, Section 307-01 service procedure to repair the transmission. When
overhauling or replacing a CD4E transmission, always install a new cold weather transmission fluid
bypass kit, even if not previously equipped. Do not flush or back flush existing transmission cooler
bypass valve system or cooler tube system. Follow instruction sheets included in the new Cold
Weather Transmission Fluid Cooler Bypass Kit.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT092504 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual
Performed As Actual Time Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7K177 55
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T CD4E - Cold Weather Transmission Failure > Page 4920
Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Cooler Flushing Service Tips
Article No. 03-14-8
07/21/03
TRANSMISSION - NEW TRANSMISSION COOLER FLUSHER - SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 1992-1997 CROWN VICTORIA, PROBE, THUNDERBIRD 1992-2003 ESCORT,
MUSTANG, TAURUS 1994-1997 ASPIRE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2000-2003 FOCUS 2002-2003
THUNDERBIRD 1992-1996 BRONCO 1992-1997 AEROSTAR, F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350
1992-1999 F-250 LD 1992-2003 ECONOLINE, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER 1995-2003
WINDSTAR 1997-2003 EXPEDITION 1999-2003 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2003
EXCURSION 2001-2003 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT
LINCOLN: 1992-1997 TOWN CAR 1992-2002 CONTINENTAL 1993-1998 MARK VIII 2000-2003
LS 1998-2003 NAVIGATOR 2002-2003 BLACKWOOD 2003 AVIATOR
MERCURY: 1992-1997 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 1992-2000 TRACER 1992-2003 SABLE
1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR 1993-2002 VILLAGER 1997-2003 MOUNTAINEER
This article supersedes TSB 00-1-5.
ISSUE The number one cause for repeat transmission repairs is that contamination from the
transmission cooler system (lines and tank) will work their way back into the rebuilt or new
transmission. For this reason a new transmission cooler flusher has been released, "Turbo-Tank
Heated Cooler Line Flusher" Rotunda Tool number 22-00001.
ACTION The transmission cooling system (cooler and lines) MUST be flushed every time the
transmission is overhauled or replaced in order to minimize the likelihood of repeat repairs. The
use of this new "Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher" (222-00001) is the most effective way to
remove contamination from its cooling system. Refer to the following Service Procedure and
Equipment instructions (supplied with the "Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher").
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Prior methods of cooler flushing have not obtained the level of cooler cleaning and contaminant
removal that is required to prevent repeat repairs. The "Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher"
uses heated Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) and a pulsating action to loosen system
contamination.
Previous equipment used solvents to clean & flush coolers, lines and torque-converters. There are
2 issues with this method:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T CD4E - Cold Weather Transmission Failure > Page 4921
^ Residual solvent contamination can cause damage to friction bonding materials within the
transmission (Clutches and Bands).
^ Lack of fluid heating and agitation prevents this method from completely removing contamination
from lines, in-radiator coolers and auxiliary coolers.
Aerosol Solvents should never be used for several reasons.
^ They do not provide the volume necessary to remove heavy contaminants.
^ They evaporate quickly and essentially leave contaminants in pockets, bends, or wherever they
are as the solvent dries.
NOTE
YOU MUST IDENTIFY THE RETURN COOLER LINE TO START THE BACK FLUSHING
PROCEDURE.
A quick way to identify the return cooler line (fluid coming out of the cooler and returning to the
transmission) is to locate the return cooler line fitting on the transmission case. Refer to the
following lists:
Rear Wheel Drive
^ TORQSHIFT, 4R100, E40D, C6 - The REAR transmission case filling receives the return line.
^ 4R70W, AODE, AOD - The TOP transmission case filling receives the return line.
^ A4LD, 4R44/55E, 5R55E, 5R55N, 5R55W, 5R55S
- The TOP transmission case filling receives the return line.
Front Wheel Drive
^ CD4E - The REAR or Pump End transaxle case fitting receives the return line.
^ 4F27E - The REAR or Cover End transaxle case fitting receives the return line.
^ AXOD, AXODE, AX4S, AX4N, 4F50N - The BOTTOM transaxle cooler line fitting receives the
return line.
NOTE
IF AN IN-LINE FILTER HAS BEEN INSTALLED IN THE COOLER LINE, IT MUST BE REMOVED
BEFORE FLUSHING THE COOLER OR COOLER LINES.
Purge the cooler and cooler line before flushing:
Located on the "Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher" is a fluid transfer and purge valve. This
valve can be used to purge the cooler and cooler lines of contaminated fluid before starting the
back flush procedure of the fluid cooling system (refer to step 5a of this Service Procedure or
Equipment instructions, supplied with the "Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher").
Flush Procedure
1. Check and top off fluid level of the "Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher" tank with
transmission fluid.
2. Allow the fluid in the flusher 15-30 minutes to heat up to 140° F (60° C) before using.
3. Install line adapters into the transmission cooler lines.
4. Attach the flusher's blue line to the transmission return cooler line quick disconnect.
5. Attach the flusher's red line to the transmission outlet cooler line quick disconnect.
a. Follow equipment instructions, to purge cooler lines and cooler prior to starting flushing
procedure (using factory installed purge valve and clear hose on "Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line
Flusher").
6. Allow the cooling system to back-flush for 10-15 minutes, then flush the cooler in a
forward/normal flow direction for an additional 10-15 minutes.
For ordering information on this new "Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher" (222-00001),
contact Rotunda at 800-ROTUNDA (800-768-8632 or outside U.S. 262-656-5805).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T CD4E - Cold Weather Transmission Failure > Page 4922
CAUTION
THIS FLUSHER CANNOT BE USED TO FLUSH COOLERS ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH
THE TEMPERATURE BYPASS-TYPE TRANSMISSION COOLER CURRENTLY FOUND IN
1998-2003 CROWN VICTORIA, GRAND MARQUIS, AND TOWN CAR VEHICLES.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 00-1-5 WARRANTY STATUS:
INFORMATION ONLY
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4923
Transmission Cooler: Description and Operation
Transaxle Cooling
All vehicles with automatic transmissions are equipped with a transmission fluid cooler integral to
the radiator which cannot be repaired separately. The integral transmission fluid cooler transfers
heat from the transmission fluid to the engine coolant. The auxiliary transmission fluid cooler
transfers heat from the transmission fluid to the outside air.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Transmission Cooler: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer's concern by operating the vehicle to duplicate the condition. 2. If the
inspection reveals obvious concern(s) that can be readily identified, repair as necessary. 3. Install
new components if a fluid leak is found in any of the transaxle cooling components. 4. If the
concern(s) remains after the inspection, determine the symptom(s) and go to the following
Symptom Chart.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4926
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Auxiliary
Transmission Cooler: Service and Repair Auxiliary
Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Cooler Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front bumper cover.
2. Disconnect the cooler tubes.
3. Remove the bolts and the auxiliary transmission fluid cooler. 4. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
^ Fill the transaxle to the specified level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Auxiliary > Page 4929
Transmission Cooler: Service and Repair General Procedures
Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning
Special Tool(s)
CAUTION: Test the Torque Converter Cleaner to make sure that a vigorous fluid flow is present
before proceeding. Install a new system filter if flow is weak or contaminated.
1. NOTE: Rubber hoses must be attached to the ends of this fluid cooler tubes to connect them to
the cleaner.
Connect the cleaner pressure and return lines appropriately. 1. Connect the pressure line to the
fluid cooler inlet tube. 2. Connect the return line to the fluid cooler outlet tube. 3. Place the outlet
end of the return line in the solvent tank reservoir.
2. NOTE: Cycling the solvent pump on and off will help dislodge contaminants in the cooler system.
Switch the solvent pumps on. Allow the solvent to circulate a minimum of five minutes.
3. Switch the solvent pump off. 4. Disconnect the cleaner pressure line at the fluid cooler tube. 5.
Using compressed air, blow through the fluid cooler inlet tube until all solvent is removed. 6.
Remove the rubber hoses from the fluid cooler tubes.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode
Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation
TRANSMISSION CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP
The Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL) is an output signal from the PCM that controls the
lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Refer to
Transmission Control Switch, PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch,
A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Figures 43 and 44) signals the PCM with key power
whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the Transmission Control Indicator
Lamp (TCIL) lights when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. The operator of the vehicle
controls the position of the TCS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator - LH
Transaxle Support Insulator LH
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery cables. 2. Remove the battery and tray.
3. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor.
4. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4940
5. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
6. Install the special tools.
7. Remove both electrical connectors from the valve cover to gain access to the engine lifting
bracket.
8. Install the special tools.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4941
9. Install the special tools.
10. Remove the wire harness bracket nut and bracket.
11. Position the wire harness bracket out of the way and remove the spacer.
12. Remove the upper transaxle mount plate assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4942
13. Disassemble the upper transaxle mount plate assembly.
^ Remove the bolt, nut, and bottom mount plate.
14. Remove the top and bottom mount cups.
Installation
1. Assemble the upper transaxle mount plate assembly using a new mount.
^ Install the top and bottom mount cups.
2. Install the bottom mount plate, bolt and nut.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4943
3. Install the upper transaxle mount plate assembly.
4. Install the spacer.
5. Install the wire harness bracket and nut.
6. Remove the special tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4944
7. Remove the special tool.
8. Remove the special tool.
9. Connect the electrical connectors to the valve cover.
10. Install the air cleaner assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4945
11. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
12. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAP) sensor.
13. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
Install the battery and tray.
14. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive
symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its
adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the
strategy.
Connect the battery cables.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4946
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower Rear
Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower Rear Removal
1. Disconnect the battery cables. 2. Remove the battery tray.
3. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor.
4. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
5. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
6. Remove the bolts from the rack.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4947
7. Remove the bolts and nuts from the mount, and remove the mount.
Installation
1. NOTE: Prior to tightening the mount nuts install the mount bolt for correct alignment.
Install a new mount and bolts. 1. Install the mount. 2. Loosely install the bolt for correct alignment.
3. Install the nuts and bolt.
2. Install the bolts to the rack.
3. Install the air cleaner assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4948
4. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
5. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAP) sensor.
6. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray cheek the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
Install the battery and tray.
7. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive
symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its
adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the
strategy.
Connect the battery cables.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4949
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower Front
Transaxle Support Insulator Lower, Front Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the splash shield.
3. Remove the cross brace.
4. Remove the cross brace.
5. Remove the top and bottom mount cups.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4950
6. Remove the rubber mount.
Installation
1. Install a new rubber mount.
2. Install the top and bottom mount cups.
3. Install the cross brace.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4951
4. Install the cross brace.
5. Install the splash shield. 6. Lower the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Digital Transmission Range
Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications
Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Specifications
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 18 ft.lb
Transmission range (TR) sensor bolts 9 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Digital Transmission Range
Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4955
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Digital Transmission Range
Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4956
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Digital Transmission Range
Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4957
Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL. 2. Disconnect the battery cables. 3. Remove the battery and
tray.
4. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAP) sensor.
5. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Digital Transmission Range
Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4958
6. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
7. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the thermostat housing to gain access to the transmission
range (TR) sensor.
Remove the thermostat housing.
8. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor.
1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Digital Transmission Range
Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4959
2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Connect the electrical connector.
3. Install the thermostat housing.
4. Install the air cleaner assembly.
5. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
6. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor.
7. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
Install the battery and tray.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Digital Transmission Range
Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4960
8. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive
symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its
adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the
strategy.
Connect the battery cables.
9. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in
PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should be
active only in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: >
02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored
Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's
Stored
Article No. 02-2-4
02/04/02
TRANSAXLE - CD4E - HARSH AND DELAYED 1-2/2-3 UPSHIFTS - AFTER TRANSAXLE OR
TURBINE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR (TSS) REPLACEMENT - POSSIBLE DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, AND
P1744
FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2001-2002 ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR
ISSUE
Some vehicles equipped with the CD4E transaxle may exhibit harsh and delayed 1-2/2-3 upshifts
along with DTCs for gear ratio errors after the Transaxle or Turbine Shaft Speed sensor (TSS)
have been replaced. DTCs may include OBD1 codes 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, or OBD II
codes P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, and P1744
ACTION
If the condition occurred after servicing the Transaxle or TSS, refer to the following TSS Selection
Chart and select the correct TSS for the vehicle application. Note that each TSS has the Ford
engineering part number on it. Also note that there is a TSS kit that includes an instruction sheet,
TSS sensor and correct bolt.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: >
02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 4969
If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and
determine the correct sensor for the vehicle.
1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body.
2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the
Selection Chart.
3. Clear all codes and verify repair.
4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year
Workshop Manual.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission
Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored
Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed
Upshifts/DTC's Stored
Article No. 02-2-4
02/04/02
TRANSAXLE - CD4E - HARSH AND DELAYED 1-2/2-3 UPSHIFTS - AFTER TRANSAXLE OR
TURBINE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR (TSS) REPLACEMENT - POSSIBLE DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, AND
P1744
FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2001-2002 ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR
ISSUE
Some vehicles equipped with the CD4E transaxle may exhibit harsh and delayed 1-2/2-3 upshifts
along with DTCs for gear ratio errors after the Transaxle or Turbine Shaft Speed sensor (TSS)
have been replaced. DTCs may include OBD1 codes 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, or OBD II
codes P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, and P1744
ACTION
If the condition occurred after servicing the Transaxle or TSS, refer to the following TSS Selection
Chart and select the correct TSS for the vehicle application. Note that each TSS has the Ford
engineering part number on it. Also note that there is a TSS kit that includes an instruction sheet,
TSS sensor and correct bolt.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission
Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 4975
If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and
determine the correct sensor for the vehicle.
1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body.
2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the
Selection Chart.
3. Clear all codes and verify repair.
4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year
Workshop Manual.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4976
Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications
Turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb
Output shaft speed (OSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 4979
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4982
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4983
Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR
The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with
information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control
and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of
vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending
upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which
powertrain control feature uses the information generated.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield.
4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor.
^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the OSS bore.
5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4986
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation.
Install the OSS sensor. ^
Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4987
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor.
5. Remove the TSS sensor.
^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore.
6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4988
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation.
Install the TSS sensor. ^
Connect the TSS electrical connector.
2. Remove the drain pan.
3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
7. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all near positions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Turbine Shaft, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Turbine Shaft: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored
Turbine Shaft: Customer Interest A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored
Article No. 02-2-4
02/04/02
TRANSAXLE - CD4E - HARSH AND DELAYED 1-2/2-3 UPSHIFTS - AFTER TRANSAXLE OR
TURBINE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR (TSS) REPLACEMENT - POSSIBLE DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, AND
P1744
FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2001-2002 ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR
ISSUE
Some vehicles equipped with the CD4E transaxle may exhibit harsh and delayed 1-2/2-3 upshifts
along with DTCs for gear ratio errors after the Transaxle or Turbine Shaft Speed sensor (TSS)
have been replaced. DTCs may include OBD1 codes 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, or OBD II
codes P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, and P1744
ACTION
If the condition occurred after servicing the Transaxle or TSS, refer to the following TSS Selection
Chart and select the correct TSS for the vehicle application. Note that each TSS has the Ford
engineering part number on it. Also note that there is a TSS kit that includes an instruction sheet,
TSS sensor and correct bolt.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Turbine Shaft, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Turbine Shaft: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 4997
If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and
determine the correct sensor for the vehicle.
1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body.
2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the
Selection Chart.
3. Clear all codes and verify repair.
4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year
Workshop Manual.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Turbine Shaft, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Turbine Shaft: > 02-2-4 > Feb >
02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored
Turbine Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's
Stored
Article No. 02-2-4
02/04/02
TRANSAXLE - CD4E - HARSH AND DELAYED 1-2/2-3 UPSHIFTS - AFTER TRANSAXLE OR
TURBINE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR (TSS) REPLACEMENT - POSSIBLE DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, AND
P1744
FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2001-2002 ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR
ISSUE
Some vehicles equipped with the CD4E transaxle may exhibit harsh and delayed 1-2/2-3 upshifts
along with DTCs for gear ratio errors after the Transaxle or Turbine Shaft Speed sensor (TSS)
have been replaced. DTCs may include OBD1 codes 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, or OBD II
codes P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, and P1744
ACTION
If the condition occurred after servicing the Transaxle or TSS, refer to the following TSS Selection
Chart and select the correct TSS for the vehicle application. Note that each TSS has the Ford
engineering part number on it. Also note that there is a TSS kit that includes an instruction sheet,
TSS sensor and correct bolt.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Turbine Shaft, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Turbine Shaft: > 02-2-4 > Feb >
02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 5003
If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and
determine the correct sensor for the vehicle.
1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body.
2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the
Selection Chart.
3. Clear all codes and verify repair.
4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year
Workshop Manual.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications
Valve Body: Specifications
Control valve body-to-transfer plate bolts 9 ft.lb
Main control cover bolts 15 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 5007
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 5008
Valve Body: Service and Repair
Main Control Valve Body
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery cables. 2. Remove the battery and tray.
3. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAP) sensor.
4. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
5. Disconnect the transaxle wiring harness electrical connector, and TR sensor connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 5009
6. Disconnect the shift cable.
7. Remove the shift cable and bracket, and position out of the way.
8. Remove the vent tube hose. 9. Raise and support the vehicle.
10. Remove the LH front wheel.
11. Remove the splash shield.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 5010
12. NOTE: Remove the bolts in the indicated sequence.
Remove the main control cover.
13. Remove the main control cover gasket.
14. NOTE: Remove the bolts in the indicated sequence.
Remove the main control valve body bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 5011
15. NOTE: Do not damage the manual valve.
Lift the main control valve body while disconnecting the manual valve link.
16. Depress the retaining tabs and push the solenoid valve body electrical connector down through
the transaxle ease.
17. Make sure the manual valve control lever does not fall out of the main control valve body while
removing from the vehicle.
Installation
1. Install the manual control valve.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 5012
2. NOTE: Inspect the solenoid valve body harness connector O-ring seal for damage. Install a new
O-ring seal, if damaged, before installing the
connector into the case.
Push the solenoid valve body harness connector into the case.
3. Connect the manual valve link to the main control valve body.
4. Install the main control valve body and tighten the bolts in sequence as indicated.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 5013
5. Loosen the nut on the ball stud for the manual valve detent lever actuating rod assembly.
6. Remove the manual control lever outer assembly bolt.
7. Using the special tool and pin, align the shifter shaft.
8. Move the manual valve detent lever assembly to the "D" position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 5014
9. Tighten the nut on the ball and remove the special tool.
10. Tighten the detent nut. Rotate back to the "D" position and check the adjustment.
11. Using the special tool and pin, align the shifter shaft.
12. Install the manual control lever.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 5015
13. Install and rotate the manual valve detent lever assembly to the neutral position.
1. Low 1 2. Low 2 3. Drive 4. Neutral 5. Reverse 6. Park
14. Install a new gasket on the main control cover.
15. Install the main control cover, and tighten the bolts in sequence as shown.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 5016
16. Install the splash shield. 17. Install the LH front wheel. 18. Lower the vehicle.
19. Install the shift cable and bracket.
20. Connect the shift cable.
21. NOTE: Before installing the vent tube hose, clean out any obstructions in the hose using low air
pressure.
Install the vent tube hose, and clamp.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 5017
22. Connect the transaxle harness connector, and the TR sensor connector.
23. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
24. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAP) sensor.
25. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
Install the battery tray and battery.
26. NOTE: When the battery is disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive symptoms
can occur while the vehicle relearns its adaptive
strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the strategy.
Connect the battery cables.
27. Check the transmission fluid, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic
Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
28. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Refill
as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Specifications
Clutch Disc: Specifications
Clutch disc inner diameter 5.91 in
Clutch disc outer diameter 8.86 in
Maximum runout 0.027 in
Set load 1.102 in
Discard thickness from outer face to rivet head Clutch disc lining thicknes 0.012 in
Flywheel side 0.138 in
Pressure plate side 0.138 in
Minimum thickness 0.012 in
Maximum runout 0.0276 in
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5022
Clutch Disc: Service and Repair
Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate
Special Tools
Removal
WARNING: Clutches and brakes contain asbestos fibers. Avoid breathing dust. Breathing asbestos
dust may cause asbestosis and cancer. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
WARNING: Breathing asbestos dust is hazardous to your health. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Dust and dirt present on wheel brake and clutch assemblies may contain asbestos
fibers that are hazardous to your health when made airborne by cleaning with compressed air or by
dry brushing. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Wheel brake assemblies and clutch facings should be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner
recommended for use with asbestos fibers such as brake/clutch/service vacuum 164-1R3600. Dust
and dirt from vacuum should be disposed of in a manner that prevents dust exposure such as
sealed bags. The bag must be labeled as per OSHA instructions and the trash hauler notified as to
the bag's contents. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: If a vacuum suitable for asbestos is not available, cleaning should be done wet. If dust
generation is still possible, technicians should wear government approved toxic dust purifying
respirators. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Grinding or sanding on brake linings, pads, rotors, drums or clutch facings should be
done only while using correctly exhaust-ventilated equipment. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in personal injury.
WARNING: OSHA requires areas where asbestos dust generation is possible to be isolated and
posted with warning signs. Only technicians concerned with carrying out brake or clutch service
should be present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. Remove the transaxle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5023
2. Using the special tool, lock the flywheel to the engine.
3. WARNING: The clutch disc and clutch pressure plate are heavy and may fall if not held when the
bolts are removed. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Loosen bolts evenly to prevent pressure plate damage.
Remove the bolts, clutch pressure plate and clutch disc.
4. CAUTION: Do not use cleaners with a petroleum base and do not immerse the clutch pressure
plate in solvent.
Using a suitable commercial alcohol base solvent, clean the clutch pressure plate.
5. Inspect the clutch pressure plate surface for burn marks, scores, flatness or ridges.
6. Inspect the clutch pressure plate diaphragm fingers for wear. Install a new clutch pressure plate
as necessary.
7. Measure the depth to the rivet heads. Install a new clutch disc if any rivet head measurement is
not within specifications.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5024
8. CAUTION: If the clutch disc is saturated with oil, inspect the rear engine crankshaft seal for
leakage. If leakage is found, install a new seal prior
to clutch disc installation.
NOTE: Use an emery cloth to remove minor imperfections in the clutch disc lining surface.
NOTE: Install a new clutch disc if any of the following conditions are present.
Inspect the clutch disc for: ^
oil or grease saturation
^ worn or loose facings
^ warpage or loose rivets at the hub
^ loose or broken torsion dampening springs
^ wear or rust on splines
9. Using the special tool, check clutch disc runout.Install a new clutch disc if not within
specifications.
10. NOTE: Install a new clutch release fork if any of the following conditions are present.
Inspect the clutch release fork for: ^
cracks
^ distortion
^ excessive wear on the release bearing contact surface
Installation
1. Using the special tool, position the clutch disc on the flywheel.
2. Position the clutch pressure plate on the flywheel, install the pressure plate bolts and tighten
them in sequence to specification.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5025
3. Remove the special tool. 4. Install the transaxle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Fluid >
Component Information > Specifications
Clutch Fluid: Specifications
Ford High Performance DOT3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB ESA-M6C25-A, DOT3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 06-9-4 > May > 06
> M/T - Clutch Master Cylinder Squeaking Noise
Clutch Master Cylinder: Customer Interest M/T - Clutch Master Cylinder Squeaking Noise
TSB 06-9-4
05/15/06
SQUEAKING NOISE FROM CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
FORD:
2001-2004 Escape
ISSUE
Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit a squeaking noise from the clutch master cylinder
as the clutch pedal is depressed or released. This noise is typically only present in ambient
temperatures of 70° F (21° C) or higher. This condition may be caused by the design of the master
cylinder seal.
ACTION
Install an updated master cylinder containing a seal with an improved design. Replace the master
cylinder following the procedure in Workshop Manual, Section 308-02.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
060904A 2001-2004 Escape 0.8 hr.
4X2/4X4: Replace Clutch Master Cylinder (Do Not Use With 7543A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7A543 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 01-24-1 > Oct > 01
> Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage
Clutch Master Cylinder: Customer Interest Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage
Article No. 01-24-1
12/10/01
CLUTCH - CLUTCH PEDAL STAYS ON FLOOR-NOT ABLE TO DISENGAGE CLUTCH - FLUID
LEAK FROM HYDRAULIC CLUTCH LINE
FORD: 2001 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER,
SUPER DUTY F SERIES, F-650, F-750
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a condition of not being able to disengage clutch as the clutch
pedal is stroked or the clutch pedal remains on floor. This may be caused by a roll pin that is loose
or protruding and no longer securing the clutch hydraulic line to the Clutch Master Cylinder or
External Slave Cylinder.
ACTION Check to insure clutch hydraulic line is connected to the Master Cylinder and External
Slave Cylinder and the roll pin is not loose or protruding outside the cylinder body. Check for the
proper amount of fluid in reservoir. It the hydraulic line is not connected to the Master Cylinder or
External Slave Cylinder and no fluid is present in reservoir, refer to the following Service Procedure
for details.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Use Service kit part number 2C3Z-7C522-AA. kit includes: 2 roll pins, 2 quad seals and 2 cotter
pins.
NOTE
MASTER CYLINDERS AND EXTERNAL SLAVE CYLINDERS SHOULD BE SERVICED AT THE
SAME TIME. VEHICLE LINES AFFECTED ARE ESCAPE, SUPER DUTY F-SERIES AND
F650-750.
NOTE
VEHICLE LINES EQUIPPED WITH AN INTERNAL CSC (CONCENTRIC SLAVE CYLINDER)
REQUIRE ONLY THE MASTER CYLINDER TO BE SERVICED. VEHICLE LINES AFFECTED
ARE EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, RANGER AND F150.
1. Confirm if roll pin is dislodged at clutch hydraulic system Master Cylinder and/or External Slave
Cylinder (see previous notes) and the hydraulic line is disconnected or leaking.
2. If so, refer to Workshop Manual (Section 308) for instructions on removing Master Cylinder,
External Slave Cylinder and system bleed procedure.
3. Use an 1/8" punch and small hammer to remove roll pin from Master Cylinder and External
Slave Cylinder.
4. Remove old quad seal from Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder.
5. Install new quad seal in Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder.
6. Reconnect hydraulic line and use a hammer to install a new roll pin at the Master Cylinder and
External Slave Cylinder.
7. Install a cotter pin through the center of each roll pin and secure (Master Cylinder and External
Slave Cylinder).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 01-24-1 > Oct > 01
> Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage > Page 5042
8. Refer to Workshop Manual (Section 308) for bleed procedure and reinstall.
Labor Operation Claiming Chart
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7C522 39
OASIS CODES: 505200, 506000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 06-9-4
> May > 06 > M/T - Clutch Master Cylinder Squeaking Noise
Clutch Master Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clutch Master Cylinder Squeaking
Noise
TSB 06-9-4
05/15/06
SQUEAKING NOISE FROM CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
FORD:
2001-2004 Escape
ISSUE
Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit a squeaking noise from the clutch master cylinder
as the clutch pedal is depressed or released. This noise is typically only present in ambient
temperatures of 70° F (21° C) or higher. This condition may be caused by the design of the master
cylinder seal.
ACTION
Install an updated master cylinder containing a seal with an improved design. Replace the master
cylinder following the procedure in Workshop Manual, Section 308-02.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
060904A 2001-2004 Escape 0.8 hr.
4X2/4X4: Replace Clutch Master Cylinder (Do Not Use With 7543A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7A543 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 01-24-1
> Oct > 01 > Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage
Clutch Master Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not
Disengage
Article No. 01-24-1
12/10/01
CLUTCH - CLUTCH PEDAL STAYS ON FLOOR-NOT ABLE TO DISENGAGE CLUTCH - FLUID
LEAK FROM HYDRAULIC CLUTCH LINE
FORD: 2001 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER,
SUPER DUTY F SERIES, F-650, F-750
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a condition of not being able to disengage clutch as the clutch
pedal is stroked or the clutch pedal remains on floor. This may be caused by a roll pin that is loose
or protruding and no longer securing the clutch hydraulic line to the Clutch Master Cylinder or
External Slave Cylinder.
ACTION Check to insure clutch hydraulic line is connected to the Master Cylinder and External
Slave Cylinder and the roll pin is not loose or protruding outside the cylinder body. Check for the
proper amount of fluid in reservoir. It the hydraulic line is not connected to the Master Cylinder or
External Slave Cylinder and no fluid is present in reservoir, refer to the following Service Procedure
for details.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Use Service kit part number 2C3Z-7C522-AA. kit includes: 2 roll pins, 2 quad seals and 2 cotter
pins.
NOTE
MASTER CYLINDERS AND EXTERNAL SLAVE CYLINDERS SHOULD BE SERVICED AT THE
SAME TIME. VEHICLE LINES AFFECTED ARE ESCAPE, SUPER DUTY F-SERIES AND
F650-750.
NOTE
VEHICLE LINES EQUIPPED WITH AN INTERNAL CSC (CONCENTRIC SLAVE CYLINDER)
REQUIRE ONLY THE MASTER CYLINDER TO BE SERVICED. VEHICLE LINES AFFECTED
ARE EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, RANGER AND F150.
1. Confirm if roll pin is dislodged at clutch hydraulic system Master Cylinder and/or External Slave
Cylinder (see previous notes) and the hydraulic line is disconnected or leaking.
2. If so, refer to Workshop Manual (Section 308) for instructions on removing Master Cylinder,
External Slave Cylinder and system bleed procedure.
3. Use an 1/8" punch and small hammer to remove roll pin from Master Cylinder and External
Slave Cylinder.
4. Remove old quad seal from Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder.
5. Install new quad seal in Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder.
6. Reconnect hydraulic line and use a hammer to install a new roll pin at the Master Cylinder and
External Slave Cylinder.
7. Install a cotter pin through the center of each roll pin and secure (Master Cylinder and External
Slave Cylinder).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 01-24-1
> Oct > 01 > Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage > Page 5052
8. Refer to Workshop Manual (Section 308) for bleed procedure and reinstall.
Labor Operation Claiming Chart
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7C522 39
OASIS CODES: 505200, 506000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5053
Clutch Master Cylinder: Specifications
Clutch master cylinder nuts 17 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5054
Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair
Clutch Master Cylinder Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the clutch master cylinder rod from the clutch pedal.
2. Remove the clutch pedal bracket nut.
3. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycols ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes.
Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If
brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if
irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention
immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake tepid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, wash it immediately with water.
Disconnect the clutch master cylinder hose from the clutch master cylinder and plug it to prevent
excess fluid loss.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5055
4. Disconnect the clutch slave cylinder tube from the clutch master cylinder.
5. Remove the clutch master cylinder.
1. Remove the clutch master cylinder nut. 2. Remove the clutch master cylinder.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the air from the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch Slave Cylinder: > 01-24-1 > Oct > 01 >
Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage
Clutch Slave Cylinder: Customer Interest Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage
Article No. 01-24-1
12/10/01
CLUTCH - CLUTCH PEDAL STAYS ON FLOOR-NOT ABLE TO DISENGAGE CLUTCH - FLUID
LEAK FROM HYDRAULIC CLUTCH LINE
FORD: 2001 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER,
SUPER DUTY F SERIES, F-650, F-750
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a condition of not being able to disengage clutch as the clutch
pedal is stroked or the clutch pedal remains on floor. This may be caused by a roll pin that is loose
or protruding and no longer securing the clutch hydraulic line to the Clutch Master Cylinder or
External Slave Cylinder.
ACTION Check to insure clutch hydraulic line is connected to the Master Cylinder and External
Slave Cylinder and the roll pin is not loose or protruding outside the cylinder body. Check for the
proper amount of fluid in reservoir. It the hydraulic line is not connected to the Master Cylinder or
External Slave Cylinder and no fluid is present in reservoir, refer to the following Service Procedure
for details.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Use Service kit part number 2C3Z-7C522-AA. kit includes: 2 roll pins, 2 quad seals and 2 cotter
pins.
NOTE
MASTER CYLINDERS AND EXTERNAL SLAVE CYLINDERS SHOULD BE SERVICED AT THE
SAME TIME. VEHICLE LINES AFFECTED ARE ESCAPE, SUPER DUTY F-SERIES AND
F650-750.
NOTE
VEHICLE LINES EQUIPPED WITH AN INTERNAL CSC (CONCENTRIC SLAVE CYLINDER)
REQUIRE ONLY THE MASTER CYLINDER TO BE SERVICED. VEHICLE LINES AFFECTED
ARE EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, RANGER AND F150.
1. Confirm if roll pin is dislodged at clutch hydraulic system Master Cylinder and/or External Slave
Cylinder (see previous notes) and the hydraulic line is disconnected or leaking.
2. If so, refer to Workshop Manual (Section 308) for instructions on removing Master Cylinder,
External Slave Cylinder and system bleed procedure.
3. Use an 1/8" punch and small hammer to remove roll pin from Master Cylinder and External
Slave Cylinder.
4. Remove old quad seal from Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder.
5. Install new quad seal in Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder.
6. Reconnect hydraulic line and use a hammer to install a new roll pin at the Master Cylinder and
External Slave Cylinder.
7. Install a cotter pin through the center of each roll pin and secure (Master Cylinder and External
Slave Cylinder).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch Slave Cylinder: > 01-24-1 > Oct > 01 >
Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage > Page 5064
8. Refer to Workshop Manual (Section 308) for bleed procedure and reinstall.
Labor Operation Claiming Chart
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7C522 39
OASIS CODES: 505200, 506000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch Slave Cylinder: > 01-24-1
> Oct > 01 > Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage
Clutch Slave Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not
Disengage
Article No. 01-24-1
12/10/01
CLUTCH - CLUTCH PEDAL STAYS ON FLOOR-NOT ABLE TO DISENGAGE CLUTCH - FLUID
LEAK FROM HYDRAULIC CLUTCH LINE
FORD: 2001 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER,
SUPER DUTY F SERIES, F-650, F-750
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a condition of not being able to disengage clutch as the clutch
pedal is stroked or the clutch pedal remains on floor. This may be caused by a roll pin that is loose
or protruding and no longer securing the clutch hydraulic line to the Clutch Master Cylinder or
External Slave Cylinder.
ACTION Check to insure clutch hydraulic line is connected to the Master Cylinder and External
Slave Cylinder and the roll pin is not loose or protruding outside the cylinder body. Check for the
proper amount of fluid in reservoir. It the hydraulic line is not connected to the Master Cylinder or
External Slave Cylinder and no fluid is present in reservoir, refer to the following Service Procedure
for details.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Use Service kit part number 2C3Z-7C522-AA. kit includes: 2 roll pins, 2 quad seals and 2 cotter
pins.
NOTE
MASTER CYLINDERS AND EXTERNAL SLAVE CYLINDERS SHOULD BE SERVICED AT THE
SAME TIME. VEHICLE LINES AFFECTED ARE ESCAPE, SUPER DUTY F-SERIES AND
F650-750.
NOTE
VEHICLE LINES EQUIPPED WITH AN INTERNAL CSC (CONCENTRIC SLAVE CYLINDER)
REQUIRE ONLY THE MASTER CYLINDER TO BE SERVICED. VEHICLE LINES AFFECTED
ARE EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, RANGER AND F150.
1. Confirm if roll pin is dislodged at clutch hydraulic system Master Cylinder and/or External Slave
Cylinder (see previous notes) and the hydraulic line is disconnected or leaking.
2. If so, refer to Workshop Manual (Section 308) for instructions on removing Master Cylinder,
External Slave Cylinder and system bleed procedure.
3. Use an 1/8" punch and small hammer to remove roll pin from Master Cylinder and External
Slave Cylinder.
4. Remove old quad seal from Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder.
5. Install new quad seal in Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder.
6. Reconnect hydraulic line and use a hammer to install a new roll pin at the Master Cylinder and
External Slave Cylinder.
7. Install a cotter pin through the center of each roll pin and secure (Master Cylinder and External
Slave Cylinder).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch Slave Cylinder: > 01-24-1
> Oct > 01 > Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage > Page 5070
8. Refer to Workshop Manual (Section 308) for bleed procedure and reinstall.
Labor Operation Claiming Chart
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7C522 39
OASIS CODES: 505200, 506000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5071
Clutch Slave Cylinder: Specifications
Clutch slave cylinder bolts 15 ft.lb
Clutch slave cylinder line bracket bolts 15 ft.lb
Clutch slave cylinder bolts 15 ft.lb
Clutch slave cylinder tube nut 18 ft.lb
Clutch slave cylinder tube fitting 22 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5072
Clutch Slave Cylinder: Service and Repair
Slave Cylinder Removal and Installation
1. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes.
Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If
brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if
irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention
immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, wash it immediately with water.
Disconnect the clutch slave cylinder tube and plug it to prevent excess fluid loss.
2. Remove the clutch slave cylinder.
1. Remove the clutch slave cylinder bolts. 2. Remove the clutch slave cylinder.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the air from the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hydraulic Hose: > 01-24-1 > Oct > 01 >
Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage
Hydraulic Hose: Customer Interest Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage
Article No. 01-24-1
12/10/01
CLUTCH - CLUTCH PEDAL STAYS ON FLOOR-NOT ABLE TO DISENGAGE CLUTCH - FLUID
LEAK FROM HYDRAULIC CLUTCH LINE
FORD: 2001 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER,
SUPER DUTY F SERIES, F-650, F-750
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a condition of not being able to disengage clutch as the clutch
pedal is stroked or the clutch pedal remains on floor. This may be caused by a roll pin that is loose
or protruding and no longer securing the clutch hydraulic line to the Clutch Master Cylinder or
External Slave Cylinder.
ACTION Check to insure clutch hydraulic line is connected to the Master Cylinder and External
Slave Cylinder and the roll pin is not loose or protruding outside the cylinder body. Check for the
proper amount of fluid in reservoir. It the hydraulic line is not connected to the Master Cylinder or
External Slave Cylinder and no fluid is present in reservoir, refer to the following Service Procedure
for details.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Use Service kit part number 2C3Z-7C522-AA. kit includes: 2 roll pins, 2 quad seals and 2 cotter
pins.
NOTE
MASTER CYLINDERS AND EXTERNAL SLAVE CYLINDERS SHOULD BE SERVICED AT THE
SAME TIME. VEHICLE LINES AFFECTED ARE ESCAPE, SUPER DUTY F-SERIES AND
F650-750.
NOTE
VEHICLE LINES EQUIPPED WITH AN INTERNAL CSC (CONCENTRIC SLAVE CYLINDER)
REQUIRE ONLY THE MASTER CYLINDER TO BE SERVICED. VEHICLE LINES AFFECTED
ARE EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, RANGER AND F150.
1. Confirm if roll pin is dislodged at clutch hydraulic system Master Cylinder and/or External Slave
Cylinder (see previous notes) and the hydraulic line is disconnected or leaking.
2. If so, refer to Workshop Manual (Section 308) for instructions on removing Master Cylinder,
External Slave Cylinder and system bleed procedure.
3. Use an 1/8" punch and small hammer to remove roll pin from Master Cylinder and External
Slave Cylinder.
4. Remove old quad seal from Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder.
5. Install new quad seal in Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder.
6. Reconnect hydraulic line and use a hammer to install a new roll pin at the Master Cylinder and
External Slave Cylinder.
7. Install a cotter pin through the center of each roll pin and secure (Master Cylinder and External
Slave Cylinder).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hydraulic Hose: > 01-24-1 > Oct > 01 >
Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage > Page 5081
8. Refer to Workshop Manual (Section 308) for bleed procedure and reinstall.
Labor Operation Claiming Chart
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7C522 39
OASIS CODES: 505200, 506000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Hose: > 01-24-1 >
Oct > 01 > Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage
Hydraulic Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage
Article No. 01-24-1
12/10/01
CLUTCH - CLUTCH PEDAL STAYS ON FLOOR-NOT ABLE TO DISENGAGE CLUTCH - FLUID
LEAK FROM HYDRAULIC CLUTCH LINE
FORD: 2001 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER,
SUPER DUTY F SERIES, F-650, F-750
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a condition of not being able to disengage clutch as the clutch
pedal is stroked or the clutch pedal remains on floor. This may be caused by a roll pin that is loose
or protruding and no longer securing the clutch hydraulic line to the Clutch Master Cylinder or
External Slave Cylinder.
ACTION Check to insure clutch hydraulic line is connected to the Master Cylinder and External
Slave Cylinder and the roll pin is not loose or protruding outside the cylinder body. Check for the
proper amount of fluid in reservoir. It the hydraulic line is not connected to the Master Cylinder or
External Slave Cylinder and no fluid is present in reservoir, refer to the following Service Procedure
for details.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Use Service kit part number 2C3Z-7C522-AA. kit includes: 2 roll pins, 2 quad seals and 2 cotter
pins.
NOTE
MASTER CYLINDERS AND EXTERNAL SLAVE CYLINDERS SHOULD BE SERVICED AT THE
SAME TIME. VEHICLE LINES AFFECTED ARE ESCAPE, SUPER DUTY F-SERIES AND
F650-750.
NOTE
VEHICLE LINES EQUIPPED WITH AN INTERNAL CSC (CONCENTRIC SLAVE CYLINDER)
REQUIRE ONLY THE MASTER CYLINDER TO BE SERVICED. VEHICLE LINES AFFECTED
ARE EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, RANGER AND F150.
1. Confirm if roll pin is dislodged at clutch hydraulic system Master Cylinder and/or External Slave
Cylinder (see previous notes) and the hydraulic line is disconnected or leaking.
2. If so, refer to Workshop Manual (Section 308) for instructions on removing Master Cylinder,
External Slave Cylinder and system bleed procedure.
3. Use an 1/8" punch and small hammer to remove roll pin from Master Cylinder and External
Slave Cylinder.
4. Remove old quad seal from Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder.
5. Install new quad seal in Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder.
6. Reconnect hydraulic line and use a hammer to install a new roll pin at the Master Cylinder and
External Slave Cylinder.
7. Install a cotter pin through the center of each roll pin and secure (Master Cylinder and External
Slave Cylinder).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Hose: > 01-24-1 >
Oct > 01 > Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage > Page 5087
8. Refer to Workshop Manual (Section 308) for bleed procedure and reinstall.
Labor Operation Claiming Chart
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7C522 39
OASIS CODES: 505200, 506000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information >
Specifications
Clutch Pedal Assembly: Specifications
Clutch pedal bracket bolt and nuts 17 ft.lb
Clutch pedal disengagement height 2.3 in
Clutch pedal free play 0.22-0.59 in
Clutch pedal height 8.35-8.54 in
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5091
Clutch Pedal Assembly: Service and Repair
Clutch Pedal Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the clutch master cylinder nut.
3. Disconnect the electrical connectors.
4. Disconnect the clutch master cylinder rod from the clutch pedal.
5. Remove the clutch pedal.
1. Remove the nuts. 2. Remove the clutch pedal.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information >
Locations
Clutch Switch: Locations
The Clutch Switch is located near the left hand rocker panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch > Page 5097
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Fork, M/T > Component Information
> Service and Repair
Clutch Release Fork: Service and Repair
Clutch Release Fork Removal and Installation
1. Remove the transaxle.
2. Remove the rubber boot.
3. Remove the clutch release fork and bearing. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pilot Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Pilot Bearing: Service and Repair
Pilot Bearing
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Remove the flywheel. 2. Inspect the pilot bearing for:
^ misalignment and looseness in the crankshaft
^ needle rollers for scoring, worn or broken rollers, inadequate grease or discoloration
^ seal leakage
3. NOTE: Install a new pilot bearing only if it is damaged.
Using the special tool, remove the pilot bearing. 1. Install the special tool. 2. Remove the pilot
bearing.
4. Clean the transaxle input shaft with a wire brush. 5. Inspect the transmission input shaft for:
^ burrs
^ rust
^ damage to the input shaft spline
^ damage to the input shaft on the pilot bearing contact surface
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pilot Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Page 5104
1. Using the special tools, install the pilot bearing. 2. Apply a light coating of Premium Long-Life
Grease XG-1-C, XG-1-K or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M1C75-B to the transaxle
input shaft.
3. Install the flywheel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information >
Specifications
Pressure Plate: Specifications
Pressure Plate Bolts 29 Nm (21 lb-ft)
Maximum Depth 0.020 in
Maximum Clearance 0.020 in
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate
Pressure Plate: Service and Repair Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate
"For information regarding this component please refer to Clutch Disc Service and Repair"
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate > Page 5110
Pressure Plate: Service and Repair Clutch Pressure Plate Locating Dowels
Clutch Pressure Plate Locating Dowels Removal
1. Remove the transmission.
2. NOTE: Care should be taken not to damage the dowel holes or the surrounding surface areas
during removal.
Remove the flywheel dowels.
Installation
1. NOTE: Care should be taken to install the dowel squarely into place until it is fully seated and to
not damage the surrounding surface areas.
Install the flywheel dowels.
2. Install the transmission.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential >
Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Carrier > Carrier Bearings >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Carrier Bearings: Service and Repair
Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing Housing and Seal
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Remove the halfshaft assembly.
2. Using the special tools, remove the stub shaft pilot bearing and seal.
Installation
1. NOTE: Lubricate the new stub shaft pilot bearing with rear axle lubricant.
Using the special tools, install the stub shaft pilot bearing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Carrier > Carrier Bearings >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5120
2. NOTE: Lubricate the new stub shaft pilot bearing housing seal with premium long-life grease.
Using the special tools, install the stub shaft pilot bearing housing seal.
3. CAUTION: Inspect the inboard CV joint seal journal for rust or nicks/scratches prior to installing
the halfshaft. Polish the seal journal with fine
crocus cloth, if necessary.
Install the halfshaft assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Differential Cover: Service and Repair
Differential Housing Cover Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. NOTE: Drain the differential fluid into a suitable drain pan.
Remove the bolts and the rear differential cover. ^
Drain the differential fluid from the housing.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the machined surfaces on the rear axle housing, the differential housing
cover and the rotary blade coupling housing are
clean and free of oil before installing the new silicone sealant. The inside of the rear axle must be
covered when cleaning the machined surface to prevent contamination.
Clean the gasket mating surfaces of the differential housing, the differential housing cover and the
rotary blade coupling housing.
2. NOTE: The differential housing cover must be installed within 15 minutes of application of the
silicone, or new sealant must be applied. If
possible, allow one hour before filling with lubricant to make sure the silicone sealant has correctly
cured.
Apply a new continuous bead of clear silicone rubber.
3. Install the differential housing cover and bolts.
4. Fill the rear axle with 1.4 liters (2.95 pints) of rear axle lubricant.
^ Tighten the filler plug.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Lock > Solenoid, Differential
Lock > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Bearing, Differential > Component
Information > Specifications
Pinion Bearing: Specifications
Pinion bearing preload (drive pinion collapsible spacer) used bearing 6-10 in.lb
new bearing 15-30 in.lb
Pinion nut 1 500 ft.lb
max
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System
Information > Service and Repair > LH
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair LH
Differential Fluid Seals LH
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. NOTE: Place a suitable drain pan under the vehicle.
Remove the transaxle drain plug and drain the fluid.
3. Remove the LH halfshaft.
4. Using the special tools, remove and discard the LH differential seal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System
Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 5135
Installation
1. Using the special tool, install the LH differential seal. 2. Install the LH halfshaft. 3. Remove the
drain pan and lower the vehicle.
4. Install the transaxle drain plug.
^ After the fluid has been drained, clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of Pipe
Sealant with Teflon (D D8AZ-19554-A or XW7Z-19554-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification
WSK-M2G350-A2.
5. Add MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R)
V specification. 6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear
positions. Refill as necessary. 7. Allow the transmission fluid to reach operating temperature and fill
as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System
Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 5136
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair RH
Differential Fluid Seals RH
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. NOTE: Determine the source of the fluid leak. If the leak is from the transaxle, continue with this
procedure.
If it is determined that the fluid leak is coming from the PTU, remove the PTU.
3. NOTE: Place a suitable drain pan under the vehicle.
Remove the transaxle drain plug and drain the fluid.
4. Remove the RH halfshaft. 5. If equipped remove the PTU.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System
Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 5137
6. If the vehicle is equipped with a PTU, use the special tools to remove the RH differential seal.
7. If the vehicle is not equipped with a PTU, use the special tools to remove the RH differential
seal.
Installation
1. If the vehicle is equipped with a PTU, use the special tools to install the RH differential seal.
2. If the vehicle is not equipped with a PTU, use the special tools to install the RH differential seal.
3. If equipped install the PTU. 4. Install the RH halfshaft.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System
Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 5138
5. Install the transaxle drain plug.
^ After the fluid has been drained, clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of Pipe
Sealant with Teflon tip D8AZ- 19554-A or XW7Z-19554-AA or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSK-M2G350-A2.
6. Remove the drain pan and lower the vehicle. 7. Add MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission
Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 8. Start the engine and move
the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Refill as necessary. 9. Allow the
transmission fluid to reach operating temperature and fill as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle
Shaft > Component Information > Specifications
Axle Shaft: Specifications
Inner halfshaft bearing nuts 220 ft.lb
Front CV joint bolts 30 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle
Shaft > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5144
Axle Shaft: Description and Operation
Rear Drive Halfshafts
CAUTION: An inspection of the outer and inner boots is necessary so that if damage or grease
leakage is evident, installation of a new halfshaft can take place immediately. Continued operation
with damage or grease leakage will result in CV joint wear and noise due to contamination and loss
of the CV joint grease.
^ The RH and LH halfshafts are the same length.
^ Inboard and outboard CV joints connect to a splined shaft. A circlip stopper holds the cross
groove inboard race assembly (inboard CV joint) together.
^ An axle circlip (4B422) retains the spliced inboard CV joint to the differential side gear. Install a
new axle circlip each time the halfshaft is removed from the vehicle.
^ A rear axle wheel hub nut secures the side shaft assembly (interconnecting shaft and outboard
CV joint) to the rear hub. Install a new rear axle wheel hub nut each time the halfshaft is removed
from the vehicle.
Halfshaft Handling
CAUTION: Never pick up or hold the halfshaft only by the inboard or outboard CV joint.
CAUTION: Do not over-angle the CV joints.
CAUTION: Damage will occur to an assembled inboard CV joint if it is over-plunged outward from
the joint housing.
CAUTION: Never use a hammer to remove or install the halfshafts.
CAUTION: Never use the halfshaft assembly as a lever to position other components. Always
support the free end of the halfshaft.
CAUTION: Do not allow the boots to contact sharp edges or hot exhaust components.
CAUTION: Handle the halfshaft only by the interconnecting shaft to avoid pull-apart and potential
damage to the CV joints.
CAUTION: Do not drop assembled halfshafts. The impact will cut the boots from the inside without
evidence of external damage.
Handle all halfshaft components carefully during removal and installation procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle
Shaft > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5145
Axle Shaft: Service and Repair
Halfshaft
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear coil spring.
2. CAUTION: Make sure to support the wheel knuckle.
Remove the nuts and separate the upper and lower ball joints.
3. NOTE: Make sure to mark the position of the knuckle bolt and cam assembly for correct
installation.
Remove the bolt and separate the rear knuckle from the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle
Shaft > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5146
4. Remove and discard the nut.
5. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the knuckle.
6. Using the special tool, remove the halfshaft. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair
Constant Velocity Joint: Service and Repair
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Halfshaft Joint
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
Disassembly
1. Remove the halfshaft.
2. Secure the halfshaft and constant velocity (CV) joint in a vise using protective jaw covers.
3. Remove the inboard halfshaft boot clamps.
4. Slide the inboard halfshaft boot off the inboard CV joint housing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5150
5. If reinstalling the original inner joint, mark the inner joint and the halfshaft to make sure of correct
installation.
6. Using a soft face hammer, separate the halfshaft from the inboard joint housing.
7. Remove and discard the bearing retainer circlip.
8. Remove and discard the snap ring.
9. Remove the inboard halfshaft boot from the halfshaft.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5151
10. Remove the two outboard halfshaft boot clamps.
11. Slide the outboard halfshaft joint boot back out of the way exposing the outboard CV joint.
12. If reinstalling the original outboard CV joint, mark the outboard CV joint and halfshaft to make
sure of correct installation.
13. Use a soft-face hammer to separate the outboard CV joint by gently tapping it off the halfshaft.
14. Remove the halfshaft bearing retainer circlip and discard.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5152
15. Remove the snap ring from the halfshaft.
16. Slide the outboard halfshaft boot off of the halfshaft.
Assembly
1. Lubricate the inboard and outboard CV joint with joint grease.
2. Install the outboard halfshaft boot.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5153
3. Install the snap ring on the halfshaft.
4. Install a new halfshaft shaft bearing retainer circlip.
5. Use a soft-face hammer to install the inboard CV joint by gently tapping it onto the halfshaft.
6. Remove any excess grease on the mating surfaces and slide the outboard halfshaft joint boot
forward onto the outboard CV joint.
7. Remove any excess air trapped in the outboard halfshaft boot using a cloth covered screwdriver
after adjusting the outboard halfshaft boot spacing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5154
8. Using the special tool, crimp two new outboard halfshaft boot clamps.
9. Position the inboard halfshaft boot.
10. Install the snap ring.
11. Install the bearing retainer circlip.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5155
12. Using a soft face hammer, install the halfshaft on the inboard joint.
13. Position the inboard halfshaft boot.
14. Remove any excess air trapped in the halfshaft boot using a cloth covered screwdriver after
adjusting the halfshaft boot spacing.
15. Using the special tool, install two new inboard joint boot clamps. 16. Install the front wheel
halfshaft.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 01-7-7 > Apr > 01 >
Rear Axle - Pinion Seal Oil Leaks
Seals and Gaskets: Customer Interest Rear Axle - Pinion Seal Oil Leaks
Article No. 01-7-7
04/16/01
AXLE - FLUID LEAK FROM REAR AXLE PINION SEAL - 4X4 VEHICLES ONLY
FORD: 2001
ESCAPE
ISSUE
Some 4X4 equipped vehicles may exhibit a rear axle pinion seal leak at the Rotary Blade Coupling
(RBC). This may be caused by the design of the pinion seal.
ACTION
Replace the pinion seal at the RBC. Refer to the following Service Procedure for details
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THE CLUTCH ASSEMBLY IS A BALANCED UNIT. IF THE FOLLOWING INDEXING
PROCEDURE IS NOT UTILIZED, A VIBRATION MAY OCCUR.
1. Index mark the driveshaft and end yoke before removing.
2 Remove driveshaft (Refer to Workshop Manual Section 205-01).
3. Remove pinion nut.
4. Using a punch, mark one of the splines on the yoke (Figure 1).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 01-7-7 > Apr > 01 >
Rear Axle - Pinion Seal Oil Leaks > Page 5164
5. Mark the corresponding spline on the pinion gear (Figure 2).
NOTE
A SMALL PUNCH THAT CAN BE INSERTED BETWEEN THE END YOKE SPLINE AND PINION
GEAR IS REQUIRED.
6. Remove end yoke.
7. Remove pinion seal.
8. Install new Pinion Seal (YL8Z-4N046-AA) using seal installer tool. SPECIAL TOOL PART
NUMBER T80T-4000-C (205-137).
9. Assemble end yoke to pinion gear spline. Align the marks made during disassembly.
10. Install pinion nut and torque to 217-271 Nm (160-200 lb-ft) (Figure 3).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 01-7-7 > Apr > 01 >
Rear Axle - Pinion Seal Oil Leaks > Page 5165
11. Assemble driveshaft to end yoke (Figure 4) and torque to 23Nm (17lb-ft). Refer to Workshop
Manual Section 205-01.
PARTS BLOCK
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions of
Bumper To Bumper warranty Coverage.
OPERATION/DESCRIPTION/TIME
DEALER CODING
OASIS CODES: 509000, 510000, 590000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 01-7-7
> Apr > 01 > Rear Axle - Pinion Seal Oil Leaks
Seals and Gaskets: All Technical Service Bulletins Rear Axle - Pinion Seal Oil Leaks
Article No. 01-7-7
04/16/01
AXLE - FLUID LEAK FROM REAR AXLE PINION SEAL - 4X4 VEHICLES ONLY
FORD: 2001
ESCAPE
ISSUE
Some 4X4 equipped vehicles may exhibit a rear axle pinion seal leak at the Rotary Blade Coupling
(RBC). This may be caused by the design of the pinion seal.
ACTION
Replace the pinion seal at the RBC. Refer to the following Service Procedure for details
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THE CLUTCH ASSEMBLY IS A BALANCED UNIT. IF THE FOLLOWING INDEXING
PROCEDURE IS NOT UTILIZED, A VIBRATION MAY OCCUR.
1. Index mark the driveshaft and end yoke before removing.
2 Remove driveshaft (Refer to Workshop Manual Section 205-01).
3. Remove pinion nut.
4. Using a punch, mark one of the splines on the yoke (Figure 1).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 01-7-7
> Apr > 01 > Rear Axle - Pinion Seal Oil Leaks > Page 5171
5. Mark the corresponding spline on the pinion gear (Figure 2).
NOTE
A SMALL PUNCH THAT CAN BE INSERTED BETWEEN THE END YOKE SPLINE AND PINION
GEAR IS REQUIRED.
6. Remove end yoke.
7. Remove pinion seal.
8. Install new Pinion Seal (YL8Z-4N046-AA) using seal installer tool. SPECIAL TOOL PART
NUMBER T80T-4000-C (205-137).
9. Assemble end yoke to pinion gear spline. Align the marks made during disassembly.
10. Install pinion nut and torque to 217-271 Nm (160-200 lb-ft) (Figure 3).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 01-7-7
> Apr > 01 > Rear Axle - Pinion Seal Oil Leaks > Page 5172
11. Assemble driveshaft to end yoke (Figure 4) and torque to 23Nm (17lb-ft). Refer to Workshop
Manual Section 205-01.
PARTS BLOCK
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions of
Bumper To Bumper warranty Coverage.
OPERATION/DESCRIPTION/TIME
DEALER CODING
OASIS CODES: 509000, 510000, 590000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page
5173
Seals and Gaskets: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 01-7-7 Date: 010416
Rear Axle - Pinion Seal Oil Leaks
Article No. 01-7-7
04/16/01
AXLE - FLUID LEAK FROM REAR AXLE PINION SEAL - 4X4 VEHICLES ONLY
FORD: 2001
ESCAPE
ISSUE
Some 4X4 equipped vehicles may exhibit a rear axle pinion seal leak at the Rotary Blade Coupling
(RBC). This may be caused by the design of the pinion seal.
ACTION
Replace the pinion seal at the RBC. Refer to the following Service Procedure for details
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THE CLUTCH ASSEMBLY IS A BALANCED UNIT. IF THE FOLLOWING INDEXING
PROCEDURE IS NOT UTILIZED, A VIBRATION MAY OCCUR.
1. Index mark the driveshaft and end yoke before removing.
2 Remove driveshaft (Refer to Workshop Manual Section 205-01).
3. Remove pinion nut.
4. Using a punch, mark one of the splines on the yoke (Figure 1).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page
5174
5. Mark the corresponding spline on the pinion gear (Figure 2).
NOTE
A SMALL PUNCH THAT CAN BE INSERTED BETWEEN THE END YOKE SPLINE AND PINION
GEAR IS REQUIRED.
6. Remove end yoke.
7. Remove pinion seal.
8. Install new Pinion Seal (YL8Z-4N046-AA) using seal installer tool. SPECIAL TOOL PART
NUMBER T80T-4000-C (205-137).
9. Assemble end yoke to pinion gear spline. Align the marks made during disassembly.
10. Install pinion nut and torque to 217-271 Nm (160-200 lb-ft) (Figure 3).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page
5175
11. Assemble driveshaft to end yoke (Figure 4) and torque to 23Nm (17lb-ft). Refer to Workshop
Manual Section 205-01.
PARTS BLOCK
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions of
Bumper To Bumper warranty Coverage.
OPERATION/DESCRIPTION/TIME
DEALER CODING
OASIS CODES: 509000, 510000, 590000
Technical Service Bulletin # 01-7-7 Date: 010416
Rear Axle - Pinion Seal Oil Leaks
Article No. 01-7-7
04/16/01
AXLE - FLUID LEAK FROM REAR AXLE PINION SEAL - 4X4 VEHICLES ONLY
FORD: 2001
ESCAPE
ISSUE
Some 4X4 equipped vehicles may exhibit a rear axle pinion seal leak at the Rotary Blade Coupling
(RBC). This may be caused by the design of the pinion seal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page
5176
ACTION
Replace the pinion seal at the RBC. Refer to the following Service Procedure for details
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THE CLUTCH ASSEMBLY IS A BALANCED UNIT. IF THE FOLLOWING INDEXING
PROCEDURE IS NOT UTILIZED, A VIBRATION MAY OCCUR.
1. Index mark the driveshaft and end yoke before removing.
2 Remove driveshaft (Refer to Workshop Manual Section 205-01).
3. Remove pinion nut.
4. Using a punch, mark one of the splines on the yoke (Figure 1).
5. Mark the corresponding spline on the pinion gear (Figure 2).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page
5177
NOTE
A SMALL PUNCH THAT CAN BE INSERTED BETWEEN THE END YOKE SPLINE AND PINION
GEAR IS REQUIRED.
6. Remove end yoke.
7. Remove pinion seal.
8. Install new Pinion Seal (YL8Z-4N046-AA) using seal installer tool. SPECIAL TOOL PART
NUMBER T80T-4000-C (205-137).
9. Assemble end yoke to pinion gear spline. Align the marks made during disassembly.
10. Install pinion nut and torque to 217-271 Nm (160-200 lb-ft) (Figure 3).
11. Assemble driveshaft to end yoke (Figure 4) and torque to 23Nm (17lb-ft). Refer to Workshop
Manual Section 205-01.
PARTS BLOCK
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page
5178
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions of
Bumper To Bumper warranty Coverage.
OPERATION/DESCRIPTION/TIME
DEALER CODING
OASIS CODES: 509000, 510000, 590000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection
Wheel Bearing Check
1. Raise the vehicle until the front tires are off the floor.
^ Make sure the wheels are in a straight forward position.
2. Spin the tire by hand to check the wheel bearings for roughness.
NOTE: Make sure the wheel rotates freely and that the brake pads are retraced sufficiently to allow
free movement of the tire and wheel assembly.
3. Grip each front tire at the top and bottom and move the wheel inward and outward while lifting
the weight of the tire off the front wheel bearing.
4. If the tire and wheel (hub) is loose on the spindle, does not rotate freely, or has a rough feeling
when spun, carry out one of the following:
1 On vehicles with inner and outer bearings, inspect the bearings and cups for wear or damage.
Adjust or install new bearing and cups as
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5182
necessary.
2 On vehicles with one sealed bearing install a new wheel hub.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front
Special Tools
Special Tools
Special Tools
Removal
NOTE: Install a new wheel bearing when the wheel hub is removed.
All vehicles 1. Remove the brake disc.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5185
2. Remove the wheel hub nut.
3. Remove the tie rod end nut.
1 Remove the cotter pin.
2 Remove the nut.
4. Using the special tool, separate the tie rod end from the knuckle.
Vehicles with ABS
5. Remove the bolt and position the anti-lock brake sensor aside.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5186
6. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
1 Remove the pinch bolt.
2 Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
7. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the wheel knuckle.
^ Position the halfshaft aside and support.
8. Remove the wheel knuckle.
1 Remove the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts.
2 Remove the wheel knuckle.
9. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing and knuckle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5187
10. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle, after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
11. Remove the snap ring.
12. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
NOTE: The brake disc shield is pressed on.
13. If necessary, remove the brake disc shield.
Installation
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5188
1. If necessary, install a disc brake shield.
2. Using the special tool, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
3. Install the snap ring.
4. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5189
5. Install the wheel knuckle.
1 Position the wheel knuckle.
2 Install the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts.
6. Using the special tool, insert the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
7. Install the pinch bolt into the wheel knuckle.
^ Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle.
Vehicles with ABS
8. Install the anti-lock brake sensor and tighten the bolt.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5190
9. Install the tie rod end into the wheel knuckle.
1 Install the tie rod end nut.
2 Install a new cotter pin.
10. Install the wheel hub nut. 11. Install the brake disc.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5191
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear
Special Tools
Removal
1. Remove the brake drum.
2. Remove the wheel hub nut.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5192
3. Using the special tool, remove the wheel hub.
4. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle, after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
5. Remove the snap ring.
6. Using the special tools, remove the wheel bearing outer race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5193
1. Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
2. Install the snap ring.
3. Using the special tool, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
4. Install the wheel hub nut. 5. Install the brake drum.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut >
Component Information > Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Front Wheel Hub Nut 290 Nm (214 lb-ft)
Rear Wheel Hub Nut (2WD) 290 Nm (214 lb-ft)
Rear Wheel Hub Nut (4WD) 290 Nm (214 lb-ft)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 >
Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak
Technical Service Bulletin # 00T06 Date: 000801
Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak
00T06
SPECIAL SERVICE INSTRUCTION
Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Rear Driveshaft Replacement
^ August 2OOO
^ Dealer Letter
^ Attachment I ^
Administrative Information
^ Attachment II ^
Labor Allowances
^ Attachment III ^
Technical Information
^ Special Service Instruction 00T06-S1
Certain 2001 Model Year Escape 4x4 Vehicles - Rear Driveshaft Replacement and Rear
Differential Leak
^ Dealer Letter
^ Attachment I ^
Administrative Information
^ Attachment II ^
Labor Allowances
^ Attachment III ^
Technical Information, Supplement 00T06-S1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 >
Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5207
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 >
Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5208
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 >
Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5209
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this Special Service Instruction.
PLEASE NOTE:
Correct all vehicles in stock before delivery.
PROMPTLY CORRECT Promptly correct all affected vehicles at your dealership and other eligible
vehicles which are brought to your dealership within the applicable 36 month / 36,000 mile warranty
coverage period.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using DWE.
^ Refer to ACESII Manual for claims preparation and submission information.
NOTE:
Prepare and submit claims on the ACESII warranty screen rather than the ACESII recall screen.
^ Use code information shown below:
^ Program Code - 00T06
^ Causal Component - 4602
^ Condition Code - 12
^ Labor Operation - Refer to Attachment II
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 >
Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5210
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENT
Parts Ordering Information Parts will not be direct shipped for this recall. Order your parts
requirement through the Recall Hotline (1-800-325-5621). Parts will be shipped Priority Next Day
delivery, beginning the week of August 28, 2000 once sufficient quantities of parts are available at
the PDC's.
NOTE:
Removed parts must be mutilated and properly scrapped to prevent their use on another vehicle.
ORDER INFORMATION DOR/COR DOR/COR number 50175 identifies parts ordered for this
campaign through the Recall Hotline (1-800-325-5621).
DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to:
^ DOES II
^ Updated Price Book
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
SERVICE PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Do not reuse any driveshaft retaining fasteners. Install new fasteners only or damage to vehicle will
occur.
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 >
Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5211
2. Position a safety stand under the driveshaft center bearing support. See Figure 1.
3. Remove the bolts and straps securing the rear of the driveshaft to the differential yoke. Discard
the bolts. See Figure 2.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 >
Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5212
4. Remove and discard the center bearing support nuts. See Figure 3.
5. Remove the center bearing support ground strap bolt from the floor pan. See Figure 3.
6. Remove and discard the bolts and washers securing the front of the driveshaft to the power take
off. See Figure 4.
7. With the aid of an assistant, remove the driveshaft from the safety stand. Discard the driveshaft.
8. With the aid of an assistant, position the center bearing support of the new driveshaft onto the
safety stand. Position the rear of the driveshaft into the differential yoke, then position the front of
the driveshaft into the power take off.
CAUTION:
The rear of the driveshaft must be bolted to the differential yoke before the center bearing support
nuts are installed.
9. Install the straps with new bolts to secure the rear of the driveshaft to the differential yoke.
Tighten the bolts to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
10. Install new nuts to the center bearing support. Tighten the nuts to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 >
Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5213
11. Install the center bearing support ground strap to the floor pan. Tighten the bolt to 40 Nm (30
lb-ft).
NOTE:
If front driveshaft bolts are missing or damaged, order Part Number YL8Z-4529-AA, quantity of one
(1).
12. Install new bolts and washers to secure the front of the driveshaft to the power take off. Tighten
the bolts to 37 Nm (27 lb-ft).
13. Remove the safety stand from under the center bearing support.
14. Lower the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 >
Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5214
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 >
Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5215
Special Service Instruction - Attachment I
OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this Special Service Instruction.
PLEASE NOTE:
Correct all vehicles in stock before delivery.
PROMPTLY CORRECT Promptly correct all affected vehicles at your dealership and other eligible
vehicles which are brought to your dealership within the applicable 36 month / 36,000 mile warranty
coverage period.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using DWE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 >
Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5216
^ Refer to ACESII Manual for claims preparation and submission information.
NOTE:
Prepare and submit claims on the ACESII warranty screen rather than the ACESII recall screen.
^ Use code information shown below:
^ Program Code - 00T06
^ Causal Component-4602
^ Condition Code - 12
^ Labor Operation - Refer to Attachment II
MATERIAL ALLOWANCE
Special Service Instruction - Attachment II
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 >
Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5217
Parts Ordering Information Parts will not be direct shipped for this recall. Order your parts
requirement through the Recall Hotline (1-800-325-5621). Parts will be shipped Priority Next Day
delivery.
NOTE:
Removed parts must be mutilated and properly scrapped to prevent their use on another vehicle.
ORDER INFORMATION DOR/COR DOR/COR number 50175 identifies parts ordered for this
campaign through the Recall Hotline (1-800-325-5621).
DEALER PRICE
^ DOES II
^ Updated Price Book
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000
Special Service Instruction - Attachment III
OVERVIEW This program combines two procedures, a driveshaft replacement and a differential
leak inspection/repair. These two procedures are closely related, and performing them together will
save time.
DRIVESHAFT REPLACEMENT: All affected vehicles will have a new driveshaft installed.
DIFFERENTIAL LEAK INSPECTION/REPAIR:
The mass damper is a weight bolted to the right side of the differential assembly. The damper may
have been installed using the wrong tightening sequence. When installed incorrectly the damper
does not contact all three mounting pads as the bolts are tightened. This creates a leak in the
silicone seal between the rotary blade coupling housing and the differential housing. An inspection
will be performed to identify leaking differential assemblies. If a leak is found, the coupling housing
will be removed and resealed with silicone (F7TZ-1 9554-AA). The damper will be reinstalled using
the correct tightening sequence.
INSPECTION
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 >
Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5218
2. Wipe clean the seam between the rotary blade coupling and the differential housing. Check for
fluid seepage at the seam. See Figure 1.
^ If no signs of fluid are found at the seam, perform Driveshaft Replacement only.
^ If signs of fluid are found at the seam, perform Driveshaft Replacement and Differential Reseal
and Mass Damper Re-Installation.
DRIVESHAFT REPLACEMENT
CAUTION:
Do not reuse any driveshaft retaining fasteners. Install new fasteners only or damage to vehicle
may occur.
1. Position a safety stand under the driveshaft center bearing support. See Figure 2.
2. Remove the bolts and straps securing the rear of the driveshaft to the differential yoke. Discard
the bolts. See Figure 3.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 >
Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5219
3. Remove and discard the center bearing support nuts. See Figure 4.
4. Remove the center bearing support ground strap bolt from the floor pan. See Figure 4.
5. Remove and discard the bolts and washers securing the front of the driveshaft to the power take
off. See Figure 5.
6. With the aid of an assistant, remove the driveshaft from the safety stand. Discard the driveshaft.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 >
Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5220
7. With the aid of an assistant, position the center bearing support of the new driveshaft onto the
safety stand. Position the rear of the driveshaft into the differential yoke, then position the front of
the driveshaft into the power take off.
CAUTION:
The rear of the driveshaft must be bolted to the differential yoke before the center bearing support
nuts are installed.
8. Install the straps with new bolts to secure the rear of the driveshaft to the differential yoke.
Tighten the bolts to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
9. Install new nuts to the center bearing support. Tighten the nuts to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
10. Install the center bearing support ground strap to the floor pan. Tighten the bolt to 40 Nm (30
lb-ft).
NOTE:
If front driveshaft bolts are missing or damaged, order Part Number YL8Z-4529-AA, quantity of one
(1).
11. Install new bolts and washers to secure the front of the driveshaft to the power take off. Tighten
the bolts to 37 Nm (27 lb-ft).
12. Remove the safety stand from under the center bearing support.
13. Lower the vehicle.
DIFFERENTIAL RESEAL AND MASS DAMPER RE-INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the electrical connector from the rotary blade coupling.
2. Remove the mass damper. See Figure 6.
3. Position a drain pan under the differential assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 >
Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5221
4. Remove the six bolts, then remove the rotary blade coupling. See Figure 7.
CAUTION:
Make sure the mating surfaces of the rotary blade coupling and the differential housing are clean
and free of oil before applying silicone sealant. Do not use abrasive cleaning pads. The inside of
the differential housing must be covered when cleaning to prevent debris from entering the
differential.
5. Clean the gasket mating surfaces of the rotary blade coupling and the differential housing with
Ford Metal Surface Cleaner (F4AZ-19A536-RA).
NOTE:
The rotary blade coupling must be installed within five (5) minutes of applying the silicone, or new
silicone must be applied. If possible, allow one (1) hour before filling with lubricant to allow proper
curing of the silicone.
6. Apply a continuous bead of silicone sealant (F7TZ-19554-AA) or equivalent to the mating
surface of the rotary blade coupling. Make sure the bead covers 360 degrees around each bolt
hole. Make sure the rubber wiring grommet does not touch or damage the new silicone bead.
NOTE:
The rubber wiring grommet must be guided into the slot on the differential housing during
installation of the rotary blade coupling.
7. Install the rotary blade coupling. Tighten bolts to 32 Nm (24 lb-ft).
CAUTION:
The proper torque sequence must be followed when installing the mass damper. Improper
sequence will create a leak at the seam between the differential housing and the rotary blade
coupling.
CAUTION:
The initial torque for the damper rear bolt should NOT exceed 4 Nm (35 LB-INCHES).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 >
Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5222
8. Install the mass damper and finger tighten the bolts. Torque the damper as follows. See Figure
8.
^ Step 1: Torque rear damper bolt to 4 Nm (35 LB-INCHES) MAXIMUM.
^ Step 2: Torque front bottom damper bolt to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
^ Step 3: Torque front top damper bolt to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
^ Step 4: Torque rear bottom damper bolt to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
9. Connect the electrical connector to the rotary blade coupling.
10. Remove the fill plug from the differential cover.
11. Fill differential with approximately 2 pints of XY-80W90-QL rear axle lubricant. Fluid level
should be between 6 mm (1/4 inch) and 14 mm (9/16 inch) from bottom of filler plug opening.
12. Tighten the fill plug to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft).
13. Return to Step No.7 to complete driveshaft installation procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: >
00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak
Technical Service Bulletin # 00T06 Date: 000801
Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak
00T06
SPECIAL SERVICE INSTRUCTION
Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Rear Driveshaft Replacement
^ August 2OOO
^ Dealer Letter
^ Attachment I ^
Administrative Information
^ Attachment II ^
Labor Allowances
^ Attachment III ^
Technical Information
^ Special Service Instruction 00T06-S1
Certain 2001 Model Year Escape 4x4 Vehicles - Rear Driveshaft Replacement and Rear
Differential Leak
^ Dealer Letter
^ Attachment I ^
Administrative Information
^ Attachment II ^
Labor Allowances
^ Attachment III ^
Technical Information, Supplement 00T06-S1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: >
00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5228
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: >
00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5229
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: >
00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5230
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this Special Service Instruction.
PLEASE NOTE:
Correct all vehicles in stock before delivery.
PROMPTLY CORRECT Promptly correct all affected vehicles at your dealership and other eligible
vehicles which are brought to your dealership within the applicable 36 month / 36,000 mile warranty
coverage period.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using DWE.
^ Refer to ACESII Manual for claims preparation and submission information.
NOTE:
Prepare and submit claims on the ACESII warranty screen rather than the ACESII recall screen.
^ Use code information shown below:
^ Program Code - 00T06
^ Causal Component - 4602
^ Condition Code - 12
^ Labor Operation - Refer to Attachment II
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: >
00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5231
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENT
Parts Ordering Information Parts will not be direct shipped for this recall. Order your parts
requirement through the Recall Hotline (1-800-325-5621). Parts will be shipped Priority Next Day
delivery, beginning the week of August 28, 2000 once sufficient quantities of parts are available at
the PDC's.
NOTE:
Removed parts must be mutilated and properly scrapped to prevent their use on another vehicle.
ORDER INFORMATION DOR/COR DOR/COR number 50175 identifies parts ordered for this
campaign through the Recall Hotline (1-800-325-5621).
DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to:
^ DOES II
^ Updated Price Book
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
SERVICE PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Do not reuse any driveshaft retaining fasteners. Install new fasteners only or damage to vehicle will
occur.
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: >
00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5232
2. Position a safety stand under the driveshaft center bearing support. See Figure 1.
3. Remove the bolts and straps securing the rear of the driveshaft to the differential yoke. Discard
the bolts. See Figure 2.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: >
00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5233
4. Remove and discard the center bearing support nuts. See Figure 3.
5. Remove the center bearing support ground strap bolt from the floor pan. See Figure 3.
6. Remove and discard the bolts and washers securing the front of the driveshaft to the power take
off. See Figure 4.
7. With the aid of an assistant, remove the driveshaft from the safety stand. Discard the driveshaft.
8. With the aid of an assistant, position the center bearing support of the new driveshaft onto the
safety stand. Position the rear of the driveshaft into the differential yoke, then position the front of
the driveshaft into the power take off.
CAUTION:
The rear of the driveshaft must be bolted to the differential yoke before the center bearing support
nuts are installed.
9. Install the straps with new bolts to secure the rear of the driveshaft to the differential yoke.
Tighten the bolts to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
10. Install new nuts to the center bearing support. Tighten the nuts to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: >
00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5234
11. Install the center bearing support ground strap to the floor pan. Tighten the bolt to 40 Nm (30
lb-ft).
NOTE:
If front driveshaft bolts are missing or damaged, order Part Number YL8Z-4529-AA, quantity of one
(1).
12. Install new bolts and washers to secure the front of the driveshaft to the power take off. Tighten
the bolts to 37 Nm (27 lb-ft).
13. Remove the safety stand from under the center bearing support.
14. Lower the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: >
00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5235
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: >
00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5236
Special Service Instruction - Attachment I
OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this Special Service Instruction.
PLEASE NOTE:
Correct all vehicles in stock before delivery.
PROMPTLY CORRECT Promptly correct all affected vehicles at your dealership and other eligible
vehicles which are brought to your dealership within the applicable 36 month / 36,000 mile warranty
coverage period.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using DWE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: >
00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5237
^ Refer to ACESII Manual for claims preparation and submission information.
NOTE:
Prepare and submit claims on the ACESII warranty screen rather than the ACESII recall screen.
^ Use code information shown below:
^ Program Code - 00T06
^ Causal Component-4602
^ Condition Code - 12
^ Labor Operation - Refer to Attachment II
MATERIAL ALLOWANCE
Special Service Instruction - Attachment II
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: >
00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5238
Parts Ordering Information Parts will not be direct shipped for this recall. Order your parts
requirement through the Recall Hotline (1-800-325-5621). Parts will be shipped Priority Next Day
delivery.
NOTE:
Removed parts must be mutilated and properly scrapped to prevent their use on another vehicle.
ORDER INFORMATION DOR/COR DOR/COR number 50175 identifies parts ordered for this
campaign through the Recall Hotline (1-800-325-5621).
DEALER PRICE
^ DOES II
^ Updated Price Book
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000
Special Service Instruction - Attachment III
OVERVIEW This program combines two procedures, a driveshaft replacement and a differential
leak inspection/repair. These two procedures are closely related, and performing them together will
save time.
DRIVESHAFT REPLACEMENT: All affected vehicles will have a new driveshaft installed.
DIFFERENTIAL LEAK INSPECTION/REPAIR:
The mass damper is a weight bolted to the right side of the differential assembly. The damper may
have been installed using the wrong tightening sequence. When installed incorrectly the damper
does not contact all three mounting pads as the bolts are tightened. This creates a leak in the
silicone seal between the rotary blade coupling housing and the differential housing. An inspection
will be performed to identify leaking differential assemblies. If a leak is found, the coupling housing
will be removed and resealed with silicone (F7TZ-1 9554-AA). The damper will be reinstalled using
the correct tightening sequence.
INSPECTION
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: >
00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5239
2. Wipe clean the seam between the rotary blade coupling and the differential housing. Check for
fluid seepage at the seam. See Figure 1.
^ If no signs of fluid are found at the seam, perform Driveshaft Replacement only.
^ If signs of fluid are found at the seam, perform Driveshaft Replacement and Differential Reseal
and Mass Damper Re-Installation.
DRIVESHAFT REPLACEMENT
CAUTION:
Do not reuse any driveshaft retaining fasteners. Install new fasteners only or damage to vehicle
may occur.
1. Position a safety stand under the driveshaft center bearing support. See Figure 2.
2. Remove the bolts and straps securing the rear of the driveshaft to the differential yoke. Discard
the bolts. See Figure 3.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: >
00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5240
3. Remove and discard the center bearing support nuts. See Figure 4.
4. Remove the center bearing support ground strap bolt from the floor pan. See Figure 4.
5. Remove and discard the bolts and washers securing the front of the driveshaft to the power take
off. See Figure 5.
6. With the aid of an assistant, remove the driveshaft from the safety stand. Discard the driveshaft.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: >
00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5241
7. With the aid of an assistant, position the center bearing support of the new driveshaft onto the
safety stand. Position the rear of the driveshaft into the differential yoke, then position the front of
the driveshaft into the power take off.
CAUTION:
The rear of the driveshaft must be bolted to the differential yoke before the center bearing support
nuts are installed.
8. Install the straps with new bolts to secure the rear of the driveshaft to the differential yoke.
Tighten the bolts to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
9. Install new nuts to the center bearing support. Tighten the nuts to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
10. Install the center bearing support ground strap to the floor pan. Tighten the bolt to 40 Nm (30
lb-ft).
NOTE:
If front driveshaft bolts are missing or damaged, order Part Number YL8Z-4529-AA, quantity of one
(1).
11. Install new bolts and washers to secure the front of the driveshaft to the power take off. Tighten
the bolts to 37 Nm (27 lb-ft).
12. Remove the safety stand from under the center bearing support.
13. Lower the vehicle.
DIFFERENTIAL RESEAL AND MASS DAMPER RE-INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the electrical connector from the rotary blade coupling.
2. Remove the mass damper. See Figure 6.
3. Position a drain pan under the differential assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: >
00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5242
4. Remove the six bolts, then remove the rotary blade coupling. See Figure 7.
CAUTION:
Make sure the mating surfaces of the rotary blade coupling and the differential housing are clean
and free of oil before applying silicone sealant. Do not use abrasive cleaning pads. The inside of
the differential housing must be covered when cleaning to prevent debris from entering the
differential.
5. Clean the gasket mating surfaces of the rotary blade coupling and the differential housing with
Ford Metal Surface Cleaner (F4AZ-19A536-RA).
NOTE:
The rotary blade coupling must be installed within five (5) minutes of applying the silicone, or new
silicone must be applied. If possible, allow one (1) hour before filling with lubricant to allow proper
curing of the silicone.
6. Apply a continuous bead of silicone sealant (F7TZ-19554-AA) or equivalent to the mating
surface of the rotary blade coupling. Make sure the bead covers 360 degrees around each bolt
hole. Make sure the rubber wiring grommet does not touch or damage the new silicone bead.
NOTE:
The rubber wiring grommet must be guided into the slot on the differential housing during
installation of the rotary blade coupling.
7. Install the rotary blade coupling. Tighten bolts to 32 Nm (24 lb-ft).
CAUTION:
The proper torque sequence must be followed when installing the mass damper. Improper
sequence will create a leak at the seam between the differential housing and the rotary blade
coupling.
CAUTION:
The initial torque for the damper rear bolt should NOT exceed 4 Nm (35 LB-INCHES).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: >
00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5243
8. Install the mass damper and finger tighten the bolts. Torque the damper as follows. See Figure
8.
^ Step 1: Torque rear damper bolt to 4 Nm (35 LB-INCHES) MAXIMUM.
^ Step 2: Torque front bottom damper bolt to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
^ Step 3: Torque front top damper bolt to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
^ Step 4: Torque rear bottom damper bolt to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
9. Connect the electrical connector to the rotary blade coupling.
10. Remove the fill plug from the differential cover.
11. Fill differential with approximately 2 pints of XY-80W90-QL rear axle lubricant. Fluid level
should be between 6 mm (1/4 inch) and 14 mm (9/16 inch) from bottom of filler plug opening.
12. Tighten the fill plug to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft).
13. Return to Step No.7 to complete driveshaft installation procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5244
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Specifications
Center bearing mount nuts 35 ft.lb
Rear end universal joint caps bolts 17 ft.lb
Driveshaft to power take off bolts 27 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5245
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Description and Operation
Driveshaft
CAUTION: All Driveshaft assemblies are balanced. If undercoating the vehicle, protect the
driveshaft to prevent overspray of any undercoating material.
CAUTION: Manual and automatic transmission driveshafts are different. Make sure that the
Driveshaft being installed is compatible with the vehicle or damage to the vehicle may occur.
The Driveshaft has traditional balance weights attached (spot-welded) by the manufacturer.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > General Procedures
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair General Procedures
Indexing
Driveshaft Indexing
NOTE: If a driveshaft is installed and driveshaft vibration is encountered after installation, index the
drive shaft.
NOTE: If indexing the driveshaft does not eliminate the vibration, balance the driveshaft.
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the front driveshaft and rotate the front flange 60 degrees. 3. Connect the front
driveshaft.
4. Disconnect the rear driveshaft universal joint and rotate 180 degrees. 5. Connect the rear
driveshaft. 6. Lower the vehicle and test drive. 7. Repeat the procedure if necessary.
Runout and Balance
Driveshaft Runout and Balance
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the rear tires.
^ Install the lug nuts to retain the brake drums.
3. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not run the vehicle on the hoist for an extended period of
time.
^ Record base line speed with the transmission in gear.
^ Increase the vehicle speed to the maximum vibration level.
^ Record the speed of the vibration as a base line.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > General Procedures > Page 5248
4. Check the rear driveshaft attachment. If there are any worn parts, new parts need to be installed.
5. WARNING: Keep hands away from the balance weights while the driveshaft is rotating.
With the transmission in gear, run the vehicle with the driveshaft rotating 97-113 km/h (60-70 mph).
6. WARNING: Keep hands away from the balance weights while the driveshaft is rotating.
Have an assistant contact the driveshaft with a marker in the rear, middle and front end to indicate
heavy spots.
7. WARNING: Keep hands away from the balance weights while the driveshaft is rotating.
To balance the driveshaft, install two screw-type hose clamps on the driveshaft and rotate them in
90 degree intervals. Check the vibration for each position and place the screws at the position that
produces the least vibration.
8. Run the vehicle at the base line speed.
9. If the vibration is still evident, rotate the clamps away from each other until the driveshaft is
balanced.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > General Procedures > Page 5249
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Driveshaft Removal and Installation
WARNING: The normal operating temperature of the exhaust system is very high. Never attempt to
remove any part of the system until it has cooled. Be especially careful when working around the
catalytic converters. The temperature of the converter rises to a high level after only a few minutes
of engine operation. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Index-mark the pinion and yoke to the rear of the driveshaft.
3. Remove the ground strap bolt.
4. CAUTION: Do not reuse center bearing nuts. Install new nuts only or damage to the vehicle will
occur.
Remove and discard the driveshaft center bearing nuts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > General Procedures > Page 5250
5. CAUTION: Do not reuse the CV joint bolts and washers. Install new bolts and washers only or
damage to the vehicle may occur.
Remove the front driveshaft to power take off bolts and washers. ^
Discard the bolts and washers.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint,
Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Description and Operation
Universal Joint: Description and Operation
Universal Joints
The Driveshaft is repaired by installing a new complete assembly. The single center joint is: ^
a lubed-for-life design that requires no periodic lubrication.
^ equipped with nylon thrust washers, located at the base of each bearing cup, which control end
play, position the needle bearings and improve grease movement.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications
Flex Plate: Specifications
Flex Plate Tightening Torque 59 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page
5257
Flex Plate: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the transaxle.
2. Remove the bolts and the flexplate. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications
Flywheel: Specifications
Flywheel Tightening Torque 83 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5261
Flywheel: Service and Repair
Removal
1. Remove the clutch.
2. Remove the bolts and the flywheel. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and
Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation
TRANSMISSION CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP
The Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL) is an output signal from the PCM that controls the
lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Refer to
Transmission Control Switch, PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Bell Housing, M/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Bell Housing: Service and Repair
Clutch Housing Locating Dowels Removal
1. Remove the flywheel.
2. NOTE: Care should be taken not to damage the dowel holes or the surrounding surface areas
during removal.
Remove the clutch housing locating dowels.
Installation
1. NOTE: Care should be taken to install the dowel squarely into place until it is fully seated and to
not damage the surrounding surface areas.
Install the clutch housing locating dowels.
2. Install the flywheel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Case, M/T > Component
Information > Specifications
Case: Specifications
Case cover bolts 89 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Manual Transaxle
> Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Differential Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications
Please refer to Manual Transmission Fluid; Specifications for capacities of the manual transaxle
assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Manual Transaxle
> Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 5279
Differential Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Fluid Type SAE 75W-90
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Drain Plug, M/T > Component
Information > Specifications
Drain Plug: Specifications
Drain plug 35 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Drain Plug, M/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5283
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications
Manual Transmission
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
................................................................... 2.8 Quarts Note: Approximate refill. Service refill
capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a
level surface.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 5288
Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Manual Transmission Fluid Type
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
.................. Motorcraft SAE 75W-90 Gear Oil GL-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Flywheel Gear, M/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Flywheel Gear: Service and Repair
Flywheel Ring Gear Removal
WARNING: This procedure should be carried out only by a correctly equipped and experienced
acetylene torch operator. To avoid personal injury, tongs must be used or asbestos gloves worn
when handling the heated flywheel ring gear. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
1. Remove the flywheel.
2. CAUTION: Tap the flywheel ring gear evenly to prevent binding.
Remove the flywheel ring gear from the flywheel. ^
Evenly heat the flywheel ring gear and use a brass drift to drive the flywheel ring gear off the
flywheel.
Installation
WARNING: This procedure should be carried out only by a correctly equipped and experienced
acetylene torch operator. To avoid personal injury, tongs must be used or asbestos gloves worn
when handling the heated flywheel ring gear. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
1. CAUTION: Do not heat the flywheel ring gear beyond 278°C (532°F). Use heat indicating
crayons to prevent overheating.
CAUTION: Keep the torch moving to prevent hot spots.
Evenly heat the flywheel ring gear.
2. CAUTION: The bevel on the flywheel ring gear must face the rear of the flywheel.
Install the flywheel ring gear. ^
Use a brass drift to tap the flywheel ring gear into position.
3. Install the flywheel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Input Shaft, M/T > Component
Information > Specifications
Input Shaft: Specifications
Input shaft lock nut 118 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, M/T >
System Information > Service and Repair
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair
Halfshaft Oil Seal
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Remove the halfshaft.
2. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar.
Remove the halfshaft seal.
Installation
1. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, M/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Page 5298
Using the special tool, install the new halfshaft seal.
2. Install the halfshaft.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T >
Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Specifications
Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications
Turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb
Output shaft speed (OSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T >
Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T >
Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 5305
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T >
Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T >
Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5308
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T >
Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5309
Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR
The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with
information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control
and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of
vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending
upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which
powertrain control feature uses the information generated.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T >
Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield.
4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor.
^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the OSS bore.
5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T >
Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor >
Page 5312
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation.
Install the OSS sensor. ^
Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T >
Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor >
Page 5313
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor.
5. Remove the TSS sensor.
^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore.
6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T >
Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor >
Page 5314
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation.
Install the TSS sensor. ^
Connect the TSS electrical connector.
2. Remove the drain pan.
3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
7. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all near positions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component
Information > Specifications
Shifter M/T: Specifications
Shift control shaft selector lever bolt 10 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5318
Shifter M/T: Service and Repair
Gearshift Lever Removal and Installation
1. Remove the center console trim and gearshift lever boot.
1. Remove the gearshift lever knob. 2. Remove the center console trim and gearshift lever boot.
2. Remove the snap ring.
3. Remove the plastic clip.
4. Remove the rubber bushing. 5. Raise and support the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5319
6. Disconnect the gearshift linkage.
1. Remove the bolt and nut. 2. Disconnect the gearshift linkage.
7. Remove the gearshift lever. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Boot,
M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Shift Boot: Service and Repair
Gearshift Lever Boot Removal and Installation
1. Remove the center console trim and gearshift lever boot.
1. Remove the Gearshift lever knob. 2. Remove the center console trim and Gearshift lever boot.
2. Remove the gearshift lever boot.
1. Remove the screws. 2. Remove the Gearshift lever boot.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T >
Component Information > Specifications
Transmission Mount: Specifications
Front transaxle support insulator bracket bolts 41 ft.lb
Front transaxle support insulator bolt 66 ft.lb
Rear transaxle support insulator bolt 66 ft.lb
Rear transaxle support insulator to subframe bolt and nuts 66 ft.lb
Rear transaxle support insulator bracket to transaxle bolts 66 ft.lb
LH transaxle support insulator bracket to transaxle bolt and nuts 66 ft.lb
LH transaxle support insulator to bracket bolt 66 ft.lb
LH transaxle support insulator to body bolts 41 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Support Insulator - LH
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Support Insulator - LH
Transaxle LH Support Insulator
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. Using the special tool, support the engine. 2. Remove the air cleaner.
3. Remove the LH transaxle support insulator.
1. Remove the bolt. 2. Remove the four bolts. 3. Remove the LH transaxle support insulator.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Support Insulator - LH > Page 5329
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Front Support Insulator
Transaxle Front Support Insulator
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. Using the special tool, support the engine.
2. Remove the front transaxle support insulator bolt. 3. Raise and support the vehicle.
4. Remove the transverse crossmember.
1. Remove the bolts. 2. Remove the transverse crossmember.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Support Insulator - LH > Page 5330
5. Remove the front-to-aft crossmember.
1. Remove the splash shield screw. 2. Remove the bolts and the nut. 3. Remove the front-to-aft
crossmember.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Support Insulator - LH > Page 5331
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Rear Support Insulator
Transaxle Rear Support Insulator
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. Using the special tool, support the engine.
2. Remove the rear transaxle support insulator.
1. Remove the bolt. 2. Remove the bolt and the nuts. 3. Remove the rear transaxle support
insulator.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor,
M/T > Component Information > Specifications
Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications
Turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb
Output shaft speed (OSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor,
M/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor,
M/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 5337
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor,
M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor,
M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5340
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor,
M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5341
Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR
The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with
information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control
and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of
vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending
upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which
powertrain control feature uses the information generated.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor,
M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield.
4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor.
^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the OSS bore.
5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor,
M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5344
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation.
Install the OSS sensor. ^
Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor,
M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5345
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor.
5. Remove the TSS sensor.
^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore.
6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor,
M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5346
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation.
Install the TSS sensor. ^
Connect the TSS electrical connector.
2. Remove the drain pan.
3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
7. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all near positions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5352
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5353
Shift Interlock Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5354
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Figures 43 and 44) signals the PCM with key power
whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the Transmission Control Indicator
Lamp (TCIL) lights when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. The operator of the vehicle
controls the position of the TCS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component
Information > Specifications
Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Specifications
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 18 ft.lb
Transmission range (TR) sensor bolts 9 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5363
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5364
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5365
Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL. 2. Disconnect the battery cables. 3. Remove the battery and
tray.
4. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAP) sensor.
5. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5366
6. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
7. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the thermostat housing to gain access to the transmission
range (TR) sensor.
Remove the thermostat housing.
8. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor.
1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5367
2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Connect the electrical connector.
3. Install the thermostat housing.
4. Install the air cleaner assembly.
5. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
6. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor.
7. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
Install the battery and tray.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5368
8. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive
symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its
adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the
strategy.
Connect the battery cables.
9. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in
PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should be
active only in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored
Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's
Stored
Article No. 02-2-4
02/04/02
TRANSAXLE - CD4E - HARSH AND DELAYED 1-2/2-3 UPSHIFTS - AFTER TRANSAXLE OR
TURBINE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR (TSS) REPLACEMENT - POSSIBLE DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, AND
P1744
FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2001-2002 ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR
ISSUE
Some vehicles equipped with the CD4E transaxle may exhibit harsh and delayed 1-2/2-3 upshifts
along with DTCs for gear ratio errors after the Transaxle or Turbine Shaft Speed sensor (TSS)
have been replaced. DTCs may include OBD1 codes 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, or OBD II
codes P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, and P1744
ACTION
If the condition occurred after servicing the Transaxle or TSS, refer to the following TSS Selection
Chart and select the correct TSS for the vehicle application. Note that each TSS has the Ford
engineering part number on it. Also note that there is a TSS kit that includes an instruction sheet,
TSS sensor and correct bolt.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored >
Page 5377
If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and
determine the correct sensor for the vehicle.
1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body.
2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the
Selection Chart.
3. Clear all codes and verify repair.
4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year
Workshop Manual.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed
Upshifts/DTC's Stored
Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed
Upshifts/DTC's Stored
Article No. 02-2-4
02/04/02
TRANSAXLE - CD4E - HARSH AND DELAYED 1-2/2-3 UPSHIFTS - AFTER TRANSAXLE OR
TURBINE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR (TSS) REPLACEMENT - POSSIBLE DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, AND
P1744
FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2001-2002 ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR
ISSUE
Some vehicles equipped with the CD4E transaxle may exhibit harsh and delayed 1-2/2-3 upshifts
along with DTCs for gear ratio errors after the Transaxle or Turbine Shaft Speed sensor (TSS)
have been replaced. DTCs may include OBD1 codes 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, or OBD II
codes P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, and P1744
ACTION
If the condition occurred after servicing the Transaxle or TSS, refer to the following TSS Selection
Chart and select the correct TSS for the vehicle application. Note that each TSS has the Ford
engineering part number on it. Also note that there is a TSS kit that includes an instruction sheet,
TSS sensor and correct bolt.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed
Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 5383
If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and
determine the correct sensor for the vehicle.
1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body.
2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the
Selection Chart.
3. Clear all codes and verify repair.
4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year
Workshop Manual.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5384
Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications
Turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb
Output shaft speed (OSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor
> Page 5387
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor > Page 5390
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5391
Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR
The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with
information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control
and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of
vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending
upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which
powertrain control feature uses the information generated.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft
Speed (OSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield.
4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor.
^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the OSS bore.
5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft
Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5394
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation.
Install the OSS sensor. ^
Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft
Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5395
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor.
5. Remove the TSS sensor.
^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore.
6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft
Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5396
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation.
Install the TSS sensor. ^
Connect the TSS electrical connector.
2. Remove the drain pan.
3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
7. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all near positions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Specifications
Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications
Turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb
Output shaft speed (OSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed
Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed
Sensor > Page 5403
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor > Page 5406
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5407
Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR
The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with
information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control
and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of
vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending
upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which
powertrain control feature uses the information generated.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft
Speed (OSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield.
4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor.
^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the OSS bore.
5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft
Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5410
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation.
Install the OSS sensor. ^
Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft
Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5411
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor.
5. Remove the TSS sensor.
^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore.
6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft
Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5412
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation.
Install the TSS sensor. ^
Connect the TSS electrical connector.
2. Remove the drain pan.
3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
7. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all near positions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information >
Specifications
Shift Solenoid: Specifications
Solenoid valve body bolts 89 in.lb
Solenoid body-to-case bolts 89 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information
> Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation
TRANSMISSION CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP
The Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL) is an output signal from the PCM that controls the
lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Refer to
Transmission Control Switch, PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 5433
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 5434
Shift Interlock Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 5435
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Figures 43 and 44) signals the PCM with key power
whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the Transmission Control Indicator
Lamp (TCIL) lights when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. The operator of the vehicle
controls the position of the TCS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission
Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications
Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Specifications
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 18 ft.lb
Transmission range (TR) sensor bolts 9 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission
Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5444
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission
Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5445
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission
Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5446
Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL. 2. Disconnect the battery cables. 3. Remove the battery and
tray.
4. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAP) sensor.
5. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission
Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5447
6. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
7. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the thermostat housing to gain access to the transmission
range (TR) sensor.
Remove the thermostat housing.
8. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor.
1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission
Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5448
2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Connect the electrical connector.
3. Install the thermostat housing.
4. Install the air cleaner assembly.
5. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
6. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor.
7. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
Install the battery and tray.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission
Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5449
8. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive
symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its
adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the
strategy.
Connect the battery cables.
9. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in
PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should be
active only in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh
and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored
Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's
Stored
Article No. 02-2-4
02/04/02
TRANSAXLE - CD4E - HARSH AND DELAYED 1-2/2-3 UPSHIFTS - AFTER TRANSAXLE OR
TURBINE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR (TSS) REPLACEMENT - POSSIBLE DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, AND
P1744
FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2001-2002 ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR
ISSUE
Some vehicles equipped with the CD4E transaxle may exhibit harsh and delayed 1-2/2-3 upshifts
along with DTCs for gear ratio errors after the Transaxle or Turbine Shaft Speed sensor (TSS)
have been replaced. DTCs may include OBD1 codes 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, or OBD II
codes P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, and P1744
ACTION
If the condition occurred after servicing the Transaxle or TSS, refer to the following TSS Selection
Chart and select the correct TSS for the vehicle application. Note that each TSS has the Ford
engineering part number on it. Also note that there is a TSS kit that includes an instruction sheet,
TSS sensor and correct bolt.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh
and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 5458
If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and
determine the correct sensor for the vehicle.
1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body.
2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the
Selection Chart.
3. Clear all codes and verify repair.
4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year
Workshop Manual.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored
Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed
Upshifts/DTC's Stored
Article No. 02-2-4
02/04/02
TRANSAXLE - CD4E - HARSH AND DELAYED 1-2/2-3 UPSHIFTS - AFTER TRANSAXLE OR
TURBINE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR (TSS) REPLACEMENT - POSSIBLE DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, AND
P1744
FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2001-2002 ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR
ISSUE
Some vehicles equipped with the CD4E transaxle may exhibit harsh and delayed 1-2/2-3 upshifts
along with DTCs for gear ratio errors after the Transaxle or Turbine Shaft Speed sensor (TSS)
have been replaced. DTCs may include OBD1 codes 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, or OBD II
codes P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, and P1744
ACTION
If the condition occurred after servicing the Transaxle or TSS, refer to the following TSS Selection
Chart and select the correct TSS for the vehicle application. Note that each TSS has the Ford
engineering part number on it. Also note that there is a TSS kit that includes an instruction sheet,
TSS sensor and correct bolt.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 5464
If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and
determine the correct sensor for the vehicle.
1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body.
2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the
Selection Chart.
3. Clear all codes and verify repair.
4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year
Workshop Manual.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5465
Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications
Turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb
Output shaft speed (OSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 5468
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5471
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 5472
Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR
The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with
information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control
and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of
vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending
upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which
powertrain control feature uses the information generated.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield.
4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor.
^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the OSS bore.
5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5475
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation.
Install the OSS sensor. ^
Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5476
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor.
5. Remove the TSS sensor.
^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore.
6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5477
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation.
Install the TSS sensor. ^
Connect the TSS electrical connector.
2. Remove the drain pan.
3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
7. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all near positions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Specifications
Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications
Turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb
Output shaft speed (OSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 5484
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5487
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 5488
Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR
The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with
information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control
and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of
vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending
upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which
powertrain control feature uses the information generated.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield.
4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor.
^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the OSS bore.
5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5491
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation.
Install the OSS sensor. ^
Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5492
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor.
5. Remove the TSS sensor.
^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore.
6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5493
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation.
Install the TSS sensor. ^
Connect the TSS electrical connector.
2. Remove the drain pan.
3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
7. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all near positions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Diagnostic
Connector - ABS > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Diagnostic
Connector - ABS > Component Information > Locations > Page 5499
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair
Technical Service Bulletin # 07S51S2 Date: 091009
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5508
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED?
Yes. OASIS was activated April 10, 2007.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED?
Yes. Available through the website. Owner names and addresses were made available April 30,
2007.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5509
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles have been directed to dealers for repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter and schedule a
service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
RELATED DAMAGE
If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the
Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company
reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not
had this recall performed on a timely basis.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service
Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval
after completion of the repair will not be granted.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair
was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this
bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC).
The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option,
directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251 Dearborn, MI 48121-6251.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund
claims that include other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be
accepted for reimbursement.
^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair.
Claiming a refund will not close the recall on the vehicle.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 07S51 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
RENTAL VEHICLES
If an ABS module needs to be ordered, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except
for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP)
guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle
was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Handling Allowance: An allowance of $1.00 per repair is being provided to cover the costs of
locally obtained materials and XG-12 Electrical Grease. To claim the allowance, enter $1.00 as
"HANDLG" in the "MISC EXPENSE" area of the claim form.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5510
^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line
on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires approval from Special Service Support
Center.
^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked.
"MT" labor requires approval from Special Service Support Center.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5511
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program Order your parts requirements through normal
order processing channels.
The DOR/COR number for this safety recall is 50376.
Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Support Center or E-mailed.
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to DOES II.
PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN
Affected ABS Modules (Part number YL8Z-2C065-AA and YL8Z-2B373-BA) and the removed ABS
connector are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center
(WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition
and return instructions.
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures".
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
This program includes making sure the wiring harness connector is properly sealed against
moisture/contamination, and inspecting the ABS module for evidence of corrosion resulting from an
inadequately sealed connector.
During the inspection, we expect that most of the affected vehicles will not have any evidence of
corrosion in the ABS module. However, the ABS wiring harness connector still needs to be
inspected for missing or improperly seated seals and/or incorrect connector number.
If the ABS module is corroded, the ABS module and connector must be replaced.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5512
A flow chart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1.
Inspect Connector Seals
INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
2. NOTE: When disconnecting the ABS module connector, be sure the blue connector lock stays
engaged with the harness connector and does not
remain in the module. Remove it from the module if necessary and make sure the white 0-ring seal
is properly installed.
Disconnect the ABS module 25-pin connector by sliding the lock mechanism out (towards the
passenger side of the vehicle) and pulling the connector off the module.
3. Disconnect the speed sensor harness, then remove the 2 harness retainers from the studs and
position the harness above the air cleaner assembly to
provide access for inspection.
4. Inspect the top of the ABS module connector cover for 2 yellow "X" marks.
^ If 2 yellow "X" marks are present, perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
^ If no yellow "X" marks are present, proceed to Step 5.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5513
5. Inspect the ABS module connector pins for corrosion. See Figure 2.
^ If corrosion is present, perform Labor Operation E - Install Pigtail, New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
^ If corrosion is not present, proceed to Step 6.
6. CAUTION: Do not cut any of the harness wires or the wire insulation when cutting off the tie
strap.
Remove the tie strap from the connector dress cover, then slide the cover off the connector. See
Figure 3.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5514
7. Verify the wire seals are present on the 4 heavier gauge wires. See Figure 4.
8. Verify the numbers 054" are stamped on the slide-lock end of the mat cover (wipe the mat cover
clean if necessary to view). See Figure 5.
NOTE:
Mat covers with any other number will be missing plugs in the unused pin locations.
9. Perform Labor Operation C - Install Pigtail and Apply Electrical Grease if:
^ any seals are missing or,
^ if the number on the mat cover is not "054".
10. Perform Labor Operation D - Seat Connector and Apply Electrical Grease if:
^ Any of the 4 wire seals are not fully seated in the connector cavities.
^ Each seal should sit approximately 1-2 mm (1/16 in) below the top of the round cavity. See Figure
4.
11. Perform Labor Operation A - Apply Electrical Grease if:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5515
^ The module is not corroded. and
^ All seals are present. and
^ All seals are fully seated. and
^ The number on the mat cover is "054".
LABOR OPERATION A - APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
1. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 6.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 6. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess
amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a "hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
2. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
3. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
LABOR OPERATION C - INSTALL PIGTAIL AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION
When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless
heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5516
USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 7.
1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module
connector. See Figure 8.
2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module
connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness
(all wires) to the same length. See Figure 8.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5517
3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/2 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See
Figure 9.
CAUTION:
The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT
cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire
on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag.
Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to
have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different
except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing
circuits when splicing wires.
NOTE:
The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these
wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation.
NOTE:
The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original
vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5518
4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness.
Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice
connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903.
See Figure 10.
5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice
connector.
6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the
flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit,
shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all
wires are insulated. See Figure 11.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5519
7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply
tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure
to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on
the other. See Figure 12.
8. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 13.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5520
connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 13. DO NOT
spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector
cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or
locked in place.
9. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
10. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
11. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by
illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3
seconds).
^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle.
^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special
Support Service Center.
LABOR OPERATION D - SEAT CONNECTOR SEALS AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
1. If the seals are not fully seated, reseat any seals not fully seated with a blunt tool. DO NOT use
anything sharp such as a screwdriver, awl or punch that could penetrate the seal and allow
moisture to enter the terminal. See Figure 14.
2. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5521
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 15.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 15. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an
excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
3. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
4. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
LABOR OPERATION E - INSTALL PIGTAIL, NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL
GREASE
IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION
When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless
heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5522
USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 16.
PROCEDURE TO REPLACE VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module
connector. See Figure 17.
2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module
connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness
(all wires) to the same length. See Figure 17.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5523
3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See
Figure 18.
CAUTION:
The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT
cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire
on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag.
Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to
have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different
except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing
circuits when splicing wires.
NOTE:
The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these
wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation.
NOTE:
The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original
vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5524
4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness.
Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice
connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903.
See Figure 19.
5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice
connector.
6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the
flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit,
shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all
wires are insulated. See Figure 20.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5525
7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply
tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure
to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on
the other. See Figure 21.
8. Install a new ABS module. Perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
9. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
10. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by
illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the
instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds).
^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle.
^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special
Support Service Center.
LABOR OPERATION F - INSTALL NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
NOTE:
Module configuration or reprogramming is not required when installing a new ABS module.
1. Disconnect the 2-wire electrical connector at the ABS module.
2. Raise the vehicle on a hoist.
3. Remove the screws and the ABS module.
4. Position the new module and install the screws. Tighten the screws no more than 2 Nm (18
lb-in).
5. Lower the hoist.
6. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect
the harness as follows:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5526
^ Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 22.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 22. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an
excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
7. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
8. Reconnect the 2-wire connector to the ABS module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5527
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5528
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5529
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5530
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5531
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5532
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
NHTSA07V156000 > Mar > 07 > Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect
Electronic Brake Control Module: Recalls Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2004 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor
Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V156000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: March 30, 2007
COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Antilock: Control Unit/Module
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 446460
SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with Antilock Brakes (ABS), the ABS module
connector may have missing or dislodged wire seals. This condition could allow contamination to
enter the module connector, creating a potential for an electrical short.
CONSEQUENCE: An electrical short might cause an ABS malfunction that would illuminate the
ABS warning light, and in some cases, the module may overheat resulting in burning odor, smoke,
and/or fire. This condition could occur either when the vehicle ignition switch is in the off position or
while the vehicle is being operated.
Remedy: Dealers will inspect the wire harness connector to the ABS module for missing or
dislodged wire seals, and repair or replace the harness connector as appropriate. The dealer will
also inspect the connector on the ABS module and replace it if it is found to be corroded or
damaged. The recall began on April 23, 2007. Owners may contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673.
NOTES: Ford recall No. 07S51. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to
http://www.safercar.gov.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair
Technical Service Bulletin # 07S51S2 Date: 091009
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5542
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED?
Yes. OASIS was activated April 10, 2007.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED?
Yes. Available through the website. Owner names and addresses were made available April 30,
2007.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5543
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles have been directed to dealers for repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter and schedule a
service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
RELATED DAMAGE
If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the
Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company
reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not
had this recall performed on a timely basis.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service
Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval
after completion of the repair will not be granted.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair
was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this
bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC).
The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option,
directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251 Dearborn, MI 48121-6251.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund
claims that include other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be
accepted for reimbursement.
^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair.
Claiming a refund will not close the recall on the vehicle.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 07S51 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
RENTAL VEHICLES
If an ABS module needs to be ordered, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except
for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP)
guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle
was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Handling Allowance: An allowance of $1.00 per repair is being provided to cover the costs of
locally obtained materials and XG-12 Electrical Grease. To claim the allowance, enter $1.00 as
"HANDLG" in the "MISC EXPENSE" area of the claim form.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5544
^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line
on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires approval from Special Service Support
Center.
^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked.
"MT" labor requires approval from Special Service Support Center.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5545
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program Order your parts requirements through normal
order processing channels.
The DOR/COR number for this safety recall is 50376.
Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Support Center or E-mailed.
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to DOES II.
PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN
Affected ABS Modules (Part number YL8Z-2C065-AA and YL8Z-2B373-BA) and the removed ABS
connector are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center
(WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition
and return instructions.
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures".
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
This program includes making sure the wiring harness connector is properly sealed against
moisture/contamination, and inspecting the ABS module for evidence of corrosion resulting from an
inadequately sealed connector.
During the inspection, we expect that most of the affected vehicles will not have any evidence of
corrosion in the ABS module. However, the ABS wiring harness connector still needs to be
inspected for missing or improperly seated seals and/or incorrect connector number.
If the ABS module is corroded, the ABS module and connector must be replaced.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5546
A flow chart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1.
Inspect Connector Seals
INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
2. NOTE: When disconnecting the ABS module connector, be sure the blue connector lock stays
engaged with the harness connector and does not
remain in the module. Remove it from the module if necessary and make sure the white 0-ring seal
is properly installed.
Disconnect the ABS module 25-pin connector by sliding the lock mechanism out (towards the
passenger side of the vehicle) and pulling the connector off the module.
3. Disconnect the speed sensor harness, then remove the 2 harness retainers from the studs and
position the harness above the air cleaner assembly to
provide access for inspection.
4. Inspect the top of the ABS module connector cover for 2 yellow "X" marks.
^ If 2 yellow "X" marks are present, perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
^ If no yellow "X" marks are present, proceed to Step 5.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5547
5. Inspect the ABS module connector pins for corrosion. See Figure 2.
^ If corrosion is present, perform Labor Operation E - Install Pigtail, New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
^ If corrosion is not present, proceed to Step 6.
6. CAUTION: Do not cut any of the harness wires or the wire insulation when cutting off the tie
strap.
Remove the tie strap from the connector dress cover, then slide the cover off the connector. See
Figure 3.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5548
7. Verify the wire seals are present on the 4 heavier gauge wires. See Figure 4.
8. Verify the numbers 054" are stamped on the slide-lock end of the mat cover (wipe the mat cover
clean if necessary to view). See Figure 5.
NOTE:
Mat covers with any other number will be missing plugs in the unused pin locations.
9. Perform Labor Operation C - Install Pigtail and Apply Electrical Grease if:
^ any seals are missing or,
^ if the number on the mat cover is not "054".
10. Perform Labor Operation D - Seat Connector and Apply Electrical Grease if:
^ Any of the 4 wire seals are not fully seated in the connector cavities.
^ Each seal should sit approximately 1-2 mm (1/16 in) below the top of the round cavity. See Figure
4.
11. Perform Labor Operation A - Apply Electrical Grease if:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5549
^ The module is not corroded. and
^ All seals are present. and
^ All seals are fully seated. and
^ The number on the mat cover is "054".
LABOR OPERATION A - APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
1. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 6.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 6. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess
amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a "hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
2. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
3. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
LABOR OPERATION C - INSTALL PIGTAIL AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION
When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless
heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5550
USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 7.
1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module
connector. See Figure 8.
2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module
connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness
(all wires) to the same length. See Figure 8.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5551
3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/2 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See
Figure 9.
CAUTION:
The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT
cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire
on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag.
Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to
have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different
except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing
circuits when splicing wires.
NOTE:
The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these
wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation.
NOTE:
The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original
vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5552
4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness.
Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice
connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903.
See Figure 10.
5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice
connector.
6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the
flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit,
shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all
wires are insulated. See Figure 11.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5553
7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply
tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure
to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on
the other. See Figure 12.
8. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 13.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5554
connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 13. DO NOT
spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector
cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or
locked in place.
9. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
10. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
11. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by
illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3
seconds).
^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle.
^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special
Support Service Center.
LABOR OPERATION D - SEAT CONNECTOR SEALS AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
1. If the seals are not fully seated, reseat any seals not fully seated with a blunt tool. DO NOT use
anything sharp such as a screwdriver, awl or punch that could penetrate the seal and allow
moisture to enter the terminal. See Figure 14.
2. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5555
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 15.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 15. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an
excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
3. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
4. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
LABOR OPERATION E - INSTALL PIGTAIL, NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL
GREASE
IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION
When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless
heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5556
USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 16.
PROCEDURE TO REPLACE VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module
connector. See Figure 17.
2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module
connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness
(all wires) to the same length. See Figure 17.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5557
3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See
Figure 18.
CAUTION:
The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT
cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire
on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag.
Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to
have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different
except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing
circuits when splicing wires.
NOTE:
The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these
wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation.
NOTE:
The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original
vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5558
4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness.
Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice
connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903.
See Figure 19.
5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice
connector.
6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the
flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit,
shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all
wires are insulated. See Figure 20.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5559
7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply
tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure
to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on
the other. See Figure 21.
8. Install a new ABS module. Perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
9. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
10. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by
illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the
instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds).
^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle.
^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special
Support Service Center.
LABOR OPERATION F - INSTALL NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
NOTE:
Module configuration or reprogramming is not required when installing a new ABS module.
1. Disconnect the 2-wire electrical connector at the ABS module.
2. Raise the vehicle on a hoist.
3. Remove the screws and the ABS module.
4. Position the new module and install the screws. Tighten the screws no more than 2 Nm (18
lb-in).
5. Lower the hoist.
6. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect
the harness as follows:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5560
^ Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 22.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 22. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an
excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
7. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
8. Reconnect the 2-wire connector to the ABS module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5561
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5562
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5563
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5564
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5565
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5566
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > NHTSA07V156000 > Mar > 07 > Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect
Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 07V156000: ABS Module
Connector Defect
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2004 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor
Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V156000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: March 30, 2007
COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Antilock: Control Unit/Module
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 446460
SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with Antilock Brakes (ABS), the ABS module
connector may have missing or dislodged wire seals. This condition could allow contamination to
enter the module connector, creating a potential for an electrical short.
CONSEQUENCE: An electrical short might cause an ABS malfunction that would illuminate the
ABS warning light, and in some cases, the module may overheat resulting in burning odor, smoke,
and/or fire. This condition could occur either when the vehicle ignition switch is in the off position or
while the vehicle is being operated.
Remedy: Dealers will inspect the wire harness connector to the ABS module for missing or
dislodged wire seals, and repair or replace the harness connector as appropriate. The dealer will
also inspect the connector on the ABS module and replace it if it is found to be corroded or
damaged. The recall began on April 23, 2007. Owners may contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673.
NOTES: Ford recall No. 07S51. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to
http://www.safercar.gov.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5571
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5572
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5573
Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation
Anti-Lock Brake Control Module
NOTE: The 4x2 service replacement module cannot be interchanged with the 4x4 module. The
service replacement 4x4 module is interchangeable with the 4x2 module.
The anti-lock brake control module is mounted to the HCU. It is an on-board diagnostic,
non-repairable unit consisting of two microprocessors and the necessary circuitry for their
operation. The anti-lock brake control module monitors system operation during normal driving as
well as during anti-lock braking. Anti-lock brake module operation is as follows: ^
Under normal driving conditions, the microprocessor produces short test pulses to the solenoid
valves that check the electrical system without any mechanical reaction.
^ Impending wheel lock conditions trigger signals from the anti-lock brake control module that open
and close the appropriate solenoid valves. This results in moderate pulsations in the brake pedal.
^ The anti-lock brake module used in 4x4 application includes a G-sensor. It detects vehicle
movement during a brake lockup event that is transferred to other wheels through the powertrain.
During normal braking, the brake pedal feel is identical to a standard brake system. Most faults that
occur in the anti-lock brake system will be stored as a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) in the
keep-alive memory of the anti-lock brake control module. The DTCs can be retrieved by following
the or-board diagnostic procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5574
Electronic Brake Control Module: Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is part of,
please refer to Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems; Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5575
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair
Module-Anti-Lock Brake Control
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the air cleaner and the air cleaner outlet pipe.
3. Disconnect the electrical connectors.
4. Remove the bolts.
5. Remove the bolt. 6. Raise and support the vehicle.
7. Remove the screws and the control module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5576
8. NOTE: The 4x2 module cannot be interchanged with the 4x4 module. The 4x4 module is
interchangeable with the 4x2 module.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control
Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Description and Operation
Hydraulic Control Unit
The HCU consists of the following components: ^
brake pressure control valve block
^ pump motor
New brake pressure control valve block and pump motor are installed as an assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control
Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5580
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to
Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems; Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control
Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5581
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair
Hydraulic Control Unit
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the air cleaner and the air cleaner outlet pipe.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Disconnect the brake lines.
5. Remove the bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control
Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5582
6. Remove the bolts and the HCU.
7. NOTE: The 4x2 module cannot be interchanged with the 4x4 module. The 4x4 module is
interchangeable with the 4x2 module.
Remove the screws and the control module, if necessary.
8. NOTE: Bleed the HCU after performing this procedure. .
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips
Wheel Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips
TSB 04-23-2
11/29/04
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL TIP
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE When servicing the wheel speed sensors on a 2001-2005 Escape or 2005 Mariner and
Escape Hybrid, care must be taken during removal to prevent damage. The wheel speed sensor
wire has a body plug attached to it. This plug can be damaged if not removed correctly, such as
removal for pinpoint testing. If the body plug is damaged, sensor replacement may be necessary
even though the sensor is functional in all other respects.
ACTION
When removing the body plug, rotate the plug into a position which allows the use of a small
screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body plug. These two tabs are at right
angles (directly above and below) to the sensor wire. See Figures 1 and 2 for reference.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips > Page
5587
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5588
Wheel Speed Sensor: Specifications
Anti-lock brake sensor bolt Rear 20 ft.lb
Anti-lock brake sensor bolt (4X2) Front 9-10 ft.lb
Anti-lock brake sensor bolt (4X4) 62-80 in.lb
Anti-lock brake sensor wire retaining bolt (4X4) 62-80 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 5591
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 5592
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 5593
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 5596
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 5597
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 5598
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5599
Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
Anti-Lock Brake Sensor
NOTE: Any time an anti-lock brake sensor is removed, thoroughly clean the mounting surfaces. On
front anti-lock brake sensors, apply High-Temperature 4x4 Front Axle and Wheel Bearing Grease.
The anti-lock brake system uses four "active" sensors and four sensor indicators to detect the
speed of each wheel. The teeth on the sensor indicator rotate past the stationary sensor at wheel
speed. As the teeth pass the sensor, a digital input signal is generated. The control module uses
the input to compute the speed of each wheel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor, Front
Sensor-Front
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Detach the grommet from the body and pull the connector through the hole.
3. Disconnect the sensor wiring.
4. Detach the retainer.
5. Remove the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5602
6. NOTE: Clean off any dirt that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the bolt and the sensor.
7. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5603
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor, Rear
Sensor-Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Detach the grommet from the body and pull the connector through the hole.
3. Disconnect the sensor wiring.
4. Detach the bolt.
5. Remove the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5604
6. NOTE: Clean off any dirt that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the bolt and the sensor.
7. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Specifications
Brake Bleeding: Specifications
Disc Brake Caliper Bleeder Screws 12 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed
Brake Master Cylinder-Bench Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. Support the brake master cylinder body in a soft jaw vise, and fill the brake master cylinder
reservoir with specified brake fluid.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
2. Install plugs in the front and rear brake outlet ports.
3. Loosen the plug in the front outlet port and slowly depress the primary piston.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5610
4. Tighten the plug in the front outlet port and release the primary piston. 5. Repeat this procedure
until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 6. Repeat Steps 3, 4, and 5 for the rear outlet port with the
front outlet port plugged. 7. Tighten the plugs and attempt to depress the primary piston. The piston
will not depress if all the air is bled out of the system. 8. Install the reservoir cap and install the
brake master cylinder in the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5611
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake Master Cylinder - In-Vehicle Bleed
Brake Master Cylinder-In-Vehicle Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and Polyglycol. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. Disconnect the brake outlet lines from the brake master cylinder and cap the lines. 2. Install
short brake hoses to the master cylinder outlet ports with the ends submerged in the brake master
cylinder reservoir.
3. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid
C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows from both brake
hoses.
5. Remove the short brake hoses and install the brake outlet lines.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5612
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Gravity Bleeding
Gravity Bleed
Brake system
1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB
or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to
the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front
wheel.
Rear drum brakes
3. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Loosen the rear wheel cylinder bleeder screw and leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid
flows.
4. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw.
Front disc brakes
5. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Open the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Leave open until clear bubble-free brake fluid
flows.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5613
6. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw.
7. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with fluid and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5614
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Manual Bleeding
Manual Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
Brake system
1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB
or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to
the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front
wheel.
Rear drum brakes
3. Attach a rubber drain hose to the rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a
container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times
and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Loosen the bleeder screw until fluid flow stops.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the bleeder screw. 6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until
clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows.
7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system.
Front disc brakes
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5615
9. Attach a rubber drain hose to the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free
end of the hose in a container partially filled with
clean brake fluid.
10. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake
pedal. 11. Loosen the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw until fluid flow stops. Maintain pressure
on the brake pedal and tighten the front disc brake
caliper bleeder screw.
12. Repeat Steps 10 and 11 until clear, bubble-free fluid flows.
13. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw.
14. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5616
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair
Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed
Brake Master Cylinder-Bench Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. Support the brake master cylinder body in a soft jaw vise, and fill the brake master cylinder
reservoir with specified brake fluid.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
2. Install plugs in the front and rear brake outlet ports.
3. Loosen the plug in the front outlet port and slowly depress the primary piston.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5617
4. Tighten the plug in the front outlet port and release the primary piston. 5. Repeat this procedure
until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 6. Repeat Steps 3, 4, and 5 for the rear outlet port with the
front outlet port plugged. 7. Tighten the plugs and attempt to depress the primary piston. The piston
will not depress if all the air is bled out of the system. 8. Install the reservoir cap and install the
brake master cylinder in the vehicle.
Brake Master Cylinder - In-Vehicle Bleed
Brake Master Cylinder-In-Vehicle Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and Polyglycol. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. Disconnect the brake outlet lines from the brake master cylinder and cap the lines. 2. Install
short brake hoses to the master cylinder outlet ports with the ends submerged in the brake master
cylinder reservoir.
3. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid
C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows from both brake
hoses.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5618
5. Remove the short brake hoses and install the brake outlet lines.
Brake System Gravity Bleeding
Gravity Bleed
Brake system
1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB
or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to
the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front
wheel.
Rear drum brakes
3. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Loosen the rear wheel cylinder bleeder screw and leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid
flows.
4. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw.
Front disc brakes
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5619
5. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Open the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Leave open until clear bubble-free brake fluid
flows.
6. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw.
7. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with fluid and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Brake System Manual Bleeding
Manual Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
Brake system
1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5620
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB
or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to
the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front
wheel.
Rear drum brakes
3. Attach a rubber drain hose to the rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a
container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times
and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Loosen the bleeder screw until fluid flow stops.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the bleeder screw. 6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until
clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows.
7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system.
Front disc brakes
9. Attach a rubber drain hose to the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free
end of the hose in a container partially filled with
clean brake fluid.
10. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake
pedal. 11. Loosen the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw until fluid flow stops. Maintain pressure
on the brake pedal and tighten the front disc brake
caliper bleeder screw.
12. Repeat Steps 10 and 11 until clear, bubble-free fluid flows.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5621
13. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw.
14. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Brake System Pressure Bleeding
Brake System Pressure Bleeding
Special Tool(s)
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air
may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the
hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. Clean the outside of the brake master cylinder reservoir.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5622
2. Remove the reservoir cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with brake fluid.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
3. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers
of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the
instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter.
Install Brake Bleeder to the brake master cylinder reservoir, and attach the Brake Bleeder tank
hose to the fitting on the adapter.
4. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RH rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose
in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 5. Open the valve on the Brake Bleeder tank.
6. Loosen the bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then close the
bleeder screw and remove the rubber hose.
7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in
order from the LH rear wheel to the RH front wheel, ending with the LH front wheel. 9. Close the
Brake Bleeder tank valve and remove the tank hose from the adapter, and remove the adapter.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5623
10. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Four Wheel Antilock Brake System Bleeding
Brake System Bleeding
Special Tool(s)
Anti-Lock Brakes Bleed
1. NOTE: Carrying out the System Bleed function drives trapped air from the hydraulic control unit
(HCU). Subsequent bleeding removes the air
from the brake hydraulic system to the bleeder screws.
NOTE: The engine must be running to provide adequate voltage to the HCU module during the
anti-lock control portion of the system bleed.
Connect the diagnostic tool.
2. Start the engine and depress the brake pedal to half of the full travel position. 3. Access
FUNCTION TEST mode and press the trigger to run the SYSTEM BLEED FUNCTION. 4. Manually
bleed the brake hydraulic system. 5. Repeat the procedure carrying out a total of two diagnostic
tool cycles and two manual bleed cycles.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Specifications
Brake Pedal Assy: Specifications
Pedal free play 0.3-0.47 in
Brake Pedal bracket Nuts 17 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Specifications >
Page 5627
Brake Pedal Assy: Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to
Brakes and Traction Control; Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Specifications >
Page 5628
Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair
Brake Pedal and Bracket
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the brake pedal position (BPP) switch. 2. If equipped, remove the speed control
deactivator switch.
3. Disconnect the push rod from the brake pedal pin.
^ Remove the cotter pin and bushing.
4. Remove the brake pedal and bracket.
^ Remove the nuts.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Specifications
Brake Caliper: Specifications
Brake Caliper Anchor Plate Bolts 111 ft.lb
Brake Caliper Bolts 26 ft.lb
Front Disc Brake Caliper Bore 2.36 in
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Removal and Installation
Brake Caliper
Removal
WARNING: Asbestos fiber dust may be present on brake and clutch assemblies and is hazardous
to health if inhaled. Brake and clutch assemblies should be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner
recommended for use with asbestos fibers such as a brake/clutch/service vacuum. The bag must
be labeled per OSHA instructions, sealed, and the trash hauler notified as to the bag's contents. If
a vacuum suitable for asbestos is not available, cleaning should be done wet. If dust generation is
still possible, technicians should wear government-approved toxic dust purifying respirators. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly.
2. Remove the brake caliper clip.
3. Position the caliper aside.
1 Remove the brake caliper bolt caps and bolts.
2 Position the caliper aside.
4. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes.
Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If
brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if
irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention
immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5635
with water.
Note: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component
has been installed, air may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires
bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. The hydraulic system can
be bled manually or with a Brake Bleeder.
Disconnect the brake line from the caliper and remove the caliper.
5. CAUTION: Do no use denatured alcohol for flushing the brake system or cleaning assemblies
where alcohol could be trapped. If denatured
alcohol is trapped, it can cause eventual failure of rubber components in the system.
CAUTION: Never allow any petroleum product or mineral oil to contact the inside of a brake
hydraulic system. Mineral oil and petroleum products deteriorate the natural rubber seals used in
brake hydraulic systems. If a brake system becomes contaminated, it must be flushed with clean
brake fluid and all rubber seals and flex hoses replaced. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT
3.
To install reverse the removal procedure. ^
Bleed the brake system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5636
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Disassembly and Assembly
Brake Caliper
Disassembly
1. Remove front disc brake caliper from the vehicle.
2. Remove the front caliper slide pins and boots.
3. Remove the dust seal.
4. WARNING: Use only as much compressed air as necessary to remove the piston. Excessive
pressure can force the piston out of the
caliper bore with enough force to cause personal injury. Never attempt to catch the piston by hand
as it comes out of the bore. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver or any other similar tool to pry the piston out of the bore.
Piston damage could result.
Note: Inspect the piston for wear, rust, or pits. If any of these conditions exist, a new piston must be
installed.
Remove the caliper piston. 1
Position a block of wood between the piston and the disc brake caliper.
2 Apply compressed air to caliper to remove piston.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5637
5. Remove the bleeder screw.
6. CAUTION: Use a plastic or wooden pick to remove the piston seal Tom the caliper bore. A metal
tool may scratch or nick the seal groove, which
could result in a seal leak.
Note: Inspect the caliper bore for wear, rust, or pits. If any of these conditions exist, do not hone; a
new caliper must be installed.
Remove the piston seal.
Assembly
1. CAUTION: Do not use denatured alcohol to clean rubber components or assemblies that have
rubber components. Cleaning rubber components
with denatured alcohol weakens the rubber and may result in failure of the component.
CAUTION: Never allow any petroleum product or mineral oil to contact the inside of a brake
hydraulic system. Mineral oil and petroleum products deteriorate the natural rubber seals used in
brake hydraulic system If a brake system becomes contaminated, it must be flushed with clean
brake hold and all rubber seals and flex hoses replaced. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake ladled C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A,
DOT 3.
Note: Be sure the seal is not twisted and is firmly seated in the caliper bore.
Note: Clean all brake caliper components. All parts must be air-dried completely. Coat all internal
parts and piston seal with High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3 before installation.
To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5638
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly.
2. Remove the brake caliper clip.
3. Position the caliper aside.
1 Remove the brake caliper bolt caps and the bolts.
2 Position the caliper aside and support.
4. Remove the outboard brake pad.
5. Remove the bolts and brake caliper anchor plate. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Pad: > 02-11-2 > Jun > 02 > Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on
Wheels
Brake Pad: Customer Interest Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels
Article No. 02-11-2
06/10/02
BRAKES - EXCESSIVE BRAKE DUST - INFORMATION AND CLEANING TIPS
FORD: 1999-2002 ESCORT 1999-2003 CROWN VICTORIA 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002
ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1999-2003 GRAND MARQUIS
ISSUE
Under normal operating conditions, customers may notice accumulation of brake dust on their
wheels. Some brake dust is inevitable as brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise. The
use of modern friction materials with emphasis on improved performance and environmental
considerations can lead to more dust than in the past.
ACTION
Brake dust can be cleaned by weekly washing with Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A) and a soft
sponge. Heavier deposits can be removed with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A).
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 108000, 301000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Pad: > 02-11-2 > Jun > 02 > Brakes - Excessive
Brake Dust on Wheels
Brake Pad: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels
Article No. 02-11-2
06/10/02
BRAKES - EXCESSIVE BRAKE DUST - INFORMATION AND CLEANING TIPS
FORD: 1999-2002 ESCORT 1999-2003 CROWN VICTORIA 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002
ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1999-2003 GRAND MARQUIS
ISSUE
Under normal operating conditions, customers may notice accumulation of brake dust on their
wheels. Some brake dust is inevitable as brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise. The
use of modern friction materials with emphasis on improved performance and environmental
considerations can lead to more dust than in the past.
ACTION
Brake dust can be cleaned by weekly washing with Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A) and a soft
sponge. Heavier deposits can be removed with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A).
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 108000, 301000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5652
Brake Pad: Specifications
Brake lining thickness 0.50 in
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5653
Brake Pad: Service and Repair
Brake Pads
Removal
WARNING: Asbestos fiber dust may be present on brake and clutch assemblies and is hazardous
to health if inhaled. Brake and clutch assemblies should be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner
recommended for use with asbestos fibers such as a brake/clutch/service vacuum. The bag must
be labeled per OSHA instructions, sealed, and the trash hauler notified as to the bag's contents. If
a vacuum suitable for asbestos is not available, cleaning should be done wet. If dust generation is
still possible, technicians should wear government-approved toxic dust purifying respirators. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly.
2. Remove the brake caliper clip.
3. Position the caliper aside.
1 Remove brake caliper bolt caps and the bolts.
2 Position the caliper aside and support.
4. Remove the brake pads.
^ Remove the outer brake pad from the anchor.
^ Remove the inner brake pad from the caliper piston.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information
> Specifications
Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications
..............................................................................................................................................................
........................................................ Min Thickness
Front ....................................................................................................................................................
.................................................. 0.8661 inch (22mm)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information
> Specifications > Page 5657
Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection
Brake Disc Runout Check
Special Tool(s)
CAUTION: The brake disc runout specification must be met to make sure of correct brake
performance without roughness complaints.
CAUTION: Do not install brake discs that are less than the minimum thickness specified. Do not
machine a brake disc below the minimum thickness specification.
NOTE: When installing brake discs, always align the painted match marks on the brake disc with
those on the front hub.
NOTE: When installing brake discs, always apply High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant
F6AZ-9L494-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the brake disc-to-front
hub mating surfaces.
1. Do not remove the tire and wheel assembly. Tighten the wheel nuts to specification. 2. Raise
and support the vehicle. 3. Assemble the special tool, using the spherical tip extension. 4. Locate
an opening on the inboard side of the dust shield that will allow the dial indicator tip to be
positioned between 5 mm (0.2 inch) and 15 mm
(0.6 inch) from the outer edge of the brake disc.
5. NOTE: Do not clamp the gauge set to a vehicle component separated from the brake disc by a
flexible joint, such as a ball joint or body mount.
Clamp the special tool on the vehicle, making sure the flexible indicator arm and probe tip do not
touch the dust shield or tire while rotating.
6. Rotate the wheel for six revolutions and record the total indicated runout. 7. If the total runout
exceeds the maximum specification, remove the brake disc. 8. Clean the disc brake mounting face
of dirt, rust and foreign material.
9. Measure and record the total indicated runout of the hub face outside the stud circle.
10. Install a new front hub if the total indicated runout exceeds the maximum specification.
^ Repeat the hub runout measurement.
11. If the brake disc total indicated runout is still out of specification, measure and record the
thickness of the brake disc. If thickness is sufficient to
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information
> Specifications > Page 5658
machine the brake disc to the runout specification, go to Step 12. If the thickness is not sufficient,
install a new brake disc and recheck the total indicated runout.
12. NOTE: Brake disc machining must be done with an on-vehicle lathe. Follow the lathe
manufacturer's instructions.
Using the special tool, machine the brake disc if final thickness will not be less than the minimum
specification. Recheck the brake disc runout.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Front
Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Front
Brake Disc
1. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate.
2. Remove the brake disc retaining clips (if equipped) and the brake disc. 3. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Front > Page 5661
Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Brake Disc Machining
Brake Disc Machining
CAUTION: Do not install brake discs that are less than the minimum thickness specified. Do not
machine a brake disc below the minimum thickness specification.
1. Check wheel bearing end-play and correct as necessary. 2. Remove the tire and wheel.
NOTE: Begin at the front of the vehicle unless the vibration has been isolated to the rear.
3. Remove the brake caliper. 4. Inspect the brake linings. Install new brake linings if below
specification. 5. Measure and record the brake disc thickness. Install a new brake disc if the
thickness after machining will be at or below specification. The
specification is stamped on the brake disc. Do not machine a new brake disc.
6. For vehicles with a two-piece hub and brake disc assembly:
^ Match-mark before disassembly.
^ Remove the brake disc.
^ Using a die grinder with a mild abrasive (Scotch Brite(R) type), remove any rust or corrosion from
the hub and brake disc mounting surfaces.
^ Align the match-marks and reinstall the brake disc on the hub.
7. Using the special tool, machine the brake discs. Follow the manufacturer's instructions. After
machining, make sure the brake disc still meets the
thickness specification.
CAUTION: Do not use a bench lathe to machine brake discs.
NOTE: The depth of cut must be between 0.10 and 0.20 mm (0.004 and 0.008 inch). Lighter cuts
will cause heat and wear. Heavier cuts will cause poor brake disc surface finish.
8. Using a dial indicator, verify that the brake disc lateral runout is now within specification. 9.
Remove the special tool hub adapter.
10. Remove any remaining metal chips from the machining operation. 11. For vehicles with a
two-piece hub and brake disc assembly:
^ Remove the brake disc from the hub.
^ Remove any remaining metal chips from hub and brake disc mounting surfaces and from the
ABS sensor.
^ Apply a high temperature anti-seize lubricant to the mounting surfaces.
^ Using the match marks, mount the brake disc on the hub.
12. Install the caliper. 13. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 14. Test the system for normal
operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information >
Specifications
Backing Plate: Specifications
Brake backing plate bolts 49 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5666
Backing Plate: Service and Repair
Brake Backing Plate Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear wheel cylinder. 2. Remove the rear wheel hub.
3. Remove the parking brake cable from the brake backing plate.
1 Remove the bolt.
2 Remove the parking brake cable.
4. Remove the brake backing plate.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the brake backing plate.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information >
Specifications
Brake Drum: Specifications
..............................................................................................................................................................
.............................................. Max Drum Diameter
Rear From 06/12/2007 ........................................................................................................................
........................................... 9.0590 inch (230.10mm)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5670
Brake Drum: Service and Repair
Brake Drum
Special Tool(s)
Removal
WARNING: Asbestos fiber dust can be present on brake and clutch assemblies and is hazardous
to health if inhaled. Brake and clutch assemblies must be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner
recommended for use with asbestos filters, such as brake/clutch/service vacuum. The bag must be
labeled per the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) instructions, sealed, and the trash
hauler notified as to the bag's contents. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
WARNING: If a vacuum suitable for asbestos is not available, cleaning must be done wet. If dust
generation is still possible, technicians must wear government-approved toxic dust purifying
respirators. The Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) requires where asbestos dust
generation is possible to be isolated and posted with warning signs. Only technicians carrying out
brake or clutch repair are to be present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: To reduce the possibility of uneven braking, always install new rear brake shoes at both
ends of an axle.
1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly.
2. CAUTION: Use of a brake drum puller or a torch is not recommended. Brake drum distortion can
result.
NOTE: If the brake drum is rusted to the axle shaft pilot diameter, tap the center of the brake drum
between the wheel studs.
Remove the brake drum. ^
If equipped, remove the brake drum retaining clips.
3. If the brake drums will not come off, follow these steps.
1 Move the brake shoe adjusting lever off the brake adjuster screw.
2 Loosen the brake shoe adjuster screw nut by adjusting the nut upward.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5671
4. Using the special tool, measure the brake drum inside diameter.
^ Install a new brake drum if the maximum inside diameter exceeds the specification shown on the
outside of the brake drum.
Installation
1. NOTE: If adjusting the rear brakes, refer to Brake Shoe Adjustment.
Position the brake drum on the vehicle.
2. WARNING: Whenever a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign material
present on the mounting surfaces of
the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel.
Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause
the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion, causing loss of
control. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Clean the wheel hub mounting surface and wheel pilot.
3. Install the tire and wheel assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Shoe: > 02-11-2 > Jun > 02 > Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on
Wheels
Brake Shoe: Customer Interest Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels
Article No. 02-11-2
06/10/02
BRAKES - EXCESSIVE BRAKE DUST - INFORMATION AND CLEANING TIPS
FORD: 1999-2002 ESCORT 1999-2003 CROWN VICTORIA 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002
ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1999-2003 GRAND MARQUIS
ISSUE
Under normal operating conditions, customers may notice accumulation of brake dust on their
wheels. Some brake dust is inevitable as brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise. The
use of modern friction materials with emphasis on improved performance and environmental
considerations can lead to more dust than in the past.
ACTION
Brake dust can be cleaned by weekly washing with Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A) and a soft
sponge. Heavier deposits can be removed with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A).
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 108000, 301000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Shoe: > 02-11-2 > Jun > 02 > Brakes - Excessive
Brake Dust on Wheels
Brake Shoe: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels
Article No. 02-11-2
06/10/02
BRAKES - EXCESSIVE BRAKE DUST - INFORMATION AND CLEANING TIPS
FORD: 1999-2002 ESCORT 1999-2003 CROWN VICTORIA 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002
ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1999-2003 GRAND MARQUIS
ISSUE
Under normal operating conditions, customers may notice accumulation of brake dust on their
wheels. Some brake dust is inevitable as brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise. The
use of modern friction materials with emphasis on improved performance and environmental
considerations can lead to more dust than in the past.
ACTION
Brake dust can be cleaned by weekly washing with Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A) and a soft
sponge. Heavier deposits can be removed with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A).
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 108000, 301000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5685
Brake Shoe: Specifications
Minimum Shoe Thickness 0.04 in
Standard Shoe Thickness 0.17 in
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5686
Brake Shoe: Adjustments
Brake Shoe Adjustment
Special Tool(s)
1. Remove the brake drum.
2. Using the special tool, measure the inside diameter of the brake drum.
3. Position the special tool on the brake shoes and linings and adjust accordingly. 4. Install the
brake drum.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5687
Brake Shoe: Service and Repair
Brake Shoes
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the brake drum. 2. Use the Brake/Clutch/Service Vacuum to remove brake dust and dirt
from the brake assemblies.
3. NOTE: If new rear brake shoes and linings are being installed, resurface the brake drums to
remove glazing and to ensure an equal friction
surface from side-to-side. Resurfacing will also correct out-of-round and bell conditions.
Using the special tool, measure the braking surface diameter. If the inside diameter measures
more than the maximum specification shown on the outside of the brake drum, install a new brake
drum.
4. Remove the parking brake cable from the parking brake cable lever.
5. Remove the hold-down clips and pins.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5688
6. Remove the lower spring.
7. Remove the rear brake shoes.
1 Pull the bottom of the brake shoe forward.
2 Release the upper return spring. Remove both brake shoes together.
8. Remove the self adjuster lever.
9. Remove the self adjuster and spring assembly.
^ Return the self adjuster to the fully seated position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5689
10. Remove the parking brake lever.
1 Remove the horseshoe clip.
2 Remove the parking brake lever.
11. Inspect the rear brake shoes for minimum thickness above the backing plate, and install new as
necessary. 12. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Specifications
Wheel Cylinder: Specifications
Wheel Cylinder inner diameter 0.937 in
Rear Wheel Cylinder bolts 9 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Removal and Installation
Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Wheel Cylinder
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear brake drum. 2. Using the Brake/Clutch/Service Vacuum, remove brake dust
and dirt from the brake assemblies.
3. Remove the parking brake cable from the parking bake cable lever.
4. Remove the hold-down clips and pins.
5. Remove the lower spring.
6. Remove the rear brake shoes.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5695
1 Pull the bottom of the brake shoe forward.
2 Release the upper return spring. Remove both brake shoes together.
7. WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 4 or DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent
damage to brake components and will
render brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air
may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the
hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
Disconnect the brake line fitting from the wheel cylinder.
8. Remove the wheel cylinder.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the wheel cylinder.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the brake hydraulic system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5696
Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
Wheel Cylinder
Disassembly
1. Remove the rear wheel cylinder.
2. CAUTION: Do not use denatured alcohol for flushing the brake system or cleaning assemblies
where alcohol could be trapped. If denatured
alcohol is trapped, it can cause eventual failure of rubber components in the system.
CAUTION: Never allow any petroleum product or mineral oil to contact the inside of a brake
hydraulic system. Mineral oil and petroleum products deteriorate the natural rubber seals used in
brake hydraulic system. If a brake system becomes contaminated, it must be flushed with clean
brake fluid and all new rubber seals and flex hoses must be installed. Use High Performance DOT
3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESA-M6C2S-A, DOT 3.
Disassemble the rear wheel cylinder. 1
Remove the bleeder screw cap
2 Remove the bleeder screw.
3 Remove the dust boots
4 Remove the pistons and piston seals.
5 Remove the spring.
3. Inspect the rear wheel cylinder bore for wear, rust or pits. If any of these conditions exist, install
a new wheel cylinder.
Assembly
1. CAUTION: Always install new piston seals and dust boots when assembling the rear wheel
cylinder. Always lubricate the bore with new brake
fluid. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent
meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Specifications
Brake Bleeding: Specifications
Disc Brake Caliper Bleeder Screws 12 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed
Brake Master Cylinder-Bench Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. Support the brake master cylinder body in a soft jaw vise, and fill the brake master cylinder
reservoir with specified brake fluid.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
2. Install plugs in the front and rear brake outlet ports.
3. Loosen the plug in the front outlet port and slowly depress the primary piston.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5703
4. Tighten the plug in the front outlet port and release the primary piston. 5. Repeat this procedure
until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 6. Repeat Steps 3, 4, and 5 for the rear outlet port with the
front outlet port plugged. 7. Tighten the plugs and attempt to depress the primary piston. The piston
will not depress if all the air is bled out of the system. 8. Install the reservoir cap and install the
brake master cylinder in the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5704
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake Master Cylinder - In-Vehicle Bleed
Brake Master Cylinder-In-Vehicle Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and Polyglycol. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. Disconnect the brake outlet lines from the brake master cylinder and cap the lines. 2. Install
short brake hoses to the master cylinder outlet ports with the ends submerged in the brake master
cylinder reservoir.
3. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid
C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows from both brake
hoses.
5. Remove the short brake hoses and install the brake outlet lines.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5705
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Gravity Bleeding
Gravity Bleed
Brake system
1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB
or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to
the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front
wheel.
Rear drum brakes
3. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Loosen the rear wheel cylinder bleeder screw and leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid
flows.
4. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw.
Front disc brakes
5. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Open the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Leave open until clear bubble-free brake fluid
flows.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5706
6. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw.
7. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with fluid and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5707
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Manual Bleeding
Manual Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
Brake system
1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB
or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to
the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front
wheel.
Rear drum brakes
3. Attach a rubber drain hose to the rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a
container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times
and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Loosen the bleeder screw until fluid flow stops.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the bleeder screw. 6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until
clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows.
7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system.
Front disc brakes
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5708
9. Attach a rubber drain hose to the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free
end of the hose in a container partially filled with
clean brake fluid.
10. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake
pedal. 11. Loosen the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw until fluid flow stops. Maintain pressure
on the brake pedal and tighten the front disc brake
caliper bleeder screw.
12. Repeat Steps 10 and 11 until clear, bubble-free fluid flows.
13. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw.
14. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5709
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair
Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed
Brake Master Cylinder-Bench Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. Support the brake master cylinder body in a soft jaw vise, and fill the brake master cylinder
reservoir with specified brake fluid.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
2. Install plugs in the front and rear brake outlet ports.
3. Loosen the plug in the front outlet port and slowly depress the primary piston.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5710
4. Tighten the plug in the front outlet port and release the primary piston. 5. Repeat this procedure
until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 6. Repeat Steps 3, 4, and 5 for the rear outlet port with the
front outlet port plugged. 7. Tighten the plugs and attempt to depress the primary piston. The piston
will not depress if all the air is bled out of the system. 8. Install the reservoir cap and install the
brake master cylinder in the vehicle.
Brake Master Cylinder - In-Vehicle Bleed
Brake Master Cylinder-In-Vehicle Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and Polyglycol. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. Disconnect the brake outlet lines from the brake master cylinder and cap the lines. 2. Install
short brake hoses to the master cylinder outlet ports with the ends submerged in the brake master
cylinder reservoir.
3. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid
C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows from both brake
hoses.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5711
5. Remove the short brake hoses and install the brake outlet lines.
Brake System Gravity Bleeding
Gravity Bleed
Brake system
1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB
or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to
the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front
wheel.
Rear drum brakes
3. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Loosen the rear wheel cylinder bleeder screw and leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid
flows.
4. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw.
Front disc brakes
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5712
5. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Open the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Leave open until clear bubble-free brake fluid
flows.
6. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw.
7. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with fluid and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Brake System Manual Bleeding
Manual Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
Brake system
1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5713
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB
or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to
the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front
wheel.
Rear drum brakes
3. Attach a rubber drain hose to the rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a
container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times
and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Loosen the bleeder screw until fluid flow stops.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the bleeder screw. 6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until
clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows.
7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system.
Front disc brakes
9. Attach a rubber drain hose to the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free
end of the hose in a container partially filled with
clean brake fluid.
10. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake
pedal. 11. Loosen the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw until fluid flow stops. Maintain pressure
on the brake pedal and tighten the front disc brake
caliper bleeder screw.
12. Repeat Steps 10 and 11 until clear, bubble-free fluid flows.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5714
13. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw.
14. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Brake System Pressure Bleeding
Brake System Pressure Bleeding
Special Tool(s)
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air
may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the
hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. Clean the outside of the brake master cylinder reservoir.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5715
2. Remove the reservoir cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with brake fluid.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
3. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers
of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the
instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter.
Install Brake Bleeder to the brake master cylinder reservoir, and attach the Brake Bleeder tank
hose to the fitting on the adapter.
4. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RH rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose
in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 5. Open the valve on the Brake Bleeder tank.
6. Loosen the bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then close the
bleeder screw and remove the rubber hose.
7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in
order from the LH rear wheel to the RH front wheel, ending with the LH front wheel. 9. Close the
Brake Bleeder tank valve and remove the tank hose from the adapter, and remove the adapter.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5716
10. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Four Wheel Antilock Brake System Bleeding
Brake System Bleeding
Special Tool(s)
Anti-Lock Brakes Bleed
1. NOTE: Carrying out the System Bleed function drives trapped air from the hydraulic control unit
(HCU). Subsequent bleeding removes the air
from the brake hydraulic system to the bleeder screws.
NOTE: The engine must be running to provide adequate voltage to the HCU module during the
anti-lock control portion of the system bleed.
Connect the diagnostic tool.
2. Start the engine and depress the brake pedal to half of the full travel position. 3. Access
FUNCTION TEST mode and press the trigger to run the SYSTEM BLEED FUNCTION. 4. Manually
bleed the brake hydraulic system. 5. Repeat the procedure carrying out a total of two diagnostic
tool cycles and two manual bleed cycles.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Specifications
Brake Caliper: Specifications
Brake Caliper Anchor Plate Bolts 111 ft.lb
Brake Caliper Bolts 26 ft.lb
Front Disc Brake Caliper Bore 2.36 in
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Removal and Installation
Brake Caliper
Removal
WARNING: Asbestos fiber dust may be present on brake and clutch assemblies and is hazardous
to health if inhaled. Brake and clutch assemblies should be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner
recommended for use with asbestos fibers such as a brake/clutch/service vacuum. The bag must
be labeled per OSHA instructions, sealed, and the trash hauler notified as to the bag's contents. If
a vacuum suitable for asbestos is not available, cleaning should be done wet. If dust generation is
still possible, technicians should wear government-approved toxic dust purifying respirators. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly.
2. Remove the brake caliper clip.
3. Position the caliper aside.
1 Remove the brake caliper bolt caps and bolts.
2 Position the caliper aside.
4. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes.
Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If
brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if
irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention
immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5722
with water.
Note: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component
has been installed, air may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires
bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. The hydraulic system can
be bled manually or with a Brake Bleeder.
Disconnect the brake line from the caliper and remove the caliper.
5. CAUTION: Do no use denatured alcohol for flushing the brake system or cleaning assemblies
where alcohol could be trapped. If denatured
alcohol is trapped, it can cause eventual failure of rubber components in the system.
CAUTION: Never allow any petroleum product or mineral oil to contact the inside of a brake
hydraulic system. Mineral oil and petroleum products deteriorate the natural rubber seals used in
brake hydraulic systems. If a brake system becomes contaminated, it must be flushed with clean
brake fluid and all rubber seals and flex hoses replaced. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT
3.
To install reverse the removal procedure. ^
Bleed the brake system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5723
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Disassembly and Assembly
Brake Caliper
Disassembly
1. Remove front disc brake caliper from the vehicle.
2. Remove the front caliper slide pins and boots.
3. Remove the dust seal.
4. WARNING: Use only as much compressed air as necessary to remove the piston. Excessive
pressure can force the piston out of the
caliper bore with enough force to cause personal injury. Never attempt to catch the piston by hand
as it comes out of the bore. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver or any other similar tool to pry the piston out of the bore.
Piston damage could result.
Note: Inspect the piston for wear, rust, or pits. If any of these conditions exist, a new piston must be
installed.
Remove the caliper piston. 1
Position a block of wood between the piston and the disc brake caliper.
2 Apply compressed air to caliper to remove piston.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5724
5. Remove the bleeder screw.
6. CAUTION: Use a plastic or wooden pick to remove the piston seal Tom the caliper bore. A metal
tool may scratch or nick the seal groove, which
could result in a seal leak.
Note: Inspect the caliper bore for wear, rust, or pits. If any of these conditions exist, do not hone; a
new caliper must be installed.
Remove the piston seal.
Assembly
1. CAUTION: Do not use denatured alcohol to clean rubber components or assemblies that have
rubber components. Cleaning rubber components
with denatured alcohol weakens the rubber and may result in failure of the component.
CAUTION: Never allow any petroleum product or mineral oil to contact the inside of a brake
hydraulic system. Mineral oil and petroleum products deteriorate the natural rubber seals used in
brake hydraulic system If a brake system becomes contaminated, it must be flushed with clean
brake hold and all rubber seals and flex hoses replaced. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake ladled C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A,
DOT 3.
Note: Be sure the seal is not twisted and is firmly seated in the caliper bore.
Note: Clean all brake caliper components. All parts must be air-dried completely. Coat all internal
parts and piston seal with High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3 before installation.
To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5725
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly.
2. Remove the brake caliper clip.
3. Position the caliper aside.
1 Remove the brake caliper bolt caps and the bolts.
2 Position the caliper aside and support.
4. Remove the outboard brake pad.
5. Remove the bolts and brake caliper anchor plate. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information
> Specifications
Brake Fluid: Specifications
High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid, C6AZ-19542-AB ESA-M6C25-A, DOT3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information
> Specifications > Page 5729
Brake Fluid: Description and Operation
Brake Fluid
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
^ Do not reuse brake fluid drained or bled from the brake system.
^ Do not use brake fluid that has been stored in an open container.
^ Do not mix different types of brake fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5733
Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
Brake Fluid Level, Warning Switch
The brake fluid level warning switch is an integral part of the brake master cylinder reservoir. It
consists of a float containing a magnet and a reed switch mounted in the bottom of the brake
master cylinder reservoir. When the brake fluid in the brake master cylinder reservoir gets to a
predetermined level, the float and magnet actuates the reed switch that causes the red brake
warning indicator to illuminate. Loss of brake fluid from either the primary (front) or secondary (rear)
system will cause this system to activate. If the brake fluid level warning switch is inoperative, a
new brake master cylinder reservoir must be installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Specifications
Brake Hose/Line: Specifications
Brake line to rear wheel cylinder fitting 10 ft.lb
Brake Line fitting to brake pressure Control valve fittings 10 ft.lb
Brake line master cylinder fittings 11 ft.lb
Inlet brake line to HCU nuts (M10-1) 17 ft.lb
Outlet Brake Line to HCU nuts (M12-1) 13 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5737
Brake Hose/Line: Description and Operation
Brake Lines and Hoses
CAUTION: Never use copper tubing. It is subject to fatigue, cracking and corrosion which could
result in brake tube failure.
Steel tubing is used throughout the brake hydraulic system. All brake tube fittings must be correctly
double flared to provide strong leakproof connections.
If a section of brake tube is damaged, the entire section must be removed and a new tube of the
same type, size, shape and length installed.
When installing new hydraulic brake lines, hoses or connectors, tighten all connections securely.
After installation, bleed the brake system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Proportioning/Combination
Valve > Component Information > Specifications
Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve: Specifications
Brake Pressure Control Valve Bolts 80 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Proportioning/Combination
Valve > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5741
Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve: Service and Repair
Brake Pressure Control Valve
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Remove the brake pressure control valve.
1 Disconnect the six brake line fittings and plug the brake lines.
2 Remove the brake pressure control valve bolts.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the brake system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Description and Operation
Hydraulic Control Unit
The HCU consists of the following components: ^
brake pressure control valve block
^ pump motor
New brake pressure control valve block and pump motor are installed as an assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5745
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to
Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems; Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5746
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair
Hydraulic Control Unit
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the air cleaner and the air cleaner outlet pipe.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Disconnect the brake lines.
5. Remove the bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5747
6. Remove the bolts and the HCU.
7. NOTE: The 4x2 module cannot be interchanged with the 4x4 module. The 4x4 module is
interchangeable with the 4x2 module.
Remove the screws and the control module, if necessary.
8. NOTE: Bleed the HCU after performing this procedure. .
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Specifications
Brake Master Cylinder: Specifications
Brake Master Cylinder Nuts 18 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Brake Master Cylinder
Brake Master Cylinder: Description and Operation Brake Master Cylinder
Brake Master Cylinder
The brake master cylinder is a dual-piston type. The brake master cylinder operates as follows: ^
When the brake pedal is depressed, pressure is applied by mechanical linkage to the primary and
secondary piston.
^ Brake master cylinder pistons apply hydraulic pressure to the two hydraulic circuits.
The brake master cylinder consists of the following components: ^
brake master cylinder reservoir
^ brake master cylinder body
^ primary piston
^ secondary piston
^ snap ring
Whenever the brake master cylinder is removed from the brake booster, new nuts must be
installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Brake Master Cylinder > Page 5753
Brake Master Cylinder: Description and Operation Brake Fluid Reservoir
Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir
NOTE: Whenever the brake master cylinder reservoir is removed from the brake master cylinder,
new seals must be installed.
The brake master cylinder reservoir: ^
is mounted to the brake master cylinder.
^ holds fluid supply for each brake master cylinder hydraulic piston.
^ provides visual fluid level markings.
^ contains the brake master cylinder fluid level warning switch.
On vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the reservoir is shared with the clutch master
cylinder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Conditions
Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Abnormal Conditions
Brake Master Cylinder-Abnormal Conditions
Changes in brake pedal feel and travel are indications that a brake system concern exists. Refer to
the Symptom Chart at Brakes and Traction Control /Testing and Inspection for abnormal condition
diagnosis.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Conditions > Page 5756
Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Normal Conditions
Brake Master Cylinder-Normal Conditions
The following conditions are considered normal and are not indications that the brake master
cylinder is in need of repair or new installation.
Condition 1. During normal operation of the brake master cylinder, the brake fluid level in the brake
master cylinder reservoir will fall during brake application and rise during release. The net brake
fluid level will remain unchanged after brake application and release. Condition 2. A trace of brake
fluid may exist on the power brake booster shell below the brake master cylinder mounting flange.
This is the result of the normal internal lubricating action of the brake master cylinder. Condition 3.
Brake fluid level will decrease as the brake shoes and linings wear.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Conditions > Page 5757
Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Bypass Condition Test
Brake Master Cylinder-Bypass Condition Test
1. Check the brake hydraulic system for leaks or insufficient brake fluid. Repair as necessary. 2.
Observe the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir as the brake pedal is slowly
pressed and quickly released. If the brake fluid
level rises when the brake pedal is pressed and drops when the brake pedal is released, but the
net brake fluid level remains unchanged, the brake master cylinder is bypassing. Repair or install a
new brake master cylinder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Conditions > Page 5758
Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Compensator Port Check
Brake Master Cylinder-Compensator Port Check
The purpose of the compensator ports in the brake master cylinder is to: ^
Supply additional brake fluid from the brake master cylinder reservoir needed by the brake system
due to brake shoe and lining wear.
^ Allow brake fluid to return to the brake master cylinder reservoir when the brakes are released.
The returning brake fluid will create a slight turbulence in the brake master cylinder reservoir. This
is a normal condition and indicates that the compensator ports are not clogged.
Clogged compensator ports may cause the brakes to hang up or not fully release. If clogged
compensator ports are suspected, proceed as follows: 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. With the
brakes released, attempt to rotate each wheel. If an excessive amount of brake drag exists,
continue with the test. If an excessive amount
of brake drag exists at only one wheel, it indicates a possible seized rear disc brake caliper, front
disc brake caliper, rear wheel cylinder, or parking brake component. Repair or install new
components as necessary.
3. Check the brake pedal position (BPP) switch adjustment, and brake pedal free play to verify that
the brake pedal is not partially applied. 4. Loosen the nuts attaching the brake master cylinder to
the power brake booster and pull the brake master cylinder away from the power brake
booster.
5. Repeat Steps 1 and 2. If the brake drag disappears, the power brake booster is binding and new
one must be installed. If the brake drag continues,
the brake master cylinder is binding and new one must be installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation
Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Brake Master Cylinder
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, Rush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Disconnect the brake fluid level warning switch electrical connector. 2. Using a suitable suction
device, drain the brake master cylinder reservoir.
3. If equipped with manual transmission, disconnect the clutch master cylinder feed.
4. Disconnect the brake lines and plug the lines and the brake master cylinder ports.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5761
5. NOTE: Whenever the brake master cylinder is removed from the brake booster, new nuts must
be installed.
Remove the nuts and the brake master cylinder.
6. NOTE: Whenever installing a new brake master cylinder reservoir, install new seals. Lubricate
the new seals with clean brake fluid.
Transfer the brake master cylinder reservoir if a new master cylinder is to be installed.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the master cylinder.
^ If equipped with manual transmission, bleed the clutch master cylinder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5762
Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
Brake Master Cylinder
Disassembly
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Remove the brake master cylinder. 2. Clean the outside of the brake master cylinder.
3. Remove the brake master cylinder reservoir.
4. Remove the seals.
5. Remove the snap ring.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5763
6. Remove the primary and secondary piston.
7. NOTE: If the brake master cylinder bore is damaged, a new brake master cylinder must be
installed.
Use isopropyl alcohol to clean and inspect the brake master cylinder bore for damage.
Assembly
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Use clean brake fluid to lubricate the new piston assembly seals and the brake master cylinder
bore.
2. Install the secondary piston assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5764
3. Install the primary piston assembly.
4. Install the snap ring.
5. Install the seals
^ Lubricate the seals with clean brake fluid and insert the seals into the brake master cylinder.
6. Install the brake master cylinder reservoir.
^ Press the brake master cylinder reservoir into the seals until it snaps in securely.
7. Install master cylinder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5765
Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Brake Fluid Reservoir
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Removal
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal inquiry.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Disconnect the fluid level electrical connector. 2. Using a suitable suction device, drain the brake
master cylinder reservoir.
3. If equipped with manual transmission, disconnect the clutch master cylinder feed.
4. Remove the brake master cylinder reservoir.
Installation
NOTE: Whenever installing a new brake master cylinder reservoir, install new seals.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5766
1. Install the new brake master cylinder reservoir.
1 Lubricate the two seals with clean brake fluid and insert the seals into the brake master cylinder.
2 Press the brake master cylinder reservoir into the seals until it snaps in securely.
3 Connect the brake master cylinder fluid level warning switch electrical connector.
2. If equipped with manual transmission, connect the clutch master cylinder feed.
^ Bleed the clutch master cylinder.
3. Bleed the master cylinder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Specifications
Wheel Cylinder: Specifications
Wheel Cylinder inner diameter 0.937 in
Rear Wheel Cylinder bolts 9 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation
Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Wheel Cylinder
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear brake drum. 2. Using the Brake/Clutch/Service Vacuum, remove brake dust
and dirt from the brake assemblies.
3. Remove the parking brake cable from the parking bake cable lever.
4. Remove the hold-down clips and pins.
5. Remove the lower spring.
6. Remove the rear brake shoes.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5772
1 Pull the bottom of the brake shoe forward.
2 Release the upper return spring. Remove both brake shoes together.
7. WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 4 or DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent
damage to brake components and will
render brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air
may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the
hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
Disconnect the brake line fitting from the wheel cylinder.
8. Remove the wheel cylinder.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the wheel cylinder.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the brake hydraulic system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5773
Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
Wheel Cylinder
Disassembly
1. Remove the rear wheel cylinder.
2. CAUTION: Do not use denatured alcohol for flushing the brake system or cleaning assemblies
where alcohol could be trapped. If denatured
alcohol is trapped, it can cause eventual failure of rubber components in the system.
CAUTION: Never allow any petroleum product or mineral oil to contact the inside of a brake
hydraulic system. Mineral oil and petroleum products deteriorate the natural rubber seals used in
brake hydraulic system. If a brake system becomes contaminated, it must be flushed with clean
brake fluid and all new rubber seals and flex hoses must be installed. Use High Performance DOT
3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESA-M6C2S-A, DOT 3.
Disassemble the rear wheel cylinder. 1
Remove the bleeder screw cap
2 Remove the bleeder screw.
3 Remove the dust boots
4 Remove the pistons and piston seals.
5 Remove the spring.
3. Inspect the rear wheel cylinder bore for wear, rust or pits. If any of these conditions exist, install
a new wheel cylinder.
Assembly
1. CAUTION: Always install new piston seals and dust boots when assembling the rear wheel
cylinder. Always lubricate the bore with new brake
fluid. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent
meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Adjustments
Parking Brake Cable: Adjustments
Parking Brake Cable Adjustment
1. Remove the parking brake handle trim.
2. Turn the parking brake control adjustment nut so that the parking brake control stroke is three to
five notches when pulled. 3. Confirm the parking brake is applied.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Cable and Conduit - Front
Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Cable and Conduit - Front
Parking Brake Cable-Front
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake control.
2. Remove the two bolts and the floor console bracket. 3. Raise and support the vehicle.
4. Remove the front parking brake cable.
1 Disconnect the parking brake cable from the RH side rear parking brake cable.
2 Disconnect the front parking brake cable from the parking brake cable equalizer.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Cable and Conduit - Front > Page 5780
Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Cable and Conduit - Rear
Parking Brake Cable-Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear drum brake shoes.
2. Remove the rear parking brake cable to knuckle bucket bolts.
3. Disconnect the rear parking brake cable from the backing plates.
4. Remove the rear parking brake cable bracket bolts.
5. Remove the RH side rear parking brake cable.
1 Disconnect the RH side rear parking brake cable from the front parking brake cable.
2 Disconnect the RH side rear parking brake cable from the parking brake bracket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Cable and Conduit - Front > Page 5781
6. Disconnect the rear parking brake cable to fuel tank support strap.
7. Disconnect the front parking brake cable.
8. Remove the LH rear parking brake cable.
1 Remove the two bolts.
2 Disconnect the rear parking bake cable from the parking brake bracket.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Control > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Parking Brake Control: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Control
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the floor console. 2. Release the parking brake control.
3. Disconnect the parking brake warning indicator switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the parking brake adjusting nut.
5. Remove the parking brake control.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the parking brake cable.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Adjust the parking brake cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Release Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Parking Brake Release Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake control.
2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch.
^ Remove the screws.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Specifications
Vacuum Brake Booster: Specifications
Power brake booster pushrod bracket nuts 17 in.lb
Purge valve bracket nuts 89 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5795
Vacuum Brake Booster: Description and Operation
Brake Booster
The brake booster consists of the following components: ^
power brake booster
^ vacuum booster hose
^ power brake booster check valve
The power brake booster reduces the effort required to push the brake pedal to actuate the brakes.
The vacuum booster hose supplies vacuum to the brake booster. The vacuum booster check valve
closes when the engine is turned off and traps engine vacuum in the power brake booster.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5796
Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection
Brake Booster-Operation Check
1. Inspect all vacuum hoses and connections. All unused vacuum connectors must be capped.
Hoses and their connections must be correctly secured
and in good condition with no holes, cracks, or collapsed areas.
2. Check the brake hydraulic system for leaks or insufficient brake fluid. Repair as necessary. 3.
With the engine off, place the transaxle in PARK (A/T) or NEUTRAL (M/T) and apply the parking
brake.
4. NOTE: If the power brake booster is noisy when the brakes are applied, new one must be
installed.
Press the brake pedal several times to exhaust all of the vacuum from the system.
5. Press and hold the brake pedal. 6. Start the engine. If the vacuum system is operating, the bake
pedal will move downward under constant foot pressure. If no movement occurs, the
power brake booster system is not functioning.
7. Remove the vacuum booster hose from the power brake booster. 8. Place the transaxle in PARK
(A/T) or NEUTRAL (M/T) and apply the parking brake. Start the engine. Manifold vacuum should
be available from
the vacuum booster hose. If manifold vacuum is not available, inspect all of the hoses and hose
connections. Repair as necessary.
9. Reconnect the vacuum booster hose and run the engine at fast idle for 10 seconds.
10. Stop the engine and let the vehicle stand for 10 minutes. 11. Apply the brake pedal with
approximately 89 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) of force. The brake pedal feel should be the same as normal
power assisted brake
operation for at least one application. If the brake pedal feel is normal, then the power brake
booster is OK. If the brake pedal feels hard, continue with the test.
12. Remove the vacuum booster hose from the power brake booster. Apply 57.3 kPa (17 in-Ha) of
vacuum to the vacuum booster hose. If the vacuum
does not leak off after 10 minutes, install a new power brake booster. If the vacuum does leak off,
install a new check valve and/or new vacuum booster hoses.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5797
Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. Remove the brake pedal push rod cotter pin and washer.
2. Remove the four power brake booster pushrod bracket nuts.
3. Disconnect the brake pedal pushrod.
3.0 L (4V)
4. Disconnect the Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve and position it aside.
1 Disconnect the cable locator.
2 Remove the nuts. Position the evaporative emission canister purge valve aside.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5798
All vehicles
5. Disconnect the master cylinder and position aside.
^ Remove the nuts
^ Position the master cylinder aside.
6. Remove the brake booster.
1 Disconnect the vacuum hose.
2 Remove the brake booster.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: Testing and Inspection
Check Valve
1. Remove the vacuum booster hose from the power brake booster. 2. Apply 57.3 kPa (17 in-Ha) of
vacuum to the vacuum booster hose. If the vacuum does not leak off after ten minutes, the check
valve is OK.
Otherwise, install a new check valve.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair
Technical Service Bulletin # 07S51S2 Date: 091009
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5811
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED?
Yes. OASIS was activated April 10, 2007.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED?
Yes. Available through the website. Owner names and addresses were made available April 30,
2007.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5812
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles have been directed to dealers for repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter and schedule a
service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
RELATED DAMAGE
If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the
Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company
reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not
had this recall performed on a timely basis.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service
Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval
after completion of the repair will not be granted.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair
was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this
bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC).
The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option,
directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251 Dearborn, MI 48121-6251.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund
claims that include other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be
accepted for reimbursement.
^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair.
Claiming a refund will not close the recall on the vehicle.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 07S51 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
RENTAL VEHICLES
If an ABS module needs to be ordered, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except
for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP)
guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle
was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Handling Allowance: An allowance of $1.00 per repair is being provided to cover the costs of
locally obtained materials and XG-12 Electrical Grease. To claim the allowance, enter $1.00 as
"HANDLG" in the "MISC EXPENSE" area of the claim form.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5813
^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line
on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires approval from Special Service Support
Center.
^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked.
"MT" labor requires approval from Special Service Support Center.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5814
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program Order your parts requirements through normal
order processing channels.
The DOR/COR number for this safety recall is 50376.
Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Support Center or E-mailed.
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to DOES II.
PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN
Affected ABS Modules (Part number YL8Z-2C065-AA and YL8Z-2B373-BA) and the removed ABS
connector are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center
(WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition
and return instructions.
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures".
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
This program includes making sure the wiring harness connector is properly sealed against
moisture/contamination, and inspecting the ABS module for evidence of corrosion resulting from an
inadequately sealed connector.
During the inspection, we expect that most of the affected vehicles will not have any evidence of
corrosion in the ABS module. However, the ABS wiring harness connector still needs to be
inspected for missing or improperly seated seals and/or incorrect connector number.
If the ABS module is corroded, the ABS module and connector must be replaced.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5815
A flow chart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1.
Inspect Connector Seals
INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
2. NOTE: When disconnecting the ABS module connector, be sure the blue connector lock stays
engaged with the harness connector and does not
remain in the module. Remove it from the module if necessary and make sure the white 0-ring seal
is properly installed.
Disconnect the ABS module 25-pin connector by sliding the lock mechanism out (towards the
passenger side of the vehicle) and pulling the connector off the module.
3. Disconnect the speed sensor harness, then remove the 2 harness retainers from the studs and
position the harness above the air cleaner assembly to
provide access for inspection.
4. Inspect the top of the ABS module connector cover for 2 yellow "X" marks.
^ If 2 yellow "X" marks are present, perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
^ If no yellow "X" marks are present, proceed to Step 5.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5816
5. Inspect the ABS module connector pins for corrosion. See Figure 2.
^ If corrosion is present, perform Labor Operation E - Install Pigtail, New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
^ If corrosion is not present, proceed to Step 6.
6. CAUTION: Do not cut any of the harness wires or the wire insulation when cutting off the tie
strap.
Remove the tie strap from the connector dress cover, then slide the cover off the connector. See
Figure 3.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5817
7. Verify the wire seals are present on the 4 heavier gauge wires. See Figure 4.
8. Verify the numbers 054" are stamped on the slide-lock end of the mat cover (wipe the mat cover
clean if necessary to view). See Figure 5.
NOTE:
Mat covers with any other number will be missing plugs in the unused pin locations.
9. Perform Labor Operation C - Install Pigtail and Apply Electrical Grease if:
^ any seals are missing or,
^ if the number on the mat cover is not "054".
10. Perform Labor Operation D - Seat Connector and Apply Electrical Grease if:
^ Any of the 4 wire seals are not fully seated in the connector cavities.
^ Each seal should sit approximately 1-2 mm (1/16 in) below the top of the round cavity. See Figure
4.
11. Perform Labor Operation A - Apply Electrical Grease if:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5818
^ The module is not corroded. and
^ All seals are present. and
^ All seals are fully seated. and
^ The number on the mat cover is "054".
LABOR OPERATION A - APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
1. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 6.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 6. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess
amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a "hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
2. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
3. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
LABOR OPERATION C - INSTALL PIGTAIL AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION
When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless
heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5819
USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 7.
1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module
connector. See Figure 8.
2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module
connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness
(all wires) to the same length. See Figure 8.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5820
3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/2 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See
Figure 9.
CAUTION:
The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT
cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire
on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag.
Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to
have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different
except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing
circuits when splicing wires.
NOTE:
The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these
wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation.
NOTE:
The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original
vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5821
4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness.
Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice
connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903.
See Figure 10.
5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice
connector.
6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the
flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit,
shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all
wires are insulated. See Figure 11.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5822
7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply
tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure
to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on
the other. See Figure 12.
8. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 13.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5823
connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 13. DO NOT
spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector
cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or
locked in place.
9. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
10. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
11. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by
illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3
seconds).
^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle.
^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special
Support Service Center.
LABOR OPERATION D - SEAT CONNECTOR SEALS AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
1. If the seals are not fully seated, reseat any seals not fully seated with a blunt tool. DO NOT use
anything sharp such as a screwdriver, awl or punch that could penetrate the seal and allow
moisture to enter the terminal. See Figure 14.
2. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5824
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 15.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 15. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an
excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
3. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
4. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
LABOR OPERATION E - INSTALL PIGTAIL, NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL
GREASE
IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION
When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless
heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5825
USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 16.
PROCEDURE TO REPLACE VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module
connector. See Figure 17.
2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module
connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness
(all wires) to the same length. See Figure 17.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5826
3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See
Figure 18.
CAUTION:
The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT
cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire
on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag.
Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to
have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different
except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing
circuits when splicing wires.
NOTE:
The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these
wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation.
NOTE:
The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original
vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5827
4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness.
Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice
connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903.
See Figure 19.
5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice
connector.
6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the
flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit,
shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all
wires are insulated. See Figure 20.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5828
7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply
tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure
to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on
the other. See Figure 21.
8. Install a new ABS module. Perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
9. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
10. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by
illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the
instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds).
^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle.
^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special
Support Service Center.
LABOR OPERATION F - INSTALL NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
NOTE:
Module configuration or reprogramming is not required when installing a new ABS module.
1. Disconnect the 2-wire electrical connector at the ABS module.
2. Raise the vehicle on a hoist.
3. Remove the screws and the ABS module.
4. Position the new module and install the screws. Tighten the screws no more than 2 Nm (18
lb-in).
5. Lower the hoist.
6. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect
the harness as follows:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5829
^ Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 22.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 22. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an
excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
7. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
8. Reconnect the 2-wire connector to the ABS module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5830
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5831
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5832
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5833
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5834
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5835
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > NHTSA07V156000 > Mar > 07 > Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect
Electronic Brake Control Module: Recalls Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2004 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor
Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V156000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: March 30, 2007
COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Antilock: Control Unit/Module
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 446460
SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with Antilock Brakes (ABS), the ABS module
connector may have missing or dislodged wire seals. This condition could allow contamination to
enter the module connector, creating a potential for an electrical short.
CONSEQUENCE: An electrical short might cause an ABS malfunction that would illuminate the
ABS warning light, and in some cases, the module may overheat resulting in burning odor, smoke,
and/or fire. This condition could occur either when the vehicle ignition switch is in the off position or
while the vehicle is being operated.
Remedy: Dealers will inspect the wire harness connector to the ABS module for missing or
dislodged wire seals, and repair or replace the harness connector as appropriate. The dealer will
also inspect the connector on the ABS module and replace it if it is found to be corroded or
damaged. The recall began on April 23, 2007. Owners may contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673.
NOTES: Ford recall No. 07S51. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to
http://www.safercar.gov.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair
Technical Service Bulletin # 07S51S2 Date: 091009
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5845
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED?
Yes. OASIS was activated April 10, 2007.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED?
Yes. Available through the website. Owner names and addresses were made available April 30,
2007.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5846
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles have been directed to dealers for repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter and schedule a
service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
RELATED DAMAGE
If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the
Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company
reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not
had this recall performed on a timely basis.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service
Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval
after completion of the repair will not be granted.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair
was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this
bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC).
The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option,
directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251 Dearborn, MI 48121-6251.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund
claims that include other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be
accepted for reimbursement.
^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair.
Claiming a refund will not close the recall on the vehicle.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 07S51 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
RENTAL VEHICLES
If an ABS module needs to be ordered, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except
for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP)
guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle
was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Handling Allowance: An allowance of $1.00 per repair is being provided to cover the costs of
locally obtained materials and XG-12 Electrical Grease. To claim the allowance, enter $1.00 as
"HANDLG" in the "MISC EXPENSE" area of the claim form.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5847
^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line
on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires approval from Special Service Support
Center.
^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked.
"MT" labor requires approval from Special Service Support Center.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5848
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program Order your parts requirements through normal
order processing channels.
The DOR/COR number for this safety recall is 50376.
Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Support Center or E-mailed.
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to DOES II.
PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN
Affected ABS Modules (Part number YL8Z-2C065-AA and YL8Z-2B373-BA) and the removed ABS
connector are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center
(WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition
and return instructions.
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures".
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
This program includes making sure the wiring harness connector is properly sealed against
moisture/contamination, and inspecting the ABS module for evidence of corrosion resulting from an
inadequately sealed connector.
During the inspection, we expect that most of the affected vehicles will not have any evidence of
corrosion in the ABS module. However, the ABS wiring harness connector still needs to be
inspected for missing or improperly seated seals and/or incorrect connector number.
If the ABS module is corroded, the ABS module and connector must be replaced.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5849
A flow chart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1.
Inspect Connector Seals
INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
2. NOTE: When disconnecting the ABS module connector, be sure the blue connector lock stays
engaged with the harness connector and does not
remain in the module. Remove it from the module if necessary and make sure the white 0-ring seal
is properly installed.
Disconnect the ABS module 25-pin connector by sliding the lock mechanism out (towards the
passenger side of the vehicle) and pulling the connector off the module.
3. Disconnect the speed sensor harness, then remove the 2 harness retainers from the studs and
position the harness above the air cleaner assembly to
provide access for inspection.
4. Inspect the top of the ABS module connector cover for 2 yellow "X" marks.
^ If 2 yellow "X" marks are present, perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
^ If no yellow "X" marks are present, proceed to Step 5.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5850
5. Inspect the ABS module connector pins for corrosion. See Figure 2.
^ If corrosion is present, perform Labor Operation E - Install Pigtail, New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
^ If corrosion is not present, proceed to Step 6.
6. CAUTION: Do not cut any of the harness wires or the wire insulation when cutting off the tie
strap.
Remove the tie strap from the connector dress cover, then slide the cover off the connector. See
Figure 3.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5851
7. Verify the wire seals are present on the 4 heavier gauge wires. See Figure 4.
8. Verify the numbers 054" are stamped on the slide-lock end of the mat cover (wipe the mat cover
clean if necessary to view). See Figure 5.
NOTE:
Mat covers with any other number will be missing plugs in the unused pin locations.
9. Perform Labor Operation C - Install Pigtail and Apply Electrical Grease if:
^ any seals are missing or,
^ if the number on the mat cover is not "054".
10. Perform Labor Operation D - Seat Connector and Apply Electrical Grease if:
^ Any of the 4 wire seals are not fully seated in the connector cavities.
^ Each seal should sit approximately 1-2 mm (1/16 in) below the top of the round cavity. See Figure
4.
11. Perform Labor Operation A - Apply Electrical Grease if:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5852
^ The module is not corroded. and
^ All seals are present. and
^ All seals are fully seated. and
^ The number on the mat cover is "054".
LABOR OPERATION A - APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
1. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 6.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 6. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess
amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a "hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
2. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
3. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
LABOR OPERATION C - INSTALL PIGTAIL AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION
When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless
heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5853
USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 7.
1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module
connector. See Figure 8.
2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module
connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness
(all wires) to the same length. See Figure 8.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5854
3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/2 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See
Figure 9.
CAUTION:
The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT
cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire
on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag.
Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to
have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different
except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing
circuits when splicing wires.
NOTE:
The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these
wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation.
NOTE:
The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original
vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5855
4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness.
Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice
connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903.
See Figure 10.
5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice
connector.
6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the
flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit,
shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all
wires are insulated. See Figure 11.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5856
7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply
tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure
to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on
the other. See Figure 12.
8. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 13.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5857
connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 13. DO NOT
spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector
cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or
locked in place.
9. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
10. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
11. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by
illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3
seconds).
^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle.
^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special
Support Service Center.
LABOR OPERATION D - SEAT CONNECTOR SEALS AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
1. If the seals are not fully seated, reseat any seals not fully seated with a blunt tool. DO NOT use
anything sharp such as a screwdriver, awl or punch that could penetrate the seal and allow
moisture to enter the terminal. See Figure 14.
2. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5858
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 15.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 15. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an
excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
3. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
4. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
LABOR OPERATION E - INSTALL PIGTAIL, NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL
GREASE
IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION
When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless
heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5859
USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 16.
PROCEDURE TO REPLACE VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module
connector. See Figure 17.
2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module
connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness
(all wires) to the same length. See Figure 17.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5860
3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See
Figure 18.
CAUTION:
The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT
cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire
on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag.
Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to
have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different
except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing
circuits when splicing wires.
NOTE:
The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these
wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation.
NOTE:
The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original
vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5861
4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness.
Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice
connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903.
See Figure 19.
5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice
connector.
6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the
flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit,
shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all
wires are insulated. See Figure 20.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5862
7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply
tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure
to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on
the other. See Figure 21.
8. Install a new ABS module. Perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
9. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
10. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by
illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the
instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds).
^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle.
^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special
Support Service Center.
LABOR OPERATION F - INSTALL NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
NOTE:
Module configuration or reprogramming is not required when installing a new ABS module.
1. Disconnect the 2-wire electrical connector at the ABS module.
2. Raise the vehicle on a hoist.
3. Remove the screws and the ABS module.
4. Position the new module and install the screws. Tighten the screws no more than 2 Nm (18
lb-in).
5. Lower the hoist.
6. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect
the harness as follows:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5863
^ Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 22.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 22. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an
excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
7. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
8. Reconnect the 2-wire connector to the ABS module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5864
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5865
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5866
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5867
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5868
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5869
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > NHTSA07V156000 > Mar > 07 > Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect
Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 07V156000: ABS Module
Connector Defect
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2004 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor
Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V156000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: March 30, 2007
COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Antilock: Control Unit/Module
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 446460
SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with Antilock Brakes (ABS), the ABS module
connector may have missing or dislodged wire seals. This condition could allow contamination to
enter the module connector, creating a potential for an electrical short.
CONSEQUENCE: An electrical short might cause an ABS malfunction that would illuminate the
ABS warning light, and in some cases, the module may overheat resulting in burning odor, smoke,
and/or fire. This condition could occur either when the vehicle ignition switch is in the off position or
while the vehicle is being operated.
Remedy: Dealers will inspect the wire harness connector to the ABS module for missing or
dislodged wire seals, and repair or replace the harness connector as appropriate. The dealer will
also inspect the connector on the ABS module and replace it if it is found to be corroded or
damaged. The recall began on April 23, 2007. Owners may contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673.
NOTES: Ford recall No. 07S51. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to
http://www.safercar.gov.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5874
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5875
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5876
Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation
Anti-Lock Brake Control Module
NOTE: The 4x2 service replacement module cannot be interchanged with the 4x4 module. The
service replacement 4x4 module is interchangeable with the 4x2 module.
The anti-lock brake control module is mounted to the HCU. It is an on-board diagnostic,
non-repairable unit consisting of two microprocessors and the necessary circuitry for their
operation. The anti-lock brake control module monitors system operation during normal driving as
well as during anti-lock braking. Anti-lock brake module operation is as follows: ^
Under normal driving conditions, the microprocessor produces short test pulses to the solenoid
valves that check the electrical system without any mechanical reaction.
^ Impending wheel lock conditions trigger signals from the anti-lock brake control module that open
and close the appropriate solenoid valves. This results in moderate pulsations in the brake pedal.
^ The anti-lock brake module used in 4x4 application includes a G-sensor. It detects vehicle
movement during a brake lockup event that is transferred to other wheels through the powertrain.
During normal braking, the brake pedal feel is identical to a standard brake system. Most faults that
occur in the anti-lock brake system will be stored as a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) in the
keep-alive memory of the anti-lock brake control module. The DTCs can be retrieved by following
the or-board diagnostic procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5877
Electronic Brake Control Module: Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is part of,
please refer to Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems; Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5878
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair
Module-Anti-Lock Brake Control
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the air cleaner and the air cleaner outlet pipe.
3. Disconnect the electrical connectors.
4. Remove the bolts.
5. Remove the bolt. 6. Raise and support the vehicle.
7. Remove the screws and the control module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5879
8. NOTE: The 4x2 module cannot be interchanged with the 4x4 module. The 4x4 module is
interchangeable with the 4x2 module.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5884
Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
Brake Fluid Level, Warning Switch
The brake fluid level warning switch is an integral part of the brake master cylinder reservoir. It
consists of a float containing a magnet and a reed switch mounted in the bottom of the brake
master cylinder reservoir. When the brake fluid in the brake master cylinder reservoir gets to a
predetermined level, the float and magnet actuates the reed switch that causes the red brake
warning indicator to illuminate. Loss of brake fluid from either the primary (front) or secondary (rear)
system will cause this system to activate. If the brake fluid level warning switch is inoperative, a
new brake master cylinder reservoir must be installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking
Brake Release Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
Parking Brake Release Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake control.
2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch.
^ Remove the screws.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips
Wheel Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips
TSB 04-23-2
11/29/04
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL TIP
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE When servicing the wheel speed sensors on a 2001-2005 Escape or 2005 Mariner and
Escape Hybrid, care must be taken during removal to prevent damage. The wheel speed sensor
wire has a body plug attached to it. This plug can be damaged if not removed correctly, such as
removal for pinpoint testing. If the body plug is damaged, sensor replacement may be necessary
even though the sensor is functional in all other respects.
ACTION
When removing the body plug, rotate the plug into a position which allows the use of a small
screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body plug. These two tabs are at right
angles (directly above and below) to the sensor wire. See Figures 1 and 2 for reference.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips >
Page 5895
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5896
Wheel Speed Sensor: Specifications
Anti-lock brake sensor bolt Rear 20 ft.lb
Anti-lock brake sensor bolt (4X2) Front 9-10 ft.lb
Anti-lock brake sensor bolt (4X4) 62-80 in.lb
Anti-lock brake sensor wire retaining bolt (4X4) 62-80 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 5899
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 5900
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 5901
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 5904
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 5905
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 5906
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5907
Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
Anti-Lock Brake Sensor
NOTE: Any time an anti-lock brake sensor is removed, thoroughly clean the mounting surfaces. On
front anti-lock brake sensors, apply High-Temperature 4x4 Front Axle and Wheel Bearing Grease.
The anti-lock brake system uses four "active" sensors and four sensor indicators to detect the
speed of each wheel. The teeth on the sensor indicator rotate past the stationary sensor at wheel
speed. As the teeth pass the sensor, a digital input signal is generated. The control module uses
the input to compute the speed of each wheel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor, Front
Sensor-Front
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Detach the grommet from the body and pull the connector through the hole.
3. Disconnect the sensor wiring.
4. Detach the retainer.
5. Remove the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5910
6. NOTE: Clean off any dirt that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the bolt and the sensor.
7. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5911
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor, Rear
Sensor-Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Detach the grommet from the body and pull the connector through the hole.
3. Disconnect the sensor wiring.
4. Detach the bolt.
5. Remove the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5912
6. NOTE: Clean off any dirt that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the bolt and the sensor.
7. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Clutch Switch: Locations
The Clutch Switch is located near the left hand rocker panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch > Page 5920
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the upper steering column shroud.
3. Remove the screws and the lower steering column shroud. 4. Turn the ignition key to the ON
position.
5. Using a small tool, depress the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock
cylinder out. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5929
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair
Battery Cable: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
3. Remove the fuse junction box cover.
4. Remove the cables.
1 Remove the nuts and the cable.
2 Release the lock clip and pull down on the connector.
5. Remove the bolt from the inner fender.
6. Remove the bolt holding the ground cable to the transaxle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Page 5934
7. Disconnect the harness clip.
8. Disconnect the harness clip at the back of the engine.
9. Remove the cable clip from under the battery support.
10. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair.
11. Remove the cable ends from the starter solenoid.
1 Remove the upper nut.
2 Remove the lower nut.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Page 5935
12. Remove the nut and the cable end from the generator B+ connector. 13. Remove the battery
cable harness assembly.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Electrical Specifications
Alternator: Electrical Specifications
Generator Output (Minimum) 58 A at 2,000 rpm
Generator Output 13.0 - 15.0 V at 2,000 rpm
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 5941
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions
Alternator: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5944
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5945
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5946
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5947
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5948
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5949
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5950
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5951
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5952
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5953
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5954
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5955
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5956
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5957
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5958
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5959
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5960
Alternator: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5961
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5962
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5963
Alternator: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 5964
Alternator: Service Precautions
CAUTION:
^ To prevent damage to the generator, do not make the jumper wire connections except as
directed.
^ Do not allow any metal object to come in contact with the housing and the internal diode cooling
fins with key on or off. A short circuit will result and burn out the diodes.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 5965
Alternator: Description and Operation
The charging system consists of the following components:
^ generator
^ integral voltage regulator
The generator maximum output provides 110 amps.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Generator Testing
Alternator: Testing and Inspection Generator Testing
CAUTION:
^ To prevent damage to the generator, do not make the jumper wire connections except as
directed.
^ Do not allow any metal object to come in contact with the housing and the internal diode cooling
fins with key on or off. A short circuit will result and burn out the diodes.
NOTE:
^ Battery posts and cable clamps must be clean and tight for accurate meter indications.
^ Refer to the battery tester manual for complete directions for testing the charging system.
1. Turn off all lamps and electrical components. 2. Place the transmission range selector lever in
NEUTRAL and apply the parking brake. 3. Carry out the Load Test and No-Load Test according to
the following component tests:
Generator On-Vehicle Test-Load Test
1. Switch the battery tester to the ammeter function. 2. Connect the positive and negative leads of
the battery tester to the corresponding battery terminals. 3. Connect the current probe to the
generator B+ output terminal, circuit 36 (YE/WH). 4. With the engine running, turn the A/C on, the
blower motor on high speed and the headlamps on high beam. 5. Increase the engine speed to
approximately 2,000 rpm. The voltage should increase a minimum of 0.5 volt above the base
voltage.
^ If the voltage does not increase as specified, carry out the Generator On-Vehicle Tests.
^ If the voltage increases as specified, the charging system is operating normally.
6. Adjust the tester load bank to determine the output of the generator. Generator output should be
at least 58 amps.
Generator On-Vehicle Test-No Load Test
1. Switch the battery tester to the voltmeter function. 2. Connect the voltmeter positive lead to the
generator B+ output terminal, circuit 36 (YE/WH) and the negative lead to ground. 3. Turn all
electrical accessories off. 4. With the engine running at 2,000 rpm, check the generator output
voltage. The voltage should be between 13.0 and 15.0 volts. If not, refer to the
Symptom Chart. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Generator Testing > Page 5968
Alternator: Testing and Inspection Other Diagnosis and Testing
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component, please refer to Charging System;
Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Page 5969
Alternator: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery cables. 2. Remove the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets
and Accessories.
3. Disconnect the electrical connectors.
1 Remove the nut and disconnect the B+ cable.
2 Remove the connector.
4. Remove the lower generator bolts.
5. Loosen the upper generator bolt from the engine but do not remove it from the generator.
NOTE: Insufficient clearance does not allow the bolt to be completely removed.
6. Move the generator to the rear of the vehicle, then lift up and out of the engine compartment.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Before reassembling, place the upper bolt into the generator.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations
Clutch Switch: Locations
The Clutch Switch is located near the left hand rocker panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Clutch Cutoff Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Clutch Cutoff Switch > Page 5976
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the upper steering column shroud.
3. Remove the screws and the lower steering column shroud. 4. Turn the ignition key to the ON
position.
5. Using a small tool, depress the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock
cylinder out. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Starter Drive/Bendix > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Starter Drive/Bendix: Testing and Inspection
Starter Drive and Flywheel Ring Gear Inspection
1. Remove the starter motor.
2. Check the wear patterns on the starter drive gear and the flywheel ring gear. If the wear pattern
is normal, install the starter motor.
3. If the starter drive gear and the flywheel ring gear are not fully meshing and both of the gears are
scored or damaged, install a new starter motor.
If necessary, install a new flywheel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 5988
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5994
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5995
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5996
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5997
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5998
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5999
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6000
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6001
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6002
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6003
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6004
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6005
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6006
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6007
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6008
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6009
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6010
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6011
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6012
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6013
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6014
Diagram 501-12-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel >
Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box
Electrical Accessory Panel: Diagrams Central Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel >
Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6019
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel >
Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6020
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel >
Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6021
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel >
Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6022
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel >
Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6023
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel >
Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6024
Electrical Accessory Panel: Diagrams Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug
> 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers
Technical Service Bulletin # 02-16-4 Date: 020819
Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers
Article No. 02-16-4
08/19/02
^ FUEL SYSTEM - FUEL PUMP "WHINING"/"BUZZING" NOISE COMES THROUGH
ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO-WAY RADIO SPEAKER
^ RADIO - ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION - "WHINING"/"BUZZING"
NOISE IN SPEAKERS CAUSED BY FUEL PUMP
^ NOISE - "WHINING"/"BUZZING" - COMES THROUGH SPEAKERS OF ENTERTAINMENT OR
TWO-WAY RADIO
FORD: 1990-1994 TEMPO 1990-1997 ESCORT, PROBE, THUNDERBIRD 1990-1998 MUSTANG
1990-1999 TAURUS 1990-2002 CROWN VICTORIA 1997-1999 CONTOUR 2001 TAURUS 1990
BRONCO II 1990-1996 BRONCO 1990-1997 AEROSTAR, F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350
1990-1999 F-250 LD 1990-2002 ECONOLINE, F-150, RANGER 1991-2002 EXPLORER
1995-2002 WINDSTAR 1997-2003 EXPEDITION 1999-2002 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2002
EXCURSION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT 2001-2002 ESCAPE
LINCOLN: 1990-1992 MARK VII 1990-1994 CONTINENTAL 1990-2002 TOWN CAR 1998-2003
NAVIGATOR 2002 BLACKWOOD
MERCURY: 1990-1994 TOPAZ 1990-1997 COUGAR 1990-1999 SABLE 1990-2002 GRAND
MARQUIS 1991-1997 TRACER 1997-1999 MYSTIQUE 2001 SABLE 1993-2002 VILLAGER
1997-2002 MOUNTAINEER
TSB 01-7-3 is being republished in its entirety to update the model year coverage and vehicle line
coverage.
ISSUE
A "whining"/"buzzing" noise in the speakers of the entertainment radio or two-way radio on vehicles
with an in-tank electric fuel pump may be caused by electrical noise from the fuel pump.
ACTION
Install an electronic noise Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Filter (F1PZ-18B925-A) on the fuel
pump inside the fuel tank. Refer to the following Test Procedure to confirm that the concern exists,
then refer to the Service Procedure for repair details.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug
> 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6033
NOTE
IF THE VEHICLE HAS AN ELECTRONIC RETURNLESS FUEL SYSTEM, DO NOT INSTALL A
RFI FILTER INLINE TO THE FUEL PUMP . ONLY VEHICLES WITH MECHANICAL
RETURNLESS FUEL SYSTEMS (PRESSURE REGULATOR IN THE TANK), OR SYSTEMS
WITH THE PRESSURE REGULATOR ON THE FUEL RAIL SHOULD BE APPROVED FOR THE
RFI FILTER INSTALLATION.
NOTE
SOME LIGHT TRUCKS REQUIRE ONE (1) RFI FILTER FOR EACH IN-TANK ELECTRIC FUEL
PUMP ON MULTI-TANK VEHICLES.
NOTE
THIS TSB DOES NOT INCLUDE TAURUS FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLES (FFVS) OR 1999
RANGER 3.0L FFVS.
TEST PROCEDURE
Fuel pump radio noise is relatively constant and changes only slightly with vehicle speed. If the
frequency of the noise varies or the noise comes and goes with the vehicle speed, then it is not the
fuel pump and this fix will not be effective. The following procedure will help determine if the fuel
pump is the cause of the radio noise:
1. Turn on the radio before the key is turned on (assuming the radio will operate without the ignition
key - you may need to put the ignition key in the Accessory position).
2. Turn the ignition key to the Run position (do not start the engine).
3. The fuel pump should run for about 1 second with the key in the Run position with the engine not
running. Listen for noise in the radio. If noise is present while the pump is running and stops when
the pump stops, then the noise is being generated by the pump and this procedure should help.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
SUPERSEDES: 01-7-3
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
021604AA Diagnose And Install RFI 2.1 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1997 Thunderbird/Cougar
021604BA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1999 And 2001 Taurus/Sable
021604CA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.2 Hrs.
Filter 1992-1997 Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis/Town Car
021604CB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1991 Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis/Town Car
021604CC Diagnose And Install RFI 2.2 Hrs.
Filter 1998-2002 Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis
021604DA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug
> 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6034
Filter 1998-2002 Town Car
021604EA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.7 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1998 Mustang
021604FA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1998 Mustang
021604GA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1994 Continental
021604HA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1990 Escort
021604IA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr.
Filter 1991-1996 Escort Tracer
021604IB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1997 Escort/Tracer
021604JA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr.
Filter 1997 Contour/Mystique
021604JB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs.
Filter 1998-1999 Contour/Mystique
021604KA Diagnose And Install RFI 2.0 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1992 Mark VII
021604LA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr.
Filter 1990-1992 Probe
021604LB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs.
Filter 1993-1997 Probe
021604MA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1990-2002 Econoline Single Fuel Tank
021604MB Diagnose And Install RFI 2.6 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1991 Econoline Both Fuel Tanks
021604NA Diagnose And Install RFI 2.0 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1996 Bronco
0216040A Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs.
Filter 1991-1994 Explorer
0216040B Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs.
Filter 1995-2002 Explorer
021604PA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs.
Filter 1997-2002 Mountaineer
0216040A Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs.
Filter 1995-2002 Windstar
021604RA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs.
Filter 1993-2002 Villager
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug
> 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6035
021604SA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.7 Hrs.
Filter 1997-2003 Expedition/Navigator
021604TA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.3 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1997 Ranger Standard Cab
021604TB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1997 Ranger Super Cab
021604TC Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs.
Filter 1998-2002 Ranger 4X4
021604TD Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1998-2002 Ranger 4X2
021604UA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1997 Aerostar
021604VA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs.
Filter 1990 Bronco II
021604WA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1996 F-150/250/350/Super Duty And 1997 F-350/Superduty Rear
021604WB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1996 F-150/250/350/Super Duty And 1997 F-350/Superduty Front
021604WC Diagnose And Install RFI 2.1 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1996 F-150/250/350/Super Duty And 1997 F-350/Superduty Both Tanks
021604WD Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1998-2002 F-150
021604XA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 2000-2002 Excursion
021604XB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1999-2002 Super Duty F-Series: Front Tank
021604XC Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs.
Filter 1999-2002 Super Duty F-Series: Rear Tank
021604XD Diagnose And Install RFI 2.7 Hrs.
Filter 1999-2002 Super Duty F-Series: Both Tanks
021604YA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr.
Filter 2001-2002 Escape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug
> 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6036
021604ZA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs.
Filter 2002 Blackwood
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18B925 42
OASIS CODES: 205000, 207000, 404000, 702000, 702300
Service Procedure
1. Remove the fuel pump sender assembly from the fuel tank. Refer to the appropriate model year
Workshop Manual for removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug
> 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6037
2. On vehicles without a fuel delivery module, remove the negative and positive connectors from
the fuel pump, Figure 1.
a. Cut the wires to the fuel pump 76 mm (3") from the flange of the fuel pump and discard the
wires.
b. Connect the RFI filter connectors to the spade terminal on the fuel pump.
c. Cut and solder both the red and black wires of the RFI filter to the red and black wires of the
flange. Use Heat Shrink Tubing (F5AZ-14A099-AA) over the solder connections.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug
> 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6038
NOTE
HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PER
THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2 ")) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO
ENTIRELY COVER EACH SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO
PREVENT EXPOSURE OF THE CONNECTIONS.
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT
MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE GROUND WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL
TANK. IF THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM
CORROSION SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE
LITERATURE (EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS.
WARNING
ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL
TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR
APPLYING SHRINK TUBING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug
> 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6039
3. On light trucks and compact trucks with a fuel delivery module, cut the fuel pump wires to the
fuel delivery module 50 mm (2") from the flange and discard the wires, Figure 2.
a. Cut the connectors from the RFI filter and solder wires to the fuel delivery module (red to red and
black to black). Use heat shrink tubing over solder connections.
b. Solder wires from the RFI filter to the flange wires (red to red and black to black). Use heat
shrink tubing over soldered connections.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug
> 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6040
NOTE
HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PER
THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2 ")) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO
ENTIRELY COVER EACH SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO
PREVENT EXPOSURE OF THE CONNECTIONS.
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT
MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE GROUND WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL
TANK. IF THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM
CORROSION SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE
LITERATURE (EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS.
WARNING
ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL
TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR
APPLYING SHRINK TUBING.
4. Secure the RFI filter to the fuel pump and sender assembly with a Bundling Strap (95873-S101)
to prevent rattling in the tank, Figures 1 and 2.
5. Reinstall the fuel pump sender assembly into the fuel tank.
CAUTION
INSTALL NEW GASKETS WHEN REINSTALLING SENDER TO PREVENT LEAKS. REFER TO
THE PARTS CATALOG FOR PROPER APPLICATIONS.
6. Check the appropriate Electrical and Vacuum Troubleshooting Manual (EVTM) (or other service
literature) for the location of the fuel pump ground. If ground is more than 0.9m (3 ') from the tank,
cut wire and ground fuel pump end within 0.9m (3 ') of the tank to prevent ground wire from acting
as an antenna. Be sure ground is secure and protected from corrosion since it is the operating
ground for the fuel pump.
7. Install the fuel tank in the vehicle as outlined in the appropriate Service or Workshop Manual.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: >
02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers
Technical Service Bulletin # 02-16-4 Date: 020819
Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers
Article No. 02-16-4
08/19/02
^ FUEL SYSTEM - FUEL PUMP "WHINING"/"BUZZING" NOISE COMES THROUGH
ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO-WAY RADIO SPEAKER
^ RADIO - ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION - "WHINING"/"BUZZING"
NOISE IN SPEAKERS CAUSED BY FUEL PUMP
^ NOISE - "WHINING"/"BUZZING" - COMES THROUGH SPEAKERS OF ENTERTAINMENT OR
TWO-WAY RADIO
FORD: 1990-1994 TEMPO 1990-1997 ESCORT, PROBE, THUNDERBIRD 1990-1998 MUSTANG
1990-1999 TAURUS 1990-2002 CROWN VICTORIA 1997-1999 CONTOUR 2001 TAURUS 1990
BRONCO II 1990-1996 BRONCO 1990-1997 AEROSTAR, F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350
1990-1999 F-250 LD 1990-2002 ECONOLINE, F-150, RANGER 1991-2002 EXPLORER
1995-2002 WINDSTAR 1997-2003 EXPEDITION 1999-2002 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2002
EXCURSION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT 2001-2002 ESCAPE
LINCOLN: 1990-1992 MARK VII 1990-1994 CONTINENTAL 1990-2002 TOWN CAR 1998-2003
NAVIGATOR 2002 BLACKWOOD
MERCURY: 1990-1994 TOPAZ 1990-1997 COUGAR 1990-1999 SABLE 1990-2002 GRAND
MARQUIS 1991-1997 TRACER 1997-1999 MYSTIQUE 2001 SABLE 1993-2002 VILLAGER
1997-2002 MOUNTAINEER
TSB 01-7-3 is being republished in its entirety to update the model year coverage and vehicle line
coverage.
ISSUE
A "whining"/"buzzing" noise in the speakers of the entertainment radio or two-way radio on vehicles
with an in-tank electric fuel pump may be caused by electrical noise from the fuel pump.
ACTION
Install an electronic noise Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Filter (F1PZ-18B925-A) on the fuel
pump inside the fuel tank. Refer to the following Test Procedure to confirm that the concern exists,
then refer to the Service Procedure for repair details.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: >
02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6046
NOTE
IF THE VEHICLE HAS AN ELECTRONIC RETURNLESS FUEL SYSTEM, DO NOT INSTALL A
RFI FILTER INLINE TO THE FUEL PUMP . ONLY VEHICLES WITH MECHANICAL
RETURNLESS FUEL SYSTEMS (PRESSURE REGULATOR IN THE TANK), OR SYSTEMS
WITH THE PRESSURE REGULATOR ON THE FUEL RAIL SHOULD BE APPROVED FOR THE
RFI FILTER INSTALLATION.
NOTE
SOME LIGHT TRUCKS REQUIRE ONE (1) RFI FILTER FOR EACH IN-TANK ELECTRIC FUEL
PUMP ON MULTI-TANK VEHICLES.
NOTE
THIS TSB DOES NOT INCLUDE TAURUS FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLES (FFVS) OR 1999
RANGER 3.0L FFVS.
TEST PROCEDURE
Fuel pump radio noise is relatively constant and changes only slightly with vehicle speed. If the
frequency of the noise varies or the noise comes and goes with the vehicle speed, then it is not the
fuel pump and this fix will not be effective. The following procedure will help determine if the fuel
pump is the cause of the radio noise:
1. Turn on the radio before the key is turned on (assuming the radio will operate without the ignition
key - you may need to put the ignition key in the Accessory position).
2. Turn the ignition key to the Run position (do not start the engine).
3. The fuel pump should run for about 1 second with the key in the Run position with the engine not
running. Listen for noise in the radio. If noise is present while the pump is running and stops when
the pump stops, then the noise is being generated by the pump and this procedure should help.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
SUPERSEDES: 01-7-3
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
021604AA Diagnose And Install RFI 2.1 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1997 Thunderbird/Cougar
021604BA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1999 And 2001 Taurus/Sable
021604CA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.2 Hrs.
Filter 1992-1997 Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis/Town Car
021604CB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1991 Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis/Town Car
021604CC Diagnose And Install RFI 2.2 Hrs.
Filter 1998-2002 Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis
021604DA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: >
02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6047
Filter 1998-2002 Town Car
021604EA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.7 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1998 Mustang
021604FA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1998 Mustang
021604GA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1994 Continental
021604HA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1990 Escort
021604IA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr.
Filter 1991-1996 Escort Tracer
021604IB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1997 Escort/Tracer
021604JA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr.
Filter 1997 Contour/Mystique
021604JB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs.
Filter 1998-1999 Contour/Mystique
021604KA Diagnose And Install RFI 2.0 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1992 Mark VII
021604LA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr.
Filter 1990-1992 Probe
021604LB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs.
Filter 1993-1997 Probe
021604MA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1990-2002 Econoline Single Fuel Tank
021604MB Diagnose And Install RFI 2.6 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1991 Econoline Both Fuel Tanks
021604NA Diagnose And Install RFI 2.0 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1996 Bronco
0216040A Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs.
Filter 1991-1994 Explorer
0216040B Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs.
Filter 1995-2002 Explorer
021604PA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs.
Filter 1997-2002 Mountaineer
0216040A Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs.
Filter 1995-2002 Windstar
021604RA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs.
Filter 1993-2002 Villager
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: >
02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6048
021604SA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.7 Hrs.
Filter 1997-2003 Expedition/Navigator
021604TA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.3 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1997 Ranger Standard Cab
021604TB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1997 Ranger Super Cab
021604TC Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs.
Filter 1998-2002 Ranger 4X4
021604TD Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1998-2002 Ranger 4X2
021604UA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1997 Aerostar
021604VA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs.
Filter 1990 Bronco II
021604WA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1996 F-150/250/350/Super Duty And 1997 F-350/Superduty Rear
021604WB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1996 F-150/250/350/Super Duty And 1997 F-350/Superduty Front
021604WC Diagnose And Install RFI 2.1 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1996 F-150/250/350/Super Duty And 1997 F-350/Superduty Both Tanks
021604WD Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1998-2002 F-150
021604XA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 2000-2002 Excursion
021604XB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1999-2002 Super Duty F-Series: Front Tank
021604XC Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs.
Filter 1999-2002 Super Duty F-Series: Rear Tank
021604XD Diagnose And Install RFI 2.7 Hrs.
Filter 1999-2002 Super Duty F-Series: Both Tanks
021604YA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr.
Filter 2001-2002 Escape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: >
02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6049
021604ZA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs.
Filter 2002 Blackwood
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18B925 42
OASIS CODES: 205000, 207000, 404000, 702000, 702300
Service Procedure
1. Remove the fuel pump sender assembly from the fuel tank. Refer to the appropriate model year
Workshop Manual for removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: >
02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6050
2. On vehicles without a fuel delivery module, remove the negative and positive connectors from
the fuel pump, Figure 1.
a. Cut the wires to the fuel pump 76 mm (3") from the flange of the fuel pump and discard the
wires.
b. Connect the RFI filter connectors to the spade terminal on the fuel pump.
c. Cut and solder both the red and black wires of the RFI filter to the red and black wires of the
flange. Use Heat Shrink Tubing (F5AZ-14A099-AA) over the solder connections.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: >
02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6051
NOTE
HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PER
THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2 ")) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO
ENTIRELY COVER EACH SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO
PREVENT EXPOSURE OF THE CONNECTIONS.
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT
MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE GROUND WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL
TANK. IF THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM
CORROSION SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE
LITERATURE (EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS.
WARNING
ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL
TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR
APPLYING SHRINK TUBING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: >
02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6052
3. On light trucks and compact trucks with a fuel delivery module, cut the fuel pump wires to the
fuel delivery module 50 mm (2") from the flange and discard the wires, Figure 2.
a. Cut the connectors from the RFI filter and solder wires to the fuel delivery module (red to red and
black to black). Use heat shrink tubing over solder connections.
b. Solder wires from the RFI filter to the flange wires (red to red and black to black). Use heat
shrink tubing over soldered connections.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: >
02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6053
NOTE
HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PER
THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2 ")) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO
ENTIRELY COVER EACH SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO
PREVENT EXPOSURE OF THE CONNECTIONS.
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT
MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE GROUND WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL
TANK. IF THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM
CORROSION SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE
LITERATURE (EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS.
WARNING
ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL
TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR
APPLYING SHRINK TUBING.
4. Secure the RFI filter to the fuel pump and sender assembly with a Bundling Strap (95873-S101)
to prevent rattling in the tank, Figures 1 and 2.
5. Reinstall the fuel pump sender assembly into the fuel tank.
CAUTION
INSTALL NEW GASKETS WHEN REINSTALLING SENDER TO PREVENT LEAKS. REFER TO
THE PARTS CATALOG FOR PROPER APPLICATIONS.
6. Check the appropriate Electrical and Vacuum Troubleshooting Manual (EVTM) (or other service
literature) for the location of the fuel pump ground. If ground is more than 0.9m (3 ') from the tank,
cut wire and ground fuel pump end within 0.9m (3 ') of the tank to prevent ground wire from acting
as an antenna. Be sure ground is secure and protected from corrosion since it is the operating
ground for the fuel pump.
7. Install the fuel tank in the vehicle as outlined in the appropriate Service or Workshop Manual.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box
Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6058
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6059
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6060
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6061
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6062
Fuse: Locations Central Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6063
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6064
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6065
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6066
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuse: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6069
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6070
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6071
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6072
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6073
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6074
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6075
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6076
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6077
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6078
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6079
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6080
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6081
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6082
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6083
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6084
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6085
Fuse: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6086
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6087
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box
Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6090
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6091
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6092
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6093
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6094
Fuse: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6095
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6096
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6097
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6098
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box
Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6103
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6104
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6105
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6106
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6107
Fuse Block: Locations Central Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6108
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6109
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6110
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6111
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6114
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6115
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6116
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6117
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6118
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6119
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6120
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6121
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6122
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6123
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6124
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6125
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6126
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6127
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6128
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6129
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6130
Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6131
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6132
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6133
Fuse Block: Connector Views
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6134
Diagram 700-01-00-3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6135
Diagram 700-01-00-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Application and ID > Battery Junction Box
Fuse Block: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6138
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6139
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6140
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6141
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6142
Fuse Block: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6143
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6144
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6145
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6146
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6150
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure
voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the
relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is
12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6154
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No
Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set
Multiple Junction Connector: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's
Set
TSB 06-9-3
05/15/06
PCM FAILURE - ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES INTERMITTENT - INOPERATIVE
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a powertrain control module (PCM) concern that results in no
crank, no start, or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) present. There may also be intermittent or inoperative power windows, door locks, keyless
entry system, lighting, speed control, radio, instrument cluster warning lamps (possibly dimly
illuminated instead of being off), or other electrical accessories. The concern is typically more
noticeable in wet and/or cold weather conditions.
This may be the result of connector terminal corrosion in C134, C263, or the central junction box
(CJB) which results in either high resistance between the male and female terminals or a short
between two or more circuits due to bridging through any corrosion that may be present. Corrosion
in C134 may be the result of improper positioning/sealing of C134. Corrosion in C263 or the CJB
may be due to a water leak in the left hand A-Pillar area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to inspect and repair the connector terminals for evidence
of corrosion. Repair any sources of water entry. If no signs of corrosion or water entry are found,
follow normal diagnostics.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
WHEN DIAGNOSING THE CAUSE OF A PCM FAILURE IT IS CRITICAL THAT THIS
INSPECTION AND REPAIR PROCEDURE BE COMPLETED IN ITS ENTIRETY BEFORE
INSTALLING A REPLACEMENT SERVICE PART.
THE POSSIBILITY EXISTS FOR A 12 VOLT
SHORT TO THE 5 VOLT VREF (CIRCUIT). INSTALLATION OF A SERVICE REPLACEMENT
PCM WITHOUT ELIMINATING THE 12 VOLT SHORT WILL RESULT IN REPEAT PCM FAILURE.
Inspect and repair the following connectors:
C134
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No
Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6163
1. Open the hood and locate C134 (Figure 1).
2. Disconnect the connector halves and thoroughly inspect the terminals. Clean any corrosion that
may be present and replace any damaged terminals.
3. Use shop air to blow out any moisture that may be present in the terminals, then apply dielectric
grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector.
4. Reconnect the connector halves and close the hood.
C263
1. Open the drivers door and remove the lower kick panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No
Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6164
2. Locate C263 as shown in Figure 2.
3. Disconnect the connector halves.
4. Pry out the terminal retainer as shown in Figure 3 and thoroughly inspect the terminals.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No
Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6165
NOTE
THE CORROSION WILL NOT BE VISIBLE UNLESS THE TERMINAL RETAINER IS REMOVED.
5. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals.
6. Work dielectric grease into the side opening in the connector, then reinstall the terminal retainer.
7. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector.
8. Reconnect the connector halves.
CJB (Central Junction Box)
1. Locate the CJB (Figure 2).
2. Disconnect the four harness connectors from the front and the two connectors from the rear of
the CJB, and remove the CJB.
3. Inspect the terminals and also the back side of the CJB or evidence of water damage or
corrosion.
4. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals or components.
5. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in the harness connectors.
6. Reconnect the six harness connectors and reinstall the CJB.
7. Reinstall the lower kick panel.
NOTE
IF ANY CORROSION WAS FOUND IN EITHER C263 OR THE CJB, THE SOURCE OF THE
WATER ENTRY MUST BE IDENTIFIED TO PREVENT A REPEAT REPAIR.
Follow standard water testing procedures to identify the source of any leaks.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No
Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6166
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No
Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6167
Figures 4 through 8 identify some common sources of water leaks.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT060903 Claim Labor As Actual Actual
Time Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14A187 68
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set
Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL
ON/DTC's Set
TSB 06-9-3
05/15/06
PCM FAILURE - ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES INTERMITTENT - INOPERATIVE
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a powertrain control module (PCM) concern that results in no
crank, no start, or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) present. There may also be intermittent or inoperative power windows, door locks, keyless
entry system, lighting, speed control, radio, instrument cluster warning lamps (possibly dimly
illuminated instead of being off), or other electrical accessories. The concern is typically more
noticeable in wet and/or cold weather conditions.
This may be the result of connector terminal corrosion in C134, C263, or the central junction box
(CJB) which results in either high resistance between the male and female terminals or a short
between two or more circuits due to bridging through any corrosion that may be present. Corrosion
in C134 may be the result of improper positioning/sealing of C134. Corrosion in C263 or the CJB
may be due to a water leak in the left hand A-Pillar area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to inspect and repair the connector terminals for evidence
of corrosion. Repair any sources of water entry. If no signs of corrosion or water entry are found,
follow normal diagnostics.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
WHEN DIAGNOSING THE CAUSE OF A PCM FAILURE IT IS CRITICAL THAT THIS
INSPECTION AND REPAIR PROCEDURE BE COMPLETED IN ITS ENTIRETY BEFORE
INSTALLING A REPLACEMENT SERVICE PART.
THE POSSIBILITY EXISTS FOR A 12 VOLT
SHORT TO THE 5 VOLT VREF (CIRCUIT). INSTALLATION OF A SERVICE REPLACEMENT
PCM WITHOUT ELIMINATING THE 12 VOLT SHORT WILL RESULT IN REPEAT PCM FAILURE.
Inspect and repair the following connectors:
C134
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6173
1. Open the hood and locate C134 (Figure 1).
2. Disconnect the connector halves and thoroughly inspect the terminals. Clean any corrosion that
may be present and replace any damaged terminals.
3. Use shop air to blow out any moisture that may be present in the terminals, then apply dielectric
grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector.
4. Reconnect the connector halves and close the hood.
C263
1. Open the drivers door and remove the lower kick panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6174
2. Locate C263 as shown in Figure 2.
3. Disconnect the connector halves.
4. Pry out the terminal retainer as shown in Figure 3 and thoroughly inspect the terminals.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6175
NOTE
THE CORROSION WILL NOT BE VISIBLE UNLESS THE TERMINAL RETAINER IS REMOVED.
5. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals.
6. Work dielectric grease into the side opening in the connector, then reinstall the terminal retainer.
7. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector.
8. Reconnect the connector halves.
CJB (Central Junction Box)
1. Locate the CJB (Figure 2).
2. Disconnect the four harness connectors from the front and the two connectors from the rear of
the CJB, and remove the CJB.
3. Inspect the terminals and also the back side of the CJB or evidence of water damage or
corrosion.
4. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals or components.
5. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in the harness connectors.
6. Reconnect the six harness connectors and reinstall the CJB.
7. Reinstall the lower kick panel.
NOTE
IF ANY CORROSION WAS FOUND IN EITHER C263 OR THE CJB, THE SOURCE OF THE
WATER ENTRY MUST BE IDENTIFIED TO PREVENT A REPEAT REPAIR.
Follow standard water testing procedures to identify the source of any leaks.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6176
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6177
Figures 4 through 8 identify some common sources of water leaks.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT060903 Claim Labor As Actual Actual
Time Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14A187 68
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: >
03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON
Coolant Level Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light
ON
Article No. 03-25-2
12/22/03
ENGINE - COOLING SYSTEM - LOW COOLANT WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED COOLANT DEGAS BOTTLE INSPECTION - SERVICE TIP
FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE
This article supersedes TSB 03-08-5 to update the vehicle model years and service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2003 Escape 3.0L vehicles may exhibit a low coolant warning indicator lamp
illuminated. This may be caused by a low coolant level, even if it appears there is significant
coolant in the degas bottle. Analysis of coolant degas bottles indicate that bottle replacement may
not be necessary. Adjusting the coolant to the proper level may be all that is required to correct the
condition.
ACTION The following Service Procedure provides tips to help in veritying proper coolant levels.
Additional diagnostic and service information can be found in the appropriate Workshop Manual
Section 303-03.
SERVICE PROCEDURE PROPER INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF COOLANT LEVEL IN
THE DEGAS BOTTLE
There are four (4) different cells within the Escape degas bottle. The front cells of the degas bottle
are not a good visual indicator of proper coolant level, as these cells will always give the
appearance of being full (Figure 1). The actual COLD FILL RANGE is the larger cell with the fill
cap, just below the seam. It can be difficult to see if not properly examined.
If the vehicle is HOT when inspecting, the coolant level should be at the bottle seam (minimum) or
above the seam by 1/2 inch, well above the LOW mark. When hot, if the coolant level is not at least
to the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), there is a possibility of illuminating the low coolant
lamp when the vehicle cools down and the coolant is drawn back into the engine cooling system.
DIAGNOSIS Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Not Illuminated (OFF):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap and return vehicle to customer.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: >
03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON > Page 6183
Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Illuminated (ON):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap, verify that the warning lamp turns off after key cycle and return to customer.
2. If the coolant level is verified to be at the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), disconnect the
coolant level sensor and verify that the warning lamp turns off. If the lamp does turn off then
replace the degas bottle. If the lamp remains on with the sensor disconnected then perform
diagnostics on the circuit beyond degas bottle/low coolant sensor.
NOTE
IT TAKES APPROXIMATELY 25 SECONDS FOR THE LOW COOLANT LAMP TO TURN OFF
AFTER THE SENSOR CIRCUIT IS OPENED. (EXAMPLE: WHEN ADDING COOLANT TO A LOW
BOTTLE WITH LAMP ON.)
NOTE
DO NOT REPLACE THE DEGAS BOTTLE UNLESS DIRECTED BY DIAGNOSTICS IN STEP 2.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
SUPERSEDES: 03-08-5
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: >
03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON > Page 6189
Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Illuminated (ON):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap, verify that the warning lamp turns off after key cycle and return to customer.
2. If the coolant level is verified to be at the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), disconnect the
coolant level sensor and verify that the warning lamp turns off. If the lamp does turn off then
replace the degas bottle. If the lamp remains on with the sensor disconnected then perform
diagnostics on the circuit beyond degas bottle/low coolant sensor.
NOTE
IT TAKES APPROXIMATELY 25 SECONDS FOR THE LOW COOLANT LAMP TO TURN OFF
AFTER THE SENSOR CIRCUIT IS OPENED. (EXAMPLE: WHEN ADDING COOLANT TO A LOW
BOTTLE WITH LAMP ON.)
NOTE
DO NOT REPLACE THE DEGAS BOTTLE UNLESS DIRECTED BY DIAGNOSTICS IN STEP 2.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
SUPERSEDES: 03-08-5
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6192
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6193
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6194
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6195
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6196
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6197
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6198
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6199
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6200
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6201
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6202
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6203
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6204
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6205
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6210
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure
voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the
relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is
12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6214
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6219
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6220
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6221
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6222
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6223
Relay Box: Locations Central Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6224
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6225
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6226
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6227
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box
Relay Box: Diagrams Central Junction Box
Diagram 700-01-00-3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6230
Diagram 700-01-00-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6231
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6234
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6235
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6236
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6237
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6238
Relay Box: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6239
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6240
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6241
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6242
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6247
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6248
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6249
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6250
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6251
Relay Box: Locations Central Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6252
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6253
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6254
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6255
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Central Junction Box
Relay Box: Diagrams Central Junction Box
Diagram 700-01-00-3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6258
Diagram 700-01-00-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6259
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6262
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6263
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6264
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6265
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6266
Relay Box: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6267
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6268
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6269
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6270
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-26-12 > Dec > 04 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's
B1994 or B1998 Set
Wiring Harness: Customer Interest SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998 Set
TSB 04-26-12
12/31/04
SIDE AIR BAG DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1994 OR B1998
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit the air bag warning lamp illuminating
intermiffently with DTC B1994 (driver side, side mount air bag circuit open) or B1998 (passenger
side, side mount air bag circuit open). This condition may be caused by a variation in the electrical
continuity at connector C337 (passenger side) or C367 (driver side) at the body harness wire
terminal crimp.
ACTION Install a replacement body harness pigtail connector in the affected circuit. Refer to the
instruction sheet included in the connector repair kit.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042612A 2001-2004 Escape One 1.2 Hrs.
Seat: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes
Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seat)
042612B 2001-2004 Escape Both 1.8 Hrs.
Seats: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes
Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seats)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14405 X2
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 >
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-18-7 Date: 050922
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips
TSB 05-18-7
09/22/05
WIRING - SOLDERING AND CRIMPING REPAIRS - SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006
Five Hundred, Ford GT, Freestyle 2006 Fusion 2000-2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2000-2005
Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2001-2005
Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2000-2006
F-650, F-750 2006 Low Cab Forward
LINCOLN: 2000-2006 LS, Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2000-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood
2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2000-2002 Cougar 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2005-2006 Montego
2006 Milan 2000-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 03-11-6 to update the service procedure, vehicle lines and model
years.
ISSUE Wire harness repairs are supported through the availability of individual components such
as:
^ Wire terminals with machine crimped pigtails
^ Hard shell connectors
^ Dual wall heat shrink tubing
^ Complete, loaded, wiring pigtail kits
Some of the available tools and service parts that are helpful when performing wiring harness
repairs are:
^ Motorcraft Wiring Pigtail Catalog (see website for more information)
^ Rotunda Wire Splice Tool kit 164-R5903
^ General Wire Terminal Repair Kit (order through Ford Component Sales)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 >
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6284
Information on the pigtail and terminal repair kits can also be accessed by technicians via the P15
web site. To access on PTS:
^ Select the year/model of the vehicle on the P15 home page
^ Select the wiring tab
^ Select the link to the pigtail or terminal repair kit at the top right of screen.
Additional service information contained in this TSB detailing wire folding, soldering, and crimping
techniques may be helpful.
ACTION
REPAIR VS REPLACEMENT
The approved procedure is to repair wiring harnesses with pigtail kits, wire terminals, or hard shell
connectors when available. The only exceptions to this procedure are when:
^ The repair cost exceeds the cost to replace the wiring harness
^ There are no component parts released to service the wiring harness
RESTRAINTS RELATED WIRING REPAIRS
If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in a stand-alone harness, do not repair
them; replace the restraints harness unless directed to repair the circuit by a TSB or other Ford
Motor Company publication.
If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in the main vehicle wiring harnesses (14401,
14A005, etc.), they should be repaired using the solder and heat-shrink repair procedure specified
in this TSB. The General Wire Terminal Repair Kit contains gold plated terminated pigtails (with
white insulation) and dual wall heat shrink tubing to perform these repairs. Loaded wiring pigtail kits
with gold plated terminals are also available in the parts catalog.
Disclaimer
Service Tips
Refer to applicable model year wiring diagrams for circuit information.
Twisted Wire Circuits
For "Twisted Wire" circuit repair (Figure 1), the twisting must not be disrupted for more than 2" (51
mm) Twist the repaired wires in the same direction and with the same general twist rate as the
original wiring. Reapply the shielding on shielded circuits.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 >
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6285
Stagger the repairs to minimize harness diameter and maintain harness length (Figure 2).
Any leads that are not going to be used need to be sealed with dual wall heat shrink and stowed
(Figure 2). Silicone must not be used.
Excess wire from the harness can be folded back on itself to maintain the harness length.
Reapply any convolute and tape that was removed to make the repair.
For 16 AGW and Smaller Diameter Wire
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 >
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6286
1. Strip 1-1/2" (37.2 mm) of insulation from Wire # 1 and 3/4" (19.5 mm) of insulation from Wire # 2,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands (Figure 3). Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire is pulled
at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during stripping, cut
off the end and re-strip.
2. Install heat shrink tubing at least 1" (26 mm) away from one of the stripped ends being spliced.
Twist wires together. Solder wires together (Figure 4).
NOTE
USE ROSIN CORE MILDLY ACTIVATED (RMS) SOLDER. DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER
FOR WIRE REPAIR.
3. Bend Wire # 1 back in a straight line for sealing (Figure 4). Inspect solder joint bond.
NOTE
WAIT FOR SOLDER TO COOL BEFORE MOVING WIRES.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 >
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6287
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 >
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6288
4. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5).
NOTE
OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES.
5. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt
appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the
hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between
the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the
solder point (Figure 5).
For 14 AGW and Larger Diameter Wire (Excluding Restraints Wiring Repairs)
1. Strip 1/4" (6.35 mm) of insulation from pigtail wire end once the wire lengths are sized so repairs
can be staggered. Take care not to nick or cut wire strands. Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire
is pulled at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during
stripping, cut off the end and re-strip.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 >
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6289
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 >
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6290
NOTE
THE STRIP LENGTH WILL VARY DEPENDING ON THE BUTT SPLICE AND WIRE IN
HARNESS. LONGER STRIP LENGTHS ARE REQUIRED WHEN THE WIRE NEEDS TO BE
FOLDED TO MATE WITH THE BUTT SPLICE. REFER TO FIGURE 10 CHART FOR STRIP
LENGTHS AND FOLDING TECHNIQUES.
2. Slide heat shrink tubing onto one (1) of the wire ends to be crimped, must be at least 1" (25.4
mm) away from stripped end (Figure 6).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 >
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6291
3. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber of the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper (or
equivalent) by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice
(Figure 7). Hold the crimping tool so the identified wire sizes are facing you. Squeeze tool handles
together until the ratchet releases, then allow the jaws of the tool to open fully.
4. Center one (1) end of the butt splice on the appropriate crimping chamber. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam of the butt splice toward the indenter (Figure 8).
5. Hold the butt splice in place and squeeze the tool handles together until the ratchet engages
sufficiently to hold the butt splice in position (typically one (1) or two (2) clicks). DO NOT deform the
butt splice.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 >
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6292
6. Insert stripped wire into the buff splice, making sure the insulation on wire does not enter the butt
splice (Figure 8).
7. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles together until ratchet releases. Allow tool
handles to open, then remove crimped butt splice.
8. To crimp the other half of the splice, reposition the un-crimped wire barrel in the same crimping
chamber, and repeat Steps 3-8. If splice cannot be turned for crimping the other half, turn the tool
around.
9. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. It is acceptable for crimp to be slightly
off center, but not off the end of the buff splice (Figure 9-a).
b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. Wire is flush with or extends slightly beyond end of
buff splice (Figure 9-b).
c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices (Figure 9-c).
10. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5).
NOTE
OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES.
11. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt
appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the
hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between
the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the
solder point (Figure 5).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 04-26-12 > Dec > 04 >
SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998 Set
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998
Set
TSB 04-26-12
12/31/04
SIDE AIR BAG DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1994 OR B1998
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit the air bag warning lamp illuminating
intermiffently with DTC B1994 (driver side, side mount air bag circuit open) or B1998 (passenger
side, side mount air bag circuit open). This condition may be caused by a variation in the electrical
continuity at connector C337 (passenger side) or C367 (driver side) at the body harness wire
terminal crimp.
ACTION Install a replacement body harness pigtail connector in the affected circuit. Refer to the
instruction sheet included in the connector repair kit.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042612A 2001-2004 Escape One 1.2 Hrs.
Seat: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes
Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seat)
042612B 2001-2004 Escape Both 1.8 Hrs.
Seats: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes
Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seats)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14405 X2
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical
- Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-18-7 Date: 050922
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips
TSB 05-18-7
09/22/05
WIRING - SOLDERING AND CRIMPING REPAIRS - SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006
Five Hundred, Ford GT, Freestyle 2006 Fusion 2000-2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2000-2005
Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2001-2005
Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2000-2006
F-650, F-750 2006 Low Cab Forward
LINCOLN: 2000-2006 LS, Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2000-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood
2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2000-2002 Cougar 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2005-2006 Montego
2006 Milan 2000-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 03-11-6 to update the service procedure, vehicle lines and model
years.
ISSUE Wire harness repairs are supported through the availability of individual components such
as:
^ Wire terminals with machine crimped pigtails
^ Hard shell connectors
^ Dual wall heat shrink tubing
^ Complete, loaded, wiring pigtail kits
Some of the available tools and service parts that are helpful when performing wiring harness
repairs are:
^ Motorcraft Wiring Pigtail Catalog (see website for more information)
^ Rotunda Wire Splice Tool kit 164-R5903
^ General Wire Terminal Repair Kit (order through Ford Component Sales)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical
- Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6302
Information on the pigtail and terminal repair kits can also be accessed by technicians via the P15
web site. To access on PTS:
^ Select the year/model of the vehicle on the P15 home page
^ Select the wiring tab
^ Select the link to the pigtail or terminal repair kit at the top right of screen.
Additional service information contained in this TSB detailing wire folding, soldering, and crimping
techniques may be helpful.
ACTION
REPAIR VS REPLACEMENT
The approved procedure is to repair wiring harnesses with pigtail kits, wire terminals, or hard shell
connectors when available. The only exceptions to this procedure are when:
^ The repair cost exceeds the cost to replace the wiring harness
^ There are no component parts released to service the wiring harness
RESTRAINTS RELATED WIRING REPAIRS
If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in a stand-alone harness, do not repair
them; replace the restraints harness unless directed to repair the circuit by a TSB or other Ford
Motor Company publication.
If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in the main vehicle wiring harnesses (14401,
14A005, etc.), they should be repaired using the solder and heat-shrink repair procedure specified
in this TSB. The General Wire Terminal Repair Kit contains gold plated terminated pigtails (with
white insulation) and dual wall heat shrink tubing to perform these repairs. Loaded wiring pigtail kits
with gold plated terminals are also available in the parts catalog.
Disclaimer
Service Tips
Refer to applicable model year wiring diagrams for circuit information.
Twisted Wire Circuits
For "Twisted Wire" circuit repair (Figure 1), the twisting must not be disrupted for more than 2" (51
mm) Twist the repaired wires in the same direction and with the same general twist rate as the
original wiring. Reapply the shielding on shielded circuits.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical
- Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6303
Stagger the repairs to minimize harness diameter and maintain harness length (Figure 2).
Any leads that are not going to be used need to be sealed with dual wall heat shrink and stowed
(Figure 2). Silicone must not be used.
Excess wire from the harness can be folded back on itself to maintain the harness length.
Reapply any convolute and tape that was removed to make the repair.
For 16 AGW and Smaller Diameter Wire
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical
- Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6304
1. Strip 1-1/2" (37.2 mm) of insulation from Wire # 1 and 3/4" (19.5 mm) of insulation from Wire # 2,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands (Figure 3). Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire is pulled
at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during stripping, cut
off the end and re-strip.
2. Install heat shrink tubing at least 1" (26 mm) away from one of the stripped ends being spliced.
Twist wires together. Solder wires together (Figure 4).
NOTE
USE ROSIN CORE MILDLY ACTIVATED (RMS) SOLDER. DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER
FOR WIRE REPAIR.
3. Bend Wire # 1 back in a straight line for sealing (Figure 4). Inspect solder joint bond.
NOTE
WAIT FOR SOLDER TO COOL BEFORE MOVING WIRES.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical
- Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6305
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical
- Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6306
4. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5).
NOTE
OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES.
5. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt
appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the
hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between
the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the
solder point (Figure 5).
For 14 AGW and Larger Diameter Wire (Excluding Restraints Wiring Repairs)
1. Strip 1/4" (6.35 mm) of insulation from pigtail wire end once the wire lengths are sized so repairs
can be staggered. Take care not to nick or cut wire strands. Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire
is pulled at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during
stripping, cut off the end and re-strip.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical
- Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6307
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical
- Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6308
NOTE
THE STRIP LENGTH WILL VARY DEPENDING ON THE BUTT SPLICE AND WIRE IN
HARNESS. LONGER STRIP LENGTHS ARE REQUIRED WHEN THE WIRE NEEDS TO BE
FOLDED TO MATE WITH THE BUTT SPLICE. REFER TO FIGURE 10 CHART FOR STRIP
LENGTHS AND FOLDING TECHNIQUES.
2. Slide heat shrink tubing onto one (1) of the wire ends to be crimped, must be at least 1" (25.4
mm) away from stripped end (Figure 6).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical
- Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6309
3. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber of the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper (or
equivalent) by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice
(Figure 7). Hold the crimping tool so the identified wire sizes are facing you. Squeeze tool handles
together until the ratchet releases, then allow the jaws of the tool to open fully.
4. Center one (1) end of the butt splice on the appropriate crimping chamber. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam of the butt splice toward the indenter (Figure 8).
5. Hold the butt splice in place and squeeze the tool handles together until the ratchet engages
sufficiently to hold the butt splice in position (typically one (1) or two (2) clicks). DO NOT deform the
butt splice.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical
- Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6310
6. Insert stripped wire into the buff splice, making sure the insulation on wire does not enter the butt
splice (Figure 8).
7. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles together until ratchet releases. Allow tool
handles to open, then remove crimped butt splice.
8. To crimp the other half of the splice, reposition the un-crimped wire barrel in the same crimping
chamber, and repeat Steps 3-8. If splice cannot be turned for crimping the other half, turn the tool
around.
9. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. It is acceptable for crimp to be slightly
off center, but not off the end of the buff splice (Figure 9-a).
b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. Wire is flush with or extends slightly beyond end of
buff splice (Figure 9-b).
c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices (Figure 9-c).
10. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5).
NOTE
OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES.
11. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt
appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the
hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between
the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the
solder point (Figure 5).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6316
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6317
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6318
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6319
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6320
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6321
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6322
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6323
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6324
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6325
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6326
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6327
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6328
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6329
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6330
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6331
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6332
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6333
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6334
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6335
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6336
Diagram 501-12-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information >
Diagrams > Central Junction Box
Electrical Accessory Panel: Diagrams Central Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information >
Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6341
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information >
Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6342
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information >
Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6343
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information >
Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6344
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information >
Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6345
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information >
Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6346
Electrical Accessory Panel: Diagrams Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers
Technical Service Bulletin # 02-16-4 Date: 020819
Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers
Article No. 02-16-4
08/19/02
^ FUEL SYSTEM - FUEL PUMP "WHINING"/"BUZZING" NOISE COMES THROUGH
ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO-WAY RADIO SPEAKER
^ RADIO - ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION - "WHINING"/"BUZZING"
NOISE IN SPEAKERS CAUSED BY FUEL PUMP
^ NOISE - "WHINING"/"BUZZING" - COMES THROUGH SPEAKERS OF ENTERTAINMENT OR
TWO-WAY RADIO
FORD: 1990-1994 TEMPO 1990-1997 ESCORT, PROBE, THUNDERBIRD 1990-1998 MUSTANG
1990-1999 TAURUS 1990-2002 CROWN VICTORIA 1997-1999 CONTOUR 2001 TAURUS 1990
BRONCO II 1990-1996 BRONCO 1990-1997 AEROSTAR, F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350
1990-1999 F-250 LD 1990-2002 ECONOLINE, F-150, RANGER 1991-2002 EXPLORER
1995-2002 WINDSTAR 1997-2003 EXPEDITION 1999-2002 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2002
EXCURSION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT 2001-2002 ESCAPE
LINCOLN: 1990-1992 MARK VII 1990-1994 CONTINENTAL 1990-2002 TOWN CAR 1998-2003
NAVIGATOR 2002 BLACKWOOD
MERCURY: 1990-1994 TOPAZ 1990-1997 COUGAR 1990-1999 SABLE 1990-2002 GRAND
MARQUIS 1991-1997 TRACER 1997-1999 MYSTIQUE 2001 SABLE 1993-2002 VILLAGER
1997-2002 MOUNTAINEER
TSB 01-7-3 is being republished in its entirety to update the model year coverage and vehicle line
coverage.
ISSUE
A "whining"/"buzzing" noise in the speakers of the entertainment radio or two-way radio on vehicles
with an in-tank electric fuel pump may be caused by electrical noise from the fuel pump.
ACTION
Install an electronic noise Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Filter (F1PZ-18B925-A) on the fuel
pump inside the fuel tank. Refer to the following Test Procedure to confirm that the concern exists,
then refer to the Service Procedure for repair details.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6355
NOTE
IF THE VEHICLE HAS AN ELECTRONIC RETURNLESS FUEL SYSTEM, DO NOT INSTALL A
RFI FILTER INLINE TO THE FUEL PUMP . ONLY VEHICLES WITH MECHANICAL
RETURNLESS FUEL SYSTEMS (PRESSURE REGULATOR IN THE TANK), OR SYSTEMS
WITH THE PRESSURE REGULATOR ON THE FUEL RAIL SHOULD BE APPROVED FOR THE
RFI FILTER INSTALLATION.
NOTE
SOME LIGHT TRUCKS REQUIRE ONE (1) RFI FILTER FOR EACH IN-TANK ELECTRIC FUEL
PUMP ON MULTI-TANK VEHICLES.
NOTE
THIS TSB DOES NOT INCLUDE TAURUS FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLES (FFVS) OR 1999
RANGER 3.0L FFVS.
TEST PROCEDURE
Fuel pump radio noise is relatively constant and changes only slightly with vehicle speed. If the
frequency of the noise varies or the noise comes and goes with the vehicle speed, then it is not the
fuel pump and this fix will not be effective. The following procedure will help determine if the fuel
pump is the cause of the radio noise:
1. Turn on the radio before the key is turned on (assuming the radio will operate without the ignition
key - you may need to put the ignition key in the Accessory position).
2. Turn the ignition key to the Run position (do not start the engine).
3. The fuel pump should run for about 1 second with the key in the Run position with the engine not
running. Listen for noise in the radio. If noise is present while the pump is running and stops when
the pump stops, then the noise is being generated by the pump and this procedure should help.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
SUPERSEDES: 01-7-3
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
021604AA Diagnose And Install RFI 2.1 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1997 Thunderbird/Cougar
021604BA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1999 And 2001 Taurus/Sable
021604CA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.2 Hrs.
Filter 1992-1997 Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis/Town Car
021604CB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1991 Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis/Town Car
021604CC Diagnose And Install RFI 2.2 Hrs.
Filter 1998-2002 Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis
021604DA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6356
Filter 1998-2002 Town Car
021604EA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.7 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1998 Mustang
021604FA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1998 Mustang
021604GA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1994 Continental
021604HA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1990 Escort
021604IA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr.
Filter 1991-1996 Escort Tracer
021604IB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1997 Escort/Tracer
021604JA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr.
Filter 1997 Contour/Mystique
021604JB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs.
Filter 1998-1999 Contour/Mystique
021604KA Diagnose And Install RFI 2.0 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1992 Mark VII
021604LA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr.
Filter 1990-1992 Probe
021604LB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs.
Filter 1993-1997 Probe
021604MA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1990-2002 Econoline Single Fuel Tank
021604MB Diagnose And Install RFI 2.6 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1991 Econoline Both Fuel Tanks
021604NA Diagnose And Install RFI 2.0 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1996 Bronco
0216040A Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs.
Filter 1991-1994 Explorer
0216040B Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs.
Filter 1995-2002 Explorer
021604PA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs.
Filter 1997-2002 Mountaineer
0216040A Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs.
Filter 1995-2002 Windstar
021604RA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs.
Filter 1993-2002 Villager
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6357
021604SA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.7 Hrs.
Filter 1997-2003 Expedition/Navigator
021604TA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.3 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1997 Ranger Standard Cab
021604TB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1997 Ranger Super Cab
021604TC Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs.
Filter 1998-2002 Ranger 4X4
021604TD Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1998-2002 Ranger 4X2
021604UA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1997 Aerostar
021604VA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs.
Filter 1990 Bronco II
021604WA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1996 F-150/250/350/Super Duty And 1997 F-350/Superduty Rear
021604WB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1996 F-150/250/350/Super Duty And 1997 F-350/Superduty Front
021604WC Diagnose And Install RFI 2.1 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1996 F-150/250/350/Super Duty And 1997 F-350/Superduty Both Tanks
021604WD Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1998-2002 F-150
021604XA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 2000-2002 Excursion
021604XB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1999-2002 Super Duty F-Series: Front Tank
021604XC Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs.
Filter 1999-2002 Super Duty F-Series: Rear Tank
021604XD Diagnose And Install RFI 2.7 Hrs.
Filter 1999-2002 Super Duty F-Series: Both Tanks
021604YA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr.
Filter 2001-2002 Escape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6358
021604ZA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs.
Filter 2002 Blackwood
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18B925 42
OASIS CODES: 205000, 207000, 404000, 702000, 702300
Service Procedure
1. Remove the fuel pump sender assembly from the fuel tank. Refer to the appropriate model year
Workshop Manual for removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6359
2. On vehicles without a fuel delivery module, remove the negative and positive connectors from
the fuel pump, Figure 1.
a. Cut the wires to the fuel pump 76 mm (3") from the flange of the fuel pump and discard the
wires.
b. Connect the RFI filter connectors to the spade terminal on the fuel pump.
c. Cut and solder both the red and black wires of the RFI filter to the red and black wires of the
flange. Use Heat Shrink Tubing (F5AZ-14A099-AA) over the solder connections.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6360
NOTE
HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PER
THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2 ")) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO
ENTIRELY COVER EACH SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO
PREVENT EXPOSURE OF THE CONNECTIONS.
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT
MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE GROUND WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL
TANK. IF THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM
CORROSION SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE
LITERATURE (EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS.
WARNING
ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL
TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR
APPLYING SHRINK TUBING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6361
3. On light trucks and compact trucks with a fuel delivery module, cut the fuel pump wires to the
fuel delivery module 50 mm (2") from the flange and discard the wires, Figure 2.
a. Cut the connectors from the RFI filter and solder wires to the fuel delivery module (red to red and
black to black). Use heat shrink tubing over solder connections.
b. Solder wires from the RFI filter to the flange wires (red to red and black to black). Use heat
shrink tubing over soldered connections.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6362
NOTE
HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PER
THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2 ")) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO
ENTIRELY COVER EACH SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO
PREVENT EXPOSURE OF THE CONNECTIONS.
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT
MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE GROUND WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL
TANK. IF THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM
CORROSION SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE
LITERATURE (EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS.
WARNING
ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL
TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR
APPLYING SHRINK TUBING.
4. Secure the RFI filter to the fuel pump and sender assembly with a Bundling Strap (95873-S101)
to prevent rattling in the tank, Figures 1 and 2.
5. Reinstall the fuel pump sender assembly into the fuel tank.
CAUTION
INSTALL NEW GASKETS WHEN REINSTALLING SENDER TO PREVENT LEAKS. REFER TO
THE PARTS CATALOG FOR PROPER APPLICATIONS.
6. Check the appropriate Electrical and Vacuum Troubleshooting Manual (EVTM) (or other service
literature) for the location of the fuel pump ground. If ground is more than 0.9m (3 ') from the tank,
cut wire and ground fuel pump end within 0.9m (3 ') of the tank to prevent ground wire from acting
as an antenna. Be sure ground is secure and protected from corrosion since it is the operating
ground for the fuel pump.
7. Install the fuel tank in the vehicle as outlined in the appropriate Service or Workshop Manual.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio
System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers
Technical Service Bulletin # 02-16-4 Date: 020819
Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers
Article No. 02-16-4
08/19/02
^ FUEL SYSTEM - FUEL PUMP "WHINING"/"BUZZING" NOISE COMES THROUGH
ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO-WAY RADIO SPEAKER
^ RADIO - ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION - "WHINING"/"BUZZING"
NOISE IN SPEAKERS CAUSED BY FUEL PUMP
^ NOISE - "WHINING"/"BUZZING" - COMES THROUGH SPEAKERS OF ENTERTAINMENT OR
TWO-WAY RADIO
FORD: 1990-1994 TEMPO 1990-1997 ESCORT, PROBE, THUNDERBIRD 1990-1998 MUSTANG
1990-1999 TAURUS 1990-2002 CROWN VICTORIA 1997-1999 CONTOUR 2001 TAURUS 1990
BRONCO II 1990-1996 BRONCO 1990-1997 AEROSTAR, F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350
1990-1999 F-250 LD 1990-2002 ECONOLINE, F-150, RANGER 1991-2002 EXPLORER
1995-2002 WINDSTAR 1997-2003 EXPEDITION 1999-2002 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2002
EXCURSION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT 2001-2002 ESCAPE
LINCOLN: 1990-1992 MARK VII 1990-1994 CONTINENTAL 1990-2002 TOWN CAR 1998-2003
NAVIGATOR 2002 BLACKWOOD
MERCURY: 1990-1994 TOPAZ 1990-1997 COUGAR 1990-1999 SABLE 1990-2002 GRAND
MARQUIS 1991-1997 TRACER 1997-1999 MYSTIQUE 2001 SABLE 1993-2002 VILLAGER
1997-2002 MOUNTAINEER
TSB 01-7-3 is being republished in its entirety to update the model year coverage and vehicle line
coverage.
ISSUE
A "whining"/"buzzing" noise in the speakers of the entertainment radio or two-way radio on vehicles
with an in-tank electric fuel pump may be caused by electrical noise from the fuel pump.
ACTION
Install an electronic noise Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Filter (F1PZ-18B925-A) on the fuel
pump inside the fuel tank. Refer to the following Test Procedure to confirm that the concern exists,
then refer to the Service Procedure for repair details.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio
System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6368
NOTE
IF THE VEHICLE HAS AN ELECTRONIC RETURNLESS FUEL SYSTEM, DO NOT INSTALL A
RFI FILTER INLINE TO THE FUEL PUMP . ONLY VEHICLES WITH MECHANICAL
RETURNLESS FUEL SYSTEMS (PRESSURE REGULATOR IN THE TANK), OR SYSTEMS
WITH THE PRESSURE REGULATOR ON THE FUEL RAIL SHOULD BE APPROVED FOR THE
RFI FILTER INSTALLATION.
NOTE
SOME LIGHT TRUCKS REQUIRE ONE (1) RFI FILTER FOR EACH IN-TANK ELECTRIC FUEL
PUMP ON MULTI-TANK VEHICLES.
NOTE
THIS TSB DOES NOT INCLUDE TAURUS FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLES (FFVS) OR 1999
RANGER 3.0L FFVS.
TEST PROCEDURE
Fuel pump radio noise is relatively constant and changes only slightly with vehicle speed. If the
frequency of the noise varies or the noise comes and goes with the vehicle speed, then it is not the
fuel pump and this fix will not be effective. The following procedure will help determine if the fuel
pump is the cause of the radio noise:
1. Turn on the radio before the key is turned on (assuming the radio will operate without the ignition
key - you may need to put the ignition key in the Accessory position).
2. Turn the ignition key to the Run position (do not start the engine).
3. The fuel pump should run for about 1 second with the key in the Run position with the engine not
running. Listen for noise in the radio. If noise is present while the pump is running and stops when
the pump stops, then the noise is being generated by the pump and this procedure should help.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
SUPERSEDES: 01-7-3
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
021604AA Diagnose And Install RFI 2.1 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1997 Thunderbird/Cougar
021604BA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1999 And 2001 Taurus/Sable
021604CA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.2 Hrs.
Filter 1992-1997 Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis/Town Car
021604CB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1991 Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis/Town Car
021604CC Diagnose And Install RFI 2.2 Hrs.
Filter 1998-2002 Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis
021604DA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio
System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6369
Filter 1998-2002 Town Car
021604EA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.7 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1998 Mustang
021604FA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1998 Mustang
021604GA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1994 Continental
021604HA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1990 Escort
021604IA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr.
Filter 1991-1996 Escort Tracer
021604IB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1997 Escort/Tracer
021604JA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr.
Filter 1997 Contour/Mystique
021604JB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs.
Filter 1998-1999 Contour/Mystique
021604KA Diagnose And Install RFI 2.0 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1992 Mark VII
021604LA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr.
Filter 1990-1992 Probe
021604LB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs.
Filter 1993-1997 Probe
021604MA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1990-2002 Econoline Single Fuel Tank
021604MB Diagnose And Install RFI 2.6 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1991 Econoline Both Fuel Tanks
021604NA Diagnose And Install RFI 2.0 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1996 Bronco
0216040A Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs.
Filter 1991-1994 Explorer
0216040B Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs.
Filter 1995-2002 Explorer
021604PA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs.
Filter 1997-2002 Mountaineer
0216040A Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs.
Filter 1995-2002 Windstar
021604RA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs.
Filter 1993-2002 Villager
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio
System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6370
021604SA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.7 Hrs.
Filter 1997-2003 Expedition/Navigator
021604TA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.3 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1997 Ranger Standard Cab
021604TB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1997 Ranger Super Cab
021604TC Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs.
Filter 1998-2002 Ranger 4X4
021604TD Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1998-2002 Ranger 4X2
021604UA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1997 Aerostar
021604VA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs.
Filter 1990 Bronco II
021604WA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1996 F-150/250/350/Super Duty And 1997 F-350/Superduty Rear
021604WB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1996 F-150/250/350/Super Duty And 1997 F-350/Superduty Front
021604WC Diagnose And Install RFI 2.1 Hrs.
Filter 1990-1996 F-150/250/350/Super Duty And 1997 F-350/Superduty Both Tanks
021604WD Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1998-2002 F-150
021604XA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 2000-2002 Excursion
021604XB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs.
Filter 1999-2002 Super Duty F-Series: Front Tank
021604XC Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs.
Filter 1999-2002 Super Duty F-Series: Rear Tank
021604XD Diagnose And Install RFI 2.7 Hrs.
Filter 1999-2002 Super Duty F-Series: Both Tanks
021604YA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr.
Filter 2001-2002 Escape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio
System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6371
021604ZA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs.
Filter 2002 Blackwood
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18B925 42
OASIS CODES: 205000, 207000, 404000, 702000, 702300
Service Procedure
1. Remove the fuel pump sender assembly from the fuel tank. Refer to the appropriate model year
Workshop Manual for removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio
System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6372
2. On vehicles without a fuel delivery module, remove the negative and positive connectors from
the fuel pump, Figure 1.
a. Cut the wires to the fuel pump 76 mm (3") from the flange of the fuel pump and discard the
wires.
b. Connect the RFI filter connectors to the spade terminal on the fuel pump.
c. Cut and solder both the red and black wires of the RFI filter to the red and black wires of the
flange. Use Heat Shrink Tubing (F5AZ-14A099-AA) over the solder connections.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio
System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6373
NOTE
HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PER
THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2 ")) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO
ENTIRELY COVER EACH SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO
PREVENT EXPOSURE OF THE CONNECTIONS.
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT
MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE GROUND WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL
TANK. IF THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM
CORROSION SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE
LITERATURE (EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS.
WARNING
ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL
TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR
APPLYING SHRINK TUBING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio
System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6374
3. On light trucks and compact trucks with a fuel delivery module, cut the fuel pump wires to the
fuel delivery module 50 mm (2") from the flange and discard the wires, Figure 2.
a. Cut the connectors from the RFI filter and solder wires to the fuel delivery module (red to red and
black to black). Use heat shrink tubing over solder connections.
b. Solder wires from the RFI filter to the flange wires (red to red and black to black). Use heat
shrink tubing over soldered connections.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio
System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6375
NOTE
HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PER
THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2 ")) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO
ENTIRELY COVER EACH SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO
PREVENT EXPOSURE OF THE CONNECTIONS.
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT
MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE GROUND WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL
TANK. IF THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM
CORROSION SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE
LITERATURE (EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS.
WARNING
ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL
TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR
APPLYING SHRINK TUBING.
4. Secure the RFI filter to the fuel pump and sender assembly with a Bundling Strap (95873-S101)
to prevent rattling in the tank, Figures 1 and 2.
5. Reinstall the fuel pump sender assembly into the fuel tank.
CAUTION
INSTALL NEW GASKETS WHEN REINSTALLING SENDER TO PREVENT LEAKS. REFER TO
THE PARTS CATALOG FOR PROPER APPLICATIONS.
6. Check the appropriate Electrical and Vacuum Troubleshooting Manual (EVTM) (or other service
literature) for the location of the fuel pump ground. If ground is more than 0.9m (3 ') from the tank,
cut wire and ground fuel pump end within 0.9m (3 ') of the tank to prevent ground wire from acting
as an antenna. Be sure ground is secure and protected from corrosion since it is the operating
ground for the fuel pump.
7. Install the fuel tank in the vehicle as outlined in the appropriate Service or Workshop Manual.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction
Box
Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction
Box > Page 6380
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction
Box > Page 6381
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction
Box > Page 6382
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction
Box > Page 6383
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction
Box > Page 6384
Fuse: Locations Central Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction
Box > Page 6385
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction
Box > Page 6386
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction
Box > Page 6387
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction
Box > Page 6388
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Fuse: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6391
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6392
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6393
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6394
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6395
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6396
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6397
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6398
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6399
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6400
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6401
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6402
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6403
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6404
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6405
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6406
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6407
Fuse: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6408
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6409
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery
Junction Box
Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery
Junction Box > Page 6412
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery
Junction Box > Page 6413
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery
Junction Box > Page 6414
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery
Junction Box > Page 6415
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery
Junction Box > Page 6416
Fuse: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery
Junction Box > Page 6417
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery
Junction Box > Page 6418
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery
Junction Box > Page 6419
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery
Junction Box > Page 6420
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box
Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box > Page 6425
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box > Page 6426
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box > Page 6427
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box > Page 6428
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box > Page 6429
Fuse Block: Locations Central Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box > Page 6430
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box > Page 6431
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box > Page 6432
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box > Page 6433
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6436
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6437
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6438
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6439
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6440
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6441
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6442
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6443
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6444
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6445
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6446
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6447
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6448
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6449
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6450
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6451
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6452
Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6453
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6454
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6455
Fuse Block: Connector Views
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6456
Diagram 700-01-00-3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6457
Diagram 700-01-00-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box
Fuse Block: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box > Page 6460
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box > Page 6461
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box > Page 6462
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box > Page 6463
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box > Page 6464
Fuse Block: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box > Page 6465
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box > Page 6466
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box > Page 6467
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box > Page 6468
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection
Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Page 6472
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure
voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the
relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is
12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Page 6476
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit.
No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set
Multiple Junction Connector: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's
Set
TSB 06-9-3
05/15/06
PCM FAILURE - ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES INTERMITTENT - INOPERATIVE
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a powertrain control module (PCM) concern that results in no
crank, no start, or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) present. There may also be intermittent or inoperative power windows, door locks, keyless
entry system, lighting, speed control, radio, instrument cluster warning lamps (possibly dimly
illuminated instead of being off), or other electrical accessories. The concern is typically more
noticeable in wet and/or cold weather conditions.
This may be the result of connector terminal corrosion in C134, C263, or the central junction box
(CJB) which results in either high resistance between the male and female terminals or a short
between two or more circuits due to bridging through any corrosion that may be present. Corrosion
in C134 may be the result of improper positioning/sealing of C134. Corrosion in C263 or the CJB
may be due to a water leak in the left hand A-Pillar area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to inspect and repair the connector terminals for evidence
of corrosion. Repair any sources of water entry. If no signs of corrosion or water entry are found,
follow normal diagnostics.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
WHEN DIAGNOSING THE CAUSE OF A PCM FAILURE IT IS CRITICAL THAT THIS
INSPECTION AND REPAIR PROCEDURE BE COMPLETED IN ITS ENTIRETY BEFORE
INSTALLING A REPLACEMENT SERVICE PART.
THE POSSIBILITY EXISTS FOR A 12 VOLT
SHORT TO THE 5 VOLT VREF (CIRCUIT). INSTALLATION OF A SERVICE REPLACEMENT
PCM WITHOUT ELIMINATING THE 12 VOLT SHORT WILL RESULT IN REPEAT PCM FAILURE.
Inspect and repair the following connectors:
C134
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit.
No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6485
1. Open the hood and locate C134 (Figure 1).
2. Disconnect the connector halves and thoroughly inspect the terminals. Clean any corrosion that
may be present and replace any damaged terminals.
3. Use shop air to blow out any moisture that may be present in the terminals, then apply dielectric
grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector.
4. Reconnect the connector halves and close the hood.
C263
1. Open the drivers door and remove the lower kick panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit.
No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6486
2. Locate C263 as shown in Figure 2.
3. Disconnect the connector halves.
4. Pry out the terminal retainer as shown in Figure 3 and thoroughly inspect the terminals.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit.
No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6487
NOTE
THE CORROSION WILL NOT BE VISIBLE UNLESS THE TERMINAL RETAINER IS REMOVED.
5. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals.
6. Work dielectric grease into the side opening in the connector, then reinstall the terminal retainer.
7. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector.
8. Reconnect the connector halves.
CJB (Central Junction Box)
1. Locate the CJB (Figure 2).
2. Disconnect the four harness connectors from the front and the two connectors from the rear of
the CJB, and remove the CJB.
3. Inspect the terminals and also the back side of the CJB or evidence of water damage or
corrosion.
4. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals or components.
5. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in the harness connectors.
6. Reconnect the six harness connectors and reinstall the CJB.
7. Reinstall the lower kick panel.
NOTE
IF ANY CORROSION WAS FOUND IN EITHER C263 OR THE CJB, THE SOURCE OF THE
WATER ENTRY MUST BE IDENTIFIED TO PREVENT A REPEAT REPAIR.
Follow standard water testing procedures to identify the source of any leaks.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit.
No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6488
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit.
No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6489
Figures 4 through 8 identify some common sources of water leaks.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT060903 Claim Labor As Actual Actual
Time Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14A187 68
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 >
Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set
Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL
ON/DTC's Set
TSB 06-9-3
05/15/06
PCM FAILURE - ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES INTERMITTENT - INOPERATIVE
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a powertrain control module (PCM) concern that results in no
crank, no start, or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) present. There may also be intermittent or inoperative power windows, door locks, keyless
entry system, lighting, speed control, radio, instrument cluster warning lamps (possibly dimly
illuminated instead of being off), or other electrical accessories. The concern is typically more
noticeable in wet and/or cold weather conditions.
This may be the result of connector terminal corrosion in C134, C263, or the central junction box
(CJB) which results in either high resistance between the male and female terminals or a short
between two or more circuits due to bridging through any corrosion that may be present. Corrosion
in C134 may be the result of improper positioning/sealing of C134. Corrosion in C263 or the CJB
may be due to a water leak in the left hand A-Pillar area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to inspect and repair the connector terminals for evidence
of corrosion. Repair any sources of water entry. If no signs of corrosion or water entry are found,
follow normal diagnostics.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
WHEN DIAGNOSING THE CAUSE OF A PCM FAILURE IT IS CRITICAL THAT THIS
INSPECTION AND REPAIR PROCEDURE BE COMPLETED IN ITS ENTIRETY BEFORE
INSTALLING A REPLACEMENT SERVICE PART.
THE POSSIBILITY EXISTS FOR A 12 VOLT
SHORT TO THE 5 VOLT VREF (CIRCUIT). INSTALLATION OF A SERVICE REPLACEMENT
PCM WITHOUT ELIMINATING THE 12 VOLT SHORT WILL RESULT IN REPEAT PCM FAILURE.
Inspect and repair the following connectors:
C134
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 >
Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6495
1. Open the hood and locate C134 (Figure 1).
2. Disconnect the connector halves and thoroughly inspect the terminals. Clean any corrosion that
may be present and replace any damaged terminals.
3. Use shop air to blow out any moisture that may be present in the terminals, then apply dielectric
grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector.
4. Reconnect the connector halves and close the hood.
C263
1. Open the drivers door and remove the lower kick panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 >
Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6496
2. Locate C263 as shown in Figure 2.
3. Disconnect the connector halves.
4. Pry out the terminal retainer as shown in Figure 3 and thoroughly inspect the terminals.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 >
Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6497
NOTE
THE CORROSION WILL NOT BE VISIBLE UNLESS THE TERMINAL RETAINER IS REMOVED.
5. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals.
6. Work dielectric grease into the side opening in the connector, then reinstall the terminal retainer.
7. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector.
8. Reconnect the connector halves.
CJB (Central Junction Box)
1. Locate the CJB (Figure 2).
2. Disconnect the four harness connectors from the front and the two connectors from the rear of
the CJB, and remove the CJB.
3. Inspect the terminals and also the back side of the CJB or evidence of water damage or
corrosion.
4. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals or components.
5. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in the harness connectors.
6. Reconnect the six harness connectors and reinstall the CJB.
7. Reinstall the lower kick panel.
NOTE
IF ANY CORROSION WAS FOUND IN EITHER C263 OR THE CJB, THE SOURCE OF THE
WATER ENTRY MUST BE IDENTIFIED TO PREVENT A REPEAT REPAIR.
Follow standard water testing procedures to identify the source of any leaks.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 >
Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6498
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 >
Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6499
Figures 4 through 8 identify some common sources of water leaks.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT060903 Claim Labor As Actual Actual
Time Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14A187 68
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 6502
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 6503
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 6504
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 6505
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 6506
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 6507
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 6508
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 6509
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 6510
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 6511
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 6512
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 6513
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 6514
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 6515
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro
ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro
ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6520
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure
voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the
relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is
12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini
ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini
ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6524
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6529
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6530
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6531
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6532
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6533
Relay Box: Locations Central Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6534
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6535
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6536
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6537
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box
Relay Box: Diagrams Central Junction Box
Diagram 700-01-00-3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6540
Diagram 700-01-00-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6541
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6544
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6545
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6546
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6547
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6548
Relay Box: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6549
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6550
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6551
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6552
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box > Page 6557
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box > Page 6558
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box > Page 6559
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box > Page 6560
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box > Page 6561
Relay Box: Locations Central Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box > Page 6562
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box > Page 6563
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box > Page 6564
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box > Page 6565
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central
Junction Box
Relay Box: Diagrams Central Junction Box
Diagram 700-01-00-3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central
Junction Box > Page 6568
Diagram 700-01-00-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central
Junction Box > Page 6569
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box > Page 6572
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box > Page 6573
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box > Page 6574
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box > Page 6575
Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box > Page 6576
Relay Box: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box > Page 6577
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box > Page 6578
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box > Page 6579
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box > Page 6580
Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-26-12 > Dec > 04 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998 Set
Wiring Harness: Customer Interest SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998 Set
TSB 04-26-12
12/31/04
SIDE AIR BAG DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1994 OR B1998
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit the air bag warning lamp illuminating
intermiffently with DTC B1994 (driver side, side mount air bag circuit open) or B1998 (passenger
side, side mount air bag circuit open). This condition may be caused by a variation in the electrical
continuity at connector C337 (passenger side) or C367 (driver side) at the body harness wire
terminal crimp.
ACTION Install a replacement body harness pigtail connector in the affected circuit. Refer to the
instruction sheet included in the connector repair kit.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042612A 2001-2004 Escape One 1.2 Hrs.
Seat: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes
Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seat)
042612B 2001-2004 Escape Both 1.8 Hrs.
Seats: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes
Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seats)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14405 X2
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-18-7 Date: 050922
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips
TSB 05-18-7
09/22/05
WIRING - SOLDERING AND CRIMPING REPAIRS - SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006
Five Hundred, Ford GT, Freestyle 2006 Fusion 2000-2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2000-2005
Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2001-2005
Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2000-2006
F-650, F-750 2006 Low Cab Forward
LINCOLN: 2000-2006 LS, Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2000-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood
2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2000-2002 Cougar 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2005-2006 Montego
2006 Milan 2000-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 03-11-6 to update the service procedure, vehicle lines and model
years.
ISSUE Wire harness repairs are supported through the availability of individual components such
as:
^ Wire terminals with machine crimped pigtails
^ Hard shell connectors
^ Dual wall heat shrink tubing
^ Complete, loaded, wiring pigtail kits
Some of the available tools and service parts that are helpful when performing wiring harness
repairs are:
^ Motorcraft Wiring Pigtail Catalog (see website for more information)
^ Rotunda Wire Splice Tool kit 164-R5903
^ General Wire Terminal Repair Kit (order through Ford Component Sales)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 6594
Information on the pigtail and terminal repair kits can also be accessed by technicians via the P15
web site. To access on PTS:
^ Select the year/model of the vehicle on the P15 home page
^ Select the wiring tab
^ Select the link to the pigtail or terminal repair kit at the top right of screen.
Additional service information contained in this TSB detailing wire folding, soldering, and crimping
techniques may be helpful.
ACTION
REPAIR VS REPLACEMENT
The approved procedure is to repair wiring harnesses with pigtail kits, wire terminals, or hard shell
connectors when available. The only exceptions to this procedure are when:
^ The repair cost exceeds the cost to replace the wiring harness
^ There are no component parts released to service the wiring harness
RESTRAINTS RELATED WIRING REPAIRS
If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in a stand-alone harness, do not repair
them; replace the restraints harness unless directed to repair the circuit by a TSB or other Ford
Motor Company publication.
If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in the main vehicle wiring harnesses (14401,
14A005, etc.), they should be repaired using the solder and heat-shrink repair procedure specified
in this TSB. The General Wire Terminal Repair Kit contains gold plated terminated pigtails (with
white insulation) and dual wall heat shrink tubing to perform these repairs. Loaded wiring pigtail kits
with gold plated terminals are also available in the parts catalog.
Disclaimer
Service Tips
Refer to applicable model year wiring diagrams for circuit information.
Twisted Wire Circuits
For "Twisted Wire" circuit repair (Figure 1), the twisting must not be disrupted for more than 2" (51
mm) Twist the repaired wires in the same direction and with the same general twist rate as the
original wiring. Reapply the shielding on shielded circuits.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 6595
Stagger the repairs to minimize harness diameter and maintain harness length (Figure 2).
Any leads that are not going to be used need to be sealed with dual wall heat shrink and stowed
(Figure 2). Silicone must not be used.
Excess wire from the harness can be folded back on itself to maintain the harness length.
Reapply any convolute and tape that was removed to make the repair.
For 16 AGW and Smaller Diameter Wire
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 6596
1. Strip 1-1/2" (37.2 mm) of insulation from Wire # 1 and 3/4" (19.5 mm) of insulation from Wire # 2,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands (Figure 3). Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire is pulled
at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during stripping, cut
off the end and re-strip.
2. Install heat shrink tubing at least 1" (26 mm) away from one of the stripped ends being spliced.
Twist wires together. Solder wires together (Figure 4).
NOTE
USE ROSIN CORE MILDLY ACTIVATED (RMS) SOLDER. DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER
FOR WIRE REPAIR.
3. Bend Wire # 1 back in a straight line for sealing (Figure 4). Inspect solder joint bond.
NOTE
WAIT FOR SOLDER TO COOL BEFORE MOVING WIRES.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 6597
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 6598
4. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5).
NOTE
OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES.
5. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt
appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the
hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between
the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the
solder point (Figure 5).
For 14 AGW and Larger Diameter Wire (Excluding Restraints Wiring Repairs)
1. Strip 1/4" (6.35 mm) of insulation from pigtail wire end once the wire lengths are sized so repairs
can be staggered. Take care not to nick or cut wire strands. Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire
is pulled at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during
stripping, cut off the end and re-strip.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 6599
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 6600
NOTE
THE STRIP LENGTH WILL VARY DEPENDING ON THE BUTT SPLICE AND WIRE IN
HARNESS. LONGER STRIP LENGTHS ARE REQUIRED WHEN THE WIRE NEEDS TO BE
FOLDED TO MATE WITH THE BUTT SPLICE. REFER TO FIGURE 10 CHART FOR STRIP
LENGTHS AND FOLDING TECHNIQUES.
2. Slide heat shrink tubing onto one (1) of the wire ends to be crimped, must be at least 1" (25.4
mm) away from stripped end (Figure 6).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 6601
3. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber of the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper (or
equivalent) by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice
(Figure 7). Hold the crimping tool so the identified wire sizes are facing you. Squeeze tool handles
together until the ratchet releases, then allow the jaws of the tool to open fully.
4. Center one (1) end of the butt splice on the appropriate crimping chamber. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam of the butt splice toward the indenter (Figure 8).
5. Hold the butt splice in place and squeeze the tool handles together until the ratchet engages
sufficiently to hold the butt splice in position (typically one (1) or two (2) clicks). DO NOT deform the
butt splice.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 6602
6. Insert stripped wire into the buff splice, making sure the insulation on wire does not enter the butt
splice (Figure 8).
7. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles together until ratchet releases. Allow tool
handles to open, then remove crimped butt splice.
8. To crimp the other half of the splice, reposition the un-crimped wire barrel in the same crimping
chamber, and repeat Steps 3-8. If splice cannot be turned for crimping the other half, turn the tool
around.
9. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. It is acceptable for crimp to be slightly
off center, but not off the end of the buff splice (Figure 9-a).
b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. Wire is flush with or extends slightly beyond end of
buff splice (Figure 9-b).
c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices (Figure 9-c).
10. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5).
NOTE
OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES.
11. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt
appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the
hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between
the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the
solder point (Figure 5).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 04-26-12 > Dec > 04 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's
B1994 or B1998 Set
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998
Set
TSB 04-26-12
12/31/04
SIDE AIR BAG DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1994 OR B1998
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit the air bag warning lamp illuminating
intermiffently with DTC B1994 (driver side, side mount air bag circuit open) or B1998 (passenger
side, side mount air bag circuit open). This condition may be caused by a variation in the electrical
continuity at connector C337 (passenger side) or C367 (driver side) at the body harness wire
terminal crimp.
ACTION Install a replacement body harness pigtail connector in the affected circuit. Refer to the
instruction sheet included in the connector repair kit.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042612A 2001-2004 Escape One 1.2 Hrs.
Seat: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes
Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seat)
042612B 2001-2004 Escape Both 1.8 Hrs.
Seats: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes
Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seats)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14405 X2
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-18-7 Date: 050922
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips
TSB 05-18-7
09/22/05
WIRING - SOLDERING AND CRIMPING REPAIRS - SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006
Five Hundred, Ford GT, Freestyle 2006 Fusion 2000-2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2000-2005
Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2001-2005
Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2000-2006
F-650, F-750 2006 Low Cab Forward
LINCOLN: 2000-2006 LS, Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2000-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood
2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2000-2002 Cougar 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2005-2006 Montego
2006 Milan 2000-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 03-11-6 to update the service procedure, vehicle lines and model
years.
ISSUE Wire harness repairs are supported through the availability of individual components such
as:
^ Wire terminals with machine crimped pigtails
^ Hard shell connectors
^ Dual wall heat shrink tubing
^ Complete, loaded, wiring pigtail kits
Some of the available tools and service parts that are helpful when performing wiring harness
repairs are:
^ Motorcraft Wiring Pigtail Catalog (see website for more information)
^ Rotunda Wire Splice Tool kit 164-R5903
^ General Wire Terminal Repair Kit (order through Ford Component Sales)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 6612
Information on the pigtail and terminal repair kits can also be accessed by technicians via the P15
web site. To access on PTS:
^ Select the year/model of the vehicle on the P15 home page
^ Select the wiring tab
^ Select the link to the pigtail or terminal repair kit at the top right of screen.
Additional service information contained in this TSB detailing wire folding, soldering, and crimping
techniques may be helpful.
ACTION
REPAIR VS REPLACEMENT
The approved procedure is to repair wiring harnesses with pigtail kits, wire terminals, or hard shell
connectors when available. The only exceptions to this procedure are when:
^ The repair cost exceeds the cost to replace the wiring harness
^ There are no component parts released to service the wiring harness
RESTRAINTS RELATED WIRING REPAIRS
If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in a stand-alone harness, do not repair
them; replace the restraints harness unless directed to repair the circuit by a TSB or other Ford
Motor Company publication.
If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in the main vehicle wiring harnesses (14401,
14A005, etc.), they should be repaired using the solder and heat-shrink repair procedure specified
in this TSB. The General Wire Terminal Repair Kit contains gold plated terminated pigtails (with
white insulation) and dual wall heat shrink tubing to perform these repairs. Loaded wiring pigtail kits
with gold plated terminals are also available in the parts catalog.
Disclaimer
Service Tips
Refer to applicable model year wiring diagrams for circuit information.
Twisted Wire Circuits
For "Twisted Wire" circuit repair (Figure 1), the twisting must not be disrupted for more than 2" (51
mm) Twist the repaired wires in the same direction and with the same general twist rate as the
original wiring. Reapply the shielding on shielded circuits.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 6613
Stagger the repairs to minimize harness diameter and maintain harness length (Figure 2).
Any leads that are not going to be used need to be sealed with dual wall heat shrink and stowed
(Figure 2). Silicone must not be used.
Excess wire from the harness can be folded back on itself to maintain the harness length.
Reapply any convolute and tape that was removed to make the repair.
For 16 AGW and Smaller Diameter Wire
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 6614
1. Strip 1-1/2" (37.2 mm) of insulation from Wire # 1 and 3/4" (19.5 mm) of insulation from Wire # 2,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands (Figure 3). Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire is pulled
at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during stripping, cut
off the end and re-strip.
2. Install heat shrink tubing at least 1" (26 mm) away from one of the stripped ends being spliced.
Twist wires together. Solder wires together (Figure 4).
NOTE
USE ROSIN CORE MILDLY ACTIVATED (RMS) SOLDER. DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER
FOR WIRE REPAIR.
3. Bend Wire # 1 back in a straight line for sealing (Figure 4). Inspect solder joint bond.
NOTE
WAIT FOR SOLDER TO COOL BEFORE MOVING WIRES.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 6615
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 6616
4. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5).
NOTE
OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES.
5. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt
appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the
hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between
the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the
solder point (Figure 5).
For 14 AGW and Larger Diameter Wire (Excluding Restraints Wiring Repairs)
1. Strip 1/4" (6.35 mm) of insulation from pigtail wire end once the wire lengths are sized so repairs
can be staggered. Take care not to nick or cut wire strands. Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire
is pulled at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during
stripping, cut off the end and re-strip.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 6617
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 6618
NOTE
THE STRIP LENGTH WILL VARY DEPENDING ON THE BUTT SPLICE AND WIRE IN
HARNESS. LONGER STRIP LENGTHS ARE REQUIRED WHEN THE WIRE NEEDS TO BE
FOLDED TO MATE WITH THE BUTT SPLICE. REFER TO FIGURE 10 CHART FOR STRIP
LENGTHS AND FOLDING TECHNIQUES.
2. Slide heat shrink tubing onto one (1) of the wire ends to be crimped, must be at least 1" (25.4
mm) away from stripped end (Figure 6).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 6619
3. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber of the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper (or
equivalent) by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice
(Figure 7). Hold the crimping tool so the identified wire sizes are facing you. Squeeze tool handles
together until the ratchet releases, then allow the jaws of the tool to open fully.
4. Center one (1) end of the butt splice on the appropriate crimping chamber. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam of the butt splice toward the indenter (Figure 8).
5. Hold the butt splice in place and squeeze the tool handles together until the ratchet engages
sufficiently to hold the butt splice in position (typically one (1) or two (2) clicks). DO NOT deform the
butt splice.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 6620
6. Insert stripped wire into the buff splice, making sure the insulation on wire does not enter the butt
splice (Figure 8).
7. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles together until ratchet releases. Allow tool
handles to open, then remove crimped butt splice.
8. To crimp the other half of the splice, reposition the un-crimped wire barrel in the same crimping
chamber, and repeat Steps 3-8. If splice cannot be turned for crimping the other half, turn the tool
around.
9. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. It is acceptable for crimp to be slightly
off center, but not off the end of the buff splice (Figure 9-a).
b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. Wire is flush with or extends slightly beyond end of
buff splice (Figure 9-b).
c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices (Figure 9-c).
10. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5).
NOTE
OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES.
11. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt
appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the
hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between
the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the
solder point (Figure 5).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By
Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
Alignment: By Symptom Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
TSB 04-21-4
11/01/04
STEERING DRIFT/PULL - IMPROVED DIAGNOSTIC AND REPAIR PROCEDURE - SERVICE
TIP
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull to either the right or left. This condition may occur
even if the alignment settings are within specifications.
ACTION The following procedure is designed to supplement the Workshop Manual. It contains a
more detailed description of the camber/caster adjustment, updated diagnostics to help determine
cause and an updated camber adjustment procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By
Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 6630
1. Refer to the Drift/Pull diagnostic flow chart (Figure 1).
2. Use procedures in TSB when adjusting alignment if directed by the diagnostic flow chart.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By
Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 6631
3. Complete worksheet as needed (Figure 5).
GENERAL FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER STRUT MOUNT ADJUSTMENT INFORMATION:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By
Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 6632
Adjustment of camber and caster can be made by rotating the upper strut mount into one (1) of four
(4) positions. The orientation of the strut rod relative to the center of the hole for the mount
determines the alignment change. The strut rod is offset 180 degrees from the paint mark on the
strut bushing. Moving the strut rod inboard or outboard changes camber and moving the strut rod
forward or rearward changes caster. Regardless of the start setting, a 90 degree rotation will only
change one of the settings (caster or camber), and a 180 degree rotation will change both settings
(caster and camber).
ADDITIONAL FRONT CAMBER ADJUSTMENT:
The clearance between the bolts and the holes in the knuckle to strut joint allows front camber
adjustment beyond what the strut mount orientation provides. This additional adjustment can be
used on either of the front wheels to increase or decrease a camber split.
Rotating the upper strut mount is the primary and preferred method to adjust front camber. If
rotating the upper strut mount does not provide enough camber adjustment, perform the following
steps to achieve an approximate camber change of up to +/- 0.24 degrees per side:
1. Lift the vehicle up off its tires.
2. Replace the old strut to knuckle fasteners (bolts and nuts) with new fasteners, but do not torque
the new fasteners.
3. Move the top of the tire inboard or outboard to adjust camber (Figure 4).
a. If more negative camber is desired, push the top of the tire inboard.
b. If less negative camber is desired, pull the top of the tire outboard.
4. With the tire at the desired position, torque the new fasteners to 85 lb-ft (115 N.m).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By
Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 6633
5. Lower the vehicle back down.
6. Place vehicle on alignment rack and measure the alignment to confirm the desired camber
change was achieved.
NOTE
DO NOT ADJUST THE ALIGNMENT SETTINGS (INDIVIDUAL CAMBER) BEYOND THE
RELEASED SPECIFICATIONS.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
FRONT W6
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
TSB 04-21-4
11/01/04
STEERING DRIFT/PULL - IMPROVED DIAGNOSTIC AND REPAIR PROCEDURE - SERVICE
TIP
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull to either the right or left. This condition may occur
even if the alignment settings are within specifications.
ACTION The following procedure is designed to supplement the Workshop Manual. It contains a
more detailed description of the camber/caster adjustment, updated diagnostics to help determine
cause and an updated camber adjustment procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 6639
1. Refer to the Drift/Pull diagnostic flow chart (Figure 1).
2. Use procedures in TSB when adjusting alignment if directed by the diagnostic flow chart.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 6640
3. Complete worksheet as needed (Figure 5).
GENERAL FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER STRUT MOUNT ADJUSTMENT INFORMATION:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 6641
Adjustment of camber and caster can be made by rotating the upper strut mount into one (1) of four
(4) positions. The orientation of the strut rod relative to the center of the hole for the mount
determines the alignment change. The strut rod is offset 180 degrees from the paint mark on the
strut bushing. Moving the strut rod inboard or outboard changes camber and moving the strut rod
forward or rearward changes caster. Regardless of the start setting, a 90 degree rotation will only
change one of the settings (caster or camber), and a 180 degree rotation will change both settings
(caster and camber).
ADDITIONAL FRONT CAMBER ADJUSTMENT:
The clearance between the bolts and the holes in the knuckle to strut joint allows front camber
adjustment beyond what the strut mount orientation provides. This additional adjustment can be
used on either of the front wheels to increase or decrease a camber split.
Rotating the upper strut mount is the primary and preferred method to adjust front camber. If
rotating the upper strut mount does not provide enough camber adjustment, perform the following
steps to achieve an approximate camber change of up to +/- 0.24 degrees per side:
1. Lift the vehicle up off its tires.
2. Replace the old strut to knuckle fasteners (bolts and nuts) with new fasteners, but do not torque
the new fasteners.
3. Move the top of the tire inboard or outboard to adjust camber (Figure 4).
a. If more negative camber is desired, push the top of the tire inboard.
b. If less negative camber is desired, pull the top of the tire outboard.
4. With the tire at the desired position, torque the new fasteners to 85 lb-ft (115 N.m).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 6642
5. Lower the vehicle back down.
6. Place vehicle on alignment rack and measure the alignment to confirm the desired camber
change was achieved.
NOTE
DO NOT ADJUST THE ALIGNMENT SETTINGS (INDIVIDUAL CAMBER) BEYOND THE
RELEASED SPECIFICATIONS.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
FRONT W6
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Page 6643
Alignment: Specifications
Front Alignment Specifications Camber -0.84 deg
Caster 1.93 deg
Toe 3 +/- 3 mm
Steering Axis Inclination 11.4 deg
Steering Axis Offset 4.16 mm
(tire size P215/70R16) -1.6 mm (-0.06 inch) (tire size
P225/70R15)1.41 mm (0.05 inch) (tire size P235/70R16)
Ride height 476.6 +/- 20 mm
Rear Alignment Specifications Camber 0.04 deg
Toe 2.4 +/- 2.8 mm
Ride height 491 +/- 20 mm
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Page 6644
Alignment: Description and Operation
Camber
Camber is the inward or outward tilting of the wheels at the top. When the wheel tilts out at the top,
then the camber is positive (+). When the wheel tilts in at the top, then the camber is negative (-).
Caster Caster is the tilting of the steering axis either forward or backward from vertical.
A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a
separate procedure on this vehicle. Front caster should fall within specification when the front
camber is adjusted.
Toe Toe is a measurement of how much the front of the wheels are turned in or out from the
straight-ahead position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Page 6645
When the wheels are turned in toward the front of the vehicle, toe is positive (+) (toe in). When the
wheels are turned out toward the front of the vehicle, toe is negative (-) (toe out). Toe is measured
in degrees, from side to side, and totaled.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment
Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster Adjustment
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the front shock absorber upper mounting bracket nuts.
3. Push the front shock absorber upper mounting bracket downward and turn it to the desired
position to set camber and caster. Both camber and
caster for front suspension are adjustable within a maximum of 30 degree angle.
4. Tighten the front shock absorber upper mounting bracket nuts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 6648
Alignment: Service and Repair Lean Correction
NOTE: When installing a new coil spring, install a new one with the same part number and the
same spring code. Refer to the Vehicle Certification (VC) Label on the driver side door.
1. Measure the distance from the wheelhouse opening to the center of the wheel and tire at the
same point on both sides of the vehicle. 2. If the difference exceeds 10 mm (0.4 inch), a lean
correction is necessary.
Compare the original with a new coil spring. Note the difference.
3. Remove the higher side coil spring.
1 If the original coil spring exceeds the height of the new one by 10 mm (0.4 inch), install the new
coil spring in the vehicle.
2 If the original coil spring is shorter than the new one by 10 mm (0.4 inch), remove the low side
coil spring from the vehicle.
4. Compare all three coil springs and select the two most evenly matched for installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 6649
Alignment: Service and Repair Toe Adjustment
Front
1. Start the engine and center the steering wheel. 2. Turn the engine off, and lock the steering
wheel in position. 3. Check the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions.
4. NOTE: Do not allow the steering gear bellows to twist when the front wheel spindle tie rod is
rotated.
Remove the clamps.
5. Loosen the nuts.
^ Clean and lubricate the nut(s) and front wheel spindle tie rod threads.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 6650
6. Rotate the front wheel spindle tie rods.
7. Tighten the nuts.
8. Install the clamp(s). 9. Recheck the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's
instructions.
Rear
1. NOTE: Jounce the vehicle to make sure that the suspension is in its normal resting position.
Check the toe setting using suitable wheel alignment equipment.
2. Loosen the LH and RH rear suspension trailing arm and bushing bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 6651
3. Turn the LH and RH adjusting cams simultaneously until the toe is within specification.
4. Tighten the LH and RH rear suspension trailing arm and bushing bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 6658
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 6659
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 6660
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 6661
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 6662
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 6663
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 6664
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 6665
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 6666
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 6667
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 6668
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 6669
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 6670
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 6671
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 6672
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 6673
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 6674
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 6675
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 6676
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 6677
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power
Steering Pressure Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch (Figure 38) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the
power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic
pressure increases. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for
additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking
maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust transmission Electronic Pressure
Control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power
Steering Pressure Switch > Page 6680
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Sensor
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The Power Steering Pressure (PSP) sensor (Figure 39) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the
power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic
pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for
additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking
maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust transmission Electronic Pressure
Control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Bleeding > System
Information > Service and Repair
Power Steering Bleeding: Service and Repair
Special Tools
Special Tools
CAUTION: If the air is not purged from the power steering system correctly, premature power
steering pump failure can result. This condition can occur on pre-delivery vehicles with evidence of
aerated fluid or on vehicles that have had steering component repairs.
1. NOTE: A whine heard from the power steering pump may be caused by air in the system. The
power steering purge procedure must be performed
prior to any component repair for which power steering noise complaints are accompanied by
evidence of aerated fluid.
Remove the power steering pump reservoir cap. Check the fluid. ^
Use Motorcraft MERCON Multi-Purpose ATE XT-2-QDX or equivalent MERCON fluid.
2. Tightly insert the stopper of the vacuum pump into the reservoir. 3. Start the vehicle.
4. Apply maximum vacuum and maintain it for a minimum of three minutes with the engine speed
at idle. 5. Release the vacuum and remove the vacuum pump.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Bleeding > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 6686
6. CAUTION: Do not overfill the reservoir.
Fill the reservoir. ^
Use Motorcraft MERCON Multi-Purpose ATE XT-2-QDX or MERCON equivalent.
7. Reinstall the vacuum pump. Apply and maintain maximum vacuum.
8. CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel against the stops for more than three to five seconds
at a time. Damage to the power steering pump
can occur.
Cycle the steering wheel fully to the left and right every 30 seconds for approximately five minutes.
9. Stop the engine, release the vacuum, and remove the vacuum pump.
10. Install the reservoir cap. 11. Check for fluid leaks at all of the connections. If the power steering
fluid shows signs of air, repeat this procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage
Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage
TSB 07-1-7
01/22/07
MERCON(R) ATF REPLACED BY MERCON(R) V AS A SERVICE FLUID FOR SOME POWER
STEERING SYSTEMS
FORD: 1996-1997 Thunderbird 1996-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 1998-2003 Escort
2000-2007 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006 Ford GT 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle
2006-2007 Fusion 1996-1997 Aerostar 1996-2007 E-Series, Explorer, Ranger 1997-2004 F-53
Motorhome Chassis 1997-2007 Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty 1998-2003 Windstar 2000-2005
Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2007 Escape 2004-2007
Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1996-1997 Cargo 1996-1998 L-Series 1996-1999 F- B-Series
2000-2007 F-650, F-750 2006-2007 Low Cab Forward
LINCOLN: 1996-1998 Mark VIII 1996-1999 Continental 1996-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln
LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX
MERCURY: 1996-1997 Cougar 1996-2005 Sable 1996-2007 Grand Marquis 1999-2002 Cougar
2003-2004 Marauder 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2007 Mountaineer 1998-2002
Villager 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2007 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid is being replaced by MERCON(R) V as a
service fluid for power steering systems originally requiring MERCON(R).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage > Page 6691
ACTION Beginning immediately all power steering applications requiring MERCON(R) can now be
serviced using MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids
labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. After July 1, 2007, MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission
Fluid will no longer be manufactured, therefore, availability of this fluid will continue until remaining
inventory has been depleted.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Service power steering Systems requiring MERCON(R) with MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R)
Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V.
CAUTION
APPLICATIONS RECOMMENDING TYPE F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AND POWER
STEERING FLUID MUST CONTINUE TO USE THAT PARTICULAR FLUID. USE OF ANY
OTHER FLUID MAY CAUSE REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY OR DAMAGE
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Power Steering Fluid: Capacity Specifications
Power Steering Fluid Capacity 2.0 qt (US)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 6694
Power Steering Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications /
/
Power Steering Fluid Type MERCON(R) ATF
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Cooler >
Component Information > Specifications
Power Steering Fluid Cooler: Specifications
Power Steering Fluid Cooler Mounting Bolts 89 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Cooler >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 6698
Power Steering Fluid Cooler: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the hose from the power steering fluid reservoir.
2. Disconnect the power steering cooler hose. 3. Remove the front bumper cover.
4. Remove the nuts and the power steering fluid cooler. 5. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
^ Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Reservoir >
Component Information > Specifications
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir: Specifications
Power Steering Pump fluid Reservoir Mounting Bolts 89 in.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Reservoir >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 6702
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: Drain the power steering fluid into a suitable drain pain.
Disconnect the power steering fluid return hose.
2. Disconnect the power steering low pressure hose.
3. Remove the bolts and the power steering pump reservoir. 4. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
^ Fill power steering system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 02-5-2 > Mar >
02 > Power Steering - Leaks in Extreme Cold
Power Steering Line/Hose: Customer Interest Power Steering - Leaks in Extreme Cold
Article No. 02-5-2
03/01/02
STEERING - POWER STEERING FLUID LEAK DURING EXTREME COLD AMBIENT
TEMPERATURES -20 TO -28C (-5 TO -20F) - VEHICLES PRODUCED 2/12/2002 ONLY
FORD: 2001-2002 ESCAPE
ISSUE
Some vehicles built before 2/12/2002 may exhibit a power steering fluid leak at the Return Hose
and/or Cooler Hose at the Intermediate Tube Assembly during extreme cold ambient temperatures
-20 to -28°C (-5 to -20 °F). This may be caused by hose blow out due to an increase in fluid
viscosity during extreme cold temperatures.
ACTION
Replace the Intermediate Tube with a steel intermediate tube and replace spring type clamps on
Return Hose and Cooler Hose with worm type clamps to increase hose retention.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Perform procedure in Workshop Manual Section 211-02 to remove Return Hose and Cooler
Hose from Intermediate Tube.
2. Replace Intermediate Tube with new part 2L8Z-3A713-AA.
3. Reinstall Cooler and Return Hoses using worm clamps 376240-S100.
4. Bleed all of the air from steering system using bleed procedure in Section 211-00 of the
appropriate year Workshop Manual.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
020502A Replace Metal Section Of 1.0 Hr.
Power Steering Return Hose (Includes Time To Bleed Air From System)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A713 42
OASIS CODES: 303000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: >
02-5-2 > Mar > 02 > Power Steering - Leaks in Extreme Cold
Power Steering Line/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Power Steering - Leaks in Extreme Cold
Article No. 02-5-2
03/01/02
STEERING - POWER STEERING FLUID LEAK DURING EXTREME COLD AMBIENT
TEMPERATURES -20 TO -28C (-5 TO -20F) - VEHICLES PRODUCED 2/12/2002 ONLY
FORD: 2001-2002 ESCAPE
ISSUE
Some vehicles built before 2/12/2002 may exhibit a power steering fluid leak at the Return Hose
and/or Cooler Hose at the Intermediate Tube Assembly during extreme cold ambient temperatures
-20 to -28°C (-5 to -20 °F). This may be caused by hose blow out due to an increase in fluid
viscosity during extreme cold temperatures.
ACTION
Replace the Intermediate Tube with a steel intermediate tube and replace spring type clamps on
Return Hose and Cooler Hose with worm type clamps to increase hose retention.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Perform procedure in Workshop Manual Section 211-02 to remove Return Hose and Cooler
Hose from Intermediate Tube.
2. Replace Intermediate Tube with new part 2L8Z-3A713-AA.
3. Reinstall Cooler and Return Hoses using worm clamps 376240-S100.
4. Bleed all of the air from steering system using bleed procedure in Section 211-00 of the
appropriate year Workshop Manual.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
020502A Replace Metal Section Of 1.0 Hr.
Power Steering Return Hose (Includes Time To Bleed Air From System)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A713 42
OASIS CODES: 303000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6716
Power Steering Line/Hose: Specifications
Power Steering Pressure Line-To-Pump Fitting 48 ft.lb
Power Steering Pressure Line Bracket-To-Engine Bolt 18 ft.lb
Power Steering Pressure And Return Line Retainer Plate-To-Gear Bolt 18 ft.lb
Power Steering Pressure Line Bracket-To-Gear Bolt 89 in.lb
Power Steering Return Line Bracket-To-Gear Bolt 89 in.lb
Power Steering Pressure Line Bracket-To-Lifting Eye Bolt 89 in.lb
Power Steering Pressure Hose To Steering Gear Fitting 21 - 25 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Hose
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Hose
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: Drain the excess power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan.
NOTE: Make sure not to drop the O-ring seals.
Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines.
1 Remove the bolt.
2 Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines.
2. Remove the power steering return line bracket-to-gear bolt.
3. Release the clamp and remove the power steering return line.
4. NOTE: Make sure the O-ring seals are on the power steering pressure and return lines.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^
Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Hose > Page 6719
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump to Gear Pressure Line
Special Tools
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. NOTE: Drain the excess power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan.
Disconnect the power steering pressure line from the power steering pump.
3. Lower the vehicle.
4. NOTE: Do not drop the O-ring seals.
Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines.
1 Remove the bolt.
2 Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Hose > Page 6720
5. Remove the power steering pressure line bracket bolt to the steering gear.
6. Remove the power steering pressure line bracket bolt to the engine lifting hook.
7. Remove the power steering pressure line bracket to engine bolt and the power steering pressure
line.
Installation
1. Using the special tool, install a new seal on the power steering pressure line fitting.
^ Remove and discard the original seal.
^ Stretch the seal over the special tool and slide it onto the tube nut.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Hose > Page 6721
2. Install the power steering pressure line bucket to engine bolt.
3. Install the power steering pressure line bracket bolt to the engine lifting hook.
4. Install the power steering pressure line bracket bolt to the steering gear.
5. NOTE: Make sure the O-ring seals are on the power steering pressure and return lines.
Connect the power steering pressure and return lines to the steering gear and install the bolt.
6. Raise the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Hose > Page 6722
7. Connect the power steering pressure line to the power steering pump. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9.
Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications
Power Steering Pump: Mechanical Specifications
Power Steering Pump Mounting Bolts 18 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 6727
Power Steering Pump: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
Steering Pump Free flow rate 1.79 - 2.19 gal/min
@ 165 degrees - 175 degrees F And Engine Set At Idle
Back pressure 60 psi
@ 165 degrees - 175 degrees F And Engine Set At Idle (With
Gate Valve Open)
Minimum flow rate 1 15 g/min
@ 165 degrees - 175 degrees F and 740 psi
Relief pressure 1300 - 1480 psi
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump
Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump
Removal
1. Remove the accessory drive belt.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. NOTE: Drain the power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan.
Disconnect the power steering pressure line.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 6730
4. Remove the lower power steering pump bolts. 5. Lower the vehicle.
6. Remove the power steering pressure line bracket bolt.
7. Disconnect the power steering low pressure hose.
8. Remove the bolts and the power steering pump.
9. Using the special tool, remove the power steering pump pulley.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 6731
1. CAUTION: Install a new power steering pump pulley after the second removal and installation.
Inspect the pulley for paint marks in the web area near the hub. If there are two paint marks, install
a new pulley. If there is no paint or one paint mark, use a paint pencil to mark the web area of the
pulley near the hub. Using the special tool, install the power steering pump pulley.
2. Using the special tool, install a new seal on the power steering pressure hose fitting.
^ Remove and discard the original seal.
^ Stretch the seal over the seal replacer and slide it onto the tube nut.
3. Position the power steering pump and install the upper bolts.
4. Connect the power steering low pressure hose.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 6732
5. Position the power steering pressure line bracket and install the bolt. 6. Raise the vehicle.
7. Install the lower power steering pump bolts.
8. Connect the power steering pressure line.
9. Connect the electrical connector.
10. Install the drive belt. 11. Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 6733
Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump Pulley
Removal and Installation
1. Loosen the power steering pump pulley bolt. 2. Remove the drive belt.
3. Remove the bolt and the power steering pump pulley. 4. To install. reverse the removal
procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6739
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6740
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6741
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6742
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6743
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6744
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6745
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6746
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6747
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6748
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6749
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6750
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6751
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6752
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6753
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6754
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6755
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6756
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6757
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6758
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch (Figure 38) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the
power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic
pressure increases. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for
additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking
maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust transmission Electronic Pressure
Control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Page 6761
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Sensor
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The Power Steering Pressure (PSP) sensor (Figure 39) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the
power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic
pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for
additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking
maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust transmission Electronic Pressure
Control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Customer Safety Information
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE
AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID
NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 6767
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE
AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID
NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Seats Removed
There are two deactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
side air bag concerns, and also when repairing any in-seat component in vehicles equipped with
side air bags.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal. This procedure will be used when
diagnosing a concern not related to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: ^
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag system is being serviced, the airbag system
must be deactivated using the appropriate deactivation procedure.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag floor
connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system with the seats in the
vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system, the seats must be removed
from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag floor
connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle
over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag system (lumbar,
climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the
restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air
bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the front seats. 9. Attach
a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag floor electrical connector.
10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical
connector. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical
connector. 12. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Seats Not Removed
There are two deactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
side air bag concerns, and also when repairing any in-seat component in vehicles equipped with
side air bags.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal. This procedure will be used when
diagnosing a concern not related to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position. 2. Disconnect the battery
ground cable.
WARNING: ^
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6770
SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR
STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS
DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD
LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag system is being serviced, the airbag system
must be deactivated using the appropriate deactivation procedure.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag floor
connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system with the seats in the
vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system, the seats must be removed
from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag floor
connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle
over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag system (lumbar,
climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the
restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect
the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped
with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat.
10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical
connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to
the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect
the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Depowering and Repowering Procedure
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event
of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if
equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered.
NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition
switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system
(SRS) fault.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the
cover and the restraints control module (RCM)
fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB.
4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no
flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit
continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6771
proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing or
replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side
impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair
have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected.
2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover.
4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front
of any air bag module when the
battery ground cable is connected.
Connect the battery ground cable.
5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator
and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool.
Seats Removed
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED
AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO
AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
4. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6772
5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Install the front seats. 8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring
connector.
^ Reconnect the electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
10. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 11. Reconnect the battery
ground cable. 12. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Seats Not Removed
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED
AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO
AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring
connector.
^ Reconnect the electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
4. If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 6.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6773
8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6774
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist
Air Bag Reconnect Checklist
The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system
concern: 1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3.
Restraints Control Module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors
connected? 5. All sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected?
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6775
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure
Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator
with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
^ fail to light.
^ remain lit continuously.
^ flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control
Module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an
SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag
indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Steering Column Lock: Description and Operation
The steering column lock is integral to the lock cylinder. When the ignition key is removed or turned
to the LOCK position, a small key inside the steering column lock engages with the steering column
tube, locking it into position. When the ignition key is turned to the OFF, START, or ON position,
the steering column lock key withdraws, unlocking the steering column tube and allowing it to
rotate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Specifications
Steering Gear: Specifications
Type Rack And Pinion
Maximum Steering Gear Lateral Movement 0.05 in
Tie Rod Articulation 0.4 - 2.5 ft.lb
Steering Gear Mounting Bolts 35 - 46 ft.lb
Steering Gear Mounting Bolts 93 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Specifications
> Page 6782
Steering Gear: Testing and Inspection
Steering Gear Grunt/Shudder Test
1. Start and run the vehicle to operating temperature. 2. Set engine idle speed to 1,200 rpm. 3.
Rotate the steering wheel to the RH stop, then turn the steering wheel 90 degrees back from that
position. Turn the steering wheel slowly in a 15
to 30 degree arc.
CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel against the stops for more than three to five seconds at
a time. Damage to the power steering pump will occur.
4. Turn the steering wheel another 90 degrees. Turn the steering wheel slowly in a 15 to 30 degree
arc. 5. Repeat the test with power steering fluid at different temperatures. 6. If a light grunt is heard
or a low (50-200 Hz) shudder is present, this is a normal steering system condition. 7. If a loud
grunt is heard or a strong shudder is felt, fill and purge the power steering system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation
Steering Gear: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Special Tools
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: 2.0L Zetec shown, 3.0L (4V) similar.
Remove the rear transaxle insulator.
1 Remove the bolts and nuts.
2 Remove the rear transaxle insulator.
Vehicles equipped with automatic transmission
2. Remove the bolts and the rear transaxle insulator bracket.
All vehicles 3. Remove the front wheels.
Vehicles equipped with manual transmission
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6785
4. Remove the bolts and the rear transaxle insulator bracket.
All vehicles
5. NOTE: LH side shown, RH similar.
Remove the tie rod end nut.
1 Remove the cotter pin.
2 Remove the nut.
6. NOTE: LH side shown, RH similar.
Using the special tool, separate the tie rod end from the knuckle.
7. NOTE: Record the number of turns required to remove the tie rod end.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6786
Remove the tie rod ends and the tie rod end jam nuts.
8. Remove the steering gear coupling pinch bolt.
1 Slide the boot up.
2 Remove the steering gear coupling pinch bolt.
9. NOTE: Drain the excess power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan.
NOTE: Do not drop the O-ring seals.
Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines.
1 Remove the bolt.
2 Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines.
10. Remove the power steering pressure and return line bracket bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6787
11. Remove the two steering gear mounting bolts.
12. NOTE: With the mounting bolts removed, slide the gear forward to separate the steering
coupling from the steering gear shaft.
Remove the steering gear.
Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: With the mounting bolts removed, slide the gear rearward to connect the steering
coupling to the steering gear shaft.
Position the steering gear in the vehicle.
2. Install the two steering gear mounting bolts.
3. Install the power steering pressure and return line bracket bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6788
4. NOTE: Make sure the O-ring seals are on the power steering pressure and return lines.
Connect the power steering pressure and return lines to the steering gear and install the bolt.
5. Install the steering gear coupling pinch bolt and slide the boot down. 6. Thread the tie rod end
jam nuts onto the front wheel spindle tie rods.
7. NOTE: Use the numbers recorded from removal to install the tie rod ends.
Thread the tie rod ends onto the front wheel spindle tie rods.
8. Tighten the tie rod end jam nuts.
9. NOTE: LH side shown, RH similar.
Connect the tie rod end to the knuckle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6789
1 Install the nut.
2 Install the cotter pin.
Vehicles equipped with manual transmission
10. Install the rear transaxle insulator bracket and the bolts.
All vehicles
11. Install the front wheels.
Vehicles equipped with automatic transmission
12. Install the rear transaxle insulator bracket and the bolts.
All vehicles
13. NOTE: 2.0L Zetec shown, 3.0L (4V) similar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6790
Install the rear transaxle insulator.
14. Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system. 15. Align the front wheels to
specifications.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6791
Steering Gear: Service and Repair Steering Gear Boot
Removal and Installation
1. Position the steering gear boot cover aside.
2. NOTE: The nut cannot be reused. Install a new nut.
Disconnect the steering column shaft from the flexible coupling.
1 Remove and discard the nut.
2 Disconnect the steering column shaft from the flexible coupling.
3. Remove the steering gear boot.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Remove the steering gear boot.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Steering Shaft: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Position the boot aside.
2. Remove and discard the pinch bolt/nut and disconnect the steering column shaft from the
flexible coupling.
3. Remove the steering column shaft pin and the steering column shaft. 4. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Steering Shaft Coupler: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Position the boot aside.
2. Loosen the pinch bolt/nut and disconnect the steering column shaft from the flexible coupling. 3.
Remove the steering gear coupling.
1 Position aside the rubber boot.
2 Remove the pinch bolt.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > NHTSA00V223001 > Aug > 00 > Recall 00V223001: Steering Wheel Nut Cracked/Fractured
Steering Wheel: Recalls Recall 00V223001: Steering Wheel Nut Cracked/Fractured
These vehicles may have mis-assembled or incorrectly manufactured nut that attaches the steering
wheel assembly to the steering column. The nut could be upside down in the steering wheel
assembly, which could overstress the steering column shaft when the nut is tightened. In addition,
some of the nuts may have been cracked during manufacture resulting in the nut fracturing when it
is tightened during vehicle assembly.
Either of these conditions can lead to the steering wheel becoming loose or separating from the
steering column, resulting in loss of steering control.
Dealers will inspect and replace the steering wheel retention armature and, if necessary, the
steering column to correct this condition. Owner notification began September 6, 2000. Owners
who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and do not receive
the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. Also contact the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT
(1-888-327-4236).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 00S19 > Aug > 00 > Recall - Steering Wheel Retention Quality Issue
Technical Service Bulletin # 00S19 Date: 000801
Recall - Steering Wheel Retention Quality Issue
00S19
SAFETY RECALL
Advance Announcement of Safety Recall 00S19: ALL 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Steering
Wheel Retention Quality Issue
^ Advance Announcement
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose
Steering Wheel: Customer Interest Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose
TSB 07-4-3
03/05/07
LEATHER - WRAPPED STEERING WHEEL - LEATHER COMING LOOSE
FORD: 2000-2005 Thunderbird 2000-2007 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2005-2007
Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2008 F-Super Duty
2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, Ranger 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2007 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2008 Escape 2004-2007 F-150, Freestar 2005-2008 Escape
Hybrid 2007 Edge 2004-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2000-2007 Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 2000-2007 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX
MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan
2000-2007 Mountaineer 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2008 Mariner 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-3 to update the vehicle model years.
ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with leather-wrapped steering wheels may exhibit the leather
coming loose from the spoke area.
ACTION Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive to re-adhere the loose leather to the wheel spoke.
Refer to the following Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
IF RE-ADHERING LEATHER TO THE FRONT SIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL ONLY, OMIT
STEPS 1 AND 6. STEERING WHEEL/AIR BAG ASSEMBLY REMOVAL IS NECESSARY ONLY
WHEN REPAIRING LOOSE LEATHER ON THE BACKSIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL.
CAUTION
AVOID SKIN CONTACT WITH MOTORCRAFT INSTANT GEL ADHESIVE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose >
Page 6815
1. Remove the steering wheel (ONLY NECESSARY TO REPAIR BACKSIDE OF STEERING
WHEEL). Refer to Workshop Manual Sections 211-04 and 501-20B.
2. Fold loose leather out of the way.
3. Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive evenly over the wheel spoke.
4. Fold the leather back into its original position.
5. Smooth the leather tuck in for neat appearance, and apply pressure until the leather is bonded to
the wheel spoke (apply pressure for at least 30 seconds).
NOTE
THE ADHESIVE SHOULD BE COMPLETELY SET AFTER 5 MINUTES. DO NOT PULL ON THE
REPAIR AREA.
6. Reinstall steering wheel.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT070403 Use SLIS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3600 33
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On
Steering Wheel Is Loose
Steering Wheel: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is
Loose
TSB 07-4-3
03/05/07
LEATHER - WRAPPED STEERING WHEEL - LEATHER COMING LOOSE
FORD: 2000-2005 Thunderbird 2000-2007 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2005-2007
Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2008 F-Super Duty
2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, Ranger 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2007 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2008 Escape 2004-2007 F-150, Freestar 2005-2008 Escape
Hybrid 2007 Edge 2004-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2000-2007 Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 2000-2007 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX
MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan
2000-2007 Mountaineer 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2008 Mariner 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-3 to update the vehicle model years.
ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with leather-wrapped steering wheels may exhibit the leather
coming loose from the spoke area.
ACTION Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive to re-adhere the loose leather to the wheel spoke.
Refer to the following Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
IF RE-ADHERING LEATHER TO THE FRONT SIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL ONLY, OMIT
STEPS 1 AND 6. STEERING WHEEL/AIR BAG ASSEMBLY REMOVAL IS NECESSARY ONLY
WHEN REPAIRING LOOSE LEATHER ON THE BACKSIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL.
CAUTION
AVOID SKIN CONTACT WITH MOTORCRAFT INSTANT GEL ADHESIVE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On
Steering Wheel Is Loose > Page 6821
1. Remove the steering wheel (ONLY NECESSARY TO REPAIR BACKSIDE OF STEERING
WHEEL). Refer to Workshop Manual Sections 211-04 and 501-20B.
2. Fold loose leather out of the way.
3. Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive evenly over the wheel spoke.
4. Fold the leather back into its original position.
5. Smooth the leather tuck in for neat appearance, and apply pressure until the leather is bonded to
the wheel spoke (apply pressure for at least 30 seconds).
NOTE
THE ADHESIVE SHOULD BE COMPLETELY SET AFTER 5 MINUTES. DO NOT PULL ON THE
REPAIR AREA.
6. Reinstall steering wheel.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT070403 Use SLIS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3600 33
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > NHTSA00V223001 > Aug > 00 > Recall
00V223001: Steering Wheel Nut Cracked/Fractured
Steering Wheel: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 00V223001: Steering Wheel Nut
Cracked/Fractured
These vehicles may have mis-assembled or incorrectly manufactured nut that attaches the steering
wheel assembly to the steering column. The nut could be upside down in the steering wheel
assembly, which could overstress the steering column shaft when the nut is tightened. In addition,
some of the nuts may have been cracked during manufacture resulting in the nut fracturing when it
is tightened during vehicle assembly.
Either of these conditions can lead to the steering wheel becoming loose or separating from the
steering column, resulting in loss of steering control.
Dealers will inspect and replace the steering wheel retention armature and, if necessary, the
steering column to correct this condition. Owner notification began September 6, 2000. Owners
who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and do not receive
the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. Also contact the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT
(1-888-327-4236).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 00S19 > Aug > 00 > Recall - Steering Wheel
Retention Quality Issue
Technical Service Bulletin # 00S19 Date: 000801
Recall - Steering Wheel Retention Quality Issue
00S19
SAFETY RECALL
Advance Announcement of Safety Recall 00S19: ALL 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Steering
Wheel Retention Quality Issue
^ Advance Announcement
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On
Steering Wheel Is Loose
Steering Wheel: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is
Loose
TSB 07-4-3
03/05/07
LEATHER - WRAPPED STEERING WHEEL - LEATHER COMING LOOSE
FORD: 2000-2005 Thunderbird 2000-2007 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2005-2007
Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2008 F-Super Duty
2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, Ranger 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2007 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2008 Escape 2004-2007 F-150, Freestar 2005-2008 Escape
Hybrid 2007 Edge 2004-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2000-2007 Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 2000-2007 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX
MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan
2000-2007 Mountaineer 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2008 Mariner 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-3 to update the vehicle model years.
ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with leather-wrapped steering wheels may exhibit the leather
coming loose from the spoke area.
ACTION Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive to re-adhere the loose leather to the wheel spoke.
Refer to the following Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
IF RE-ADHERING LEATHER TO THE FRONT SIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL ONLY, OMIT
STEPS 1 AND 6. STEERING WHEEL/AIR BAG ASSEMBLY REMOVAL IS NECESSARY ONLY
WHEN REPAIRING LOOSE LEATHER ON THE BACKSIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL.
CAUTION
AVOID SKIN CONTACT WITH MOTORCRAFT INSTANT GEL ADHESIVE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On
Steering Wheel Is Loose > Page 6835
1. Remove the steering wheel (ONLY NECESSARY TO REPAIR BACKSIDE OF STEERING
WHEEL). Refer to Workshop Manual Sections 211-04 and 501-20B.
2. Fold loose leather out of the way.
3. Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive evenly over the wheel spoke.
4. Fold the leather back into its original position.
5. Smooth the leather tuck in for neat appearance, and apply pressure until the leather is bonded to
the wheel spoke (apply pressure for at least 30 seconds).
NOTE
THE ADHESIVE SHOULD BE COMPLETELY SET AFTER 5 MINUTES. DO NOT PULL ON THE
REPAIR AREA.
6. Reinstall steering wheel.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT070403 Use SLIS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3600 33
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > NHTSA00V223001 > Aug > 00 > Recall 00V223001:
Steering Wheel Nut Cracked/Fractured
Steering Wheel: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 00V223001: Steering Wheel Nut
Cracked/Fractured
These vehicles may have mis-assembled or incorrectly manufactured nut that attaches the steering
wheel assembly to the steering column. The nut could be upside down in the steering wheel
assembly, which could overstress the steering column shaft when the nut is tightened. In addition,
some of the nuts may have been cracked during manufacture resulting in the nut fracturing when it
is tightened during vehicle assembly.
Either of these conditions can lead to the steering wheel becoming loose or separating from the
steering column, resulting in loss of steering control.
Dealers will inspect and replace the steering wheel retention armature and, if necessary, the
steering column to correct this condition. Owner notification began September 6, 2000. Owners
who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and do not receive
the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. Also contact the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT
(1-888-327-4236).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 00S19 > Aug > 00 > Recall - Steering Wheel Retention
Quality Issue
Technical Service Bulletin # 00S19 Date: 000801
Recall - Steering Wheel Retention Quality Issue
00S19
SAFETY RECALL
Advance Announcement of Safety Recall 00S19: ALL 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Steering
Wheel Retention Quality Issue
^ Advance Announcement
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6845
Steering Wheel: Specifications
Steering Wheel Turning Effort
.................................................................................................................................. 30 N maximum
6.75 lbs. maximum
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6846
Steering Wheel: Service and Repair
Removal
1. Position the front seats rearward.
2. Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). See: Steering Column/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Air Bag
Disarming and Arming/Depowering and Repowering Procedure
3. Lower the steering wheel air bag connector access cover.
4. Turn the pinion shaft to release the steering wheel from the column shaft.
5. Remove the steering wheel.
- Position the steering wheel rearward.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6847
1. Install the steering wheel.
- Connect the electrical connector.
- Position the steering wheel onto the steering column shaft.
2. Tighten the pinion shaft.
3. Close the steering wheel air bag connector access cover.
4. Repower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). See: Steering Column/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Air Bag
Disarming and Arming/Depowering and Repowering Procedure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Tie Rod End Inspection Procedures
Tie Rod End: Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Tie Rod End Inspection Procedures
Article No. 03-15-13
08/04/03
STEERING - TIE ROD END INSPECTION PROCEDURE
FORD: 1997-2002 EXPEDITION 1997-2003 F-150 2001-2004 ESCAPE
LINCOLN: 1998-2002 NAVIGATOR 2002-2003 BLACKWOOD
This article supersedes 03-9-9 to update the vehicle models covered.
ISSUE This article is to be used as an updated procedure for inspecting tie rod end wear.
ACTION This procedure is designed to supplement the Workshop Manual, as it provides a more
detailed tie rod end inspection procedure.
SERVICE INFORMATION
NOTE
FOR ESCAPE VEHICLES, THIS TIE ROD END INSPECTION PROCEDURE SHOULD ONLY BE
COMPLETED ON THE OUTER TIE RODS. FOR ESCAPE INNER TIE ROD INSPECTION
PROCEDURES, REFER TO WORKSHOP MANUAL SECTION 211-00.
Step 1 - Free Play:
Check the outer tie rod ends by grasping by hand and push up and down. Check the inner tie rod
ends, pushing them front to rear. If any free play is observed in a joint, it is worn and should be
replaced.
Step 2 - Stud Lash - Free Play:
While vehicle is on the ground or on a drive-on hoist, have an assistant rotate the steering wheel
rapidly back and forth from 10 o'clock to 2 o'clock to 10 o'clock while observing the inner and outer
tie rods. If the outer tie rod ends have any vertical movement or the inner tie rod ends have any
horizontal movement, the tie rod end with the observed movement should be replaced.
Step 3 - Seal Inspection:
Raise the vehicle on a hoist and remove the front wheels. The wheels will need to be turned to the
right in order to inspect the passenger side inner tie rod end and to the left to inspect the drivers
side inner tie rod end. Inspect all four seals for tears, perforations and wear. If there is any
indication of wear or perforations on the seal, that tie rod end should be replaced.
Step 4 - Stud Corrosion:
For Escape Vehicles - If Squeak is noticed during Step 2, disconnect tie rod from knuckle and
articulate stud in socket. If squeak is verified, replace part. While pushing down on seal, at stud
end, if corrosion present at contact point at base of stud, replace part.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Tie Rod End Inspection Procedures > Page 6853
For All Other Vehicles Covered In This Article:
Using a wrench, rotate the tie rod end so that the front of the seal on the outer tie rod end is
expanded (Figure 1). Using a puffy knife or other hard, flat, dull object, lift the bottom of the seal up,
exposing the stud (Figure 2). If any water escapes from the seal in the form of bubbles or in a liquid
form, that tie rod end should be replaced. Closely examine the stud for signs of corrosion,
especially around the interface with the knuckle. A rag might be needed to clean off any grease on
the stud that impairs a good visual inspection. If there is any sign of corrosion, that tie rod end
should be replaced.
Rotate the tie rod end in the opposite direction to expand the inner tie rod seal. Repeat the
inspection procedure used on the outer tie rod. Repeat this entire procedure on the other side of
the vehicle. If there is sign of corrosion, that tie rod end should be replaced.
NOTE
IF ANY TIE ROD ENDS ARE REMOVED, INSPECT THE SEAL AND THE STUD AGAIN NOTING
ANY DIFFERENCES IN VISUAL PERCEPTIONS FROM WHEN THE PART WAS ON THE
VEHICLE. CHECKING THE STUD AFTER REMOVAL HELPS IMPROVE CONSCIOUSNESS OF
ISSUES WHEN INSPECTING PARTS ON VEHICLE.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-9-9 WARRANTY STATUS:
INFORMATION ONLY
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Tie Rod End Inspection Procedures > Page 6854
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6855
Tie Rod End: Specifications
Tie Rod End Jam Nuts 55 Nm
Tie Rod End Nuts 55 Nm
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6856
Tie Rod End: Service and Repair
Special Tools
Removal and Installation
1. Turn the ignition switch to the unlock position. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3.
Remove the castellated nut.
1 Remove the cotter pin.
2 Remove the castellated nut.
4. Loosen the tie rod end jam nut.
5. Using the special tool, separate the tie rod end.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6857
6. Remove the tie rod end. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Adjust the front toe.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications >
Front Suspension Balljoint Inspection Job Aid
Ball Joint: Specifications Front Suspension Balljoint Inspection Job Aid
Front Lower Balljoint
Measurement
..................................................................................................................................................
Between lower control arm and knuckle
Deflection .............................................................................................................................................
........................................... 0-0.008 in (0-0.2mm)
Reference Diagram .............................................................................................................................
............................................................................. D
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications >
Front Suspension Balljoint Inspection Job Aid > Page 6863
Ball Joint: Specifications Ball Joint, Lower
Lower Ball Joint Radial Play - Maximum 1/32 inch
Ball Joint Pinch Bolt 52 ft. lbs.
Lower Ball Joint Nut 85 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications >
Front Suspension Balljoint Inspection Job Aid > Page 6864
Ball Joint: Specifications Rear Suspension
Rear Suspension
Upper Ball Joint Nut 85 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Front Suspension Balljoint Inspection Job Aid
Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection Front Suspension Balljoint Inspection Job Aid
Front Lower Balljoint
Measurement
..................................................................................................................................................
Between lower control arm and knuckle
Deflection .............................................................................................................................................
........................................... 0-0.008 in (0-0.2mm)
Reference Diagram .............................................................................................................................
............................................................................. D
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Front Suspension Balljoint Inspection Job Aid > Page 6867
Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection Ball Joint, Lower
Ball Joint Inspection-Front Suspension Lower Arm
Prior to carrying out this test, check the front wheel hub for excessive end play. 1. Raise and
support the vehicle so no load is on the front suspension lower arm.
2. Grasp the upper and lower edges of the (1) tire and move the wheel in and out from the (2) pivot
center line. 3. The front suspension lower arm ball joint is worn if excessive movement is felt while
the wheel is being moved. 4. Install a new front suspension lower arm if the movement exceeds
0.794 mm (1/32 inch).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Front Suspension Balljoint Inspection Job Aid > Page 6868
Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection Ball Joint, Upper
Ball Joint Inspection-Front Suspension Lower Arm
Prior to carrying out this test, check the front wheel hub for excessive end play. 1. Raise and
support the vehicle so no load is on the front suspension lower arm.
2. Grasp the upper and lower edges of the (1) tire and move the wheel in and out from the (2) pivot
center line. 3. The front suspension lower arm ball joint is worn if excessive movement is felt while
the wheel is being moved. 4. Install a new front suspension lower arm if the movement exceeds
0.794 mm (1/32 inch).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection
Control Arm Bushing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing
Inspection
TSB 09-5-1
03/23/09
LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING INSPECTION PROCEDURE
FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE Many states and Canadian provinces require annual safety inspections which include the
evaluation of suspension components. The information in this procedure is intended to assist the
technician performing the inspection with specific criteria for 2001-2009 Escape and Mariner lower
control arm (LCA) bushings and will prevent the unnecessary replacement of good components.
ACTION Inspect according to the procedure below.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
The LCA bushing is located at the rear of the front suspension lower control arm. The bushing is
identified as number 1 of Figure 1. The control arm is mounted in the front subframe with bolts
number 2 and number 3. The bushing is part of the LCA and cannot be serviced separately from
the arm.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection > Page 6874
Figure 2 - Shows a new bushing prior to assembly into the control arm. Bolt number 2 passes
through the inner sleeve and the outer sleeve is pressed into the control arm. The rubber bushing
is bonded to both the inner and outer sleeves.
Figure 3 - Illustrates a generic bushing showing minor sur[ace cracks that do not adversely affect
the performance of the bushing. Bushings exhibiting sur[ace cracks with a depth less than 3/8" (10
mm) are acceptable and will continue to function normally. These do not require replacement.
Figure 4 - Illustrates a partial separation between the rubber and the outer sleeve. The bushing
may show signs of movement on the rubber surface, making the surface shiny. Bushings with a
separation or crack depth less than or equal to 3/8" (10 mm) are acceptable and meet all functional
requirements. These do not require replacement.
Bushings with a separation or crack greater than 3/8" (10 mm) in depth should be replaced. The
customer may hear a bang or clunk in the front suspension if there is enough separation for the
arm to contact the subframe. This does not affect the retention of the control arm to the vehicle as
the bushing is sandwiched in the subframe and held in place with the bolt. The vehicle can be
safely operated in this condition until the bushing is replaced.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection > Page 6875
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Radius Arm > Component Information > Specifications
Radius Arm: Specifications
Strut Piston Rod To Bearing Plate Nut 76 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information >
Specifications
Rear Knuckle: Specifications
Wheel Knuckle Cam Bolt 85 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD
Rear Knuckle: Service and Repair Wheel Knuckle-2WD
Special Tools
Removal
NOTE: When a new wheel knuckle is installed a new wheel bearing must also be installed.
All vehicles 1. Remove the brake shoes.
2. Remove the wheel hub nut.
3. Using the special tool, remove the wheel hub.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6884
4. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle, after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
5. Remove the snap ring.
Vehicles with ABS
6. Position the Anti-Lock Brake Sensor (ABS) aside.
1 Remove the ABS sensor bolt and bracket bolts.
2 Position the ABS sensor aside.
All vehicles
7. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the brake backing plate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6885
^ Remove the parking brake cable bolt from the wheel knuckle.
8. Disconnect the brake line from the wheel cylinder.
^ Remove the brake line bracket bolt.
9. Support the wheel knuckle.
10. Remove the lower shock absorber nut.
11. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the
nut.
Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 1
Remove the nut.
2 Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6886
12. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the
nut.
Separate the upper ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 1
Remove the nut.
2 Separate the upper ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
13. NOTE: Note the position of the spring insulator and spring for installation.
Remove the spring. ^
Lower the support to the wheel knuckle.
14. Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
1 Mark the position of the adjustment cam notch.
2 Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
15. Remove the wheel knuckle.
1 Remove the wheel knuckle cam.
2 Remove the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6887
16. Remove the brake backing plate from the wheel knuckle.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the brake backing plate from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
All vehicles
1. Using the special tools, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
2. Install the snap ring into the wheel knuckle.
3. Position the brake backing plate to the wheel knuckle and install the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6888
4. Using the wheel hub washer and the special tool, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
5. Install the wheel hub nut.
6. Position the wheel knuckle and install the wheel
7. Install the wheel knuckle cam bolt loosely.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6889
8. Support the wheel knuckle and install the spring.
9. Install the lower shock absorber nut.
10. Position the upper ball joint and install the nut.
11. Position the lower ball joint and install the nut.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6890
12. Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
1 Align the wheel knuckle cam.
2 Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
13. Connect the brake line to the wheel cylinder.
^ Install the brake line bracket bolt.
14. Install the parking brake cable through the brake backing plate.
^ Install the bolt.
Vehicles with ABS
15. Position the ABS sensor and bracket bolts.
^ Install the bolts.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6891
16. Install the brake shoes. 17. Bleed the brake system. 18. Check and adjust the wheel alignment
as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6892
Rear Knuckle: Service and Repair Wheel Knuckle 4WD
Special Tools
Removal and Installation
NOTE: When a new wheel knuckle is installed a new wheel bearing must also be installed.
All vehicles 1. Remove the brake shoes.
2. Remove the rear halfshaft nut.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6893
3. Using the special tool, loosen the halfshaft from the wheel hub.
4. Using the special tools, remove the wheel hub.
5. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle, after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
6. Remove the snap ring.
Vehicles with ABS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6894
7. Position the Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) sensor aside.
1 Remove the ABS sensor bolt and bucket bolts.
2 Position the ABS sensor aside.
All vehicles
8. Disconnect the parking brake cable.
^ Remove the parking brake cable bolt from the wheel knuckle.
9. Disconnect the brake line from the wheel cylinder.
^ Remove brake line bracket bolt.
10. Support the wheel knuckle.
11. Remove the lower shock absorber nut.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6895
12. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the
nut.
Disconnect the lower ball joint. ^
Remove the nut.
13. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the
nut.
Disconnect the upper ball joint. ^
Remove the nut.
14. NOTE: Note the position of the spring insulator and spring for installation.
Remove the spring. ^
Lower the support to the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6896
15. Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
1 Mark the position of the adjustment cam notch.
2 Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
16. Remove the wheel knuckle.
1 Remove the wheel knuckle cam.
2 Remove the wheel knuckle.
17. Remove the brake backing plate from the wheel knuckle.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the brake backing plate from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
All vehicles
1. Using the special tools, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6897
2. Install the snap ring into the wheel knuckle.
3. Install the bake backing plate into the wheel knuckle.
^ Install the bolts.
4. Using the special tools, install the wheel hub.
5. Position the wheel knuckle and install the wheel knuckle cam.
^ Position the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6898
6. Install the wheel knuckle cam bolt loosely.
7. Support the wheel knuckle and install the spring.
8. Install the lower shock absorber nut.
9. Install the upper ball joint.
^ Install the nut.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6899
10. Install the lower ball joint.
^ Install the nut.
11. Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
1 Align the wheel knuckle cam.
2 Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
12. Install the brake line to the wheel cylinder.
^ Install brake line bracket bolt.
13. Install the parking brake cable through the brake backing plate.
1 Install the bolt.
2 Install the parking brake cable through the brake backing plate.
Vehicles with ABS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6900
14. Position the ABS brake sensor and bracket bolts.
^ Install the bolts.
All vehicles
15. Install the halfshaft nut. 16. Install the brake shoes. 17. Bleed the brake system. 18. Check and
adjust the wheel alignment as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Bushing >
Component Information > Specifications
Stabilizer Bushing: Specifications
FRONT SUSPENSION
Stabilizer Bar Bushing Mount ..............................................................................................................
.................................................. 70 Nm 52 ft. lbs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link >
Component Information > Specifications
Stabilizer Link: Specifications
Stabilizer Bar Links 48 Nm
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 6908
Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Remove the stabilizer bar link.
1 Remove the upper and lower stabilizer bar link nuts.
2 Remove the stabilizer bar link.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6918
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6919
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6925
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6926
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6927
Front Subframe: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6928
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6929
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6930
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6931
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6932
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6933
Front Subframe: Service and Repair
SUBFRAME - FRONT
Special Tool(S)
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the rear transmission mount nuts and bolt.
3. Using the special tool, support the engine. 4. Remove the two front wheel and tire assemblies. 5.
Remove the two engine air deflectors.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6934
6. Remove the two lower control arm ball joint pinch bolts and nuts (one on each side).
7. Disconnect the stabilizer bar link.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Disconnect the link from the stabilizer bar.
8. Remove the lateral support crossmember.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the crossmember.
9. Remove the front transmission mount bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6935
10. Remove the engine support crossmember bolts.
11. Remove the nut and the engine support crossmember.
12. Remove the two steering gear bolts.
13. Position the steering gear out of the subframe mounts. 14. Remove the dual converter Y-pipe
on the 3.0L (4V) engine or the muffler inlet pipe on the 2.0L (Zetec) engine.
Vehicles with manual transmission
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6936
15. Remove the two bolts and disconnect the manual transmission shift linkage.
Vehicles with 4WD
16. Remove the driveshaft.
17. NOTE: Lower the rear of the engine to allow the subframe to clear the companion flange on the
transfer case.
Lower the rear of the engine approximately 150 mm (6 in).
All vehicles
18. CAUTION: Do not allow the rear subframe bolts to come out of the lower control arm bushing.
Completely loosen the two front subframe bolts, but do not remove them.
19. NOTE: The lower control arm ball joints must be disconnected from the spindles at the same
time the subframe is lowered.
With an assistant, remove the two subframe nuts lower the subframe from the vehicle.
20. Transfer all necessary components. 21. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 >
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 >
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6945
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 >
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6946
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6952
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6953
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6954
Front Subframe Mount: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6955
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6956
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6957
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6958
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6959
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6968
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6969
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6975
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6976
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6977
Rear Subframe: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6978
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6979
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6980
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6981
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6982
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6983
Rear Subframe: Service and Repair
SUBFRAME - REAR
Removal
Vehicles with 4WD
1. Remove the rear axle assembly.
All vehicles
2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Remove the four bolts and position the rear control arm aside.
4. Disconnect the exhaust hanger from the subframe.
5. With an assistant, remove the four bolts and rear subframe.
Installation
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6984
1. With an assistant, position the rear subframe and loosely install the bolts.
2. With a 19 mm (0.76 in) rod, align the rear subframe with the alignment holes.
3. Tighten the rear subframe bolts.
4. Connect the exhaust hanger on the subframe.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6985
5. Position the four rear control arms in the subframe.
- Loosely install the bolts.
Vehicles with 4WD
6. Install the rear axle assembly.
All vehicles
7. Lower the vehicle.
8. NOTE: The vehicles must be at ride height before tightening the bolts.
Tighten the four control arms bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front
Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Front
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
All vehicles 1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Disconnect the brake hose grommet from the bracket.
Vehicles with ABS
3. Disconnect the anti-lock brake harness from the strut and spring assembly.
1 Remove the bolt.
2 Position the bracket aside.
All vehicles
4. Position the stabilizer bar link aside.
1 Remove the upper stabilizer bar link nut.
2 Position the stabilizer bar link aside.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6990
5. Remove the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts.
6. NOTE: Support the strut and spring assembly when removing upper nuts.
Remove the strut and spring assembly. ^
Remove the nuts.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Align the front wheels to specifications.
Disassembly and Assembly
Disassembly and Assembly
1. Remove the strut and spring assembly.
2. WARNING: Always wear safety goggles when using a spring compressors Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal
injury.
Mount the assembly in a suitable holding fixture and use a suitable spring compressor to compress
the front coil spring.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6991
3. Remove the strut piston rod nut.
4. Disassemble the strut and spring assembly.
1 Remove the metal sheet plate.
2 Remove the upper strut mount.
3 Remove the thrust bearing plate.
4 Remove the thrust bearing.
5 Remove the upper spring seat.
6 Remove the upper spring seat isolator.
7 Remove the spring.
8 Remove the dust boot.
9 Remove the rubber bump stopper.
10 Remove the lower spring seat.
5. NOTE: New fasteners must be used when old fasteners are loosened and/or removed.
NOTE: Make sure that an alignment procedure is carried out any time the strut and spring
assembly or the front shock absorber mounting bracket bolts are loosened.
NOTE: Be sure the spring is correctly seated in the insulator.
To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6992
Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Rear
Removal and Installation
NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
NOTE: After removing the wheel, finger-tighten one lug nut to retain the drum if the drum retainers
have been removed.
All vehicles 1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Disconnect the brake line from the wheel cylinder.
^ Remove the brake line bracket bolt.
Vehicles with ABS
3. Position the Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) sensor aside.
1 Remove the ABS sensor bolt and bracket bolts.
2 Position the ABS sensor aside.
All vehicles 4. Support the rear wheel knuckle.
5. Loosen both inside upper and lower arm bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6993
6. Remove the lower shock nut and position aside.
7. NOTE: Note the position of the spring insulator and spring for installation.
Remove the spring. ^
Lower the support to the wheel knuckle.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the brake system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 >
Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Customer Interest Suspension - Front Strut
Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
TSB 09-6-5
04/06/09
NOISE - FRONT STRUT AREA
FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE Some 2001-2009 Escape, 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2009 Mariner
Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a pop, rub, grunt, squeak, and/or creak noise from the front strut area
during slow, lock-to-lock turns such as parking maneuvers. Vehicles built on or before 1/13/2009
may also exhibit a clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise from the front strut area while
driving over a series of bumps and/or rough roads.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Using chassis ears on the front strut mounts is pop, rub, grunt, squeak, creak, clunk, crunch,
thump, and/or knocking noise present from the front strut
area during slow parking lot type maneuvers?
a. No - Procedure does not apply, proceed with normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00
diagnostics.
b. Yes on turns - Boot may be binding, go to Step 2 Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
c. Yes over bumps (built on or before 1/13/2009) - Go to Step 3 Dust Boot Replacement Procedure
and install new dust boot designed for this
concern.
d. Yes over bumps (built after 1/13/09) - Procedure does not apply. Proceed with normal WSM,
Section 204-00 diagnostics.
2. Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
a. Raise the vehicle per WSM, Section 100-02.
b. Reach through the spring and pull the strut dust boot and jounce bumper assembly straight
down, out of the upper spring seat.
c. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust cover.
d. Raise dust cover so that jounce bumper is accessible and apply 360 degrees to the jounce
bumper itself.
e. Slide the dust cover and jounce bumper upward into its original location on the strut.
f. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
3. Dust Boot Replacement Procedure (vehicles built on/before 1/13/2009).
a. Remove front strut per WSM, Section 204-01.
b. Disassemble front strut and replace dust boot with latest level part per WSM, Section 204-01.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 >
Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 7002
C. Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust boot.
(3) Apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself.
d. Assemble front strut and install per WSM, Section 204-01.
e. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090605A 2001-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Apply Grease Following Service
Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test (Do Not Use With
1007D, 18124A)
090605B 2001-2009 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Strut Dust Boots,
Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears
and Road Test Can Be Claimed With Operations C And D (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A)
090605C 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber and, Toe-In
Can Be Claimed With Operation B And D (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090605D 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Correct Caster, Camber And
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 >
Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 7003
Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5,
2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18A179 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5
> Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front Strut
Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
TSB 09-6-5
04/06/09
NOISE - FRONT STRUT AREA
FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE Some 2001-2009 Escape, 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2009 Mariner
Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a pop, rub, grunt, squeak, and/or creak noise from the front strut area
during slow, lock-to-lock turns such as parking maneuvers. Vehicles built on or before 1/13/2009
may also exhibit a clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise from the front strut area while
driving over a series of bumps and/or rough roads.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Using chassis ears on the front strut mounts is pop, rub, grunt, squeak, creak, clunk, crunch,
thump, and/or knocking noise present from the front strut
area during slow parking lot type maneuvers?
a. No - Procedure does not apply, proceed with normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00
diagnostics.
b. Yes on turns - Boot may be binding, go to Step 2 Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
c. Yes over bumps (built on or before 1/13/2009) - Go to Step 3 Dust Boot Replacement Procedure
and install new dust boot designed for this
concern.
d. Yes over bumps (built after 1/13/09) - Procedure does not apply. Proceed with normal WSM,
Section 204-00 diagnostics.
2. Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
a. Raise the vehicle per WSM, Section 100-02.
b. Reach through the spring and pull the strut dust boot and jounce bumper assembly straight
down, out of the upper spring seat.
c. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust cover.
d. Raise dust cover so that jounce bumper is accessible and apply 360 degrees to the jounce
bumper itself.
e. Slide the dust cover and jounce bumper upward into its original location on the strut.
f. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
3. Dust Boot Replacement Procedure (vehicles built on/before 1/13/2009).
a. Remove front strut per WSM, Section 204-01.
b. Disassemble front strut and replace dust boot with latest level part per WSM, Section 204-01.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5
> Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 7009
C. Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust boot.
(3) Apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself.
d. Assemble front strut and install per WSM, Section 204-01.
e. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090605A 2001-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Apply Grease Following Service
Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test (Do Not Use With
1007D, 18124A)
090605B 2001-2009 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Strut Dust Boots,
Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears
and Road Test Can Be Claimed With Operations C And D (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A)
090605C 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber and, Toe-In
Can Be Claimed With Operation B And D (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090605D 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Correct Caster, Camber And
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5
> Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 7010
Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5,
2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18A179 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Specifications > Shock Absorber
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Specifications
Front Shock Absorber Upper Mounting Bracket Nuts 80 Nm
Lower Shock Absorber Nut 85 Nm
Upper Shock Absorber Nut 13 Nm
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Specifications > Shock Absorber > Page 7013
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Specifications
Upper Strut Mount Bolts 80 Nm
Strut-To-Wheel Knuckle Bolts 115 Nm
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
All vehicles 1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Disconnect the brake hose grommet from the bracket.
Vehicles with ABS
3. Disconnect the anti-lock brake harness from the strut and spring assembly.
1 Remove the bolt.
2 Position the bracket aside.
All vehicles
4. Position the stabilizer bar link aside.
1 Remove the upper stabilizer bar link nut.
2 Position the stabilizer bar link aside.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7016
5. Remove the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts.
6. NOTE: Support the strut and spring assembly when removing upper nuts.
Remove the strut and spring assembly. ^
Remove the nuts.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Align the front wheels to specifications.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7017
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
Disassembly and Assembly
1. Remove the strut and spring assembly.
2. WARNING: Always wear safety goggles when using a spring compressors Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal
injury.
Mount the assembly in a suitable holding fixture and use a suitable spring compressor to compress
the front coil spring.
3. Remove the strut piston rod nut.
4. Disassemble the strut and spring assembly.
1 Remove the metal sheet plate.
2 Remove the upper strut mount.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7018
3 Remove the thrust bearing plate.
4 Remove the thrust bearing.
5 Remove the upper spring seat.
6 Remove the upper spring seat isolator.
7 Remove the spring.
8 Remove the dust boot.
9 Remove the rubber bump stopper.
10 Remove the lower spring seat.
5. NOTE: New fasteners must be used when old fasteners are loosened and/or removed.
NOTE: Make sure that an alignment procedure is carried out any time the strut and spring
assembly or the front shock absorber mounting bracket bolts are loosened.
NOTE: Be sure the spring is correctly seated in the insulator.
To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7019
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the upper shock absorber nut.
^ Remove the rear quarter trim panel and upper shock absorber nut.
2. Raise and support the vehicle enough to relax the suspension system.
3. Remove the shock absorber.
^ Remove the lower shock absorber nut.
^ Remove the shock absorber.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Component Information >
Specifications
Trailing Arm: Specifications
Rear Suspension Trailing Arm and Bushing Bolt 85 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection
Wheel Bearing Check
1. Raise the vehicle until the front tires are off the floor.
^ Make sure the wheels are in a straight forward position.
2. Spin the tire by hand to check the wheel bearings for roughness.
NOTE: Make sure the wheel rotates freely and that the brake pads are retraced sufficiently to allow
free movement of the tire and wheel assembly.
3. Grip each front tire at the top and bottom and move the wheel inward and outward while lifting
the weight of the tire off the front wheel bearing.
4. If the tire and wheel (hub) is loose on the spindle, does not rotate freely, or has a rough feeling
when spun, carry out one of the following:
1 On vehicles with inner and outer bearings, inspect the bearings and cups for wear or damage.
Adjust or install new bearing and cups as
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Page 7026
necessary.
2 On vehicles with one sealed bearing install a new wheel hub.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front
Special Tools
Special Tools
Special Tools
Removal
NOTE: Install a new wheel bearing when the wheel hub is removed.
All vehicles 1. Remove the brake disc.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 7029
2. Remove the wheel hub nut.
3. Remove the tie rod end nut.
1 Remove the cotter pin.
2 Remove the nut.
4. Using the special tool, separate the tie rod end from the knuckle.
Vehicles with ABS
5. Remove the bolt and position the anti-lock brake sensor aside.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 7030
6. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
1 Remove the pinch bolt.
2 Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
7. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the wheel knuckle.
^ Position the halfshaft aside and support.
8. Remove the wheel knuckle.
1 Remove the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts.
2 Remove the wheel knuckle.
9. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing and knuckle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 7031
10. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle, after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
11. Remove the snap ring.
12. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
NOTE: The brake disc shield is pressed on.
13. If necessary, remove the brake disc shield.
Installation
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 7032
1. If necessary, install a disc brake shield.
2. Using the special tool, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
3. Install the snap ring.
4. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 7033
5. Install the wheel knuckle.
1 Position the wheel knuckle.
2 Install the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts.
6. Using the special tool, insert the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
7. Install the pinch bolt into the wheel knuckle.
^ Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle.
Vehicles with ABS
8. Install the anti-lock brake sensor and tighten the bolt.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 7034
9. Install the tie rod end into the wheel knuckle.
1 Install the tie rod end nut.
2 Install a new cotter pin.
10. Install the wheel hub nut. 11. Install the brake disc.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 7035
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear
Special Tools
Removal
1. Remove the brake drum.
2. Remove the wheel hub nut.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 7036
3. Using the special tool, remove the wheel hub.
4. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle, after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
5. Remove the snap ring.
6. Using the special tools, remove the wheel bearing outer race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 7037
1. Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
2. Install the snap ring.
3. Using the special tool, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
4. Install the wheel hub nut. 5. Install the brake drum.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information >
Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Front Wheel Hub Nut 290 Nm (214 lb-ft)
Rear Wheel Hub Nut (2WD) 290 Nm (214 lb-ft)
Rear Wheel Hub Nut (4WD) 290 Nm (214 lb-ft)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation
JACKING
WARNING: ^
DO NOT RUN THE ENGINE WHEN JACKING THE VEHICLE. THE WHEELS CONTACTING THE
GROUND COULD CAUSE THE VEHICLE TO MOVE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ MAKE SURE THE JACK AND JACK STANDS ARE CORRECTLY LOCATED TO PREVENT
THE VEHICLE FROM FALLING. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT
IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ WHEEL CHOCKS SHOULD BE USED TO PREVENT THE VEHICLE FROM ROLLING AND
FALLING OFF THE JACK. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
CAUTION: The service jack provided with the vehicle is only intended to be used in an emergency
for changing a deflated tire. Never use the service jack to hoist the vehicle for any other service.
Refer to the Owner Guide when using the jack supplied with the vehicle.
Jacking Points - Front
1. The front jacking point is at the bolt head of the lower control arm.
Jacking Points - Rear
1. The rear jacking points are located on the rear trailing arms.
LIFTING
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Page 7046
Lifting Points
1. The lifting points are part of the uni-body structure.
CAUTION: Damage to the suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if care
is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment
Technical Service Bulletin # 02-1-6 Date: 020121
Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment
Article No. 02-1-6
01/21/02
^ WHEELS - ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT HUNTER G5P9700 - SERVICE TIPS
^ VIBRATION - ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT HUNTER G5P9700 - SERVICE
TIPS
FORD: 1997 THUNDERBIRD 1997-2000 CONTOUR 1997-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, ESCORT,
MUSTANG, TAURUS 2000-2002 FOCUS 2002 THUNDERBIRD 1997-2002 E SERIES,
EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 1999-2002 SUPER DUTY F SERIES
2000-2002 EXCURSION 2001-2002 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT
LINCOLN:
1997-1998 MARK VIII 1997-2002 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 2000-2002 LS 1998-2002
NAVIGATOR 2002 BLACKWOOD
MERCURY: 1997 COUGAR 1997-2000 MYSTIQUE 1997-2002 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE
1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2002 MOUNTAINEER, VILLAGER
ISSUE The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance when using tire/wheel assembly road
force measurement equipment such as the Hunter GSP97OO. This bulletin is authored and
endorsed by Hunter, Michelin, Goodyear, Continental/General, Hankook, Bridgestone/Firestone
and Pirelli. Items addressed are software upgrades, road test (exercise tires), assembly center
verification and warranty restrictions.
This type of equipment can be a valuable tool to improve customer satisfaction when used as a
vibration repair tool. This type of equipment can also provide a high level of customer satisfaction
when used as an assembly too! when the customer has purchased new wheels/tires in the
"Around-the-Wheel" program.
ACTION The Hunter GSP9700/9712 road force measurement tool is NOT to be used for
determining if a tire or wheel meets a specification. It can be used as a service diagnostic tool to
minimize road force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. The tool such as the Hunter GSP97OO
can approximate the low point of the "'1heel and the high point of the tire. This allows the tire to be
matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly road force variation. This will
minimize the contribution to vibration from the tire/wheel assembly.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 306000, 703000
Service Information
NOTE
TRADITIONAL WHEEL BALANCER "MATCH-MOUNTING" OR "WEIGHT OPTIMIZATION"
ACHIEVES WEIGHT MINIMIZATION AND WILL NOT ACHIEVE THE SAME RESULTS.
NOTE
WARRANTY CLAIMS CANNOT BE SUBMITTED FOR TIRE/WHEEL REPLACEMENT BASED ON
HUNTER G5P9700 RESULTS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7051
NOTE
UPGRADING SOFTWARE TO VERSION 2.1 OR GREATER WILL ENHANCE THE
TECHNICIANS CAPABILITY TO MINIMIZE THE ROAD FORCE VARIATION OF THE
TIRE/WHEEL ASSEMBLY. THE VERSION OF SOFTWARE CAN BE IDENTIFIED FROM THE
START-UP SCREEN BY PRESSING THE CENTER SHIFT KEY ONCE (I.E. HAS TWO GREEN
ARROWS) AND SELECTING THE K1 KEY ("IDENTIFY SOFTWARE"). IF THE SYSTEM IS IN
THE BALANCE MODE, THE START-UP SCREEN CAN BE ACCESSED BY PRESSING THE "R"
KEY TWICE (THIS IS JUST TO THE LEFT OF THE START KEY). CONTACT YOUR LOCAL
HUNTER ENGINEERING REPRESENTATIVE TO ORDER SOFTWARE UPGRADES.
1. Check the inflation pressure of all four tires and adjust to the vehicle manufacturers
recommended pressure. The vehicle manufacturers recommended tire pressure for the original
equipment tires can be found on the drivers side door placard.
2. Road test the vehicle on a smooth road for a minimum of 10 miles. Performance of the road test
at highway speeds is preferred.
NOTE
THIS MUST BE PERFORMED TO "EXERCISE" THE TIRES AND ELIMINATE "COLD" FLAT
SPOTTING THAT OCCURS DUE TO SHORT-PERIOD VEHICLE STORAGE OR PARKING. IF
THE VEHICLE'S TIRES ARE NOT EXERCISED FIRST, ACCURACY OF THE ROAD FORCE
MEASUREMENTS CAN VARY SIGNIFICANTLY, EVEN IF THE VEHICLE IS PARKED/STORED
IN ONE LOCATION FOR ONLY A SHORT PERIOD OF TIME (E.G. 20 MINUTES).
3. Perform the road force measurement IMMEDIATELY after exercising the tires. If the road force
measurement cannot be performed immediately, lift all four tires off the ground with a hoist or jack
stands to prevent measurement errors due to further flat spotting.
4. Assembly centering verification MUST be performed and PASSED prior to any road force
measurement.
For those with a software version other than 2.1 the centering verification must be performed
manually.
a. Spin assembly to measure. Record the assembly R1H.
b. Loosen wing-nut.
c. Rotate and reposition assembly and cone/adapter to a different mounting location (180 degrees).
d. Tighten wing-nut.
e. Re-spin to measure. Record the assembly R1H.
f. Compare results obtained in STEP a with those obtained in STEP e.
g. If the difference in assembly R1H measurements is less than 5 lbs., the assembly centering
verification PASSES and technician can proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the
centering verification FAILS proceed to STEP h.
h. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE.
^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application
^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged
5. For those with software version 2.1 the following procedure will lead the technician through a
Centering Check.
a. From the balance mode screen press the center SHIFT KEY ONCE (i.e. has two green arrows).
b. Push the "K1" button to select Perform Centering Check.
c. Follow the instructions.
d. If Centering Check PASSES proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the Centering Check
fails proceed to step e.
e. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE.
^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application
^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged
6. Prior to installing assembly on the vehicle balance assembly utilizing the two-plane dynamic
balancing mode.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7052
Technical Service Bulletin # 00L12 Date: 010101
Information
00L12
SPECIAL FIELD ACTION
All 2001 Model Year Passenger Cars and Light Trucks up to and Including F550 Super Duty
Vehicles Sold in the U.S., U.S. Territories, Mexico, and Canada - Warranty Guide Supplement
Original - January 2001
Dealer Letter
Attachment I ^
Administrative Information
Attachment II ^
Labor Allowances
Attachment III ^
Technical Information
Customer Notification Letter
Supplement # 1, February 5, 2001 - Updated Information
All 2001 Model Year Passenger Cars and Light Trucks up to and Including F550 Super Duty
Vehicles Sold in the U.S., U.S. Territories, Mexico, and Canada - Warranty Guide Supplement
Supplement # 2, February 19, 2001 - Updated Information
All 2001 Model Year Passenger Cars and light Trucks up to and Including F550 Super Duty
Vehicles Sold in the U.S., U.S. Territories, Mexico, and Canada - Warranty Guide Supplement
Special Field Action 00L12, Supplement # 1 dated 2/05/01 - Updated Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7053
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7054
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS
Will not be active for this program.
PLEASE NOTE
Correct all units in dealer inventory prior to delivery to the customer.
DEALER - OWNER CONTACT
An owner list will not be provided for this program.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using DWE.
^ Refer to ACES II manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7055
LABOR ALLOWANCES
Attachment III - Technical Information
SPECIAL FIELD ACTION 00L12 WARRANTY GUIDE SUPPLEMENT
VEHICLES COVERED BY THE NEW TIRE WARRANTY All 2001 model year passenger cars and
light trucks up to and including F550 Super Duty vehicles sold in the U.S., U.S. Territories, Mexico,
and Canada, built through December 31, 2000.
NOTE:
Information regarding tire warranty will be included in the Warranty Guide for vehicles produced
after December 31, 2000.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Obtain a copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement.
NOTE:
Beginning January 2001, dealers will begin to receive vehicle notification letters, which includes the
Warranty Guide Supplement, for in-stock units. In the interim, until notification letters begin to arrive
at the dealership, please make copies of the Warranty Guide Supplement (attached to this
document).
2. Locate the vehicle Warranty Guide (located in the glove compartment).
3. Place a copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement in the Warranty Guide of the vehicle.
PLEASE NOTE:
This procedure is for dealer stock units only. Owners of vehicles previously delivered will receive a
copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement with their notification letter.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7056
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7057
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7058
Supplement # 1 - Information
Supplement # 1, February 5, 2001 - Updated Information
Cover Letter
Dealer Letter
Attachment I ^
Administrative Information
Attachment II ^
Labor Allowances
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7059
Attachment III ^
Technical Information
Customer Notification Letter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7060
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7061
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7062
Supplement # 1 - Attachment I
OASIS
Will not be active for this program.
PLEASE NOTE
Correct all units in dealer inventory prior to delivery to the customer.
DEALER - OWNER CONTACT
An owner list will not be provided for this program.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using DWE.
^ Refer to ACES II manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Supplement # 1 - Attachment II
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7063
LABOR ALLOWANCES
Supplement # 1 - Attachment III
WARRANTY GUIDE SUPPLEMENT
NOTE:
Information regarding tire warranty will be included in the Warranty Guide for vehicles produced
after the end date listed above.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7064
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Obtain a copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement.
NOTE:
Beginning January 2001, dealers will begin to receive vehicle notification letters, which includes the
Warranty Guide Supplement, for in-stock units. In the interim, until notification letters begin to arrive
at the dealership, please make copies of the Warranty Guide Supplement (included in this
document).
2. Locate the vehicle Warranty Guide (located in the glove compartment).
3. Place a copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement in the Warranty Guide of the vehicle.
PLEASE NOTE:
This procedure is for dealer stock units only. Owners of vehicles previously delivered will receive a
copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement with their notification letter.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7065
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7066
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7067
Supplement # 2 - Information
Supplement # 2, February 19, 2001 - Updated Information
Cover Letter
Dealer Letter
Attachment I ^
Administrative Information
Attachment II ^Labor Allowances
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7068
Attachment III ^
Technical Information
Apology Letter
Customer Notification Letter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7069
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7070
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7071
Supplement # 2 - Attachment I
OASIS
Will not be active for this program.
PLEASE NOTE
Correct all units in dealer inventory prior to delivery to the customer.
DEALER - OWNER CONTACT
An owner list will not be provided for this program.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using DWE.
^ Refer to ACES II manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Supplement # 2 - Attachment II
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7072
LABOR ALLOWANCES
Supplement # 2 - Attachment III
WARRANTY GUIDE SUPPLEMENT
NOTE:
Information regarding tire warranty will be included in the Warranty Guide for vehicles produced
after the end date listed above.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7073
1. Obtain a copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement. Note: Beginning January 2001, dealers will
begin to receive vehicle notification letters, which includes the Warranty Guide Supplement, for
in-stock units. In the interim, until notification letters begin to arrive at the dealership, please make
copies of the Warranty Guide Supplement (attached to this document).
2. Locate the vehicle Warranty Guide (located in the glove compartment).
3. Place a copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement in the Warranty Guide of the vehicle.
PLEASE NOTE:
This procedure is for dealer stock units only. Owners of vehicles previously delivered will receive a
copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement with their notification letter.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7074
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7075
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7076
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 7077
Tires: Specifications
Aluminum Max. Radial Runout 0.06 in
Max. Lateral Runout 0.08 in
Steel Max. Radial Runout 0.06 in
Max. Lateral Runout 0.08 in
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > NHTSA00V260001 > Sep > 00 > Recall 00V260001: Wheel Separation From Vehicle
Wheels: Recalls Recall 00V260001: Wheel Separation From Vehicle
Some 4x2 sport utility vehicles not equipped with an antilock braking system may have
inadvertently been built with 4x4 rear hubs instead of 4x2 hubs. If the incorrect hubs are installed
on a 4x2 vehicle, the rear wheels can loosen, or in some cases, separate from the vehicle.
This condition could cause loss of control of the vehicle, increasing the risk of a crash.
Dealers will inspect the rear hubs and, if necessary, replace them. Owner notification began
September 25, 2000. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon
service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Ford at
1-800-392-3673. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety
Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-11-2 > Jun > 02 > Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels
Wheels: Customer Interest Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels
Article No. 02-11-2
06/10/02
BRAKES - EXCESSIVE BRAKE DUST - INFORMATION AND CLEANING TIPS
FORD: 1999-2002 ESCORT 1999-2003 CROWN VICTORIA 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002
ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1999-2003 GRAND MARQUIS
ISSUE
Under normal operating conditions, customers may notice accumulation of brake dust on their
wheels. Some brake dust is inevitable as brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise. The
use of modern friction materials with emphasis on improved performance and environmental
considerations can lead to more dust than in the past.
ACTION
Brake dust can be cleaned by weekly washing with Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A) and a soft
sponge. Heavier deposits can be removed with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A).
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 108000, 301000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 02-11-2 > Jun > 02 > Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on
Wheels
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels
Article No. 02-11-2
06/10/02
BRAKES - EXCESSIVE BRAKE DUST - INFORMATION AND CLEANING TIPS
FORD: 1999-2002 ESCORT 1999-2003 CROWN VICTORIA 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002
ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1999-2003 GRAND MARQUIS
ISSUE
Under normal operating conditions, customers may notice accumulation of brake dust on their
wheels. Some brake dust is inevitable as brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise. The
use of modern friction materials with emphasis on improved performance and environmental
considerations can lead to more dust than in the past.
ACTION
Brake dust can be cleaned by weekly washing with Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A) and a soft
sponge. Heavier deposits can be removed with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A).
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 108000, 301000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 02-1-6 > Jan > 02 > Wheels/Tires - Road Force
Measurement Equipment
Technical Service Bulletin # 02-1-6 Date: 020121
Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment
Article No. 02-1-6
01/21/02
^ WHEELS - ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT HUNTER G5P9700 - SERVICE TIPS
^ VIBRATION - ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT HUNTER G5P9700 - SERVICE
TIPS
FORD: 1997 THUNDERBIRD 1997-2000 CONTOUR 1997-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, ESCORT,
MUSTANG, TAURUS 2000-2002 FOCUS 2002 THUNDERBIRD 1997-2002 E SERIES,
EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 1999-2002 SUPER DUTY F SERIES
2000-2002 EXCURSION 2001-2002 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT
LINCOLN:
1997-1998 MARK VIII 1997-2002 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 2000-2002 LS 1998-2002
NAVIGATOR 2002 BLACKWOOD
MERCURY: 1997 COUGAR 1997-2000 MYSTIQUE 1997-2002 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE
1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2002 MOUNTAINEER, VILLAGER
ISSUE The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance when using tire/wheel assembly road
force measurement equipment such as the Hunter GSP97OO. This bulletin is authored and
endorsed by Hunter, Michelin, Goodyear, Continental/General, Hankook, Bridgestone/Firestone
and Pirelli. Items addressed are software upgrades, road test (exercise tires), assembly center
verification and warranty restrictions.
This type of equipment can be a valuable tool to improve customer satisfaction when used as a
vibration repair tool. This type of equipment can also provide a high level of customer satisfaction
when used as an assembly too! when the customer has purchased new wheels/tires in the
"Around-the-Wheel" program.
ACTION The Hunter GSP9700/9712 road force measurement tool is NOT to be used for
determining if a tire or wheel meets a specification. It can be used as a service diagnostic tool to
minimize road force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. The tool such as the Hunter GSP97OO
can approximate the low point of the "'1heel and the high point of the tire. This allows the tire to be
matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly road force variation. This will
minimize the contribution to vibration from the tire/wheel assembly.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 306000, 703000
Service Information
NOTE
TRADITIONAL WHEEL BALANCER "MATCH-MOUNTING" OR "WEIGHT OPTIMIZATION"
ACHIEVES WEIGHT MINIMIZATION AND WILL NOT ACHIEVE THE SAME RESULTS.
NOTE
WARRANTY CLAIMS CANNOT BE SUBMITTED FOR TIRE/WHEEL REPLACEMENT BASED ON
HUNTER G5P9700 RESULTS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 02-1-6 > Jan > 02 > Wheels/Tires - Road Force
Measurement Equipment > Page 7100
NOTE
UPGRADING SOFTWARE TO VERSION 2.1 OR GREATER WILL ENHANCE THE
TECHNICIANS CAPABILITY TO MINIMIZE THE ROAD FORCE VARIATION OF THE
TIRE/WHEEL ASSEMBLY. THE VERSION OF SOFTWARE CAN BE IDENTIFIED FROM THE
START-UP SCREEN BY PRESSING THE CENTER SHIFT KEY ONCE (I.E. HAS TWO GREEN
ARROWS) AND SELECTING THE K1 KEY ("IDENTIFY SOFTWARE"). IF THE SYSTEM IS IN
THE BALANCE MODE, THE START-UP SCREEN CAN BE ACCESSED BY PRESSING THE "R"
KEY TWICE (THIS IS JUST TO THE LEFT OF THE START KEY). CONTACT YOUR LOCAL
HUNTER ENGINEERING REPRESENTATIVE TO ORDER SOFTWARE UPGRADES.
1. Check the inflation pressure of all four tires and adjust to the vehicle manufacturers
recommended pressure. The vehicle manufacturers recommended tire pressure for the original
equipment tires can be found on the drivers side door placard.
2. Road test the vehicle on a smooth road for a minimum of 10 miles. Performance of the road test
at highway speeds is preferred.
NOTE
THIS MUST BE PERFORMED TO "EXERCISE" THE TIRES AND ELIMINATE "COLD" FLAT
SPOTTING THAT OCCURS DUE TO SHORT-PERIOD VEHICLE STORAGE OR PARKING. IF
THE VEHICLE'S TIRES ARE NOT EXERCISED FIRST, ACCURACY OF THE ROAD FORCE
MEASUREMENTS CAN VARY SIGNIFICANTLY, EVEN IF THE VEHICLE IS PARKED/STORED
IN ONE LOCATION FOR ONLY A SHORT PERIOD OF TIME (E.G. 20 MINUTES).
3. Perform the road force measurement IMMEDIATELY after exercising the tires. If the road force
measurement cannot be performed immediately, lift all four tires off the ground with a hoist or jack
stands to prevent measurement errors due to further flat spotting.
4. Assembly centering verification MUST be performed and PASSED prior to any road force
measurement.
For those with a software version other than 2.1 the centering verification must be performed
manually.
a. Spin assembly to measure. Record the assembly R1H.
b. Loosen wing-nut.
c. Rotate and reposition assembly and cone/adapter to a different mounting location (180 degrees).
d. Tighten wing-nut.
e. Re-spin to measure. Record the assembly R1H.
f. Compare results obtained in STEP a with those obtained in STEP e.
g. If the difference in assembly R1H measurements is less than 5 lbs., the assembly centering
verification PASSES and technician can proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the
centering verification FAILS proceed to STEP h.
h. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE.
^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application
^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged
5. For those with software version 2.1 the following procedure will lead the technician through a
Centering Check.
a. From the balance mode screen press the center SHIFT KEY ONCE (i.e. has two green arrows).
b. Push the "K1" button to select Perform Centering Check.
c. Follow the instructions.
d. If Centering Check PASSES proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the Centering Check
fails proceed to step e.
e. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE.
^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application
^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged
6. Prior to installing assembly on the vehicle balance assembly utilizing the two-plane dynamic
balancing mode.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > NHTSA00V260001 > Sep > 00 > Recall 00V260001: Wheel
Separation From Vehicle
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 00V260001: Wheel Separation From Vehicle
Some 4x2 sport utility vehicles not equipped with an antilock braking system may have
inadvertently been built with 4x4 rear hubs instead of 4x2 hubs. If the incorrect hubs are installed
on a 4x2 vehicle, the rear wheels can loosen, or in some cases, separate from the vehicle.
This condition could cause loss of control of the vehicle, increasing the risk of a crash.
Dealers will inspect the rear hubs and, if necessary, replace them. Owner notification began
September 25, 2000. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon
service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Ford at
1-800-392-3673. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety
Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 02-11-2 > Jun > 02 > Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels
Article No. 02-11-2
06/10/02
BRAKES - EXCESSIVE BRAKE DUST - INFORMATION AND CLEANING TIPS
FORD: 1999-2002 ESCORT 1999-2003 CROWN VICTORIA 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002
ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1999-2003 GRAND MARQUIS
ISSUE
Under normal operating conditions, customers may notice accumulation of brake dust on their
wheels. Some brake dust is inevitable as brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise. The
use of modern friction materials with emphasis on improved performance and environmental
considerations can lead to more dust than in the past.
ACTION
Brake dust can be cleaned by weekly washing with Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A) and a soft
sponge. Heavier deposits can be removed with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A).
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 108000, 301000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 02-1-6 > Jan > 02 > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement
Equipment
Technical Service Bulletin # 02-1-6 Date: 020121
Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment
Article No. 02-1-6
01/21/02
^ WHEELS - ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT HUNTER G5P9700 - SERVICE TIPS
^ VIBRATION - ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT HUNTER G5P9700 - SERVICE
TIPS
FORD: 1997 THUNDERBIRD 1997-2000 CONTOUR 1997-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, ESCORT,
MUSTANG, TAURUS 2000-2002 FOCUS 2002 THUNDERBIRD 1997-2002 E SERIES,
EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 1999-2002 SUPER DUTY F SERIES
2000-2002 EXCURSION 2001-2002 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT
LINCOLN:
1997-1998 MARK VIII 1997-2002 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 2000-2002 LS 1998-2002
NAVIGATOR 2002 BLACKWOOD
MERCURY: 1997 COUGAR 1997-2000 MYSTIQUE 1997-2002 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE
1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2002 MOUNTAINEER, VILLAGER
ISSUE The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance when using tire/wheel assembly road
force measurement equipment such as the Hunter GSP97OO. This bulletin is authored and
endorsed by Hunter, Michelin, Goodyear, Continental/General, Hankook, Bridgestone/Firestone
and Pirelli. Items addressed are software upgrades, road test (exercise tires), assembly center
verification and warranty restrictions.
This type of equipment can be a valuable tool to improve customer satisfaction when used as a
vibration repair tool. This type of equipment can also provide a high level of customer satisfaction
when used as an assembly too! when the customer has purchased new wheels/tires in the
"Around-the-Wheel" program.
ACTION The Hunter GSP9700/9712 road force measurement tool is NOT to be used for
determining if a tire or wheel meets a specification. It can be used as a service diagnostic tool to
minimize road force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. The tool such as the Hunter GSP97OO
can approximate the low point of the "'1heel and the high point of the tire. This allows the tire to be
matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly road force variation. This will
minimize the contribution to vibration from the tire/wheel assembly.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 306000, 703000
Service Information
NOTE
TRADITIONAL WHEEL BALANCER "MATCH-MOUNTING" OR "WEIGHT OPTIMIZATION"
ACHIEVES WEIGHT MINIMIZATION AND WILL NOT ACHIEVE THE SAME RESULTS.
NOTE
WARRANTY CLAIMS CANNOT BE SUBMITTED FOR TIRE/WHEEL REPLACEMENT BASED ON
HUNTER G5P9700 RESULTS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 02-1-6 > Jan > 02 > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement
Equipment > Page 7114
NOTE
UPGRADING SOFTWARE TO VERSION 2.1 OR GREATER WILL ENHANCE THE
TECHNICIANS CAPABILITY TO MINIMIZE THE ROAD FORCE VARIATION OF THE
TIRE/WHEEL ASSEMBLY. THE VERSION OF SOFTWARE CAN BE IDENTIFIED FROM THE
START-UP SCREEN BY PRESSING THE CENTER SHIFT KEY ONCE (I.E. HAS TWO GREEN
ARROWS) AND SELECTING THE K1 KEY ("IDENTIFY SOFTWARE"). IF THE SYSTEM IS IN
THE BALANCE MODE, THE START-UP SCREEN CAN BE ACCESSED BY PRESSING THE "R"
KEY TWICE (THIS IS JUST TO THE LEFT OF THE START KEY). CONTACT YOUR LOCAL
HUNTER ENGINEERING REPRESENTATIVE TO ORDER SOFTWARE UPGRADES.
1. Check the inflation pressure of all four tires and adjust to the vehicle manufacturers
recommended pressure. The vehicle manufacturers recommended tire pressure for the original
equipment tires can be found on the drivers side door placard.
2. Road test the vehicle on a smooth road for a minimum of 10 miles. Performance of the road test
at highway speeds is preferred.
NOTE
THIS MUST BE PERFORMED TO "EXERCISE" THE TIRES AND ELIMINATE "COLD" FLAT
SPOTTING THAT OCCURS DUE TO SHORT-PERIOD VEHICLE STORAGE OR PARKING. IF
THE VEHICLE'S TIRES ARE NOT EXERCISED FIRST, ACCURACY OF THE ROAD FORCE
MEASUREMENTS CAN VARY SIGNIFICANTLY, EVEN IF THE VEHICLE IS PARKED/STORED
IN ONE LOCATION FOR ONLY A SHORT PERIOD OF TIME (E.G. 20 MINUTES).
3. Perform the road force measurement IMMEDIATELY after exercising the tires. If the road force
measurement cannot be performed immediately, lift all four tires off the ground with a hoist or jack
stands to prevent measurement errors due to further flat spotting.
4. Assembly centering verification MUST be performed and PASSED prior to any road force
measurement.
For those with a software version other than 2.1 the centering verification must be performed
manually.
a. Spin assembly to measure. Record the assembly R1H.
b. Loosen wing-nut.
c. Rotate and reposition assembly and cone/adapter to a different mounting location (180 degrees).
d. Tighten wing-nut.
e. Re-spin to measure. Record the assembly R1H.
f. Compare results obtained in STEP a with those obtained in STEP e.
g. If the difference in assembly R1H measurements is less than 5 lbs., the assembly centering
verification PASSES and technician can proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the
centering verification FAILS proceed to STEP h.
h. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE.
^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application
^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged
5. For those with software version 2.1 the following procedure will lead the technician through a
Centering Check.
a. From the balance mode screen press the center SHIFT KEY ONCE (i.e. has two green arrows).
b. Push the "K1" button to select Perform Centering Check.
c. Follow the instructions.
d. If Centering Check PASSES proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the Centering Check
fails proceed to step e.
e. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE.
^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application
^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged
6. Prior to installing assembly on the vehicle balance assembly utilizing the two-plane dynamic
balancing mode.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 02-1-6 > Jan > 02 > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement
Equipment > Page 7120
NOTE
UPGRADING SOFTWARE TO VERSION 2.1 OR GREATER WILL ENHANCE THE
TECHNICIANS CAPABILITY TO MINIMIZE THE ROAD FORCE VARIATION OF THE
TIRE/WHEEL ASSEMBLY. THE VERSION OF SOFTWARE CAN BE IDENTIFIED FROM THE
START-UP SCREEN BY PRESSING THE CENTER SHIFT KEY ONCE (I.E. HAS TWO GREEN
ARROWS) AND SELECTING THE K1 KEY ("IDENTIFY SOFTWARE"). IF THE SYSTEM IS IN
THE BALANCE MODE, THE START-UP SCREEN CAN BE ACCESSED BY PRESSING THE "R"
KEY TWICE (THIS IS JUST TO THE LEFT OF THE START KEY). CONTACT YOUR LOCAL
HUNTER ENGINEERING REPRESENTATIVE TO ORDER SOFTWARE UPGRADES.
1. Check the inflation pressure of all four tires and adjust to the vehicle manufacturers
recommended pressure. The vehicle manufacturers recommended tire pressure for the original
equipment tires can be found on the drivers side door placard.
2. Road test the vehicle on a smooth road for a minimum of 10 miles. Performance of the road test
at highway speeds is preferred.
NOTE
THIS MUST BE PERFORMED TO "EXERCISE" THE TIRES AND ELIMINATE "COLD" FLAT
SPOTTING THAT OCCURS DUE TO SHORT-PERIOD VEHICLE STORAGE OR PARKING. IF
THE VEHICLE'S TIRES ARE NOT EXERCISED FIRST, ACCURACY OF THE ROAD FORCE
MEASUREMENTS CAN VARY SIGNIFICANTLY, EVEN IF THE VEHICLE IS PARKED/STORED
IN ONE LOCATION FOR ONLY A SHORT PERIOD OF TIME (E.G. 20 MINUTES).
3. Perform the road force measurement IMMEDIATELY after exercising the tires. If the road force
measurement cannot be performed immediately, lift all four tires off the ground with a hoist or jack
stands to prevent measurement errors due to further flat spotting.
4. Assembly centering verification MUST be performed and PASSED prior to any road force
measurement.
For those with a software version other than 2.1 the centering verification must be performed
manually.
a. Spin assembly to measure. Record the assembly R1H.
b. Loosen wing-nut.
c. Rotate and reposition assembly and cone/adapter to a different mounting location (180 degrees).
d. Tighten wing-nut.
e. Re-spin to measure. Record the assembly R1H.
f. Compare results obtained in STEP a with those obtained in STEP e.
g. If the difference in assembly R1H measurements is less than 5 lbs., the assembly centering
verification PASSES and technician can proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the
centering verification FAILS proceed to STEP h.
h. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE.
^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application
^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged
5. For those with software version 2.1 the following procedure will lead the technician through a
Centering Check.
a. From the balance mode screen press the center SHIFT KEY ONCE (i.e. has two green arrows).
b. Push the "K1" button to select Perform Centering Check.
c. Follow the instructions.
d. If Centering Check PASSES proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the Centering Check
fails proceed to step e.
e. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE.
^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application
^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged
6. Prior to installing assembly on the vehicle balance assembly utilizing the two-plane dynamic
balancing mode.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > NHTSA00V260001 > Sep > 00 > Recall 00V260001: Wheel
Separation From Vehicle
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 00V260001: Wheel Separation From Vehicle
Some 4x2 sport utility vehicles not equipped with an antilock braking system may have
inadvertently been built with 4x4 rear hubs instead of 4x2 hubs. If the incorrect hubs are installed
on a 4x2 vehicle, the rear wheels can loosen, or in some cases, separate from the vehicle.
This condition could cause loss of control of the vehicle, increasing the risk of a crash.
Dealers will inspect the rear hubs and, if necessary, replace them. Owner notification began
September 25, 2000. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon
service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Ford at
1-800-392-3673. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety
Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 7125
Wheels: Specifications
Aluminum Max. Radial Runout 0.06 in
Max. Lateral Runout 0.08 in
Steel Max. Radial Runout 0.06 in
Max. Lateral Runout 0.08 in
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Straightening Wheels, Rims or Components
Wheels: Service and Repair Straightening Wheels, Rims or Components
1. NOTE: Do not heat wheels in an attempt to soften them for straightening to repair damage. The
special alloy used in these wheels is heat-treated.
Uncontrolled heating from welding affects the properties of the material.
Do not weld the wheels for any reason.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Straightening Wheels, Rims or Components > Page 7128
Wheels: Service and Repair Wheel Leaks
1. Pinhole leaks in cast aluminum wheels compromise the wheel integrity. Install a new wheel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection
Wheel Bearing Check
1. Raise the vehicle until the front tires are off the floor.
^ Make sure the wheels are in a straight forward position.
2. Spin the tire by hand to check the wheel bearings for roughness.
NOTE: Make sure the wheel rotates freely and that the brake pads are retraced sufficiently to allow
free movement of the tire and wheel assembly.
3. Grip each front tire at the top and bottom and move the wheel inward and outward while lifting
the weight of the tire off the front wheel bearing.
4. If the tire and wheel (hub) is loose on the spindle, does not rotate freely, or has a rough feeling
when spun, carry out one of the following:
1 On vehicles with inner and outer bearings, inspect the bearings and cups for wear or damage.
Adjust or install new bearing and cups as
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Page 7132
necessary.
2 On vehicles with one sealed bearing install a new wheel hub.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front
Special Tools
Special Tools
Special Tools
Removal
NOTE: Install a new wheel bearing when the wheel hub is removed.
All vehicles 1. Remove the brake disc.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 7135
2. Remove the wheel hub nut.
3. Remove the tie rod end nut.
1 Remove the cotter pin.
2 Remove the nut.
4. Using the special tool, separate the tie rod end from the knuckle.
Vehicles with ABS
5. Remove the bolt and position the anti-lock brake sensor aside.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 7136
6. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
1 Remove the pinch bolt.
2 Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
7. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the wheel knuckle.
^ Position the halfshaft aside and support.
8. Remove the wheel knuckle.
1 Remove the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts.
2 Remove the wheel knuckle.
9. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing and knuckle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 7137
10. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle, after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
11. Remove the snap ring.
12. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
NOTE: The brake disc shield is pressed on.
13. If necessary, remove the brake disc shield.
Installation
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 7138
1. If necessary, install a disc brake shield.
2. Using the special tool, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
3. Install the snap ring.
4. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 7139
5. Install the wheel knuckle.
1 Position the wheel knuckle.
2 Install the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts.
6. Using the special tool, insert the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
7. Install the pinch bolt into the wheel knuckle.
^ Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle.
Vehicles with ABS
8. Install the anti-lock brake sensor and tighten the bolt.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 7140
9. Install the tie rod end into the wheel knuckle.
1 Install the tie rod end nut.
2 Install a new cotter pin.
10. Install the wheel hub nut. 11. Install the brake disc.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 7141
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear
Special Tools
Removal
1. Remove the brake drum.
2. Remove the wheel hub nut.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 7142
3. Using the special tool, remove the wheel hub.
4. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle, after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
5. Remove the snap ring.
6. Using the special tools, remove the wheel bearing outer race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 7143
1. Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
2. Install the snap ring.
3. Using the special tool, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
4. Install the wheel hub nut. 5. Install the brake drum.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information
> Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Front Wheel Hub Nut 290 Nm (214 lb-ft)
Rear Wheel Hub Nut (2WD) 290 Nm (214 lb-ft)
Rear Wheel Hub Nut (4WD) 290 Nm (214 lb-ft)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information >
Specifications
Wheel Fastener: Specifications
Wheel Nuts (all wheels) 133 Nm (98 lb-ft)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front wheel bearing.
2. Press out the wheel studs. 3. To install. reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 7153
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel bearing.
2. Press out the wheel studs. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Locations
Accumulator HVAC: Locations
Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Locations >
Page 7158
Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Locations >
Page 7159
Accumulator HVAC: Service Precautions
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Locations >
Page 7160
Accumulator HVAC: Description and Operation
NOTE: Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air
conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed
A/C compressor or damage to the suction accumulator.
The suction accumulator is mounted to the A/C accumulator bracket. The inlet tube of the suction
accumulator is connected to the A/C evaporator outlet tube. The outlet tube is connected to the A/C
manifold and tube assembly.
After entering the inlet of the suction accumulator, heavier oil-laden refrigerant contacts an
internally mounted dome (which serves as an umbrella) and drips down onto the bottom of the
canister.
^ A small diameter oil bleed hole, in the bottom of the vapor return tube, allows the accumulated
heavier liquid refrigerant and oil mixture to re-enter the compressor suction line at a controlled rate.
^ As the heavier mixture passes through the small diameter liquid bleed hole, it has a second
chance to vaporize and recirculate through the A/C compressor without causing compressor
damage due to slugging.
^ A fine mesh screened filter fits tightly around the bottom of the vapor return tube to filter out
refrigerant system contaminant particles.
^ A desiccant bag is mounted inside the canister to absorb any moisture which may be in the
refrigerant system.
^ A fitting located on the top of the suction accumulator is used to attach the A/C cycling switch. A
long-travel Schrader-type valve stem core is installed in the fitting so that the A/C cycling switch
can be removed without discharging the A/C system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Locations >
Page 7161
Accumulator HVAC: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Perform the Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure. 2. Remove the A/C cycling
switch.
3. Remove the nuts from the A/C manifold and tube mounting bracket.
4. Disconnect the A/C manifold and tube from the suction accumulator.
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
5. Remove the two suction accumulator mounting bracket nuts.
6. Disconnect the suction line from the A/C evaporator core.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Locations >
Page 7162
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
7. Remove the suction accumulator.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Lubricate the new suction accumulator with the correct amount of PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C
or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. See: Refrigerant Oil Addition.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Locations >
Page 7163
Accumulator HVAC: Tools and Equipment
Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool Set
Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool Set
Disconnect Tool, Spring Lock Coupling
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Conditioning Switch > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Air Conditioning Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Remove the function selector switch knob.
3. Remove the function selector switch.
^ Push in the locking tab on one side of the function selector switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Align the function selector switch locking tabs with the holes in the housing and press the
function selector into the housing. Verify that both locking tabs are secured.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Defrost Vacuum Control Motor
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Defrost Vacuum Control Motor
REMOVAL
1. Remove the vacuum control motor.
1 Disconnect the vacuum line.
2 Remove the two screws.
3 Disconnect the vacuum control motor from the door lever.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Defrost Vacuum Control Motor > Page 7172
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Footwell Vent Vacuum Control Motor
REMOVAL
1. Remove the vacuum control motor.
1 Disconnect the vacuum line.
2 Remove the two screws.
3 Disconnect the vacuum control motor from the door lever.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Defrost Vacuum Control Motor > Page 7173
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Outside Air Inlet Vacuum Control Motor
REMOVAL
1. Remove the vacuum control motor.
1 Disconnect the vacuum line.
2 Remove the two screws.
3 Disconnect the vacuum control motor from the door lever.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Defrost Vacuum Control Motor > Page 7174
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Panel Vent Vacuum Control Motor
REMOVAL
1. Remove the vacuum control motor.
1 Disconnect the vacuum line.
2 Remove the two screws.
3 Disconnect the vacuum control motor from the door lever.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Cable, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Air Door Cable: Service and Repair
Alignment Pin, Temperature Blend Door
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Lower the glove compartment door.
^ Press the glove compartment release tabs inward while pulling downward on the glove
compartment.
3. Disconnect the temperature blend door control cable.
1 Align the locator holes and insert the special tool.
2 Release the locking tab.
3 Remove the temperature blend door control cable from the blend door shaft.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Cable, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 7178
4. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
^ Disconnect the electrical connectors.
5. Depress the three tabs and remove the temperature blend door control cable.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Rotate the gear to align the locking tab with the notch in the gear before installing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Defroster Duct
Air Duct: Service and Repair Defroster Duct
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to: Body and Frame, Interior Trim, Dashboard/Instrument
Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and
Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service
and Repair/Removal and Installation
2. Remove the screws and the retaining guides.
3. Remove the screws and remove the duct.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Defroster Duct > Page 7183
Air Duct: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Air Distribution Ducts
REMOVAL
1. Remove the defroster duct.
2. Remove the screws from the front side of the instrument panel.
3. Remove the screw for the left vent duct.
4. Remove the screw for the right vent duct.
5. Remove the screws for the center vent duct and remove the vent duct.
INSTALLATION
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Defroster Duct > Page 7184
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Defroster Duct > Page 7185
Air Duct: Service and Repair Rear Footwell Duct
REMOVAL
1. Remove the driver and front passenger seats.
2. Remove the utility compartment.
1 Remove the four plastic fasteners.
2 Remove the utility compartment.
^ Disconnect the electrical connection.
3. Remove LH and RH front door scuff plates. 4. Remove LH and RH lower A-pillar panels.
5. Remove the LH foot rest. 6. Pull back the carpet to gain access to the rear floor vent.
7. Remove the wire harness pin-type retainer.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Defroster Duct > Page 7186
8. Remove the floor duct pin-type retainers and remove the duct.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust
Air Register: Customer Interest A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust
TSB 04-25-13
12/27/04
SERVICEABILITY OF INSTRUMENT PANEL REGISTER VENTS
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape
2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 vehicles may exhibit instrument panel (IP) register vents that are difficult
to adjust or are limited in their adjustability.
ACTION Register vents for the IP center finish panel can now be ordered and replaced individually.
Replacement of an entire center finish panel assembly to correct a register vent condition is no
longer necessary. The IP outboard register vents can be replaced similarly without replacing the
entire housing assembly, however, the outboard vent must be ordered as an assembly with the
housing. Refer to the following Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
CENTER REGISTER REPLACEMENT
1. Remove center finish panel. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-12.
2. With center finish panel removed, release the register retention tabs and remove the register.
3. Replace register with Part Number YL8Z-19893-CAA left or YL8Z-19893-CAB right.
4. Reinstall the center finish panel.
OUTBOARD REGISTER REPLACEMENT
1. Tilt the vehicle's outboard register to the down most position. Pull the top of the register out until
it is released from the housing.
2. Remove the new register from the service replacement register housing assembly (base #
-19893-), as described in Step 1.
3. Snap the new register into the vehicle's existing outboard register housing.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042513A Register Replace Right 0.2 Hr.
Outboard Vent Only
042513B Register Replace Left 0.2 Hr.
Outboard Vent Only
042513C Register Replace Both 0.4 Hr.
Center Vents (Includes Time To Remove And
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust > Page
7195
Install Center Finish Panel)
042513D Register Replace All Vents 0.4 Hr.
(Includes Time To Remove And Install Center Finish Panel)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19893 41
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to
Adjust
Air Register: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust
TSB 04-25-13
12/27/04
SERVICEABILITY OF INSTRUMENT PANEL REGISTER VENTS
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape
2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 vehicles may exhibit instrument panel (IP) register vents that are difficult
to adjust or are limited in their adjustability.
ACTION Register vents for the IP center finish panel can now be ordered and replaced individually.
Replacement of an entire center finish panel assembly to correct a register vent condition is no
longer necessary. The IP outboard register vents can be replaced similarly without replacing the
entire housing assembly, however, the outboard vent must be ordered as an assembly with the
housing. Refer to the following Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
CENTER REGISTER REPLACEMENT
1. Remove center finish panel. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-12.
2. With center finish panel removed, release the register retention tabs and remove the register.
3. Replace register with Part Number YL8Z-19893-CAA left or YL8Z-19893-CAB right.
4. Reinstall the center finish panel.
OUTBOARD REGISTER REPLACEMENT
1. Tilt the vehicle's outboard register to the down most position. Pull the top of the register out until
it is released from the housing.
2. Remove the new register from the service replacement register housing assembly (base #
-19893-), as described in Step 1.
3. Snap the new register into the vehicle's existing outboard register housing.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042513A Register Replace Right 0.2 Hr.
Outboard Vent Only
042513B Register Replace Left 0.2 Hr.
Outboard Vent Only
042513C Register Replace Both 0.4 Hr.
Center Vents (Includes Time To Remove And
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to
Adjust > Page 7201
Install Center Finish Panel)
042513D Register Replace All Vents 0.4 Hr.
(Includes Time To Remove And Install Center Finish Panel)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19893 41
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Locations
Electrical Components
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Blower Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7207
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7208
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7209
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7210
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7211
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7212
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7213
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7214
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7215
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7216
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7217
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7218
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7219
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7220
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7221
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7222
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7223
Blower Motor: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7224
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7225
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7226
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7227
Blower Motor: Electrical Diagrams
DETAILED DIAGRAMS
Diagram 412-00-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7228
Diagram 412-00-00-2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7229
Diagram 412-00-00-3
RELATED DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7230
Diagram 413-00-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7231
Blower Motor: Description and Operation
Blower Motor
The blower motor pulls air from the air inlet and forces it into the heater core housing where it is
mixed and distributed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7232
Blower Motor: Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding this component please refer to:
Heating and Air Conditioning; Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Blower Motor
Blower Motor: Service and Repair Blower Motor
REMOVAL
1. Remove the RH A-pillar lower trim.
2. Remove the blower motor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the washer screws.
3 Remove the blower motor and cover, lower the assembly from the housing.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Blower Motor > Page 7235
Blower Motor: Service and Repair Blower Motor Wheel
Blower Motor Wheel
REMOVAL
1. Remove the blower motor.
2. Remove the blower motor wheel retainer from the motor shaft, and remove the wheel.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Install a new blower wheel retainer.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations
Blower Motor Relay: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 7239
Electrical Components
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 7240
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 7241
Blower Motor Relay: Description and Operation
The blower motor relay supplies voltage to the blower motor and is activated when the key is ON
and the function selector switch is in any position besides OFF. The blower motor relay is located
under the instrument panel next to the steering column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 7242
Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 7243
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 7247
Blower Motor Resistor: Description and Operation
The four-speed operation of the blower motor is achieved through the blower motor switch resistor
and contains a thermal limiter which is used as a temperature protecting fuse. The assembly is
located on the passenger side on the evaporator core housing behind the glove compartment.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Remove the blower motor switch knob.
3. Remove the blower motor switch.
^ Depress the locking tab.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair
NOTE: The air distribution system of this vehicle cannot be equipped with a cabin air filter.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications
General Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Compressor Clutch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7260
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7261
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7262
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7263
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7264
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7265
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7266
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7267
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7268
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7269
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7270
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7271
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7272
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7273
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7274
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7275
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7276
Compressor Clutch: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7277
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7278
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7279
A/C Compressor Clutch Assy.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7280
Compressor Clutch: Electrical Diagrams
DETAILED DIAGRAMS
Diagram 412-00-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7281
Diagram 412-00-00-2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7282
Diagram 412-00-00-3
RELATED DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7283
Diagram 413-00-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 7284
Compressor Clutch: Service Precautions
CAUTION: Do not use air tools. The A/C clutch field coil can be easily damaged.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 7285
Compressor Clutch: Description and Operation
A/C compressor and Clutch Assembly
NOTE:
^ Internal A/C compressor components are not repaired separately. Install a new FS-10 A/C
compressor only as an assembly. The A/C clutch, A/C clutch pulley, A/C clutch field coil and the
shaft seals are repairable.
^ Installation of a new suction accumulator is not required when repairing the air conditioning
system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C
compressor or damage to the suction accumulator.
The FS-10 A/C compressor has the following characteristics:
^ a 10-cylinder swashplate design utilizing the tangential design mount
^ displacement of 170 cc (10.4 cubic inches)
^ A one-piece lip-type seal (repaired from the front of the A/C compressor) is used to seal it at the
shaft opening in the assembly.
^ Five double-acting pistons operate within the cylinder assembly. The pistons are actuated by a
swashplate that changes the rotating action of the shaft to a reciprocating force.
^ Reed-type discharge valves are located between the cylinder assembly and the head at each end
of the A/C compressor.
^ The A/C compressor uses PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B. This oil contains special additives necessary for the A/C
compressor.
^ The A/C compressor oil from vehicles equipped with an FS-10 A/C compressor may have a dark
color while maintaining a normal oil viscosity. This is normal for this A/C compressor because
carbon from the piston rings will discolor the oil.
Compressor Clutch Components
The magnetic A/C clutch has the following characteristics:
^ It drives the compressor shaft.
^ When battery positive voltage (B+) is applied to the A/C clutch field coil, the clutch disc and hub
assembly is drawn toward the A/C clutch pulley.
^ The magnetic force locks the clutch disc and hub assembly and the A/C clutch pulley together as
one unit, causing the compressor shaft to rotate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 7286
^ When B+ is removed from the A/C clutch field coil, springs in the clutch disc and hub assembly
move the clutch disc away from the A/C clutch pulley.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 7287
Compressor Clutch: Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding this component please refer to:
Heating and Air Conditioning; Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 7288
Compressor Clutch: Adjustments
1. Check the A/C clutch air gap at three equally-spaced places between the clutch hub and the A/C
clutch pulley.
Compressor Clutch Components
2. Remove the A/C clutch. Add or remove spacers between the A/C clutch and the compressor
shaft until clearance is within specification.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 7289
Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the A/C compressor.
2. Using the special tool, remove the A/C clutch bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 7290
Compressor Clutch Components
3. Remove the disk and hub assembly and the A/C clutch hub spacer.
1 Thread an 8 x 1.25 mm bolt into the A/C clutch to force it from the compressor shaft.
2 Lift the disk and hub assembly and the A/C clutch hub spacer from the compressor shaft.
4. Remove the pulley snap ring.
5. Remove the A/C clutch pulley.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 7291
6. Remove the A/C clutch field coil.
1 Note the location of the A/C clutch field coil electrical connector.
2 Using the special tools, remove the A/C clutch field coil.
CAUTION: Do not use air tools. The A/C clutch field coil can be easily damaged.
INSTALLATION
1. Clean the A/C clutch field coil and pulley mounting surfaces.
2. Using the special tools, install the A/C clutch field coil.
CAUTION: Do not use air tools. The A/C clutch field coil can be easily damaged.
NOTE: Position the clutch field coil on the A/C compressor as previously marked.
3. Install the A/C clutch pulley.
NOTE: The A/C clutch pulley is a tight fit on the A/C compressor head. It must be correctly aligned
during installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 7292
4. Install the pulley snap ring with the bevel side out.
5. Place one nominal thickness A/C clutch hub spacer inside the clutch hub spline opening.
6. Install the disk and hub assembly.
7. Using the special tool, install and tighten the A/C clutch bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 7293
Compressor Clutch Components
8. Measure and adjust the clutch air gap by removing or adding A/C clutch hub spacers. 9. Install
the A/C compressor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 7294
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Locations
Electrical Components
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views
A/C Compressor Clutch Assy.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 7300
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 7301
Compressor Clutch Coil: Service Precautions
CAUTION: Do not use air tools. The A/C clutch field coil can be easily damaged.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 7302
Compressor Clutch Coil: Description and Operation
A/C compressor and Clutch Assembly
NOTE:
^ Internal A/C compressor components are not repaired separately. Install a new FS-10 A/C
compressor only as an assembly. The A/C clutch, A/C clutch pulley, A/C clutch field coil and the
shaft seals are repairable.
^ Installation of a new suction accumulator is not required when repairing the air conditioning
system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C
compressor or damage to the suction accumulator.
The FS-10 A/C compressor has the following characteristics:
^ a 10-cylinder swashplate design utilizing the tangential design mount
^ displacement of 170 cc (10.4 cubic inches)
^ A one-piece lip-type seal (repaired from the front of the A/C compressor) is used to seal it at the
shaft opening in the assembly.
^ Five double-acting pistons operate within the cylinder assembly. The pistons are actuated by a
swashplate that changes the rotating action of the shaft to a reciprocating force.
^ Reed-type discharge valves are located between the cylinder assembly and the head at each end
of the A/C compressor.
^ The A/C compressor uses PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B. This oil contains special additives necessary for the A/C
compressor.
^ The A/C compressor oil from vehicles equipped with an FS-10 A/C compressor may have a dark
color while maintaining a normal oil viscosity. This is normal for this A/C compressor because
carbon from the piston rings will discolor the oil.
Compressor Clutch Components
The magnetic A/C clutch has the following characteristics:
^ It drives the compressor shaft.
^ When battery positive voltage (B+) is applied to the A/C clutch field coil, the clutch disc and hub
assembly is drawn toward the A/C clutch pulley.
^ The magnetic force locks the clutch disc and hub assembly and the A/C clutch pulley together as
one unit, causing the compressor shaft to rotate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 7303
^ When B+ is removed from the A/C clutch field coil, springs in the clutch disc and hub assembly
move the clutch disc away from the A/C clutch pulley.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 7304
Compressor Clutch Coil: Service and Repair
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the A/C compressor.
2. Using the special tool, remove the A/C clutch bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 7305
Compressor Clutch Components
3. Remove the disk and hub assembly and the A/C clutch hub spacer.
1 Thread an 8 x 1.25 mm bolt into the A/C clutch to force it from the compressor shaft.
2 Lift the disk and hub assembly and the A/C clutch hub spacer from the compressor shaft.
4. Remove the pulley snap ring.
5. Remove the A/C clutch pulley.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 7306
6. Remove the A/C clutch field coil.
1 Note the location of the A/C clutch field coil electrical connector.
2 Using the special tools, remove the A/C clutch field coil.
CAUTION: Do not use air tools. The A/C clutch field coil can be easily damaged.
INSTALLATION
1. Clean the A/C clutch field coil and pulley mounting surfaces.
2. Using the special tools, install the A/C clutch field coil.
CAUTION: Do not use air tools. The A/C clutch field coil can be easily damaged.
NOTE: Position the clutch field coil on the A/C compressor as previously marked.
3. Install the A/C clutch pulley.
NOTE: The A/C clutch pulley is a tight fit on the A/C compressor head. It must be correctly aligned
during installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 7307
4. Install the pulley snap ring with the bevel side out.
5. Place one nominal thickness A/C clutch hub spacer inside the clutch hub spline opening.
6. Install the disk and hub assembly.
7. Using the special tool, install and tighten the A/C clutch bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 7308
Compressor Clutch Components
8. Measure and adjust the clutch air gap by removing or adding A/C clutch hub spacers. 9. Install
the A/C compressor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 7309
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Pulley > Component
Information > Diagrams
A/C Compressor Clutch Assy.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component
Information > Service Precautions
Compressor Shaft Seal: Service Precautions
CAUTION: To prevent refrigerant system contamination, do not allow dirt or other foreign materials
to enter the A/C compressor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Page 7316
Compressor Shaft Seal: Service and Repair
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the disk and hub assembly from the A/C compressor.
2. Using the special tool, remove the shaft seal felt from the nose of the A/C compressor. 3. Clean
the compressor nose area.
CAUTION: To prevent refrigerant system contamination, do not allow dirt or other foreign materials
to enter the A/C compressor.
4. Using the special tool, remove the shaft seal snap ring.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Page 7317
5. Using the special tool, remove the shaft seal from the A/C compressor.
INSTALLATION
1. Clean the A/C compressor nose area.
CAUTION: To prevent refrigerant system contamination, do not allow dirt or other foreign materials
to enter the A/C compressor.
2. Lubricate the shaft seal and special tool with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent
meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. Place the
shaft seal on the special tool.
3. Position the special tool, with the shaft seal, over the A/C compressor shaft.
4. Using the special tool, push the shaft seal onto the A/C compressor shaft until seated.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Page 7318
5. Using the special tool, install the shaft seal snap ring. 6. Carry out the A/C compressor external
leak test. See: Testing and Inspection/External Leak Test
7. Using the special tool, install the shaft seal felt. 8. Install the disk and hub assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Page 7319
Compressor Shaft Seal: Tools and Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 7323
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Compressor Clutch Relay
Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Compressor Clutch Relay
The A/C compressor clutch relay supplies voltage to the A/C compressor clutch and is located in
the Battery Junction Box (BJB). The Power Control Module (PCM) can interrupt the A/C
compressor operation through the A/C compressor clutch relay under the following conditions:
^ during engine start-up
^ Wide Open Throttle (WOT)
^ low engine idle conditions
^ excessively high engine temperatures
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Compressor Clutch Relay > Page 7326
Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Compressor Cut-Off Relay
WIDE OPEN THROTTLE A/C CUT-OFF
The Wide Open Throttle A/C Cut-Off Relay (may be referred to as the A/C clutch relay) is normally
open. There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch or EATC Module and the A/C
clutch. The PCM will receive a signal indicating that A/C is requested (for some applications, this
message is sent through the BUS + and BUS - circuits). When A/C is requested, the PCM will
check other A/C related inputs that are available (such as ACP (SW), A/C Cycling Switch (ACCS)).
If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK (such as coolant
temperature, engine rpm, throttle position), the PCM will ground the Wide Open Throttle A/C
(WAC) output, closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/C clutch.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Page 7327
Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Page 7328
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure
voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the
relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is
12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Fitting HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions
Compressor Fitting HVAC: Service Precautions
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Fitting HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 7332
Compressor Fitting HVAC: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the nuts from the A/C manifold and tube mounting bracket.
2. Disconnect the A/C manifold and tube from the suction accumulator.
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
3. Remove the front bumper cover.
4. Remove the nut and disconnect the A/C manifold and tube to A/C condenser core air
conditioning line (peanut) fitting.
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
5. Raise and support the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Fitting HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 7333
6. Remove the RH splash shield.
7. If equipped, disconnect the engine block heater electrical connector.
8. Disconnect the A/C clutch field coil electrical connector.
9. Remove the A/C manifold and tube assembly bolt.
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
NOTE: Vehicles with 2.0L Zetec engine shown, vehicles with 3.0L (4V) engine similar.
10. Remove the A/C manifold and tube assembly through the bottom of the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Fitting HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 7334
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
^ Apply Pipe Sealant with Teflon (R) D8AZ-19554-A or equivalent meeting Ford specifications
WSK-M2G350-A2 and ESR-M18P7-A to the threads of the A/C manifold retaining bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Fitting HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 7335
Compressor Fitting HVAC: Tools and Equipment
Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool (5/8 Inch)
Disconnect Tool, Spring Lock Coupling
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Fitting HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 7336
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Locations
Condenser HVAC: Locations
Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page
7340
Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page
7341
Condenser HVAC: Service Precautions
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page
7342
Condenser HVAC: Description and Operation
NOTE: Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air
conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed
A/C compressor or damage to the suction accumulator.
The A/C condenser core has the following characteristics:
^ It is an aluminum fin-and-tube design heat exchanger located in front of the vehicle radiator.
^ It cools compressed refrigerant gas by allowing air to pass over the fins and tubes to extract heat
and by condensing gas to liquid refrigerant as it is cooled.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page
7343
Condenser HVAC: Testing and Inspection
ON-VEHICLE LEAK TEST
1. Perform the Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure. 2. Disconnect the suspect A/C
evaporator core or A/C condenser core from the A/C system.
NOTE: DO NOT leak test an A/C evaporator core with the suction accumulator/drier attached to the
core tubes.
3. Clean the spring lock couplings. 4. Connect the appropriate test fittings from the A/C Test Fitting
Set to the evaporator or condenser tube connections. 5. Connect the red and blue hoses from the
manifold gauge set to the test fittings on the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. Connect
the
yellow hose to a known good vacuum pump.
NOTE: The automatic shut-off valves on some gauge set hoses do not open when connected to
the test fittings. If available, use hoses without shut-off valves. If hoses with shut-off valves are
used, make sure the valve opens when attached to the test fittings or install an adapter which will
activate the valve. The test is not valid if the shut-off valve does not open.
6. Open both gauge set valves and start the vacuum pump. Allow the vacuum pump to operate for
a minimum of 45 minutes after the gauge set low
pressure gauge indicates 101 kPa (30 in-Hg). The 45-minute evacuation is necessary to remove
any refrigerant from oil left in the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. If the refrigerant is
not completely removed from the oil, outgassing will degrade the vacuum and appear as a
refrigerant leak.
7. If the low pressure gauge reading will not drop to 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) when the valves on the
gauge and manifold set are open and the vacuum
pump is operating, close the gauge set valves and observe the low pressure gauge. If the pressure
rises rapidly to zero, a large leak is indicated. Recheck the test fitting connections and gauge set
connections before installing a new A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core.
8. After evacuating for 45 minutes, close the gauge set valves and stop the vacuum pump.
Observe the low pressure gauge; it should remain at the
101 kPa (30 in-Hg) mark. ^
If the low pressure gauge reading rises 34 or more kPa (10 or more in-Hg) of vacuum from the 101
kPa (30 in-Hg) position in 10 minutes, a leak is indicated.
^ If a very small leak is suspected, wait 30 minutes and observe the vacuum gauge.
^ If a small amount of vacuum is lost, operate the vacuum pump with gauge valves open for an
additional 30 minutes to remove any remaining refrigerant from the oil in the A/C evaporator core or
A/C condenser core. Then recheck for loss of vacuum.
^ If a very small leak is suspected, allow the system to sit overnight with vacuum applied and check
for vacuum loss.
9. If the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core does leak, as verified by the above procedure,
install a new A/C evaporator core or A/C
condenser core.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page
7344
Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
NOTE:
^ Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air conditioning
system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C
compressor or damage to the suction accumulator.
^ If an A/C condenser core leak is suspected, the A/C condenser core must be leak tested before it
is removed from the vehicle.
1. Perform the Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure. 2. Remove the front bumper
cover.
3. Remove the nuts from the two condenser core air conditioning line (peanut) fittings.
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
4. Remove the screws and the A/C condenser core brackets. 5. Remove the A/C condenser core.
NOTE: When removing the A/C condenser core, disconnect the two air conditioning line (peanut)
fittings from the A/C condenser core.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Lubricate the new A/C condenser core with the correct amount of PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C
or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. See: Refrigerant Oil Addition.
^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page
7345
Condenser HVAC: Tools and Equipment
Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool Set
Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool Set
Disconnect Tool, Spring Lock Coupling
Heater Hose Disconnect Tool
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page
7346
Special Tool(s)
Set, A/C Fittings
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions
Control Assembly: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7351
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7352
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7353
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7354
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7355
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7356
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7357
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7358
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7359
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7360
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7361
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7362
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7363
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7364
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7365
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7366
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7367
Control Assembly: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7368
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7369
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7370
Control Assembly: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7371
Control Assembly: Electrical Diagrams
DETAILED DIAGRAMS
Diagram 412-00-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7372
Diagram 412-00-00-2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7373
Diagram 412-00-00-3
RELATED DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7374
Diagram 413-00-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Page 7375
Control Assembly: Description and Operation
The manual climate control system heats or cools the vehicle interior depending on the position of
the function selector switch and the temperature selected. The position of the function selector
switch determines heating or cooling and air distribution. The temperature control setting
determines air temperature.
The manual climate control system components include:
^ blower motor switch resistor
^ vacuum reservoir tank
^ climate control assembly
^ blower motor relay
^ A/C compressor clutch relay
^ footwell vent vacuum control motor
^ defrost vacuum control motor
^ panel vent vacuum control motor
^ outside air inlet vacuum control motor
^ temperature blend door control cable
The climate control assembly has three system controls:
^ The A/C heater function selector switch combines a vacuum selector valve with two electrical
switches to supply battery positive voltage (B+) to the A/C clutch circuit and the blower motor
control circuit.
^ The temperature selection is accomplished through cable-controlled positioning of the
temperature blend door located in the heater core housing.
^ The blower motor switch controls the blower motor speed by adding or bypassing resistors in the
heater blower motor switch resistor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > System Testing
Control Assembly: Testing and Inspection System Testing
For further information regarding this component please refer to :
Heating and Air Conditioning; Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > System Testing > Page 7378
Control Assembly: Testing and Inspection Component Tests
Function Selector Switch Vacuum Connector
Function Selector Switch Vavuum Application Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Main Climate Control
Control Assembly: Service and Repair Main Climate Control
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Remove the four screws and the climate control assembly.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Main Climate Control > Page 7381
Control Assembly: Service and Repair Control Assembly Bulbs
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Remove the illumination bulb(s) by turning a quarter turn counterclockwise and lifting straight up.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Main Climate Control > Page 7382
Control Assembly: Service and Repair Temperature Control Switch
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Remove the temperature control switch knob.
3. Depress the three tabs and remove the temperature blend door control cable.
4. Remove the temperature control switch.
1 Remove the screw.
2 Depress the tab and rotate the temperature control switch counterclockwise.
INSTALLATION
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Main Climate Control > Page 7383
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Rotate the gear to align the locking tab with the notch in the gear before installing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Peanut
Fitting
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Peanut
Fitting > Page 7388
Spring Lock Coupling
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
7389
Coupler HVAC: Service Precautions
CAUTION:
^ Do not use metal tools to remove the O-ring seals. They can cause axial scratches across the
O-ring seal grooves resulting in refrigerant leaks.
^ Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool to remove the A/C tube lock coupling spring; this can
cause axial scratches across the O-ring seal grooves resulting in refrigerant leaks.
^ Maintain low speed drill rotation when inserting or removing the cleaning tool to prevent axial
scratches which may cause future leaks.
^ Use only new green O-ring seals. The use of any O-ring seals other than specified may result in
intermittent leakage during vehicle operation.
^ Support the female fitting with a wrench to prevent the tubes from twisting.
^ Use only new purple O-ring seals. The use of any O-ring seals other than specified may result in
intermittent leakage during vehicle operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Spring Lock Coupling
Coupler HVAC: Description and Operation Spring Lock Coupling
Spring Lock Coupling
The spring lock coupling is a refrigerant line coupling held together by a garter spring inside a
circular cage.
^ When the coupling is connected together, the flared end of the female fitting slips behind the
garter spring inside the cage of the male fitting.
^ The garter spring and cage then prevent the flared end of the female fitting from pulling out of the
cage.
^ The O-ring seals are green in color and are made of a special material.
^ Use only the green O-ring seals listed in the Ford Master Parts Catalog for the spring lock
coupling.
^ A plastic indicator ring is used on the spring lock couplings of the A/C evaporator core to indicate,
during vehicle assembly, that the coupling is connected. Once the coupling is connected, the
indicator ring is no longer necessary but will remain captive by the coupling near the cage opening.
^ An A/C tube lock coupling clip may be used to secure the coupling but is not necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Spring Lock Coupling > Page 7392
Coupler HVAC: Description and Operation Peanut Fitting
The air conditioning line (peanut) fitting is an integral part of the refrigeration line or component.
^ The male and female blocks of the air conditioning line (peanut) fitting are retained with a nut.
^ An O-ring seal is installed around the tube on the male block.
^ The female block is welded to the tube and is not adjustable.
^ Support the female fittings with a wrench to prevent twisting of the tubes.
^ The male block will pivot around the tube to allow for alignment with the female block during
assembly.
^ When correctly assembled the male and female fittings should be flush.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Spring Lock Coupling Connect and Disconnect Procedure
Coupler HVAC: Service and Repair Spring Lock Coupling Connect and Disconnect Procedure
Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool Set
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
DISCONNECT
1. Perform the Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure.
2. Remove the A/C tube lock coupling clip.
3. Using the special tool, disengage the spring lock coupling fittings.
4. Remove the O-ring seals with a non-metallic tool.
CAUTION: Do not use metal tools to remove the O-ring seals. They can cause axial scratches
across the O-ring seal grooves resulting in refrigerant leaks.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Spring Lock Coupling Connect and Disconnect Procedure > Page 7395
5. Remove the A/C tube lock coupling spring with a small hooked wire.
CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool to remove the A/C tube lock coupling spring;
this can cause axial scratches across the O-ring seal grooves resulting in refrigerant leaks.
CLEANING
1. Fabricate a cleaning tool from a 1/8 inch diameter brazing rod.
2. Cut an abrasive pad from maroon colored 3M Scotch Brite (R) with the dimensions
corresponding to the coupling size.
3. Assemble the pad to the tool. 4. Coat the abrasive pad with PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
(R-134a Systems) F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) or equivalent meeting
Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B.
5. Roll the pad on the tool and install it in a variable speed motor drill.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Spring Lock Coupling Connect and Disconnect Procedure > Page 7396
6. Polish for one minute at moderate speed (less than 1,500 rpm) or until the surface is clean and
free of scratches or foreign material.
CAUTION: Maintain low speed drill rotation when inserting or removing the cleaning tool to prevent
axial scratches which may cause future leaks.
7. Clean the fitting with a lint-free cloth. 8. Inspect the surface for grooves or scratches. If grooves
or scratches are still present, install a new component.
9. Clean the O-ring seal grooves with a 300 mm (12 inch) length of natural fiber string.
^ Loop the string around the grooves and pull the string back and forth.
10. Remove any foreign material from the grooves with a lint-free cloth.
CONNECT
1. Install the A/C tube lock coupling spring.
2. Lubricate the inside of the coupling with PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems)
F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) or
equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Spring Lock Coupling Connect and Disconnect Procedure > Page 7397
3. Install the O-ring seals.
1 Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems)
F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B.
NOTE: Some connections may have two or three O-ring seals.
CAUTION: Use only new green O-ring seals. The use of any O-ring seals other than specified may
result in intermittent leakage during vehicle operation.
4. Connect the spring lock coupling fittings with a twisting motion until the A/C tube lock coupling
spring snaps over the flared end of the female
fitting.
5. Install the A/C tube lock coupling clip. 6. Charge the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Spring Lock Coupling Connect and Disconnect Procedure > Page 7398
Coupler HVAC: Service and Repair Peanut Fitting Connect and Disconnect Procedure
DISCONNECT
1. Perform the Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure.
2. Remove the nut from the air conditioning line (peanut) fitting.
CAUTION: Support the female fitting with a wrench to prevent the tubes from twisting.
3. Pull the air conditioning line (peanut) fitting apart.
4. Remove the O-ring seal with a non-metallic tool.
CAUTION: Do not use metal tools to remove the O-ring seal. They can cause axial scratches
across the O-ring seal groove resulting in refrigerant leaks.
CONNECT
1. Clean all dirt or foreign material from the fittings.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Spring Lock Coupling Connect and Disconnect Procedure > Page 7399
2. Install the O-ring seal.
1 Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems)
F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B.
CAUTION: Use only new purple O-ring seals. The use of any O-ring seals other than specified may
result in intermittent leakage during vehicle operation.
3. Lubricate the inside of the fittings with PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems)
F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) or equivalent
meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B.
4. Assemble the male and female fittings together.
NOTE: When correctly assembled, the male and female fittings should be flush.
5. Charge the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and Repair
Evaporator Case: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Perform the Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure. 2. Remove the instrument panel.
Refer to: Body and Frame, Interior Trim, Dashboard/Instrument Panel, Service and Repair,
Removal and
Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service
and Repair/Removal and Installation
3. Disconnect the refrigerant line spring lock couplings from the A/C evaporator core.
4. Disconnect the vacuum hose.
5. Remove the evaporator core housing.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Carefully remove the evaporator core housing to avoid spilling PAG compressor oil in the
passenger area.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: ^
Feed the vacuum hose through the opening in the cowl while installing the housing.
^ Before installing the temperature control cable, make sure the blend door, cable and temperature
switch are correctly positioned.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Page 7403
Evaporator Case: Tools and Equipment
Heater Hose Disconnect Tool
Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool (5/8 Inch)
Disconnect Tool, Spring Lock Coupling
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Page 7404
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 03-5-6 > Mar > 03 > A/C - Musty or Mildew Type Odors
Technical Service Bulletin # 03-5-6 Date: 030317
A/C - Musty or Mildew Type Odors
Article No. 03-5-6
03/17/03
CLIMATE CONTROL - MUSTY OR MILDEW TYPE ODOR FROM CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a musty and/or mildew type odor coming from the climate
control system. This odor is caused by mildew-type fungi growth in the A/C evaporator. It is most
noticeable when the A/C is first turned on.
ACTION Apply Motorcraft A/C Cooling Coil Coating to the A/C system, which encapsulates the
mildew to help reduce odors. Install air inlet vacuum motor bleed valve, which operates the
recirculation/fresh air door to default to fresh mode when the vehicle is parked to dry out the
evaporator core. Refer to the following Service Procedure for details.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of
Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
030506A Apply Motorcraft A/C 1.5 Hrs.
Cooling Coil Coating To The A/C System Then Install Air Inlet Vacuum Motor Bleed Valve
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19B55 53
OASIS CODES: 208000, 208300, 208999
Disclaimer
Odor Service Tips
Types Of Odors, Their Sources And Treatments
There are typically four (4) types of objectionable odors found in a vehicle, they are:
^ Chemical odors
^ Environmental odors
^ Microbiological odors
^ Human and other interior-generated odors
Odors can be described in a number of ways:
^ Musty
^ Mildew
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 03-5-6 > Mar > 03 > A/C - Musty or Mildew Type Odors > Page 7413
^ Fishy
^ Sweet
^ Burning
^ Chemical
^ Fuel
^ Oil
^ Exhaust
^ Wet cement
^ Urine
^ Tar
^ Fragrance
^ Body odor
Chemical odors:
^ Coolant: sweet smell
^ Fuel: gasoline or diesel fuel smell
^ Oil: oil type or burning smell
^ Power Steering Fluid: oil type or burning smell
^ Transmission Fluid: oil type or burning smell
^ Washer Fluid: alcohol type smell
^ Gear Lube: garlic/sulphur smell
^ Refrigerant/Oil: ether type smell
^ Carpet/Trim Adhesives: fishy, urine, or sweet smell
^ Evaporator Core Coating: wet cement type smell
Environmental odors:
^ Exhaust: exhaust, fuel, burning type smell
^ Industrial Pollutants: all types of smells
^ Dust: musty, mildew, wet cement type smell
^ Pollen: sweet smell
^ Tobacco: burning, tar smell
Microbiological odors:
Microbial growth supported by warm temperatures and moisture may occur on:
^ Foam Seals: musty, mildew smell
^ Rubber Seals: musty, mildew smell
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 03-5-6 > Mar > 03 > A/C - Musty or Mildew Type Odors > Page 7414
^ Adhesives: musty, mildew smell
^ Standing Water: musty, mildew smell
^ Water Soaked Carpet/Trim: musty, mildew smell
Human and other interior-generated odors:
^ Secretion From The Human Body: body odors
^ Perfuming Agents: sweet or fragrance smell
^ Dirty Clothes, Shoes, Socks: musty, mildew, body odors
^ Food/Beverage: sweet, musty, mildew, fishy smell
The first step in diagnosing an odor concern is to verify the concern. To verify an odor you must
determine when and under what circumstances the odor occurs and what type of odor it is.
Chemical odors are usually constant regardless of A/C setting and can be enhanced by A/C
system operation. Most chemical odors are caused by fluid leaks and some are caused by
improperly cured carpet and trim adhesives or evaporator core coatings.
Environmental odors usually occur for a short time and go away after the vehicle has passed
through the affected area. These odors are usually only detected when a window is open or the
A/C system is operating in a function that allows outside air to enter the vehicle.
Microbiological odors, if in the A/C system, usually last for about 30 seconds when first turned on
and will be detected in both Max and Normal A/C. Microbiological odors occurring elsewhere such
as from standing water in doors or kick panels or wet carpeting may last indefinitely and will be
more intense in Max A/C. Microbiological odors will not occur at temperatures below 50° F (10° C).
Human and other interior-generated odors occur while the source is present and may linger for a
short time after removal. These odors can be more noticeable during operation of the A/C system.
They can be detected in the outside air position and may be more noticeable in recirculation mode.
The first step in getting rid of odors is to find the source of the odor. Once the source is found, it
must be removed and the affected area cleaned or treated.
Chemical odors can be removed by repairing or replacing the component that causes the odor and
then cleaning any residue that may have accumulated from the component failure.
Environmental odors usually cannot be removed due to the fact that they occur from external
sources and are an everyday occurrence. They can, however, be minimized by switching to Max
A/C or recirculation mode.
Microbiological odors can be eliminated by removing the source and then treating the affected
area. Standing water must be allowed to drain and dry out. A/C systems may be treated by using
Motorcraft A/C Cooling Coil Coating (YN-29), or equivalent meeting Ford specification
(WSS-M99B187-A) as described in the Service Procedure in this article.
Human and other interior-generated odors can be eliminated by removing the source and cleaning
the affected area.
A/C Odor Treatment Procedure
1. Try to reasonably rule out any other source for the odor. Check the carpet on the passenger side
for signs of being wet. Continue diagnosis if water is found on carpet and repair as needed. Check
the blower motor and cover for signs of moisture. This may be as a result of water bypassing the
cowl baffling system that prevents rain intrusion.
2. Remove the engine side fasteners for the plenum cover. This will allow access to the Cowl Top
Panel - Water RH. Remove this and inspect the air inlet screen. Use a shop vacuum if there is
debris present. This debris may work its way into the evaporator case and act as food for the
microbes to grow. Re-install the cowl components.
3. Check to see that the evaporator drain tube (or hose) is not plugged or restricted by debris.
Clear anything that may be obstructing the drainage of water.
4. Open vehicle windows.
5. Disconnect A/C cycling switch electrical connector.
6. Set the following:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 03-5-6 > Mar > 03 > A/C - Musty or Mildew Type Odors > Page 7415
^ Function selector switch in A/C mode
^ Temperature at full heat Blower at high speed
^ Engine running at normal operating temperature
7. Run vehicle (Steps 4-6 conditions) for 25 minutes. This will dry out the system.
8. Turn ignition off.
9. Disconnect and remove the blower motor and blower motor resistor by referring to Workshop
Manual, Section 412-02 - Blower Motor. (This provides ease of access to the evaporator core and
eliminates the possibility of contaminating the blower motor and/or blower motor resister with the
Motorcraft A/C Cooling Coil Coating.)
NOTE
TO AVOID ANY POSSIBLE DAMAGE, DO NOT SPILL OR SPRAY THIS PRODUCT ON ANY
INTERIOR SURFACE (E.G., INSTRUMENT PANEL) OR MATERIAL (E.G., CARPETING).
10. Add the full four (4) fluid ounces (1 bottle) of Motorcraft A/C Cooling Coil Coating (YN-29) to the
Rotunda A/C Disodorizer Sprayer (Rotunda 164-R4700). For effective treatment, use the full four
(4) fluid ounces on one vehicle application. Insert the A/C Disodorizer sprayer nozzle into the
opening in the evaporator case and direct toward the face of the evaporator core. Spray Motorcraft
A/C Cooling Coil Coating until empty.
11. Reinstall and reconnect blower motor resistor and blower motor.
12. Repeat Steps 6, 7, and 8 to cure the Cooling Coil Coating.
13. Reconnect A/C cycling switch.
Air Inlet Vacuum Motor Bleed Valve Tee Installation
1. Remove the passenger front air bag. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-20B for procedure.
2. Disconnect vacuum line at air inlet door vacuum motor. Install bleed valve tee Part Number
3L8Z-19B888-AA into vacuum line 90 degree connector, and attach vacuum line with the vacuum
bleed tee to air inlet door vacuum motor. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 412-04 (Vacuum
Control Motor - Outside Air Inlet) for component location.
3. Follow Workshop Manual procedures for reinstalling passenger front air bag.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 03-5-6 > Mar > 03 > A/C - Musty or Mildew Type Odors
Technical Service Bulletin # 03-5-6 Date: 030317
A/C - Musty or Mildew Type Odors
Article No. 03-5-6
03/17/03
CLIMATE CONTROL - MUSTY OR MILDEW TYPE ODOR FROM CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a musty and/or mildew type odor coming from the climate
control system. This odor is caused by mildew-type fungi growth in the A/C evaporator. It is most
noticeable when the A/C is first turned on.
ACTION Apply Motorcraft A/C Cooling Coil Coating to the A/C system, which encapsulates the
mildew to help reduce odors. Install air inlet vacuum motor bleed valve, which operates the
recirculation/fresh air door to default to fresh mode when the vehicle is parked to dry out the
evaporator core. Refer to the following Service Procedure for details.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of
Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
030506A Apply Motorcraft A/C 1.5 Hrs.
Cooling Coil Coating To The A/C System Then Install Air Inlet Vacuum Motor Bleed Valve
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19B55 53
OASIS CODES: 208000, 208300, 208999
Disclaimer
Odor Service Tips
Types Of Odors, Their Sources And Treatments
There are typically four (4) types of objectionable odors found in a vehicle, they are:
^ Chemical odors
^ Environmental odors
^ Microbiological odors
^ Human and other interior-generated odors
Odors can be described in a number of ways:
^ Musty
^ Mildew
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 03-5-6 > Mar > 03 > A/C - Musty or Mildew Type Odors >
Page 7421
^ Fishy
^ Sweet
^ Burning
^ Chemical
^ Fuel
^ Oil
^ Exhaust
^ Wet cement
^ Urine
^ Tar
^ Fragrance
^ Body odor
Chemical odors:
^ Coolant: sweet smell
^ Fuel: gasoline or diesel fuel smell
^ Oil: oil type or burning smell
^ Power Steering Fluid: oil type or burning smell
^ Transmission Fluid: oil type or burning smell
^ Washer Fluid: alcohol type smell
^ Gear Lube: garlic/sulphur smell
^ Refrigerant/Oil: ether type smell
^ Carpet/Trim Adhesives: fishy, urine, or sweet smell
^ Evaporator Core Coating: wet cement type smell
Environmental odors:
^ Exhaust: exhaust, fuel, burning type smell
^ Industrial Pollutants: all types of smells
^ Dust: musty, mildew, wet cement type smell
^ Pollen: sweet smell
^ Tobacco: burning, tar smell
Microbiological odors:
Microbial growth supported by warm temperatures and moisture may occur on:
^ Foam Seals: musty, mildew smell
^ Rubber Seals: musty, mildew smell
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 03-5-6 > Mar > 03 > A/C - Musty or Mildew Type Odors >
Page 7422
^ Adhesives: musty, mildew smell
^ Standing Water: musty, mildew smell
^ Water Soaked Carpet/Trim: musty, mildew smell
Human and other interior-generated odors:
^ Secretion From The Human Body: body odors
^ Perfuming Agents: sweet or fragrance smell
^ Dirty Clothes, Shoes, Socks: musty, mildew, body odors
^ Food/Beverage: sweet, musty, mildew, fishy smell
The first step in diagnosing an odor concern is to verify the concern. To verify an odor you must
determine when and under what circumstances the odor occurs and what type of odor it is.
Chemical odors are usually constant regardless of A/C setting and can be enhanced by A/C
system operation. Most chemical odors are caused by fluid leaks and some are caused by
improperly cured carpet and trim adhesives or evaporator core coatings.
Environmental odors usually occur for a short time and go away after the vehicle has passed
through the affected area. These odors are usually only detected when a window is open or the
A/C system is operating in a function that allows outside air to enter the vehicle.
Microbiological odors, if in the A/C system, usually last for about 30 seconds when first turned on
and will be detected in both Max and Normal A/C. Microbiological odors occurring elsewhere such
as from standing water in doors or kick panels or wet carpeting may last indefinitely and will be
more intense in Max A/C. Microbiological odors will not occur at temperatures below 50° F (10° C).
Human and other interior-generated odors occur while the source is present and may linger for a
short time after removal. These odors can be more noticeable during operation of the A/C system.
They can be detected in the outside air position and may be more noticeable in recirculation mode.
The first step in getting rid of odors is to find the source of the odor. Once the source is found, it
must be removed and the affected area cleaned or treated.
Chemical odors can be removed by repairing or replacing the component that causes the odor and
then cleaning any residue that may have accumulated from the component failure.
Environmental odors usually cannot be removed due to the fact that they occur from external
sources and are an everyday occurrence. They can, however, be minimized by switching to Max
A/C or recirculation mode.
Microbiological odors can be eliminated by removing the source and then treating the affected
area. Standing water must be allowed to drain and dry out. A/C systems may be treated by using
Motorcraft A/C Cooling Coil Coating (YN-29), or equivalent meeting Ford specification
(WSS-M99B187-A) as described in the Service Procedure in this article.
Human and other interior-generated odors can be eliminated by removing the source and cleaning
the affected area.
A/C Odor Treatment Procedure
1. Try to reasonably rule out any other source for the odor. Check the carpet on the passenger side
for signs of being wet. Continue diagnosis if water is found on carpet and repair as needed. Check
the blower motor and cover for signs of moisture. This may be as a result of water bypassing the
cowl baffling system that prevents rain intrusion.
2. Remove the engine side fasteners for the plenum cover. This will allow access to the Cowl Top
Panel - Water RH. Remove this and inspect the air inlet screen. Use a shop vacuum if there is
debris present. This debris may work its way into the evaporator case and act as food for the
microbes to grow. Re-install the cowl components.
3. Check to see that the evaporator drain tube (or hose) is not plugged or restricted by debris.
Clear anything that may be obstructing the drainage of water.
4. Open vehicle windows.
5. Disconnect A/C cycling switch electrical connector.
6. Set the following:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 03-5-6 > Mar > 03 > A/C - Musty or Mildew Type Odors >
Page 7423
^ Function selector switch in A/C mode
^ Temperature at full heat Blower at high speed
^ Engine running at normal operating temperature
7. Run vehicle (Steps 4-6 conditions) for 25 minutes. This will dry out the system.
8. Turn ignition off.
9. Disconnect and remove the blower motor and blower motor resistor by referring to Workshop
Manual, Section 412-02 - Blower Motor. (This provides ease of access to the evaporator core and
eliminates the possibility of contaminating the blower motor and/or blower motor resister with the
Motorcraft A/C Cooling Coil Coating.)
NOTE
TO AVOID ANY POSSIBLE DAMAGE, DO NOT SPILL OR SPRAY THIS PRODUCT ON ANY
INTERIOR SURFACE (E.G., INSTRUMENT PANEL) OR MATERIAL (E.G., CARPETING).
10. Add the full four (4) fluid ounces (1 bottle) of Motorcraft A/C Cooling Coil Coating (YN-29) to the
Rotunda A/C Disodorizer Sprayer (Rotunda 164-R4700). For effective treatment, use the full four
(4) fluid ounces on one vehicle application. Insert the A/C Disodorizer sprayer nozzle into the
opening in the evaporator case and direct toward the face of the evaporator core. Spray Motorcraft
A/C Cooling Coil Coating until empty.
11. Reinstall and reconnect blower motor resistor and blower motor.
12. Repeat Steps 6, 7, and 8 to cure the Cooling Coil Coating.
13. Reconnect A/C cycling switch.
Air Inlet Vacuum Motor Bleed Valve Tee Installation
1. Remove the passenger front air bag. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-20B for procedure.
2. Disconnect vacuum line at air inlet door vacuum motor. Install bleed valve tee Part Number
3L8Z-19B888-AA into vacuum line 90 degree connector, and attach vacuum line with the vacuum
bleed tee to air inlet door vacuum motor. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 412-04 (Vacuum
Control Motor - Outside Air Inlet) for component location.
3. Follow Workshop Manual procedures for reinstalling passenger front air bag.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 7424
Evaporator Core: Locations
Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 7425
Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 7426
Evaporator Core: Description and Operation
NOTE: Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air
conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed
A/C component or damage to the suction accumulator.
The A/C evaporator housing contains the A/C evaporator core. The A/C evaporator core is the
plate/fin type with a unique refrigerant flow path.
^ A mixture of refrigerant and oil enters the bottom of the A/C evaporator core through the A/C
evaporator core inlet tube and is routed so it flows through the partitioned first four plate/fin
sections.
^ The next four plate/fin sections are partitioned to force the refrigerant to flow toward the other end
of the A/C evaporator core.
^ The next five plate/fin sections are partitioned to force the refrigerant to flow toward the bottom of
the A/C evaporator core.
^ Refrigerant then continues through to the remaining five plate/fin sections and then moves out of
the A/C evaporator core through the A/C evaporator core outlet tube.
^ This W-pass flow pattern transfers the flow of refrigerant and oil through the A/C evaporator core.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 7427
Evaporator Core: Testing and Inspection
ON-VEHICLE LEAK TEST
1. Perform the Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure. 2. Disconnect the suspect A/C
evaporator core or A/C condenser core from the A/C system.
NOTE: DO NOT leak test an A/C evaporator core with the suction accumulator/drier attached to the
core tubes.
3. Clean the spring lock couplings. 4. Connect the appropriate test fittings from the A/C Test Fitting
Set to the evaporator or condenser tube connections. 5. Connect the red and blue hoses from the
manifold gauge set to the test fittings on the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. Connect
the
yellow hose to a known good vacuum pump.
NOTE: The automatic shut-off valves on some gauge set hoses do not open when connected to
the test fittings. If available, use hoses without shut-off valves. If hoses with shut-off valves are
used, make sure the valve opens when attached to the test fittings or install an adapter which will
activate the valve. The test is not valid if the shut-off valve does not open.
6. Open both gauge set valves and start the vacuum pump. Allow the vacuum pump to operate for
a minimum of 45 minutes after the gauge set low
pressure gauge indicates 101 kPa (30 in-Hg). The 45-minute evacuation is necessary to remove
any refrigerant from oil left in the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. If the refrigerant is
not completely removed from the oil, outgassing will degrade the vacuum and appear as a
refrigerant leak.
7. If the low pressure gauge reading will not drop to 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) when the valves on the
gauge and manifold set are open and the vacuum
pump is operating, close the gauge set valves and observe the low pressure gauge. If the pressure
rises rapidly to zero, a large leak is indicated. Recheck the test fitting connections and gauge set
connections before installing a new A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core.
8. After evacuating for 45 minutes, close the gauge set valves and stop the vacuum pump.
Observe the low pressure gauge; it should remain at the
101 kPa (30 in-Hg) mark. ^
If the low pressure gauge reading rises 34 or more kPa (10 or more in-Hg) of vacuum from the 101
kPa (30 in-Hg) position in 10 minutes, a leak is indicated.
^ If a very small leak is suspected, wait 30 minutes and observe the vacuum gauge.
^ If a small amount of vacuum is lost, operate the vacuum pump with gauge valves open for an
additional 30 minutes to remove any remaining refrigerant from the oil in the A/C evaporator core or
A/C condenser core. Then recheck for loss of vacuum.
^ If a very small leak is suspected, allow the system to sit overnight with vacuum applied and check
for vacuum loss.
9. If the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core does leak, as verified by the above procedure,
install a new A/C evaporator core or A/C
condenser core.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 7428
Evaporator Core: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
NOTE:
^ Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air conditioning
system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C
component or damage to the suction accumulator.
^ If an A/C evaporator core leak is suspected, the A/C evaporator core must be leak tested before it
is removed from the vehicle.
^ The evaporator core and evaporator housing must be installed as a complete unit.
1. Remove the A/C evaporator core housing. 2. Transfer, the components from the old evaporator
core housing to the new evaporator core housing.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Lubricate the new A/C evaporator core with the correct amount of PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C
or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. See: Refrigerant Oil Addition.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 7429
Evaporator Core: Tools and Equipment
Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool Set
Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool Set
Disconnect Tool, Spring Lock Coupling
Heater Hose Disconnect Tool
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 7430
Special Tool(s)
Set, A/C Fittings
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Locations
Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Locations
Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Refrigerant System Components, Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7434
Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Refrigerant System Components, Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7435
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7436
Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Service Precautions
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7437
Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Description and Operation
A/C Evaporator Core Orifice
NOTE: Install a new A/C evaporator core orifice whenever a new A/C compressor is installed.
The A/C evaporator core orifice has the following characteristics:
^ color-coded green
^ an orifice diameter of 1.25 mm (0.052 inch)
^ located in the condenser to evaporator line
^ Changes the high-pressure liquid refrigerant into a low-pressure liquid.
^ filter screens located on the inlet and outlet ends of the orifice body
^ The inlet filter screen acts as a strainer for the liquid refrigerant flowing through the A/C
evaporator core orifice.
^ O-ring seals on the A/C evaporator core orifice prevent the high-pressure liquid refrigerant from
bypassing the A/C evaporator core orifice.
^ Adjustment or repair cannot be made to the A/C evaporator core orifice. A new A/C evaporator
core orifice must be installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7438
Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Service and Repair
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the condenser to evaporator line at the orifice tube.
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
2. Engage the special tool onto the A/C evaporator core orifice.
3. Hold the special tool T-handle stationary and rotate the special tool body to remove the A/C
evaporator core orifice.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7439
4. If the A/C evaporator core orifice is broken, screw the end of the special tool into the broken A/C
evaporator core orifice.
5. Hold the special tool T-handle stationary and rotate the special tool body to remove the broken
A/C evaporator core orifice.
INSTALLATION
1. Lubricate and install the O-ring seals on the A/C evaporator core orifice.
^ Use PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B.
2. Place the A/C evaporator core orifice into the special tool.
3. Using the special tool, insert the A/C evaporator core orifice into the condenser to evaporator
line until seated.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7440
4. Remove the special tool.
5. Connect the condenser to evaporator line at the orifice tube. 6. Recharge the A/C system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7441
Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Tools and Equipment
Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool Set
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Locations
Expansion Valve: Locations
For further information regarding this component please refer to:
Heating and Air Conditioning; Expansion Block/Orifice Tube.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page
7445
Expansion Valve: Service and Repair
For further information regarding this component please refer to:
Heating and Air Conditioning; Expansion Block/Orifice Tube.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Core: Customer Interest A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page
7454
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page
7455
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Core: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
> Page 7461
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
> Page 7462
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Technician Safety Information
Heater Core: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ CARBON MONOXIDE IS COLORLESS, ODORLESS AND DANGEROUS. IF IT IS NECESSARY
TO OPERATE THE ENGINE WITH THE VEHICLE IN A CLOSED AREA SUCH AS A GARAGE,
ALWAYS USE AN EXHAUST COLLECTOR TO VENT THE EXHAUST GASES OUTSIDE THE
CLOSED AREA.
^ THE HEATER CORE INLET HOSE WILL BECOME TOO HOT TO HANDLE IF THE SYSTEM IS
WORKING CORRECTLY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Technician Safety Information > Page 7465
Heater Core: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening
of non-specification clamps can cause leakage at the heater water hose connection and damage
the heater core.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Page 7466
Heater Core: Description and Operation
Heater Core
The heater core consists of fins and tubes arranged to extract heat from the engine coolant and
transfer the heat to air passing through the heater core housing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Page 7467
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection
WARNING: CARBON MONOXIDE GAS IS COLORLESS, ODORLESS AND DANGEROUS. IF IT
IS NECESSARY TO OPERATE THE ENGINE WITH THE VEHICLE IN A CLOSED AREA SUCH
AS A GARAGE, ALWAYS USE AN EXHAUST COLLECTOR TO VENT THE EXHAUST GASES
OUTSIDE THE CLOSED AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT
IN PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Inspect for evidence of coolant leakage at the heater water hose to heater core attachments. A
coolant leak in the heater water hose could follow
the heater core tube to the heater core and appear as a leak in the heater core.
CAUTION: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening
of non-specification clamps can cause leakage at the heater water hose connection and damage
the heater core.
NOTE: Testing of returned heater cores reveals that a large percentage of heater cores are good
and did not require installation of a new heater core. If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater
core must be tested by following the Plugged Heater Core Component Test before the Heater Core
Pressure Test. Carry out a system inspection by checking the heater system thoroughly.
2. Check the integrity of the heater water hose clamps.
Heater Core - Plugged
WARNING: THE HEATER CORE INLET HOSE WILL BECOME TOO HOT TO HANDLE IF THE
SYSTEM IS WORKING CORRECTLY.
1. Check to see that the engine coolant is at the correct level. 2. Start the engine and turn on the
heater 3. When the engine coolant reaches operating temperature, feel the heater core outlet hose
to see if it is hot.
If it is not hot: ^
the heater core may have an air pocket.
^ the heater core may be plugged, or
^ the thermostat is not working correctly.
Heater Core - Pressure Test Use the radiator/heater core pressure tester to carry out the pressure
test.
1. Drain the coolant from the cooling system.
NOTE: Due to space limitations, a bench test may be necessary for pressure testing.
2. Disconnect the heater water hoses from the heater core. 3. Install a short piece of heater water
hose, approximately 101 mm (4 inches) long on each heater core tube. 4. Fill the heater core and
heater water hoses with water and install plug BT-7422-B and adapter BT-7422-A from the
radiator/heater core
pressure tester in the heater water hose ends. Secure the heater water hoses, plug and adapter
with hose clamps.
5. Attach the pump and gauge assembly from the radiator/heater core pressure tester to the
adapter. 6. Close the bleed valve at the base of the gauge. Pump 241 kPa (35 psi) of air pressure
into the heater core. 7. Observe the pressure gauge for a minimum of three minutes. 8. If the
pressure drops, check the heater water hose connections to the core tubes for leaks. If the heater
water hoses do not leak, remove the
heater core from the vehicle and carry out the bench test.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Page 7468
Heater Core - Bench Test 1. Remove the heater core from the vehicle. 2. Drain all of the coolant
from the heater core. 3. Connect the 101 mm (4 inch) test heater water hoses with plug and
adapter to the core tubes. Then connect the radiator/heater core pressure
tester to the adapter.
4. Apply 241 kPa (35 psi) of air pressure to the heater core. Submerge the heater core in water. 5.
If a leak is observed, install a new heater core.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Page 7469
Heater Core: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Drain the engine coolant.
NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater
core is removed.
2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 3. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to:
Body and Frame, Interior Trim, Dashboard/Instrument Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and
Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service
and Repair/Removal and Installation
4. Remove the heater blending door levers.
1 Remove the screw for heater blending door.
2 Remove the levers for the blending door.
5. Remove the heater core.
1 Remove the three screws.
2 Remove the cover for the heater core and pull the heater core out of the housing.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Before installing the temperature control cable, make sure the blend door, cable and
temperature switch are correctly positioned.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Heater Core Case: Description and Operation
The heater core housing contains the following components:
^ heater core
^ air temperature control door
^ panel air flow control door
^ defrost/floor air flow control door
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 7473
Heater Core Case: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Drain the engine coolant.
2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 3. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to:
Body and Frame, Interior Trim, Dashboard/Instrument Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and
Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service
and Repair/Removal and Installation
4. If equipped with A/C, remove the A/C evaporator core housing.
5. Remove the heater core housing.
1 Remove the heater core housing retaining nuts.
2 Carefully remove the heater core housing to avoid spilling engine coolant in the passenger area.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Hose: Customer Interest A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 7482
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 7483
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 7489
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 7490
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut
Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front Strut
Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
TSB 09-6-5
04/06/09
NOISE - FRONT STRUT AREA
FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE Some 2001-2009 Escape, 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2009 Mariner
Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a pop, rub, grunt, squeak, and/or creak noise from the front strut area
during slow, lock-to-lock turns such as parking maneuvers. Vehicles built on or before 1/13/2009
may also exhibit a clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise from the front strut area while
driving over a series of bumps and/or rough roads.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Using chassis ears on the front strut mounts is pop, rub, grunt, squeak, creak, clunk, crunch,
thump, and/or knocking noise present from the front strut
area during slow parking lot type maneuvers?
a. No - Procedure does not apply, proceed with normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00
diagnostics.
b. Yes on turns - Boot may be binding, go to Step 2 Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
c. Yes over bumps (built on or before 1/13/2009) - Go to Step 3 Dust Boot Replacement Procedure
and install new dust boot designed for this
concern.
d. Yes over bumps (built after 1/13/09) - Procedure does not apply. Proceed with normal WSM,
Section 204-00 diagnostics.
2. Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
a. Raise the vehicle per WSM, Section 100-02.
b. Reach through the spring and pull the strut dust boot and jounce bumper assembly straight
down, out of the upper spring seat.
c. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust cover.
d. Raise dust cover so that jounce bumper is accessible and apply 360 degrees to the jounce
bumper itself.
e. Slide the dust cover and jounce bumper upward into its original location on the strut.
f. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
3. Dust Boot Replacement Procedure (vehicles built on/before 1/13/2009).
a. Remove front strut per WSM, Section 204-01.
b. Disassemble front strut and replace dust boot with latest level part per WSM, Section 204-01.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut
Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 7496
C. Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust boot.
(3) Apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself.
d. Assemble front strut and install per WSM, Section 204-01.
e. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090605A 2001-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Apply Grease Following Service
Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test (Do Not Use With
1007D, 18124A)
090605B 2001-2009 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Strut Dust Boots,
Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears
and Road Test Can Be Claimed With Operations C And D (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A)
090605C 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber and, Toe-In
Can Be Claimed With Operation B And D (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090605D 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Correct Caster, Camber And
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut
Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 7497
Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5,
2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18A179 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut
Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 7503
C. Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust boot.
(3) Apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself.
d. Assemble front strut and install per WSM, Section 204-01.
e. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090605A 2001-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Apply Grease Following Service
Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test (Do Not Use With
1007D, 18124A)
090605B 2001-2009 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Strut Dust Boots,
Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears
and Road Test Can Be Claimed With Operations C And D (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A)
090605C 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber and, Toe-In
Can Be Claimed With Operation B And D (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090605D 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Correct Caster, Camber And
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut
Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 7504
Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5,
2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18A179 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 7505
Heater Hose: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Drain the engine coolant.
2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core.
3. Disconnect the heater hose from the hose connection. 4. Remove the RH front wheel.
5. Disconnect the heater hose from the hose connection.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Lubricate the hoses with Rubber Suspension Insulator Lube E25Y-19553-A or equivalent meeting
Ford specification ESF-M99B112-A.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information >
Locations
High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Locations
Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7509
Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7510
High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Description and Operation
An A/C compressor pressure relief valve is incorporated in the compressor A/C manifold and tube
to:
^ relieve unusually high refrigerant system discharge pressure buildups of (3,792 kPa [550 psi] and
above).
^ prevent damage to the A/C compressor and other system components.
^ avoid total refrigerant loss by closing after the excessive pressure has been relieved.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7511
High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Perform the Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure. 2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Remove the RH splash shield.
4. If equipped, disconnect the engine block heater electrical connector.
5. Remove the A/C compressor pressure relief valve.
NOTE: Vehicles with the 2.0L Zetec engine shown, vehicles with the 3.0L (4V) engine similar.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions
Hose/Line HVAC: Service Precautions
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 7515
Hose/Line HVAC: Description and Operation
NOTE: Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air
conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed
A/C compressor or damage to the suction accumulator.
The condenser to evaporator line contains high-pressure liquid refrigerant upstream of the A/C
evaporator core orifice. The A/C manifold and tube assembly is attached to the A/C compressor
with O-ring seals.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 7516
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch. 2. Remove the evaporator core orifice.
3. Disconnect the condenser to evaporator line from the A/C evaporator core.
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
4. Remove the front bumper cover.
5. Remove the nut and disconnect the condenser to evaporator line from the A/C condenser core
and remove the condenser to evaporator line.
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 7517
Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool Set
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Receiver Dryer: Description and Operation
For further information regarding this component and the system that it is part of, please refer to:
Accumulator HVAC.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 7521
Receiver Dryer: Service and Repair
For further information regarding this component and the system that it is part of, please refer to:
Accumulator HVAC.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
.................................................. 850 kg (1 lb, 14 oz)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 7526
Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications
A/C Refrigerant ....................................................................................................................................
....................................... R-134a Refrigerant YN-19
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Page
7527
Refrigerant: Diagrams
Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Page
7528
Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Environmental Impact Information
Refrigerant: Environmental Impact Information
The Ozone Layer A thin layer of ozone molecules, located 10 to 30 miles above the earth, form a
protective cover by absorbing a portion of the ultraviolet (UV) radiation emitted from the Sun.
Ozone Depletion Scientific research performed over the past 15 years links the release of
chlorofluorocarbons (CFC)s, also know by the trade name Freon) into the atmosphere to ozone
depletion. When CFCs are released into the atmosphere, they eventually reach the ozone layer
located in the stratosphere where they react with and destroy ozone molecules.
Harmful Effects Ozone depletion and the corresponding increase in UV radiation has been shown
to lead to higher incidents of cancer as well as global warming. When viewed from a global
perspective, ozone depletion holds an enormous potential for damage.
Upper Level Vs. Ground Level Ozone Confusion often arises when we hear about the necessity of
the ozone layer and ground level ozone. The ozone layer existing high above the earth is beneficial
but the same compound, when located at ground level, is harmful to humans, animals, crops and
vegetation.
Ground level ozone is a component of smog and forms when hydrocarbons (HC) react with
nitrogen oxides (NOx) in the presence of sunlight and heat.
Montreal Protocol In response to the growing body of evidence demonstrating the detrimental
effects of (CFC)s, 24 countries and the European community met in Montreal, Canada, in 1987 to
establish standards for the control of (CFC)s. Since that time, a total of 132 countries have become
signatories to this agreement leading to an end of production of R12 in December, 1995, in all
developed countries.
As established by the Montreal Protocol, R12 production in developed countries has ceased.
Clean Air Act The United States Congress, acting in response to the Montreal Protocol, banned
production of (CFC)s by the year 2000. Congress also amended the Clean Air Act in an effort to
control both the production and use of (CFC)s for refrigerant applications including mobile vehicle
air conditioning systems.
Additional Information Sources
For more complete and detailed explanations of the above policies, please refer to:
http://www.epa.gov/ozone/
Technician Certification Organizations providing technician refrigerant recovery and recycling
certification include:
National Institute for Automotive Service Excellence (ASE) 13505 Dulles Technology Drive, Suite 2
Herndon, VA 22071-3421 Phone: (703) 713-3800 Fax: (703) 713-0727 http://www.asecert.org/
International Mobile Air Conditioning Association (IMACA) P.O. Box 9000 Fort Worth, TX
76147-2000 Phone: (817) 732-4600 Fax: (817) 732-9610 http://www.imaca.org/
Mobile Air Conditioning Society (MACS) Worldwide P.O. Box 100 East Greenville, PA 18041
Phone: 215-679-2220
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Environmental Impact Information > Page 7531
Fax: 215-541-4635 http://www.macsw.org/
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Environmental Impact Information > Page 7532
Refrigerant: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE INJURY, THE AIR BAG SYSTEM
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING ANY CLIMATE
CONTROL COMPONENTS. TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY, DISCONNECT THE
BATTERY POSITIVE CABLE AND WAIT ONE MINUTE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ CARBON MONOXIDE IS COLORLESS, ODORLESS AND DANGEROUS. IF IT IS NECESSARY
TO OPERATE THE ENGINE WITH VEHICLE IN A CLOSED AREA SUCH AS A GARAGE,
ALWAYS USE AN EXHAUST COLLECTOR TO VENT THE EXHAUST GASES OUTSIDE THE
CLOSED AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
^ R-134A IS CLASSIFIED AS A SAFE REFRIGERANT, BUT MISUSE CAN MAKE IT
DANGEROUS. THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS MUST BE OBSERVED. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GOGGLES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM.
^ AVOID CONTACT WITH LIQUID REFRIGERANT R-134A. R-134A VAPORIZES AT
APPROXIMATELY -25°C (-13°F) UNDER ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE AND IT WILL FREEZE
SKIN TISSUE.
^ NEVER ALLOW REFRIGERANT R-134A GAS TO ESCAPE IN QUANTITY IN AN OCCUPIED
SPACE. R-134A IS NON-TOXIC, BUT IT WILL DISPLACE THE OXYGEN NEEDED TO
SUPPORT LIFE.
^ DO NOT ALLOW ANY PORTION OF THE CHARGED AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM TO
BECOME TOO HOT. THE PRESSURE IN AN AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM RISES AS THE
TEMPERATURE RISES AND TEMPERATURES OF APPROXIMATELY 85°C (185°F) CAN BE
DANGEROUS.
^ ALLOW THE ENGINE TO COOL SUFFICIENTLY PRIOR TO CARRYING OUT MAINTENANCE
OR SERIOUS BURNS AND INJURY CAN OCCUR.
^ USE EXTREME CARE AND OBSERVE ALL SAFETY AND SERVICE PRECAUTIONS
RELATED TO THE USE OF REFRIGERANTS. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS
MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ DUE TO REFRIGERANT HAZARDS, ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GOGGLES AND
NON-PENETRABLE GLOVES WHEN WORKING ON OR FLUSHING A/C SYSTEMS. FAILURE
TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Environmental Impact Information > Page 7533
Refrigerant: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION:
- To avoid damaging the vehicle or A/C components, the following precautions must be observed: ^
The A/C refrigerant of all vehicles must be identified and analyzed prior to refrigerant charging.
Failure to do so can contaminate the shop bulk refrigerant and other vehicles.
^ Do not add R-12 refrigerant to an A/C system that requires the use of R-134a refrigerant. These
two types of refrigerant must never be mixed. Doing so can damage the A/C system.
^ Charge the A/C system with the engine running only at the low-pressure side to prevent
refrigerant slugging from damaging the A/C compressor.
^ Use only R-134a refrigerant. Due to environmental concerns, when the air conditioning system is
drained, the refrigerant must be collected using refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. R-134a
must never be removed without the appropriate equipment or released into the atmosphere. Use of
a recovery machine dedicated to R-134a is necessary to reduce the possibility of oil and refrigerant
incompatibility concerns. Refer to the instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer when
removing refrigerant from or charging the air conditioning system.
^ Refrigerant R-134a must not be mixed with air for leak testing or used with air for any other
purpose above atmospheric pressure. R-134a is combustible when mixed with high concentrations
of air and at higher pressures.
^ A number of manufacturers are producing refrigerant products that are described as direct
substitutes for refrigerant R-134a. The use of any unauthorized substitute refrigerant can severely
damage the A/C components. If repair is necessary, use only new or recycled refrigerant R-134a.
- To avoid contamination of the A/C system: ^
Keep service tools and the work area clean.
^ Never open or loosen a connection before discharging the system.
^ When loosening a connection, if any residual pressure is evident, allow it to leak out before
opening the fitting.
^ Evacuate a system that has been opened to install a new component or a system that has
discharged through leakage before charging.
^ Seal open fittings with a cap or plug immediately after disconnecting a component from the
system.
^ Clean the outside of the fittings thoroughly before disconnecting a component from the system.
^ Do not remove the sealing caps from a new component until ready to install.
^ Refrigerant oil will absorb moisture from the atmosphere if left uncapped. Do not open an oil
container until ready to use, and install the cap immediately after using. Store the oil in a clean,
moisture-free container.
^ Install a new O-ring seal before connecting an open fitting. Coat the fitting and O-ring seal with
refrigerant oil before connecting.
^ When installing a refrigerant line, avoid sharp bends. Position the line away from the exhaust or
any sharp edges that can chafe the line.
^ Tighten threaded fittings only to specifications. The steel and aluminum fittings used in the
refrigerant system will not tolerate overtightening.
^ When disconnecting a fitting, use a wrench on both halves of the fitting to prevent twisting of the
refrigerant lines or tubes.
^ Do not open a refrigerant system or uncap a new component unless it is as close as possible to
room temperature. This will prevent condensation from forming inside a component that is cooler
than the surrounding air.
- Good ventilation is necessary in the area where electronic A/C leak testing is to be carried out. If
the surrounding air is contaminated with refrigerant gas, the leak detector will indicate this gas all
the time. Odors from other chemicals such as antifreeze, diesel fuel, disc brake cleaner, or other
cleaning solvents can cause the same problem. A fan, even in a well-ventilated area, is very helpful
in removing small traces of contamination from the air that might affect the leak detector.
- A/C Refrigerant Analyzer must be used before the recovery of any vehicle's A/C refrigerant.
Failure to do so puts the shop's bulk refrigerant at risk of contamination. If the vehicle's A/C
refrigerant is contaminated, refer the customer to the service facility that carried out the last A/C
service. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use the A/C recovery equipment that is
designated for recovering contaminated A/C refrigerant. All contaminated A/C refrigerant must be
disposed of as hazardous waste. For all equipment, follow the equipment manufacturer's
procedures and instructions.
- Suction accumulator/drier, muffler, hoses, thermal expansion valve, and fixed orifice tube should
be removed when flushing the A/C system. Internal plumbing of these devices makes it impossible
to correctly remove any residual-flushing agent. Except for the hoses, these components are
typically discarded after A/C system contamination. Hoses can normally be reused unless they are
clogged with foreign material. The 3.785 liters (1 gallon) of A/C Systems Flushing Solvent
F4AZ-19579-A and FL1-A filter used in A/C Flusher 219-00001 are intended for use on one vehicle
only. They may be used to flush both the A/C condenser core and the A/C evaporator core on an
individual vehicle, but under no circumstances should they be used on more than one vehicle.
- During normal A/C operation, oil is circulated through the system with the refrigerant, and a small
amount is retained in each component. If certain components of the system are removed for new
installation, some of the refrigerant oil will go with the component. To maintain the original total oil
charge, it is necessary to compensate for the oil lost by adding oil to the system with the new part.
- If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into your
recovery/recycling equipment.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system, you must verify the purity of the
refrigerant. 2. Connect the R-134a A/C Refrigerant Center to the low and high pressure service
gauge port valves.
NOTE: Some R-134a service centers require the use of an A/C manifold gauge set.
3. Recover the refrigerant from the system following the operating instructions provided by the
equipment manufacturer. 4. Once the service center has recovered the vehicle A/C system
refrigerant, close the service center inlet valve (if so equipped). Then switch off the
power supply.
5. Allow the vehicle A/C system to remain closed for about two minutes. Observe the system
vacuum level as shown on the gauge. If the pressure
does not rise, disconnect the recovery station hose(s).
6. If the system pressure rises, repeat Steps 2 through 5 until the vacuum level remains stable for
two minutes. 7. Carry out the required repairs, then evacuate and recharge the A/C system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 7536
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Identifying Refrigerants
Delux A/C Refrigerant Analyzer
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Follow the instructions included with the refrigerant analyzer to obtain the sample for testing.
NOTE: Prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system, you must use an A/C refrigerant
analyzer to identify gas samples taken directly from the refrigeration system or storage containers.
2. The analyzer will display one of the following:
^ A green "PASS" Light Emitting Diode (LED) will light if the purity of the R-134, R-12 or the R-22 is
better than 98% by weight.
^ A red "FAIL" LED will light if the purity of the gases does not meet the 98% purity standard.
^ A red "FAIL" LED and "HYDROCARBON" light will illuminate and a horn will sound if a
hydrocarbon is detected above 5%. This will alert the user of potential hazards.
3. If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into your
recovery/recycling equipment.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 7537
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Handling of Contaminated Refrigerants
1. Recover the contaminated refrigerant using suitable recovery-only equipment designed for
capturing and storing contaminated refrigerant.
^ This equipment must only be used to recover contaminated refrigerant to prevent the spread to
other vehicles.
^ If this equipment is not available, contact an A/C service facility in your area with the correct
equipment to carry out this service.
CAUTION: If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into your
recovery/recycling equipment.
2. Determine and correct the cause of the customer's initial concern. 3. Remove the suction
accumulator/drier.
NOTE: ^
Residual refrigerant oil in the suction accumulator/drier must be drained and measured for correct
oil system matching.
^ The suction accumulator/drier cannot be cleaned and a new suction accumulator/drier must be
installed.
4. Clean the A/C evaporator core and the A/C condenser core by flushing. 5. Install the new suction
accumulator/drier. 6. Correctly oil match the system. 7. Evacuate and charge the system. 8.
Dispose of contaminated refrigerant according to all federal, state and local regulations.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 7538
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Evacuation and Charging
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Prior to charging the refrigerant system, you must verify the purity of the refrigerant. See: Service
and Repair/Identifying Refrigerants
2. Connect the R-134a A/C Refrigerant Center to the low and high pressure service gauge port
valves.
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a charging station to carry out evacuation and
charging of the refrigerant system. If a charging station is not available, system charging may be
accomplished using a separate vacuum pump, charging cylinder, and manifold gauge set.
3. Evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) (vacuum)
and as close to 101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible.
Continue to operate the vacuum pump for a minimum of 45 minutes.
4. Turn off the evacuation pump. Observe the low-pressure gauge for five minutes to make sure
that the system vacuum is held. If vacuum is not
held for five minutes, leak test the system, service the leaks, and evacuate the system again.
5. Correctly oil match the system to verify that the correct amount of refrigerant oil is present in the
system. 6. Charge the system with the specified weight of refrigerant and refrigerant oil. 7. When
no more refrigerant is being drawn into the system, start the engine and select MAX A/C operation.
Adjust the blower motor speed to
maximum and allow the remaining refrigerant to be drawn into the system. Continue to add
refrigerant into the system until the specified weight of R-134a has been added. Close the charging
cylinder valve and allow the system to pull any remaining refrigerant from the hose. When the
suction pressure drops to approximately 207 kPa (30 psi), close the charging hose valve.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 7539
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Leak Detection
Electronic Leak Detection
Refrigerent Leak Detector
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
CAUTION: Good ventilation is necessary in the area where electronic A/C leak testing is to be
carried out. If the surrounding air is contaminated with refrigerant gas, the leak detector will indicate
this gas all the time. Odors from other chemicals such as antifreeze, diesel fuel, disc brake cleaner,
or other cleaning solvents can cause the same problem. A fan, even in a well-ventilated area, is
very helpful in removing small traces of contamination from the air that might affect the leak
detector.
1. Leak test the refrigerant system using the Refrigerant Leak Detector. Follow instructions
included with leak detector for handling and operation
techniques.
NOTE: System pressure should be between 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C (75°F) with the
engine off.
2. If a leak is found, recover the refrigerant and repair the system.
Tracer Dye Leak Detection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 7540
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
NOTE: Ford Motor Company vehicles are produced with R-134a Leak Tracer Dye incorporated into
the A/C system. The location of leaks can be pinpointed by the bright yellow-green glow of the
tracer dye. Since more than one leak can exist, always inspect each component.
1. Check for leaks using a 120-watt UV spot lamp. 2. Scan all components, fittings and lines of the
A/C system. 3. After the leak is repaired, remove any traces of leak dye with a general purpose oil
solvent.
4. Verify the repair by operating the system for a short time and inspecting with the UV spot lamp.
Tracer Dye Injection
NOTE: System pressure should be between 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C (75°F) with the
engine off.
1. Install the Manifold Gauge Set or a recovery station.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 7541
2. Turn the valve on the fluorescent tracer dye injector all the way to the left to close the valve.
3. Fill the reservoir with 7 ml (0.25 ounce) of R-134a Fluorescent Tracer Dye 164-R3712.
4. Install the injector between the low-side quick disconnect and the vehicle low-pressure service
gauge port valve. 5. Open all quick disconnect valves and charge the refrigerant system. 6. When
system charging is complete, recover the refrigerant from the dye injector. 7. Remove the dye
injector from the low-side quick disconnect valve.
NOTE: Only connect the dye-injector to the Manifold Gauge Set or the charging/recovery station
when dye is to be injected. The dye injector has a one-way check valve that will prevent system
refrigerant recovery and evacuation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications
General Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications > Page 7546
Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
R-134a Systems ...................................................................................................................
F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) WSH-M1C231-B
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page
7547
Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair
Refrigerant Oil Addition
CAUTION: During normal A/C operation, oil is circulated through the system with the refrigerant,
and a small amount is retained in each component. If certain components of the system are
removed for new installation, some of the refrigerant oil will go with the component. To maintain the
original total oil charge, it is necessary to compensate for the oil lost by adding oil to the system
with the new part.
1. Rotate the A/C compressor shaft six to eight revolutions while collecting oil in a clean measuring
device.
^ If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is between 85-142 ml (3-5 ounces), pour
the same amount plus 30 ml (1 ounce) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent
meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B into the new A/C compressor.
^ If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is greater than 142 ml (5
ounces), pour the same amount drained of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent
meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B into the new A/C compressor.
^ If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is less than 85 ml (3 ounces),
pour 85 ml (3 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B into the new A/C compressor.
NOTE: Service A/C compressors are shipped without compressor oil.
2. For the suction accumulator/drier, drill two 1/2 inch holes in the suction accumulator/drier
cylinder and drain the oil into a calibrated container.
^ Add a quantity of new oil to match that drained from the old suction accumulator/drier plus 60 ml
(2 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification
WSH-M1C231-B.
3. For the A/C evaporator core, add 89 ml (3 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or
equivalent meeting Ford specification
WSH-M1C231-B to the suction accumulator/drier inlet tube.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page
7548
4. For the A/C condenser core, add 30 ml (1 ounce) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or
equivalent meeting Ford specification
WSH-M1C231-B to the A/C condenser core or the suction accumulator/drier inlet tube.
5. Add 60 ml (2 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B to the suction
accumulator/drier inlet tube when carrying out each of the following repairs: ^
installation of a new A/C evaporator core orifice
^ installation of a new A/C compressor pressure relief valve
^ installation of a new refrigerant line
^ repair of an O-ring seal leak
^ repair of a charge port leak
6. Installation of new components that do not require discharge of refrigerant and resulting oil loss,
such as the A/C cycling switch and the A/C
pressure transducer, do not require additional oil.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations
Electrical Components
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7552
Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7553
Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Compressor Cut-Off/Cycling Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Compressor Cut-Off/Cycling Switch > Page 7556
Dual Pressure Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation A/C Cycling Switch
A/C Cycling Switch
The A/C cycling switch is mounted on a Schrader valve-type fitting on the top of the suction
accumulator.
^ A valve depressor, located inside the threaded end of the A/C cycling switch, presses in on the
Schrader valve stem.
^ This allows the suction pressure inside the suction accumulator to control the operation of the
A/C cycling switch.
^ The electrical switch contacts open when the suction pressure drops to 152-193 kPa (22-28 psi).
^ The contacts close when the suction pressure rises to 276-324 kPa (40-47 psi).
^ When the A/C cycling switch contacts close, the signal to energize the A/C clutch is sent to the
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) which energizes the A/C relay and supplies B+ voltage to the
A/C clutch field coil.
^ When the A/C cycling switch contacts open, the A/C clutch field coil is deenergized and
compressor operation stops.
^ The A/C cycling switch will control the A/C evaporator core pressure at a point where the plate/fin
surface temperature will be maintained slightly above freezing.
^ This prevents icing of the A/C evaporator core and blockage of airflow.
^ It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to remove the A/C cycling switch.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch > Page 7559
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Cycling Switch
PCM Inputs
AIR CONDITIONING CYCLING SWITCH
The Air Conditioning (A/C) cycling switch may be wired to either the A/C Cycling Switch (ACCS) or
ACPSW Powertrain Control Module (PCM) input. When the A/C cycling switch opens, the PCM will
turn off the Air Conditioning (A/C) clutch For information on the specific function of the A/C cycling
switch, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning.
The A/C Cycling Switch (ACCS) circuit to the PCM provides a voltage signal which indicates when
the A/C is requested. When the A/C demand switch is turned on, and both the A/C cycling switch
and the high pressure contacts of the A/C high pressure switch (if equipped and in circuit) are
closed, voltage is supplied to the ACCS circuit at the PCM. Refer to Vehicle/Diagrams for vehicle
specific wiring.
If the ACCS signal is not received by the PCM, the PCM circuit will not allow the A/C to operate.
For additional information, refer to PCM outputs, wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff. See:
Powertrain Management/Description and Operation/PCM Outputs
NOTE: Some applications do not have a dedicated (separate) input to the PCM indicating that A/C
is requested. This information is received by the PCM through the BUS + and BUS - Standard
Corporate Protocol (SCP) communication.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch > Page 7560
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning High Pressure
Switch
The A/C pressure cut-off switch is used to interrupt A/C compressor operation in the event of high
system discharge pressures.
^ The A/C pressure cut-off switch is mounted on a Schrader valve-type fitting on the high pressure
side of the condenser to evaporator line.
^ A valve depressor, located inside the threaded end of the A/C pressure cut-off switch, is used to
monitor the compressor discharge pressure.
^ It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch.
^ The A/C pressure cut-off switch has two sets of contacts. One electrical contact is normally
closed.
^ When the compressor discharge pressure rises to approximately 3,103 kPa (450 psi), the switch
contacts open, disengaging the A/C compressor.
^ When the pressure drops to approximately 1,724 kPa (250 psi), the contacts close to allow
operation of the A/C compressor.
The switch contains a second set of electrical contacts used for high-speed fan control.
^ When the compressor discharge pressure reaches approximately 2,241 kPa (325 psi), these
contacts close and engage the high-speed fan control.
^ When the pressure drops to approximately 1,896 kPa (275 psi), the contacts again open and the
high speed fan control is disengaged.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Cut-Off/Cycling Switch
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Compressor Cut-Off/Cycling Switch
REMOVAL
1. Remove the A/C cycling switch.
1 Disconnect the A/C cycling switch electrical connector.
2 Remove the A/C cycling switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Cut-Off/Cycling Switch > Page 7563
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Pressure Cutoff Switch
REMOVAL
1. Remove the pressure cut-off switch.
1 Disconnect the A/C pressure cut-off switch electrical connector.
2 Remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Blower Motor Relay: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7568
Electrical Components
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7569
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7570
Blower Motor Relay: Description and Operation
The blower motor relay supplies voltage to the blower motor and is activated when the key is ON
and the function selector switch is in any position besides OFF. The blower motor relay is located
under the instrument panel next to the steering column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7571
Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7572
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7576
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Compressor Clutch Relay
Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Compressor Clutch Relay
The A/C compressor clutch relay supplies voltage to the A/C compressor clutch and is located in
the Battery Junction Box (BJB). The Power Control Module (PCM) can interrupt the A/C
compressor operation through the A/C compressor clutch relay under the following conditions:
^ during engine start-up
^ Wide Open Throttle (WOT)
^ low engine idle conditions
^ excessively high engine temperatures
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Compressor Clutch Relay > Page 7579
Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Compressor Cut-Off Relay
WIDE OPEN THROTTLE A/C CUT-OFF
The Wide Open Throttle A/C Cut-Off Relay (may be referred to as the A/C clutch relay) is normally
open. There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch or EATC Module and the A/C
clutch. The PCM will receive a signal indicating that A/C is requested (for some applications, this
message is sent through the BUS + and BUS - circuits). When A/C is requested, the PCM will
check other A/C related inputs that are available (such as ACP (SW), A/C Cycling Switch (ACCS)).
If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK (such as coolant
temperature, engine rpm, throttle position), the PCM will ground the Wide Open Throttle A/C
(WAC) output, closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/C clutch.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7580
Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7581
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure
voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the
relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is
12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Air Conditioning Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Conditioning Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Remove the function selector switch knob.
3. Remove the function selector switch.
^ Push in the locking tab on one side of the function selector switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Align the function selector switch locking tabs with the holes in the housing and press the
function selector into the housing. Verify that both locking tabs are secured.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Remove the blower motor switch knob.
3. Remove the blower motor switch.
^ Depress the locking tab.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations
Electrical Components
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7592
Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7593
Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Compressor Cut-Off/Cycling Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Compressor Cut-Off/Cycling Switch > Page 7596
Dual Pressure Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation A/C Cycling Switch
A/C Cycling Switch
The A/C cycling switch is mounted on a Schrader valve-type fitting on the top of the suction
accumulator.
^ A valve depressor, located inside the threaded end of the A/C cycling switch, presses in on the
Schrader valve stem.
^ This allows the suction pressure inside the suction accumulator to control the operation of the
A/C cycling switch.
^ The electrical switch contacts open when the suction pressure drops to 152-193 kPa (22-28 psi).
^ The contacts close when the suction pressure rises to 276-324 kPa (40-47 psi).
^ When the A/C cycling switch contacts close, the signal to energize the A/C clutch is sent to the
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) which energizes the A/C relay and supplies B+ voltage to the
A/C clutch field coil.
^ When the A/C cycling switch contacts open, the A/C clutch field coil is deenergized and
compressor operation stops.
^ The A/C cycling switch will control the A/C evaporator core pressure at a point where the plate/fin
surface temperature will be maintained slightly above freezing.
^ This prevents icing of the A/C evaporator core and blockage of airflow.
^ It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to remove the A/C cycling switch.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch > Page 7599
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Cycling Switch
PCM Inputs
AIR CONDITIONING CYCLING SWITCH
The Air Conditioning (A/C) cycling switch may be wired to either the A/C Cycling Switch (ACCS) or
ACPSW Powertrain Control Module (PCM) input. When the A/C cycling switch opens, the PCM will
turn off the Air Conditioning (A/C) clutch For information on the specific function of the A/C cycling
switch, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning.
The A/C Cycling Switch (ACCS) circuit to the PCM provides a voltage signal which indicates when
the A/C is requested. When the A/C demand switch is turned on, and both the A/C cycling switch
and the high pressure contacts of the A/C high pressure switch (if equipped and in circuit) are
closed, voltage is supplied to the ACCS circuit at the PCM. Refer to Vehicle/Diagrams for vehicle
specific wiring.
If the ACCS signal is not received by the PCM, the PCM circuit will not allow the A/C to operate.
For additional information, refer to PCM outputs, wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff. See:
Powertrain Management/Description and Operation/PCM Outputs
NOTE: Some applications do not have a dedicated (separate) input to the PCM indicating that A/C
is requested. This information is received by the PCM through the BUS + and BUS - Standard
Corporate Protocol (SCP) communication.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch > Page 7600
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning High Pressure
Switch
The A/C pressure cut-off switch is used to interrupt A/C compressor operation in the event of high
system discharge pressures.
^ The A/C pressure cut-off switch is mounted on a Schrader valve-type fitting on the high pressure
side of the condenser to evaporator line.
^ A valve depressor, located inside the threaded end of the A/C pressure cut-off switch, is used to
monitor the compressor discharge pressure.
^ It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch.
^ The A/C pressure cut-off switch has two sets of contacts. One electrical contact is normally
closed.
^ When the compressor discharge pressure rises to approximately 3,103 kPa (450 psi), the switch
contacts open, disengaging the A/C compressor.
^ When the pressure drops to approximately 1,724 kPa (250 psi), the contacts close to allow
operation of the A/C compressor.
The switch contains a second set of electrical contacts used for high-speed fan control.
^ When the compressor discharge pressure reaches approximately 2,241 kPa (325 psi), these
contacts close and engage the high-speed fan control.
^ When the pressure drops to approximately 1,896 kPa (275 psi), the contacts again open and the
high speed fan control is disengaged.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Cut-Off/Cycling Switch
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Compressor Cut-Off/Cycling Switch
REMOVAL
1. Remove the A/C cycling switch.
1 Disconnect the A/C cycling switch electrical connector.
2 Remove the A/C cycling switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Cut-Off/Cycling Switch > Page 7603
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Pressure Cutoff Switch
REMOVAL
1. Remove the pressure cut-off switch.
1 Disconnect the A/C pressure cut-off switch electrical connector.
2 Remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Locations
Service Port HVAC: Locations
Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page
7607
Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 2
The high-pressure gauge port valve is located on the condenser to evaporator line.
The low-pressure gauge port valve is located on the A/C manifold and tube assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page
7608
Service Port HVAC: Description and Operation
Service Gauge Port Valve
The high-pressure gauge port valve is located on the condenser to evaporator line.
The low-pressure gauge port valve is located on the A/C manifold and tube assembly.
The fitting is an integral part of the refrigeration line or component.
^ Special couplings are required for both the high-side and low-side gauge ports.
^ The Schrader-type valve core can be repaired if the seal leaks.
^ Always install the A/C charging valve cap on the gauge port valves after repairing the refrigerant
system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Vacuum Harness HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Customer Safety Information
Vacuum Harness HVAC: Customer Safety Information
WARNING:
BEFORE USING, OR HANDLING COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PAINT THINNER CONTAINING
METHYL ETHYL KETONE (MEK), READ AND FOLLOW THE WARNING INFORMATION ON
THE PRODUCT LABEL.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Vacuum Harness HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 7613
Vacuum Harness HVAC: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
BEFORE USING, OR HANDLING COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PAINT THINNER CONTAINING
METHYL ETHYL KETONE (MEK), READ AND FOLLOW THE WARNING INFORMATION ON
THE PRODUCT LABEL.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Vacuum Harness HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 7614
Vacuum Harness HVAC: Service and Repair
Vacuum Tester Kit
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Measure the length of the damaged area of the mini-tube vacuum hose. 2. Cut a piece of
standard 3 mm (0.125 inch) inner diameter vacuum hose approximately 25 mm (1 inch) longer than
the damaged area of the
mini-tube vacuum hose.
3. Cut off the mini-tube vacuum hose on each side of the damaged area. 4. Dip the mini-tube hose
ends in commercially available paint thinner containing Methyl Ethyl Ketone (MEK). This solvent
will seal the mini-tube
in the vacuum hose.
WARNING: READ THE WARNING INFORMATION ON THE PRODUCT LABEL. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
5. Insert the ends of the mini-tube vacuum hose approximately 9 mm (0.375 inch) into the ends of
the standard 3 mm (0.125 inch) service vacuum
hose section.
6. Shake the service joint after assembly to make sure the O-ring seal solvent is dispersed and the
vacuum line is not plugged. 7. Test the system for a vacuum leak in the repair area.
^ Use the Vacuum Tester or equivalent.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Vacuum Harness HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 7615
Vacuum Tester Kit
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information >
Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Inspection and Repair After
A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment
Inspection and Repair After a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment
WARNING: Remove restraint system diagnostic tools from the vehicle prior to road testing. If tools
are not removed, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) device may not deploy in a crash.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash and
possibly violate vehicle safety standards.
NOTE: After diagnosing or repairing a supplemental restraint system (SRS), the restraint system
diagnostic tools (if required) must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
NOTE: Deployable devices (such as air bag modules, pretensioners) may deploy alone or in
various combinations depending on the impact event.
NOTE: Always refer to the appropriate workshop manual procedures prior to carrying out vehicle
repairs affecting the SRS and safety belt system.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
All vehicles
1. NOTE: Refer to the correct removal and installation procedure for all SRS components being
installed.
When any deployable device or combination of devices are deployed and/or the restraints control
module (RCM) has the DTC B1231 (Event Threshold Exceeded) in memory, the repair of the
vehicle's SRS is to include the removal of all deployed devices and the installation of new
deployable devices, the removal and installation of new impact sensors, and the removal and
installation of a new RCM. DTCs must cleared from all required modules after repairs are carried
out.
Vehicles with occupant classification sensor (OCS) system
2. NOTE: After installation of new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system components carry
out the OCS System Reset procedure as
instructed in the workshop manual. Refer to the appropriate workshop manual for OCS system
removal and installation procedure.
When a vehicle has been involved in a collision and the occupant classification system module
(OCSM) has DTC B1231 stored in memory, the repair of the OCS system is to include the following
procedures for the specified system:
- For rail type OCS system, inspect the passenger side floorpan for damage and repair as
necessary. Install new OCS system rails.
- For weight sensor bolt type OCS system, inspect the passenger side floorpan for damage and
repair as necessary. Install a new seat track with OCS system weight sensor bolts. DTC must be
cleared from the OCSM before carrying out Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset.
Do not install a new OCSM unless DTC B1231 cannot be cleared.
- NOTE: Most bladder type OCSM do not store a DTC B1231 in memory after deployment. The
DTC B1231 is stored only by the RCM.
For bladder type OCS system, inspect for damage and repair as necessary. If installation of an
OCS system component is required, an OCS system service kit must be installed.
All vehicles
3. When any damage to the impact sensor mounting points or mounting hardware has occurred,
repair or install new mounting points and mounting
hardware as needed.
4. When the driver air bag module has deployed, a new clockspring must be installed.
5. New driver and/or front passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height
adjusters) must be installed if the vehicle is
involved in a collision that results in deployment of the driver and/or front passenger safety belt
pretensioners. For additional information, refer to Safety Belt System.
6. Inspect the entire vehicle for damage, including the following components:
Steering column (deployable column if equipped) Instrument panel knee bolsters and mounting
points Instrument panel braces and brackets Instrument panel and mounting points Seats and seat
mounting points Safety belts, safety belt buckles and safety belt retractors.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information >
Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment > Page 7621
SRS wiring, wiring harnesses and connectors
7. After carrying out the review and inspection of the entire vehicle for damage, repair or install new
components as needed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information >
Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment > Page 7622
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Safety Belt Procedure After
A Collision
SAFETY BELT PROCEDURE AFTER A COLLISION
WARNING: All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support
assemblies (slide bar), shoulder belt height adjusters, child safety seat tether attachments (if
equipped), and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. New belt assemblies
should be installed unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate
correctly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if
either damage or incorrect operation is noted.
NOTE: Safety belt assemblies should be periodically inspected to make sure they have not
become damaged and that they remain in correct operating condition, particularly if they have been
subjected to severe stress.
Before installing the new safety belt assembly, the safety belt attaching areas must be inspected
for damage and distortion. If the attaching points are damaged and distorted, the sheet metal must
be reworked back to its original shape and structural integrity.
Install the new safety belt(s) using the appropriate instructions. Perform the Functional Test.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Customer Safety Information
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE
AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID
NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 7628
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE
AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID
NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Seats Removed
There are two deactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
side air bag concerns, and also when repairing any in-seat component in vehicles equipped with
side air bags.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal. This procedure will be used when
diagnosing a concern not related to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: ^
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag system is being serviced, the airbag system
must be deactivated using the appropriate deactivation procedure.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag floor
connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system with the seats in the
vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system, the seats must be removed
from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag floor
connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle
over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag system (lumbar,
climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the
restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air
bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the front seats. 9. Attach
a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag floor electrical connector.
10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical
connector. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical
connector. 12. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Seats Not Removed
There are two deactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
side air bag concerns, and also when repairing any in-seat component in vehicles equipped with
side air bags.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal. This procedure will be used when
diagnosing a concern not related to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position. 2. Disconnect the battery
ground cable.
WARNING: ^
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7631
SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR
STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS
DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD
LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag system is being serviced, the airbag system
must be deactivated using the appropriate deactivation procedure.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag floor
connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system with the seats in the
vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system, the seats must be removed
from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag floor
connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle
over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag system (lumbar,
climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the
restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect
the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped
with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat.
10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical
connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to
the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect
the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Depowering and Repowering Procedure
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event
of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if
equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered.
NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition
switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system
(SRS) fault.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the
cover and the restraints control module (RCM)
fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB.
4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no
flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit
continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7632
proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing or
replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side
impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair
have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected.
2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover.
4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front
of any air bag module when the
battery ground cable is connected.
Connect the battery ground cable.
5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator
and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool.
Seats Removed
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED
AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO
AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
4. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7633
5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Install the front seats. 8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring
connector.
^ Reconnect the electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
10. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 11. Reconnect the battery
ground cable. 12. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Seats Not Removed
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED
AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO
AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring
connector.
^ Reconnect the electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
4. If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 6.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7634
8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7635
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist
Air Bag Reconnect Checklist
The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system
concern: 1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3.
Restraints Control Module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors
connected? 5. All sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected?
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7636
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure
Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator
with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
^ fail to light.
^ remain lit continuously.
^ flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control
Module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an
SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag
indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Specifications
Air Bag: Specifications
Passenger Air Bag Module Bolts 8 Nm
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations >
Passenger Air Bag Module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations >
Passenger Air Bag Module > Page 7642
Air Bag: Locations Side Air Bag Module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations >
Passenger Air Bag Module > Page 7643
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver
Air Bag Module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver
Air Bag Module > Page 7646
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver
Air Bag Module > Page 7647
Air Bag: Diagrams Side Air Bag Module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions
> Technician Safety Information
Air Bag: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TRIM COVER POINTED AWAY
FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN WITH THE TRIM COVER FACE DOWN. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ AIR BAG MODULES WITH DISCOLORED OR DAMAGED TRIM COVERS MUST BE
INSTALLED NEW, NOT REPAINTED.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions
> Technician Safety Information > Page 7650
Air Bag: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment
door.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions
> Page 7651
Air Bag: Description and Operation
Driver Air Bag Module
NOTE: References to the driver air bag module must not be confused with the seat-mounted air
bag components of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
The driver air bag module: ^
is steering wheel mounted.
^ will deploy upon receiving a signal from the Restraints Control Module (RCM).
^ has no subassemblies.
^ is serviced with the steering wheel as an assembly.
Passenger Air Bag Module
NOTE: References to the passenger air bag module must not be confused with the seat-mounted
air bag components of the supplemental restraint system (SRS).
The passenger air bag module: ^
has no separately repairable parts and is installed as an assembly.
^ is mounted in the RH side of the instrument panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module
Air Bag: Service and Repair Driver Air Bag Module
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event
of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim cover pointed away from your
body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Do not set a live air bag module down with the trim cover face down. This will reduce
the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a
product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap
and water afterwards.
WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
WARNING: Air bag modules with discolored or damaged trim covers must be installed new, not
repainted.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition
switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system
(SRS) fault.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition,
install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Depower the system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Air Bag
Disarming and Arming/Depowering and Repowering
Procedure
2. NOTE: The driver air bag module and steering wheel must be serviced as an assembly. These
components are not serviced separately
NOTE: Make sure to follow all steps and instructions in the removal of the steering wheel.
Remove the steering wheel.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
4. Repower the system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Air Bag
Disarming and Arming/Depowering and Repowering
Procedure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7654
Air Bag: Service and Repair Passenger Air Bag Module
Vehicles With Side Air Bags
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND DEPLOYMENT DOOR POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN WITH THE DEPLOYMENT DOOR FACE
DOWN. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL
DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ AIR BAG MODULES WITH DISCOLORED OR DAMAGED DEPLOYMENT DOORS MUST BE
INSTALLED NEW, NOT REPAINTED.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE
LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7655
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
2. Open the glove box past its stops.
3. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the Instrument Panel (I/P), disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7656
5. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
6. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
8. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7657
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
10. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
12. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the side air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7658
13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
14. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system
diagnostic tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
19. Remove the four passenger air bag module bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7659
20. Reaching one hand into the glove box opening, push outward on the passenger air bag module
and remove it from the instrument panel.
CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment
door.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND DEPLOYMENT DOOR POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN WITH THE DEPLOYMENT DOOR FACE
DOWN. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL
DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ AIR BAG MODULES WITH DISCOLORED OR DAMAGED DEPLOYMENT DOORS MUST BE
INSTALLED NEW, NOT REPAINTED.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7660
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Make sure the J-clips are correctly aligned to the holes in the passenger air bag module before
positioning it in the instrument panel.
2. Position and align the two passenger air bag module trim cover alignment pins (one shown) to
the instrument panel openings.
3. Install the passenger air bag module trim cover into the instrument panel.
^ Install the trim cover alignment pins into the instrument panel.
^ When aligned correctly, the passenger air bag module trim cover will have an even gap around
its perimeter and sit flat up against the instrument panel.
4. Install the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7661
5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
6. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 7. Close the glove box. 8. Connect
the battery ground cable. 9. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still installed at the remaining
deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
10. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: ^
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
11. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7662
VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND
POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
12. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
13. Install the steering wheel access cover.
14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
15. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
the bracket under the seat.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7663
16. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
17. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag
module electrical connector onto the bracket under the
seat.
18. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7664
19. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
onto the bracket under the seat.
20. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
21. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air
bag module electrical connector onto the bracket
under the seat.
22. Connect the battery ground cable. 23. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed,
prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Vehicles Without Side Air Bags
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7665
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND DEPLOYMENT DOOR POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN WITH THE DEPLOYMENT DOOR FACE
DOWN. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL
DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ AIR BAG MODULES WITH DISCOLORED OR DAMAGED DEPLOYMENT DOORS MUST BE
INSTALLED NEW, NOT REPAINTED.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE
LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7666
2. Open the glove box past its stops.
3. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the Instrument Panel (I/P), disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
5. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7667
6. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
8. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7668
10. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector. 12. Connect the battery ground cable. 13. With the restraint system
diagnostic tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
14. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
15. Remove the four passenger air bag module bolts.
16. Reaching one hand into the glove box opening, push outward on the passenger air bag module
and remove it from the instrument panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7669
CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment
door.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND DEPLOYMENT DOOR POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN WITH THE DEPLOYMENT DOOR FACE
DOWN. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL
DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ AIR BAG MODULES WITH DISCOLORED OR DAMAGED DEPLOYMENT DOORS MUST BE
INSTALLED NEW, NOT REPAINTED.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7670
1. Make sure the J-clips are correctly aligned to the holes in the passenger air bag module before
positioning it in the instrument panel.
2. Position and align the two passenger air bag module trim cover alignment pins (one shown) to
the instrument panel openings.
3. Install the passenger air bag module trim cover into the instrument panel.
^ Install the trim cover alignment pins into the instrument panel.
^ When aligned correctly, the passenger air bag module trim cover will have an even gap around
its perimeter and sit flat up against the instrument panel.
4. Install the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7671
5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
6. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 7. Close the glove box. 8. Connect
the battery ground cable. 9. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still installed at the remaining
deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
10. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: ^
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
11. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7672
VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND
POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
12. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
13. Install the steering wheel access cover.
14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
15. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
the bracket under the seat.
16. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7673
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
17. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
onto the bracket under the seat.
18. Connect the battery ground cable. 19. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed,
prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Page 7674
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Specifications
Air Bag Control Module: Specifications
Restraint Control Module Bolts 12 Nm
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 7678
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 7679
Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 7680
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Air Bag Control Module: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE
CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET
FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE
AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM
MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING
BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 7683
Air Bag Control Module: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Page 7684
Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) carries out the following functions:
^ signals the inflators to deploy the air bags in the event of a deployable crash
^ monitors the air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) for faults
^ illuminates the air bag indicator if a fault is detected
^ flashes the air bag indicator to indicate the Lamp Fault Code (LFC) detected
^ communicates through the Data Link Connector (DLC) the current or historical Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs)
^ signals the instrument cluster to activate a chime if the air bag indicator is not available and
another SRS fault exists
NOTE: The safing Sensor is internal to the RCM and is not serviced separately.
The RCM monitors the SRS for possible faults. If a fault is detected while the ignition switch is in
the RUN position, the RCM will flash the air bag indicator located in the instrument cluster.
When the ignition is cycled (turned off and then on), the air bag indicator will prove out by lighting
for six seconds and then off for two seconds. After the prove out, the air bag indicator will then flash
the two-digit LFC for any current SRS fault. If an SRS fault exists, the air bag indicator will flash the
LFC five times, and then remain illuminated for the rest of the key cycle. The RCM will also
communicate the current and historical DTCs through the DLC, to the scan tool. If the air bag
indicator does not function, and the system detects a fault condition, the RCM will signal the
instrument cluster to activate an audible chime. The chime is a series of five sets of five tone
bursts. If the chime is heard, the SRS and the air bag indicator require repair.
LFCs are prioritized. If two or more faults occur at the same time, the fault having the highest
priority will be displayed. After that fault has been corrected, the next highest priority fault will be
displayed.
The RCM includes a backup power supply. This feature provides sufficient backup power to deploy
the air bags in the event that the ignition circuit is damaged in a collision before the safing and air
bag sensors determine that a deployment is required. The backup power supply will deplete its
stored energy approximately one minute after the battery ground cable is disconnected.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Page 7685
Air Bag Control Module: Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Air Bag Systems; Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Vehicles With Side Air Bags
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE
CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET
FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE
AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM
MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition,
install the original part and perform the diagnostic
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7688
procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
2. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7689
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
5. Open the glove box past its stops.
6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the instrument panel, disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
8. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7690
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
12. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7691
13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
14. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system diagnostic tools
installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 19. Position the carpet back
at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel.
20. Remove the right-hand side restraint control module (RCM) retaining bolts. 21. Position the
carpet back at the left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7692
22. Remove the RCM.
1 Slide and disengage the two RCM electrical connector locking clips.
2 Push down to pivot the RCM electrical connector tabs and pull out to disconnect.
3 Remove the retaining bolt.
4 Remove the RCM.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE
CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET
FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE
AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM
MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition,
install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Position the RCM to the center tunnel area and install the three bolts hand-tight.
WARNING: ^
THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING
BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7693
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
2. Tighten the right-hand side RCM bolts.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
3. Reposition the carpet back at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument
panel.
4. Connect the RCM.
1 Tighten the bolt.
2 Connect the RCM electrical connectors.
3 Slide and engage the RCM electrical connector locking clips.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
5. Reposition the carpet back at the left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument
panel. 6. Connect the battery ground cable. 7. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still
installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
8. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7694
9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
10. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
the bracket under the seat.
11. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
12. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag
module electrical connector onto the bracket under the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7695
seat.
13. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
14. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
onto the bracket under the seat.
15. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7696
16. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air
bag module electrical connector onto the bracket
under the seat.
17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
18. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 19. Close the glove box.
20. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7697
VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
21. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
22. Install the steering wheel access cover. 23. Connect the battery ground cable. 24. With all the
restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Vehicles Without Side Air Bags
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7698
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE
CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET
FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE
AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM
MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition,
install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7699
2. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
5. Open the glove box past its stops.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7700
6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the instrument panel, disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
8. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7701
10. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector. 12. Connect the battery ground cable. 13. With the restraint system diagnostic
tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
14. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 15. Position the carpet back
at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel.
16. Remove the right-hand side restraint control module (RCM) retaining bolts. 17. Position the
carpet back at the left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel.
18. Remove the RCM.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7702
1 Slide and disengage the two RCM electrical connector locking clips.
2 Push down to pivot the RCM electrical connector tabs and pull out to disconnect.
3 Remove the retaining bolt.
4 Remove the RCM.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE
CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET
FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE
AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM
MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition,
install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Position the RCM to the center tunnel area and install the three bolts hand-tight.
WARNING: ^
THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING
BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7703
2. Tighten the right-hand side RCM bolts.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
3. Reposition the carpet back at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument
panel.
4. Connect the RCM.
1 Tighten the bolt.
2 Connect the RCM electrical connectors.
3 Slide and engage the RCM electrical connector locking clips.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
5. Reposition the carpet back at the left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument
panel. 6. Connect the battery ground cable. 7. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still
installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
8. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7704
10. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
the bracket under the seat.
11. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
12. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
onto the bracket under the seat.
13. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7705
VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND
POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
14. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 15. Close the glove box.
16. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
17. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
18. Install the steering wheel access cover. 19. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7706
20. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air
Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7707
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Weld Nut Repair
"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE:
^ There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedures and Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control
Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
^ If two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts in this procedure. Weld nuts must
be installed in Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side
Impact Sensor.
^ The following procedure applies to vehicles that have a rectangular hole in the sheet metal that is
in close proximity to the missing weld nut.
1. Obtain a "J" nut (part number N623332-S301) or any of the following optional "J" nuts (part
numbers: N623342-S101, N800854-S100,
N800925-S100).
2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190) or equivalent. 3. Install
the "J" nut through the rectangular hole in the sheet metal. 4. Install the crash sensor.
NOTE: Be sure the threaded portion of the "J" nut is aligned with the clearance hole in the sheet
metal.
5. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE:
^ There are two procedures to repairs a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedure and Weld Nut Repair-"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM)
and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
^ Use only this procedure if two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts in Weld
Nut Repair-"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Crash Sensor.
^ Radiator support repair shown, others are similar.
1. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) weld nut (part number N806285-S190). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in)
grounding screw (part number N806327-S190).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7708
3. Route a sufficient length of copper welding wire through the weld nut clearance hole and back
out an adjacent access hole.
4. Feed the copper welding wire through the weld nut, then through a standard flat washer. 5.
Secure the flat washer so that it cannot be pulled off the end of the copper welding wire. 6. Pull the
copper welding wire back through the clearance hole, allowing the weld nut and flat washer to
follow the copper welding wire through. 7. Position the weld nut to the weld nut clearance hole,
firmly pulling on the copper welding wire allowing the secured flat washer to hold the weld
nut in position.
8. Holding the weld nut securely in place and using a MIG welder, weld in four places around the
edge of the weld nut. 9. Metal finish as required.
10. Verify the nut is securely in place. 11. Install the crash sensor. 12. Tighten the attaching screws
to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Stripped Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
1. Obtain an 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw (part number N802455-S190). 2. Drill out the internal
threads of the stripped-out weld nut to 7.37 mm (0.29 in) using a letter "L" size drill bit. 3. Position
the crash sensor to the vehicle. 4. Install the 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw into the drilled-out
weld nut. 5. Install the remaining attaching screws. 6. Tighten the attaching screws to specification.
Refer to Torque Specifications.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 7709
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Diagrams
Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TRIM COVER POINTED AWAY
FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN WITH THE TRIM COVER FACE DOWN. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ AIR BAG MODULES WITH DISCOLORED OR DAMAGED TRIM COVERS MUST BE
INSTALLED NEW, NOT REPAINTED.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ TO REDUCE THE RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, READ AND FOLLOW ALL
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, NOTES, AND INSTRUCTIONS IN THE STEERING WHEEL REMOVAL
AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.
^ INCORRECT CENTRALIZATION MAY RESULT IN PREMATURE COMPONENT FAILURE. IF
IN DOUBT WHEN CENTRALIZING THE CLOCKSPRING, REPEAT THE CENTRALIZING
PROCEDURE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THIS INSTRUCTION MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
^ TO REDUCE THE RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, READ AND FOLLOW ALL
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, NOTES, AND INSTRUCTIONS IN THE STEERING WHEEL REMOVAL
AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 7715
Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION:
^ Overturning will destroy the clockspring. The internal ribbon wire acts as the stop and can be
broken from its internal connection.
^ Make sure the road wheels are in the straight ahead position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7716
Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Description and Operation
The clockspring:
^ is mounted on the steering column, behind the steering wheel.
^ provides a continuous electrical path between the Restraints Control Module (RCM) and the
driver air bag module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7717
Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TRIM COVER POINTED AWAY
FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN WITH THE TRIM COVER FACE DOWN. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ AIR BAG MODULES WITH DISCOLORED OR DAMAGED TRIM COVERS MUST BE
INSTALLED NEW, NOT REPAINTED.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tool MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7718
removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side
airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The
restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat Systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
All vehicles
1. Make sure the wheels are in the straight-ahead position. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable
and wait at least one minute. 3. Remove the steering wheel.
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, READ AND FOLLOW
ALL WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, NOTES, AND INSTRUCTIONS IN THE STEERING WHEEL
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.
Vehicles with tilt column
4. Position the steering column completely downward.
All vehicles
5. Push in where indicated, releasing the retaining tabs, and remove the upper steering column
shroud.
6. Remove the lower steering column shroud.
1 Release the tilt column locking lever, if equipped.
2 Remove the three screws.
3 Remove the lower steering column shroud.
NOTE: The steering column must be in the raised position, with the tilt column lever released (if
equipped), to remove the lower steering column shroud.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7719
7. Apply two strips of masking tape across the clockspring to prevent accidental rotation when the
clockspring is removed.
8. Separate the clockspring from the steering column.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Pull out and separate the clockspring from the steering column.
9. Remove the clockspring.
1 Disconnect the accessory electrical connector.
2 Push to release the clockspring electrical connector locking clip.
3 With the clockspring electrical connector locking clip in the released position, pull and disconnect
the clockspring electrical connector.
4 Remove the clockspring.
10. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the clockspring
electrical connector at the steering column.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7720
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TRIM COVER POINTED AWAY
FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN WITH THE TRIM COVER FACE DOWN. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ AIR BAG MODULES WITH DISCOLORED OR DAMAGED TRIM COVERS MUST BE
INSTALLED NEW, NOT REPAINTED.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat Systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
All vehicles
1. Connect the battery ground cable. 2. With the restraint system diagnostic tools installed at all
deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
3. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Vehicles receiving a new clockspring
4. Remove the key from the clockspring, holding the rotor in its centralized position.
^ Do not allow the clockspring rotor to turn from this position.
NOTE: A new clockspring is supplied in a centralized position and held there with a key.
Vehicles needing clockspring recentering
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7721
5. Centralize the clockspring.
1 Hold the clockspring outer housing stationary.
2 While turning the rotor clockwise, carefully feel for the ribbon wire to run out of length, and a
slight resistance is felt. Stop turning at this point.
CAUTION: Overturning will destroy the clockspring. The internal ribbon wire acts as the stop and
can be broken from its internal connection.
3 Turn the rotor counterclockwise approximately 2-3/4 turns. This is the center point of the
clockspring. ^
Do not allow the rotor to turn from this position.
WARNING: INCORRECT CENTRALIZATION MAY RESULT IN PREMATURE COMPONENT
FAILURE. IF IN DOUBT WHEN CENTRALIZING THE CLOCKSPRING, REPEAT THE
CENTRALIZING PROCEDURE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THIS INSTRUCTION MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
CAUTION: Make sure the road wheels are in the straight ahead position.
NOTE: If a clockspring has rotated out of center, follow through with this step.
All vehicles
6. Make sure the road wheels are in the straight ahead position.
7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the clockspring
electrical connector at the steering column.
8. Connect the clockspring electrical connectors.
1 Connect the clockspring electrical connector.
2 Connect the accessory electrical connector.
Vehicle repairs reusing the same clockspring
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7722
9. Remove the tape applied during clockspring removal.
NOTE: When the tape is removed, do not allow the clockspring to turn.
All vehicles
10. Align the clockspring for installation.
^ Align the large slot to the large tab in the clockspring.
^ Align the small slot to the small tab in the clockspring.
NOTE: The clockspring is shown from the back for clarity.
11. Install the clockspring.
1 With the slots and tabs aligned, slide the clockspring over the steering column.
2 With the clockspring sitting flush against the multi-function switch, install the screws.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7723
12. Install the lower steering column shroud.
1 Release the tilt column locking lever, if equipped.
2 Position the lower steering column shroud to the steering column.
NOTE: The steering column must be in the raised position, with the tilt column lever released (if
equipped), to install the lower steering column shroud.
3 Install the three screws.
Vehicles with tilt column
13. Position the steering column completely downward.
All vehicles
14. Position the upper steering column shroud to the steering column and completely engage the
retaining tabs.
^ Make sure the upper steering column shroud is aligned correctly and the retaining tabs are
completely engaged.
15. Install the steering wheel.
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, READ AND FOLLOW
ALL WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, NOTES, AND INSTRUCTIONS IN THE STEERING WHEEL
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.
16. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air
Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7724
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information >
Specifications
Impact Sensor: Specifications
Side Impact Sensor Bolts 12 Nm
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Side Air Bag Sensor, Left
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Side Air Bag Sensor, Left > Page 7730
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Side Air Bag Sensor, Left
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Side Air Bag Sensor, Left > Page 7733
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Customer Safety Information
Impact Sensor: Customer Safety Information
WARNING: THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR
CORRECT SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN
WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND
BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE
RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 7736
Impact Sensor: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE AIR BAG SIDE CRASH SENSOR RETAINING BOLTS IS
CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 7737
Impact Sensor: Description and Operation
WARNING: THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR
CORRECT SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN
WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND
BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE
RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
For this vehicle, the SRS employs three crash sensors. One of the sensors is integral to the RCM
and is not serviceable separately. In addition, there are two side crash sensors located in the LH
and RH B-pillars. The RCM is mounted on the center tunnel under the instrument panel. Mounting
orientation is critical for correct operation of all crash sensors.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Side Impact Sensor
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor
Driver Side
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7740
vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint
system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if
equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: ^
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
2. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7741
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
5. Open the glove box past its stops.
6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the Instrument Panel (I/P), disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7742
8. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
10. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7743
12. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
14. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system diagnostic
tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7744
19. Remove the B-pillar trim panel.
20. Remove the side crash sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the side crash sensor.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7745
1. Install the side crash sensor.
1 Position the side crash sensor to the B-pillar.
2 Install the bolts.
3 Connect the side crash sensor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE AIR BAG SIDE CRASH SENSOR RETAINING
BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
2. Connect the battery ground cable. 3. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still in place at all
deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
4. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 5. Install the B-pillar trim
panel.
6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
the bracket under the seat.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7746
8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
9. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag module
electrical connector onto the bracket under the
seat.
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
11. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7747
onto the bracket under the seat.
12. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
13. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air
bag module electrical connector onto the bracket
under the seat.
14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7748
15. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 16. Close the glove box.
17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
18. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
19. Install the steering wheel access cover. 20. Connect the battery ground cable. 21. With all the
restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7749
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
22. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
Passenger Side
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7750
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat Systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: ^
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
2. Open the glove box past its stops.
3. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the Instrument Panel (I/P), disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7751
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
5. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
6. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7752
8. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
10. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7753
12. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking dip.
2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
14. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system
diagnostic tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7754
19. Remove the B-pillar trim panel.
20. Remove the side crash sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the side crash sensor.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat Systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7755
1. Install the side crash sensor.
1 Position the side crash sensor to the B-pillar.
2 Install the bolts.
3 Connect the side crash sensor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE AIR BAG SIDE CRASH SENSOR RETAINING
BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
2. Connect the battery ground cable. 3. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still in place at all
deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
4. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 5. Install the B-pillar trim
panel.
6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
onto the bracket under the seat.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7756
8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
9. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air
bag module electrical connector onto the bracket
under the seat.
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
11. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7757
the bracket under the seat.
12. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
13. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag
module electrical connector onto the bracket under the
seat.
14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7758
15. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
16. Install the steering wheel access cover.
17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
18. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 19. Close the glove box. 20.
Connect the battery ground cable. 21. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove
out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7759
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
22. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7760
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Weld Nut Repair
"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE:
^ There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedures and Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control
Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
^ If two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts in this procedure. Weld nuts must
be installed in Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side
Impact Sensor.
^ The following procedure applies to vehicles that have a rectangular hole in the sheet metal that is
in close proximity to the missing weld nut.
1. Obtain a "J" nut (part number N623332-S301) or any of the following optional "J" nuts (part
numbers: N623342-S101, N800854-S100,
N800925-S100).
2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190) or equivalent. 3. Install
the "J" nut through the rectangular hole in the sheet metal. 4. Install the crash sensor.
NOTE: Be sure the threaded portion of the "J" nut is aligned with the clearance hole in the sheet
metal.
5. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE:
^ There are two procedures to repairs a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedure and Weld Nut Repair-"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM)
and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
^ Use only this procedure if two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts in Weld
Nut Repair-"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Crash Sensor.
^ Radiator support repair shown, others are similar.
1. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) weld nut (part number N806285-S190). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in)
grounding screw (part number N806327-S190).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7761
3. Route a sufficient length of copper welding wire through the weld nut clearance hole and back
out an adjacent access hole.
4. Feed the copper welding wire through the weld nut, then through a standard flat washer. 5.
Secure the flat washer so that it cannot be pulled off the end of the copper welding wire. 6. Pull the
copper welding wire back through the clearance hole, allowing the weld nut and flat washer to
follow the copper welding wire through. 7. Position the weld nut to the weld nut clearance hole,
firmly pulling on the copper welding wire allowing the secured flat washer to hold the weld
nut in position.
8. Holding the weld nut securely in place and using a MIG welder, weld in four places around the
edge of the weld nut. 9. Metal finish as required.
10. Verify the nut is securely in place. 11. Install the crash sensor. 12. Tighten the attaching screws
to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Stripped Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
1. Obtain an 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw (part number N802455-S190). 2. Drill out the internal
threads of the stripped-out weld nut to 7.37 mm (0.29 in) using a letter "L" size drill bit. 3. Position
the crash sensor to the vehicle. 4. Install the 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw into the drilled-out
weld nut. 5. Install the remaining attaching screws. 6. Tighten the attaching screws to specification.
Refer to Torque Specifications.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 7762
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Safing Sensor, Air Bag > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Safing Sensor: Description and Operation
Safing Sensor
The Safing Sensor is part of the Restraints Control Module (RCM) and is not serviced separately.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Specifications
Side Air Bag: Specifications
Side Air Bag Module 5 Nm
Seat Pivot Nut 5 Nm
Seat Backrest Bolts 40 Nm
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Locations >
Left
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Locations >
Left > Page 7771
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams >
Right
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams >
Right > Page 7774
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Side Air Bag: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ TO REDUCE THE RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, READ AND FOLLOW ALL
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, NOTES, AND INSTRUCTIONS IN THE SEAT REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.
^ FRONT SEAT BACK TRIM COVERS INSTALLED ON SEATS EQUIPPED WITH SIDE AIR
BAGS CANNOT BE REPAIRED; THEY ARE TO BE REPLACED (CLEANING IS PERMISSIBLE).
^ INSPECT THE MOUNTING SURFACES OF THE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE AND THE SEAT
BACK FRAME MOUNTING BRACKET FOR ANY FOREIGN OBJECTS BEFORE INSTALLING
THE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE. IF ANY FOREIGN OBJECTS ARE FOUND, REMOVE THEM.
FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY, IN THE EVENT OF AN AIR BAG
DEPLOYMENT.
^ BEFORE INSTALLING THE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE, CHECK IT FOR DAMAGE AND
FOREIGN OBJECTS. IF THE AIR BAG MODULE IS DAMAGED, REPLACE IT. IF ANY FOREIGN
OBJECTS ARE FOUND, REMOVE THEM. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY, IN THE EVENT OF AN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT.
^ IF THE AIR BAG COVER HAS SEPARATED OR THE AIR BAG MATERIAL HAS BEEN
EXPOSED, INSTALL A NEW SIDE AIR BAG MODULE. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REPAIR THE AIR
BAG MODULE. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY IN THE EVENT OF
AN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT.
^ INSPECT THE SIDE AIR BAG CAVITY IN THE SEAT BACK PAD FOR ANY FOREIGN
OBJECTS. IF ANY FOREIGN OBJECTS ARE FOUND, REMOVE THEM. FAILURE TO DO SO
MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 7777
Side Air Bag: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION:
^ Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat
not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
^ Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air bag
module and the mounting bracket.
^ When positioning the seat or installing the seat bottom to the seat back, be careful not to damage
the seat back pivot or the recliner mechanism. This can cause damage to the seat components.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 7778
Side Air Bag: Description and Operation
Driver Side Air Bag Module
NOTE:
^ References to side air bag modules refer to the seat-mounted and not to the steering wheel or
instrument panel mounted air bag components of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
^ When installing a new side air bag module after deployment, refer to Seats.
The driver side air bag module: ^
will deploy upon receiving a signal from the Restraints Control Module (RCM) initiated by the driver
side crash sensor.
^ is installed as an assembly.
^ is mounted in the driver seat back.
Passenger Side Air Bag Module
NOTE:
^ References to side air bag modules refer to the seat-mounted and not to the steering wheel or
instrument panel mounted air bag components of the supplemental restraint system (SRS).
^ When installing a new side air bag module after deployment, refer to Seats.
The passenger side air bag module: ^
will deploy upon receiving a signal from the restraints control module (RCM) initiated by the
passenger side crash sensor.
^ is installed as an assembly.
^ is mounted in the passenger seat back.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 7779
Side Air Bag: Service and Repair
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 7780
removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side
airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The
restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat Systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ If a side air bag deployment took place the seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be replaced. The seatback frame should be replaced if necessary.
^ When replacing the side air bag after deployment, refer to Seats.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 2. Remove the affected seat
from the vehicle.
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, READ AND FOLLOW
ALL WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, NOTES, AND INSTRUCTIONS IN THE SEAT REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
NOTE: The driver side air bag module removal is shown, the passenger side air bag module
removal is similar.
3. Pry out and remove the seat cushion adjuster handle center plug.
NOTE: Use care not to damage the center hole plug.
4. Remove the seat cushion adjuster handle.
1 Release the retaining tabs.
2 Pull and remove the seat cushion adjusted handle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 7781
5. Remove the outboard seat cushion side shield.
1 Remove the seat backrest lever cover.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Pull out to release the retaining clips and remove the seat cushion side shield. ^
If equipped, disconnect the power seat switch electrical connector.
6. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield.
^ Pull out to release the retaining clips.
7. Release the pin-type retainers and separate the side air bag electrical connector and wire
harness from the seat.
NOTE: Note the wire harness routing for installation.
8. Remove the seat backrest pivot nut.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 7782
9. Remove the seat backrest.
1 Remove the seat backrest bolts.
2 Slide the seat backrest pivot stud out of the seat cushion frame and remove the seat backrest.
CAUTION: When positioning the seat or separating the seat bottom from the back, be careful not to
damage the seat back pivot or the recliner mechanism. This can cause damage to the seat
components.
10. Turn the manual lumbar handle clockwise until it stops, releasing all tension on the manual
lumbar support cable.
11. Pull and remove the manual lumbar support adjustment handle.
12. Separate the seat backrest trim cover J-retainers.
13. Remove the seat backrest trim cover.
1 Placing a hand between the seat backrest trim cover and pad, carefully separate the hook and
loop strips.
2 Roll up the seat back trim cover, in an inside out fashion, and remove the seat backrest trim
cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 7783
WARNING: FRONT SEAT BACK TRIM COVERS INSTALLED ON SEATS EQUIPPED WITH SIDE
AIR BAGS CANNOT BE REPAIRED; THEY ARE TO BE REPLACED (CLEANING IS
PERMISSIBLE).
CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook and loop strip. The
hook and loop strip can be torn from the seat cushion foam.
14. Remove the seat backrest pad from the frame.
15. Separate the side air bag module wiring harness pin-type retainers from the seat back frame.
16. Remove the side air bag module.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Remove the side air bag module.
NOTE: If installing a new side air bag module, use new retaining nuts. If the same side air bag
module is to be reused, then reuse the side air bag module retaining nuts.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 7784
GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS
WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE
LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat Systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ When replacing the side air bag after deployment, refer to Seats.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
^ The driver side air bag module installation is shown, the passenger side air bag module
installation is similar.
1. Install the side air bag module onto the seat backrest frame mounting bracket.
1 Position the side air bag module to the seat backrest frame mounting bracket.
2 Install the nuts.
WARNING: ^
INSPECT THE MOUNTING SURFACES OF THE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE AND THE SEAT
BACK FRAME MOUNTING BRACKET FOR ANY FOREIGN OBJECTS BEFORE INSTALLING
THE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE. IF ANY FOREIGN OBJECTS ARE FOUND, REMOVE THEM.
FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY, IN THE EVENT OF AN AIR BAG
DEPLOYMENT.
^ BEFORE INSTALLING THE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE, CHECK IT FOR DAMAGE AND
FOREIGN OBJECTS. IF THE AIR BAG MODULE IS DAMAGED, REPLACE IT. IF ANY FOREIGN
OBJECTS ARE FOUND, REMOVE THEM. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY, IN THE EVENT OF AN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT.
^ IF THE AIR BAG COVER HAS SEPARATED OR THE AIR BAG MATERIAL HAS BEEN
EXPOSED, INSTALL A NEW SIDE AIR BAG MODULE. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REPAIR THE AIR
BAG MODULE. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 7785
PERSONAL INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT.
CAUTION: Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air
bag module and the mounting bracket.
2. Route the side air bag module wire harness. Install the pin-type retainers to the seat backrest
frame.
3. Position the seat backrest pad onto the seat backrest frame.
WARNING: INSPECT THE SIDE AIR BAG CAVITY IN THE SEAT BACK PAD FOR ANY
FOREIGN OBJECTS. IF ANY FOREIGN OBJECTS ARE FOUND, REMOVE THEM. FAILURE TO
DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT.
4. Install the seat backrest trim cover.
1 Position and roll the seat backrest trim cover down over the seat backrest frame and pad.
2 Attach the hook and loop strips.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 7786
5. Attach the seat back trim cover J-retainers.
6. Install the manual lumbar control knob.
7. Install the seat backrest bolts.
1 Align the seat backrest to the seat bottom.
2 Install the seat backrest bolts.
CAUTION: When positioning the seat or installing the seat bottom to the seat back, be careful not
to damage the seat back pivot or the recliner mechanism. This can cause damage to the seat
components.
8. Install the pivot nut.
9. Route the side air bag module wire harness as noted in removal. Install the wire harness and
electrical connector pin-type retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 7787
10. Install the outboard seat cushion side shield.
1 Align the retaining clips and push inward, seating the retaining clips. ^
If equipped, connect the power seat switch electrical connector.
2 Install the screw.
3 Install the seat backrest lever cover.
11. Install the seat cushion adjuster handle.
12. Install the seat cushion adjuster handle center plug.
13. Align the retaining clips and push inward, installing the inboard seat cushion side shield. 14.
Install the affected seat into the vehicle.
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, READ AND FOLLOW
ALL WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, NOTES AND INSTRUCTIONS IN THE SEAT REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 7788
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
15. Connect the battery ground cable. 16. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed,
prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
17. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 7789
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Specifications
Air Bag Control Module: Specifications
Restraint Control Module Bolts 12 Nm
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 7794
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 7795
Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 7796
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Air Bag Control Module: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE
CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET
FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE
AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM
MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING
BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 7799
Air Bag Control Module: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7800
Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) carries out the following functions:
^ signals the inflators to deploy the air bags in the event of a deployable crash
^ monitors the air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) for faults
^ illuminates the air bag indicator if a fault is detected
^ flashes the air bag indicator to indicate the Lamp Fault Code (LFC) detected
^ communicates through the Data Link Connector (DLC) the current or historical Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs)
^ signals the instrument cluster to activate a chime if the air bag indicator is not available and
another SRS fault exists
NOTE: The safing Sensor is internal to the RCM and is not serviced separately.
The RCM monitors the SRS for possible faults. If a fault is detected while the ignition switch is in
the RUN position, the RCM will flash the air bag indicator located in the instrument cluster.
When the ignition is cycled (turned off and then on), the air bag indicator will prove out by lighting
for six seconds and then off for two seconds. After the prove out, the air bag indicator will then flash
the two-digit LFC for any current SRS fault. If an SRS fault exists, the air bag indicator will flash the
LFC five times, and then remain illuminated for the rest of the key cycle. The RCM will also
communicate the current and historical DTCs through the DLC, to the scan tool. If the air bag
indicator does not function, and the system detects a fault condition, the RCM will signal the
instrument cluster to activate an audible chime. The chime is a series of five sets of five tone
bursts. If the chime is heard, the SRS and the air bag indicator require repair.
LFCs are prioritized. If two or more faults occur at the same time, the fault having the highest
priority will be displayed. After that fault has been corrected, the next highest priority fault will be
displayed.
The RCM includes a backup power supply. This feature provides sufficient backup power to deploy
the air bags in the event that the ignition circuit is damaged in a collision before the safing and air
bag sensors determine that a deployment is required. The backup power supply will deplete its
stored energy approximately one minute after the battery ground cable is disconnected.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7801
Air Bag Control Module: Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Air Bag Systems; Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Vehicles With Side Air Bags
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE
CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET
FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE
AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM
MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition,
install the original part and perform the diagnostic
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7804
procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
2. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7805
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
5. Open the glove box past its stops.
6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the instrument panel, disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
8. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7806
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
12. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7807
13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
14. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system diagnostic tools
installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 19. Position the carpet back
at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel.
20. Remove the right-hand side restraint control module (RCM) retaining bolts. 21. Position the
carpet back at the left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7808
22. Remove the RCM.
1 Slide and disengage the two RCM electrical connector locking clips.
2 Push down to pivot the RCM electrical connector tabs and pull out to disconnect.
3 Remove the retaining bolt.
4 Remove the RCM.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE
CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET
FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE
AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM
MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition,
install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Position the RCM to the center tunnel area and install the three bolts hand-tight.
WARNING: ^
THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING
BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7809
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
2. Tighten the right-hand side RCM bolts.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
3. Reposition the carpet back at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument
panel.
4. Connect the RCM.
1 Tighten the bolt.
2 Connect the RCM electrical connectors.
3 Slide and engage the RCM electrical connector locking clips.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
5. Reposition the carpet back at the left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument
panel. 6. Connect the battery ground cable. 7. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still
installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
8. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7810
9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
10. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
the bracket under the seat.
11. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
12. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag
module electrical connector onto the bracket under the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7811
seat.
13. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
14. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
onto the bracket under the seat.
15. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7812
16. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air
bag module electrical connector onto the bracket
under the seat.
17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
18. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 19. Close the glove box.
20. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7813
VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
21. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
22. Install the steering wheel access cover. 23. Connect the battery ground cable. 24. With all the
restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Vehicles Without Side Air Bags
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7814
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE
CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET
FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE
AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM
MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition,
install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7815
2. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
5. Open the glove box past its stops.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7816
6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the instrument panel, disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
8. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7817
10. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector. 12. Connect the battery ground cable. 13. With the restraint system diagnostic
tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
14. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 15. Position the carpet back
at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel.
16. Remove the right-hand side restraint control module (RCM) retaining bolts. 17. Position the
carpet back at the left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel.
18. Remove the RCM.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7818
1 Slide and disengage the two RCM electrical connector locking clips.
2 Push down to pivot the RCM electrical connector tabs and pull out to disconnect.
3 Remove the retaining bolt.
4 Remove the RCM.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE
CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET
FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE
AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM
MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition,
install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Position the RCM to the center tunnel area and install the three bolts hand-tight.
WARNING: ^
THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING
BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7819
2. Tighten the right-hand side RCM bolts.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
3. Reposition the carpet back at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument
panel.
4. Connect the RCM.
1 Tighten the bolt.
2 Connect the RCM electrical connectors.
3 Slide and engage the RCM electrical connector locking clips.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
5. Reposition the carpet back at the left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument
panel. 6. Connect the battery ground cable. 7. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still
installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
8. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7820
10. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
the bracket under the seat.
11. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
12. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
onto the bracket under the seat.
13. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7821
VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND
POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
14. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 15. Close the glove box.
16. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
17. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
18. Install the steering wheel access cover. 19. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7822
20. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air
Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7823
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Weld Nut Repair
"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE:
^ There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedures and Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control
Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
^ If two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts in this procedure. Weld nuts must
be installed in Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side
Impact Sensor.
^ The following procedure applies to vehicles that have a rectangular hole in the sheet metal that is
in close proximity to the missing weld nut.
1. Obtain a "J" nut (part number N623332-S301) or any of the following optional "J" nuts (part
numbers: N623342-S101, N800854-S100,
N800925-S100).
2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190) or equivalent. 3. Install
the "J" nut through the rectangular hole in the sheet metal. 4. Install the crash sensor.
NOTE: Be sure the threaded portion of the "J" nut is aligned with the clearance hole in the sheet
metal.
5. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE:
^ There are two procedures to repairs a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedure and Weld Nut Repair-"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM)
and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
^ Use only this procedure if two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts in Weld
Nut Repair-"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Crash Sensor.
^ Radiator support repair shown, others are similar.
1. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) weld nut (part number N806285-S190). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in)
grounding screw (part number N806327-S190).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7824
3. Route a sufficient length of copper welding wire through the weld nut clearance hole and back
out an adjacent access hole.
4. Feed the copper welding wire through the weld nut, then through a standard flat washer. 5.
Secure the flat washer so that it cannot be pulled off the end of the copper welding wire. 6. Pull the
copper welding wire back through the clearance hole, allowing the weld nut and flat washer to
follow the copper welding wire through. 7. Position the weld nut to the weld nut clearance hole,
firmly pulling on the copper welding wire allowing the secured flat washer to hold the weld
nut in position.
8. Holding the weld nut securely in place and using a MIG welder, weld in four places around the
edge of the weld nut. 9. Metal finish as required.
10. Verify the nut is securely in place. 11. Install the crash sensor. 12. Tighten the attaching screws
to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Stripped Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
1. Obtain an 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw (part number N802455-S190). 2. Drill out the internal
threads of the stripped-out weld nut to 7.37 mm (0.29 in) using a letter "L" size drill bit. 3. Position
the crash sensor to the vehicle. 4. Install the 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw into the drilled-out
weld nut. 5. Install the remaining attaching screws. 6. Tighten the attaching screws to specification.
Refer to Torque Specifications.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7825
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Customer Safety Information
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE
AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID
NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 7831
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE
AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID
NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Seats Removed
There are two deactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
side air bag concerns, and also when repairing any in-seat component in vehicles equipped with
side air bags.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal. This procedure will be used when
diagnosing a concern not related to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: ^
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag system is being serviced, the airbag system
must be deactivated using the appropriate deactivation procedure.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag floor
connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system with the seats in the
vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system, the seats must be removed
from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag floor
connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle
over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag system (lumbar,
climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the
restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air
bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the front seats. 9. Attach
a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag floor electrical connector.
10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical
connector. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical
connector. 12. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Seats Not Removed
There are two deactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
side air bag concerns, and also when repairing any in-seat component in vehicles equipped with
side air bags.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal. This procedure will be used when
diagnosing a concern not related to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position. 2. Disconnect the battery
ground cable.
WARNING: ^
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7834
SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR
STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS
DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD
LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag system is being serviced, the airbag system
must be deactivated using the appropriate deactivation procedure.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag floor
connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system with the seats in the
vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system, the seats must be removed
from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag floor
connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle
over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag system (lumbar,
climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the
restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect
the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped
with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat.
10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical
connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to
the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect
the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Depowering and Repowering Procedure
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event
of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if
equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered.
NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition
switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system
(SRS) fault.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the
cover and the restraints control module (RCM)
fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB.
4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no
flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit
continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7835
proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing or
replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side
impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair
have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected.
2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover.
4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front
of any air bag module when the
battery ground cable is connected.
Connect the battery ground cable.
5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator
and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool.
Seats Removed
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED
AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO
AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
4. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7836
5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Install the front seats. 8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring
connector.
^ Reconnect the electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
10. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 11. Reconnect the battery
ground cable. 12. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Seats Not Removed
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED
AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO
AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring
connector.
^ Reconnect the electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
4. If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 6.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7837
8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7838
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist
Air Bag Reconnect Checklist
The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system
concern: 1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3.
Restraints Control Module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors
connected? 5. All sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected?
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7839
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure
Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator
with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
^ fail to light.
^ remain lit continuously.
^ flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control
Module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an
SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag
indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment >
Component Information > Specifications
Child Seat Tether Attachment: Specifications
Child Safety Seat Tether Anchor 22 Nm
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 7844
Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT SEAT BELT
BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTERS (IF
SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND ATTACHING
HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT ASSEMBLIES
SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE ASSEMBLIES
SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN USE DURING A
COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER DAMAGE OR
IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED.
^ IT IS IMPORTANT THAT THE BOLT/ANCHOR BE SECURELY TIGHTENED TO
SPECIFICATION. OTHERWISE, THE CHILD'S SAFETY SEAT MAY NOT BE PROPERLY
SECURED, AND THE CHILD CAN BE INJURED IN CASE OF A SUDDEN STOP OR ACCIDENT.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 7845
Child Seat Tether Attachment: Description and Operation
Some manufacturers make child safety seats that include a tether strap that goes over the back of
the vehicle seat and attaches to an anchoring point. Other manufacturers offer the tether strap as
an accessory. Contact the manufacturer of the child safety seat for information about ordering a
tether strap.
Child safety seat tether anchors are manufactured into the vehicle. See the owners manual for
locations.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 7846
Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND
ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT
ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE
ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN
USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER
DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED.
1. At the roof, near the rear liftgate door, remove the child safety seat tether anchor cover.
2. Remove the child safety seat tether anchor.
1 Remove the bolt.
2 Remove the child safety seat tether anchor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
WARNING: IT IS IMPORTANT THAT THE BOLT/ANCHOR BE SECURELY TIGHTENED TO
SPECIFICATION. OTHERWISE, THE CHILD'S SAFETY SEAT MAY NOT BE PROPERLY
SECURED, AND THE CHILD CAN BE INJURED IN CASE OF A SUDDEN STOP OR ACCIDENT.
NOTE: ^
Rework the sheet metal to its original condition and structural integrity.
^ Make sure to tighten the bolts to specification.
2. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-17-11 > Sep > 05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set
Seat Belt: Customer Interest SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set
TSB 05-17-11
09/05/05
RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the
electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the
buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully
functional.
ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety
belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved
connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt
buckle pretensioner.
One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for
complete repair procedure.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs.
A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner
Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With
14056D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7861202 OR 7861203 X2
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 05-17-11 > Sep > 05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's
B1877/B1881 Set
Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set
TSB 05-17-11
09/05/05
RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the
electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the
buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully
functional.
ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety
belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved
connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt
buckle pretensioner.
One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for
complete repair procedure.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs.
A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner
Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With
14056D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7861202 OR 7861203 X2
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 05-3-10 > Feb > 05 > Restraints - Seat Belt Stop Button
Service
Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Stop Button Service
TSB 05-3-10
02/21/05
SAFETY BELT WEB STOP BUTTON SERVICE
FORD: 2000-2004 Mustang 2000-2005 Crown Victoria, Focus, Taurus 1999-2005 F-Super Duty
2000-2003 Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion, F-150, Ranger 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005
Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2002-2005 Explorer 2003-2004 Expedition 2004-2005 Freestar 2005
Escape Hybrid
LINCOLN: 2000-2005 LS, Town Car 2003-2004 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2001-2005 Mariner 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
ISSUE To service a safety belt web stop button (the button that keeps the belt tongue from sliding
down when not in use), a service kit is now available.
ACTION Install the safety belt button kit, DO NOT replace the entire safety belt assembly. Follow
the Service Procedure in the Instruction Sheet that comes with the kit. Refer to Section 501-20A of
the appropriate model year Workshop Manual for additional information if needed.
NOTE
ONE KIT WILL REPAIR ONE SEAT BELT BUTTON.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
70611B09 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 05-3-10 > Feb > 05 > Restraints - Seat Belt Stop Button
Service
Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Stop Button Service
TSB 05-3-10
02/21/05
SAFETY BELT WEB STOP BUTTON SERVICE
FORD: 2000-2004 Mustang 2000-2005 Crown Victoria, Focus, Taurus 1999-2005 F-Super Duty
2000-2003 Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion, F-150, Ranger 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005
Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2002-2005 Explorer 2003-2004 Expedition 2004-2005 Freestar 2005
Escape Hybrid
LINCOLN: 2000-2005 LS, Town Car 2003-2004 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2001-2005 Mariner 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
ISSUE To service a safety belt web stop button (the button that keeps the belt tongue from sliding
down when not in use), a service kit is now available.
ACTION Install the safety belt button kit, DO NOT replace the entire safety belt assembly. Follow
the Service Procedure in the Instruction Sheet that comes with the kit. Refer to Section 501-20A of
the appropriate model year Workshop Manual for additional information if needed.
NOTE
ONE KIT WILL REPAIR ONE SEAT BELT BUTTON.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
70611B09 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 7869
Seat Belt: Specifications
Second Row Safety Belt Bolt 47 Nm
Safety Belt Anchor Bolt 47 Nm
Safety Belt Guide Bolt 47 Nm
Front Row Safety Belt Retractor Lower Bolt 47 Nm
Front Row Safety Belt Retractor Upper Bolt 9 Nm
Second Row Safety Belt Retractor Bolt 47 Nm
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Customer Safety Information
Seat Belt: Customer Safety Information
WARNING: REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS SHOULD NEVER BE PLACED IN THE FRONT
SEATS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 7872
Seat Belt: Technician Safety Information
WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND
ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT
ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE
ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN
USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER
DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 7873
Seat Belt: Description and Operation
WARNING: REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS SHOULD NEVER BE PLACED IN THE FRONT
SEATS.
The dual locking mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder safety
belt for the front outboard passenger and both rear outboard seating positions, operates in two
ways. The driver single locking mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of the combination
lap/shoulder safety belt works only in the vehicle sensitive mode.
1. In the vehicle-sensitive (emergency locking) mode, the shoulder belt retractor allows the
occupant freedom of movement, locking tight only on
hard braking, hard cornering or impacts of approximately 8 km/h (5 mph) or more. The front and
rear outboard seat belt retractors can also be made to lock by pulling/jerking on the belt.
2. In the automatic locking mode, the shoulder belt retractor automatically locks and remains
locked when the combination lap/shoulder safety belt is
buckled and does not allow the occupant freedom of movement. This mode provides tight
lap/shoulder belt fit on the occupant and on a child safety seat.
3. When the combination lap/shoulder belt is unbuckled and allowed to retract completely, the
retractor switches to the vehicle-sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
The automatic locking mode must be used when installing a child safety seat in the front outboard
passenger and both rear outboard passenger seating positions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation
Seat Belt: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Front Safety Belt and Retractor
Safety Belt Bolt Bit
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND
ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT
ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE
ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN
USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER
DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED.
NOTE: The driver side is shown, the passenger side is similar.
1. Remove the B-pillar trim panel.
2. Remove the safety belt anchor.
1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
2 Remove the safety belt anchor.
3. Separate the front safety belt retractor from the B-pillar.
1 Remove the bolt.
2 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
3 Separate the front safety belt retractor from the B-pillar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7876
4. Remove the front safety belt retractor.
1 Disconnect the front safety belt retractor.
2 Remove the front safety belt retractor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Make sure that after the front passenger safety belt retractor is installed, the retractor is not in the
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
NOTE: ^
Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation.
^ Make sure to tighten bolts to specification.
2. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.
^ Carry out the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) Mode Functional Test to make sure that the
new retractor operates correctly. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Functional Test - Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) Mode
Safety Belt and Buckle - Center and Driver Side
Safety Belt Bolt Bit
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND
ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT
ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE
ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN
USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER
DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED.
1. Pivot the seat bottom forward. 2. Pivot the seat backrest back.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7877
3. Remove the safety belt and buckle assembly.
1 Position the carpet out of the way.
2 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
3 Feed the safety belt and buckle through the carpet and remove the assembly.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: ^
Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted after repositioning the seat.
^ Make sure that the safety belt and buckle are accessible after repositioning the seat.
^ Make sure to tighten the bolt to specification.
2. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
Rear Safety Belt and Retractor
Safety Belt Bolt Bit
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND
ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT
ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE
ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN
USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER
DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED.
NOTE: The driver side is shown, the passenger side is similar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7878
1. Remove the rear door scuff plate.
1 Open the cover.
2 Remove the two pin-type retainers (one shown).
3 Remove the rear door scuff plate.
2. Separate the weather-stripping from the C-pillar.
3. Remove the safety belt anchor.
1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
2 Remove the safety belt anchor.
4. From behind the rear safety belt guide cover, release the retaining tabs, slide the cover up and
remove it.
NOTE: The rear safety belt guide has been removed for clarity.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7879
5. Remove the rear safety belt guide.
1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
2 Remove the safety belt guide.
6. Lower the second row seat backrest.
7. Separate the rear hatch weather-stripping along the scuff plate and rear quarter trim panel on
the side of the safety belt retractor being serviced.
8. Remove the rear hatch scuff plate.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Pull up to release the retaining clips and remove the rear hatch scuff plate.
9. Pull out to release the retaining clips and remove the rear quarter trim panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7880
10. Remove the rear safety belt retractor.
1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
2 Remove the rear safety belt retractor.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the rear safety belt retractor.
1 Position the rear safety belt retractor to the C-pillar.
2 Using the special tool, install the bolt.
2. Install the quarter trim panel.
1 Position the quarter trim panel and feed the safety belt webbing through the opening.
2 Align the quarter trim panel and push in, fastening the retainers.
NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation.
3. Install the rear hatch scuff plate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7881
1 Align the rear hatch scuff plate and push in, fastening the retainers.
2 Install the pin-type retainers.
4. Install the rear hatch weather-stripping.
5. Install the spacer onto the rear safety belt guide bolt.
6. Install the rear safety belt guide.
1 Position the safety belt guide.
2 Using the special tool, install the bolt.
NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation.
7. Install the rear safety belt guide cover.
NOTE: If the safety belt guide cover is damaged or if it does not remain in position, install a new
cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7882
8. Raise the second row seat backrest.
9. Install the safety belt anchor.
1 Position the safety belt anchor.
2 Using the special tool, install the bolt.
NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation.
10. Install the C-pillar weatherstripping.
11. Install the rear door scuff plate.
1 Position the rear door scuff plate.
2 Install the two pin-type retainers (one shown).
3 Close the cover.
12. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.
1 Make sure that after the rear safety belt retractor is installed, the retractor is not in the Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
2 Carry out the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) Mode Functional Test to make sure that the
new retractor operates correctly. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Functional Test - Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) Mode
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7883
Seat Belt: Service and Repair Safety Belt Pretensioner Disposal
Deployed
1. Dispose of the deployed safety belt pretensioner in the same manner as any other part to be
scrapped.
WARNING: ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING A SAFETY
BELT RETRACTOR/PRETENSIONER ASSEMBLY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY
IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
Undeployed, Inoperative
WARNING: CARRY A LIVE SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR/PRETENSIONER ASSEMBLY SO AS
TO KEEP FINGERS AND CLOTHING AWAY FROM MOVEABLE PARTS. THIS WILL REDUCE
THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
NOTE: All inoperative safety belt retractor/pretensioner assemblies have been placed on the
Mandatory Return List. All damaged safety belt retractor/pretensioners must be treated the same
as any inoperative live safety belt retractor/pretensioner being returned.
1. Remove the inoperative safety belt retractor/pretensioner assembly from the vehicle. 2. Package
and return the inoperative safety belt retractor/pretensioner assembly to Ford Motor Company.
Undeployed, Scrapped Vehicle
REMOTE DEPLOYMENT
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE OR
SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR/PRETENSIONER ASSEMBLY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF
INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TRIM COVER OR DEPLOYMENT
DOOR POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN
THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ REMOTE DEPLOYMENT IS TO BE PERFORMED OUTDOORS WITH ALL PERSONNEL AT
LEAST 6.1 METERS (20 FEET) AWAY TO ENSURE PERSONAL SAFETY. DUE TO THE LOUD
REPORT WHICH OCCURS WHEN THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED, HEARING PROTECTION IS
REQUIRED.
^ DO NOT PLACE THE DRIVER OR PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE TRIM COVER
OR DEPLOYMENT DOOR FACING DOWN, AS THE FORCES OF THE DEPLOYING AIR BAG
COULD CAUSE IT TO RICOCHET AND CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Remove the safety belt pretensioner from the vehicle.
2. Cut and strip the wires near the electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7884
3. Obtain two wires (20 gauge minimum) at least 6.1 meters (20 feet) long and attach one end of
each wire to stripped ends of the pretensioner wires. 4. Place the pretensioner on a flat surface in
an open outdoor area. 5. Remain at least 6.1 meters (20 feet) away from the safety belt
pretensioner.
6. Deploy the safety belt pretensioner by touching the other ends of the two wires to the terminals
of a 12 volt battery. 7. To allow for cooling, wait at least ten minutes before approaching the
deployed safety belt pretensioner. 8. Dispose of the deployed safety belt pretensioner in the same
manner as any other part to be scrapped.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 7885
Seat Belt Bolt Bit
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckle Cover
Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 03S10 Date: 040201
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckle Cover
Replacement > Page 7894
Attachment I - Administrative Information
Safety Recall 03S10 Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles Front Safety Belt Buckle Cover
Replacement
OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states provinces and countries.
Accordingly you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected stock vehicles before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter (when available) and
schedule a service date.
^ Also correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
RELATED DAMAGE
^ Related damage claims are not approved for this program.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckle Cover
Replacement > Page 7895
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
^ This repair will require no additional labor time to complete. Claims submitted with "MT" labor will
not be accepted for reimbursement.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this Safety Recall if
the repair was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan which is posted with
this bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center
(CRC). The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or at their
option directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 1904, Dearborn, MI 48121.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund
claims that include other non-covered repairs or those judged by Ford to be excessive will not be
accepted for reimbursement.
^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair.
Claiming a refund will not close out the VIN for this recall.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 03S10 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refund must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the FSA's repair line. Refer to
ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
Note:
If either safety belt buckle fails to latch properly during the operational checks specified in the repair
procedure call the Special Service Support Center at 1-800-325-5621 to obtain authorization for the
replacement of the safety belt assembly.
SPECIAL TOOL
One buckle cover removal tool was sent to each dealer at no cost. A limited supply will be available
until March 1 2004 from the Special Service Support Center (1-800-325-5621). Tools may also be
fabricated locally by referring to the instructions at the end of Attachment Ill.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Parts will not be direct shipped for this recall. Order your parts requirements through order
processing channels as noted below.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckle Cover
Replacement > Page 7896
^ For Stock Orders effective immediately follow normal order process.
^ For Interim Orders effective immediately follow normal order process.
^ For Emergency Orders within the first 30 days after launch call 1-800-325-5621.
^ For Emergency Orders 31 days after launch follow normal order process.
The DOR/COR for this program is 50314. This number identifies parts ordered for this recall
through the Special Service Support Center (1-800-325-5621).
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices refer to DOES II.
PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures."
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
SERVICE PROCEDURE
SPECIAL TOOL INFORMATION
One (1) buckle cover removal tool is being supplied to each dealer. A limited number of additional
tools will be available until March 1, 2004 from the Special Service Support Center at
1-800-325-5621. Tools may also be fabricated locally by referring to the instructions at the end of
this attachment.
CAUTION:
Care should be taken when using the buckle cover removal tool to avoid damage to the vehicle
interior. Always pull the removal tool in a direction away from the seat and center console.
NOTE:
Sitting in the seat during buckle cover removal will allow better control of the tool should it slip off
the buckle during removal.
NOTE:
Any supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault or air bag indicator light issues must be corrected
before this procedure is performed. Any SRS fault or air bag indicator light issues present are NOT
covered by this program.
1. Buckle Cover Removal:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckle Cover
Replacement > Page 7897
a) Securely insert the hooked end of the buckle cover removal tool into the buckle assembly as
shown. See Figure 1.
b) While sitting in the seat, firmly pull the tool up and away from the seat and center console to
separate the safety belt buckle cover halves.
2. Buckle Operation Check 1:
With both front safety belt covers removed, verify the operation of both safety belt buckles.
a) Insert the safety belt tongue into the buckle. Make sure the buckle makes a "click" noise.
b) Pull on the safety belt to make sure it is securely locked in the buckle.
c) Push the buckle release button and make sure the buckle releases the safety belt.
d) If the buckle fails to securely lock and retain the safety belt, call the Special Service Support
Center at 1-800-325-5621.
3. Buckle Cover Installation:
CAUTION:
Do not overtighten the screws.
NOTE:
Verify that the plastic anti-rattle spring is in place on the lower cover prior to installation. See Figure
2.
NOTE:
Replacement buckle covers go together more easily when the upper cover is positioned first
(inboard side), and the lower cover positioned second (outboard side).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckle Cover
Replacement > Page 7898
a) Install the new safety belt buckle cover with the felt patch on the passenger side buckle
assembly. Install four (4) supplied screws to secure the cover and tighten the screws. See Figure 3.
b) Install the other safety belt cover (without felt patch) onto the driver side seat belt assembly.
Install four (4) supplied screws to secure the cover and tighten the screws. The two remaining
screws in the kit are spare screws.
4. Buckle Operation Check 2:
With the new safety belt buckle covers in place, verify the operation of both safety belt buckles.
a) Insert the safety belt tongue into the buckle. Make sure the buckle makes a "click" noise.
b) Pull on the safety belt to make sure it is securely locked into the buckle.
c) Push the buckle release button and make sure the buckle releases the safety belt.
d) If the buckle fails to securely lock and retain the safety belt, call the Special Service Support
Center at 1-800-325-5621.
NOTE:
Special Service Support Center will authorize replacement of the buckle assembly if the latch fails
to operate properly. Replacement covers must be installed on the new assembly to maintain
uniform appearance.
5. Move the seats back to their original positions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckle Cover
Replacement > Page 7899
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckle Cover
Replacement > Page 7900
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Belt Buckle: > NHTSA03V507000 > Dec > 03 > Recall 03V507000: Seat Belt
Buckle Cover Replacement
Seat Belt Buckle: Recalls Recall 03V507000: Seat Belt Buckle Cover Replacement
DEFECT: On certain sport utility vehicles, a post within the safety belt buckle covers could fracture,
which could affect latch function, resulting in either a "no latch" or "partial latch" condition. In the
"partial latch" condition, the buckle tongue can be inserted into the buckle and appear to be
engaged, but will release from the buckle without the push button being depressed when a
relatively low load is applied, such as when an occupant moves slightly in the seat. In the event of
a crash, the seat occupant may not be properly restrained, increasing the risk of injury.
REMEDY: Dealers will have the driver and front passenger safety belt buckle cover removed and
replaced with a newly designed service buckle cover. The manufacturer has reported that owner
notification began on February 2, 2004. Owners may contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat
Belt Buckle Cover Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 03S10 Date: 040201
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat
Belt Buckle Cover Replacement > Page 7910
Attachment I - Administrative Information
Safety Recall 03S10 Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles Front Safety Belt Buckle Cover
Replacement
OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states provinces and countries.
Accordingly you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected stock vehicles before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter (when available) and
schedule a service date.
^ Also correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
RELATED DAMAGE
^ Related damage claims are not approved for this program.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat
Belt Buckle Cover Replacement > Page 7911
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
^ This repair will require no additional labor time to complete. Claims submitted with "MT" labor will
not be accepted for reimbursement.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this Safety Recall if
the repair was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan which is posted with
this bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center
(CRC). The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or at their
option directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 1904, Dearborn, MI 48121.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund
claims that include other non-covered repairs or those judged by Ford to be excessive will not be
accepted for reimbursement.
^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair.
Claiming a refund will not close out the VIN for this recall.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 03S10 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refund must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the FSA's repair line. Refer to
ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
Note:
If either safety belt buckle fails to latch properly during the operational checks specified in the repair
procedure call the Special Service Support Center at 1-800-325-5621 to obtain authorization for the
replacement of the safety belt assembly.
SPECIAL TOOL
One buckle cover removal tool was sent to each dealer at no cost. A limited supply will be available
until March 1 2004 from the Special Service Support Center (1-800-325-5621). Tools may also be
fabricated locally by referring to the instructions at the end of Attachment Ill.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Parts will not be direct shipped for this recall. Order your parts requirements through order
processing channels as noted below.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat
Belt Buckle Cover Replacement > Page 7912
^ For Stock Orders effective immediately follow normal order process.
^ For Interim Orders effective immediately follow normal order process.
^ For Emergency Orders within the first 30 days after launch call 1-800-325-5621.
^ For Emergency Orders 31 days after launch follow normal order process.
The DOR/COR for this program is 50314. This number identifies parts ordered for this recall
through the Special Service Support Center (1-800-325-5621).
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices refer to DOES II.
PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures."
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
SERVICE PROCEDURE
SPECIAL TOOL INFORMATION
One (1) buckle cover removal tool is being supplied to each dealer. A limited number of additional
tools will be available until March 1, 2004 from the Special Service Support Center at
1-800-325-5621. Tools may also be fabricated locally by referring to the instructions at the end of
this attachment.
CAUTION:
Care should be taken when using the buckle cover removal tool to avoid damage to the vehicle
interior. Always pull the removal tool in a direction away from the seat and center console.
NOTE:
Sitting in the seat during buckle cover removal will allow better control of the tool should it slip off
the buckle during removal.
NOTE:
Any supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault or air bag indicator light issues must be corrected
before this procedure is performed. Any SRS fault or air bag indicator light issues present are NOT
covered by this program.
1. Buckle Cover Removal:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat
Belt Buckle Cover Replacement > Page 7913
a) Securely insert the hooked end of the buckle cover removal tool into the buckle assembly as
shown. See Figure 1.
b) While sitting in the seat, firmly pull the tool up and away from the seat and center console to
separate the safety belt buckle cover halves.
2. Buckle Operation Check 1:
With both front safety belt covers removed, verify the operation of both safety belt buckles.
a) Insert the safety belt tongue into the buckle. Make sure the buckle makes a "click" noise.
b) Pull on the safety belt to make sure it is securely locked in the buckle.
c) Push the buckle release button and make sure the buckle releases the safety belt.
d) If the buckle fails to securely lock and retain the safety belt, call the Special Service Support
Center at 1-800-325-5621.
3. Buckle Cover Installation:
CAUTION:
Do not overtighten the screws.
NOTE:
Verify that the plastic anti-rattle spring is in place on the lower cover prior to installation. See Figure
2.
NOTE:
Replacement buckle covers go together more easily when the upper cover is positioned first
(inboard side), and the lower cover positioned second (outboard side).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat
Belt Buckle Cover Replacement > Page 7914
a) Install the new safety belt buckle cover with the felt patch on the passenger side buckle
assembly. Install four (4) supplied screws to secure the cover and tighten the screws. See Figure 3.
b) Install the other safety belt cover (without felt patch) onto the driver side seat belt assembly.
Install four (4) supplied screws to secure the cover and tighten the screws. The two remaining
screws in the kit are spare screws.
4. Buckle Operation Check 2:
With the new safety belt buckle covers in place, verify the operation of both safety belt buckles.
a) Insert the safety belt tongue into the buckle. Make sure the buckle makes a "click" noise.
b) Pull on the safety belt to make sure it is securely locked into the buckle.
c) Push the buckle release button and make sure the buckle releases the safety belt.
d) If the buckle fails to securely lock and retain the safety belt, call the Special Service Support
Center at 1-800-325-5621.
NOTE:
Special Service Support Center will authorize replacement of the buckle assembly if the latch fails
to operate properly. Replacement covers must be installed on the new assembly to maintain
uniform appearance.
5. Move the seats back to their original positions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat
Belt Buckle Cover Replacement > Page 7915
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat
Belt Buckle Cover Replacement > Page 7916
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > NHTSA03V507000 > Dec > 03 > Recall
03V507000: Seat Belt Buckle Cover Replacement
Seat Belt Buckle: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 03V507000: Seat Belt Buckle Cover
Replacement
DEFECT: On certain sport utility vehicles, a post within the safety belt buckle covers could fracture,
which could affect latch function, resulting in either a "no latch" or "partial latch" condition. In the
"partial latch" condition, the buckle tongue can be inserted into the buckle and appear to be
engaged, but will release from the buckle without the push button being depressed when a
relatively low load is applied, such as when an occupant moves slightly in the seat. In the event of
a crash, the seat occupant may not be properly restrained, increasing the risk of injury.
REMEDY: Dealers will have the driver and front passenger safety belt buckle cover removed and
replaced with a newly designed service buckle cover. The manufacturer has reported that owner
notification began on February 2, 2004. Owners may contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7921
Seat Belt Buckle: Specifications
Safety Belt Buckle And Pretensioner Bolt 47 Nm
Second Row Safety Belt Buckle Bolt 47 Nm
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Seat Belt Buckle: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ THE BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER IS A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE.
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN SERVICING AN AIR BAG-EQUIPPED VEHICLE
AND WHEN HANDLING A BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER. THIS WILL
REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ THE BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER IS A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE. NEVER
PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE. DOING SO COULD RESULT IN
BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER OR AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT AND COULD
RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT SEAT BELT
BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTERS (IF
SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND ATTACHING
HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT ASSEMBLIES
SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE ASSEMBLIES
SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN USE DURING A
COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER DAMAGE OR
IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 7924
Seat Belt Buckle: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 7925
Seat Belt Buckle: Description and Operation
The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt buckle and pretensioner are secured to the
front seat cushion frame assembly. This allows the front safety belt buckle end to move with the
front seat.
The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device that removes excess webbing
from the safety belt system. The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner uses the same crash
sensor system as the air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). When the belt and buckle
assembly pretensioner deploys, the buckle moves downward, pulling excess webbing from the lap
and shoulder safety belts.
If the safety belt buckle and pretensioner assembly is deployed, a new assembly must be installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner
Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner
Safety Belt Bolt Bit
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ THE BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER IS A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE.
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN SERVICING AN AIR BAG-EQUIPPED VEHICLE
AND WHEN HANDLING A BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER. THIS WILL
REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ THE BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER IS A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE. NEVER
PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE. DOING SO COULD RESULT IN
BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER OR AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT AND COULD
RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. Refer to Air Bag Systems.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: ^
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 7928
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
2. Remove the affected seat from the vehicle.
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
NOTE: ^
Make sure to follow all steps and instructions in the removal procedure of the affected seat.
^ The driver seat safety belt buckle and pretensioner is shown, the passenger side is similar.
3. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield.
^ Pull out to release the retaining clips.
4. Release the pin-type retainers and separate the safety belt buckle and pretensioner electrical
connector and wire harness from the seat.
NOTE: Note the wire harness routing for installation.
5. Remove the safety belt buckle and pretensioner.
1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
2 Remove the safety belt buckle and pretensioner.
NOTE: Do not handle the safety belt buckle and pretensioner in the area of the safety belt buckle
and pretensioner cable or retaining nut. Accidental pretensioner deployment could occur and result
in personal injury.
INSTALLATION
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 7929
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE
LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. Refer to Air Bag Systems.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
^ The driver seat safety belt buckle and pretensioner is shown, the passenger side is similar.
1. Install the safety belt buckle and pretensioner.
1 Position the safety belt buckle and pretensioner to the seat cushion frame.
2 Align and install the anti-rotation tab of the safety belt buckle and pretensioner to the slot in the
seat cushion frame.
3 Using the special tool, install the bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 7930
2. Route the safety belt buckle and pretensioner wire harness as noted in removal. Install the wire
harness and electrical connector pin-type retainers.
3. Align the retaining clips and push in, installing the inboard seat cushion side shield. 4. Install the
affected seat into the vehicle.
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
NOTE: Make sure to follow all steps and instructions in the installation procedure of the affected
seat.
5. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air
Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
6. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 7931
Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Rear Safety Belt Buckle - Center and Passenger Side
Safety Belt Bolt Bit
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND
ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT
ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE
ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN
USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER
DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED.
1. Pivot the seat bottom forward. 2. Pivot the seat backrest back.
3. Remove the safety belt buckle assembly.
1 Position the carpet out of the way.
2 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
3 Remove the safety belt buckle assembly.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: ^
Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to repositioning the seat.
^ Make sure that the safety belt buckles are accessible after repositioning the seat.
^ Make sure to tighten the bolt to specification.
2. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 7932
Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Rear Safety Belt and Buckle - Center and Driver Side
Safety Belt Bolt Bit
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND
ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT
ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE
ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN
USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER
DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED.
1. Pivot the seat bottom forward. 2. Pivot the seat backrest back.
3. Remove the safety belt and buckle assembly.
1 Position the carpet out of the way.
2 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
3 Feed the safety belt and buckle through the carpet and remove the assembly.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: ^
Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted after repositioning the seat.
^ Make sure that the safety belt and buckle are accessible after repositioning the seat.
^ Make sure to tighten the bolt to specification.
2. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Page 7933
Seat Belt Bolt Bit
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt Buckle Switch: > 05-17-11 > Sep > 05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp
ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Customer Interest SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set
TSB 05-17-11
09/05/05
RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the
electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the
buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully
functional.
ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety
belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved
connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt
buckle pretensioner.
One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for
complete repair procedure.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs.
A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner
Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With
14056D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7861202 OR 7861203 X2
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle Switch: > 05-17-11 > Sep > 05 > SRS - Air
Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's
B1877/B1881 Set
TSB 05-17-11
09/05/05
RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the
electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the
buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully
functional.
ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety
belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved
connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt
buckle pretensioner.
One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for
complete repair procedure.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs.
A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner
Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With
14056D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7861202 OR 7861203 X2
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7947
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Extension > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Seat Belt Extension: Description and Operation
A safety belt that is too short even when fully extended can be lengthened. The safety belt
extension is available. This assembly will add approximately 20 cm (8 inches) to the length of the
safety belt. Use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short when fully extended. Do
not use the safety belt extension to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso. Safety belt
extensions are available at no cost from any authorized Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information >
Specifications
Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Specifications
Safety Belt Shoulder Height Adjuster Bolts 47 Nm
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 7954
Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service Precautions
WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND
ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT
ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE
ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN
USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER
DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation
Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND
ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT
ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE
ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN
USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER
DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED.
NOTE: The driver side is shown, the passenger side is similar.
1. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 2. Lower the height adjuster.
3. Remove the upper height adjuster bolt. 4. Raise the height adjuster.
5. Remove the height adjuster.
1 Remove the bolt.
2 Remove the height adjuster.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Make sure that the front safety belt retractor is not in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode.
NOTE: ^
Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation.
^ Make sure to tighten bolts to specification.
2. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.
^ Carry out the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) Mode Functional Test to make sure that the
new retractor operates correctly. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Functional Test - Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) Mode
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7957
Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service and Repair General Procedures
D-Ring Installation Kit
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Remove the trim panels.
2. Use the half-inch drill provided in D-Ring Installation Kit 100-F012 (134-00018) or equivalent to
drill out the damaged threads in the upper
B-pillar structure.
3. Apply a suitable lubricant to the M14 x 1.5 tap provided in D-Ring Installation Kit 100-F012
(134-00018) and tap new threads.
NOTE: After each rotation, back tap off slightly to remove new cuttings and be sure to clean out
any chips before proceeding.
4. Use a threaded insert (N807170-S190) provided in D-Ring Installation Kit 100-F012 (134-00018)
or equivalent and screw it into the retapped hole
until it is slightly below the surface of the hole.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7958
5. Use a hammer to lightly tap the installation tool provided in D-Ring Installation Kit 100-F012
(134-00018) several times to drive down the insert
keys.
NOTE: If the two hex-head bolts on the front seat shoulder strap adjuster are not stripped, refer to
Seat Belt Height Adjuster to install the height adjuster to the body. If the front seat shoulder strap
adjuster bolts are stripped, replace the adjuster.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 7959
D-Ring Installation Kit
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt Retractor: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Seat Belts
Slow to Retract
Seat Belt Retractor: Customer Interest Restraints - Seat Belts Slow to Retract
TSB 05-16-11
08/22/05
SAFETY BELT RETRACTION SPEED
FORD: 2000-2003 Mustang 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Taurus 2000-2003 Explorer Sport,
Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion, Explorer 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Ranger 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape
Hybrid 2004-2006 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 LS, Town Car, Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2000-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2006
Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-21 to update the vehicle model years.
ISSUE A service kit is now available to improve safety belt retraction speed.
ACTION See the part application chart and select the appropriate kit. Follow the Instruction Sheet
included in the kit. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-20A for additional information.
NOTE
TEFLON TAPE SHOULD ONLY BE USED ON THE FRONT ROW SEATS FOR VEHICLES
LISTED IN THIS TSB, WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR AND THE
MOUNTAINEER. TEFLON TAPE CAN ALSO BE USED ON SECOND ROW SEATS FOR THESE
THREE VEHICLES.
NOTE
FOR MUSTANG, AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR AND MOUNTAINEER, REFER TO THE
FOLLOWING BUILD DATE INFORMATION BEFORE PERFORMING THIS TSB. TEFLON TAPE
HAS ALREADY BEEN INSTALLED DURING PRODUCTION ON SOME OF THESE VEHICLES.
^ MUSTANG: Only install on vehicles built through 6/15/2003. Teflon tape was already installed on
vehicles built on/after 6/16/2003.
^ AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR/MOUNTAINEER (FRONT ROW SEATS): Only install on vehicles
built through 6/24/2004. Teflon tape was already installed on vehicles built on/after 6/25/2004.
^ AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR/MOUNTAINEER (SECOND ROW SEATS): Only install on vehicles
built through 10/21/2004. Teflon tape was already installed on vehicles built on/after 10/22/2004.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt Retractor: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Seat Belts
Slow to Retract > Page 7968
Parts Block
NOTE
THE LABOR OPERATIONS WITHIN THIS TSB CAN BE CLAIMED IN COMBINATION AS
NEEDED TO COVER THE REQUIRED REPAIRS.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051611A Install Teflon Tape B 0.8 Hr.
Pillars Both Sides (Includes Time To Remove And Install Trim Panels If Necessary)
051611B Install Teflon Tape C 1.1 Hrs.
Pillars Both Sides (Includes Time To Remove And Install Trim Panels And Seats If Necessary)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
70611B08 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Retractor: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 > Restraints Seat Belts Slow to Retract
Seat Belt Retractor: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belts Slow to Retract
TSB 05-16-11
08/22/05
SAFETY BELT RETRACTION SPEED
FORD: 2000-2003 Mustang 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Taurus 2000-2003 Explorer Sport,
Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion, Explorer 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Ranger 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape
Hybrid 2004-2006 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 LS, Town Car, Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2000-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2006
Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-21 to update the vehicle model years.
ISSUE A service kit is now available to improve safety belt retraction speed.
ACTION See the part application chart and select the appropriate kit. Follow the Instruction Sheet
included in the kit. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-20A for additional information.
NOTE
TEFLON TAPE SHOULD ONLY BE USED ON THE FRONT ROW SEATS FOR VEHICLES
LISTED IN THIS TSB, WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR AND THE
MOUNTAINEER. TEFLON TAPE CAN ALSO BE USED ON SECOND ROW SEATS FOR THESE
THREE VEHICLES.
NOTE
FOR MUSTANG, AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR AND MOUNTAINEER, REFER TO THE
FOLLOWING BUILD DATE INFORMATION BEFORE PERFORMING THIS TSB. TEFLON TAPE
HAS ALREADY BEEN INSTALLED DURING PRODUCTION ON SOME OF THESE VEHICLES.
^ MUSTANG: Only install on vehicles built through 6/15/2003. Teflon tape was already installed on
vehicles built on/after 6/16/2003.
^ AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR/MOUNTAINEER (FRONT ROW SEATS): Only install on vehicles
built through 6/24/2004. Teflon tape was already installed on vehicles built on/after 6/25/2004.
^ AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR/MOUNTAINEER (SECOND ROW SEATS): Only install on vehicles
built through 10/21/2004. Teflon tape was already installed on vehicles built on/after 10/22/2004.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Retractor: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 > Restraints Seat Belts Slow to Retract > Page 7974
Parts Block
NOTE
THE LABOR OPERATIONS WITHIN THIS TSB CAN BE CLAIMED IN COMBINATION AS
NEEDED TO COVER THE REQUIRED REPAIRS.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051611A Install Teflon Tape B 0.8 Hr.
Pillars Both Sides (Includes Time To Remove And Install Trim Panels If Necessary)
051611B Install Teflon Tape C 1.1 Hrs.
Pillars Both Sides (Includes Time To Remove And Install Trim Panels And Seats If Necessary)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
70611B08 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7975
Seat Belt Retractor: Specifications
Front Row Safety Belt Retractor Lower Bolt 47 Nm
Front Row Safety Belt Retractor Upper Bolt 9 Nm
Second Row Safety Belt Retractor Bolt 47 Nm
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7976
Seat Belt Retractor: Service Precautions
WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND
ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT
ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE
ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN
USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER
DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7977
Seat Belt Retractor: Description and Operation
WARNING: REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS SHOULD NEVER BE PLACED IN THE FRONT
SEATS.
The dual locking mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder safety
belt for the front outboard passenger and both rear outboard seating positions, operates in two
ways. The driver single locking mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of the combination
lap/shoulder safety belt works only in the vehicle sensitive mode.
1. In the vehicle-sensitive (emergency locking) mode, the shoulder belt retractor allows the
occupant freedom of movement, locking tight only on
hard braking, hard cornering or impacts of approximately 8 km/h (5 mph) or more. The front and
rear outboard seat belt retractors can also be made to lock by pulling/jerking on the belt.
2. In the automatic locking mode, the shoulder belt retractor automatically locks and remains
locked when the combination lap/shoulder safety belt is
buckled and does not allow the occupant freedom of movement. This mode provides tight
lap/shoulder belt fit on the occupant and on a child safety seat.
3. When the combination lap/shoulder belt is unbuckled and allowed to retract completely, the
retractor switches to the vehicle-sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
The automatic locking mode must be used when installing a child safety seat in the front outboard
passenger and both rear outboard passenger seating positions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front
Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Front
Safety Belt Bolt Bit
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND
ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT
ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE
ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN
USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER
DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED.
NOTE: The driver side is shown, the passenger side is similar.
1. Remove the B-pillar trim panel.
2. Remove the safety belt anchor.
1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
2 Remove the safety belt anchor.
3. Separate the front safety belt retractor from the B-pillar.
1 Remove the bolt.
2 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
3 Separate the front safety belt retractor from the B-pillar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 7980
4. Remove the front safety belt retractor.
1 Disconnect the front safety belt retractor.
2 Remove the front safety belt retractor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Make sure that after the front passenger safety belt retractor is installed, the retractor is not in the
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
NOTE: ^
Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation.
^ Make sure to tighten bolts to specification.
2. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.
^ Carry out the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) Mode Functional Test to make sure that the
new retractor operates correctly. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Functional Test - Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) Mode
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 7981
Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Rear
Safety Belt Bolt Bit
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND
ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT
ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE
ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN
USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER
DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED.
NOTE: The driver side is shown, the passenger side is similar.
1. Remove the rear door scuff plate.
1 Open the cover.
2 Remove the two pin-type retainers (one shown).
3 Remove the rear door scuff plate.
2. Separate the weather-stripping from the C-pillar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 7982
3. Remove the safety belt anchor.
1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
2 Remove the safety belt anchor.
4. From behind the rear safety belt guide cover, release the retaining tabs, slide the cover up and
remove it.
NOTE: The rear safety belt guide has been removed for clarity.
5. Remove the rear safety belt guide.
1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
2 Remove the safety belt guide.
6. Lower the second row seat backrest.
7. Separate the rear hatch weather-stripping along the scuff plate and rear quarter trim panel on
the side of the safety belt retractor being serviced.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 7983
8. Remove the rear hatch scuff plate.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Pull up to release the retaining clips and remove the rear hatch scuff plate.
9. Pull out to release the retaining clips and remove the rear quarter trim panel.
10. Remove the rear safety belt retractor.
1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
2 Remove the rear safety belt retractor.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the rear safety belt retractor.
1 Position the rear safety belt retractor to the C-pillar.
2 Using the special tool, install the bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 7984
2. Install the quarter trim panel.
1 Position the quarter trim panel and feed the safety belt webbing through the opening.
2 Align the quarter trim panel and push in, fastening the retainers.
NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation.
3. Install the rear hatch scuff plate.
1 Align the rear hatch scuff plate and push in, fastening the retainers.
2 Install the pin-type retainers.
4. Install the rear hatch weather-stripping.
5. Install the spacer onto the rear safety belt guide bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 7985
6. Install the rear safety belt guide.
1 Position the safety belt guide.
2 Using the special tool, install the bolt.
NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation.
7. Install the rear safety belt guide cover.
NOTE: If the safety belt guide cover is damaged or if it does not remain in position, install a new
cover.
8. Raise the second row seat backrest.
9. Install the safety belt anchor.
1 Position the safety belt anchor.
2 Using the special tool, install the bolt.
NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 7986
10. Install the C-pillar weatherstripping.
11. Install the rear door scuff plate.
1 Position the rear door scuff plate.
2 Install the two pin-type retainers (one shown).
3 Close the cover.
12. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.
1 Make sure that after the rear safety belt retractor is installed, the retractor is not in the Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
2 Carry out the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) Mode Functional Test to make sure that the
new retractor operates correctly. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Functional Test - Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) Mode
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 7987
Seat Belt Bolt Bit
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Specifications
Seat Belt Tensioner: Specifications
Safety Belt Buckle And Pretensioner Bolt 47 Nm
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Diagrams > Driver Seat
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Diagrams > Driver Seat > Page 7993
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Seat Belt Tensioner: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ THE BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER IS A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE.
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN SERVICING AN AIR BAG-EQUIPPED VEHICLE
AND WHEN HANDLING A BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER. THIS WILL
REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ THE BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER IS A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE. NEVER
PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE. DOING SO COULD RESULT IN
BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER OR AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT AND COULD
RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ CARRY A LIVE SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR/PRETENSIONER ASSEMBLY SO AS TO KEEP
FINGERS AND CLOTHING AWAY FROM MOVEABLE PARTS. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK
OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ REMOTE DEPLOYMENT IS TO BE PERFORMED OUTDOORS WITH ALL PERSONNEL AT
LEAST 6.1 METERS (20 FEET) AWAY TO ENSURE PERSONAL SAFETY. DUE TO THE LOUD
REPORT WHICH OCCURS WHEN THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED, HEARING PROTECTION IS
REQUIRED.
^ DO NOT PLACE THE DRIVER OR PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE TRIM COVER
OR DEPLOYMENT DOOR FACING DOWN, AS THE FORCES OF THE DEPLOYING AIR BAG
COULD CAUSE IT TO RICOCHET AND CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 7996
Seat Belt Tensioner: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Occupant Restraints - Active
Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Occupant Restraints - Active
The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt buckle and pretensioner are secured to the
front seat cushion frame assembly. This allows the front safety belt buckle end to move with the
front seat.
The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device that removes excess webbing
from the safety belt system. The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner uses the same crash
sensor system as the air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). When the belt and buckle
assembly pretensioner deploys, the buckle moves downward, pulling excess webbing from the lap
and shoulder safety belts.
If the safety belt buckle and pretensioner assembly is deployed, a new assembly must be installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Occupant Restraints - Active > Page 7999
Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Occupant Restraints - Passive
As part of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the safety belt buckles are equipped with
pretensioners. The safety belt buckle pretensioners remove excess slack from the safety belt
webbing. The pretensioners are activated by the Restraints Control Module (RCM) when the
module detects a crash event force exceeding a programmed unit.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner
Seat Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner
Safety Belt Bolt Bit
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ THE BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER IS A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE.
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN SERVICING AN AIR BAG-EQUIPPED VEHICLE
AND WHEN HANDLING A BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER. THIS WILL
REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ THE BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER IS A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE. NEVER
PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE. DOING SO COULD RESULT IN
BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER OR AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT AND COULD
RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. Refer to Air Bag Systems.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: ^
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 8002
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
2. Remove the affected seat from the vehicle.
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
NOTE: ^
Make sure to follow all steps and instructions in the removal procedure of the affected seat.
^ The driver seat safety belt buckle and pretensioner is shown, the passenger side is similar.
3. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield.
^ Pull out to release the retaining clips.
4. Release the pin-type retainers and separate the safety belt buckle and pretensioner electrical
connector and wire harness from the seat.
NOTE: Note the wire harness routing for installation.
5. Remove the safety belt buckle and pretensioner.
1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
2 Remove the safety belt buckle and pretensioner.
NOTE: Do not handle the safety belt buckle and pretensioner in the area of the safety belt buckle
and pretensioner cable or retaining nut. Accidental pretensioner deployment could occur and result
in personal injury.
INSTALLATION
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 8003
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE
LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. Refer to Air Bag Systems.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
^ The driver seat safety belt buckle and pretensioner is shown, the passenger side is similar.
1. Install the safety belt buckle and pretensioner.
1 Position the safety belt buckle and pretensioner to the seat cushion frame.
2 Align and install the anti-rotation tab of the safety belt buckle and pretensioner to the slot in the
seat cushion frame.
3 Using the special tool, install the bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 8004
2. Route the safety belt buckle and pretensioner wire harness as noted in removal. Install the wire
harness and electrical connector pin-type retainers.
3. Align the retaining clips and push in, installing the inboard seat cushion side shield. 4. Install the
affected seat into the vehicle.
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
NOTE: Make sure to follow all steps and instructions in the installation procedure of the affected
seat.
5. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air
Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
6. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 8005
Seat Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Safety Belt Pretensioner Disposal
Deployed
1. Dispose of the deployed safety belt pretensioner in the same manner as any other part to be
scrapped.
WARNING: ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING A SAFETY
BELT RETRACTOR/PRETENSIONER ASSEMBLY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY
IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
Undeployed, Inoperative
WARNING: CARRY A LIVE SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR/PRETENSIONER ASSEMBLY SO AS
TO KEEP FINGERS AND CLOTHING AWAY FROM MOVEABLE PARTS. THIS WILL REDUCE
THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
NOTE: All inoperative safety belt retractor/pretensioner assemblies have been placed on the
Mandatory Return List. All damaged safety belt retractor/pretensioners must be treated the same
as any inoperative live safety belt retractor/pretensioner being returned.
1. Remove the inoperative safety belt retractor/pretensioner assembly from the vehicle. 2. Package
and return the inoperative safety belt retractor/pretensioner assembly to Ford Motor Company.
Undeployed, Scrapped Vehicle
REMOTE DEPLOYMENT
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE OR
SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR/PRETENSIONER ASSEMBLY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF
INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TRIM COVER OR DEPLOYMENT
DOOR POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN
THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ REMOTE DEPLOYMENT IS TO BE PERFORMED OUTDOORS WITH ALL PERSONNEL AT
LEAST 6.1 METERS (20 FEET) AWAY TO ENSURE PERSONAL SAFETY. DUE TO THE LOUD
REPORT WHICH OCCURS WHEN THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED, HEARING PROTECTION IS
REQUIRED.
^ DO NOT PLACE THE DRIVER OR PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE TRIM COVER
OR DEPLOYMENT DOOR FACING DOWN, AS THE FORCES OF THE DEPLOYING AIR BAG
COULD CAUSE IT TO RICOCHET AND CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Remove the safety belt pretensioner from the vehicle.
2. Cut and strip the wires near the electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 8006
3. Obtain two wires (20 gauge minimum) at least 6.1 meters (20 feet) long and attach one end of
each wire to stripped ends of the pretensioner wires. 4. Place the pretensioner on a flat surface in
an open outdoor area. 5. Remain at least 6.1 meters (20 feet) away from the safety belt
pretensioner.
6. Deploy the safety belt pretensioner by touching the other ends of the two wires to the terminals
of a 12 volt battery. 7. To allow for cooling, wait at least ten minutes before approaching the
deployed safety belt pretensioner. 8. Dispose of the deployed safety belt pretensioner in the same
manner as any other part to be scrapped.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 8007
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Warning Timer > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Seat Belt Warning Timer: Description and Operation
Safety Belt Warning System
The safety belt warning indicator illuminates and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten
their safety belts.
The conditions of operation for the safety belt warning indicator and chime are as follows: ^
If the driver's safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to RUN, the safety belt
warning indicator illuminates for 1-2 minutes and the warning chime sounds for 4-8 seconds.
^ If the driver's safety belt is buckled while the warning indicator is illuminated and the reminder
chime is sounding, the safety belt warning indicator and reminder chime turn off.
^ If the driver's safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to RUN, the safety belt
warning indicator and reminder chime remain off.
Belt Minder
The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature
provides additional reminders to the driver that the driver's safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster.
To activate or deactivate the Belt Minder feature, refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning
Indicators.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Specifications
Impact Sensor: Specifications
Side Impact Sensor Bolts 12 Nm
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left > Page 8017
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left > Page 8020
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information
Impact Sensor: Customer Safety Information
WARNING: THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR
CORRECT SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN
WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND
BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE
RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 8023
Impact Sensor: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE AIR BAG SIDE CRASH SENSOR RETAINING BOLTS IS
CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Page 8024
Impact Sensor: Description and Operation
WARNING: THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR
CORRECT SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN
WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND
BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE
RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
For this vehicle, the SRS employs three crash sensors. One of the sensors is integral to the RCM
and is not serviceable separately. In addition, there are two side crash sensors located in the LH
and RH B-pillars. The RCM is mounted on the center tunnel under the instrument panel. Mounting
orientation is critical for correct operation of all crash sensors.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor
Driver Side
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8027
vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint
system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if
equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: ^
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
2. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8028
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
5. Open the glove box past its stops.
6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the Instrument Panel (I/P), disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8029
8. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
10. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8030
12. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
14. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system diagnostic
tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8031
19. Remove the B-pillar trim panel.
20. Remove the side crash sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the side crash sensor.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8032
1. Install the side crash sensor.
1 Position the side crash sensor to the B-pillar.
2 Install the bolts.
3 Connect the side crash sensor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE AIR BAG SIDE CRASH SENSOR RETAINING
BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
2. Connect the battery ground cable. 3. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still in place at all
deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
4. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 5. Install the B-pillar trim
panel.
6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
the bracket under the seat.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8033
8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
9. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag module
electrical connector onto the bracket under the
seat.
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
11. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8034
onto the bracket under the seat.
12. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
13. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air
bag module electrical connector onto the bracket
under the seat.
14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8035
15. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 16. Close the glove box.
17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
18. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
19. Install the steering wheel access cover. 20. Connect the battery ground cable. 21. With all the
restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8036
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
22. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
Passenger Side
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8037
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat Systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: ^
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
2. Open the glove box past its stops.
3. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the Instrument Panel (I/P), disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8038
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
5. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
6. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8039
8. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
10. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8040
12. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking dip.
2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
14. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system
diagnostic tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag
Systems/Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8041
19. Remove the B-pillar trim panel.
20. Remove the side crash sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the side crash sensor.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat Systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8042
1. Install the side crash sensor.
1 Position the side crash sensor to the B-pillar.
2 Install the bolts.
3 Connect the side crash sensor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE AIR BAG SIDE CRASH SENSOR RETAINING
BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
2. Connect the battery ground cable. 3. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still in place at all
deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
4. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 5. Install the B-pillar trim
panel.
6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
onto the bracket under the seat.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8043
8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
9. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air
bag module electrical connector onto the bracket
under the seat.
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
11. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8044
the bracket under the seat.
12. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
13. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag
module electrical connector onto the bracket under the
seat.
14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8045
15. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
16. Install the steering wheel access cover.
17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
18. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 19. Close the glove box. 20.
Connect the battery ground cable. 21. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove
out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8046
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
22. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8047
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Weld Nut Repair
"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE:
^ There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedures and Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control
Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
^ If two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts in this procedure. Weld nuts must
be installed in Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side
Impact Sensor.
^ The following procedure applies to vehicles that have a rectangular hole in the sheet metal that is
in close proximity to the missing weld nut.
1. Obtain a "J" nut (part number N623332-S301) or any of the following optional "J" nuts (part
numbers: N623342-S101, N800854-S100,
N800925-S100).
2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190) or equivalent. 3. Install
the "J" nut through the rectangular hole in the sheet metal. 4. Install the crash sensor.
NOTE: Be sure the threaded portion of the "J" nut is aligned with the clearance hole in the sheet
metal.
5. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE:
^ There are two procedures to repairs a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedure and Weld Nut Repair-"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM)
and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
^ Use only this procedure if two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts in Weld
Nut Repair-"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Crash Sensor.
^ Radiator support repair shown, others are similar.
1. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) weld nut (part number N806285-S190). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in)
grounding screw (part number N806327-S190).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8048
3. Route a sufficient length of copper welding wire through the weld nut clearance hole and back
out an adjacent access hole.
4. Feed the copper welding wire through the weld nut, then through a standard flat washer. 5.
Secure the flat washer so that it cannot be pulled off the end of the copper welding wire. 6. Pull the
copper welding wire back through the clearance hole, allowing the weld nut and flat washer to
follow the copper welding wire through. 7. Position the weld nut to the weld nut clearance hole,
firmly pulling on the copper welding wire allowing the secured flat washer to hold the weld
nut in position.
8. Holding the weld nut securely in place and using a MIG welder, weld in four places around the
edge of the weld nut. 9. Metal finish as required.
10. Verify the nut is securely in place. 11. Install the crash sensor. 12. Tighten the attaching screws
to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Stripped Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
1. Obtain an 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw (part number N802455-S190). 2. Drill out the internal
threads of the stripped-out weld nut to 7.37 mm (0.29 in) using a letter "L" size drill bit. 3. Position
the crash sensor to the vehicle. 4. Install the 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw into the drilled-out
weld nut. 5. Install the remaining attaching screws. 6. Tighten the attaching screws to specification.
Refer to Torque Specifications.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 8049
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Safing Sensor, Air Bag >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Safing Sensor: Description and Operation
Safing Sensor
The Safing Sensor is part of the Restraints Control Module (RCM) and is not serviced separately.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt Buckle Switch: > 05-17-11 > Sep >
05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Customer Interest SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set
TSB 05-17-11
09/05/05
RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the
electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the
buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully
functional.
ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety
belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved
connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt
buckle pretensioner.
One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for
complete repair procedure.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs.
A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner
Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With
14056D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7861202 OR 7861203 X2
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle Switch: >
05-17-11 > Sep > 05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's
B1877/B1881 Set
TSB 05-17-11
09/05/05
RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the
electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the
buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully
functional.
ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety
belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved
connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt
buckle pretensioner.
One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for
complete repair procedure.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs.
A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner
Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With
14056D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7861202 OR 7861203 X2
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8066
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Accessory Delay Relay: Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8072
Diagram 700-01-00-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay >
Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay >
Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Relay > Page 8075
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay
Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 8078
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 8079
Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 8080
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure
voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the
relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is
12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Antenna Cable: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the audio unit. 2. Remove the right lower A-pillar trim.
3. Disconnect the antenna cable connector.
4. Lower the glove box door.
5. Remove the three pin-type retainers holding the lead-in cable.
6. Remove the antenna cable clip fastened to the center instrument panel support. 7. Remove the
cable through the glove box opening.
INSTALLATION
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8086
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle
Antitheft) > Component Information > Application and ID
Alarm Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control
Modules (General Module).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle
Antitheft) > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 8091
Alarm Module: Testing and Inspection
Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System
Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System
Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8095
Alarm System Transponder: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Pull the tilt wheel lever down in open position, as
necessary.
3. Remove the lower instrument panel steering column cover.
1 Remove the lower instrument panel steering column cover.
2 Remove the screws.
3 Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the transceiver assembly.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Remove the transceiver assembly.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: No key replacement or re-initialization needs to occur with the removal or installation of a
new PATS transceiver.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For
Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics
Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics
TSB 06-15-8
08/07/06
KEYPAD DIAGNOSTICS - DEALER INSTALLED ACCESSORY
FORD: 1998-2006 Taurus 1999-2003 Escort 1999-2006 Mustang 2000-2006 Focus 2002-2005
Thunderbird 2005-2006 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006 Crown Victoria, Fusion 1998-2006
Expedition, Explorer, F-150, Ranger 1999 F-250 Light Duty 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2006
F-Super Duty 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005
Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2006 Freestar
LINCOLN: 1998-2006 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 1998-2006 Navigator
2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1998-2005 Sable 1999-2002 Cougar 2005-2006 Montego 2006 Grand Marquis, Milan
1998-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some vehicles may experience a concern with the keyless entry keypad. In order to
properly diagnose the concern with the keyless entry keypad, it is important to identify whether the
keypad is a factory installed style (wired) or a Genuine Ford Accessory (GFA) radio frequency (RF)
style keypad.
ACTION Use the following Service Procedure to identify GFA RF keypads and provide diagnostic
service tips.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
IDENTIFICATION:
1. Production installed keyless entry keypads are mounted flush with the surface of the vehicle and
are wired directly to the module controlling the vehicle's keyless entry system. This style keypad
can be diagnosed using the appropriate Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics > Page 8104
2. Dealer installed GFA RF keypads are adhesive backed and protrude approximately 1/2" (13
mm) from the surface of the vehicle and there are no specific diagnostics available in the WSM
(Figure 1).
NOTE
THIS RF KEYPAD WAS ALSO US[D IN PRODUCTION ON 2004 F-SUPER DUTY VEHICLES
BUILT PRIOR TO 12/3/2003. REFER TO WSM, SECTION 501-14 FOR RF KEYPAD
DIAGNOSTICS FOR THESE VEHICLES.
GENUINE FORD ACCESSORY KEYPAD DIAGNOSTIC TIPS
1. The keypad operates similarly to a remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter and is programmed
using a similar procedure.
Although the RF keypad is not specifically addressed in the WSM, the RKE transmitter
programming portion of the WSM, Section 501-14 can be used as a guide
NOTE
THE 7-8 AND 9-0 BUTTONS ON THE KEYPAD MUST BE PRESSED SIMULTANEOUSLY
DURING THE PROCEDURE IN ORDER FOR THE KEYPAD TO BE RECOGNIZED AS AN
ADDITIONAL REMOTE TRANSMITTER.
Since the GFA RF keypad is essentially another RKE transmitter, the transmitter diagnostic
pinpoint tests in the vehicle's WSM can also be referenced even though the buttons serving the
lock / unlock functions will differ
2. The GFA RF keypad is serviced as an assembly. The internal battery cannot be replaced
separately.
3. If the master code or owner selectable code is lost or forgotten, the GFA RF keypad must be
replaced. These codes are not stored in any vehicle module (with the exception of 2004 F-Super
Duty vehicles produced prior to 12/3/2003).
4. The GFA RF keypad and all RKE transmitters (the number of transmitters allowable will vary by
vehicle) must be reprogrammed together anytime the keypad is replaced, an RKE transmitter is
replaced, or the module controlling the keyless entry system on the vehicle (GEM/SJB/VSM/DDM
etc.) is replaced.
NOTE
THERE IS AN EXCEPTION TO TIP 4 FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH INTEGRATED
KEYHEAD TRANSMITTERS (IKTs) (FUSION/MILAN/ZEPHYR). THE GFA RF KEYPADS FOR
VEHICLES WITH IKTs MUST BE PROGRAMMED INDEPENDENTLY FROM THE IKTs. TURN
THE IGNITION FROM "OFF" TO "RUN" 8 TIMES WITHIN 10 SECONDS, WITH THE 8TH TIME
ENDING IN "RUN". THE DOOR LOCKS WILL CYCLE TO CONFIRM ENTERING
PROGRAMMING MODE. PRESS THE 7-8 AND 9-0 BUTTON ON THE KEYPAD
SIMULTANEOUSLY TO SEND A LOCK SIGNAL. TURN IGNITION TO OFF. THE LOCKS WILL
CYCLE AGAIN TO INDICATE THE END OF THE PROGRAMMING MODE.
5. The keypad will normally illuminate for 5 seconds after one or more buttons are pressed, and the
illumination will immediately turn off if the 7-8 and 9-0 buttons are pressed simultaneously (lock all
doors). The keypad contains an optical sensor and will not illuminate under bright lighting
conditions. The keypad may only illuminate briefly in colder temperatures in order to maximize the
battery power available to transmit a lock/unlock signal. The temperature at which this occurs will
vary depending upon the keypad battery age and condition. Both of these conditions are a normal
function of the Power Save Mode and do not indicate a need to replace the keypad.
6. After entering the keypad code, the system may unlock the driver's door, lock it, then unlock it
again, and the keypad will not even briefly illuminate. This is the Alert Mode and is an indication
that battery power is very low and the keypad must be replaced.
7. The keypad also contains an Anti-scan feature. If the wrong code has been entered 7 times (35
consecutive button presses) the keypad is disabled for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash
during this time.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics > Page 8105
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14A626 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Module > Component Information > Application and ID
Keyless Entry Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control
Modules (General Module).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Module > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 8109
Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection
Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 8115
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Connector Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8118
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8119
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8120
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8121
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8122
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8123
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8124
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8125
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8126
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8127
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8128
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8129
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8130
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8131
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8132
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8133
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8134
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8135
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8136
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8137
Diagram 419-10-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Description and Operation > System Description
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Description and Operation System Description
The multifunction module consists of the Generic Electronic Module (GEM).
The GEM controls the following features:
^ interval rear window wiper
^ battery saver
^ illuminated entry
^ headlamp control
^ interior lamp control
^ power door locks
^ Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
^ accessory delay
^ perimeter anti-theft system
^ door ajar output control
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Description and Operation > System Description > Page 8140
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Description and Operation Principles of Operation (How
Does It Work?)
The Generic Electronic Module (GEM) constantly monitors its subsystems for concerns. If a
concern is found in one of the subsystems, the GEM will record the concern in the form of a
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).
The ignition switch position is very important to the GEM function. Erratic or unexpected GEM
function can often be traced to problems with these GEM inputs.
The GEM controls a variety of systems:
^ interval rear window wiper
^ battery saver
^ illuminated entry
^ headlamp control
^ interior lamp control
^ power door locks
^ Remote Key Less Entry (RKE)
^ accessory delay
^ perimeter anti-theft system
^ door ajar output control
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system in question. 2. Visually inspect for obvious
signs of mechanical and electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Electrical ^
Fuse
^ Wiring harness
^ Connector(s)
^ Circuitry
^ Generic Electronic Module (GEM)
3. If the concern remains after the inspection, connect the diagnostic tool to the Data Link
Connector (DLC) located beneath the instrument panel
and select the vehicle to be tested from the diagnostic tool menu. If the diagnostic tool does not
communicate with the vehicle: ^
check that the program card is correctly installed.
^ check the connections to the vehicle.
^ check the ignition switch position.
4. If the diagnostic tool still does not communicate with the vehicle, refer to the diagnostic tool
manual. 5. Carry out the DATA LINK DIAGNOSTICS test. See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Module Communication
Network/Testing and Inspection/Module Communications Network/Pinpoint Tests/Pinpoint Test PC
(Precheck) If the diagnostic tool responds with: ^
CKT914, CKT915 or CKT70 = ALL ECUS NO RESP/NOT EQUIP, refer to Module
Communications Network (Information Bus).
^ NO RESP/NOT EQUIP for generic electronic module (GEM), go to Pinpoint Test A.
^ SYSTEM PASSED, retrieve and record the continuous Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), erase
the continuous DTCs and carry out self-test diagnostics for the GEM.
6. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the GEM Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Index to continue diagnostics. See: Diagnostic
Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures
7. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, refer to the appropriate Vehicle System to
continue diagnostics.
Additional Testing
For additional information on warning chime concerns, refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and
Warning Indicators.
For additional information on courtesy lamps/illuminated entry and battery saver concerns, refer to
Lighting and Horns.
For additional information on Rear interval timer concerns, refer to Wiper and Washer Systems.
For additional information on keyless entry concerns, refer to Keyless Entry.
For additional information on Power Door Lock concerns, refer to Power Locks.
For additional information on anti-theft concerns, refer to Antitheft and Alarm Systems.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8143
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures
DTC Index B1217 - B1325
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8144
DTC Index B1327 - C1962
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8145
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8146
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Pinpoint Tests
A1 - A2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8147
A2 - A4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8148
A4 - A5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8149
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
NOTE: Prior to removal of the GEM, it is necessary to upload module configuration information to a
diagnostic tool. This information needs to be downloaded into the new module once installed.
2. Remove the floor console. Refer to Console.
3. Disconnect the GEM electrical connectors.
4. Remove the GEM
1 Pull back the insulation and remove the nuts.
2 Remove the GEM.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Configure the GEM. Refer to Module Communications Network (Information Bus).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General
Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8150
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound
System > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01
> Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: Customer Interest Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers
Article No. 01-7-3
04/16/01
^ FUEL SYSTEM - FUEL PUMP "WHINING"/"BUZZING" NOISE COMES THROUGH
ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO - WAY RADIO SPEAKER
^ RADIO - ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO - WAY COMMUNICATION - "WHINING"/"BUZZING"
NOISE IN SPEAKERS CAUSED BY FUEL PUMP
^ NOISE - "WHINING"/"BUZZING" - COMES THROUGH SPEAKERS OF ENTERTAINMENT OR
TWO-WAY RADIO
FORD: 1990-1994
TEMPO
1990-1997 PROBE, THUNDERBIRD
1990-1999 ESCORT, MUSTANG, TAURUS
1990-2001 CROWN VICTORIA
1997-1999 CONTOUR
2001 TAURUS
1990 BRONCO II
1990-1996 BRONCO
1990-1997 AEROSTAR, F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350
1990-1999 F-250 LD
1990-2001 ECONOLINE, F-150, RANGER
1991-2001 EXPLORER
1995-2001 WINDSTAR
1997-2001 EXPEDITION
1999-2001 SUPER DUTY F SERIES
2000-2001 EXCURSION
2001 ESCAPE
LINCOLN: 1990-1992
MARK VII
1990-1999 CONTINENTAL
1990-2001 TOWN CAR
1997-1998 MARK VIII
1998-2001 NAVIGATOR
MERCURY: 1990-1994
TOPAZ
1990-1997 COUGAR
1990-1999 SABLE
1990-2001 GRAND MARQUIS
1991-1999 TRACER
1997-1999 MYSTIQUE
1999 COUGAR
2001 SABLE
1993-2001 VILLAGER
1997-2001 MOUNTAINEER
This TSB article is being republished in its entirety to update the model year vehicles.
ISSUE
A "whining"/"buzzing" noise in the speakers of the entertainment radio or two-way radio on vehicles
with an in-tank electric fuel pump may be caused by electrical noise from the fuel pump.
ACTION
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01
> Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8164
Install an electronic noise Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Filter (F1PZ-18B925-A) on the fuel
pump inside the fuel tank. Refer to the following Test Procedure to confirm that the concern exists,
then refer to the Service Procedure for repair details.
NOTE
SOME LIGHT TRUCKS REQUIRE ONE (1) RFI FILTER FOR EACH IN-TANK ELECTRIC FUEL
PUMP ON MULTI-TANK VEHICLES.
NOTE
THIS TSB DOES NOT INCLUDE TAURUS FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLES (FFVS) OR 1999
RANGER 3.0L FFVS.
TEST PROCEDURE
Fuel pump radio noise is relatively constant and changes only slightly with vehicle speed. If the
frequency of the noise varies or the noise comes and goes with the vehicle speed, then it is not the
fuel pump and this fix will not be effective. The following procedure will help determine if the fuel
pump is the cause of the radio noise:
1. Turn on the radio before the key is turned on (assuming the radio will operate without the ignition
key - you may need to put the ignition key in the Accessory position).
2. Turn the ignition key to the Run position (do not start the engine).
3. The fuel pump should run for about 1 second with the key in the Run position with the engine not
running. Listen for noise in the radio. If noise is present while the pump is running and stops when
the pump stops, then the noise is being generated by the pump and this procedure should help.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the fuel pump sender assembly from the fuel tank. Refer to the appropriate model year
Workshop Manual for removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01
> Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8165
2. On vehicles without a fuel delivery module, remove the negative and positive connectors from
the fuel pump, Figure 1.
a. Cut the wires to the fuel pump 76 mm (3") from the flange of the fuel pump and discard the
wires.
b. Connect the RFI filter connectors to the spade terminal on the fuel pump.
c. Cut and solder both the red and black wires of the RFI filter to the red and black wires of the
flange. Use Heat Shrink Tubing (F5AZ-14A099-M) over the solder connections.
NOTE
HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PRIOR
TO THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01
> Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8166
TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2",)) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO ENTIRELY COVER EACH
SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO PREVENT EXPOSURE OF
THE CONNECTIONS.
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT
MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE GROUND WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL
TANK. IF THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM
CORROSION SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE
LITERATURE (EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS.
WARNING
ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL
TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR
APPLYING SHRINK TUBING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01
> Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8167
3. On light trucks and compact trucks with a fuel delivery module, cut the fuel pump wires to the
fuel delivery module 50 mm (2") from the flange and discard the wires, Figure 2.
a. Cut the connectors from the RFI filter and solder wires to the fuel delivery module (red to red and
black to black). Use heat shrink tubing over soldering connections.
b. Solder wires from the RFI filter to the flange wires (red to red and black to black). Use heat
shrink tubing over soldered connections.
NOTE:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01
> Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8168
HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PRIOR
TO THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2")) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO
ENTIRELY COVER EACH SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO
PREVENT EXPOSURE OF THE CONNECTIONS.
NOTE:
FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT
MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL TANK IF
THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM CORROSION.
SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE LITERATURE
(EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS.
WARNING
ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL
TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR
APPLYING SHRINK TUBING.
4. Secure the RFI filter to the fuel pump and sender assembly with a Bundling Strap (95873-S101)
to prevent rattling in the tank, Figures 1 and 2.
5. Reinstall the fuel pump sender assembly into the fuel tank.
CAUTION
INSTALL NEW GASKETS WHEN REINSTALLING SENDER TO PREVENT LEAKS. REFER TO
THE PARTS CATALOG FOR PROPER APPLICATIONS.
6. Check the appropriate Electrical and vacuum troubleshooting manual (EVTM) (or other Service
Literature) for the location of the fuel pump pump ground. If ground is more than 0.9m (3') from the
tank, cut wire and ground fuel pump end within 0.9m (3') of the tank to prevent ground wire from
acting as an antenna. Be sure ground is secure and protected from corrosion since it is the
operating ground for the fuel pump.
7. Install the fuel tank in the vehicle as outlined in the appropriate Service or Workshop manual.
PARTS BLOCK
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 90-18-3, 91-17-5 SUPERSEDES: 99-12-9 WARRANTY
STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01
> Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8169
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01
> Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8170
OPERATION/DESCRIPTION/TIME
DEALER CODING
OASIS CODES: 205000, 207000, 404000, 702000, 702300
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 01-7-3
> Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio
Speakers
Article No. 01-7-3
04/16/01
^ FUEL SYSTEM - FUEL PUMP "WHINING"/"BUZZING" NOISE COMES THROUGH
ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO - WAY RADIO SPEAKER
^ RADIO - ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO - WAY COMMUNICATION - "WHINING"/"BUZZING"
NOISE IN SPEAKERS CAUSED BY FUEL PUMP
^ NOISE - "WHINING"/"BUZZING" - COMES THROUGH SPEAKERS OF ENTERTAINMENT OR
TWO-WAY RADIO
FORD: 1990-1994
TEMPO
1990-1997 PROBE, THUNDERBIRD
1990-1999 ESCORT, MUSTANG, TAURUS
1990-2001 CROWN VICTORIA
1997-1999 CONTOUR
2001 TAURUS
1990 BRONCO II
1990-1996 BRONCO
1990-1997 AEROSTAR, F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350
1990-1999 F-250 LD
1990-2001 ECONOLINE, F-150, RANGER
1991-2001 EXPLORER
1995-2001 WINDSTAR
1997-2001 EXPEDITION
1999-2001 SUPER DUTY F SERIES
2000-2001 EXCURSION
2001 ESCAPE
LINCOLN: 1990-1992
MARK VII
1990-1999 CONTINENTAL
1990-2001 TOWN CAR
1997-1998 MARK VIII
1998-2001 NAVIGATOR
MERCURY: 1990-1994
TOPAZ
1990-1997 COUGAR
1990-1999 SABLE
1990-2001 GRAND MARQUIS
1991-1999 TRACER
1997-1999 MYSTIQUE
1999 COUGAR
2001 SABLE
1993-2001 VILLAGER
1997-2001 MOUNTAINEER
This TSB article is being republished in its entirety to update the model year vehicles.
ISSUE
A "whining"/"buzzing" noise in the speakers of the entertainment radio or two-way radio on vehicles
with an in-tank electric fuel pump may be caused by electrical noise from the fuel pump.
ACTION
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 01-7-3
> Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8176
Install an electronic noise Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Filter (F1PZ-18B925-A) on the fuel
pump inside the fuel tank. Refer to the following Test Procedure to confirm that the concern exists,
then refer to the Service Procedure for repair details.
NOTE
SOME LIGHT TRUCKS REQUIRE ONE (1) RFI FILTER FOR EACH IN-TANK ELECTRIC FUEL
PUMP ON MULTI-TANK VEHICLES.
NOTE
THIS TSB DOES NOT INCLUDE TAURUS FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLES (FFVS) OR 1999
RANGER 3.0L FFVS.
TEST PROCEDURE
Fuel pump radio noise is relatively constant and changes only slightly with vehicle speed. If the
frequency of the noise varies or the noise comes and goes with the vehicle speed, then it is not the
fuel pump and this fix will not be effective. The following procedure will help determine if the fuel
pump is the cause of the radio noise:
1. Turn on the radio before the key is turned on (assuming the radio will operate without the ignition
key - you may need to put the ignition key in the Accessory position).
2. Turn the ignition key to the Run position (do not start the engine).
3. The fuel pump should run for about 1 second with the key in the Run position with the engine not
running. Listen for noise in the radio. If noise is present while the pump is running and stops when
the pump stops, then the noise is being generated by the pump and this procedure should help.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the fuel pump sender assembly from the fuel tank. Refer to the appropriate model year
Workshop Manual for removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 01-7-3
> Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8177
2. On vehicles without a fuel delivery module, remove the negative and positive connectors from
the fuel pump, Figure 1.
a. Cut the wires to the fuel pump 76 mm (3") from the flange of the fuel pump and discard the
wires.
b. Connect the RFI filter connectors to the spade terminal on the fuel pump.
c. Cut and solder both the red and black wires of the RFI filter to the red and black wires of the
flange. Use Heat Shrink Tubing (F5AZ-14A099-M) over the solder connections.
NOTE
HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PRIOR
TO THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 01-7-3
> Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8178
TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2",)) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO ENTIRELY COVER EACH
SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO PREVENT EXPOSURE OF
THE CONNECTIONS.
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT
MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE GROUND WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL
TANK. IF THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM
CORROSION SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE
LITERATURE (EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS.
WARNING
ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL
TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR
APPLYING SHRINK TUBING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 01-7-3
> Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8179
3. On light trucks and compact trucks with a fuel delivery module, cut the fuel pump wires to the
fuel delivery module 50 mm (2") from the flange and discard the wires, Figure 2.
a. Cut the connectors from the RFI filter and solder wires to the fuel delivery module (red to red and
black to black). Use heat shrink tubing over soldering connections.
b. Solder wires from the RFI filter to the flange wires (red to red and black to black). Use heat
shrink tubing over soldered connections.
NOTE:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 01-7-3
> Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8180
HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PRIOR
TO THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2")) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO
ENTIRELY COVER EACH SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO
PREVENT EXPOSURE OF THE CONNECTIONS.
NOTE:
FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT
MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL TANK IF
THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM CORROSION.
SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE LITERATURE
(EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS.
WARNING
ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL
TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR
APPLYING SHRINK TUBING.
4. Secure the RFI filter to the fuel pump and sender assembly with a Bundling Strap (95873-S101)
to prevent rattling in the tank, Figures 1 and 2.
5. Reinstall the fuel pump sender assembly into the fuel tank.
CAUTION
INSTALL NEW GASKETS WHEN REINSTALLING SENDER TO PREVENT LEAKS. REFER TO
THE PARTS CATALOG FOR PROPER APPLICATIONS.
6. Check the appropriate Electrical and vacuum troubleshooting manual (EVTM) (or other Service
Literature) for the location of the fuel pump pump ground. If ground is more than 0.9m (3') from the
tank, cut wire and ground fuel pump end within 0.9m (3') of the tank to prevent ground wire from
acting as an antenna. Be sure ground is secure and protected from corrosion since it is the
operating ground for the fuel pump.
7. Install the fuel tank in the vehicle as outlined in the appropriate Service or Workshop manual.
PARTS BLOCK
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 90-18-3, 91-17-5 SUPERSEDES: 99-12-9 WARRANTY
STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 01-7-3
> Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8181
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 01-7-3
> Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8182
OPERATION/DESCRIPTION/TIME
DEALER CODING
OASIS CODES: 205000, 207000, 404000, 702000, 702300
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored
Turbine Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's
Stored
Article No. 02-2-4
02/04/02
TRANSAXLE - CD4E - HARSH AND DELAYED 1-2/2-3 UPSHIFTS - AFTER TRANSAXLE OR
TURBINE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR (TSS) REPLACEMENT - POSSIBLE DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, AND
P1744
FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2001-2002 ESCAPE
MERCURY: 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR
ISSUE
Some vehicles equipped with the CD4E transaxle may exhibit harsh and delayed 1-2/2-3 upshifts
along with DTCs for gear ratio errors after the Transaxle or Turbine Shaft Speed sensor (TSS)
have been replaced. DTCs may include OBD1 codes 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, or OBD II
codes P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, and P1744
ACTION
If the condition occurred after servicing the Transaxle or TSS, refer to the following TSS Selection
Chart and select the correct TSS for the vehicle application. Note that each TSS has the Ford
engineering part number on it. Also note that there is a TSS kit that includes an instruction sheet,
TSS sensor and correct bolt.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 8188
If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and
determine the correct sensor for the vehicle.
1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body.
2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the
Selection Chart.
3. Clear all codes and verify repair.
4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year
Workshop Manual.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 8194
If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and
determine the correct sensor for the vehicle.
1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body.
2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the
Selection Chart.
3. Clear all codes and verify repair.
4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year
Workshop Manual.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers
Speaker: Customer Interest Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers
Article No. 01-7-3
04/16/01
^ FUEL SYSTEM - FUEL PUMP "WHINING"/"BUZZING" NOISE COMES THROUGH
ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO - WAY RADIO SPEAKER
^ RADIO - ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO - WAY COMMUNICATION - "WHINING"/"BUZZING"
NOISE IN SPEAKERS CAUSED BY FUEL PUMP
^ NOISE - "WHINING"/"BUZZING" - COMES THROUGH SPEAKERS OF ENTERTAINMENT OR
TWO-WAY RADIO
FORD: 1990-1994
TEMPO
1990-1997 PROBE, THUNDERBIRD
1990-1999 ESCORT, MUSTANG, TAURUS
1990-2001 CROWN VICTORIA
1997-1999 CONTOUR
2001 TAURUS
1990 BRONCO II
1990-1996 BRONCO
1990-1997 AEROSTAR, F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350
1990-1999 F-250 LD
1990-2001 ECONOLINE, F-150, RANGER
1991-2001 EXPLORER
1995-2001 WINDSTAR
1997-2001 EXPEDITION
1999-2001 SUPER DUTY F SERIES
2000-2001 EXCURSION
2001 ESCAPE
LINCOLN: 1990-1992
MARK VII
1990-1999 CONTINENTAL
1990-2001 TOWN CAR
1997-1998 MARK VIII
1998-2001 NAVIGATOR
MERCURY: 1990-1994
TOPAZ
1990-1997 COUGAR
1990-1999 SABLE
1990-2001 GRAND MARQUIS
1991-1999 TRACER
1997-1999 MYSTIQUE
1999 COUGAR
2001 SABLE
1993-2001 VILLAGER
1997-2001 MOUNTAINEER
This TSB article is being republished in its entirety to update the model year vehicles.
ISSUE
A "whining"/"buzzing" noise in the speakers of the entertainment radio or two-way radio on vehicles
with an in-tank electric fuel pump may be caused by electrical noise from the fuel pump.
ACTION
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8203
Install an electronic noise Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Filter (F1PZ-18B925-A) on the fuel
pump inside the fuel tank. Refer to the following Test Procedure to confirm that the concern exists,
then refer to the Service Procedure for repair details.
NOTE
SOME LIGHT TRUCKS REQUIRE ONE (1) RFI FILTER FOR EACH IN-TANK ELECTRIC FUEL
PUMP ON MULTI-TANK VEHICLES.
NOTE
THIS TSB DOES NOT INCLUDE TAURUS FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLES (FFVS) OR 1999
RANGER 3.0L FFVS.
TEST PROCEDURE
Fuel pump radio noise is relatively constant and changes only slightly with vehicle speed. If the
frequency of the noise varies or the noise comes and goes with the vehicle speed, then it is not the
fuel pump and this fix will not be effective. The following procedure will help determine if the fuel
pump is the cause of the radio noise:
1. Turn on the radio before the key is turned on (assuming the radio will operate without the ignition
key - you may need to put the ignition key in the Accessory position).
2. Turn the ignition key to the Run position (do not start the engine).
3. The fuel pump should run for about 1 second with the key in the Run position with the engine not
running. Listen for noise in the radio. If noise is present while the pump is running and stops when
the pump stops, then the noise is being generated by the pump and this procedure should help.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the fuel pump sender assembly from the fuel tank. Refer to the appropriate model year
Workshop Manual for removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8204
2. On vehicles without a fuel delivery module, remove the negative and positive connectors from
the fuel pump, Figure 1.
a. Cut the wires to the fuel pump 76 mm (3") from the flange of the fuel pump and discard the
wires.
b. Connect the RFI filter connectors to the spade terminal on the fuel pump.
c. Cut and solder both the red and black wires of the RFI filter to the red and black wires of the
flange. Use Heat Shrink Tubing (F5AZ-14A099-M) over the solder connections.
NOTE
HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PRIOR
TO THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8205
TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2",)) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO ENTIRELY COVER EACH
SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO PREVENT EXPOSURE OF
THE CONNECTIONS.
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT
MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE GROUND WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL
TANK. IF THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM
CORROSION SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE
LITERATURE (EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS.
WARNING
ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL
TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR
APPLYING SHRINK TUBING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8206
3. On light trucks and compact trucks with a fuel delivery module, cut the fuel pump wires to the
fuel delivery module 50 mm (2") from the flange and discard the wires, Figure 2.
a. Cut the connectors from the RFI filter and solder wires to the fuel delivery module (red to red and
black to black). Use heat shrink tubing over soldering connections.
b. Solder wires from the RFI filter to the flange wires (red to red and black to black). Use heat
shrink tubing over soldered connections.
NOTE:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8207
HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PRIOR
TO THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2")) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO
ENTIRELY COVER EACH SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO
PREVENT EXPOSURE OF THE CONNECTIONS.
NOTE:
FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT
MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL TANK IF
THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM CORROSION.
SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE LITERATURE
(EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS.
WARNING
ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL
TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR
APPLYING SHRINK TUBING.
4. Secure the RFI filter to the fuel pump and sender assembly with a Bundling Strap (95873-S101)
to prevent rattling in the tank, Figures 1 and 2.
5. Reinstall the fuel pump sender assembly into the fuel tank.
CAUTION
INSTALL NEW GASKETS WHEN REINSTALLING SENDER TO PREVENT LEAKS. REFER TO
THE PARTS CATALOG FOR PROPER APPLICATIONS.
6. Check the appropriate Electrical and vacuum troubleshooting manual (EVTM) (or other Service
Literature) for the location of the fuel pump pump ground. If ground is more than 0.9m (3') from the
tank, cut wire and ground fuel pump end within 0.9m (3') of the tank to prevent ground wire from
acting as an antenna. Be sure ground is secure and protected from corrosion since it is the
operating ground for the fuel pump.
7. Install the fuel tank in the vehicle as outlined in the appropriate Service or Workshop manual.
PARTS BLOCK
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 90-18-3, 91-17-5 SUPERSEDES: 99-12-9 WARRANTY
STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8208
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8209
OPERATION/DESCRIPTION/TIME
DEALER CODING
OASIS CODES: 205000, 207000, 404000, 702000, 702300
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 >
Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers
Speaker: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers
Article No. 01-7-3
04/16/01
^ FUEL SYSTEM - FUEL PUMP "WHINING"/"BUZZING" NOISE COMES THROUGH
ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO - WAY RADIO SPEAKER
^ RADIO - ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO - WAY COMMUNICATION - "WHINING"/"BUZZING"
NOISE IN SPEAKERS CAUSED BY FUEL PUMP
^ NOISE - "WHINING"/"BUZZING" - COMES THROUGH SPEAKERS OF ENTERTAINMENT OR
TWO-WAY RADIO
FORD: 1990-1994
TEMPO
1990-1997 PROBE, THUNDERBIRD
1990-1999 ESCORT, MUSTANG, TAURUS
1990-2001 CROWN VICTORIA
1997-1999 CONTOUR
2001 TAURUS
1990 BRONCO II
1990-1996 BRONCO
1990-1997 AEROSTAR, F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350
1990-1999 F-250 LD
1990-2001 ECONOLINE, F-150, RANGER
1991-2001 EXPLORER
1995-2001 WINDSTAR
1997-2001 EXPEDITION
1999-2001 SUPER DUTY F SERIES
2000-2001 EXCURSION
2001 ESCAPE
LINCOLN: 1990-1992
MARK VII
1990-1999 CONTINENTAL
1990-2001 TOWN CAR
1997-1998 MARK VIII
1998-2001 NAVIGATOR
MERCURY: 1990-1994
TOPAZ
1990-1997 COUGAR
1990-1999 SABLE
1990-2001 GRAND MARQUIS
1991-1999 TRACER
1997-1999 MYSTIQUE
1999 COUGAR
2001 SABLE
1993-2001 VILLAGER
1997-2001 MOUNTAINEER
This TSB article is being republished in its entirety to update the model year vehicles.
ISSUE
A "whining"/"buzzing" noise in the speakers of the entertainment radio or two-way radio on vehicles
with an in-tank electric fuel pump may be caused by electrical noise from the fuel pump.
ACTION
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 >
Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8215
Install an electronic noise Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Filter (F1PZ-18B925-A) on the fuel
pump inside the fuel tank. Refer to the following Test Procedure to confirm that the concern exists,
then refer to the Service Procedure for repair details.
NOTE
SOME LIGHT TRUCKS REQUIRE ONE (1) RFI FILTER FOR EACH IN-TANK ELECTRIC FUEL
PUMP ON MULTI-TANK VEHICLES.
NOTE
THIS TSB DOES NOT INCLUDE TAURUS FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLES (FFVS) OR 1999
RANGER 3.0L FFVS.
TEST PROCEDURE
Fuel pump radio noise is relatively constant and changes only slightly with vehicle speed. If the
frequency of the noise varies or the noise comes and goes with the vehicle speed, then it is not the
fuel pump and this fix will not be effective. The following procedure will help determine if the fuel
pump is the cause of the radio noise:
1. Turn on the radio before the key is turned on (assuming the radio will operate without the ignition
key - you may need to put the ignition key in the Accessory position).
2. Turn the ignition key to the Run position (do not start the engine).
3. The fuel pump should run for about 1 second with the key in the Run position with the engine not
running. Listen for noise in the radio. If noise is present while the pump is running and stops when
the pump stops, then the noise is being generated by the pump and this procedure should help.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the fuel pump sender assembly from the fuel tank. Refer to the appropriate model year
Workshop Manual for removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 >
Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8216
2. On vehicles without a fuel delivery module, remove the negative and positive connectors from
the fuel pump, Figure 1.
a. Cut the wires to the fuel pump 76 mm (3") from the flange of the fuel pump and discard the
wires.
b. Connect the RFI filter connectors to the spade terminal on the fuel pump.
c. Cut and solder both the red and black wires of the RFI filter to the red and black wires of the
flange. Use Heat Shrink Tubing (F5AZ-14A099-M) over the solder connections.
NOTE
HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PRIOR
TO THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 >
Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8217
TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2",)) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO ENTIRELY COVER EACH
SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO PREVENT EXPOSURE OF
THE CONNECTIONS.
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT
MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE GROUND WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL
TANK. IF THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM
CORROSION SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE
LITERATURE (EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS.
WARNING
ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL
TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR
APPLYING SHRINK TUBING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 >
Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8218
3. On light trucks and compact trucks with a fuel delivery module, cut the fuel pump wires to the
fuel delivery module 50 mm (2") from the flange and discard the wires, Figure 2.
a. Cut the connectors from the RFI filter and solder wires to the fuel delivery module (red to red and
black to black). Use heat shrink tubing over soldering connections.
b. Solder wires from the RFI filter to the flange wires (red to red and black to black). Use heat
shrink tubing over soldered connections.
NOTE:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 >
Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8219
HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PRIOR
TO THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2")) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO
ENTIRELY COVER EACH SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO
PREVENT EXPOSURE OF THE CONNECTIONS.
NOTE:
FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT
MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL TANK IF
THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM CORROSION.
SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE LITERATURE
(EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS.
WARNING
ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL
TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR
APPLYING SHRINK TUBING.
4. Secure the RFI filter to the fuel pump and sender assembly with a Bundling Strap (95873-S101)
to prevent rattling in the tank, Figures 1 and 2.
5. Reinstall the fuel pump sender assembly into the fuel tank.
CAUTION
INSTALL NEW GASKETS WHEN REINSTALLING SENDER TO PREVENT LEAKS. REFER TO
THE PARTS CATALOG FOR PROPER APPLICATIONS.
6. Check the appropriate Electrical and vacuum troubleshooting manual (EVTM) (or other Service
Literature) for the location of the fuel pump pump ground. If ground is more than 0.9m (3') from the
tank, cut wire and ground fuel pump end within 0.9m (3') of the tank to prevent ground wire from
acting as an antenna. Be sure ground is secure and protected from corrosion since it is the
operating ground for the fuel pump.
7. Install the fuel tank in the vehicle as outlined in the appropriate Service or Workshop manual.
PARTS BLOCK
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 90-18-3, 91-17-5 SUPERSEDES: 99-12-9 WARRANTY
STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 >
Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8220
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 >
Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8221
OPERATION/DESCRIPTION/TIME
DEALER CODING
OASIS CODES: 205000, 207000, 404000, 702000, 702300
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8222
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker
Speaker: Diagrams Speaker
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker > Page 8225
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker > Page 8226
Speaker: Diagrams Tweeter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8227
Speaker: Description and Operation
All vehicles are equipped with four radio speakers mounted in the doors. The optional tweeters are
mounted in the sail panels and the optional woofer is mounted in the right rear quarter panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations
Accessory Delay Relay: Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8233
Diagram 700-01-00-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Relay >
Page 8236
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini
ISO Relay
Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini
ISO Relay > Page 8239
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini
ISO Relay > Page 8240
Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini
ISO Relay > Page 8241
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure
voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the
relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is
12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Application and ID
Alarm Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control
Modules (General Module).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 8245
Alarm Module: Testing and Inspection
Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Locations >
Component Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Locations >
Component Locations > Page 8251
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Connector Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8254
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8255
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8256
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8257
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8258
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8259
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8260
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8261
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8262
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8263
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8264
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8265
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8266
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8267
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8268
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8269
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8270
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8271
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8272
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8273
Diagram 419-10-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Description and
Operation > System Description
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Description and Operation System Description
The multifunction module consists of the Generic Electronic Module (GEM).
The GEM controls the following features:
^ interval rear window wiper
^ battery saver
^ illuminated entry
^ headlamp control
^ interior lamp control
^ power door locks
^ Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
^ accessory delay
^ perimeter anti-theft system
^ door ajar output control
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Description and
Operation > System Description > Page 8276
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Description and Operation Principles of Operation (How
Does It Work?)
The Generic Electronic Module (GEM) constantly monitors its subsystems for concerns. If a
concern is found in one of the subsystems, the GEM will record the concern in the form of a
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).
The ignition switch position is very important to the GEM function. Erratic or unexpected GEM
function can often be traced to problems with these GEM inputs.
The GEM controls a variety of systems:
^ interval rear window wiper
^ battery saver
^ illuminated entry
^ headlamp control
^ interior lamp control
^ power door locks
^ Remote Key Less Entry (RKE)
^ accessory delay
^ perimeter anti-theft system
^ door ajar output control
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system in question. 2. Visually inspect for obvious
signs of mechanical and electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Electrical ^
Fuse
^ Wiring harness
^ Connector(s)
^ Circuitry
^ Generic Electronic Module (GEM)
3. If the concern remains after the inspection, connect the diagnostic tool to the Data Link
Connector (DLC) located beneath the instrument panel
and select the vehicle to be tested from the diagnostic tool menu. If the diagnostic tool does not
communicate with the vehicle: ^
check that the program card is correctly installed.
^ check the connections to the vehicle.
^ check the ignition switch position.
4. If the diagnostic tool still does not communicate with the vehicle, refer to the diagnostic tool
manual. 5. Carry out the DATA LINK DIAGNOSTICS test. See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Module Communication
Network/Testing and Inspection/Module Communications Network/Pinpoint Tests/Pinpoint Test PC
(Precheck) If the diagnostic tool responds with: ^
CKT914, CKT915 or CKT70 = ALL ECUS NO RESP/NOT EQUIP, refer to Module
Communications Network (Information Bus).
^ NO RESP/NOT EQUIP for generic electronic module (GEM), go to Pinpoint Test A.
^ SYSTEM PASSED, retrieve and record the continuous Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), erase
the continuous DTCs and carry out self-test diagnostics for the GEM.
6. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the GEM Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Index to continue diagnostics. See: Diagnostic
Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures
7. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, refer to the appropriate Vehicle System to
continue diagnostics.
Additional Testing
For additional information on warning chime concerns, refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and
Warning Indicators.
For additional information on courtesy lamps/illuminated entry and battery saver concerns, refer to
Lighting and Horns.
For additional information on Rear interval timer concerns, refer to Wiper and Washer Systems.
For additional information on keyless entry concerns, refer to Keyless Entry.
For additional information on Power Door Lock concerns, refer to Power Locks.
For additional information on anti-theft concerns, refer to Antitheft and Alarm Systems.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8279
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures
DTC Index B1217 - B1325
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8280
DTC Index B1327 - C1962
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8281
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8282
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Pinpoint Tests
A1 - A2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8283
A2 - A4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8284
A4 - A5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Page 8285
Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
NOTE: Prior to removal of the GEM, it is necessary to upload module configuration information to a
diagnostic tool. This information needs to be downloaded into the new module once installed.
2. Remove the floor console. Refer to Console.
3. Disconnect the GEM electrical connectors.
4. Remove the GEM
1 Pull back the insulation and remove the nuts.
2 Remove the GEM.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Configure the GEM. Refer to Module Communications Network (Information Bus).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Page 8286
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Application and ID
Keyless Entry Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control
Modules (General Module).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 8290
Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection
Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Trailer Lamps: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the trailer tow lights. 2. Verify the exterior lighting
system of the vehicle is operating correctly. If not, refer to the appropriate pinpoint test. See:
Pinpoint Tests 3. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Electrical ^
Central Junction Box (CJB) fuse: 21 (10A)
- 16 (10A)
^ Connections
^ Circuity
^ Relays
^ Bulb(s)
4. If the fault is not visually evident, determine the symptom and proceed to the Symptom Chart.
See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8303
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8304
Trailer Lamps: Pinpoint Tests
Connector Circuit Reference
Refer to Vehicle/Diagrams for schematic and connector information.
Z1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8305
AA1 - AA2
AC1
AC1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8306
AD1
AE1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8307
AE1 - AE2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8308
73III Automotive Meter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8309
73III Automotive Meter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair
Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair
FRONT BUMPER COVER
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the six pin-type retainers (three each side).
2. Remove the four front bumper cover bolts (two each side).
3. Remove the two front bumper cover to front fender pin-type retainers (one each side). 4. If
equipped, disconnect the fog lamp electrical connectors.
5. Remove the lower front bumper cover bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 8319
6. Remove the pin-type retainers.
7. Remove the two upper bolts (one each side) and the front bumper cover. 8. To install, reverse
the removal procedure.
- When installing, be sure to position the front bumper cover into the bumper slides.
- Transfer components as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System
Information > Service and Repair
Front Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair
FRONT BUMPER
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front bumper cover.
2. Remove the front bumper.
1 Remove the four front bumper nuts (two each side).
2 Remove the front bumper.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information
> Service and Repair
Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair
REAR BUMPER COVER
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the six rear splash shield bolts (three each side).
2. Remove the two rear bumper cover to rear quarter panel screws (one each side).
3. Remove the four pin-type retainers.
4. Remove the rear bumper cover.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the bolts and the liftgate alignment bumpers.
3 Remove the rear bumper cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information
> Service and Repair > Page 8327
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- When installing, be sure to position the rear bumper cover into the bumper slides.
- Transfer components as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System Information
> Service and Repair
Rear Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair
REAR BUMPER
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear bumper cover.
2. Remove the rear bumper.
1 Remove the four rear bumper nuts (two each side).
2 Remove the rear bumper.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
COWL PANEL GRILLE
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wiper pivot arms.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Remove the wiper pivot arms.
2. Remove the driver side cowl grille.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the screw caps and screws.
3 Remove the cowl grille.
3. Remove the passenger side cowl grille.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the screw caps and screws.
3 Remove the cowl grille.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside.
3. Remove the screws and the anti-theft guard.
4. Remove the exterior door handle screw.
5. Disconnect the exterior door handle actuating rod.
1 Release the clip.
2 Disconnect the actuating rod.
6. Remove the exterior door handle lock cylinder cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8342
7. Remove the exterior door handle.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside.
3. Remove the interior door handle.
^ Release the clip.
4. Remove the door latch cable.
1 Disconnect the cable conduit.
2 Remove the door latch cable.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System
Information > Adjustments
Front Door Hinge: Adjustments
HINGE ADJUSTMENT - FRONT DOOR
NOTE: Make sure the rear door is within specification before making any adjustments to the front
door. Refer to the specification chart. See: Specifications
LH and RH sides
1. Remove the fender.
2. Mark the positions of the front door hinges to use as reference points.
3. Loosen the two front door hinge-to-body bolts just enough to permit movement.
4. Remove the A-pillar lower trim panel.
1 Remove the pin-type retainer.
2 Remove the A-pillar lower trim panel.
LH side
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System
Information > Adjustments > Page 8349
5. Position the central junction box (CJB) aside.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Position the CJB aside.
RH side
6. Position the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch bracket aside.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Position the bracket aside.
LH and RH sides
7. Loosen the lower door hinge bolt just enough to permit movement.
8. Adjust the front door to specification.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System
Information > Adjustments > Page 8350
9. Tighten the three front door hinge to body bolts.
LH side
10. Install the CJB.
1 Position the CJB.
2 Install the nuts.
RH side
11. Install the IFS bracket.
1 Position the bracket.
2 Install the bolts.
LH and RH sides
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System
Information > Adjustments > Page 8351
12. Install the A-pillar lower trim panel.
1 Position the A-pillar lower trim panel.
2 Install the pin-type retainers.
13. Install the fender.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable
to Open
Technical Service Bulletin # 02-9-3 Date: 020513
Doors - Unable to Open
Article No. 02-9-3
05/13/02
BODY - UNABLE TO OPEN DOORS
FORD: 2001-2002 ESCAPE
ISSUE Some vehicles built before 12/15/01 may exhibit door latches that will not open. The outside
handle and inside handle can be moved freely but latch remains locked. This may occur if the
locked door's outside handle is lifted at the same time as the power lock button on either the key
fob or the door panel is pressed.
ACTION Refer to the follow Service Procedure to open door(s) and replace door latch per
Workshop Manual Section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
020903A Follow Service Procedure 1.5 Hrs.
To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Front Door
020903B Follow Service Procedure 2.3 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors
020903C Follow Service Procedure 1.8 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door One Rear Door
020903D Follow Service Procedure 2.8 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors One
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable
to Open > Page 8360
Rear Door
020903E Follow Service Procedure 2.2 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door Both Rear Doors
020903F Follow Service Procedure 0.6 Hr.
To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Rear Door
020903G Follow Service Procedure 0.9 Hr.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Rear Doors
020903H Follow Service Procedure 3.1 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front And Both Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5421813 41
OASIS CODES: 112000
Information
Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
Use the procedure below titled "Front Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and
replace the failed door latch mechanism.
Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
Use the procedure below titled "Rear Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and
replace the failed door latch mechanism.
All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
Use the procedure below titled "All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement" to gain access and
replace the failed door latch mechanism.
Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
REMOVAL
WARNING
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
WARNING
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
NOTE
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE
RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE
SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR.
WARNING
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable
to Open > Page 8361
THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY.
REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN
INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
ALL VEHICLES
NOTE
VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE.
1. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass completely down.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
3. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs, and disconnect the passenger air
bag module electrical connector and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel
harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
4. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air
bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column
harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
5. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness
electrical connector.
All vehicles:
6. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat
and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety' belt pretensioner body
harness electrical connector.
7. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
8. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles:
9. Connect the battery ground cable.
10. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts.
CAUTION
USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE
ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN
DAMAGED COMPONENTS.
11. Remove the front seat, front seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat.
12. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s).
13. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s).
14. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s).
^ Remove the pin-type retainers
^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable
to Open > Page 8362
15. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove
screw (Figure 1).
NOTE
ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT
BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN.
16. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel.
17. Remove door handle cup screw.
CAUTION
DO NOT TO SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL.
CAUTION
MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO
CREASE OR BREAK.
18. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside.
NOTE
TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER
COVER.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable
to Open > Page 8363
19. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly
at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating lever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger
front door shown, all doors similar).
CAUTION
WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL.
20. Open door, and move glass to the up position.
21. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel.
22. Remove front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks,
Latches and Entry Systems Removal and Installation.
INSTALLATION
All vehicles:
Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and
Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation."
1. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
4. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
5. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
6. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
7. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable
to Open > Page 8364
8. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with air bags:
9. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
10. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver air
bag connector access cover.
11. Remove the special tool from the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Close
the glove compartment.
12. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01:
Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
13.. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-20B: Occupant
Restraints - Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing.
14. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s).
All vehicles:
2. Remove door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Position aside water shield.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
NOTE
USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT
OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND
PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR).
4. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry
Systems Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
1. Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and
Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation."
2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s).
All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
REMOVAL
1. Open tailgate to access rear doors.
NOTE
REAR DOORS MUST BE OPENED BEFORE FRONT DOORS CAN BE OPENED.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable
to Open > Page 8365
2. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s).
All vehicles:
3. Remove rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
4. Position watershield aside.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
NOTE
USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT
OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND
PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR).
5. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry
Systems " Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation".
WARNING
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
WARNING
NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN
AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
WARNING
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
NOTE
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE
RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE
SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR.
WARNING
THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY.
REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN
INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE
VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE.
ALL VEHICLES
6. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass into the completely down.
7. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
8. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs and disconnect the passenger air
bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel
harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
9. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air
bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column
harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable
to Open > Page 8366
10. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness
electrical connector.
All vehicles:
11. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat
and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body
harness electrical connector.
12. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
13. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles:
14. Connect the battery ground cable.
15. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts.
CAUTION
USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE
ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN
DAMAGED COMPONENTS.
16. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat through rear doors.
17. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s).
18. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s).
19. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s).
^ Remove the pin-type retainers
^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s)
20. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove
screw (Figure 1).
NOTE
ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT
BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN.
21. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel.
22. Remove door handle cup screw.
CAUTION
DO NOT SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL.
CAUTION
MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO
CREASE OR BREAK.
23. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside.
NOTE
TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER
COVER.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
24. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly
at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating fever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger
front door shown, all doors similar).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable
to Open > Page 8367
CAUTION
WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL.
25. Open door(s), and move glass to the up position.
26. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel(s).
27. Remove door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches
and Entry Systems Removal and Installation.
INSTALLATION
All Vehicles:
1. Install new rear door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks,
Latches and Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation."
2. Install rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
4. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s).
5. Install new front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks,
Latches and Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation."
6. Install front door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
7. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
8. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
9. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
10. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
11. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
12. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with air bags:
13. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
14. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector, and install the
driver air bag connector access cover.
15. Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module
electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector, and close the
glove compartment.
16. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable
to Open > Page 8368
Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
17. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-2DB: Occupant
Restraints Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing.
18. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
19. Close tailgate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 >
Doors - Unable to Open
Technical Service Bulletin # 02-9-3 Date: 020513
Doors - Unable to Open
Article No. 02-9-3
05/13/02
BODY - UNABLE TO OPEN DOORS
FORD: 2001-2002 ESCAPE
ISSUE Some vehicles built before 12/15/01 may exhibit door latches that will not open. The outside
handle and inside handle can be moved freely but latch remains locked. This may occur if the
locked door's outside handle is lifted at the same time as the power lock button on either the key
fob or the door panel is pressed.
ACTION Refer to the follow Service Procedure to open door(s) and replace door latch per
Workshop Manual Section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
020903A Follow Service Procedure 1.5 Hrs.
To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Front Door
020903B Follow Service Procedure 2.3 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors
020903C Follow Service Procedure 1.8 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door One Rear Door
020903D Follow Service Procedure 2.8 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors One
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 >
Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8374
Rear Door
020903E Follow Service Procedure 2.2 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door Both Rear Doors
020903F Follow Service Procedure 0.6 Hr.
To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Rear Door
020903G Follow Service Procedure 0.9 Hr.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Rear Doors
020903H Follow Service Procedure 3.1 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front And Both Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5421813 41
OASIS CODES: 112000
Information
Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
Use the procedure below titled "Front Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and
replace the failed door latch mechanism.
Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
Use the procedure below titled "Rear Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and
replace the failed door latch mechanism.
All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
Use the procedure below titled "All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement" to gain access and
replace the failed door latch mechanism.
Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
REMOVAL
WARNING
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
WARNING
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
NOTE
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE
RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE
SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR.
WARNING
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 >
Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8375
THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY.
REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN
INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
ALL VEHICLES
NOTE
VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE.
1. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass completely down.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
3. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs, and disconnect the passenger air
bag module electrical connector and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel
harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
4. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air
bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column
harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
5. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness
electrical connector.
All vehicles:
6. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat
and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety' belt pretensioner body
harness electrical connector.
7. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
8. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles:
9. Connect the battery ground cable.
10. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts.
CAUTION
USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE
ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN
DAMAGED COMPONENTS.
11. Remove the front seat, front seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat.
12. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s).
13. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s).
14. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s).
^ Remove the pin-type retainers
^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 >
Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8376
15. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove
screw (Figure 1).
NOTE
ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT
BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN.
16. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel.
17. Remove door handle cup screw.
CAUTION
DO NOT TO SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL.
CAUTION
MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO
CREASE OR BREAK.
18. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside.
NOTE
TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER
COVER.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 >
Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8377
19. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly
at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating lever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger
front door shown, all doors similar).
CAUTION
WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL.
20. Open door, and move glass to the up position.
21. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel.
22. Remove front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks,
Latches and Entry Systems Removal and Installation.
INSTALLATION
All vehicles:
Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and
Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation."
1. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
4. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
5. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
6. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
7. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 >
Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8378
8. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with air bags:
9. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
10. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver air
bag connector access cover.
11. Remove the special tool from the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Close
the glove compartment.
12. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01:
Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
13.. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-20B: Occupant
Restraints - Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing.
14. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s).
All vehicles:
2. Remove door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Position aside water shield.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
NOTE
USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT
OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND
PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR).
4. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry
Systems Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
1. Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and
Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation."
2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s).
All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
REMOVAL
1. Open tailgate to access rear doors.
NOTE
REAR DOORS MUST BE OPENED BEFORE FRONT DOORS CAN BE OPENED.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 >
Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8379
2. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s).
All vehicles:
3. Remove rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
4. Position watershield aside.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
NOTE
USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT
OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND
PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR).
5. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry
Systems " Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation".
WARNING
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
WARNING
NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN
AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
WARNING
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
NOTE
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE
RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE
SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR.
WARNING
THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY.
REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN
INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE
VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE.
ALL VEHICLES
6. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass into the completely down.
7. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
8. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs and disconnect the passenger air
bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel
harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
9. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air
bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column
harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 >
Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8380
10. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness
electrical connector.
All vehicles:
11. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat
and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body
harness electrical connector.
12. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
13. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles:
14. Connect the battery ground cable.
15. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts.
CAUTION
USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE
ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN
DAMAGED COMPONENTS.
16. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat through rear doors.
17. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s).
18. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s).
19. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s).
^ Remove the pin-type retainers
^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s)
20. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove
screw (Figure 1).
NOTE
ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT
BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN.
21. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel.
22. Remove door handle cup screw.
CAUTION
DO NOT SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL.
CAUTION
MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO
CREASE OR BREAK.
23. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside.
NOTE
TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER
COVER.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
24. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly
at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating fever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger
front door shown, all doors similar).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 >
Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8381
CAUTION
WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL.
25. Open door(s), and move glass to the up position.
26. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel(s).
27. Remove door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches
and Entry Systems Removal and Installation.
INSTALLATION
All Vehicles:
1. Install new rear door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks,
Latches and Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation."
2. Install rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
4. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s).
5. Install new front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks,
Latches and Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation."
6. Install front door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
7. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
8. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
9. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
10. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
11. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
12. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with air bags:
13. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
14. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector, and install the
driver air bag connector access cover.
15. Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module
electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector, and close the
glove compartment.
16. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 >
Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8382
Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
17. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-2DB: Occupant
Restraints Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing.
18. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
19. Close tailgate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8383
Front Door Latch: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 02-9-3 Date: 020513
Doors - Unable to Open
Article No. 02-9-3
05/13/02
BODY - UNABLE TO OPEN DOORS
FORD: 2001-2002 ESCAPE
ISSUE Some vehicles built before 12/15/01 may exhibit door latches that will not open. The outside
handle and inside handle can be moved freely but latch remains locked. This may occur if the
locked door's outside handle is lifted at the same time as the power lock button on either the key
fob or the door panel is pressed.
ACTION Refer to the follow Service Procedure to open door(s) and replace door latch per
Workshop Manual Section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
020903A Follow Service Procedure 1.5 Hrs.
To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Front Door
020903B Follow Service Procedure 2.3 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors
020903C Follow Service Procedure 1.8 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door One Rear Door
020903D Follow Service Procedure 2.8 Hrs.
To Open Doors And
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8384
Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors One Rear Door
020903E Follow Service Procedure 2.2 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door Both Rear Doors
020903F Follow Service Procedure 0.6 Hr.
To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Rear Door
020903G Follow Service Procedure 0.9 Hr.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Rear Doors
020903H Follow Service Procedure 3.1 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front And Both Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5421813 41
OASIS CODES: 112000
Information
Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
Use the procedure below titled "Front Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and
replace the failed door latch mechanism.
Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
Use the procedure below titled "Rear Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and
replace the failed door latch mechanism.
All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
Use the procedure below titled "All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement" to gain access and
replace the failed door latch mechanism.
Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
REMOVAL
WARNING
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
WARNING
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
NOTE
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE
RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE
SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8385
WARNING
THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY.
REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN
INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
ALL VEHICLES
NOTE
VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE.
1. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass completely down.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
3. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs, and disconnect the passenger air
bag module electrical connector and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel
harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
4. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air
bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column
harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
5. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness
electrical connector.
All vehicles:
6. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat
and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety' belt pretensioner body
harness electrical connector.
7. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
8. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles:
9. Connect the battery ground cable.
10. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts.
CAUTION
USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE
ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN
DAMAGED COMPONENTS.
11. Remove the front seat, front seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat.
12. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s).
13. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s).
14. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s).
^ Remove the pin-type retainers
^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8386
15. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove
screw (Figure 1).
NOTE
ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT
BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN.
16. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel.
17. Remove door handle cup screw.
CAUTION
DO NOT TO SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL.
CAUTION
MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO
CREASE OR BREAK.
18. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside.
NOTE
TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER
COVER.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8387
19. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly
at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating lever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger
front door shown, all doors similar).
CAUTION
WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL.
20. Open door, and move glass to the up position.
21. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel.
22. Remove front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks,
Latches and Entry Systems Removal and Installation.
INSTALLATION
All vehicles:
Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and
Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation."
1. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
4. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
5. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
6. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
7. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8388
8. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with air bags:
9. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
10. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver air
bag connector access cover.
11. Remove the special tool from the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Close
the glove compartment.
12. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01:
Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
13.. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-20B: Occupant
Restraints - Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing.
14. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s).
All vehicles:
2. Remove door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Position aside water shield.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
NOTE
USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT
OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND
PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR).
4. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry
Systems Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
1. Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and
Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation."
2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s).
All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
REMOVAL
1. Open tailgate to access rear doors.
NOTE
REAR DOORS MUST BE OPENED BEFORE FRONT DOORS CAN BE OPENED.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8389
2. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s).
All vehicles:
3. Remove rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
4. Position watershield aside.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
NOTE
USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT
OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND
PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR).
5. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry
Systems " Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation".
WARNING
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
WARNING
NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN
AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
WARNING
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
NOTE
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE
RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE
SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR.
WARNING
THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY.
REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN
INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE
VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE.
ALL VEHICLES
6. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass into the completely down.
7. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
8. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs and disconnect the passenger air
bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel
harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
9. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air
bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column
harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8390
10. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness
electrical connector.
All vehicles:
11. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat
and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body
harness electrical connector.
12. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
13. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles:
14. Connect the battery ground cable.
15. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts.
CAUTION
USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE
ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN
DAMAGED COMPONENTS.
16. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat through rear doors.
17. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s).
18. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s).
19. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s).
^ Remove the pin-type retainers
^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s)
20. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove
screw (Figure 1).
NOTE
ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT
BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN.
21. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel.
22. Remove door handle cup screw.
CAUTION
DO NOT SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL.
CAUTION
MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO
CREASE OR BREAK.
23. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside.
NOTE
TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER
COVER.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
24. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly
at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating fever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger
front door shown, all doors similar).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8391
CAUTION
WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL.
25. Open door(s), and move glass to the up position.
26. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel(s).
27. Remove door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches
and Entry Systems Removal and Installation.
INSTALLATION
All Vehicles:
1. Install new rear door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks,
Latches and Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation."
2. Install rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
4. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s).
5. Install new front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks,
Latches and Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation."
6. Install front door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
7. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
8. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
9. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
10. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
11. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
12. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with air bags:
13. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
14. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector, and install the
driver air bag connector access cover.
15. Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module
electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector, and close the
glove compartment.
16. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8392
Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
17. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-2DB: Occupant
Restraints Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing.
18. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
19. Close tailgate.
Technical Service Bulletin # 02-9-3 Date: 020513
Doors - Unable to Open
Article No. 02-9-3
05/13/02
BODY - UNABLE TO OPEN DOORS
FORD: 2001-2002 ESCAPE
ISSUE Some vehicles built before 12/15/01 may exhibit door latches that will not open. The outside
handle and inside handle can be moved freely but latch remains locked. This may occur if the
locked door's outside handle is lifted at the same time as the power lock button on either the key
fob or the door panel is pressed.
ACTION Refer to the follow Service Procedure to open door(s) and replace door latch per
Workshop Manual Section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
020903A Follow Service Procedure 1.5 Hrs.
To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Front Door
020903B Follow Service Procedure 2.3 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors
020903C Follow Service Procedure 1.8 Hrs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8393
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door One Rear Door
020903D Follow Service Procedure 2.8 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors One Rear Door
020903E Follow Service Procedure 2.2 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door Both Rear Doors
020903F Follow Service Procedure 0.6 Hr.
To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Rear Door
020903G Follow Service Procedure 0.9 Hr.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Rear Doors
020903H Follow Service Procedure 3.1 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front And Both Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5421813 41
OASIS CODES: 112000
Information
Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
Use the procedure below titled "Front Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and
replace the failed door latch mechanism.
Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
Use the procedure below titled "Rear Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and
replace the failed door latch mechanism.
All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
Use the procedure below titled "All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement" to gain access and
replace the failed door latch mechanism.
Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
REMOVAL
WARNING
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
WARNING
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8394
NOTE
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE
RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE
SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR.
WARNING
THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY.
REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN
INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
ALL VEHICLES
NOTE
VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE.
1. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass completely down.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
3. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs, and disconnect the passenger air
bag module electrical connector and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel
harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
4. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air
bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column
harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
5. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness
electrical connector.
All vehicles:
6. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat
and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety' belt pretensioner body
harness electrical connector.
7. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
8. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles:
9. Connect the battery ground cable.
10. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts.
CAUTION
USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE
ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN
DAMAGED COMPONENTS.
11. Remove the front seat, front seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat.
12. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s).
13. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s).
14. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s).
^ Remove the pin-type retainers
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8395
^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s)
15. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove
screw (Figure 1).
NOTE
ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT
BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN.
16. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel.
17. Remove door handle cup screw.
CAUTION
DO NOT TO SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL.
CAUTION
MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO
CREASE OR BREAK.
18. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside.
NOTE
TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER
COVER.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8396
19. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly
at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating lever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger
front door shown, all doors similar).
CAUTION
WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL.
20. Open door, and move glass to the up position.
21. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel.
22. Remove front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks,
Latches and Entry Systems Removal and Installation.
INSTALLATION
All vehicles:
Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and
Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation."
1. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
4. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
5. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
6. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
7. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8397
8. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with air bags:
9. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
10. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver air
bag connector access cover.
11. Remove the special tool from the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Close
the glove compartment.
12. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01:
Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
13.. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-20B: Occupant
Restraints - Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing.
14. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s).
All vehicles:
2. Remove door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Position aside water shield.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
NOTE
USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT
OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND
PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR).
4. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry
Systems Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
1. Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and
Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation."
2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s).
All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
REMOVAL
1. Open tailgate to access rear doors.
NOTE
REAR DOORS MUST BE OPENED BEFORE FRONT DOORS CAN BE OPENED.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8398
2. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s).
All vehicles:
3. Remove rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
4. Position watershield aside.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
NOTE
USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT
OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND
PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR).
5. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry
Systems " Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation".
WARNING
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
WARNING
NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN
AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
WARNING
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
NOTE
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE
RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE
SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR.
WARNING
THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY.
REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN
INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE
VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE.
ALL VEHICLES
6. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass into the completely down.
7. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
8. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs and disconnect the passenger air
bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel
harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
9. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air
bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column
harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8399
10. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness
electrical connector.
All vehicles:
11. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat
and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body
harness electrical connector.
12. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
13. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles:
14. Connect the battery ground cable.
15. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts.
CAUTION
USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE
ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN
DAMAGED COMPONENTS.
16. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat through rear doors.
17. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s).
18. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s).
19. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s).
^ Remove the pin-type retainers
^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s)
20. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove
screw (Figure 1).
NOTE
ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT
BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN.
21. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel.
22. Remove door handle cup screw.
CAUTION
DO NOT SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL.
CAUTION
MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO
CREASE OR BREAK.
23. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside.
NOTE
TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER
COVER.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
24. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly
at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating fever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger
front door shown, all doors similar).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8400
CAUTION
WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL.
25. Open door(s), and move glass to the up position.
26. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel(s).
27. Remove door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches
and Entry Systems Removal and Installation.
INSTALLATION
All Vehicles:
1. Install new rear door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks,
Latches and Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation."
2. Install rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
4. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s).
5. Install new front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks,
Latches and Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation."
6. Install front door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
7. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
8. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
9. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
10. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
11. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
12. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with air bags:
13. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
14. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector, and install the
driver air bag connector access cover.
15. Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module
electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector, and close the
glove compartment.
16. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8401
Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
17. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-2DB: Occupant
Restraints Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing.
18. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
19. Close tailgate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8402
Front Door Latch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside.
3. Position the interior door handle aside.
^ Release the clip.
4. Disconnect the exterior door handle actuating rod.
1 Release the two clips.
2 Disconnect the rod.
5. Remove the screws and the anti-theft guard.
6. Remove and discard the door latch screws.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8403
7. Disconnect the door lock cylinder actuating rod.
1 Open the clip.
2 Disconnect the rod.
8. Disconnect the door latch electrical connector.
1 Release the clip.
2 Disconnect the electrical connector.
9. Remove the front door latch.
10. Disconnect the interior door handle cable.
1 Release the cable conduit.
2 Disconnect the cable.
11. Remove the exterior door handle actuating rod.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System
Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Panel: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR TRIM PANEL
Removal and Installation
Vehicles with power windows
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the front door window control switch.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
Vehicles with manual windows
3. Remove the front door manual window regulator handle.
1 Release the clip.
2 Remove the front door manual window regulator handle.
All vehicles
4. Remove the front door latch release handle bezel.
1 Remove the screw.
2 Remove the front door latch release handle bezel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 8407
5. Remove the door handle cup screw.
6. Remove the front door trim panel.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the front door trim panel.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System
Information > Adjustments
Front Door Striker: Adjustments
STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
NOTE: Before adjusting the door latch striker plate, verify that the door can be closed easily and
fits tightly.
1. Loosen the door latch striker bolts.
2. Reposition the door latch striker plate from side to side or up and down as necessary.
3. Tighten the door latch striker plate bolts.
4. NOTE: The rear door is shown, the front door is similar.
Check the adjustment. Repeat the procedure as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
System Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the exterior mirror.
2. Remove the screw and the door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside.
4. Remove the front door interior glass weatherstrip.
5. Remove the front door exterior belt line moulding. 6. Lower the front door window glass to gain
access to the screws.
7. Remove the front door window glass screws.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8414
8. Remove the front door window glass.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 8419
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window
Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
All vehicles
1. Remove the front door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the front door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside. 4.
Lower the front door window glass to gain access to the screws.
5. Remove the front door window glass screws. 6. Support the front door window glass in the full
up position.
Vehicles with power windows
7. Disconnect the front door power window regulator motor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window
Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8423
8. Remove the front door power window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the nuts.
Vehicles with manual windows
9. Remove the front door window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolt.
2 Remove the nuts.
INSTALLATION
All vehicles
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Cycle the door window glass to make sure of correct door window glass engagement.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside.
3. Disconnect the door latch electrical connector.
1 Release the clip.
2 Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Position the rear door glass top run aside.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Position the rear door glass top run aside.
5. Disconnect the exterior door handle actuating rod.
1 Open the clip.
2 Disconnect the actuating rod.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8429
6. Remove the exterior door handle screws.
7. Remove the exterior door handle.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside.
3. Remove the interior door handle.
^ Release the clip.
4. Remove the door latch cable.
1 Disconnect the cable conduit.
2 Remove the door latch cable.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System
Information > Adjustments
Rear Door Hinge: Adjustments
HINGE ADJUSTMENT - REAR DOOR
1. Remove the front seat safety belt retractor.
2. Mark the positions of the rear door hinges to use as reference points.
3. Loosen the rear door hinge-to-body bolts just enough to permit movement.
4. Loosen the two rear door hinge-to-body bolts just enough to permit movement.
5. Adjust the rear door to specification.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System
Information > Adjustments > Page 8436
6. Tighten the four rear door hinge-to-body bolts. 7. Check the front door adjustments. 8. Install the
front seat safety belt retractor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to
Open
Technical Service Bulletin # 02-9-3 Date: 020513
Doors - Unable to Open
Article No. 02-9-3
05/13/02
BODY - UNABLE TO OPEN DOORS
FORD: 2001-2002 ESCAPE
ISSUE Some vehicles built before 12/15/01 may exhibit door latches that will not open. The outside
handle and inside handle can be moved freely but latch remains locked. This may occur if the
locked door's outside handle is lifted at the same time as the power lock button on either the key
fob or the door panel is pressed.
ACTION Refer to the follow Service Procedure to open door(s) and replace door latch per
Workshop Manual Section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
020903A Follow Service Procedure 1.5 Hrs.
To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Front Door
020903B Follow Service Procedure 2.3 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors
020903C Follow Service Procedure 1.8 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door One Rear Door
020903D Follow Service Procedure 2.8 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors One
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to
Open > Page 8445
Rear Door
020903E Follow Service Procedure 2.2 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door Both Rear Doors
020903F Follow Service Procedure 0.6 Hr.
To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Rear Door
020903G Follow Service Procedure 0.9 Hr.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Rear Doors
020903H Follow Service Procedure 3.1 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front And Both Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5421813 41
OASIS CODES: 112000
Information
Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
Use the procedure below titled "Front Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and
replace the failed door latch mechanism.
Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
Use the procedure below titled "Rear Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and
replace the failed door latch mechanism.
All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
Use the procedure below titled "All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement" to gain access and
replace the failed door latch mechanism.
Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
REMOVAL
WARNING
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
WARNING
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
NOTE
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE
RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE
SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR.
WARNING
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to
Open > Page 8446
THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY.
REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN
INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
ALL VEHICLES
NOTE
VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE.
1. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass completely down.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
3. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs, and disconnect the passenger air
bag module electrical connector and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel
harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
4. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air
bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column
harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
5. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness
electrical connector.
All vehicles:
6. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat
and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety' belt pretensioner body
harness electrical connector.
7. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
8. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles:
9. Connect the battery ground cable.
10. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts.
CAUTION
USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE
ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN
DAMAGED COMPONENTS.
11. Remove the front seat, front seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat.
12. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s).
13. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s).
14. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s).
^ Remove the pin-type retainers
^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to
Open > Page 8447
15. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove
screw (Figure 1).
NOTE
ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT
BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN.
16. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel.
17. Remove door handle cup screw.
CAUTION
DO NOT TO SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL.
CAUTION
MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO
CREASE OR BREAK.
18. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside.
NOTE
TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER
COVER.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to
Open > Page 8448
19. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly
at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating lever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger
front door shown, all doors similar).
CAUTION
WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL.
20. Open door, and move glass to the up position.
21. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel.
22. Remove front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks,
Latches and Entry Systems Removal and Installation.
INSTALLATION
All vehicles:
Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and
Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation."
1. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
4. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
5. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
6. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
7. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to
Open > Page 8449
8. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with air bags:
9. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
10. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver air
bag connector access cover.
11. Remove the special tool from the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Close
the glove compartment.
12. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01:
Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
13.. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-20B: Occupant
Restraints - Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing.
14. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s).
All vehicles:
2. Remove door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Position aside water shield.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
NOTE
USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT
OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND
PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR).
4. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry
Systems Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
1. Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and
Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation."
2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s).
All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
REMOVAL
1. Open tailgate to access rear doors.
NOTE
REAR DOORS MUST BE OPENED BEFORE FRONT DOORS CAN BE OPENED.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to
Open > Page 8450
2. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s).
All vehicles:
3. Remove rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
4. Position watershield aside.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
NOTE
USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT
OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND
PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR).
5. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry
Systems " Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation".
WARNING
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
WARNING
NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN
AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
WARNING
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
NOTE
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE
RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE
SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR.
WARNING
THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY.
REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN
INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE
VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE.
ALL VEHICLES
6. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass into the completely down.
7. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
8. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs and disconnect the passenger air
bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel
harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
9. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air
bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column
harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to
Open > Page 8451
10. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness
electrical connector.
All vehicles:
11. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat
and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body
harness electrical connector.
12. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
13. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles:
14. Connect the battery ground cable.
15. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts.
CAUTION
USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE
ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN
DAMAGED COMPONENTS.
16. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat through rear doors.
17. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s).
18. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s).
19. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s).
^ Remove the pin-type retainers
^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s)
20. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove
screw (Figure 1).
NOTE
ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT
BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN.
21. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel.
22. Remove door handle cup screw.
CAUTION
DO NOT SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL.
CAUTION
MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO
CREASE OR BREAK.
23. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside.
NOTE
TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER
COVER.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
24. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly
at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating fever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger
front door shown, all doors similar).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to
Open > Page 8452
CAUTION
WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL.
25. Open door(s), and move glass to the up position.
26. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel(s).
27. Remove door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches
and Entry Systems Removal and Installation.
INSTALLATION
All Vehicles:
1. Install new rear door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks,
Latches and Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation."
2. Install rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
4. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s).
5. Install new front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks,
Latches and Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation."
6. Install front door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
7. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
8. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
9. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
10. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
11. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
12. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with air bags:
13. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
14. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector, and install the
driver air bag connector access cover.
15. Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module
electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector, and close the
glove compartment.
16. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to
Open > Page 8453
Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
17. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-2DB: Occupant
Restraints Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing.
18. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
19. Close tailgate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 >
Doors - Unable to Open
Technical Service Bulletin # 02-9-3 Date: 020513
Doors - Unable to Open
Article No. 02-9-3
05/13/02
BODY - UNABLE TO OPEN DOORS
FORD: 2001-2002 ESCAPE
ISSUE Some vehicles built before 12/15/01 may exhibit door latches that will not open. The outside
handle and inside handle can be moved freely but latch remains locked. This may occur if the
locked door's outside handle is lifted at the same time as the power lock button on either the key
fob or the door panel is pressed.
ACTION Refer to the follow Service Procedure to open door(s) and replace door latch per
Workshop Manual Section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
020903A Follow Service Procedure 1.5 Hrs.
To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Front Door
020903B Follow Service Procedure 2.3 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors
020903C Follow Service Procedure 1.8 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door One Rear Door
020903D Follow Service Procedure 2.8 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors One
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 >
Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8459
Rear Door
020903E Follow Service Procedure 2.2 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door Both Rear Doors
020903F Follow Service Procedure 0.6 Hr.
To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Rear Door
020903G Follow Service Procedure 0.9 Hr.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Rear Doors
020903H Follow Service Procedure 3.1 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front And Both Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5421813 41
OASIS CODES: 112000
Information
Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
Use the procedure below titled "Front Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and
replace the failed door latch mechanism.
Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
Use the procedure below titled "Rear Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and
replace the failed door latch mechanism.
All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
Use the procedure below titled "All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement" to gain access and
replace the failed door latch mechanism.
Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
REMOVAL
WARNING
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
WARNING
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
NOTE
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE
RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE
SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR.
WARNING
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 >
Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8460
THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY.
REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN
INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
ALL VEHICLES
NOTE
VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE.
1. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass completely down.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
3. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs, and disconnect the passenger air
bag module electrical connector and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel
harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
4. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air
bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column
harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
5. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness
electrical connector.
All vehicles:
6. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat
and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety' belt pretensioner body
harness electrical connector.
7. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
8. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles:
9. Connect the battery ground cable.
10. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts.
CAUTION
USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE
ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN
DAMAGED COMPONENTS.
11. Remove the front seat, front seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat.
12. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s).
13. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s).
14. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s).
^ Remove the pin-type retainers
^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 >
Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8461
15. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove
screw (Figure 1).
NOTE
ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT
BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN.
16. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel.
17. Remove door handle cup screw.
CAUTION
DO NOT TO SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL.
CAUTION
MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO
CREASE OR BREAK.
18. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside.
NOTE
TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER
COVER.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 >
Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8462
19. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly
at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating lever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger
front door shown, all doors similar).
CAUTION
WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL.
20. Open door, and move glass to the up position.
21. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel.
22. Remove front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks,
Latches and Entry Systems Removal and Installation.
INSTALLATION
All vehicles:
Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and
Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation."
1. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
4. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
5. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
6. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
7. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 >
Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8463
8. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with air bags:
9. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
10. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver air
bag connector access cover.
11. Remove the special tool from the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Close
the glove compartment.
12. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01:
Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
13.. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-20B: Occupant
Restraints - Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing.
14. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s).
All vehicles:
2. Remove door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Position aside water shield.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
NOTE
USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT
OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND
PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR).
4. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry
Systems Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
1. Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and
Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation."
2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s).
All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
REMOVAL
1. Open tailgate to access rear doors.
NOTE
REAR DOORS MUST BE OPENED BEFORE FRONT DOORS CAN BE OPENED.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 >
Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8464
2. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s).
All vehicles:
3. Remove rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
4. Position watershield aside.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
NOTE
USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT
OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND
PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR).
5. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry
Systems " Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation".
WARNING
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
WARNING
NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN
AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
WARNING
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
NOTE
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE
RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE
SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR.
WARNING
THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY.
REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN
INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE
VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE.
ALL VEHICLES
6. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass into the completely down.
7. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
8. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs and disconnect the passenger air
bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel
harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
9. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air
bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column
harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 >
Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8465
10. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness
electrical connector.
All vehicles:
11. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat
and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body
harness electrical connector.
12. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
13. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles:
14. Connect the battery ground cable.
15. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts.
CAUTION
USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE
ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN
DAMAGED COMPONENTS.
16. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat through rear doors.
17. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s).
18. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s).
19. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s).
^ Remove the pin-type retainers
^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s)
20. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove
screw (Figure 1).
NOTE
ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT
BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN.
21. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel.
22. Remove door handle cup screw.
CAUTION
DO NOT SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL.
CAUTION
MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO
CREASE OR BREAK.
23. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside.
NOTE
TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER
COVER.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
24. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly
at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating fever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger
front door shown, all doors similar).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 >
Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8466
CAUTION
WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL.
25. Open door(s), and move glass to the up position.
26. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel(s).
27. Remove door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches
and Entry Systems Removal and Installation.
INSTALLATION
All Vehicles:
1. Install new rear door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks,
Latches and Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation."
2. Install rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
4. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s).
5. Install new front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks,
Latches and Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation."
6. Install front door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
7. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
8. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
9. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
10. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
11. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
12. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with air bags:
13. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
14. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector, and install the
driver air bag connector access cover.
15. Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module
electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector, and close the
glove compartment.
16. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 >
Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8467
Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
17. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-2DB: Occupant
Restraints Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing.
18. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
19. Close tailgate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8468
Rear Door Latch: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 02-9-3 Date: 020513
Doors - Unable to Open
Article No. 02-9-3
05/13/02
BODY - UNABLE TO OPEN DOORS
FORD: 2001-2002 ESCAPE
ISSUE Some vehicles built before 12/15/01 may exhibit door latches that will not open. The outside
handle and inside handle can be moved freely but latch remains locked. This may occur if the
locked door's outside handle is lifted at the same time as the power lock button on either the key
fob or the door panel is pressed.
ACTION Refer to the follow Service Procedure to open door(s) and replace door latch per
Workshop Manual Section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
020903A Follow Service Procedure 1.5 Hrs.
To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Front Door
020903B Follow Service Procedure 2.3 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors
020903C Follow Service Procedure 1.8 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door One Rear Door
020903D Follow Service Procedure 2.8 Hrs.
To Open Doors And
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8469
Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors One Rear Door
020903E Follow Service Procedure 2.2 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door Both Rear Doors
020903F Follow Service Procedure 0.6 Hr.
To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Rear Door
020903G Follow Service Procedure 0.9 Hr.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Rear Doors
020903H Follow Service Procedure 3.1 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front And Both Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5421813 41
OASIS CODES: 112000
Information
Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
Use the procedure below titled "Front Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and
replace the failed door latch mechanism.
Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
Use the procedure below titled "Rear Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and
replace the failed door latch mechanism.
All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
Use the procedure below titled "All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement" to gain access and
replace the failed door latch mechanism.
Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
REMOVAL
WARNING
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
WARNING
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
NOTE
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE
RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE
SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8470
WARNING
THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY.
REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN
INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
ALL VEHICLES
NOTE
VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE.
1. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass completely down.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
3. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs, and disconnect the passenger air
bag module electrical connector and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel
harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
4. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air
bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column
harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
5. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness
electrical connector.
All vehicles:
6. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat
and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety' belt pretensioner body
harness electrical connector.
7. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
8. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles:
9. Connect the battery ground cable.
10. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts.
CAUTION
USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE
ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN
DAMAGED COMPONENTS.
11. Remove the front seat, front seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat.
12. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s).
13. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s).
14. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s).
^ Remove the pin-type retainers
^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8471
15. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove
screw (Figure 1).
NOTE
ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT
BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN.
16. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel.
17. Remove door handle cup screw.
CAUTION
DO NOT TO SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL.
CAUTION
MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO
CREASE OR BREAK.
18. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside.
NOTE
TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER
COVER.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8472
19. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly
at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating lever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger
front door shown, all doors similar).
CAUTION
WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL.
20. Open door, and move glass to the up position.
21. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel.
22. Remove front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks,
Latches and Entry Systems Removal and Installation.
INSTALLATION
All vehicles:
Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and
Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation."
1. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
4. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
5. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
6. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
7. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8473
8. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with air bags:
9. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
10. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver air
bag connector access cover.
11. Remove the special tool from the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Close
the glove compartment.
12. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01:
Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
13.. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-20B: Occupant
Restraints - Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing.
14. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s).
All vehicles:
2. Remove door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Position aside water shield.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
NOTE
USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT
OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND
PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR).
4. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry
Systems Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
1. Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and
Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation."
2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s).
All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
REMOVAL
1. Open tailgate to access rear doors.
NOTE
REAR DOORS MUST BE OPENED BEFORE FRONT DOORS CAN BE OPENED.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8474
2. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s).
All vehicles:
3. Remove rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
4. Position watershield aside.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
NOTE
USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT
OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND
PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR).
5. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry
Systems " Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation".
WARNING
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
WARNING
NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN
AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
WARNING
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
NOTE
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE
RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE
SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR.
WARNING
THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY.
REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN
INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE
VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE.
ALL VEHICLES
6. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass into the completely down.
7. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
8. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs and disconnect the passenger air
bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel
harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
9. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air
bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column
harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8475
10. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness
electrical connector.
All vehicles:
11. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat
and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body
harness electrical connector.
12. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
13. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles:
14. Connect the battery ground cable.
15. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts.
CAUTION
USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE
ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN
DAMAGED COMPONENTS.
16. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat through rear doors.
17. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s).
18. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s).
19. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s).
^ Remove the pin-type retainers
^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s)
20. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove
screw (Figure 1).
NOTE
ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT
BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN.
21. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel.
22. Remove door handle cup screw.
CAUTION
DO NOT SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL.
CAUTION
MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO
CREASE OR BREAK.
23. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside.
NOTE
TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER
COVER.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
24. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly
at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating fever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger
front door shown, all doors similar).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8476
CAUTION
WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL.
25. Open door(s), and move glass to the up position.
26. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel(s).
27. Remove door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches
and Entry Systems Removal and Installation.
INSTALLATION
All Vehicles:
1. Install new rear door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks,
Latches and Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation."
2. Install rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
4. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s).
5. Install new front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks,
Latches and Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation."
6. Install front door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
7. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
8. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
9. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
10. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
11. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
12. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with air bags:
13. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
14. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector, and install the
driver air bag connector access cover.
15. Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module
electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector, and close the
glove compartment.
16. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8477
Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
17. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-2DB: Occupant
Restraints Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing.
18. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
19. Close tailgate.
Technical Service Bulletin # 02-9-3 Date: 020513
Doors - Unable to Open
Article No. 02-9-3
05/13/02
BODY - UNABLE TO OPEN DOORS
FORD: 2001-2002 ESCAPE
ISSUE Some vehicles built before 12/15/01 may exhibit door latches that will not open. The outside
handle and inside handle can be moved freely but latch remains locked. This may occur if the
locked door's outside handle is lifted at the same time as the power lock button on either the key
fob or the door panel is pressed.
ACTION Refer to the follow Service Procedure to open door(s) and replace door latch per
Workshop Manual Section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
020903A Follow Service Procedure 1.5 Hrs.
To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Front Door
020903B Follow Service Procedure 2.3 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors
020903C Follow Service Procedure 1.8 Hrs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8478
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door One Rear Door
020903D Follow Service Procedure 2.8 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors One Rear Door
020903E Follow Service Procedure 2.2 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door Both Rear Doors
020903F Follow Service Procedure 0.6 Hr.
To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Rear Door
020903G Follow Service Procedure 0.9 Hr.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Rear Doors
020903H Follow Service Procedure 3.1 Hrs.
To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front And Both Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5421813 41
OASIS CODES: 112000
Information
Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
Use the procedure below titled "Front Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and
replace the failed door latch mechanism.
Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
Use the procedure below titled "Rear Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and
replace the failed door latch mechanism.
All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
Use the procedure below titled "All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement" to gain access and
replace the failed door latch mechanism.
Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
REMOVAL
WARNING
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
WARNING
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8479
NOTE
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE
RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE
SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR.
WARNING
THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY.
REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN
INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
ALL VEHICLES
NOTE
VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE.
1. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass completely down.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
3. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs, and disconnect the passenger air
bag module electrical connector and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel
harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
4. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air
bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column
harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
5. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness
electrical connector.
All vehicles:
6. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat
and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety' belt pretensioner body
harness electrical connector.
7. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
8. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles:
9. Connect the battery ground cable.
10. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts.
CAUTION
USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE
ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN
DAMAGED COMPONENTS.
11. Remove the front seat, front seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat.
12. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s).
13. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s).
14. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s).
^ Remove the pin-type retainers
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8480
^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s)
15. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove
screw (Figure 1).
NOTE
ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT
BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN.
16. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel.
17. Remove door handle cup screw.
CAUTION
DO NOT TO SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL.
CAUTION
MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO
CREASE OR BREAK.
18. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside.
NOTE
TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER
COVER.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8481
19. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly
at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating lever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger
front door shown, all doors similar).
CAUTION
WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL.
20. Open door, and move glass to the up position.
21. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel.
22. Remove front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks,
Latches and Entry Systems Removal and Installation.
INSTALLATION
All vehicles:
Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and
Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation."
1. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
4. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
5. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
6. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
7. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8482
8. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with air bags:
9. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
10. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver air
bag connector access cover.
11. Remove the special tool from the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Close
the glove compartment.
12. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01:
Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
13.. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-20B: Occupant
Restraints - Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing.
14. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s).
All vehicles:
2. Remove door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Position aside water shield.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
NOTE
USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT
OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND
PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR).
4. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry
Systems Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
1. Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and
Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation."
2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s).
All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement
REMOVAL
1. Open tailgate to access rear doors.
NOTE
REAR DOORS MUST BE OPENED BEFORE FRONT DOORS CAN BE OPENED.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8483
2. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s).
All vehicles:
3. Remove rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
4. Position watershield aside.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
NOTE
USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT
OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND
PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR).
5. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry
Systems " Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation".
WARNING
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
WARNING
NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN
AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
WARNING
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
NOTE
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE
RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE
SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR.
WARNING
THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY.
REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN
INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE
VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE.
ALL VEHICLES
6. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass into the completely down.
7. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
8. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs and disconnect the passenger air
bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel
harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
9. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air
bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column
harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8484
10. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness
electrical connector.
All vehicles:
11. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat
and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body
harness electrical connector.
12. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
13. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and
connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles:
14. Connect the battery ground cable.
15. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts.
CAUTION
USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE
ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN
DAMAGED COMPONENTS.
16. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat through rear doors.
17. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s).
18. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s).
19. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s).
^ Remove the pin-type retainers
^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s)
20. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove
screw (Figure 1).
NOTE
ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT
BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN.
21. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel.
22. Remove door handle cup screw.
CAUTION
DO NOT SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL.
CAUTION
MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO
CREASE OR BREAK.
23. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside.
NOTE
TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER
COVER.
NOTE
IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO
FREE LEVER.
24. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly
at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating fever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger
front door shown, all doors similar).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8485
CAUTION
WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL.
25. Open door(s), and move glass to the up position.
26. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel(s).
27. Remove door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches
and Entry Systems Removal and Installation.
INSTALLATION
All Vehicles:
1. Install new rear door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks,
Latches and Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation."
2. Install rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
3. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
4. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s).
5. Install new front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks,
Latches and Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation."
6. Install front door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and
Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation."
7. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
8. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft).
9. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
Vehicles equipped with side air bags:
10. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
11. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
12. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Vehicles equipped with air bags:
13. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles:
14. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector, and install the
driver air bag connector access cover.
15. Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module
electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector, and close the
glove compartment.
16. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8486
Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect".
17. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-2DB: Occupant
Restraints Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing.
18. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
19. Close tailgate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8487
Rear Door Latch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door trim panel.
2. Disconnect the door latch electrical connector.
1 Release the clip.
2 Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Position the rear door glass top run aside.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Position the door glass top run aside.
4. Disconnect the exterior door handle actuating rod.
1 Open the clip.
2 Disconnect the actuating rod.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8488
5. Remove and discard the rear door latch screws. 6. Remove the rear door latch.
7. Disconnect the interior door handle cable.
1 Release the cable conduit.
2 Disconnect the cable.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System
Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR TRIM PANEL
Removal and Installation
Vehicles with power windows
1. Remove the rear door window control switch.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
Vehicles with manual windows
2. Remove the rear door manual window regulator handle.
1 Release the clip.
2 Remove the rear door manual window regulator handle.
All vehicles
3. Remove the rear door latch release handle bezel.
1 Remove the screw.
2 Remove the rear door latch release handle bezel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 8492
4. Remove the door handle cup screw.
5. Remove the rear door sail panel.
6. Remove the rear door trim panel. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker > System
Information > Adjustments
Rear Door Striker: Adjustments
STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
NOTE: Before adjusting the door latch striker plate, verify that the door can be closed easily and
fits tightly.
1. Loosen the door latch striker bolts.
2. Reposition the door latch striker plate from side to side or up and down as necessary.
3. Tighten the door latch striker plate bolts.
4. NOTE: The rear door is shown, the front door is similar.
Check the adjustment. Repeat the procedure as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass >
System Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door glass top run.
2. Remove the rear door window glass.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator
> System Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
All vehicles
1. Remove the rear door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the rear door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside. 4.
Lower the rear door window glass to gain access to the screws.
5. Remove the rear door window glass screws. 6. Support the rear door window glass in the full up
position.
Vehicles with power windows
7. Disconnect the rear door power window regulator electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator
> System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8502
8. Remove the rear door power window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolts
2 Remove the nuts.
Vehicles with manual windows
9. Remove the rear door window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the nuts.
INSTALLATION
All vehicles
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Cycle the door glass to make sure of correct window glass engagement.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information >
Service Precautions
Hood Latch: Service Precautions
CAUTION: Make sure the hood latch is fully engaged.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Page 8507
Hood Latch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the hood latch nut.
2. Remove the hood latch bolts.
NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the bolts.
3. Remove the hood latch.
1 Release the cable conduit.
2 Disconnect the cable.
3 Remove the hood latch.
INSTALLATION
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Page 8508
1. Connect the hood latch release cable and conduit.
1 Connect the cable.
2 Engage the cable conduit.
2. Position the hood latch with alignment marks and install the bolts.
3. Install the hood latch nut. 4. Verify the hood alignment.
5. Adjust the hood latch.
1 Loosen the bolts.
2 Loosen the nut.
3 Align the hood latch with the hood latch striker.
6. Tighten the hood latch bolts and nut.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Page 8509
7. Verify the hood latch striker is fully engaging the hood latch.
^ Repeat previous steps as necessary.
CAUTION: Make sure the hood latch is fully engaged.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Hood Latch Release: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the hood latch release handle bolts. 2. Remove the hood latch.
3. Remove the two hood latch release handle cable locators. 4. Remove the hood latch release
handle.
NOTE: The hood latch release handle cable must be pulled through the dash panel into the
passenger compartment.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood
Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Open the liftgate glass.
2. Remove the two liftgate nut access covers (one on each side).
3. Disconnect the rear window glass electrical harness connector.
4. Disconnect the heated window grid wire electrical connector.
5. Disconnect the two liftgate window glass cylinders.
1 Slide the spring retainer to the end of the socket.
2 Disconnect the socket from the ball stud.
NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8521
6. Remove the two liftgate window glass hinge nuts.
NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Transfer components as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8528
Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8529
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance
Technical Service Bulletin # 04C09 Date: 050318
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes. OASIS was activated January 20, 2004.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED: Yes Available through the website by March 21, 2005.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8538
Owner names and addresses will be available March 31, 2005.
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affect units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter (when available) and
schedule a service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
RELATED DAMAGE
Related damage claims are not approved for this program.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
This repair will require no additional labor time to complete. Claims submitted with "MT" labor will
not be accepted for reimbursement.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair
was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this
bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC).
The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option,
directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251, Dearborn, MI 48121-6251.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund
claims that included other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be
accepted for reimbursement.
^ This compliance recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous
repair. Claiming a refund will not close out the VIN for this recall.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 04C09 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is
claimed.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8539
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Parts will not be direct shipped for this recall. Order your parts requirements through normal order
processing channels.
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to DOES II.
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
CLAIM HANDLING PROCEDURE FOR RETURNING PRIOR LEVEL PARTS Immediate Purge
Required: -4L8Z-7843150-DB LATCH ASY - TAILGATE (LIFTGATE) -3L8Z-7843400-FAA
HANDLE Prepare and submit a PCS claim as described below: ^
REASON CODE: GB
^ SHIPPER NBR: 04C09
^ LINE EXPLANATION: Purge Required
When preparing your PCS claim, list the part number being returned on the claim, and indicate the
quantity of that part number being returned. Your PCS claim must be submitted by March 31, 2005.
Claims filed after this date will be denied.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
This program involves performing specific liftgate latch system repairs on two (2) specific vehicle
populations. Each repair procedure identifies the affected vehicles requiring that particular repair.
See the list below for specific repairs needed for each vehicle population.
2004 model year Escape vehicles and 2001-2003 Escape vehicles serviced with subject parts:
^ replace the liftgate latch release rod
^ replace release rod clip
^ replace handle assembly return spring and circlip
2005 model year Escape vehicles:
^ replace the liftgate latch release rod
^ replace release rod clip
LIFTGATE HANDLE REMOVAL AND REPAIR AFFECTED VEHICLES: 2004 MODEL YEAR
ESCAPE VEHICLES AND 2001-2003 MODEL YEAR ESCAPE VEHICLES SERVICED WITH
SUBJECT PARTS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8540
1. Open the liftgate.
2. If equipped, remove the rear wiper motor cover.
3. Remove the four (4) screws and remove the liftgate trim panel.
4. Disconnect the liftgate window latch, liftgate handle and liftgate latch release rods by opening the
clips. See Figure 1.
5. Release the liftgate window latch ajar switch wiring harness locator and if equipped, disconnect
the liftgate latch actuator electrical connector. See Figure 2.
6. Remove the liftgate latch remote control assembly retaining screw and all four (4) retaining nuts.
See Figure 3.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8541
7. Disconnect the liftgate handle-to-remote release rod from the remote control assembly, then
remove the remote control. See Figure 4.
8. Remove the liftgate handle assembly and place it on a bench. See Figure 5.
9. Disassemble the handle as follows:
a) Remove the circlip
b) Pull the pivot rod out of the handle assembly.
c) Note the position of the spring then remove the spring from the handle assembly.
10.
NOTE: the new circlip is supplied in the bag with the new spring. Make sure to retain the new circlip
for installation to the original pivot rod and handle.
LIFTGATE LATCH REMOVAL AND RELEASE ROD REPLACEMENT AFFECTED VEHICLES:
ALL VEHICLES COVERED BY 04C09
NOTE: For 2001-2004 model year vehicles, proceed to Step 4. Ford 2005 model year vehicles,
begin the repair on step 1.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. If equipped, remove the rear wiper motor cover.
3. Remove the four (4) screws and remove the liftgate trim panel.
4. Disconnect the liftgate ajar switch electrical connector (located on the liftgate latch).
5. Remove the three (3) liftgate latch bolts and retain.
6. Remove the liftgate latch.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8542
7. Remove the liftgate latch release rod and install the new rod. See Figure 6.
8. Remove the original release rod clip and replace with the new clip.
LIFTGATE LATCH INSTALLATION AFFECTED VEHICLES: ALL VEHICLES COVERED BY
04C09
1. Position the latch assembly in the vehicle.
2. Apply Motorcraft Medium-Strength Threadlocker TA-25 (blue) to the bolts and install the three
(3) liftgate latch bolts. See Figure 7.
3. Tight the bolts to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. Connect the liftgate ajar switch electrical connector.
NOTE:
Fore 2001-2004 model year vehicles, proceed to Liftgate Handle Installation. For 2005 model year
vehicles, continue with Step 5 of this procedure.
5. Install the liftgate trim panel and four (4) screws.
6. If equipped, install the rear wiper motor cover.
7. Close the liftgate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8543
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8544
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8545
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8546
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > NHTSA04V602000 > Dec > 04
> Recall 04V602000: Liftgate Latch Release Rod Replacement
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Recalls Recall 04V602000: Liftgate Latch Release Rod Replacement
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2005 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor
Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 04V602000 RECALL DATE: Dec 17, 2004
COMPONENT: Latches/Locks/Linkages: Doors: Latch
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 262113
SUMMARY: Certain 2004-2005 sport utility vehicles and certain 2001-2003 sport utiity vehicles
having rear liftgate components serviced with 2004 equivalent components fail to comply with the
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 206, "Door Locks and Door Retention
Components." The rear liftgate latching system does not meet the inertia load requirement in one
direction.
CONSEQUENCE: If the liftgate is left unlocked, there is the potential that it may open during a
crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the rear liftgate latch release rod, the release rod attachment clip
and the door handle return spring. The recall is expected to begin on January 24, 2005. Owners
should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673.
NOTES: Ford recall No. 04C09. Customers can also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236. 888-327-4236.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 >
Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance
Technical Service Bulletin # 04C09 Date: 050318
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes. OASIS was activated January 20, 2004.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED: Yes Available through the website by March 21, 2005.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 >
Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8556
Owner names and addresses will be available March 31, 2005.
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affect units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter (when available) and
schedule a service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
RELATED DAMAGE
Related damage claims are not approved for this program.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
This repair will require no additional labor time to complete. Claims submitted with "MT" labor will
not be accepted for reimbursement.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair
was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this
bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC).
The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option,
directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251, Dearborn, MI 48121-6251.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund
claims that included other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be
accepted for reimbursement.
^ This compliance recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous
repair. Claiming a refund will not close out the VIN for this recall.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 04C09 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is
claimed.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 >
Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8557
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Parts will not be direct shipped for this recall. Order your parts requirements through normal order
processing channels.
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to DOES II.
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
CLAIM HANDLING PROCEDURE FOR RETURNING PRIOR LEVEL PARTS Immediate Purge
Required: -4L8Z-7843150-DB LATCH ASY - TAILGATE (LIFTGATE) -3L8Z-7843400-FAA
HANDLE Prepare and submit a PCS claim as described below: ^
REASON CODE: GB
^ SHIPPER NBR: 04C09
^ LINE EXPLANATION: Purge Required
When preparing your PCS claim, list the part number being returned on the claim, and indicate the
quantity of that part number being returned. Your PCS claim must be submitted by March 31, 2005.
Claims filed after this date will be denied.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
This program involves performing specific liftgate latch system repairs on two (2) specific vehicle
populations. Each repair procedure identifies the affected vehicles requiring that particular repair.
See the list below for specific repairs needed for each vehicle population.
2004 model year Escape vehicles and 2001-2003 Escape vehicles serviced with subject parts:
^ replace the liftgate latch release rod
^ replace release rod clip
^ replace handle assembly return spring and circlip
2005 model year Escape vehicles:
^ replace the liftgate latch release rod
^ replace release rod clip
LIFTGATE HANDLE REMOVAL AND REPAIR AFFECTED VEHICLES: 2004 MODEL YEAR
ESCAPE VEHICLES AND 2001-2003 MODEL YEAR ESCAPE VEHICLES SERVICED WITH
SUBJECT PARTS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 >
Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8558
1. Open the liftgate.
2. If equipped, remove the rear wiper motor cover.
3. Remove the four (4) screws and remove the liftgate trim panel.
4. Disconnect the liftgate window latch, liftgate handle and liftgate latch release rods by opening the
clips. See Figure 1.
5. Release the liftgate window latch ajar switch wiring harness locator and if equipped, disconnect
the liftgate latch actuator electrical connector. See Figure 2.
6. Remove the liftgate latch remote control assembly retaining screw and all four (4) retaining nuts.
See Figure 3.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 >
Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8559
7. Disconnect the liftgate handle-to-remote release rod from the remote control assembly, then
remove the remote control. See Figure 4.
8. Remove the liftgate handle assembly and place it on a bench. See Figure 5.
9. Disassemble the handle as follows:
a) Remove the circlip
b) Pull the pivot rod out of the handle assembly.
c) Note the position of the spring then remove the spring from the handle assembly.
10.
NOTE: the new circlip is supplied in the bag with the new spring. Make sure to retain the new circlip
for installation to the original pivot rod and handle.
LIFTGATE LATCH REMOVAL AND RELEASE ROD REPLACEMENT AFFECTED VEHICLES:
ALL VEHICLES COVERED BY 04C09
NOTE: For 2001-2004 model year vehicles, proceed to Step 4. Ford 2005 model year vehicles,
begin the repair on step 1.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. If equipped, remove the rear wiper motor cover.
3. Remove the four (4) screws and remove the liftgate trim panel.
4. Disconnect the liftgate ajar switch electrical connector (located on the liftgate latch).
5. Remove the three (3) liftgate latch bolts and retain.
6. Remove the liftgate latch.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 >
Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8560
7. Remove the liftgate latch release rod and install the new rod. See Figure 6.
8. Remove the original release rod clip and replace with the new clip.
LIFTGATE LATCH INSTALLATION AFFECTED VEHICLES: ALL VEHICLES COVERED BY
04C09
1. Position the latch assembly in the vehicle.
2. Apply Motorcraft Medium-Strength Threadlocker TA-25 (blue) to the bolts and install the three
(3) liftgate latch bolts. See Figure 7.
3. Tight the bolts to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. Connect the liftgate ajar switch electrical connector.
NOTE:
Fore 2001-2004 model year vehicles, proceed to Liftgate Handle Installation. For 2005 model year
vehicles, continue with Step 5 of this procedure.
5. Install the liftgate trim panel and four (4) screws.
6. If equipped, install the rear wiper motor cover.
7. Close the liftgate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 >
Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8561
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 >
Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8562
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 >
Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8563
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 >
Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8564
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: >
NHTSA04V602000 > Dec > 04 > Recall 04V602000: Liftgate Latch Release Rod Replacement
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 04V602000: Liftgate Latch Release
Rod Replacement
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2005 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor
Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 04V602000 RECALL DATE: Dec 17, 2004
COMPONENT: Latches/Locks/Linkages: Doors: Latch
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 262113
SUMMARY: Certain 2004-2005 sport utility vehicles and certain 2001-2003 sport utiity vehicles
having rear liftgate components serviced with 2004 equivalent components fail to comply with the
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 206, "Door Locks and Door Retention
Components." The rear liftgate latching system does not meet the inertia load requirement in one
direction.
CONSEQUENCE: If the liftgate is left unlocked, there is the potential that it may open during a
crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the rear liftgate latch release rod, the release rod attachment clip
and the door handle return spring. The recall is expected to begin on January 24, 2005. Owners
should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673.
NOTES: Ford recall No. 04C09. Customers can also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236. 888-327-4236.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Latch
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Latch
REMOVAL
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Disconnect the liftgate ajar switch electrical connector.
3. Disconnect the liftgate latch actuating rod.
1 Open the clip.
2 Disconnect the actuating rod.
4. Remove and discard the liftgate latch bolts. 5. Remove the liftgate latch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: ^
Make sure the liftgate latch release rod is not pre loading the latch. It should be clipped in a relaxed
state with no slack.
^ Position the liftgate latch release rod by pushing outboard to remove the slack.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Latch > Page 8571
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Latch Remote Control
REMOVAL
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Disconnect the liftgate lock cylinder actuating rod.
1 Release the clip.
2 Disconnect the actuating rod.
3. Disconnect the liftgate latch remote control actuating rods.
1 Open the clip and disconnect the liftgate window latch actuating rod.
2 Open the clip and disconnect the liftgate latch actuating rod.
4. Disconnect the electrical connectors.
1 If equipped, disconnect the liftgate latch actuator electrical connector.
2 Release the liftgate window latch ajar switch wiring harness locator.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Latch > Page 8572
5. Remove the liftgate latch remote control assembly.
1 Remove the screw.
2 Remove the nuts.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Transfer all necessary components.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Latch > Page 8573
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate window Latch
REMOVAL
NOTE: Make sure the liftgate window glass is in the raised position.
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Disconnect the liftgate window latch.
1 Disconnect the liftgate window latch ajar switch electrical connector.
2 Open the clip and disconnect the actuating rod.
3. Remove the liftgate window latch.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the latch.
NOTE: Mark the position of the liftgate window latch prior to removing the nuts.
INSTALLATION
1. Position the liftgate window latch and loosely install the bolts. 2. Adjust the liftgate window latch.
^ Set the liftgate window glass flushness to 1.5 mm (0.06 in) under flush.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Latch > Page 8574
3. Tighten the liftgate window latch bolts.
4. Connect the liftgate window latch.
1 Connect the liftgate window latch ajar switch electrical connector.
2 Connect the actuating rod and close the clip.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the liftgate trim panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
NOTE: Individual lock cylinders are repaired by discarding the inoperative cylinder and building a
new lock cylinder using the appropriate lock repair package. The lock repair package includes a
detailed instruction sheet to build the new lock cylinder to the current key code of the vehicle.
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Remove the liftgate lock cylinder.
1 Disconnect the actuating rod.
2 Remove the nuts.
3 Remove the lock cylinder.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Solenoid >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Solenoid: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the liftgate latch remote control.
2. Remove the screws and the liftgate latch actuator.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 8585
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information >
Service and Repair
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
COWL PANEL GRILLE
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wiper pivot arms.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Remove the wiper pivot arms.
2. Remove the driver side cowl grille.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the screw caps and screws.
3 Remove the cowl grille.
3. Remove the passenger side cowl grille.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the screw caps and screws.
3 Remove the cowl grille.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service
and Repair
Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair
FENDER SPLASH SHIELD
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front wheel and tire assembly.
2. Remove the fender splash shield pin-type retainers.
3. Remove the fender splash shield screws.
4. Remove the fender splash shield.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the fender splash shield.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
Front Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises > Page 8605
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises > Page 8606
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8612
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8613
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 8614
Front Subframe: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 8615
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 8616
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 8617
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 8618
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 8619
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 8620
Front Subframe: Service and Repair
SUBFRAME - FRONT
Special Tool(S)
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the rear transmission mount nuts and bolt.
3. Using the special tool, support the engine. 4. Remove the two front wheel and tire assemblies. 5.
Remove the two engine air deflectors.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 8621
6. Remove the two lower control arm ball joint pinch bolts and nuts (one on each side).
7. Disconnect the stabilizer bar link.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Disconnect the link from the stabilizer bar.
8. Remove the lateral support crossmember.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the crossmember.
9. Remove the front transmission mount bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 8622
10. Remove the engine support crossmember bolts.
11. Remove the nut and the engine support crossmember.
12. Remove the two steering gear bolts.
13. Position the steering gear out of the subframe mounts. 14. Remove the dual converter Y-pipe
on the 3.0L (4V) engine or the muffler inlet pipe on the 2.0L (Zetec) engine.
Vehicles with manual transmission
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 8623
15. Remove the two bolts and disconnect the manual transmission shift linkage.
Vehicles with 4WD
16. Remove the driveshaft.
17. NOTE: Lower the rear of the engine to allow the subframe to clear the companion flange on the
transfer case.
Lower the rear of the engine approximately 150 mm (6 in).
All vehicles
18. CAUTION: Do not allow the rear subframe bolts to come out of the lower control arm bushing.
Completely loosen the two front subframe bolts, but do not remove them.
19. NOTE: The lower control arm ball joints must be disconnected from the spindles at the same
time the subframe is lowered.
With an assistant, remove the two subframe nuts lower the subframe from the vehicle.
20. Transfer all necessary components. 21. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8632
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8633
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8639
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8640
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 8641
Front Subframe Mount: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 8642
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 8643
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 8644
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 8645
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 8646
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
Rear Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises > Page 8655
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises > Page 8656
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8662
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8663
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 8664
Rear Subframe: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 8665
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 8666
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 8667
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 8668
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 8669
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 8670
Rear Subframe: Service and Repair
SUBFRAME - REAR
Removal
Vehicles with 4WD
1. Remove the rear axle assembly.
All vehicles
2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Remove the four bolts and position the rear control arm aside.
4. Disconnect the exhaust hanger from the subframe.
5. With an assistant, remove the four bolts and rear subframe.
Installation
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 8671
1. With an assistant, position the rear subframe and loosely install the bolts.
2. With a 19 mm (0.76 in) rod, align the rear subframe with the alignment holes.
3. Tighten the rear subframe bolts.
4. Connect the exhaust hanger on the subframe.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 8672
5. Position the four rear control arms in the subframe.
- Loosely install the bolts.
Vehicles with 4WD
6. Install the rear axle assembly.
All vehicles
7. Lower the vehicle.
8. NOTE: The vehicles must be at ride height before tightening the bolts.
Tighten the four control arms bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises >
Page 8681
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises >
Page 8682
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8688
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8689
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust
Air Register: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust
TSB 04-25-13
12/27/04
SERVICEABILITY OF INSTRUMENT PANEL REGISTER VENTS
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape
2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 vehicles may exhibit instrument panel (IP) register vents that are difficult
to adjust or are limited in their adjustability.
ACTION Register vents for the IP center finish panel can now be ordered and replaced individually.
Replacement of an entire center finish panel assembly to correct a register vent condition is no
longer necessary. The IP outboard register vents can be replaced similarly without replacing the
entire housing assembly, however, the outboard vent must be ordered as an assembly with the
housing. Refer to the following Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
CENTER REGISTER REPLACEMENT
1. Remove center finish panel. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-12.
2. With center finish panel removed, release the register retention tabs and remove the register.
3. Replace register with Part Number YL8Z-19893-CAA left or YL8Z-19893-CAB right.
4. Reinstall the center finish panel.
OUTBOARD REGISTER REPLACEMENT
1. Tilt the vehicle's outboard register to the down most position. Pull the top of the register out until
it is released from the housing.
2. Remove the new register from the service replacement register housing assembly (base #
-19893-), as described in Step 1.
3. Snap the new register into the vehicle's existing outboard register housing.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042513A Register Replace Right 0.2 Hr.
Outboard Vent Only
042513B Register Replace Left 0.2 Hr.
Outboard Vent Only
042513C Register Replace Both 0.4 Hr.
Center Vents (Includes Time To Remove And
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust > Page 8695
Install Center Finish Panel)
042513D Register Replace All Vents 0.4 Hr.
(Includes Time To Remove And Install Center Finish Panel)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19893 41
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 8696
Rear Subframe Mount: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 8697
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 8698
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 8699
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 8700
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 8701
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair
Grille: Service and Repair
RADIATOR GRILLE
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front bumper cover.
2. Release the nine clips and remove the radiator grille. 3. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Specifications
Console: Specifications
Torque Specifications, Part 1
Torque Specifications, Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Specifications
> Page 8709
Console: Description and Operation
Overhead Console
The overhead console may consists of the following components: ^
garage door opener compartment
^ lamp switch
^ roof opening panel control switch (with roof opening panel)
^ sunglass compartment(s)
^ center dome lamp/map lamps
Floor Console
The high series floor console consists of the following components: ^
arm rest
^ floor console finish panel
^ rear cup holders
^ storage compartment
The low series floor console consists of the following components: ^
floor console front finish panel
^ floor console rear finish panel
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and
Repair > High Series Floor Console
Console: Service and Repair High Series Floor Console
REMOVAL
1. Remove the floor console finish panel.
1 Apply the parking brake.
2 Remove the floor console finish panel.
2. Remove the floor console front bolts.
3. Remove the floor console.
1 Remove the two rear bolts.
2 Remove the floor console.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and
Repair > High Series Floor Console > Page 8712
Console: Service and Repair Low Series Floor Console
REMOVAL
1. Remove the floor console front finish panel.
1 If equipped, remove the manual transmission shifter knob by turning counterclockwise.
2 Remove the floor console front finish panel.
2. Remove the floor console rear finish panel.
1 Apply the parking brake.
2 Remove the floor console rear finish panel.
3. Remove the floor console front bolts.
4. Remove the floor console.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and
Repair > High Series Floor Console > Page 8713
1 Remove the rear two bolts.
2 Remove the floor console.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Customer Safety Information
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE
AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID
NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 8719
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE
AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID
NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Seats Removed
There are two deactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
side air bag concerns, and also when repairing any in-seat component in vehicles equipped with
side air bags.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal. This procedure will be used when
diagnosing a concern not related to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: ^
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag system is being serviced, the airbag system
must be deactivated using the appropriate deactivation procedure.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag floor
connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system with the seats in the
vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system, the seats must be removed
from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag floor
connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle
over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag system (lumbar,
climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the
restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air
bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the front seats. 9. Attach
a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag floor electrical connector.
10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical
connector. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical
connector. 12. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Seats Not Removed
There are two deactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
side air bag concerns, and also when repairing any in-seat component in vehicles equipped with
side air bags.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal. This procedure will be used when
diagnosing a concern not related to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position. 2. Disconnect the battery
ground cable.
WARNING: ^
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8722
SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR
STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS
DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD
LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag system is being serviced, the airbag system
must be deactivated using the appropriate deactivation procedure.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag floor
connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system with the seats in the
vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system, the seats must be removed
from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag floor
connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle
over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag system (lumbar,
climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the
restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect
the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped
with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat.
10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical
connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to
the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect
the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Depowering and Repowering Procedure
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event
of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if
equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered.
NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition
switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system
(SRS) fault.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the
cover and the restraints control module (RCM)
fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB.
4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no
flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit
continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8723
proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing or
replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side
impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair
have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected.
2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover.
4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front
of any air bag module when the
battery ground cable is connected.
Connect the battery ground cable.
5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator
and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool.
Seats Removed
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED
AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO
AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
4. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8724
5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Install the front seats. 8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring
connector.
^ Reconnect the electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
10. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 11. Reconnect the battery
ground cable. 12. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Seats Not Removed
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED
AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO
AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring
connector.
^ Reconnect the electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
4. If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 6.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8725
8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8726
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist
Air Bag Reconnect Checklist
The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system
concern: 1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3.
Restraints Control Module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors
connected? 5. All sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected?
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8727
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure
Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator
with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
^ fail to light.
^ remain lit continuously.
^ flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control
Module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an
SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag
indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass
Headliner: Customer Interest Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass
Article No. 03-25-3
12/22/03
BODY - HEADLINER - SAG/LOOSE AT REAR QUARTER GLASS
FORD: 2001-2004 ESCAPE
This article supersedes TSB 01-23-7 to update the vehicle model years.
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a headliner sag/loose condition at rear quarter glass area near
C/D pillar.
ACTION Verify condition. Inspect headliner for amount of sag and overall condition. Repair or
replace headliner.
Refer to the following Service Procedure for details.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
PRIOR TO REPAIRING THE HEADLINER, PLEASE READ THROUGH THE FOLLOWING
PROCEDURE IN ITS ENTIRETY. REMEMBER TO INSTALL THE PROTECTIVE TUBING
SLEEVE ONTO THE DRILL BIT TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE ROOF. DO NOT DRILL THE
HOLES UNTIL STEP 12.
Prior to repair, inspect the vehicle for the following conditions to determine if the headliner should
be replaced:
1. If the headliner sags in excess of 30 mm (1.180 inch) below quarter window black-out paint, the
headliner must be replaced (refer to Workshop Manual Section 501). Do not attempt repair.
2. Inspect for delamination of headliner cloth to substrate. If cloth has come loose the headliner
must be replaced (refer to Workshop Manual Section 501). Do not attempt repair.
If headliner does not meet the above replacement criteria, the headliner can be repaired. Continue
with procedure.
To repair the headliner, use the Headliner Retainer Installation Kit.
^ For Parchment interior, use part number 2L8Z-78519D80-AAA
^ For Graphite interior, use part number 2L8Z-78519D80-AAB
HEADLINER REPAIR PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass
> Page 8736
1. Locate new push-pin holes (See Figure 1 for example locations).
2. Cut template along the curves printed on both sides of template.
3. Make two holes on template along the printed circles.
4. Align template with glass and C-pillar or D-pillar as noted on template. Make sure arrow points to
front of the vehicle. Use template for locating proper push-pin spacing (Figure 2).
5. Fit the D-pillar side edge as noted on template and the D-pillar to locate the new push-pin
positions between D-pillar and C-pillar (Figure 2).
6. Mark both left-hand side and right-hand side new pin position holes as noted on template. Make
sure arrow points to front of the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass
> Page 8737
NOTE
DO NOT DRILL AT THIS POINT. ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR AND HARNESS NEED TO BE
TEMPORARILY MOVED TO PREVENT DAMAGE. CONNECTOR MUST BE ROTATED 90
DEGREES ON LEFT HAND SIDE ONLY AS VIEWED FROM REAR OF VEHICLE (FIGURE 5).
7. Remove the push-pin and child seat tether cap on left hand side only. This allows headliner to
flex and helps prevent crease damage (Figure 3).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass
> Page 8738
8. Remove top portion of left hand D-pillar trim to allow headliner to flex down. Be careful not to
bend or over flex headliner too much or creasing will occur (Figure 4).
9. Rotate electrical connector 90 degrees. Pull harness toward rear of vehicle to avoid drill damage
(Figure 5).
10. Install protective tubing sleeve onto 7 mm (9/32 inch) drill bit with 7-10 mm of the drill bit
exposed beyond the end of the tube (Figure 6).
NOTE
THIS SLEEVE MUST BE USED TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE ROOF.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass
> Page 8739
11. Align drill perpendicular (90 degrees to surface of headliner) so that pin will be flush with
headliner surface (Figure 7).
NOTE
USE SAFETY GLASSES OR GOGGLES TO PROTECT EYES FROM CHIPS WHEN DRILLING
HOLES.
12. Drill holes using the 7 mm (9/32 inch) drill bit with protective sleeve.
13. Before inserting the push-pins, remove any debris/metal shavings that have accumulated on
the headliner and/or rear cargo department as a result of drilling the holes.
NOTE
DO NOT INSERT PUSH-PINS YET.
14. Rotate electrical connector and harness to original position.
15. Insert new pins into holes until headliner is 2 mm (.080 inch) above glass blackout line.
NOTE
BE CAREFUL NOT TO PULL HEADLINER UP TOO FAR. THIS WILL CAUSE GAPPING AT C
AND D PILLAR TRIM. PUSH-PINS CAN BE REMOVED AND RE-INSTALLED TO DESIRED
LENGTH.
16. Verify electrical function of center dome lamp, rear dome lamp and rear wiper.
17. Install D-pillar trim and push-pins in original locations. Make sure clips and pins are properly
positioned and seated.
18. Inspect headliner and trim positioning.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
SUPERSEDES: 01-23-7
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass
> Page 8740
032503A Verify Concern And 2.3 Hrs.
Replace Headliner (Includes Time For Overhead Console And Sun/Moon Roof)
032503B Verify Concern And 0.5 Hr.
Perform Repair Procedure:
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7851944 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear
Quarter Glass
Headliner: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass
Article No. 03-25-3
12/22/03
BODY - HEADLINER - SAG/LOOSE AT REAR QUARTER GLASS
FORD: 2001-2004 ESCAPE
This article supersedes TSB 01-23-7 to update the vehicle model years.
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a headliner sag/loose condition at rear quarter glass area near
C/D pillar.
ACTION Verify condition. Inspect headliner for amount of sag and overall condition. Repair or
replace headliner.
Refer to the following Service Procedure for details.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
PRIOR TO REPAIRING THE HEADLINER, PLEASE READ THROUGH THE FOLLOWING
PROCEDURE IN ITS ENTIRETY. REMEMBER TO INSTALL THE PROTECTIVE TUBING
SLEEVE ONTO THE DRILL BIT TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE ROOF. DO NOT DRILL THE
HOLES UNTIL STEP 12.
Prior to repair, inspect the vehicle for the following conditions to determine if the headliner should
be replaced:
1. If the headliner sags in excess of 30 mm (1.180 inch) below quarter window black-out paint, the
headliner must be replaced (refer to Workshop Manual Section 501). Do not attempt repair.
2. Inspect for delamination of headliner cloth to substrate. If cloth has come loose the headliner
must be replaced (refer to Workshop Manual Section 501). Do not attempt repair.
If headliner does not meet the above replacement criteria, the headliner can be repaired. Continue
with procedure.
To repair the headliner, use the Headliner Retainer Installation Kit.
^ For Parchment interior, use part number 2L8Z-78519D80-AAA
^ For Graphite interior, use part number 2L8Z-78519D80-AAB
HEADLINER REPAIR PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear
Quarter Glass > Page 8746
1. Locate new push-pin holes (See Figure 1 for example locations).
2. Cut template along the curves printed on both sides of template.
3. Make two holes on template along the printed circles.
4. Align template with glass and C-pillar or D-pillar as noted on template. Make sure arrow points to
front of the vehicle. Use template for locating proper push-pin spacing (Figure 2).
5. Fit the D-pillar side edge as noted on template and the D-pillar to locate the new push-pin
positions between D-pillar and C-pillar (Figure 2).
6. Mark both left-hand side and right-hand side new pin position holes as noted on template. Make
sure arrow points to front of the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear
Quarter Glass > Page 8747
NOTE
DO NOT DRILL AT THIS POINT. ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR AND HARNESS NEED TO BE
TEMPORARILY MOVED TO PREVENT DAMAGE. CONNECTOR MUST BE ROTATED 90
DEGREES ON LEFT HAND SIDE ONLY AS VIEWED FROM REAR OF VEHICLE (FIGURE 5).
7. Remove the push-pin and child seat tether cap on left hand side only. This allows headliner to
flex and helps prevent crease damage (Figure 3).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear
Quarter Glass > Page 8748
8. Remove top portion of left hand D-pillar trim to allow headliner to flex down. Be careful not to
bend or over flex headliner too much or creasing will occur (Figure 4).
9. Rotate electrical connector 90 degrees. Pull harness toward rear of vehicle to avoid drill damage
(Figure 5).
10. Install protective tubing sleeve onto 7 mm (9/32 inch) drill bit with 7-10 mm of the drill bit
exposed beyond the end of the tube (Figure 6).
NOTE
THIS SLEEVE MUST BE USED TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE ROOF.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear
Quarter Glass > Page 8749
11. Align drill perpendicular (90 degrees to surface of headliner) so that pin will be flush with
headliner surface (Figure 7).
NOTE
USE SAFETY GLASSES OR GOGGLES TO PROTECT EYES FROM CHIPS WHEN DRILLING
HOLES.
12. Drill holes using the 7 mm (9/32 inch) drill bit with protective sleeve.
13. Before inserting the push-pins, remove any debris/metal shavings that have accumulated on
the headliner and/or rear cargo department as a result of drilling the holes.
NOTE
DO NOT INSERT PUSH-PINS YET.
14. Rotate electrical connector and harness to original position.
15. Insert new pins into holes until headliner is 2 mm (.080 inch) above glass blackout line.
NOTE
BE CAREFUL NOT TO PULL HEADLINER UP TOO FAR. THIS WILL CAUSE GAPPING AT C
AND D PILLAR TRIM. PUSH-PINS CAN BE REMOVED AND RE-INSTALLED TO DESIRED
LENGTH.
16. Verify electrical function of center dome lamp, rear dome lamp and rear wiper.
17. Install D-pillar trim and push-pins in original locations. Make sure clips and pins are properly
positioned and seated.
18. Inspect headliner and trim positioning.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
SUPERSEDES: 01-23-7
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear
Quarter Glass > Page 8750
032503A Verify Concern And 2.3 Hrs.
Replace Headliner (Includes Time For Overhead Console And Sun/Moon Roof)
032503B Verify Concern And 0.5 Hr.
Perform Repair Procedure:
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7851944 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Procedures
Headliner: Procedures
REMOVAL
Vehicles with overhead console
1. Remove the overhead console.
1 Open the front console door.
2 Remove the screws.
3 Remove the overhead console. ^
If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector.
All vehicles
2. Remove the two sun visors and two clips.
1 Remove the six screws.
2 Remove the two sun visors and two clips.
3. Remove the eight passenger assist handle covers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Procedures > Page 8753
4. Remove the four passenger assist handles.
1 Remove the eight bolts.
2 Remove the four passenger assist handles.
5. Open the four A-pillar passenger assist handle covers.
6. Remove the two A-pillar passenger assist handles.
1 Remove the four bolts.
2 Remove the two A-pillar passenger assist handles.
7. Remove the two windshield side garnish mouldings. 8. If equipped, remove the roof opening
panel moulding.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Procedures > Page 8754
9. Remove the safety belt D-ring covers.
10. Remove the safety belt D-ring bolts. 11. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside.
12. Remove the upper B-pillar trim panels. 13. Remove the two C-pillar trim panels.
14. Remove the two D-pillar trim panels.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Procedures > Page 8755
15. Remove the front interior lamp lens.
16. Remove the front interior lamp.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the front interior lamp. ^
Disconnect the electrical connector.
17. Remove the rear interior lamp.
^ Disconnect the electrical connector.
18. Remove the five pin-type retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Procedures > Page 8756
19. If equipped, remove the three child seat tether anchor covers.
20. If equipped, remove the three bolts and the child seat tether anchors. 21. Remove the
headliner.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Procedures > Page 8757
Headliner: Removal and Replacement
HEADLINER
Removal and Installation
Vehicles with overhead console
1. Remove the overhead console.
1 Open the front console door.
2 Remove the screws.
3 Remove the overhead console. If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector.
All vehicles
2. Remove the two sun visors and two clips.
1 Remove the six screws.
2 Remove the two sun visors and two clips.
3. Remove the eight passenger assist handle covers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Procedures > Page 8758
4. Remove the four passenger assist handles.
1 Remove the eight bolts.
2 Remove the four passenger assist handles.
5. Open the four A-pillar passenger assist handle covers.
6. Remove the two A-pillar passenger assist handles.
1 Remove the four bolts.
2 Remove the two A-pillar passenger assist handles.
7. Remove the two windshield side garnish mouldings. 8. If equipped, remove the roof opening
panel moulding.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Procedures > Page 8759
9. Remove the safety belt D-ring covers
10. Remove the safety belt D-ring bolts. 11. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside.
12. Remove the upper B-pillar trim panels. 13. Remove the two C-pillar trim panels.
14. Remove the two D-pillar trim panels.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Procedures > Page 8760
15. Remove the front interior lamp lens.
16. Remove the front interior lamp.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the front interior lamp. Disconnect the electrical connector.
17. Remove the rear interior lamp.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
18. Remove the five pin-type retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Procedures > Page 8761
19. If equipped, remove the three child seat tether anchor covers.
20. If equipped, remove the three bolts and the child seat tether anchors. 21. Remove the
headliner. 22. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Procedures
Trim Panel: Procedures
B-Pillar Trim Panel
REMOVAL
1. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover.
2. Remove the safety belt D-ring bolt. 3. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside.
4. Remove the upper B-pillar trim panel.
5. Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Procedures > Page 8766
6. Remove the rear door scuff plate trim panel.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the rear door scuff plate trim panel.
7. Remove the lower B-pillar trim panel.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
C-Pillar Trim Panel
REMOVAL
LH side
1. If equipped with a power point on the LH quarter trim panel, disconnect the battery ground cable.
Both sides
2. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Procedures > Page 8767
3. Remove the safety belt D-ring bolt.
4. Remove the pin-type retainers and the liftgate scuff plate trim panel. 5. Position the liftgate
weatherstrip aside.
6. If equipped, remove the cargo net hold-down.
7. Remove the rear quarter trim panel.
^ If equipped with a power point on the LH quarter trim panel, disconnect the electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Procedures > Page 8768
8. Remove the C-pillar trim panel.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Procedures > Page 8769
Trim Panel: Removal and Replacement
B-Pillar Trim Panel
B-PILLAR TRIM PANEL
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover.
2. Remove the safety belt D-ring bolt. 3. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside.
4. Remove the upper B-pillar trim panel.
5. Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Procedures > Page 8770
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel.
6. Remove the rear door scuff plate trim panel.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the rear door scuff plate trim panel.
7. Remove the lower B-pillar trim panel. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
C-Pillar Trim Panel
C-PILLAR TRIM PANEL
Removal and Installation
LH side
1. If equipped with a power point on the LH quarter trim panel, disconnect the battery ground cable.
Both sides
2. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Procedures > Page 8771
3. Remove the safety belt D-ring bolt.
4. Remove the pin-type retainers and the liftgate scuff plate trim panel. 5. Position the liftgate
weatherstrip aside.
6. If equipped, remove the cargo net hold-down.
7. Remove the rear quarter trim panel.
- If equipped with a power point on the LH quarter trim panel, disconnect the electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Procedures > Page 8772
8. Remove the C-pillar trim panel. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
NOTE:
^ When a new lock cylinder is installed, the door lock cylinder, liftgate lock cylinder and ignition lock
cylinder should be installed as a set. This will eliminate carrying an extra key which will fit only one
lock. If a new key is to be used, the new key code number is stamped on a metal tag attached to
the key.
^ Individual lock cylinders are repaired by discarding the inoperative cylinder and building a new
lock cylinder using the appropriate lock repair package. The lock repair package includes a detailed
instruction sheet to build the new lock cylinder to the current key code of the vehicle.
1. Remove the exterior front door handle.
NOTE: Make sure the window glass is in the raised position.
2. Remove and discard the door latch screws.
3. Remove the door lock cylinder actuating rod.
1 Open the two clips.
2 Remove the rod.
4. Remove the exterior door handle bracket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 8778
5. Remove the door lock cylinder.
1 Release the clips.
2 Remove the lock cylinder.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics
Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics
TSB 06-15-8
08/07/06
KEYPAD DIAGNOSTICS - DEALER INSTALLED ACCESSORY
FORD: 1998-2006 Taurus 1999-2003 Escort 1999-2006 Mustang 2000-2006 Focus 2002-2005
Thunderbird 2005-2006 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006 Crown Victoria, Fusion 1998-2006
Expedition, Explorer, F-150, Ranger 1999 F-250 Light Duty 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2006
F-Super Duty 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005
Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2006 Freestar
LINCOLN: 1998-2006 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 1998-2006 Navigator
2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1998-2005 Sable 1999-2002 Cougar 2005-2006 Montego 2006 Grand Marquis, Milan
1998-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some vehicles may experience a concern with the keyless entry keypad. In order to
properly diagnose the concern with the keyless entry keypad, it is important to identify whether the
keypad is a factory installed style (wired) or a Genuine Ford Accessory (GFA) radio frequency (RF)
style keypad.
ACTION Use the following Service Procedure to identify GFA RF keypads and provide diagnostic
service tips.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
IDENTIFICATION:
1. Production installed keyless entry keypads are mounted flush with the surface of the vehicle and
are wired directly to the module controlling the vehicle's keyless entry system. This style keypad
can be diagnosed using the appropriate Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics > Page 8784
2. Dealer installed GFA RF keypads are adhesive backed and protrude approximately 1/2" (13
mm) from the surface of the vehicle and there are no specific diagnostics available in the WSM
(Figure 1).
NOTE
THIS RF KEYPAD WAS ALSO US[D IN PRODUCTION ON 2004 F-SUPER DUTY VEHICLES
BUILT PRIOR TO 12/3/2003. REFER TO WSM, SECTION 501-14 FOR RF KEYPAD
DIAGNOSTICS FOR THESE VEHICLES.
GENUINE FORD ACCESSORY KEYPAD DIAGNOSTIC TIPS
1. The keypad operates similarly to a remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter and is programmed
using a similar procedure.
Although the RF keypad is not specifically addressed in the WSM, the RKE transmitter
programming portion of the WSM, Section 501-14 can be used as a guide
NOTE
THE 7-8 AND 9-0 BUTTONS ON THE KEYPAD MUST BE PRESSED SIMULTANEOUSLY
DURING THE PROCEDURE IN ORDER FOR THE KEYPAD TO BE RECOGNIZED AS AN
ADDITIONAL REMOTE TRANSMITTER.
Since the GFA RF keypad is essentially another RKE transmitter, the transmitter diagnostic
pinpoint tests in the vehicle's WSM can also be referenced even though the buttons serving the
lock / unlock functions will differ
2. The GFA RF keypad is serviced as an assembly. The internal battery cannot be replaced
separately.
3. If the master code or owner selectable code is lost or forgotten, the GFA RF keypad must be
replaced. These codes are not stored in any vehicle module (with the exception of 2004 F-Super
Duty vehicles produced prior to 12/3/2003).
4. The GFA RF keypad and all RKE transmitters (the number of transmitters allowable will vary by
vehicle) must be reprogrammed together anytime the keypad is replaced, an RKE transmitter is
replaced, or the module controlling the keyless entry system on the vehicle (GEM/SJB/VSM/DDM
etc.) is replaced.
NOTE
THERE IS AN EXCEPTION TO TIP 4 FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH INTEGRATED
KEYHEAD TRANSMITTERS (IKTs) (FUSION/MILAN/ZEPHYR). THE GFA RF KEYPADS FOR
VEHICLES WITH IKTs MUST BE PROGRAMMED INDEPENDENTLY FROM THE IKTs. TURN
THE IGNITION FROM "OFF" TO "RUN" 8 TIMES WITHIN 10 SECONDS, WITH THE 8TH TIME
ENDING IN "RUN". THE DOOR LOCKS WILL CYCLE TO CONFIRM ENTERING
PROGRAMMING MODE. PRESS THE 7-8 AND 9-0 BUTTON ON THE KEYPAD
SIMULTANEOUSLY TO SEND A LOCK SIGNAL. TURN IGNITION TO OFF. THE LOCKS WILL
CYCLE AGAIN TO INDICATE THE END OF THE PROGRAMMING MODE.
5. The keypad will normally illuminate for 5 seconds after one or more buttons are pressed, and the
illumination will immediately turn off if the 7-8 and 9-0 buttons are pressed simultaneously (lock all
doors). The keypad contains an optical sensor and will not illuminate under bright lighting
conditions. The keypad may only illuminate briefly in colder temperatures in order to maximize the
battery power available to transmit a lock/unlock signal. The temperature at which this occurs will
vary depending upon the keypad battery age and condition. Both of these conditions are a normal
function of the Power Save Mode and do not indicate a need to replace the keypad.
6. After entering the keypad code, the system may unlock the driver's door, lock it, then unlock it
again, and the keypad will not even briefly illuminate. This is the Alert Mode and is an indication
that battery power is very low and the keypad must be replaced.
7. The keypad also contains an Anti-scan feature. If the wrong code has been entered 7 times (35
consecutive button presses) the keypad is disabled for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash
during this time.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics > Page 8785
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14A626 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information >
Application and ID
Keyless Entry Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control
Modules (General Module).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information >
Application and ID > Page 8789
Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection
Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Diagrams > Driver Side
Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Driver Side
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Diagrams > Driver Side > Page 8795
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Diagrams > Driver Side > Page 8796
Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Passenger Side
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Diagrams > Driver Side > Page 8797
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component
Information > Application and ID
Power Door Lock Control Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control
Modules (General Module).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component
Information > Application and ID > Page 8801
Power Door Lock Control Module: Testing and Inspection
Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8806
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Driver Side
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Driver Side
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Driver Side > Page 8809
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Driver Side > Page 8810
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Passenger Side
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Driver Side > Page 8811
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
NOTE: Individual lock cylinders are repaired by discarding the inoperative cylinder and building a
new lock cylinder using the appropriate lock repair package. The lock repair package includes a
detailed instruction sheet to build the new lock cylinder to the current key code of the vehicle.
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Remove the liftgate lock cylinder.
1 Disconnect the actuating rod.
2 Remove the nuts.
3 Remove the lock cylinder.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
8819
Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
8820
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID
> Paint Codes
Paint: Application and ID Paint Codes
Part 1
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID
> Paint Codes > Page 8826
The upper portion of the Vehicle Certification (VC) label contains the manufacturer's name, the
month and year of manufacture, the certification statement and the VIN. It also includes Gross
Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR). The VC label is located on the left-hand front door jamb.
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL REFERENCE
Paint Code
Paint Codes
The first set to numbers/letters indicate the vehicle primary body color code. The second set of
numbers/letters (if applicable), indicate a lower body, two-tone paint code. All colors are base
coat/clear coat. BZ - Chrome Yellow
- BQ - Light Parchment Gold
- E4 - Bright Red
- FL - Medium Toreador Red
- LL - Medium Wedgewood Blue
- UA - Ebony
- FY - Woodland Green
- YZ - Oxford White
- YN - Silver Metallic
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID
> Paint Codes > Page 8827
Tape/Paint Stripe Code
Tape and paint stripe codes do not apply.
Revision Level Revision level - will advance as revisions occur. Not printed on label.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID
> Paint Codes > Page 8828
Paint: Application and ID Paint Code Sticker Location
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL REFERENCE
The VC label is located on the left-hand front door or door jamb and is in a similar location on
trucks.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID
> Paint Codes > Page 8829
Paint: Application and ID Vehicle Certification (VC) Label
Part 1
Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID
> Paint Codes > Page 8830
The upper portion of the Vehicle Certification (VC) label contains the manufacturer's name, the
month and year of manufacture, the certification statement and the VIN. It also includes Gross
Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR). The VC label is located on the left-hand front door jamb.
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL REFERENCE
Paint Code
Paint Codes
The first set to numbers/letters indicate the vehicle primary body color code. The second set of
numbers/letters (if applicable), indicate a lower body, two-tone paint code. All colors are base
coat/clear coat. BZ - Chrome Yellow
- BQ - Light Parchment Gold
- E4 - Bright Red
- FL - Medium Toreador Red
- LL - Medium Wedgewood Blue
- UA - Ebony
- FY - Woodland Green
- YZ - Oxford White
- YN - Silver Metallic
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID
> Paint Codes > Page 8831
Tape/Paint Stripe Code
Tape and paint stripe codes do not apply.
Revision Level Revision level - will advance as revisions occur. Not printed on label.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module >
Component Information > Application and ID
Keyless Entry Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control
Modules (General Module).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module >
Component Information > Application and ID > Page 8836
Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection
Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Control Module >
Component Information > Application and ID
Power Door Lock Control Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control
Modules (General Module).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Control Module >
Component Information > Application and ID > Page 8840
Power Door Lock Control Module: Testing and Inspection
Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8844
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8850
Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Close the roof opening panel. 2. Remove the headliner.
3. Remove the roof opening panel motor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connectors.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the roof opening panel motor.
INSTALLATION
1. Connect the roof opening panel motor electrical connector.
NOTE: The roof opening panel should be in the closed position.
2. With the motor still removed, bump the roof opening panel switch one time only towards the
close or vent open position.
3. Install the roof opening panel motor.
1 Position the roof opening panel motor.
2 Install the bolts
4. Check for correct operation of the roof opening panel motor. 5. Install the headliner.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Roof Opening Panel Position Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Roof Opening Panel Position Switch > Page 8855
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair
Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Open the roof opening panel. 2. Remove the roof opening panel frame.
3. Remove the air deflector.
^ Lift up the air deflector and slide the air deflector to the rear to release the air deflector arms.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8862
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
8870
Power Seat Switch: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARD.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF
THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
8871
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
8872
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
8873
Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARD.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF
THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system
must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
^ Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
the side air bag to floor connector.
^ A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
^ If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the seat control switch knob.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
8874
3. Remove the front seat cushion side shield,
1 Remove the seat backrest handle.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Remove the shield. ^
Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the seat control switch.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Technician Safety Information
Seat Cushion: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARD.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF
THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Technician Safety Information > Page 8879
Seat Cushion: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Driver Seat Cushion
Seat Cushion: Service and Repair Front Driver Seat Cushion
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
DISASSEMBLY
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARD.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF
THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system
must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8882
the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor
connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle.
^ Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
the side air bag to floor connector.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
^ A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
^ If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
^ Manual seat shown, power seat similar.
All vehicles
1. Position the front seats forward. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one
minute.
Vehicles with side air bag
3. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
4. Connect the special tool to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles
5. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8883
6. Connect the special tool to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector.
7. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
8. Connect the special tool to the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector.
Vehicles with side air bag
9. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8884
10. Connect the special tool to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles
11. Lower the glove compartment.
^ Depress the locking tabs.
12. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
13. Connect the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module
electrical connector.
14. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8885
15. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
16. Connect the special tool to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector. 17. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the air bag system.
19. Remove the seat track to floor nuts. 20. Position the driver seat rearward. 21. If equipped with
power seats, disconnect the negative battery cable.
22. Remove the driver seat.
^ If equipped with power seats, disconnect the electrical connector.
1 Remove the seat track to floor bolts.
2 Remove the driver seat.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8886
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
23. Disconnect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips. 24. Remove the front seat cushion trim and pad
from the front seat cushion frame.
25. Separate the front seat cushion trim from the front seat cushion pad.
ASSEMBLY
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARD.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF
THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8887
SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system
must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
^ Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
the side air bag to floor connector.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
^ A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
^ If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
All vehicles
1. Install the front seat cushion trim to the front seat cushion pad. 2. Install the front seat cushion
trim and pad to the front seat cushion frame.
3. Connect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips.
4. Install the driver seat.
1 Position the driver seat.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8888
2 Install the seat track to floor bolts. ^
If equipped with power seats, connect the electrical connector.
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
5. If equipped with power seats, connect the battery ground cable. 6. Position the driver seat
forward.
7. Install the seat track to floor nuts. 8. If equipped with power seats, disconnect the battery ground
cable and wait one minute.
Vehicles with side air bag
9. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
10. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8889
11. Remove the special tool from the driver side safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
12. Connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 13. Connect the battery
ground cable. 14. With the remaining special tools still in place, prove out the air bag system. 15.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
16. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8890
17. Connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Vehicles with side air bag
18. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
19. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
20. Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module
electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8891
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
21. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 22. Raise the glove compartment.
^ Depress the locking tabs.
23. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
24. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8892
25. Install the driver air bag connector access cover. 26. Connect the battery ground cable. 27.
Prove out the air bag system. 28. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8893
Seat Cushion: Service and Repair Front Passenger Seat Cushion
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
DISASSEMBLY
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARD.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF
THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system
must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8894
the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor
connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle.
^ Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
the side air bag to floor connector.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
^ A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
^ If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
All vehicles
1. Position the front seats forward. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one
minute.
Vehicles with side air bag
3. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
4. Connect the special tool to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles
5. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8895
6. Connect the special tool to the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector.
7. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
8. Connect the special tool to the driver side seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector.
Vehicles with side air bag
9. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8896
10. Connect the special tool to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles
11. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover.
12. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
13. Connect the special tool to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector. 14. Lower the glove compartment.
^ Depress the locking tabs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8897
15. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
16. Connect the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module
electrical connector. 17. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the air bag system.
19. Remove the seat track to floor nuts. 20. Position the passenger seat rearward.
21. Remove the passenger seat.
1 Remove the seat track to floor bolts.
2 Remove the passenger seat.
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a sent not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8898
22. Disconnect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips. 23. Remove the the front seat cushion trim and
pad from the front seat cushion frame.
24. Separate the front seat cushion trim from the front seat cushion pad.
ASSEMBLY
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARD.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE
FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system
must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8899
contained in Air Bag Systems.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
^ Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
the side air bag to floor connector.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
^ A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
^ If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
All vehicles
1. Install the front seat cushion trim to the front seat cushion pad. 2. Install the front seat cushion
trim and pad to the front seat cushion frame.
3. Connect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips.
4. Install the passenger seat.
1 Position the passenger seat.
2 Install the seat track to floor bolts.
5. Position the passenger seat forward.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8900
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
6. Install the seat track to floor nuts. 7. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one
minute.
Vehicles with side air bag
8. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
9. Connect the passenger seat air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8901
10. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
11. Connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 12. Connect the
battery ground cable. 13. With the remaining special tools still in place, prove out the air bag
system. 14. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
15. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8902
16. Connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Vehicles with side air bag
17. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
18. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
19. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8903
VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND
POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
20. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
21. Install the driver air bag connector access cover.
22. Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
23. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 24. Raise the glove compartment.
^ Depress the locking tabs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8904
25. Connect the battery ground cable. 26. Prove out the air bag system. 27. Check the restraint
system for correct operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8905
Seat Cushion: Service and Repair Rear Seat Cushion
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE: 60% split bench seat shown, 40% and bench seat similar.
1. Lift up the rear seat cushion.
2. Remove the rear seat cushion.
^ Pull up on release lever and slide the seat out of the floor bracket.
3. Release the J-retainer.
4. Unzip the rear seat cushion trim.
5. Remove the rear seat cushion trim from the rear seat cushion pad.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8906
6. Remove the rear seat cushion bracket.
1 Remove the two bolts.
2 Remove the rear seat cushion bracket.
ASSEMBLY
1. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair
Seat Latch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear seat backrest.
2. Remove the rear seat backrest side trim panel.
3. Remove the rear seat backrest latch.
1 Remove the bolt.
2 Remove the nut.
3 Remove the latch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Technician Safety Information
Seat Track: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
'THE' SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARD.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF
THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Technician Safety Information > Page 8914
Seat Track: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat
Seat Track: Service and Repair Driver Seat
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
'THE' SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARD.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF
THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system
must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 8917
the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor
connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle.
^ Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
the side air bag to floor connector.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
^ A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
^ If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
^ Manual seat track shown, power seat track similar.
All vehicles
1. Position the front seats forward. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one
minute.
Vehicles with side air bag
3. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
4. Connect the special tool to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles
5. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 8918
6. Connect the special tool to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector.
7. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
8. Connect the special tool to the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector.
Vehicles with side air bag
9. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 8919
10. Connect the special tool to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles
11. Lower the glove compartment.
^ Depress the locking tabs.
12. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. Connect the special tool to
the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
14. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 8920
15. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
16. Connect the special tool to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector. 17. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the air bag system.
19. Remove the seat track to floor nuts. 20. Position the driver seat rearward. 21. If equipped with
power seats, disconnect the negative battery cable.
22. Remove the driver seat.
^ If equipped with power seats, disconnect the electrical connector.
1 Remove the seat track to floor bolts.
2 Remove the driver seat.
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 8921
in damaged components.
23. If equipped, remove the seat height adjustment control.
24. Remove the outboard seat cushion side shield.
1 Remove the seat backrest handle.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Remove the shield. ^
If equipped with a power seat, disconnect the electrical connector.
25. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield.
26. Remove the front seat backrest bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 8922
27. Remove the front seat backrest.
1 Remove the pivot nut.
2 Remove the backrest.
NOTE: If equipped with a side air bag module, note the routing of the wiring harness for installation.
28. Remove the front seat cushion pan.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the front seat cushion pan.
29. If equipped with manual seats, remove the seat adjuster.
^ Unclip the seat adjuster pins.
30. Remove the safety belt pretensioner from the seat track.
1 Remove the bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 8923
2 Remove the safety belt pretensioner.
NOTE: Note the routing of the wiring harness for installation.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARD.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF
THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system
must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
^ Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
the side air bag to floor connector.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
^ A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
^ If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 8924
1. Install the safety belt pretensioner.
1 Position the safety belt pretensioner.
2 Install the bolt.
2. If equipped with manual seats, install the seat adjuster.
^ Connect the seat adjuster pins.
3. Install the front seat cushion pan.
1 Position the front seat cushion pan.
2 Install the bolts.
4. Install the front seat backrest.
1 Install the backrest.
2 Install the pivot nut.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 8925
5. Install the front seat backrest bolts.
6. Install the inboard seat cushion side shield.
7. Install the outboard seat cushion side shield.
1 Install the shield. ^
If equipped with a power seat, connect the electrical connector.
2 Install the screw
3 Install the seat backrest handle.
8. If equipped, install the seat height adjustment control.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 8926
9. Install the driver seat.
1 Position the driver seat. ^
If equipped with power seats, connect the electrical connector.
2 Install the seat track to floor bolts.
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
10. If equipped with power seats, connect the battery ground cable. 11. Position the driver seat
forward.
12. Install the seat track to floor nuts. 13. If equipped with power seats, disconnect the battery
ground cable and wait one minute.
Vehicles with side air bag
14. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 8927
15. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
16. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
17. Connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 18. Connect the battery
ground cable. 19. With the remaining special tools still in place, prove out the air bag system. 20.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
21. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 8928
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
22. Connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Vehicles with side air bag
23. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
24. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 8929
25. Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
26. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 27. Raise the glove compartment.
^ Depress the locking tabs.
28. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 8930
29. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
30. Install the driver air bag connector access cover. 31. Connect the battery ground cable. 32.
Prove out the air bag system. 33. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 8931
Seat Track: Service and Repair Passenger Seat
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARD.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF
THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system
must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 8932
the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor
connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle.
^ Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
the side air bag to floor connector.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
^ A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
^ If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
All vehicles
1. Position the front seats forward. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one
minute.
Vehicles with side air bag
3. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
4. Connect the special tool to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles
5. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 8933
6. Connect the special tool to the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector.
7. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
8. Connect the special tool to the driver seat safety belt pretensioners body harness electrical
connector.
Vehicles with side air bag
9. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 8934
10. Connect the special tool to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles
11. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover.
12. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
13. Connect the special tool to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector. 14. Lower the glove compartment.
^ Depress the locking tabs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 8935
15. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
16. Connect the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module
electrical connector. 17. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the air bag system.
19. Remove the seat track to floor nuts. 20. Position the passenger seat rearward.
21. Remove the passenger seat.
1 Remove the seat track to floor bolts.
2 Remove the passenger seat.
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 8936
22. Remove the outboard seat cushion side shield.
1 Remove the seat backrest handle.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Remove the shield.
23. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield.
24. Remove the front seat backrest bolts.
25. Remove the front seat backrest.
1 Remove the pivot nut.
2 Remove the backrest.
NOTE: If equipped with a side air bag module, note the routing of the wiring harness for installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 8937
26. If equipped, remove the under seat storage bin.
27. Remove the front seat cushion pan.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the front seat cushion pan.
28. Remove the seat adjuster.
^ Unclip the seat adjuster pins.
29. Remove the safety belt pretensioner.
1 Remove the bolt.
2 Remove the safety belt pretensioner.
NOTE: Note the routing of the wiring harness for installation.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 8938
AFTERWARD.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF
THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system
must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
^ Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
the side air bag to floor connector.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
^ A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
^ If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
All vehicles
1. Install the safety belt pretensioner.
1 Install the safety belt pretensioner.
2 Install the bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 8939
2. Install the seat adjuster.
^ Connect the seat adjuster pins.
3. Install the front seat cushion pan.
1 Position the front seat cushion pan.
2 Install the bolts.
4. If equipped, install the under seat storage bin.
5. Install the front seat backrest.
1 Install the backrest.
2 Install the pivot nut.
6. Install the front seat backrest bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 8940
7. Install the inboard seat cushion side shield.
8. Install the outboard seat cushion side shield.
1 Install the shield.
2 Install the screw.
3 Install the seat backrest handle.
9. Install the passenger seat.
1 Position the passenger seat.
2 Install the seat track to floor bolts.
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
10. Position the passenger seat forward.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 8941
11. Install the seat track to floor nuts.
Vehicles with side air bag
12. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
13. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
14. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness
electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 8942
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
15. Connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 16. Connect the
battery ground cable. 17. With the remaining special tools still in place, prove out the air bag
system. 18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
19. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
20. Connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Vehicles with side air bag
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 8943
21. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
22. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
23. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 8944
24. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
25. Install the driver air bag connector access cover.
26. Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
27. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 28. Raise the glove compartment.
^ Depress the locking tabs.
29. Connect the battery ground cable. 30. Prove out the air bag system. 31. Check the restraint
system for correct operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page
8945
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood
Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8955
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Driver Side
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Driver Side
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Driver Side > Page 8958
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Driver Side > Page 8959
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Passenger Side
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Driver Side > Page 8960
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8964
Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8965
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 8969
Power Seat Switch: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARD.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF
THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 8970
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 8971
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 8972
Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARD.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF
THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system
must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
^ Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
the side air bag to floor connector.
^ A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
^ If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the seat control switch knob.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 8973
3. Remove the front seat cushion side shield,
1 Remove the seat backrest handle.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Remove the shield. ^
Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the seat control switch.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8977
Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8978
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Roof Opening Panel Position Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Roof Opening Panel Position Switch > Page 8983
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 8988
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Sound Proofing / Insulation: Description and Operation
INSULATION
Insulation is made of urethane, PVC, and recycled felt. Insulation is installed:
- under the roof panel.
- above and below the instrument panel.
- on the cowl sides.
- over the front and rear floor areas.
- in the A, B, and D-pillar sections.
- behind the rear quarter trim panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and
Repair
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
COWL PANEL GRILLE
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wiper pivot arms.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Remove the wiper pivot arms.
2. Remove the driver side cowl grille.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the screw caps and screws.
3 Remove the cowl grille.
3. Remove the passenger side cowl grille.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the screw caps and screws.
3 Remove the cowl grille.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Weatherstrip: > 05-22-11 > Nov > 05 > Body - Door Seal Squeaking
Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Door Seal Squeaking
TSB 05-22-11
11/14/05
DOOR SEAL SQUEAKS
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape, 2005 Escape Hybrid and Mariners may exhibit squeaks from the
shedlip seal for the doors. This seal runs along the top edge of the doors, above the top section of
the individual door inner seals. This is most likely to be noticed at slow speeds and when the body
is put into a twist.
ACTION Replace the seals.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
052211A 2001-2005 Escape, 2005 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, 2005 Mariner: Replace The Shedlip Seal For Both Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7851222 41
OASIS CODES: 110000, 702000
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Weatherstrip: > 05-22-11 > Nov > 05 > Body - Door Seal Squeaking
Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Door Seal Squeaking
TSB 05-22-11
11/14/05
DOOR SEAL SQUEAKS
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape, 2005 Escape Hybrid and Mariners may exhibit squeaks from the
shedlip seal for the doors. This seal runs along the top edge of the doors, above the top section of
the individual door inner seals. This is most likely to be noticed at slow speeds and when the body
is put into a twist.
ACTION Replace the seals.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
052211A 2001-2005 Escape, 2005 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, 2005 Mariner: Replace The Shedlip Seal For Both Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7851222 41
OASIS CODES: 110000, 702000
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams >
Deactivator Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams >
Deactivator Switch > Page 9015
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
9016
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service Precautions
CAUTION: Initial installation of a deactivator switch allows for one adjustment. If additional
adjustments are required, install a new switch.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
9017
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the deactivator switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Rotate counterclockwise 45 degrees and remove the deactivator switch.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Initial installation of a deactivator switch allows for one adjustment. If additional
adjustments are required, install a new switch.
1. Release the plunger lock.
^ Turn the lock knob counterclockwise until the first click is felt.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Install the deactivator switch.
1 Position the deactivator switch in the bracket and rotate clockwise 45 degrees.
2 Connect the electrical connector.
4. Slowly release the brake pedal and tug moderately once the pedal reaches the rest position.
NOTE: There should be an extra click heard when tugging on the brake pedal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9021
Cruise Control Servo: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Release the speed control cable cap.
1 Squeeze the speed control cable cap retaining tab.
2 Rotate the speed control cable cap.
3. Remove the speed control cable.
1 Depress the spring retainer.
2 Slide the core wire end out of the speed control servo pulley and remove the speed control cable.
4. Remove the speed control actuator assembly.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Separate the wire harness from the bracket.
3 Remove the nuts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9022
5. Remove the bolts and separate the speed control actuator from the bracket.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Recalls for Cruise Control Servo Cable: > NHTSA00V210001 > Aug > 00 > Recall 00V210001: Speed Control
Cable Corrosion/Binding
Cruise Control Servo Cable: Recalls Recall 00V210001: Speed Control Cable Corrosion/Binding
The speed control cable can have a cracked or missing speed control cable servo cap locating tab.
The locating tab could enter the servo clutch cavity and interfere with the speed control servo
clutch. Also, water could enter those units that contain a cracked or missing servo cap locating tab,
eventually causing corrosion that could interfere with the function of the speed control.
If either of these conditions occurs and the speed control is used, the speed control could prevent
the throttle from returning to idle, resulting in a stuck throttle. A stuck throttle could result in a crash.
Dealers will inspect the speed control cables. Vehicles with speed control cables from cavities 3
and 4 will have the cable the speed control servo replaced. Owner notification began August 6,
2000. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and
do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673.
Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at
1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cruise Control Servo Cable: > NHTSA00V210001 > Aug > 00 > Recall
00V210001: Speed Control Cable Corrosion/Binding
Cruise Control Servo Cable: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 00V210001: Speed Control
Cable Corrosion/Binding
The speed control cable can have a cracked or missing speed control cable servo cap locating tab.
The locating tab could enter the servo clutch cavity and interfere with the speed control servo
clutch. Also, water could enter those units that contain a cracked or missing servo cap locating tab,
eventually causing corrosion that could interfere with the function of the speed control.
If either of these conditions occurs and the speed control is used, the speed control could prevent
the throttle from returning to idle, resulting in a stuck throttle. A stuck throttle could result in a crash.
Dealers will inspect the speed control cables. Vehicles with speed control cables from cavities 3
and 4 will have the cable the speed control servo replaced. Owner notification began August 6,
2000. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and
do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673.
Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at
1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 9036
Cruise Control Servo Cable: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the speed control cable from the throttle control linkage and bracket.
2. Release the speed control cable cap.
1 Depress the speed control cable cap retaining tab.
2 Rotate the speed control cable cap.
3. Remove the speed control cable.
1 Depress the spring retainer.
2 Slide the core wire end out of the speed control servo pulley and remove the speed control cable.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service Precautions
Cruise Control Switch: Service Precautions
WARNING: WHEN CARRYING A LIVE AIR BAG, MAKE SURE THE BAG AND TRIM COVER
ARE POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL
DEPLOYMENT, THE BAG WILL THEN DEPLOY WITH MINIMAL CHANCE OF INJURY. FAILURE
TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page
9040
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the steering wheel.
2. Remove the steering wheel cover.
WARNING: WHEN CARRYING A LIVE AIR BAG, MAKE SURE THE BAG AND TRIM COVER
ARE POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL
DEPLOYMENT, THE BAG WILL THEN DEPLOY WITH MINIMAL CHANCE OF INJURY. FAILURE
TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
3. Remove the steering wheel frame.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Disconnect the ground wire.
3 Remove the steering wheel frame.
4. Disconnect the speed control switches electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page
9041
5. Remove the speed control switches.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the speed control switches.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch > Page 9047
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9048
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service Precautions
CAUTION: Initial installation of a deactivator switch allows for one adjustment. If additional
adjustments are required, install a new switch.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9049
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the deactivator switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Rotate counterclockwise 45 degrees and remove the deactivator switch.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Initial installation of a deactivator switch allows for one adjustment. If additional
adjustments are required, install a new switch.
1. Release the plunger lock.
^ Turn the lock knob counterclockwise until the first click is felt.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Install the deactivator switch.
1 Position the deactivator switch in the bracket and rotate clockwise 45 degrees.
2 Connect the electrical connector.
4. Slowly release the brake pedal and tug moderately once the pedal reaches the rest position.
NOTE: There should be an extra click heard when tugging on the brake pedal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component
Information > Service Precautions
Cruise Control Switch: Service Precautions
WARNING: WHEN CARRYING A LIVE AIR BAG, MAKE SURE THE BAG AND TRIM COVER
ARE POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL
DEPLOYMENT, THE BAG WILL THEN DEPLOY WITH MINIMAL CHANCE OF INJURY. FAILURE
TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Page 9053
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the steering wheel.
2. Remove the steering wheel cover.
WARNING: WHEN CARRYING A LIVE AIR BAG, MAKE SURE THE BAG AND TRIM COVER
ARE POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL
DEPLOYMENT, THE BAG WILL THEN DEPLOY WITH MINIMAL CHANCE OF INJURY. FAILURE
TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
3. Remove the steering wheel frame.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Disconnect the ground wire.
3 Remove the steering wheel frame.
4. Disconnect the speed control switches electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Page 9054
5. Remove the speed control switches.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the speed control switches.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Audible Warning Device: Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators; Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Charge Lamp/Indicator > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-5-5 > Mar > 01 > PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold
Temperatures
Charge Lamp/Indicator: Customer Interest PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures
Article No. 01-5-5
March 19, 2001
ELECTRICAL - CHARGING SYSTEM WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED - DURING
COLD AMBIENT TEMPERATURES BELOW - 6 DEGREES CELSIUS (20 DEGREES F.) VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH 2.0L ZETEC ENGINE BUILT 7/8/2000 THROUGH 2/12/2001 ONLY
FORD: 2001 ESCAPE
ISSUE
Some vehicles may exhibit a red charge lamp illumination in cold ambient temperatures below-6°C
(20°F). This may be caused by the calibration of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
ACTION
Verify red charge lamp illumination. If normal diagnostics cannot resolve condition, reprogram the
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with latest calibration. Refer to the PCM Calibration Information
Chart shown for details.
Obtain an Authorized Modifications Decal (FPS 8262 - obtainable through DOES II, 25/pkg) and list
the date, dealer number, and summary of modifications performed. Select a prominent place
adjacent to the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal suitable for installing the Authorized
Modifications Decal. Clean the area, install the decal, and cover it with a clear plastic decal shield.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 203000, 203100, 204000, 204200, 206000, 290000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Charge Lamp/Indicator > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 01-5-5 > Mar > 01 > PCM - Charge Lamp ON
in Cold Temperatures
Charge Lamp/Indicator: All Technical Service Bulletins PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold
Temperatures
Article No. 01-5-5
March 19, 2001
ELECTRICAL - CHARGING SYSTEM WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED - DURING
COLD AMBIENT TEMPERATURES BELOW - 6 DEGREES CELSIUS (20 DEGREES F.) VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH 2.0L ZETEC ENGINE BUILT 7/8/2000 THROUGH 2/12/2001 ONLY
FORD: 2001 ESCAPE
ISSUE
Some vehicles may exhibit a red charge lamp illumination in cold ambient temperatures below-6°C
(20°F). This may be caused by the calibration of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
ACTION
Verify red charge lamp illumination. If normal diagnostics cannot resolve condition, reprogram the
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with latest calibration. Refer to the PCM Calibration Information
Chart shown for details.
Obtain an Authorized Modifications Decal (FPS 8262 - obtainable through DOES II, 25/pkg) and list
the date, dealer number, and summary of modifications performed. Select a prominent place
adjacent to the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal suitable for installing the Authorized
Modifications Decal. Clean the area, install the decal, and cover it with a clear plastic decal shield.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 203000, 203100, 204000, 204200, 206000, 290000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Charge Lamp/Indicator > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Charge Lamp/Indicator: > 01-24-1 > Oct > 01 >
Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage
Clutch Slave Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not
Disengage
Article No. 01-24-1
12/10/01
CLUTCH - CLUTCH PEDAL STAYS ON FLOOR-NOT ABLE TO DISENGAGE CLUTCH - FLUID
LEAK FROM HYDRAULIC CLUTCH LINE
FORD: 2001 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER,
SUPER DUTY F SERIES, F-650, F-750
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a condition of not being able to disengage clutch as the clutch
pedal is stroked or the clutch pedal remains on floor. This may be caused by a roll pin that is loose
or protruding and no longer securing the clutch hydraulic line to the Clutch Master Cylinder or
External Slave Cylinder.
ACTION Check to insure clutch hydraulic line is connected to the Master Cylinder and External
Slave Cylinder and the roll pin is not loose or protruding outside the cylinder body. Check for the
proper amount of fluid in reservoir. It the hydraulic line is not connected to the Master Cylinder or
External Slave Cylinder and no fluid is present in reservoir, refer to the following Service Procedure
for details.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Use Service kit part number 2C3Z-7C522-AA. kit includes: 2 roll pins, 2 quad seals and 2 cotter
pins.
NOTE
MASTER CYLINDERS AND EXTERNAL SLAVE CYLINDERS SHOULD BE SERVICED AT THE
SAME TIME. VEHICLE LINES AFFECTED ARE ESCAPE, SUPER DUTY F-SERIES AND
F650-750.
NOTE
VEHICLE LINES EQUIPPED WITH AN INTERNAL CSC (CONCENTRIC SLAVE CYLINDER)
REQUIRE ONLY THE MASTER CYLINDER TO BE SERVICED. VEHICLE LINES AFFECTED
ARE EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, RANGER AND F150.
1. Confirm if roll pin is dislodged at clutch hydraulic system Master Cylinder and/or External Slave
Cylinder (see previous notes) and the hydraulic line is disconnected or leaking.
2. If so, refer to Workshop Manual (Section 308) for instructions on removing Master Cylinder,
External Slave Cylinder and system bleed procedure.
3. Use an 1/8" punch and small hammer to remove roll pin from Master Cylinder and External
Slave Cylinder.
4. Remove old quad seal from Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder.
5. Install new quad seal in Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder.
6. Reconnect hydraulic line and use a hammer to install a new roll pin at the Master Cylinder and
External Slave Cylinder.
7. Install a cotter pin through the center of each roll pin and secure (Master Cylinder and External
Slave Cylinder).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Charge Lamp/Indicator > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Charge Lamp/Indicator: > 01-24-1 > Oct > 01 >
Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage > Page 9077
8. Refer to Workshop Manual (Section 308) for bleed procedure and reinstall.
Labor Operation Claiming Chart
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7C522 39
OASIS CODES: 505200, 506000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Charge Lamp/Indicator > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Charge Lamp/Indicator: > 01-24-1 > Oct > 01 >
Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage > Page 9083
8. Refer to Workshop Manual (Section 308) for bleed procedure and reinstall.
Labor Operation Claiming Chart
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7C522 39
OASIS CODES: 505200, 506000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Cigarette Lighter: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9088
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9089
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9090
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9091
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9092
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9093
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9094
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9095
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9096
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9097
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9098
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9099
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9100
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9101
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9102
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9103
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9104
Cigarette Lighter: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9105
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9106
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9107
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9108
Diagram 501-12-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Customer Safety Information
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE
AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID
NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 9114
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE
AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID
NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Seats Removed
There are two deactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
side air bag concerns, and also when repairing any in-seat component in vehicles equipped with
side air bags.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal. This procedure will be used when
diagnosing a concern not related to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: ^
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag system is being serviced, the airbag system
must be deactivated using the appropriate deactivation procedure.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag floor
connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system with the seats in the
vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system, the seats must be removed
from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag floor
connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle
over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag system (lumbar,
climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the
restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air
bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the front seats. 9. Attach
a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag floor electrical connector.
10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical
connector. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical
connector. 12. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Seats Not Removed
There are two deactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
side air bag concerns, and also when repairing any in-seat component in vehicles equipped with
side air bags.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal. This procedure will be used when
diagnosing a concern not related to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position. 2. Disconnect the battery
ground cable.
WARNING: ^
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9117
SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR
STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS
DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD
LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag system is being serviced, the airbag system
must be deactivated using the appropriate deactivation procedure.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag floor
connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system with the seats in the
vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system, the seats must be removed
from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag floor
connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle
over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag system (lumbar,
climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the
restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect
the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped
with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat.
10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical
connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to
the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect
the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Depowering and Repowering Procedure
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event
of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if
equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered.
NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition
switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system
(SRS) fault.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the
cover and the restraints control module (RCM)
fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB.
4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no
flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit
continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9118
proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing or
replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side
impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair
have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected.
2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover.
4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front
of any air bag module when the
battery ground cable is connected.
Connect the battery ground cable.
5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator
and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool.
Seats Removed
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED
AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO
AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
4. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9119
5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Install the front seats. 8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring
connector.
^ Reconnect the electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
10. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 11. Reconnect the battery
ground cable. 12. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Seats Not Removed
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED
AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO
AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring
connector.
^ Reconnect the electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
4. If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 6.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9120
8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9121
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist
Air Bag Reconnect Checklist
The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system
concern: 1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3.
Restraints Control Module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors
connected? 5. All sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected?
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9122
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure
Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator
with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
^ fail to light.
^ remain lit continuously.
^ flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control
Module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an
SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag
indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 9126
Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 9127
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pin 3 using a fused (10 A) jumper to 12V DC power and pin 5 to
ground. Measure the voltage between pin 3 and pin 5 while rotating the thumbwell from full
illumination to no illumination. If the voltage smoothly decreases from near 12 volts to near 0 volts,
the illumination dimmer is okay. If not, replace the main light switch.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Customer Safety Information
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE
AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID
NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 9133
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE
AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID
NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Seats Removed
There are two deactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
side air bag concerns, and also when repairing any in-seat component in vehicles equipped with
side air bags.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal. This procedure will be used when
diagnosing a concern not related to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: ^
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag system is being serviced, the airbag system
must be deactivated using the appropriate deactivation procedure.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag floor
connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system with the seats in the
vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system, the seats must be removed
from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag floor
connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle
over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag system (lumbar,
climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the
restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air
bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the front seats. 9. Attach
a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag floor electrical connector.
10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical
connector. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical
connector. 12. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Seats Not Removed
There are two deactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
side air bag concerns, and also when repairing any in-seat component in vehicles equipped with
side air bags.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal. This procedure will be used when
diagnosing a concern not related to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position. 2. Disconnect the battery
ground cable.
WARNING: ^
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9136
SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR
STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS
DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD
LATCHES.
^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag system is being serviced, the airbag system
must be deactivated using the appropriate deactivation procedure.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag floor
connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system with the seats in the
vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system, the seats must be removed
from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag floor
connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle
over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag system (lumbar,
climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the
restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect
the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped
with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat.
10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical
connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to
the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect
the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Depowering and Repowering Procedure
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event
of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if
equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered.
NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition
switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system
(SRS) fault.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the
cover and the restraints control module (RCM)
fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB.
4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no
flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit
continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9137
proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing or
replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side
impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair
have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected.
2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover.
4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front
of any air bag module when the
battery ground cable is connected.
Connect the battery ground cable.
5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator
and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool.
Seats Removed
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED
AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO
AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
4. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9138
5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Install the front seats. 8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring
connector.
^ Reconnect the electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
10. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 11. Reconnect the battery
ground cable. 12. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Seats Not Removed
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED
AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO
AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring
connector.
^ Reconnect the electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
4. If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 6.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9139
8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9140
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist
Air Bag Reconnect Checklist
The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system
concern: 1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3.
Restraints Control Module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors
connected? 5. All sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected?
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9141
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure
Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator
with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
^ fail to light.
^ remain lit continuously.
^ flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control
Module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an
SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag
indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument
Panel Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever Indicator Bulb
Instrument Panel Bulb: Service and Repair Selector Lever Indicator Bulb
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument cluster.
2. Remove the selector lever indicator bulb.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument
Panel Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever Indicator Bulb > Page 9146
Instrument Panel Bulb: Service and Repair Instrument Cluster Bulb
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument cluster.
2. Remove the instrument cluster bulbs.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument
Panel Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever Indicator Bulb > Page 9147
Instrument Panel Bulb: Service and Repair Warning Indicator Bulb
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument cluster.
2. Remove the desired miniature bulb by turning it a quarter turn counterclockwise and lifting
straight up.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Lamp Out Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9152
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9153
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9154
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9155
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9156
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9157
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9158
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9159
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9160
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9161
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9162
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9163
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9164
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9165
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9166
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9167
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9168
Lamp Out Indicator: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9169
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9170
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9171
Lamp Out Indicator: Electrical Diagrams
Diagram 413-09-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9172
Diagram 413-09-00-2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9173
Diagram 413-09-00-3
Diagram 413-09-00-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9174
Diagram 413-09-00-5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation
SERVICE ENGINE SOON
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine's emission control system. This
is commonly known as the On Board Diagnostic System (OBD II). This OBD II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards. The
OBD II system also assists the service technician in properly servicing your vehicle.
The SERVICE ENGINE SOON indicator light illuminates when the ignition is first turned to the ON
position to check the bulb. If it comes on after the engine is started, on of the engine's emission
control systems may be malfunctioning. The light may illuminate without a driveability concern
being noted. The vehicle will ususally be drivable and will not require towing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9178
Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair
Solid SERVICE ENGINE SOON light
This means that the On Board Diagnostic System (OBD II) has detected a malfunction. Temporary
malfunctions may cause your SERVICE ENGINE SOON light to illuminate. Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel. (The engine may misfire or run poorly.) 2. Poor fuel quality or
water in the fuel. 3. The fuel cap may not have been properly installed and securely tightened.
The temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel and/or
properly installing and securely tightening the gas cap. After three driving cycles with out these or
any other temporary malfunctions present, the SERVICE ENGINE SOON light should turn off. (A
driving cycle consists of a cold engine start-up followed by mixed city/highway driving.) No
additional vehicle service is required.
Blinking SERVICE ENGINE SOON light
Engine misfire is occurring which could cause damage to your catalytic converter. You should drive
in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
at the first available opportunity.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL)
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
Check Engine, Service Engine Soon Or ISO Standard Engine Symbol
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) (Figure 15) alerts the driver that the Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) has detected an OBD II emission-related component or system fault. When this
occurs, an OBD II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set.
^ The MIL is located on the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE
SOON or ISO standard engine symbol (Figure 16).
^ Power is supplied to the MIL whenever the ignition switch is in the RUN or START position.
^ The MIL will remain on in the RUN/START mode as a bulb check during the instrument cluster
proveout for approximately 4 seconds.
^ If the MIL remains on after the bulb check: The PCM illuminates the MIL for an emission related concern and a DTC will be present.
- The instrument cluster will illuminate the MIL if the PCM does not send a control message to the
instrument cluster.
- The PCM is operating in the Hardware Limited Operation Strategy (HLOS).
- The MIL circuit is shorted to ground.
^ If the MIL remains off (during the bulb check): Bulb is damaged.
- MIL circuit is open.
^ To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the Scan Tool must be sent, or three
consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a fault.
^ For any MIL concern, GO to Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection.
^ If the MIL blinks at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition could possibly exist.
^ If the MIL blinks erratically, an intermittent open B+ to the bulb or an intermittent short to ground
in the MIL circuit exist. Also, the PCM can reset while cranking if battery voltage is low.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair
The manufacturer does NOT show that this vehicle is equipped with an oil change reminder lamp.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Specifications
Oil Pressure Sender: Specifications
Oil Pressure Sender Tightening Torque 20 ft.lb
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 9188
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 9189
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: The halfshaft is removed for clarity.
Disconnect the oil pressure sender electrical connector.
2. Remove the oil pressure sender. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9197
Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9198
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pin 3 using a fused (10 A) jumper to 12V DC power and pin 5 to
ground. Measure the voltage between pin 3 and pin 5 while rotating the thumbwell from full
illumination to no illumination. If the voltage smoothly decreases from near 12 volts to near 0 volts,
the illumination dimmer is okay. If not, replace the main light switch.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation
TRANSMISSION CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP
The Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL) is an output signal from the PCM that controls the
lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Refer to
Transmission Control Switch, PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Brake Lamp: > 02-17-6 > Sep > 02 > A/T - Inadvertent Shift Interlock Disabling
Brake Lamp: Customer Interest A/T - Inadvertent Shift Interlock Disabling
Article No. 02-17-6
09/02/02
LAMP - BRAKE - INADVERTENT DISABLING OF BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK
FORD: 1992-1993 FESTIVA 1992-1994 TEMPO 1992-1997 THUNDERBIRD 1992-2003 CROWN
VICTORIA, ESCORT, MUSTANG, TAURUS 1993-1997 PROBE 1994-1997 ASPIRE 1995-2000
CONTOUR 2002-2003 THUNDERBIRD 1992-1997 AEROSTAR 1992-2003 E SERIES 1993-1997
F SUPER DUTY 1994-1996 BRONCO 1994-1997 F-250, F-350 1994-2003 F-150 1995-2003
EXPLORER, RANGER, WINDSTAR 1997-2003 EXPEDITION 1998-1999 F-250 LD 1999-2003
SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2003 EXCURSION, EXPLORER SPORT 2001-2003 ESCAPE,
EXPLORER SPORT TRAC
LINCOLN: 1992-2003 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 1993-1998 MARK VIII 2000-2003 LS
1998-2003 NAVIGATOR
MERCURY: 1992-1994 TOPAZ 1992-1997 COUGAR 1992-1999 TRACER 1992-2003 SABLE
1993-2003 GRAND MARQUIS 1994 CAPRI 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2003 COUGAR
1993-2002 VILLAGER 1997-2003 MOUNTAINEER
Article 01-18-1 is being republished in its entirety to update the model year coverage and vehicle
line applications.
ISSUE
Corporate, municipal, or police fleets may have had their Ford Motor Company vehicle modified to
flash the brake lamps whenever the "police lights" or other aftermarket lights are turned on. These
added "police lights" have the potential to disable the brake shift interlock system. The brake shift
interlock feature prevents the vehicle from being shifted from park unless the brake pedal is
depressed. Disabling of the brake shift interlock feature may enable the operator to inadvertently
apply the accelerator instead of the brake pedal when shifting from Park to Drive or Reverse gears.
ACTION
As appropriate, dealers should advise owners (including corporate, municipal, and police agencies)
that any vehicle that has been modified with a connection to the brake circuit, or that electrically
interfaces with the brake lamps in that manner, should be disconnected IMMEDIATELY and the
emergency lighting system should be modified in a manner that does not interfere with normal
service operation or the brake shift interlock. In addition, if the high-mount stoplamp flashes when
the "police lights" are on, the modification does not conform with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Brake Lamp: > 02-17-6 > Sep > 02 > A/T - Inadvertent Shift Interlock Disabling > Page 9218
(FMVSS) 108 which requires that the high-mount stoplamp only illuminate when applying the
brakes.
Installation of warning lights should only be performed with a completely separate electrical system,
without connection to any existing vehicle wiring. Connection of aftermarket electrical equipment
into the brake lamp circuit or any other circuit which is connected to the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM), anti-lock brake computer, air bag system, or any other vehicle system, will cause vehicle
malfunction.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 01-18-1 WARRANTY STATUS:
INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 203000, 203200, 205000, 301000, 503300
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Lamp: > 02-17-6 > Sep > 02 > A/T - Inadvertent Shift Interlock Disabling
Brake Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Inadvertent Shift Interlock Disabling
Article No. 02-17-6
09/02/02
LAMP - BRAKE - INADVERTENT DISABLING OF BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK
FORD: 1992-1993 FESTIVA 1992-1994 TEMPO 1992-1997 THUNDERBIRD 1992-2003 CROWN
VICTORIA, ESCORT, MUSTANG, TAURUS 1993-1997 PROBE 1994-1997 ASPIRE 1995-2000
CONTOUR 2002-2003 THUNDERBIRD 1992-1997 AEROSTAR 1992-2003 E SERIES 1993-1997
F SUPER DUTY 1994-1996 BRONCO 1994-1997 F-250, F-350 1994-2003 F-150 1995-2003
EXPLORER, RANGER, WINDSTAR 1997-2003 EXPEDITION 1998-1999 F-250 LD 1999-2003
SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2003 EXCURSION, EXPLORER SPORT 2001-2003 ESCAPE,
EXPLORER SPORT TRAC
LINCOLN: 1992-2003 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 1993-1998 MARK VIII 2000-2003 LS
1998-2003 NAVIGATOR
MERCURY: 1992-1994 TOPAZ 1992-1997 COUGAR 1992-1999 TRACER 1992-2003 SABLE
1993-2003 GRAND MARQUIS 1994 CAPRI 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2003 COUGAR
1993-2002 VILLAGER 1997-2003 MOUNTAINEER
Article 01-18-1 is being republished in its entirety to update the model year coverage and vehicle
line applications.
ISSUE
Corporate, municipal, or police fleets may have had their Ford Motor Company vehicle modified to
flash the brake lamps whenever the "police lights" or other aftermarket lights are turned on. These
added "police lights" have the potential to disable the brake shift interlock system. The brake shift
interlock feature prevents the vehicle from being shifted from park unless the brake pedal is
depressed. Disabling of the brake shift interlock feature may enable the operator to inadvertently
apply the accelerator instead of the brake pedal when shifting from Park to Drive or Reverse gears.
ACTION
As appropriate, dealers should advise owners (including corporate, municipal, and police agencies)
that any vehicle that has been modified with a connection to the brake circuit, or that electrically
interfaces with the brake lamps in that manner, should be disconnected IMMEDIATELY and the
emergency lighting system should be modified in a manner that does not interfere with normal
service operation or the brake shift interlock. In addition, if the high-mount stoplamp flashes when
the "police lights" are on, the modification does not conform with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Lamp: > 02-17-6 > Sep > 02 > A/T - Inadvertent Shift Interlock Disabling > Page 9224
(FMVSS) 108 which requires that the high-mount stoplamp only illuminate when applying the
brakes.
Installation of warning lights should only be performed with a completely separate electrical system,
without connection to any existing vehicle wiring. Connection of aftermarket electrical equipment
into the brake lamp circuit or any other circuit which is connected to the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM), anti-lock brake computer, air bag system, or any other vehicle system, will cause vehicle
malfunction.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 01-18-1 WARRANTY STATUS:
INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 203000, 203200, 205000, 301000, 503300
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Brake Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9227
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9228
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9229
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9230
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9231
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9232
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9233
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9234
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9235
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9236
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9237
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9238
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9239
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9240
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9241
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9242
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9243
Brake Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9244
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9245
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9246
Brake Lamp: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9247
Brake Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
DETAILED DIAGRAMS
Diagram 417-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9248
Diagram 417-01-00-2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9249
Diagram 417-01-00-3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9250
Diagram 417-01-00-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9251
Diagram 417-01-00-5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9252
Diagram 417-01-00-6
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9253
Diagram 417-01-00-7
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9254
Diagram 417-01-00-8
RELATED DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9255
Diagram 413-00-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9256
Diagram 413-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Brake Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the stoplamps. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of
mechanical and electrical damage.
Visual Inspection Chart
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step. 4. If the fault is not visually evident, verify the symptom and
proceed to the Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9259
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9260
Brake Lamp: Pinpoint Tests
H1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9261
H2 - H3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9262
I1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9263
I2
J1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page
9264
73III Automotive Meter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Pedal Position Switch <--> [Brake Light Switch] > Component
Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Pedal Position Switch <--> [Brake Light Switch] > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 9268
Brake Pedal Position Switch: Description and Operation
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch
The Brake Pedal Position (BPP) switch (Figure 21) is used by the PCM to disengage the
transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control
for idle quality. On most applications the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and supplies battery
positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. On other applications the BPP switch
signal is broadcast over the SCP link via another module to be received by the PCM.
On applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all
stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor
in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stop amp bulbs has
failed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Pedal Position Switch <--> [Brake Light Switch] > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 9269
Brake Pedal Position Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Brake Pedal Position (BPP) switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Rotate clockwise and remove the BPP switch.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: Initial installation of brake pedal position (BPP) switch allows for one adjustment. If
additional adjustments are necessary, install a new switch.
1. To unlock, rotate the lock knob counterclockwise to the stop. 2. With the engine running, fully
depress and hold the brake pedal.
3. Install the brake pedal position (BPP) switch.
1 Position the BPP switch in the bracket and rotate counterclockwise.
2 Connect the electrical connector.
4. Slowly release the brake pedal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams
Cargo Lamp: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9273
Cargo Lamp: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the cargo lamp assembly from the headliner.
3. Remove the cargo lamp assembly.
1 Disconnect the electrical connectors.
2 Remove the cargo lamp assembly.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Center Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Center Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the high-mounted stoplamp assembly.
^ Remove and discard the screws and washers.
2. Remove the high-mounted stoplamp bulb holder from the lamp assembly by disengaging the
snaps.
3. Remove the bulb(s).
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cornering Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Cornering Lamp: Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Lighting and Horns; Turn Signals; Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Courtesy Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9285
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9286
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9287
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9288
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9289
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9290
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9291
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9292
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9293
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9294
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9295
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9296
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9297
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9298
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9299
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9300
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9301
Courtesy Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9302
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9303
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9304
Courtesy Lamp: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9305
Diagram 417-02-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9306
Courtesy Lamp: Description and Operation
The Generic Electronic Module (GEM) supplies voltage and ground to the interior courtesy lamps
when any of the following inputs are received:
^ any door becomes ajar
^ liftgate or liftgate glass becomes ajar
^ remote keyless entry unlock signal is received
^ a key cylinder switch is turned to UNLOCK
All interior courtesy lamps are turned off when any of the following occurs:
^ all the doors, liftgate and liftgate glass are closed
^ the ignition switch is turned to RUN
^ a key cylinder switch is turned to LOCK
^ remote keyless entry lock signal is received
The illuminated entry feature is another feature which activates the interior lamps. This feature
operates as follows:
The GEM illuminates the interior lamps at 80 percent brightness when an unlock signal is received
from a remote keyless entry transmitter, key cylinder switch, or door handle lifted when locked. If
no door ajar signal is received the GEM will time out and turn the interior lights off. The illuminated
entry feature will be canceled when any of the following conditions are met:
^ the remote transmitter lock button is pressed and the courtesy lamp control is not activated.
^ the ignition is in the RUN or START position and the interior lamp control is not activated.
Battery Saver
The GEM is equipped with a battery saver which will turn the lights off after 45 minutes of inactivity.
This feature is an internal function of the GEM software.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Courtesy Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of
mechanical and electrical damage.
Visual Inspection Chart
3. If an obvious cause for an observed of reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step. 4. If the diagnostic tool does not power up, refer to the
diagnostic tool manual. 5. Carry out the DATA LINK DIAGNOSTICS test. See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Module Communication
Network/Testing and Inspection/Module Communications Network/Pinpoint Tests/Pinpoint Test PC
(Precheck) If the diagnostic tool responds with: ^
CKT914, CKT915 or CKT70 = ALL ECUS NO RESP/NOT EQUIP, refer to Module
Communications Network (Information Bus).
^ NO RESP/NOT EQUIP for GEM, Refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Module (General
Module).
^ SYSTEM PASSED, retrieve and record the continuous Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), erase
the continuous DTCs, and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the GEM.
6. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the GEM Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Index to continue diagnostics. See: Diagnostic
Trouble Code Descriptions
7. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, proceed to the Symptom Chart to continue
diagnostics. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic
Procedures
8. If the DTCs are retrieved that are not found in the following GEM Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Index, refer to the master GEM Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) Index in Multifunction Electronic Control Module (General Module).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9309
DTC Index B1317 - B1571
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9310
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9311
Courtesy Lamp: Pinpoint Tests
Test A: Interior Lamps Are Inoperative
A1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9312
A2 - A3
A3 - A4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9313
A5 - A6
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9314
A6 - A8
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9315
A8
Test B: Interior Lamps Stay On Continuously - Do Not Fade Out
B1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9316
B2 - B3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9317
B4 - B5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9318
B6 - B7
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9319
B8 - B10
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9320
B11 - B12
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9321
B13 - B15
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9322
B16 - B17
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9323
B18 - B20
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9324
B21 - B22
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9325
B23 - B25
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9326
B26 - B27
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9327
B28 - B30
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9328
B31 - B32
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9329
B33 - B35
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9330
B35 - B36
Test C: Courtesy Lamp Do Not Turn ON With One Door Open
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9331
C1 - C2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9332
C2 - C4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9333
C4
D1 - D2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9334
D2
Test E: Demand Lighting Is Inoperative
E1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9335
E2 - E4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9336
E4
F1 - F2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9337
F2 - F3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page
9338
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit >
Component Information > Locations > Page 9343
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit >
Component Information > Locations > Page 9344
Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the nut and the DRL module.
^ Disconnect the electrical connectors.
^ Transfer parts as necessary.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 9348
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 9349
Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 9350
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9354
Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9355
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pin 3 using a fused (10 A) jumper to 12V DC power and pin 5 to
ground. Measure the voltage between pin 3 and pin 5 while rotating the thumbwell from full
illumination to no illumination. If the voltage smoothly decreases from near 12 volts to near 0 volts,
the illumination dimmer is okay. If not, replace the main light switch.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Battery Discharge Protection Relay, Lighting > Component Information >
Application and ID
Battery Discharge Protection Relay: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control
Modules (General Module).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Dome Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9363
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9364
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9365
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9366
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9367
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9368
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9369
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9370
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9371
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9372
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9373
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9374
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9375
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9376
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9377
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9378
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9379
Dome Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9380
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9381
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9382
Diagram 417-02-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Exterior Lighting Module > Component Information > Application and ID
Exterior Lighting Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control
Modules (General Module).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Exterior Lighting Module > Component Information > Application and ID >
Page 9386
Exterior Lighting Module: Testing and Inspection
Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Technician Safety Information
WARNING: THE HALOGEN FOG LAMP BULB CONTAINS GAS UNDER PRESSURE. THE BULB
MAY SHATTER IF THE GLASS ENVELOPE IS SCRATCHED OR IF THE BULB IS DROPPED.
HANDLE THE BULB CAREFULLY. GRASP THE BULB ONLY BY ITS BASE. AVOID TOUCHING
THE GLASS ENVELOPE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 9392
Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: The fog lamp bulb should not be removed from the fog lamp until just before a new bulb
is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect fog lamp bulb
performance. Contaminants may enter the fog lamp where they can settle on the lens and reflector.
Never turn on the fog lamps with the bulb removed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Page 9393
Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING: THE HALOGEN FOG LAMP BULB CONTAINS GAS UNDER PRESSURE. THE BULB
MAY SHATTER IF THE GLASS ENVELOPE IS SCRATCHED OR IF THE BULB IS DROPPED.
HANDLE THE BULB CAREFULLY. GRASP THE BULB ONLY BY ITS BASE. AVOID TOUCHING
THE GLASS ENVELOPE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
CAUTION: The fog lamp bulb should not be removed from the fog lamp until just before a new bulb
is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect fog lamp bulb
performance. Contaminants may enter the fog lamp where they can settle on the lens and reflector.
Never turn on the fog lamps with the bulb removed.
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Position the inner fender well aside.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the pin-type retainers.
3 Remove the screw.
4 Position the inner fender well aside.
3. Remove the lamp socket from the lamp assembly.
^ Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information >
Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 9397
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 9398
Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 9399
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure
voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the
relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is
12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 9403
Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service Precautions
CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to remove fog lamp switch or damage to the finish panel may
occur. Adding tape to the end of a thin tool will reduce marring to the finish panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 9404
Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to remove fog lamp switch or damage to the finish panel may
occur. Adding tape to the end of a thin tool will reduce marring to the finish panel.
2. Use a thin tool to remove the fog lamp switch.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component
Information > Locations > Page 9409
Hazard Warning Flasher: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 9413
Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Position the instrument panel center finish panel rearward from the instrument panel.
3. Remove the Hazard flasher switch.
1. Disconnect Electrical connector. 2. Remove the hazard flasher switch.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Headlamp Bulb: Technician Safety Information
WARNING: THE HALOGEN HEADLAMP BULB CONTAINS GAS UNDER PRESSURE. THE
BULB MAY SHATTER IF THE GLASS ENVELOPE IS SCRATCHED OR IF THE BULB IS
DROPPED. HANDLE THE BULB CAREFULLY. GRASP THE BULB ONLY BY ITS BASE. AVOID
TOUCHING THE GLASS ENVELOPE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY
RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 9419
Headlamp Bulb: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: The headlamp bulb should not be removed from the headlamp until just before a new
bulb is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect headlamp bulb
performance. Contaminants may enter the headlamp where they can settle on the lens and
reflector. Never turn on the headlamps with the bulb removed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 9420
Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING: THE HALOGEN HEADLAMP BULB CONTAINS GAS UNDER PRESSURE. THE
BULB MAY SHATTER IF THE GLASS ENVELOPE IS SCRATCHED OR IF THE BULB IS
DROPPED. HANDLE THE BULB CAREFULLY. GRASP THE BULB ONLY BY ITS BASE. AVOID
TOUCHING THE GLASS ENVELOPE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY
RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
CAUTION: The headlamp bulb should not be removed from the headlamp until just before a new
bulb is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect headlamp bulb
performance. Contaminants may enter the headlamp where they can settle on the lens and
reflector. Never turn on the headlamps with the bulb removed.
1. Disconnect the headlamp electrical connector.
NOTE: Make sure that the headlamp switch and the ignition switch are in the OFF position.
2. Remove the rubber boot.
3. Depress the retainer clip and position aside.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 9421
4. Remove the bulb.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 9425
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 9426
Headlamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 9427
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure
voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the
relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is
12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection
Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Page 9431
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9436
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9437
Horn Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9438
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure
voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the
relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is
12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Application and ID
Interior Lighting Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control
Modules (General Module).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Application and ID >
Page 9442
Interior Lighting Module: Testing and Inspection
Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Control Module > Component Information > Application and ID
Lamp Control Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control
Modules (General Module).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Lamp Out Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9450
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9451
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9452
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9453
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9454
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9455
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9456
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9457
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9458
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9459
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9460
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9461
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9462
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9463
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9464
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9465
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9466
Lamp Out Indicator: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9467
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9468
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9469
Lamp Out Indicator: Electrical Diagrams
Diagram 413-09-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9470
Diagram 413-09-00-2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9471
Diagram 413-09-00-3
Diagram 413-09-00-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9472
Diagram 413-09-00-5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
License Plate Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9477
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9478
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9479
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9480
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9481
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9482
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9483
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9484
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9485
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9486
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9487
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9488
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9489
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9490
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9491
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9492
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9493
License Plate Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9494
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9495
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9496
License Plate Lamp: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9497
License Plate Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
DETAILED DIAGRAMS
Diagram 417-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9498
Diagram 417-01-00-2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9499
Diagram 417-01-00-3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9500
Diagram 417-01-00-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9501
Diagram 417-01-00-5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9502
Diagram 417-01-00-6
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9503
Diagram 417-01-00-7
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9504
Diagram 417-01-00-8
RELATED DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9505
Diagram 413-00-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 9506
Diagram 413-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9507
License Plate Lamp: Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Lighting and Horns; Parking Lamp; Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9508
License Plate Lamp: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the license plate lamp assembly.
^ Push the license lamp to the right and pull out.
2. Disconnect the socket from the lens.
^ Remove the bulb.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Map Light: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9513
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9514
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9515
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9516
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9517
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9518
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9519
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9520
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9521
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9522
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9523
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9524
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9525
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9526
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9527
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9528
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9529
Map Light: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9530
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9531
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9532
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9533
Diagram 417-02-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9534
Map Light: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the interior/map reading lamp lens.
3. Remove the interior/map reading lamp assembly.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the interior/map reading lamp. ^
Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair
Marker Lamp: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Position the inner fender well aside.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the pin-type retainers.
3 Remove the screw.
4 Position the inner fender well aside.
3. Remove the lamp socket from the lamp assembly.
4. Remove the bulb.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 9542
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 9543
Parking Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 9544
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure
voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the
relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is
12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Battery Discharge Protection
Relay, Lighting > Component Information > Application and ID
Battery Discharge Protection Relay: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control
Modules (General Module).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Control Unit > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 9552
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 9553
Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the nut and the DRL module.
^ Disconnect the electrical connectors.
^ Transfer parts as necessary.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay
> Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay
> Component Information > Locations > Page 9557
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay
> Component Information > Locations > Page 9558
Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay
> Component Information > Locations > Page 9559
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Exterior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Application and ID
Exterior Lighting Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control
Modules (General Module).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Exterior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Application and ID > Page 9563
Exterior Lighting Module: Testing and Inspection
Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 9567
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 9568
Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 9569
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure
voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the
relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is
12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 9573
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 9574
Headlamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 9575
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure
voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the
relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is
12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 9579
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 9580
Horn Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 9581
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure
voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the
relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is
12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Application and ID
Interior Lighting Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control
Modules (General Module).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Application and ID > Page 9585
Interior Lighting Module: Testing and Inspection
Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Lamp Control Module >
Component Information > Application and ID
Lamp Control Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control
Modules (General Module).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 9592
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 9593
Parking Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 9594
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure
voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the
relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is
12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Pedal Position Switch
<--> [Brake Light Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Pedal Position Switch
<--> [Brake Light Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9602
Brake Pedal Position Switch: Description and Operation
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch
The Brake Pedal Position (BPP) switch (Figure 21) is used by the PCM to disengage the
transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control
for idle quality. On most applications the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and supplies battery
positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. On other applications the BPP switch
signal is broadcast over the SCP link via another module to be received by the PCM.
On applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all
stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor
in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stop amp bulbs has
failed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Pedal Position Switch
<--> [Brake Light Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9603
Brake Pedal Position Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Brake Pedal Position (BPP) switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Rotate clockwise and remove the BPP switch.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: Initial installation of brake pedal position (BPP) switch allows for one adjustment. If
additional adjustments are necessary, install a new switch.
1. To unlock, rotate the lock knob counterclockwise to the stop. 2. With the engine running, fully
depress and hold the brake pedal.
3. Install the brake pedal position (BPP) switch.
1 Position the BPP switch in the bracket and rotate counterclockwise.
2 Connect the electrical connector.
4. Slowly release the brake pedal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9607
Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service Precautions
CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to remove fog lamp switch or damage to the finish panel may
occur. Adding tape to the end of a thin tool will reduce marring to the finish panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9608
Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to remove fog lamp switch or damage to the finish panel may
occur. Adding tape to the end of a thin tool will reduce marring to the finish panel.
2. Use a thin tool to remove the fog lamp switch.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9612
Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Position the instrument panel center finish panel rearward from the instrument panel.
3. Remove the Hazard flasher switch.
1. Disconnect Electrical connector. 2. Remove the hazard flasher switch.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9616
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Turn Signal Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9620
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Tail Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9625
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9626
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9627
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9628
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9629
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9630
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9631
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9632
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9633
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9634
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9635
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9636
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9637
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9638
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9639
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9640
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9641
Tail Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9642
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9643
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9644
Tail Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
DETAILED DIAGRAMS
Diagram 417-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9645
Diagram 417-01-00-2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9646
Diagram 417-01-00-3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9647
Diagram 417-01-00-4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9648
Diagram 417-01-00-5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9649
Diagram 417-01-00-6
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9650
Diagram 417-01-00-7
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9651
Diagram 417-01-00-8
RELATED DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9652
Diagram 413-00-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9653
Diagram 413-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9654
Tail Lamp: Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Lighting and Horns; Parking Lamp; Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9655
Tail Lamp: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear lamp assembly.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Pull straight back to remove the rear lamp assembly. ^
Disconnect the electrical connectors.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Trailer Lamps: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the trailer tow lights. 2. Verify the exterior lighting
system of the vehicle is operating correctly. If not, refer to the appropriate pinpoint test. See:
Pinpoint Tests 3. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Electrical ^
Central Junction Box (CJB) fuse: 21 (10A)
- 16 (10A)
^ Connections
^ Circuity
^ Relays
^ Bulb(s)
4. If the fault is not visually evident, determine the symptom and proceed to the Symptom Chart.
See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9660
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9661
Trailer Lamps: Pinpoint Tests
Connector Circuit Reference
Refer to Vehicle/Diagrams for schematic and connector information.
Z1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9662
AA1 - AA2
AC1
AC1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9663
AD1
AE1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9664
AE1 - AE2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9665
73III Automotive Meter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page
9666
73III Automotive Meter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Trunk Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9671
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9672
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9673
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9674
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9675
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9676
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9677
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9678
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9679
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9680
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9681
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9682
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9683
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9684
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9685
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9686
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9687
Trunk Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9688
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9689
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9690
Diagram 417-02-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Locations
> Page 9695
Turn Signal Flasher: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Position the inner fender well aside.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the pin-type retainers.
3 Remove the screw.
4 Position the inner fender well aside.
3. Remove the lamp socket from the lamp assembly.
4. Remove the bulb.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection
Turn Signal Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Page 9703
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Vanity Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Find and Use These Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
^ System Diagrams
^ Grounds Diagrams
Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It
is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of
diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they
influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9708
Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit
such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the
diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts,
power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams.
Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if
the Ignition Switch were OFF).
Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown
completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram
where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow.
Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a
particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the
diagram.
Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each
component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here.
Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component
identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number
in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be
found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9709
Fuse And Relay Information
Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the
fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses.
Fuse Circuits
Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The
circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the
fuse and the first component are shown.
Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery.
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A
thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text
"partial".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9710
Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of
(1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces).
The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can
physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and
cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the
connector housing is indicated next to the connector number.
Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or
pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the
way out by a spring.
Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and
fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to
the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors
work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo
Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.
A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the
top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the
way in.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
circuit Numbering
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification
Circuit Numbering:
Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The
system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to
assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting
electrical circuits. Function:
The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter
"S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the
most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit.
System-Connection (including branch):
Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code
is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate
wires in one connection with the same function.
Wire Identification (wire colors):
The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined
directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the
wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757.
Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to
differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9711
Wire Identification Example
Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know
the following information about the wire:
Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit
System: AC = Headlamp leveling
Connection: 3 = Switch connection
A = Branch
Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm
Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe).
Circuit Identification Charts
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9712
Circuit Identification Chart
System Codes Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9713
Sample Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9714
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9715
Sample Diagram
Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
Circuit Identification Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9716
Circuit Identification Chart
SYSTEM CODES CHART
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9717
SAMPLE DIAGRAMS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9718
Sample Diagram
Sample Diagram
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9719
Sample Diagram
Electrical Symbols
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9720
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9721
Symbols
Symbols
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9722
Types of Diagrams Shown
Types of Diagrams Shown
Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams
provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them.
Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations.
Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system
information suitable for diagnostic operations.
Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a
relationship to them, are also included.
All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding
of the system component interactions.
Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type.
Wire Color Code Identification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9723
Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural
OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9724
Vanity Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9725
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9726
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 9727
Diagram 417-02-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 9733
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 9734
Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 9735
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 9739
Heated Glass Element Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the audio unit.
2. Push outward on the rear window defrost switch to remove it from the instrument panel center
finish panel.
^ Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair
Rear Defogger: Technical Service Bulletins A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair
TSB 04-24-5
12/13/04
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER GRID/INTEGRAL ANTENNA DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR TERMINAL TAB REPAIR
FORD: 1999-2000 Contour 1999-2002 Escort 1999-2003 Escort ZX2 1999-2005 Crown Victoria,
Mustang, Taurus 2000-2005 Focus 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2005
Expedition, Explorer 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Escape
2004-2005 F-150, Freestar 2005 Escape Hybrid
LINCOLN: 1999-2002 Continental 1999-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS 1999-2005 Navigator
2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1999 Tracer 1999-2000 Mystique 1999-2005 and Marquis, Sable 2005 Montego
1999-2002 Villager 1999-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 04-18-9 to update vehicle applications and service procedure.
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit inoperative electric rear window defroster (heated back lite) grid
lines, integral antenna concerns causing radio reception issues or terminal tabs pulled from the
rear window glass.
ACTION Follow the diagnostic and repair procedures included in this article to inspect and service
rear defroster grid lines, integral antenna concerns or broken terminal tabs.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Warrantable/Non Warrantable repairs
Warrantable grid line repairs typically can be identified by one inoperative grid line with a small
discoloration at the area of concern, approximately the size of a pinhead. Grid line(s) that are
scratched or have the silver material removed are not warrantable and should be addressed with
the customer. Replacement of backglass for grid line or bus bar tarnishing is not a warrantable
repair. Tarnishing of the silver lines or bus bars is a normal condition. Please refer to the Heated
Back Lite Damageability Job Aid for additional information and examples of defects and damage.
NOTE
THE GRID LINE MATERIAL IS NOT EMBEDDED INTO THE GLASS BUT IS BAKED TO THE
GLASS SURFACE AND CONSEQUENTLY CAN BE SCRAPED OFF. INOPERATIVE LINES MAY
APPEAR TO THE EYE TO BE UNDAMAGED DUE TO RESIDUE REMAINING ON
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair > Page 9744
THE GLASS AND WILL REQUIRE DIAGNOSIS WITH A VOLTMETER OR 12V TEST LAMP AS
EXPLAINED IN THIS ARTICLE.
Examples Of Non-Warrantable Grid Line Damage
^ Ice scraper damage to grid lines
^ Animal scratches on grid lines
^ Window tint film/removal of the film which damages grid lines
^ Stickers placed over grids which upon removal, removes the grid line material
^ License plate (steel type placed against the inside of back glass) which rubs on the grid line
causing damage
^ Temporary license plate (paper stuck on to the inside of the back glass) which upon removal
removes grid line material
^ Cargo or lumber rubbing against the glass which removes grid line material
^ Cellular phone antenna installation/removal which damages grid line material
NOTE
AN UNDAMAGED GRIDLINE WILL HAVE SMALL RIDGES THAT PROJECT ABOVE THE
SURFACE OF THE GLASS AND CAN EASILY BE FELT WHEN RUNNING A FINGERNAIL
ACROSS THEM.
GRIDLINES THAT HAVE BEEN "RAZOR BLADED" WILL FEEL SMOOTH WHEN A FINGERNAIL
IS DRAGGED ACROSS THE AFFECTED AREA. THERE MAY BE SOME RESIDUE LEFT ON
THE GLASS THAT APPEARS TO BE GRID MATERIAL BUT A CHECK WITH A VOLTMETER OR
12V TEST LAMP, AS EXPLAINED IN THIS ARTICLE, WILL CONFIRM AN OPEN CIRCUIT. GRID
LINE INOPERATIVE - DIAGNOSTICS
1. Reference Workshop Manual Section 501-11 and the Wiring Diagram Section 56 to verify power
and ground to the back-glass.
2. Connect a test lamp or DVOM to a good body ground.
3. Turn the ignition key to the run position and depress and release the rear defroster button to turn
the system on. THE GRID IS ENERGIZED FOR APPROXIMATELY 10 MINUTES EACH TIME
THE DEFROSTER BUTTON IS PRESSED.
4. Starting from the top grid line at the center of the back-glass, touch the test lamp or DVOM +
lead to each grid line. (Use caution not to damage grid lines). The DVOM should read
approximately 1/2 of the battery voltage on each line at the center of the back-glass. If using a test
light, the bulb should be approximately the same brightness on each line from top to bottom. If the
DVOM or light indicates a high voltage or no voltage on any grid line, move along the concern grid
line with the + test lead or test lamp until the voltage changes suddenly. This is the area of
concern, use chalk to mark the area of concern and mark the outside of the glass at that same
area.
5. Repair per the Grid Line Repair Procedure.
GRID LINE REPAIR PROCEDURE
NOTE
LONG GAPS ARE ALMOST ALWAYS DUE TO DAMAGE AND ARE NOT WARRANTABLE,
HOWEVER THEY CAN BE REPAIRED. THE LONGER THE GAP THE MORE IMPORTANT IT IS
TO APPLY A MINIMUM SIX (6) COATS OF CONDUCTIVE REPAIR MATERIAL WITH THE FIVE
(5) MINUTE DRY TIME BETWEEN EACH COAT. APPLYING LESS COATS OR NOT ALLOWING
DRY TIME BETWEEN COATS WILL PRODUCE REPAIRED RESISTANCE THAT IS GREATER
THAN OEM RESISTANCE, RESULTING IN POOR DEFROST PERFORMANCE AND
EXCESSIVE LOCALIZED HEATING. REPAIRED LONG GAPS ARE GENERALLY NOT
VISUALLY PLEASING UNLESS EXTREME CARE IS TAKEN WHEN TAPING AFFECTED GRID
LINE AREAS.
NOTE
IF THE BROWN COLOR UNDER THE GRID LINE IS DAMAGED OR MISSING (THIS IS VERY
RARE), IT WILL BE NECESSARY TO APPLY BROWN ACRYLIC LACQUER TOUCH-UP PAINT
FOR COLOR MATCH. THIS PAINT MUST MEET SPECIFICATION ESR-M2P100-C AND
SHOULD BE APPLIED TO THE GLASS PRIOR TO APPLYING THE REAR WINDOW
DEFROSTER REPAIR COMPOUND.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair > Page 9745
Service inoperative grid lines on rear window glass using Motorcraft Defroster Repair PM-11 or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESB-M4J58-A as follows:
Surface Preparation
1. Bring vehicle inside and warm it to 60° F (16° C) or above.
2. Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of
the rear window glass as this may cause damage to the grid lines. Clean the entire grid line service
area with Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC-23 or equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESR-M14P5-A to remove all dirt, wax, grease, oil or other foreign matter. It is important that the
repair area be clean and dry.
NOTE
THE REPAIR AREA HOWEVER SHOULD BE CLEANED WITH STEEL WOOL OR AN ABRASIVE
PAD SUCH AS SCOTCHBRITE TO REMOVE GRIME.
Mixing
The bottle of Rear Window Defroster Repair compound and touch-up paint (if needed) must be at
room temperature. Shake the bottle for at least one (1) minute for thorough mixing. Shake
frequently during use.
Application
1. Mark location of open grid on the outside of the back window glass (performed in diagnostics).
Place protective covering over the package tray as necessary.
2. Using "fine line tape", mask off the area directly above and below open grid line (Figure 1). It is
best to extend the tape 26 mm (1") beyond the concern area in both directions. The open should
be at the center of the mask and tape gap must be no wider than the existing grid line. Other types
of tape may be used but end results of the repair may not appear as visually acceptable due to
ease of application and tape edge finish.
3. If the brown layer of the grid is not broken or missing, apply only the silver grid repair compound
to the open grid line. Apply the correct coating in several smooth continuous strokes (allowing five
(5) minutes drying time between coats) across the open grid line area using the brush applicator in
the cap. Extend the service coating at least 6 mm (.25") on both sides of the open grid line area.
Apply a minimum of six (6) coats of the grid repair compound.
4. If both brown and silver layers of the grid are broken or missing, apply a coating of brown
lacquer touch-up paint across the open line area first. Take care to paint only the area missing the
color. Two (2) coats may be necessary to obtain the proper color. Allow the touch-up paint to dry at
least five (5) minutes between coats. Apply six (6) coats of grid repair compound.
NOTE
THE INTERIOR SIDE OF THE GRID LINES ARE NOT PAINTED, BUT DUE TO THE SILVER
TARNISHING WILL TEND TO CHANGE THE GRID TO A GOLD OR BROWN COLOR. THE
REPAIRED AREA WILL BE BRIGHT SILVER AND WILL ALSO TARNISH OVER
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair > Page 9746
TIME TO MATCH THE REST OF THE GRID.
5. After five (5) minutes of dry time of the final coat of grid repair compound, remove the tape, step
outside and inspect the repaired area. If the repair compound is visible above or below the grid, the
excess can be removed. This may be done by placing a single-edge razor blade on the back
window glass parallel to grid and scrape gently toward grid. A wider/thicker line will perform better
but may not be cosmetically appealing.
CAUTION
BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE GRID LINE WITH RAZOR BLADE. VERIFY ALL OF THE GRID
LINES FUNCTION PROPERLY WHEN FINISHED.
Curing
The service coating will air-dry in approximately one (1) minute and the system can be energized
after five minutes. Maximum hardness and adhesion occur after approximately 24 hours.
SOLDER METHOD OF LEAD TERMINAL
NOTE
THE REAR WINDOW MUST BE AT A MINIMUM OF 60° F (16° C) BEFORE A REPAIR IS MADE.
PLACE PROTECTIVE COVERING OVER THE PACKAGE TRAY AS NECESSARY.
The new terminal will cover the original terminal location, but must be placed so that the new
terminal conductive areas will be placed on a good conductive base. This area should be cleaned
with steel wool or an abrasive pad to remove grime from the buss-bar. The area should then be
cleaned with Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23, or equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESR-M14P5-A to remove all dirt, wax, grease, oil or other foreign matter. It is important that the
repair area be clean and dry and appear metallic. Depending on the buss-bar condition, rigorous
polishing with steel wool may be required. Please note that the entire buss-bar may be cleaned to
improve appearance.
CAUTION
DO NOT USE ANY TYPE OF FLAME TORCH OR FLAME HEATED SOLDERING GUN FOR THIS
PROCEDURE. TESTING INDICATED INADEQUATE HEAT GENERATION AT THE TIP AND THE
EXHAUST HEAT CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO PLASTIC TRIM PARTS IN THE AREA. USE ONLY
AN ELECTRIC SOLDERING GUN WITH 100 WATTS OR MORE OF POWER.
BEFORE USING THE SOLDERING GUN, BE SURE TO MELT A SMALL AMOUNT OF ROSIN
CORE SOLDER TO THE TIP. THE SOLDER WILL ASSIST IN ACHIEVING BETTER HEAT
TRANSFER FROM THE SOLDERING GUN TIP TO THE NEW TERMINAL.
The new terminal has pre-applied solder, flux and temperature sensitive paint. The paint provides a
visual indication when the terminal has reached the proper temperature to melt the solder on the
terminal. When the proper temperature is achieved the temperature paint will liquefy and change
color.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair > Page 9747
Use terminal type A (Figure 2) for all tab locations except on the Focus vehicle line. For the Focus,
use type B (Figure 3).
NOTE
DEPENDING ON THE ORIGINAL TERMINAL LOCATION, AND WHETHER THE TERMINAL IS
COVERED BY PILLAR TRIM, WILL DETERMINE WHERE TO LOCATE THE NEW TERMINAL.
SOME GRID LINE BUSS-BARS MAY ONLY ALLOW THE PLACEMENT OF THE TERMINAL
ABOVE OR BELOW THE ORIGINAL TAB LOCATION DUE TO SPACE LIMITATIONS, BUT FOR
MOST VEHICLE APPLICATIONS THE REPLACEMENT TAB LOCATION WILL COVER THE
ORIGINAL TAB LOCATION BUT STILL ALLOW THE REPLACEMENT TAB TO ATTACH TO THE
BUSS-BAR ON GOOD CONDUCTIVE MATERIAL.
1. Place the replacement terminal over the original tab location making sure the conductive areas
of the terminal will be on a good conductive area. Do not place the terminal tab foot on the original
location which does not have conductive material (figure 4).
2. Hold the terminal in place with an item such as regular lead pencil at a 90 degree angle from the
terminal. (Terminal type B can be held in place with tape.) (Holding at other than a 90 degree angle
may allow the terminal to slip when the solder liquefies).
3. Place the soldering gun tip on the top of the terminal but not on the painted areas of the tab.
Energize the soldering gun and watch for the painted area of the terminal to liquefy and change
color. The paint should liquefy in approximately 25-45 seconds after heating. As soon as the paint
color completely changes on either side of the terminal, de-energize the soldering gun and
continue to hold the terminal in place with the soldering gun and pencil for an additional thirty (30)
seconds.
4. Remove the soldering gun and pencil from the terminal. The terminal should be allowed to cool
for another two (2) minutes before the wiring lead is attached to the terminal.
5. Attach the electrical lead connection to this terminal, turn on the rear defroster, and verify
operation.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair > Page 9748
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042405A Repair Grid Lines (Includes 0.7 Hr.
Time To Diagnose And Recheck)
042405B Replace Terminal (Includes 0.4 Hr.
Time To Diagnose And Recheck)
042405C Repair Grid Lines And 0.8 Hr.
Replace Terminal (Includes Time To Diagnose And Recheck)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7042006 28
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay
> Component Information > Locations
Diagram 700-01-00-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay
> Component Information > Locations > Page 9753
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay
> Component Information > Locations > Page 9754
Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay
> Component Information > Locations > Page 9755
COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied)
Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground.
Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not,
replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86.
If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9760
Heated Glass Element Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the audio unit.
2. Push outward on the rear window defrost switch to remove it from the instrument panel center
finish panel.
^ Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 9765
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Adjust Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 9766
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Left Rear
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 9769
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 9770
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 9771
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 9772
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Passenger Side
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 9773
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 9774
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Right Rear
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 9775
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9776
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
NOTE: The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar.
Front door
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
All doors
2. Release the locking clip and remove the window control switch.
^ Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 9783
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 9788
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Adjust Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 9789
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Left Rear
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Left Rear
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 9792
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 9793
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 9794
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 9795
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Passenger Side
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 9796
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 9797
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Right Rear
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 9798
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Page 9799
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
NOTE: The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar.
Front door
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
All doors
2. Release the locking clip and remove the window control switch.
^ Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Frame > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Door Glass Top Run
Window Frame: Service and Repair Front Door Glass Top Run
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door window glass. 2. Remove the front door interior sail panel.
^ If equipped, disconnect the speaker electrical connector.
3. Remove the door glass top run bolts.
4. Remove the door glass top run.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Frame > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Door Glass Top Run > Page 9804
Window Frame: Service and Repair Rear Door Glass Top Run
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door window regulator.
2. Position the rear door window glass to the full down position.
3. Remove the screws and the rear door exterior sail panel.
4. Remove the rear door interior glass weatherstrip.
5. Remove the rear door exterior belt line moulding.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Frame > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Door Glass Top Run > Page 9805
6. Remove the rear door glass top run bolts.
7. Position the rear door window glass down and forward.
8. Remove the rear door glass top run.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > System
Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the exterior mirror.
2. Remove the screw and the door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside.
4. Remove the front door interior glass weatherstrip.
5. Remove the front door exterior belt line moulding. 6. Lower the front door window glass to gain
access to the screws.
7. Remove the front door window glass screws.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 9810
8. Remove the front door window glass.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Open the liftgate glass.
2. Remove the two liftgate nut access covers (one on each side).
3. Disconnect the rear window glass electrical harness connector.
4. Disconnect the heated window grid wire electrical connector.
5. Disconnect the two liftgate window glass cylinders.
1 Slide the spring retainer to the end of the socket.
2 Disconnect the socket from the ball stud.
NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 9814
6. Remove the two liftgate window glass hinge nuts.
NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Transfer components as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair
REAR QUARTER WINDOW GLASS
REMOVAL
1. Remove the C-pillar trim panel. 2. Remove the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Remove the rear quarter window glass.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Remove the window glass.
4. Remove the excess foam butyl from the rear quarter window opening.
INSTALLATION
1. Apply foam butyl or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSB-M2G234-C to the rear quarter
window opening.
NOTE: When applying foam butyl, leave a slight overlap at the rear of the window opening to allow
drainage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 9818
2. Install the rear quarter window glass.
^ Tighten the nuts in the sequence shown.
NOTE: Loosely install the nuts before tightening.
3. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 4. Install the C-pillar trim panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > System
Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door glass top run.
2. Remove the rear door window glass.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
All vehicles
1. Remove the front door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the front door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside. 4.
Lower the front door window glass to gain access to the screws.
5. Remove the front door window glass screws. 6. Support the front door window glass in the full
up position.
Vehicles with power windows
7. Disconnect the front door power window regulator motor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 9826
8. Remove the front door power window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the nuts.
Vehicles with manual windows
9. Remove the front door window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolt.
2 Remove the nuts.
INSTALLATION
All vehicles
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Cycle the door window glass to make sure of correct door window glass engagement.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
All vehicles
1. Remove the rear door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the rear door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside. 4.
Lower the rear door window glass to gain access to the screws.
5. Remove the rear door window glass screws. 6. Support the rear door window glass in the full up
position.
Vehicles with power windows
7. Disconnect the rear door power window regulator electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 9830
8. Remove the rear door power window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolts
2 Remove the nuts.
Vehicles with manual windows
9. Remove the rear door window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the nuts.
INSTALLATION
All vehicles
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Cycle the door glass to make sure of correct window glass engagement.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician
Safety Information
Windshield: Technician Safety Information
WARNING: TO PREVENT GLASS SPLINTERS FROM ENTERING THE EYES OR CUTTING
HANDS, WEAR SAFETY GLASSES AND HEAVY GLOVES WHEN CUTTING THE GLASS FROM
THE VEHICLE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician
Safety Information > Page 9835
Windshield: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION:
^ After installing the urethane installed glass, the vehicle should not be driven until the urethane
adhesive has cured. The curing times at temperatures above 13°C (55°F) and relative humidity
above 59% is 12-24 hours (Refer to the Essex drive away chart for the cure times as temperatures
and humidity vary.). Inadequate curing of the urethane adhesive may adversely affect the strength
of the urethane bond.
^ Do not scratch the pinch weld area.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 9836
Windshield: Service and Repair
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING: TO PREVENT GLASS SPLINTERS FROM ENTERING THE EYES OR CUTTING
HANDS, WEAR SAFETY GLASSES AND HEAVY GLOVES WHEN CUTTING THE GLASS FROM
THE VEHICLE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
1. Open the four A-pillar passenger assist handle covers.
2. Remove the two A-pillar passenger assist handles.
1 Remove the four bolts.
2 Remove the two A-pillar passenger assist handles.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 9837
3. Remove the two windshield side garnish mouldings.
4. Remove the overhead console.
1 Open the front console door.
2 Remove the screws.
3 Remove the overhead console. ^
If equipped, disconnect electrical connector.
5. Remove the two sun visors and two clips.
1 Remove the six screws.
2 Remove the sun visors and clips.
6. Remove the driver and passenger assist handles. 7. Remove the interior rear view mirror. 8.
Lower the front portion of the headliner. 9. Remove the cowl grille.
10. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any dirt or foreign material from the pinch weld.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 9838
11. Using the special tool, cut the urethane adhesive from the windshield glass starting at the top
center and work toward the bottom corners.
NOTE: Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the special tool when cutting.
12. Using the special tool, distance the windshield glass from the body.
13. Using the special tool, cut the remaining urethane adhesive and remove the windshield glass.
14. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any foreign material or dirt from the pinch weld.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: After installing the urethane installed glass, the vehicle should not be driven until the
urethane adhesive has cured. The curing times at temperatures above 13°C (55°F) and relative
humidity above 59% is 12-24 hours (Refer to the Essex drive away chart for the cure times as
temperatures and humidity vary.). Inadequate curing of the urethane adhesive may adversely affect
the strength of the urethane bond.
1. Dry fit the windshield glass, making alignment marks with tape or non-staining grease pencil.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 9839
2. Trim the remaining urethane adhesive on the pinch weld to within the specification.
^ The existing urethane adhesive surface should be smooth and free of cuts and contamination.
CAUTION: Do not scratch the pinch weld area.
3. Use a wool applicator to apply Urethane Metal Primer Essex U-413 meeting Ford specification
WSB-M2G234-C to any exposed metal on the
pinch weld. Allow 6 to 10 minutes to dry.
4. If reinstalling the original windshield glass, remove the excess urethane adhesive and the
windshield moulding. 5. Clean the inside of the windshield glass surface with an alcohol-free
cleaner making sure the ceramic coated area is clean. 6. If installing a new windshield glass, apply
Urethane Glass Prep Essex U-401 meeting Ford specification WSB-M2G314-B twice around the
glass
surface to be urethaned.
NOTE: Wipe off the glass prep immediately after each application because it flash dries.
7. If installing a new windshield, apply Glass Primer Essex U-402 meeting Ford specification
WSB-M5B280-C to the same area that was prepped in
the pervious step. Allow five minutes to dry.
8. Apply foam dam meeting Ford specification EBS-M3G137-A to the bottom of the windshield
glass.
9. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 9840
10. Apply a bead of Urethane Adhesive Essex 400-HV or Essex U-216, which meets Ford
specification WSB-M2G316-B to the sides and top of the
windshield glass.
11. Apply a bead of Urethane Adhesive Essex 400-HV which meets Ford specification
WSB-M2G316-B to the bottom of the windshield glass outside
the foam dam.
12. Install the windshield glass aligning it to the marks previously made. 13. After the windshield
glass is set, check for water leaks and add urethane adhesive where needed. 14. If necessary,
remove excess urethane adhesive from the outside surface of the windshield glass. 15. Install the
cowl grille. 16. Reposition the front portion of the headliner.
17. Install the overhead console.
1 Position the overhead console. ^
If equipped , connect the electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 9841
2 Install the screws.
18. Install the two sun visors and two clips.
1 Position the sun visors and clips.
2 Install the six screws.
19. Install the interior rear view mirror.
20. Install the two windshield side garnish mouldings. 21. Install the two A-pillar passenger assist
handles. 22. Install the driver and passenger assist handles.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 9842
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov
> 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 00S49 Date: 001101
Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
00S49
SAFETY RECALL
Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Windshield Wiper Module Inspection and Possible
Replacement
November 2000
Advance Announcement
Dealer Letter
Attachment I ^
Administrative Information
Attachment II ^
Labor Allowances
^ Parts Ordering Information
Attachment III ^
Technical Information
Owner Letter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov
> 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9853
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov
> 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9854
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov
> 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9855
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS
You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this recall.
PLEASE NOTE
Correct all vehicles in stock before delivery.
PROMPTLY CORRECT
Promptly correct all affected vehicles on your dealer VIN list which you will receive in the Ford
Dealer Consolidated Communicator (FDCC). Also, correct other eligible vehicles which are brought
to your dealership.
DEALER-OWNER CONTACT
If you have recently sold a vehicle, please contact that owner immediately and provide them a copy
of the owner letter and schedule a service date.
REGIONAL CONTACT
Advise regional office if an owner:
^ cannot be contacted.
^ does not make a service date.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using DWE.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
OWNER REFUNDS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov
> 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9856
Ford Motor Company will refund owner-paid wiper module repairs made before the date of the
Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the
servicing dealer). Refer to ACESII manual for refund information.
RENTAL CARS
For vehicles which fail the inspection, and if parts are not available, Ford Motor Company will pay
for a rental vehicle, except for fuel which will be at the owner's expense. Enter the word "RENTAL"
plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall
claim. Follow ESP cost guidelines.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
CRITICAL PARTS SUPPLY NOTE - PLEASE READ CAREFULLY
Parts will be in limited supply for several weeks. Therefore, parts will be prioritized for vehicles
which Ford records show as sold as of November 16, 2000.
Dealers are to report the results of inspections on all affected units that fail the inspection (for the
first 30 days) by calling the Recall Hotline at 1-800-325-5621 with the following required
information:
-- VIN number
-- Results of (4) ball stud inspections
-- Results of (4) plastic ball socket inspections
-- Dealer P&A; Code
Based on the inspection results reported. dealers will be advised if the vehicle can be released or if
it must be held for repair. Please note that FCS-700 tags will be issued and all replaced parts must
be returned to the Warranty Parts Return Center where they will be inspected to assure that only
suspect parts are being replaced. The cost of parts not properly inspected or not returned will be
charged back to the dealer.
A fair and equitable distribution of parts will be made based on the number of vehicles which fail
the inspection and are properly reported to the Recall Hotline. Each Dealer who calls in will receive
a shipment of parts for reported units before any dealer receives a second shipment.
No seed stock distribution is planned at this time. No parts will be sent until inspected units are
reported to the Recall Hotline.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov
> 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9857
Please note that vehicles sold after November 16, 2000 will not receive priority handling for parts.
We urge you to carefully conduct inspections and manage your allocation of parts for this program.
NOTE:
All orders must be placed through the Recall Hotline (1-800 325-5621) for the first 30 days, until
December 21, 2000. After that date, use the normal order process.
ORDER INFORMATION DOR/COR
DOR/COR number 50197 identifies parts ordered for this campaign through the Recall Hotline
(1-800-325-5621).
FCS-700 TAGS
FCS-700 Tags will be issued for each claim involving a wiper module (less motor) replacement.
These returned assemblies will be inspected and dealers will be "charged-back" for units that pass
inspection criteria. Less than 6% of the wiper module assemblies will require replacement.
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to:
^ DOES II
^ Updated Price Book
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
The affected vehicles in this program may require the replacement of the windshield wiper
mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly (wiper module assembly less motor). A two-part inspection
must be performed to determine if replacement is required. The inspection includes the following:
^ An inspection of the wiper link ball studs.
^ An inspection of the wiper link plastic ball sockets.
If the vehicle fails the inspection process, a new windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft
assembly must be installed. This procedure gives details of the inspection process and refers you
to the service procedures in the Workshop Manual if replacement is required.
INSPECTION
CAUTION
Whenever the wiper arms are removed and reinstalled, proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is
critical.
1. Verify that the wipers are in the "PARK" position and the key is in the "OFF" position before
proceeding with inspection.
2. Remove the windshield wiper arm nuts, then remove the wiper arms.
3. Remove the left side cowl top vent panel.
4. Disconnect the wiper motor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov
> 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9858
5. Remove the three (3) bolts, then remove the wiper module. See Figure 1.
IMPORTANT:
USING A PERMANENT MARKER, PLACE A MARK ON THE WIPER LINKS NEXT TO ALL BALL
STUDS/SOCKETS THAT FAIL INSPECTION. DEFECTIVE WINDSHIELD WIPER MOUNTING
ARM AND PIVOT SHAFT ASSEMBLIES MUST BE RETURNED TO THE WARRANTY PARTS
RETURN CENTER. SEE THE ATTACHMENT II FOR MORE INFORMATION.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov
> 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9859
6. Inspect the four (4) ball studs (positions A-D). The backside of each ball stud should be riveted
(mushroomed) over as shown in the illustration. Please note, the ball stud at position B is the most
suspect. See Figure 2 for ball stud location and Figure 3 for detail of ball studs.
^ If ANY of the ball studs are not mushroomed over, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm
and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate
Workshop Manual.
^ If all of the ball studs are mushroomed over, continue the inspection procedure.
7. Visually inspect the tabs on the four (4) plastic ball sockets located at the ends of the wiper links.
Each tab should be undamaged and fully engaged in the corresponding hole located in the wiper
arm link. See Figure 2 for location of ball sockets and Figure 4 for detail of tabs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov
> 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9860
a. If the tab is missing, damaged, or detached from the rim on ANY of the sockets, replace the
windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in
section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 5.
b. If the tab is aligned but not fully engaged into the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of
the sockets but is not otherwise damaged or detached from the rim, press the tab with your thumb
(no tools) to fully engage it in the hole. If force greater than thumb pressure is required to engage
the tab into the hole, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to
the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 6.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov
> 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9861
c. If the tab is not aligned with the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of the sockets,
replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service
procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 7.
d. Beginning at the tab, carefully lift the lip of the rubber seal using a flat screwdriver or similar tool.
Verify that there is a continuous rim of plastic material around the base of EACH socket. If there
are any sections of material broken away or any visible damage (cracks) on ANY one of the
sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service
procedures in section 501-16
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov
> 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9862
of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 8.
e. Inspect the dome section of the sockets for cracks. If grease is present on the dome of the
socket, this may be evidence of a crack. If ANY one of the sockets is cracked, replace the
windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in
section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 9.
If the wiper module passes all the inspections described in A-E, no replacement is required.
8. Install the wiper module. Tighten the bolts to 12 Nm (107 lb-in).
WARNING:
THE IGNITION KEY MUST BE IN THE "OFF" POSITION BEFORE CONNECTING THE WIPER
MOTOR. IF NOT, SUDDEN MOVEMENT OF THE WIPER LINKS MAY OCCUR WHEN THE
MOTOR IS CONNECTED.
9. Connect the wiper motor electrical connector.
10. Install the left side cowl vent panel.
CAUTION
The wiper motor must be in the "PARK" position before installing the wiper arms or damage to the
vehicle will result.
11. Cycle and park the wiper motor.
CAUTION
Proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is critical.
12. Install the windshield wiper arms. Tighten the nuts to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov
> 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9863
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov
> 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9864
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control
Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 00S49 Date: 001101
Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
00S49
SAFETY RECALL
Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Windshield Wiper Module Inspection and Possible
Replacement
November 2000
Advance Announcement
Dealer Letter
Attachment I ^
Administrative Information
Attachment II ^
Labor Allowances
^ Parts Ordering Information
Attachment III ^
Technical Information
Owner Letter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control
Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9870
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control
Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9871
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control
Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9872
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS
You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this recall.
PLEASE NOTE
Correct all vehicles in stock before delivery.
PROMPTLY CORRECT
Promptly correct all affected vehicles on your dealer VIN list which you will receive in the Ford
Dealer Consolidated Communicator (FDCC). Also, correct other eligible vehicles which are brought
to your dealership.
DEALER-OWNER CONTACT
If you have recently sold a vehicle, please contact that owner immediately and provide them a copy
of the owner letter and schedule a service date.
REGIONAL CONTACT
Advise regional office if an owner:
^ cannot be contacted.
^ does not make a service date.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using DWE.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
OWNER REFUNDS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control
Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9873
Ford Motor Company will refund owner-paid wiper module repairs made before the date of the
Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the
servicing dealer). Refer to ACESII manual for refund information.
RENTAL CARS
For vehicles which fail the inspection, and if parts are not available, Ford Motor Company will pay
for a rental vehicle, except for fuel which will be at the owner's expense. Enter the word "RENTAL"
plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall
claim. Follow ESP cost guidelines.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
CRITICAL PARTS SUPPLY NOTE - PLEASE READ CAREFULLY
Parts will be in limited supply for several weeks. Therefore, parts will be prioritized for vehicles
which Ford records show as sold as of November 16, 2000.
Dealers are to report the results of inspections on all affected units that fail the inspection (for the
first 30 days) by calling the Recall Hotline at 1-800-325-5621 with the following required
information:
-- VIN number
-- Results of (4) ball stud inspections
-- Results of (4) plastic ball socket inspections
-- Dealer P&A; Code
Based on the inspection results reported. dealers will be advised if the vehicle can be released or if
it must be held for repair. Please note that FCS-700 tags will be issued and all replaced parts must
be returned to the Warranty Parts Return Center where they will be inspected to assure that only
suspect parts are being replaced. The cost of parts not properly inspected or not returned will be
charged back to the dealer.
A fair and equitable distribution of parts will be made based on the number of vehicles which fail
the inspection and are properly reported to the Recall Hotline. Each Dealer who calls in will receive
a shipment of parts for reported units before any dealer receives a second shipment.
No seed stock distribution is planned at this time. No parts will be sent until inspected units are
reported to the Recall Hotline.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control
Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9874
Please note that vehicles sold after November 16, 2000 will not receive priority handling for parts.
We urge you to carefully conduct inspections and manage your allocation of parts for this program.
NOTE:
All orders must be placed through the Recall Hotline (1-800 325-5621) for the first 30 days, until
December 21, 2000. After that date, use the normal order process.
ORDER INFORMATION DOR/COR
DOR/COR number 50197 identifies parts ordered for this campaign through the Recall Hotline
(1-800-325-5621).
FCS-700 TAGS
FCS-700 Tags will be issued for each claim involving a wiper module (less motor) replacement.
These returned assemblies will be inspected and dealers will be "charged-back" for units that pass
inspection criteria. Less than 6% of the wiper module assemblies will require replacement.
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to:
^ DOES II
^ Updated Price Book
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
The affected vehicles in this program may require the replacement of the windshield wiper
mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly (wiper module assembly less motor). A two-part inspection
must be performed to determine if replacement is required. The inspection includes the following:
^ An inspection of the wiper link ball studs.
^ An inspection of the wiper link plastic ball sockets.
If the vehicle fails the inspection process, a new windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft
assembly must be installed. This procedure gives details of the inspection process and refers you
to the service procedures in the Workshop Manual if replacement is required.
INSPECTION
CAUTION
Whenever the wiper arms are removed and reinstalled, proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is
critical.
1. Verify that the wipers are in the "PARK" position and the key is in the "OFF" position before
proceeding with inspection.
2. Remove the windshield wiper arm nuts, then remove the wiper arms.
3. Remove the left side cowl top vent panel.
4. Disconnect the wiper motor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control
Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9875
5. Remove the three (3) bolts, then remove the wiper module. See Figure 1.
IMPORTANT:
USING A PERMANENT MARKER, PLACE A MARK ON THE WIPER LINKS NEXT TO ALL BALL
STUDS/SOCKETS THAT FAIL INSPECTION. DEFECTIVE WINDSHIELD WIPER MOUNTING
ARM AND PIVOT SHAFT ASSEMBLIES MUST BE RETURNED TO THE WARRANTY PARTS
RETURN CENTER. SEE THE ATTACHMENT II FOR MORE INFORMATION.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control
Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9876
6. Inspect the four (4) ball studs (positions A-D). The backside of each ball stud should be riveted
(mushroomed) over as shown in the illustration. Please note, the ball stud at position B is the most
suspect. See Figure 2 for ball stud location and Figure 3 for detail of ball studs.
^ If ANY of the ball studs are not mushroomed over, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm
and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate
Workshop Manual.
^ If all of the ball studs are mushroomed over, continue the inspection procedure.
7. Visually inspect the tabs on the four (4) plastic ball sockets located at the ends of the wiper links.
Each tab should be undamaged and fully engaged in the corresponding hole located in the wiper
arm link. See Figure 2 for location of ball sockets and Figure 4 for detail of tabs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control
Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9877
a. If the tab is missing, damaged, or detached from the rim on ANY of the sockets, replace the
windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in
section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 5.
b. If the tab is aligned but not fully engaged into the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of
the sockets but is not otherwise damaged or detached from the rim, press the tab with your thumb
(no tools) to fully engage it in the hole. If force greater than thumb pressure is required to engage
the tab into the hole, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to
the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 6.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control
Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9878
c. If the tab is not aligned with the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of the sockets,
replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service
procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 7.
d. Beginning at the tab, carefully lift the lip of the rubber seal using a flat screwdriver or similar tool.
Verify that there is a continuous rim of plastic material around the base of EACH socket. If there
are any sections of material broken away or any visible damage (cracks) on ANY one of the
sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service
procedures in section 501-16
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control
Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9879
of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 8.
e. Inspect the dome section of the sockets for cracks. If grease is present on the dome of the
socket, this may be evidence of a crack. If ANY one of the sockets is cracked, replace the
windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in
section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 9.
If the wiper module passes all the inspections described in A-E, no replacement is required.
8. Install the wiper module. Tighten the bolts to 12 Nm (107 lb-in).
WARNING:
THE IGNITION KEY MUST BE IN THE "OFF" POSITION BEFORE CONNECTING THE WIPER
MOTOR. IF NOT, SUDDEN MOVEMENT OF THE WIPER LINKS MAY OCCUR WHEN THE
MOTOR IS CONNECTED.
9. Connect the wiper motor electrical connector.
10. Install the left side cowl vent panel.
CAUTION
The wiper motor must be in the "PARK" position before installing the wiper arms or damage to the
vehicle will result.
11. Cycle and park the wiper motor.
CAUTION
Proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is critical.
12. Install the windshield wiper arms. Tighten the nuts to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control
Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9880
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control
Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9881
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9882
Wiper Control Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding the Rear Interval Wiper please refer to Multifunction Electronic
Control Modules (General Module).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9883
Wiper Control Module: Testing and Inspection
Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9888
Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9889
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9890
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the steering column shroud.
NOTE: The windshield wiper/washer switch is part of the multifunction switch assembly.
2. Remove the screws.
3. Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9894
Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9895
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9896
Wiper Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the steering column shroud.
NOTE: The windshield wiper/washer switch is part of the multifunction switch assembly.
2. Remove the screws.
3. Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Windshield Washer Hose: Service and Repair
1. Locate and verify the leaking washer hose.
2. Cut the hose cleanly and remove the damaged portion of the washer hose. 3. Install a
windshield washer hose adapter between the cut ends of the hose. 4. Install a segment of 6.4 mm
(0.25 in) i.d. black rubber hose over the ends of the washer hose, and clamp both ends of the
rubber hose using spring
clamps.
NOTE: In difficult cases, clamping may be required.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Rear Window Washer Pump Motor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Rear Window Washer Pump Motor > Page 9904
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Windshield Washer Pump: Technician Safety Information
WARNING: WINDSHIELD WASHER SOLUTION CONTAINS METHANOL, WHICH IS
POISONOUS. OBSERVE ALL CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS INDICATED ON THE LABEL OF
THE WASHER SOLUTION CONTAINER. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY
RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 9909
Windshield Washer Pump: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Do not operate the windshield washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer
reservoir to prevent component damage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Windshield Washer Pump
Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Windshield Washer Pump
REMOVAL
1. Remove the RH front wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the RH front splash shield.
3. Remove the windshield washer pump.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Disconnect the hose.
3 Remove the windshield washer pump.
WARNING: WINDSHIELD WASHER SOLUTION CONTAINS METHANOL, WHICH IS
POISONOUS. OBSERVE ALL CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS INDICATED ON THE LABEL OF
THE WASHER SOLUTION CONTAINER. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY
RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before
washer pump removal.
INSTALLATION
1. Fill the windshield washer reservoir with Ultra-Clear Windshield Washer Concentrate
C9AZ-19550-AC or BC or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESR-M17P5-A.
CAUTION: Do not operate the windshield washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer
reservoir to prevent component damage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
WARNING: WINDSHIELD WASHER SOLUTION CONTAINS METHANOL, WHICH IS
POISONOUS. OBSERVE ALL CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS INDICATED ON THE LABEL OF
THE WASHER SOLUTION CONTAINER.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Windshield Washer Pump > Page 9912
Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Rear Window Washer Pump
REMOVAL
1. Remove the RH front wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the RH front splash shield.
3. Remove the windshield washer pump.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Disconnect the hose.
3 Remove the windshield washer pump.
WARNING: WINDSHIELD WASHER SOLUTION CONTAINS METHANOL, WHICH IS
POISONOUS. OBSERVE ALL CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS INDICATED ON THE LABEL OF
THE WASHER SOLUTION CONTAINER. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY
RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before
washer pump removal.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Fill the windshield washer reservoir with Ultra-Clear Windshield Washer Concentrate
C9AZ-19550-AC or BC or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESR-M17P5-A.
WARNING: WINDSHIELD WASHER SOLUTION CONTAINS METHANOL, WHICH IS
POISONOUS. OBSERVE ALL CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS INDICATED ON THE LABEL OF
THE WASHER SOLUTION CONTAINER. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY
RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
CAUTION: Do not operate the windshield washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer
reservoir.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Windshield Washer Pump > Page 9913
Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Washer Pump and Reservoir
REMOVAL
1. Remove the right front wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the right front splash shield.
3. Position the windshield washer reservoir aside.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Position the windshield washer reservoir aside.
WARNING: WINDSHIELD WASHER SOLUTION CONTAINS METHANOL, WHICH IS
POISONOUS. OBSERVE ALL CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS INDICATED ON THE LABEL OF
THE WASHER SOLUTION CONTAINER. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY
RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before
removal.
4. Remove the windshield washer reservoir.
1 Disconnect the electrical connectors.
2 Disconnect the hoses.
3 Remove the windshield washer reservoir.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Fill the windshield washer reservoir with Ultra-Clear Windshield Washer Concentrate
C9AZ-19550-AC or BC or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESR-M17P5-A.
WARNING: WINDSHIELD WASHER SOLUTION CONTAINS METHANOL, WHICH IS
POISONOUS. OBSERVE ALL CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS INDICATED ON THE LABEL OF
THE WASHER SOLUTION CONTAINER. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY
RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
CAUTION: Do not operate the windshield washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer
reservoir.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Page 9917
Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Page 9918
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Page 9919
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the steering column shroud.
NOTE: The windshield wiper/washer switch is part of the multifunction switch assembly.
2. Remove the screws.
3. Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Arm: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor
Wiper Arm: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor
Article No. 03-20-1
10/13/03
ELECTRICAL - REAR WIPER ARM REMOVAL - SERVICE TIP
FORD: 2001-2004 ESCAPE
ISSUE Some Escape vehicles may exhibit the rear wiper arm being seized to the motor and
difficult to remove. This may be caused by an insufficient amount of anti-seize compound on the
arm/motor shaft splines.
ACTION For vehicle service requiring the removal of the rear wiper arm, the following Service
Procedure will help to free the wiper arm from the motor shaft.
NOTE
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THE WIPER ARM BY CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WITH A
HACKSAW OR GRIND TOOL. CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WILL MAKE THE MOTOR
UNUSABLE REQUIRING REPLACEMENT. IN ADDITION, DAMAGE TO THE LIFTGATE GLASS
MAY OCCUR. HOWEVER IF THE REASON FOR SERVICE IS DUE TO AN INOPERABLE REAR
WIPER MOTOR AND THE WIPER ARM IS SEIZED, THEN CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT IS AN
ACCEPTABLE MEANS OF REMOVAL. USE CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S
PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC. INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE
COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Confirm that wiper arm is seized on motor and that the wiper arm retainer latch is in the "release"
position.
2. Mark and LIGHTLY center punch the exact center of arm mount "circle" (area over motor shaft).
3. Carefully drill through wiper arm using 1/8" drill bit. Do not drill into the motor shaft.
NOTE
PREVENT METAL SHAVINGS FROM FALLING ONTO THE BODY OR PAINT AS DAMAGE MAY
OCCUR.
4. Enlarge the drilled hole using 3/8" drill bit.
5. Apply a small amount of penetrating oil at contact area of splines for wiper arm and motor.
6. Tap on joint area lightly to create vibration and facilitate penetrating oil working into splines of
arm and motor.
7. Allow the oil to sit and penetrate for several minutes.
NOTE
BE SURE THE WIPER ARM RETAINER CLIP IS IN THE "RELEASE" POSITION BEFORE
CONTINUING WITH STEP 8.
8. Install a puller with a 5/16" or smaller center screw (e.g. Battery Clamp Puller) to the wiper arm
so that jaws of puller are pulling against the arm, and center post of puller is pressing against
center of wiper motor shaft.
NOTE
ENSURE THAT JAWS OF PULLER ARE PULLING AGAINST WIPER ARM AND NOT MOTOR
SHAFT BUSHING.
9. Tighten puller in very small increments while tapping lightly on the wiper arm and center shaft of
puller.
With pressure applied to the wiper arm and shaft a light shock should pop arm off of motor shaft.
NOTE
BE CAREFUL THAT ARM & PULLER DO NOT FALL AND DAMAGE THE LIFTGATE AND/OR
BUMPER.
10. When installing the new wiper arm, remove all corrosion/rust from motor splines and apply
anti-seize compound to splines of arm and motor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Arm: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor >
Page 9928
NOTE
IF AFTER PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE THE WIPER ARM STILL CANNOT BE REMOVED,
THEN CAREFULLY CUT MOTOR SHAFT AND REPLACE MOTOR AND WIPER ARM. USE
CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC.
INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE
AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Arm: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized
to Motor
Wiper Arm: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor
Article No. 03-20-1
10/13/03
ELECTRICAL - REAR WIPER ARM REMOVAL - SERVICE TIP
FORD: 2001-2004 ESCAPE
ISSUE Some Escape vehicles may exhibit the rear wiper arm being seized to the motor and
difficult to remove. This may be caused by an insufficient amount of anti-seize compound on the
arm/motor shaft splines.
ACTION For vehicle service requiring the removal of the rear wiper arm, the following Service
Procedure will help to free the wiper arm from the motor shaft.
NOTE
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THE WIPER ARM BY CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WITH A
HACKSAW OR GRIND TOOL. CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WILL MAKE THE MOTOR
UNUSABLE REQUIRING REPLACEMENT. IN ADDITION, DAMAGE TO THE LIFTGATE GLASS
MAY OCCUR. HOWEVER IF THE REASON FOR SERVICE IS DUE TO AN INOPERABLE REAR
WIPER MOTOR AND THE WIPER ARM IS SEIZED, THEN CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT IS AN
ACCEPTABLE MEANS OF REMOVAL. USE CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S
PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC. INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE
COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Confirm that wiper arm is seized on motor and that the wiper arm retainer latch is in the "release"
position.
2. Mark and LIGHTLY center punch the exact center of arm mount "circle" (area over motor shaft).
3. Carefully drill through wiper arm using 1/8" drill bit. Do not drill into the motor shaft.
NOTE
PREVENT METAL SHAVINGS FROM FALLING ONTO THE BODY OR PAINT AS DAMAGE MAY
OCCUR.
4. Enlarge the drilled hole using 3/8" drill bit.
5. Apply a small amount of penetrating oil at contact area of splines for wiper arm and motor.
6. Tap on joint area lightly to create vibration and facilitate penetrating oil working into splines of
arm and motor.
7. Allow the oil to sit and penetrate for several minutes.
NOTE
BE SURE THE WIPER ARM RETAINER CLIP IS IN THE "RELEASE" POSITION BEFORE
CONTINUING WITH STEP 8.
8. Install a puller with a 5/16" or smaller center screw (e.g. Battery Clamp Puller) to the wiper arm
so that jaws of puller are pulling against the arm, and center post of puller is pressing against
center of wiper motor shaft.
NOTE
ENSURE THAT JAWS OF PULLER ARE PULLING AGAINST WIPER ARM AND NOT MOTOR
SHAFT BUSHING.
9. Tighten puller in very small increments while tapping lightly on the wiper arm and center shaft of
puller.
With pressure applied to the wiper arm and shaft a light shock should pop arm off of motor shaft.
NOTE
BE CAREFUL THAT ARM & PULLER DO NOT FALL AND DAMAGE THE LIFTGATE AND/OR
BUMPER.
10. When installing the new wiper arm, remove all corrosion/rust from motor splines and apply
anti-seize compound to splines of arm and motor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Arm: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized
to Motor > Page 9934
NOTE
IF AFTER PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE THE WIPER ARM STILL CANNOT BE REMOVED,
THEN CAREFULLY CUT MOTOR SHAFT AND REPLACE MOTOR AND WIPER ARM. USE
CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC.
INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE
AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Adjustments > Windshield
Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment
Wiper Arm: Adjustments Windshield Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment
1. Cycle and park the windshield wipers
2. Verify that the RH and LH wiper blades are located at the specified position. 3. If not within
specification, remove the windshield wiper pivot arms and reposition to the correct locations.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Adjustments > Windshield
Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment > Page 9937
Wiper Arm: Adjustments Rear Window Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment
1. Cycle and park the rear window wiper.
2. Verify that the rear window wiper blade is located at the specified position. 3. If not within
specification, remove the rear window wiper pivot arm and reposition to the correct location.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Wiper Pivot Arm
Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Front Wiper Pivot Arm
REMOVAL
1. Remove the pivot arm nut.
2. Remove the windshield wiper pivot arm.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Adjust the windshield wiper pivot arms.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Wiper Pivot Arm > Page 9940
Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Rear Wiper Pivot Arm
REMOVAL
1. Remove the pivot arm.
1 Lift pivot arm to the upright position.
2 Slide the locking tab out.
3 Pull up and remove the pivot arm.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Adjust the windshield wiper pivot arm.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Adjustments >
Windshield Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment
Wiper Blade: Adjustments Windshield Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment
1. Cycle and park the windshield wipers
2. Verify that the RH and LH wiper blades are located at the specified position. 3. If not within
specification, remove the windshield wiper pivot arms and reposition to the correct locations; refer
to Wiper Arm.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Adjustments >
Windshield Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment > Page 9945
Wiper Blade: Adjustments Rear Window Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment
1. Cycle and park the rear window wiper.
2. Verify that the rear window wiper blade is located at the specified position. 3. If not within
specification, remove the rear window wiper pivot arm and reposition to the correct location; refer to
Wiper Arm.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 00S49 Date: 001101
Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
00S49
SAFETY RECALL
Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Windshield Wiper Module Inspection and Possible
Replacement
November 2000
Advance Announcement
Dealer Letter
Attachment I ^
Administrative Information
Attachment II ^
Labor Allowances
^ Parts Ordering Information
Attachment III ^
Technical Information
Owner Letter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
> Page 9954
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
> Page 9955
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
> Page 9956
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS
You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this recall.
PLEASE NOTE
Correct all vehicles in stock before delivery.
PROMPTLY CORRECT
Promptly correct all affected vehicles on your dealer VIN list which you will receive in the Ford
Dealer Consolidated Communicator (FDCC). Also, correct other eligible vehicles which are brought
to your dealership.
DEALER-OWNER CONTACT
If you have recently sold a vehicle, please contact that owner immediately and provide them a copy
of the owner letter and schedule a service date.
REGIONAL CONTACT
Advise regional office if an owner:
^ cannot be contacted.
^ does not make a service date.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using DWE.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
OWNER REFUNDS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
> Page 9957
Ford Motor Company will refund owner-paid wiper module repairs made before the date of the
Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the
servicing dealer). Refer to ACESII manual for refund information.
RENTAL CARS
For vehicles which fail the inspection, and if parts are not available, Ford Motor Company will pay
for a rental vehicle, except for fuel which will be at the owner's expense. Enter the word "RENTAL"
plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall
claim. Follow ESP cost guidelines.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
CRITICAL PARTS SUPPLY NOTE - PLEASE READ CAREFULLY
Parts will be in limited supply for several weeks. Therefore, parts will be prioritized for vehicles
which Ford records show as sold as of November 16, 2000.
Dealers are to report the results of inspections on all affected units that fail the inspection (for the
first 30 days) by calling the Recall Hotline at 1-800-325-5621 with the following required
information:
-- VIN number
-- Results of (4) ball stud inspections
-- Results of (4) plastic ball socket inspections
-- Dealer P&A; Code
Based on the inspection results reported. dealers will be advised if the vehicle can be released or if
it must be held for repair. Please note that FCS-700 tags will be issued and all replaced parts must
be returned to the Warranty Parts Return Center where they will be inspected to assure that only
suspect parts are being replaced. The cost of parts not properly inspected or not returned will be
charged back to the dealer.
A fair and equitable distribution of parts will be made based on the number of vehicles which fail
the inspection and are properly reported to the Recall Hotline. Each Dealer who calls in will receive
a shipment of parts for reported units before any dealer receives a second shipment.
No seed stock distribution is planned at this time. No parts will be sent until inspected units are
reported to the Recall Hotline.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
> Page 9958
Please note that vehicles sold after November 16, 2000 will not receive priority handling for parts.
We urge you to carefully conduct inspections and manage your allocation of parts for this program.
NOTE:
All orders must be placed through the Recall Hotline (1-800 325-5621) for the first 30 days, until
December 21, 2000. After that date, use the normal order process.
ORDER INFORMATION DOR/COR
DOR/COR number 50197 identifies parts ordered for this campaign through the Recall Hotline
(1-800-325-5621).
FCS-700 TAGS
FCS-700 Tags will be issued for each claim involving a wiper module (less motor) replacement.
These returned assemblies will be inspected and dealers will be "charged-back" for units that pass
inspection criteria. Less than 6% of the wiper module assemblies will require replacement.
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to:
^ DOES II
^ Updated Price Book
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
The affected vehicles in this program may require the replacement of the windshield wiper
mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly (wiper module assembly less motor). A two-part inspection
must be performed to determine if replacement is required. The inspection includes the following:
^ An inspection of the wiper link ball studs.
^ An inspection of the wiper link plastic ball sockets.
If the vehicle fails the inspection process, a new windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft
assembly must be installed. This procedure gives details of the inspection process and refers you
to the service procedures in the Workshop Manual if replacement is required.
INSPECTION
CAUTION
Whenever the wiper arms are removed and reinstalled, proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is
critical.
1. Verify that the wipers are in the "PARK" position and the key is in the "OFF" position before
proceeding with inspection.
2. Remove the windshield wiper arm nuts, then remove the wiper arms.
3. Remove the left side cowl top vent panel.
4. Disconnect the wiper motor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
> Page 9959
5. Remove the three (3) bolts, then remove the wiper module. See Figure 1.
IMPORTANT:
USING A PERMANENT MARKER, PLACE A MARK ON THE WIPER LINKS NEXT TO ALL BALL
STUDS/SOCKETS THAT FAIL INSPECTION. DEFECTIVE WINDSHIELD WIPER MOUNTING
ARM AND PIVOT SHAFT ASSEMBLIES MUST BE RETURNED TO THE WARRANTY PARTS
RETURN CENTER. SEE THE ATTACHMENT II FOR MORE INFORMATION.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
> Page 9960
6. Inspect the four (4) ball studs (positions A-D). The backside of each ball stud should be riveted
(mushroomed) over as shown in the illustration. Please note, the ball stud at position B is the most
suspect. See Figure 2 for ball stud location and Figure 3 for detail of ball studs.
^ If ANY of the ball studs are not mushroomed over, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm
and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate
Workshop Manual.
^ If all of the ball studs are mushroomed over, continue the inspection procedure.
7. Visually inspect the tabs on the four (4) plastic ball sockets located at the ends of the wiper links.
Each tab should be undamaged and fully engaged in the corresponding hole located in the wiper
arm link. See Figure 2 for location of ball sockets and Figure 4 for detail of tabs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
> Page 9961
a. If the tab is missing, damaged, or detached from the rim on ANY of the sockets, replace the
windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in
section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 5.
b. If the tab is aligned but not fully engaged into the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of
the sockets but is not otherwise damaged or detached from the rim, press the tab with your thumb
(no tools) to fully engage it in the hole. If force greater than thumb pressure is required to engage
the tab into the hole, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to
the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 6.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
> Page 9962
c. If the tab is not aligned with the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of the sockets,
replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service
procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 7.
d. Beginning at the tab, carefully lift the lip of the rubber seal using a flat screwdriver or similar tool.
Verify that there is a continuous rim of plastic material around the base of EACH socket. If there
are any sections of material broken away or any visible damage (cracks) on ANY one of the
sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service
procedures in section 501-16
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
> Page 9963
of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 8.
e. Inspect the dome section of the sockets for cracks. If grease is present on the dome of the
socket, this may be evidence of a crack. If ANY one of the sockets is cracked, replace the
windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in
section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 9.
If the wiper module passes all the inspections described in A-E, no replacement is required.
8. Install the wiper module. Tighten the bolts to 12 Nm (107 lb-in).
WARNING:
THE IGNITION KEY MUST BE IN THE "OFF" POSITION BEFORE CONNECTING THE WIPER
MOTOR. IF NOT, SUDDEN MOVEMENT OF THE WIPER LINKS MAY OCCUR WHEN THE
MOTOR IS CONNECTED.
9. Connect the wiper motor electrical connector.
10. Install the left side cowl vent panel.
CAUTION
The wiper motor must be in the "PARK" position before installing the wiper arms or damage to the
vehicle will result.
11. Cycle and park the wiper motor.
CAUTION
Proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is critical.
12. Install the windshield wiper arms. Tighten the nuts to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
> Page 9964
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
> Page 9965
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module
Inspection/Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 00S49 Date: 001101
Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
00S49
SAFETY RECALL
Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Windshield Wiper Module Inspection and Possible
Replacement
November 2000
Advance Announcement
Dealer Letter
Attachment I ^
Administrative Information
Attachment II ^
Labor Allowances
^ Parts Ordering Information
Attachment III ^
Technical Information
Owner Letter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module
Inspection/Replacement > Page 9971
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module
Inspection/Replacement > Page 9972
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module
Inspection/Replacement > Page 9973
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS
You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this recall.
PLEASE NOTE
Correct all vehicles in stock before delivery.
PROMPTLY CORRECT
Promptly correct all affected vehicles on your dealer VIN list which you will receive in the Ford
Dealer Consolidated Communicator (FDCC). Also, correct other eligible vehicles which are brought
to your dealership.
DEALER-OWNER CONTACT
If you have recently sold a vehicle, please contact that owner immediately and provide them a copy
of the owner letter and schedule a service date.
REGIONAL CONTACT
Advise regional office if an owner:
^ cannot be contacted.
^ does not make a service date.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using DWE.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
OWNER REFUNDS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module
Inspection/Replacement > Page 9974
Ford Motor Company will refund owner-paid wiper module repairs made before the date of the
Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the
servicing dealer). Refer to ACESII manual for refund information.
RENTAL CARS
For vehicles which fail the inspection, and if parts are not available, Ford Motor Company will pay
for a rental vehicle, except for fuel which will be at the owner's expense. Enter the word "RENTAL"
plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall
claim. Follow ESP cost guidelines.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
CRITICAL PARTS SUPPLY NOTE - PLEASE READ CAREFULLY
Parts will be in limited supply for several weeks. Therefore, parts will be prioritized for vehicles
which Ford records show as sold as of November 16, 2000.
Dealers are to report the results of inspections on all affected units that fail the inspection (for the
first 30 days) by calling the Recall Hotline at 1-800-325-5621 with the following required
information:
-- VIN number
-- Results of (4) ball stud inspections
-- Results of (4) plastic ball socket inspections
-- Dealer P&A; Code
Based on the inspection results reported. dealers will be advised if the vehicle can be released or if
it must be held for repair. Please note that FCS-700 tags will be issued and all replaced parts must
be returned to the Warranty Parts Return Center where they will be inspected to assure that only
suspect parts are being replaced. The cost of parts not properly inspected or not returned will be
charged back to the dealer.
A fair and equitable distribution of parts will be made based on the number of vehicles which fail
the inspection and are properly reported to the Recall Hotline. Each Dealer who calls in will receive
a shipment of parts for reported units before any dealer receives a second shipment.
No seed stock distribution is planned at this time. No parts will be sent until inspected units are
reported to the Recall Hotline.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module
Inspection/Replacement > Page 9975
Please note that vehicles sold after November 16, 2000 will not receive priority handling for parts.
We urge you to carefully conduct inspections and manage your allocation of parts for this program.
NOTE:
All orders must be placed through the Recall Hotline (1-800 325-5621) for the first 30 days, until
December 21, 2000. After that date, use the normal order process.
ORDER INFORMATION DOR/COR
DOR/COR number 50197 identifies parts ordered for this campaign through the Recall Hotline
(1-800-325-5621).
FCS-700 TAGS
FCS-700 Tags will be issued for each claim involving a wiper module (less motor) replacement.
These returned assemblies will be inspected and dealers will be "charged-back" for units that pass
inspection criteria. Less than 6% of the wiper module assemblies will require replacement.
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to:
^ DOES II
^ Updated Price Book
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
The affected vehicles in this program may require the replacement of the windshield wiper
mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly (wiper module assembly less motor). A two-part inspection
must be performed to determine if replacement is required. The inspection includes the following:
^ An inspection of the wiper link ball studs.
^ An inspection of the wiper link plastic ball sockets.
If the vehicle fails the inspection process, a new windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft
assembly must be installed. This procedure gives details of the inspection process and refers you
to the service procedures in the Workshop Manual if replacement is required.
INSPECTION
CAUTION
Whenever the wiper arms are removed and reinstalled, proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is
critical.
1. Verify that the wipers are in the "PARK" position and the key is in the "OFF" position before
proceeding with inspection.
2. Remove the windshield wiper arm nuts, then remove the wiper arms.
3. Remove the left side cowl top vent panel.
4. Disconnect the wiper motor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module
Inspection/Replacement > Page 9976
5. Remove the three (3) bolts, then remove the wiper module. See Figure 1.
IMPORTANT:
USING A PERMANENT MARKER, PLACE A MARK ON THE WIPER LINKS NEXT TO ALL BALL
STUDS/SOCKETS THAT FAIL INSPECTION. DEFECTIVE WINDSHIELD WIPER MOUNTING
ARM AND PIVOT SHAFT ASSEMBLIES MUST BE RETURNED TO THE WARRANTY PARTS
RETURN CENTER. SEE THE ATTACHMENT II FOR MORE INFORMATION.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module
Inspection/Replacement > Page 9977
6. Inspect the four (4) ball studs (positions A-D). The backside of each ball stud should be riveted
(mushroomed) over as shown in the illustration. Please note, the ball stud at position B is the most
suspect. See Figure 2 for ball stud location and Figure 3 for detail of ball studs.
^ If ANY of the ball studs are not mushroomed over, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm
and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate
Workshop Manual.
^ If all of the ball studs are mushroomed over, continue the inspection procedure.
7. Visually inspect the tabs on the four (4) plastic ball sockets located at the ends of the wiper links.
Each tab should be undamaged and fully engaged in the corresponding hole located in the wiper
arm link. See Figure 2 for location of ball sockets and Figure 4 for detail of tabs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module
Inspection/Replacement > Page 9978
a. If the tab is missing, damaged, or detached from the rim on ANY of the sockets, replace the
windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in
section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 5.
b. If the tab is aligned but not fully engaged into the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of
the sockets but is not otherwise damaged or detached from the rim, press the tab with your thumb
(no tools) to fully engage it in the hole. If force greater than thumb pressure is required to engage
the tab into the hole, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to
the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 6.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module
Inspection/Replacement > Page 9979
c. If the tab is not aligned with the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of the sockets,
replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service
procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 7.
d. Beginning at the tab, carefully lift the lip of the rubber seal using a flat screwdriver or similar tool.
Verify that there is a continuous rim of plastic material around the base of EACH socket. If there
are any sections of material broken away or any visible damage (cracks) on ANY one of the
sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service
procedures in section 501-16
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module
Inspection/Replacement > Page 9980
of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 8.
e. Inspect the dome section of the sockets for cracks. If grease is present on the dome of the
socket, this may be evidence of a crack. If ANY one of the sockets is cracked, replace the
windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in
section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 9.
If the wiper module passes all the inspections described in A-E, no replacement is required.
8. Install the wiper module. Tighten the bolts to 12 Nm (107 lb-in).
WARNING:
THE IGNITION KEY MUST BE IN THE "OFF" POSITION BEFORE CONNECTING THE WIPER
MOTOR. IF NOT, SUDDEN MOVEMENT OF THE WIPER LINKS MAY OCCUR WHEN THE
MOTOR IS CONNECTED.
9. Connect the wiper motor electrical connector.
10. Install the left side cowl vent panel.
CAUTION
The wiper motor must be in the "PARK" position before installing the wiper arms or damage to the
vehicle will result.
11. Cycle and park the wiper motor.
CAUTION
Proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is critical.
12. Install the windshield wiper arms. Tighten the nuts to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module
Inspection/Replacement > Page 9981
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module
Inspection/Replacement > Page 9982
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 9983
Wiper Control Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding the Rear Interval Wiper please refer to Multifunction Electronic
Control Modules (General Module).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 9984
Wiper Control Module: Testing and Inspection
Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Motor: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor
Wiper Motor: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor
Article No. 03-20-1
10/13/03
ELECTRICAL - REAR WIPER ARM REMOVAL - SERVICE TIP
FORD: 2001-2004 ESCAPE
ISSUE Some Escape vehicles may exhibit the rear wiper arm being seized to the motor and
difficult to remove. This may be caused by an insufficient amount of anti-seize compound on the
arm/motor shaft splines.
ACTION For vehicle service requiring the removal of the rear wiper arm, the following Service
Procedure will help to free the wiper arm from the motor shaft.
NOTE
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THE WIPER ARM BY CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WITH A
HACKSAW OR GRIND TOOL. CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WILL MAKE THE MOTOR
UNUSABLE REQUIRING REPLACEMENT. IN ADDITION, DAMAGE TO THE LIFTGATE GLASS
MAY OCCUR. HOWEVER IF THE REASON FOR SERVICE IS DUE TO AN INOPERABLE REAR
WIPER MOTOR AND THE WIPER ARM IS SEIZED, THEN CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT IS AN
ACCEPTABLE MEANS OF REMOVAL. USE CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S
PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC. INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE
COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Confirm that wiper arm is seized on motor and that the wiper arm retainer latch is in the "release"
position.
2. Mark and LIGHTLY center punch the exact center of arm mount "circle" (area over motor shaft).
3. Carefully drill through wiper arm using 1/8" drill bit. Do not drill into the motor shaft.
NOTE
PREVENT METAL SHAVINGS FROM FALLING ONTO THE BODY OR PAINT AS DAMAGE MAY
OCCUR.
4. Enlarge the drilled hole using 3/8" drill bit.
5. Apply a small amount of penetrating oil at contact area of splines for wiper arm and motor.
6. Tap on joint area lightly to create vibration and facilitate penetrating oil working into splines of
arm and motor.
7. Allow the oil to sit and penetrate for several minutes.
NOTE
BE SURE THE WIPER ARM RETAINER CLIP IS IN THE "RELEASE" POSITION BEFORE
CONTINUING WITH STEP 8.
8. Install a puller with a 5/16" or smaller center screw (e.g. Battery Clamp Puller) to the wiper arm
so that jaws of puller are pulling against the arm, and center post of puller is pressing against
center of wiper motor shaft.
NOTE
ENSURE THAT JAWS OF PULLER ARE PULLING AGAINST WIPER ARM AND NOT MOTOR
SHAFT BUSHING.
9. Tighten puller in very small increments while tapping lightly on the wiper arm and center shaft of
puller.
With pressure applied to the wiper arm and shaft a light shock should pop arm off of motor shaft.
NOTE
BE CAREFUL THAT ARM & PULLER DO NOT FALL AND DAMAGE THE LIFTGATE AND/OR
BUMPER.
10. When installing the new wiper arm, remove all corrosion/rust from motor splines and apply
anti-seize compound to splines of arm and motor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Motor: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor >
Page 9993
NOTE
IF AFTER PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE THE WIPER ARM STILL CANNOT BE REMOVED,
THEN CAREFULLY CUT MOTOR SHAFT AND REPLACE MOTOR AND WIPER ARM. USE
CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC.
INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE
AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm
Seized to Motor
Wiper Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor
Article No. 03-20-1
10/13/03
ELECTRICAL - REAR WIPER ARM REMOVAL - SERVICE TIP
FORD: 2001-2004 ESCAPE
ISSUE Some Escape vehicles may exhibit the rear wiper arm being seized to the motor and
difficult to remove. This may be caused by an insufficient amount of anti-seize compound on the
arm/motor shaft splines.
ACTION For vehicle service requiring the removal of the rear wiper arm, the following Service
Procedure will help to free the wiper arm from the motor shaft.
NOTE
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THE WIPER ARM BY CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WITH A
HACKSAW OR GRIND TOOL. CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WILL MAKE THE MOTOR
UNUSABLE REQUIRING REPLACEMENT. IN ADDITION, DAMAGE TO THE LIFTGATE GLASS
MAY OCCUR. HOWEVER IF THE REASON FOR SERVICE IS DUE TO AN INOPERABLE REAR
WIPER MOTOR AND THE WIPER ARM IS SEIZED, THEN CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT IS AN
ACCEPTABLE MEANS OF REMOVAL. USE CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S
PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC. INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE
COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Confirm that wiper arm is seized on motor and that the wiper arm retainer latch is in the "release"
position.
2. Mark and LIGHTLY center punch the exact center of arm mount "circle" (area over motor shaft).
3. Carefully drill through wiper arm using 1/8" drill bit. Do not drill into the motor shaft.
NOTE
PREVENT METAL SHAVINGS FROM FALLING ONTO THE BODY OR PAINT AS DAMAGE MAY
OCCUR.
4. Enlarge the drilled hole using 3/8" drill bit.
5. Apply a small amount of penetrating oil at contact area of splines for wiper arm and motor.
6. Tap on joint area lightly to create vibration and facilitate penetrating oil working into splines of
arm and motor.
7. Allow the oil to sit and penetrate for several minutes.
NOTE
BE SURE THE WIPER ARM RETAINER CLIP IS IN THE "RELEASE" POSITION BEFORE
CONTINUING WITH STEP 8.
8. Install a puller with a 5/16" or smaller center screw (e.g. Battery Clamp Puller) to the wiper arm
so that jaws of puller are pulling against the arm, and center post of puller is pressing against
center of wiper motor shaft.
NOTE
ENSURE THAT JAWS OF PULLER ARE PULLING AGAINST WIPER ARM AND NOT MOTOR
SHAFT BUSHING.
9. Tighten puller in very small increments while tapping lightly on the wiper arm and center shaft of
puller.
With pressure applied to the wiper arm and shaft a light shock should pop arm off of motor shaft.
NOTE
BE CAREFUL THAT ARM & PULLER DO NOT FALL AND DAMAGE THE LIFTGATE AND/OR
BUMPER.
10. When installing the new wiper arm, remove all corrosion/rust from motor splines and apply
anti-seize compound to splines of arm and motor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm
Seized to Motor > Page 9999
NOTE
IF AFTER PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE THE WIPER ARM STILL CANNOT BE REMOVED,
THEN CAREFULLY CUT MOTOR SHAFT AND REPLACE MOTOR AND WIPER ARM. USE
CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC.
INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE
AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Windshield
Wiper Motor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Windshield
Wiper Motor > Page 10002
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10003
Wiper Motor: Testing and Inspection
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR
Use an Alternator, Regulator, Battery and Starter Tester (ARBST) to test the wiper motor on the
vehicle.
To test the wiper motor, disconnect the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft from the
windshield wiper motor; refer to Wiper Arm.
Disconnect the wiper motor. Connect the (1) green lead from (2) Alternator, Regulator, Battery and
Starter Tester (ARBST) to the battery negative (-) post. Connect the (3) red lead from ARBST to
the wiper motor (4) common brush terminal (terminal 3).
Test the low-speed mode by connecting a (5) cable from the battery positive (+) post to the (6)
low-speed brush terminal (terminal 4) and measure the current draw. If the current draw is greater
than 3.5 amperes, install a new windshield wiper motor.
Test the high-speed mode by connecting a cable from the battery positive (+) post to the (7)
high-speed brush terminal (terminal 5) and measure the current draw. If the current draw is greater
than 5.5 amperes, install a new wiper motor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Windshield Wiper Motor
Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Windshield Wiper Motor
REMOVAL
1. Remove the wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft refer to, Wiper Motor Linkage.
2. Remove the windshield wiper motor.
1 Remove the bolt and windshield wiper motor linkage.
2 Remove the windshield wiper motor mounting bolts.
3 Remove the windshield wiper motor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Windshield Wiper Motor > Page 10006
Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Rear Window Wiper Motor
REMOVAL
1. Remove the pivot arm.
1 Lift pivot arm to the upright position.
2 Slide the locking tab out.
3 Pull up and remove the pivot arm.
2. Remove the rear wiper motor shaft nut cover.
3. Remove the rear wiper motor shaft nut. 4. Open the liftgate.
5. Remove the rear wiper motor plastic cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Windshield Wiper Motor > Page 10007
6. Remove rear wiper motor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the nut.
3 Remove the bolt.
4 Remove the rear wiper motor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor Linkage: > NHTSA00V387002 > Nov > 00 > Recall 00V387002: Windshield
Wiper Linkage Failure
Wiper Motor Linkage: Recalls Recall 00V387002: Windshield Wiper Linkage Failure
The windshield wiper linkage can disengage due to a broken ball socket.
This condition will likely result in sudden and complete loss of the windshield wiper function, or of
the wiper function on the driver side only, increasing the risk of a crash.
Dealers will inspect and, if necessary, replace the wiper module. Owner notification is expected to
begin during December 2000. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an
agreed upon service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should
contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's
Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 00S49 Date: 001101
Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
00S49
SAFETY RECALL
Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Windshield Wiper Module Inspection and Possible
Replacement
November 2000
Advance Announcement
Dealer Letter
Attachment I ^
Administrative Information
Attachment II ^
Labor Allowances
^ Parts Ordering Information
Attachment III ^
Technical Information
Owner Letter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
> Page 10020
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
> Page 10021
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
> Page 10022
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS
You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this recall.
PLEASE NOTE
Correct all vehicles in stock before delivery.
PROMPTLY CORRECT
Promptly correct all affected vehicles on your dealer VIN list which you will receive in the Ford
Dealer Consolidated Communicator (FDCC). Also, correct other eligible vehicles which are brought
to your dealership.
DEALER-OWNER CONTACT
If you have recently sold a vehicle, please contact that owner immediately and provide them a copy
of the owner letter and schedule a service date.
REGIONAL CONTACT
Advise regional office if an owner:
^ cannot be contacted.
^ does not make a service date.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using DWE.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
OWNER REFUNDS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
> Page 10023
Ford Motor Company will refund owner-paid wiper module repairs made before the date of the
Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the
servicing dealer). Refer to ACESII manual for refund information.
RENTAL CARS
For vehicles which fail the inspection, and if parts are not available, Ford Motor Company will pay
for a rental vehicle, except for fuel which will be at the owner's expense. Enter the word "RENTAL"
plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall
claim. Follow ESP cost guidelines.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
CRITICAL PARTS SUPPLY NOTE - PLEASE READ CAREFULLY
Parts will be in limited supply for several weeks. Therefore, parts will be prioritized for vehicles
which Ford records show as sold as of November 16, 2000.
Dealers are to report the results of inspections on all affected units that fail the inspection (for the
first 30 days) by calling the Recall Hotline at 1-800-325-5621 with the following required
information:
-- VIN number
-- Results of (4) ball stud inspections
-- Results of (4) plastic ball socket inspections
-- Dealer P&A; Code
Based on the inspection results reported. dealers will be advised if the vehicle can be released or if
it must be held for repair. Please note that FCS-700 tags will be issued and all replaced parts must
be returned to the Warranty Parts Return Center where they will be inspected to assure that only
suspect parts are being replaced. The cost of parts not properly inspected or not returned will be
charged back to the dealer.
A fair and equitable distribution of parts will be made based on the number of vehicles which fail
the inspection and are properly reported to the Recall Hotline. Each Dealer who calls in will receive
a shipment of parts for reported units before any dealer receives a second shipment.
No seed stock distribution is planned at this time. No parts will be sent until inspected units are
reported to the Recall Hotline.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
> Page 10024
Please note that vehicles sold after November 16, 2000 will not receive priority handling for parts.
We urge you to carefully conduct inspections and manage your allocation of parts for this program.
NOTE:
All orders must be placed through the Recall Hotline (1-800 325-5621) for the first 30 days, until
December 21, 2000. After that date, use the normal order process.
ORDER INFORMATION DOR/COR
DOR/COR number 50197 identifies parts ordered for this campaign through the Recall Hotline
(1-800-325-5621).
FCS-700 TAGS
FCS-700 Tags will be issued for each claim involving a wiper module (less motor) replacement.
These returned assemblies will be inspected and dealers will be "charged-back" for units that pass
inspection criteria. Less than 6% of the wiper module assemblies will require replacement.
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to:
^ DOES II
^ Updated Price Book
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
The affected vehicles in this program may require the replacement of the windshield wiper
mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly (wiper module assembly less motor). A two-part inspection
must be performed to determine if replacement is required. The inspection includes the following:
^ An inspection of the wiper link ball studs.
^ An inspection of the wiper link plastic ball sockets.
If the vehicle fails the inspection process, a new windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft
assembly must be installed. This procedure gives details of the inspection process and refers you
to the service procedures in the Workshop Manual if replacement is required.
INSPECTION
CAUTION
Whenever the wiper arms are removed and reinstalled, proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is
critical.
1. Verify that the wipers are in the "PARK" position and the key is in the "OFF" position before
proceeding with inspection.
2. Remove the windshield wiper arm nuts, then remove the wiper arms.
3. Remove the left side cowl top vent panel.
4. Disconnect the wiper motor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
> Page 10025
5. Remove the three (3) bolts, then remove the wiper module. See Figure 1.
IMPORTANT:
USING A PERMANENT MARKER, PLACE A MARK ON THE WIPER LINKS NEXT TO ALL BALL
STUDS/SOCKETS THAT FAIL INSPECTION. DEFECTIVE WINDSHIELD WIPER MOUNTING
ARM AND PIVOT SHAFT ASSEMBLIES MUST BE RETURNED TO THE WARRANTY PARTS
RETURN CENTER. SEE THE ATTACHMENT II FOR MORE INFORMATION.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
> Page 10026
6. Inspect the four (4) ball studs (positions A-D). The backside of each ball stud should be riveted
(mushroomed) over as shown in the illustration. Please note, the ball stud at position B is the most
suspect. See Figure 2 for ball stud location and Figure 3 for detail of ball studs.
^ If ANY of the ball studs are not mushroomed over, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm
and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate
Workshop Manual.
^ If all of the ball studs are mushroomed over, continue the inspection procedure.
7. Visually inspect the tabs on the four (4) plastic ball sockets located at the ends of the wiper links.
Each tab should be undamaged and fully engaged in the corresponding hole located in the wiper
arm link. See Figure 2 for location of ball sockets and Figure 4 for detail of tabs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
> Page 10027
a. If the tab is missing, damaged, or detached from the rim on ANY of the sockets, replace the
windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in
section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 5.
b. If the tab is aligned but not fully engaged into the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of
the sockets but is not otherwise damaged or detached from the rim, press the tab with your thumb
(no tools) to fully engage it in the hole. If force greater than thumb pressure is required to engage
the tab into the hole, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to
the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 6.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
> Page 10028
c. If the tab is not aligned with the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of the sockets,
replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service
procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 7.
d. Beginning at the tab, carefully lift the lip of the rubber seal using a flat screwdriver or similar tool.
Verify that there is a continuous rim of plastic material around the base of EACH socket. If there
are any sections of material broken away or any visible damage (cracks) on ANY one of the
sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service
procedures in section 501-16
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
> Page 10029
of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 8.
e. Inspect the dome section of the sockets for cracks. If grease is present on the dome of the
socket, this may be evidence of a crack. If ANY one of the sockets is cracked, replace the
windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in
section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 9.
If the wiper module passes all the inspections described in A-E, no replacement is required.
8. Install the wiper module. Tighten the bolts to 12 Nm (107 lb-in).
WARNING:
THE IGNITION KEY MUST BE IN THE "OFF" POSITION BEFORE CONNECTING THE WIPER
MOTOR. IF NOT, SUDDEN MOVEMENT OF THE WIPER LINKS MAY OCCUR WHEN THE
MOTOR IS CONNECTED.
9. Connect the wiper motor electrical connector.
10. Install the left side cowl vent panel.
CAUTION
The wiper motor must be in the "PARK" position before installing the wiper arms or damage to the
vehicle will result.
11. Cycle and park the wiper motor.
CAUTION
Proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is critical.
12. Install the windshield wiper arms. Tighten the nuts to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
> Page 10030
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
> Page 10031
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > NHTSA00V387002 > Nov > 00 > Recall
00V387002: Windshield Wiper Linkage Failure
Wiper Motor Linkage: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 00V387002: Windshield Wiper Linkage
Failure
The windshield wiper linkage can disengage due to a broken ball socket.
This condition will likely result in sudden and complete loss of the windshield wiper function, or of
the wiper function on the driver side only, increasing the risk of a crash.
Dealers will inspect and, if necessary, replace the wiper module. Owner notification is expected to
begin during December 2000. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an
agreed upon service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should
contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's
Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module
Inspection/Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 00S49 Date: 001101
Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement
00S49
SAFETY RECALL
Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Windshield Wiper Module Inspection and Possible
Replacement
November 2000
Advance Announcement
Dealer Letter
Attachment I ^
Administrative Information
Attachment II ^
Labor Allowances
^ Parts Ordering Information
Attachment III ^
Technical Information
Owner Letter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module
Inspection/Replacement > Page 10041
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module
Inspection/Replacement > Page 10042
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module
Inspection/Replacement > Page 10043
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS
You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this recall.
PLEASE NOTE
Correct all vehicles in stock before delivery.
PROMPTLY CORRECT
Promptly correct all affected vehicles on your dealer VIN list which you will receive in the Ford
Dealer Consolidated Communicator (FDCC). Also, correct other eligible vehicles which are brought
to your dealership.
DEALER-OWNER CONTACT
If you have recently sold a vehicle, please contact that owner immediately and provide them a copy
of the owner letter and schedule a service date.
REGIONAL CONTACT
Advise regional office if an owner:
^ cannot be contacted.
^ does not make a service date.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using DWE.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
OWNER REFUNDS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module
Inspection/Replacement > Page 10044
Ford Motor Company will refund owner-paid wiper module repairs made before the date of the
Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the
servicing dealer). Refer to ACESII manual for refund information.
RENTAL CARS
For vehicles which fail the inspection, and if parts are not available, Ford Motor Company will pay
for a rental vehicle, except for fuel which will be at the owner's expense. Enter the word "RENTAL"
plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall
claim. Follow ESP cost guidelines.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS
CRITICAL PARTS SUPPLY NOTE - PLEASE READ CAREFULLY
Parts will be in limited supply for several weeks. Therefore, parts will be prioritized for vehicles
which Ford records show as sold as of November 16, 2000.
Dealers are to report the results of inspections on all affected units that fail the inspection (for the
first 30 days) by calling the Recall Hotline at 1-800-325-5621 with the following required
information:
-- VIN number
-- Results of (4) ball stud inspections
-- Results of (4) plastic ball socket inspections
-- Dealer P&A; Code
Based on the inspection results reported. dealers will be advised if the vehicle can be released or if
it must be held for repair. Please note that FCS-700 tags will be issued and all replaced parts must
be returned to the Warranty Parts Return Center where they will be inspected to assure that only
suspect parts are being replaced. The cost of parts not properly inspected or not returned will be
charged back to the dealer.
A fair and equitable distribution of parts will be made based on the number of vehicles which fail
the inspection and are properly reported to the Recall Hotline. Each Dealer who calls in will receive
a shipment of parts for reported units before any dealer receives a second shipment.
No seed stock distribution is planned at this time. No parts will be sent until inspected units are
reported to the Recall Hotline.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module
Inspection/Replacement > Page 10045
Please note that vehicles sold after November 16, 2000 will not receive priority handling for parts.
We urge you to carefully conduct inspections and manage your allocation of parts for this program.
NOTE:
All orders must be placed through the Recall Hotline (1-800 325-5621) for the first 30 days, until
December 21, 2000. After that date, use the normal order process.
ORDER INFORMATION DOR/COR
DOR/COR number 50197 identifies parts ordered for this campaign through the Recall Hotline
(1-800-325-5621).
FCS-700 TAGS
FCS-700 Tags will be issued for each claim involving a wiper module (less motor) replacement.
These returned assemblies will be inspected and dealers will be "charged-back" for units that pass
inspection criteria. Less than 6% of the wiper module assemblies will require replacement.
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to:
^ DOES II
^ Updated Price Book
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
The affected vehicles in this program may require the replacement of the windshield wiper
mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly (wiper module assembly less motor). A two-part inspection
must be performed to determine if replacement is required. The inspection includes the following:
^ An inspection of the wiper link ball studs.
^ An inspection of the wiper link plastic ball sockets.
If the vehicle fails the inspection process, a new windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft
assembly must be installed. This procedure gives details of the inspection process and refers you
to the service procedures in the Workshop Manual if replacement is required.
INSPECTION
CAUTION
Whenever the wiper arms are removed and reinstalled, proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is
critical.
1. Verify that the wipers are in the "PARK" position and the key is in the "OFF" position before
proceeding with inspection.
2. Remove the windshield wiper arm nuts, then remove the wiper arms.
3. Remove the left side cowl top vent panel.
4. Disconnect the wiper motor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module
Inspection/Replacement > Page 10046
5. Remove the three (3) bolts, then remove the wiper module. See Figure 1.
IMPORTANT:
USING A PERMANENT MARKER, PLACE A MARK ON THE WIPER LINKS NEXT TO ALL BALL
STUDS/SOCKETS THAT FAIL INSPECTION. DEFECTIVE WINDSHIELD WIPER MOUNTING
ARM AND PIVOT SHAFT ASSEMBLIES MUST BE RETURNED TO THE WARRANTY PARTS
RETURN CENTER. SEE THE ATTACHMENT II FOR MORE INFORMATION.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module
Inspection/Replacement > Page 10047
6. Inspect the four (4) ball studs (positions A-D). The backside of each ball stud should be riveted
(mushroomed) over as shown in the illustration. Please note, the ball stud at position B is the most
suspect. See Figure 2 for ball stud location and Figure 3 for detail of ball studs.
^ If ANY of the ball studs are not mushroomed over, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm
and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate
Workshop Manual.
^ If all of the ball studs are mushroomed over, continue the inspection procedure.
7. Visually inspect the tabs on the four (4) plastic ball sockets located at the ends of the wiper links.
Each tab should be undamaged and fully engaged in the corresponding hole located in the wiper
arm link. See Figure 2 for location of ball sockets and Figure 4 for detail of tabs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module
Inspection/Replacement > Page 10048
a. If the tab is missing, damaged, or detached from the rim on ANY of the sockets, replace the
windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in
section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 5.
b. If the tab is aligned but not fully engaged into the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of
the sockets but is not otherwise damaged or detached from the rim, press the tab with your thumb
(no tools) to fully engage it in the hole. If force greater than thumb pressure is required to engage
the tab into the hole, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to
the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 6.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module
Inspection/Replacement > Page 10049
c. If the tab is not aligned with the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of the sockets,
replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service
procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 7.
d. Beginning at the tab, carefully lift the lip of the rubber seal using a flat screwdriver or similar tool.
Verify that there is a continuous rim of plastic material around the base of EACH socket. If there
are any sections of material broken away or any visible damage (cracks) on ANY one of the
sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service
procedures in section 501-16
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module
Inspection/Replacement > Page 10050
of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 8.
e. Inspect the dome section of the sockets for cracks. If grease is present on the dome of the
socket, this may be evidence of a crack. If ANY one of the sockets is cracked, replace the
windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in
section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 9.
If the wiper module passes all the inspections described in A-E, no replacement is required.
8. Install the wiper module. Tighten the bolts to 12 Nm (107 lb-in).
WARNING:
THE IGNITION KEY MUST BE IN THE "OFF" POSITION BEFORE CONNECTING THE WIPER
MOTOR. IF NOT, SUDDEN MOVEMENT OF THE WIPER LINKS MAY OCCUR WHEN THE
MOTOR IS CONNECTED.
9. Connect the wiper motor electrical connector.
10. Install the left side cowl vent panel.
CAUTION
The wiper motor must be in the "PARK" position before installing the wiper arms or damage to the
vehicle will result.
11. Cycle and park the wiper motor.
CAUTION
Proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is critical.
12. Install the windshield wiper arms. Tighten the nuts to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module
Inspection/Replacement > Page 10051
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module
Inspection/Replacement > Page 10052
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 10053
Wiper Motor Linkage: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the cowl top vent panels.
2. Remove the wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft.
3. Remove the motor assembly.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
10057
Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection
Component Testing Instructions
Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad.
Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations
and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that
may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component.
The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the
component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete
component, perform all tests.
Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as
shown in the third column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
10058